JP2020162734A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: One state is set from a plurality of control states including a first control state in which first control for varying variation means to a first position that a game ball can enter for a first period can be easily determined, and a second control state in which second control for varying the variation means to the first position for a second period longer than the first period can be easily determined. Based on the fact that a discrimination result of discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result, a variable game in which variable ball entry means is varied to a first variable state in which a game ball can enter for a predetermined period, and based on the fact that a game ball has passed through a specific region during the execution of the variable game, the game state is set to an advantageous game state that is advantageous for the player. Ease of the passage through the specific region varies when the discrimination result becomes the specific discrimination result during the first control state, and when the discrimination result becomes the specific discrimination result during the second control state. Thereby, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a hit that is advantageous to the player when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such game machines are intended to improve the interest by setting one of a plurality of game states having different degrees of advantage after the end of the winning game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there was a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, and the game ball is inserted into the entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the ball can enter and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the variable means based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. A variable control means for variably changing the position from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and as a control executed by the variable control means, the variable means performs the second position during a predetermined first period. A first control that is variable from the first position to the first position, and a second control in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during a second period longer than the first period. A control determination means for determining control of one of a plurality of control including at least, a first control state in which the first control is easily determined by the control determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a first state thereof. A control state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a second control state in which the second control is more easily determined by the control determination means, and a game ball entering the ball entry means. It is possible to change between a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the above, a first variable state in which the game ball can enter, and a second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second variable state to the first variable state for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the variable ball entry means and the determination result being a predetermined specific determination result. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to, a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the variable game during execution of the variable game. Based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area, the first advantageous game state setting means for setting the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed to the advantageous game state advantageous to the player is provided. It is configured so that the ease of passing through the specific area can be changed depending on whether the specific determination result is obtained during the control state or the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state. Has been done.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 has the specific determination result during the second control state, rather than the specific determination result during the first control state in the gaming machine according to claim 1. It is configured so that the game ball is less likely to pass through the specific area during the execution of the variable game.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is based on the first variable game in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and the first variable game as the type of the variable game in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2. Also includes a second variable game that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least one of the specific determination results during the first control state. It is configured so that at least the ease of passing through the specific region in the first variable game is variable depending on the case where the determination is made and the case where the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state.

The game machine according to claim 4 is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass through the game machine according to claim 3, and the inflowing game ball flows down to the specific area. A second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and a second flow path that allows the inflowing game ball to flow down in a direction that cannot pass through the specific region. And, a swing that can be changed into a first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. A dividing means and a switching control means for switching between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the execution of the variable game are provided. In the first variable game, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means while the variable ball entry means is changed to the first variable state is transferred to the distribution means in the first distribution state. The second variable game is configured to be reachable, and the second variable game is a game in which the variable ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means while the variable ball entry means is changed to the first variable state. The sphere is configured so as to make it difficult for the sphere to reach the distribution means in the first distribution state.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the period from the start of the first variable game to the end of the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is It is configured so that the length of the period required for the game ball that has passed through the variable means without entering the ball-entry means to reach the variable ball-entry means is likely to be less than or equal to the length of the period required.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, the ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball launched in a specific direction can enter the ball, and the game ball can enter the ball entering means. The variable means can be changed to the first position and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the variable means is used for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. The variable control means for varying from the second position to the first position, and the control executed by the variable control means, the variable means from the second position to the first position during a predetermined first period. A plurality of controls including at least a first control that is variable to the first position and a second control in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during a second period longer than the first period. A control determining means for determining one of the controls, a first control state in which the first control is easily determined by the control determining means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the control determination rather than the first state. Based on the control state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least the second control state in which the second control is easily determined by the means, and the game ball entering the ball entry means. A discriminating means for executing discrimination, a first variable state in which the game ball can enter, and a second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state. Then, based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second variable state to the first variable state for a predetermined period. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game, a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and a game ball in the specific area during execution of the variable game. The first control state is provided with an advantageous game state setting means for setting the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player based on the passage of the first control state. The ease of passing through the specific region is configured to be variable depending on whether the specific determination result is obtained or the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to the second control state, in addition to the effect of the game machine according to the first aspect, the specific determination result is obtained during the first control state, rather than during the second control state. The person who has the specific determination result is configured so that the game ball is less likely to pass through the specific area during the execution of the variable game. Therefore, the person who has the specific determination result in the second control state. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that it becomes difficult to set the advantageous gaming state.

According to the game machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine according to claim 1 or 2, as the type of the variable game, a first variable game in which a game ball can pass through the specific area and a first variable game. A type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the game ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the first variable game is provided, and during the first control state. At least the ease of passing through the specific region in the first variable game is variable depending on whether the specific determination result is obtained or the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state. It is configured in.

This has the effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first variable game will be determined by the type determination means.

According to the game machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the game machine according to claim 3, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the inflowing game ball is provided. A first flow path for flowing down to the specific area and a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass are provided so that the inflowing game ball cannot pass through the specific area. A second flow path to be flowed down, a first distribution state in which the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. A variable distribution means and a switching control means for switching between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the execution of the variable game. In the first variable game, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means while the variable ball entry means has been changed to the first variable state is in the first distribution state. The second variable game is configured so as to be reachable to the distribution means, and the second variable game means the variable ball entry means while the variable ball entry means is changed to the first variable state. The game ball that has entered the ball is configured so that it becomes difficult to reach the sorting means in the first sorting state.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the first variable game will be determined.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area ends after the first variable game is started. The period until the game ball that has passed through the variable means without entering the ball entry means is likely to be equal to or less than the length of the period required for the game ball to reach the variable entry means. Therefore, when a specific determination result is obtained during the second control state, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an operation diagram which saw the operation unit from the back side. (A) is a schematic view of the closed state of the operating unit viewed from above, and (b) is a schematic view of the open state of the operating unit viewed from above. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode at the time of entering the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a small hit A is won during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the small hit B is won during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content of the situation display mode which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing right-handed strike among the small hit A in-game screens displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the case where a ball wins a prize after a) is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing right-handed strike among the small hit B in-game screens displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the case where a ball wins a prize after a) is displayed. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 2D is a time saving in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the addition table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit type selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the open scenario table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the final state display selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small hit game at the time of winning the small hit A in the first embodiment. (A) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small hit game at the time of winning the small hit B in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process for small hits executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit-related update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V entrance passage command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the instruction command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering the time saving state to be displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a left-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of starting the right-handed game in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the form. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode about the right-handed game in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the time saving game in the time saving state in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and FIG. 2D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving 2 table in a form. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. is there. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the hold display selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a game state setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game content determination process to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows various counter update processing 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the time saving state, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state which is displayed by. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example which shows the time saving number of times in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of ROM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving 3 table set in the ROM of the apparatus. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the opening scenario 3 table set in the ROM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the third embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving remaining period determination table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving remaining period determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the deterministic variation discrimination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when the time saving A is set as the time saving state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the case where the time saving B is set as the time saving state. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the time reduction number of times correction effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation pattern 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for ordinary use in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving A fluctuation pattern table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving B fluctuation pattern table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 detachment stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number correction process for display which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 1st Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the effect modification example of each embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the effect modification example of each embodiment. (B) is a figure explaining the flow of the production in the production modification example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the game board in the fifth embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric accessory provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is an electric motor provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment. It is a front enlarged view which shows that the accessory is in a closed state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the jackpot game is started in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing the jackpot game in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device which can be displayed in. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the time saving game in the time saving state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 5 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the signal input processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 5 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the 6th Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart schematically showing an opening pattern of an electric accessory according to a sixth embodiment. It is a transition diagram which showed the transition destination of the game state in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a selection table for special figure 1 set in the ROM in the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the selection table for the special figure 1, and (b) is the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the special figure 2 selection table set in the ROM in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a top view of the V winning device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the opening pattern of a small hit in 7th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the time saving state of the seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when a small hit is won during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device at the time of winning a small hit after the end of the time saving state. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the seventh embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second random number table in the seventh embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the specified contents of the direct hit table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the V-per table according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the time saving variation pattern table in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the mode transition method in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 7 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit | related process 7 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device at the end of the time saving state of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing after the end of the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a small hit with the holding ball of the 2nd special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing the time-dependent change of the effect mode when the start winning prize corresponding to the small hit is detected within 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the final fluctuation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a time-dependent change in the effect mode when a start winning prize corresponding to a small hit is detected 5 seconds or later from the start of the fluctuation in the final fluctuation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special 1 direct hit table in the eighth embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special 2 direct hit table in the eighth embodiment, and (d) is a V hit table in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the regulation contents of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table per drawing in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the switching pattern of the switching valve provided in the distribution device in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the time saving giving table in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in the 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process 9 executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 9 executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode showing that the probability change state is set and the degree of expectation is high in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the probability change state is set in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which shows that the set expectation degree is low. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) shows the specified contents of the first hit type selection table in the tenth embodiment. It is a block diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special 1 hit table in the 10th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the special 2 hit table in the 10th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the limit reaching table in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving table according to the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the back mode lottery table in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution processing which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution processing which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 10 executed by MPU in the main control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 10 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the modified example of the tenth embodiment, and (b) is the defined table for reaching the limit in the modified example of the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined content of the time saving table in the modified example of the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the modification of the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the seventh time saving state in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device at the eighth time reduction in the time reduction state of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 10th time saving state among the time saving state of 11th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when a specific number or more of the special figure 2 hold number is acquired in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when a small hit is won without holding the special figure 2 in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the time saving table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the fluctuation pattern table for ordinary use in eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the time saving variation pattern table in eleventh embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. (A) to (e) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of the change in the acquisition expectation degree of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 winning process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the pre-end period executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device when entering the chance mode in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a site destruction chance effect in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when it was executed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a site destruction chance is successful in the chance mode of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is an avoidance turn effect in the chance mode of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of rushing into. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the avoidance rate notification effect executed every time the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired in the avoidance turn effect of the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after the avoidance rate is notified in the avoidance turn effect of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is an attack turn in the chance mode of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the effect is executed. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first hit random number table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the twelfth embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the chance mode table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the gaming state between the chance modes in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the gaming state between the consecutive villa modes in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the definition content of the avoidance rate selection table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 12 executed by MPU in the main control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 12 executed by MPU in the main control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 12 executed by MPU in the main control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 12 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 12 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 12 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the final battle production is executed in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the final battle production is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing the super final battle production being executed in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of a case. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the probabilistic state in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the time saving table in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 5C is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern table according to the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal / latent table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the probability variation table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the gaming state between the normal mode and the chance mode in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the gaming state between the consecutive villa mode A in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the gaming state between the consecutive villa mode B in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 13 executed by MPU in the main control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 13 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 13 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 13 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 13 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 13 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous attack effect started when a jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the latent state of the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous attack effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a second big hit during execution of a continuous attack effect in an embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the time saving table in the 14th embodiment. FIG. 5C is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern table in the 14th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal mode table in the 14th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the chance mode table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the 14th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition method of the gaming state between the chance mode and the consecutive villa mode in the 14th embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 14 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 14th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the stock time effect executed during the jackpot game in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the display mode in the time saving state in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state of the fifteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the first half per V of the 15th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the timed change of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the fifteenth embodiment. In the fifteenth embodiment, it is the figure which showed the flow of the game when the big hit was won by the lottery of the first special symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second random number table in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the direct hit table in the fifteenth embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the V-per table according to the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the jackpot operation table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the fifteenth embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the key mode selection table in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing 15 executed by MPU in the main control device in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 15 executed by MPU in the main control device in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 15 executed by MPU in the main control device in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 15 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing 15 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the end of a round. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 15 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 16th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device in the time saving state of the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device at the time of winning a small hit by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol during the time saving state of 16th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the 16th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the second random number table in the 16th embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the direct hit table in the 16th embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram for V hit in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rule content of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the time saving table in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the 16th embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the continuous change expectation degree update table in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 16 executed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 detachment stop process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 16 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state in which a time saving state is set as a gaming state in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a latent probability as a gaming state in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the ball flow in the state which the state is set. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game in the 17th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the RUSH middle screen in the state where the probabilistic state (probability change A state) is set in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the latent in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the RUSH middle screen in the state which the certain state is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the super RUSH entry screen in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the super RUSH middle screen in the 17th embodiment. is there. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the RUSH continuous jackpot screen during RUSH in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is the display mode of the challenge mode transition jackpot screen during RUSH in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the challenge mode middle screen in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the challenge mode extension screen in the 17th embodiment. Is. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the challenge mode end screen in the 17th embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display mode of the recovery screen from the challenge mode in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the back challenge mode middle screen in the 17th embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display mode of the back challenge mode end screen in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the flow of the game state and mode transition in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the 17th embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number 17 table in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 2 random number 17 table in the 17th embodiment, and (d) is the second random number 17 in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the regulation contents of the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection 17 table in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the hit operation 17 table in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the 17 tables for time saving / probability change B in the 17th embodiment, and (b) shows the specified contents of the 17 tables for probability change A in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the latent probability 17 table in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the limit 17 table in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the time saving grant 17 table in 17th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario 17 table in the 17th embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 17 executed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 17 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 17 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit | related process 17 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start process 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 17 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop process 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 17 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the screen during the challenge mode in the modified example of the 17th embodiment, and (b) is the display of the screen with the remaining period of the challenge mode added in the modified example of the 17th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the aspect. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the 17 tables for time saving / probability variation B in the modified example of the 17th embodiment, and (b) is the specification of the 17 tables for limits in the 17th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the board surface deformation example of 17th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the display screen in the ending period of the latent probability jackpot in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is left-handed as a gaming method of the latent probability state in the 18th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the display screen in a latent state when a game is selected. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a display screen when a big hit is won during a left-handed game in a latent state in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the display screen, and (b) is a stock in the 18th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the display screen in RUSH. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the display screen when the addition effect occurs in the stock RUSH in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a display screen when a right-handed game is selected as a game method in a latent state in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the 18th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the display screen when a big hit is won during a right-handed game in a certain state. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number 18 table in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is the specified contents of the first type selection 18 table in the 18th embodiment. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the above, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the hit operation 18 table in the 18th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the 18 tables for normal use in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the 18 tables for latent accuracy in the 18th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the additional pt selection table in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a block showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the 18th embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game content in the latent state in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 18 executed by MPU in the main control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 18 executed by MPU in the main control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit | related process 18 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start processing 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball processing 18 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 18 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation number update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of winning a small hit by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol during the time saving state of 19th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 19th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process 19 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation discard process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 19th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the hit operation 20 table in 20th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the relationship between the jackpot game and the jackpot effect in the 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit | related process 20 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 20 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ROM in the main control device in the main control example of 17th Embodiment, and (b) is schematically the rule content of the fall lottery table in the 17th Embodiment main control example. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the main control alternative example of 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th Embodiment main control alternative example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 21st Embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the sorting device when the ordinary electric accessory is set to the buried state in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is the ordinary electric accessory in the 21st embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a sorting device when an object is set in a protruding state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the variation of Special Figure 1 in the latent state displayed by the third symbol display device in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the 21st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a change in Special Figure 2 in a latent state displayed by a third symbol display device. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the 21st embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit random number table in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the 21st embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table in the 21st embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the 21st embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table in the 21st embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving / probability variation table in the 21st embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table according to the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure opening pattern table according to the 21st embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing the time course of the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory during the normal state in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is the ordinary electric motor during the latent state in the 21st embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the operation mode of the accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 21 executed by MPU in the main control device in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 21 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 21 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 21st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 22nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 22nd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot effect executed when a jackpot is won during the normal state in the 22nd embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device when an effect of acquiring a superhuman drug is executed as a jackpot effect in the 22nd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device in RUSH in a form. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot effect executed when a jackpot is won during the latent state in the 22nd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the jackpot effect executed when the jackpot is won during the latent state in the 22nd embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit in the 22nd embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the 22nd embodiment. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the 22nd embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second hit random number table in the 22nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table in the 22nd embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving / probability variation table in the 22nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving giving table in 22nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device according to the 22nd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device according to the 22nd embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the hit effect selection table in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 22 executed by MPU in the main control device in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start processing 22 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 22nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 23rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device during the probabilistic state in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode set in the third symbol display device during the probable state in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode set in the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving grant table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the substantial special figure 1 game table in the 23rd embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in the 23rd Embodiment schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 24th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot effect executed when a jackpot is won in a normal state or a time saving state A in the 24th embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot effect executed when a jackpot is won in a probabilistic state in the 24th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot effect executed when a normal jackpot is won during a probability variation state in the 24th embodiment, and (b) reaches the probability variation limit number of times in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the jackpot production which is executed when it is done. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode set in the third symbol display device during the time saving state B in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the time saving state B in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode set in the 3rd symbol display device when a big hit is won in between. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the 24th embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table in the 24th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving giving table in 24th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation pattern scenario table in 24th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the main control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 24 executed by MPU in the main control device in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start processing 24 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 24 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of 24th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device during the time saving state B in the first modification of the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode set in the 3rd symbol display device during the normal state B in the 1st modification of a form. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving table in the 1st modification of 24th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the variation pattern scenario table in the 1st modification of the 24th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 24th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 24th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device during the time saving state B in the second modification of the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode set in the 3rd symbol display device when the probability variation jackpot is won during the time saving state B in the 2nd modification of the form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device during the latent state in the second modification of the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot C24 which was elected during the latent state in the second modification of the form. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving table in the 2nd modification of 24th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the variation pattern scenario table in the second modification of the 24th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 21st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the sorting device when the ordinary electric accessory is set to the protruding state in the modified example of the 21st embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in the modification of 21st Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode set in the third symbol display device when shifting from the normal state to the latent state in the modified example of the 21st embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode set in the third symbol display device during the latent state in the modified example of the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode set in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a modification of the 21st embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device in the case where the concealment state is set during the latent state in an example. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device when the concealment state is terminated while the latent state is maintained in the modified example of the 21st embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of transitioning to a normal state after the end of a concealed state in the modification of 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing 21A executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 21st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a secret lottery process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the 21st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing A executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process A executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 21st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 25th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are enlarged front views of the entrance portion of the sorting device according to the 25th embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution device when the ordinary electric accessory is changed to the buried state in the 25th embodiment, and (b) is the ordinary electric accessory in the 25th embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a sorting device when an object is changed to a protruding state. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory in 25th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in 25th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the RAM in the main control device in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 25th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first type selection table in the 25th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table in the 25th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the non-normal table in the 25th embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the regulation contents of the time saving giving table in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing 25 executed by MPU in the main control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection processing 25 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 25 executed by MPU in the main control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 26th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the operation mode for each jackpot type in the 26th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device during the probabilistic state in the 26th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control unit in the 26th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 26th embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 26th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table in the 26th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening selection table in the 26th embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 26 executed by MPU in the main control device in 26th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 26th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 27th Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device in the state where the opening / closing door is closed in the 27th embodiment, and (b) is a right variable winning in the state where the opening / closing door is opened in the 27th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the device. (A) is a top view of the opening / closing door in the state where the opening / closing door is closed in the 27th embodiment, and (b) is the opening / closing in the state where the game ball is on the upper surface of the opening / closing door in the 27th embodiment. It is a top view of the opening / closing door when the door is opened. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the round before the V round displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 27th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the 1st type selection table in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 27 executed by MPU in the main control device in 27th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the operation mode of the electric accessory in the modification of the 26th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 81, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 to 7 are schematic views schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is a figure (rear view).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

Specifically, a ball launched with a firing intensity of 90% to 100% always passes through the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a ball launched with a firing intensity of 40% to 50% always has a variable display. A sphere configured to pass through the area on the left side of the device unit 80 and fired at a firing intensity of 50% to 60% mostly passes through the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, with some variable display. It passes through the area on the right side of the device unit 80. Further, most of the balls launched with a firing intensity of 70% to 90% pass through the region on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball is configured to pass through the region on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Has been done.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , The peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

First symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are displayed according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball opening 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball wins the second ball opening 640, the first symbol display device 37a operates. The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuating state by a lighting state, or stop symbols. Is a symbol corresponding to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set as a game state after the jackpot game ends) or a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which a normal state is set as a game state after the jackpot game ends) or a missed symbol. The presence or absence is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds and the time saving state is given after the jackpot ends, and the 15R time saving jackpot (15R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds after the jackpot ends. There are 5R time-saving jackpots (5R time-saving big hits) that are given a time-saving state, and 5R normal jackpots (5R time-saving no big hits) that are not given a time-saving state after the jackpot ends with 5R rounds of the jackpot game.

In addition, in some cases where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a non-big hit, the privilege given to the player is less than the above-mentioned big hit (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Benefits to let) Small hits are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type are shown.

Here, the "15R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "5R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state. Further, the "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state after the jackpot of 5 rounds.

That is, in this pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when a jackpot with a special symbol is won, the player can be given the most benefits, "15R time saving jackpot", and the next most benefits can be given. It is configured to provide one of the "5R short-time jackpot" and the "5R normal jackpot", which has the fewest benefits given to the player among the jackpot games. As a result, even if a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, the game is performed while expecting that the big hit game in which the most benefits are given is provided among the big hit games in which the benefits that can be given are different. Can be made.

In this embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the content of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, and the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game. The size is defined, but the size is not limited to this, and the size of the privilege given to the player may be defined by using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits are given without defining the size of the privilege. You may just make the contents of the jackpot game different so that it is done.

In addition, the "time saving state" is a game in which the jackpot probability is the same as in the normal state as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the jackpot ends, but the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. It is in a state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in this case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640 is longer than in the normal state. In addition, in order to set a game state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, other configurations may be used, only a part of the above-mentioned setting contents may be used, or the above-mentioned contents. Alternatively, the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number (100 times) as a condition for ending the "time saving state". (1st end condition), or when the number of small hits won in the special symbol lottery reaches the 2nd predetermined number (for example, 1 time) (2nd end condition). When it is established, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any of the multiple end conditions is satisfied, the time-saving state is changed to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set multiple timings at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to make the player play the game while being excited about how long the time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hit A to small hit C) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery, and a second small hit type is prepared for each small hit type. The number of times the end condition is satisfied is set differently. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time saving state will end only by the number of small hits won during the time saving state, so that the player is always tense and the time is shortened. You can play a game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game (special discharge flow path 650e2 which is a specific area). The V switch 650e3 provided in the above is configured to be a big hit (so-called per type 2) by detecting a sphere (see FIG. 6). In addition, as will be described in detail later, the degree of expectation that the ball will pass through a specific area during the small hit game (V winning expectation) differs depending on the type of small hit that is won. Then, the number of times (the number of small hits) that the second end condition set for each small hit type is satisfied is reduced for the small hit type in which the small hit game with a high expectation of V winning is executed. It is configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to associate the V prize expectation for winning two types of hits when a small hit is won during the time saving game with the anxiety that the time saving state may end. It is possible for the player to play the game enthusiastically.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) is set as the end condition (first end condition) with respect to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). However, other end conditions may be set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, for example, when the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol becomes the third predetermined number (for example, 50 times). , The end condition of the time saving state may be satisfied when the number of fluctuations of only the second special symbol reaches the fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times). Moreover, only a part of a large number of termination conditions described above may be used, or each may be appropriately combined.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a ball winning (starting winning) to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the variation of the third symbol, and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are triggered by the passage of a ball. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the two symbols in a variable manner is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), for example, the left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed (see FIG. 10). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variable display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (variable display). (Variable display), and the third symbol is special on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbol.

That is, the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed (the lottery of the special symbol is executed) based on the determination condition (the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) is satisfied, and a predetermined value is determined. After the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, the display mode (combination of symbols) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of the special symbol) of the discrimination means. , The identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third symbol, which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, may be displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a part of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a hit / miss determination such as a big hit or a miss). The display mode may correspond to the result only), or the display mode may correspond to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, big hit, small hit, and miss) as the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is the above-mentioned three types of lottery as the display mode of the third symbol. A display mode indicating that the result is one of two specific types (for example, big hit or small hit) may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is a dynamic display (variable display) in which the lights are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 It is configured to be in operation (protruding) for a predetermined time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second entry port 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time saving state than in the gaming state in the normal state. As a result, during the time saving state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the operating state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640 during the time saving state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is won in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is won as compared with the case where the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is won in the normal state. The period of operation (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is projected to facilitate the ball from entering the second entry port 640) is configured to be long. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640 during the time saving state.

It should be noted that the configuration for making it easy for the ball to win the second ball opening 640 during the time saving state is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, for each hit that increases the hit probability of the second symbol. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be used. Further, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is changed so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set regardless of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

Further, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is changed according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are changed, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variation display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time of the game, the variation display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the hit is displayed (of the second symbol). It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a). With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose fluctuation has started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal state can be displayed. It can be operated according to the operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set gaming state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be defined other than the above. For example, the fluctuation start timing of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a may be defined. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the gaming state at any one of the start timings, the operating pattern advantageous to the player as the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state). The operation pattern) may be set.

As shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the game A part (almost) of the balls flowing down the right side of the board can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is missed. If there is, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the function of holding that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not provided, but the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is held. When the player has a function to perform the function, for example, the player can hold the second symbol holding display means for indicating the number of held balls up to four times in total, and the player can see the second symbol holding display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81). It is good to provide it in a part).

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, when it has a function of holding that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the number of holds is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 2, in the game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game), the first ball entry port 64 is on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can easily enter the game (so-called right-handed game) in which the ball flows down. Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to allow the ball to enter the first entry port 64. To.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entry port 64 in the front view, a second ball entry port 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entry port 640, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, each of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

In addition, in the present embodiment, switches (first entrance switch, second entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a lottery opportunity for a special symbol (big hit lottery opportunity) are provided in the entrance. The configuration is such that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained and a prize ball can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is set. When the switch (detecting means) for detecting the passing ball detects the passage of the ball, the lottery opportunity for the special symbol may be obtained. In this case, at least a part of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbol can be entered, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls are paid out. It is advisable to provide an entrance. With such a configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery opportunity is acquired and the number of times the prize ball is acquired can be made different, so that various playability can be provided.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a can be changed into a protruding state (allowable state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the front side (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and a shunting state (regulated state) with the game board 13 shunted. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in the shunting state (regulated state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, that is, the second symbol. If a winner is won in the lottery of the two symbols, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (allowable state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second entry port 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second entry port 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is defined as the left side (left-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80. It is divided into the right side (right-handed area), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to divide the destination of the launched ball into the right-handed area or the left-handed area. It is configured in. Hereinafter, the game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to launch the ball into the left-handed area in the game area is referred to as a left-handed game, and the game in which the ball is launched into the right-handed area is referred to as a right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a lottery trigger for whether or not to operate the second entry port 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640, and the electric accessory 640a is operated. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right-handed area, and is configured so that the right-handed game is performed when the time saving state is set as the game state.

A nail is planted below the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball launched by the left-handed game does not enter the second entry port 640, and the second ball enters during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. With this configuration, in the left-handed game, in order to change the first special symbol, a game is performed in which the ball enters the first entrance 64, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is changed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game performance depending on the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the right-handed region, a V-winning device 650 whose upper surface is inclined downward toward the lower left direction (lower left direction in the front view of FIG. 2) is provided. Each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the shunting state, the ball passes through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the protruding state, the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 2). Then, the ball that has reached the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second entrance 640, and if the electric accessory 640a is changed to the shunting state by the time it reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a, it is electric. The ball is configured to enter the general winning opening 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the above-mentioned electric accessory 640a, the second ball entry port 640, and the general winning opening 63. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing the cover member 655, the player can visually recognize the inside of the cover member 655 by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the pachinko machine 10 or the third symbol display device 81 during the game. It can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by timing the operation of the electric accessory 640a.

Further, in a state where the game is not performed (a state in which the power of the game machine is turned off), the incident light to the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized, and the pachinko machine can be used. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. When the cover member 655 is used to change the visibility inside, the light emitting means is shared by making the light emitting means for decoration available as described above. However, the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a light emitting means for making the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see may be provided exclusively.

Further, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made difficult to see for a predetermined period including the period during which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. For example, when it is determined that the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (that is,). The light emitting means is controlled so that a character (for example, "open") informing that the electric accessory 640a operates is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655 when a winning character is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols. The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is operating, and it is difficult to make it difficult to grasp the detailed operation timing thereof.

Here, the configuration of the right-handed region of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the region where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-shaped member on which a sphere can flow down, and is in the lower right direction (lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 3). It is arranged on the game board 13 so as to have a downward slope toward. Then, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down to the region a (see FIG. 3) corresponding to the range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is located in the shunting state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located at the protruding position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the shunting state when the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), the electric accessory 640a is provided below the electric accessory 640a. The ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning opening 63. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second entry port 640.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is configured to operate continuously for different periods in the gaming state, and the normal state is set as the gaming state. When the electric accessory 640a operates in this state, the electric accessory 640a is in a shunting state by the time the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the protruding state reaches the area b (see FIG. 3). In the state where the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the region c (see FIG. 3). It is configured to be located in.

Specifically, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds in the time saving state and 0.2 seconds in the normal state. Then, in the electric accessory 640a, the flow period for the ball to flow down in the region (range from region a to region c) shown in FIG. 3 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. It is configured (0.8 seconds in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, a normal symbol is won, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, the ball is in a state of flowing down. Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed by the time the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second entrance 640, the lottery of the second special symbol is surely executed in the normal state. Can be prevented.

Further, in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) when the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. , The ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Further, in the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and is electrically operated at the timing when it reaches the region b. The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the operation of the electric accessory 640a). As shown in FIG. 3, such a ball enters the general winning opening 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the right-handed game is played in the time-saving state, the ball entry port (second entry port 640) differs depending on the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the arrival timing of the ball to the electric accessory 640a. Alternatively, by configuring the ball so that it can be guided to the general winning opening 63), the player can be made to continuously perform the right-handed game during the time saving state.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed due to the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 (trigger). However, since it does not have a means for holding and storing the ball entering the second entrance 640 (meaning for holding and storing the right to execute the lottery of Special Figure 2), the change of the special symbol is executed. Even if a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the process, only the privilege of paying out prize balls (5 pieces) according to the entry is given to the player.

As described above, the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the second entry opening 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the player to enter the ball into the second entry opening 640 than to enter the ball into the general winning opening 63. (That is, the lottery of special figure 2 and 5 prize balls) can be given to the player, and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) cannot be executed (during special symbol change). If there is, it is configured so that it is possible to give a privilege (that is, 10 prize balls) that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the general prize opening 63 than the second entry opening 640.

As a result, the entry port (the entry opening where many benefits can be obtained) that the player wants to enter can be changed according to the game situation (whether or not the special symbol is changed), so that the time is shortened. It is possible to entertain the player with a right-handed game in the state. Further, in order to allow the ball to enter both the second entrance opening 640 and the general winning opening 63 during one operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. A long period (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the ball enters the second entry port 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates, but other than that, for example, during a time saving state. The operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the above is slightly longer than the period (for example, 0.9 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640 (0.8 seconds). It may be configured to be (seconds). With this configuration, after passing the ball through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the ball launch is stopped, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has operated, the ball launch is started again ( Since so-called stop striking) can be suppressed, the right-handed striking game can be continuously performed in the time-saving state, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", the V winning device is won. The opening / closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is configured to operate so as to be variable to an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, even in a part of the winning "big hit" of the special symbol (the big hit of the big hit type is the big hit D), the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is described above. It is configured to operate in the same way as when the "small hit" is won. This makes it difficult to know whether the special symbol "big hit" or "small hit" was won when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 was operated.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. First, as shown in FIG. 3, when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state in which the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 in the closed state is sphered. The ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (lower left side in the front view of FIG. 3). , Outflow toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in the open state (that is, during the small hit game), the ball wins in the V winning device 650.

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to be 0.1 seconds × 12 times (see FIG. 25), and the opening / closing door is opened at the timing when the V winning device 650 is opened. The ball flowing down on the 650f1 wins the V winning device 650. The balls that have won the V winning device 650 are configured to flow down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6A). There is. With this configuration, no matter from which position of the opening / closing door 650f1 the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650, the ball can be smoothly inserted. It can be made to flow down.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but the opening / closing door 650f1 flows down during the opening period of the opening / closing door 650f1. Other periods may be set as long as the ball in the ball can win the V winning device 650. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened is 12 times in one small hit game, but other times may be set.

Although the details will be described later, in the small hit game, the period from opening the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 once to opening the next opening (inter-opening interval period) is 5 during the small hit game. After the 10th and 10th opening operations, 5 seconds is set, and at other timings, 0.5 seconds is set. This is to make it easier for the V winning device 650 to win a ball during the period when the small hit game is being performed. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hit game, during the opening interval period after the fifth opening operation is completed. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guidance display that emphasizes and urges the player to play the right-handed game.

Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guidance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is such that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650. Is set longer than usual. Further, the same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the tenth opening operation during the small hit game is completed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small hit game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, in a specific game (small hit game) in which the opening operation is executed a plurality of times, a part of the interval period between opening is set longer than the others, and it is determined that the proper game is not performed. By making it possible to display a game guidance display for promoting appropriate game content, it is possible to make a player who is playing an erroneous game play a game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, a special opening interval period longer than the others is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small hit game. By providing the player with a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display during one small hit game in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform an appropriate game. When the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, it is preferable to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that the player who is normally playing the game cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the small hit game, at least one ball is inserted in one opening operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that it can be balled, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of winnings (10 pieces), which is a condition for ending the small hit game during the 10th opening operation It will be reached and the small hit game will be completed.

That is, the interval period between openings executed after the 10th opening operation during the small hit game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing to display the game guidance display using this timing, an unnecessarily long special opening interval period can be set for a player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game). It will not be executed, and the small hit game can be executed smoothly.

In addition, when setting the interval period between the first special opening as in the present embodiment at the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) to reach even if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. The timing when the first special opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends), or the timing when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the first special opening interval period (the fifth opening operation). It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entering the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball. If it is determined, a notification effect is displayed to notify that during the first special opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball, the game guidance display is displayed as described above. It is good to configure it to be displayed. As a result, the special open interval period set during the small hit game can be effectively used according to the content of the game.

Further, in the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the small hit game ends without having a predetermined number (10) of balls win the V winning device 650 during the small hit game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 is combined with an opening forming member 650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form a V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED substrate 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. A flow formed by an opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 650e and a flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that projects to the road and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is locked to the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, and the back surface thereof. A flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws. It is composed of and.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 5 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 5B, the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). An inclined bottom surface is formed on the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5A.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by an opening / closing door 650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, it is possible to continuously perform a right-handed game during a time-saving game, a big hit game, and a small hit game, so that the time and effort to change the game method according to the game state is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state of the opening / closing door 650f1, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. Can be made to. Therefore, the time required for the small hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 650 g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. To. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Will be done.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the big hit game is set after the small hit game by the game ball passing through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the jackpot game. Further, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small hit can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow in which the ball cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). It is for communicating with any of the paths (normal discharge flow path 650e1), and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. The flow path is switched to (see FIG. 6B).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal game play, so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. It is configured in. Then, when a small hit is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON according to the contents specified in the opening scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 25, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is specially discharged. It is configured so that the flow path 650e2 can flow down. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, that is, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. By providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 6A), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In this way, the game state set after the small hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, so that the player's interest is improved even during the small hit game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is composed of. With this configuration, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow route of the ball after detecting that the opening / closing door 650f1 has been opened even though the small hit has not been won, the ball will surely be released. It is possible to suppress the situation where the special discharge flow path 650e2 flows down.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged. The end timing of the small hit game (when the end condition of the small hit game (when the V winning device 650 has a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established). If all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after the event has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650 and the outside is determined. It is preferable to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the winning ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the V switch 650e3, so that whether or not the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is finished is sorted. Can be done. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening (specific area) for giving a big hit game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit game in which the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to be on differs according to the small hit type (small hit A to small hit C) set when the small hit is won. Is configured to be executed. With this configuration, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball will pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small hit game will differ depending on the content of the small hit game that is executed when the small hit is won. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win the small hit but also play the game while expecting the small hit game with a high expectation of V prize to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic view of the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 in a plan view in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. As shown in FIG. 7A, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment allows the ball that has reached the upper surface of the V winning device 650 to follow the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650y1 of the 650 through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 to the left upper surface 650y2 and flow out toward the variable winning device 65.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the sphere, and the sphere is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. It is configured so that the flow-down period is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small hit game. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win a prize when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small hit game.

When the small hit game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7A and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a schematic view of a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened, it moves so as to evacuate to the inside of the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the upper right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the winning can be performed. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 also wins a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the shunting position.

Further, in the V winning device 650, no matter from which position the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the ball flow after winning is smooth. 1 regulation member 651 and 2nd regulation member 652 are provided (see FIG. 2), and the balls that have won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 are the 1st regulating member 651 and the first. 2 It is configured so that it is aligned in a row via the regulation member 652 and then flows down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first regulating member, the ball winning vigorously from the opening / closing door 650f1 is directly detected at the detection port 650a1. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the ball detection switch 650c1, it is possible to prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from failing. In addition, a flow path (flow path flowing down on the first regulation member 651 and the second regulation member 652) for aligning the balls before the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width equivalent to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which ball clogging occurs in the V winning device 650 and interferes with the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation is performed in the privilege game (small hit game) given when the judgment result (result of the lottery of the special symbol) of the discrimination means is a predetermined judgment result (small hit). The flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1) is longer than the opening interval period (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small hit game is surely made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

Further, even if only the balls flowing down on the variable member are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, a predetermined number (10 pieces) can be won during the small hit game. Since the number of opening operations (12 times) in the winning game is set to be larger than the number of winning conditions (10) in the small hit game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short. , A sufficient number of winnings can be secured. In addition, by setting a long opening period, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive number of balls are won by the V winning device 650 during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 8, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a first frame button 22, a second frame button 23, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are indicated, it is referred to as a frame button 22). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the effect content at the time of super reach. Instruct 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character for production (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command for outputting audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command for emitting the lamp display device 227 in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. 10 (a) and 10 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10A, the third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 imitates the numbers "0" to "9". It is composed of each type of main symbol. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols that are variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines images such as figures and characters and numbers may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By reducing the size of the display or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). As shown in FIG. 10B, a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction of firing the ball (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11A). That is, in the present embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board 13 the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10, when the guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is variable, the voice guidance using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are used. It is configured to execute the light emission guidance that was used. Here, as the voice guidance using the voice output device 226, a voice indicating the display content displayed in the small display area Dm2 is output, such as a voice indicating "right-handed".

Further, as the light emitting guide using the lamp display device 227, for example, in the case of guiding "right-handed", a plurality of LEDs (not shown) used as the light emitting means are lit in order from the left side to the right side. Light emission control. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the lighting pattern of the light emitting means provided on the game board 13, it is possible to easily grasp to which region of the game board 13 the ball should be fired. In addition, it is possible to notify the player that the direction in which the ball is launched to the player (game direction) has been switched not only by the display content of the third symbol display device 81 but also by voice guidance and light emission guidance. Therefore, the player can immediately notice that the game direction has been changed.

A small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display area Dm1 is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol can be easily displayed. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the frame button 22 is urged to be pressed is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm1 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

Although the details will be described later, the small display area Dm1 includes the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a in which the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second special symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. It is formed from a special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b on which 3 symbols are displayed (see FIG. 11 (a)). As a result, even when the display effect is executed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp which special symbol the third symbol corresponds to is changing. .. The pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration in which the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a and the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b are formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one variation is used in the small display area Dm1. A display area may be provided so that only the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner among the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the lower right of the front view in the main display area Dm. Although details will be described later, this small display area Dm3 is a situation (state) for suggesting whether or not the time saving state ends when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific gaming state (time saving state). ) Display mode Dm3a (see FIG. 11A) is a display area. As a result, the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 allows the player to play the game while predicting the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 10B, a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured, so that the sub-display area Ds Is displayed with a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically. Further, the player may be visually notified of the size of the number of reserved balls by changing the mode of the character according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are displayed. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information related to the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for 1 second (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), the lottery based on the reserved ball is performed. The corresponding variable display is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time. In this way, after the lottery result corresponding to one special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stopped display state is continued for a predetermined period of time, and then the next special symbol change is started. , It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that a new special symbol change has been started. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned symbol determination period is always provided after the lapse of the symbol variation time, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball port 640. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10B, the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and the ball is inserted into the first entry port 64. Of these, it is formed as a hold display area for displaying a hold symbol, which is the number of balls (hold balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed. In the first display area Ds1, the first reserved symbol Dsb and the second reserved symbol Dsb are stored in the order in which the winning information acquired when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 (in the order of the oldest reserved timing). The reserved symbol Dsc, the third reserved symbol Dsd, and the fourth reserved symbol Dse are displayed. Then, the pending symbol corresponding to the fluctuation currently being executed is displayed as the executing symbol Dsa at the center position of the sub-display area Ds.

The reserved symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 is the reserved symbol corresponding to the next fluctuation (front of FIG. 10B) when the variable display being executed ends and the next fluctuation is started. The first reserved symbol Dsb) displayed on the far right in the visual sense is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted to the right and displayed. Then, the erased first reserved symbol Dsb is displayed as the executing symbol Dsa. As a result, it is possible to notify the player which of the reserved symbols corresponds to the variable display being executed. Therefore, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed and the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol can be displayed. When an effect that raises the expectation that the lottery is a big hit (so-called look-ahead effect) is executed, the player can easily determine that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead effect is executed. Can be recognized.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction in which each reserved symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to second reserved symbol Dse) displayed in the first display area Ds1 moves (shifts) when a new special symbol change is started. Since the running symbol Dsa is displayed (to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 10B), the reserved symbols (first reserved symbol Dsb to second reserved symbol Dse) and the running symbol Dsa are played. Since the player can grasp the variable display in a series of lines, the player can easily grasp which pending symbol corresponds to the variable display being executed.

In the present embodiment, only the ball entering the first ball opening 64 can be held up to 4 times, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of balls to be entered into the second entry port 640 may be set to be held up to a predetermined number, or the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to be entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the ball opening 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first ball opening 64, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first ball opening 64 may be set to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second ball opening 640. It may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for, or conversely, may be smaller. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

A second display area Ds2 is formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds, and an effect description for supplementing the content of the effect (display effect) executed in the main display area Dm is displayed (FIG. 11 (FIG. 11). b) See). In this way, a plurality of information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the variation display information of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the special symbol currently being executed. Display effect information for indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result corresponding to is a specific lottery result (big hit winning), effect explanation information supplementing the content of the display effect information, and hold symbol information indicating the number of reserved symbols of the special symbol By displaying the running symbol information or the like indicating the running symbol in a predetermined section (area), various information displayed at the same time can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17. The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first special symbol) is triggered by the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

It should be noted that the third symbol is commonly displayed in a variable manner with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the second special symbol, which is more likely to give a lottery result more favorable to the player than the first special symbol, is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol. It is configured so that the two special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

However, in the first embodiment, the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured, so that the reserved balls of the first special symbol are substantially specially digested in order. The change of the symbol is executed. For example, when the change of the new special symbol is started, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable state, that is, the first. If the timing of starting a new variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol and the timing of the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting winning) match, the variation of the second special symbol will occur. It is configured to be executed with priority.

As a result, the opportunity to receive a lottery that is advantageous to the player (the opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) is lost due to the execution of the more disadvantageous lottery (the lottery of the first special symbol). Can be reliably prevented.

As the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, an effect suggesting the presence or absence of various contents that can be established based on the lottery of the special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is a part of the case where the jackpot winning suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot was won by the special symbol lottery, and the case where the jackpot was not won by the special symbol lottery (winning out). The game state is advantageous to the player due to the small hit winning suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the player has won the small hit that gives the player less benefits than the big hit (for example, payout of the prize ball) and the lottery result of the special symbol. When the game state transition suggestion effect for suggesting the transition to the time reduction state or the time reduction state is set as the game state, the time reduction state ends according to the lottery result of the special symbol or the variation display of the special symbol. A time-saving state end suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the award is to be performed.

Further, the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol (big hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect, etc.) is the third symbol that is stopped and displayed after the third symbol is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Depending on the combination, the effect using the period until the lottery result is notified (dynamic display period) is executed. For example, the stop display indicating that the third symbol has won the jackpot during the dynamic display period. Of the modes (for example, the combination of "777"), only a part of the combinations are stopped and displayed in the reach display mode (for example, only two of the three third symbols are stopped and displayed at "77". The display mode) in which the remaining third symbol is changed) is displayed, and then the story characteristic is displayed in the main display area Dm with the third symbol showing the reach display mode displayed in the small display area Dm1. The effect of having it is executed, and when the story is completed correctly, the effect of stopping and displaying the third symbol at "777" is executed.

In the above-mentioned example, the reach display mode is a state in which a part of the combination of the third symbols is stopped and displayed in a manner that matches the combination indicating that the lottery result is a hit (big hit). The display mode may be a reach display mode. For example, a part of the third symbol may be displayed in a dedicated display mode for indicating the reach state, or a combination of some of the third symbols may be displayed. May be displayed in a dedicated display mode for indicating the reach state, instead of the combination indicating that the jackpot has been won. By configuring so that the player can grasp that the reach state is established by confirming the stop display mode of a part of the third symbol in this way, the player wins a big hit. Expectations for what has been done can be gradually increased, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a continuous effect to be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations as an effect suggesting a lottery result of a special symbol. In this continuous effect, when a prize information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the prize information is obtained. The lottery result of the special symbol change corresponding to the command is displayed in the period until the change display corresponding to the special symbol change is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol change executed before the target special symbol change). Is an effect to suggest to the player by using the period during which is executed.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect is given to the player. Can be provided and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the lottery result (for example, deviation) of the special symbol can be continuously produced without highlighting each variation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced. it can.

Further, in the first embodiment, in addition to the effect of suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state is changed according to the number of lottery (variation number) of the special symbol. It is configured to also execute a suggestive effect (time saving state end suggestion effect). This time-saving state end suggestion effect is an effect that is continuously executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state, and is the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times the special symbol variation is executed) or the special symbol. This is an effect for suggesting the possibility that the time saving state will end according to the number of times that the lottery result of is a specific lottery result (for example, a small hit win).

Here, the content of the above-mentioned time-saving state end suggestion effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entry port 640, and the second entry is made according to the operating state (variable state) of the electric accessory 640a. It is configured so that a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball mouth 640 (first state) and a state in which the ball is easy to enter (second state) are set. Further, a lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and when a small hit is won, a small hit game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed. To. The V winning device 650 has a special discharge flow path 650e2 as a specific area through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 can pass, and the V switch indicates that the ball has passed (flowed down) through the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is configured so that a big hit (per 2 types) is set when the 650e3 detects it. Then, the time saving state set as the gaming state is advantageous for the player in which the electric accessory 640a can easily move (variable) to the second state (a state in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640). Since the game is in the game state, a right-handed game is performed in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 during the time saving state.

As described above, the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is configured to end when the ending condition (time saving ending condition) is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol change based on the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol lottery is performed. This is configured so that the time saving state ends (the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state) when any of the conditions when the small hit is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) is satisfied.

By making it possible to set a plurality of time saving end conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state that is advantageous to the player continues. On the other hand, it suggests (notifies) the player whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving information (for example, information indicating the number of small hits won during the time saving state) updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition. ) Otherwise, there is a problem that the time saving state that is advantageous to the player ends suddenly, and the player feels dissatisfied.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the time saving end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, and the time saving information updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small hits won during the time saving state). ) Is suggested (notified) to the player as a time saving state end suggestion effect, so that the player can play the game while predicting the period in which the time saving state is continuously set. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is suddenly ended and the player feels dissatisfied.

In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions include a time-saving end condition that is advantageous for the player (a time-saving end condition that is established by winning the jackpot) and other disadvantageous time-saving end conditions. In the time saving state end suggestion effect executed during the time saving state, the time saving information is simply updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition and the time saving information (for example, the number of small hits won during the time saving state). Rather than executing the effect based on (information indicating), it is determined whether the time-saving end condition that is satisfied or the time-saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied is advantageous to the player, and the effect based on the determination result is also determined. It is configured to run.

By configuring in this way, not only is the player predicting whether or not the timing for ending the time saving state is approaching, but also whether or not the time saving ending condition that is advantageous to the player is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect to be executed (the effect of suggesting the end of the time saving state) interesting, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a plurality of types of small hit games are executed, and according to the small hit game to be executed ( (Depending on the set small hit type), the expectation that two types of hits are set during the small hit game is different. Then, among the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions, as the time-saving end condition that is established based on winning a predetermined number of small hits in the special symbol lottery, the number of times (time-saving end condition) for each small hit type set at the time of winning the small hit Is configured to set the number of winnings).

With this configuration, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by the small hit winning of the special symbol, the time saving end condition established this time is advantageous to the player (the small hit type that is easy to hit two types is set. Whether it is a time-saving end condition that is satisfied by the fact that it is done) or a time-saving end condition that is disadvantageous to the player (a time-saving end condition that is established because a small hit type that is difficult to hit two types) Can be suggested (notified) to the player. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition is satisfied by winning the small hit, the player can pay attention to the effect executed by the time saving state end suggestion effect.

In addition, the number of times set for each small hit type (the number of times the time saving end condition is satisfied for each small hit type) is set differently according to the expected degree per two types of each small hit type. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the small hit type with high expectation per type (for example, small hit A) finishes in a shorter time with a smaller number of winnings than the small hit type with low expectation per type (for example, small hit C). It is configured so that the conditions are satisfied.

By configuring in this way, for example, immediately after the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends based on the small hit winning of the special symbol in the time saving state end suggestion effect, or until just before the time saving state ends. When the effect indicating that the time saving information has been updated is executed, it is possible to make the player predict that the small hits won this time are the small hits with high expectations for each of the two types. That is, it is possible to make the player predict various game results based on the effect content of the time saving state end suggestion effect and the period during which the time saving state continues, and the effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition advantageous for the player, the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the big hit is won as described above and the small hit type that is easy to hit two kinds of the small hit games are set. There is a time saving end condition that is satisfied in some cases, but it is not limited to this, and among a plurality of time saving end conditions, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the player is more likely than when the other time saving end conditions are satisfied. It suffices if it is advantageous to. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is satisfied, a special state is set in which the special symbol lottery executed thereafter is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine having a function, the time saving end condition that is advantageous to the player may be a time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Specifically, for example, a special symbol high-probability state in which it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot or a special symbol low-probability state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot is set, and a normal symbol is won. By setting either the easy normal symbol high probability state or the normal symbol low probability state that is harder to win than that, the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal) is set as a plurality of game states. Symbol low probability state), probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), latent state (special symbol high probability state) , Ordinary symbol low probability state) and four game states are provided, and the degree of advantage of the player in each game state is configured so that at least the latent state is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state.

Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, only when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol high probability state to the normal symbol low probability state It is configured so that the latent probability state is set by shifting to. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in the state where the probability change state is set, and the jackpot is set in the state where the probability change state is set, rather than the game state other than the latent state is set after the jackpot ends. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning the prize, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the game state in which the latent state is set is more advantageous to the player. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned example, the condition for setting the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times while the probability change state is set. By setting only when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is set as the time saving end condition that is advantageous to the player. In addition to the configuration of the above example, a configuration may be added in which the latent probability state is set in a small part (for example, 1%) when the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the probability variation state is set.

As a result, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player can be set regardless of whether the jackpot of the special symbol is won or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. However, in this case, the time-saving end condition in which the latent probability state is easily set is the time-saving end condition that is more advantageous to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 11 to 15, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state end suggestion effect in the present embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when a big hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol and a time saving state is set after the big hit. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the time saving state is set, the characters “pounding rush rush” indicating that the time saving state is set in the main display area Dm are displayed. This "pounding rush" is an effect executed in response to the period in which the time saving state is set, and is a notification mode for indicating to the player that the current gaming state is the time saving state.

Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dm2, the characters "right-handed" are displayed to guide the game to be performed during the time-saving state, and it is notified that the right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. .. In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 during the pounding rush, and the character 801 (see FIG. 12 (a)) imitating a boy is displayed in the treasure box 802 (FIG. 12 (a)) in the central part of the main display area Dm. The effect of searching for (see) is executed. The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the small display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a status (state) display mode Dm3a for suggesting whether or not the time saving state ends is displayed. In this situation (state) display mode Dm3a, whether or not the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol change has won a big hit, and the time saving state is set based on the currently executed special symbol change. It can be changed to various display modes (see FIG. 15) depending on the determination result of whether or not to end or whether or not the information for the condition for ending the time saving state is updated based on the currently executed special symbol variation. It is configured to be done.

In FIG. 11A, a display mode “display mode 1” (see FIG. 15) indicating that the currently executed special symbol variation has not won the big hit and the small hit is displayed. The display screen shown in FIG. 11A is a case where the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit, and the change of the first special symbol already held and stored at the time of winning the big hit is executed. Therefore, of the small display area Dm2, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a, and the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as the executing symbol Dsa. Display mode "Circle" is displayed.

Here, the display screen when there is a reserved symbol that wins the jackpot in the first special symbol (held symbol) that has already been reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). .. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents in the case where the time saving state is set after the big hit and there is a reserved symbol that has won the big hit. In FIG. 11B, the winning information corresponding to the first reserved symbol Dsb includes the winning information for winning a big hit, and the small display area Dm3 is a display mode indicating that a special symbol is hit (design hit). "Display mode 3" (see FIG. 15) is displayed as the status display mode Dm3b.

Then, in the second display area Ds2, the characters "Expect" indicating the contents of the situation display mode Dm3b are displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 11B, since the jackpot is won immediately after the time saving state is set (after the time saving state is set and the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed three times), the above-mentioned time saving state is obtained. It is set to win the jackpot while maintaining the display screen shown in FIG. 11 (b) without executing the pounding rush executed during. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the pounding rush from being executed for a short period of time.

In this case, in the main display area Dm, a display screen (effect start screen during the time saving state) in a mode different from the usual (see FIG. 11A) is displayed, such as "Pounding rush rush?". The display screen shown in FIG. 11B may be configured to be displayed even when the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game, for example. As a result, when the display mode of "Pounding rush rush !!" shown in FIG. 11A is displayed after the jackpot game is completed, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the time saving state has been set. , The player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, when the display mode of "Pounding rush rush?" Shown in FIG. 11B is displayed after the jackpot game ends, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, or the jackpot is won in the hold. It is possible to notify the player that it is one of the above, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition to the above-described configuration, there is a determination means for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning the jackpot in the reserved symbols existing after the end of the jackpot game, and there is winning information for winning the jackpot by the determination means. If it is determined that, the same display mode (for example, the character of "big chance") may be displayed regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) set after the jackpot game ends. .. Further, the jackpot information determined by the above-mentioned discrimination means is analyzed, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the analyzed jackpot information (look-ahead jackpot information) is determined, and the jackpot is determined based on the discrimination result. It may be configured to set the display mode after the end of the game.

In this case, for example, when it is determined that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the look-ahead jackpot information ends, the characters "Pounding rush rush !!" (that is, the time saving state) are displayed as the display mode after the jackpot game ends. If it is determined that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the look-ahead jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game is "Pounding rush rush?" ”(That is, a display mode that does not notify that the time has been shortened) may be displayed.

By configuring in this way, if the winning information that wins the jackpot is included in the reserved symbol that exists after the end of this jackpot game, it is not the game state set after the end of this jackpot game, but the reserved symbol. Based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot (next jackpot) included in, the display mode displayed after the end of the current jackpot game can be set. Therefore, for example, after the end of this jackpot game, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set, and during that time saving state, the jackpot included in the reserved symbol is won, and after the jackpot game ends, the player becomes a player more than the time saving state. When an unfavorable normal state is set, a display mode that does not notify the player that the time saving state has been set is displayed, so that the time saving state that is advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

Here, the display mode of the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining the type of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, nine types of situation display modes can be displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the lottery result of the changing special symbol (big hit winning, small hit winning). ) Or, the status display mode is set according to the content (number of small hit wins, number of special symbol changes) that is updated when the special symbol changes with respect to the time saving end condition that the time saving state ends when it is established. It is displayed in the display area Dm3.

As a result, by grasping the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, it is possible to make the player predict how the time saving state will progress due to the special symbol change during execution, which is easy to understand. A game can be provided.

To specifically explain the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, "display mode 1 (first display mode)" is displayed as a "white circle" (see FIG. 11 (a)). ) Display mode. In this "display mode 1", the contents related to the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for ending the time saving state (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations and the number of small hit winnings) are up to a predetermined stage without winning the big hit. This is a display mode that is set when it has not been updated. When this "display mode 1" is displayed, it can be confirmed that the time-saving game (time-saving state) does not end due to this special symbol change, and the player can expect the next and subsequent special symbol changes with confidence. ..

Next, "display mode 2 (second display mode)" is a display mode displayed by a "black circle". This "display mode 2" is a display mode that is set when it indicates that a small hit has been won and the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for ending the time saving state have not been updated to a predetermined stage. .. Here, as described above, the present embodiment is configured so that a big hit (per two types) is set in the wake of the small hit game, and the content of the small hit game to be executed (the small hit of the winning small hit). It is configured so that the degree of expectation (probability that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during a small hit game) in which two types of hits are set differs depending on the type).

This "display mode 2" notifies the player that the small hit has been won, but does not notify the player of the winning small hit type, so that the player has won the small hit this time. The game is played while expecting that the small hit type of is a small hit type (for example, small hit A) in which it is easy to set two types of hits. In addition, since the game will be played while feeling the possibility that the end condition of the time saving state will be updated (updated within the range of the stage before reaching the predetermined stage) by winning the small hit, give a feeling of tension. You can play a game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of small hit types are classified into a small hit type (small hit A) in which two types of hits are easily set and a small hit type in which two types of hits are more difficult to set than the small hit A. (Small hit B, small hit C) is set, and as the end condition (time reduction end condition) of the time saving state that can be established based on the small hit winning, the number of winnings is set as small as the small hit type that is easy to set the 2 types. It is configured to be done. That is, for each of the plurality of small hit types, the time saving end condition is set differently according to the degree of advantage to the player, and the lottery result that is advantageous to the player has the time saving end condition. It is configured so that it can be easily established.

Therefore, for example, when the "display mode 2" is displayed immediately after the time saving state is set, it is predicted that one of all the small hit types has been won, and the time saving state is set and the predetermined period has elapsed. If "Display mode 2" is displayed later (after winning multiple small hits during the time saving state), the small hits for which the number of winnings is set to be large as the time saving end condition, that is, two types of hits It can be predicted that a small hit with a small hit type that is difficult to set has been won. In this way, since the lottery result of this special symbol can be predicted in detail based on the type of display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the elapsed period of the time saving state, it is fun to predict to the player. Can be provided.

"Display mode 3 (third display mode)" is a display mode displayed by a "sun mark using a white circle" (see FIG. 11B). This "display mode 3" is a display mode indicating that the jackpot (per symbol) of the special symbol has been won. As a result, when the jackpot (big hit game) is set by a plurality of triggers as in the present embodiment, the trigger for which the jackpot (big hit game) is set can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

"Display mode 4 (fourth display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters of chance in a white circle" (see FIG. 14A). In this "display mode 4", the small hit type B or small hit C (that is, the small hit with a low expectation for each of the two types) is won, and the condition for ending the time saving state and the time saving state are This is a display mode set when the termination condition is updated to a predetermined stage.

"Display mode 5 (fifth display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters of last chance in a white circle" (see FIG. 13A). This "display mode 5" is a display mode that is set when a small hit is won and a condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. By displaying this "display mode 5", the player is notified that the time saving condition has been completed.

By configuring in this way, the time saving state will end unless two types of hits are obtained in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit that was won this time, at the stage before the small hit game is executed. Since it is possible to notify the player at (a stage before the special symbol indicating that the small hit has been won is stopped and displayed), the small hit game is performed more enthusiastically than usual. Can be made.

"Display mode 6 (sixth display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters in a large pinch in a white circle" (see FIG. 14B). This "display mode 6" is a display mode set when the small hit C, which has the lowest expectation for each of the two types of small hits, is won and the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. The "display mode 6" is for suggesting to the player that the time saving state ends by winning the small hit (small hit C). In this way, by suggesting to the player that the special symbol change this time is a time saving change again during the time saving state, the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is suddenly ended, and the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a confusing situation.

The "display mode 7 (seventh display mode)" is a display mode displayed in "characters of intense heat in a white circle". This "display mode 7" is a display mode set when the small hit A, which has the highest expectation for each of the two small hit types, is won and the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied.

In the first embodiment, "1 time" is set for the small hit A, which has the highest expectation for each of the two types, as a time saving end condition (condition for ending the number of winnings) that can be satisfied when a small hit is won. Therefore, as the explanation of "display mode 7", it is explained that the setting is made when the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types are not limited to this. Of these, it may be used as a display mode to indicate only that the small hit A, which has the highest expectation for each of the two types, has been won.

"Display mode 8 (8th display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "a character ending in a white circle". This "display mode 8" is set when the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) that is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times is satisfied without winning the big hit and the small hit. This is a display mode. By displaying this "display mode 8", it is possible to reliably notify the player of the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In the first embodiment, when the winning count end condition and the variation count end condition are satisfied by the same special symbol variation (lottery) as the condition for ending the time saving state, the variation count end condition is satisfied. It is configured to discriminate. That is, in the special symbol variation in which the variation number end condition is satisfied, when the small hit A is won, the "display mode 8" is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit has been won after making the player think that the time saving state has ended, so that the player can play a surprising game. Can be provided.

"Display mode 9 (9th display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "characters of? In a white circle". This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set without being related to the lottery result of the special symbol or the update information of the time saving state. This "display mode 9" is a display mode set by a predetermined lottery regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the progress status of the time saving state. In this way, by making it possible to set a display mode in which the player cannot be notified of the game state or the game situation, each time the special symbol change is executed for the player, the special symbol change is related to this time. There is no need to provide information (updated information).

In addition, in this 1st Embodiment, by displaying "display mode 9", it is configured to make it difficult for a player to understand (make it difficult to grasp) the game content in a time-saving state. In addition, a determination means for determining whether or not to display the display modes 1 to 9 in the small display area Dm3 may be provided, and the display content may be determined based on the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the content of the pounding rush executed by the third symbol display device during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content of the pounding rush executed during the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state, and the small hit A is set as the small hit type. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the effect content displayed while the 2nd special symbol winning a small hit is changing.

As shown in FIG. 12A, in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b, and the second special symbol (the second special symbol as the running symbol Dsa) ( A "triangular mark" indicating the special figure 2) is displayed. In this state, after all the first special symbols (special figure 1) that are reserved and stored in the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 (a) are digested (without the reserved memory of the newly executed special symbol). , This is a state showing the case where the change of the second special symbol is started due to (trigger) that the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition (winning number end condition) is satisfied when the small hit A is set once, and therefore, due to this special symbol change. , "Display mode 5" is displayed as the status (state) display mode Dm3a indicating that the small hit is won and the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the small hit is won in the second display area Ds2. The word "Treasure chest found" is displayed to suggest.

Then, when the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating a small hit, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows FIG. 12 (b). The display contents shown in are displayed. FIG. 12 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the second special symbol during the variable display in FIG. 12 (a) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b of the small display area Dm1, the third symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination "341" for showing the lottery result (small hit) of the second special symbol. The treasure box 802 is enlarged and displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "(the contents of the treasure box) are ..." are displayed in the second display area Ds2 to guide the development of the future production.

This treasure box 802 is used to show the game result of the small hit game to be executed immediately after, and the effect of successfully or failing to open the treasure box 802 is executed according to the result of the small hit game. To. The content of the effect executed according to the result of the small hit game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b).

Here, with reference to FIG. 13A, the content of the effect when two types of hits are obtained during the small hit game in which the small hit A is set will be described. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when two types of hits are won (V prizes are won) in the small hit game in which the small hit A executed during the time saving state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 13A, when a V prize is won during the small hit game (when a ball winning the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball) , The effect of successfully opening the treasure chest 802 is executed, and the V display 803 indicating that the jackpot game is set is displayed. Then, the characters "big hit" indicating that the big hit (per two types) have been acquired are displayed in the second display area Ds2.

On the other hand, if the two types of hits cannot be obtained during the small hit game in which the small hit A is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. FIG. 13B schematically shows the display content when the small hit A executed during the time saving state did not win the two types of hits (V did not win) in the small hit game in which the small hit A was set. It is a schematic diagram. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied by winning once for the small hit in which the small hit A is set, the small hit game of the small hit A is performed. If the V prize cannot be won, the time saving state ends and the normal state is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13B, when the small hit game of the small hit A cannot win the V prize, the failure display mode 803 in which the treasure box 802 exploded is displayed, and the time saving state is displayed in the second display area Ds2. The text "Sorry, rush end" is displayed to indicate that is ending. After this screen is displayed, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm2 as game guidance according to the normal state, and the screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed.

Next, the effect when the small hit B for which the small hit B is set is won during the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 14A. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the small hit for which the small hit B is set is won for the first time in the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (d), but in the present embodiment, as one of the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, it is possible to set "three wins for a small hit for which a small hit B is set". It is configured in. Here, when the small hit for which the small hit B is set is won for the first time during the time saving state, the display mode 4 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 as shown in FIG. 14A, and the main display area is displayed. The treasure chest 804 is displayed in Dm.

This treasure box 804 has a different display mode from the treasure box 802 shown in FIG. 12 (b), and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for each of the two types of small hits won this time. Specifically, it is configured so that the treasure chest (treasure box 802) in a luxurious display mode is more easily displayed when the small hit (small hit A), which has a high expectation for each of the two types, is won. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation per type 2 depending on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. it can.

In the small hit game (small hit game corresponding to the small hit B) executed after the display screen of FIG. 14 (a) is displayed, if a V prize is won, the same effect display screen as in FIG. 13 (a) is displayed. It is displayed (the only difference is that the display mode of the opened treasure box is changed to the treasure box 804), while if the V prize is not won, the effect display screen indicating that the contents of the opened treasure box 804 is empty is displayed. After that, the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed, and the effect of the boy 801 searching for the treasure box again is executed.

Next, the effect when the small hit C in which the small hit C is set is won during the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the small hit C in which the small hit C is set is won five times in the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 (d), but in the present embodiment, as one of the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, "5 wins for a small hit for which a small hit C is set" can be set. It is configured in. Here, when the small hit C for which the small hit C is set is won five times during the time saving state, the display mode 6 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 as shown in FIG. 14B, and the main display is displayed. A treasure chest 805 is displayed in the area Dm.

This treasure box 805 has a different display mode from the above-mentioned treasure box 802,804b, and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation per two types in the small hit won this time. Specifically, it is configured so that the treasure chest (treasure chest 805) having a poor display mode is more likely to be displayed when the small hit (small hit C) with the lowest expectation per type 2 is won. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation per type 2 depending on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. it can.

That is, when the display screen shown in FIG. 14B is displayed, it is highly possible that the time saving end condition is satisfied by winning the small hit (small hit C) with the lowest expectation for each type 2. Therefore, the player will play the small hit game to be executed after this while praying for a V prize.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be satisfied based on the lottery (variation) of the special symbol executed during the time saving state can be set, and a plurality of set time saving end conditions can be set. It is possible to execute an effect (display of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a) that allows the player to grasp the situation of the time saving state based on whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the update status until the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the time saving state suddenly ends and the player is confused.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16A is a display screen displayed when the right for two types has not been acquired when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small hit game in which the small hit A is set as the small hit type is executed. FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram showing an example, in which FIG. 16B shows a case where the right per two types is acquired after a lapse of a predetermined period from the execution of the small hit game in which the small hit A is set as the small hit type. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen displayed in. Further, FIG. 17A is displayed when the right for each of the two types has not been acquired when a predetermined period has passed since the small hit game in which the small hit B or C is set as the small hit type is executed. FIG. 17B is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen to be displayed, and FIG. 17B is a two-type hit after a predetermined period has elapsed from the execution of the small hit game in which the small hit B or C is set as the small hit type. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen which is displayed when the right of is acquired.

In the first embodiment, the small hit game is configured to open the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small hit game, and at the 5th or 10th opening timing, the small hit game is executed. The V switch 650e3 is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays a highlight guidance display mode (see FIG. 16A) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set the display instruction command to make it.

Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects the ball while the highlighting guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, the display achievement for displaying the achievement display mode for blessing the player is achieved. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hit game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is reliably configured to win the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. The ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. If it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1 despite the configuration as described above, the third symbol is displayed when the small hit game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the display for guiding the right-handed hit to the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10B) of the display device 81. Alternatively, it is possible that the game is stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the right-handed game by changing the display for guiding the right-handed person displayed in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Further, when the right-handed game is performed after the highlighted guide display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the timing for displaying the highlighted guide display mode (see FIG. 16A), the right-handed game is used. The timing is set so that the launched ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has executed a right-handed game according to the display of the highlight guidance display mode Dy1 cannot let the ball flow down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 during the small hit game.

Further, in the first embodiment, the small hit game (small hit A) having a high expectation per two types is executed because the expected degree of the two types is different depending on the winning small hit type. The content of the effect display that is executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing depending on whether the game is a small hit game (small hits B or C) with a low expectation for each type 2 is executed. It's different.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 51). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a corresponding to entry into the first ball entry port 64, which is composed of four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and is provided in this area. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Are stored respectively.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started. It should be noted that the present embodiment does not have a configuration for suspending and storing the ball entering the second entry port 640 and a configuration for suspending and storing the ball passing through the through gate 67, but these configurations are not provided. However, as a predetermined number (for example, four) holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area or a normal symbol holding ball storage area may be provided.

Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 51).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Further, the first random number table 202a is provided with two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the number of random numbers that are small hits is set differently (see FIG. 20). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become small hits different, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big hits or small hits) to the player is increased between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 20B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and FIG. 20 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In the first hit random number table 202a, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20B, in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (that is, that is). It is stipulated as a judgment value of (out). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

When executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, "0-4" among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and "5-989" is the small hit determination value. "990-999" is specified as a determination value other than that (that is, out of order). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is determined, and when the value is any of "0-4", it is determined as a big hit, and it is determined by any of "5-989". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, in a state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game), the ball is the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

Here, unless the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number determined to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, That is, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbols at the time of lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. It is stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first random number table 202a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the total number of random numbers is 1000, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 5, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 21 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). .. As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratios can be different, it is necessary to provide the player with different playability between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "big hit A", and any of "10 to 49". If it is, the jackpot type is "big hit B", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C".

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving times is 1). "Big hit A" is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the advantageous time saving state for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

"Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving times is 1). Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "big hit A", the "big hit B" is a big hit type that is advantageous for the player because the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state that is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

"Big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "big hit C" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 15 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and 90 A 5 round jackpot game is selected at a rate of%. In addition, a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a time saving state is selected at a rate of 50%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 21 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 21 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit D". That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big hit D" for the player is always selected as the big hit type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (d), the content of time saving for each type of jackpot will be described.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number is not limited to one, and five or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the taste of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a normal state and a time saving state, and the range of random value values set for each stop type that is out of order is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal state or a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

For example, in a time-saving state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because big hits are likely to occur. It is selected, and "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easier to do.

In this embodiment, in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to the game state, a stop type selection table (not shown) is provided for the normal state and for the time saving state, but other than that. A dedicated table may be provided according to the game state. For example, as a game state, it becomes easier to win a special symbol hit (big hit) (it becomes easier to win than a normal state), and a high probability state (high special symbol). In a gaming machine having a probability change state (probability state, probability change state), a stop type selection table for the probability change state may be provided.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). In 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the ball is in the first entry port 64 in a state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game). Alternatively, it is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is set.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, the small hit type selection table 202f is defined so that three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. ing. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is "0", the small hit type is "small hit A (big hit A when passing V)", and any of "1 to 10". If it is, the small hit type is "small hit B (big hit B when passing V)", and if it is any of "11-99", the small hit type is "small hit C (passing V)". Time jackpot A) ”.

Here, each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C) is executed after the small hit game is completed when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of small hit A, big hit A (15R time saving big hit) is set, and after executing small hit A, a big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then the time saving state is executed. As a result, one time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set. Further, in the case of the small hit B, the big hit B (5R time saving big hit) 5R time saving one big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. It is configured to be executed, and then one time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set as the time-saving state. ing. In the case of the small hit C, the big hit A (15R time saving big hit) is set as in the case of the small hit A, and after the small hit C is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. Is executed, but after the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small hit type, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game ends and the game state set after the big hit game can be different. Specifically, the small hit A is the most advantageous for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (15R) and the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit game is completed. It is set as a small hit, and the small hit B is set to be more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned small hit A because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R), but a time saving state is set after the big hit game. To. The small hit C is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is once (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. With this configuration, if the jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special figure 1) after the jackpot ends. ) Is executed, but the time saving state does not end. Further, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. Therefore, any special symbol (second) during the time saving state can be ended. The special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 23A. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is used in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state and in the state where the time saving state is set. A variation pattern table 202d2 for shortening the working hours is specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different according to the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "off", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation of 7 seconds is specified in association with the range of "140 to 149", and a deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "140 to 149", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "150 to 179". Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other, and super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is associated with a range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and various normal reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds correspond. It is specified by attaching a super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "30 to 189", and various special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds in the range of "190 to 198". Has been done.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range. If a long deviation of 180 seconds is specified and the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 seconds in the entire range. Long off is stipulated.

In this way, any fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured not to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed is performed. The case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is a case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and therefore the normal state. For the fluctuation of the second special symbol in, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second special symbol is illegally drawn in a short period of time. If it is determined that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been executed during the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is illegally executed, the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that is illegally executed is forcibly executed. It may be configured to be created and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds (selection ratio is 7 seconds) when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order. Approximately 70%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 15%), 80 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 10%), and 20 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 5%). .. Also, if the lottery result is a big hit, it will be easier to select in the order of 80 seconds (selection ratio is about 80%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is about 15%), 140 seconds (selection ratio is about 5%). It is stipulated in.

In this way, the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) are related, and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the special It is configured so that the jackpot expectation degree when a specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected can be suggested by the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the symbol is out of order. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected fluctuation time (variation pattern).

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (big hit B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the executed fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player. Therefore, the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even when a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 24, in the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the symbol type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4, and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is specified in the range of "0 to 198", that is, a short deviation of 2 seconds is specified in the entire range, and when the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". A short hit with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the range, that is, the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is "out of", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range. If the fluctuation time is 20 seconds off and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds in the entire range. Is stipulated. If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the number of fluctuations is one or more, and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the fluctuation time is specified as 30 seconds in the entire range and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 160" and the fluctuation time is 10 seconds. Is specified, and a medium / small hit with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in the range of "161 to 198", and when the lottery result is a "big hit", a medium / small hit with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), it returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at that time and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is always constant regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, as the second random number table 202c, there is a low probability time of the normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. Two types may be provided, one for (the period during which the time is shortened). In this case, the number of hit random numbers included in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of winning can be changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state, and if the gaming state is the time saving state, the second symbol is displayed. In the device 83, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the time saving state, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol for 30 seconds.

If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set as a stop symbol (second symbol). The "○" symbol is lit and displayed. Then, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the second symbol is stopped display (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state and If the time is also shortened at the start of the fluctuation of the second symbol, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and the number of times of opening the second entrance 640 may be arbitrarily set.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operation content of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period of the second entrance 640, number of times of opening) are changed according to the set gaming state. When the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the normal state, and further. If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period when the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is also set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts operating, in other cases Compared with, the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It becomes a state. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol are determined. The fluctuation time of the second symbol and the operation content of the electric accessory 640a are set differently, but other configurations may be used, for example, the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol). From the start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, a discriminating means for discriminating that the time saving state is continuously set is provided, and the discriminating result of the discriminating means is used to determine the fluctuation time of the second symbol. And the operation content of the electric accessory 640a may be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute an operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as an operation of the electric accessory 640a, at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation and at the start of the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It is necessary that the time saving state is set at any timing. With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol, which started to fluctuate at the timing when the normal state is set, is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or , Based on a lottery of one second symbol, such as when the second symbol that started to fluctuate at the timing when the time reduction state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time reduction state is set. When the fluctuation of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a straddle a plurality of gaming states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a, which is advantageous to the player, is executed. It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). At the same time, the update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the main control device 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, a random number table 202c per second, and a random number table 202c per second as part of the fixed value data. At least the variation pattern table 202d, the time saving assignment table 202e, the small hit type selection table 202f, and the open scenario table 202g are stored.

Among the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first hit random number table 202, the first hit type selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202f are Since the detailed contents have already been explained, the explanation will be omitted.

The time saving table 202e is a data table that is referred to when a plurality of time saving ending conditions for ending the time saving state are set differently for each winning jackpot type, and the jackpot game ends (ending of the jackpot game). When the period ends), it is referred to (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), and a different number of time reductions (time reduction end condition) is set according to the jackpot type.

Here, the contents specified in the time saving table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 21D. FIG. 21D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving table 202e. In the present embodiment, there are a jackpot type (big hit A, B, D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (big hit C) in which the time saving state is not set (normal state is set) after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 21D, a plurality of time saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

In the present embodiment, the first time saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the second time saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the small hit A is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. It has a third time-saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the small hit B is won, and a fourth time-saving end condition that is satisfied according to the number of times the small hit C is won in the special symbol lottery.

As shown in FIG. 21D, the time saving table 202e defines the values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions, and the values set as the first time saving end condition described above are. The value set in the time reduction medium counter 203k and set as the second time reduction end condition is set in the small hit A counter 203m, and the value set as the third time reduction end condition is set in the small hit B counter 203n and the fourth time reduction end. The value set as the condition is set in the small hit C counter 203p.

Specifically, when the jackpot types are jackpots A and B, the time reduction end conditions are "100" for the time reduction medium counter 203k (first time reduction end condition), "1" for the small hit A counter 203m, and small hit. It is specified that the value of "3" is set in the B counter 203n and the value of "5" is set in the small hit C counter 203p. In the case of the big hit D, the time reduction medium counter 203k (first time reduction end condition) is used as the time reduction end condition. Is set to "100", the small hit A counter 203m is set to "2", the small hit B counter 203n is set to "10", and the small hit C counter 203p is set to "50".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, the jackpot C of the time saving giving table 202e is set for the various counters described above. The value is not specified. In this way, by making the end condition of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each winning jackpot type, even if it is notified in advance that the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, it is concrete. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the content of the time saving, it is possible to play the game with the motivation to play until the end (until the time saving state ends).

In addition to the time saving end state set by using the time saving table 202e, the present embodiment is configured so that the time saving state ends even when a special symbol jackpot is won. Based on this jackpot winning. Since the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not different depending on the set jackpot type, it is omitted from the time saving grant table 202e, but it is satisfied based on the above-mentioned time saving ending condition (the jackpot winning of the special figure). The time saving end condition) may also be configured so as to specify a value in the time saving giving table 202e.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a plurality of time saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-mentioned first time saving end condition to fourth time saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as the time saving end condition. For example, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), or a condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times). The predetermined number of times (for example, the total number of values of the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p) is the predetermined number of times (for example, 10). You may set the time saving end condition that is satisfied when it becomes).

Further, the time saving end condition that is satisfied by another factor may be set without being based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol or the lottery result. For example, the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol or the number of winnings of the ordinary symbol (electric accessory 640a) When the number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number, the time saving end condition is satisfied, or when the number of balls entered into a specific entry opening (for example, general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). The time saving end condition and the like that satisfy the above may be set in advance.

As described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time saving state is configured to end when any of the time saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonous game from being performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, control is used to end the time saving state when any of the time saving ending conditions is satisfied among the plurality of time saving ending conditions. In addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving ending conditions are set to a predetermined number. When (for example, two) are satisfied, the time saving end condition may be satisfied. In this case, a condition arrival determination means for determining the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, a condition arrival determination means for determining whether the number of establishments determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), Is provided, and when it is determined by the condition arrival determination means that the number of establishments has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the time saving end condition that is first satisfied is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating criterion for the condition arrival discriminating means is changed based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. A discriminating reference number variable means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time saving state that is easy to finish and a time saving state that is difficult to finish according to the type of the time saving ending condition that is first satisfied, so that the player is enthusiastic even after the time saving state is set. You can play a game.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period (for example, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times) after the time saving state is set, and a measurement result of the predetermined period measuring means. When a result discriminating means for discriminating is provided and the result discriminating means determines that the present is within a predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the end of the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delay means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period may be provided. In addition, while it is determined by the result determination means that the current time is within the predetermined period, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and the values of various counters set corresponding to each time reduction end condition are updated (subtracted). ) May not be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to surely prevent the situation where the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set, and it is possible to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. Further, as described above, when the process of ending the time saving state based on the satisfaction of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is used, the plurality of time saving ending conditions are set to the priority time saving ending condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol). A time-saving end condition that is satisfied when 100 times are reached) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and the priority time-saving end is set. When the condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated immediately, and when only a plurality of non-priority time saving ending conditions are satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated. By providing the priority time saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with the time saving state excessively.

The opening scenario table 202g is an opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 in the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when a big hit or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. It is a data table that stores open scenarios that are scenarios of various solenoids provided in each winning device), and is set to the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot or the winning small hit. The contents of the opening scenario are stipulated according to the type of small hit.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario table 202g. In the open scenario table 202g schematically shown in FIG. 25, the periods during which the same scenario is set are collectively described, but in reality, the elapsed period from the time when each open scenario is set is described. A measurement counter is provided to measure the number of items, and among the currently set open scenarios, the operation of the specified contents corresponding to the measured value of the measurement counter is configured to be executed. Omit.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario table 202g. The open scenario table 202g is a winning device (variable winning device 65) capable of entering a ball in a privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. , V winning device 650) is defined as operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) ) Can be set differently to set the degree of advantage of the award game in multiple stages, so even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to entertain the player with which type of win was won. it can.

In the opening scenario table 202g, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type). And the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games). The period during which the winning device set to is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change is allowed). )) And the on / off switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are defined. There is.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to the jackpot A, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" for "15 rounds" and one round. As a game, the opening operation mode in which "continuously 29 seconds" is opened is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. .. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, jackpot A is given the privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit to be done.

Next, the hit type corresponds to the jackpots B and C, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" as "5 rounds" as one round game. The opening operation mode for continuously opening "29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed for the player. It will be a big hit game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls will be paid out. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. Since it is configured, the jackpot B is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the winning type is "1 second" as the start interval period, and the "V winning device 650" is opened to the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and the "variable winning device 65" Is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, in the first round, "0.1 seconds open is opened 12 times with an interval between openings of 0.5 seconds", and 2 to In the 15th round, the opening operation mode of "continuously opening for 29 seconds" is "10 seconds" after the end of the first round as the interval period between rounds, "1 second" in other cases, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Is stipulated.

That is, although the details will be described later, the start interval period of the jackpot D, the period until the second round is executed (the content of the first round game (opening / closing operation mode), and the interval between rounds after the end of the first round). The content specified in (Period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small hit game described later. By configuring in this way, whether the hit game being executed this time is a big hit game or a small hit game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small hit game, the small hit game ends). It can be difficult for the player to grasp (until the timing of the game). As a result, it is possible to provide a winning game that is unexpected to a player who has won the small hit and recognized that the small hit game is being executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win a small hit. (See FIG. 20 (c)). Therefore, the time saving state is set as the game state, and during the period in which the change of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some hit game is started after the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won, which hit (big hit or small hit) is won by the player in order to execute the winning game starting from the same opening operation. Can be made difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the big hit is set to be lower than the case of winning the small hit, and after the big hit game corresponding to the big hit D is completed, It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, the player who wins the big hit will not be provided with more disadvantageous benefits than when he wins the small hit, so that the player can play a surprising game (big hit game corresponding to the big hit D). Since it can be a game that is advantageous to the player, the player can be more excited.

In addition, in the case where the big hit D is won and the case where various small hits are won, the same effect mode is executed as the variation display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the display of the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or in the period before and after that stop display timing. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period, the display mode and the display area are changed, and the display mode and the display area are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the stop display timing of the special symbol. It is advisable to switch the symbol of No. 3 from the third symbol to the normal symbol for production corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when the winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged apart from each other, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (at any hit). At the timing of notifying the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display that draws the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, as in the present embodiment. It is preferable to make the display area of 37b smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is harder to see than the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit or a small hit by the stop display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the big hit continues even during the hit game. You can expect to win.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. In addition to the small hit game (1 round game), the content in which the hit type is defined corresponding to the small hits A to C is that the V switch 650e3 detects the ball during the small hit game, so that the small hit game The opening scenario of the jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also specified. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the winning small hit type small hit game content with the large hit game content that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

Specifically, for the small hit type A, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device "1 round" are opened as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval interval period "0.5 seconds (interval interval 1) other than after the 5th and 10th opening ends), 5th and 10th opening ends After that, 5 seconds (interval between openings 2) "is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

Further, for the small hit types B and C, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device are opened once for "1 round" as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval period between openings "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th openings (interval interval 1)", after the 5th and 10th openings "5 seconds (interval between openings 2)" is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

That is, the big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game corresponding to the small hits B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the big hit game corresponding to the small hit A described above. Further, when the small hit type is small hit B, a time saving state is set, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the corresponding big hit game is completed, and in the case of small hit C, after the corresponding big hit game is completed. Since the time saving state is not set, the small hit B is a small hit that is more disadvantageous than the small hit A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the small hit C.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 51) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a jackpot start flag 203c, a jackpot medium flag 203d, and a small hit type storage area 203e. Small hit start flag 203f, small hit medium flag 203g, V passing big hit type storage area 203h, V flag 203i, V passing flag 203j, time saving medium counter 203k, small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter It has 203p, a short fluctuation flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first ball entrance 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired based on the entry into the ball is stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting winning), and the acquired data is the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery of the first special symbol is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to the area.

Then, when the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, the ball enters the second entry port 640 (starting) in a state in which a new special symbol change can be executed. (Winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 is acquired at that timing, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the normal symbol (second symbol), when the ball passes through the normal start port 67 in a state in which a new normal symbol variation can be executed. At that timing, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the normal symbol holding ball execution area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. 3 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S207 in FIG. 38).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S208 of FIG. 38, FIG. 43). See S705). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special figure 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b is changed. The value of the displayed number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The jackpot start flag 203c is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off (S1603 in FIG. 52). The jackpot start flag 203c is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power off is maintained when the power is cut off.

The jackpot middle flag 203d is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to off (S1620 in FIG. 52). This jackpot middle flag 203d is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit type storage area 203e is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set for the winning small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit has been won (S307: Yes in FIG. 39). ), The acquired small hit type is temporarily stored (S311 in FIG. 39). Then, when the number of open V winning devices 650 reaches a predetermined number during the small hit game (S1707: Yes in FIG. 53) and it is determined that the V flag 203i is not set to ON (S1708; No. in FIG. 53). ) Refers to the stored small hit type (S1709 in FIG. 53), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small hit type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (information for indicating the small hit type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.

The small hit start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203f is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S1703 in FIG. 53). This small hit start flag 203f is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to off (S1720 in FIG. 53). This small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure when a power failure occurs. It is configured to be.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h contains data for determining the jackpot type that is set when the ball winning the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when the small hit game is being executed. It is a storage area to be stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h, when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored (FIG. 40). S402). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h. The 203i is configured to be turned on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V-passing large hit type storage area 203h is configured to be cleared. This V-pass jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of small hit game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. The flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether the V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1715: Yes in FIG. 53), it is set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag being set, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1716 in FIG. 53). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The V-passing flag 203j is a flag used to determine the state in which the V-flag 203i is set to ON during the small hit game, and is set to ON when the V-flag 203i is set to ON. Will be done. In the present embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and correspond to the balls that first win the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is set to ON in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 48) (S1207 in FIG. 48).

Then, in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 48), it is determined whether the V-pass flag 203j is set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48), and if it is determined that the V-pass flag 203j is set to ON (S1201: Yes in FIG. 48). ), The processing of S1202 to S1208 among the V-passing processing (see FIG. 48) is skipped. As a result, even if the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small hit game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process executed during the small hit game, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

The time saving medium counter 203k is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until one of the time saving end conditions set in the time saving state is satisfied, and is the ending in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), the value (100) specified in the time saving table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52). ..

Then, the counter value is referred to in the time reduction number update process (S219 in FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) (S601 in FIG. 42), and the counter value is larger than 0. When the determination is made (S601: Yes in FIG. 42), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S604: Yes in FIG. 42), the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S605 in FIG. 42). In this embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and even if any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time reduction end condition based on the number of small hit wins). (Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S505 in FIG. 41). In this way, even when the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition (first time reduction end condition) with reference to the value of the time reduction medium counter 203k is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the time reduction medium counter 203k Since the value is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203k is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The small hit A counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of small hit winnings for which small hit A is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), the value specified in the time saving table 202e ( 1) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small hit small hit that was won this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the type is small hit A (S502: Yes in FIG. 41), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m after the subtraction is 0 (S504: Yes in FIG. 41), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S507 in FIG. 41). .. In this embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and even if any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time reduction end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition (second time reduction end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit A counter 203m is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the small hit A counter Since the value of 203m is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit A counter 203m is continued even though the time saving state is completed. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The small hit B counter 203n is a counter for measuring the number of small hits for which small hit B is set as the small hit type until one of the time reduction end conditions set during the time reduction state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), the value specified in the time saving table 202e ( 3) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small hit small hit that was won this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the type is small hit B (S510: Yes in FIG. 41), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n after the subtraction is 0 (S512: Yes in FIG. 41), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S507 in FIG. 41). .. In this embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and even if any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time reduction end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even when the time reduction end condition other than the time reduction end condition (third time reduction end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit B counter 203n is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the small hit B counter Since the value of 203n is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit B counter 203n is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The small hit C counter 203p is a counter for measuring the number of small hit winnings for which small hit C is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 52), the value specified in the time saving table 202e ( 5) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small hit small hit that was won this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the type is small hit C (S510: No in FIG. 41), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p after subtraction is 0 (S514: Yes in FIG. 41), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state (S515 in FIG. 41). .. In this embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and even if any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time reduction end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). Even if is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even when the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (fourth time saving end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit C counter 203p is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the small hit C counter Since the value of 203p is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit C counter 203p is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds), and when it is set to ON, the normal symbol (second symbol) is set. It indicates that the short variation of the symbol) has been executed. The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q determines that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 45) is in the time saving state (time saving) (S909: Yes in FIG. 45). ), It is set to on when the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set (S911 in FIG. 45), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S913 in FIG. 45). , This is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S915: Yes in FIG. 45) (S916 in FIG. 45).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S916: Yes in FIG. 45), it is determined whether the current state is in the time saving state (time saving in progress) (S918 in FIG. 45). ), When it is determined that the time is being shortened (in the time saving) (S918: Yes in FIG. 45), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (FIG. 45 S919). The short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is set to off after being determined to be set to on in the normal symbol fluctuation process (S106 of FIG. 45) (S917 of FIG. 45).

In this way, when the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and when the electric accessory 640a open operation is set after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) are set. By changing the normal symbol (lottery) that is executed across the time saving state, it is possible to surely prevent the electric accessory 640a from opening for a long time, which is a privilege advantageous to the player (long of the electric accessory 640a). It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided with the opening).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. The large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side, the V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and the switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 composed of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To do.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a state display selection table 222b, a final state display selection table 222c, and other various data necessary for controlling the game. The program etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The counter for selecting the fluctuation pattern is each time it is updated (each time various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed at 1-millisecond intervals in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 are executed). It is a counter composed of a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value, the maximum value (for example, 299) is reached, and then the value returns to 0. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The counter value for selecting the fluctuation pattern may be updated by a process other than the various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 described above. For example, of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113, the period during which the repetitive processing is executed when 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous processing was executed (for example, the processing of S2114 of FIG. 55 is executed). A process for updating the value of the counter may be added during the period from the time until the process of S2115 is executed). With this configuration, in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55), 1 millisecond depends on the period spent for executing a part of the processing (processing of S2102 to S2112 in FIG. 55). The number of times the process of updating the value of the counter for selecting the fluctuation pattern is executed can be made indefinite (random). Therefore, the voice is set based on the content of the display effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by using the variation pattern selection 222a) set by the audio lamp control device 113 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the law of control of the lamp control device 113.

The state display selection table 222b is a display mode of the state display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set as the game state (see the status (state) display mode Dm3a in FIG. 11). It is a data table used when selecting. The state display selection table 222b is used when selecting a state display mode corresponding to a variation display other than a variation in which the time saving state ends (final variation in the time saving state) among the states in which the time saving state is set. ..

This state display selection table 222b shows the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation (the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery of the special symbol and the small hit in the special symbol lottery, and 2 during the small hit (during the small hit game). The degree of expectation that the seed hit is set) and the degree of update of the time saving state (whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, or various elements set as the time saving end condition (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of small hits, etc.) ) Is configured to select a different state display mode based on the update status). Therefore, by grasping the content of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player is made to grasp the situation of the time saving state currently set. be able to.

Here, the contents specified in the state display selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the status display selection table 222b shows the lottery result of the special symbol (win / fail judgment result) and the setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k (determination result of whether or not it is set to ON). , Various state display modes are defined in correspondence with the setting status of the semi-end condition flag 223m (determination result of whether or not it is set to ON) and the value of the state effect counter 223o.

Here, the various flags and counters referred to in the state display selection table 222b will be briefly described. The time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are flags for indicating that the time saving state has elapsed for a predetermined period. It is set to ON when the time saving state has elapsed for a predetermined period. The state display mode can be changed according to the setting status of each flag, that is, according to the elapsed status of the time saving state.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to be turned on based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the ending conditions for ending the time saving state. That is, when the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by executing the change of the special symbol is approaching, and it is possible to give a feeling of tension and play the game in the time saving state. it can. In addition, since various effects can be executed in a continuously set time saving state, the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, when the number of special symbol changes executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON, and the state (situation) display mode Dm3a However, in order to display various display modes to the player as the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a, for example, the number of special symbol changes executed during the time saving state. Is different between the odd-numbered times and the even-numbered times (situation). The display mode Dm3a may be displayed, or a predetermined period (for example, a period from when the special symbol changes 10 times) after the time saving state is set. Only, the state (situation) display mode Dm3a different from other periods may be set.

The semi-end condition flag 223m is turned on based on the number of times a small hit is won (the number of times a small hit is won and operation control is executed for the V winning device 650) among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. It is set to. That is, when a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) are won in a small hit after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it can be suggested to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by winning a small hit is approaching, and it is possible to give a feeling of tension and play the game in the time saving state. In addition, since various effects can be executed in a continuously set time saving state, the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

The state effect counter 223o is a loop counter whose value of "0 to 99" is periodically updated, and is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 at intervals of 1 millisecond. The value is updated by 1 each time the counter update process (S2111 in FIG. 55) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27 (a), the contents specified in the state display selection table 222b will be specifically described. FIG. 27A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27A, the state display selection table 222b is an effect executed in response to the hit / fail determination result, the time saving lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m, and the value of the state effect counter 223o. The state display mode (see FIG. 15 for the content of the specific display mode) is specified.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode "3" is defined, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49", and "3" is defined. The state display mode "1" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Is regulated.

Further, when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode "1" is defined, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and When the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state is displayed in the range of "70 to 79". The mode "1" is defined, and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

That is, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit, the status display selected according to the progress status of the set time saving state (time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m setting status). The mode can be changed. Therefore, various state display modes can be displayed during the time saving state, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, either the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are set to off (the first half period of the time saving state) and either the time saving lower limit flag 223k or the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on. Since the display mode that is easily selected as the state display mode can be different depending on the period (the middle period of the time saving state), the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the third display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. By letting the player grasp the above, it is possible to predict the progress of the time saving state.

Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to off and the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", the state is displayed. Aspect "4" is configured to be set. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, this state display mode "4" is a state display mode for suggesting to the player that a small hit has been won, but in the present embodiment, the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. It is configured to be selected even when there is a certain case, that is, when the winning / failing determination is not a small hit (when the winning / failing determination result is more favorable to the player than the small hit winning). As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player, and it is possible to provide an early and timeless effect.

Next, the winning / failing determination result is small hit A (small hit in which the small hit game that is most likely to hit two of the plurality of small hit types is executed), and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are set. When it is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 79" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Will be done. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49", and "7" is defined. The state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Is regulated.

Next, when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit A, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The state display mode "5" is defined, the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". When both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 79", and "80 to 99". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of ".

Then, the hit / fail determination result is a small hit B or C (a small hit in which a small hit game that is difficult to hit two types among a plurality of small hit types is executed), and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are set. When it is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range where the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69", and the state display mode "6" is defined in the range "70 to 79". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "4" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69", and "4" is defined. The state display mode "2" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit B or C, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49". The state display mode "6" is defined in the range, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and "80". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "~ 99". When both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "2" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49", and "50 to". The state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "69", the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". The flag.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different state display modes are displayed according to the small hit type set for the winning small hit (according to the expected degree per two types during the small hit game to be executed). By grasping the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, the player can predict the timing when the time saving state ends, and also the variable display (dynamic) of the special symbol currently being executed. It is possible to predict the result (display) result (lottery result of special symbol). Therefore, the player can be interested in the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the small hit A is won, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79". If this is the case, the content of the state display selection table 222b is defined so that the state display mode “6” is selected. As shown in FIG. 15, this state display mode “6” is a state display mode in which the characters “large pinch” are displayed to indicate that the time saving state ends based on the small hit winning. By displaying this state display mode "6" even when the small hit A is exceptionally won, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the state display mode "6" is displayed. Since it is possible to increase the possibility of winning two types of small hit games that are executed after the game, the state display mode is based on winning the small hit B or small hit C, which is unlikely to be a two type. Even when "6" is displayed, the player can continue to have expectations for the two types of hits until the small hit game is completed.

When the pass / fail judgment result is incorrect and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49" and the state display mode "1". Is specified, the state display mode "4" is specified in the range of "50 to 69", "3" is specified in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is specified in the range of "80 to 99". Is stipulated. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69", and "1" is defined. The state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Further, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". "6" is defined, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". When both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 79", and "80". The state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "~ 99".

In this way, the semi-end condition flag 223m is turned on when the winning / failing judgment result is incorrect, that is, when the special symbol change in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied based on the small hit winning or the big hit winning is executed. When set to, the state display mode that makes the player think that the small hit is won and the time saving end condition is satisfied is selected. As a result, in the state where the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, that is, in the state where the small hit game is executed a predetermined number of times after the time saving state is set, the game is played while giving the player a sense of crisis. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, a state display mode that makes the player think that he / she has won a small hit than when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off The state display mode "2, 4 to 7") is easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that pseudo-suggests that a small hit has been won unnecessarily when the result of the winning / failing determination is incorrect. Specifically, in the state where the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, it is easy to select an effect mode (state display mode) that makes it seem that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won. In the state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off, it is configured so that it is difficult to select an effect mode (state display mode) that makes it seem that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won. There is.

Since it is configured in this way, it is possible to set the display mode of the state display mode for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations executed during the period when the semi-end condition flag 223 m is set in a series of flows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game executed during the time saving state and reducing the effect of the effect.

Further, the state display mode "9" is selected according to the value of the state effect counter 223o without being based on the hit / fail determination result or the setting status of various flags. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the progress status of the current time saving state. Further, the state display mode "3" is configured to be selected in a part of the case where the pass / fail determination result is incorrect. As a result, when the display mode of the state display mode "3" is displayed on the display screen on the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol being dynamically displayed is either a big hit or a miss. A production that suggests that is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order (other than big hit and small hit) is 1/100 (see FIG. 20C), and further, the value of the state effect counter 223o. Is configured to display the state display mode "3" in the range of "70 to 79", that is, 1/10 of the value of the counter updated in the range of "0 to 99" ( When the second special symbol is drawn, the state display mode "3" is selected with a probability of 1/1000 of the lottery result "out").

Therefore, the state display mode "3" is displayed when most of the jackpots are won, but it may be displayed even when the player wins the prize, so that the player can see the result of the special symbol lottery until the end. It is possible to play a game with a feeling of excitement (until it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of state display modes are provided so that the player can predict the progress status of the current time saving state (the remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol. Although it is configured to be selected, a status display mode that can reliably notify the progress status of the current time saving state (the remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol is selected. It may be configured so that it can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the state display mode is set for each hit / fail determination result based on the progress status of the time saving state (setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m) and the value of the state effect counter 223o. Although it is configured to be selected differently, it may be configured to select the state display mode using other conditions, for example, an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the frame button 22). ), An operation determination means for determining whether or not the player has executed a predetermined operation is provided, and the state display mode is selected differently based on the determination result of the operation determination means. You may. Further, in this case, when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been executed, the progress status of the current time reduction state (the remaining number until each time reduction end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol are displayed. It is preferable to configure the state display mode to be clearly shown so that it can be easily selected. As a result, the player actively operates the operating means, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, every time the effect setting process is executed (every time the variation display of the third symbol is set), the state display is displayed using the state display selection table 222b. The mode is configured to be selected, but for example, a storage means for storing the set state display mode while the time saving state is continuously set is provided, and the contents stored in the storage means are provided. It may be configured to determine the state display mode to be newly set (selected) based on. With this configuration, the state display mode is evenly displayed during the time saving state, and the randomly set state display mode (selected based on the value of the state effect counter 223o) is biased to one side. In some cases, the state display mode set during the remaining time saving state can be intentionally biased to one side.

In addition, the number of times the time saving state is repeatedly set (the number of times the jackpot is won (two types are set) during the time saving state and the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game) and the prize balls acquired during that period. The state display mode selected may be different depending on the number.

Next, the contents of the final state display selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final state display selection table 222c. The final state display selection table 222c is a data table referred to for selecting a state display mode to be displayed in the third display area Ds3 during the time saving state, like the state display selection table 222b described above. This final state display selection table 222c is different from the state display selection table 222b described above, and the variation of the special symbol at which the time saving state ends (when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the number of fluctuations satisfying the time saving end condition). It is referred to when setting the variation display (effect display) for the variation of the special symbol in, or the variation of the special symbol when the number of small hits of the special symbol reaches the number of winnings satisfying the time saving end condition. It is a thing.

The final state display selection table 222c is referred to when it is determined that the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is on (S2905: Yes in FIG. 63) in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) described later (FIG. 63). S2907). The contents defined in the final state display selection table 222c will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). When the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is ". The state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and the state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Is regulated. When the hit / fail determination result is a small hit A, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state display mode is defined in the range of "70 to 89". “5” is defined, and the state display mode “8” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

Further, when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit B or C, the state display mode "6" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69", and the range of "70 to 89". The state display mode "5" is defined in the above, and the state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". When the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the state display mode “8” is defined in the range where the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is “0 to 99”.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state display mode displayed during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set and the final variation display of the special symbol in which the time saving state ends (the time saving state ends). Since it is configured to refer to and select a different data table from the state display mode displayed in (when the time saving state is performed), it is suggested that the time saving state continues as if the time saving state ends. It is possible to surely prevent the state display mode from being displayed.

Further, as described above, the state display mode "8" is configured to be displayed in a part of the case where the jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won after making the player think that the time saving state has ended with the stop display of the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. ..

As described above, the state display mode "8" is always displayed when the player wins the prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and giving a feeling of dissatisfaction with the subsequent game result.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). As shown in FIG. 26B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and an effect counter 223e. Game state storage area 223f, time reduction information update area 223g, provisional hit determination flag 223h, provisional time reduction information update area 223i, provisional time reduction end flag 223j, time reduction lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time reduction pre-end variation flag 223n, state At least an effect counter 223o and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation. In the prize information storage area 223a, prize information based on the prize information command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the prize information related process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2301 in FIG. 57) is executed. The winning information commands that are stored in order from the first area and are transmitted from the main control device 110 are set when the pre-reading process of the main control device 110 (S707 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the main control device 110 is stored. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1501 of FIG. 51) executed in the main process of 110 (see FIG. 51).

Each of the winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is one for each time the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 62) is executed. The shift (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) is performed (see S2806 in FIG. 62). As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In addition, since the winning information (pre-reading information of the special symbol) transmitted by the winning information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the change in the special symbol currently being executed), for example, the winning Based on the reception of the information command, the effect using the period from the start timing of the next special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command (so-called look-ahead continuous) When executing the effect), the prize information corresponding to the prize information command can be retained until the above-mentioned look-ahead continuous effect is completed.

In this embodiment, up to four prize information (information that can be acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be stored and stored, so that the prize information storage area 223a is an execution area. In addition to the above, it is configured to have a first area to a fourth area. For example, winning information that can be acquired when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (winning information related to the second special symbol). ) Is also configured so that up to four can be held and stored, in the winning information storage area 223a, in addition to the execution area, four areas for the first special symbol (holding information area) and four for the second special symbol It may be configured to provide one area (holding information area).

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 56). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203b.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The information included in the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of hold balls, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol hold ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 as the reserved ball number command, it is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. A calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls may be provided based on the information obtained.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2802 in FIG. 62). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2808 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the display stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) (S2810 in FIG. 62).

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 It is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 of the above is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and the values of the counters are configured to be updated without synchronization. There is.

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters having different values to be updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Further, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used for a lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects.

The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify the current game state.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the game state storage area 223f when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like because the data is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the main control device 110 executed after the power is turned on (S1412 in FIG. 50), the game state storage area is immediately after the power is restored. Information indicating the game state that was set before the power was cut off is stored in 223f. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the voice lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state. Further, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set (S509 in FIG. 41, S607 in FIG. 42, S1616 in FIG. 52, etc.). ..

The time saving information update area 223g includes the end condition of the time saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times that the event subject to the end condition (for example, the change of the special symbol, the small hit, the big hit) is executed). It is a data area for storing. The state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (end condition and progress status of the time saving state) stored in the time saving information update area 223a. The time saving information update area 223g is determined to be the end timing of the ending effect by the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the jackpot control process of the main control device 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52) (FIG. In S1612 of 52), when the time saving setting information command set when the ending condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 of FIG. 52) is received, the ending condition for ending the current time saving state is set.

Then, in the time saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), the update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that the special symbol change has been executed, and the small hit are won. When it is determined that the small hit information (small hit information for indicating that the operation has been performed) has been received (S2604: Yes in FIG. 60, S2615: Yes in FIG. 60), the current time saving status is updated corresponding to the received update information. ..

To specifically explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223g, each item that can be the end condition of the time saving information update area 223g (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the second special) The number of fluctuations of the symbol, the total number of fluctuations of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the number of winnings for each small hit type (small hits A to C) (the operation of the V winning device 600) It is formed so that information can be temporarily stored according to the number of times it has started), the number of small hit wins (the total number of wins of each small hit type), etc., and for each item, The time reduction setting information (the number of times the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied) and the update information of each item during the period in which the time reduction state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times actually executed) are stored respectively. It is configured to be.

In the present embodiment, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is used to determine an end condition that is more likely to be satisfied than other end conditions from a plurality of end conditions, and each end condition is satisfied. It is configured to determine the number of remaining executions up to. Further, using the time reduction setting information and the update information stored in the time reduction information update area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time reduction setting information is calculated. The time saving progress may be configured to be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

Further, in the present embodiment, as the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, the update information (information indicating the number of times already executed (number of fluctuations, number of winnings)) is stored. The remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied may be calculated, and the information indicating the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving setting information and the update information are separately stored (stored), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the information stored as the time saving setting information is stored. May be configured to update directly. With this configuration, the capacity of the time saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

The provisional collision detection flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the prize information (the prize information held and stored) before the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed includes the prize information for winning the big hit. It indicates that the winning information that is held and stored by being set to ON includes the winning information that wins the jackpot. The provisional hit determination flag 223h is a prize information related process (executed when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives the prize information command acquired in the look-ahead process (S707 in FIG. 44) of the main control device 110. In (see S2210 of FIG. 57), when it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control device 110 (S2305: Yes in FIG. 57), it is set to ON (S2306 in FIG. 57). ..

Then, when it is referred to in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 57) (S2303 in FIG. 57) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2303: Yes in FIG. 57), various types of winning information commands received thereafter It is configured to skip the discrimination process. It is also referred to in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2903 in FIG. 63). (S2903: Yes in FIG. 63), the process for setting the display state display command indicating the state display mode is skipped.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control device 110 in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 59) (S2504: Yes in FIG. 59). The provisional collision determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506 in FIG. 59).

As explained above, if the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information held and stored at the end of the jackpot includes the winning information to win the jackpot, Whether or not the winning information that wins the jackpot is included in the winning information included in the newly received winning information command after that, and whether or not the currently set end condition of the gaming state is satisfied. It is configured not to perform discrimination. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state will end due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set time saving state will end based on the winning information acquired after that. , It is configured to skip the unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the process of determining the content of the winning information is executed depending on whether a new winning information command is received or the jackpot game is completed, but other timings are used. For example, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 50), each winning information stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is displayed. When the return winning information command for indicating is set and all are configured to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned return winning information command, the above-mentioned winning is won. It may be configured to execute the process of determining the content of the information.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new winning information command is received or when the jackpot game is completed, a process for determining the content of the winning information is always executed, but the present invention is limited to this. If there is no such thing and a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied, the content of the winning information may not be determined. In this case, as predetermined prohibition conditions, for example, the production mode prohibition condition that is satisfied when the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of production modes and one of the production modes is set, or a special symbol A plurality of special symbols change based on the prohibition condition during hamari, which is established when a lottery result other than a jackpot (missing) continues a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), and the jackpot lottery result (win / fail judgment result) included in the winning information. The prohibition condition during continuous production that is established while the continuous production that is executed across the game is being executed, and the predetermined period after the continuous production is completed (for example, the variation of the special symbol is executed twice). It is advisable to establish a condition for prohibiting frequent occurrences, etc. that is established during the period until).

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period during which the effect (so-called look-ahead effect) according to the content determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and a period during which the effect cannot be executed. Even if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the person, the expectation for the big hit can be maintained. In addition, when the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied, the frequency of determining the content of the winning information may be reduced, or when the prohibition condition is not satisfied, the content of the winning information is always displayed. Instead of discriminating, the content of the winning information may be determined more frequently. Further, it is preferable to configure so that the player does not know whether or not the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied.

The temporary time saving information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing the time saving information (temporary time saving information) updated in advance according to the winning information included in the winning information command. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the time saving state ends is determined in advance with reference to the temporary time saving information stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i.

The temporary time saving information update area 223i is used for a time saving related command including time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, a jackpot control process of the main control device 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52), similarly to the time saving information updating area 223g described above. When the end timing of the ending effect is determined (S1612 in FIG. 52) and the time saving setting information command set when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 in FIG. 52) is received (S2602 in FIG. 60: Yes), the end condition (time saving information) for ending the current time saving state is set (S2603 in FIG. 60). Then, in the prize information related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57), the update information corresponding to the received prize information is stored (S2307 in FIG. 57). The temporary time saving end flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the temporary time saving information stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i, and is used as the temporary time saving information when it is set to ON. Based on this, it indicates that the time saving end condition is satisfied. The provisional time reduction end flag 223j satisfies the time reduction end condition when the updated information (temporary time reduction information) of the provisional time reduction information update area 223i in the prize information related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57). It is set to ON when it is determined that the lamp is present (S2309 in FIG. 57).

Then, when it is referred to in the prize information related process (S2210 in FIG. 57) (S2304 in FIG. 57) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304: Yes in FIG. 57), the prize information command received thereafter It is configured to skip various discrimination processes for.

As explained above, if the time saving end condition is satisfied by the winning information included in the received winning information command, the winning information included in the newly received winning information command after that will be a big hit. It is configured so that it does not determine whether or not the winning information to be won is included and whether or not the currently set end condition of the gaming state is satisfied. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state will end due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set time saving state will end based on the winning information acquired after that. , It is configured to skip the unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and is set to ON. , This is to show that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times. The time saving lower limit flag 223k is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (of the first special symbol) among the ending conditions (time saving ending conditions) for ending the time saving state in the time saving update process (S2216 of FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113. The special symbol executed during the time saving state with respect to the end condition (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100) set corresponding to the total number of fluctuations of the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). Is set to ON when it is determined that the number of fluctuations of the above exceeds a predetermined number (70 times) (the number of remaining time reductions until the end of the time reduction state is less than 30 times) (S2608: Yes in FIG. 60). To. Then, it is referred to when the state display mode is selected by using the state display selection table 222b in the effect setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2804 in FIG. 63) (S2906 in FIG. 63). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes in FIG. 60), or in the small hit-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to off (S2613 in FIG. 60, S2708 in FIG. 61).

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to be on according to the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied and configuring the effect mode to be changed according to the setting status of the flag, the player Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect that suggests the end timing of the time saving state.

In the first embodiment, the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, in a state where a time saving state is set, a flag (counter) that can identify the state is provided every time the change of the special symbol is executed 10 times, and the effect mode is set according to the flag (counter). It may be configured to be variable.

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end condition established based on winning a small hit by the special symbol lottery, and is on. By being set to, it is intended to indicate that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times. The quasi-end condition flag 223m is referred to in the small hit-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2703 in FIG. 61), and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (see FIG. 61). In the case of S2703: No in FIG. 61), when it is determined that the semi-end condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 61). Then, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to off (S2707 in FIG. 61).

The time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation before the time saving state ends (the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed, and when it is set to ON, the time saving state ends. It indicates that the previous change is executed. Specifically, when the period (number of fluctuations) until the time-saving end condition set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied is the remaining one among the multiple end conditions of the time-saving state. Set to on. By executing the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) while the variation flag 223n before the end of the time reduction is set to ON, the variation can be determined as the final variation in the time reduction state, and the time reduction state can be determined. It is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the final fluctuation.

This pre-end time variation flag 223n is set to on (S2611 in FIG. 60) when it is determined in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60) that the number of remaining time reductions is one (S2610: Yes in FIG. 60). ). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes in FIG. 60), or in the small hit-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes in FIG. 61), it is set to off (S2614 in FIG. 60, S2709 in FIG. 61). Further, when it is referred to in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) (S2905 in FIG. 63) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2905 in FIG. 63). : Yes), the process using the final status display selection table 222c to set the display status display command indicating the status display mode (process for the final variation of the time saving state) is executed, and it is not set to on (off). When it is determined (S2905: No in FIG. 63), the process using the status display selection table 222b (process for fluctuation other than the final fluctuation in the time saving state) is executed. ..

In the present embodiment, in order to determine that the variation before the end of the time reduction is completed (executed), the variation flag 223n before the end of the time reduction is set, but other than that, for example, , A configuration is provided in which the winning information of the second special symbol can be held and stored, and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 44) is also executed for the winning information held and stored, and the result of the look-ahead processing is shown. It is configured to receive a winning command, and based on the received winning command, it is configured to determine in advance the winning information of the second special symbol to be won a small hit. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when the change before the special symbol change in which the small hit winning that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is executed is executed, the change before the time saving end change flag 223n is turned on. Configuration may be added. As a result, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time reduction end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the change in the special symbol immediately before the time reduction end condition is satisfied.

The state effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lottery used when setting the effect mode of various effects executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and although not shown, the state effect counter 223o of the voice lamp control device 113. It is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. The detailed configuration is omitted because it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above. The value of the state effect counter 223o is referred to when the state display mode is selected by using the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c (see FIG. 63).

In this way, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (hit / fail judgment result, setting status of various flags), the selection is made based on a randomly updated value (value of the state effect counter 223o). By configuring the display modes to be displayed in more detail, the display modes are diversified, and the current gaming state is determined by the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81). It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping (update status of the time saving state).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 56) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed during the normal game state (during the normal state), and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Will be done. Here, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, and if a big hit is won, the normal state is set as a game state after the big hit is completed. It is configured in. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, even if the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs a right-handed game during a normal state (during a normal game), the ball does not enter the second entrance 640. Since it is configured to be (difficult), the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and the player who commits the fraudulent act is not allowed to play an advantageous game. It is a measure for. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to allow the player to perform a lottery (game) more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, there was a risk of cheating and drawing a lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed due to fraudulent acts.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize information of the second special symbol (the prize information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not stored, for example, the time is shortened. The winning information of the second special symbol is reserved and stored in the state (in the state where the electric accessory 640a is easily moved to the protruding position), and the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is based on the reserved winning information. (Fluctuation) is never executed. Thereby, when the normal game is performed, it is possible to surely prevent the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily inserted into the second entrance 640 by the opening operation (protruding operation) of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the second entrance 640. A right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (ball). (By passing through a specific area), the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is set (executed) via the small hit game, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate discomfort to the player who has won the big hit via the small hit game.

In this embodiment, the ball can pass through a specific area during the small hit game depending on the small hit types (small hits A to C) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that small hit games with different characteristics (the possibility that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball) are executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (first special symbol or first special symbol or first special symbol) is set as an end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the time saving state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player (game state more advantageous than the normal state). 2 The number of fluctuations (first time reduction end condition) that is established when the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) As a result, when the number of winnings in the small hit (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small hit winning) reaches the specified number of operations, the operation number end condition (second time reduction end condition) is satisfied. , Is set.

Further, although the details will be described later, the second time saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small hit type (small hit game to be executed) set when the small hit is won. There is.

Then, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per type) before the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition or the second time saving ending condition is satisfied. (Winning), or a small hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and during the small hit game according to the winning small hit (small hit game according to the small hit type), the ball is passed through a specific area to win the big hit. When it is acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the above-mentioned first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) or the second type before acquiring per type or per type 2. When any of the time saving end conditions (end conditions according to the small hit winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way may end the time saving state when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed when the time saving state is set ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of winning the second kind. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in the game (lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time saving state is set and the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the left-handed game is being performed, and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. If the number is (4), the jackpot is won, and in the "first special symbol change (lottery) in the time saving state" that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot is won. Even so, it is possible to suppress the provision of a result that is disadvantageous to the player to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, the flow of the pachinko machine 10 during the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described. 29 (a) to 29 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (f), when the small hit game is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 displays the small hit game effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses from the start of the small hit game, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). Further, the flow path solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated within 17 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small hit game. By detecting the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game is started, the first round game is started and the specific winning opening 65 is opened. Be released.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball can be won by the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball can be detected by the V switch 650e3 only by normally executing the right-handed game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, is configured to end when the second special symbol lottery is performed once, the game can be played without any inconvenience. Can be done. Further, since the time saving state is configured to end when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, for example, the type of the small hit won in the lottery of the second special symbol is identified, and the player If you win a small hit that is disadvantageous to you (for example, a small hit with a small hit type of small hit C), you can prevent the game aiming for the next special symbol lottery without winning the ball to the V winning device 650. can do.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36. FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 of the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to output the data after the address is specified in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 66 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 64).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to be used as the power-on main image shown in FIG. 32 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (displays of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 32 (b). As shown in FIG. 32 (c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and a "○" as shown in FIG. 32 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 32 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", FIG. 32 (c) The image shown in is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by power-on. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 33 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 33B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 33, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 smoothly displays the image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the range between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 33A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33B, the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but in doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from position b'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 31) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to D. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be more likely to be done, and the normal symbol will be hit. There will be more opportunities. Therefore, since there are many chances that the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit of the special symbol, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball enters the second ball. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit with a special pattern without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, the player notifies that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery will be a big hit of the special symbol, so that the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame are defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when superimposing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, either the back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage") is displayed, or the back is different from the backs A and B. It contains information that specifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image of the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, in the example of FIG. 35). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table can be displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 64) (see S4005 in FIG. 64). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4305 in FIG. 66 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 66B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 66B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 66 (b) see S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 79 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 79 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 66 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 78) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 36) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 36, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating a drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 66 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6007 in FIG. 76). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 80). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 80). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 66B) is executed, it is performed (see S6602 of FIG. 81).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 53. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (999, 99, 99, 239, 99, respectively in this embodiment) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process associated with the winning of the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S109). The details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpot includes a period in which the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed to indicate the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). The period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during the jackpot game (round game period), the round game period ends, and then the lottery (variation) of a new special symbol is started. The grace period (ending period) up to is included.

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is being hit, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hit flag 203d is set to ON. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is set to on) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot hit flag 203d is not set on (set to off) (S201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b It is determined whether or not the display mode is changing (S202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not changing (S202: No), the game ball goes to the second entrance 640. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered (S203).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S203: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is not a big hit and the special symbol is not changing, the ball is entered into the second entrance 640. When the ball enters, that is, when the second special symbol fluctuation (lottery) start condition is satisfied, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 Each value of is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S204).

Next, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S210), and end this process. The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second entry port 640 (S203: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is 0 (S206: No), the reserved balls of the first special symbol for which the fluctuation (lottery) is started are secured at the present time. Since there is no state, this process for executing the special symbol change is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not 0 (S206: Yes), that is, the reserved balls of the first special symbol for starting the fluctuation (lottery) are secured. For example, a hold ball number command (Special Figure 1) that subtracts the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203b (S207) and indicates the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203b changed by the calculation. Hold ball count command) is set (S208). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S211). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S211: No), that is, if the present is during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S211 if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S211: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set. (S212). The stop display is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S210) described later with reference to FIG. 39. Although detailed description will be omitted, in the present embodiment, the stop display set in the process of S212 is displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop symbol continuously for a predetermined period of time in this way, unlike the case where the changing symbol is displayed for a moment, the first stop display is surely displayed to the player. The contents of the design can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, 0.5 seconds is set as a predetermined period (fixed period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above, but other configurations may be used, for example, the first symbol If a blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erasing state is performed to indicate that the state is fluctuating, it is longer than one lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) when the blinking display is performed. The period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, the player can easily determine whether the first symbol is changing or stopped (determined).

After the processing of S212 is completed, when the variation display of the special symbol being executed is started in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation start processing (see S210 in FIG. 39) is performed. It is determined whether the lottery result of the symbol (the result of this determination) is a big hit of the special symbol (S213). If it is determined that the result of this lottery is a big hit of a special symbol (S213: Yes), the specific winning opening (variable winning device) 65 is based on the big hit type (the big hit type set when the big hit is won). The opening scenario of (S214) is set, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot middle flag 203d are set to ON (S216), the time saving / medium counter 203k is set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, as described in the process of S217, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the change of the special symbol is completed (the final display of the first symbol is completed), and then the jackpot is completed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing until the game starts. It should be noted that the timing for ending the time saving state based on winning the jackpot of the special symbol may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol (first symbol) In addition to after the confirmation display of, for example, the time saving state may be ended at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol won by the jackpot, or the time reduction at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the confirmation display is started). You may end the state. In addition, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period after the jackpot game is started (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened). However, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (the timing for establishing the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the special symbol jackpot is won) is set from among the plurality of timings described above. Only one may be configured to be set in advance, or the time saving state may be configured to end at different timings depending on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

With this configuration, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the special symbol changes, the time saving state ends for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes is the specified number of times (for example). It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the normal state has been set after reaching (100 times), or whether the time saving state has ended by winning a big hit during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the effect display (variation display) of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied for each of multiple jackpot types (the timing at which the time saving state ends when the jackpot is won) to be different, the special symbol can be created based on the ending timing of the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (discrimination result). In addition, when the player identifies the timing when the time saving state ends as a part of the timing when the time saving end condition set for each of a plurality of jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol is obtained. A timing that can notify the player that it is a big hit, that is, a time saving end timing dedicated to the big hit that the time saving state ends only when the time saving ending condition that is satisfied by winning the big hit may be provided.

With this configuration, by grasping the timing when the time saving state ends, it is possible to know quickly that the jackpot has been won, and it is possible to prolong the period of immersion in the sense of superiority. In addition, in order to achieve such an effect, the above-mentioned time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot should be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from the execution of the special symbol fluctuation to the end of the special symbol fluctuation. It is good to configure.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), the time reduction number update process for updating the time reduction number is executed (S219), and then the current lottery result is executed. Is a small hit or not (S220). The detailed description of the time saving number update process (S219) described above will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but in this processing, among the plurality of time saving end conditions set, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special symbol) The process of updating the information for the variable number end condition that can be established based on the lottery number) is executed.

In the process of S220, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S220: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S221), the above-mentioned process of S218 is executed, and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S220: No), the small hit start setting process (S221) is skipped, the process of S218 is executed, and this process is performed. finish.

As described above, in the special symbol variation processing (S104 of FIG. 38) of the present embodiment, priority is given to whether or not the lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (first), and the second It is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the special symbol is satisfied (process of S203 in FIG. 38). This is variable when the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, does not have a hold storage means for holding and storing the winning information, and the time saving state is set as the game state (variation). (Easy), and when the normal state is set, the second special symbol, which is immutable (difficult to change), is configured to be a special symbol that is more difficult to change (lottery) than the first special symbol. This is because it has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by any chance, the lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition of the second special symbol are simultaneously (timer interrupt processing of the main control device 110 (FIG. 37). If the processing period (including an error of 2 milliseconds) is satisfied, the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol will be started with priority over the second special symbol, which is difficult to execute. This will cause discomfort to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is easier to win the lottery result which is advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (easy to win a small hit). Since the lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition of the second special symbol are simultaneously (see the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37)). If the processing period (including an error of 2 milliseconds) is established, the fluctuation of the first special symbol will be started prior to the second special symbol, which is difficult to execute (lottery). There was a problem of giving discomfort.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the process of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the value added to the player is high (the winning probability of the small hit is the first special symbol). Because it is configured to prioritize (first) the lottery (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this embodiment), which is higher than the above and the lottery (variation) is difficult to actually execute). , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a process for updating the time reduction number, a small hit is won after executing a process related to the variation number end condition (time reduction number update process (S219)) that is satisfied according to the change number of the special symbol. It is configured to execute the process (small hit start setting process (S221)) related to the winning count end condition that is satisfied according to the above. With this configuration, when a lottery result is obtained that satisfies the variation number end condition and the winning number end condition in one special symbol variation (lottery), the variation number end condition comes first. , And the time saving state ends based on the condition for ending the number of fluctuations.

In this way, by configuring so as to determine whether or not each time saving end condition is satisfied in a predetermined order for a plurality of set time saving end conditions, a special symbol variation in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are the same ( Even if it can be reached in the lottery), the time saving state can be terminated regularly.

It should be noted that, for example, when the above-mentioned configuration is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated after the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is satisfied, and when the winning count end condition is satisfied, the value is small. By using the pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time saving state after the winning game is completed, the end timing of the time saving state can be changed according to the time saving ending condition to be established.

Specifically, for example, when the small hit B is won and the winning number end condition is independently satisfied, the time saving state ends after the small hit game corresponding to the small hit B is completed. On the other hand, if the small hit B is won in the lottery (variation) of the special symbol that satisfies the variable number end condition, the variable number end condition is satisfied with priority and the small hit game corresponding to the small hit B starts. The time saving state ends before the special symbol (first symbol) indicating the lottery result (small hit B) of the special symbol is confirmed.

In the above example, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, even if the time saving state ends based on the lottery (variation) of the special symbol won in the small hit B, the time saving end is established. Since the timing for ending the time saving state (whether or not there is a time saving during the small hit game) can be changed and set according to the conditions, the length of the period advantageous to the player can be established according to the time saving ending condition. Can be different. Thereby, it is possible to set the time saving end condition which is advantageous for the player and the time saving ending condition which is disadvantageous. Therefore, in addition to the game in which the player is expected not to satisfy the time saving end condition, it is possible to provide a new game property in which the player is expected to satisfy the time saving establishment condition as advantageous as possible.

It should be noted that, for a game machine having the above-described configuration, for example, even during a small hit game, when the electric accessory 640a is opened (long open), the ball can be entered (easily). A second entry opening 640 is provided above the specific winning opening (V winning device 650) opened in the small hit game so that the ball can be entered into the entry opening 640), and the second entry opening 640 is provided during the small hit game. 2 It is preferable to configure the ball to enter the ball into the ball entry port 640.

Further, the type of small hit in which the small hit game is executed for which the period of the small hit game (the period in which the V winning device 650 is open (1.8S) and the period in which the V winning device 650 is closed) is long (for example, 60 seconds) is specified. It is configured to be configurable and is provided to the player when the V winning device 650 is won, rather than the number of prize balls (for example, 5) provided to the player when the ball is entered into the second entrance. By configuring so that the number of prize balls (for example, 3) is smaller, the game result (the number of balls acquired by the game) can be greatly different depending on whether or not there is a time saving state during the small hit game. .. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by providing a technique for differentiating the end timing of the shortened time as described above, it is possible to provide the player with a more entertaining game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start processing (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S210). This special symbol variation start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is the execution of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol miss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37a , 37b, and the process for determining the effect pattern (variation time) of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is acquired (S301). Next, the lottery result is based on the first random number table 202a (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (first special symbol or second special symbol). (S302). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22 (b)). If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry port 640, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined by comparing the random number values stored in And the random number values stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 22C) are compared to determine whether the jackpot or the small hit is a big hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S303). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S303: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the first hit type selection table 202b corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. It is determined what type of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to D) of the four types of special symbols (see FIGS. 23 (b) or 23 (c)).

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same discrimination value determined to be a jackpot, but the discrimination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so an illegal game aiming at the same random number value is performed. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being executed in a biased manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers determined to be jackpots is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not limited to this. The number of random numbers determined to be jackpots may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol type) and the jackpot type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to D). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S314. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the acquired special symbol type, lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24).

In the process of S314, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S306 is set (S314). Next, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 is set (S315). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are stored in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later, in which the voice lamp control device is used. It is transmitted toward 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S315 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S303: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S307). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table 202f (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202f, and the small hit (small hit) of three types of special symbols is compared. Of A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 22).

Next, the display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S309). After that, the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24).

Next, the small hit type acquired in the process of S308 is stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (S311), and then the above-mentioned processes of S314 and S315 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). .. In this embodiment, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, so it is necessary to refer to the special symbol type in S308 and S309. However, for example, if it is configured to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol, in the processing of S308 and S309, the small hit type is acquired with reference to the special symbol type, and the small hit is obtained. It may be configured to set the display mode.

In the processing of S314 and S315 in this case, the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see S310) and the stop type (see S309) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Is set.

When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the type of the special symbol is set (S312). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of off is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S313). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24). Next, the above-described processes S314 and S315 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

Next, the small hit start setting process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S221). This small hit start setting process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). Based on the above, the start of the small hit game is set, and the process for updating the time saving information according to the winning small hit (update process for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hit game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is in a specific area (V). By passing through the winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big hit game is executed (set) after the small hit game is completed.

That is, the game state in which the small hit game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, different small hit games are executed according to the small hit types (small hits A to C) set when the small hit is won. , The possibility that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game is different depending on each small hit type.

With this configuration, the possibility (expectation) of the big hit game (per 2 types) being executed (set) can be changed depending on the small hit game to be executed, so that the player can get a small hit. It is possible to improve the interest of the game because it is possible to make people interested not only in whether or not they win the prize but also in the type of small hit that they win.

When the small hit start setting process (S221) is executed, first, the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S401). After that, the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202f, the V-passing big hit type (the big hit game set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game) is determined. To do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A (15 rounds with short time, big hit), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (5 rounds with short time, big hit). If the small hit type is C, it is determined that it is a big hit A (5-round time saving big hit) (see FIG. 22). That is, in the present embodiment, the content of the jackpot game (per 2 types) set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, and the jackpot (per 1 type) by lottery of special symbols. ) Is executed when the same jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game is executed, and when two types of hits are acquired (when a ball passes through a specific area), one type is set. The jackpot type (big hit A or B) is configured to be set according to the type of small hit executed.

In this way, when two types of hits are acquired, the jackpot type is set and the process of starting the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type is executed, so that one type is won and two types are won. The processing related to the big hit game can be shared between the case where the hit is acquired and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, a jackpot game that can be executed may be configured to be configurable only when one type is won or only when two types are won. It may be configured to execute different jackpot game processing for hit and hit type 2.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S402, the start of the small hit is set (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set on (S404). After that, the time saving update process for small hits is executed (S405), and this process is terminated. This small hit time saving update process (S405) is a process for updating the time saving information corresponding to the winning number of times end condition, which is the end condition of the time saving state that can be established when the small hit is won, and the time saving information is updated. When the winning count end condition is satisfied, the process for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state is executed, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. To do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the small hit time saving update process (S405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit time saving update process (S405). This small hit time saving update process (S405) is a process executed in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). Yes, it is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small hit, and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the small hit time saving update process (S405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0 (S501). That is, it is determined whether the current time is shortened. In the process of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is not larger than 0 (0) (S501: No), it means that the player has won a small hit in a gaming state other than the time saving state. This process is skipped in order to update the time saving information, and this process is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that the small hit is not won except in the state where the time saving state is set (so that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is not executed), S501 When it is determined that the time saving state is not set in the process of, an error command for executing an error notification (abnormal notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, the time saving state is set (S501: Yes), then the small hit won this time It is determined whether or not the small hit type of is "small hit A" (S502). Here, in the process of S502, in the process of S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read out and the determination is executed.

In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the small hit type this time is "small hit A" (S502: Yes), the value of the small hit A counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S503), and the small hit A after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether the value of the counter 203m is 0 (S504), and if it is determined to be 0 (S504: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit A) is obtained in this small hit winning. ) Is satisfied, so the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203k, which was measuring the period until the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, is set to 0 (S505), and various winning count end conditions are measured. Each value of the hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p is set to 0 (S506), and the normal state is set as the gaming state (S507).

By executing the above-mentioned processes S505 to S507, when one of the plurality of set time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the period until the other time-saving end conditions are satisfied is measured. Since each counter value can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving information can be updated after the time saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state). It is possible to reliably prevent the processing (processing for updating the values of the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, the small hit C counter 203p, and the time saving medium counter 203k) from being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary processing, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time reduction information corresponding to each of the plurality of time reduction end conditions are set to 0 (). Since it is only configured to be set to (a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied), it is necessary to determine which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended in the previous time saving state after the time saving state was completed. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the time-saving end condition that has been satisfied may be provided so that the type and the number of times the time-saving end condition that has been satisfied in the past can be determined.

With this configuration, for example, the time saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishments, and is established by the player based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) an easy time saving end condition. Further, the update status of the time reduction information corresponding to the other time reduction end conditions when the time reduction end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, the small hit A counter 203 m and the small hit B when the value of the time reduction medium counter 203k becomes 0). The counter 203n and the small hit C counter 203p) are storably configured, and the most difficult time-saving end condition, that is, the largest of the plurality of time-saving end conditions when one time-saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to determine the time saving end condition having the time saving information of the value.

When the processing of S507 is completed, next, the remaining time reduction command corresponding to the value of each subtracted small hit counter is set (S508), the state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S509), and this processing is performed. To finish. Here, the commands set in S508 and S509 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is stored in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving number command, and sets a state display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (the period until the time saving state ends). In addition, the current game state is grasped based on the received state command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S504, when it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m is not 0 (S504: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so S505 for ending the time saving state. ~ The process of S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S508.

The description will be continued by returning to the process of S502 described above. In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit A" ("small hit B" or "small hit C") (S502: No), the next In addition, it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit won this time is "small hit B" (S510), and if it is determined to be "small hit B" (S510: Yes), the small hit B counter 203n The value of is subtracted by 1 (S511), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted small hit B counter 203n is 0 (S512).

If it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is 0 in the processing of S512 (S512: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit B) is satisfied in this small hit winning. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S505 described above, and the process for ending the time saving state is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S512, when it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is not 0 (1 or more) (S512: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so that the time saving state is not completed. The process of S505 to S507 for terminating the above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S508.

In the processing of S510, when it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit B", that is, "small hit C" (S510: No), the value of the small hit C counter 223p. Is subtracted by 1 (S513), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit C counter 223p after the subtraction is 0 (S514).

If it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 223p is 0 in the processing of S514 (S514: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit C) is satisfied in this small hit winning. Since this is the case, S515 to S517, which execute the same processing as S505 to S507 described above, are executed, and the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, in the processing of S514, when it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p is not 0 (1 or more) (S514: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so the time saving state is not completed. The process of S515 to S517 for terminating the state is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S508.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol won in the small hit has elapsed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small hit winning is subtracted, and the time saving is completed based on the small hit winning. It is configured to determine whether or not the condition (condition for ending the number of winnings) is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to end the time saving state according to the winning number end condition before the small hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large difference in the timing of ending the time saving state regardless of whether the time saving ending condition of the variation number ending condition or the winning number ending condition is satisfied.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, when the variation number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the variation number of the special symbol is satisfied, the definite display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing of ending, and if the winning number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of winnings in the small hit in the special symbol lottery is satisfied, the special symbol is satisfied. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start setting timing of the small hit game after the confirmation display of (first symbol).

That is, regardless of which of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is configured to end immediately after the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to know which time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state set this time is finished. In order for the player to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. For example, by setting the time saving state to end at the time of setting the small hit start (immediately before the small hit game is started) as in the present embodiment, the time saving state is set immediately after the small hit game is started. It can be difficult to determine whether or not it has finished.

In addition, in this embodiment, when any of the end conditions of the variable number end condition and the winning number end condition is satisfied among the plurality of time reduction end conditions, the timing is substantially the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to discriminate). It is configured to end the time saving state by (concept including time difference), but other configurations may be used. For example, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, a special symbol (first symbol) is determined. The time saving state may be terminated immediately after the display, and if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated after the small hit game executed after the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is completed. .. With this configuration, the time can be shortened during the period during which the small hit game is being executed.

Therefore, during the small hit game, the player cannot determine whether or not the time saving state has ended due to this small hit winning, and until the small hit game ends (whether or not two types of hits have been won). Until the game result is notified), it can be difficult to tell whether or not the time saving state has ended. Further, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of acquiring two types of hits during the small hit game, the player is notified whether or not the time saving state is completed after the small hit game is completed. Isn't this small hit game based on the small hit winning that ends the time saving state by configuring in? Since the game is played while predicting that, it is possible to always enthusiastically aim for two types of small hit games that are executed during the time saving state.

Next, the time saving number update process (S219) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S219). This time reduction number update process (S219) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), updates the time reduction number of times, and sets the game state to the normal state. This is the process for setting to.

In the time reduction number update process (S219), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, whether the current time reduction is in progress (S601). In the process of S601, when the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the time reduction is not in progress (S601: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (S601: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603. To do.

In the process of S603, a command for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203k changed (subtracted by 1) by the calculation is set (S603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described later, the voice lamp control device. It is transmitted toward 113.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0 (S604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S605), the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p. Is set to 0 (S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the time saving end condition (variation number ending condition) that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied is determined by the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42). Whether or not the time saving end condition (winning number ending condition) that is satisfied based on the number of times the small hit of the special symbol is won is satisfied is determined by the time saving update process for small hits (see FIG. 41). .. Then, in any of the processing, when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions are set. All are configured to be set to a value (0) indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the processing contents for ending the time saving state can be unified.

In this embodiment, in order to indicate the update status of the time reduction information corresponding to each time reduction end condition, a value indicating each time reduction end condition is set in various counters at the timing when the time reduction state is set, and each time reduction end condition is set. When the time saving information corresponding to the condition is determined, the values of various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. In addition to this, when the time saving state is set, the values of various counters are set to 0, and when the corresponding time saving information is determined, the counter value is added by 1, and the value of the counter after the addition is the time saving end condition. It may be configured to end the time saving state when it is determined that the value indicates. That is, the means for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving information (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of small hits, etc.) corresponding to various time saving end conditions are updated in the state where the time saving state is set. Any configuration may be provided with an update means.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the time saving end conditions, the end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of each small hit type reaches a predetermined number is used as the winning number end condition. , The total number of times each small hit type is set, that is, the winning number end condition corresponding to the total number of small hits won during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set may be set. You may set the winning count end condition that is established when the total number of times that the number of times that the hit B is set and the number of times that the small hit C is set reaches a predetermined number of times.

In this case, the number of winnings (the number of times the small hit B ends (for example, 3 times)) and the number of times the winning number ending condition corresponding only to the small hit C is satisfied (the number of winnings) Of course, the total number of small hits C ends (for example, 5 times) is less than the sum of the small hit B end times and the small hit C end times, and the small hit B end times and small hits. It is preferable to set less than a large value (5 times in the case of this example) among the number of times of C end per hit. As a result, for the small hit type set when a small hit is won during the time saving state, the end timing of the time saving state cannot be predicted unless the time saving situation is grasped in a complex manner. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning, winning ball) in the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64. Then, when it is determined that a prize has been won, that is, when a ball is detected by a ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first entry slot 64 (S701: Yes), various random number counters. Is a process for acquiring and executing the hold process for that value.

When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64 (starting winning, winning) (S701). .. Here, whether or not the state in which the ball is detected is continued over three timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed by the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64. Is configured to determine the winning (winning) of the ball to the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64. In this way, it is determined that the ball has won (winned) only when it is determined that the ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period (the period during which the timer interrupt process is executed three times (4 milliseconds)). For example, even if a small amount of electricity generated by the flow of a sphere becomes noise and the sensor (ball entry detection switch) is momentarily turned on (a state in which the passage of a sphere is detected), that It is possible to classify the event generated by noise (momentary on) and the event generated by the passage of the sphere (on that continues for a predetermined period) and execute the process.

When the control for determining that the ball has entered is used when the ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period, the period for determining that the ball has been detected is less than the predetermined period (as described above). In addition to (instantaneous detection by noise), it is preferable to determine that an abnormality has occurred even when the upper limit period longer than a predetermined period is exceeded, and not to determine that the ball has won a prize (winning ball). As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning (winning) of the ball from malfunctioning even if noise is generated for a long period of time due to an illegal operation.

Then, when it is determined that the ball has won (winned) the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N1) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (3 or less) (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 Add the value (N1) of the reserved ball counter 203b by 1 (S704), and indicate the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b changed by the calculation (special figure 1 reserved ball command). Is set (S705).

The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 51) described later. In the external output process (S1501), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) described above, Each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Then, in the process of S707, the look-ahead process is executed (S707). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning (ball winning) in the first winning opening (ball entry) 64 (S701: No), or when it is determined that there is no winning (ball winning) in the first winning opening (ball entry) 64 (ball winning). Even if it is determined that there is (S701: Yes), if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not less than 4 (4) (S703: No), S707. Move to the look-ahead processing.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the winning information (right to execute the lottery) of the first special symbol is configured to be held and stored up to a predetermined number (4), and the winning information of the second special symbol is stored. Although it is configured so that it cannot be held and stored, a configuration may be used in which both the winning information of the first special symbol and the winning information of the second special symbol can be held and stored up to a predetermined number. In this case, the process described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be configured to be executed for the winning information of the second special symbol (second winning opening (entry opening) 640).

Further, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a configuration in which the winning information can be reserved and stored, the upper limit number of the winning information for each special symbol that can be reserved and stored is unified (for example, 4). Alternatively, different values may be set as the upper limit number (for example, 4 for the first special symbol and 2 for the second special symbol). Further, it is configured to set the upper limit of the number of reserved balls that can be reserved for the total value of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a look-ahead process (S707), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S707).

In this look-ahead process (S707 in FIG. 44), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball winning) in the first winning opening (ball entry opening) 64 (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first winning opening (entry opening) 64 (S801: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the variable pattern table 202d The lottery result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance based on (normal variation pattern table 202d1 or time saving variation pattern table 202d2) (S802).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S802 is set (S803), and this process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 57) described later, sets the display mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81, and sets the display mode. Performs a process to (tentatively) update the progress of the time saving state in advance. Then, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 are displayed at the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accompanying electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 of FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S901). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during the process. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S901: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S902) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol is changing) (S902: No), that is, even if the current symbol is hit, the normal symbol is changed. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, a state in which a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be started (executed), the second hit random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area. Is determined (S903).

In the process of S903, when it is determined that the second hit random number counter is not stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area, that is, when it is determined that the winning information of the normal symbol to be newly executed does not exist. (S903: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S903: Yes), the value of the stored second hit random number counter C4 is acquired (S904). ..

Then, based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S904 and the random number table 202c per normal symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S905). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal design is off.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S905 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S906), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S906: Yes), the hit time The display mode of S907 is set (S907), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S907, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S906, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (S906: No), the display mode at the time of the off is set (S908), and the process proceeds to the process of S909. In the process of S908, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S909.

When the processing of S907 or S908 is completed, in the processing of S909, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S909), and when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S909). S909: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S910), then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S911), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (normal state) (S909: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S912), this process is terminated.

In addition, the normal figure short fluctuation flag 202q set to be turned on in the process of S911 is a configuration for temporarily storing whether or not the game state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is the time saving state. Therefore, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and is referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. As a result, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a can be changed according to which gaming state the normal symbol variation (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a are.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the change (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored by using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the game state storage means that can always memorize the currently set game state, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is determined. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. By doing so, the game state at the timing when the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed may be determined. That is, the configuration may be such that a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S902: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S913). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S910 or the process of S911 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S913 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S913: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S913, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S913: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S914). In the process of S914, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S907, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S908, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing is lit. It is configured to be (confirmed display). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S914, the change in the second symbol display device 83 when the second symbol display update process (S1508 of FIG. 51) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next. When the display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of S907 or S908.

After the processing of S914 is completed, the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 45 and S106) when the variation display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started (this time). The lottery result) is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol (S915). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S915: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S915: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is set to ON (S916).

In the process of S916, when it is determined that the short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is not set on (set to off), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is When it is determined to be in the normal state (S916: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S921), and the process proceeds to S920. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S916, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time saving state. If this is the case (S916: Yes), the short fluctuation flag 203q of the normal figure is set to off (S917), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time saving) (S918).

In the process of S918, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S918: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state (S918: No). Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1. It is set to times (S921), and the process proceeds to S920.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S918: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). (Timing to set) is both in a short time state, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory 640a). (S919), and the process proceeds to S920.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol is set are set. Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions under which the opening operation that is advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (30 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 640a. There is nothing. Similarly, in the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winning is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 640a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 640a).

Further, since it is possible to suppress the long opening of the electric accessory 640a in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set is determined, and the game state set at each timing is set. The above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the above configuration, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set are in the normal state (S921 in FIG. 45). (Opening operation set in S919) may be set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S919 in FIG. 45) may be set in other states. With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed during the period before and after the time saving state, which is the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that the time saving state ends when the jackpot game is executed, the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time saving state is continuously set unless the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit game is executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time in the small hit game, and balls to a plurality of winning openings (V winning opening 650a, second winning opening 640) are opened. It will be a specific period that makes it easier to enter the ball.

Using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a and a second entrance ball opening 640 are arranged in the information of the V winning device 650, and a small hit game is in progress. It is preferable to configure the ball to enter the two winning openings (V winning device 650a, second winning opening 640), whereby the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the small hit game can be increased. , It becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Return to FIG. 45 and continue the description. In the process of S920, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is set (S920), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S920, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1506) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S921 or the process of S919 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), determines whether or not the ball has passed at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 46 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1001). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (S101). Since the content of this detection is the same as the process of S701 of the start winning process (see FIG. 43) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, it is determined that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1001: Yes), and it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is undergoing normal symbol variation (S1002). 2 When it is determined that the display mode of the symbol display device 83 is changing the normal symbol (S1002: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not during the normal symbol change (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently being hit (S1002: No). S1003). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol is hit (S1003: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S1003: No), it is the timing when a new normal symbol change (execution) can be drawn, so it was updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (S101) described above. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S1004). After that, this process ends.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V inlet passing process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passing sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1101). If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is not on (S1101: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is on (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1102).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1102: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1103), and this process is terminated. The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is not open (S1102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is issued. Set (S1104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1105), and this process ends.

Next, the V-passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V-passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V-pass processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V-pass flag 203j is on (S1201). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the V passage flag 203j is ON (S1201: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the V passage flag 203j is not on (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the V has not passed (S1202: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that V passage is present (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage is in the valid period (S1203). If it is determined that the V-passing valid period is in progress (S1203: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1204), and the acquired V-passing jackpot type is acquired. The V flag 203i indicating the above is set to on (S1205). Then, the V passage command is set (S1206).

Next, the V passage flag 203j is set to ON (S1207). After that, the time saving and medium counter 203k is set to 0 (S1208), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S1203: No), an error command is set (S1209), and this process is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when the V passage is not valid, it is considered that the ball is illegally won by the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1209, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1301) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting accompanying the power-on is executed (S1401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1402). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1403).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1404), and if it is turned on (S1404: Yes), the process shifts to S1415. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405), and if it is not stored (S1405: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S1415 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1406), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1407: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1415 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1515 in FIG. 51, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S1415, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1415). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1416, S1417) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1416, S1417) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1405: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1407: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1408). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1410, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is read (S1411), and a state command based on the read value is set (S1412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S1413). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1414), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1501 to S1508 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1511 and S1512 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 51), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1501). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the special figure 1 reserved ball count command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 39) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing (S1501), the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command (S1602), the round number command (S1607), and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1611). In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 (S1502) is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1503), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed. Or, a jackpot control process for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1504). .. In the jackpot control process (S1504), the winning openings (specific winning openings 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning openings 650a of the V winning device 650) corresponding to each round of the jackpot state are opened, and the corresponding winning openings ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of a small hit state of a special symbol, various effects are executed according to the small hit, and the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of the V winning device 650). A small hit control process for opening or closing 650a) is executed (S1505). In the small hit control process (S1505), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1506). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S920 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S919 or the processing of S921 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S1507). In the first symbol display update process (S1507), when a variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. 1 Start with the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process (see FIG. 51) is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) is completed, the first symbol is displayed. The variation display executed by the symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is terminated, and the stop symbol is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S305, S309 or S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). (1st symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the 1st symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1508). In the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 changes. Start displaying. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S914 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 The stopped symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S907 or the processing of S908 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45) after ending the executed variation display. Stop display (lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1510). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1510: Yes), the process is shifted to S1501 and each process after S1501 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1510: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1511, S1512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1502 (S1512).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1501 to S1508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time (S1511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter are repeatedly executed. CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1509, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 49 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1513 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1513), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1514). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1515), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1516), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1509 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1501 to S1508, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1511 and S1512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1501 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1401) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1501 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1504). This jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the corresponding winning opening This is a process for opening or closing (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504), first, it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S1601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203c. The jackpot start flag 203c is set to on when the jackpot start is set by the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (S216). In the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is (when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is on) (S1601: Yes), the opening command is set (S1602), and then the jackpot start flag is set. 203c is set to off (S1603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to off) (S1601: No), then the jackpot is currently in progress. (S1604). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the period in which the above-mentioned jackpot middle flag 203d is set to ON. In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is off) (S1604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is set to on) (S1604: Yes), various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot. The determination process (S1605 to S1612) for determining whether it is the timing to execute the above is executed.

In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the present is a big hit (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether the present is the start timing of a new round (S1605). In the process of S1605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. When it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) is based on the open scenario table 202g. The V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1607). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery count) during the execution of a plurality of jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during the jackpot game). When it is executed (during the period in which the time saving state is repeatedly set), the number of rounds of the jackpot game continuously executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side is cumulatively displayed. .. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 is a period setting means for setting a period (continuous chan period) for determining that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command and the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. And, when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the number of round games (the number of rounds) in the previously executed jackpot game is added to the number of round games (rounds) of the new jackpot game. The number of rounds accumulating means for adding the number) and the number of display rounds command corresponding to the accumulated number of rounds accumulated by the accumulated number of rounds are transmitted to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game It has a round cumulative number display control means and a display. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), then the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition of the winning opening 650a) is satisfied (S1608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or variable. When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening is satisfied. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed to end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1608: No), then, It is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed after 15 rounds (the final round game preset in this jackpot game) is completed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment, which is the ball ejection time). When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. The start timing of the ending effect and the end timing described later are also configured to be determined based on the opening scenario (see S214 of FIG. 38) set when the jackpot is won.

In the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: Yes), the ending command is set (S1611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1610 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: No), it is determined in the process of S1612 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612). If it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), then it is determined which of the jackpot A to the jackpot D is being executed (S1613). In the process of S1613, the jackpot type stored in the storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read out.

Next, the corresponding time saving end condition is set by using the time saving giving table 202e based on the read jackpot type (S1614). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R time reduction with jackpot) or jackpot B (5R time reduction with jackpot), 100 is set for the time saving medium counter 203k, 1 is set for the small hit A counter 203m, and the small hit B counter is used. 3 is set for 203n, and 5 is set for the small hit C counter p. When the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time reduction with jackpot), the time reduction medium counter 203k is 100, the small hit A counter 203m is 2, the small hit B counter 203n is 10, and the small hit C counter p is 50. Are set respectively.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot), the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the time saving medium counter 203k, the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit It is configured so that a value (time saving end condition) is not set for each of the C counter p. After completing the process of S1614 described above, next, a time saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the process of S1614 is set (S1615).

The time saving setting information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time reduction setting information command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the time reduction information indicating the time reduction end condition of the current time reduction state in the time reduction information update area 223g and the provisional time reduction information update area 223i (see S2603 in FIG. 60). .. Based on the time saving information set here and the updated information of the time saving state updated based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol, the remaining number of times (remaining condition) of the time saving state is determined, and based on the remaining number of times. Various production modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After finishing the processing of S1615, next, the state command corresponding to the game state set after the big hit is set (S1616), the end of the big hit is set (S1617), and the big hit middle flag 203d is set to off (S1618). ), End this process.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state can be set differently according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol is established as the end condition (time reduction end condition) in the time saving state as compared with the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured so that difficult time-saving end conditions are set.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the added value when winning one type instead of two types during a right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

In the present embodiment, the same time saving end condition is set in the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) set when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. , Not limited to that, for example, it may be configured to set a time saving end condition that is more difficult to be established when the jackpot type is jackpot A. Further, a part of the plurality of time saving end conditions may be set so that the jackpot A is more likely to be satisfied, and the other is more likely to be satisfied by the jackpot B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21D, in the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the variation number ending condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (end based on the value of the time saving medium counter 203k). (Conditions) and the winning count end condition (end condition based on the value of each small hit counter) regarding the number of winnings won as a result of the special symbol lottery are set.

In addition, as the winning count end condition, the end condition corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of small hit winning is set. With this configuration, for the player, the small hit game corresponding to which small hit type is executed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number (100 times), and how much more. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state ends.

In this embodiment, only the number of fluctuations "100 times" of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set as the condition for ending the number of fluctuations, but it differs depending on the jackpot type. The fluctuation number end condition may be set. Further, as a condition for ending the number of fluctuations, a first special symbol fluctuation measuring means for measuring only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is provided, and this is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. It is established when the first special symbol fluctuation end condition and the second special symbol fluctuation measuring means for measuring only the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol are provided and the measurement result of the second special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. The second special symbol change end condition may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition based on the measurement result of the counters (small hit A counter 203 m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter 203p) corresponding to each small hit type is set as the winning count end condition. However, it is not limited to this, and a time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the total value of the number of times a small hit is won may be set, or a plurality of (3 or more) small hit types may be set. Among them, a means for measuring the total number of times the small hit game in which a predetermined number (two) of small hit types are set is executed is provided, and an end condition is set based on the measurement result of the means. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition is set for all the small hit types that can be set at the time of winning the small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times is set at the time of winning the small hit. Even if this is done, the small hit type Z may be set as a small hit type for which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied. As a result, even if the player knows that the small hit has been won during the time saving state, it is difficult to determine whether the time saving state is approaching the end due to this small hit.

In addition, when the above-mentioned small hit type Z is provided, it is preferable to execute the small hit game having the same contents as the small hit game in which the winning number end condition is set. With this configuration, even if the game content of the small hit game executed during the time saving state is identified, it is difficult to determine whether the time saving state is approaching the end by this small hit game. ..

In this way, by determining that the small hit has been won, or by determining the game content of the small hit game that is executed based on the winning of the small hit, that is, the game of the pachinko machine 10. By discriminating the content, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether or not it is approaching the end), thereby suggesting (notifying) the progress of the time saving state (whether or not it is approaching the end). It is possible to make the player have a strong interest. The control content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described in detail in the explanation of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

Next, the small hit control process (S1505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1505). This small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit are executed and the response is made. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 53, S1505), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203f is set to ON by the processing of S404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1701, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701: Yes), the opening command is set (S1702). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to off (S1703), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1701: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1704). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. The determination of S1704 is determined by analyzing whether the small hit medium flag 303g is set to ON. In the process of S1704, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the small hit (S1704: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S1704: Yes), the process of S1705 is executed. In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1705). When it is determined in the process of S1705 that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g (S1705: Yes). S1706), it is determined whether this time is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1707).

In the process of S1707, if it is determined that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1707 that this time is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1707: Yes), then it is determined in the processing of S1708 whether the V flag 203i is set to ON. (S1708), when it is determined that it is not on (off) (S1708: No), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read (S1709), and then the read small hit is read. An instruction command corresponding to the type is set (S1710).

The instruction commands set in the process of S1710 include, for example, a small hit (for example, small hit A) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the small hit game as a small hit type, and a ball is specified during the small hit game. An instruction command is set to make the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 different depending on the small hits (for example, small hits B and C) that are difficult to pass through the area.

Specifically, when the small hit A, which is easy to hit two types during the small hit game, is set as the small hit type, the display mode for forcibly forcing the player to execute the right-handed game (FIG. 16 (a)) is set, and then, when the ball passes through a specific area, a display mode (see FIG. 16 (b)) indicating that the two types have been successfully won is displayed. ing. In this way, by making the content when the instruction command is set different according to the degree of expectation for passing the ball through the specific area in the small hit game to be executed, the player can be provided with a natural effect. can do.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S1711, if it is determined that the current timing is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S1711: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1713). If it is determined in the process of S1713 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1713: Yes), the ending command is set (S1714), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1713 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1713: No), it is determined in the process of S1715 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715). If it is determined in the process of S1715 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1715, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1716), and it is determined that it is set to ON. (S1716: Yes) sets an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203i (S1717), sets the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot middle flag 203d on (S1718), and sets the V flag 203i. It is set to off (S1719), the V passage flag 203j is set to off (S1720), the small hit medium flag 203g is set to off (S171721), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (S2118 in FIG. 55) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 55, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S2115: Yes in FIG. 55), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2118. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2062 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2118 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2066. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), the process proceeds to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the process proceeds to S2068.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2064. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2063: No), and the process proceeds to S2068.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2118, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2064, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2064). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2066). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the lamp display device 227. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2068, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 55). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2118 is executed, the process of S2068 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2069), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2071) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2068 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2068 is performed via the processes of S2064 to S2066. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), S2069, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2070, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2071), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2069 is that when the processing of S2068 is reached via the processing of S2064 to S2068, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2064. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113 and the variation display setting process of S2114 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is made, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect are pressed, and the frame button This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), various counter update processes (S2111) are executed. This various counter update process is a process for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating a plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.

In the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the values of all the counters are updated by 1 each time various counter update processes (S2111) are executed, that is, if the update method of each counter is unified, each counter is updated. Since the condition is synchronized and there is a problem that it is not possible to give randomness to the set effect mode, the updated values of the counters are configured not to be synchronized.

After finishing the various counter update processes (S2111), the effect update process (S2112) is next executed. This effect update process (S2112) is for performing a process for changing the content of the currently executed effect (variable display that has already been set) during the effect execution.

After the effect update process (S2112), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2113). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off process is executed (S2118). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203). The process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display in the symbol is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2208). Further, in the process of S2208, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S2208 is completed, the processing of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2208. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected. Or, at the time of lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. When the process of S2208 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2207, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information-related processing is executed (S2210). Next, the process of S2117 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the winning information-related processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S2210). This prize information-related process (S2210) determines whether or not to execute the provisional hit effect based on the prize information (variable type) included in the prize information command received this time and the current game situation. Is executed.

When the winning information-related process (S2210) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state read in the process of S2301 is in the time reduction (S2302), and if it is determined that the time is in the reduction (S2302: Yes), then the provisional collision determination flag 223h is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S2303). If it is determined in the processing of S2303 that the provisional collision detection flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2303: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2304, and is the provisional time reduction end flag 223j turned on? Is determined (S2304). If it is determined in the processing of S2304 that the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is not on (off) (S2304: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2305, which corresponds to the winning information received from the main control device 110 this time. Determine if there is information (S2305).

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned processing of S2303, when it is determined that the provisional collision determination flag 223h is on (S2303: Yes), or in the processing of S2304, when it is determined that the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is on (S2304: Yes) skips the process of determining whether or not to execute the temporary hit effect, and shifts to the process of S2311 described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning information-related processing (S2211), the provisional hit effect can be executed only when the read game state is in the short time. Therefore, since the temporary hit effect can be executed only when the time is shortened, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the temporary hit determination flag 223h is on, that is, when the temporary hit effect has already been executed, the temporary hit effect being executed is not set because the temporary hit effect is not set. It can be provided to the player until the end.

Next, the process (S2305 to S2311) for setting the temporary hit effect will be described. In the process of S2305, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the winning information received from the main control device 110 this time (S2305). When it is determined that the received winning information is a hit (S2305: Yes), the provisional collision determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2306), and the information in the provisional time saving information update area 223i is updated (S2307). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information (S2305: No), the processing of S2306 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2307.

Next, it is determined whether the information updated in the process of S2307 is a time saving end condition (S2308). When it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied (S2308: Yes), the provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to ON (S2309). On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition is not the time saving (S2308: No), the process of S2309 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2310 described later. Next, a display winning information command corresponding to the information in the temporary time saving information update area 223i is set (S2311), and the received winning information command information is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S2311), and this processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the time saving (S2302: No), the display winning information command corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), and the above-mentioned S2311 is set. Process is executed and this process is terminated.

Return to FIG. 56 to continue the description. In the process of S2209, if the winning information command is not received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). When a hit-related command is received (S22111: Yes), the hit-related process (S2212) is executed, the above-mentioned process of S2217 is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the content of the hit-related process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S2212). The hit-related process (S2212) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. The processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In the hit-related process (S2212 in FIG. 58), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the command determination process (S2113) has received the jackpot start command (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S2402), the provisional hit determination flag 223h is set to off (S2403), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2404). When the number of rounds command is received (S2404: Yes), the number of display rounds command is set based on the number of rounds (S2405), and this process ends. In this embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as a number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, the voice lamp control device is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started from the main control device 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round on the voice lamp controller 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2406). When the jackpot end command is received (S2406: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S2407), and the jackpot end processing (S2408) is executed. The details of the jackpot end processing (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

On the other hand, in the process of S2406, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S2409). When the small hit start command is received (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S2410), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2409: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S2411). When the small hit end command is received (S2411: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (S2412), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2411: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passage command has been received (S2413). When the V entrance passage command is received (S2413: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2414), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2413: No), it is determined whether the V passage command has been received (S2415). When a V-passing command is received (S2415: Yes), a display V-effect command for indicating an effect based on the entry of the V-winning device 650 into the V switch 650e3 is set (S2416), and this process ends. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S2415, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S2415: No), it is determined whether or not the instruction command has been received (S2417). When the instruction command is received (S2417: Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2418), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2417, if it is determined that the instruction command has not been received (S2417: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game is configured to open the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 is executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing. Is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays a highlight guidance display mode (see FIG. 16A) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set the display instruction command to make it.

Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects the ball while the highlighting guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, the display achievement for displaying the achievement display mode for blessing the player is achieved. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hit game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is reliably configured to win the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. The ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. If it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1 despite the configuration as described above, the third symbol is displayed when the small hit game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the display for guiding the right-handed hit to the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10A) of the display device 81. Alternatively, it is possible that the game is stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the right-handed game by changing the display for guiding the right-handed person displayed in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Further, when the right-handed game is performed after the highlighted guide display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the timing for displaying the highlighted guide display mode (see FIG. 16A), the right-handed game is used. The timing is set so that the launched ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has executed a right-handed game according to the display of the emphasis guidance display mode cannot let the ball flow down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 during the small hit game.

Here, the jackpot end processing (S2408), which is one of the hit-related processing (S2212), will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2408).

In the jackpot end processing (S2408 in FIG. 59), first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2501). Next, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S2501 is in the time saving state (S2502). When it is determined that the read information is in the time saving state (S2502: Yes), all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S2503). On the other hand, in the process of S2502, when it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2502: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

After executing the process of S2503, next, in the process of S2503, it is determined whether or not the read information has hit information (S2504). When it is determined that there is hit information (S2504: Yes), a continuous display command is set (S2505). Next, the provisional collision determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506), the display status display command is set (S2507), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2504, when it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S2504: No), a display winning information command corresponding to the read state is set (S2508), and this process is terminated.

Return to FIG. 56 to continue the description. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2211: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2214), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving related command has been received (S2215). If it is determined that the time saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes), the time saving update process (S2216) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the time saving update process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. On the other hand, in the process of S2215, when it is determined that the command related to the time saving is not received (S2215: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and this process is terminated.

Next, the content of the time saving update process (S2216), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113), will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S2216).

In the time saving update process (S2216), first, the time saving related information received this time is analyzed (S2601). Next, in the process of S2601, it is determined whether the analyzed time reduction related information is the time reduction setting information (S2602). When it is determined that the time reduction related information is the time reduction setting information (S2602: Yes), the time reduction information is set in the time reduction information update area 223g and the provisional time reduction information update area 223i (S2603), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the time reduction related information is not the time reduction setting information (S2602: No), it is determined whether the time reduction related information is fluctuation information (S2604). When it is determined that the time saving related information is fluctuation information (S2604: Yes), the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2605). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2606), and it is determined whether or not the time saving lower limit flag 223k provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2607). When it is determined that the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off (S2607: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is less than 30 (S2608). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is less than 30 times (S2608: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON (S2609). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2608 that the number of remaining time reductions is more than 30 (S2608: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on in the processing of S2607 (S2607: Yes), the processing of S2608 to S2609 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2610 described later.

Next, it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is one (S2610). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is one (S2610: Yes), the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not one (S2610: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to off (S2613), and the time reduction pre-end variation flag 223n is set to off (S2614). Next, the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is set to off (S2615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 0 (S2612: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2604, when it is determined that the time saving related information is not fluctuation information (S2604: No), it is determined whether the time saving related information is small hit information (S2616). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the small hit information (S2616: Yes), the small hit related update process (S2617) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, if it is determined that the time saving related information is not the small hit information (S2616: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Here, the small hit-related update process (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit-related update process (S2617).

In the small hit-related update process (S2617 in FIG. 61), first, the information in the time saving information update area 223 g is updated (S2701). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2702), and it is determined whether the semi-end condition flag 223m is ON (S2703). When it is determined that the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (S2703: No), it is determined whether the quasi-end condition is satisfied (S2704). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON (S2705), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, when it is determined that the semi-end condition flag 223m is on (S2703: Yes), or in the processing of S2704, when it is determined that the semi-end condition is not satisfied (S2704: Yes). No), it is determined whether the end condition is satisfied (S2706). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to off (S2707), and then the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to off (S2708). Next, the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is set to off (S2709), the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is set to off (S2710), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, when it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (S2706: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the variation display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2114). This variation display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2807. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S2802), and then the fluctuation is changed in the processing of S2203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 56). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2803).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, an effect setting process for setting an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2804), and then a display variation for notifying the display control device 114. It is generated based on the variation pattern type in which the pattern command is acquired and the state display mode set in the effect setting process, and is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2805). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. When the processing of S2805 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2806), and the process shifts to the processing of S2807.

Here, the content of the effect setting process (S2804) executed in the process of S2804 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2804). This effect setting process (S2804) is a variation pattern set in the current variation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62) when the prize information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) and the provisional hit effect are set. It is a process for setting the temporary hit effect of.

When the effect setting process (S2804) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2901). Next, in the process of S2901, it is determined whether the read information is in the time saving state (S2902). When it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is in the time saving state (S2902: Yes), it is determined whether the provisional collision determination flag 223h is ON (S2903). If it is determined that the provisional collision determination flag 223h is on (S2903: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, when it is determined that the provisional collision determination flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2903: No), the information of the time saving information update area 223g is read out (S2904). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is ON (S2905). When it is determined that the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is off (S2905: No), the ROM 222 is based on the time reduction lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m setting, the hit / fail judgment result, and the value of the state effect counter 223o. The state display mode is selected by using the state display selection table 222b provided in (S2906). Next, a display command indicating the selected state display mode is set (S2908), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the pre-time reduction variation flag 223n is on (S2905: Yes), the final result provided in the ROM 222 is based on the result of the hit / fail determination and the value of the state effect counter 223o. The state display mode is selected using the state display selection table (S2907). Next, the process of S2908 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Return to FIG. 62 to continue the description. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2801: No), or after executing the process of S2806 described above, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807). .. When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S2808), and the extracted stop type command is acquired (S2809). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the extracted stop type (S2810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S2807: No), this process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 81. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 64, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S4001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S4001 in FIG. 64) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 65, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S4102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S4102 and S4102, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 64. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S4003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S4004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 79 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 79 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S4005, the interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a). FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (b). FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 66B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S4302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75.

In the display setting process (S4303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S4304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simple display setting process (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous advance notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, various types of image controller 237 are used. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), which are determined in the task process (S4304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 38 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to D, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance eye). ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed to display the S4304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 67, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402), and then the command For all the unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S4403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. 68A. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main controller. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S4505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S4502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 81. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4406). If there is a display variable type command (S4406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S4407), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S4601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S4603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S4304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S4601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 69A. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S4701). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4702. .. When the specified back image type is back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image discrimination flag set by S4702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and there is an error command. If (S4410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4802), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4802 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S4802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and there is a hit-related command. If (S4412: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing hit-related command processing. The hit-related command processing executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related command processing (FIG. 70, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that there is a display hit start command in the process of S4901 (S4901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S4902), and the process proceeds to the process of S4903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (a). FIG. 71 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S4902). This jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 70) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of a jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S4902), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5005). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the processing of S4901 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4903. When the processing of S4901 or S4902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined that there is a display round number command in the process of S4903, the round number command process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to the process of S4905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4904) will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). FIG. 71 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S4904). This round number command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 70) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command process (S4904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4903 that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4905. When the processing of S4903 or S4904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). If it is determined in the process of S4905 that there is a jackpot end command for display (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to the process of S4907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S4906) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a). FIG. 72 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command process (S4906). This jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 70) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S4906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5205), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S4905 (S4905: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4907. When the processing of S4905 or S4906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S4907). If it is determined in the process of S4907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the process proceeds to the process of S4909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S4908) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). This small hit start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and suggests the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command processing (S4908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S5303) based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5305). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4909. When the processing of S4907 or S4908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit end command for display (S4909). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the process of S4909 (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S4910), and the process proceeds to the process of S4911.

Here, the details of the small hit end command process (S4910) will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). This small hit end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined that a small hit end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and suggests the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command processing (S4910), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5405), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4909 that there is no small hit end command for display (S4909: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4911. When the processing of S4909 or S4910 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). If it is determined that there is a V entrance passage command in the process of S4911 (S4911: Yes), the V entrance pass command process is executed (S4912), and the process proceeds to the process of S4913.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). This V entrance passage command process (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and the V prize of the V prize device 650. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the switch (V switch) 650e3.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4911 that there is no display V entrance passage command (S4911: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4913. When the processing of S4911 or S4912 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). If it is determined that there is a V effect command in the process of S4913 (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and the process proceeds to the process of S4915.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S4914) will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a). This V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and there is a high probability that a jackpot game will be granted. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that on the third symbol display device 81.

In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5605), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V effect command in the process of S4913 (S4913: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4915. When the processing of S4913 or S4914 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display instruction command (S4915). If it is determined that there is an instruction command in the process of S4915 (S4915: Yes), the instruction command process is executed (S4916), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4915, if it is determined that there is no display instruction command (S4915: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the instruction command processing (S4916) will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). This instruction command process (S4916) is a process executed when it is determined that the instruction command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and it is highly probable that the jackpot game will be given. This is a process for displaying the suggested effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the instruction command processing (S4916), first, the instruction effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5651). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5652), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the instruction effect display data table (S5653). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5654), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5655), and this process ends.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 67. In the processing of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there are various production-related commands corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands. If there are various production-related commands (S4414: Yes), the production-related command processing is executed (S4415), and the process returns to the processing of S4401.

Here, the details of the effect-related command processing (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect-related command processing. This effect-related command process executes processing corresponding to various effect-related commands received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the effect-related command processing (S4415), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the effect display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5705), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When it is determined that there are no various effect-related commands in the process of S4414 (S4414: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

In the processing of S4401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes). ), The processing of S4402 to S4416 is executed again. Then, the processes of S4401 to S4416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 68 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6002 to S6004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6002), S6003 to S6004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6101).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, off (S6003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6005.

In S6005, the pointer update process is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6201, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6203), and if it is a demo display data table (S6203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6203: No). S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 76 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counting counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S6010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the finalized display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S6015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6016). If the demo display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S6017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S6016, if the demo display flag is on (S6016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S4309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which is specified to stop and display), in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the details of the transfer setting process (S4305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S6301 (S6301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6402). In the process of S6402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6403. Further, as a result of the processing of S6401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6403.

In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S6301: No in FIG. 79 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the display setting process (S4303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6502), and if it is the transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Further, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6502: No), the processes of S6503 and S6504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6507. Further, as a result of the processing of S6505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S6510), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The discrimination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer setting process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 36 (S6601). That is, in the processing of S6601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S6602 (S6603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 66B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state which is an advantageous game state for the player, when a big hit is won (a symbol hit or a two-kind hit is acquired). The time saving end condition (special prize end condition) set in (when), the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) set when the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times, and the special symbol lottery for a small hit Since it is configured so that the time saving end condition (time saving end condition) set when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number can be set, the period (time saving) in which the time saving state is continuously set is set. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily predict the timing at which the state ends).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned winning count end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won a plurality of times, the player is asked to win the small hit each time during the time saving state. Isn't the time saving state ending? Can make you think. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit types can be set when a small hit is won, and as a plurality of small hit types, a small hit type for setting a winning count end condition and a winning count end condition There is a small hit type that does not set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends based on the small hit game executed during the time saving state.

As described above, when the small hit type for setting the winning count end condition and the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is not set are set, the small hit game to be executed (opening operation of the V winning device 650) is performed. For the same content (same in concept including an error that cannot be identified by the player), set the small hit type that sets the winning count end condition and the small hit type that does not set the winning count end condition. It is good to configure it to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing when the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a plurality of small hit types for setting the winning count end condition can be set, and the number of times set as the winning count end condition is different for each small hit type. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends by determining the content of the small hit game executed during the time saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, a small hit is won by a lottery of a second special symbol (special figure 2) that is easy to be executed when a time saving state is set, and the winning small hit is supported. When the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game (when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has flowed down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 opened by the small hit game) , The big hit (per 2 types) is set after the small hit game is completed.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned setting for each of the two types means that, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the big hit game based on the big hit type (big hit game content) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol is the small hit. It is configured to execute on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the game, but is not limited to this, and is being executed on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The jackpot type corresponding to the type of the small hit game (small hit type) may be read (lottery), and the jackpot game corresponding to the read (selected as a result of the lottery) jackpot type may be executed. , A jackpot is set on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type selected based on the result of a predetermined lottery may be executed. ..

In the first embodiment in which two types of hits can be set in this way, small hit games with different expectations for setting two types of hits are set according to the winning small hit types, and each small hit type is set. It is configured so that the time saving end condition (the winning count end condition) is set. Further, the smaller hit game (small hit type) in which two types of hits are easily set, the smaller the number of times the winning number end condition is satisfied (winning number).

With this configuration, if you win a small hit during the time saving state, you can play the small hit game while assuming both the possibility of winning per 2 types and the possibility that the time saving state will end. Since it will be executed, it is possible to improve the playability in a time-saving state. Further, the more the small hit game in which the two types of hits are easily won, the easier it is for the time saving state to end, so that the game during the small hit game can be enthusiastically performed.

In the first embodiment, among the small hit types, the winning number end condition is once for the small hit A, which can win two types of hits if the right-handed game is continuously performed. (There are some exceptions). With this configuration, a large penalty can be given only to the player who does not continuously play the right-handed game (the player who does not play the appropriate game), and the time is shortened for the player. You can continue to play right-handed games inside.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, the timing at which the time saving state ends is different depending on the type of the time saving ending condition that is satisfied, and the time saving state is set during the period when the small hit game is executed. It is configured so that it can be set when it is continuing and when the time saving state is finished. As a result, the game result can be different depending on which time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player is made to pay attention not only to whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, but also to the type of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied. be able to.

Specifically, when a small hit is won in a special symbol variation in which the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the timing at which the variation of the special symbol stops (the timing at which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed). During the small hit game that is executed after the time saving state ends, it will be in the normal state, but if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state will be at the timing when the small hit game is executed. Is terminated.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650, which is opened during the small hit game, is launched on the upstream side (right-handed game) of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a. It is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path through which the ball flows down), and is configured so that the ball does not easily flow down to the through gate 67 or the electric accessory 640a side during the small hit game. As a result, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the established time saving ending condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, so that it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the time saving state is set at the time when the normal symbol is won and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set, the time saving state is set during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Is configured so that the opening operation during the time saving state is continuously executed even if is completed. Therefore, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the established time saving ending condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, and thus it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

It should be noted that, unlike the first embodiment described above, it is not difficult to understand that the timing at which the time-saving end condition ends differs depending on the satisfied time-saving end condition, but the time-saving state changes according to the satisfied time-saving end condition. In the case of giving a playability peculiar to greatly different ending timings, for example, when the variation number end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated at the timing when the variation of the special symbol starts, and the winner is elected. When the number-of-times end condition is satisfied, it is preferable to end the time saving state at the timing when the small hit game ends. With this configuration, the period for which the time reduction state is set can be significantly different depending on the type of time reduction end condition that is satisfied.

In this case, unlike the first embodiment described above, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged on the upstream side of the V winning device 650 and the time saving state is set during the small hit game. Is configured so that many balls are guided by the electric accessory 640a to enter the ball entry port (for example, the general ball entry port 63, the second ball entry port 640), and further, the opening operation is performed by a small hit game. It is preferable that the ball entry port, which is guided by the operation of the electric accessory 640a and enters the ball, pays out more balls than the V winning device 650.

In addition, as the time saving end condition, the fluctuation number ending condition is set to 2 times and the winning number ending condition is set to 1 time, and only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol change after the time saving state is set. It is preferable to configure so that many balls can be entered into the entrances guided by the electric accessory 640a during the small hit game. With this configuration, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a specific time saving end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to provide a new game property.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown with reference to FIG. 2, a V winning device 650 that is opened when a small hit is won is arranged in the right side region, and a right-handed game is played during the small hit game. By doing so, the V winning device 650 is made to win a ball, and when the ball winning the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 detects the ball), two types of hits are set. ing. Furthermore, the contents of the jackpot set as two types (the content of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, etc.) are configured to be set according to the type of the small hit which is the lottery result of the special symbol. are doing.

In such playability, for example, when a small hit is won, the lottery result is identified by the stop display mode of the first symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, and corresponds to the current small hit. By determining the content of the jackpot set in the above, for example, the content of the jackpot that is not the most advantageous to the player (for example, the number of prize balls (the number of round games) that can be obtained by the jackpot game) is another jackpot game. If you win a small hit that is set to a lesser, more disadvantageous game state (for example, normal state) for the player after the end of the big hit game, you do not intentionally win two types of hits, and the next small hit There was a risk that the game would be played so as to aim for a winning prize.

Therefore, as a configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the period until the ball launched by performing the right side game reaches the V winning device 650 is special to the first display device 37. The right area so that it is longer than the period from when the stop symbol showing the lottery result of the symbol is stopped and displayed until the small hit game is executed (until the time when two types of hits can be obtained during the small hit game). Of these, it is preferable to provide a delay flow path for delaying the flow of the ball on the upstream side of the V winning device 650.

With this configuration, when the right-handed game is performed after determining the lottery result of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain the two types. Therefore, in order to win two types, the right-handed game can be continuously executed even before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (from the variable display of the special symbol), as described above. It is possible to prevent malicious games from being played.

In this case, for all the small hits, the period until the ball fired by playing the right side game reaches the V winning device 650 is the stop symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first display device 37. It is not necessary to make it longer than the period from when is stopped and displayed until the small hit game is executed (until the time when two types of hits can be obtained during the small hit game), and some small hit games ( In particular, it suffices that the small hit type in which the big hit content that is advantageous to the player is set) is executed so as to satisfy the condition.

Further, in the first embodiment, the expectation level per two types during the small hit game (the possibility that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game when the right-handed game is continuously performed) is determined. It is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, and specifically, as described above, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k is different depending on the winning small hit type. Not limited to this, for example, by making the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a, which is rotated in the small hit game, different according to the winning small hit type, the expectation level per two types during the small hit game (continuation). In the case where the right-handed game is performed, the possibility that the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game) may be different.

In this case, for example, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k during the small hit game is set to a constant operation regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down during the small hit game is specified. An operation pattern is set in which the first period communicating with the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) passing through the region and the second period communicating with the other flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) are alternately established. , The opening timing of the V winning opening 650a may be set to be different from the timing when the first period and the second period are established.

Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the right-handed game can be continued by executing the same effect as the small hit game. In this case, if the special symbol is lost in the lottery, the special symbol's final display time, that is, the period for stopping and displaying the special symbol lottery result, is changed according to the type of the loss. In some cases where the lottery result of the symbol is out of order, the final display time of the special symbol can be lengthened (the period until the next special symbol change is executed can be lengthened).

Therefore, it is possible to perform a game aiming at two kinds of hits other than the case where the small hit game is won. Further, by applying the effect at the time of disengagement (pseudo small hit game effect) to the pachinko machine 10 having the game board 13 using the delay member described above, the right-handed game can be performed more continuously.

Further, when the V winning device 650a is set to the small hit type in which the opening operation (small hit game) in which the ball cannot win is executed, and the small hit of the small hit type (unfortunate small hit) is won, that is, 2. Even when a small hit game with no expectation for two types is executed, the above-mentioned (pseudo small hit game effect) may be executed.

In addition, the number of times the lottery result (specific loss, unfortunate small hit) of the special symbol that can execute the above-mentioned pseudo small hit game effect is measured, and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the measurement result. It may be configured. As a result, the time saving state can be ended based on the number of times the pseudo small hit game effect is executed, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the small hit game effect this time is a pseudo one, that is, It is possible to facilitate the continuous right-handed game in order to grasp whether or not the ball wins in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game production.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. In the second embodiment, the point that the first embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the content set as the end condition of the time saving state are different. The difference is that the content of the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different from the point.

In the first embodiment described above, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the variation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of winnings that are established based on the number of winnings that are won in the small hit. The end condition and the end condition are configured to be settable, and the time reduction state is terminated when any one of the termination conditions of one of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied. As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time saving state is continuously set, and the game can be played with a sense of tension during the time saving state, so that a game that does not get tired can be provided. there were.

Further, as the winning count end condition, different conditions can be set according to the set small hit type, which makes it more difficult to understand the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, since different time saving end conditions can be set according to the jackpot type of the jackpot in which the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

However, in the first embodiment described above, it is only difficult for the player to grasp the plurality of time saving end conditions set according to the result of the game and the time saving information updated during the time saving state, which is predetermined. There was a problem that it was difficult to make the player think that he had won the big hit by himself because it was left to the lottery result of the special symbol to determine what the time saving end condition was satisfied.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether to perform the right-handed game or the left-handed game in the state where the time saving state is set. In addition, the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be established are different depending on the selected game content (right-handed game, left-handed game).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the player can select the game content during the time saving state. Therefore, in the game in the time saving state executed according to the game content selected by the player, even if the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage or the time saving state can be continued for a long period of time, the player is self-sufficient. It can be thought that it is the result of playing the game in.

Further, the second embodiment is configured so that it is possible to obtain per two types as in the first embodiment described above, and the first game (left-handed game) and the second game are performed during the time saving state. The expected value for the period in which the time saving state is continuously set and the expected value for acquiring per two types (expected value for each type of special symbol per fluctuation) and the expected value for the period when the (right-handed game) is performed. , Are configured to be different.

Specifically, when the first game is performed, the time-saving game in which the time-saving state can continue for a short period of time is likely to be short, and the time-saving game in which it is easy to obtain two types of hits during the time-saving state is executed, and the second game When the above is performed, the period during which the time saving state can be continued tends to be long (longer than the first game), and it is difficult to obtain two types of hits during the time saving state (compared to the first game). It is configured so that a time-saving game (which is difficult to acquire) is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to select the game content during the time saving state according to the player's own convenience, so even a player who wants to play a game for a long period of time can play the game only for a short period of time. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a non-player to play a game without dissatisfaction. It should be noted that a detailed description of the contents for performing a game having different game characteristics during the time saving state will be described later.

<About the production contents in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the contents of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 82 (a), the content of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends will be described. FIG. 82A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the ending period during the jackpot game. Of the elements displayed on the display screen, the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), during the ending period of the jackpot game, the "preference after the jackpot" for guiding the game method in the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends in the central portion of the main display area Dm. The comment "Please enjoy the game of" and the comment "End of big hit" to notify that the big hit game is over are displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a first guide display area Dm4 indicating the content of the first game that can be executed during the time saving state and a second guidance display area Dm4 indicating the content of the second game that can be executed during the time saving state are shown. A Dm5 and an acquired content display area Dm9 for indicating the privilege acquired during the jackpot game are formed. In the second embodiment, "left-handed" indicating a left-handed game as the first game that can be executed in the time-saving state, and "short" indicating a characteristic game property when the left-handed game is performed in the time-saving state. The comment "time game" is displayed in the first guidance display area Dm4.

Further, in the second guidance display area Dm5, "right-handed" indicating a right-handed game as a second game that can be performed during the time-saving state, and characteristic game characteristics when the right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. A comment indicating "a relaxing game" is displayed in the second guidance display area Dm5. That is, in the second embodiment, as a game method during the time saving state, a left-handed game in which the time-saving state is settled in a short period of time and a right-handed game in which the time-saving state can be enjoyed for a long period of time can be selected. This can be displayed immediately before the time saving state is set (during the ending period of the jackpot game). Therefore, the player can be made to play the game by an arbitrary game method at the timing when the time saving state is set.

In the present embodiment, only the major differences between the first game and the second game are displayed in characters in the first guide display area Dm4 and the second guide display area Dm5, and the game method in the time saving state is displayed by the player. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to display all the differences between the first game and the second game, or the differences are displayed by pictures instead of characters. It may be configured to do so. Further, as shown in FIG. 82A, only major differences are displayed in the first guide display area Dm4 and the second guide display area Dm5, and the first guide display area is displayed during the period in which the display is displayed. By selecting Dm4 or the second guide display area Dm5, detailed contents may be displayed.

With this configuration, even for players who think that it is sufficient to roughly grasp the game contents that differ depending on the game method, and for players who want to grasp the details of the game contents that differ depending on the game method. Can also provide an appropriate display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (b), the display contents immediately after the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 82B is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the second embodiment has a function of holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) with respect to the first embodiment described above. In the second display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is held. It is configured so that four symbols, the first reserved symbol Dsf to the fourth reserved symbol Dsi, are displayed with a "triangular" mark.

The reserved symbols are in the order in which they are reserved and stored (the second special symbol lottery is executed) in the same manner as the reserved symbols of the first special symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to fourth reserved symbol Dse) described above. It is displayed in order from the first reserved symbol Dsf to the fourth reserved symbol Dsi, that is, from the left side to the right side of the second display area Ds2 in the order in which the ball enters the ball entry port 640). That is, the reserved symbols (Dsb to Dse) of the first special symbol and the reserved symbols (Dsf to Dsi) of the second special symbol are both displayed so as to gradually shift toward the executing symbol Dsa. The player can easily grasp the reserved symbol corresponding to the next executed special symbol from the display content of each special symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), immediately after the time saving state is set, the character "?" Is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2. This is a display indicating that the player has not determined whether to execute the current time saving state in the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). In addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 82 (b), a display mode for indicating that the game method in the time saving state has not been determined may be displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2, for example, a left-handed game. , The characters "left or right" indicating that any of the right-handed games may be played may be displayed.

Although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, whether the ball entry port into which the ball enters for the first time after the time saving state is set is the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640. Is determined, and the game method arbitrarily selected by the player is determined based on the determination result. Therefore, the character "?" Is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2 during the period from when the time saving state is set until the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640.

Further, in the second embodiment, the display content of FIG. 82 (b) is configured to continue for a predetermined period (4 seconds) after the time saving state is set, and the time saving state is maintained during that period. The variation pattern is set so that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information stored on hold at the time when is set ends. With this configuration, if the winning information for winning a big hit is included in the reserved ball of the special symbol, before the first game or the second game is determined and displayed (in the game guidance display area Dm2). The special symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot can be terminated (before the display mode for guiding the game method is displayed).

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which a jackpot is won due to a special symbol change on a side different from the game method selected by the player, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82B, the game method during the period in which the time saving state is set is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, but other display areas. It may be configured to display the game method currently set in. That is, during the jackpot game, it is necessary to display the display method for guiding (instructing) the game method that is advantageous to the player, so it is necessary to display the display method in the guidance display area Dm2, but the time is shortened. While is set, it is configured so that the same game result can be obtained regardless of which game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) the player selects. The game method may be displayed in another area for displaying the current game method, instead of the guide display area Dm2 for guiding (instructing) the game method that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when displaying in the guidance display area Dm2, the situation in which the game method is guided (instructed) to the player by changing the display mode (for example, the color and shape of the characters) and the current game method ( It may be configured so that it can be distinguished from the situation in which the game method selected by the player) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83A, the content of the effect when the first game (left-handed game) is executed in the state where the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 83A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed when the first game (left-handed game) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 83A, when the first game is executed, a game result display 810 imitating a "lottery box" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the lower left of the main display area Dm. On the side, a game content display 811 for guiding the game content of the first game to the player is displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 for suggesting the time reduction end number in the first game is formed.

That is, in the first game (left-handed game in the time saving state) in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a lottery is executed according to the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol, and the result (1st prize to miss). Is displayed as the game result display 810, so that an effect display for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first game (left-handed game) is executed (set) as the game method during the time reduction, the characters "left-handed" indicating the game method of the first game are displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2. ..

When a specific game method (game direction) such as "left-handed" or "right-handed" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2, the game is different from the displayed game method (game direction). When the game is played by the method (game direction), an error notification for correcting the game method (game direction) is executed. That is, after it is determined that the first game (left-handed game) is performed in the time-saving state, an error notification is executed when the right-handed game is performed, and the second game (right-handed game) is performed in the time-saving state. After it is confirmed that the game will be performed, an error notification will be executed when the left-handed game is performed. In addition, during the period when neither game method is determined during the time saving state, the error notification is not executed regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is played. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 for displaying the reserved number (number of reserved symbols) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol A special figure 2 holding number display area Dm7 for displaying the number of holdings (number of holding symbols) is formed, and a special symbol corresponding to the game method (left-handed game) currently selected in the sub-display area Ds (left-handed game) Only the reserved symbols of the first special symbol) are displayed (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Ds1). With this configuration, it is possible to emphasize and display (effect display) only the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the special symbol corresponding to the game method selected by the player.

Further, the actual number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) corresponding to each special symbol is configured to be displayed in the dedicated special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the exact number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) for each special symbol. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 83A, the player can easily identify the current number of reservations "0" in the special figure 1 hold number display area Dm6 and the special figure 2 hold number display area Dm7. Although it is configured to be displayed in the size of, the number of holdings of each special symbol can be displayed in a size that cannot be identified without the player's consciousness, or the number of holdings can be displayed by an identifier other than a number. It is good to configure it so that it does.

Then, when the effect display corresponding to the left-handed game shown in FIG. 83 (a) is executed, the result of the lottery is displayed in the main display area Dm as the effect result according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. , The remaining time reduction number for suggesting the time reduction end number is updated and displayed in the time reduction number display area Dm10 based on the progress of each value (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of small hit winnings) with respect to the time reduction end condition. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the time saving state by grasping the result of the lottery and the display content of the time saving number display area Dm10.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game is selected as the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the character 812 imitating a boy searches for the treasure box 813 for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol. At the same time, the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the special symbol (second special symbol) corresponding to the selected game method (right-handed game) is displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. Regarding the content of the effect executed when this right-handed game is selected, the effect using the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is different from the effect content of the first embodiment described above. Other than that, they are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, among the effects executed when the right-handed game is selected in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the effects are different from the effects of the first embodiment described above. Explain the contents. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a game screen when a right-handed game is selected during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the second embodiment, the reservation symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to display whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, or the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. In FIG. 84, the notice display mode 820 showing the characters “chance” for the first reserved symbol Dsf corresponding to the next special symbol change is the third hold corresponding to the special symbol change after three changes. A notice display mode 821 showing the characters "end" is displayed for the symbol Dsh.

The notice display mode set for each of the reserved symbols is selected and displayed using the reserved display selection table 222aa described later.

In this way, by displaying the notice display mode for the reserved symbol, the player is motivated to win a big hit by the time the special symbol change is executed while predicting the special symbol change at which the time saving state ends. Will play the game. In addition, based on the content of the notice display mode, it is possible to grasp the period during which the time saving state does not end and execute the special symbol change with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the content of the game in the time saving state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram schematically showing the game content in the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type among the game contents in the time-saving state in the second embodiment. is there. As shown in FIG. 85, the second embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won by a lottery of the first special symbol with respect to the first embodiment described above, and the first special symbol is better. It is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit game (a small hit game executed in response to the small hit A), which is easier to obtain a second type hit than the second special symbol.

Further, in the second embodiment, the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above is used, and when the time saving state is set, the ball is moved to the second entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. The opening operation control of the electric accessory 640a is changed so that the ball can be easily entered. That is, when the second game (right-handed game) is executed during the time saving state, more balls than in the normal state are entered into the second entrance 640, and a lot of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. be able to. On the other hand, even if the time saving state is set, the ease of entering the ball into the first entry port 64 does not change from the normal state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game), which are the contents of the game in the time-saving state, will be compared and described. First, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the time saving state (the number of prize balls that can be obtained by inserting a ball into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640) will be described. The number of prize balls in this time-saving state is configured to be larger in the second game than in the first game. Then, when the first game is performed during the time saving state, only the same number of prize balls as when the normal state is set can be obtained, and the number of balls (holding balls) decreases during the time saving state. The game to go is executed. On the other hand, when the second game is played, it is possible to put many balls into the second entrance 640, so that many prize balls can be obtained, and as a result, during the time saving state. A game of keeping (maintaining) the ball (holding ball) is executed.

The period during which the time saving state can be continuously set is configured to be shorter when the first game is performed than when the second game is performed. Specifically, among a plurality of time-saving end conditions, as a variation number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, a variation number end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times. And, at least, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 80 times, and when the first game is executed, the maximum number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 30 times. However, it is configured so that the time saving state is not set continuously.

Furthermore, the degree of expectation of obtaining a big hit (including per type and per type 2) for each special symbol change (lottery) executed during the time saving state is higher when the first game is performed. It is configured to be higher (larger) than when two games are played. Explaining the degree of expectation of winning this jackpot, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (the lottery of the special symbol executed when the first game is executed) and the lottery of the second special symbol (the first). The probability of winning a big hit (probability of winning per type) is the same (1/200) as the lottery of special symbols executed when two games are executed. That is, the first game and the second game are configured with different expectations for winning the two types.

Explaining this point in detail, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the first game, the probability of winning a small hit is set to be 1/10, and it is executed during the second game. In the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small hit is set to be halved. Then, the distribution of the small hit type set when the small hit is won is set so that the small hit A: small hit B is 9: 1 when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Has been done. That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the first game, the small hit A is executed with a probability of 1/11.

On the other hand, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit A is executed with a probability of 1/200. In this way, by making the probability of winning a small hit and the distribution of the small hit type set at the time of winning a small hit different, the first game fluctuates once with a special symbol than the second game. Based on the (lottery), it is configured so that the expectation of winning a big hit (including per type and per type 2) is high.

Further, in the second embodiment, the time saving end condition that is easily satisfied when the first game is executed and the time saving ending condition that is easily satisfied when the second game is executed are set to be different. Specifically, when the first game is executed, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the small hit A is won once is most likely to be satisfied, and then the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times. It is set so that it becomes difficult to be satisfied in the order of the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the case is met and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the small hit B is won three times.

When the second game is executed, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the small hit D is won 20 times is most likely to be satisfied, and then it is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 80 times. It is set so that it is difficult to be satisfied in the order of the time saving end condition and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the small hit A is won once.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player selects a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends, so that different game characteristics can be achieved. Can perform the game of.

Further, as different game characteristics, it is possible to select a game property aiming at a big hit in a short period of time (first game) and a game property aiming at a big hit in a long period of time (second game). In addition, as a method for different game methods, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and the case where the first game is performed and the case where the second game is performed are different. It is configured so that the time saving end condition can be easily satisfied. As a result, the period in which the time saving state is continuously set can be made different between the first game and the second game.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the contents of the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. It differs in that it is done. Since other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 86A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the first per random number table 202a is replaced with the first per random number 2 table 202aa, and the first per type selection table 202b is replaced with the first per random number table 202a. The 1-per type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with the variation pattern table 202d, the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is replaced with the time reduction grant table 202e, and the time reduction grant 2 table 202ae is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202f. The type selection 2 table 202af is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the open scenario 2 table 202ag is provided instead of the open scenario table 202g.

The first random number 2 table 202aa is different from the first random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in that the value (first random number counter value C1) determined to be a small hit is changed. There is. Here, the first random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

FIG. 87 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first random number 2 table 202aa includes the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 corresponding to the first special symbol and the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 corresponding to the second special symbol. ,have.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 87B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1. The special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 is different from the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above in that a value determined to be a small hit is added, and other elements are the same. The description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa, “10 to 109” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the small hit determination value. That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is determined (executed) using the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed), it is determined as a big hit at a ratio of 1/200. , It is configured to be judged as a small hit at a rate of 1/10.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (c). FIG. 87 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2. As shown in FIG. 87 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 4" is defined as a big hit determination value, and "5 to 499" is a small hit. It is specified as a judgment value. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is judged (executed) using the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 (when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed), it is determined as a big hit at a ratio of 1/200. However, it is configured to be judged as a small hit at a rate of 1/2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit can be won in both the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured. As a result, even if the first game (left-handed game) that executes the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the second game (right-handed game) that executes the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. However, it is possible to satisfy the winning count end condition that is established based on the number of winnings in the small hit.

Further, since the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol can be set differently, the first game and the second game can be set differently. It is possible to make the easiness of satisfying the winning count end condition different. Therefore, it is possible to provide various games in which the ease of ending the time saving state is different depending on whether the first game is executed or the second game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 86 (a), the description will be continued. The first hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the first hit type selection table 202b of the first embodiment described above in that the presence or absence of the time saving state given to some jackpot types is changed. The other elements are the same. The description of the same element will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c). FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and FIG. 88 (b) is the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1. 88 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab has the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 corresponding to the first special symbol and the special figure 2 jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. It has a selection 2 table 202ab2, and various tables are used properly according to the corresponding special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 has the acquired first hit type counter value C2 of "0 to 9" in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1. In the range, "big hit A" is defined as the jackpot type, "big hit B" is defined as the jackpot type in the range of "10 to 49", and "big hit C" is defined as the jackpot type in the range of "50 to 99". Is stipulated.

The "big hit A" defined here is a jackpot type in which a round game executes a 15-round jackpot game, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the round game is 5 rounds, and the time saving state is set after the big hit game is completed regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Big hit C" is a big hit type of 5 rounds of round game, and if the game state at the time of winning (at the time of setting) is the normal state, the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game, and at the time of winning (at the time of setting). ) Is in the time saving state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

As described above, the second embodiment has a jackpot type (big hit C) defined so that the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. ing. As a result, the player can be made aware of whether or not the jackpot has been won, the set jackpot type, and the game state at the time of winning, so that the game can be made more complicated and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the consciousness.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the acquired first hit type counter value C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type is "big hit". "D" is specified.

Return to FIG. 86 to continue the description. The variation pattern 2 table 202ad is different from the variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the specified contents of the variation pattern selected during the period in which the time saving state is set are different. .. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad, and FIG. 89B is defined in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 included in the variation pattern 2 table 202ad. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically. As shown in FIG. 89A, the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state and is referred to when the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is set and when the time saving state is set. It has a time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2, and a variation pattern according to the game state when setting a variation pattern of a special symbol (when executing a special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39)). It is configured to set the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referring to the table.

Next, the contents specified in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). The time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 changes the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined number of times from the end of the jackpot (after the end of the jackpot game) with respect to the time saving variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, it differs in that it is configured to set a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in which a specific time is specified.

Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the big hit ends, the total time of 1 to 4 special symbol changes after the big hit ends is constant (3) regardless of which special symbol change is executed. It is configured to be (seconds). Further, in the present embodiment, from the end of the jackpot game to the elapse of a predetermined period (4 seconds), the selection display for allowing the player to select the game method set in the time saving state (FIG. 82 (b)). ) Is displayed.

With this configuration, during the period when the selection display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball (reserved symbol) already acquired when the time saving state is entered is displayed. Since it can be easily executed, a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) different from the special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol) mainly executed by the game method (for example, left-handed game) selected during the time saving state is used. 2 Even if the change of the special symbol) is executed, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set when a hit (big hit, small hit) is won between 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit is set as a special symbol after the end of the big hit. It is different according to the number of fluctuations, and the timing to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol of the 4th rotation after the big hit, the timing to stop and display that the lottery result of the special symbol of the 3rd rotation is a hit, The timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol of the second rotation is a hit and the timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol of the first rotation is a hit are all configured to be constant. are doing.

With this configuration, the selection display screen (see FIG. 82 (b)) displayed when the time saving state is set can be displayed for a predetermined period (at least 3 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition to making it possible, the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to many reserved balls can be digested by using the period during which the selection display screen is displayed.

Further, if a hit (small hit, big hit) is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a specific fluctuation pattern is executed according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the time saving state is set. As a result, if a player wins a hit within a predetermined period (within a predetermined number of fluctuations of a special symbol (within 1 to 4 rotations)) after the end of the jackpot, the timing of notifying the player of the winning result (winning). (Timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol (third symbol) indicating) is configured to be constant.

In the second embodiment, a variation pattern table is used in which a special variation pattern is selected for the variation pattern set in the period from the time saving state is set until the variation of the special symbol is executed four times. However, for the period in which a special fluctuation pattern is selected after the time saving state is set, other periods may be used. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls (4) of the first special symbol and A special fluctuation pattern may be selectably configured for the number of special symbol fluctuations (8 times) corresponding to the total number (8) of the maximum number of reserved balls (4) of the second special symbol. However, the period from when the time saving state is set until the change of the special symbol is executed twice may be targeted. Further, in the second embodiment, when a winning is won, a fluctuation pattern dedicated to winning is set, but whether or not to set a fluctuation pattern dedicated to winning based on the content of the winning hit. It may be configured to determine whether or not, and set the fluctuation pattern based on the determination result.

Specifically, among the cases where the hit is won, the case where the big hit is won and the case where the small hit A is set (that is, the small hit type in which it is easier to obtain two types of hits than other small hit types) Only when the small hit to be set) is won, the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the hit may be set. As a result, it is possible to give a great expectation to the player who has noticed that the special symbol variation based on the variation pattern (variation time) different from the usual one is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), as a fluctuation pattern (variation time) set for the special symbol fluctuation after the fifth rotation (including the fifth rotation) after the time saving state is set, the first special The symbol is configured so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the second special symbol is set. As a result, if it is possible to continuously change the special symbol during the time saving state, the game that changes the first special symbol (first game, left-handed game) is the lottery (variation) of the special symbol. ) Can be executed in large numbers in a short period of time.

In FIG. 89 (b), the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot is defined as the content specified in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2, which is referred to when the time reduction state is set. ) Indicates only one type of fluctuation pattern for the lottery result of the special symbol after the fifth rotation (including the fifth rotation), but in reality, a counter (not shown) (depending on the control process of the main control device 110) is shown. It is configured to select one from a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times according to the value acquired from the loop counter whose value is updated), but the detailed description thereof is omitted.

In this way, even in the fluctuation pattern table configured to select one fluctuation pattern from a plurality of fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the second special symbol. It is configured to be easy to use. Therefore, if it is possible to continuously change the special symbol during the time saving state, the game that changes the first special symbol (first game, left-handed game) is the lottery (variation) of the special symbol. Can be executed in large numbers in a short period of time. The above-mentioned short fluctuation time variation pattern is most likely to be set, except when the first special symbol has a shorter variation time than the second special symbol in all the selectable variation patterns. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is easy to select is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or the average fluctuation time per fluctuation when all the fluctuation patterns are set according to the design values. Is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or the shortest fluctuation time that can be set according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is set according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It also includes configurations that are set or set to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time obtained. That is, when the player actually plays the pachinko machine 10 in the time-saving state, the number of fluctuations per unit time is the second special symbol in the first game (left-handed game) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. It suffices if it is set to be more than.

The time saving 2 table 202ae differs from the time saving table 202e of the first embodiment described above in the time saving end conditions (values set in various counters) set for each jackpot type, and the time saving. It differs in that the type of counter that sets the value that is the end condition is changed (increased). Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents specified in the time saving 2 table 202ae will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (d). FIG. 88 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving 2 table 202ae. In this time saving 2 table 202ae, the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 203ae are replaced with the small hit C counter 203p in place of the time saving medium counter 203k with respect to the above-mentioned time saving table 202e. The difference is that the counter 203ac is provided and the values set (assigned) to the various counters are different.

In the second embodiment, as described above, the player selects the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game) as a plurality of games having different game characteristics during the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be set, and it is easy to be satisfied among a plurality of end conditions (time reduction end conditions) for ending the time saving state depending on whether the first game is executed or the second game is executed. It is configured so that the termination conditions are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "100", and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "100". It is stipulated that the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "100", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "100", and the jackpot type is "big hit B". In the case of, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "80", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is "1", and the value of the small hit B counter 203n is "3". , It is stipulated that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "20".

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "40", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "70", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is "2", and the small hit. It is stipulated that the value of the B counter 203n is set to "5" and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "40". When the jackpot type is "big hit D", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to "30". , Special figure 2 The value of the counter 203ae is "80", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is "20". It is specified to be set.

That is, when the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit A" is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won twice (small hit A counter 203 m). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value becomes 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times (special). FIG. 2 The time saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0) becomes the time saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied.

In addition, when the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit B" is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won once (small hit A counter 203 m). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value becomes 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the small hit D is won 20 times (the value of the small hit counter 203ac). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied (when becomes 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied.

When the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit C" is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won twice (the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied (by becoming 0) becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 70 times (special figure 2). When the time saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0) becomes the time saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to "big hit D" is set, the above-mentioned "time saving end condition" is set. The same time saving state (time saving end condition) as "Big hit B" is set.

That is, it is established by differently executing (selected) game methods in the state where the time saving state is set (depending on the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game)). It is possible to make different time-saving end conditions that are easy to do. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play a different game as a game in the time saving state.

Furthermore, the time saving end condition (value set in various counters) is configured to be different according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and it is established when the same game (for example, right-handed game) is played during the time saving. It is configured so that the time saving end conditions that are easy to do are different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, you can be interested in the jackpot type of the jackpot that was won this time.

In this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types set when a jackpot is won, but the number of jackpot types is not limited to this, and five or more types of jackpot types are provided. You may. In this case, multiple jackpot types with the same game content (opening period, number of round games, inter-round interval period, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won are provided, and the time saving end condition is provided for each jackpot type. It is good to configure so that they are different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time reduction state (content of the time reduction end condition) set after the end of the jackpot game based on the content of the jackpot game to be executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), the time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied in a shorter period of time when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed. It is configured. As a result, in the first game, the period (time reduction period) in which the time reduction state is continuously set can be shortened.

In addition, in the second embodiment, it is easier to obtain two types of hits when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed (small hit A in which "small hit A" is set as the small hit type). It is configured so that it is easy to win. With this configuration, the first game is a game that provides the player with the playability of aiming for two types in a short time period, and the second game is a game that aims for one type in a long time period. It can be a game that provides sex to the player.

Therefore, by selecting the game method (first game, second game) to be executed during the time saving state, the game can be executed with different game characteristics, and the player is provided with a game that does not get tired of. be able to. Further, in the second embodiment, since the game period in the time saving state is different between the first game and the second game, the player can be made to select the game method according to the playable period. It is possible to provide a suitable game to a good player.

Further, in the second embodiment, regardless of which game method is selected during the time saving state, the jackpot probability during the time saving state (the probability of winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery and the small hit game during the small hit game). Since the sum of the probabilities that the ball passes through a specific area and wins a jackpot is almost the same (including an error that the player does not notice (for example, an error of 10% or less)), for which player You can play the game with confidence.

In the second embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type is set, the time saving end condition is set so that the player cannot have an advantage or disadvantage in the first game and the second game. As another configuration, for example, when a predetermined jackpot type is set, a time saving end condition is set so that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and other than the above-mentioned predetermined jackpot type. When a specific jackpot type is set, the time saving end condition may be set so that the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set jackpot type (executed jackpot game), so that the interest of the game can be improved. When the game methods (first game, second game) that are advantageous to the player are configured to be different according to the jackpot type in this way, all the jackpot types are considered in consideration of the predetermined distribution rate. It is preferable that the player is configured so that no advantage or disadvantage can occur between the case where the first game is executed and the case where the second game is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from always selecting only one of the game methods when the time saving state is set.

In addition, a storage means for storing the jackpot type (time saving state) set during a predetermined period (for example, the period after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) is provided, and the contents stored in the storage means (for example). A notification means for notifying (displaying) the player of the time saving history) may be provided. As a result, it is possible to predict the time saving state to be set in the future and select the game method based on the time saving state set in the past. In addition, the effect display (big hit effect display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game is used to notify the player of a suggestion mode suggesting a game method that is advantageous to the player. You may.

Return to FIG. 86 to continue the description. The small hit type selection 2 table 202af makes it possible to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit type selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above. , The difference is that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af, and FIG. 90 (b) is the contents specified in the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1. 90 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table af2.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202af is the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1 referred to when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. It has a special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2, which is referred to when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed.

In the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the value range of the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is "0 to 89", and the small hit type is "small hit A". However, "small hit B" is defined as a small hit type in "90 to 99".

Here, the small hit type "small hit A" is the same as the "small hit A" of the first embodiment described above, and when the ball passes through V (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, 2). "Big hit A" is set as the big hit type of the big hit that is set (executed) in (when the seed hit is acquired). The "small hit B" is the same as the "small hit B" of the first embodiment described above, and when the ball passes through V (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, when two types of hits are obtained. ) Is set (executed) as the jackpot type of the jackpot, "jacket B" is set.

Further, in the special symbol 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is set to "0" and the small hit type is set to "small hit A". , "1 to 99", "small hit D" is defined as a small hit type.

Here, the small hit type "small hit D" is a small hit type in which the small hit game with the lowest expectation per two types (about 5%) is executed among the plurality of small hit types, and passes through V. "Big hit B" is set as the big hit type set (executed) at the time (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game and when two types of hits are obtained). In other words, it is the most disadvantageous small hit for the player.

The opening scenario 2 table 202ag differs from the opening scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above in that an opening scenario corresponding to the small hit D is specified instead of the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit C. Except for the same. Then, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit D, among the opening scenarios corresponding to the small hit C, the on period of the flow path solenoid 650k is shortened, making it more difficult to pass V (passing the ball to a specific region). Since the difference is only between the point and the point that the opening scenario set at the time of passing V (when acquiring per type 2) is changed to 5 rounds instead of 15 rounds, detailed illustration is omitted.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b). FIG. 86B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, a small hit D counter 203ac is provided instead of the small hit C counter 203p, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203aa, and a special symbol. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae are added.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the first implementation failure described above. Since it is provided for the second special symbol, detailed explanation is omitted, but when the ball enters the second entry port 640, which triggers the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, the second It is variably set when a lottery (variation) of a special symbol is executed.

The small hit D counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of small hit winnings for which small hit D is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined in the jackpot control process 2 (S1554 in FIG. 98) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 98), it is defined in the time saving 2 table 202ae. The value is set (S1653 in FIG. 98).

Then, in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 94) of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94), the small hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed this time, the small hit won this time. When it is determined that the small hit type is small hit D, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (not shown). If it is determined that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac after the subtraction is 0, the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the game state. In the second embodiment, a plurality of time reduction end conditions for ending the time reduction state are set, and even if any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time reduction based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). Even if the end condition is met), the counter value is set (reset) to 0. In this way, even when the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (fifth time saving end condition) with reference to the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the small hit D counter Since the value of 203ac is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is continued even though the time saving state is completed. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine the establishment of the time-saving end condition when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial values (0). Since it is configured as such, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated from becoming complicated.

The special figure 1 counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and ends the time saving state when the time saving state is set. A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol set as an end condition for causing the movement is set, and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol changes during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, the process for ending the time saving state is executed.

The special figure 2 counter 203ae is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and ends the time saving state when the time saving state is set. A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol set as the end condition for causing the movement is set, and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol changes during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, the process for ending the time saving state is executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the time saving state is established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. There is a time saving end condition. As a result, when the first game (a game in which only the first special symbol is changed) and the second game (a game in which only the second special symbol is changed) are executed, the dedicated time saving end conditions can be satisfied. Can be.

In the second embodiment, the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 202ae are provided so as to measure the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the total variation of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). A means for measuring (number of times) (corresponding to the time reduction / medium counter 203k of the first embodiment) and a means for measuring either the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (for example, a special figure). 1 counter 203ae), and by executing the process of subtracting the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 from the total number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 (second special symbol) may be calculated. good.

With this configuration, among the time-saving end conditions, the end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. The end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the end condition that is satisfied based on the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol can be managed by using two counters. In order to obtain the same effect, the measured value (subtracted value) of the special figure 1 counter 203ae of the second embodiment and the measured value (subtracted value) of the special figure 2 counter 203af are added up. It may be configured to calculate the total number of fluctuations.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. As shown in FIG. 91A, the ROM 222 of the second embodiment has a state display selection table 222b and a final state display selection with respect to the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 26A). It differs from the table 222c in that a hold display selection table 222aa is provided instead of the table 222c.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the RAM 223 of the second embodiment has a provisional hit determination flag 223h and a provisional time reduction end with respect to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 26 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. Flag 223j, time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n, are deleted, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223aa, right-handed flag 223ab, left-handed flag 223ac, time-saving start flag 223ad The difference is that a time reduction counter 223ae is provided. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

The hold display selection table 222aa wins a prize for the hold symbol (see FIG. 84 (a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the hold ball of the special symbol acquired during the time saving state. It is referred to when selecting a display mode (see FIG. 84 (a)) for notifying the player of the pre-determination result of the information, and whether or not the time saving state ends (update status of the time saving ending condition). In addition, the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is suggested (notified) to the player in advance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the contents specified in the hold display selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 92 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hold display selection table 222aa. In the second embodiment, the hold mode effect of setting the same display mode as the state display mode set for the special symbol variation being executed in the first embodiment described above for the hold symbol is executed. (See FIG. 84).

The hold display selection table 222aa is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the hold mode effect, and is temporarily updated based on the result of the look-ahead processing of the temporary time saving information stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i. Various hold display modes are defined based on the obtained time saving information) and the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o. The values indicating the hold display modes described in the hold display selection table 222aa are the same as the state display modes of the first embodiment described above, and the display modes shown with reference to FIG. 15 are the values. Since it is specified correspondingly, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the hold display selection table 222aa, the current hit / fail judgment result stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i, that is, the special included in the winning information corresponding to the current processing. The lottery result of the symbol is "big hit", and the information (already hit information) indicating the big hit is not already stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i at the stage before the current processing is executed (already hit). When the information "none") and the pre-end information indicating that the time-saving pre-end condition is satisfied (pre-end information "yes") are stored, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is "0 to 0". The hold display mode "3" is defined in the range of "69", and the hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, when the result of the hit / fail judgment this time is "big hit", the hit information is "none", and the information before the end is "none", the value of the state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49". The hold display mode "3" is defined as the hold display mode "1" in the range of "50 to 69" and "9" in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set in the range where the value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information. , The hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

In this way, the prize information corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the hold display mode is set this time and the prize information already stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (acquired before the prize information targeted this time). By variably setting the hold display mode according to the winning / failing judgment result of the special symbol included in the winning information) and the progress of the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol for the player, It is possible to suggest in advance whether or not the time saving state will end.

Therefore, when the hold display mode in which the time saving state may end is displayed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to win the jackpot before the hold display mode is displayed. In addition, by making it possible to set multiple time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from suddenly ending in a game machine in which it is difficult to understand the period in which the time saving state is continuously set. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game that gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

Next, when the result of this hit / fail judgment is "small hit A", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state production counter 223o is "0 to 49". The hold display mode "5" is defined in the range of, the hold display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none". In this case, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", the hold display mode "7" is in the range of "50 to 69", and the hold display mode "7" is in the range of "70 to 99". "9" is specified in the range.

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set in the range where the value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information. , The hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment this time is "small hits B and D", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state production counter 223o is "0 to 49". The hold display mode "5" is defined in the range of "", the hold display mode "6" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none". In the case of, the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", the hold display mode "2" is in the range of "50 to 69", and the hold display mode "4" is in the range of "70 to 99". "9" is specified in the range of.

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set in the range where the value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information. , The hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

When the result of this hit / fail judgment is "missing", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state production counter 223o is held and displayed in the range of "0 to 49". Aspect "1" is a hold display mode "4" in the range of "50 to 69", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-end information is "none". The value of the state effect counter 223o is defined as a hold display mode "1" in the range of "0 to 69" and "9" in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, when the hit information is "Yes", the hold display mode is not set in the range where the value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69" regardless of the presence or absence of the pre-end fluctuation information. , The hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

As described above, in the second embodiment, the hold display selection table 222aa is described so that the same display mode is selected for the same conditions as the status display mode of the first embodiment described above. There is. In addition, when the winning information acquired earlier includes information for winning a big hit (win / fail judgment result), the display mode that can be set (selected) for the subsequent reserved symbols is restricted (holding display). Aspect "9" (see FIG. 15) is selected only). Therefore, when the hold display mode is selected and displayed for each of the plurality of hold symbols, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the second embodiment, the display mode of the acquired winning information (reserved symbol) is changed with high probability, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a determination means for determining whether or not to actually display the hold display mode selected in the hold display selection table 222aa, and the display mode of the hold symbol are changed according to the determination result of the determination means. When the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 39"), the hold display mode may not be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the future game content (whether or not the time saving state has been completed and whether or not the jackpot has been won) from being easily grasped only by the display mode of the reserved symbol.

Further, since the hold display mode "9" is selected with a predetermined probability regardless of the information included in the acquired winning information (holding symbol), the future game will be played only by the holding symbol display mode. It is possible to further suppress the fact that the content (whether or not the time saving state is completed and whether or not the jackpot is won) is easily grasped.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 91B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

When the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa receives a command related to the second special symbol among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main controller 110, the second special symbol 2 according to the content indicated by the command. It is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls of the symbol. Since the detailed configuration is the same except that the target command is changed with respect to the configuration of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The right-handed flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to execute the right-handed game (second game), and when set to ON, the right-handed game (second game) is set. It indicates that it is a period for executing the game). The right-handed flag 223ab has the winning information received in the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101 (a)) executed in the winning information-related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100). When it is determined that the prize information is not related to (1 special symbol) (that is, the prize information is related to special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No in FIG. 101 (a)), it is set to ON. The flag.

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101 (b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to off when the time saving state ends.

The left-handed flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to execute the right-handed game (second game), and when set to ON, the left-handed game (first). It indicates that it is a period for executing the game). The left-handed flag 223ac has the winning information received in the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101 (a)) executed in the winning information-related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100). When it is determined that the winning information is related to (1 special symbol) (S3002: Yes in FIG. 101 (a)), it is set to ON.

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101 (b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to off when the time saving state ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game method (first game or second game) when the time saving state is set can be selected by adjusting the direction in which the player actually shoots the ball. It is configured as follows. Then, the game method selected by the player is determined to be an appropriate game method in the time saving state, and the game method not selected by the player is determined to be an inappropriate game method in the time saving state. ..

In the second embodiment, the ball entry port where the ball first enters after the time saving state is set is in the left-handed area (the area where the ball can flow down (pass) when the left-handed game is performed). The first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) or the second ball port arranged in the right-handed area (the area where the ball can flow down (pass) when a right-handed game is played). 640 is determined by analyzing the winning command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the appropriate game method in the time saving state is determined based on the determination result, but the time saving state is In the set state, it suffices if it is configured so that it can be determined whether or not an appropriate game is being played, and if an appropriate game is not being played, an error notification can be executed. A configuration other than the configuration of the form may be used.

For example, an operating means that can be operated by a player is provided, and a game method during a jackpot game or during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the jackpot game is completed and a time saving state is set can be used. It may be configured to be selected by operating the operating means, and may be configured to set an appropriate gaming method when the ball passes through the gaming area corresponding to the gaming method selected by the operating means. As a result, the game method desired by the player can be set as an appropriate game method more reliably.

Further, it may be configured so that the player can variably set an appropriate game method while the time saving state is set. With this configuration, by changing the game method while predicting the update status of the time reduction end condition, the player can positively select the game (to set the game method) so as to have a more advantageous time reduction state. Game) can be performed. In this case, the fact that the game method is changed is set by operating the operating means, and it is inappropriate regardless of which game (first game, second game) is executed during the game method variable period. It is good to configure it so that it is not discriminated as a game. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation of changing the game method performed during the time saving state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one ball enters a specific entry slot, an appropriate game method is set according to the type of entry slot into which the ball enters. However, for example, it may be configured to set an appropriate game method according to the type of the entry slot into which a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls have entered after the time saving state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent an erroneous game method from being set by firing a ball into a game area corresponding to an undesired game method due to an erroneous operation.

The time saving start flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the time saving state has been set as the game state, and indicates that the time saving state has been set by being set to ON. The time saving start flag 223ad determines that a time saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes in FIG. 99) in the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described later, and further, the received time saving related command is transmitted. When it is determined that the time saving setting information (information indicating that the time saving state has been set) (S2252: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99).

Then, it is referred to in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) (S3301 in FIG. 104), and when it is determined to be ON, 4000 is set in the value of the time reduction time counter 223ae described later (S3302 in FIG. 104). ), The flag is set to off (S3303 in FIG. 104). That is, the time saving start flag 223ad is used to determine that the time saving state has been set on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is a dedicated process (time saving state) only when it is set to ON. The process to be executed only when is set) is executed.

The timekeeping time counter 223ae is a counter for continuing the elapsed period (elapsed time) after the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, a predetermined value is set and the value is subtracted. As a result, the elapsed period from the time saving state is set is determined. When it is determined that the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to ON in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104), the time reduction time counter 223ae has a value of 4000 (S3301: Yes in FIG. 104). Is set (S3302).

Next, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed during the normal game state (during the normal state), and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Will be done. Here, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, and if a big hit is won, the normal state is set as a game state after the big hit is completed. It is configured in. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, even if the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs a right-handed game during a normal state (during a normal game), the ball does not enter the second entrance 640. Since it is configured to be (difficult), the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and the player who commits the fraudulent act is not allowed to play an advantageous game. It is a measure for. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to allow the player to perform a lottery (game) more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, there was a risk of cheating and drawing a lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed due to fraudulent acts.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize information of the second special symbol (the prize information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not stored, for example, the time is shortened. The winning information of the second special symbol is reserved and stored in the state (in the state where the electric accessory 640a is easily moved to the protruding position), and the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is based on the reserved winning information. (Fluctuation) is never executed. Thereby, when the normal game is performed, it is possible to surely prevent the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily inserted into the second entrance 640 by the opening operation (protruding operation) of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the second entrance 640. A right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (ball). (By passing through a specific area), the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is set (executed) via the small hit game, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate discomfort to the player who has won the big hit via the small hit game.

In this embodiment, the ball can pass through a specific area during the small hit game depending on the small hit types (small hits A to C) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that small hit games with different characteristics (the possibility that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball) are executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (first special symbol or first special symbol or first special symbol) is set as an end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the time saving state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player (game state more advantageous than the normal state). 2 The number of fluctuations (first time reduction end condition) that is established when the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) As a result, when the number of winnings in the small hit (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small hit winning) reaches the specified number of operations, the operation number end condition (second time reduction end condition) is satisfied. , Is set.

Further, although the details will be described later, the second time saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small hit type (small hit game to be executed) set when the small hit is won. There is.

Then, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per type) before the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition or the second time saving ending condition is satisfied. (Winning), or a small hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and during the small hit game according to the winning small hit (small hit game according to the small hit type), the ball is passed through a specific area to win the big hit. When it is acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the above-mentioned first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) or the second type before acquiring per type or per type 2. When any of the time saving end conditions (end conditions according to the small hit winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way may end the time saving state when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed when the time saving state is set ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of winning the second kind. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in the game (lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time saving state is set and the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit game is completed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the left-handed game is being performed, and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. If the number is (4), the jackpot is won, and in the "first special symbol change (lottery) in the time saving state" that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot is won. Even so, it is possible to suppress the provision of a result that is disadvantageous to the player to the player.

<Control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
In the control process in the second embodiment, the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) is changed to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 94) with respect to the above-described first embodiment, and the special symbol variation processing is executed. The time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42), and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is changed to the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96). The difference is that the look-ahead process 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed instead of the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44) executed in the start winning process. Further, the difference is that the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98), and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). In this special symbol variation processing 2, the point of acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab and the time saving number update processing are performed with respect to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of the above.

When the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not changing (S202). : No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are acquired (S251), and the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab value. It is determined whether (N2) is larger than 0 (S252).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is not 0 (S252: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (S253) and changed by calculation. A special symbol 2 hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab is set (S254). After the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S254, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (S255). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) Similarly, the processes of S206 to S210 are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202: Yes), S211 to S213 are the same as in the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Processing is executed. In the process of S213, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S213: Yes), the processes of S214 to S218 are executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), and this process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in the process of S213 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S213: No), the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the time saving number update process 2 is executed (S271). This time reduction number update process 2 (S271) is a process for updating the time reduction number of times and setting the game state to the normal state, similarly to the time reduction number update process (see FIG. 42). The details of the time saving number update process 2 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) is completed, the processes S220, S221 and S218 are executed in the same manner as in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the time saving number update process 2 (S271) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94) will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving number update process 2 (S271). In this time saving number update process 2 (S271), the time saving number is subtracted even for the fluctuation of the first special symbol with respect to the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above, and the time saving end condition. The difference is that it is changed so as to determine whether or not is established, and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time reduction number update process 2 (S271) is executed, the processes S601 and S602 are executed in the same manner as the time reduction number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. After finishing the processing of S602, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of FIG. 2 (S651). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (S651: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is subtracted by 1 (S652), and the process proceeds to the process of S653. On the other hand, in the processing of S651, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (that is, the fluctuation of the special figure 1) (S651: No), the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to 1. Subtraction (S654) is performed, and the process proceeds to S653.

In the processing of S653, a command for the number of remaining time reductions indicating the values of various counters is set (S653), and then whether the value of any of the time reduction medium counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0. Determine (S655). If it is determined that none of the values of the time saving / medium counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S655: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S655, when it is determined that any of the values of the time saving / medium counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S651: Yes), the first embodiment described above The process of S605 to S607 is executed in the same manner as the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the above, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (S155). In the start winning process 2 (S155), in addition to the start winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the second entrance 640, and the second When there is a start prize at the entrance 640, the process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters. Is added, and the look-ahead process 2 is executed instead of the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44).

When the start winning process 2 (S155) is started, first, the process of S701 is executed in the same manner as the start winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S701, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the processes of S702 and S703 described above are executed.

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S753. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S703: Yes), from S704 described above. The process of S706 is executed.

After finishing the processing of S706, it is next determined whether or not the present time is during the time reduction or the jackpot of the special symbol (S751). If it is determined that the current time is during the time reduction or the jackpot of the special symbol is being hit (S751: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of S751, if it is determined that the current time is not during the time saving or the jackpot of the special symbol (S751: No), the look-ahead process 2 (S752) is executed and the process is shifted to S753.

In the process of S701, when the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is not detected (S701: No), there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b In the processing of S753 executed when the value (N1) is 4, which is the maximum value (S703: No), and when the processing of S752 is completed, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Whether or not it is determined (S753). In the process of S753, similarly to the process of S701, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S753: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired (S754), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the number counter 203ab is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S755).

Then, whether or not there is a ball entering the second entrance 640 (S753: No), or even if there is a prize at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is If it is not less than 4 (S755: No), the process proceeds to the look-ahead process 2 (S752). On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S753: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than 4 (S755: Yes), the special symbol 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203ab is added by 1 (S756). Then, a special figure 2 hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (S757).

The special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is also stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201, similarly to the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the process of S705. In the external output process (S1501) of the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 51), the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab from the special figure 2 hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 2 of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223aa.

After setting the special figure 2 hold ball number command by the processing of S757, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first area of the free hold area (special figure 2 hold 1st area to special figure 2 hold 4 area) of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203aa of the RAM 203 (S758). In the process of S758, as in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 hold second area is set, if the value is 2, the special figure 2 hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the special figure 2 hold fourth area is set. , Each is the first area.

Next, when the process of S758 is completed, the process proceeds to the look-ahead process 2 (S752), and the main process is completed.

Next, the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (S752) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (S752). The look-ahead process 2 (S752) in the second embodiment is referred to when there is a new prize in the first ball opening 64 with respect to the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above. Instead of the random number table 202a per unit, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the variation pattern table 202d (normal variation pattern table 202d1 or time saving variation pattern table 202d2), the first random number 2 table 202aa, special figure 1 Refer to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2), lottery in the second special symbol. It differs in that it adds a look-ahead of the results, and is otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the look-ahead process 2 (S752) is executed, first, the same process of S801 as the look-ahead process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above is executed. In the process of S801, if there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S851: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S851: Yes), special symbol 1 random number 2 table aa1, special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table Based on 202af1 and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance (S852).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S852 is set (S853), and the process proceeds to the process of S854. On the other hand, in the process of S851, even if there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S851: No), the process proceeds to the process of S854.

In the process of S854, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854). As a result of the determination, if there is no new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854: Yes), special symbol 2 random number 2 table aa2, special figure 2 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab2, special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table Based on 202af2 and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance (S855).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S855 is set (S856), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554). This jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This process differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in that the time reduction content (time reduction end condition) set at the end of the jackpot control (end timing of the ending effect) is different. ..

When the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is started, first, the same processes as those of S1601 to S1612 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above are executed, and in the process of S1612, it is the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot winning time is shortened (S1651). If it is determined that the jackpot winning time is short (S1651: Yes), the process proceeds to S1653. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot winning time is not in the time saving (that is, it is in the normal game state) (S1651: No), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot). Determine (S1652).

When it is determined that the jackpot is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and it is determined that the jackpot is not C (5R time saving no jackpot) in the processing of S1652 (S1613: No), or in the processing of S1651. When it is determined that the jackpot winning time is in the time reduction (S1651: Yes), the time reduction end condition corresponding to each jackpot type is set based on the time reduction grant 2 table 202ae (see FIG. 88 (d)) (S1653). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No) and the jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot) is determined in the processing of S1652 (S1652: Yes), or S1653. When the process of is completed, the same process as in S1617 to S1620 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above is executed, and this process is completed.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. In the second embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99) and the prize information related process (see FIG. 57) with respect to the above-described first embodiment. The point of changing to the prize information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), the point of changing the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 103), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63). Was replaced with the effect setting process 2 (FIG. 104), detailed explanations were added for various counter update processes (see FIG. 105 (a)), and details of the effect update process (see FIG. 105 (b)). It is different from the point where the above explanation is added, and it is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S2163). The command determination process 2 (S2163) is a process executed when a prize information command is received from the main control device 110 with respect to the command determination process (S2113 of FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the related process (see FIG. 57) is changed to the prize information related process 2 (see FIG. 100) and the content of the process to be executed when a time saving related command is received is changed. Are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, the same processes S2201 to S2209 as the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S2209 that the command received this time is a prize information command (S2209: Yes), the prize information related process 2 is executed (S2251), and then the process proceeds to S2217. The content of the winning information-related process 2 executed in the process of S2251 will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

On the other hand, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a winning information command (S2209: No), then it is the same as the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 of FIG. 56). If the processing of S2211 to S2215 is executed and it is determined in the processing of S2215 that the command received this time is a time saving related command (S2215: Yes), then the content of the received time saving related command is set to the time saving. It is determined whether the information is the information transmitted from the main control device 110 when the time saving state is newly set (S2252).

In the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information received this time is the time saving setting information (S2252: Yes), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to on (S2253), and the time saving information is stored in the time saving information update area 223g. The information is updated (S2254), and the process proceeds to S2217. In the process of S2254, a value that is a time saving end condition is set in various counters based on the information included in the time saving related command received this time. Specifically, for example, the time reduction corresponding to the content set in S1614 of the command (big hit control process 2 (see FIG. 98)) including the time reduction setting information transmitted at the timing of the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot B. When a command indicating information) is received, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "80", and the small hit A counter is referred to with reference to the time saving 2 table 202ae. Set the value of 203m to "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n to "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac to "20" (see FIG. 88 (d)).

Returning to FIG. 99, the description continues. When the processing of S2254 is completed, the processing of S2217 is then executed to end the main processing. On the other hand, in the processing of S2252, when it is determined that the information included in the time saving related command received this time is not the time saving setting information (S2252: No), that is, the information included in the time saving related command received this time is In the case of information (time saving update information) that updates the time saving information (number of fluctuations and number of small hit wins) corresponding to the time saving end condition (close to the time saving end condition), the information about the time saving end condition has already been set. Since the time saving game has been started, the process of S2253 for setting the time saving start flag to be turned on is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2254.

In the process of S2254 in this case, the time saving update information is read from the plurality of information included in the time saving related command received this time, and the processing of updating the target time saving information is executed. Further, when the content indicated by the time saving information after the update indicates that the remaining period until the time saving end condition is satisfied is less than the predetermined period, that fact is stored in the time saving information update area.

Next, the contents of the winning information-related process 2 (S2251) will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prize information related process 2 (S2251). The prize information-related process 2 (S2251) is for setting a display mode indicating the updated content of the time saving information based on the prize information with respect to the prize information-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S2210 in FIG. 57). The difference is that the contents of the processing of are different and the processing for setting the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) in the time saving state is added. ing. Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the prize information related process 2 (S2251) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f (information for indicating the currently set game state) is read (S2301), and the read information is read. It is determined whether the gaming state indicated by is the gaming state indicating the time saving state (whether the time saving is in progress) (S2302). If it is determined by the process of S2302 that the current time is not in the short time (S2302: No), after executing the same process as S2312 of the prize information related process (see FIG. 57) of the first embodiment described above, S2311 Move to the processing of.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the currently set game state is the time saving state (time saving is in progress) (S2302: Yes), the game state setting process is then executed (S2351). This game state setting process (S2351) determines whether the game method selected by the player in the current time saving state is the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). , The process for setting an appropriate game is executed in the time saving state, and the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 (a).

When the process of S2351 is completed, the game content determination process is then executed (S2352). This game content determination process (S2352) executes a process for determining whether an appropriate game is being executed during the time saving state, and for detailed contents, refer to FIG. 101 (b). It will be described later. When the process of S2352 is completed, the hold display setting process is subsequently executed (S2353), and then the process proceeds to the process of S2311 to end this process.

The hold display setting process (S2353) executes a process for setting the display mode of the hold symbol displayed corresponding to the prize information command received this time based on the prize information included in the prize information command received this time. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (a), the content of the game state setting process (S2351) executed in the prize information related process 2 (S2251 of the figure 100) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (S2351). In this game state setting process (S2351), the game method (game direction) executed during the current time saving state is set based on the winning information included in the winning information command first received after the time saving state is set. Execute the process to do.

When the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101A) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001). The time saving start flag 223ad determines that the time saving setting information has been received in the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) (S2252: Yes in FIG. 99), that is, when a new time saving state is set. It is set to on (S2253 in FIG. 99). That is, in the process of S3001, it is determined whether the state is the state immediately after the time saving state is set.

If it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001: No), then the winning information received this time is related to Special Figure 1 (lottery (variation) of the first special symbol). It is determined whether it is (winning information for showing the result) (S3002), and if it is determined that it is related to the special figure 1 (S3002: Yes), it is placed in the left-handed area in the state where the time saving state is set. Since it indicates that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 provided, the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to on (S3003), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to off (S3004), and so on. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is not related to the special figure 1 (related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No), the time saving state is set. In this state, since it indicates that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 arranged in the right-handed area, the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3005), and the process proceeds to S3004. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3001 that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set on (set to off) (S3001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the second embodiment, the time saving start flag 223ad is set to on and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to on from the time when the time saving state is set until the first winning information command is received. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the area where the ball entry port into which the ball enters is arranged (right-handed area, left-handed area). The game in which the ball is fired against the player is set to be an appropriate game in the time saving state, and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to off.

Thereby, the timing for setting the game method in the time saving state can be limited to the period in which the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (b), the content of the game content determination process (S2352) executed in the prize information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99). I will explain. FIG. 101B is a flowchart showing the contents of the game content determination process (S2352). In this game content determination process (S2352), the prize information included in the prize information command received this time is the prize information based on the appropriate game method for the game method set as the appropriate game method during the time saving state. Is determined, and a process for setting an error command is executed based on the determination result.

When the game content determination process (S2352) is executed, it is first determined whether the winning information received this time is related to the special figure 1 (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol) ( In S3101), when it is determined that it is related to the special figure 1 (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102). In the process of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102: Yes), the left-handed game (first game) in the time-saving state is set to be an appropriate game. While in the state (with the left-handed flag 223ac turned on), a winning command indicating that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 in which the ball launched by the left-handed game can enter is received. Since this is a case, this process is terminated as it is without determining that it is abnormal.

On the other hand, in the process of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to on (set to off) (S3102: No), the right-handed game (second game) in the time saving state. Is set to be an appropriate game (with the right-handed flag 223ab turned on), and the ball launched by the left-handed game can enter the first ball entrance 64. Since it is the case that the winning command indicating the ball is received, it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed, the display error command is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of S3101, the winning information received this time is not related to special figure 1 (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol), that is, the winning information received this time is related to special figure 2. When it is determined that it is (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the second special symbol) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3103). ), If it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3103: No), the left-handed game (first game) in the time saving state ) Is set to be an appropriate game (with the left-handed flag 223ac turned on), and the ball launched by the right-handed game can enter the second entrance 640. Since this is the case when a winning command indicating a winning ball has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game has not been performed, a display error command is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

As described above, when a winning command is received after setting an appropriate game method in the current time saving state by the game state setting process (S2351) shown in FIG. 101 (a), FIG. 101 ( By the game content determination process (S2352) shown in b), it is possible to determine whether or not the game method in the time saving state is appropriate. By configuring in this way, even if the player can select the game method (direction in which the ball is launched) at his / her own will, the game method selected by the player is set as an appropriate game method, and the game method is set as an appropriate game method. Since an error command indicating an abnormality can be set when a game method other than the above is executed, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), after the game state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)) is executed, the game content determination process (see FIG. 101 (b)). Is configured so that the game content determination process is not executed when neither the right-handed flag 223ab nor the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON. There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), if one of the flags (right-handed flag 223ab, left-handed flag 223ac) is not set to on, the other flag (right-handed) Since it can be determined that the middle flag 223ab and the other flag of the left-handed flag 223ac are set to ON, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In the second embodiment, in the game state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)), an appropriate game method in the time saving state is set based on the winning information included in one winning information command. Therefore, when the game content determination process (see FIG. 101B) is executed, an appropriate game method has already been set (either the right-handed flag 223ab or the left-handed flag 223ac is on). It will be set to).

On the other hand, for example, as the game state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)), the winning information command is received a plurality of times, and the time saving state is appropriate based on the winning information included in the received winning information command. When executing the process of setting the game method, the appropriate game method in the time saving state is set until a predetermined period elapses after the time saving state is set (until the winning information command is received a predetermined number of times). You will not be able to do it. In such a case, a flag (unset flag) is provided to indicate that the game method has not been set, and if the unset flag is on, that is, if the game method has not been set, the game content determination process (See FIG. 101 (b)) may be configured to be skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the error command from being set based on the game (ball firing) executed while the game method is being determined.

In the second embodiment, the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) during the time saving state is included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. Since the determination is made based on the winning information, it is not necessary to collect dedicated information for determining the game method, and the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a means for detecting the passage of a ball in an area where a ball flowing down a left-handed region surely passes and a means for detecting a ball passing in an area where a ball flowing down a right-handed region surely passes. A means for the game may be provided, and the detection result of the ball passage of each means may be collected to set an appropriate game method during the time saving state. With such a configuration, it is necessary to add a dedicated configuration and the control process becomes complicated, but since the gaming method selected by the player can be reliably detected, the setting accuracy of the gaming method can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, in order to determine the gaming method selected by the player, the detection result of a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance is used. It may be configured as.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the hold display setting process (S2353) executed in the prize information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be described. .. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display setting process (S2353). In this hold display setting process (S2353), when an appropriate prize information command is received during the time reduction state, the update status of the time reduction state and the jackpot game are displayed for the hold symbol displayed corresponding to the prize information command. The process of setting the effect mode of the hold suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of execution is executed.

When the hold display setting process (S2353) is executed, first, the prize information command received this time is a command including the prize information related to the special figure 1 (the prize information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol). (S3201), and if it is determined to be related to the special figure 1 (S3201: Yes), it is determined whether the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202). If it is determined in the processing of S3202 that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202: Yes), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, and will be described later. The process proceeds to the processes of S3203 to S3206, and the process for executing the hold suggestion effect is executed by using the hold symbol for the received winning information command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3202, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to on (set to off) (S3202: No), the winning information command received this time is an appropriate game. Because it is a winning information command that does not correspond to (because the winning information command of the first special symbol is received while the right-handed game (second game) is determined to be an appropriate game), the processing of S3203 to S3206 Is skipped to end this process.

Similarly, in the processing of S3201, when it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information related to the special figure 1 (S3201: No), that is, the winning information related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol). If it is determined that the command is set to ON (S3207), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3207), and if it is determined to be ON (S3207: Yes), the prize received this time is won. Since the information command is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the process shifts to the processing of S3203 to S3206 described later, and the processing for executing the hold suggestion effect is executed using the holding symbol for the received winning information command. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3207, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3207: No), the winning information command received this time is an appropriate game. Because it is a prize information command that does not correspond to (because the prize information command of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received while the left-handed game (first game) is determined to be an appropriate game). The processing of S3203 to S3206 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the winning information command is received, the winning information included in the received winning information command is the winning information corresponding to the gaming method selected by the player. It is configured to determine whether or not it is, and to execute the effect (hold display effect) using the prize information included in the prize information command only when the prize information corresponds to the game method selected by the player. ing. As a result, it is prohibited to execute the hold display effect for a game that the player does not intend (for example, a game in which the operation handle 51 is mistakenly operated and the ball is launched in a direction different from the intended direction). can do.

Therefore, by continuing the game method selected by the player himself / herself, information advantageous to the player (information provided to the player by the hold display effect) can be obtained, and the player is motivated. It is possible to play a game. In the second embodiment, when the player plays an unintended game (a game method different from the game method selected by himself / herself), the hold display effect is not executed, but the player The information that can be acquired by the player may be configured to be disadvantageous as compared with the case where the player uses the game method selected by himself / herself. For example, the frequency of occurrence of the hold display effect may be reduced, or the hold display effect may be used. The content of the information indicated by the display mode displayed on the screen may be reduced, or the display mode indicating the information of the content different from the fact may be displayed.

Return to FIG. 102 and continue the description. In the process of S3203, the information of the temporary time saving information update area 223i is updated based on the winning information received this time (S3203), and the hold display mode using the hold display selection table 222aa based on the contents of the temporary time saving information update area 223i. Is selected (S3204), the selected hold display mode is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3205), and the display hold display command corresponding to the selected hold display mode is set (S3206). This process ends.

Next, the contents of the variation display setting process 2 (S2134) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134). The variation display setting process 2 (S2134) performs the effect setting process (S2804 in FIG. 63) in contrast to the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that it is replaced with S2851), and the rest is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the effect setting process 2 (S2851) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2851). The effect setting process 2 (S2851) is different from the effect setting process (S2804) of the first embodiment described above in that the process executed when the time saving state is set as the game state is different. are doing. The other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the effect setting process 2 (S2851) is executed, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as the above-described effect setting process (see FIG. 63) are executed, and the information read in the process of S2902 indicates the time saving state. If it is determined that this is not the case (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information read in the process of S2902 is the information indicating the time saving information (S2902: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301). Here, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that it is the timing to set the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set ( S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

In the process of S3302, 4000 is set to the value of the timekeeping time counter 223ae, then the timekeeping start flag 223ad is set to off, the display game selection command is set, and S3304), and this process is terminated. The display game selection command set in the process of S3304 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 of FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display game selection command, the display control device 114 causes the player to select the game method in the time saving state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82 (b)). ) Is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set on (set to off) (S3301: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving time counter 223ae is larger than 0. Determine (S3305).

The time-saving counter The time counter 233ae measures a predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment) from the timing of setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation after the time-saving state is set, and in the processing of S3305, It is determined whether or not the current timing has passed the above-mentioned predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment).

In the process of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the timekeeping time counter 223ae is larger than 0, that is, 4 seconds have elapsed from the timing of setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation after the time saving state is set. If it is determined that the game method is not used (S3305: Yes), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is in the period of continuously displaying the selection screen (see FIG. 82 (b)) for selecting the game method. Therefore, the processes of S3306 to S3308 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the timekeeping time counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (0) (S3305; No), the hold included in the winning information storage area corresponding to this fluctuation. The mode information is read (S3306), the effect mode corresponding to the read hold mode information is set (S3307), the display effect command indicating the selected effect mode is set (S3308), and the present process is terminated.

As described above, when setting the variable display corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display is set based on the hold mode information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect mode associated with the hold effect display already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the hold mode information. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect having a relevance for a long period of time (a period in which a plurality of changes in the special symbol are executed), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 102), the winning information corresponding to the game method (first game (left-handed game) or second game (right-handed game)) selected by the player is provided. Since the hold mode information is set only for the player, the target special symbol variation when the effect setting process (S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed corresponds to the game method selected by the player. In the case of a special symbol variation that has not been performed, since the hold mode information is not set in the winning information storage area 223a, the effect mode is not set for the variation display. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect display (see FIGS. 83 (a) and 83 (b)) using the predetermined effect mode only for the special symbol variation corresponding to the game method selected by the player, and the effect is easy for the player to understand. Can be provided.

Next, various counter update processes 2 (S2161) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a). FIG. 105 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processes 2 (S2161). The various counter update processes 2 (S2161) differ from the various counter update processes (S2111) of the first embodiment described above in that a process of updating (subtracting) the value of the timekeeping time counter 223ae is added. The other elements are the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

When various counter update processes 2 (S2161) are executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the timekeeping counter 223ae is larger than 0 (S3401), and if it is determined to be larger than 0 (S3401: Yes), The value of the time-saving time counter 223ae is subtracted by 1 (S3402), and then the values of various other counters are subtracted (updated) by 1 (S3403), and this process is terminated. Since the details of the various counters updated in the process of S3403 are the same as the various counter update processes of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3401, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving time counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (0) (S3401: No), the processing of S3402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3403, and then the process is started. This process ends. That is, since the value of the time-saving time counter 223ae is decremented (updated) by 1 each time various counter update processes 2 (S2161) executed at 1-millisecond intervals are executed, the effect setting process 2 ( The value of 4000 set in (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is a value for measuring a period of 4 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105 (b), the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2162) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105B is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2162). The effect update process 2 (S2162) is different from the effect update process (S2112) of the first embodiment described above in that a process for setting the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 in the time saving state is added. However, the others are the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

When the effect update process 2 (S2162) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving state is set (S3501), when it is determined that the time saving state is set (S3501: Yes), and then the time saving state is set. It is determined whether the value of the timekeeping counter 223ae is larger than 0 (S3502). That is, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol change in the time saving state was executed.

In the processing of S3502, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving time counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (0) (S3502: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON. Then (S3503), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3503: Yes), a right-handed display command is set (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3508. When this right-handed display command is set, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the right-handed display command, it displays the characters "right-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and is right to the player. Guidance is displayed to execute the hitting game.

In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3503: No), then the left-handed flag 223ac is set to on. It is determined whether or not (S3504), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3505: Yes), a left-handed display command is set (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

When a left-handed display command is set in the process of S3506, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the left-handed display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and left the player with respect to the player. Guidance is displayed to execute the hitting game.

On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set on (set to off) (S3505; No), that is, it is held and stored after the time saving state is set. The change of the special symbol that had been performed was executed, but if 4 seconds have passed without a new ball entering the 1st entrance 64 or the 2nd entrance 640, a display standby command is set. Then (S3507), the process proceeds to S3508. The display standby command set in the process of S3507 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby command, the display control device 114 continuously displays the character "?" In the guidance display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to the player. The screen for selecting the game method (see FIG. 82 (b)) is continuously displayed.

With this configuration, even if the game is temporarily interrupted due to a restroom break or the like after the jackpot game is completed, it is possible to easily restart the game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, different time saving end conditions are set for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the player It is configured so that a game for executing the lottery of the special figure 1 (left-handed game) and a game for executing the lottery of the special figure 2 (right-handed game) can be selected.

As a result, it is possible to play a plurality of types of games in a state in which the time saving state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the games at an early stage.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the game of executing the lottery of Special Figure 1 (left-handed game) is executed during the time saving state, the game of executing the lottery of Special Figure 2 (right-handed game) is executed. It is configured so that the time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied and it is easier to win a small hit that is easier to obtain a second type hit than in the case of doing so.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to select a game that is likely to be a big hit but the time saving state is easy to end, and a game that is difficult to be a big hit but the time saving state is hard to end. It is possible to arbitrarily select a game according to the convenience.

In the second embodiment, the state in which the time saving state is set is set as an advantageous state, and in the advantageous state, the player is configured to select a plurality of types of games, but other than that, For example, the gaming state in which the probabilistic state is set may be set as the advantageous state, and the case where the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set may be set as the advantageous state.

Further, in the second embodiment, when an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state) is set and an end condition (for example, a time saving end condition) for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, it is disadvantageous to the player. The game state (for example, the normal state) is set so as to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the advantageous state end condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, the advantageous state is higher than the advantageous state. It may be configured to shift to a more advantageous super-advantageous state. With such a configuration, the player can be enthusiastically played so as to quickly shift from the advantageous state to the super-advantageous state.

Further, as the advantageous state end condition for terminating the advantageous state, a disadvantageous end condition in which a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state) that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state is set by being established, and a super-advantageous state that is more advantageous than the advantageous state (for example). For example, it may be configured to set an advantageous end condition in which a latent state) is set, or a disadvantageous end in addition to the ease of establishing the advantageous end condition depending on the game method selected. It is advisable to configure the conditions so that the ease of establishment of the favorable termination condition is also different.

With this configuration, the subsequent game results can be significantly different depending on the game method selected in the advantageous state for the player, so that the player feels as if he / she played the game by himself / herself. Can be given.

In the second embodiment, an example of two types of game methods (left-handed game, right-handed game) selected by the player is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any of three or more types of game methods can be used. It may be configured to select a game method.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 124. In the third embodiment, the point that the second variable winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650 and the game content based on the lottery result of the second special symbol are different from the first embodiment. It differs in that.

Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, when a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit game in which the V winning device 650 is opened is executed, and during the small hit game. When the ball that has won the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area, it has two types of hits in which the big hit game is executed (set) after the small hit game is completed. However, in the third embodiment, the small hit is executed. When the player wins the game, only a small hit game for opening the second variable winning device 1650 is executed, and a specific area is not provided in the second variable winning device 1650. That is, this third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that it uses a pachinko machine 10 that does not have game playability per type 2.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a second variable winning device 1650 instead of the V winning device 650 and a configuration of the electric accessory 640a with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the above is changed, the other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a ball flowing down the right side region (right-handed region) of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the through gate 67, and an electric accessory is on the downstream side thereof. A second ball entry port 640 with a 640a is provided. A plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided on the downstream side thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, as in the first embodiment described above, the ball flows down into the left side region (left-handed region) of the variable display device unit 80 while the normal state is set as the gaming state. A game aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game to be made, that is, a game mainly in which a lottery of the first special symbol is performed, and while the time saving state is set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 It is configured so that a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by a right-handed game in which a ball flows down to a right-handed area (right-handed area), that is, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol is mainly performed.

Details will be omitted because they have been described in the first embodiment, but also in the second embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is in the left side region where the ball launched by the left-handed game can flow down (to the left side of the lower end position of the variable display device unit 80). A second variable winning device 1650 is provided. The second variable winning device 1650 executes an opening operation in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won by a lottery of a second special symbol.

Although the details will be described later, in the small hit game of the third embodiment, an opening operation (opening period is 0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650 is executed. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be arranged at a position where the ball is difficult to reach.

That is, if only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit among a plurality of special symbols and a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball may flow down. The second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the left-handed area. With this configuration, it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650 when the small hit game is executed.

In the third embodiment configured as described above, the small hit winning of the second special symbol can be used only in order to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, since the player is not given a privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game executed by the small hit winning, even if the winning probability is set so that the small hit is won with a high probability, the player is given a prize. It is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessive privilege is given.

Furthermore, since the period during which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened is set to a short period (0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650, there is a high probability of a small hit. Even if the winning probability is set so as to win the game, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given an excessive privilege.

Further, in the third embodiment, the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the left side area different from the game area (right side area) in which the ball fired in the right-handed game in which the second special symbol is drawn is flowed down. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is playing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is open (executing the small hit game). It is possible to execute a small hit game without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be visible to the player, but in addition to the above, for example, the glass unit 16 and the second variable winning device A decorative member may be provided between the 1650 and the second variable winning device 1650 so that the player cannot easily see the second variable winning device 1650. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is performing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (executing the small hit game). It is possible to perform a small hit game without giving a sense of discomfort to the person.

In addition, a light emitting member (for example, an LED) for allowing the player to visually recognize the light emitting state is provided in the decorative member provided in the vicinity of the second variable winning device 1650, and in a part of the case where the small hit game is executed. It is preferable to configure the light emitting member to operate (light emit). Specifically, a predetermined lottery is executed when it is determined that the small hit game is executed by the small hit determination means for determining that the condition for executing the small hit game is satisfied and the small hit determination means. It is preferable to provide a lottery means for performing the drawing and a light emitting control means for executing control to operate the light emitting member when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a difference between the number of small hit games that are actually executed and the number of small hit games that the player can see (operate the light emitting member), and the small hit games can actually be played. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the execution has been performed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict when the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the small hit game is executed (the number of times the small hit is won) is satisfied (when is the end timing of the time saving state). Can be done.

Further, it is preferable that the light emitting control means executes the control to emit light even when the above-mentioned light emitting member is not won as a small hit. As a result, the number of times the light emitting member emits light can be made larger than the number of times the small hit is actually won, so that the time is shortened based on the number of times the small hit game is executed (the number of times the small hit is won). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the end condition is satisfied (when is the end timing of the time saving state).

In this case, the light emitting member is operated when there is a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to a change in the special symbol being executed, or a lottery result of a big hit as a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the winning information stored on hold. It is good to configure it so that it is easy. That is, it is preferable that the light emitting operation executed to notify the fact that the small hit game is won is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

As a result, when the light emitting member emits light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the small hit game is executed, whether the big hit of the special symbol is won, or whether it is just a decorative effect. .. Further, a state in which a factor that terminates a state that is disadvantageous to the player (execution of a small hit game), that is, a state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state) is established, and a state that is advantageous to the player (a state that is advantageous to the player). Since the light emitting member is made to emit light by the jackpot winning), the player can be interested in the game result after the light emitting member emits light.

When the above-described configuration is used, the timing at which the light emitting control means emits light from the light emitting member is the timing at which the small hit is won (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the timing at which the small hit game is started, or the timing at which the small hit game is started. , The timing during the small hit game, the timing after the end of the small hit game, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, etc. may be set, or a predetermined predetermined timing may be set. May be set.

Further, the light emitting control means may be configured to change the conditions for causing the light emitting member to emit light based on the operation result for the operating means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. In this case, for example, when a predetermined operation condition (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22 10 times or more in 2 seconds (continuous striking operation)) is satisfied, the number of operations of the light emitting member and the number of small hit winnings are determined. It is preferable to configure the light emission control so as to be approximate (more similar than when the predetermined operating conditions are not satisfied). As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means, and the player can be enthusiastically participated.

In addition, using the light emitting operation of the light emitting member described above, for example, the player is notified (suggested) of the situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (remaining number of small hits won) and the type of small hits won this time. ) May be configured. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in the light emitting operation content of the light emitting member.

In the third embodiment, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not a small hit has been won, so that it is difficult to understand the end timing of the time saving state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, and a feeling of tension is given. We are trying to let the player play the game, but not limited to this, the player is notified that the small hit has been won, but the small hit type set for the winning small hit is given to the player. It may be configured not to notify, or it may be configured to notify the player up to the small hit type. In this case, in order to notify the player that the small hit has been won, a specific display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a display mode in which the player can identify that the small hit has been won). The third symbol may be stopped and displayed), or the second variable winning device 1650 may be provided in the right-handed area. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of small hits won in the time saving state, so that the player can play the game while predicting the end timing of the time saving state.

<About the production contents in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110, the effect during the time saving state executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. The figures shown in each of FIGS. 107 to 110 are schematic views schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. , The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the winning information of the second special symbol is also configured to be hold-stored. Therefore, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The difference is that the effect using the reserved storage information of the second special symbol is executed as the effect for suggesting the remaining time reduction (the effect for suggesting the remaining period of the time reduction state to the player). Hereinafter, the content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect in the third embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the effect content used in the first embodiment.

FIG. 107A is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen displayed when the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), when the time saving state is set, the effect start screen for explaining the content of the effect executed during the time saving state is displayed. In the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the small display area Dm11 has a plurality of situation display modes such as the first situation display mode Dm11a, the second situation display mode Dm11b, the third situation display mode Dm11c, and the fourth situation. The display mode Dm11d is displayed.

In this plurality of status display modes, each display mode corresponds to the degree of establishment of a plurality of time reduction end conditions (progress until the time reduction end condition is satisfied), and the progress until the time reduction end condition is satisfied. Correspondingly, the display mode is configured to be variable. Specifically, a bomb having a fuse of a predetermined length is displayed as each situation display mode, and when the first fluctuation is executed after the time saving state is set, the fuse is ignited.

Then, among the time-saving end conditions, the situation display mode corresponding to the time-saving end condition in which the condition is likely to be satisfied is changed so that the length of the fuse is shorter than the other situation display modes. By changing the display mode of the situation display mode in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the timing at which the time saving state ends by the effect (remaining time reduction suggestion effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. , The player can be made to pay attention to the production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), on the effect start screen (time reduction start screen), in order to notify the player of the content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect in the central portion of the main display area Dm, "even one explodes. Then, the characters "End in a short time" and "Big hit when digestion is completed" are displayed. As a result, if even one of the plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 explodes, the time saving state ends, and the fire of the plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 can be extinguished. It is easy to know that it will be a big hit.

The state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is a state in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b, that is, the variation of the special symbol is executed in the time saving state. This is a state in which a plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are on fire. If it is determined that the special symbol does not start changing after the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set (the special symbol does not start changing after the jackpot game ends), the time saving state waits. As the screen, it may be configured to display a screen indicating that the remaining time reduction suggestion effect for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed.

When the game is advanced with the time saving state set and the time saving end condition is approaching (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, or the number of small hits won in the time saving state reaches the predetermined number of times. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the coalescence status display mode Dm11z for suggesting (notifying) that fact is displayed in the small display area Dm11. FIG. 107 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen during the remaining time reduction suggestion effect in the time reduction state.

In this combined status display mode Dm11z, when the progress status of a plurality of time-saving end conditions is a pre-end condition (for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set to 50 as the end condition of the number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set to 30. When it is reached, it is displayed when the small hit A winning number 5 is set as the winning number end condition, and the condition that is satisfied when the small hit A winning number reaches 3) is satisfied. is there. Therefore, by displaying the combined status display mode Dm11z in the small display area Dm11, the player can be made aware that the time saving state is about to end.

In addition, when the time saving state ends by displaying the combined status display mode Dm11z in a state where the progress status of the plurality of time saving end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition (among the plurality of set time saving end conditions, When any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time reduction end condition is satisfied to end the time reduction state. That is, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), when a plurality of situation display modes (Dm11a to Dm11d) whose display modes are variable according to the progress status of each time saving end condition are displayed in the small display area Dm11, Since it is necessary to execute an effect in which one of the status display modes explodes when the time saving state ends, it is easy for the player to know which of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is satisfied this time. There was a problem that it was grasped by.

In this way, the player can easily grasp which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied this time, so that a plurality of time-saving ends set when shifting to the time-saving state can be achieved. There was a risk that the conditions would be easily predicted and even the timing when the time saving state would end would be easily predicted. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the pre-end condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the progress of each time-saving end condition of the transition. Therefore, it is configured to display the coalescence status display mode Dm11z. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time saving end condition is satisfied to end the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, the coalescence status display mode Dm11z is displayed only when the pre-end condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions, but even one time-saving end condition ends. The coalescence status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when the previous condition is satisfied, or the coalescence status display mode when the value corresponding to the specific time reduction end condition among the plurality of time reduction end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition. Dm11z may be displayed.

Then, when the time saving state ends, the screen shown in FIG. 108 (a) is displayed. FIG. 108A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the time saving state. FIG. 108 (a) shows a display screen when the time saving end condition is satisfied for one of the winning count end conditions, and corresponds to the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b. A stop display is made with a combination of "341" indicating that the third symbol has won a small hit, and a display mode indicating a state in which the bomb has exploded is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the main display area Dm. In the central part, the character "end" is displayed to notify the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, the content of the effect of suggesting the remaining time reduction for a special situation when the time reduction state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (b). FIG. 108 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a means for holding and storing the winning information of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is drawn by lottery in the normal state (during the left-handed game). When the jackpot is won and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol stored on hold may be executed.

And, among them, there was a case where the winning information of the first special symbol stored on hold included the winning information of winning the jackpot (so-called holding inner consecutive villa). In this way, even though the time saving state is set, the next jackpot is based on the winning information already acquired before the time saving state is set, instead of the winning information of the special symbol acquired during the time saving state. When the game is executed, if the effect (remaining time reduction suggestion effect) executed during the time saving state is executed, a contradiction occurs between the effect content and the game result, and the effect is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a winning information that is a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol that is held and stored when the time saving state is set, and the winning is a big hit. When it is determined that there is information, it is configured to execute a special effect (effect in hold during time reduction) instead of starting (execution) the normal effect of suggesting the remaining time reduction (see FIG. 107 (a)). ing. As a result, if the effect (remaining time reduction suggestion effect) that is executed during the time reduction state is executed, a contradiction will occur between the effect content and the game result, and it will be suppressed that the effect will be reduced. A sense of superiority can be given to the player by performing a special effect in the unusual situation where the jackpot is won again in the hold memory after the jackpot ends.

When the effect in hold during the time reduction is executed, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the combined status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the characters "!?" Are displayed in the combined status display mode Dm11z. In order to suggest to the player that an effect different from the normal remaining time reduction suggestion effect is being executed, the characters "something is wrong" are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. .. By performing such a display, it is possible to easily make the player understand that an effect different from the usual one is being executed.

Further, in FIG. 108 (b), since the first special symbol is changed as described above, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is changed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display area Dm1a. It is displayed, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b.

The display screen shown in FIG. 108B is also executed when, for example, before the time saving state is set, it is determined that any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied based on the winning information already acquired. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot is immediately (until all the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the winning information stored on hold are completed). Since it is possible to notify the player that either the player is elected or the time saving state is terminated, the player can be interested in the content of the next effect to be executed.

When the time saving state ends from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b), a display screen similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a) is displayed to notify the player that the time saving state ends. To do. On the other hand, when a big hit is won from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b), the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (a) is displayed. FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the timing when time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b) and the jackpot of the first special symbol is won.

As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when a jackpot is won by the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information of the first special symbol that has already been held and stored in the state where the time saving state is set, the special figure 1 variation display area In Dm1a, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777" indicating a big hit, and the fire-extinguished coalescence status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11. Then, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the characters "fire extinguishing completed" and "big hit" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot has been won.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit (the timing when the special symbol change of the first rotation is executed after the end of the big hit), it is stored on hold. If the content of the winning information is determined and, as a result of the determination, it is determined that there is winning information that wins the jackpot, a special effect (time saving) that is different from the normal time saving state (remaining time saving suggestion effect) It is configured to execute the production in the middle hold.

With this configuration, the jackpot will be won immediately after the remaining time reduction suggestion effect is executed, and the production content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect and the game result may not match, or the game result may be supported. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forcibly changing the effect content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect.

Next, the effect content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect when the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of the time reduction state is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 109 (b). FIG. 109 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the number of remaining time reductions is determined in the time reduction state. In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol variation is executed, and the special symbol lottery. It is configured so that a plurality of winning count end conditions that are satisfied when a small hit is won in the above are set, and the time saving state ends when any of the multiple setting time saving end conditions is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to predict the period during which the time saving state is continuously set (timing at which the time saving state ends), and the interest of the game during the time saving state is improved. ..

Even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set in this way, the period until the time saving state ends may be fixed. For example, the number of changes in the special symbol until the game progresses in the time-saving state and the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied is 3, and the number of small hits is 5 times until the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, since a small hit is won only once for each change of the special symbol, the time is shortened when the special symbol lottery is executed three times regardless of the special symbol lottery result. It will end.

In the third embodiment, when the period until the end of the time saving state (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is determined, the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations in the small display area Dm11 is determined as shown in FIG. 109 (b). (In the example of FIG. 109 (b), "3 times") is displayed. With this configuration, in a gaming machine in which the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be complicatedly set by setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the timing at which the time-saving state ends is determined in advance, Since the timing can be clearly notified to the player, it is possible to play the game while being aware of the remaining period of the time saving state.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the period until the end of the time saving state (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is determined, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the small display area Dm11 (in the example of FIG. 109 (b)). Since "3 times") is displayed, the period in which this display is displayed is a period in which the time saving state does not end based on the number of times the small hit is won, no matter how many times the small hit is won. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically played to win many small hits while the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations is displayed in the small display area Dm11.

In addition, when such an effect display is used in the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is possible to win two kinds of hits by winning a small hit, so that it is more motivated. You can play a game. That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment, if a small hit is won during the time saving state, a chance to win two kinds of hits and a pinch at the end of the time saving state come. , As shown in FIG. 109 (b), it is a period in which the time saving state does not end based on the small hit winning (a period in which it is confirmed that the time saving state ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol). By executing the effect of notifying (remaining period fixed notification effect), while the remaining period fixed notification effect is being executed, if a small hit is won, only the chance of winning two types will come. Since it is possible to notify a person, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that the player can win many small hits.

Further, in the third embodiment, different time saving end conditions are set based on the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot, and in some of them, a predetermined time saving state is set. Each time reduction end condition may be set so that the time reduction end condition is not satisfied during the period.

In the third embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect for notifying the player that the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied after the time saving state is set. FIG. 110A is a schematic view showing a display screen at the time of short-time rush after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 (a), but in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot D, the time saving state is at least until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times. The time saving end condition is set so that the end does not end. That is, the period from the setting of the time saving state to the execution of the special symbol change 20 times is the period in which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110A, the present is a specific period after the time saving state is set (the period during which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol). An effect (invincible effect) for notifying the player of this is executed. During this invincible production, a bomb that is not lit is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the player is notified that the bomb does not explode (the period during which the time saving state does not end). There is.

Then, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the remaining period mode 820 for notifying the remaining period of the invincible effect is displayed. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 110A, the characters "until the squib is ignited ..." and "20" are displayed as the remaining period mode 820. In this way, by executing the effect (invincible effect) for showing the player the period during which the time saving state does not end, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind during the time saving state. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. .. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the first random number 3 table 202ba is used instead of the first random number table 202a for the ROM 202 (see FIG. 19A) in the first embodiment described above, and the small hit type selection table is used. The difference is that the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb is replaced with 202f, the time saving 3 table 202bc is replaced with the time saving table 202e, and the opening scenario 3 table 202b is provided instead of the opening scenario table 202g. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (a). FIG. 112A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 3 table 202ba per first. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the first random number 3 table 202ba defines a special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 and a special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (b). FIG. 112B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. The special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 has the same contents as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 20B) of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. To do.

FIG. 112 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2. The special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 differs from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20C) in that the range of values determined to be small hits is different. They are different and otherwise the same. Specifically, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2, the small hit determination value is defined in the range where the acquired first random number counter value C1 is in the range of "5 to 499".

That is, in the third embodiment using the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a probability (ratio) of 5/1000 (1/200). However, it is determined that it is a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 495/1000. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the jackpot or the small hit is won with a probability of 1/2.

The range determined as a big hit or a small hit is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and it may be specified that the probability of being determined as a small hit is lower than the probability of being determined as a big hit. The range determined to be a small hit may not only be specified by continuous values, but may also be specified with a gap. Further, in the third embodiment, the determination of big hit or small hit is executed using the same table regardless of the set gaming state. For example, depending on the set gaming state. It may be configured to perform a jackpot or small hit determination using different tables.

Specifically, the range determined as a small hit is wider in the table used when the time saving state is set as the gaming state than in the table used when the normal state is set as the gaming state. It is good to configure it like this. With this configuration, even if the small hit winnings used to end the time saving state are configured to occur frequently during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the situation that frequently occurs in the normal state. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), in the third embodiment, the small hit is not won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the small hit is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. Although it is configured to win a small hit, it may be configured to win a small hit by a lottery of the first special symbol.

With this configuration, for example, when the time saving state is set and the winning information of the first special symbol stored on hold includes the winning information for winning a small hit, the time saving state is immediately terminated. be able to. When such a configuration is used, for example, it is preferable to use it in a gaming machine capable of providing a gaming state that is advantageous to the player if the time saving state is immediately terminated.

Specifically, as the game state, in addition to the normal state and the time saving state, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is low (normal state: low probability state of the special symbol, normal symbol). Low probability state, time saving state: low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol (probability variation state: high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) Latent state: High probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set, and the latent state is set when the time saving end condition is satisfied during the period when the probability change state is set. It is preferable to configure the game so that the latent probability state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

According to such a game machine, it can be advantageous for the player that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the state where the probability change state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest. Further, in such a game machine, when the winning information of the first special symbol that is held and stored when the probabilistic state is set includes the winning information that wins a small hit, the probabilistic state is immediately terminated. By using the configuration that shifts to the latent state, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to memorize the winning information of the first special symbol up to the maximum number (4) by the time the probability change state is set. ..

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb has different contents of each small hit type from the small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. Other than that, for example, the small hit type defined for the range of the small hit type counter value C5 is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the first embodiment described above, the third embodiment is not provided with the V winning device 650, and is a game in which a ball is passed through a specific area during a small hit game to obtain a big hit (per two types). Since it does not have the property, each small hit type defined in the small hit type 3 table 202bb is different in that the contents of the big hit game set at the time of acquisition of two types are not associated with each other.

FIG. 113B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the time saving granting 3 table 202bc is set for each jackpot type with respect to the time saving granting table 202e (see FIG. 21D) of the first embodiment described above. It differs in that the provisions of the time saving end conditions are different.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, among the time saving end conditions, "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k as the variation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. As the winning count end condition established based on the winning count, "1" is set for the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "10" is set for the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "50" is set for the value of the small hit C counter 203ac. It is specified to be set. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times", "wins once for the small hit A (the small hit to which is set)", and "small". The end condition is satisfied when either of the conditions of "winning the hit B (small hit set) 10 times" and "winning the small hit C (small hit set) 50 times" are satisfied. A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state a) is set.

When the jackpot type is jackpot B, among the time saving end conditions, "50" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k as the variation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the number of small hit winnings. As the winning count end condition established based on the above, "5" is set for the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "5" is set for the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "25" is set for the value of the small hit C counter 203ac. Is stipulated as. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is completed, "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times", "the small hit A (the small hit to which is set) is won 5 times", and "small". The end condition is satisfied when either the condition of "winning the hit B (small hit set) 5 times" or "winning the small hit C (small hit set) 25 times" is satisfied. A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state b) is set.

When the jackpot type is jackpot D, among the time saving end conditions, "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k as the variation number ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and based on the number of small hit winnings. As a condition for ending the number of winnings, "20" is set for the value of the small hit A counter 203m, and "80" is set for the value of the small hit C counter 203ac. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times", "the small hit A (the small hit to which is set) is won 20 times", and "small". A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state c) is set in which the end condition is satisfied when any of the conditions of "winning the hit C (small hit to which is set) 80 times" is satisfied.

As described above, in the same manner as in each of the above-described embodiments, in the third embodiment, a plurality of different time-saving end conditions are set according to the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, and the set multiple time-saving end conditions Since the time saving state is configured to end when any of the conditions is satisfied, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be diversified.

In addition, since the time saving end condition that is easy to be established and the establishment are different according to the time saving state (a to c) set according to the jackpot type, the time saving state is based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the time saving state. Since the case where the time saving state ends and the case where the time saving state ends based on the number of small hit winnings in the time saving state can be mixed and generated, the pattern in which the time saving state ends can be diversified.

In the third embodiment, the number of items set as the time saving end condition is different depending on the set time saving state. Specifically, in the time saving states a and b, the time saving end condition that can be satisfied when the small hit B is won is set, but in the time saving state c, the time saving ending condition that can be satisfied when the small hit B is won is set. Is configured not to be set.

With this configuration, even if the player knows the type of small hit game to be executed during the time saving state (the first symbol corresponding to the small hit type set for the winning small hit is stopped and displayed). Even if the player grasps the type of the small hit game by grasping the first symbol that is stopped and displayed), whether or not the type of the small hit game is set as the time saving end condition is determined by the game. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, the time saving end condition is set for all the small hit types (small hits A to C) that can be set. However, as a configuration other than this, for example, a small hit type that is set when a small hit is won is added (for example, small hits X to Z), and the time is shortened for the added small hit type. It may be configured so that the end condition is not set.

With this configuration, if a small hit is won during the time saving state, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the end of the time saving state is approaching (in the time saving end condition). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Further, in this case, the small hit game executed by the small hit type (for example, small hit A) in which the time saving end condition is set and the small hit type (for example, small hit X) in which the time saving end condition is not set It is preferable to configure the operation contents to be the same (including an error that cannot be identified by the player). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the current small hit type according to the operation content during the small hit game.

Next, the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202db in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202b. As shown in FIG. 114, the opening scenario 3 table 202b is different from the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described above in that the contents of the opening scenarios defined corresponding to the small hits A to C are different. , The difference is that the contents of the opening scenario defined corresponding to the jackpot D are different, and the other elements are the same.

Here, the above-mentioned differences among the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202b will be described. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted. As described above, the third embodiment is a small hit game in which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened as a small hit game executed when a small hit is won (a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening is opened). Is configured to run. Further, in the third embodiment, even if the ball wins the second variable winning device 1650 during the small hit game, it is configured so that the two kinds of winning cannot be obtained.

Therefore, in the opening scenario defined corresponding to the small hits A to C of the opening scenario 3 table 202bd, only the operation content for one round (1R) corresponding to the small hit game is specified. Further, as shown in FIG. 114, in the third embodiment, an open scenario is defined in which an error of a degree that is difficult for the player to identify is provided corresponding to the small hits A to C.

Specifically, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit A, the opening operation in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.1 seconds is executed, and the opening corresponding to the small hit B is performed. In the scenario, the opening operation in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.11 seconds is executed, and in the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit C, the second of the second variable winning device 1650 is executed. Each opening scenario is defined so that the opening operation in which the opening time of the variable winning opening is 0.09 seconds is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult to grasp the small hit type corresponding to the current small hit game from the content of the small hit game actually executed, while defining different opening scenarios for each small hit type. Can be done.

In the third embodiment, in order to make it difficult to grasp the small hit type corresponding to the current small hit game from the content of the small hit game to be executed, the second variable winning is made corresponding to each small hit type. Although the opening scenario in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the device 1650 is made different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify is specified, the period of the start interval of the small hit game (0.5 seconds) is also specified. ) And the period of the end interval (0.5 seconds) may be different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify. In addition, each time may be different so that the period of the opening scenario defined for each small hit type is the same.

In addition, among a plurality of small hit types, a specific small hit type is configured to specify an opening scenario different from other small hit types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify it). , It may be configured to make the player identify that a specific small hit type has been set, and in this case, it is different from other small hit types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify it). It is advisable to configure the time saving end condition to be set for the small hit type for which the opening scenario is defined. With such a configuration, by grasping the content of the small hit game to be executed, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict the timing when the time saving state ends.

Further, the same opening scenario may be specified for a plurality of small hit types. In this case, depending on the small hit type, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied while the small hit game is being executed. It is good to configure so that different effects are executed. Here, as a predetermined condition set while the small hit game is being executed, for example, a ball wins a prize in the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 during the small hit game, or during the small hit game. It is preferable to set a condition that is satisfied when the player operates the frame button 22. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period (during the predetermined period) during which the small hit game is being executed.

In addition, as the effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the small hit game, for example, an effect in which the type of sound generated when the ball passes (enters) the predetermined area is different, or a frame button is used. In addition to the effect of making the sound and the light different based on the operation of 22, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform different effects.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c are deleted from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26A), and the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba is added. It is different in that it is. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a schematic view showing the contents specified in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba. In this time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, with respect to various time saving end conditions set in the set time saving state, game information (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of small hit winnings) corresponding to various time saving end conditions, that is, , The value of the time saving medium counter 203k, the value of the small hit A counter 203m, the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and the information included in the time saving information update area 223g updated based on the time saving related command indicating the value of the small hit C counter. Based on this, it is for determining that a certain period of time has passed.

By referring to the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, the current time saving state can be largely classified. Then, by changing the effect mode according to the division, it is possible to roughly notify the player of the progress of the time saving state. In the third embodiment, the progress of the time saving state is determined in two stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to determine in three or more stages. .. In this case, for example, a plurality of threshold values may be defined in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, and the current progress may be determined based on the corresponding threshold values.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). In the third embodiment, the remaining time reduction number of times confirmation flag 223ba and the confirmation fluctuation flag 223bb are added to the above-mentioned second embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining time reduction number confirmation flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time reduction state ends is confirmed, and is turned on when the number of changes of the special symbol until the time reduction state ends is confirmed. It is set. That is, in the third embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number ending condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, and the small hit is won during the time saving state. Since the winning count end condition, which is established when the number of times of winning reaches a predetermined number, is set, it is possible to determine the remaining period until the time saving state ends in the entire period in which the time saving state is set. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

That is, for example, when a value of "100" is set as the end condition of the number of fluctuations and a value of "2" is set as the end condition of the number of winnings, the special symbol fluctuates 100 times or 2 per small hit. Since the time saving state ends when the time is won, the remaining period of the time saving state cannot be determined unless the period until the small hit is won twice. On the other hand, even when the above-mentioned time saving end condition is set, if the game in the time saving state progresses, the special symbol is changed 98 times, and the small hit is never won, the time saving state is reached. It is confirmed that the number of special symbol changes will be 2 until the end of.

In this way, when the remaining period (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) until the end of the time saving state is determined, the time saving state is suddenly ended by executing the effect of notifying the player to that effect. The situation can be suppressed. Further, as in the third embodiment, when the time saving end condition has the variation number end condition and the winning number end condition, the remaining period until the end (special symbol remaining variation number) is determined. By executing the effect of notifying the player to that effect, it is possible to expect the player to win the small hit without giving a sense of danger that the time saving state will end.

The remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is set to on when it is determined in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123) that the remaining time reduction number has been determined, and the effect setting process 3 (see S2871 in FIG. 122). (S3356 in FIG. 122). Then, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number confirmation flag 223ba is set to ON (FIG. 122S3356: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the remaining time reduction number (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is set (FIG. 122). S3357). As a result, the number of times the special symbol changes until the time saving state of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ends is displayed (see FIG. 109 (b)).

In the third embodiment, when the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the time saving state is determined, the remaining time saving number determination flag 223ba is provided as a flag to indicate that fact, but the player It may be configured to notify the remaining period of the time saving state with respect to, for example, special figure 1 remaining time saving number of times to show that the remaining fluctuation number of the first special symbol until the end of the time saving state is fixed. A confirmation flag and a special figure 2 remaining time reduction confirmation flag for indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations of the second special symbol until the time reduction state ends are provided, and the special figure 1 remaining time reduction confirmation flag is turned on. When set to, the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol is displayed, and when the special figure 2 remaining time reduction confirmation flag is set to on, the number of remaining fluctuations of the second special symbol is displayed. You may.

With this configuration, for example, a game in which only the first special symbol is changed (lottery) and a game in which only the second special symbol is changed (lottery) during the time saving state are set separately. In the machine, it is possible to display the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol according to the game content actually executed (the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is actually performed).

The definite fluctuation flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that the period from when the time saving state is set until the time saving end condition is satisfied at the shortest time is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, and is a special flag until the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is set to ON when the number of symbol fluctuations is 15 or more. The definite fluctuation flag 223bb is a value corresponding to the value of various counters indicating the time reduction end condition in the definite fluctuation determination process (see S3063 in FIG. 124) executed in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123). When it is determined that the minimum value of is 15 or more (S3653: Yes in FIG. 124), a display time saving command corresponding to the minimum value is set (S3654 in FIG. 124) and is set to ON (FIG. 124). S3655).

Then, when it is determined that the minimum value indicating the value of various counters indicating the time saving end condition is not 15 or more (S3653: No in FIG. 124), a display time saving command that does not indicate the minimum value is set (FIG. In S3656 of 124), when a plurality of pre-end conditions are satisfied (S3602 of FIG. 124) in the time saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 of FIG. 123), it is set to off (see S3608 of FIG. 123).

As a result, it becomes possible to notify the player of the period during which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied after the time saving state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having anxiety that the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with peace of mind (without worrying about the end of the time saving state) during the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON by referring to the values of all the counters set corresponding to all the time saving end conditions set in the time saving state. However, it suffices if the player can be made to play the game in the time saving state with peace of mind. For example, it can be established in the current time saving state. A time saving state discriminating means for discriminating the time saving end condition is provided, and it is determined whether or not the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set on by referring only to the value of the counter corresponding to the time saving end condition determined by the time saving state discriminating means. However, a discriminating means for discriminating a time-saving end condition that cannot be satisfied in the current time-saving state is provided, and only the value of the counter corresponding to the time-saving end condition determined by the discriminating means is excluded. Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON.

<Regarding the control process in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment>
In the control process in the third embodiment, the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is changed to the timer interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 118) with respect to the above-described first embodiment, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is changed. ), Instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start winning prize executed in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that process 2 (see FIG. 96) is executed and the small hit control process is changed to small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 120), and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, detailed description of the content of the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above will be omitted.

First, the contents of the timer interrupt process 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 3. In the timer interrupt process 3, the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37) is replaced with the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43). The point of executing the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above, and the V entrance pass process (see FIG. 47) and the V pass process. The difference is that (see FIG. 48) is not executed.

When the timer interrupt process 3 is executed, the processes S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above. Then, when the processing of S103 is completed, the special symbol variation processing 3 is executed instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) (S174). Details of the special symbol variation processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119. Then, instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above is executed (S155). The details of the start winning process 2 are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processes of S106 and S107 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37), and then S110 of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37). The same process of S110 as the process of is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S174) will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S174). In this special symbol variation processing 3, the point of acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab and the small hit start setting for the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the start of the small hit is set instead of the processing.

When the special symbol variation process 3 (S174) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, unless the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: No), S251 to the same as the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94) of the second embodiment described above. The process of S255 is executed. The details of the processes of S251 to S255 are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the processing of S252 that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38). ), The same processing of S206 to S210 as the processing of S206 to S210 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202: Yes), S211 to S220 are the same as the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Processing is executed. In the processing of S220, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S220: Yes), a small hit opening scenario according to the small hit type set corresponding to the winning small hit is displayed. It is set with reference to the opening scenario 3 table 202b (S271). Next, the start of the small hit is set (S272), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set on (S273). After that, the time saving update process for small hits is executed (S274), and this process is terminated. The small hit time saving update process (S274) is executed in the small hit start setting process (FIGS. 40, S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. This is the same process as the hitting time reduction update process (FIG. 41, S405), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S1555) will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S1555). The small hit control process 3 (S1555) is changed to the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This is a process to be executed, and for the above-mentioned small hit control process (see FIG. 53), the processes related to the V flag 203i and the V passing flag 203j are deleted, and the target to be operated during the small hit game is a V winning device. The difference is that the second variable winning device 1650 is used instead of 650.

When the small hit control process 3 (S1555) is started, first, the same processes as those of S1701 to S1705 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) described above are executed, and in the process of S1705, the second variable winning opening is opened. When it is determined that the timing (timing to open the winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650) (S1705: Yes), S1706 is the same as the processing of S1706 of the small hit control processing (see FIG. 53) described above. The process is executed, and then this process is terminated. The processes S1701 to S1706 executed in the small hit control process 3 execute an operation of opening the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650, and the small hit of the first embodiment described above is performed. Although the operation target is different from that of the control process (see FIG. 53), since the control contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the process of S1705, if it is not the timing of opening the second variable winning opening (S1705: No), the same process as in S1711 to S1715 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) described above is executed. In the process of S1715, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), the same process of S1720 as the process of S1720 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) described above is executed, and then the process of S1720 is executed. This process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment configured as described above is configured so that a normal state and a time saving state can be set as a gaming state, and the period in which the normal state is set is provided in the left region. 1 A left-handed game is performed in which a ball is inserted into the entrance 64 to execute a lottery for the first special symbol, a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is executed. If so, a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol.

The time saving state, which is a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, is a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, that is, a variation number ending condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol. Alternatively, it is continuously set until any of the winning count end conditions that are established based on the winning count that is won in the small hit by the lottery of the second special symbol is satisfied.

Then, by making the content of the time saving end condition different according to the type of the winning jackpot, it is configured so that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing when the time saving state ends (the period during which the time saving state is continuously set). are doing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.

In addition, even if a time-saving end condition is set that makes it difficult for the time-saving state to end, it is assumed that the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state early or the time-saving state is likely to end depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. However, since the time saving state can be continued for a long period of time depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is longer than that of the gaming machine in which the time saving state is set for a predetermined specific period. The game can be played while expecting it to continue.

<Regarding the control process in the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. In the third embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 121) and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) is produced with respect to the above-described first embodiment. It differs in that it is changed to the setting process 3 (see FIG. 122), and is the same except for the above. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S2183). This command determination process 3 (S2183) is the same as the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S2163 of FIG. 99) with respect to the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 of FIG. 56). The difference is that the process related to winning information (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is executed and the content of the process executed when a command related to time saving is received is changed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S2183 of FIG. 121) is executed, the command determination process of the first embodiment (S2113 of FIG. 56) or the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (S2163 of FIG. 99) described above is executed. If the same process as any of the above is executed, and then in the process of S2215, if it is determined that the command received this time is a command related to time saving (S2215: Yes), then the contents of the time saving information update area 223g are displayed. Update and move to the process of S2217. That is, in the third embodiment, when a command related to time saving is received, the received command is stored as it is, instead of performing the process of changing the corresponding flag or counter as in the first embodiment described above. The process is executed.

Then, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to grasp the time saving state. In the third embodiment as well, when a time saving-related command is received as in the first embodiment described above, the corresponding flag or counter is changed as in the first embodiment described above. It may be configured as.

Next, the process of the effect setting process 3 (S2871) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 3 (S2871). In this effect setting process 3 (S2871), the time saving state is changed based on the progress of the time saving state (the situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (the number of remaining fluctuations) and the number of fluctuations after the time saving state is set). The production mode of the production for suggesting the remaining period is set.

When the effect setting process 3 (S2871) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S2901), and then it is determined whether the read information is in the time saving state (S2902). .. If it is determined that the time is not shortened (S2902: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving state is (S2902: Yes), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read out (S3351), and the special symbol type (special figure 1) of this fluctuation (this fluctuation) is read. Alternatively, the lottery result is extracted from the fluctuation pattern (S3352), and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by this fluctuation (S3353).

As a result of the determination in S3353, if it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied (S3353: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the time reduction end is set (S3355), and this process is terminated. In the process of S3354, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S3354: No), then it is determined whether the remaining time saving number determination flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S3356: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the number of remaining time reductions is set (S3357), and this process ends.

Then, in the process of S3356, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is not set to ON (S3356: No), the time reduction remaining period determination process described later is executed with reference to FIG. 123 (S3358). , End this process.

Next, the content of the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358) will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358). In this time saving remaining period determination process (S3358), the current time saving is performed according to the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, that is, the time saving information updated based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 110. A process for determining the situation and setting an effect mode based on the determination result is executed.

When the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358) is executed, first, the time saving remaining period is determined based on the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba using the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g (S3601). .. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not a plurality of remaining periods have reached the pre-end condition (S3602), and if a plurality of remaining periods have not been reached (S3602: No), a definite fluctuation determination process is executed (S3063). , End this process. The content of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124, but in the state where the time reduction state is set, the time reduction end condition (value of various counters) set this time is determined. , When the special symbol change (lottery) is executed, the process for determining the period during which the time saving state does not end (the number of special symbol changes) is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a plurality of remaining periods have reached the pre-end condition (S3602: Yes), it is determined whether the definite variation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604), and the definite variation flag 223bb is turned ON. If it is determined that it is not set (set to off) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is fixed, and if the number of remaining time reductions is not fixed, it is combined. A display time saving command indicating the mode is set (S3605), and this process is terminated. When the display time saving command indicating the coalescence mode is set in the process of S3605, the coalescence status display mode Dm11z as shown in FIG. 107 (b) is displayed.

This makes it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied, and at the same time, indicates that a plurality of time-saving end conditions have been reached just before the condition is satisfied (that is, the time-saving state is long). It is possible to notify (that it is continuing).

In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to on (S3604: Yes), the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to off (S3608), and whether the above-mentioned remaining time reduction number is fixed. Move to the process of determining. If it is determined in the process of S3604 that the number of remaining time reductions is fixed, then information indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored in the time reduction information update area 223g (S3606), and the display time reduction indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored. A command is set (S3607), the remaining time reduction number fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3608), and this process is terminated.

Here, the content of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063). In this definite fluctuation determination process (S3063), as described above, a command for determining a period during which the set time saving state cannot be completed and displaying that fact on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is issued. The process to set is executed. As a result, in a game machine having a game property (a game property having a plurality of time reduction end conditions) in which it is difficult to know when the time reduction state ends, the player can display the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 110). ) Can be confirmed to determine the period during which the game can be played with peace of mind.

When the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) is executed, it is first determined whether the definite variation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3651: No), the time is shortened. The values corresponding to the medium counter 203k, the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p are read from the time saving information update area 223g, and the minimum value thereof is extracted (S3652).

In the present embodiment, in the process of S3652, the values of the various counters described above in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are determined based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a counter that is variable in synchronization with various counters included in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 described above, and is configured to make a determination based on the value of the counter. Is also good.

It is determined whether the minimum value extracted in the process of S3652 is a condition value (15 or more in this embodiment) that can be notified as a definite variation, and if it is determined that it is a condition value (15) or more (S3653). : Yes), then the display time saving command indicating the minimum value is set (S3654), the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3655), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player only when the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, and thus the fixed fluctuation Only when the flag 223bb is set to ON, the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be set as an effect mode for the player to play the game with peace of mind. That is, for example, when the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of times the special symbol changes) is one, the player is notified to that effect, and the player is prevented from giving anxiety. be able to.

In this embodiment, when the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of times the special symbol changes) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, an effect mode for notifying the player to that effect is set. However, the content is not limited to this, and the content to be notified to the player may be different based on the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, when the player performs a specific operation. May be configured to notify the fact that the period during which the time saving state cannot be completed (the number of times the special symbol changes) is less than the predetermined number of times, or the player performs a special operation. In this case, it may be configured to notify only when the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of times the special symbol changes) is a special number of times larger than the predetermined number of times.

If it is determined in the processing of S3653 that the minimum value is less than the condition value (15) (S3653: No), a display time saving command corresponding to the updated time saving information is set (S3656), and this processing is terminated. To do. If it is determined that the definite fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON in the processing of S3651 (S3651: Yes), the processing of S3652 and S3653 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3654.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 153. In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (variably) at the same time (in parallel) with respect to the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it is configured.

Then, as the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the second special symbol is drawn (variable) more often). The time saving state (that is, the time saving state) and the time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is more likely to be selected (that is, the time saving of the first special symbol is more drawn (variable)). The state) and the game state are configured to be configurable, and a game state having a different degree of advantage to the player is provided in the time saving state.

Further, it is different in that different effects (time reduction number display) are executed corresponding to the plurality of time reduction states described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the fourth embodiment will be described as being different from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 125 is a front view of the game board 13 used in the game machine of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right-handed region is different. In this figure, the ball launched by the left-handed game flows down the left-handed (left side) area along the arrow PA1 shown on the game board 13, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is the game board. It is configured to flow down the right-handed (right side) region along the arrow PA2 shown in 13.

As shown in FIG. 125, in the present embodiment, a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as a left first starting port 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. The left first starting port 64 has an opening on the upper surface having a size capable of allowing one game ball to enter, and two nails are slightly larger than the diameter of the two game balls at the opposite positions of the opening. They are arranged at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of the game game to the left first starting port 64 (for example, the number of game balls winning to the left first starting port 64 when 250 game balls are launched). The ratio) can be changed.

Further, in the right region of the variable display unit 80, a second starting port 640 and a first starting port 64 (hereinafter, referred to as a right first starting port 64) are arranged vertically in parallel. The second starting port 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game plate 60 into which one game ball can enter. On the front side (opposing surface) of the opening, a normal electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 is arranged. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and is pivotally supported on one end side so as to be rotatable. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a hit, the game ball is played for a predetermined number of times (once or twice in this embodiment) and a predetermined number of seconds (0.5 seconds or 1 second in this embodiment). Is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in this embodiment) in a direction (a direction away from the opening) so that the can be guided to the second starting port 640. The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In the normal state (other than when the second symbol hits), the opening of the second starting port 640a is maintained in a closed state (standing up in the vertical direction).

Further, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640. When the normal electric accessory 640a is open (tilted to the horizontal direction), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first starting port 64. With this configuration, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure the game ball in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first starting port 64.

In this embodiment, when the gaming states are the high probability state (probability variation state) and the time-saving gaming state, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit is high. Further, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the player fires the gaming ball so that the gaming ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and wins the gaming ball in the left first starting port 64. Perform the game to make it. Then, the third symbol becomes a hit, and the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit increases when the game shifts to the probability variation game or the time-saving game. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol is likely to be a hit. Has been done. Therefore, the player fires the game ball so as to pass through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game) to execute the game. In this case, since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state is high, it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 640, while the winning in the right first starting port 64 is reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the second special symbol than the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to be given a probability change after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are likely to be given a time-saving game (low probability game state) after the jackpot game (low probability game state). It is configured so that a jackpot (which is difficult to give a probabilistic game) is given.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when a big hit is made, a big hit is given so that a probabilistic game is easily given after the big hit game at 100%. That is, the person who wins the second special symbol is more likely to be given the probabilistic game state.

Further, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric accessory 640a is opened, the distance between the tip of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one or more and less than two game balls. It is an interval of. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the interval can easily pass through the through gate 67 having a gate-shaped opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the right first starting port 64 due to the nails arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, the game ball flows down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 by a nail arranged above the opening of the right first starting port 64. It is configured at intervals (less than one game ball), and is configured to flow downward through the windmill as it is. That is, when winning a prize in the right first starting port 64, it is configured so as to be limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (a state of standing upright in the vertical direction).

In the present embodiment, in the open state of the normal electric accessory 640a, the right first starting port 64 is not won, but the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 is the right first starting. The interval may be set so that the opening 64 can be won, and the ratio may be reduced so that the right first starting port 64 can be won.

Next, in the fourth embodiment, the contents of the effect mode (effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device) in the time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. First, with reference to FIG. 126, a display screen at the time of entering the time saving state, which is displayed corresponding to the set type of the time saving state, will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, although the details will be described later, it is possible to change (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), and further, it is set in the time saving state. By making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol different, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the time reduction state, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol are easily executed. It is possible to set the second time saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the fluctuation of.

Then, only the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win the small hit, and when the small hit is won, the two kinds of hits can be obtained as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, by fluctuating (lottery) a plurality of special symbols at the same time (in parallel), a specific lottery result is obtained in one special symbol lottery so that a lottery result advantageous to the player does not occur at the same time. When (for example, a hit) is won, the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating a loss.

Further, when the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the time saving corresponds to the fluctuation start timing of each special symbol executed at the same time (side by side). It is configured so that the number of times the state is set (the number of time reductions) is subtracted.

That is, when the first time saving state in which the first special symbol mainly fluctuates is set, the time saving game is likely to be performed according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol set as the time saving end condition, but the second special symbol When the second time saving state is set, which mainly fluctuates, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped based on the small hit winning as described above, so it is set as the time saving end condition. There is a problem that there is a big difference between the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of games actually executed.

Specifically, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times as the time reduction end condition and the first time reduction state is set, the first special symbol If only the fluctuation (lottery) is executed (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 100 times), the first time is shortened. It is possible to execute the special symbol change about 100 times during the state (the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped due to the lottery result of the first special symbol).

On the other hand, when the time saving end condition is set that the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times, and the second time saving state is set, the second special symbol (Lottery) is configured so that only the fluctuation (lottery) is executed (a long time (longer time than the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), and In the lottery of the second special symbol, if it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/1 (the probability of excluding only the probability of winning the big hit), the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped every time, the number of fluctuations actually executed is about 50 times.

In this way, even when the same condition is set as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed while the time saving state is set (forced stop) in the type of time saving game to be executed. The number of fluctuations without) will be different. In such a case, if the player is displayed with the actually set number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) regardless of the type of the set time reduction state, the time reduction state that gives the player a sense of discomfort. There was a problem that it would be provided.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions (remaining time reduction number) to be notified to the player on the display screen (time reduction state entry screen) when the time reduction state is set according to the type of the time reduction state to be set. Is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to suppress the provision of a time saving state that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the number of time reductions to be notified to the player (the number of remaining time reductions) is displayed differently according to the type of the set time reduction state, the remaining time reduction to be notified to the player is obtained. When the number of times and the actual number of remaining time reductions are different, a process for correcting the remaining time reduction number to be notified to the player is executed.

With this configuration, for example, in a state where the first time saving state is set, by temporarily interrupting the game during the game, the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times, or the second time saving state can be set. Even if the player wins a lottery result other than a big hit or a small hit in the lottery result of the second special symbol and the first special symbol that is changing cannot be forcibly stopped, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to synchronize the reported number of remaining time reductions with the actual number of remaining time reductions without giving.

Specifically, when the above-mentioned second time saving state (time saving A) is set, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is actually as shown in FIG. 126 (a). Even if it is set as the time saving end condition to reach 100 times, "50" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 in consideration of the number of times that the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped by the small hit winning, and the first When the time saving state (time saving B) is set, "100" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 as shown in FIG. 126 (b).

As a result, when the second time reduction state is set, it is possible to make the player think that the time reduction end condition in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 50 times is set. Then, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is updated (subtracted) by the forced stop of the special symbol, the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 is updated (subtracted) according to the update (subtraction). However, since it is configured to update (subtract) the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 according to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is continuously set. The period (number of special symbol changes) can be updated (subtracted) without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), when the time saving state is set, the reserved symbol corresponding to each special symbol is not displayed in the sub display area Ds. are doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from detecting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that is actually executed while the time saving state is set by the digestion mode of the reserved symbol. In the fourth embodiment, instead of displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol in the sub display area Ds, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. The area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm7 are formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member provided on the game board 13 is not the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A notification means may be provided to notify the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in a light emitting mode by using a part thereof. Further, this notification means may be used in the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the content of the correction effect for correcting the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed on the display screen (time reduction state setting screen) when the time reduction state is set is different depending on the type of the set game state. (See FIG. 126). In this case, for example, the game is temporarily interrupted in the state where the first time saving state is set, and the second special symbol is executed a plurality of times, or the second special symbol is set in the state where the second time saving state is set. When the special symbol is changed under unusual conditions, such as when the lottery result is out of order and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, the reported number of remaining time reductions and the actual remaining time reduction There was a risk that the number of times would be different.

In such a case, for example, in a time saving game in which the time saving A is set and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped. That is, when the actual number of remaining time reductions becomes larger than the number of times corresponding to the reported number of remaining time reductions, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the third symbol is temporarily displayed during the variable display. It is stopped, and the same production mode as when notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol in the main display area Dm (a concept including an error that is difficult for the player to notice) is displayed. That is, during the variation display of the second special symbol, a pseudo stop effect that makes the player think that the variation of the special symbol has stopped is executed, and the display mode of the remaining time reduction display area Dm10 corresponds to the pseudo stop effect. (Remaining time reduction for notification) is updated (subtracted), and the correction effect is executed so as to be in the state shown in FIG. 127 (b).

With this configuration, the reported number of remaining time reductions can be synchronized with the actual number of remaining time reductions without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, although detailed description will be described later, this correction effect is executed only when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (second special symbol) is a predetermined time or more (30 seconds or more). It is configured to be done. Therefore, even if the pseudo stop effect is executed during the fluctuation period of one special symbol, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, although detailed description is omitted, when the actual number of remaining time reductions is less than the number of times corresponding to the reported number of remaining time reductions, the display of the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. An effect (multiple variation fusion effect) for updating (subtracting) the mode (remaining time reduction for notification) may be executed.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 135. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from the first embodiment described above. It's different.

FIG. 128 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number 4 table 202ca, a first hit type selection 4 table 202cc, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern 4 table 202cd, and a small hit type selection 4 table 202ce. Has been done.

First, the first random number 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 4 table 202ca. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the first random number 4 table 202ca defines a random number table corresponding to the first special symbol and a random number table corresponding to the second special symbol. The first is different from the random number table 202a (see FIG. 20A) in that the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is replaced with the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2, and other than that. It is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (b). FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 has a range determined as a small hit from "5 to 989" to "5 to 998" with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. The difference is that it is changed to ", and other than that, it is the same. That is, in the lottery of the second special symbol in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is won with a probability of 994/1000.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130A, the first type selection 4 table 202cc will be described. FIG. 130A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first type selection 4 table 202cc. The first hit type selection 4 table 202cc is different from the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 21 (a)) described above, in place of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 The table 202cc1 is different in that the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202cb2 is provided in place of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cc1 will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cc1. The special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202ccb1 is based on the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 21 (b)) and shows the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type and after the jackpot game is completed. It is different from the set game state.

Specifically, when jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, a 15-round jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game, and then a time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when jackpot B is selected. Is executed as a jackpot game for 5 rounds, and then a time saving state (time saving A) is set. Then, when the jackpot C is selected, the jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and then the normal state is set. That is, as the jackpot types, jackpot A and jackpot B are jackpots in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and jackpot C is a jackpot in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) are set as the time saving states that can be set after the jackpot game is completed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed as the game in the time saving state, and when the time saving B is set, the time saving state is in progress. It is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed as the game of. In this way, it is possible to set different game specifications in the time saving state by making the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol mainly executed during the time saving state different according to the set time saving state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine having game specifications equal to or greater than the types of game states that can be set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cc2 will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (c). FIG. 130 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202 kb2. The special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202bc2 is defined with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 21 (c)) corresponding to a possible value of the first hit type counter value C2. The difference is that the types of jackpot types to be played are increased, the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot type, the jackpot D is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the first hit type counter value C2, and the jackpot E is defined in the range of "70 to 99". Then, when the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, after that, the time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when the jackpot E is selected, the jackpot E is selected. A 15-round jackpot game is executed as a game, and then a time saving state (time saving B) is set.

That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state is always set after the big hit game is completed, and 70% of them are set to the time saving A and 30% are set to the time saving B. .. Here, when the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the time saving game mainly by the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed again. On the other hand, when the time saving B is set, the time saving game mainly by lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a left-handed player is hit in a normal state or a probability change state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a 58% ratio (big hits B and D) is an advantageous latent state. It is configured to move to. Then, when a right-handed hit is made in the latent state and a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, an advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits EG). Therefore, once the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) is set, the second special symbol lottery is performed by winning a prize in the second entrance 1640 by hitting right. It is easy to execute, and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are easily repeated. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game for one purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 131, the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd includes a normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the normal state, and a time saving A for determining the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state. At least the fluctuation pattern table 202cd2 and the fluctuation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B are specified. Next, the specific contents of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. The normal variation pattern table 202cd1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 132, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 has a random number value (variation time) for determining the variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type (hit / fail determination result). The variable type counter value (counter value of CS1) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a hit (big hit) is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and the normal reach (normal reach). 20 seconds) is associated, and super reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 198".

On the other hand, in the case of a loss in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), a variation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. The range of "71-120" is associated with the variation pattern of the long deviation (12 seconds), and the range of "121-170" is associated with the deviation normal reach (20 seconds). Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach (30 seconds) out of the range of "171 to 198" is associated.

Further, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time saving A will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (a). FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time saving A. The variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time reduction A is referred to in order to select the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the state in which the time reduction A is set. It's a table.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a jackpot ultra-short fluctuation (1 second) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. ) Is specified in association with each other. Further, for the deviation of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), the deviation ultra-long fluctuation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. There is.

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. For the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the small hit short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 For the deviation of the special symbol (special drawing 2), the deviation short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202cd3 for the time saving B will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern table 202cd3 for the time saving B. The variation pattern table 202cd3 for the time reduction B is referred to in order to select the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the state in which the time reduction B is set. It's a table.

As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) has a jackpot short variation (5 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Is specified in association with each other. Further, in the deviation of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), the deviation ultra-long fluctuation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. There is.

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot ultra-short fluctuation (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined by associating a small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. For the deviation of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), the deviation long variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. 134. The small hit type selection 4 table 202ce is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 134, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "small hit A". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which a small hit game having the same open pattern as the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, 70 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is determined at 70% (70/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "70 to 99", "small hit B" is associated and defined. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 30 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 30% (30/100).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 151. In the fourth embodiment, a lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be duplicated and executed for each of the above-described embodiments. It's different.

Then, in the state where the time saving state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special symbol (first time saving state) and the lottery of the first special symbol. The difference is that the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the time saving state (second time saving state), which is executed more frequently, can be set.

In the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state which is the gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the first time saving state and the second time saving state which is more advantageous than the first time saving state can be set. , It is possible to provide a plurality of gaming states having different advantageous stages to a player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

First, the special symbol variation process 4 (S194), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194). The special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194) makes various determinations and decisions based on the counter values acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. In order to enable the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to simultaneously control the variation display in the variation display mode determined by the predetermined control, or to stop the display in the display mode showing the determination result. Control is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot medium flag 203d is on) (S7001), and the jackpot is in progress (during the jackpot). When it is determined (S7001: Yes) that the flag 203d is on), it is not necessary to set the lottery of the special symbol, the stop of the variation display, and the like, so that the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot medium flag 203d is off) (S7001: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether or not the small hit medium flag 203g is on). (S7002). If it is determined in the process of S7002 that a small hit is in progress (the small hit medium flag 203 g is on) (S7002: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (the small hit medium flag 203 g is off) (S7002: No), it is determined whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S7003).

In the process of S7003, when it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being displayed (S7003: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7005), and the process proceeds to the process of S7006. Here, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the processing for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, when the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol in the variable display with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation is performed. Will be executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, in the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7003: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. On the condition that the above conditions are met, the first special symbol variation start process for executing the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed (S7004), and the process shifts to S7006. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S7004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139.

In the process of S7006 executed after the first special symbol change start process (S7004) or the first special symbol change stop process (S7005) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is displaying the change. (S7006), if the variation of the second special symbol is being displayed (S7006: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7008), and this process is terminated. Similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008) is the second special symbol when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. This is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7006, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7006: No), the second is provided on the condition that a new starting prize is detected in the second entrance 640. A second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display by executing a special symbol lottery is executed (S7007), and this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation (lottery) control of the first special symbol and the fluctuation (lottery) control of the second special symbol are configured to be executed independently. .. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the change of the second special symbol (lottery) regardless of whether or not the change of the first special symbol (lottery) is executed. Therefore, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed a plurality of times in a short time, and the game efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, a big hit or a small hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and while a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) based on the winning is executed, a new special symbol is used. It is configured so that fluctuations (lottery) do not start. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform a complicated act of predicting the lottery result of a special symbol while performing a winning game, and the player can pay attention to the winning game during the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the stop display is performed in a display mode indicating that one of the plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has won the jackpot. When this is done, the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment. As a result, a state in which the special symbol fluctuates during the jackpot game, or a state in which one special symbol wins the jackpot (during the jackpot game) and the other special symbol wins the jackpot may occur. Since it can be eliminated, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation start processing and the special symbol fluctuation stop processing are not executed during either the big hit game or the small hit game, but the present invention is limited to this. Without, for example, it may be configured not to execute the fluctuation start processing of the special symbol and the fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol only during the big hit game, or the fluctuation start processing of the special symbol during the big hit game or the small hit game. , The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute more fluctuations (lottery) of special symbols, so that the player can enjoy the game in a short period of time.

Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S7004), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S7004).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 138, S7004), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is acquired (S7101), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b (S7101). It is determined whether N1) is a value larger than 0 (S7102). In the process of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is larger than 0 (S7102: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted by 1. Then (S7103), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b after subtraction is set (S7104).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

When the processing of S7104 is completed, the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S7105 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S7106). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 138, S7106) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the game state being played.

When the process of S7106 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is then executed (FIGS. 138 and S7107). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) includes the result of determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S7108). Although the details of this game state update process (FIG. 138, S7108) will be described later, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the values of various counters (time reduction / medium counter 203k) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. It is a process to do. When the process of S7108 is completed, this process is completed. A detailed description of this game state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

On the other hand, in the process of S7102, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S7102: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7201). Next, it is determined whether or not the range of random numbers that are big hits or small hits defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match. The determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S7202).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S7202 is a big hit (S7203), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S7203: Yes), the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. It is set (S7204), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (S7205). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7206), and the value according to the current gaming state (for example, in the normal state). If there is 0, if the time is shortened, 1) is stored (set) in the winning state storage area 203cf (S7207), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S7203: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7208), and then , End this process. In this embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol is configured so that the small hit is not won. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery is not a big hit in the processing of S7203 (S7203: No), the lottery result is missed. It is configured to determine that there is, and the process of S7208 is executed. However, for example, when the process of the first special symbol is configured to win a small hit, it is not a big hit in the process of S7203. When the determination is made (S7203: No), it may be determined whether or not the player has won the small hit, and the process may be executed according to the determination result. In this case, in contrast to the special figure 2 deviation processing (see S7708 in FIG. 145), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, a process different only in that the first special symbol is targeted instead of the second special symbol is executed. Just do it.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 140, S7107), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first 1 It is determined whether or not a jackpot of a special symbol is set (S7301). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the process of S7204 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139).

When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set in the process of S7301 (S7301: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S7201 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139). Based on the value of the 1-per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined (selected) from the 1st per-type selection 4 table 202cc (see FIG. 130) (S7302), and the process proceeds to S7303.

On the other hand, in the process of S7301 when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is off) (S7301: No), the process of S7302 is performed. Skip and move to the process of S7303.

In the process of S7303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7303). Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S7304), and the process proceeds to S7305. Here, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving state that can be set as the gaming state is the time saving A (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the time saving B (second time saving) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A. Since the state) and the game state can be set, the game states that can be set are configured to be three types: normal state, time saving A, and time saving B, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k and the time saving. The current gaming state is determined based on the information stored in the state storage area 203cd.

Specifically, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, and when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 1 or more (not 0), the current gaming state is determined. It is determined that the state is a time saving state. Then, when the information indicating the time saving A (for example, the information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, the current gaming state is the time saving A (first time saving state). If it is determined that there is, and information indicating the time saving B (for example, information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, the current gaming state is the time saving B (second time saving). State) is determined.

The configuration for determining the current gaming state is not limited to the configuration used in the fourth embodiment, and other configurations may be used. For example, a game state storage area for temporarily updating the currently set game state is provided, and the current game state is determined using the information stored in the game state storage area. You may. With such a configuration, the capacity of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased, but the current gaming state can be reliably determined. Further, even when the types of game states that can be set are increased (for example, four types), the current game state can be easily determined.

In the processing of S7305, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state) (7305), and then based on the selected variation pattern. , Special figure 1 variable pattern command is set (S7306).

When the processing of S7306 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S7307). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S7308), and ends this process.

Next, the game state update process (S7108), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138), will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S7108). In this game state update process (see S7108 in FIG. 141), a process for subtracting the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is updated so as to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In the 4th embodiment, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is updated so as to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. With this configuration, even when a process that can independently execute the fluctuation (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used (start of fluctuation of the special symbol). Even if the order and the change stop order of the special symbol are exchanged), the time saving state can be appropriately set according to the predetermined number of changes of the special symbol.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 141) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S7401). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (S7401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time reduction state, the processing of S7402 and S7403 is skipped and the present End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0 (S7401: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203k is set to 1. After subtraction (S7402) and setting the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203k (S7403), this process ends.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time reduction number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the time reduction medium counter 203k from the remaining time reduction number command, and stores the extracted value in the time reduction information update area 223g of the RAM 223. In this way, since the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the time saving information update area 223g according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it synchronizes with the value of the time saving medium counter 203k of the main control device 110. You can update the value while letting it.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the first special symbol is stopped by a combination of the processing of stopping the first special symbol when the fluctuation time elapses and the first special symbol is stopped by the combination of the symbols indicating the jackpot, the fluctuation is in progress. A process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol with a combination of symbols indicating the deviation is executed.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 142, S7005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S7501), and when it is determined that it is the end timing (S7501). S7501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S7502). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to on for the first special symbol (S7502: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to on (S7503), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203cc has been turned on is set (S7504). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S7505).

When the processing of S7505 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S7506), the jackpot flag 203ca, and the time saving / medium counter 203k are reset (S7507). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to on (S7508), the jackpot medium flag 203d is set to on (S7509), and the process proceeds to S7510.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7502, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to off for the first special symbol (S7502: No), the processing of S7503 to S7509 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7510.

In the process of S7510, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (stop display) is set (S7510). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S7511), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S7501 when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S7501: No), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S7512), this process is terminated. During the period during which the process of S7512 is being executed, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

As described above, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed (S7501: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is shown. The process of stopping the fluctuation display (S7503 to S7511) is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S7502: Yes), a process (S7503, S7504) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is executed.

In the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed (after the jackpot game is completed), the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case of forcibly stopping by disconnection.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 142) is based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139). The jackpot scenario is set in the process of S7506 of). For example, the jackpot scenario is stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) using the opening period of the jackpot game. A jackpot scenario may be set in the process of S7506 based on the game state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol (one) is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol (the other) is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. , Not limited to this, for example, when the stop symbol of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol, that is, a combination of stop symbols indicating that a small hit has been won. On the other hand, the symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be configured to be forcibly stopped at the off symbol, or at the time when the small hit symbol of the one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the other symbol is stopped. The variation display of the symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is completed (after the jackpot game is completed), the variable display of the other symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be restarted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the above-described example, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific stop symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) indicating a hit, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is stopped or provisionally. Although the configuration for stopping has been described, other configurations may be used as long as the winning games of both are not executed at the same time. For example, a stopping symbol (for example, a jackpot) in which one special symbol indicates a winning may be used. Even if the symbol is displayed as stopped, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is continued without being stopped or temporarily stopped, and while the hit game (for example, the jackpot game) based on one special symbol is being executed, the other special symbol is displayed. When a stop symbol indicating a hit (for example, a jackpot symbol) is displayed as a stop, the execution of a hit game (for example, a jackpot game) based on the other special symbol is waited until one of the hit games is completed (postponed). ) May be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols, and at the same time, a plurality of winning games occur at the same time, providing a game that is difficult to understand. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, since it is possible to continuously start another winning game after one winning game is completed, it is possible to continuously provide a privilege (winning game) that is advantageous to the player, and improve the interest of the game. Can be made to.

In addition, when such a configuration is used, the game is that the jackpot is won in the other special symbol (the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) by using the effect (hit effect) executed during one of the hit games. It is preferable to configure it so as to notify the person. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the other special symbol while concentrating on the winning game, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Furthermore, if the lottery result of the other special symbol executed during one hit game is not a hit (it is a miss), the winning effect being executed is used so as not to notify that it is a miss. good. As a result, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result in which no new privilege is given to the player, the effect for the currently given privilege is given priority to the player. , It is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed independently (parallel) for a plurality of special symbols, and as a result of the lottery, one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a hit (small hit, big hit). At that time, control is executed to forcibly remove the fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol, but as another configuration, for example, the lottery result of one special symbol is won (small hit). , Big hit) (when the change of the special symbol whose lottery result is a hit is started), in the lottery of the other special symbol executed after that, the forced lottery excluding the winning lottery result (Determination using a special table in which deviations are specified for the entire range of the acquired random number counter value C1 per first) may be executed.

With this configuration, even if the lottery of a plurality of special symbols is executed independently, it is possible to prevent the plurality of winning games from being executed at the same time. In addition, instead of the timing when the stop symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is set according to the timing when the special symbol is drawn (the start timing of the fluctuation in which the stop symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, since forced disconnection control can be performed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the effect content executed during the variable display of the other special symbol and the lottery result of the other special symbol. it can.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S7007), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S7007).

In the second special symbol change start processing (FIG. 143, S7007), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to on (S7601: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to off (S7607), and this process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is stopped and displayed at the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (the stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot). This is a flag that is set to turn on while displaying the stop display of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the disengagement. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set.

Therefore, when the fluctuation stop flag 203cc in FIG. 2 is turned on in the processing of S7601, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S7602 to S7606 for setting the fluctuation start. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol from starting to change again within the same process. it can. In the fourth embodiment, as described with reference to the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194) of FIG. 137, after the variation processing related to the first special symbol is executed, the variation processing related to the second special symbol is performed. Since it is configured to be executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is used. For example, in the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194) of FIG. 137, after executing the variation processing related to the second special symbol, When the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag (the target is changed from the second special symbol to the first special symbol) is replaced with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc. It may be configured to use the flag).

Further, as in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute fluctuations (lottery) independently (in parallel), and the lottery result of one special symbol is won. In the case of showing, it is preferable to specify the variation processing of each special symbol (special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 137)) so that the variation processing for the special symbol which is advantageous for the player is executed first. As a result, for example, when a hold storage function (hold storage means) is provided in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the change of the special symbol is started at the same time (within the same process) after the jackpot game is completed, the player It is possible to preferentially handle the lottery result of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a disadvantageous game.

Specifically, for example, the first special symbol lottery in which it is easy to give a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, per 16 rounds) and the second special symbol lottery in which it is difficult to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In a game machine that can independently execute a special symbol lottery, a storage means that can store up to a plurality (for example, 4) of the right to execute each special symbol lottery is provided, and after the jackpot game is completed. Etc., when the lottery of each special symbol is performed at the same time (same process) and the lottery result of each special symbol shows a win with the same fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds). By configuring the process related to the first special symbol to be executed with priority, the winning game of the first special symbol (privilege advantageous to the player) is given regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S7601, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S7601: No), the second entrance 640 is used. It is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected (S7602). If the winning (winning) to the second entry port 640 is detected (S7602: Yes), then the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small Each value of the hit type counter C5 is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S7603), and the second special symbol jackpot determination for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is performed. The process is executed (S7604). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

When the processing of S7604 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is then performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S7603. Execute (S7605). The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146. After the process of S7605 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 141) is executed (S7606), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S7602, if it is determined that the winning of the second ball opening 1640 is not detected (S7602: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be independently (parallel) and can be changed (lottery), and the special symbol is changed. It is configured to execute a process of updating the game state (a process of subtracting the number of time reductions) when the (lottery) is executed. That is, when the process of changing (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (within the same process) is executed while the time reduction state is set, the number of time reductions is subtracted by two. Will be.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are independently (parallel) changed (lottery) is used, but in the third symbol display device 81, one special symbol is used according to the game state. Is used as the main special symbol, and is configured to perform an effect that makes it appear as if a game using only the main special symbol is being performed (see FIG. 126), providing an easy-to-understand effect to the player. However, even when the variable display in which only the main special symbol is emphasized is executed by the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are internally used. Since the number of time reductions is subtracted due to the change (lottery) of the special symbol), there is a contradiction between the display mode of the number of time reductions and the update status of the game state (internal number of time reductions). Alternatively, there is a problem that the updated content of the display mode of the reduced number of times is inconsistent with the effect content of the variable display in which only the main special symbol is emphasized.

The details of such a problem will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions for display (number of remaining time reductions) is updated according to the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the main special symbol. When the display is controlled and there is a difference between the number of time reductions on the display and the actual number of time reductions, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the main special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more). When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process of correcting the display time reduction number is executed so as to fill the difference between the display time reduction number and the actual time reduction number. ..

With this configuration, the player only plays the game while paying attention to the effect executed in response to the main special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the appropriate time saving situation (remaining time saving). The number of times) can be grasped, and an easy-to-understand game can be performed.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139) is executed. The differences from (see) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604) is executed, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol holding ball execution area) is acquired (S7701). Then, the process of S7702 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the first random number 4 table 202ca. The only difference between these processes is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol holding ball execution area), and the other cases are the first special symbol jackpot determination. The same control as the process (see FIG. 137) is performed.

When the processing of S7702 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S7703), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S7703: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a big hit. The processing of S7704 to S7707 is executed, and this processing is terminated. In each of these processes S7704 to S7707, the same process as each process of S7204 to S7207 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 137). Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S7703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S7703: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a miss of the second special symbol is set. Special Figure 2 Off-axis variation processing is executed (S7708), and this processing is terminated. Next, the details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (S7708).

In the special figure 2 deviation processing (S7708), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S7702 of FIG. 144 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S7801), and if the lottery result is a small hit. (S7801: Yes), the small hit flag 203cc is set to on (S7802), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S7803). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S7804), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7801 that the lottery result is out of order (S7801: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7805), and then This process ends.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 145, S7007), will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 146, S7605), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the special symbol reservation ball execution area (second special symbol execution area) (S7901). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S7902). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the process of S7704 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144).

In the process of S7902, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S7902: Yes), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is displayed. Read (S7903). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S7701 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144) described above, the first hit type selection 4 table 202 bb (see FIG. 131 (a)). ) To determine the jackpot type (S7904).

When the processing of S7904 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S7905), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S7906). Then, the process proceeds to S7908.

On the other hand, in the process of S7902, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S7902: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S7907) is executed, and the process proceeds to S7908. Transition.

In the process of S7908, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S7908). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S7909), and then ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the special drawing 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 147, S7907), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S8001). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cc is set to ON (S8001). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cc is on (S8001: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S8002). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce (see FIG. 134) (S8003).

Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S8004), and the variation of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Select a pattern (S8005). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S8006), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8001, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (S8001: No), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd corresponding to the current gaming state ( (See FIGS. 131 to 133) is read (S8007), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S8008). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation pattern (S8009), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S7008), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101). In the process of S8101, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: Yes), the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S8103). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the second special symbol (S8103: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8105). The process proceeds to S8106.

Next, the processing after S8106 differs from the above-mentioned processing after S7505 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 140 and S7005) in the following points. In the processing of S8106 and S8102 corresponding to the processing of S7505 and S7512, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S8112 corresponding to the processing of S7511, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special drawing. 2 It differs in that it is changed to a confirmation command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101 when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S8102), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S8103, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to off for the second special symbol (S8103: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S8104), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (S8104), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 148, S7008), will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 detachment stop process (S8104).

In the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (FIG. 149, S8104), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cc is set to ON (S8201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cc is set to ON (S8201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8202). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S8203).

When the processing of S8203 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S8204). After that, the small hit flag 203cc is set to off (S8205), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to on (S8207).

When the processing of S8207 is completed, the special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S8208). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37, is stopped to fluctuate with a small hit symbol (S8209), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201 when it is determined that the small hit flag 203cc is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S8201: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S8210). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37, is disengaged and stopped fluctuating at the symbol (S8211), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594). The jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed at the end timing of the ending effect, that is, the end timing of the jackpot game, with respect to the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1504 in FIG. 52). The difference is that the content of the game state after the jackpot game is set) is different. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since there are differences in the configuration of the game board 13 and the main control contents between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the detailed operation contents may differ during the jackpot. Even in such cases, it is assumed that the processing contents are the same, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed, the same processes of S1601 to S1612 as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above (see S1504 in FIG. 52) are executed. That is, the same process as the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) is executed during the period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot. Then, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the current end timing of the ending effect is (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot C (S1691).

In the processing of S1691, the current jackpot type is based on the information stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h and the information stored in the memory area that temporarily stores the currently executed jackpot type. To determine.

In the processing of S1691, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot C (any of jackpot A, B, D) (S1691: No), that is, after the end of this jackpot (after the end of the jackpot game). ) Is determined to set the time saving state, then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S1692). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving state in which the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or B and jackpot D is set. The process of S1692 is a process for determining whether to set a time saving state (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player or a time saving state (second time saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the first time saving state. ..

In the processing of S1692, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot D (S1692: No), the information indicating the time saving A state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cc (S1693), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1694. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S1692, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot D (S1692: Yes), the information indicating the time saving B state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cc (S1695), and the process proceeds to S1694. Transition.

When the time saving A state is set, that is, when the jackpot types this time are jackpots A and B, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state. In addition, the variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A (see FIG. 133 (a)) is referred to, and the time saving game in which the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) is more likely to be executed than the variation of the first special symbol (lottery). When it is executed and the time saving B state is set, that is, when the jackpot type this time is jackpot D, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the time saving state. , The variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B (see FIG. 134 (b)) is referred to, and the time saving game is executed in which the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) is easier to be executed than the variation of the second special symbol (lottery). Will be done.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state is provided according to the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set, and the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is provided. By making the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol different depending on the jackpot type for which the time reduction state is set, the time reduction state (time reduction A) in which the second special symbol becomes the main special symbol. ) And the time saving state (time saving B) in which the first special symbol becomes the main special symbol can be set. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol.

With this configuration, in the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state set as the gaming state, the time saving state on the disadvantage side to the player (time saving B) and the time saving state on the advantageous side to the player (time saving A) ) And can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, it is possible to set game states having different degrees of advantage simply by changing the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol, so it is necessary to use a special configuration for different degrees of advantage. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110.

Return to FIG. 150 and continue the description. After finishing the processing of S1693 or S1695, next, 100 is set to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k (S1694), and a status command for notifying the set gaming state to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1696). ). After that, the same processes of S1617 and S1618 as the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) can be set, and 100 is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203k regardless of which time saving state is set. It is configured to do. That is, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment, only the fluctuation number ending condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, a time saving state in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are set may be set.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the same time saving end condition (100 for the value of the time saving medium counter 203k) is set regardless of the set type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B). However, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the type of the set time saving state, and when the time saving state in which the time saving game is performed which is advantageous for the player is set, it is disadvantageous for the advantageous player. It may be configured so that the time saving end condition which is hard to be established is set as compared with the case where the time saving state in which the time saving game is performed is set.

Next, the contents of the small hit control process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 4 (S1595). The small hit control process 4 (see S1595 in FIG. 151) is a part of the process executed at the opening timing of the V winning opening with respect to the small hit control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that is deleted, and the same processing is executed otherwise. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit control process 4 (S1595 of FIG. 151) is executed, first, the same processes of S1701 to S1706 as the above-mentioned small hit control process (see S1505 of FIG. 53) are executed, and when the process of S1706 is completed. , S1707 and S1708 are skipped, the processes of S1709 and S1710 are executed, and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the current timing is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: No), the same processing of S1711 to S1721 as the processing of the small hit control processing (S1505 of FIG. 53) described above is performed. Execute and end this process.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation configuration). ) And one type that wins a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and one type that wins a small hit by a special symbol lottery and wins a big hit when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. It is different from each of the above-described embodiments in that it has a configuration (so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed configuration) capable of performing.

Then, in the gaming state in which the time saving state is set, the time saving state (time saving B) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the time saving state (time saving A) in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is mainly executed. ) And can be set by changing the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol set in the simultaneous fluctuation.

Further, the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol, and the time saving state in which the time saving A is set described above is more game than the time saving state in which the time saving B is set. It is configured to be in a game state that is advantageous to the person. Further, the time saving state in which the time saving B is set is configured so that the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is larger than that in the normal state.

That is, the above-mentioned simultaneous fluctuation configuration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned one-kind and two-kind mixed configuration, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol in the time-saving state is made different according to the jackpot type. By configuring the above, it is possible to execute a time-saving game in which a large number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed and a time-saving game in which a large number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol are executed.

In addition, by configuring the second special symbol to be easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol (including a configuration in which a small hit lottery is not performed in the first special symbol), a time-saving game in a time-saving state. , An advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player by aiming at both one type and two types (a time saving game that causes a lot of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol) and a disadvantageous time saving that aims at only one type. It is possible to set a state (a time-saving game in which a large number of changes (lottery) of the first special symbol are executed). Further, even when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

Therefore, as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is advantageous for a game machine having a conventional 1-type / 2-type mixed configuration in which only a gaming state (time saving state) in which it is easier to obtain two types of hits than in a normal state can be set. It is possible to set a plurality of game states at different stages and provide various games to the player, and it is possible to provide a game rich in interest.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not, and to play a big hit game with peace of mind.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the fourth embodiment, lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be duplicated and executed for each of the above-described embodiments (so-called simultaneous variation configuration). ) Is a big difference.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state, the time saving state (time saving B) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) is mainly executed and the time saving state in which the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) is mainly executed (lottery) are mainly executed. The state (time reduction A) can be set, and the number of time reductions (the number of time reductions on the display) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed according to the set time reduction state. It is configured in. With this configuration, it is possible to display the number of time reductions corresponding to the number of fluctuation effects (the number of fluctuations of the main special symbol) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, the fourth embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (see FIG. 129 (b)), and win the small win in the lottery of the second special symbol. In that case (when the small hit symbol indicating the small hit is stopped and displayed), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol indicating the deviation.

Since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit at a rate of 994/1000 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the number of time reductions is set in the gaming state in which the time reduction A is set. Even if 100 times is set, the fluctuation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) can be executed only about 50 times.

Therefore, when the time reduction A is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display 50 times as the display time reduction number, and the fluctuation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) is performed. ) Is executed, the display time reduction count is updated (subtracted). As a result, the number of time reductions is actually set to 100, and the number of time reductions is as if the player does not notice that the number of time reductions is subtracted in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is forcibly stopped. It is possible to make people think that 50 times have been set, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, when the above-mentioned time saving number display is performed, for example, when the second special symbol is won out by lottery, or when the hold memory of the first special symbol is lost and a new change of the first special symbol is started. When the first special symbol does not change at the time when the small hit of the second special symbol is won (when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, at the timing when the change of the second special symbol is stopped. If a situation occurs in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol cannot be stopped, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state becomes larger than the number of times of display time saving. , When the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the fluctuation of the second special symbol or when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not performed and a new fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the second Since the first special symbol is changed regardless of the change of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state is less than the number of times of display time saving. Problems occur.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined error occurs between the display time reduction number and the actual time reduction number, the time reduction number correction effect for correcting the error is executed. (See FIG. 127). As a result, the time saving state ends with an error between the number of fluctuations of the main special symbol executed during the time saving state set this time (the remaining number of times executed during the time saving state) and the number of times of display time saving. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, in order to update the display time reduction count according to the fluctuation of the main special symbol executed during the time reduction state, the player pays attention to the variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the time reduction count. You can play the game in a short time with peace of mind.

As the above-mentioned correction effect of the number of time reductions, in the subtraction correction effect executed when the number of time reductions for display is larger than the actual number of time reductions, the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol is set for a predetermined time (for example). , 30 seconds) or more, and if the fluctuation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, a pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-variation stop and pseudo-variation stop) that makes one special symbol fluctuation appear as multiple special symbol fluctuations. The effect of updating (subtracting) the number of display time reductions is executed at the time when the fluctuation is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a pseudo manner or when the fluctuation is restarted from the temporarily stopped state. Will be done. As a result, the number of display time reductions can be subtracted without discomfort during one special symbol change.

On the other hand, in the addition correction effect executed when the number of display time reductions is less than the actual number of time reductions, is the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)? Is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, an additional display is executed on the display screen to indicate that the number of display time reductions is added, and the display time reduction number is added. good. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the number of time reductions has been added on the way.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the same time reduction number is set, the displayed time reduction number is set differently according to the set time reduction state, so that the player can be set. It is possible to play a game in a short time state without giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the number of time reductions to be displayed in advance is different according to the set time reduction state, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the effect of correcting the time reduction number for display during the time reduction state, so that the player can understand. It is possible to provide an easy game.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the correction effect for correcting the number of display time reductions during the time reduction state is not limited to the above, and for example, it is shown that a plurality of display time reductions are reduced as an effect corresponding to the variable display of the main special symbol. By displaying the item on the display screen, a plurality of display time reduction times may be subtracted in one main special symbol change, or a number less than 50 may be displayed in advance as the display time reduction number. , The execution frequency of the subtraction correction effect may be extremely reduced.

In addition, the effect mode of the addition correction effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, after the display time reduction number of times is "1 time", "? Time" is displayed and how long the time reduction state continues. May be configured so that the player does not know, or when it is known in advance that the lottery for the main special symbol change has been won in succession, a plurality of main special symbol changes can be combined into one main. It is configured to make a pseudo fluctuation so that it looks like a special symbol fluctuation, and even though the main special symbol fluctuation is actually executed twice, the display time reduction number is subtracted only once. You may.

Further, even when there is no error between the number of display time reductions and the actual number of time reductions, the subtraction correction effect and the addition correction effect may be intentionally executed. As a result, various effects can be performed during the time saving state, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired of.

Among the contents of the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment, the differences from the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. do. First, the contents of the effect setting process 4 (S2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 4 (S2891).

The effect setting process 4 (S2891) is a part of the effect setting process 2 (FIG. 104) of the second embodiment described above with respect to the effect setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S2804 in FIG. 63). (Refer to S2851), different display commands are set according to the set time saving state type (time saving A, time saving B), and display according to the actual time saving number (remaining time saving number). It differs in that it added a process to correct the number of times of use.

When the effect setting process 4 (see S2891 in FIG. 152) is executed, first, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as the above-mentioned effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) are executed, and then the above-mentioned effect setting process is executed. The same process of S3301 as in 2 (see S2851 of FIG. 104) is executed. In the process of S3301, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set on (set to off) (S3301: No), that is, in the state where the time saving state is set, the first special When the symbol variation is completed, the same processes of S3306 to S3308 as in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) are executed, and then the display time reduction number correction process is executed (S3376), and this process is performed. To finish.

In this display time reduction correction process (S3376), the display time reduction number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time reduction state is discriminated from the actual time reduction number, and a predetermined error occurs in the discrimination result. In this case, a process for correcting the value of the display time reduction number of times is executed. The detailed contents of this display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the currently set time saving state type is the time saving A (S3371). ), If it is determined that the time reduction A is not (S3371: No), the display time reduction B start command is set (S3372), and the process proceeds to S3374. The display time reduction B start command set here is output to the display control device 114 by command output processing in the same manner as the other display commands described above, and displays the display screen shown in FIG. 126 (b). Referenced when.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3371 that the time reduction A is (S3371: Yes), the display time reduction A start command is set (S3373), and the process proceeds to S3374. When the display time reduction A start command is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 126 (a) is displayed.

In the process of S3374, the corresponding time saving state (time saving type) is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cc (S3374), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to off (S3375), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the content of the display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display time reduction number correction process (S3376). In this display time reduction number correction process (S3376), it is determined whether or not to execute the above-mentioned lower correction effect process with reference to FIG. 127.

When the display time reduction number correction process (S3376) is executed, first, the value of the display time reduction counter Ca, that is, the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction display area Dm10 of the display screen is read (S3701). .. The display time reduction counter Ca of the second special symbol is set when the time reduction A is set, that is, when the time reduction state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is mainly performed is set. It is updated every time the fluctuation is executed, and when the time saving B is set, that is, when the time saving state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is mainly performed is set, the first special symbol is set. Is updated every time the fluctuation of is executed.

Next, the actual number of remaining time reductions stored in the time reduction information update area 223g is read (S3702), and the difference between the value read in the processing of S3701 and the value read in the processing of S3702 is calculated (S3703). In the process of S3703, it is determined whether there is a difference between the compared values (S3704), and if it is determined that there is a difference (S3704: Yes), the fluctuation time set in the current fluctuation pattern is read out (S3705). It is determined whether the read variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds) (S3706).

If it is determined that the time is 30 seconds or more in the processing of S3706 (S3706: Yes), then the number of pseudo stops corresponding to the difference value calculated in the processing of S3703 (special symbol in the pseudo stop effect (third symbol)). (S3707), and a correction variation pattern corresponding to the set pseudo-variation number (pseudo-stop number) is determined (S3708). Then, the value of the time reduction counter Ca for display is corrected to the value of the time reduction information update area, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, when it is determined that there is no difference (S3704: No), or in the process of S3706, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S3706: No), this process is performed as it is. finish.

<About the first modification in the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by executing the left-handed game, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by executing the right-handed game. As described above, a configuration was used in which the first ball entry port 64 was arranged in the left side region and the second ball entry port 640 was arranged in the right side area. Then, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, a plurality of small hit types (small hits A to C) can be set, and the number of times the small hit is won in the state where the time saving state is set is set. Based on this, in detail, when the set number of times of the small hit type set for the difference won in the small hit reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. ..

On the other hand, in this modified example, there is a big difference in that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed by executing the right-handed game. In this way, in the right-handed game executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end for ending the time-saving state is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. As conditions, it is possible to set a special figure 1 end condition based on the lottery of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 end condition based on the lottery of the second special symbol.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time saving state ends, so that the game content can be easily predicted, resulting in a monotonous game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early. it can.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 154. The same elements as those of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 154, the pachinko machine 10 of this modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right region. First, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side region, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the left side flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member and the right side flow path 702.

A movable lid 1500 that forms the lower surface of the flow surface is provided on the upstream side of the left flow path, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a constant opening / closing operation is executed by a movable control means (not shown). It is configured in the open state where the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64b on the right side arranged below the movable lid 1500, and the closed state where it is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball. The opening and closing operation is executed.

Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device 110, and the movable lid opening / closing process results in an opening period of 0.1 seconds. , A closing period of 2 to 3 seconds is repeated according to a predetermined scenario. The right-side first ball entry port 64b, which is controlled to open and close in this way, is configured so that the ball is more difficult to enter than the first ball entry port 64.

Then, the ball flowing down the left side flow path 701 and flowing down on the movable lid 1500 flows down the bent portion of the left side flow path 701, passes through the through gate 67 provided at the lower end portion of the left side flow path 701, and passes through the right side. It flows out to the lower area of the area. Further, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be able to enter above the through gate 67 of the left flow path 701, and when the electric accessory 640a opens, a ball flowing down the left flow path 701 is the first. 2 It is configured to be guided to the entrance 640.

On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 flow into the inflow port 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the back side of the left flow path 701 (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 154). It flows out to the lower area of the right area. Here, the ball outflow position of the left side flow path 701 and the ball outflow position of the right side flow path 702 will be described with reference to FIG. 154.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the rolling member 1500 is always arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the timing when the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) and the timing when the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened coincide with each other. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling (or falling onto the constantly movable member) on the constantly movable member 1500 is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of opening the constantly movable valve 1500 is 0 in 0.9 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the right first entrance 64b.

That is, in a game state in which the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball enters the right first entrance 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game is performed. It is possible to prevent the state in which there is no hold of the special figure 1 from occurring when the state is completed and the time is shortened. In addition, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time, the left first ball enters in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at the mouth 64a.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 balls out of the 250 shot balls fired will enter the left first entry port 64a. It is designed, and if a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the left first entrance 64a, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. It becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, about 9 out of the 250 fired balls are designed to enter the right first entry port 64b. If one game ball enters, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b even if the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed game is more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be arranged based on the design concept to the extent that the player is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time saving state or the jackpot state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13 in the present modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are different from the configurations of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

In the first modification, the through gate 67 is arranged in the downstream portion of the first flow path 701 having the bent portion 701a, and the second entry is made in the downstream portion of the second flow path 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is arranged. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second entry port 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without reducing the flow speed of the ball. Therefore, since the flow interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of balls are simultaneously entered into the second entry port 640. It can be suppressed that it ends up. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened (see FIG. 23B), it is promptly performed. The ball can be entered into the second entry port 640.

Further, different flow paths (first flow path 701, 1st flow path 701,) in which the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since it is arranged in the second flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second entry port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is easy to insert a ball into the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally inserted into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to make.

With this configuration, when the right-handed game is performed in a state where the time saving state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. Further, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, the flow path of the ball that can enter the second entrance 640. Since the left side flow path 701 is provided with the right side first entry slot 64b for executing the lottery of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Can be suppressed.

In this modified example, in the right area of the game board 13, the ball entry port (the first ball entry port 64b on the left side) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the ball entry that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. A mouth (second taxiway 640) is provided so that a ball launched by a right-handed game can win a prize in any of the taxiways, but other configurations include, for example, a game. A distribution device may be provided in the right region of the board 13 to alternately distribute the ball to the first taxiway leading to the left first entry port 64b and the second taxiway leading to the second entry port 640.

With this configuration, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol can be alternately satisfied, which is excessive for the player. (That is, only the lottery of the second special symbol is biasedly executed during the time saving state), and the game state that is excessively disadvantageous to the player is provided (that is, the game state that is advantageous to the player is provided. That is, only the lottery of the first special symbol is biasedly executed during the time saving state), and this can be suppressed.

<About the first modification of the second embodiment>
Next, the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. In the second embodiment described above, the time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 end condition) and the time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure). 2 End condition), and the degree of expectation to win 2 types based on the lottery of the 1st special symbol, and the degree of expectation to win 2 types based on the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. Was configured to be different.

Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is easier to end (the time saving ending condition is easier to be satisfied) than in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the two types are easily obtained. It was. Then, as shown in FIG. 82, when the time saving state is set, the left-handed game (the game in which the first special symbol is drawn) and the right-handed game (the game in which the second special symbol is drawn) are It was configured to display an effect screen for selecting either one and let the player play a desired game.

On the other hand, in the first modification, an effect for performing one game (right-handed game) is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied in the one game. When it is determined that the state is (the state in which the condition before the end of the time reduction is satisfied), the effect for performing the other game (left-handed game) is executed. With this configuration, the game can be enjoyed to the maximum extent in the time-saving state by performing the game according to the effect to be executed (variable game method).

Next, the display screen in the state in which the time saving state of this modification is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. 155 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (big hits A, B, D in the second embodiment described above) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and FIG. 155 (b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the condition before the end of the time reduction related to the right-handed game is satisfied during the period in which the time reduction state is set, and FIG. 156 (a) shows the time reduction state is set. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen after the condition before the end of time reduction about a right-handed game was satisfied during the period. In each display screen, the same reference numerals are given to the elements displaying the same effect mode as that of the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the ending screen of the jackpot game, in addition to displaying "right-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2, the display mode showing "right-handed" in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Is displayed. Here, in the present modification, unlike the second embodiment described above, an effect display for encouraging the player to play the game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and the game state is set in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. It is configured so that the display mode corresponding to the instruction command for notifying the corresponding game direction is displayed.

That is, during the big hit game and during the time saving state, the display mode indicating "right-handed" is always displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Furthermore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "Please hit right after the jackpot rush rushes in" is displayed in order to perform the right-handed game after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state and the time saving end condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is satisfied (special figure 2 condition before the time saving end). As shown in Fig. 155 (b), the comment "End of pounding rush, entry into pullback zone" indicating that the right-handed game in the time-saving state has ended is displayed, and "left" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. The characters "hit" are displayed.

As a result, the player finishes the right-handed game and starts the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set. In fact, since the time saving state has not ended, "right-handed" is continuously displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Then, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbol displays Dsb to Dse of the first special symbol that can be acquired by the left-handed game are displayed.

Then, when the player starts the left-handed game, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), the effect in the pullback zone is executed. Since the effect in the pullback zone is the same as that in the case where the left-handed game is performed in the time-saving state in the second embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the state where the time saving state is set, the degree of establishment (progress) of a plurality of time saving end conditions is determined and right-handed. It is configured to perform an effect such as performing a game to perform a game or performing a left-handed game. This has the effect of allowing the player to perform various games during the time saving state.

Further, in this modification, the game direction is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 so that the right-handed game is performed in the first half and the left-handed game is performed in the second half of the time saving state. As a result, the right-handed game can be continuously executed from the jackpot game, and the left-handed game can be continuously executed when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the game direction from becoming complicated.

Further, when the state is reached immediately before the end of the time reduction state in the right-handed game, that is, the time reduction end condition that is satisfied based on the information updated by the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is immediately before the establishment. When it is determined that there is, since the effect of guiding the left-handed game is executed, it is possible to guide the player to the game in which it is difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state according to the current situation. .. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to an advantageous game method.

Further, in the second embodiment to which the present modification is applied, as shown in FIG. 2, the first game is performed by the left-handed game regardless of whether the normal state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the ratio of balls entering the ball entry port 64 is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is set or the normal state is set in the "pull-back zone" in which the left-handed game is performed in the latter half of the time saving state.

In the second embodiment to which the present modification is applied, as described above, the time saving state is configured so that it is easier to obtain the two types of hits based on the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Therefore, during the "pull-back zone" where the time saving state is set, the ease of drawing (variation) of the first special symbol is the same as when the normal state is set, but the lottery Based on this, it is easy to obtain a hit between two types, so that the game state is more advantageous than the normal state.

Therefore, it is possible to produce a gaming state in which a jackpot is actually set more easily (it is easier to obtain two types of hits) than in a normal state as a "pull-back zone", so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the timing at which the pre-time reduction condition is satisfied based on the right-handed game differs depending on the lottery result of the right-handed game (the lottery result of the second special symbol), the period during which this "pull-back zone" is executed is indefinite. Become a thing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the "pull-back zone" to continue for a long period of time.

Further, in this modification, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is set according to the game state, and the guidance display is performed according to the game state and the progress of the time reduction end condition (whether or not the time reduction end condition is established). It is configured to set the display mode of the area Dm2, and the display mode of the guide display area Dm2 is displayed larger than the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 to actively guide the player to the game method. However, not limited to this, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is configured to be variable according to the game state and the progress of the time reduction end condition (whether or not the time reduction end condition is established). You may. In this case, if the condition before the end of the time reduction is satisfied by the right-handed game (the game for executing the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol) during the time reduction state, the condition before the end of the time reduction is satisfied. It is preferable to change the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so as to be less conspicuous than in the case where the game direction is not displayed.

In this way, in the state where the time saving state is set, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is changed from the first notification mode to the second according to the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is established). By changing to the notification mode, the player can visually determine the degree of advantage when the game is executed according to the game direction (for example, right-handed) notified by the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. ..

<About the fifth embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the second embodiment described above in that the player is allowed to select the game method when the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, a game (first game) in which a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed when the time saving state is set. It was configured so that the player could select the game (second game) to be performed (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the lottery of Special Figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. It was configured to draw the special figure 2 by aiming at the mouth 640 (see FIG. 2).

Then, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 2 are different, and the time saving ending condition is easily satisfied (the time saving state ends). It was configured so that the player could select a game (easy to play) and a game (from that game) in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, the game in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied (first game) is more likely to be in one special symbol lottery than the game in which the time saving ending condition is hard to be satisfied (second game). Probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery, and winning a jackpot (per 2 types) during the small hit (during the small hit game) It was configured so that the probability of adding up the probability of doing so would be high.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, various games can be executed by letting the player select the game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It can be suppressed. In addition, depending on the game method selected by the player, the ease of ending the time saving state (the ease of satisfying the time saving ending condition) and the degree of expectation of a big hit for one special drawing lottery should be different. Therefore, the player himself / herself can select a game that suits him / herself, and can provide a game suitable for various players.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one of the game methods (second game) selected by the player during the time saving state is easier to enter the ball than in the normal state. The game is aimed at the mouth 640, but the other game (first game) is a game aimed at the first entrance 64, which has the same ease of entering the ball as in the normal state. There was a problem that it was difficult to give an advantage due to the time saving state being set.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the second embodiment described above in that the player is allowed to select the game method when the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, a game (first game) in which a lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed and a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed when the time saving state is set. It was configured so that the player could select the game (second game) to be performed (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the lottery of Special Figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. It was configured to draw the special figure 2 by aiming at the mouth 640 (see FIG. 2).

Then, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 2 are different, and the time saving ending condition is easily satisfied (the time saving state ends). It was configured so that the player could select a game (easy to play) and a game (from that game) in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, the game in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied (first game) is more likely to be in one special symbol lottery than the game in which the time saving ending condition is hard to be satisfied (second game). Probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery, and winning a jackpot (per 2 types) during the small hit (during the small hit game) It was configured so that the probability of adding up the probability of doing so would be high.

In the second embodiment configured in this way, various games can be executed by letting the player select the game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It can be suppressed. In addition, depending on the game method selected by the player, the ease of ending the time saving state (the ease of satisfying the time saving ending condition) and the degree of expectation of a big hit for one special drawing lottery should be different. Therefore, the player himself / herself can select a game that suits him / herself, and can provide a game suitable for various players.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one of the game methods (second game) selected by the player during the time saving state is set to the time saving state, so that the game is more than the normal state. The game is aimed at the second entrance 640, which makes it easier to enter the ball, while the other game (first game) is aimed at the first entrance 64, which is the same as the normal state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to give the player an advantage due to the setting of the time saving state. In other words, by setting the time saving state, the special symbol changes (lottery) can be performed more efficiently than in the normal state, and in that state, different playability (easiness of ending the time saving state and one time). It was not possible to provide the jackpot expectation in the special drawing lottery.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is simultaneously executed as in the fourth embodiment described above. By having a possible configuration (so-called simultaneous variation configuration) and varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol that can be set according to the gaming state, the player can select different playability in the time saving state. It is configured as follows.

As a result, by setting the time saving state, it is possible to provide a game in which the special symbol can be changed (lottery) more efficiently than in the normal state, and the player can select a different game property. It is configured as follows.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has a configuration of a right side area of the game board 13 (a game area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80) and a game area below the variable display device unit 80. Is different from the configuration (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment) described above. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is formed so that the right side region is roughly divided into two, and the momentum of the ball launched by the right-handed game, that is, the operation handle 51. The ball flows down different flow paths according to the magnitude (launch intensity) of the resistance value detected by the variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the ball by the change in electrical resistance. It is configured as follows.

Specifically, when the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 exceeds the reference amount, the fired ball is configured to flow down the right side region, and further, the operation handle 51 When the rotation operation amount (rotation position) is larger than the reference amount and less than the limit amount (weak right-handed game), it is divided into left and right by the regulation wall (regulation member) 900 provided in the center of the right side region. When the ball is launched toward the first right region 901a on the left side of the region and the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 is equal to or more than the limit amount and less than or equal to the limit amount (strong right-handed game). Of the regions divided into left and right by the regulation wall (regulation member) 900, the ball is configured to be launched toward the second right region 901b on the right side. In the fifth embodiment, the firing intensity is increased according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, but the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 reaches a predetermined rotation operation amount. However, the operation handle 51 can be rotated even after the firing intensity is maximized. With this configuration, it is not necessary to operate the operation handle 51 up to the limit (up to the upper limit) of the rotation operation range of the operation handle 51 when performing a strong right-handed game, so that the operation handle 51 is hard to break. be able to.

Hereinafter, in the right-handed game, the game aiming at the first right-hand area 901a is referred to as a weak right-handed game, and the game aiming at the second right-hand area 901b is referred to as a strong right-handed game. In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the magnitude of the firing intensity of the right-handed game, but the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games by other configurations. For example, a plurality of different games may be repeatedly set according to the magnitude of the firing intensity, or even if the balls are launched with the same firing intensity, the balls may be set. It may be configured so that different games are set according to the firing timing and the number of balls, and the right side region may be formed so that the balls flow down different regions for each different game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the firing intensity of the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball launched by the left-handed game flows down. On the other hand, it may be configured to set a plurality of games.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 157. The ball launched by the weak right-handed game is placed in the opening formed between the plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display device unit 80) and the variable display device unit 80. It invades and flows down the first right side region 901a. On the other hand, the ball launched by the strong right-handed game invades the opening formed above the plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display device unit 80), and the second It flows down the right side region 901b.

As shown in FIG. 157, the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment has an identifier for indicating that the right side region is divided into a plurality of right side regions (first right side region 901a, second right side region 901b). As a result, a mark imitating a fish (displaying the first right area) 910 and a mark imitating a turtle (displaying the second right area) 911 are visible to the player near the entrance of each area (game board). It is affixed (on the surface of 13). With this configuration, it is possible to identify whether or not the game (strong right-handed game, weak right-handed game) desired by the player is actually performed, and identify the mark affixed to the trajectory of the launched ball. It can be easily determined by doing so.

In the fifth embodiment, the above-mentioned first right area display 910 and second right area display 911 are attached one by one near the entrance of each area, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Multiple may be pasted. Further, instead of sticking to the surface of the game board 13, the surface of the game board 13 is made of a transparent member (for example, acrylic resin), and each mark is attached so as to be embedded in the transparent member. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the fired ball does not come into contact with each mark (first right area display 910, second right area display 911), so that each mark is peeled off by contacting the ball. It is possible to suppress the problem of closing.

Of the areas partitioned by the regulation wall 900, the first right side area 901a is provided with a second entry port 640, and most (about 95%) of the balls that have invaded the first right side area 901a are the second entry balls. It is configured to enter the mouth 640. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, a variation time of 10 minutes is set for the lottery of Special Figure 2 executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. are doing. Then, the number of balls (the number of prize balls) to be paid out when a ball enters the second entry port 640 is set to one.

With this configuration, even if a weak right-handed game is executed in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase (the number of balls paid out is smaller than the number of shot balls), and the second ball is entered. Even if the ball entry rate to the mouth 640 is increased, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed efficiently.

Next, in the second right side region 901b of the region partitioned by the regulation wall 900, a through gate 67 and a right first ball entry port 964 are arranged. An electric accessory 964a is attached to the right first entrance 964. This electric accessory 964a operates on the same operating principle as the electric accessory 640a of the second embodiment described above, and is a lottery result of a general drawing lottery executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67. Depending on the situation, the ball can be changed between an open state in which the ball easily enters the right first entry port 964 and a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter (impossible to enter). The detailed contents will be omitted because they are the same as those in the second embodiment described above.

By arranging different entrances for each of the partitioned areas in this way, different special drawing lottery is executed according to the content of the game during the time saving state. Although the details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation time is short (5 to 60 seconds) with respect to the lottery of Special Figure 2 executed in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state. It is configured to be set.

Therefore, since both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed during the time saving state, the player can select which game to play. In the fifth embodiment, different lottery results are given to the player depending on whether the special figure 1 lottery is performed or the special figure 2 lottery is performed during the time saving state. There is.

Specifically, it is easier for the special figure 1 lottery to end the time saving state than the special figure 2 lottery, and the privilege (number of prize balls) given when the big hit is won increases. It is configured as follows. In other words, during the time saving state, the special figure 1 lottery can perform a high-risk, high-return game compared to the special figure 2 lottery (a game with a different game property can be executed). .. In this way, when the player can select the game method, the player can enthusiastically select the game method by executing different game characteristics according to the selected game state.

In addition, depending on the game method selected, the period during which the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, continues (the period during which the time-saving state continues on average) is made different. Can be selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game according to the convenience of the player himself / herself.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when a game method for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in a short period of time (shorter period than other game methods) is selected, a big hit is made in that time-saving state. When the player wins the game, the player is given a greater privilege than when another game method is selected. As a result, even if a game method in which the time saving state ends in a short period of time is selected, the privilege can be given fairly to the player, so that the player can easily select the desired game method.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. Specifically, a first pass sensor 905a is provided in the first right side region 901a partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and a second pass sensor 905b is provided in the second right side region 901b.

The first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b are detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the game board 13, and can detect the flow (pass) of the ball in a non-contact state. It is composed of various proximity sensors. The first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b have a passage width of one sphere or more and less than two spheres (for example, 15 mm) in each region in order to reliably detect a sphere passing through each region. It is provided in the part where By limiting the flow width of the sphere flowing down each region in this way, the detection accuracy of the sphere can be improved. In addition, the number of detection means required to detect the sphere can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b described above are embedded in the game board 13 so that the detection area is the surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is embedded. A proximity sensor is provided to detect a change in capacitance caused by a ball flowing down the surface (bottom surface of the ball flow), but a proximity sensor of any other form may be provided, a limit switch, or the like. The detection means of the contact type detection method may be provided.

In the fifth embodiment, in order to prevent the proximity sensor corresponding to one region from detecting a sphere flowing down the other region, a predetermined thickness (predetermined thickness) so that the detection ranges of the proximity sensors do not overlap. For example, the configuration has 5 mm), but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, various displacements (capacitance displacement, magnetic field displacement) detected by the proximity sensor are prevented from being affected across the regulation wall 900. The material may be configured to form the regulation wall 900.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, a dedicated detection means is used to determine which region (first right region 901a, second right region 901b) the ball launched by the right-handed game has passed. However, the information (signal) indicating that the ball has entered the ball entry openings arranged in each of the first right side area 901a and the second right side area 901b is not limited to this. It may be determined based on. Further, the adjustment amount of the operation handle 51 may be detected, and the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game may be discriminated based on the adjusted amount.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player is provided with a configuration and a process for determining whether the right-handed game currently being executed is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. The current game method can be notified to the player.

Next, the detailed configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. First, with reference to FIG. 158, the configuration of the upper portion of the game board 13, that is, the portion where the ball launched by the right-handed game is distributed into the first right side region 901a and the second right side region 901b will be described. FIG. 158 is a partially enlarged view showing the upper side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 158, the ball launched by the right-handed game passes through the apex portion of the game board 13 (the uppermost part of the game area of the game board 13 formed in a circle in FIG. 157 front view). In any of the opening 902b formed between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 and the opening 902a below the opening 902b and formed between the tip nail K1a and the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to be distributed to. Further, the opening 902b formed above the game board 13 extends to the entrance width (the center point of the circular game area and the straight line passing through the tip nail K1a to the rail 62 to the tip nail K1a and the rail 62). The distance) is 2 cm, and the entrance width of the opening 902a (the distance between the outer wall of the variable display device unit 80 and the tip nail K1a in the straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a) is 4. It is configured to be centimeters.

This is because when a strong right-handed game is performed in a right-handed game, the launched ball advances stably along the rail 62, whereas in a weak right-handed game, the trajectory of the ball is stabilized. Because it is difficult, the entrance width of the opening 902a in which the ball launched by the weak right-handed game invades is wider than that of the opening 902b in which the ball launched by the strong right-handed game invades. This is to make it easier to perform.

That is, by forming the entrance width of the opening 902a wide, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 corresponding to the weak right-handed game can be widened, so that the player can perform the weak right-handed game. It can be made easier.

Further, a fish mark (first right area display) 910 is affixed in the vicinity of the opening 902a in the first right side area 901a, and a turtle mark (second right side area display) 910 is affixed in the vicinity of the opening 902b in the second right side area 901b. Right area display) 911 is attached. In this way, by affixing each mark to the area through which the ball immediately after passing through each opening (the ball immediately after being distributed to the partitioned area) passes, which area the fired ball is fired to the player. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not the user has reached.

In the present embodiment, marks (first right side area display, second right side area display) for indicating each area are attached in the first right side area 901a and the second right side area 901b, but the present invention is limited to this. No, for example, among the areas through which the sphere before passing through each opening (902a, 902b) passes, the first right area is displayed in the area where it is determined which opening the sphere that has passed through that area passes through. 910, the second right area display 911 may be attached. In this way, marks for indicating each area not only in the partitioned area but also in the area through which the sphere that is determined to invade the specific partitioned area passes (first right area display, second right side). By configuring the area display) to be attached, it is possible to easily attach the mark to a position easily visible to the player in the limited space of the game board 13.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 159 (a) is an enlarged view of the right side region when the variable winning device 9650a is open, and FIG. 159 (b) is an enlarged view of the right side region when the variable winning device 9650a is closed. is there.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player selects a weak right-handed game aiming at the first right-hand area 901a and a strong right-handed game aiming at the second right-hand area 901b as a game method during the right-handed game. It is configured so that the player can be provided with a game having different game characteristics according to the selected game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it is necessary for the player to select a desired game method from the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game, and adjust the operation handle 51 according to the game method. there were. As described above with reference to FIG. 158, in the fifth embodiment, the opening 902a of the weak right-handed game is widened so that the adjustment range of the operation handle 51 for the weak right-handed game that is difficult for the player to adjust is widened. It is configured to be wider than the opening 902b of the strong right-handed game so that the player can easily select the game method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), in the fifth embodiment, when any game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) is performed in the state where the time saving state is set. Even if there is, a variable winning device 9650a that is openly operated in the jackpot game is arranged so that the jackpot game can be executed while the game is continued.

As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the time saving state, the selected game method can be continued during the time saving state, so that the player is troubled in the state where the time saving state and the jackpot gaming state are repeatedly set. It is possible to play a game without feeling the feeling.

Further, the variable winning device 9650a is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entrance port 640 arranged in the first right side area 901a and the first ball entry port 964 arranged in the second right side area 901b. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball launched in the right-handed game does not enter each entry opening before winning the variable winning device 9650, and the jackpot game can be smoothly performed.

Further, the variable winning device 9650a has a first right region 901a and a second right region 901b as a part of the regulation wall 900 as shown in FIG. 159 (b) except during the jackpot game (when the opening operation is not performed). Since it is closed so as to partition and, it is possible to prevent a ball flowing down each region from invading a different region during the time saving state.

In the fifth embodiment, any region (first right region 901a, second right region) can be executed so that the jackpot game can be executed while maintaining the gaming method selected by the player during the time saving state. A variable winning device 9650 is arranged so that a ball flowing down 901b) can also win a prize, but the ball launched by the right-handed game is not limited to this, and each region (first right region 901a, second) The variable winning device 9650 may be arranged in the area through which the game passes before being distributed to the right side area 901b).

Further, a variable winning device corresponding to each area may be provided. Specifically, the variable for special figure 2 is opened when a big hit is won by the lottery of special figure 2 in the first right area 901a where the ball of the weak right-handed game in which the lottery of special figure 2 is executed flows down. A special figure 1 is provided when a winning device is arranged and a big hit is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 in the second right area 901b where the ball of the strong right-handed game in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed flows down. It is configured to dispose a variable winning device for.

With this configuration, if you win a big hit by playing one of the games (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) in the state where the time saving state is set, it will be as it is for the player. It is possible to execute a jackpot game while continuing the game method of. In addition, different variable winning devices will be opened when a big hit is won according to the game method to be executed. Therefore, by making the game method different for the player while the time saving state is set. It is possible to make it easy to understand that different games are executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied) in the state where the time saving state is set, or when the special symbol When the number of small hits won by lottery reaches a predetermined number (when the winning number end condition is satisfied), the time saving state is changed to the normal state (from the gaming state advantageous to the player to the unfavorable gaming state). It is configured to migrate. Regarding this configuration, only the values set as the end conditions are different from the second embodiment described above, and the process of determining whether or not each end condition is satisfied and each end condition are performed. Since the processing for shifting the game state to be executed when is satisfied is the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by making it possible to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol and not winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ease of ending the time saving state is different between the game (strong right-handed game) and the game that executes the lottery of the second special symbol (weak right-handed game). Furthermore, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the amount of privilege (prize ball amount) given to the player in one jackpot is higher than that in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. Is configured to be large, so that the player can enthusiastically select the game method in the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the content of the jackpot effect executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen at the time when the jackpot (big hit game) is started, and FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram of the display screen during the jackpot (big hit game). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example schematically.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the weak right-handed game, the strong right-handed game, and the player can select and execute (by operating the operation handle 51) in the state where the time saving state is set. In addition, during the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is to be performed in the same manner as in the time-saving state, the player is guided by the production whether the game method corresponding to the time-saving game desired by the player is performed. It is configured so that

That is, as shown in FIG. 157, in the fifth embodiment, as a game method (time saving game method) in the time saving state, a weak right-handed game and a strong right-handed game can be executed, and further. , It is configured so that the jackpot game can be executed regardless of which game method is being executed. With this configuration, the game method corresponding to the game method in the time saving state desired by the player is executed in advance using the period during which the jackpot game, which is the stage before the time saving state is set, is executed. be able to.

Therefore, when different time-saving game methods are executed based on the operation of the operation handle 51 as in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving game method desired by the player can be surely executed. Further, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game content actually executed during the jackpot game (same as the executed game storage area) matches the game state desired by the player during the time saving state. However, it is configured to execute an effect based on the determination result. As a result, the player can easily understand the current game method (the game method during the big hit game).

When the jackpot game is started (when the jackpot opening period is reached), a "right-handed" comment is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. Then, in the main display area Dm, a selection screen for selecting the game method desired by the player in the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is displayed. Specifically, a safe mode display mode 851 and a challenge mode display mode 852 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an arrow pointing to each display mode periodically and repeatedly indicates one of the display modes. By operating the frame button 22 with, a desired game method is selected.

This safe mode display mode 851 is selected when a weak right-handed game in a time-saving state, that is, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed is desired, and a challenge mode display mode 852 Is selected when a strong right-handed game in a time-saving state, that is, a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed is desired. The figure shown in FIG. 160A is a state in which the arrow 853 indicating the safe mode display mode 851 is displayed, and the player desires by operating (pressing) the operation button 22 in this state. The game method can be selected as the safe mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 160A, the challenge mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the arrow 854 shown by the dotted line is displayed by the solid line.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Please select the desired game" are displayed as a comment for allowing the player to select the desired mode, and the frame button 22 for guiding the selection operation is displayed. A simulated figure is displayed. Based on the display content displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the player grasps the content to be selected at the start of the jackpot and selects the desired game method in the time saving state. For the game method selected here, the game method being executed during the jackpot game is determined.

During the jackpot game, the figure shown in FIG. 160 (b) is displayed. On the screen during the jackpot game, "right-handed" is continuously displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and the current number of round games is displayed in the round number display area 858. In the example of FIG. 160 (b), "ROUND 5" indicating that the round game is the fifth round is displayed.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the current game method is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the desired game method selected at the start of the jackpot game is displayed in the desired game display area 861. In the figure shown in FIG. 160 (b), the display mode showing the "safety mode" is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the display mode showing the "challenge mode" is displayed in the desired game display area 861. .. That is, the display content when the actually executed game method is different from the game method desired by the player is displayed, and in order to change the game method to the game guide area 859 of the sub-display area Ds. The comment "Strongly right-handed" is displayed.

By configuring the display mode in this way, adjustments for matching the actual game method with the game method desired by the player (the game method desired to be executed during the time reduction state) are made before the time reduction state is set. It can be performed during the period when the jackpot game is being executed. Further, when the game method being executed during the jackpot game is different from the desired game method, a guidance display for changing the game method can be displayed during the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the desired game method during the period.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 160 (b). On the display screen during the jackpot game, there is a running jackpot history 855 that shows the game method when the running jackpot is won, and a safety mode jackpot history 856 that shows the number of times the jackpot was won during the safety mode. The challenge mode jackpot history 857, which indicates the number of times the jackpot was won during the mode, is displayed. The figure shown in FIG. 160 (b) is a lottery of the first special symbol executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state. The letter "V" indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed as the running jackpot history 855.

In addition, when the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot won by the lottery of the second special symbol executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the state where the time saving state is set. Is displayed in the running hit history 855 with the letter "V with a fish mark", and is a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol executed when the ball enters the right first entrance 964. If you win, the character "V with a turtle mark" is displayed in the running hit history 855. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the chance of winning the jackpot regardless of the game state in which the jackpot is won.

In addition, by providing the safe mode jackpot history 856 and the challenge mode jackpot history 857, what kind of game is played in the past when playing a game with the pachinko machine 10, especially when playing a game in a time-saving state. You can refer to the game history of. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to predict an advantageous game method, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

In the fifth embodiment, as the past game history, the game method set when the jackpot is won is cumulatively displayed, but other than that, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, It may be configured to display the accumulated value of the game methods selected in the past.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the game content in the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the content of the time-saving game in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, in the fifth embodiment, different games are executed depending on the game method to be executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when a weak right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the first right region 901a is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, most of the launched balls are the second entrance 640. It is configured so that one prize ball is paid out by entering the ball.

Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol, which is executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, it is set so that the small hit is not won, and when the big hit is won. Is set to perform a 10-round jackpot game. Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving state is set, the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery of the second special symbol have the same degree of variation. The time is set.

On the other hand, when a strong right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the second right region 901b is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 964a is based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. Opens. Then, if a ball enters the right first entry port 964 while the electric accessory 964a is in the opening operation, three prize balls are paid out. Here, about one-third of the balls launched into the second right region 901b in the state where the time saving state is set are configured to enter the right first entrance 964. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the right-handed game is performed during the time saving state, the holding ball is maintained regardless of whether the weak right-handed game or the strong right-handed game is performed. You can get a prize ball (prize ball = medium).

Further, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed by the strong right-handed game, unlike the lottery of the second special symbol described above, it is configured so that a small hit can be won (the winning probability is 1/60). ). Here, in the fifth embodiment, as the time saving end condition which is a condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number ending condition which is satisfied when the number of times of change of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In addition, even if a small hit is won, the time saving end condition is satisfied. That is, when the time saving state is set, the strong right-handed game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed has a shorter time than the weak right-handed game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured so that a game that is easy to finish is performed.

Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the prize amount (number of prize balls) given to the player is larger than that in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. The game is configured to be performed.

With this configuration, the time saving state is set until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 100 times in the time saving state, but the weakness of executing the lottery of the second special symbol with few benefits when winning the jackpot. A time saving state is set until a right-handed game (safety mode) is performed, a special symbol change is executed 100 times, or a small hit is won, that is, more time-saving end conditions are set than in a weak right-handed game. However, although the time saving state is easy to end, there are many benefits if you win the jackpot (12 round jackpot). Different playability depending on whether you perform a strong right-handed game (challenge mode) that executes the lottery of the first special symbol. Since it can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In the fifth embodiment, the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. However, other than that, the time saving end condition described in each of the above-described embodiments may be set. For example, in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won, and the small hit type set for the winning small hit is a specific small hit type (for example, small hit A). It is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied only in the case of, and the above-mentioned specific small hit type (small hit A) is set only when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. You may. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the time saving state ends just by winning the small hit, so that it is possible to provide a feeling of excitement to the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won, that is, when the small hit is won once, but the time saving end condition is satisfied. The number of winnings may be set to one or more times. Further, when a small hit is won, a plurality of small hit types may be set, and different time saving end conditions may be set for each small hit type.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. In the fifth embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to fluctuate (lottery) at the same time, and the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 is The values set in each table are different from those of the fourth embodiment described above, but are the same except for the above. The detailed description of the same part or the part where the value is simply changed will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 162 (a), among the configurations of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern 5 table different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment described above. The contents of 202dd will be described. FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd. The variation pattern 5 table 202dd is different from the variation pattern 4 table 202cd described above in that the specified contents of the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state are different.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the above-described fourth embodiment, different variation pattern tables are referred to according to the set time saving state (depending on the winning jackpot type), and the first In contrast to the configuration in which the time saving state in which the 1 special symbol is easily changed and the time saving state in which the second special symbol is easily changed can be set, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern referred to during the time saving state is configured. The difference is that the simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 for shortening the working hours is specified as the table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 162 (b), the contents specified in the time saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 will be described. FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the time saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 has a first special symbol (special drawing 1) as compared with the fluctuation pattern table referred to during the time saving state of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that there is no significant difference in the fluctuation time set for any of the fluctuation pattern defined in accordance with the above and the fluctuation pattern defined in response to the second special symbol (special figure 2).

That is, in the fourth embodiment described above, in the right-handed game executed when the time saving state is set, both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are drawn by lottery. The lottery is mainly executed by configuring the game board 13 so as to be executed and making the length of the fluctuation time set for each special symbol different according to the type of the time saving state set as the game state. It was configured to change the type of special symbol.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time set for each special symbol is set to the same length, and the player makes a ball. The difference is that the type of special symbol on which the lottery is executed is mainly changed by changing the game area in which the game is fired.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 used in the fifth embodiment shows the lottery result (win / fail determination) regardless of whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. A fluctuation pattern (big hit fluctuations 1 to 3) with a fluctuation time of 10 to 60 seconds is specified for a jackpot (result), and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for a lottery result (win / fail judgment result). A fluctuation pattern of ~ 30 seconds (disengagement fluctuations 1 to 3) is specified. In addition, only the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that it can be judged as a small hit as a winning / failing judgment result, but for this small hit, 10 seconds or more as in the case where the above-mentioned winning / failing judgment result is wrong A fluctuation pattern of 30 seconds (small hit fluctuations 1 to 3) is specified. As a result, the same fluctuation time can be set for the fluctuation that is won in the small hit and the fluctuation that is won in the loss.

Therefore, the effect suggesting that the time reduction ends due to winning the small hit can be applied as it is even when the lottery result (win / fail determination result) is out of order. In the fifth embodiment, the effect suggesting that the time reduction is completed (the effect suggesting that the small hit has been won) is executed depending on whether the winning / failing result is wrong or the small hit. In addition to this, for example, the fluctuation time specified for the case where the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a small hit, and the fluctuation time specified for the case of a big hit, May be the same, and it may be configured to execute an effect indicating that the player has won either a big hit or a small hit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand until the end whether a situation in which a player wins a big hit and obtains a privilege or a situation in which a player wins a small hit and ends a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is given. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the first pass counter 223 da, the second pass counter 223 db, the selected game storage area 223 dc, the execution game storage area 223 dd, and the jackpot information storage area 223 de are compared with the second embodiment described above. And, are different in that they are added.

The first pass counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the first pass sensor 905a (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the number of balls that have passed through the first right region 901a during the jackpot game. is there. The first pass counter 223da turns on the first pass sensor 905a during the jackpot in the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined to be present, the value is added by 1 (see S3803). In addition, the value added when determining the game method being executed is referred to (see S3806 to S3809). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot has ended (when the time saving state is set), the value is cleared (reset) to 0 (see S3811).

The second pass counter 223db is a counter similar to the first pass counter 223da described above, and is the number of balls detected by the second pass sensor 905b (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the second pass counter during the jackpot game. This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the right region 901b. The processing using the second pass counter 223db is different only in that the target of the first pass counter 223da described above is changed from the first pass sensor 905a to the second pass sensor 905b. Is omitted.

The selected game storage area 223dc is an area for temporarily storing the game method desired by the player during the time saving state. In this selected game storage area 223dc, the game method selected during the game selection period set in the predetermined period (10 seconds) after the jackpot game is started (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set) is set. It is stored, and when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (see S2157 in FIG. 167) that the pressing of the frame button 22 is the game selection period (S3852: Yes), the button is pressed. The corresponding game method is stored (S3853).

Based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc, the player determines the desired game method as the game method in the time saving state, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 160 (b)). The current state of the game is configured to set the display mode of the game method. The information stored in the selected game storage area 223 dc is configured to be retained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the selection screen displayed at the start of the jackpot game (FIG. 160 (a)). In (see), the selection display mode may be formed so that the information stored in the selection game storage area 223dc is indicated by the arrow first.

Further, the player did not select any game method during the period (during the game selection period) while the selection screen (see FIG. 160 (a)) displayed at the start of the jackpot game is displayed (during the game selection period). When the frame button 22 is not pressed), the game method based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc (information stored during the past game selection period) is automatically selected. It is good to configure.

In this case, the game is selected so that the arrow points to the display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc at the start time and the end time of the game selection period on which the selection screen is displayed. It is advisable to set the production mode during the period. With this configuration, even if the player does not select a game method, one of the game methods is automatically selected without changing the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is possible to perform a production that makes you think that it was done.

The execution game storage area 223dd is an area for temporarily storing the actually executed game method. The execution game storage area 223dd stores information indicating the current game method determined based on the area in which the ball launched during the big hit (during the big hit game) flows down, and is a voice lamp control device. In the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of 113, the first right region 901a and the first right region 901a during the big hit (during the big hit game). Information indicating a game method based on the number of balls flowing down the second right side region 901b is stored (S3809, S3810 in FIG. 166). With this configuration, the region where the launched ball actually flows down can be discriminated, and the current gaming method can be determined based on the discriminant result, so that the determination accuracy can be improved.

The information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is used when determining the currently executing game method, and is displayed in the desired game display area 861 on the display screen during the jackpot game (FIG. 160 (b)). It is referred to when setting the aspect (S3554 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot information storage area 223de is an area for storing information related to the jackpot. This jackpot information storage area 223de stores information about the winning jackpot, and indicates the type of the winning jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game method when the jackpot is won (for example, the jackpot). The special symbol type that is the target of the lottery won in is stored, and in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165), it is determined that the command transmitted from the main control device 110 is a hit-related command. In this case (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), the information included in the received command is stored (S2291 in FIG. 165).

<Regarding the control process in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process of the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment executes the same control process as the control process of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independent (parallel). It is configured so that it can be changed. Then, if a winner is won in the lottery of one of the special symbols (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the win), the other special symbol change in progress is displayed to indicate the loss. It is configured to forcibly stop and display in the mode.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game executed when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery (provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 which is a specific area). The V switch 650e3 has a control process so that a jackpot (per 2 types) can be obtained (by detecting a ball), whereas in the fifth embodiment, the above-mentioned 2 types are obtained. It differs in that it does not have the control process of.

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). In contrast to the two gaming states of,, which can be set, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned two gaming states, a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) ) And the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set.

<Regarding the control process in the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 1113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select the game method when the time saving state is set, and the operation handle 51 is operated by the player to perform a weak right-handed game or a weak right-handed game. One of the strong right-handed games is executed.

In both the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game executed during the time saving state, the ball is launched to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right side in front view of FIG. 157) by operating the operation handle 51 greatly. The game method of the right-handed game to be played is divided in detail, and a predetermined adjustment accuracy is required to execute each game method. Therefore, in order for the player to execute the desired game method, a slight adjustment period and adjustment firing (shooting the ball while adjusting the operation amount) are required.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 157, at least when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is maximized (when the operation handle 51 is rotated all the way to the right). Since the operation amount is configured to correspond to the strong right-handed game, the player can easily execute the strong right-handed game, but for the weak right-handed game, the operation handle. While operating 51 to the extent that it becomes a right-handed game (to the extent that the fired ball reaches the right area of the variable display device unit 80), it does not become a strong right-handed game (the fired ball is the second right side). It had to be adjusted to such an extent that it did not flow down the region 901b), which required an adjustment period and an adjustment launch.

Therefore, as in the effect display (see FIG. 82A) executed in the second embodiment described above, at the timing when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing immediately before the time saving state is set. When the effect display for allowing the player to select the game method is executed, the time saving state is set at the stage where the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted toward the game method desired by the player. Therefore, there is a problem that the game in the time-saving state is likely to be executed by the game method not intended by the player.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the time reduction set for the player after the end of the jackpot game at the timing when the opening screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing when the jackpot game is started. It is configured to execute an effect display for selecting a game method in the state. As a result, the game method can be adjusted using the period during which the jackpot game is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in the time saving state by the game method not intended by the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of which of the plurality of game methods that the player can select as the game method in the time saving state is executed, the same privilege can be obtained during the jackpot game. Therefore, the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as the period for adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 toward the game method in the time saving state without giving a disadvantageous situation to the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the game method in the desired time saving state is configured to be selectable by the player, the game method selected by the player, and the game method actually executed during the jackpot game. Is compared, and based on the comparison result, a display is configured to guide the player to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thereby, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be easily adjusted toward the game method desired by the player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the amount of benefits (prize ball amount) given when a big hit is won differs depending on the game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) executed during the time saving state. It is configured in. Then, in the period in which the time saving state (including the probability variation state) and the jackpot game are repeatedly continued, that is, in the continuous period (consecutive chan period, valid period) in which the normal state (excluding during the jackpot) is not set as the gaming state The number of times the player has won the prize (the number of consecutive chans) is displayed separately for each game that was being executed when the jackpot was won.

As a result, the relationship between the game method selected by the player and the winning status (number of wins) of the jackpot can be visually confirmed. Therefore, the game method when the time saving state is set next is the past result. Can be selected based on. Therefore, it is possible to give a strategy element to the game and improve the interest.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment, the main process (main process) is performed with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment described above. The main process 5 (see FIG. 164) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99), the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99), and the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 105 (b)) is performed. The difference is that the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 168) is used instead of the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 168).

The fifth embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the control processing content of the main control device 110 is replaced with the control processing of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above. ing. Therefore, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the replacement of the control process of the main control device 110 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and the control process of the other voice lamp control device 113 is the second embodiment. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the main process 5 executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 5. As shown in FIG. 164, in the main process 5, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (S2197) is performed instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107) with respect to the above-mentioned main process 2 (see FIG. 55). , The command determination process 5 (S2193) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (S2163), and the signal input process (S2151) is added.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 5 (S2193) will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (S2193). When the command determination process 5 (S2193) receives a hit-related command with respect to the above-mentioned command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99), the information indicated by the received command is stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de. It differs in that it is stored in.

When the command determination process 5 (S2193 in FIG. 165) is executed, first, the same processes in S2201 to S2209 as in the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described above are executed. Then, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the same prize information related process 2 (S2251) as in the second embodiment described above is executed, and then the process of S2217 is executed. Is executed to end this process.

In the second embodiment described above, in the prize information related process 2 (S2251) described above, it is determined whether the game method in the time saving state is a right-handed game or a left-handed game, and the determination is made. Although it is configured to set the effect contents (effect for guidance notification, effect for error notification) based on the result, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured not to execute such a process. Although it differs in that, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209: No in FIG. 165), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165). If it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S2211: Yes in FIG. 165), the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de is updated according to the received content (content indicated by the hit-related command). After that (S2291), the same processes of S2212 and S2217 as those of the command determination process 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed, and this process is terminated.

The information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de, which is updated in the process of S2291 described above, includes, for example, the number of times the jackpot is won and the opportunity for the lottery to win the jackpot (the opportunity for the lottery to win the jackpot). There is information to show the game method that became. By configuring the jackpot information storage area 223de to update the contents immediately after winning the jackpot in this way, there is an effect that the past jackpots can be studied during the jackpot game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 165. In the process of S2211, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2211: No), the same processes of S2213 to S2217 as those of the command determination process 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed. This process ends.

Next, the contents of the signal input process (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the signal input processing (S2151). In this signal input process (S2151), when the first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b provided on the game board 13 detect the passage of the ball, the process based on the detection result is executed. Specifically, the number of balls passing (flowing down) through each area (first right side area 901a, second right side area 901b) provided on the game board 13 is counted, and the difference value is a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls). ), The process of determining the area in which a large number of balls is detected, that is, the game method corresponding to the area in which many balls have flowed down is executed as the actual game method.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the signal input process (S2151) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current jackpot is being hit (S3801), and if it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S3801: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the first pass sensor 905a has detected the ball (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first pass sensor 905a is detecting the sphere (S3802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first pass counter 223da (S3803), and then the process of S3804. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first passing sensor 905a does not detect the sphere (S3802: No), the process of S3803 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3804.

In the process of S3804, it is determined whether the second passing sensor 905b has detected the sphere (S3804). If it is determined that the second pass sensor 905b is detecting the sphere (S3804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second pass counter 223db (S3805), and then the process of S3806 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the second pass sensor 905b has not detected the sphere (S3804: No), the process of S3805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3806.

Then, in the process of S3806, the difference between the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db is calculated. That is, the difference between the number of balls that have passed through the first right side region 901a (value of the first pass counter 223da) and the number of balls that have passed through the second right side region 901b (value of the second pass counter 223db) during the jackpot game. Is calculated.

When the processing of S3806 is completed, it is next determined whether the difference between the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db is 5 or more (S3807), and it is determined that the difference is 5 or more. In the case (S3807: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the first pass counter 223 da is larger than the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db (S3808).

If it is determined in the process of S3808 that the value of the first pass counter 223da is larger (S3808: Yes), a weak right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3809), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of S3808, when it is determined that the value of the first pass counter 223 da is not larger than the value of the second pass counter 223 db (the value of the second pass counter 223 db is larger) (S3808: No), A strong right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3810), and this process ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, the number of balls launched during the jackpot game that have flowed down the first right side area 901a and the number of balls that have flowed down the second right side area 901b are measured. Based on the measurement result, it is possible to determine whether the current game method is a weak right-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down in the first right-hand area 901a or a strong right-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down in the second right-hand area 901b. It is configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the information (game method) set in the execution game storage area 223dd by the processing of S3809 and the processing of S3810 is the display of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. It is configured so that the player can easily grasp it by displaying it in the current game display area 860 of the screen.

In the fifth embodiment, the current game method is set when the difference value between the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db is a predetermined amount (5 balls) or more. It is configured in. That is, immediately after the jackpot game is executed (the period during which the right-handed game during the jackpot game does not fire five or more balls), the current game method is executed regardless of the area where the balls are fired. Since it is not set in the game storage area 223dd, it is configured so that the game method is not displayed in the current game display area 860.

With this configuration, the current game method on the display screen can be set immediately after the jackpot game is started, in a state where the game method in the player's right-handed game is not fixed (unstable state). It can be suppressed from being displayed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the current game method is not specified until the difference value between the value of the first pass counter 223 da and the value of the second pass counter 223 db reaches a predetermined amount (5 balls). It is configured in. With this configuration, the display mode (display mode displayed in the current game display area 860) for showing the current game method displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is frequently switched. Can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 166. In the process of S3811, it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the jackpot (S3811). In the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that a command for indicating that the time saving state has been set (a command including a content indicating that the current gaming state is the time saving state) has been output, or during a jackpot game. When it is determined that the command indicating that is no longer output, it is determined that the jackpot has ended.

In the processing of S3811, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S3811: Yes), the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db added during the jackpot game are cleared to 0. (S3812), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current timing is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S3811: No), that is, if the game state is neither the jackpot nor the jackpot end timing, other signal input processing is executed (S3813). , End this process.

As the processing of S3813 described above, for example, when the game state is the normal state (when the game state in which the left-handed game aiming at the left side region is an appropriate game is set), the first pass sensor 905a Or, when the second passing sensor 905b detects the ball, that is, when it is determined that the right-handed game is being performed, a guidance display for guiding the game method to the player is executed. The first pass sensor 905a or the second pass sensor 905b detects the ball in a game state (for example, a time saving state) in which a different game is executed depending on the processing of the above and the game method executed by the player. Based on this, a process for determining the game method being executed and displaying it in the current game display area 860 is configured to be executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is started (during the opening period of the jackpot game), the game method in the time saving state desired by the player is selected, and the period during which the jackpot game is executed is used. The game is configured so that the player can change the game method. However, the period during which the jackpot game is executed may be used as a period for changing the game method. For example, the jackpot game May be configured to execute an effect of selecting a game method (see FIG. 160 (a)) in the middle of executing.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157) executed in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157), in addition to the processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, a game selection period in which the player selects a desired game method (FIG. 160 (a)). The difference is that the operation process of the frame button 22 in (see) is added.

When the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157 in FIG. 167) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3851), and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that there is no such case (S3851: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S3851 (S3851: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game selection period is (S3852).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth embodiment, in the command determination process 5 (see S2193 in FIG. 165), the hit-related execution is executed when a hit-related command is received (S2211: Yes). In the process (S2212), 10 seconds after the start of the jackpot (after it is determined to be the start timing of the jackpot) is set as the game selection period. In this game selection period, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in a period counter value (not shown), and the counter value is updated in various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 164) executed every 1 millisecond. It is configured to measure 10 seconds.

In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current game selection period is (the value of the period counter is not 0) (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the button press on the frame button 22 is selected. Game storage area 223dc (S3853), the game method set in S3853, that is, the display pressing command indicating the game method corresponding to the button pressing is set (S3855), and this process is terminated.

The display pressing command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and the game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is controlled so that the game method selected by the person (the game method to be executed during the time saving state) is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the game method desired by the player himself during the jackpot game (see FIG. 160 (b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the fifth embodiment, both the game method desired by the player himself and the game method executed during the jackpot game are displayed during the jackpot game. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not it is necessary to adjust the game method based on the display content displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, if the game method desired by the player himself / herself does not match the game method executed during the jackpot game during the jackpot game, the game method actually executed is executed. However, the operation method of the operation handle 51 is guided (instructed) to the game guidance area 859 of the sub-display area Ds so that the game method is desired by the player himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to guide the player to a specific adjustment method, so that the player can easily execute the desired game method.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 167. In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current game selection period is not (S3852: No), then it is determined whether it is in another operation period (S3854), and it is determined that it is in another operation period. If this is done (S3854: Yes), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing corresponding to the operation period is set (S3855), and this processing is terminated.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, other operation periods include, for example, a part of a special symbol change period for showing the lottery result of a special symbol and a period during which the game is not executed (the change of the special symbol is executed). In the special symbol change period, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected), the lottery result of the changing special symbol is displayed. It is configured to perform a production to suggest that it is a big hit.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected) during the so-called demonstration period in which the game is not executed, a screen for explaining the game content of the pachinko machine 10 or , Today's game history is configured to be selected and displayed. In this way, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player by differentiating the privilege (executed effect) for the operation according to the game state and the game situation when the frame button 22 is operated. , The effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the effect update process 5 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 5. The effect update process 5 is different from the effect update process of each of the above-described embodiments in that a process of updating the display content of the display screen displayed during the jackpot game is executed.

When the effect update process 5 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current jackpot is in progress (S3551), and when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3551: Yes), it is stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. The information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is read out (S3552), and then the information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is read out.

Then, a display game method command corresponding to the selected game method and the running game method is set (S3554). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and each content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display mode indicating the game method corresponding to is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 168. In the process of S3555, it is determined whether or not the contents of the information read in the process of S3552 (selected game method) and the information read in the process of S3553 (execution game method) match (S3555). , If it is determined that they match (S3555: Yes), it means that the desired game method and the current game method match, so a display instruction command for maintaining the current game method. Is set, and this process ends.

When a display instruction command for maintaining the current game method is set in the process of S3556, for example, "keep as it is" in the game guidance area 859 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The comment is displayed. As a result, the player can enter an advantageous state in favor of the player by maintaining the current supplementary game technique.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3555 that the selected game and the executed game do not match, (S3555: No), a display instruction command for indicating a comment for changing the current game method is set (S3557). reference). Here, for example, when the selected game is in the challenge mode (strong right-handed game) and the executed game is in the safe mode (weak right-handed game), in order to change the game method, "strengthen right-handed" is selected. Characters are displayed in the game guidance area 859. As a result, when changing the game method from the currently being executed game method to a desired game method, it is possible to easily grasp the adjustment content that must be specifically executed.

Then, in the process of S3551, when it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S3551: No), and when the process of S3556 or the process of S3557 is completed, the other effect update process is executed (S3558). End the process. In the process of S3558, among various effect update processes that can be executed in each of the above-described embodiments, the corresponding process is executed.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the first advantageous game (strong right) in which the player executes the lottery of the first special symbol in the advantageous state (probability change state, time saving state) which is the advantageous game state. It is configured so that the player can select either the hitting game) or the second advantageous advantage (weak right hitting game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Then, both the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game described above are configured so that the lottery of the special symbol is more easily executed than when the normal state is set as the game state.

With this configuration, the player selects one advantageous game from a plurality of advantageous games as a game in which a lottery of a special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state during the advantageous state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, regardless of which game the player selects, it is possible to make it easier to execute the lottery of the special symbol than in the normal state, so that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the game method. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the player can select a game method in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the termination conditions of the advantageous state are different for a plurality of game methods that the player can select. It is configured in. Specifically, the number of fluctuations that is established when the special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times) as the time saving end condition in which the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the advantageous state and the time saving state is ended. In addition to the end condition, set the winning number end condition that is established when the number of times the small hit is won (the small hit game is executed) reaches the predetermined number (1 time) in the special symbol lottery, and the first special The lottery of symbols is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the lottery of the second special symbol.

With this configuration, the probability that the advantageous state ends in the first advantageous game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the second advantageous game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, that is, It is possible to change the probability (continuation rate) of winning a jackpot during an advantageous state.

Further, among a plurality of advantageous games that can be selected by the player, if a big hit is won in the first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is difficult to continue, the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more likely to continue than in the first advantageous game. The content of the jackpot game is set so that the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game is larger than that when the jackpot is won in the above. Specifically, the jackpot is won during the first advantageous game. In that case (if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol), the jackpot game for 12 rounds is executed, and if the jackpot is won during the second advantageous game (the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol). (If you win), the jackpot game for 10 rounds is configured to be executed.

As a result, the player can easily end the advantageous state but has a large privilege at the time of winning the big hit, and the advantageous state is harder to end than the first advantageous game, but the privilege at the time of winning the big hit is small. It is possible to select either an advantageous game or an advantageous game. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a desired game method according to the time that can be spent on the game and the player's own convenience such as the current condition, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, the time saving state is used as the advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic state may be set as the advantageous state. That is, as the probability variation end condition at which the probability variation state ends, the variation count end condition and the winning count end condition can be set, and the probability variation end condition is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the ease of establishment of is different. Even in such a configuration, the same effect as in the case where the above-mentioned time saving state is set as an advantageous state can be obtained.

When the probability change state is used as the advantageous state, the first probability change end condition in which the normal state is set and the second probability change end condition in which the time saving state is set are set in advance when the probability change end condition is satisfied. It is advisable to set it so that the transition destination of the game state differs depending on the end condition established earlier. In this case, for example, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a game state which is more disadvantageous than the probability change state is set, and when the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the game is more advantageous than the probability change state. It is preferable to configure the game performance in each game state so that the state is set.

Specifically, the first probability variation end condition is satisfied when the fluctuation count end condition is satisfied, and the second probability variation end condition is satisfied when the winning count end condition is satisfied. , Special figure 1 change number end condition that is satisfied when the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches 50 times, and special figure 2 change number end condition that is satisfied when the change of the second special symbol reaches 80 times. , The first special symbol or the total number of fluctuations ending condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times may be set.

With this configuration, the game specifications can be further different between the first advantageous game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the second advantageous game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is possible to strengthen the meaning of letting the player select the game method. Further, since the condition for ending the total number of fluctuations is set, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively executing the game in the advantageous state by alternately executing the plurality of advantageous games.

Further, regarding the winning count end condition, the special figure 1 winning count end condition that is satisfied when the first advantageous game is executed, and the special figure 2 winning count end condition that is satisfied when the second advantageous game is executed. By setting so as to be different, the game specifications can be further different.

In the fifth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous state (time saving state) is made different according to the type of the special symbol, and the game method in the advantageous state for the player (the special symbol that executes the lottery during the advantageous state). It is configured to provide various games to the player by letting the player select the type), but the end condition of the time saving state is not limited to this, for example, even if it depends on the big hit type when the big hit is won. It is good to configure it so that it can be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a game in a more diverse advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the fifth embodiment described above, regardless of which game method is selected during the advantageous state, the expected value of the privilege amount given to the player during the period in which the advantageous state is set (that is, that is). The amount of benefits (number of prize balls) in the case of winning one big hit is divided by the average number of special symbol fluctuations in which the advantageous state is continuously set when the advantageous state is set once) is equivalent. However, when using a configuration in which the end conditions of the advantageous state are different based on the jackpot type in addition to the special symbol type as described above, the first is according to the winning jackpot type. It is preferable to configure so that the expected value of the privilege amount given to the player is larger when the one advantageous game is selected than when the second advantageous game is selected. As a result, it becomes possible to greatly differ the subsequent game results depending on the game method selected by the player.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 177. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), a time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), and a probability variation state (probability change state). It is configured to be able to set four states: special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), and latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), and the degree of advantage for the player is different. The configuration is such that a plurality of probabilistic state states and a plurality of time saving states having different degrees of advantage can be set.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol, the player who wins the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be given more benefits to the player. There is. Specifically, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, more prize balls can be obtained than in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. , The rate of transition to the probabilistic state of the special symbol is high (the jackpot type capable of passing through the probabilistic switch 65e3 described later is easily selected).

Then, as the probabilistic state, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed as compared with the probabilistic state 1. A (relatively advantageous) probability variation state 2 is provided. In addition, as the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the second special symbol lottery is easier to be executed (that is, compared to the time saving state 1). (Relatively advantageous) time saving state 2 is provided.

In this way, even when the same game state is set, the type of special symbol that is easy to draw is configured to be switchable, and the prize ball that can be obtained according to the details of the set game state. By making the amount and the rate of transition to the probabilistic state different, it is possible to play the game aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. The probability variation state 1 is a state in which a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined, and the probability variation state 2 is a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol height. It is a state in which the probability state 2 (time saving state 2) is combined.

Further, although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of operation (opening) patterns of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) in the time saving state are prepared, and the operation (opening) of the electric accessory 701 is set. Based on the pattern, it is configured so that the special symbol that is easy to execute the lottery can be changed during the time saving state. The operation (opening) pattern of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) is variably set based on the winning jackpot type.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the special symbol that is easy to execute the lottery (variation) during the time saving state based on the winning jackpot type, so that it is possible to provide the player with various playability. it can. Further, in the sixth embodiment, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving states for ending the time saving state are established based on the lottery of special symbols.

Specifically, as the variation number end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the special figure 1 variation number end condition established based on the variation number of the first special symbol and the variation number of the second special symbol are established. The special figure 2 change number end condition, and the total change number end condition that is established based on the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set. 1 The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times as the end condition of the number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times as the condition of ending the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, and 100 times is the number of fluctuations corresponding to the end condition of the total number of fluctuations. It is set.

Furthermore, as a condition for ending the number of winnings that is established when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the special figure 1 that is established based on the special figure 1 small hit (small hit A) that is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. The condition for ending the number of winnings and the condition for ending the number of winnings for Special Figure 2 which is established based on the special figure 2 small hit (small hit B) won by the lottery of the second special symbol are set. The number of winnings is set to 2 times, and the number of winnings is set to 20 times as a condition for ending the number of winnings in Special Figure 2.

With this configuration, depending on the type of special symbol for which the lottery (variation) is executed during the time reduction state, the game in which the time reduction state is likely to end (the time reduction for which the first special symbol lottery (variation) is likely to be performed) A game) and a game in which the time saving state is difficult to end (a time saving game in which a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is easily performed) can be set.

It should be noted that the time saving end condition set for each special symbol in the sixth embodiment may be such that the ease of ending the time saving state differs depending on the type of the special symbol, and each of the above-described embodiments. Any of the specific examples used in (shown) may be adopted, and the small hit probability in the time saving state may be different depending on the special symbol type, or multiple types may be selected for the small hits that can be won by the special symbol lottery. In the configuration in which the winning count end condition is set for each small hit type, the probability that any of the winning count end conditions is satisfied may be different for each special symbol type.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of advantageous state end conditions (time saving end conditions) for terminating the advantageous state (time saving state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player can be set and set. It is configured so that the ease of establishing the advantageous state end condition differs depending on the type of state. Then, a plurality of advantageous states having different easiness of establishing the advantageous state end condition are configured to be transferred based on the winning jackpot type.

As a result, it is possible for the player to play a game in various advantageous states via a plurality of jackpot winnings. Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the player has a special advantageous state in which the player can be transferred only when the jackpot is won a plurality of times from the state in which the normal state is set, a plurality of jackpot wins are given to the player. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game so as to shift to a special advantageous state by passing through.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured to set a gaming state (for example, a normal state and an advantageous state) having different expectations for shifting to a special advantageous state that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game state (advantageous state) with a high expectation of shifting to a special advantageous state is set, it is possible to facilitate continuous game play, and it is possible to enhance the operation of the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110 is provided. The first embodiment is a partial change in the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223, a partial process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This is a change from the pachinko machine 10 in. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 169, in the sixth embodiment, the configurations of the lower side and the right side region of the variable display device unit 80 are different from those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above. are doing. Specifically, there are two first entrances (first entrance 64a1, right side first) that trigger the lottery of the first special symbol as the entrances that trigger the lottery of the special symbols. The point that the ball entry port 64a0) and the second ball entry port 64b that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol are provided, that is, the point that three entry ports that trigger the lottery of the special symbol are provided. It's different.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64a1 is on the lower side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, and the second ball is on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the right side of the front view. The mouth 64b is provided with a right first ball entry port 64a2 on the right side of the front view with respect to the right second ball entry port 64b.

At both the first ball entry port 64a1 and the right first ball entry port 64a2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. That is, the first ball entry port 64a1 and the right first ball entry port 64a2 are ball entry ports having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entry port 64b has a function different from the above-mentioned two types of entry openings because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a first operating accessory 645a is attached to the right first ball entry port 64a2. The first operating accessory 645a is in an open state in which the ball can enter (easily) enter the right first entry port 64a2, and the ball cannot enter the right first entry port 64a2 ( It is formed of a pair of blade-shaped members so as to be variable to a closed state (difficult). The first operating accessory 645a is switched to the open state when the ball enters the first operating port 704 provided inside the distribution winning device 700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

Similarly, a second operating accessory 645b is attached to the right second entrance 64b. The second operating accessory 645b is also in an open state in which the ball can enter the right second entry port 64b (easily) and cannot enter the right second entry port 64b (the ball cannot enter the right second entry port 64b). It is formed of a pair of blade-shaped members so as to be variable to a closed state (difficult). The second operating accessory 645b is switched to the open state when the ball enters the second operating port 707 provided inside the distribution winning device 700. On the other hand, the second operating accessory 645b that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when the ball enters the right second entrance.

In the sixth embodiment, the first actuating combination formed of a pair of blade-shaped members as a regulating member for restricting the entry of a ball into the right first entry port 64a2 and the right second entry port 64b. An object 645a and a second operating accessory 645b are provided, but any object may be used as long as the ease of entering the ball into each entry port can be changed. For example, the object is positioned in a protruding state protruding from the game board 13. By doing so, the ball may be restricted from entering the ball entry port, and the ball may be variable so as to be allowed to enter the ball entry port by being located in the buried state where the ball is buried in the game board 13. Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the operating accessory is in the closed state, the ball is configured so that the ball cannot enter the corresponding (attached to the operating accessory) entrance. Instead of closing the ball until it cannot enter the ball, it may be changed so that the ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the operating accessory 645 can be positioned in two states, an open state and a closed state, but is configured to be variable to three or more states. Is also good. Further, in the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which an operating accessory is attached to each of the right first entrance ball opening 64a2 and the right second entrance ball opening 64b is used, but other configurations are used. For example, by changing one operating object to the first state, it is easy for a ball to enter one of the entrances (it is easier to enter than the other entrance), and the other is easy to enter. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the mouth (it is difficult to enter the ball from one of the entrances) and changing it to a second state different from the first state, one of the balls enters, contrary to the above-mentioned first state. Make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball opening (difficult to enter from the other entry port) and make it easier for the ball to enter the other entry port (easier to enter from one entry port). It may be configured as. As a result, it is possible to change the degree of ball entry to the plurality of entry ports according to the operation content of one operating accessory.

A distribution winning device 700 is provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. The distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball that has entered the inside to either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, if the ball is distributed to the first operating port 704 (if the ball enters), the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first entry port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first entry ball is entered. The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 707 (if the ball enters), the second operating accessory 645b attached to the right second entrance is switched to the open state and goes to the right second entrance 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution winning device 700 provided in the right region of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment. The upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is configured so that a ball can flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, the upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is inclined in the lower left direction in the front view, so that the ball reaching the upper surface of the distribution winning device 700 basically flows down in the lower left direction. To do. Further, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the upper right side of the distribution winning device 700. The electric accessory 701 has an open state (immersive state) in which the ball can enter the inside of the distribution winning device 700 (easy) and a closed state (protruding state) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult). ) And can be switched. The electric accessory 701 is set to the open state when it is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. Since the first operating port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703, the ball flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first operating port 704. On the other hand, since the second operating port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the ball flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second operating port 707. Further, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 branch, a flow path through which the ball that has entered the inside of the distribution winning device 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is set as a switching valve ( (Variable flow path) 702 is provided. This switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches (slide displacement) between a first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down to the second flow path 706. )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the left side when viewed from the front to block the upstream side of the second flow path, and only the first flow path is open. Proceeds to the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slidably displaced to the right side in the front view to block the upstream side of the first flow path, and only the first flow path is opened. , The sphere advances to the second flow path.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and is 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hits for a predetermined period (for example, the normal symbol hits). ) Has elapsed, and the first switching state is switched to the second switching state. Further, when a specific period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after switching to the second switching state, the switching state is switched to the first switching state again.

If the ball can be entered into the distribution winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down toward the second operating port 707. When the ball enters the second operating port 707, the second operating accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can be entered into the right second operating port 64b. That is, it is advantageous for the player because it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the probability of the special symbol being given the probability variation state is high in the case of a big hit. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the flow direction of the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 (whether it flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As shown in FIG. 170, a first operating mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operating port 704. The first actuating port 704 is composed of a known non-electric accessory, that is, the first actuating accessory 645a is switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the first actuating port 704. Can be done. Further, when the first operating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right first entry port 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707. The second actuating mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first actuating mechanism 705. That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second operating port 707. Further, when the second operating accessory 645b is in the open state, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right second entry port 64b.

In this way, by entering the ball into the distribution winning device 700, the ball is entered into the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating accessory 645a or the first 2 The operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, it is more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operating port 704 or enters the second operating port 707. You can pay attention to the crab. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the correspondence between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning device 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 171, two types (opening pattern A and opening pattern B) are provided for the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701. When the open pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the hit of the normal symbol is started, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. Will be done. Then, the hit state ends after the open state for 0.1 seconds is set. Since the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state during the opening period of 1 second, the balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the first operating port 704. .. On the other hand, during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period is the second operating port 707. It is distributed to. However, since it is difficult to allow the ball to enter during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, in many cases, the ball that enters the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern A is set is It is distributed to the first operating port 704, and the right first ball entry port 64a1 is opened. Therefore, if the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for an extremely short time (that is, 0.1 seconds) immediately after the hit of the normal symbol is started, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. Set to state. Then, the hit state ends after the open state is set for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second). During the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period moves to the first operating port 704. It is sorted. However, as described above, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter during the extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, in the opening period of 1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period moves to the second operating port 707. It is sorted. Therefore, in many cases, the ball that has entered the distribution device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is distributed to the second operating port 707, and the right second entry port 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this way, the degree of advantage for the player can be different depending on the set opening pattern, so that the opening pattern can be made interested every time the normal symbol is hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In this embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the gaming state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability change non-time saving state), the time saving state 1, and the probability change state 1, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 when the normal symbol hits. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the opening pattern B is set when the normal drawing is hit. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the probability variation state 2, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability change state 2, it is difficult for the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. In this way, since the types of special symbols that are easily executed can be different depending on the game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 169. A variable winning device 65 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 13, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is obtained by a big hit lottery performed due to a ball entering (winning) into the first ball opening 64a1, the right first ball opening 64a2, or the right second ball opening 64b, After a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the V winning device 650 (see FIGS. 4 to 6) in the first embodiment described above, and is as described above in the first embodiment, but for convenience of explanation. In the sixth embodiment, the reference numerals of "650" will be added to the reference numerals of "650" in FIGS. 4 to 6. Although details will be omitted, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry device 65 during the jackpot is a switch used in place of the probability change switch 65e3 (the V switch 650e3 of the first embodiment described above). ), The probability change state is given after the end of the big hit, and in this respect, it is functionally different from the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment described above. Since the other configurations and functions are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. First, FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 174 (a) is included in the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the selection table 202b1 for the special figure 1, and FIG. 174 (b) shows the contents of the selection table 202b2 for the special figure 2 included in the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure. The selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 is a lottery for the second special symbol. When a big hit is made in, it is referred to to determine the big hit type.

First, the selection table 202b1 for special drawing 1 included in the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (a). FIG. 174 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the selection table 202b1 for special drawing 1. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9". This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. .. The pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, that the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 4 rounds (providing the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65). This is an operation pattern in which the flow path is opened). Since the player continuously launches balls toward the variable winning device 65 at the jackpot, one or more balls can flow down to the probability change switch 65e3 within 5 seconds. When the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the big hit, the probability change state is given after the big hit.

That is, after the big hit, the probability variation state 1 (a gaming state in which the special symbol high probability state 1 and the normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined) is given. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the player did not launch the ball during the jackpot, the time saving state 1 (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol) after the jackpot ends. High probability state 1) is given. Although the jackpot A is likely to be in a probabilistic state, the probabilistic state to be given is the probabilistic state 1, and it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the probabilistic state. It is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

A jackpot B is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 49". This jackpot B has 4 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 (normal symbol high probability state 2) after the jackpot. Is a jackpot type to which is given. When the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot, the probability variation state 2 of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state 2) is given after the jackpot.

That is, after the big hit, the probability variation state 2 in which the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the player did not launch the ball during the jackpot, only the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot B ends. The jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot because it is easy to shift to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in terms of the prize ball, it is less than the case where the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the prize spherical surface is disadvantageous.

A jackpot C is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 94". This jackpot C has 4 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. The pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to be on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the probability change switch in the variable winning device 65). This is an operation pattern (the flow path provided with 65e3 is opened). Even if the ball is inserted at the same time as the 4th round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the probabilistic solenoid 65k within 0.5 seconds. The flow path is closed before the sphere reaches the probabilistic solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the jackpot C, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is not given after the jackpot. That is, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, and the number of prize balls is also the second special symbol. Since it is less than the case where a big hit is made in the lottery, it is the most disadvantageous big hit type for the player.

A jackpot D is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "95 to 94". This jackpot D has 4 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. The probability change state is not given, and the prize ball is also less than when it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, but since the time saving state 2 where the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is given, the big hit D Is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

Next, the selection table 202b2 for special drawing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (b). FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the selection table 202b2 for special drawing 2. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 also defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first hit type counter C2, similarly to the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1. ing. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. .. Although the jackpot E is likely to be in a probabilistic state, the probabilistic state to be given is the probabilistic state 1, and it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the probabilistic state. Compared to jackpot B and jackpot F), the state after the jackpot ends is disadvantageous.

A jackpot F is associated with a range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 79". This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern capable of passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. .. The jackpot F is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot because it is easy to shift to the probability variation state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player. Also, in terms of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a larger number of prize balls than when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

A jackpot G is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 84". This jackpot G has 15 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, the lottery of the first special symbol is more advantageous than a big hit.

The jackpot H is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "85-94". This jackpot H has 15 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. Although the probability variation state is not given, the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is given, so that the jackpot H is more advantageous than the jackpot C and the jackpot G. Also, the prize spherical surface is more advantageous than winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

As described above, in this embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type has a different number of rounds and a game state after the jackpot, the player can pay attention to which jackpot type will be used when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, depending on whether the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the ratio of the jackpot type that is the operation pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 It's different. That is, it is advantageous for the player to win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol because many prize balls can be won. In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the big hit types (big hits E and F) that are the operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 80%, whereas the first In the special symbol lottery, the percentage of jackpot types (big hits A and B) that are operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 50%. Therefore, a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be in a probable change state. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, whether the lottery to be executed is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. You can play the game by paying attention to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the type of the high-probability state of the normal symbol is changed according to the winning jackpot type. Specifically, the normal symbol high probability state 1 and the normal symbol high probability state 2 can be set. Then, in addition to the normal state as the game state, the probability variation state 1 in which the normal symbol high probability state 1 is set for the high probability state of the special symbol, and the probability variation state 2 in which the normal symbol high probability state 2 is set are special. Five types of gaming states can be set, including a time saving state 1 in which the normal symbol high probability state 1 is set and a time saving state 2 in which the normal symbol high probability state 2 is set for the low probability state of the symbol. It is configured.

Here, a method of shifting the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. As shown in FIG. 172, in the sixth embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a big hit is made, a new game state is set after the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 172, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal state (non-probability change non-time saving state), it basically shifts to the probability change state 1 (unless the launch of the ball is stopped during the jackpot) and becomes the jackpot B. Then, it shifts to the probability change state 2. Further, when the jackpot C is reached, the time saving state 1 is set, and when the jackpot D is reached, the time saving state 2 is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, when the gaming state is the time saving state 1 (time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) and the probability change state 1 (probability change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed). Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-probability change non-time saving state). Although the illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 1 or the probability variation state 1, when the lottery of the special symbols for the number of times of the time saving is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, when the game state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), when the jackpot E is reached, the game shifts to the probability variation state 1 and when the jackpot F is reached. , It shifts to the most advantageous probability variation state 2, and when it becomes a jackpot G, it shifts to a time saving state 1, and when it becomes a jackpot H, it shifts to a time saving state 2 (loops the time saving state 2). Further, as shown in FIG. 172, even in the probability change state 2 (the probability change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), the same state transition as in the time saving state 2 is performed. Although the illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 2 or the probability variation state 2, when the lottery of the special symbols for the number of times of the time saving is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 173. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203ab, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb, probability variation counter 203zz, probability variation setting flag 203zzs, probability variation passing counter 203zzt1, winning number counter 203zzt2, operation counter 203zzt3, counter buffer 203zz, remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4, remaining ball timer 203zzt5 , Probability variation effective flag 203zzt6, probability variation effective timer 203zzt7, discharge number counter 203zzt8, time saving medium counter 203zu, time saving identification flag 203zx, jackpot flag 203zi, and other memory area 203z.

Of these, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. Since they are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203za has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 (through gate), and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203za is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203zb is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value of 4 is added by 1. Will be done. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 zb (the number of hold times M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is It is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203zb is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203za.

The probability variation counter 203zg is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability variation counter 203zg is set to zero, and the timing at which the specific entry port (large opening port) 65a or the second specific entry port 650a is closed in the final round of the jackpot in the main control device 110 ( That is, when the probability change flag 203r, which will be described later, is turned on at the end timing of the jackpot), that is, when the game ball enters the probability change port 900a and the game ball is detected by the probability change switch (not shown), 100 is set. Will be done.

In the sixth embodiment, the ball flows down a specific area (the area for the probability change switch 65e3 to detect the ball) during the jackpot game, so that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability variation). A predetermined value is set in the counter 203 zg), but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability change state is automatically set after the jackpot game is completed according to the type of jackpot won. You may.

When the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing, the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is referred to, and if the value is larger than 0, it is special based on the first random number table for high probability. While the symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the probability variation counter 203 zg is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for the low probability time.

As described above, the counter buffer 203zh is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The jackpot flag 203zi is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203zi is turned on, the jackpot game in which the distribution winning device 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The probability change setting flag 203zzs is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (the probability change switch 65e3 has detected the game ball during the jackpot game). Whether or not). Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203zs is set to ON. On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203r is set to off based on the on. The probability variation setting flag 203zzs is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

The probability variation pass counter 203zzt1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot B in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passing counter 203zt1 and the discharge number counter 203zt8 described later. The probability variation pass counter 203zzt1 is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3. Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0". The probability variation pass counter 203zzt1 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203zzt2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, it is added and updated one by one based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 provided in the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2) and the number discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203zzt8 and the probability variation passing counter 203zzt1) After it is determined whether and match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203zzt3 is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in the jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds, and in the jackpot C, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Set. In the operation counter 203zzt3, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 13 rounds in the jackpot B, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot C. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0. The operation counter 203zzt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203zzt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203zzt5, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203zzt5 is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter to do.

The remaining ball timer 203zzt5 discharges the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after one of the preset rounds is completed. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for the door has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203zzt5. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203zzt5 (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections thereof match. To. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, and the jackpot C is used. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if that flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203zzt6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203zzt6 is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is required to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than an hour. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability variation effective timer 203zzt7 is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation activation flag 203zzt6 is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203zzt7, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203zzt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, and the ball is allowed to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, or the piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203zzt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. The discharge number counter 203zzt8 is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls winning in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined.

The time-saving medium counter 203zu is a counter for counting the number of changes of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203zu is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability change state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state is shifted to 100 times.

The time saving identification flag 203zx is a flag for identifying the type of the time saving state. If 0 is set in the time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that the time saving state is 1 (probability variation state 1). The time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 even in the normal state where it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol as in the time saving state 1. On the other hand, when 1 is set in the time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that it is the time saving state 2 (probability variation state 2). When it hits a normal symbol, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to the time saving identification flag 203zx. Specifically, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 0 and the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set, so that the ball is entered into the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first operating port 704, and the ball can enter the left first entry port 64a2.

On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 1, when the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern B is set, so that the ball is entered into the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. The ball enters the second operating port 707, and the ball can enter the left second entry port 64b. At the end of the big hit, the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the big hit. Further, 0 is set when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the time saving medium counter 203zu becomes 0).

In the normal state (non-probability change non-time saving state), the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 because the ball is launched to the right side of the game board 13 in the non-time saving state (so-called right-handed). This is to suppress the method. That is, if the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the player always strikes right in an attempt to execute an advantageous lottery for the second special symbol. In the normal state, it is difficult to let the ball enter the right second entrance 64b because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, but in the case of a big hit, the rate of the special symbol is 80%. Since it will be in a probabilistic state, the merit in the case of a big hit will be greater. Therefore, there is a possibility of inducing an irregular game method.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, and the opening pattern A is set even if the hit occurs. It can be in a state where there is no merit for a person to perform a right-handed strike. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to hit the left side, so that an irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 175 to 177, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment described above, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to store the reserved ball, and the height of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. It differs from the fact that the probability state can be set.

First, the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175) executed in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175).

In the special symbol variation processing 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (Z201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not changing (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol 1 N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab (variation in the special symbol 2). Acquires the display hold count N2) (Z203).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball for variable display in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is larger than 0 (Z204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0. If it is determined (Z204: No), it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is greater than 0 (Z209), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b (N1). ) Is determined to be 0 (Z209: No), it is determined that there is no reserved ball for variable display in the special symbol, and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is larger than 0 (Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (Z205). ), Set the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation (Z206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203aa is shifted (Z207). In the processing of Z207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display. The detailed description of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be omitted.

Further, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (Z204: No) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0. (Z209: Yes) performs the same processing as the above-described processing for the holding ball of the special symbol 2 for the holding ball of the special symbol 1. The detailed description of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing will be omitted.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (Z214: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Z215), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z216). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z213). When this special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing or special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

After the processing of Z216 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (the result of this lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start processing is special. It is determined whether it is a big hit of the symbol (Z217). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (Z217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203zi is set to on (Z218), the jackpot start command is set (Z220), the time saving / medium counter 203zu, and the probability variation counter 203zg. The value of is reset (Z271), and the process proceeds to Z222.

The jackpot flag 203zi set to ON in the process of Z218 causes the process in the jackpot game to be executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 51). Since the specific description is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the jackpot start command set in the processing of the Z220 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. As a result, a display suggesting the start of a big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be made to recognize that the special gaming state has been entered.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (Z217: No), the same time saving number update processing (see S219 in FIG. 38) as in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the special Information is updated for the change count end condition that is satisfied based on the change count of the symbol. After finishing the processing of S219, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is larger than 0 (Z223), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes), the probability variation is The value of the counter 203 zg is subtracted by 1 (Z224), the same processing of S220 and S221 as in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the processing is transferred to Z222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203 zg is 0 (Z223: No), the process of Z224 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S220.

In the processing of Z222, a stop command is set to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the processing of Z216, with the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81. Is done (Z222). When the processing of Z222 is completed, the main processing is completed.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the special symbol variation processing 6 of the sixth embodiment as well, it is determined whether or not the small hit has been won as in the first embodiment described above, and when the small hit is won, Is executed for the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 41) corresponding to the winning small hit. With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the time saving end is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number as a condition for ending the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol). In addition to the condition (variation number end condition), it is possible to set a time saving end condition (winning number end condition) that is established when the number of small hits won in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends. The sixth embodiment is configured to be able to set a high-probability state of a special symbol in addition to the high-probability state of a normal symbol as a game state to be set after the jackpot ends. Then, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (value set in the probability variation counter zg) set in advance is set as the upper limit. In this way, when a game state (probability change state) other than the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state that is advantageous to the player, the game state ends with respect to the game state (probability change state). It may be configured to set conditions.

In this case, as a condition for ending the probabilistic state, a probabilistic end condition different from the above-mentioned time-saving end condition may be set. For example, the number of times is smaller than the time-saving end condition. It is advisable to set the number of winnings as the probability change end condition.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the requirements that cause the probability variation end condition to be satisfied and the requirements that cause the time reduction end condition to be satisfied to be different. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the probabilistic end condition and the time saving end condition is satisfied first. Therefore, for example, whether or not the probability change end condition has already been satisfied when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when the state where the lottery of the special symbol is easy to execute is changed to the difficult state). It is possible to assume (whether or not the symbol has shifted from a state in which it is easy to win a big hit to a state in which it is difficult to win).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the game state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is a time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) and a probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol). As the end condition of each game state, the change number end condition (time reduction state change number end condition, probability change state change number end condition) is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number. ), It is configured to set the winning count end condition (time saving state winning count end condition, probability change state winning count end condition) that is established when the number of winnings in a predetermined small hit reaches the predetermined number. Therefore, unlike the game property of only whether or not to shift from a game state that is advantageous to the player to a game state that is unfavorable to the player, the end of the time saving state (establishment of the time saving end condition) and the end of the probability change state (probability change end condition). (Establishment of), and it is possible to shift to various gaming states.

Therefore, for the player, one end condition (for example, a time saving end condition) is satisfied before the other end condition (for example, a probability variation end condition), and after one end condition is satisfied, the other end condition is satisfied. The period until the condition is satisfied (for example, the latent probability period) may be configured to be the most advantageous gaming period for the player. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game property in which the player is allowed to play the game while expecting that the end condition for ending the game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, which is one of the game states, is satisfied. ..

Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, the time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed according to the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) set. It is configured so that the time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed can be set. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to obtain the lottery result which is advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, from the normal state, it is easy to shift to the time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and from the time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured so that it is easy to shift to a time saving state (probability change state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a more advantageous gaming state for the player by shifting a plurality of gaming states via a jackpot or the like, so that the most advantageous game for the player. You can expect to play the game in the state. Further, in this case, only when the time saving end condition is satisfied before the probability change end condition in the state where the probability change state (probability change state 2) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is set. It is preferable to configure the game so that the game state is most favorable to the player.

As a result, a game state that is advantageous to the player is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and further, the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. When a specific end condition for terminating is satisfied, it is possible to shift to a more advantageous gaming state, and when other than a specific end condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to a disadvantageous gaming state. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always play a game with a sense of tension.

In addition, the specific end condition for terminating the gaming state advantageous to the player and the end condition other than the specific end condition used in the sixth embodiment will be described in each of the above-described embodiments. The various termination conditions described above may be applied, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105). The jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is off in the processing of Z1301 (Z1301: No), it is not necessary to control the jackpot, so this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371). If it is determined in the processing of Z1371 that it is the start timing of the jackpot, (Z1371: Yes), the opening command is set (Z1372), and this processing is terminated.

In the processing of Z1371, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374). If it is determined in the processing of Z1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374: Yes), the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 64a and the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k are set. The jackpot operation setting process 6 is executed (Z1375), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the jackpot operation setting process 6 (Z1375) is executed, first, the release operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set release scenario, and based on the read release scenario (data). The switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set. Then, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1374: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376). ).

In the processing of Z1376, if it is determined that the timing of the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is (Z1376: Yes), the state of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (Z1377). End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1376, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1378). ).

In the processing of Z1378, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1378: Yes), the ending processing 6 is executed (Z1379), and this processing is terminated. The details of the ending process 6 (Z1379) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

In the processing of Z1378, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (Z1378: No), the winning process 6 is executed (Z1380), the abnormality processing 6 is executed (Z1381), and the present processing is terminated.

When the winning process 6 (Z1380) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the round is valid. The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the opening / closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period, it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed, the winning number counter 203zt2 is added and updated by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2 is 10 or more.

When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2 is 10 or more, the end condition in this round game is satisfied. Therefore, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed, and the remaining The ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to on. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed.

As described above, in the winning process 6, a process of determining whether or not the round game end condition is satisfied is executed during one round game in the jackpot game. Further, a process of appropriately determining whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 is executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is greater than 0 and it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is greater than 0, the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is updated by -1. Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, the value of the probability change passage counter 203zzt1 is incremented by 1 and updated. The probability variation setting flag 203zs is set to on. After that, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0. When it is determined that the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off, the probability variation effective flag 203zzt6 is set to on, and this process is terminated. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203zzt6 to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change It can be controlled so that the game is set.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203zzt7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being illegally passed through the game ball and being given the probability change game state.

Next, as the abnormality process 6 (S1381), a process of monitoring whether or not the game ball is illegally passed through the probability change switch 65e3 is executed.

Next, the details of the ending process 6 (Z1379 of FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 6 (Z1379). In the ending process 6 (Z1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (Z4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203zi is set to off (Z4102), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203zs is on (Z4103). When it is determined in the processing of Z4103 that the probability variation setting flag 203zs is on (Z4103: Yes), the probability variation counter 203zg is set to 100 (Z4104). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation counter 203zg being set to 100. After that, the process proceeds to the Z4105 process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4103, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is not on (Z4103: No), the processing of Z4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4105.

In the processing of Z4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game based on any of jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105). If it is determined that the jackpot is A, C, E, or G in the processing of Z4105 (Z4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 (Z4106), and the process proceeds to Z4108 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4105, when it is determined that none of the jackpots A, C, E, and G is (Z4105: No), 1 is set to the time saving identification flag 203zx (Z4107), and the process proceeds to Z4108. To do.

By setting the time saving identification flag 203zx to 0 or 1 by the processing of Z4106 or Z4107, the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the normal symbol variation processing is switched. When the processing of Z4106 or Z4107 is completed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is set to 100 (Z4108), and this processing is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state (probability variation state) is given, the type of the time saving state set is set differently depending on the jackpot type. As a result, in the time saving state executed after the jackpot game, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 700, the ball enters the first operating port 704 or enters the second operating port 707. It is possible to switch between the right first entry port 64a2 and the right second entry port 64b depending on the jackpot type.

Therefore, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed by the first special symbol or the lottery is executed by the second special symbol in the time saving state. Then, by setting different advantages given to the player in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the magnitude of the privilege given to the player can be changed depending on the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is varied between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the probability variation rate, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of time reductions, the fluctuation time, etc. are defined as the first special symbol. By setting differently from the second special symbol, the privilege may be set differently. In addition, with the configuration as in this embodiment, even in the probability-changing game state with the same jackpot probability, the type of the special symbol that changes during the time-saving (during probabilistic change) is switched depending on the type of the time-saving state to be given. It is possible to change the benefits that the player can receive in the probabilistic game state. Therefore, it is possible to set a probabilistic game state in which a plurality of granted benefits are different. Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of hit types of the second special symbol is set to be larger than that of the first special symbol, the types of jackpots guided by the probability change switch 65e3 can be set to a plurality of probability variation ratios. Therefore, the probability variation rate can be changed depending on the time saving state, and the player can be provided with a fresh game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the condition (end) that the time saving state (probability change state) ends depending on the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Ease) is different. Therefore, the advantageous condition between the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed.

In addition, in the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above, a game in which the player executes the lottery of the first special symbol and a game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed can be selected and configured. It was configured so that a player could play a game corresponding to the game method selected by the person. That is, when a predetermined game state (time saving state) is set, any game (a game that executes a lottery for the first special symbol, a game that executes a lottery for the second special symbol) can be executed. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined game state (for example, a time saving state), one game (for example, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol) can be executed (for example, a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed). A game state in which the time saving state 1) is set, and in the state in which the time saving state 1 is set, the other game (for example, a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol is executed) can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (Time saving state 2) can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to set and provide different gaming states to the player in stages. Therefore, a game having a higher capture element than the above-described second and fifth embodiments. Machines can be provided.

With this configuration, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed when the time saving state 1 is set, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied as compared with the lottery of the second special symbol. Configure to make it easier. Specifically, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is 30 times, and the condition for ending the number of winnings when the number of small hits is won twice by the lottery for the first special symbol. Is configured to hold.

Then, in a part of the case where the jackpot of the special symbol is won during the period in which the time saving state 1 is continuously set, the time saving state 2 (after the jackpot game ends) after the jackpot ends (after the jackpot game ends) It is configured so that the time saving state in which the lottery is executed) is set. As described above, in this second special symbol lottery, the time saving end condition is configured to be more difficult to be satisfied than the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol is 100. The condition for ending the number of times of change is satisfied when the number of times is reached, and the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied when the small hit is won 20 times by the lottery of the second special symbol.

With this configuration, once the time saving state 2 is reached, the time saving state is more likely to continue than in the case of the time saving state 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a time saving state in which the degree of game is different. In the above-mentioned example, the time saving state is shown as an example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the time saving state is not limited to this, and may be used for the probability changing state, and the end conditions of the probability changing state and the time saving state respectively. May be managed independently, and for example, a gaming state (latent state), which is a normal symbol low probability state in a special symbol high probability state, may be set.

Further, as the end condition of the gaming state that can be set in the sixth embodiment, either the end condition set in each of the above-described embodiments or the assumed end condition may be adopted, or a plurality of them may be combined. Is also good.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage differs depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol or the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol. 2 It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to win a big hit in the lottery of special symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, a time saving state 1 and a time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving state given after the end of the big hit. The time saving state 1 is a time saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (the ball is easily entered into the right first entrance ball opening 64a2), and the time saving state 2 is the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Is easy to be executed (the ball is easy to enter into the right second entrance 64b), which is a time saving state. More specifically, in the time saving state 1, when a hit is made, the ball is easily entered into the first operating port 704 inside the distribution winning device 700 (the first operating accessory 645a is easily opened). The accessory 701 is released. Therefore, by hitting right in the time saving state 1, the ball can easily enter the right first entrance ball opening 64a1, so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, when a hit is made, the electric accessory 701 is easily entered into the second operating port 707 inside the distribution winning device 700 (the second operating accessory 645b is easily opened). Is released. Therefore, by hitting right in the time saving state 2, the ball can easily enter the right second entrance 64b, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability change switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the jackpot type that allows the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot by changing the internal flow path and the jackpot type. A jackpot type is provided so that the ball cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult). Then, depending on whether the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the ratio of the jackpot types that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is changed to the probability change state of the special symbol. The configuration is such that the rate of transition is variable. That is, the configuration is such that a person who wins a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to shift to a probabilistic state than a case where a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is the operating port (first). More attention can be paid to whether the ball enters the operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided in the probabilistic state as well as the time saving state. That is, a probabilistic state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed and a probabilistic state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed are provided. A plurality of probabilistic states in which the rate of transition to the probabilistic state differs depending on whether the lottery is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the degree of advantage is also different for the probabilistic state given. Is provided, so that the game can be performed aiming at a better state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that only one of them is changed (lottery) according to a predetermined regularity, as described above. As in the fourth embodiment, it may be used for a game machine having a configuration in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed independently.

In the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the types of special symbols to which the lottery (variation) is executed during the time saving state are completely separated according to the type of the time saving state (time saving state 1, time saving state 2) to be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery (variation) frequency of each special symbol may be made different according to the type of the set time saving state. For example, when the time saving state A is set, the time saving state B is such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed twice to the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. If it is set, the ratio of the first special symbol lottery (variation) once to the second special symbol lottery (variation) three times, when the time saving state C is set. Is configured so that only the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is executed, and when the time saving state D is set, only the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various playability according to the time saving state set.

Instead of the pachinko machine 10 used in the sixth embodiment described above, the following pachinko machine 10 may be used, and in a normal game state, a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) is performed. Will be executed. As a result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64a1, the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened is executed when the jackpot is won. At the same time, depending on the type of jackpot won, the probability of winning a jackpot by the special figure lottery after the jackpot game ends becomes high, and the probability fluctuation game state (hereinafter referred to as the probabilistic state) or the probability variation state in which the special figure lottery is easily received, or The probability of winning a jackpot does not change, but a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a special drawing lottery is given.

Then, as will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 has a probability change state 1 in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed during the probability change state and a probability change state in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. 2 and are provided. In addition, the jackpot based on the lottery of Special Figure 2 is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one jackpot game is large, or 1 after the jackpot game is completed. It is set so that it is easy to shift to a game state where it is easy to win a big hit with a large number of balls that can be obtained by a big hit game.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 provides a probabilistic state 1 that is more advantageous than the normal game for the player and a probabilistic state 2 that is more advantageous than the probabilistic state 1. As a result, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probabilistic state is increased (it is easy to enter the probable change state 1), and it is easy for the player to experience the game state (probability change state) in which the player is more likely to hit the jackpot than the normal game. This makes it easier to experience the effect during the jackpot game and the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the probabilistic state, and makes it possible to entertain the game, and reduces the rate of transition to the probabilistic state 2. However, it is possible to provide a sense of superiority to the player who has transitioned to the probability change state 2, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved for the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set even in the time saving state as in the above-mentioned probability change state, and both the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are higher than the normal game. A game state in which it is easy to receive a special figure lottery (a ball is easy to enter the entrance where the special figure lottery is executed, and a fluctuation time shorter than that in the normal game state is set as a fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure lottery. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time saving state 1 is configured so that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is configured so that the lottery of the special drawing 2 is substantially executed. Is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player.

When such a pachinko machine 10 is used, the configuration of the game board 13 may be as follows. That is, to explain with reference to FIG. 169, when the game state shifts to the probabilistic state or the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80) is displayed. The target game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69 and is in the vicinity of the through gate (normal entry port) 67 or the through gate (normal entry port) 67. It passes between the planted nails and flows down toward the distribution winning device 700. The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured so that a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is opened when the result of a lottery of ordinary symbols (normal symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 is a hit. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of open patterns, and it is preferable to configure the electric accessory 710 so that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution winning device 700 is different.

Although detailed description will be omitted, the configuration inside the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning device 700 is opened, a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 falls on the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the winning (per drawing) as a result of the drawing lottery, and the first switching valve 702 is determined by the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. As described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after winning the prize. The switching valve 702 may be operated as described above, and the first flow path 703 may be operated so as to communicate with each other during the other period.

As described above, the mechanism for changing the accessory to the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using the electric configuration is a known technique called a non-electric accessory. In the present embodiment, detailed description of the configuration of the non-electric accessory has been omitted, but any technique already disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the distribution winning device 700 and entered the second operating port 707 is operated by the second operating mechanism 708 in the same manner as the configuration of the non-electric accessory described above. 2 The operating accessory 645b is opened. When the ball enters the right second entry port 64b, which allows the ball to enter when the second operating accessory 645b is opened, the lottery of the special figure 2 set more advantageous than the special figure 1 is performed. Will be executed. Regarding the configuration of the non-electric accessory composed of the second actuating port 707, the second actuating mechanism 708, and the second actuating accessory 645b, the first actuating port 704, the first actuating mechanism 705, and the first actuating accessory 645b described above are described. Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electric accessory composed of the operating accessory 645a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is provided only for a predetermined period, that is, from the time when the above-mentioned switching valve 702 is elected per normal figure to the time when 1.5 seconds have passed and 3.5 seconds have passed (2 seconds). It is opened by flowing down the second flow path 706 that the first flow path 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other and the first flow path 703 is operated to communicate with each other during other periods (including the period in which the first flow path 703 is not won in the normal drawing). Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the second operating accessory 645b, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed due to an illegal game. Because.

Further, as a configuration of the right side region of the game board 13, when the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b can be entered by the ball entered in the distribution winning device 700, the distribution is performed. It is preferable that the ball that has flowed down the right side region of the game board 13 without entering the winning device 700 is guided by a plurality of nails and enters any of the entry openings in which the ball can be entered.

Further, a switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided in the distribution winning device 700, and the switching valve 702 is after winning a normal drawing. , It is configured to operate to a position where the second flow path communicates for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is configured so that a constant operation is executed regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entered in the opening pattern B is surely guided to the first flow path 703 so that the ball entered in the opening pattern A is surely guided. The operation is configured to be executed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. This makes it possible to guide the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to a desired flow path, and the ball is released from the distribution winning device 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

According to the alternative example described above, the opening pattern of the electric service (electric accessory) can be set based on the jackpot type, and the opening pattern of the electric service (electric accessory) is set. It is possible to set a gaming state in which FIG. 1 substantially fluctuates and a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates. Furthermore, it is more advantageous for the player to win the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery than to win the big hit in the special figure 1 lottery (the number of balls that can be obtained by the big hit game is large, which is practically special. The rate of transition to the gaming state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 is executed is high) is set to be granted.

As a result, the time saving state and the probabilistic state are further favored by the player (time saving state 2, probabilistic change state 2) and the player is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state but more advantageous than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variation state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, by setting a high transition ratio from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability change state 1, the player can easily see the effect executed in the time saving state or the probability change state. By making it possible, or by setting a low transition rate to shift to the probabilistic state 2 which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, it is possible to give a superiority complex to the player who has transitioned to the probabilistic state 2. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game for the player.

It should be noted that two types of opening patterns A and B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), but the setting is not limited to this, and three or more types of opening patterns can be set. You may. This makes it possible to set a wider variety of gaming states.

Further, as an opening pattern of the electric service (electric accessory), an opening pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding the ball to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) for guiding the ball to the second flow path 706. However, for example, an opening pattern may be provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706. As a result, the player can enjoy which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the ball entering the electric accessory 701 is guided to, further improving the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Further, the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is configured to enter any of the operating ports (first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). For example, the distribution winning device 700 A flow that allows the ball to be discharged from the game board 13 to the game board 13 again, or to the out port that communicates with the discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without entering each operating port. A road may be provided. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the player interested in the flow of the ball in the distribution winning device 700, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured so that a predetermined constant operation is performed after the hit game is executed. For example, the switching valve 702 always performs a constant operation after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured so that the flow path to be communicated is switched when the number of balls entered in the distribution winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

The operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (motor (not shown)). For example, the switching valve 702 is operated when a ball comes into contact with the switching member 702, and a predetermined condition (for example, passing 10 balls) is satisfied. It may be configured so that the communication flow path is switched when it is filled.

Further, the ball guided to any of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter any of the operating ports. For example, any of the balls is flown by the switching valve 702. A distribution member for distributing the ball guided to the road to a plurality of flow paths may be provided, and the ball distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member may be configured to enter the corresponding operation port.

In addition, the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in this embodiment). For example, the distribution winning device 700 As a means for varying (extending) the time for the ball that has entered the ball to reach the switching valve 702, a plurality of routes having different periods until the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 are provided. A distribution means for distributing the balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 to any route may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who can play the game while predicting when the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 will reach the switching valve 702 from getting bored with the game at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to.

Next, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of another example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 is based on the jackpot type in which the normal gaming state, the probabilistic state 1 (unfavorable probabilistic change), the probabilistic change state 2 (advantageous probabilistic change), the time saving state 1 (disadvantageous time saving), and the time saving state 2 (advantageous time saving) are won. It is configured to migrate.

First, in the normal game state, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed, and when a big hit is won, 50% shifts to the probability change state 1, 30% shifts to the probability change state 2, and 15% shifts to the time saving state 1. 5% shift to the time saving state 2.

Next, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric service opening pattern in the probability change state 1, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 substantial variation). In the probability change state 1, if a jackpot is won, the probability change state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% shifts to the probability change state 2, 15% shifts to the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. In this way, since the probability variation state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates as in the normal game state, the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal game state, but the game after the jackpot is won. The transition destination of the state and its distribution are the same.

In the probabilistic state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the electric service opening pattern, the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the actual variation of the special figure 2). In the probability change state 2, if a big hit is won, the probability change state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% shifts to the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. As described above, the probability variation state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the jackpot probability is set higher than that in the normal game state. Therefore, the game state is most advantageous to the player. Will be.

Next, in the time saving state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric service opening pattern, the game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 substantial variation). In the time saving state 1, if a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the probability changing state 1, 30% shifts to the probability changing state 2, 15% loops the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. In this way, since the time saving state 1 is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates as in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure and the normal figure is shortened, and the electric accessory 701 at the time of hitting the normal figure Although the opening pattern is different from that of the normal gaming state, the transition destination of the gaming state after winning the jackpot and its distribution are the same.

In the time saving state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the electric service opening pattern, the game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the actual variation of the special figure 2). In the time saving state 2, if a big hit is won, 80% shifts to the probabilistic state 2, 15% loops through the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. In this way, the time saving state 2 is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates, and the probability of shifting to the probabilistic state 2 which is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won is the normal gaming state. It is a gaming state set to 2.5 times or more (so-called pullback zone). By providing such a gaming state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will shift to the most advantageous gaming state (probability variation state 2) than the normal gaming state, and to enthusiastically play the game. It has the effect of being able to.

It should be noted that the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be only the time saving state 2. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play, who could not shift to the probabilistic state even though he won the jackpot in the normal game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this, depending on the game state. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent early getting bored with the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probabilistic change state continues until the next big hit, and the time reduction state is given 10 times regardless of the game state. For example, the probability change state is specified by the variation display of the special symbol. The specification is to continue until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed every time the special figure fluctuates, and by winning the lottery, the probability change state changes to the normal game state. It may be configured to be migrated. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal game state is different. You may try to do it.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 195. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the variation display of the first number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special symbol is executed without winning the jackpot as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state. The first end condition (number of fluctuations end condition) that is satisfied in the above, and the second end condition (number of wins) that is satisfied based on winning the second number of small hits (for example, 5 times) without winning the big hit. (End condition) and is configured to be set at least, and the time-saving state is terminated when any one of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied. Further, as a condition for ending the number of winnings, the number of times is set to be different for each type of small hit, so that it is difficult to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, V winning is generated during the execution of the small hit game regardless of the game state at the time when the small hit is won (the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3). It was configured so that the degree of advantage of the jackpot started in the case was common.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state instead of using only one type of ending condition of the time saving state. Configured. More specifically, when a small hit is won, a game ball is inserted into the V winning device 6500 provided in place of the V winning device 650 to execute a big hit game, or a game ball is entered. It is configured so that the player can select whether to reduce the number of remaining time reductions without causing it. Then, the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on whether the jackpot is won during the time saving state or the jackpot is won after the time saving state is completed. That is, it is configured so that a jackpot in the normal state after the end of the time saving state is more likely to win a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (a type of jackpot in which the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot). As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player selects whether or not to insert the game ball into the V winning device 6500 each time a small hit is won in the time saving state. You can improve your interest.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is a partial change. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, when the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment wins a small hit against the game board 13 in the first embodiment, like the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment. A V winning device 6500, which is set so that a game ball can be entered for a predetermined period, is provided on the left side of the board. The reason why the V winning device 6500 is arranged on the left side is that in the seventh embodiment, the player is allowed to select whether or not to generate the V winning game during the execution of the small hit game in the time saving state. is there. That is, when the V prize device 6500 is provided in the direction of launching the game ball in the time saving state (that is, on the right side of the game board 13), the player wants to select not to generate the V prize at the time of a small hit. Even so, there is a possibility that the game ball that has already been launched by hitting the right side will enter the V prize device 6500 and the V prize will be generated against the player's will. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is provided on the left side of the board surface, and unless the game method is intentionally changed in the time saving state (that is, the right-handed game is not switched to the left-handed game), the V prize is won. Is configured so that it cannot occur (it becomes difficult to occur). As a result, the player who does not want to generate the V prize in the small hit game can surely end the small hit game without generating the V prize.

The V winning device 6500 according to the seventh embodiment is provided with a V switch 6500e3 inside. Like the V switch 650e3 in the first embodiment, the V switch 6500e3 is configured so that a jackpot is started when a game ball passes through. That is, in the small hit game in which the V winning device 6500 is set to be able to enter the ball, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 and passes through the V switch 6500e3. To. In the seventh embodiment, the internal mechanism of the V winning device 6500 is configured so that all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 6500 pass through the V switch 6500e3. That is, the inside of the V winning device 6500 according to the seventh embodiment is not provided with any configuration corresponding to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the switching member 650h in the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment, and the ball is entered. It is configured so that all the game balls that have been played flow down the special discharge flow path 6500e2, pass through the V winning switch 6500e3, and then are discharged to the outside. Therefore, in the small hit game, the big hit is determined when at least one game ball enters the V winning device 6500, so that the game playability of the small hit game can be made simple and easy to understand. it can. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability that is easy for the player to understand. Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won, the player simply shoots a game ball toward the V winning device 6500 by continuously left-handing. It is configured so that 10 or more game balls enter the V winning opening 6500a. Therefore, when a small hit is won, the player who wants to start the big hit can easily pass the V winning switch 6500e3 to start the big hit. Even if a plurality of game balls pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 in one small hit game, only one game ball that first passes through the V winning switch 6500e3 is used for the start determination of the big hit, and the subsequent game balls. There is no effect on the feasibility of the jackpot. That is, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 6500 and a plurality of game balls pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 in one small hit game, only one big hit is executed (with a big hit). It is configured so that one small hit does not acquire more than one right. Therefore, substantially, the ratio of the number of game balls that trigger the execution of the big hit to the number of game balls that enter the V winning device 6500 in the small hit game is 1/10 or less.

Further, as shown in FIG. 178, in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, a second ball entry port 6400 is provided on the right side of the board surface instead of the second ball entry port 640 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the second entrance 6400 is provided with the electric accessory 6400a, and the electric accessory 6400a normally closes the second entrance 6400. While the game ball forms a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, if it is hit by a lottery of a normal symbol, a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds × 1 time or 2 seconds × 2 times ) The electric accessory 6400a is opened to form a state in which the ball can enter the second ball entry port 6400. Further, as shown in FIG. 178, in the seventh embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided (moved) on the upstream side on the right side of the board surface. As a result, when a right-handed hit is made, the distance until the launched game ball reaches the through gate 67 is shortened, so that it becomes easier to execute the lottery of the normal symbol earlier.

Here, with reference to FIG. 179, the details of the V winning device 6500 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a top view of the V winning device 6500 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, the opening / closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 according to the seventh embodiment is configured to be capable of forming a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can pass on the upper surface thereof in a closed state. .. More specifically, on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1, a flow path through which the game ball can flow down from the left side to the right side in the front view is formed, and the game flows down the flow path. Convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe are provided to prevent the flow of the sphere. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe, it flows down on the opening / closing door 6500f1 along the outer circumference of each convex portion 6500fa to 6500fe. That is, on the opening / closing door 6500f1, a zigzag-shaped flow path is formed by the convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe. Therefore, as compared with the case where the convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe are not provided (that is, the game ball can flow linearly on the opening / closing door 6500f1 from the right direction to the left direction in the front view), the opening / closing door It is possible to lengthen the period required for the 6500f1 to completely flow down the upper surface. In other words, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the V winning device 6500 by the left-handed game, a plurality of game balls are likely to flow down to the opening / closing door 6500f1 at the same time. ing. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 6500f1 is opened due to a small hit, a plurality of game balls that were flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 at the time of opening are moved into the V winning device 6500 immediately after the opening / closing door 6500f1 is opened. Can be dropped into. This makes it possible to enter more game balls in one small hit game, so if you win a small hit, you want to start a big hit (enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500). A player who wants to pass the V winning switch 6500e3) can easily enter at least one game ball into the V winning device 6500. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, an opening pattern of the opening / closing door 6500f1 set when a small hit is won in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, only one type of opening pattern is defined as the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 6500f1. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, the opening / closing door 6500f1 is maintained in the closed state for 3 seconds after the start of the small hit game, and the opening / closing door 6500f1 is opened after 3 seconds. By continuously hitting left during the closing period of 3 seconds, about 5 game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1, so that the opening / closing door 6500f1 is switched to the open state (variable). ) Immediately after, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 can be entered into the V winning device 6500.

As shown in FIG. 180, the open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the opening / closing door 6500f1 is closed when 0.6 seconds have elapsed (3.6 seconds after the start of the small hit). After that, as shown in FIG. 180, a closed state for 3 seconds (a period during which a plurality of game balls can reach (store) the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 by left-handing) and an open state for 0.6 seconds (opening / closing). The period of guiding the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the door 6500f1 to the inside of the V winning device 6500) is repeated up to two times, and the small hit game is completed when the third open state is completed. .. If 10 or more game balls, which is the upper limit of the number of winning balls in the small hit, is detected, the small hit game is terminated at the time of detection. If the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 before the small hit game is completed, the ball passes through the V winning switch 6500e3, and the big hit is started after the small hit game is completed. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the combination of the upper surface structure of the opening / closing door 6500f1 in the V winning device 6500 and the opening pattern of the small hit allows more game balls to be inserted in one small hit game. Is possible. More specifically, as in the seventh embodiment, the opening period is not set in three times for 0.6 seconds each, but simply for 1.8 seconds (0.6 seconds ×) immediately after the start of the small hit game. If the open state of 3) is set, only about three game balls can be fired during the open period, so that there is a possibility that no game ball enters the V winning device 6500. .. In other words, even though the player has left-handed during the small hit game in hopes of starting the big hit, the big hit cannot be started, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. there is a possibility. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since a plurality of game balls can be easily entered into the V winning device 6500 in one small hit game, it is desired to start a big hit. A player who desires to hit right during a small hit game can easily enter a game ball into the V winning device 6500 to start a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, a characteristic effect during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, as in the time saving state in the first embodiment described above, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the variable display effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is shown. As a part of (variable pattern production), a production in which the boy character 801 searches for a treasure box is executed. Then, if the lottery result is a small hit (or a big hit), the effect of finding the treasure box is executed, and the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game, and after the small hit is completed, the big hit ( When the start of (per 2 types) is confirmed, the effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and the effect of V display 803 indicating that the jackpot game is set from the treasure box 802 appears (FIG. 13). (See)) is executed. On the other hand, the game ball did not enter the V winning device 6500 during the execution of the small hit game because the player did not hit the left side during the execution of the small hit game (the start condition of the big hit was satisfied). If not), the effect of the boy character 801 passing through without opening the treasure box 802 is executed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in a time-saving state in which the electric accessory 6400a is easily opened (it is easy to enter the second entrance 6400), the game is played to the second entrance 6400 by hitting the right. Every time the ball enters and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the effect of acquiring the key is executed. The details of the effect of acquiring (accumulating) the key will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b). Since the display contents of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, a display area HR6 for showing the remaining number of time saving is formed above the boy character 801. FIG. 181 (a) illustrates a case where the remaining number of time reductions is 10 times, and the characters “remaining 10 times” are displayed inside the display area HR6. In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit, 10 times is always set as the time saving number. That is, FIG. 181 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents immediately after the end of the time saving jackpot. In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is entered after the jackpot is completed, four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801. In these four display areas, each time a game ball enters the second entrance 6400 and the number of reserved balls increases, an image of a key in a mode corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), a display area HR5 in which the characters "Right-handed key is stored !!" is displayed is formed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to easily understand that the keys are accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by right-handing the player.

FIG. 181 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a game ball enters the second entrance 6400 in a time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the game ball enters the second entrance 6400, an image imitating a key is displayed in the display area HR4. As a result, the player can easily understand that the entry into the second entrance 6400 and the display of the key are linked. The image of this key is provided with a plurality of aspects. The details will be described later, but in the seventh embodiment, the degree of advantage in the case where the V prize is generated (when the game ball is inserted into the V prize device 6500) is suggested to the player by the mode of the key. It is configured to be possible. That is, when a V prize is generated, the expected degree of being given a time saving state after the end of the jackpot based on the V prize is suggested to the player by the display mode of the key image. More specifically, in addition to the key of the mode (normal mode) shown in FIG. 181 (b), as a mode with high expectation, a key mode larger than the normal mode, or a sun with low expectation, A mode that is more tattered than a normal mode is provided. Depending on the display mode of these keys, it is possible to realize a playability that allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V prize.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the V prize is generated in the small hit won in the normal state rather than the big hit executed when the V prize is generated in the small hit won in the time saving state. The jackpot executed in the case is configured so that the rate of being given the time saving state is higher. Then, in the seventh embodiment, the small hit can be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, the case where the small hit is won in the normal state is the case where the small hit is won by the reserved ball of the second special symbol used for the lottery after the time saving state is completed. Therefore, in the time-saving state in the seventh embodiment, even if a small hit is won during the time-saving state, right-handed hitting is continued to avoid entering the V winning device 6500 provided on the left side of the board. It is better to continue to accumulate the hold, end the time saving number of times with more hold accumulated (that is, shift to the normal state), and perform the game method of digesting the hold ball of the second special symbol. Expectations are high. Therefore, during the time saving state, the type of jackpot (whether or not the time saving state is given) that is started when the V prize is generated is estimated from the aspect of the key, and the jackpot that is given the time saving state is given. It is possible to realize an extremely different and novel game property of avoiding the V prize unless it is presumed that the game will be started, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to keep the number of reserved balls as much as possible (that is, the upper limit of 4) in the time saving state, he / she more aggressively hits the right during the time saving state. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit is won during the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), when the small hit is won in the time saving state, the effect of the boy character 801 discovering the tattered-looking treasure box 802 on which the characters "DANGER" are written is executed. During the time saving state, the appearance of the treasure chest is set to tattered, which makes us think that it is better not to open the treasure chest 802. That is, if a V prize is generated during the time saving state and a big hit is obtained, it can be suggested to the player that the ratio of the time saving state being given is low.

Further, at the lower part of the main display area Dm, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR7 in which the characters "Choose" are displayed is formed, and "Use a key !!" for the left half of the sub display area Ds. A horizontally long rectangular display area HR8 in which the characters "Left-handed" and "Left-handed" are displayed is formed, and the characters "Key is preserved !!" and "Right-handed" are formed for the right half. A horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR9 is formed. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG imitating a right-pointing arrow (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. The arrow image YG makes it easy for the player to understand that the key that can be used for the treasure chest 802 currently displayed is the key displayed in the display area HR4. With these display contents, the player can open the treasure box 802 by using the key displayed in the display area HR4 by hitting the left side (that is, a V prize can be generated and a big hit can be started. On the other hand, it is easy for the player to understand that the treasure chest 802 can be left unopened (that is, the small hit game is ended without generating a V prize) by continuing right-handed striking. Therefore, depending on the mode of the key, you can choose whether to hit left to start the big hit and aim for a shorter time, or to continue right hit to end the small hit game. Since it can be realized, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. The key that was not used because the player continued to hit the right side disappears at the end of the small hit.

FIG. 182 (b) is a small hit in a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol when the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), when a small hit is won in the normal state after the end of the time saving state, the effect of discovering the treasure box 802 in which the boy character 801 has a shining appearance is executed. The player says that the treasure chest 802 should be opened by being set to a more luxurious looking mode than if a small hit was made during the time saving state (when the treasure chest 802 in the tattered mode is displayed). Can be easily understood. That is, it is suggested to the player that if a V prize is generated in the normal state after exiting the time saving state (the time saving state ends) and a big hit is obtained, the time saving state is likely to be given after the big hit ends. be able to. Further, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR5 in which the characters "Use the left-handed stocked key !!" is displayed is formed with respect to the sub-display area Ds. .. According to these display contents, if you get a small hit after exiting the time saving state (shifting to the normal state after the number of time saving times has passed), you should hit left to generate a V prize. Can be easily understood by the player.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the winning small hit in the normal state is higher than the case where the big hit (per two types) is started by generating the V prize during the execution of the small hit game won in the time saving state. It is configured so that the ratio of the time saving state being given after the end of the big hit is higher when the two kinds of hits are started by generating the V prize during the execution of the hit game. Then, during the time saving state, the degree of expectation that the time saving state is given when the V prize is generated can be suggested by the effect mode (the display mode of the key image). As a result, when a small hit is won in a short time state, it is extremely special and it is possible to select whether to end the small hit without generating a V prize or to generate a V prize and start a big hit. Innovative playability can be realized.

In the seventh embodiment, the effect mode is different between the time saving state and the normal state after the time saving state ends (the state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol exists), and the time saving state ends. In the normal state after the game is played, a configuration is set to encourage (suggest) a left-handed hit (that is, a V prize) when a small hit is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the time saving state is not completed, as soon as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is maximized, a left-handed (V winning) effect may be executed. If the reserved ball is the maximum, even if the time saving state is not given after the big hit ends (that is, even if the game state after the big hit ends is set to the normal state), the second special in the normal state after the big hit ends. It is advantageous for the player because the holding ball of the symbol raises the expectation that a small hit will be made (that is, the expectation that two kinds of big hits can be started in the normal state where the rate of time saving state is high is high). It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, a game method (left-handed) for generating a V prize (using a key) and a V prize in the sub-display area Ds when a small hit is won during the time saving state. It was configured to suggest both the game method (right-handed) for avoiding (without using the key) to the player mainly by letters (see Fig. 182 (a)), but it is limited to this. is not. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest each game method (a game method for generating and avoiding a V prize) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG are moved to the left side in the main display area Dm, and four display areas having a substantially rectangular shape similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 (display area HRR1). ~ HRR4) and an image imitating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG (arrow image YG2) may be provided. Then, in the display areas HR1 to HR4 on the left side, an image of the key for opening the treasure box 802 is displayed in the same manner as in the seventh embodiment, and the display areas HR1 to HRR4 on the right side are displayed. An image imitating a bomb for blasting the treasure chest 802 may be displayed. Then, the arrow image YG is composed of an arrow pointing to the left toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 is directed to the image of the bomb displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 of the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4. It may be composed of an arrow pointing to the right. With this configuration, if you hit right according to the instructions of the arrow image YG2 that imitates the arrow pointing to the right, you can end the small hit (avoid V winning) by exploding the treasure chest 802 with a bomb. This can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, if you hit left according to the instruction of the arrow image YG that imitates the arrow pointing to the left, you can open the treasure box 802 (generate V prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. Can be easily understood by a person. That is, as the roles of the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2, the role of showing the item (key and the bomb) used in the small hit effect being executed and the game method (game) of the player for using the item. It can play multiple different roles, the role of indicating the launch direction of the sphere). Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, and to efficiently use the display elements, so that a more suitable production mode can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (a). FIG. 183 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is open to the small hit type selection table 202f with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19 (a)). It differs from the scenario table 202g in that is deleted. Further, the first random number table 202a, the first random number selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the time saving table 202e are partially changed. ..

First, the details of the first type selection table 202a in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b). Although not shown, the first random number table 202a in the seventh embodiment is a lottery of the first special symbol, similarly to the first random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21A). Two types are defined: a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for use in the above, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for use in the lottery of the second special symbol. First, with reference to FIG. 184 (a), the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

FIG. 184 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 defines a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment shows the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit. As the range, "0 to 9" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the value of the random number counter C1 per first is any value of "0-9", it is determined as a big hit, while any value of "0-9". If it is not (a value of any of "10 to 999"), it is determined to be out of order. Of the 1000 counter values (random number values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the counter values (random number values) determined to be big hits are 10 of "0 to 9". , The probability of being judged as a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/100 (10/1000). Note that the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment does not specify a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit, as in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the probability of being determined as a small hit (winning a small hit) in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0.

Next, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). Similar to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 defines a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment, the range of the counter value (random number value) determined to be a big hit is "0 to 9". Is specified in association with each other, and “10 to 989” is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) determined to be a small hit. Of the 1000 counter values (random number values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the counter values (random number values) determined to be jackpots are 10 of "0 to 9". Since the counter value (random number value) determined to be a small hit is 980 of "10 to 989", the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/100 (10/1000). The probability of being judged as a small hit is 98/100 (980/1000). That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit almost (with a probability of 98/100). Therefore, in the time saving state, since the small hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol almost every time, it is possible to more enjoy the playability that allows the player to select whether or not to generate the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184 (c), the specified contents of the second random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment will be described. The second hit random number table 202c is a data table in which the value range of the second hit random number counter C4, which is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol, is defined, as in the second hit random number table 202c in the first embodiment. is there. When the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed, the random number value (counter value) defined in the second random number table 202c is compared with the value of the second random number counter C4, and it is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A lottery for whether or not is executed.

FIG. 184 (c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second random number counter C4 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), in the second hit random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment, a random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. And a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), 200 random values of "5 to 204" are used as random values (counter values) determined to be hits of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol. (Counter value) is specified. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, 200 are determined to be hits of the normal symbol, so it is normal in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. The probability of hitting a symbol is 1 / 1.2 (200/240).

Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), only "0" is defined as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, one random number value is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol, so it is normal in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol. The probability of hitting a symbol is 1/240.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is set to an extremely low probability. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of hitting right in a normal state, expecting that the game ball enters the second entrance 6400 as a hit of a normal symbol. In the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the normal symbol is won by lottery in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 6400a is used for an extremely short time (0). It is configured so that it can only be released (2 seconds x 1 time). As a result, even if you hit right during the normal state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is low, and even if you win, the game ball will almost enter the second entrance 6400. Since it is not possible to make it, it is better to let the game ball enter the first entrance 64 by hitting the left and play the game aiming to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (right). It is possible to make the player think that it is not worth the hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed during a normal state.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (a). The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won, similar to the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment. FIG. 185 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 185 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol (so-called "direct hit" occurs), the big hit type A direct hit table 202be1 for specifying (determining) and a V-hit table 202be2 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained based on the occurrence of a V prize are defined. ing. First, the details of the direct hit table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b).

FIG. 185 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the direct hit table 202be1. As shown in FIG. 185 (b), in the seventh embodiment, "big hit A7" and "big hit A7" and "big hit" can be determined when a big hit is obtained (a direct hit occurs) in a special symbol lottery. There are two types of jackpots, "B7". "Big hit A7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of big hit is 4 rounds, and when the player wins in the normal state, the time saving state of 10 times is given after the big hit is completed. On the other hand, "big hit B7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of big hit is 4 and the normal state is set after the end of big hit when winning in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the "big hit A7" is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B7" because the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more advantageous. In the time saving state, no matter which jackpot is won, an advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. This is because if a direct hit occurs at a relatively early stage after shifting to the time saving state, the V prize, which is a characteristic game property in the seventh embodiment, is generated or occurs in the time saving state. Since it will not be possible to fully enjoy the playability of selecting whether or not to let the player play, the player will surely enjoy the game in the time-saving state by configuring the configuration so that the game always shifts to the time-saving state even after the direct hit. The purpose. In other words, in order to prevent the player from being disappointed by not being able to fully enjoy the game in the time-saving state and shifting to the normal state, the time-saving state must be after a direct hit during the time-saving state. It is configured to be.

If a direct hit occurs, it is irrelevant to the type of special symbol that triggered the direct hit (whether it is a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol or a big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol). In addition, either "big hit A7" or "big hit B7" is specified according to only the value of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), "big hit A7" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", and "50 to". "Big hit B7" is defined in association with the range of "99". That is, 50 values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each of the "big hit A7" and the "big hit B7". Therefore, when a direct hit occurs, the ratio of specifying "big hit A7" and the ratio of specifying "big hit B7" are half (both 50%).

Next, the details of the V-per-V table 202be2 will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b). As described above, the V-hit table 202be2 identifies (selects) the type of jackpot to be executed based on the occurrence of V-winning in the small-hit game (the game ball has passed the V-winning switch 6500e3). Data is a specified data table. FIG. 185 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V-per table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 185 (b), the V-hit table 202be2 defines four types of jackpots: "big hit C7", "big hit D7", "big hit E7", and "big hit F7".

As shown in FIG. 185 (c), "big hit C7" is associated with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit C7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "big hit C7" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the jackpot types and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is also advantageous. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit C7" is one out of 100 possible random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2. The probability (ratio) that "big hit C7" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 1/100 (1%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), "big hit D7" is defined in association with the range of "1 to 4" in which the hit of the first hit type counter C2 is. In this "big hit D7", the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and when the player wins in the normal state, the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state which is advantageous to the player, while the time saving state is won. If this is the case, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. This "big hit D7" has the second largest number of rounds after "big hit C7", and if it is won in the normal state, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is advantageous, so this "big hit C7" is the second most advantageous jackpot type. Is. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit D7" is four. The probability (ratio) that "big hit D7" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 4/100 (4%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), "big hit E7" is defined in association with the range of "5-29" for the first hit type counter C2. In this "big hit E7", the number of rounds of the big hit is 4 rounds, and when the player wins in the normal state, the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state which is advantageous to the player, while the time saving state is won. If this is the case, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. That is, it is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds than "big hit C7" and "big hit D7", and the game state after the big hit is the same as "big hit D7". Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E7" is 25. The probability (ratio) that "big hit E7" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 25/100 (25%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), "big hit F7" is defined in association with the range of "30 to 99" for the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit F7" has four jackpot rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, since the number of rounds is the smallest and it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit F7" is 70. The probability (ratio) that "big hit F7" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 70/100 (70%).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, if a V prize is generated during the time saving and the jackpot is won, an advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot is completed unless the "big hit C7" with a distribution of 1% is won. There is no such thing. On the other hand, in the normal state after the time saving state ends, if a small hit is won with the reserved ball of the second special symbol and a V prize is generated, "big hit C7" (distribution 1%), "big hit D7" By winning either "(Distribution 4%)" or "Big hit E7" (Distribution 25%), an advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. That is, it is configured so that the time saving state is set at a rate of 30%. Therefore, it is more likely that the V prize will be generated in the normal state than in the time saving state, and the time saving state will be more advantageous. Therefore, until the time saving state ends (the number of time saving times elapses), a small hit will be made. It can be configured so that the degree of advantage becomes high when a special game method of continuing right-handed hitting is performed so as not to generate a V prize even if the player wins. In addition, even if it shifts to the normal state, the time saving state is set only at the rate of 30% of the jackpot based on the V prize (the majority is set to the normal state), so at first glance it means to shift to the normal state. Seems to be difficult. However, if the right-handed hit is continued until the time saving state ends, in most cases, it is possible to shift to the normal state with four reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated, and In the second special symbol lottery, you will win a small hit (at a rate of 98%). In other words, almost four chances of a big hit based on the V prize will be given. The probability of winning any of the "big hit C7" to "big hit E7" at a rate of 30% within 4 times is about 76% (the probability of winning all 4 times "big hit F7" is 70% x 70% x 70% x Since 70% = 24%), it is possible to shift to the time saving state again at a relatively high rate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to end the time saving state with the hold accumulated to the maximum.

In addition, as soon as the hold is accumulated to the maximum, even if the V prize is generated, the normal state is set almost (at a rate of 99%) after the jackpot ends. In other words, as in the case of avoiding the V prize until the number of time reductions becomes 0, four chances for shifting to the time reduction state are given, and the V prize is avoided until the number of time reductions becomes 0. Since one jackpot is obtained, the range of choices for the player's game method can be expanded. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 186 (a). The time reduction table 202e is a data table that is referred to for setting the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. At the end of the jackpot, the time saving table 202e is referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is set. The value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is subtracted by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed and the fluctuation is stopped. During this time, while the value of the counter 203k is 1 or more, the time is shortened, and a right-handed hit forms an advantageous state in which the game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6400, while when the value becomes 0 It shifts to a disadvantageous normal state.

FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e. As shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit A7" won in the normal state, "10 times" is defined in association with the number of times the time reduction is granted, and for the "big hit A7" won in the time reduction state. However, "10 times" is specified in association with the number of times of time saving. Therefore, when the "big hit A7" is won, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit is completed regardless of the game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit B7" won in the normal state, "0 times" is defined in association with the number of times the time reduction is granted, while the time reduction state is won. For "big hit B7", "10 times" is defined in association with the number of times of shortening the time. Therefore, when a direct hit occurs in the normal state and the "big hit B7" is determined, the player shifts to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player, while a direct hit occurs in the time saving state and the "big hit B7" is determined. Then, it shifts to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit C7" won in the normal state and the time saving state, "10 times" is defined in association with the number of times the time saving is given. Therefore, when a V prize is generated in the small hit and the "big hit C7" is determined, the time shifts to an advantageous time saving state after the big hit ends regardless of the game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit D7" won in the normal state, "10 times" is specified in association with the number of times the time reduction is granted, while the time reduction state is won. For "big hit E7", 0 times is specified in association with the number of times of time saving. Further, the same number of time reductions is also defined for "big hit E7". Therefore, in the normal state, when a V prize is generated in the small hit and either "big hit D7" or "big hit E7" is determined, the time saving state is set to be advantageous after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when these jackpot types are determined in the time state, a disadvantageous normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), for "big hit F7", "0 times" is defined as the number of times of shortening the time, regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, in both the normal state and the time saving state, if the "big hit F7" is won, a disadvantageous normal state is set, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions (that is, the value of the time reduction counter 203k) is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of the type of the special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different time reduction times can be set. In this case, when shifting to the time saving state, the time saving number of the first special symbol may be set to, for example, 5 times, and the time saving number of the second special symbol may be set to 10 times. With this configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed up to 10 times during the time saving state regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the time saving state. That is, when the "big hit A7" is won in the state where the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists, the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the time of shifting to the time saving state and is held immediately after the end of the big hit. Even when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is possible to prevent the number of lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed during the time saving state from being reduced. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the playability of allowing the player to select whether or not to generate a V prize in the small hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment will be described. The configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment is the same as the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23A) in the first embodiment, and the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment has the same configuration. On the other hand, the only difference is that the specified contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the specified contents of the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are partially changed. The fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for normal use in the seventh embodiment is different from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for normal use in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23B), and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is also the second special. The fluctuation pattern of the symbol is also standardized and unified to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first embodiment (a long variation of 180 seconds is not set in the lottery of the second special symbol). Since only the differences are made, the illustration and detailed description will be omitted. In the normal state of the seventh embodiment, as described above, it is normal to end the time saving state so that the long fluctuation is not performed when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. This is because the player can select the game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the state. That is, if the player avoids the V prize in the small hit won during the time saving state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed after the time saving state is finished, a long fluctuation time is set. The purpose is to prevent this because the game may be delayed and the player's interest may be impaired.

Next, the details of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 186 (b). FIG. 186 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186 (b), in the time saving variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other. Has been done.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 0". When the range of "198", that is, the entire range is defined by a short deviation of 1 second and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". That is, a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range. Therefore, if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the fluctuation ends in a very short time, so that when the time saving state is entered with the reserved ball of the first special symbol remaining. , Can't win a small hit (that is, can't play a game of gameplay that selects whether to generate or avoid a V prize in a small hit) To finish the lottery of the first special symbol in a short period of time. Can be done.

If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is "missing" or "small hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149". A "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is specified in association with it, and a "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "190 to 195" and the "normal reach" of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "196 to 198". On the other hand, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the above. That is, it is compared with the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the normal state (when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 23B)). Then, the fluctuation time is shortened when the lottery result is not a big hit. As a result, it is possible to speedily perform (digest) the game during the time-saving state, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the time-saving state from becoming redundant.

Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". On the other hand, "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with each other, and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified in the range of "195 to 198", and the "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in association with the range. That is, even if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state. There is. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game from becoming redundant in the time saving state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). FIG. 183 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19 (b)) with the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb, and winning state storage area 203ec are added. It is also different in that the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, the small hit C counter 203p, and the short fluctuation flag 203q in the normal diagram are deleted in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 6400 (starting prize), and the acquired data is the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area. Among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) constituting 203a2, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area. When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the game ball winning the second entrance 6400, and is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b in other configurations. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, these special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 are added in order to mount the reserved memory of the second special symbol which was not mounted in the first embodiment. ..

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2. .. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea is the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored (stored) in the execution area shifted (moved) to the execution area for executing the lottery, the judgment such as the lottery for winning a normal symbol is made. Will be done.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a2, other The shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the holding area of the above into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203eb (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball passes through the through gate 67. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1013 in FIG. 191). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, which is the maximum value, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Fig.). See S1012: No in 191). Further, the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S933 in FIG. 190).

The winning state storage area 203ec is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (that is, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0), the winning state storage area 203ec is used as information indicating the normal state. "00H" is stored. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (that is, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is 1 or more), the information indicating the time saving state is "01H" in the winning state storage area 203ec. Is stored. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ec is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state (that is, the number of time reductions) after the jackpot ends (see S1621 in FIG. 192). ).

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a method of transitioning to each state in the seventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the seventh embodiment, two gaming states are provided. That is, two types of gaming states are provided: a normal gaming state (normal state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, and a time saving game state (time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage is significantly different between the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists immediately after the end of the time saving state and the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist. It is configured in. That is, if there is even one reserved ball with the second special symbol, a small hit or a big hit is won almost (at a rate of 99%), so it is extremely compared to the case where the reserved ball with the second special symbol does not exist. Form a favorable state. In the following description, for the sake of simplification of the description, the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist is referred to as "normal mode", and the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists. This is called "stock open mode" in the sense that the game is played using the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated (stocked) during the time saving state, and the time saving game state is called V during the time saving state. It means that the game is played by selecting either the game property of generating a prize and executing a big hit, or the game property of avoiding the V prize during a small hit and shifting to the "stock release mode". It is called "select mode".

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 187, a method of shifting from the normal mode (normal game state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to the other mode only when a big hit (direct hit) is made in the special symbol lottery. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, when it becomes a "big hit A7" in which a big hit is won at a rate of 50% in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the big hit is advantageous. Set to select mode (short-time game state). On the other hand, if the "big hit B7" is won at a rate of 50% when the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the big hit is set to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player again. (Loops in normal mode). Therefore, in the normal mode, the game can be performed with the expectation that the "big hit A7" will be won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, in the select mode (time saving game state), when a small hit is won and a V prize is generated, a big hit is obtained, and when the number of time saving times has elapsed (finished). There is a possibility of shifting to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, a small hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and a V prize is generated to win a prize per 2 types (per V), and the jackpot type is a jackpot D7 ~. If it becomes either F7, it shifts to either the normal mode or the stock release mode after the jackpot ends. That is, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the jackpot D7 to F7, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the jackpot, while the second special symbol is reserved at the end of the jackpot D7 to F7. If the number of balls is 1 or more, the game shifts to the stock release mode after the jackpot ends. Similarly, when the number of time reductions has elapsed (finished), if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 when the number of time reductions has elapsed, the mode shifts to the normal mode, while the number of time reductions has elapsed. If the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more at that time, the mode shifts to the stock release mode. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game can be played while being careful not to make the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol 0. That is, since it is possible to positively make a right-handed hit so that more game balls enter the second entrance 6400, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, when a direct hit occurs, or when a jackpot C7 with a distribution of 1% is determined by winning each of the two types, the game state after the jackpot ends is again changed. Set to select mode.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, in the stock opening mode, if a big hit (direct hit and V hit) is won, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, when a direct hit is made and the jackpot A7 is determined, the mode shifts to an advantageous select mode after the jackpot ends. Further, if the jackpot B7 is determined as a direct hit and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the jackpot, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, if a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game and the number is 2 types (per V) and one of the big hits C7 to E7 is determined, the mode after the big hit is set to the select mode. To. In addition, the jackpot F7 is determined as the hit type per 2 types (per V), and if the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist at the end of the jackpot F7, the mode shifts to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. To do. On the other hand, if the jackpot is B7 or the jackpot F7, and there is one or more reserved balls with the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is the stock release mode again.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, there are three modes in which the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the jackpot type and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot (or the time when the number of time reductions has elapsed). It is configured to shift to any of the modes. Therefore, since various mode transitions can be realized, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 188 to 192, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, since the hold storage function of the second special symbol is added to the first embodiment, the content of the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is also changed. , The same modification as the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) in the second embodiment described above (the embodiment having the hold storage function of the second special symbol as in the seventh embodiment) has been applied. Therefore, the detailed description of the start winning process in the seventh embodiment will be omitted here. First, the special symbol variation processing 7 (S121 in FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188. This special symbol variation processing 7 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIGS. 38 and S104) in the first embodiment, and is a special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). ), This is a process for setting the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Of the special symbol variation processing 7 (S121) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, S206 to S218, and S220, S201 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIGS. 38 and S104) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S202, S206 to S218, S220, and the same processing is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (S121) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the special symbol 1 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol 1 N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol 2 N2) are acquired (S231).

Next, it was determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 was larger than 0 (S232), and it was determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 was 0. In the case (S232: No), the process proceeds to S206. On the other hand, in the processing of S232, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S232: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 ( N2) is subtracted by 1 (S233), and a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203b2 changed by the calculation is set (S234).

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S234, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S235). In the process of S235, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S210.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S213 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S213: No), then the time saving medium counter 203k When it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (S236) and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is determined to be larger than 0 (S236: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S. S237), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0 in the processing of S236 (S236: No), the processing of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S220.

In the process of S220, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit (S220). When it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S220: Yes), the small hit start setting process 7 is executed (S238) instead of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. ), The process proceeds to S218. The details of the small hit start setting process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S220: No), the process of S238 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S218.

Next, the small hit start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 189. The small hit start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) is a process executed in place of the small hit start setting process (see FIGS. 40 and S221) in the first embodiment, and is a small hit start in the first embodiment. Similar to the setting process, it is a process for setting the start of the small hit game.

Of the small hit start setting process 7 (S238) in the seventh embodiment, in each process of S401 and S404, each of S401 and S404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIGS. 40 and S221) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the small hit start setting process 7 (S238) in the seventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is completed, the V hit table 202be2 of the first hit type selection table 202b is next (see FIG. 185 (c)). The data indicating the jackpot type specified with reference to is stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h (S411), the start of the jackpot is set (S412), and the process shifts to S404.

Next, the normal symbol variation process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 190. This ordinary symbol variation process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIGS. 45 and S106) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIGS. 45 and S106) in the first embodiment. (See FIG. 45), in order to control the fluctuation display and fluctuation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second entrance 6400, and the like. It is the processing of.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 7 (S122) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S901, S902, S906 to S910 and S912-920, the ordinary symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 45 and S106). The same processes as those of S901, S902, S906 to S910 and S912-920 of the above are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S122) in the seventh embodiment, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (S902: No) in the processing of S902, the normal symbol reservation ball count counter The value of 203eb (the number of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S931). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is larger than 0 (S932), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is 0 (S932: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is not 0 (S932: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is subtracted by 1 (S933).

When the processing of S933 is completed, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea is then shifted (S934). In the process of S934, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203ea is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea is acquired (S935).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S936). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, while the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 0. , It is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

In the processing of S936, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S936: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S936 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability Based on this, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S937), and the process shifts to S906. In the process of S937, specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 184 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S936, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S936: No), then the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S935 and the normal symbol for low probability Based on the random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S938), and the process shifts to S906. In the process of S938, specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "1-239", it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 184 (c)).

Next, the through-gate passing process 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 191. The through-gate passage process 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) is a process executed in place of the through-gate passage process (see FIGS. 46 and S107) in the first embodiment, and is a process in which the game ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing it in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea when the game ball has passed.

Of the through-gate passage processing 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, in the processing of S1001, the same processing as each processing of S1001 of the through-gate passage processing (see FIGS. 46 and S107) in the first embodiment is executed. To Further, in the through gate passing process 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1001 that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S1001: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter. The value of 203eb (the number of times of holding the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S1011). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is 4 (that is, that is). If it is (upper limit value) (S1012: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203eb is added by 1 (S1013), and the second The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea (S1014), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S1521 of FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 192. The jackpot control process 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIGS. 52 and S1504) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52). ), This is a process for making various settings during the execution of the jackpot game.

Of the jackpot control processes 7 (S1521) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618, the jackpot control processes (see FIGS. 52 and S1504) S1601 to S1612 and S1615 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S1618 is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (S1521) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (ending period) (S1612: Yes), the jackpot type being executed is determined. , The number of time reductions corresponding to the data in the winning state storage area 203ec is read from the time reduction table 202e (see FIG. 186 (a)) (S1621), and the number of time reductions read is set to the counter value of the time reduction medium counter 203k. (S1622), the process proceeds to S1615.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 193 to 195, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 1113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the winning information-related process 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 193. The prize information-related process 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) is a process executed in place of the prize information-related process (see FIGS. 57 and S2210) in the first embodiment, and is a process related to the prize information in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57 and S2210). Similar to FIG. 57), this is a process for performing control according to the winning information command received from the main control device 110.

Of the winning information-related processing 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S2301, S2302, S2311 and S2312, S2301, S2302 of the winning information-related processing (see FIGS. 57 and S2210) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S2311 and S2312, the same processing is executed.

Further, in the prize information-related process 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2302 that the read game state is the time saving state (S2302: Yes), then the received prize information command is received. Is a command indicating the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321). In the process of S2321, when it is determined that the command indicates the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: Yes), the mode of the key according to the lottery result notified by the winning information command is specified (S2322). The display of the key image of the specified mode is set (S2324), and the process proceeds to 2311. On the other hand, in the processing of S2321, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not a command indicating the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: No), the processing of S2322 and S2324 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2311. Transition.

Next, the hit-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 194. The hit-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIGS. 58 and S2221) in the first embodiment, and is a hit-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58). ), When a command related to a hit is received from the main control device 110, this is a process for executing control according to the type of the received command.

Of the hit-related processes 7 (S2222) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S2401 to S2409 and S241 to S2418, S2401 to S2409 and S2411 of the hit-related processes (see FIGS. 58 and S2212) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S2418 is executed. Further, in the hit-related process 7 (S2222) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the process of S2409 (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S2421). ), After that, this process is terminated. The details of this small hit start command processing (S2421) will be described with reference to FIG. 195.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned small hit start command process (S2421). In this small hit start command process (S2421), first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S3901), and then it is determined whether or not the read information is information indicating the time saving state. (S3902). In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the read information is the information indicating the time saving state (S3902: Yes), the start of the small hit effect for the select mode (see FIG. 182 (a)) is set (S3903). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the read information is not the information indicating the time saving state (determined to be the information indicating the normal state) (S3902: No), the small hit effect for the stock release mode (S3902: No) (See FIG. 182 (b)) is set to start (S3904), and then this process ends.

By executing this small hit start command process (see FIG. 195), the small hit effect can be different depending on whether the small hit is won in the normal state or the small hit in the time saving state. It is possible to realize a playability that allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V prize from the production mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the disadvantageous normal state than to win the jackpot in the advantageous time saving state as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that it is easy to set a short game state. That is, it is configured so that a small hit is won with a high probability in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easily executed during the time saving state, and the time saving state is given when a V prize is generated in the small hit and the big hit is started. The ratio is set so that the small hit in the normal state is higher than the small hit in the time saving state. In other words, knowing the risk of becoming less likely to be in a time-saving state, the first game method of generating a V prize by hitting left as soon as a small hit is won in the time-saving state and executing a big hit, and ending the time-saving state Being aware of the risk that it will take time and holding balls to make it, the time saving state is ended while keeping a lot of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the V prize is generated by the small hit after the time saving state ends. It is possible to let the player select the two game methods.

Here, in a general game machine, the degree of advantage when a big hit is made in an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state) is equal to or higher than the degree of advantage when a big hit is made in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). Since the specifications are normal, in most cases, when the player shifts to an advantageous state, the player plays the game with a strong expectation that a big hit will occur during the advantageous state. For this reason, when the advantageous state ends and the state shifts to the disadvantageous state, the player may be discouraged and the player's motivation for the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is executed after the advantageous time saving state is completed, is configured so that the expectation of shifting to the time saving state is higher. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot with the reserved ball of the second special symbol after finishing the time saving state. That is, in addition to the option of winning a V prize by hitting left to win a big hit when a small hit is made in a short time state, the small hit during a short time intentionally returns to a normal state by avoiding a V prize. The player can be given the option of migrating. Therefore, an extremely special and novel game method of intentionally avoiding a big hit can be given as one of the options, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is drawn so as to win a small hit (98/100), but the small hit probability may be arbitrarily determined. For example, it may be configured to be a small hit at 1/4. With this configuration, even if you try to win a V prize with a small hit after shifting to the normal state, there is a high possibility that you will not win the small hit due to the hold of the second special symbol, so during the time saving state As soon as a small hit is reached, more players can be made to select a game method in which a V prize is generated and a big hit is executed. In addition, instead of lowering the small hit probability, a balance may be achieved by increasing the time saving ratio (for example, 80%) in the case where two types are hit in the normal state. Also, instead of lowering the small hit probability (reducing it to 1/4), the rate at which a V prize is generated when a left-handed hit is made in a small hit is reduced (for example, V is only about once every four small hits). It may be configured (to prevent winning). As a result, more players can be made to select the game method of ending the time saving state.

In the seventh embodiment, when a V prize is generated during the time saving state and a V hit is won, the gaming state after the big hit is set to a disadvantageous normal state at a rate of 99% regardless of the number of time saving times. It was configured to be done. That is, from the time when the time saving state is set until the time saving number elapses (the specific condition is satisfied), the degree of advantage when winning per V is lower than after the time saving number elapses (after the specific condition is satisfied). However, it is not limited to this. For example, even in the time saving state, the ratio of the time saving state being given is high when the time saving state is won (for example, 30% which is the same as the case where the time saving state is won in the normal state). You may. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is won in the latter half of the time saving state (for example, the lottery of the last three special symbols), and a V prize is generated in the small hit and the result is a V hit. , It may be configured so that the time saving state is given at a relatively high rate as in the normal state. On the contrary, if a small hit is won in the first half of the time saving state (for example, the first two special symbol lottery) and a V prize is generated in the small hit and the V win is obtained, the normal state is reached. Similarly, it may be configured so that the time saving state is given at a relatively high rate.

In the seventh embodiment, a small hit can be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery of the first special symbol also has a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200). It may be configured to win a small hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect a small hit to be won even when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is entered, the time saving state ends when a total of 10 special symbol lottery is executed regardless of the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is executed. It was configured, but it is not limited to this. For example, a different number of time reductions may be set for each type of special symbol (for example, the first special symbol 5 times, the second special symbol 10 times). That is, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the time saving state, the number of lottery of the second special symbol until the end of the time saving state may be the same each time. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of times of playability for selecting whether or not to generate V prizes the same each time in the time saving state.

In the seventh embodiment, the effect mode is different between the time saving state and the normal state after the time saving state ends (the state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol exists), and after the time saving state ends. In the normal state of, the configuration is such that when a small hit is won, a left-handed (that is, V winning) is prompted (suggested) to be performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the time saving state is not completed, as soon as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is maximized, a left-handed (V winning) effect may be executed. If the reserved ball is the maximum, even if the time saving state is not given after the big hit ends (that is, even if the game state after the big hit ends is set to the normal state), the second special in the normal state after the big hit ends. It is advantageous for the player because the holding ball of the symbol raises the expectation that a small hit will be made (that is, the expectation that two kinds of big hits can be started in the normal state where the rate of time saving state is high is high). It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, a game method (left-handed) for generating a V prize (using a key) and a V prize in the sub-display area Ds when a small hit is won during the time saving state. It was configured to suggest both the game method (right-handed) for avoiding (without using the key) to the player mainly by letters (see Fig. 182 (a)), but it is limited to this. is not. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest each game method (a game method for generating and avoiding a V prize) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG are moved to the left side in the main display area Dm, and four display areas having a substantially rectangular shape similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 (display area HRR1). ~ HRR4) and an image imitating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG (arrow image YG2) may be provided. Then, in the display areas HR1 to HR4 on the left side, an image of the key for opening the treasure box 802 is displayed in the same manner as in the seventh embodiment, and the display areas HR1 to HRR4 on the right side are displayed. An image imitating a bomb for blasting the treasure chest 802 may be displayed. Then, the arrow image YG is composed of an arrow pointing to the left toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 is directed to the image of the bomb displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 of the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4. It may be composed of an arrow pointing to the right. With this configuration, if you hit right according to the instructions of the arrow image YG2 that imitates the arrow pointing to the right, you can end the small hit (avoid V winning) by exploding the treasure chest 802 with a bomb. This can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, if you hit left according to the instruction of the arrow image YG that imitates the arrow pointing to the left, you can open the treasure box 802 (generate V prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. Can be easily understood by a person. That is, as the roles of the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2, the role of showing the item (key and the bomb) used in the small hit effect being executed and the game method (game) of the player for using the item. It can play multiple different roles, the role of indicating the launch direction of the sphere). Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, and to efficiently use the display elements, so that a more suitable production mode can be realized.

In the seventh embodiment, only two types of gaming states, a normal state and a time saving state, are provided, and the case where the player wins the V hit in the normal state is more than the case where the V hit is won in the time saving state. Was configured to increase the rate of granting an advantageous time saving state, but is not limited to this. For example, in addition to these two types of gaming states, a so-called probabilistic state or latent probable state is provided, and the degree of advantage when the latent probable state becomes a big hit is higher than the probabilistic state, or the probabilistic state. It is also possible to increase the degree of advantage when the time saving state becomes a big hit than. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect a big hit in a relatively unfavorable state while realizing a wider variety of state transitions, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 214. The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above is configured so that when a right-handed hit is performed in a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, almost only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in an advantageous time saving state, and further, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the time saving state is more likely to end when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed than when it is executed. More specifically, rather than the time saving end condition based on the number of lottery of the first special symbol (the number of time saving of the first special symbol), the time saving end condition (the number of time saving of the second special symbol) based on the number of lottery of the second special symbol It was configured so that the number of times was smaller. On the other hand, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of small hits than the lottery of the first special symbol, the degree of expectation of a big hit for one lottery (direct hit and V hit). The total expectation) was configured to be higher in the lottery for the second special symbol. As a result, if the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the expectation of a big hit will be high, but while the time saving state will be easy to end early, the lottery of the first special symbol will be prioritized. If you execute it, the expectation of big hit will be low, but it will be a game that you can enjoy the time saving state for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to select the playability according to the preference of each player.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, since the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery of the second special symbol, the right-handed strike is continuously executed in the time saving state. In that case, first, it is difficult to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state (the number of time saving is large), and after the lottery of the first special symbol with low jackpot expectation is executed continuously, the second special with high jackpot expectation A lottery of symbols is executed. That is, it is possible to realize an extremely novel game playability in which the jackpot expectation is higher in the latter half (and at the time of holding digestion of the second special symbol after the end) in the advantageous time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 7 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 196, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, in the eighth embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is provided (moved) on the right side of the board surface (position where the game ball launched by right-handed hitting can enter) on the game board 13. It is different in that. The structure, opening pattern, and the like of the V winning device 6500 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above. That is, in the eighth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, only by firing the game ball to the V winning device 6500 during the execution of the small hit game, almost all V winning is generated and the winning is won. It is configured to be. In other words, the specifications are such that winning a small hit and winning a big hit are almost equal. Further, the second entrance 6400 was deleted, and instead, the distribution winning device 700, which was also provided on the game board 13 (see FIG. 169) in the sixth embodiment on the right side of the board surface of the game board 13, the first right. The difference is that the ball entry port 64a2 and the right second ball entry port 64b are provided. Since the distribution winning device 700, the right first ball entrance 64a2, and the right second ball opening 64b are described with reference to FIG. 170 and the like in the sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be given here. Is omitted.

Although details will be described later, in the eighth embodiment, a period during which the game ball can easily enter the first operating port 704 as a hit of a normal symbol (the switching valve 702 is switched to the first switching state). The hit type (A8 per normal drawing) in which the electric accessory 701 is opened during the period (when the game is in) and the period in which the game ball can easily enter the second operating height 704 (the switching valve 702 is switched to the second switching state). There is at least a hit type (B8 per normal drawing) in which the electric accessory 702 is opened during the period of time. Then, when the normal symbol hits in the time saving state, 80% is A8 per normal figure and 20% is B8 per normal figure. That is, in the time saving state, the right first entry port 64a2 is opened more frequently (opportunity) than the right second entry opening 64b. With this configuration, when the player continuously strikes right in a time-saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed with higher priority. In other words, by performing a relatively simple game method of continuing to hit right, the lottery of the first special symbol with low expectation is first intensively executed, and then the second special symbol with high expectation is executed. The lottery can be executed. Therefore, after shifting to the time saving state, a relatively long period (until the special symbol lottery is executed 96 times) in a state where the jackpot expectation is low (the jackpot can only be won by direct hit). After the game is played, the game can be played for a relatively short period of time in a state where the expectation of a big hit is high (both direct hit and V hit can occur). Therefore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is not won 96 times, the player is made to play the game while giving the player a sense of security that the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a higher expectation, is coming up later. Innovative playability can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 197 and 198, a characteristic effect during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the small hit probability is different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the probability of a big hit due to V winning (probability of winning per V). ) Is changed, and the probability that the lottery of the second special symbol will be a big hit is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the number of time reductions of the second special symbol is smaller than the number of time reductions of the first special symbol, and only the lottery of the second special symbol with high expectation is executed. , The advantageous time saving state is likely to end relatively early, and when only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving state can be enjoyed for a relatively long time. In the eighth embodiment, this specification (the lottery of the first special symbol has a low expectation of a big hit and it is difficult to end the time saving state, while the lottery of the second special symbol has a high expectation of a big hit and It is configured to suggest to the player by directing (a specification that makes it easier to end the time saving state).

FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. Here, even in the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, the same variation pattern effect as in the first and seventh embodiments described above is mainly executed. That is, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the effect of the boy character 801 searching for the treasure box is executed as a part of the variable display effect (variable pattern effect) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. Then, if the lottery result is a small hit (or a big hit), the effect of finding the treasure box is executed, and the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game, and after the small hit is completed, the big hit ( When the start of (per 2 types) is confirmed, the effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and the effect of V display 803 indicating that the jackpot game is set from the treasure box 802 appears (FIG. 13). (See)) is executed.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the first display area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds includes a reserved symbol of the first special symbol and a reserved symbol of the second special symbol. Is displayed up to 4 each. FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which three reserved balls of the first special symbol and zero reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. The holding sphere of the first special symbol is displayed in a substantially circular shape on the upper side in the first display area Ds1, and the holding sphere of the second special symbol is displayed in a substantially equilateral triangle shape on the lower side in the first display area Ds1. .. Due to this difference in shape, the player can easily distinguish between the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the executing symbol Dsa for indicating the type of the special symbol in the executing variation display is displayed in the center of the sub-display area Ds. In the example of FIG. 197 (a), a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, which has a substantially circular shape and has the character "normal" displayed inside, is displayed (that is, the first symbol). The state where the lottery of the special symbol is executed) is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the characters "right-handed" normal "hold digestion" are displayed for the second display area Ds2 formed on the right side in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is easily digested by hitting the player right in a short time state (the lottery of the first special symbol is the second special symbol). It is easy to understand that it is configured to be executed in preference to the lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), a horizontally long substantially rectangular display region HR10 is formed with respect to the central upper portion in the main display region Dm. Inside the display area HR10, the remaining number of time reductions of the first special symbol and the remaining number of time reductions of the second special symbol are displayed. In the example of FIG. 197 (a), the situation is illustrated in which the number of time reductions of the first special symbol is 94 times remaining and the number of lottery times of the second special symbol is 4 times remaining. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), a reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (a symbol having a substantially circular shape and having the characters "normal" displayed inside) above the display area HR10. ) Is displayed on the right side of the image, which is "94 times remaining". In addition, in the center of the display area HR10, on the right side of the image imitating the reserved symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (a symbol having a substantially equilateral triangular shape and the characters "heat" displayed inside), "4 times remaining". "Is displayed. Further, below the display area HR10, the characters "RUSH ends when either becomes 0 !?" are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand the number of time reductions (time reduction end condition) for each special symbol.

FIG. 197 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a starting prize for the right second entrance 64b is first detected in a time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 197 (b), when the game ball enters the second entry port 64b and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds becomes The reserved symbol of the second special symbol (a symbol having a substantially equilateral triangular shape and the letters "heat" is attached) is displayed. In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the character "heat" is generally used as a kind of character suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high, so the character "normal" displayed on the reserved symbol of the first special symbol By comparing this with the word "heat" displayed on the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, it is intuitive to the player that the lottery of the second special symbol has a higher expectation of a big hit. Can be understood by.

Further, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), when there is one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, "left-handed" heat "hold digestion! ?? "Is added and displayed. As a result, the player can be made to select whether to digest the hold ball of the first special symbol or the hold of the second special symbol depending on the firing direction. Therefore, since the game can be performed by a game method that suits the tastes of each player, it is possible to provide a game machine that suits the tastes of a wide range of players. Specifically, for example, for a player who wants to execute a lottery of a second special symbol with a high expectation rather than executing a lottery of a first special symbol with a low expectation, the right second entry A game method in which a start winning prize for the ball mouth 64b is detected, and every time the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol increases, left-handed (or launch stop) is performed to execute a lottery of the second special symbol (of the second special symbol). It is possible to select a game method) in which the number of time reductions is passed first. In addition, for players who want to save the lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high degree of expectation, the lottery for the first special symbol is given priority by continuously executing right-handed strikes during the time saving state. While executing, increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (after the number of time reductions of the first special symbol has passed first, the lottery with high expectation is executed for the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) Can be selected. In addition, for example, until just before the end of the time reduction number of the first special symbol (for example, until the time reduction number of the first special symbol is one remaining), the right-handed stroke is continued and the lottery of the first special symbol is prioritized. After that, the lottery of the second special symbol that the number of reserved balls will be accumulated up to the upper limit (that is, four) is executed four times, and the fourth variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is also possible to select a game method in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is increased as much as possible by right-handed while the time is reduced, and a lottery based on the reserved balls is executed after the time reduction is completed. Furthermore, just before the end of the time reduction number of the second special symbol (for example, until the time reduction number of the first special symbol is one remaining), the lottery of the second special symbol occurs every time the start prize of the second special symbol occurs. (That is, left-handed or stop firing), and right-handed so that the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed when the number of time reductions of the second special symbol is one remaining. Can be continuously executed to select a game method in which the number of time reductions of the first special symbol elapses first. In this case, between the three lottery of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state and the end of the three times of the second special symbol lottery until the end of the time saving number of the first special symbol. With the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol accumulated in (there is a high possibility of accumulating up to 4 which is almost the upper limit), the lottery of the 2nd special symbol with high expectation can be executed at least 7 times, so you will win the jackpot. The possibility can be increased. In this way, it is possible to realize various game characteristics in which the jackpot expectation and the period length differ depending on the game method of the player, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is performed by differentiating the display mode of the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol of the second special symbol. 1 It was configured to make it easier for players to intuitively understand that the expectation for big hits is higher than the lottery for special symbols (it is easy to win small hits), but in addition to this, at the time of starting prize Depending on the pre-reading result, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed within the range in which the player can grasp the type of the special symbol (whether it is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol or the reserved symbol of the second special symbol). You may. More specifically, for example, the color of the reserved symbol may be different depending on the jackpot expectation. That is, depending on the look-ahead result, the color may be changed to any of white, blue, green, and red in ascending order of jackpot expectation. As a result, not only the type of the special symbol but also the color of the reserved symbol is taken into consideration, and the lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed by right-handed, or the second special symbol is left-handed (or the launch is stopped). Since the player can select whether to execute the lottery based on the reserved ball, the range of playability can be further expanded. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, in addition to this, if a big hit is made (a direct hit occurs) by a special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the game state after the big hit ends at a predetermined ratio (for example, 20% ratio). It is configured to be set to the normal state (the time saving no jackpot is determined), and there is a high possibility that the time saving no jackpot is won as a reserved symbol (it becomes easier to be selected in the case of the time saving no jackpot, and it is missed. It may be configured to provide a special aspect (for example, a reserved symbol imitating a bomb) (which is difficult to be selected in the case of a short-time big hit). With this configuration, when the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), the second is before the start winning prize corresponding to the reserved ball is generated. It is possible to make the player think that he should have aimed for a big hit by digesting the reserved ball with a special pattern. Therefore, in particular, for a player who has selected a game method in which the player simply continuously hits the right side during the time saving state, the game method in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol is first digested in the next time saving state. Can make you want to try. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. In addition, when the game is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb) and the lottery result based on the reserved ball is notified by a mere deviation, the game is played even though no advantageous result is notified. It is possible to realize a novel playability that can reassure the person. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, when the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), a lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) is performed so that the reserved ball corresponding to the special mode is not digested. 2 It is possible to execute a lottery that is executed with priority over special symbols) and aim to win a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the game method is different depending on the mode of the reserved symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198 (a), a display mode after any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied (after the time reduction number of times of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has elapsed) will be described. FIG. 198 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the end of the time saving state. In the example of FIG. 198 (a), the case where the time saving state is completed after the time saving number of times of the second special symbol has elapsed is shown. Further, at the end of the time reduction, four reserved balls of the first special symbol and one reserved ball of the second special symbol are illustrated. As shown in FIG. 198 (a), when the time saving state ends, the characters "one time remaining" are displayed on the right side of the image imitating the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the display area HR10. , The characters "0 times remaining" are displayed on the right side of the image imitating the reserved symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Further, below the display area HR10, the characters "RUSH end ..." are displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended because the time saving number of the second special symbol becomes 0. Further, the character "right-handed" is erased in the small display area Ds2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to hit the right and causing the player to lose even though the start winning is unlikely to occur even if the time saving state ends and the right hit is made. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), at the end of the time saving state, a number indicating the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is shown in the leftmost first display area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds. "4" and "1") indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed small. That is, the reserved symbols are displayed in a simple and inconspicuous manner as compared with the time saving state. Then, in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "RUSH end ..." are displayed in a conspicuous (larger) manner than the number of reserved balls. As a result, the player can be given a stronger impression that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended. The time saving end screen indicating that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended continues to be displayed until all the lottery based on the reserved balls held at the time when the time saving state ends is completed. If a big hit or a small hit is won with the reserved ball while the time saving end screen is displayed, a special effect (revival effect) is executed. This revival effect will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198 (b), a display mode in the case of a big hit or a small hit after the end of the time saving state in the lottery based on the reserved ball held at the time when the time saving state ends will be described. As shown in FIG. 198 (b), when a big hit is won while the time saving end screen is displayed, three symbols imitating the number "7" break through the display area HR10 from the back side of the display area HR10. The effect (revival effect) of the appearance that appears for a relatively short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed. In addition, the characters "BONUS confirmed !!" indicating that a big hit or a small hit has been won are displayed in the second display area Ds2. By executing this revival effect, it is possible to give greater surprise and joy to the player who thought that the time saving state has ended, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Can be done. In addition, the symbol displayed in this revival effect and the characters "BONUS confirmed !!" are configured to continue to be displayed until the start of the big hit or the small hit. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time is extremely short (0.1 seconds) regardless of the number of lottery, from the end of the time saving state to the digestion of at least all the reserved balls. It is configured in. As a result, the screen at the end of the revival effect (three "7" symbols and the characters "BONUS confirmed !!") will continue to be displayed for a long period of time, preventing the game from becoming redundant. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, a time-dependent change in the effect mode when a big hit or a small hit exists in the reserved ball held at the end of the time saving state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 199 (a), the time-dependent change of the effect mode when the reserved ball corresponding to the small hit is held within 5 seconds after the last variation display in the time saving state is started will be described. Here, the period of 5 seconds is a period until the character 801 discovers the treasure box 802 in the effect of searching for the treasure box 802. If the lottery result of the special symbol is wrong, the effect that the contents of the found treasure chest 802 is empty is executed, and if it is a hit (big hit or small hit), V display 803 appears from the found treasure chest 802. The production is executed. That is, within 5 seconds (before opening the treasure box 802), the effect result is rewritten without discomfort according to the contents of the reserved ball (even if the effect that the contents of the treasure box 802 are empty at the start of fluctuation is set). , Change to the effect that V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802). That is, in FIG. 199 (a), after the effect corresponding to the deviation is started, the reserved ball corresponding to the small hit is detected within the period in which the effect result can be rewritten (within 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case of rewriting the effect.

As shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the final fluctuation display in the time saving state (in the example of FIG. 199 (a), the deviation display of the second special symbol) is started, the boy character is displayed for 5 seconds. The effect that 801 searches for the treasure chest 802 is executed. Since the time saving state continues until this final fluctuation is completed, the electric accessory 701 is opened by the player hitting right, and the game ball enters the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 702. Since the ball is balled, the game ball can enter the right first entrance 64a2 and the right second entrance 64b. In the example of FIG. 199 (a), the start winning prize is detected three times before the lapse of 5 seconds, two times are missed, and one is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the last fluctuation display in the time saving state is off and the start winning prize corresponding to the small hit is detected within 5 seconds after the fluctuation starts, the character 801 is in 5 seconds. After executing the effect of searching for the treasure box 802, the effect of V display 803 appearing from the treasure box 802 found by the character 801 is executed from the elapse of 5 seconds to the elapse of 10 seconds. The state in which the V display 803 is displayed continues until the fluctuation display corresponding to the small hit ends, and when the small hit fluctuation (and the stop display period of the small hit symbol) elapses, the opening of the small hit The production is started. As described above, the variation display based on the reserved ball after the end of the time saving state is set to an ultra-short variation of 0.1 seconds (variation time 0.1 seconds, stop display time 0.1 seconds) regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, the period from the end of the last variation display in the time saving state to the start of the small hit can be made extremely short (0.6 seconds in the example of FIG. 199 (a)). Therefore, even if the display period of the V display 803 is extended (the display continues even after the final fluctuation of the time saving state is completed), it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing a time-dependent change in the effect mode when a holding ball that becomes a small hit is detected after 5 seconds have passed since the last variation display in the time saving state was started. In the example of FIG. 199 (b), after the reserved ball corresponding to the deviation of the first special symbol is held within 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the small hit of the second special symbol corresponds to 5 seconds or later. The case where the holding ball is held is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), if a small hit occurs after 5 seconds have passed, the character 801 searches for the treasure chest 802 in 5 seconds during the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of 10 seconds, and then. The effect that the contents of the found treasure box 802 are empty is executed in 4 seconds, and the display mode is switched to the time saving end display (see FIG. 198 (a)) 9 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. The time reduction end display continues for 1 second until 10 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, which is the end timing of the fluctuation, and after the fluctuation is stopped, the revival effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) is executed. When three symbols imitating the same number indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) are displayed by this revival effect, the symbol display is maintained until the start timing of the small hit. In this way, when a hit (big hit or small hit) holding ball is detected after the effect of confirming the contents of the treasure box 802 is started, the effect mode is not forcibly rewritten and the hit is notified by the revival effect. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the production, and at the same time, to have great joy for the hit. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200A. FIG. 200A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 200A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment in that the type selection table 202af per drawing is added. There is. It is also different in that the provisions of the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the time saving table 202e are partially changed.

First, with reference to FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c), the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be described. Although not shown, the first random number table 202a in the eighth embodiment is the same as the first random number table 202a in the first embodiment and the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 21A). Two types are defined: a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for use in the lottery of 1 special symbol, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for use in the lottery of the second special symbol. First, with reference to FIG. 200 (b), the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 200B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, similarly to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 184 (a)) in the seventh embodiment described above. Judgment value) is specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment shows the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit. As the range, "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is any value of "0 to 3", it is determined as a big hit, while any value of "0 to 3". If it is not (a value of any of "4 to 999"), it is determined to be out of order. Of the 1000 counter values (random number values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the counter values (random number values) determined to be big hits are four, "0 to 3". , The probability of being judged as a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000). Further, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment does not specify a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the probability of being determined as a small hit (winning a small hit) in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, only the direct hit can occur (V hit based on the small hit winning cannot occur), so that the big hit expectation is in the lottery of the second special symbol. It will be lower than that.

Next, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200 (c). Similar to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 184 (b)) in the seventh embodiment, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is determined to be a big hit and a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Numerical values (judgment values) are specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment, the range of the counter value (random number value) determined to be a big hit is "0 to 3". Is specified in association with each other, and "4 to 230" is specified in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) determined to be a small hit. Of the 1000 counter values (random number values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the counter values (random number values) determined to be jackpots are four, "0 to 3". Since the counter value (random number value) determined to be a small hit is 226 of "4 to 230", the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000). The probability of being judged as a small hit is 1 / 4.4 (226/1000). Further, in the eighth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won, about 10 game balls are produced by the V winning device 6500 simply by continuously firing the game balls aiming at the V winning device 6500. Winning a small hit is almost synonymous with winning a big hit because you can enter the ball into. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a direct hit occurs with a probability of 1/250, and a small hit is won at 1 / 4.4, and a V hit is almost certainly generated. Compared to the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot expectation is greatly increased. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect to be a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201 (a), the details of the first type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment will be described. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won, similarly to the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 200A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 200A, when the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs). The jackpot type is specified (determined) when the first direct hit table 202bf1 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type and the jackpot are obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (the direct hit of the second special symbol occurs). The second direct hit table 202bf2 for (decision) and the jackpot type are specified (decision) when a jackpot is obtained (V hit occurs) based on the occurrence of a V prize during the execution of the small hit game. A table 202bf3 per V for this purpose is specified. First, the details of the special 1 direct hit table 202bf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 200 (b).

FIG. 201 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special 1 direct hit table 202bf1. As shown in FIG. 201 (b), in the eighth embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs), " There are two types of jackpots, "big hit A8" and "big hit B8". "Big hit A8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of big hit is 4 and a time saving state is given after the end of big hit when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, "big hit B8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of big hit is 4 and the normal state is set after the end of big hit when winning in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the "big hit A8" is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B8" because the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more advantageous. In the time saving state, no matter which jackpot is won, an advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed by shifting to a disadvantageous normal state even though the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol whose jackpot expectation is low in the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the special 2 direct hit table 202bf2 will be described with reference to FIG. 201 (c). FIG. 201 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special 2 direct hit table 202bf2. As shown in FIG. 201 (c), in the eighth embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs), " Only "big hit C8" is provided ("big hit C8" is associated with all the values of the first hit type counter C2). "Big hit C8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of big hit is 15 rounds, and the normal state is set after the end of big hit when winning in the normal state. Therefore, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, there is no possibility of shifting to the advantageous time saving state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method aiming to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed at normal times. If the "big hit C7" is won in the time saving state, an advantageous time saving state is set after the big hit is completed. As a result, even if the player wins a direct hit with a low probability in a short time state, it is possible to prevent the player from shifting to an unfavorable normal state and disappointing the player. Can be further improved.

Next, the details of the V-per-V table 202bf3 will be described with reference to FIG. 201 (d). As described above, the V-hit table 202bf3 identifies (selects) the type of jackpot to be executed based on the occurrence of V-winning in the small-hit game (the game ball has passed the V-winning switch 6500e3). Data is a specified data table. FIG. 201 (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V-per table 202bf3. As shown in FIG. 201 (d), the V-hit table 202bf3 defines three types of jackpots: "big hit D8", "big hit E8", and "big hit F8".

As shown in FIG. 201 (d), "big hit D8" is defined in association with the range in which the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39". This "big hit D8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "big hit D8" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the jackpot types and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit D8" is 40. The probability (ratio) that "big hit D8" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 40/100 (40%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 201 (d), the hit of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "40 to 59" with the "big hit E8". This "big hit E8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This "big hit E8" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit D8", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is advantageous, so it is the second most advantageous jackpot type after the "big hit D8". Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E8" is 20. The probability (ratio) that "big hit E8" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 20/100 (20%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 201 (d), "big hit F8" is defined in association with the range of "60 to 99" for the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit F8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is four, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds than "big hit D8" and "big hit E8", but is equivalent in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit F8" is 40. The probability (ratio) that "big hit F8" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 40/100 (40%).

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit occurs, the time saving state is always set after the big hit ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. It is said. In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit (= V hit) is won with an extremely high probability as compared with the direct hit of 1 / 4.4. Therefore, in the time saving state (and while digesting the reserved balls of the second special symbol stored in the time saving state after the transition to the normal state), the time saving state is changed every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the game will be given again, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 202A. FIG. 202A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), for the "big hit A8" won in the normal state, the number of times the time reduction of the first special symbol is given (the special 1 time reduction medium counter for indicating the number of time reductions of the first special symbol). "96 times" is specified as the value of 203k1), and "4 times" is specified as the number of times of time reduction of the second special symbol (value of the special 2 time reduction / medium counter 203k2 for indicating the number of time reductions of the second special symbol). Has been done. In addition, the same number of times the time reduction is granted is also defined in association with the "big hit A8" won in the time reduction state. Therefore, when the "big hit A8" is won, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit is completed regardless of the game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), the "big hit B8" won in the normal state is associated with "0 times" as the number of times of shortening the time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. While it is stipulated, for the "big hit B8" that was won in the time saving state, "96 times" is the number of times the first special symbol is given and "4 times" is given as the number of times the second special symbol is given. It is specified with. Therefore, when the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and the "big hit B8" is determined, the player shifts to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player, while the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the time saving state. When it occurs and the "big hit B8" is determined, it shifts to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. Similarly, for the "big hit C8", for the "big hit C8" won in the normal state, "0 times" is associated with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the number of time reduction grants. On the other hand, for the "big hit C8" that was won in the time saving state, "96 times" is associated with the number of times of the first special symbol being given, and "4 times" is associated with the number of times of giving the second special symbol. Is stipulated. Therefore, when the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and the "big hit C8" is determined, the player shifts to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player, while the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the time saving state. When it occurs and the "big hit C8" is determined, it shifts to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), for "big hit D8" to "big hit F8", the number of times of shortening the time of the first special symbol is "96 times", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. 2 "4 times" is specified in association with the number of times the special symbol is given as a time reduction. For this reason, if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state and the pending digestion after the time saving state ends, and a V hit occurs, the time saving state is always given after the end of the V hit. To. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small hit probability (1 / 4.4) is executed, not only the expectation of V per player can be increased, but also the time is shortened. You can also increase your expectations for. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the type selection table 202fa per drawing will be described with reference to FIG. 202 (b). The hit type selection table 202fa is a data table that is referred to for specifying (determining) the hit type when a hit of a normal symbol is made. FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202fa per general map. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), two types of normal map per type are defined in the normal map per type selection table 202fa in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, two types of hits are defined: "A8 per normal figure" and "B8 per normal figure". "A8 per normal figure" is set to an open pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened only 0.2 seconds x 1 time immediately after the start of the normal symbol when the player wins in the normal state of the normal symbol. If the player wins in the time saving state of the symbol, the open pattern A (see FIG. 171) is set, which is a type per symbol. As described above, the switching valve 702 is fixed to the first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 for 1.4 seconds after the start of the normal symbol, so that the normal symbol hits in the normal state. If the player wins "A per normal figure", it will be difficult for the game ball to enter the distribution device 700 during the opening period of 0.2 seconds, and the game ball will enter the distribution device 700. Even if the game ball enters the ball, the entered game ball enters the first operating port 704 and the right first entry port 64a2 is opened. Therefore, even if an irregular game method of launching a game ball aiming at the distribution device 700 by hitting right at normal times is performed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the distribution device 700, and even if the ball has entered However, since only the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed, the merit for the irregular game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed during a normal state. On the other hand, as described above in the description of the sixth embodiment, when the opening pattern A is set, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the distribution device 700, and the ball that has entered is almost the first operation. Enter the mouth 704.

In addition, when the "B8 per normal figure" is won in the normal state of the normal symbol, an opening pattern is set in which the electric accessory 701 is opened only 0.2 seconds x 1 time immediately after the start of the normal symbol. If the player wins in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the open pattern B (see FIG. 171) is set as the normal symbol type. For this reason, if the player wins "B8 per normal figure" in the normal state, it is difficult to enter the sorting device 700 as in the case of "A8 per normal figure", and even if the ball is entered, it is almost the first operating port. An open pattern is set in which the game ball enters only in 704. On the other hand, if the "B8 per normal drawing" is won in the short time state, the game ball can easily enter the distribution device 700, and the entered game ball almost enters the second operating port 707. Since the ball is played, the right second entrance 64b, which is an advantageous (that is, has a high expectation of big hit) second special symbol lottery, is opened. Therefore, it can be said that "B8 per Fuzu" is more advantageous than "A8 per Fuzu".

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), for a range in which the value of the second hit type counter C6 for determining the normal figure hit type is "0 to 79", the normal figure hit type is "A8 per normal figure". Is specified in association with each other. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second hit type counter C6, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "A8 per normal figure" is "0". Since there are 80 pieces of "~ 79", the probability that "A8 per normal figure" is determined when the normal symbol hits is 4/5 (80/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), for the value of the second hit type counter C6 in the range of "80 to 99", "B8 per normal figure" is defined in association with the type per normal figure. ing. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the second hit type counter C6, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "B8 per normal figure" is 20 from "80 to 99". Therefore, the probability that "B8 per normal figure" is determined when the hit is a normal symbol is 1/5 (20/100).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the time saving state and the lottery is won, the right first entrance ball opening 64a2 is easily opened at a rate of 80%, and "A8 per normal symbol" is determined. It is configured so that "B8 per normal figure" is determined (selected) so that the right second entrance 64b is easily opened at a rate of 20%. With this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a large number of time reductions and the lottery is preferentially executed, can be executed with higher priority. Therefore, immediately after the start of the time reduction state, the first is the first. 2 Even though only the lottery of special symbols has been executed and the player wants to execute the lottery of the first special symbol first and then the lottery of the second special symbol in the latter half. It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending in a relatively short period of time. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, a method of shifting to each state in the eighth embodiment will be described. Here, in the eighth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, two gaming states are provided. That is, two types of gaming states are provided: a normal gaming state (normal state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, and a time saving game state (time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage is significantly different between the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists immediately after the end of the time saving state and the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist. It is configured in. That is, if there is even one reserved ball with the second special symbol, there is a probability of 1 / 4.4 that the player wins a small hit and wins a V hit, and the time saving state is always set again after the V hit ends. It forms a very advantageous state as compared with the case where the holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist. In the following description, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist is referred to as "normal mode", and the time-saving game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. The normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B" in the sense that the expectation of becoming a big hit is high, respectively.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 203, a method of shifting from the normal mode (normal game state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit (direct hit) is made in the lottery of the first special symbol. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, when it becomes a "big hit A8" in which a big hit is won at a rate of 50% in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the big hit is advantageous. The chance mode A (short-time game state) is set. On the other hand, if the "big hit B8" is won at a rate of 50% when the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the big hit is set to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player again. (Loops in normal mode). Therefore, in the normal mode, the game can be performed with the expectation that the "big hit A8" will be won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Next, a method of shifting from the chance mode A (short-time game state) to another state (mode) will be described with reference to the central portion of FIG. 203. As shown in the central portion of FIG. 203, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode A to another mode only when the number of time reductions has elapsed. More specifically, when the number of time reductions has elapsed (after entering the time reduction game state, the lottery of the first special symbol is completed 96 times, or the lottery of the second special symbol is completed four times), the second If there is a reserved ball with a special symbol, the mode shifts to chance mode B. On the other hand, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist when the number of time reductions elapses, the mode shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. If the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist at the time when the number of time reductions elapses in the chance mode A, for example, left-handed (or stop firing) when four reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated. Then, during the execution of the 4th variation display of the 2nd special symbol (that is, the last variation display in the time saving state), an attempt was made to accumulate the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol by hitting right, but "A8 per normal symbol". This is the case when the winning ball is biased and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not increase. Further, as another case, for example, immediately after the transition to the chance mode A, the "B8 per normal symbol" is continuously won, and the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed and the lottery of the second special symbol is 4 For example, if it has been executed three times in a row.

On the other hand, as shown in the central part of FIG. 203, when a direct hit or a V hit based on a small hit win occurs in chance mode A, the mode after the big hit is always set to the player regardless of the big hit type. The advantageous chance mode A is set. As a result, the player can be pleased when a direct hit or a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery in the chance mode A.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 203, a method of shifting from the chance mode B (normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 203, from chance mode B to another state (mode), not only when a big hit is won, but also when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are digested, the other state (mode). Move to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 203, when a direct hit occurs and the jackpot type of the direct hit is "big hit A8" determined at a rate of 50% of the direct hit of the first special symbol. After the big hit, the player shifts to the chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, even if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit is won, the mode shifts to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the big hit is completed.

On the other hand, "big hit B8", which is determined at a rate of 50% when a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs, and a rate of 100% are determined when a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs. If either "Big hit C8" is won and the reserved ball of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit is 0, the state (mode) after the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. .. In addition, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are exhausted (all the lottery of the second special symbol after the transition to the chance mode B is lost), the mode shifts to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not 0 (1 or more) at the end of "Big hit B8" or "Big hit C8", the state (mode) after the end of the big hit is the chance mode again. It becomes B.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, since the game is configured to go back and forth between the three types of states triggered by a big hit or the like, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 204, the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment has a final variation flag 223fa with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 26B) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. , The final effect setting flag 223 fb and the hit effect flag 223 fc are added.

The final fluctuation flag 223fa is a flag indicating whether or not the final fluctuation display in the time saving state is being executed. When the final variation flag 223fa is on, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is not being executed. This final fluctuation flag 223fa is set to on when the last fluctuation in the time saving state starts, and turns off when the number of time saving becomes 0 (that is, when the last fluctuation display in the time saving state ends). It is set (see S2622 in FIG. 213).

The final effect set flag 223fb indicates whether or not the type of effect after the treasure box 802 is found (the effect mode after 5 seconds have passed since the start of the change) has already been set in the final variation display in the time saving state. It is a flag. If the final effect setting flag 223fb is on, it means that the effect type has been determined, and if it is off, it means that the effect type has not been determined. When a winning holding ball is detected during the execution of the final variation (a big hit or a small hit starting prize is detected), it depends on the state of the final effect set flag 223fb and the state of the hit effect flag 223fc described later. , Whether or not to notify the hit is determined by the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)).

The hit effect flag 223fc is an effect mode indicating a hit (that is, an effect mode in which the V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802) or a resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) as the effect mode of the final variable effect in the time saving state. This is a flag to indicate whether or not is set. If the hit effect flag 223fc is on, it means that the effect mode indicating a hit or the revival effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the effect mode indicating a loss is being executed or the last in the time saving state. It means that the variable display is not being executed. The hit effect flag 223fc is set to on when the effect mode indicating a hit is set (see S3516 in FIG. 209) or when the start of the resurrection effect is set (see S2326 in FIG. 211), and the time saving state (and the time saving state (and)) It is set to off when the effect mode in (hold digestion) is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 205 to 207. First, the special symbol variation process 8 (S131 in FIG. 205) according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. This special symbol variation process 8 (S131) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIGS. 188 and S121) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (FIG. 188, S121) in the seventh embodiment. Similar to 188), this is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Of the separate symbol variation processing 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S235 and S238, the special symbol variation processing 7 (FIG. The same processes as those of S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S235, and S238 of (see 188 and S121) are executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, the order of the processing of S206 and the processing of S232 are switched. That is, as a configuration in which the value of the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter b is first determined by the processing of S206, and the processing of S232 is executed only when the value is 0 (S206: No). There is. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1 or more, the lottery of the second special symbol is not started (the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery of the second special symbol). Specifications) are adopted.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S213 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S213: No), the number of time reductions is updated. The time saving number update process 8 is executed (S241), and the process shifts to the process of S220. The details of the time saving number update process 8 (S241) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process 8 (S241).

This time reduction number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) is a process for updating the time reduction number of ordinary symbols, as in the time reduction number update process (see FIGS. 42 and S219) in the first embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, as the time reduction / medium counter 203k, the special 1 time reduction / medium counter 203k1 for indicating the number of time reductions of the first special symbol and the special 2 time reduction for indicating the number of time reductions of the second special symbol are used. A medium counter 203k2 is provided. In the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, the value of the corresponding time saving medium counter is updated according to the type of the special symbol.

Of the time reduction frequency update processing 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S601, S604 and S607, S601, S604 and S607 of the time reduction frequency update processing (see FIGS. 42 and S219) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of is executed. Further, when the time saving number update process 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment is executed, it is first determined whether or not the present is the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611). In the process of S611, when it is determined that the current time is the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special 1 time saving / medium counter 203k1 is larger than 0. (S612). If it is determined in the process of S612 that the value of the special 1 time saving / medium counter 203k1 is 0 (S612: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S612, when it is determined that the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 is not 0 (S612: Yes), the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 is subtracted by 1 (S613), and after the subtraction. The remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the special 1 time reduction / medium counter 203k1 is set (S614), and the process proceeds to S604.

On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the current time is not the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611: No), it means that the fluctuation stop this time is the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 2 time saving / medium counter 203k2 is larger than 0 (S615). In the process of S615, if it is determined that the value of the special 2 time saving / medium counter 203k2 is 0 (S615: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S615, if it is determined that the value of the special 2 time saving / medium counter 203k2 is not 0 (S615: Yes), the value of the special 2 time saving / medium counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S616), and after updating. Set the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the special 2 time reduction / medium counter 203k2 (S617), and shift to the processing of S604.

Further, in the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k becomes 0 in the processing of S604 (that is, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k1 for special 1 or When it is determined (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S618), and the special 1 time reduction / medium counter 203k1 and the special 2 time reduction are set to 0). The value of the medium counter 203k2 is set to 0 (S619), and the process shifts to S607.

By executing this time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206), the time saving number of the first special symbol and the time saving number of the second special symbol are accurately updated according to the type of the special symbol whose fluctuation has been stopped. can do.

Next, the normal symbol variation process 8 (S132) executed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 207. This ordinary symbol variation process 8 (S132) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (see FIGS. 190 and S122) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (FIG. 190, S122) in the seventh embodiment. Similarly to 190), this is a process for controlling the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 701 in the distribution device 700, and the like.

Of the normal symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S901, S902, S906 to S910, S912-915, S920 and S931 to S938, the ordinary symbol variation in the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S901, S902, S906 to S910, S912-915, S920 and S931 to S938 of process 7 (see FIGS. 190 and S122) are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S915 that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S915: Yes), then the normal symbol is used. The opening pattern according to the current gaming state is specified with reference to the figure-based type selection table 202fa (see FIG. 202 (b)) (S941), and the process shifts to S920.

By executing this ordinary symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207), when a normal symbol is hit, A8 per ordinary symbol is determined at a rate of 80%, and B8 per ordinary symbol is determined at a rate of 20%. Since it can be determined, the right first ball entry port 64a2 can be more easily opened than the right second ball entry port 64b when the player hits the right ball in a short time state. Therefore, the lottery of the first special symbol with a low expectation of a substantial jackpot can be executed with higher priority, so that the lottery of the second special symbol with a high expectation can be easily executed in the latter half of the time saving state. Can be configured. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 208 to 214. First, the main process 8 (FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 208. The main process 8 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the main process 8 (see FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment, the effect update process (S2112) is replaced with the main process (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). The point where the process 8 (S2121) is executed, the point where the command determination process 8 (S2122) is executed instead of the command determination process (S2113), and the variation display setting process 8 (S2123) instead of the variation display setting process (S2114). The only difference is that First, the details of the above-mentioned effect update process 8 (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 8 (S2121). This effect update process 8 (S2121) is a process executed in the main process 8 (see FIG. 208) in place of the effect update process (see S2112) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). , This is a process for updating the effect mode according to the progress of the variation pattern effect (variation display effect).

In this effect update process 8 (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation flag 223fa is on (S3511), and if it is determined that the final fluctuation flag 223fa is off (S3511: No), it is as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final fluctuation flag 223fa is on (S3511: Yes), it means that the final fluctuation display in the time saving state is being executed. Therefore, the final effect setting flag 223fb is turned on next. (S3512), it is determined whether or not (whether or not the type of effect after finding the treasure box 802 has been determined in the final variation display in the time saving state). In the process of S3512, if it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is off (the final effect in the time saving state has not been determined) (S3512: No), then the present is 5 from the start of this fluctuation. It is determined whether or not the timing has passed the second (S3513). In the process of S3513, if it is determined that the current timing is 5 seconds after the start of this fluctuation (S3513: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit in the hold (S3513: Yes). S3514). If it is determined that there is a big hit or a small hit in the hold (S3514: Yes), the start of the effect in which V appears from the treasure box is set (S3515), and the hit effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S3516). The process proceeds to S3519.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3514, if it is determined that there is no big hit or small hit in the hold (S3514: No), the start of the effect that the contents of the treasure box are empty is set (S3517), and the hit effect flag 223fc is turned off. After setting (S3518), the process proceeds to S3519. In the process of S3519, the final effect setting flag 223fb is set to on (S3519), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3512, when it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S3512: Yes), and in the processing of S3513, the present is not the timing when 5 seconds have passed from the start of this fluctuation. When it is determined (S3513: No), it is not necessary to determine the effect mode in the final variation display in the time saving state, so that this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this effect update process 8 (see FIG. 209), the time reduction is performed by taking into account the look-ahead result of the reserved balls accumulated during the period from the start of the last fluctuation display in the time reduction state to the elapse of 5 seconds. It is possible to set the effect mode to be executed at the fluctuation time in the final fluctuation display (and the fluctuation display based on the holding ball) in the state.

Next, the command determination process 8 (S2122) executed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 210. This command determination process 8 (S2122) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a command determination process (FIG. 5) in the seventh embodiment. 56), this is a process for performing control according to various commands received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process 8 (S2122) in the eighth embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above is replaced with the winning information-related process (S2210). The point of executing the prize information related process 8 (S2231), the point of executing the stop command process (S2232) instead of the process of S2214 for setting the stop display of the third symbol, and the point of shortening the time instead of the time saving update process (S2216). The difference is only in that the update process 8 (S2233) is executed. First, the above-mentioned winning information-related process 8 (S2231) will be described with reference to FIG. 211. The winning information-related process 8 (S2231) is notified by a winning information command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the winning information-related processing (see FIGS. 57 and S2210) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing control according to the read-ahead result.

Of the winning information-related processing 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S2311 and S2312, the winning information-related processing (see FIGS. 57 and S2210) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S2311 and S2312 is executed. Further, in the winning information-related process 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2321), and the final effect set flag 223fb is off. If it is determined (S2321: No), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, in the process of S2321, when it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2321: Yes), then whether the hit effect flag 203fc is on (that is, the last variation display in the time saving state). (S2322), it is determined whether or not an effect mode indicating a hit or a small hit is set as the effect mode of. If it is determined in the process of S2322 that the hit effect flag 203fc is on (S2322: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2312.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2322, when it is determined that the winning effect flag 203fc is off (S2322: No), then the received winning information is based on the lottery result after the high-speed digestion period (that is, after the time saving state ends). It is determined whether or not the winning information is digested within the period in which the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set) (S2323). If it is determined in the process of S2323 that the received prize information is not the prize information to be digested within the high-speed digestion period (S2323: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is the winning information that is digested within the high-speed digestion period (S2323: Yes), then whether the received winning information is the winning information corresponding to the big hit or the small hit. If it is determined whether or not (S23234) and it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information for the big hit or the small hit (S2324: No), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is the winning information corresponding to the big hit or the small hit (S2324: Yes), the execution of the revival effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) is set (S2325), and the winning effect is set. The flag 223fc is set to on (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2311. In the process of S2325, if the final variation in the time saving state is being executed, the revival effect is set to start based on the end of the final variation, while after the final variation in the time saving state is completed. , Set to start the resurrection effect immediately.

By executing this prize information related process 8 (see FIG. 211), when the prize information corresponding to the big hit or the small hit is detected after setting the final effect of the loss, the player can feel no discomfort by the revival effect. Since the big hit or the small hit can be notified, the effect mode can be set more preferably.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned stop command processing (S2322) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing this stop command processing (S2232). This stop command process (S2322) is one of the command determination processes 8, and is a process for performing control according to the stop command received from the main control device 110.

In this stop command processing (see FIG. 212), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S9001), and when it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is off (S9001). : No), the process shifts to S9007. On the other hand, in the process of S9001, when it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223 fb is on (S9001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the hit effect flag 223 fc is on (S9002). In the process of S9002, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S9002: Yes), then it is determined whether the stop command received this time is a stop command corresponding to the hit or small hit symbol. (S9004), if it is determined that the stop command does not correspond to the hit or small hit symbol (it is the stop command corresponding to the loss) (S9004: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command corresponding to the hit or small hit symbol has been received (S9004: Yes), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the process of S9005, the end of the final effect is set (S9005), the final effect set flag 223 fb and the hit effect flag 223 fc are set to off (S9006), and the process shifts to S9007.

On the other hand, in the process of S9002, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is off (S9002: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (S9003). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (S9003: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (S9003: No), each process of S9005 and S9006 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S9007. In the process of S9007, the stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S9007), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the time saving update process (S2233) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process 8 (S2233). As described above, the time saving update process 8 (S2233) is the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the command determination process 8 (see FIGS. 210 and S2122). This is a process to be executed instead, and the number of time reductions grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of time reductions, as in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process to update in synchronization with.

In this time reduction update process 8 (see FIG. 213), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating that the number of time reductions has become 0 (S2621). In the process of S2621, when it is determined that the received command is a command indicating that the number of time reductions has become 0 (S2621: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the last variation display in the time reduction state. Therefore, the final fluctuation flag 223fa is set to off (S2622), and the process proceeds to S2623. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the number of time reductions has become 0 (S2621: No), the process of S2622 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2623.

In the process of S2623, the data of the time saving information update area 223g and the display setting of the time saving number of times are updated according to the notified time saving related information (S2623), and this processing is terminated. By executing this time saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), the actual time saving number and the time saving number grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the details of the effect setting process 8 (S2821) in the eighth embodiment will be described. Here, the effect setting process 8 is executed in the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process to be performed. The difference between the variation display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment and the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) in the seventh embodiment is that the effect setting process 8 (S2821) is executed. Since there are only points, the illustration of the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) is omitted.

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 8 (S2821). Similar to the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), the effect setting process 8 (S2821) responds to the variation pattern (variation time) notified by the variation pattern command. , This is a process for determining (setting) a detailed variable display mode.

In the effect setting process 8 (S2821), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2911). In the process of S2911, when it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is off (S2911: No), the effect mode of the variable pattern effect according to the lottery result is set (S2912), and then this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S2911, when it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fc is on (S2911: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S2913). If it is determined in the process of S2913 that the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S2913: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2917.

On the other hand, in the process of S2913, when it is determined that the winning effect flag 223fc is off (S2913: No), then it is determined whether or not the data in the winning information storage area 223a includes a hit or a small hit. (S2914), if it is determined that the data in the winning information storage area 223a does not include a hit or a small hit (S2914: No), the process proceeds to S2917. In the process of S2917, the display continuation of the display mode at the start of the fluctuation is set (S2917), and then the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2914, when it is determined that the data in the winning information storage area 223a contains a hit or a small hit (S2914: Yes), the start of the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) is set (see FIG. 198 (b)). S2915), the hit effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S2916), and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol (starting prize) and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol (starting prize) are set in a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. After configuring so that both of the above can be established, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol (the possibility of winning a big hit is substantially higher). ). Then, by selecting the first game method (a game method in which the player continuously hits the right side), the lottery of the first special symbol becomes easier to be executed, but the second game method is different from the first game method. By selecting the game method (a game method in which the game ball hits the left or stops firing each time the game ball enters the right second entry port 64b), the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. By doing so, it is possible to arbitrarily select the timing at which the player is allowed to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high expectation of big hit. As a result, it is possible to realize a game playability that suits each player's taste, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions of a time saving state (a state advantageous to the player) are provided, and the second special is more than the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. It is configured so that the time saving state is more likely to be completed when the lottery of symbols is executed. More specifically, the number of lottery times (number of time reductions) at which the time reduction state is completed is made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of time reductions (96 times) of the first special symbol is higher than that of the first special symbol. The second special symbol was configured so that the number of time reductions (4 times) was smaller. With this configuration, if the game method of preferentially executing the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous (that is, the expectation of big hit is high) is continued, the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. Since there is a high possibility that the time saving state will end in a short period of time compared to the case where the first special symbol is drawn, the lottery of the first special symbol with low jackpot expectation is to some extent within the time saving number of the first special symbol (for example, 95). The game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol after executing the second special symbol can be one of the options of the player. On the contrary, for a player who wants to know the result of the time saving state (whether the big hit or the time saving state ends) in a relatively short time, the number of time saving of the first special symbol is lost. With this in mind, it is possible to select a game method in which the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. In this way, it is possible to realize a game with a high degree of freedom in which each player can select the timing for executing the lottery of the second special symbol according to his / her taste, and thus the player's interest in the game is further improved. Can be made to.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is controlled to be executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol (the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). When there is a reserved ball, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is preferentially moved to the execution area and used for the lottery). With this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol for the number of time reductions of the first special symbol can be executed only by practicing a relatively simple game method of continuously hitting the right during the time saving state. At the same time, the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored. Then, when the number of time reductions of the first special symbol becomes 0, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is almost accumulated up to the upper limit of 4, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is based on the upper limit. 2 It is possible to execute a lottery of special symbols (that is, a lottery with a high expectation of big hits). That is, from the start of the time saving state until the first condition is satisfied (until the time saving number of the first special symbol is digested), the jackpot expectation is low, and after the first condition is satisfied, Until the second condition is satisfied (until the reserved ball of the second special symbol disappears), it is possible to realize a game playability in which the expectation of a big hit is high.

Here, when a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) is won in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after the jackpot ends, the first gaming state (for example, the probabilistic variation state) that is advantageous to the player is the predetermined number of lottery. Is set as an upper limit, and a gaming machine is known in which a second gaming state (for example, a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set when the jackpot is not won within the predetermined number of lottery. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the first gaming state usually has a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state, and therefore, when the first gaming state ends, the player's game There was a problem that it may reduce the motivation for.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the jackpot expectation is low (that is, for the player) from the time when the time saving state advantageous to the player is set until the first condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol (which has a low degree of advantage) can be easily executed, and the expectation of a big hit is high (that is, for the player) after the first condition is satisfied and until the second condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (which has a high degree of advantage) can be easily executed. In other words, when it shifts to the advantageous time saving state, it is configured to first shift to the state where the degree of advantage is low and then to the state where the degree of advantage is high. By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot is not won by the time the first condition is satisfied, the player can feel reassured that a state with a higher expectation for a jackpot is coming up later. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the motivation for the game when the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, after the transition to the time saving state advantageous to the player, until just before the end of the time saving number of the second special symbol (until the lottery of the second special symbol is executed three times). After preferentially executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of time reductions of the first special symbol is terminated first by continuously executing the right-handed stroke, and then the number of time reductions of the first special symbol has elapsed. By executing the game method of digesting the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated until the time is reduced, the time saving state and the holding balls accumulated during the time saving state are all digested until the time saving state ends. It can be configured so that the number of lottery of the second special symbol executed in the meantime is likely to be large (7 times). In other words, left-handed (or fired) so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed from the transition to the time saving state until the specific condition is satisfied (the number of time reductions of the second special symbol is 1 remaining). It is possible to realize an extremely special and novel specification that the game method of executing stop) and continuing right-handed hitting after the satisfaction of a specific condition is most advantageous for the player. You can improve your interest.

In the eighth embodiment, the number of time reductions of the first special symbol is set to be larger than the number of time reductions of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of time reductions of the first special symbol and the number of time reductions of the second special symbol may be the same number of times (for example, both are 4 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period during which the lottery of the first special symbol having a low expectation is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming redundant during the time saving state. Further, for example, the number of time reductions of the first special symbol may be set to be less than the number of time reductions of the second special symbol (for example, 3 times). With such a configuration, there is a relatively high possibility that the number of time reductions of the first special symbol will elapse before the game balls are sufficiently inserted into the right second entrance 64b (up to the maximum number of reserved balls). Therefore, it is possible to realize a game playability that can make the player feel joy just by entering the game ball into the right second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit, a 20% rate of winning B8 per normal symbol (a state in which the ball can be entered into the right second entrance 64b) is configured. It was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the probability of winning B per normal figure may be low (for example, 1/50). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be accumulated in the time saving state, so that the player can be pleased when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated. Can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, when a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit occurs, the small hit that triggered the V hit is in an advantageous time saving state. Regardless of whether the player was elected or was elected during the unfavorable normal state, the gaming state after the end of each V was set to an advantageous time saving state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the time saving state is set when the V hit occurs during the normal state than when the V hit occurs during the time saving state. It was configured so that the ratio was high. With this configuration, during the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol with low jackpot expectation is executed while continuously right-handing so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed. It is possible to increase the number of reserved balls of the 2 special symbols, and after the time saving state is completed, perform a game method of aiming for a V hit by a lottery based on the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol. That is, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to more reliably realize a novel game property that shifts from a state in which the jackpot expectation is low to a state in which the jackpot expectation is high.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, when the normal symbol is hit during the time saving state, the right first ball entry port 64a2 is easily opened (ball entry into the first operation port 704). The ratio of the opening pattern per type (A8 per pachinko) makes it easier to open the right second entry port 64b (easier to enter the second operating port 707). It was configured so that it was determined at a higher rate than the type per normal figure (B8 per normal figure). As a result, the lottery condition (starting prize) of the first special symbol is more satisfied when the right-handed strike is continuously executed in the time-saving state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, from the transition to the time saving state to the elapse of the first period (for example, 180 seconds), even if the normal symbol is hit, the first one is hit. The game ball is configured to enter only the operating port 704, and the second operating port 704 is also provided only during the period from the elapse of the first period to the elapse of the second period (for example, 360 seconds). The operating port 707 is also configured so that a game ball can enter the ball. With this configuration, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are increased from the start of the time saving state to the elapse of the first period. Immediately after the start of the time saving state, the game balls continuously enter the second operating port 707, and the time saving number of the second special symbol elapses in a relatively short time, so that the time saving state becomes early. It is possible to more reliably prevent the termination.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed and that the main control device The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of 110 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 8 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 of the distribution device 700 (see FIG. 170) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 215. Here, the switching valve 702 according to the eighth embodiment described above has a first switching state in which the first flow path 703 can pass through in a specific switching pattern when the hit of the normal symbol is started. It was configured so that the second switching state in which the two flow paths 706 could pass through could be switched (see FIG. 171). On the other hand, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment has a specific switching pattern determined in advance based on the end of the jackpot (or the initialization of the pachinko machine 10) regardless of the hit period of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the switching operation is started. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing a switching pattern of the switching valve 702.

As shown in FIG. 215, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment is set in a switching mode (first switching mode) in which the switching valve 702 is maintained in the first switching state for 180 seconds when the jackpot ends. .. While the first switching mode is set, when the electric accessory 701 is opened by hitting a normal symbol and the game ball enters the distribution device 700, the game ball moves to the first operating port 704. Guided (flowing down), the right first entry port 64a2 is opened. Therefore, if the player continues to hit right while the time is shortened and the first switching mode is set, the game ball enters only the right first entrance 64a2 and is biased toward the lottery of the first special symbol. At the same time as being executed, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be stored.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215, when 180 seconds set in the first switching mode elapses, the second switching state for 1 second and the first switching state for 3 seconds are periodically repeated (switching mode). The second switching mode) is set for 180 seconds (that is, from the start of the switching pattern until 180 seconds have elapsed and 360 seconds have elapsed). That is, while the second switching mode is set, the ratio of the period during which the switching valve 702 is set to the first switching state is 3/4, and the ratio of the period set to the second switching state is 1/4. Become. If you continue to hit right while this second switching mode is set, about 1/4 of the game balls that hit the normal symbol and entered the distribution device 700 will be played. The ball enters the second operating port 707, and a 3/4 ratio of game balls enters the first operating port 704. Therefore, if right-handed hitting is continued while the second switching mode is set, the game ball enters the right first entrance 64a2 at a higher rate than the right second entrance 64b. .. Therefore, while the second switching mode is set, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased while the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. During the 180 seconds when the second switching mode is set, the second switching state is switched to the second switching state at a rate of 1 second every 4 seconds (the second switching state is set 45 times), so continuously hit right. By continuing to do so, it is possible to allow almost four or more game balls to enter the right second entrance 64b. That is, it is possible to easily store the upper limit number (4) of the reserved balls of the second special symbol only by continuously right-handing during the second switching state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215, a switching mode in which the switching valve 702 is maintained in the first switching state (third switching mode) after 360 seconds have elapsed from the start of the switching pattern until 3600 seconds have elapsed. ) Is set. While this third switching mode is set, as in the case when the first switching mode is set, the game ball enters only the right first entrance ball opening 64a2, so that a special symbol lottery is performed. 1 It is possible to focus on the lottery of special symbols. These first switching mode, second switching mode, and third switching mode are the minimum units of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702, and thereafter, every time the switching pattern of the minimum unit is completed, the switching pattern is repeatedly executed from the beginning. Will be done.

Since the fluctuation time of the deviation in the time saving state is about 4 seconds on average, it takes about 384 seconds (4 seconds × 96 times) until the number of times of the time saving of the first special symbol elapses. That is, since the number of time reductions of the first special symbol elapses while the third switching mode is set, the second special symbol is being digested while the holding ball of the second special symbol is digested after the time reduction state ends. The possibility that the number of reserved balls of the symbol increases can be set to zero. Therefore, it is possible to unify the number of lottery of the second special symbol having a high expectation of big hit in each time saving state, so that the expectation of big hit in one time saving state can be made uniform.

Here, if, as in the eighth embodiment, the operating port in which the game ball that has entered the distribution device 700 is easily guided is set to be different depending on the type of normal drawing, the time saving state is particularly high. If the electric accessory 701 is opened by winning "B8 per normal figure" immediately before the end, and the opening continues until at least one lottery using the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started, the first 2 There is a possibility that the game ball enters the distribution device 700 during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases even after the time saving state is completed. That is, there is a possibility that the possibility of winning a big hit in a time-saving state of 1 may be significantly increased or decreased depending on the timing of hitting a normal symbol and the type of hitting a normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the third switching mode is easily set before and after the end of the time saving state (that is, about 384 seconds after the end of the jackpot), so that even if the time saving state is reached. Even if the player wins the hit of the normal symbol just before the end and the opening period of the electric accessory 701 based on the hit continues until after consuming at least one reserved ball of the second special symbol, the second after the end of the time saving state. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of reserved balls with a special symbol. That is, even if the normal symbol hits at the right time and the game ball can be put into the distribution device 700 at the right time, only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol with low expectation is increased. It can be configured so that it cannot be done. As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation in the time saving state of 1 uniform.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. Here, the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 200A) in that the specified contents of the time saving table 202e are changed. .. Further, as the jackpot type defined in the first hit type selection table 202b, the jackpots A9 to F9 are defined instead of the jackpots A8 to F8 in the eighth embodiment. Since the number of rounds and the associated random number value (the range of the counter value of the first hit type counter C2) are exactly the same as those of the jackpots A8 to F9, the jackpots A9 to F9 are described here. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the time saving table 202e according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 216, for the "big hit A9" won in the normal state, the number of times the time reduction of the first special symbol is given (the value of the special 1 time reduction / medium counter 203k1 for indicating the number of time reductions of the first special symbol). ) Is defined as "96 times", and "4 times" is specified as the number of times of time reduction of the second special symbol (value of the special 2 time reduction / medium counter 203k2 for indicating the number of time reductions of the second special symbol). .. In addition, the same number of times the time reduction is granted is also defined in association with the "big hit A9" won in the time reduction state. Therefore, when the "big hit A9" is won, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit is completed regardless of the game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 216, for the "big hit B9" won in the normal state, "0 times" is defined in association with the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are given as the time reduction. On the other hand, for the "big hit B9" that was won in the time saving state, "96 times" is specified as the number of times the time saving is given for the first special symbol, and "4 times" is specified as the number of times the time saving is given for the second special symbol. Has been done. Therefore, when the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and the "big hit B9" is determined, the player shifts to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player, while the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the time saving state. When it occurs and the "big hit B9" is determined, it shifts to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 216, for the "big hit C9", regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state or the time saving state, the time saving number of the first special symbol is "96 times". , "4 times" is specified in association with the number of times the second special symbol is given as the time reduction. Therefore, when the direct hit of the second special symbol occurs and the "big hit C9" is determined, the time saving state which is advantageous to the player shifts to the game state regardless of the game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), for the "big hit D9" to "big hit F9" won in the normal state, the number of times of shortening the time of the first special symbol is "96 times" and that of the second special symbol. While "4 times" is specified as the number of time reduction grants, the time reduction of the first special symbol and the second special symbol for "big hit D9" to "big hit F9" won in the time reduction state. As the number of grants, "0 times" is defined in association with each other. For this reason, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state and a small hit is won, if a V prize is generated and the V hit is won, a disadvantageous normal state is always set. Then, in the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and when a small hit is won, a V prize is generated and the V hit is won, so that an advantageous time saving state is always set. Therefore, during the time saving state, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the maximum number while continuously right-handing so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed, and after the time saving state is completed, the second 2 It is possible to realize a novel game property that is advantageous to the player by practicing the game method of executing the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, a method of shifting to each state in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 217. Here, the ninth embodiment is provided with three modes (normal mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B) as in the eighth embodiment. First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 217, a method of shifting from the normal mode (normal game state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit (direct hit) is made in the lottery of the first special symbol. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, when it becomes a "big hit A9" in which a big hit is won at a rate of 50% in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the big hit is advantageous. The chance mode A (short-time game state) is set. On the other hand, if the "big hit B9" is won at a rate of 50% when the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the big hit is set to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player again. (Loops in normal mode). Therefore, in the normal mode, the game can be performed with the expectation that the "big hit A9" will be won in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Next, a method of shifting from the chance mode A (time saving game state) to another state (mode) will be described with reference to the central portion of FIG. 217. As shown in the central portion of FIG. 217, there is a possibility of shifting from the chance mode A to another mode not only when the jackpot is won but also when the number of time reductions has elapsed. More specifically, in the chance mode A, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V prize is generated and the V hit is won, the mode shifts to the disadvantageous normal mode after the big hit is completed. In addition, when the number of time reductions has elapsed in the chance mode A (after entering the time reduction game state, the lottery of the first special symbol is completed 96 times, or the lottery of the second special symbol is completed four times), the second If there is a reserved ball with a special symbol, the mode shifts to chance mode B.

On the other hand, as shown in the central portion of FIG. 203, when a direct hit occurs in the chance mode A, the mode after the big hit is always set to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player regardless of the jackpot type. (Loops chance mode A). As a result, in the chance mode A, the lottery of the first special symbol that has no possibility of winning a small hit (that is, a V hit occurs) and has a possibility of winning a direct hit is executed. It is possible to realize playability that makes the player expect that a direct hit will occur. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the player want to preferentially execute the lottery of the first special symbol with a low jackpot expectation over the lottery of the second special symbol with a high jackpot expectation. It is possible to improve the interest in.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 217, a method of shifting from the chance mode B (a normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 217, from chance mode B to another state (mode), not only when the jackpot is won, but also when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are digested, the other state (mode). Move to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217, when a direct hit occurs and the jackpot type of the direct hit is "big hit A9" determined at a rate of 50% of the direct hit of the first special symbol. , And, in the case of "big hit C9" determined at a rate of 100% of the direct hit of the second special symbol, the player shifts to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit. In addition, even if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit is won, the mode shifts to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the big hit is completed.

On the other hand, if the "big hit B8", which is determined at a rate of 50% when a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs, is won, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit is 0. , The state (mode) after the jackpot ends is set to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are exhausted (all the lottery of the second special symbol after the transition to the chance mode B is lost), the mode shifts to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not 0 (1 or more) at the end of "Big hit B8" or "Big hit C8", the state (mode) after the end of the big hit is the chance mode again. It becomes B. Therefore, in the chance mode B, the game can be performed with the expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be a small hit (that is, the V hit will be won) rather than the direct hit. Therefore, until the chance mode A ends, the right-handed stroke is continuously executed so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed to elapse the time reduction number of the first special symbol, and after the transition to the chance mode B, , It is possible to realize a special and novel gameplay that can be expected to be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. ..

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 218 and 219. First, the start-up process 9 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 218. The start-up process 9 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a start-up process in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the raising process (see FIG. 50), this is a process executed to perform the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 based on the power-on.

Of the start-up processes 9 (see FIG. 218) in the ninth embodiment, each process of S1401 to S1417 is the same as each process of S1401 to S1417 of the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1417 is completed, the start of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 (see FIG. 215) is set (S1421), and S1410 Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the details of the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment will be described. The jackpot control process 9 (S1521) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIGS. 52 and S1504) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the embodiment), this is a process for performing various settings during the execution of the jackpot game.

Of the jackpot control processes 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618, the jackpot control processes (see FIGS. 52 and S1504) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1617 is completed, the start of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 (see FIG. 215) is set (S1623), and the process proceeds to S1618. Transition.

By executing these start-up processes 9 (see FIG. 218) and jackpot control process 9 (see FIG. 219), the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 is initialized at the time of initializing the pachinko machine 10 and at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in the time saving state, the opportunity for the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to increase can be limited to the period from 180 seconds after the end of the jackpot to 360 seconds after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the distribution device 700 immediately after the end of the time saving state, the right second entry port 64b is opened (normal symbol hitting is started just before the end of the time saving state, and the hit of the normal symbol is started. Since the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started immediately after the end of the time saving state, the game ball that has entered the distribution device 700 is guided to the second operating port 707). , The number of lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state after the end of the time saving state can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation in the time saving state of 1 uniform.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol (starting prize) and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol (starting prize) are set in a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. After configuring so that both of the above can be established, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol (the possibility of winning a big hit is substantially higher). ). Then, if the player wins in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time-saving state, there is a high possibility that the player will shift to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player (if a direct hit with a low probability occurs, the time-saving state will be entered. When a V hit based on a small hit with a high probability occurs, it shifts to the normal state) On the other hand, if it wins in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that it shifts to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It was configured to be high. That is, after the transition to the time saving state, until the specific condition is satisfied (the time saving state ends), the person who wins the jackpot based on the lottery of the first special symbol is the second special. While it is easier for the player to have an advantage than winning a jackpot based on the fact that the lottery of symbols has been executed, after the specific conditions are met (after the time saving state ends), the lottery of the second special symbol will be held. It is configured so that a big hit based on the above is more advantageous to the player than a big hit based on the lottery of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the type of special symbol that the player wants to execute the lottery can be different before and after the establishment of the specific condition. It is possible to improve the interest in the game. That is, until the specific condition is satisfied, a game method in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases while the lottery of the first special symbol is executed without interruption (that is, continuous right-handed strikes are performed). A game method in which a lottery based on a reserved ball of the second special symbol is easily executed after a specific condition is satisfied (that is, a game method in which firing is stopped until the reserved ball of the second special symbol is exhausted). ) Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the period during which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may increase in the time saving state is within a specific period (from the time when 180 seconds have passed after the end of the jackpot to the time when 360 seconds have passed. ) Is limited. In other words, before and after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to form a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right second entrance 64b regardless of whether or not a normal symbol hits. With this configuration, the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state after the end of the time saving state can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation in the time saving state of 1 uniform.

In the ninth embodiment, the first special symbol is set within the number of time reductions by configuring so that it is more advantageous to win per V in the normal state than to win per V during the time reduction state. The lottery is executed, and the game method of digesting the reserved ball of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state where the number of time reductions has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this. On the contrary, if you win per V within the number of time reductions, it will be more advantageous if you win a small hit with the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction state and win the V. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed within a short time, the player can be made to think that a V prize will be generated, so that the degree of freedom of the game is improved. Can be made to.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is switched in a fixed switching pattern triggered by the end of the jackpot, and the period during which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored is 180 seconds to 360 seconds after the end of the jackpot. The configuration was limited to, but it is not limited to this. The period during which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored may be arbitrarily set. Further, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 does not need to be fixed, and for example, a different switching pattern may be set according to the jackpot type. That is, a time-saving jackpot in which a switching pattern that enables the holding balls of the second special symbol to be stored during the time-saving state is set, and a switching pattern that makes it impossible (difficult) to store the holding balls of the second special symbol. It may be configured to provide a time-saving jackpot in which is set.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to be switched in a fixed switching pattern when the jackpot ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control of the eighth embodiment described above may be adopted. That is, a control may be adopted in which the switching operation is performed with a fixed switching pattern triggered by the start of hitting the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is changed according to the hit type of the normal symbol. On the contrary, the switching control of the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment may be adopted in the eighth embodiment described above.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching operation is performed with a fixed switching pattern triggered by the end of the jackpot, and the switching valve 702 is configured to be highly likely to be set to the first switching state before and after the end of the time reduction. Immediately after the end of the time reduction, the game ball that has entered the distribution device 700 enters the second operating port 707, the right second entry port 64b is opened, and after shifting to the normal state, the second special symbol It was configured to suppress the increase of reserved balls, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the final display time of the last fluctuation display in the time-saving state, a period longer than the hit period (2.5 seconds) per normal symbol set when the normal symbol hits during the time-saving state (for example). (5 seconds) may be set, and the time saving state may be terminated at the end of the fluctuation time (the final display period of the last fluctuation display is controlled so that the time saving state has already ended). With this configuration, even if the hit of the normal symbol starts immediately before the final display, the hit of the normal symbol can be ended during the final display period, so that the second special symbol can be hit in the normal state. After the lottery is started by 1 or more (that is, after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced), it is possible to surely prevent the game ball from entering the right second entry slot 64b.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching mode (first to third switching modes) is changed according to the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot (and after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10). It is not limited. For example, the switching mode may be changed according to the number of time reductions. More specifically, for example, while the number of time reductions remains 80 or more, the first switching mode (switching mode in which it is difficult to insert the game ball into the right second entry port 64b) It is configured to be set, and within the range where the number of time reductions is less than 80 times and the remaining number of times is 20 times or more, the game ball is inserted into the second switching mode (right second entrance 64b). If the number of time reductions is less than 20 times, it is difficult to insert the game ball into the third switching mode (right second entrance 64b). The switching mode) may be set. With this configuration, only a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is selected in the time saving state, and even if the time saving state ends in about 300 seconds, immediately after the end of the time saving state and the second special symbol It is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the right second entry port 64b when one or more of the reserved balls of the above are digested.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to perform a switching operation in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started at the end of the jackpot (and the initialization of the pachinko machine 10). It was done, but it is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the switching operation of a specific switching pattern is started when the jackpot starts. With this configuration, the timing at which the second switching mode is set can be changed depending on the time required for the jackpot game, so that the second switching mode can be set in a relatively short time after the jackpot ends. , The second switching mode can be continued even just before the end of the time saving state, and so on. Therefore, since the degree of advantage of the player can be changed according to the progress of the game during the big hit, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 has a predetermined switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started at the end of the jackpot (and the initialization of the pachinko machine 10) regardless of the jackpot type. It was configured to switch, but it is not limited to this. For example, the switching pattern set after the end of the jackpot may be different depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, when a direct hit is won, the switching valve 702 is configured to switch the state according to the switching pattern shown in FIG. 215, while when a V hit is won, the switching valve 702 is the first. 2 The switching pattern (second switching pattern) that is not set in the switching state (or the setting period is short) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of winning a direct hit during the time saving state, so that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of winning the direct hit. Further, for example, when the direct hit of the first special symbol is won, the switching valve 702 is configured to be switched according to the switching pattern shown in FIG. 215, while the direct hit or V hit of the second special symbol is the first. Two switching patterns may be set.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 248. The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above is configured to provide two types of gaming states, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, and further, the holding ball of the second special symbol. The configuration was such that the degree of advantage in the normal state could be significantly changed depending on the presence or absence.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, as the gaming state, in addition to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player and the time saving state which is relatively advantageous to the player, the latent state which is disadvantageous to the player and the player. The configuration is such that the most advantageous probability change state is provided. That is, in addition to the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state, but the electric accessory 64ra is difficult to be released and the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be executed, and the jackpot probability is high and An advantageous probability change state in which the electric accessory 64ra is easily released is provided. Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won, a high percentage (90% percentage) is set to a high probability state (latent state or probability change state) of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Instead, an upper limit number of times (for example, 11 times) is provided for the number of consecutive times in the high probability state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the game state after the end of the big hit, so that a deep game property can be realized.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, both the lottery condition of the first special symbol and the lottery condition of the second special symbol can be satisfied when right-handed is performed in the time saving state of the normal symbol. In the above, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). (The so-called simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them fluctuates and stops at the jackpot stop symbol, the fluctuation display of the other is related to the remaining fluctuation time and the lottery result. It is configured so that it is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol that is not off. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is confirmed as a big hit and the big hits are started in duplicate during the execution of the big hit game.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, it is assumed that the jackpot is won in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the latent probability state, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the probability change state or the time saving state. However, while these advantageous states are configured to end by executing a lottery of special symbols a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbols is set. If a jackpot is won in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the probability changing state that continues until the next big hit, or the time saving state that continues until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the big hit is set. .. That is, in the normal state and the latent state, first, the jackpot in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is given a predetermined number of times (8 times) is won, and the jackpot is won by the lottery within the 8 times. It is configured so that it can be shifted to a probabilistic state that continues until the next big hit, or a time saving state that continues until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the big hit. If you shift to a probabilistic state that continues until the next big hit, you can always win the next big hit with the time saving state of the normal symbol set, so even after the end of the next big hit, it will continue until the next big hit It will be in a probabilistic state, or a time saving state that will continue until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, it forms the most advantageous state for the player. In addition, even in a time-saving state that continues until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed, if the jackpot can be won within 100 times, a probable change state that continues until the next jackpot, or 100 special symbols after the end of the jackpot Since the time is shortened until the lottery is completed, a state in which the expectation of an advantageous state is relatively high is formed.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the state shifts to the probabilistic state that continues until the next big hit, and the probable change state and the big hit are repeated by continuing to win the probable change big hit that is won at a rate of 90%, and the probable change state of the special symbol. When the maximum number of times (probability change limit number of times) is reached, regardless of whether the probability change jackpot is won or the normal jackpot is won, the time reduction state is 100 times (that is, it is relatively disadvantageous compared to the probability change state). If you win a jackpot within a short time (so-called pullback occurs), the percentage of advantageous jackpot type (big hit with many rounds) will be a jackpot during the probability change state. It was configured so that it would be easier to get higher than if it was won. More specifically, the jackpot of the second special symbol is configured so that the proportion of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage (the selection ratio of a small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. In the time saving state set by reaching the probability variation limit number, the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is remarkably low. That is, the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, it is uniformly 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result. The lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In other words, it is configured so that the percentage of winning big hits in the lottery of the first special symbol is high. As a result, when the probability variation limit is reached, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be pulled back, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is performed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 7 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 220, in the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is deleted from the board surface configuration (see FIG. 178) of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. At the position where the 2 entry port 6400 was provided, the right first entry opening 64r is provided as a start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is on the right side of the board. The difference is that a second entry opening 6450 is provided as a start winning opening that triggers a lottery. In addition, the reason why the V winning device 6500 is deleted is that in the tenth embodiment, a specification is adopted in which only one of the missed or the big hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol, and the small hit is provided. Because there is no such thing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, a characteristic effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, if a jackpot is won while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving state of the normal symbol is always given after the jackpot ends. That is, basically, if the probability variation jackpot is won, the probability variation state that continues until the next jackpot is set, and if the normal jackpot is won or the probability variation limit is reached, 100 special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to set a time saving state that continues until it is done. In the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is clarified whether the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is the time saving state or the probabilistic state. It is configured to suggest according to the production mode without notifying. An example of the suggestion by this effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 (a) and 221 (b).

FIG. 221 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode showing that the degree of expectation in which the probability variation state is set is relatively high. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), when the display mode indicating that the probability variation state is set and the degree of expectation is high is set, the character 801 is set in the main display area Dm in the forest where many trees grow. A production to search for the treasure chest 802 is developed. In addition to this, the characters "forest area" are displayed for the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this forest area is configured so that the selection rate is higher when the probabilistic state is set than when the time saving state is set.

On the other hand, FIG. 221 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode showing that the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively low (the possibility of the time saving state is high). As shown in FIG. 221 (b), when the display mode indicating that the expectation of the probabilistic state is low is set, the character 801 searches for the treasure box 802 in the desolate wilderness in the main display area Dm. Will be done. In addition to this, the characters "wilderness area" are displayed for the second display area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this wilderness area is configured so that the ratio of selection is higher when the time saving state is set than when the probability variation state is set.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned production mode of the forest area and the wilderness area, the production mode of the sky area (character 801 is a sea of clouds) in which the probability change state is determined to be set at the time of execution. There is a production to search for the treasure chest 802 inside). Further, in the tenth embodiment, every time a new variation pattern effect (variation display) is started, a lottery for whether or not the display mode can be changed is executed. As a result, even if the production mode of the wilderness area with low expectation is set, the game is performed with the expectation that the production mode will be changed to the production mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is increased every time the variation display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (a). FIG. 222 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment has a variation pattern scenario table 202ga added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 183 (a)). It differs in that it is. It is also different in that the configurations of the first per random number table 202a, the first per type selection table 202b, and the time saving assignment table 202e are partially changed.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223 (a). FIG. 223 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), in the first hit random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment, a random number value (first hit random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol (Counter value of) and a random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) that is determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol is 25 of "0 to 24". Random values (counter values) are specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, 25 random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 24". Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probability variation state or the latent probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/40 (25/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), seven random values of "0 to 6" are used as random values (counter values) determined to be jackpots in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol. (Counter value) is specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, seven random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 6". Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is about 1/143 (7/1000).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery differs greatly between the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, since the game can be sharpened, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223 (b), the first hit random number table 202b in the tenth embodiment has a special feature 1 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. At least a winning table 202bf1 and a special 2 winning table 202bf2 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol are defined. First, the details of the special 1 per table 202bg1 will be described with reference to FIG. 224 (a).

FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special 1 per table 202 bg1 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 224 (a), the special 1 hit table 202bg1 in the tenth embodiment has eight types of big hits, "big hit A10" to "big hit H10", as the big hit types of the first special symbol. It is stipulated. "Big hit A10" to "Big hit C10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit D10" to "big hit F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the "big hit G10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit H10" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. It should be noted that whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is given is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit and the big hit type.

As shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 5", "big hit A10" (9-round probability variation jackpot) is defined as a jackpot type. ing. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit A10" is "0 to 5". The ratio of "big hit A10" being determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit B10" (9-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "6 to 46" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B10" is 41, which is "6 to 46". When a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of "big hit B10" being determined (selected) is 41% (41/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit C10" (9-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "47 to 66" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C10" is 20 of "47 to 66". When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate at which "big hit C10" is determined (selected) is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value "67" of the first hit type counter C2 is defined by associating "big hit D10" (three-round probability variation big hit) as the jackpot type. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit D10" is one, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit D10" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit E10" (three-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "68,69" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E10" is two, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit E10" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit F10" (three-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "70 to 89" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit F10" is 20 from "70 to 89". When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate at which "big hit F10" is determined (selected) is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit G10" (9 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 92" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G10" is 3, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit G10" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit H10" (3 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "93 to 99" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit H10" is 7, so the lottery for the first special symbol The rate at which "big hit H10" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won is 7% (7/100).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a probability variation jackpot is obtained at a rate of 90% (when any of "big hit A10" to "big hit F10" is obtained). The normal jackpot is won at a rate of 10% (when either "big hit G10" or "big hit H10" is achieved). In addition, a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

Next, the details of the special 2 per table 202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. 224 (b). As described above, the special 2 hit table 202g2 is a data table for determining the hit type when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 224 (b), in the tenth embodiment, four jackpot types of "big hit I10" to "big hit L10" are provided as the hit types of the second special symbol. "Big hit A10" to "Big hit C10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit D10" to "big hit F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. "Big hit I10" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit J10" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the "big hit K10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit L10" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 26", "big hit I10" (9-round probability variation jackpot) is defined as the jackpot type. ing. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit I10" is "0 to 26". The percentage of "Big hit I10" determined (selected) is 27% (27/100) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit J10" (three-round probability variation big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "27 to 89" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit J10" is "27 to 89". The percentage of "big hit J10" determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 53% (53/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit K10" (9 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "90 to 92" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit K10" is "90 to 92". The percentage of "big hit K10" determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), "big hit L10" (3 rounds normal jackpot) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "93 to 99" as the jackpot type. It is stipulated. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit L10" is "93 to 99". ", So when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of" jackpot L10 "determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio is 90% (“big hit I10”, as in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. If it becomes either "Big hit J10"), it becomes a probabilistic big hit, and at a rate of 10% (when it becomes either "Big hit K10" or "Big hit L10"), it is configured to win a normal big hit. In addition, a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%. That is, in terms of the number of rounds, the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit is more advantageous than the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225 (a). Similar to the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is data in which data for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol is defined according to the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It's a table. FIG. 225 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d according to the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 225 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. A normal table 202dg1 for (selection) and a time saving table 202dg2 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variation time) in a game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which a time reduction state of a normal symbol is set. It is composed of at least a table 202 deg3 for reaching the limit for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a state where the probability variation limit number of times has been reached. First, the details of the normal table 202dg1 will be described with reference to FIG. 225 (b).

FIG. 225 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202 deg1. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), in the normal table 202 deg1 in the tenth embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other. There is. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 0". A "short deviation" of 7 seconds is defined in association with the range of "139", and a "short deviation" of 10 seconds is defined for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "140 to 149". "Long deviation" is specified in association with each other, and "normal reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 179", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is specified. However, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198".

Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". On the other hand, "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with each other, and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "30 to 189". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is specified in association with the range of "190 to 198" and the variation time is 90 seconds.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 changes in the range of "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range. When a super long deviation of 600 seconds is specified in association with each other and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 600 in the entire range. Super long hits per second are specified in association with each other. Therefore, even if a game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6450 by hitting right in a normal state or a latent state, a special symbol lottery can be executed only every 600 seconds, which is normal. It is possible to significantly deteriorate the game efficiency when an irregular game method of hitting right is performed in the game state in which the normal state of the symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of hitting right in a normal state or a latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226 (a), the details of the time saving table 202dg2, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, the time saving table 202deg2 is a data table referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a gaming state in which the time reduction state of a normal symbol is set. Is. FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202 deg2.

As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the time saving table 202dg2 defines the lottery result of the special symbol and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with each other. That is, in the time saving state and the probability change state, basically (except when the probability change limit number is reached), the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol regardless of the type of the special symbol. It is configured. This is because, in the time saving state of the normal symbol in the tenth embodiment, the game ball frequently enters both the right first entrance 64r and the second entrance 6450 by hitting right. This is to prevent the lottery of one special symbol from being unevenly executed.

As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "off", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149". A "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is specified in association with it, and a "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "190 to 195" and the "normal reach" of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "196 to 198". On the other hand, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the above. That is, it is configured so that a short fluctuation time can be easily determined as compared with the case where the deviation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202 deg1 (see FIG. 225 (b)). As a result, it is possible to efficiently perform the game in the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". Therefore, a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with each other, and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with a value in the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "50 to 194". It is defined that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "195 to 198" and the fluctuation time is 30 seconds in association with the "special reach". That is, even if the lottery result is successful, it is configured so that a short fluctuation time can be easily determined as compared with the case where the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal table 202 deg1 (see FIG. 225 (b)). are doing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226 (b), the details of the limit reaching table 202dg3, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, the limit arrival table 202deg3 is data in which data for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is defined during the time saving state set after reaching the probability variation limit number of times. It's a table. FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202 deg2.

As shown in FIG. 226 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), each variation pattern is selected by the same distribution as the time saving table 202 deg2 (see FIG. 226 (a)). .. On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 changes in the range of "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range. When a super long deviation of 600 seconds is specified in association with each other and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 600 in the entire range. Super long hits per second are specified in association with each other. Therefore, if a right-handed strike is performed in the time-saving state after reaching the probability variation limit number, the lottery of the first special symbol can be intensively executed while the ultra-long fluctuation of the second special symbol is being executed. .. Here, as described above, the jackpot of the first special symbol is configured so that the jackpot type (the jackpot with a large number of rounds), which is more advantageous than the jackpot of the second special symbol, can be easily determined. You can expect a big hit in the lottery of special symbols.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 227. Similar to the time reduction table 202e in the seventh embodiment, the time reduction table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. is there. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot A10 (9 round probability variation jackpot) and jackpot D10 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. If the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit, the number of time reductions that continue until the next jackpot is given, while if the probability variation limit number is reached by the jackpot, eight time reductions are set. .. Therefore, if the jackpot A10 or the jackpot D10 is won before the probability variation limit is reached, the probability variation state (the most advantageous gaming state) that continues until the next jackpot is set, while the probability variation limit is reached. Since only the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of 8 times are set in the above, the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the probability variation limit number is reached. As the number of time reductions that continue until the next big hit, for example, 65536 times, which is sufficiently large with respect to the jackpot probability (the number of times that the big hit can be considered to be won within the time reduction number) is set. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot A10 (9 round probability variation jackpot) and jackpot D10 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Is given a time saving state that continues until the next big hit if the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit, while if the probability variation limit number is reached by the jackpot, 100 time reduction times are set. To. Therefore, even if the probability variation limit has been reached, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls held, so that it is possible to have a sense of expectation for pulling back the jackpot. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, it is configured so as not to clearly notify the player whether or not the limit number of times has been reached (whether it is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state). Therefore, even if the probability variation limit is actually reached and the time saving state is set, the player can expect the probability variation state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot B10 (9 round probability variation jackpot), the jackpot E10 (3 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot E10 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. For jackpot I10 (9-round probability variation jackpot), 8 time reductions are given regardless of whether the hit is before the probability variation limit is reached or the probability variation limit is reached. That is, if it is before the limit is reached, it will be in a probable state until the lottery of eight special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit, and it will be in a latent state after the ninth time. On the other hand, if the limit number of times has been reached, the time will be shortened from the end of the jackpot until the end of the eight special symbol lottery, and the ninth and subsequent times will be in the normal state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot B10 (9 round probability variation jackpot), the jackpot E10 (3 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. For I10 (9-round probability variation jackpot), the same number of time reduction grants as jackpot A10 and jackpot D10 is associated. That is, the number of time reductions that continue until the next big hit is associated with the hit before the probability variation limit number is reached, and the number of time reductions of 100 times is associated with the hit after the probability variation limit number is reached. ing. Therefore, the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are more disadvantageous than the jackpots A10 and D10 in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends when they are won in the normal state or in the latent probability state when the probability variation limit number has not been reached. When winning in other situations (when winning in the probability variation state, when winning in the time saving state, when the probability variation limit number is reached), the same gaming state as the jackpots A10 and D10 is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot C10 (9 round probability variation jackpot) and the jackpot F10 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the normal state are defined as 8 times as the number of time reductions. .. In addition, if the probability variation jackpot is won in the normal state, the probability variation limit number will not be reached, so the number of time reduction grants when the probability variation limit number is reached is not specified (since the probability variation limit number cannot be reached, it is specified. No need). Further, for the jackpots C10 and F10 that are won in the latent state, 0 times are associated and defined as the number of time reductions regardless of whether the hit is before the probability variation limit is reached or the probability variation limit is reached. There is. That is, when the jackpots C10 and F10 are won in the latent state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given even once, which is extremely disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot C10 (9 round probability variation jackpot) and the jackpot F10 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. The same number of time reduction grants as the jackpots A10, B10, D10, E10, and I10 are associated with each other. That is, the number of time reductions that continue until the next big hit is associated with the hit before the probability variation limit number is reached, and the number of time reductions of 100 times is associated with the hit after the probability variation limit number is reached. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot G10 (9 rounds normal jackpot), the jackpot H10 (3 rounds normal jackpot), and the jackpot won in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. For K10 (9 rounds normal jackpot) and jackpot L10 (3 rounds normal jackpot), 8 times are specified in association with each other. In addition, since the probability variation limit number cannot be reached when a normal jackpot is won, the number of time reduction grants when the probability variation limit number is reached is not specified (it is not necessary to specify it). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 that were won in the game state (time saving state, probability variation state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving is given 100 times. It is associated. That is, when the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 are won, the number of time reduction grants that continue until the next jackpot cannot be set, which is more disadvantageous than the jackpots A10 to F10 and H10 to J10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 227, the probability variation limit number has been reached for the jackpot J10 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the gaming state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. Regardless of whether or not, 0 times is specified as the number of time reductions in association with each other. Therefore, since the jackpot J10 has a small number of rounds and is not given a time saving state, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player when it is won in the normal state or the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot J10 won in the game state (time saving state, probability variation state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, if the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit. While a time saving state that continues until the next big hit is given, when the probability variation limit number is reached by the big hit, 100 time saving times are set.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the probability variation limit number has been reached. are doing. As a result, the gaming state after the jackpot can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 228. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga is a data table referred to for selecting a correspondence relationship (variation pattern scenario) between the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the jackpot and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to. As shown in FIG. 228, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in the tenth embodiment, the variation pattern scenario set after the end of the jackpot is set in association with the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the limit is reached. Is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228, for the situation where the jackpot type is jackpot A10, D10 and the probability variation limit number has not been reached, the time saving table 202dg2 is referred to regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols. Fluctuation pattern scenarios are defined in association with each other. Therefore, after the end of the jackpots A10 and D10, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the time saving table 202deg2 every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed until the next jackpot. This is because when either the jackpot A10 or D10 is won, the probability variation state that continues until the next jackpot is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228, if the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are won before the probability variation limit is reached in the normal state or the latent probability state, eight lottery is executed after the jackpot ends. Until then, the time saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and in the 9th and subsequent lottery, the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202deg1 is referred to is set. This is because, in the state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, if any of the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 is won within the probability variation limit number, the probability variation state with the time saving number of 8 times is set. .. On the other hand, if the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are won before the probability variation limit is reached in the time saving state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern is referred to by the time saving table 202gd2 regardless of the number of lottery after the jackpot ends. The fluctuation pattern scenario in which is determined is set. This is because if any of the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 is won in the state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the probability variation state that continues until the next jackpot is set is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state, if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won before the probability variation limit is reached, the lottery is executed eight times after the jackpot ends. During the period, the time saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and in the 9th and subsequent lottery, the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202deg1 is referred to is set. This is because, in the normal state, when any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won within the probability variation limit number, the probability variation state in which the number of time reductions is 8 is set. Further, in the latent state, if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won before the probability variation limit is reached, the normal table 202dg1 is referred to and the fluctuation pattern is referred to regardless of the number of lottery after the jackpot ends. The fluctuation pattern scenario in which is determined is set. This is because, in the latent state, if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won within the probability variation limit, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the latent state. On the other hand, in the time saving state or the probability change state, if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won before reaching the probability variation limit number, the time saving table 202gd2 is referred to regardless of the number of lottery after the jackpot ends. A fluctuation pattern scenario is set in which the fluctuation pattern is determined. This is because if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the probability variation state that continues until the next jackpot is set is set.

As shown in FIG. 228, when any of the jackpot G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won in the normal state or the latent state, the time is shortened after the jackpot is completed until the eight lottery is executed. A variation pattern scenario is set in which the reference table 202 dc2 is referred to, and the normal table 202 dc1 is referred to in the 9th and subsequent lottery. This is because if any of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won while the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving state is set to be 8 times. On the other hand, if the jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10 is won before the probability variation limit is reached in the time saving state or the probability variation state, after the jackpot ends, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed. , The time saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and in the 101st and subsequent lottery, a variation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202dg1 is referred to is set. This is because when any of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won in the state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 100 is set.

On the other hand, if one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the latent state and the probability variation limit number is reached in the jackpot, the normal table 202deg1 is referred to regardless of the number of lottery after the jackpot ends. A variation pattern scenario is set. This is because if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the latent probability state is set, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state. In addition, if one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the probability variation state and the probability variation limit number is reached by the jackpot, when the limit is reached after the jackpot ends until 100 lottery is executed. A variation pattern scenario is set in which the table 202dg3 is referred to, and the normal table 202deg1 is referred to in the 101st and subsequent lottery. This is because if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the probability change state is set, the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100 is set.

On the other hand, if a probability variation jackpot other than the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the latent probability state and the probability variation limit number is reached in the jackpot, after the jackpot ends and until eight lottery is executed. , The time saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and in the 9th and subsequent lottery, a variation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202deg1 is referred to is set. This is because if a probability variation jackpot other than the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the latent probability state is set, the time reduction state is set with the number of time reductions being eight times. In addition, if a probability change jackpot other than the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the probability variation state and the probability variation limit number is reached in the jackpot, the limit is reached after the jackpot ends until 100 lottery is executed. A variation pattern scenario is set in which the hourly table 202dg3 is referred to and the normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the 101st and subsequent lottery. This is because if a probability variation jackpot other than the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the probability variation state is set, the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100 is set.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the probability variation state and the probability variation limit number is reached in the jackpot, the limit reaching table 202dg3 is set in the time saving state set after the jackpot ends. The fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to. That is, it is configured so that a table that is easily executed by focusing on the lottery of the first special symbol when right-handed is performed is referred to. That is, when the jackpot is won within the short time, the ratio of winning the advantageous jackpot type (big hit with many rounds) is high. With this configuration, even though the probability variation limit has been reached and the probability variation jackpot has been won, a disadvantageous (low advantage) time saving state has been set compared to the probability variation state. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to strongly expect the player to win the jackpot within a short time. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, a state transition method in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 229. Here, in the tenth embodiment, as described above, four gaming states are provided: a normal state and a latent state which are disadvantageous to the advantageous player, and a time saving state and a probable change state which are advantageous to the player. Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are two types of probabilistic states: a probabilistic state in which the number of time reductions is eight times, and a probabilistic state in which the time reduction continues until the next big hit. Further, as the time saving state, there are two types, a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 8 times and a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 100 times. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the normal state and the latent state, which are disadvantageous to the player, are referred to as the normal mode A and the normal mode B, respectively, and the time saving state (8 times) and the probabilistic state are changed. Are called chance mode A and chance mode B, respectively, and the time saving state with a large number of time saving times (100 times) is called the pullback mode, and the probability change state that continues until the next big hit (a state in which the consecutive villas are practically confirmed) ) Is called the consecutive villa mode. First, a mode transition method in the normal mode A will be described with reference to the upper left side of FIG. 229.

As shown on the upper left side of FIG. 229, in the normal mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when the jackpot is won. That is, when either the jackpot A10 or D10, which is determined at a rate of 7% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot is finished is the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous to the player. Is set to. In addition, if any of the jackpots B10, C10, E10, and F10, which are determined at a rate of 83% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends becomes chance mode B. Set. Further, when either the jackpot G10 or H10, which is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A. In this way, when a big hit is won in the normal mode A, the time saving state of the normal symbol is always given at least 8 times. Therefore, by winning the big hit again within the time saving number of times, it is possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode. Can be expected. Further, when a jackpot is obtained in the normal mode A, the jackpot B10, C10, E10, or F10 is mainly won (at a high rate of 83%), and the mode shifts to the chance mode B. In other words, in most cases, the lottery can be received eight times with a high probability of a special symbol, so that the transition to the consecutive villa mode can be expected more strongly.

Next, a method of mode transition in the normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. 229. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 229, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big hit is won. Specifically, when one of the jackpots A10 and D10, which is determined at a rate of 7% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot is completed is advantageous to the player. Set to consecutive villa mode. When the probability variation limit is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A. If either the jackpot B10 or E10, which is determined at a rate of 43% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode B. When the probability variation limit is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A. Further, when either the jackpot G10 or H10, which is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A. On the other hand, if either the jackpot C10 or F10, which is determined at a rate of 40% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is changed to the normal mode B again. Set. That is, a disadvantageous state is set in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given. When the probability variation limit is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the normal mode A. That is, the time saving state is not given regardless of whether the probability variation limit is reached or not. In this way, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode B, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given only at a rate of 60%. Therefore, in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the normal mode B is better than the normal mode A. Is disadvantageous. However, in the normal mode B, since the jackpot probability is tripled or more, the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the jackpot probability.

Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described with reference to the center left side of FIG. 229. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 229, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of time reductions is completed. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 229, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a probability variation jackpot (big hit A10 to F10, I10, J10) determined at a rate of 90% is won. The mode after the big hit is set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode for the player. On the other hand, if a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery and a normal big hit (big hit G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the big hit is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions elapses in the chance mode A (the lottery of the special symbol is missed eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode A, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be won during the time reduction of 8 times.

Next, a mode transition method in chance mode B will be described with reference to the center right side of FIG. 229. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 229, in the chance mode B, as in the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of time reductions is completed. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 229, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a probability variation jackpot (big hit A10 to F10, I10, J10) determined at a rate of 90% is won. The mode after the big hit is set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode for the player. When the probability variation limit is reached in the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, if a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery and a normal big hit (big hit G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the big hit is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions elapses in the chance mode B (the lottery of the special symbol is missed eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode B which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode B as well, as in the chance mode A, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be won during the time reduction of 8 times.

Next, a mode transition method in the pullback mode will be described with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 229. As shown on the lower left side of FIG. 229, in the pullback mode, as in the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of time reductions is completed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 229, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a probability variation jackpot (big hit A10 to F10, I10, J10) determined at a rate of 90% is won. The mode after the big hit is set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode for the player. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions elapses in the pullback mode (the lottery of the special symbol is lost 100 times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if you win a normal jackpot (big hit G10, H10, K10, L10) that is determined at a rate of 10% when you win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends will switch to the pullback mode again. Set (loops pullback mode).

Next, a mode transition method in the consecutive villa mode will be described with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 229. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 229, in the consecutive villa mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when the jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 229, when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a normal big hit (big hit G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won. The mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, if a probabilistic jackpot (big hit A10 to F10, I10, J10), which is determined at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is again the player Set to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode (loop the consecutive villa mode). If the probability variation jackpot is won and the probability variation limit number is reached, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, in order to shift to the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous for the player, basically, after shifting to the chance modes A and B in which the number of time reductions of eight times is set. Therefore, it is necessary to win the jackpot within the range of 8 times, which is a relatively small number of times. However, once the transition to the consecutive villa mode is made, a very advantageous state is formed in which the consecutive villa mode and the jackpot are repeated at a high rate of 90%. Therefore, when the transition to the consecutive villa mode is performed, the player You can have a great sense of satisfaction with.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222 (b). FIG. 222 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (b), the RAM 222 in the tenth embodiment has a probability variation flag 203 ga, a limit counter 203 gb, and a variation pattern scenario with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 183 (b)). Storage area 203gc, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203g, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh, and limit arrival flag 203gi are added. It is different in that it is. Further, in the tenth embodiment, since the small hit is not mounted, the small hit type storage area 203e, the small hit start flag 203f, the small hit medium flag 203g, the V passing big hit type storage area 203h, the V flag 203i, It is also different in that the V-passing flag 203j is deleted.

The probability variation flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is set. When the probability variation flag 203ga is on, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the high probability state, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the low probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203ga is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set. The probability variation flag 203ga is set to off when the initial state is set to off and when the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244). On the other hand, this probability variation flag 203ga is set to on at the end of the probability variation jackpot when the probability variation jackpot is won and the probability variation limit number of times has not been reached (see S1676 of FIG. 246). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38). That is, in the tenth embodiment, once the probability variation flag 203ga is set to on, the probability variation flag 203ga is not set to off until the next jackpot is won, so the probability variation jackpot is won. In this case, the high-probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot ends is that the next jackpot is always won unless the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (unless the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on). It is configured to continue until it is done.

In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) since the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol. May be configured to terminate the high-probability state of the special symbol when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, instead of the probability variation flag 203ga, a probability variation counter for counting the remaining number of lottery until the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-probability end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-probability end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high-probability state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special symbol high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the high probability state of the special symbol may be terminated when any of the special symbol high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The limit counter 203 gb is a counter for counting the number of probable variation limits. If the value of the limit counter 203 gb is less than 11 at the end of the probability variation jackpot, it indicates that the probability variation limit number has not been reached, so that the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203gb is 11 at the end of the probability variation jackpot, it indicates that the probability variation limit number has been reached, so that the state after the jackpot ends is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. The initial value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0, and each time a probability variation jackpot is won, the value is added and updated by 1 at the end of the probability variation jackpot (see S1674 in FIG. 246). Further, the limit counter 203gb is reset to 0 when it is determined that the probability variation limit has been reached (counter value has been updated to 11) at the end of the probability variation jackpot and at the end of the normal jackpot (FIG. 246). See S1672).

The variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc is a storage area for storing data indicating the variation pattern scenario. At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the fluctuation pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203 gc and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot ends. The pattern table is read. At the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203gc stores data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern scenario determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga (see S1683 in FIG. 246).

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to be turned on when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery based on the start winning prize to the first entry slot 64 or the right first entry slot 64r). It is a flag (see S1816 in FIG. 235). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1877 of FIG. 239). When the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is on and the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed and the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is changed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed (see S1875 in FIG. 239). As a result, when a big hit is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit is started twice.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to on when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery based on the starting prize at the second entrance 6450) (see S1926 in FIG. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S1977 in FIG. 244). When the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203ge is on and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed and the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the first special symbol is removed and the symbol is removed. Is executed (see S1974 in FIG. 244). As a result, when a big hit is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit is started twice.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 gg and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 gg are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined according to the counter values of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 gf and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 gg.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. While the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided (see S1902: Yes in FIG. 240). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see S1873 in FIG. 239), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. If so, it is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 240).

The limit arrival flag 203gi is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation limit number of times has been reached. If this limit arrival flag 203gi is on, it means that the probability variation limit number has been reached (the probability variation jackpot has been won 11 times in a row), and if it is off, it means that the probability variation limit number has not been reached. .. The limit arrival flag 203gi is set to off based on the fact that the initial state is set to off and the counter value of the limit counter 203gb is updated to 11 which is the probability variation limit number at the end of the jackpot (FIG. 246). See S1677). Further, the limit arrival flag 203gi is set to off at the start of the jackpot (when setting the stop display of the first symbol indicating the jackpot) (see S1877 of FIG. 239 and S1977 of FIG. 244).

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 230 (a). FIG. 230A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment selects the final state display with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26 (a)). The difference is that the table 222c has been deleted and the back mode lottery table 222ga has been added. The rear mode lottery table 222ga is data in which data for drawing the rear mode (directing mode) indicating the degree of expectation in which the probability change state (ream mode) is set in the consecutive villa mode and the pullback mode is defined. It's a table. The details of the back mode lottery table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. 231.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rear mode lottery table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 231, in the rear mode lottery table 222ga, the value of the effect lottery counter determined to change the rear mode is a combination of the current gaming state and the currently set rear mode type. It is specified for each. Specifically, when the game state is in the probabilistic state and the currently set rear mode is the wilderness area (rear mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is low), the effect counter 223e is set to "0-9". Forest modes are associated with the range. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and when the wilderness area is set, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the forest area is shifted to the forest area with a high probability of probabilistic change with a probability of 1/10 (10/100). Is determined. Since the value of the effect counter 223e is not associated with the rear mode of the sky area, there is no possibility of jumping from the wilderness area to the sky area.

Further, when the game state is in the probabilistic state and the currently set rear mode is the forest area (rear mode in which the expectation of the probabilistic state is relatively high), the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 2". The wilderness mode is associated with the above, and the sky mode is associated with "5". Therefore, if the probability change state and the forest area is set, it is determined that every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the probability of shifting to the wilderness area where the probability change expectation is low is 3/100. It is determined that the transition to the sky area where the probability change state is fixed has a probability of / 100. Further, as shown in FIG. 231, in the state where the sky area is set in the probabilistic state, the lottery for shifting to another rear mode is not performed. Therefore, the sky area, which is the most pleasing rear mode, can be continued for a longer period of time, and the interest of the player can be improved. If the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first rear mode is always set to the wilderness area. In other words, in order to shift the back mode to the sky area, first, after breaking through the transition lottery to the forest area with a probability of 1/10 in the wilderness area, before falling to the wilderness area in the forest area , It is necessary to break through the transition lottery to the sky area with a probability of 1/100. That is, even in the probabilistic state, it is relatively difficult to move to the sky area, so that the player can be more satisfied when moving to the sky area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time saving state set based on the normal jackpot winning, when the wilderness area (rear mode with low expectation of the probability change state) is set as the rear mode, If the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0-4", the area is moved to the forest area. That is, there is a 1/20 (5/100) probability of shifting to a forest area with a high probability of change. On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 14", the movement (falls) to the wilderness area occurs. That is, the probability of transition from the wilderness area to the forest area is lower than that when the probability change state is set, and the probability of transition (fall) from the forest area to the wilderness area is higher. Has been done. That is, since the wilderness area is configured so that the set ratio (stay ratio) is high, it is possible to realize the playability of estimating the current game state from the rear mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time saving state set based on the arrival of the probability variation limit number, when the wilderness area (rear mode with low expectation of the probability variation state) is set as the rear mode, If the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 19", the area is moved to the forest area. That is, there is a 1/5 (20/100) probability of shifting to a forest area with a high probability of change. On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0", the process shifts (falls) to the wilderness area. In other words, it is configured so that it is most likely to be set in the forest area in the time saving state set when the probability variation limit is reached. Therefore, it is possible to make the player guess that it is a chance rather than the time saving state based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 230 (b). FIG. 230B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment is tentatively hit against the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26 (b)). The difference is that the determination flag 223h, the provisional time reduction information update area 223i, the time reduction lower limit flag 223j, the forward end condition flag 223k, the time reduction pre-end variation flag 223m, and the state effect counter 223n are deleted.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 232 to 246. First, the timer interrupt process 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 232. This timer interrupt process 10 is a process executed in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, similar to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in.

Of the timer interrupt processes 10 in the tenth embodiment, in each of the processes S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110 and S111, the timer interrupt process in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (FIG. 37). The same processing as each processing of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110 and S111 of (see) is executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 232) in the tenth embodiment, after executing the process of S102, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit. The random number counter C4 is updated (S141), and then the special symbol variation process 10 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment (S142), S105 to S107, S110 and After executing the process of S111, this process ends.

Next, the details of the special symbol variation processing 10 (S142) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 233. This special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for making various settings related to the variation display of the special symbol. is there. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 (S142). When this special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is being hit (S281), and if it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S281: Yes), the setting regarding the variation display Since there is no possibility of performing this process, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S281, when it is determined that the current time is not a big hit (S281: No), then whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 gf is larger than 0 (that is, special figure 1 is changing). (S282), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf is not larger than 0 (0) (S282: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (S282) S283) is executed, and then the process shifts to the process of S287 that executes the variation process related to the special figure 2. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S283) will be described later with reference to FIG. 234.

On the other hand, in the processing of S282, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 gf is larger than 0 (the fluctuation of the first special symbol is being displayed) (S282: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation is executed. The intermediate process (S284) is executed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S284) executes the process in the special figure 1 variation. When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S284) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203gf in the special figure 1 is 0) (S285), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S285: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S286) is executed, and then the process proceeds to the process of S287. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S286) will be described later with reference to FIG. 239. On the other hand, in the process of S285, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S285: No), the process of S286 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S287.

In each process of S287 to S291, the same process as each process of S282 to S286 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S287 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 gg is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S287), and the special figure 2 changes. When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203 gg is not larger than 0 (0) (S287: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S288) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 240.

On the other hand, in the process of S287, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 gg is larger than 0 (S287: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process (S289) is executed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 243, but this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S289) executes the process in the special figure 2 variation.

After finishing the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S289), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the variation time counter 203 gg of the special figure 2 is 0) (S290), and the variation time If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S290: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S291) is executed to end this process. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 244. On the other hand, in the process of S292, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S290: No), the process of S291 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the first special symbol variation start process (S283), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S283).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S283), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S1801), and the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is obtained. It is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S1802). In the process of S1802, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is larger than 0 (S1802: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted by 1. Then (S1803), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b after subtraction is set (S1804).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

When the processing of S1804 is completed, the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S1805). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S1805 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S1806). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 235, but will be set to the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on this, it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S1806 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is then executed (see FIG. 236). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, but this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) is stored in the execution area of the first special symbol winning / failing determination result and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S1808). The details of this game state update process (S1808) will be described later with reference to FIG. 237. This is a process for updating the state of the machine 10. When the process of S1808 is completed, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1802, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S1802: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 in FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S1811). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1812). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ga is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S1812: Yes), the first random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 223 (a)) is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S1813). On the other hand, in the processing of S1812, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ga is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S1812: No), the first random number table 202a (for low probability) It is determined whether or not the random number value of the jackpot defined in FIG. 223 (a) matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (see FIG. 223 (a)). S1814).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S1813 or S1814 is a big hit (S1815), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S1815: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to ON (S1816). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a big hit (S1817). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1818), and the data corresponding to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 203 ec (S1819), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1815, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S1815: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1820), and then , End this process.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 of FIG. 234), will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807 of FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806 of FIG. 235), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first 1 It is determined whether or not a jackpot of a special symbol has been set (S1821). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to be turned on in the process of S1816 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (the jackpot flag 203gd of the special figure 1 is set to on) (S1821: Yes), the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot The jackpot type is determined from the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 224 (a)) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1811 in the determination process (see FIG. 235) (S1822). , S1823.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1821 when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is off) (S1821: No), the processing of S1822 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1823.

In the process of S1823, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S1823). Next, the fluctuation pattern scenario (see FIG. 228) corresponding to the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203203 cc is specified, and is associated with the current number of fluctuations (lottery count) in the specified fluctuation pattern scenario. Read the variation pattern table (S1824). When the processing of S1824 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is then selected from the read variation pattern table (S1825), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is executed based on the selected variation pattern. Set (S1826).

When the processing of S1826 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S1827), then the fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S1828), and the processing of S1825 A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in 1 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203gf in FIG. 1 (S1829), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a game state update process (S1808), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S1808). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203ga, which is a condition for setting the game state, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k, only the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol. In order to do so, in the game state update process (see FIG. 237), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes (see FIG. 234), the process of updating the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is configured to be executed. There is.

The probability variation flag 203ga, which will be described in detail later, is set to off when the jackpot fluctuation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, one of the two condition elements (the state of the probability variation flag 203ga and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k) referred to when setting the game state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other conditions. By making the element updatable when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two conditional elements.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 237) is started, it is first determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S1831: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1831: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S1832), and the remaining time reduction number indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203k is shown. Set the command (S1833). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203k after subtraction has become 0 (S1834), and if it is determined that the value has become 0 (S1834: Yes), then the probability variation flag 203ga is set to ON. Is determined (S1835). Here, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON (S1835: No), it indicates a probability change state (that is, a latent state) in which the time saving game is not given. A status command is set (S1836), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1835, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203ga is not set to ON (S1835: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S1837), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S1834, if it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is not 0 (S1834: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next big hit of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit). In addition to this, for example, a probability change counter is provided in place of the probability change flag 203ga, and the value of the probability change counter is subtracted each time a change of a special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability change counter becomes 0. In some cases, it may be configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S1808) shown with reference to FIG. 237 is set as the game state update process at the start of the special figure change, and separately at the timing when the change display of the special symbol ends. By providing the game state update process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped to update the value of the probability change counter, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the content of the first special symbol variation executing process (S284) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S142 of FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. I will explain. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S284). When this first special symbol variation executing process (S284) is executed, first, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203 gf is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1851), and then the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Update (S1852) and end this process.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S286), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S142 in FIG. 233), will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S286).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S286), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to on (that is, whether it is the timing to stop the first special symbol at the jackpot symbol) (S1871). .. In the process of S1871, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203 ggd is set to ON (S1871: Yes), then whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 gg is 1 or more (S1871: Yes). That is, it is determined whether the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed) (S1872). In the process of S1872, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 gg is 1 or more (the second special symbol is displaying the fluctuation) (S1872: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped. The flag 203gh is set to on (S1873), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set (S1874). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1875).

When the processing of S1875 is completed, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1876), and the data of the winning state storage area 203ec is updated according to the current gaming state (S1878). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge, the probability variation flag 203ga, the time saving medium counter 203k and the limit arrival flag 203gi are all reset (S1878), and the jackpot medium flag 203d is set to ON (S1879). , S1880.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1871, when the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to off for the first special symbol (S1871: Yes), in the processing of S1872, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is set. If it is determined to be 0 (S1872: No), the processes of S1873 to S1879 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1880.

In the process of S1880, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is fixed and stopped is set (S1880). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1881), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S288), the processing (S1873 to S1879) of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. When the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S1872: No), a process (S1875) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner at the off symbol is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case of forcibly stopping by disconnection. Further, in the present embodiment, the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S1876 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203ec in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235). However, for example, based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203ec in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot starts in the process of S1876. May be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S288) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing (S288). In the second special symbol change start process (S288), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, in response to the above-described processing related to the fluctuation of the first special symbol with reference to FIGS. 234 to 239, the target of the fluctuation is simply changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the element will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S290), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to on (S1901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to off (S1902), and this process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is a flag that is set to be turned on while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the fluctuation stop flag 203gh in FIG. 2 is turned on in the processing of S1901, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S1903 to S1910 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S1901: No), the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter. The value (N2) of 203b2 is acquired (S1903), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203b2 is a value larger than 0 (S1904). In the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is larger than 0 (S1904: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203b2 is subtracted by 1. Then (S1905), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203b2 after subtraction is set (S1906).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203b2 from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203b2 according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 2 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b2.

When the processing of S1906 is completed, the data of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is then shifted to the previous data (S1907). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S1907 is completed, the second special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S1908). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241. However, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) is set to the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2. Based on this, it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S1908 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is then executed (see FIG. 242). Although details will be described later, this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) includes the result of determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process is then executed (S1910 (S1808)). When the process of S1910 is completed, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is 0 (S1904: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S290 in FIG. 240) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) is executed. Therefore, here, mainly, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. The difference from (see 235) will be described.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S1921). Then, the processes S1922 to S1924 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit are executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability variation flag 203ga. Each of these processes differs in that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and the other controls are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235). Is executed.

When the processing of S1923 or S1924 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S1925), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S1925: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. The processes of S1926 to S1929 for setting the jackpot are executed, and this process is terminated. In each of these processes S1926 to S1929, the same process as each process of S1816 to S1819 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235). Will be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1925, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S1925: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1925: No). S1820), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes (see S288 of FIG. 240) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. ) Will be explained. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909 in FIG. 242), the target of variation is the first with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 236) and the process related to the variation of the first special symbol. Since the target of the symbol is only changed from the special symbol to the second special symbol, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the second special symbol variation executing process (S289), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S289). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S289), a process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

When the second special symbol fluctuation executing process (S289) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 gg is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1951), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Is updated (S1952), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291) executes a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291), if the target of the fluctuation is different from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 239). Since it is only given, the detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the details of the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 245. The jackpot control process 10 (S1531) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment. Of the jackpot control processes 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, the processes of S1601 to S1612 are the same as the processes of the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 192) S1601 to S1612 in the seventh embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending period (ending effect) (S1612), the end of the current jackpot game is set. The jackpot end processing for this is executed (S1631), and then this processing is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. 246.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S1631). As described above, this jackpot end process (S1631) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end process (S1631), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S1671), and if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S1671: Yes), the limit counter 1 is added to the value of 203 gb (S1674). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203 gb after addition by the processing of S1674 is 11 (S1675), and when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203 gb after addition is 11 (S1675: Yes). , The limit arrival flag 203gi is set to ON (S1677), and the process proceeds to S1672.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1675, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after addition is not 11 (value of 10 or less) (S1675: No), the probability variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1676). The process proceeds to S1678.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of 1677 that the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot (normally a jackpot) (S1671: No), the processes of S1674 to S1677 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1672. In the processing of S1672, the value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0 (S1672), the probability variation flag 203ga is set to off (S1673), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1678.

In the process of S1678, the number of time reductions corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit arrival flag 203gi are read from the time reduction assignment table 202e (see FIG. 225) (S1678). ), The read time reduction number is set as the counter value of the time reduction medium counter 203k (S1679). Next, the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (S1680), and the state command corresponding to the game state after the big hit is set (S1681).

Next, the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the execution jackpot type, the data of the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit arrival flag 203gi is specified (S1682), and the data indicating the specified fluctuation pattern scenario is changed. It is stored in the pattern scenario storage area 203 gc (S1683). Next, the end of the jackpot is set (S1684), and the jackpot middle flag 203d is set to off (S1685) to end this process.

By executing this jackpot end process, it is possible to appropriately set the gaming state according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type, and whether or not the probability variation limit has been reached.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 247 and 248. First, the variation display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 247. The variation display setting process 10 (S2141) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIGS. 62 and S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the variation display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment, the effect setting process (S8004) is different from the variation display setting process (see FIGS. 62 and S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. ) Is different in that the effect setting process 10 (S2831) is executed, and the same process is executed otherwise, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect setting process 10 (S2831) executed in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 10 (S2831). The effect setting process 10 (S2831) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 10 (see FIGS. 247 and S2141) executed in the tenth embodiment.

In the effect setting process 10 (S2831), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display currently being executed is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S2921). In the process of S2921, when it is determined that the fluctuation display currently being executed is the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (S2921: Yes), the fluctuation display mode for the jackpot is selected as the fluctuation display mode (S2922), and then the present End the process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (S2921: No), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state (S2923). If it is determined in the process of S2923 that the current gaming state is not the probability change state or the time saving state (S2923: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2928. On the other hand, in the process of S2923, when it is determined that the current game state is the probability change state or the time saving state (S2923: Yes), the rear mode lottery table 222ga (see FIG. 231) is read out (S2924), and the current game is played. The back mode is drawn according to the state and whether or not the limit is reached (S2925), and then it is determined whether or not the back mode is changed and the lottery is performed (S2926). If the rear mode is not changed (S2926: No), the process proceeds to S2928.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rear mode is to be changed (S2926: Yes), the display rear image change command corresponding to the changed rear mode is set (S2927), and the process proceeds to S2928.

In the process of S2928, a variable display mode for deviation is selected as the variable display mode (S2928), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, there is a high possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the normal modes A and B (normal state, latent state) which are disadvantageous to the player, and the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous. Modes A and B (time reduction state with 8 time reductions, probability change state), consecutive villa mode most advantageous for the player (probability change state that continues until the next jackpot), and pullback mode relatively advantageous for the player (time reduction) It is configured to provide 6 modes (time saving state with 100 times), and if a big hit is won in normal modes A and B, it will almost always shift to either chance mode A or B (direct consecutive). It is less likely to shift to the villa mode). In other words, if you do not win the jackpot in either chance mode A or B (that is, if you do not win the jackpot by lottery of special symbols within 8 times after shifting to chance mode A or B), it is advantageous for the player. It is configured so that it is difficult to shift to the continuous villa mode. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment just by shifting to the consecutive villa mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a big hit is made in the consecutive villa mode, the consecutive villa mode is set again after the big hit is completed at a high rate (when the probability change big hit is won at a rate of 90%). Even if you win a low percentage (10% percentage) of normal jackpots, or if you reach the probability variation limit, you will always shift to pullback mode without falling directly into a disadvantageous state. It was configured as follows. Then, when the jackpot is won in the pullback mode, the mode is configured to shift (return) only to the consecutive villa mode or the pullback mode, as in the case of winning the jackpot in the consecutive villa mode. In other words, as long as the jackpot is won within a short time in the pullback mode, there is no possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous gaming state, so that the degree of advantage in shifting to the consecutive villa mode can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game when the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode (probability change state that continues until the next big hit), and the consecutive villa mode and the big hit are repeated by continuing to win the probability change big hit that is won at a rate of 90%. , When the upper limit of the probability variation state of the special symbol (probability variation limit number) is reached, regardless of whether the probability variation jackpot is won or the normal jackpot is won, the pullback mode is set instead of the time saving number (100). When a jackpot is won within (times) (so-called pullback occurs), the ratio of advantageous jackpot types (big hits with many rounds) is likely to be higher than when a jackpot is won during a probability change state. It was configured in. More specifically, the jackpot of the second special symbol is configured so that the proportion of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage (the selection ratio of a small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. In the pullback mode set by reaching the probability variation limit number of times, the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is remarkably low. That is, the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, it is uniformly 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result. The lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In other words, it is configured so that the percentage of winning big hits in the lottery of the first special symbol is high. As a result, when the probability variation limit is reached, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be pulled back, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the tenth embodiment, only when the probability variation limit number is reached and the time saving state (pull-back mode) is set, the lottery of the first special symbol, which is relatively advantageous, is concentrated during the pull-back mode. It was configured to form a state to be executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the pullback mode is set after the jackpot is completed by winning the normal jackpot in the consecutive villa mode, the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed (the fluctuation pattern is referred to by the limit reaching table 202dg3). Is determined). With such a configuration, it is possible to more strongly expect that pullback will occur in each pullback mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, when the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode, the consecutive villa mode is always continued until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, every time the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied in the consecutive villa mode, a lottery (fall lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state (pull-back mode or normal mode A) of the special symbol. The specifications may be adopted. In this case, if it is determined that the special symbol will fall into the low probability state within 100 times after the jackpot ends, the pullback mode is set until the total of 100 lottery is completed, while 100 times or more. If it is determined that the vehicle will fall to, the normal mode A may be set. Further, in this case, when the player falls into the pullback mode by the fall lottery, the lottery of the first special symbol, which is advantageous, may be executed during the set pullback mode. With this configuration, after the player falls into the pullback mode, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the pullback will occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modified example of the tenth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 252. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when the jackpot and the consecutive villa mode are repeated in the consecutive villa mode to reach the probability variation limit and the pullback mode is set, it is advantageous (that is, the jackpot is won). (It is easy to determine the type of jackpot that is advantageous in the case of this) By configuring so that only the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed, it is possible to make the player strongly aware that he wants to win the jackpot during the pullback mode. Configured to be possible.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the pullback mode set based on the arrival of the probability variation limit number of times, the jackpot cannot be won within the time saving number of times, and the mode shifts to the normal mode A (normal state) (normal state). In the case of a fall), by winning a big hit in the normal mode A, a special state is formed in which the rate of transition to the consecutive villa mode is higher than usual. As a result, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game even after shifting from the pullback mode to the normal mode A, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 249, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 249, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in this modification is different from the board surface structure of the game board 13 (see FIG. 220) in the tenth embodiment described above, instead of the first ball slot 64. , The point that the distribution winning device 750 is provided, instead of the right first ball opening 64r, the right second ball opening 6400r is provided as a starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. The difference is that the point and the second entrance 6450 have been deleted. The distribution winning device 750 uses the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the distribution winning device 750 through the upper opening 750a, which is one of the starting winning openings that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. It is possible to distribute to either the entry slot 64c or the central second entry slot 6400c, which is one of the starting winning openings that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the distribution winning device 750 through the opening 750a is received by the distribution member 750b provided directly below the opening 750a, and is received by the central first entry port 64c. Let it flow down toward either the central second entrance 6400c or the center. The distribution member 750b is variably configured to be tilted to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 249) and to the left side in the front view. In the state tilted to the right side in the front view, the distribution member 750b is tilted to the right side in the front view. The game ball flowing in from the opening 750a is received by the left side portion of the distribution member 750b, and the weight of the received game ball causes the game ball to rotate counterclockwise and switch to a state of being tilted to the left side in the front view. The game ball received by the member 750b is dropped toward the central first entry port 64c arranged on the lower left side of the front view. On the other hand, in a state where the disadvantageous w3 opening member 750b is tilted to the left side in the front view, the game ball flowing in from the opening 750a is received by the right side portion of the distribution member 750b and clockwise depending on the weight of the received game ball. As a result of rotating and switching to a state of being tilted to the right side of the front view, the game ball received by the distribution member 750b is dropped toward the central second entry port 6400c arranged on the lower right side of the front view. .. That is, every time the game ball enters the opening 750a, the distribution member 750b receives the game ball and alternately flows down to the central first entry port 64c and the central second entry port 6400c. Has been done. As a result, the lottery of special symbols can be executed more efficiently.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the tenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 250. Here, in the present modification, with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 222 (a)), the specified contents of the variation pattern table 202d, the time saving table 202e, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ga Only some changes have been made. Therefore, the illustration of the configuration of the ROM 202 is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 250, the details of the normal table 202dg1 constituting the variation pattern table 202d in this modification will be described. The normal table 202dg1 is in a gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, similarly to the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. This is a data table in which data for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the lottery when a lottery of a special symbol is executed is defined. FIG. 250 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202 deg1.

As shown in FIG. 250 (a), the normal table 202 dc1 in this modification is the distribution of the first special symbol of the normal table 202 dc1 (see FIG. 225 (b)) in the tenth embodiment regardless of the symbol type. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern in the same distribution as above. That is, in this modified example, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. It is configured so that a relatively short fluctuation time can be easily selected (a super long fluctuation of 600 seconds cannot be selected) as in the case of. As described above with reference to FIG. 249, in this modification, the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol) in the tenth embodiment is provided at the position where the first winning opening 64 is provided. , A distribution device 750 (a configuration in which game balls are alternately won in the central first entrance 64c and the central second entrance 6400c) is provided, and a normal game method (left) in a normal state of a normal symbol. This is because the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed in parallel (simultaneously) by performing the hitting). That is, since the lottery of the second special symbol is executed without performing an irregular game method (a game method in which a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state of a normal symbol), the game efficiency is improved. For the purpose, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is configured to be shorter than that of the tenth embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250 (b), the details of the limit reaching table 202 dc3 in this modification will be described. Similar to the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226 (b)) in the tenth embodiment, the limit reaching table 202deg3 is forced even though the probability variation limit number is reached and the probability variation jackpot is won. This is a data table that may be referred to for determining (selecting) the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol when the special symbol is set to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot.

FIG. 250 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the limit reaching table 202 deg3. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the limit reaching table 202 deg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) in the present modification is the limit reaching table 202 dc3 in the tenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 226 (b)). ), The correspondence between the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each lottery result and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected (determined) is exactly the opposite between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is a difference in drinking in that it is. That is, the correspondence relationship in the first special symbol of the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226 (b)) in the tenth embodiment described above is the limit reaching table 202deg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) in this modification. ) Is the correspondence of the second special symbol. Further, the correspondence relationship in the second special symbol of the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226 (b)) in the tenth embodiment described above is the limit reaching table 202deg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) in this modification. ) Is the correspondence of the first special symbol. Therefore, in this modification, when the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the limit reaching table 202 deg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is as long as 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result. While the fluctuation time is always set, a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds to 30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, during the period in which the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to (the probability variation limit number is reached and the number of special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends is 101 times or more), the distribution winning device 750 is left-handed. When the game ball is fired at the target, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed only every 600 seconds, while the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed relatively frequently. In other words, it is possible to focus on the advantageous second special symbol lottery in which it is easy to determine the advantageous jackpot type (the jackpot type to which the probability variation state that continues until the next jackpot is given) when the jackpot is won. It is possible to form a special normal state (special state) having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state shifted under the conditions (when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or when the normal jackpot is won). Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game during the special state, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 251. Similar to the time reduction table 202e in the tenth embodiment, the time reduction table 202e sets the number of time reductions according to the type of big hit and the game state at the time of winning the big hit (counter value of the time reduction medium counter 203k). It is a data table that is referred to when (setting). FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 251, the time saving table 202e (see FIG. 251) in the present modification has a second special symbol with respect to the specified content (see FIG. 227) of the time saving table 202e in the tenth embodiment described above. The difference is that the number of time reduction grants for some of the jackpots (big hits I10, J10) has changed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot I10 (9-round probability variation jackpot) won in the normal state, the number of time reductions (for example, the number of time reductions that continue until the next jackpot for the jackpot that has not reached the probability variation limit number) 65536 times) is specified in association with each other, and the number of time reductions of 8 times is specified in association with the jackpot after reaching the probability variation limit number of times. Further, for the jackpot I10 won in the latent state, 8 times are defined as the number of time reductions, regardless of whether the hit is before the probability variation limit is reached or the probability variation limit is reached. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, the jackpot I10 (9-round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set is the same as the other probability variation jackpot. The number of time reduction grants is associated. That is, the number of time reductions that continue until the next big hit is associated with the hit before the probability variation limit number is reached, and the number of time reductions of 100 times is associated with the hit after the probability variation limit number is reached. ing.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions given to the jackpot J10, the same number of time reductions as the jackpot C10 and the jackpot F10 are defined in association with each other. That is, for the jackpot J10 (three-round probability variation jackpot) won in the normal state, eight times are associated and defined as the number of time reductions. Further, for the jackpot J10 won in the latent probability state, 0 times is associated with the number of time reductions regardless of whether the hit is before the probability variation limit is reached or the probability variation limit number is reached. That is, when the jackpot J10 is won in the latent state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given even once, which is extremely disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, the jackpot J10 (3 round probability variation jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set is the same as the other probability variation jackpot. The number of time reduction grants is associated. That is, the number of time reductions that continue until the next big hit is associated with the hit before the probability variation limit number is reached, and the number of time reductions of 100 times is associated with the hit after the probability variation limit number is reached. ing.

As described above, in the present modification, the degree of advantage when the probability variation jackpot (big hit I10, J10) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is higher than that in the tenth embodiment. That is, in the normal state, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of time reductions that continue until the next big hit is set at a rate of 27% (when the big hit I10 is won) (that is,). , Directly shift to the consecutive villa mode), and set the number of time reductions of 8 times at a rate of 73% (when winning the jackpot J10 to L10) (that is, shift to either chance mode A or B). It was configured as follows. That is, in the normal state, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of directly shifting to the consecutive villa mode after the big hit ends (7%, which is the ratio of winning either the big hit A10 or D10). Rather than that, the rate of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol and shifting to the consecutive villa mode is configured to be nearly four times higher. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, when the table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250) for reaching the limit is referred to and the state shifts to the special state in which the fluctuation pattern is selected, the possibility of directly shifting to the consecutive villa mode increases, so the shift to the special state is made. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game in such a case. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in this modification will be described. Similar to the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment, the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in this modification has the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big hit and the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to. It is a data table referred to for selecting a correspondence (variation pattern scenario). FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga.

As shown in FIG. 252, in this modification, the variation pattern scenario set when the probability variation limit number is reached is partially changed with respect to the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment. It differs only in that it is. More specifically, if the probability variation jackpot is won in the probability variation state and the probability variation limit number is reached by the jackpot, the time saving table 202dg2 is referred to after the jackpot ends until 100 lottery is executed. Then, in the 101st and subsequent lottery, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to. That is, the pullback mode is set by reaching the probability variation limit number by repeating the consecutive villa state and the jackpot, and the jackpot cannot be won during the pullback mode (time reduction state in which the time reduction number is 100 times). If this is the case, in the subsequent normal state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202deg3 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the lottery of the second special symbol, which is relatively advantageous (the ratio of directly shifting to the consecutive villa mode is high when the jackpot is won), so that even after the pullback mode is finished. , Can remind the player to continue the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the tenth embodiment, the probability variation limit is reached by repeating the consecutive villa mode and the jackpot, the pullback mode is set, and the jackpot is achieved during the pullback mode. When the player cannot be elected and shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player, a special state is set in which the ratio of shifting to the consecutive villa mode increases by winning the jackpot. That is, the lottery of the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous (it is difficult to set the consecutive villa mode even if the jackpot is won in the normal state), is hardly executed, and the advantageous (the consecutive villa mode is set when the jackpot is won in the normal state). The lottery can be executed by focusing on the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved when the state shifts to the special state.

Here, it is generally known that a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a probabilistic state or a time saving state. Among the conventional gaming machines, once the advantageous gaming state is entered, the advantageous gaming state and the jackpot are repeated at a relatively high rate, and when the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs. The aim was to improve the interest of the players. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when an advantageous gaming state ends and an unfavorable gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set, it is intended to continue the game in the unfavorable gaming state. There was a problem that it became difficult.

On the other hand, in this modification, when a special state (a state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202deg3) is set after the end of the pullback mode, the game in the disadvantageous normal state is played. Since it is possible to make the player want to continue, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained even after the advantageous game state ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this modification, the special state is set after the end of the pullback mode only when the probability change limit number is reached and the pullback mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends by winning the normal jackpot in the consecutive villa mode, the normal mode A (normal state) after the pullback mode ends may be set to a special state. With this configuration, when the pullback mode ends, a special state can be set without fail, so that the player's motivation for the game when the pullback mode ends decreases. This can be prevented (suppressed) more reliably.

In this modification, in the normal mode A after the pullback mode based on reaching the probability variation limit number is completed, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202deg3 until the jackpot is won. , Not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202 deg3 only after the end of the pullback and the end of the lottery for a specific number of times (100 times). By configuring in this way, if a so-called addiction occurs after the pullback mode is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing sight of the time of disappointment, and at the time when a specific number of lottery is completed. You can make a decision whether to quit the game once.

In this modified example, only when the pull-back mode ends and the normal mode A is entered, an advantageous state is formed in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be biased, but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in the normal mode A and the normal mode B, even when the special symbols are continuously lost over a specified number of times (for example, 200 times) or more, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes extremely long (for example). (600 seconds) It may be configured to form an advantageous state. With this configuration, even if so-called addiction occurs, the motivation for the game is unlikely to decrease.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 272. In the seventh embodiment described above, it is easier to set a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state after the end of the big hit if the jackpot is achieved in the disadvantageous normal state rather than the jackpot in the advantageous time-saving state. In order to make it so that it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed during the time saving state, and a V prize is generated in the small hit to start the big hit. The rate at which the time-saving state is given to is higher for the small hit in the normal state than for the small hit in the time-saving state.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the advantageous period in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball) can be acquired during the time saving state which is advantageous to the player, and the advantageous period are acquired more than the advantageous period. It is configured so that a difficult disadvantage period can be set and the disadvantage period is set before the advantageous period. Then, when the jackpot game is executed during the advantageous period of the time saving state, the game executed after the end of the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than when the jackpot game is executed during the disadvantageous period of the time saving state. It is configured to be easy to become. That is, rather than executing the jackpot game between the time when the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set and the specific condition is satisfied (until the advantageous period is set), the jackpot game is executed after the specific condition is satisfied (advantageous). It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to execute the jackpot game (after the period is set) (it becomes easier to execute the second special symbol lottery using the special figure 2 reserved ball after the jackpot game is completed). There is.

In addition, when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed during the normal state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game. By setting a time-saving state in which the end condition is difficult to be satisfied, a jackpot game is executed during the normal state using the special figure 2 holding ball secured during the time-saving state, rather than when the jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is more advantageous to the player when it is made to do so.

With this configuration, the jackpot game is executed as soon as possible (the jackpot game is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured or only a small amount of special figure 2 reserved ball is secured). Being aware of the first game method (a game method in which a small hit game executed during a disadvantageous period wins a V prize) and the risk that it will take time and a ball to finish the time saving state, the second special symbol It is possible to let the player select a second game method in which the time saving state is ended while keeping a large number of reserved balls, and a V prize is generated by a small hit after the time saving state is completed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and a plurality of time saving ending conditions are further provided according to the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) executed by the player. Of the conditions (special figure 1 end condition, special figure 2 end condition), the time saving end condition that is likely to be satisfied is configured to be different. Then, it is determined whether the state is immediately before each time reduction end condition is satisfied (the state before the time reduction end is satisfied), and when it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied with respect to one time reduction end condition. , It was configured to execute an effect (game method guidance effect) for performing a game by a game method in which other time reduction end conditions are more likely to be satisfied than one time reduction end condition in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied.

That is, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to maximize the enjoyment of the game in the time saving state to the player (in order to lengthen the game period in the time saving state), one of the plurality of time saving end conditions Only the element for satisfying the time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol) is updated, and the element for satisfying the other time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol) is completely updated. It was configured to prevent the time saving state from ending when it was not done.

Further, in the eighth embodiment described above, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and the time saving state is terminated with the lottery rights for the second special symbol reserved and stored. As a result, in the normal state set after the end of the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, can be executed. In other words, it is possible to end the time saving state while maximizing the number of special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state and holding more lottery rights for the second special symbol. It was configured to run.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, the gaming state other than the time saving state (for example, the normal state) is set. The lottery of the second special symbol, which can facilitate the acquisition of the lottery right, is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, when the number of lottery of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (10 times), the time saving state is configured to end. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the lottery right of the second special symbol stored at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed) and the time saving state The second special symbol executed during the time saving state is based on the remaining number of lottery (remaining time saving number) of the special symbol until the end of (until the number of lottery of the special symbol in the time saving state reaches 10 times). As the fluctuation pattern of, a different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected, and the special figure 2 at the end of the time reduction according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol selected during the time reduction state. It is configured so that the expected degree of acquisition of the number of reserved balls is different. That is, based on the timing of increasing / decreasing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 during the time saving state, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state can be easily increased or decreased. ing.

More specifically, the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) executed in the last half period of the time reduction state (for example, the 9th and 10th time reduction) is specified during the special figure 2 variation. Fig. 2 Extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 seconds) that makes it difficult to acquire the reserved balls, and special figure 2 Long fluctuation time that makes it possible to easily acquire the number of reserved balls (for example, 20 seconds). ) Is configured to be selected according to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2.

Furthermore, in the time saving state, the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is larger when the right-handed game is temporarily interrupted than when the player continuously executes the right-handed game. It is configured to be easy to become. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is set to the upper limit (4) during the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 in the specific number of time reductions (for example, the 8th time reduction), the special figure corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions. FIG. 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation is configured to be an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 second).

With this configuration, the player who is playing the game in the time-saving state is not simply continuously executing the right-handed game, but is allowed to consider whether or not the right-handed game is executed. Can be done. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that it is advantageous not to execute the game.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to execute a guidance effect that can guide the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to make the player play a game that requires the skill of the player to play the game according to the production content of the guidance effect being executed, so that the player's motivation to play is increased. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game in a time-saving state from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

The eleventh embodiment is a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and a part of the effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the seventh and eighth embodiments described above. The difference is that a part of the ROM 202 configuration of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the RAM 223 configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 253, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 253 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 253, the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment arranges the V winning device 6500 from the left side of the board to the right side of the board with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 178) in the seventh embodiment. The changed points, the arrangement position of the through gate 67 was changed to the lower position of the V winning device 6500, and the arrangement position of the first variable winning device 65 was changed from the lower center position of the board surface to the left side of the board surface. They are different and otherwise the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the game area (left side area) on the left side of the variable display unit 80 wins a prize more than the game ball that has flowed down the game area (right side area) on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first ball opening 64 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged at easy positions, and the game ball that has flowed down the right area is V-winning at a position that is easier to win than the game ball that has flowed down the left area. A second entry port 6400 to which the device 6500, the through gate 67, and the electric accessory 6400a are attached is arranged.

That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the normal state is set and when the jackpot game is executed, the left-handed game in which the game ball is mainly flowed down to the left side region is an advantageous game method for the player. When the time saving state is set and the small hit game is executed, the right-handed game in which the game ball is mainly flowed down to the right side area is an advantageous game method for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the board surface configuration of the right side region in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is arranged at an upper position in the right side region, and the gaming ball launched by the right-handed game by the nails planted in the game board 13 is almost the same. All are guided toward the left end of the V-winning device 6500 so that the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6400f1 of the V-winning device 6500 flows down from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 253).

Further, as described in the seventh embodiment described above, the opening / closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is such that a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can pass is formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 in a closed state. It is configured (see FIG. 179). Therefore, by performing the right-handed game while the small hit game is being executed, the game ball can be reliably won by the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game.

In a state where the opening / closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is closed (a state in which the small hit game is not executed), the game ball flowing down the right side region passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 in the closed state, and is described above. Similar to the seventh embodiment, the flow path is divided into a flow path that passes through the through gate 67 and reaches the electric accessory 640a and a flow path that flows down toward the out port 66 without passing through the through gate 67. It is configured as follows.

In the eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second entrance 6400 is easily opened, so that the player strikes right. Depending on the game, a game is performed in which the game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6400, which triggers the lottery of the second special symbol.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the ball first reaches the V winning device 6500 in the right-handed game executed in the time saving state. Therefore, when the small hit game is executed during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the entry of the ball into the second entrance 6400 during the small hit game period. As a result, the degree of increase in the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol in the time-saving state can be managed by making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation in the time-saving state different.

In the eleventh embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 6400 are arranged below the V winning device 6500, so that the game ball reaches the second entrance 6400 during the small hit game. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the through gate 67 even during the small hit game, and the game ball passes through the through gate 67. Even if the player wins the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed in the above, the game ball may be configured so as not to reach the second entrance 6400 to which the electric accessory 6400a to be opened is attached. In this case, since it is possible to pass the game ball through the through gate 67 during the small hit game period, the reserved memory of the normal symbol is exhausted during the small hit game, and the game in the time saving state is smoothly performed. It is possible to suppress the situation where it cannot be executed.

Further, only the through gate 67 may be arranged below the V winning device 6500, and the second entrance 6400 to which the electric accessory 6400a is attached may be arranged above the V winning device 6500. In this case, since the second entrance 6400 can be arranged on the upstream side of the right side region, the game ball can be smoothly entered into the second entrance 6400 during the time saving state. It is possible to smoothly execute the game in the time saving state.

Here, the game content in the state in which the time saving state is set will be briefly described with respect to the differences from the seventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving state is set to the number of lottery times (remaining time reduction number) of the special symbol in the time saving state. , It is configured to be different based on the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol, and it is difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol (variable pattern with a short fluctuation time) and the reserved second special symbol. It is configured so that it is possible to set (select) a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time) that makes it easy to secure memory.

Then, by the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state, it is possible to secure a hold memory of many second special symbols at the end of the time reduction state. It is configured so that it is possible to make a state that is difficult to secure and a state that is difficult to secure. Furthermore, it is easier to increase the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state by interrupting the right-handing game at a specific timing rather than continuously executing the right-handing game during the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be done. With this configuration, the player can arbitrarily select the game method in the time-saving state, and the degree of advantage of the game executed after the time-saving state ends (the number of times the second special symbol lottery is held and stored). Can be changed, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game in the time saving state.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, the period until the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) is executed six times during the time saving state) is the predetermined period. It is a disadvantageous period in which it is more difficult to secure the reserved memory of the 2nd special symbol than the period after the period has passed (the period during which the 7th to 10th special symbol (second special symbol) lottery is executed during the time saving state). It is configured to be. In other words, the period after the predetermined period has elapsed is configured to be an advantageous period in which it is easier to secure the hold storage of the second special symbol than the predetermined period after the time saving state is set.

With this configuration, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the securing status of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol differs depending on the number of time reductions at the time of winning. Can be done. Therefore, the player is selected whether or not to play a game for generating a V prize during the small hit game according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol secured at the time of winning the small hit. Can be made to.

That is, when the normal state is set after the big hit game (V big hit) executed based on winning the small hit during the time saving state and winning the game ball V during the small hit game, the normal state is set. Since it is not possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed only for the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol secured during the time saving state. .. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to win the V prize while securing more reserved memories of the second special symbol during the time saving state.

However, in the eleventh embodiment, the first half period after the time saving state is set is set as a disadvantageous period in which it is difficult to secure the hold memory of the second special symbol, and the second half period is secured by the hold memory of the second special symbol. Since it is an advantageous period that is easy (easier to secure than a disadvantageous period), if a small hit is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a big hit (V big hit) is immediately given regardless of the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol. V-win the game ball until the advantageous period (second half period) is reached in order to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol while executing the target game or taking the risk of not being able to V-win the game ball during the time saving state. It is possible to let the player choose whether to perform a game that is not allowed. Therefore, the subsequent game result can be greatly different depending on the game method selected by the player.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, in the latter half period (advantageous period) of the time saving state described above, the variation pattern of the selected second special symbol variation is changed according to the reserved storage number of the second special symbol. It is configured. Then, the degree of expectation of acquisition of the reserved storage number of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state is different depending on the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation selected. More specifically, when the reserved storage number of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4) at the timing when the second special symbol change of the ninth rotation is executed after the time saving state is set, the time saving state is set. The number of reserved storage of the second special symbol at the end of is reduced, and the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol is a specific number at the timing when the second special symbol fluctuation of the ninth rotation is executed after the time saving state is set. In the case of 3), the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state is likely to increase.

That is, the right-handed game is temporarily interrupted and adjusted so that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol becomes a specific number that is not the upper limit, as compared with the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state. With this configuration, depending on the game method executed by the player in the time saving state, the degree of advantage when the time saving state ends, that is, when the time saving state ends without executing the jackpot game. Since the degree of advantage of the game executed after the end of the time saving state can be different, the player can be enthusiastically performed the game during the time saving state.

Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the V winning of the game ball during the time saving state, the time saving state is set. As an end condition for ending (re-time reduction state), a time reduction end condition (special figure 1 time reduction end condition) that is established when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once is set. Then, as shown in FIG. 253, the game ball can enter the first entrance 64, which is a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, by the game method (left-handed game) executed during the jackpot game. It is configured in.

With this configuration, if the game ball is V-winned in a state where the hold memory of the second special symbol cannot be secured during the time saving state, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game is completed. Even if this is done, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed before the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and the special figure 1 time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the time reduction state ends instantly. It will be.

On the other hand, if the game ball is V-winned while the reserved memory of the second special symbol is secured during the time saving state, the first special symbol lottery is performed when the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game is completed. Since the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over, the special figure 1 time reduction is performed compared to the case where the time reduction state (re-time reduction state) is set without securing the hold memory of the first special symbol. It is possible to make it difficult for the end condition to be satisfied.

In addition, the second special symbol lottery (during the time saving state) is executed during the normal state by ending the time saving state with the reserved memory number of the second special symbol secured up to the upper limit without winning a V during the time saving state. When a small hit is won by a lottery based on the reserved memory) and the time saving state is set after the big hit game (per V) executed based on the V winning of the game ball during the small hit game. That is, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed in the normal state, the above-mentioned special figure 1 time saving ending condition is not set.

That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the V hit is executed within a predetermined period after the time saving state is set, it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the V hit is executed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Furthermore, it is better to end the time saving state with the reserved storage number of the second special symbol secured up to the upper limit than when the V hit is executed within the predetermined period after the time saving state is set. It is configured to be advantageous to the person.

With this configuration, the subsequent game results can be significantly different depending on the game method selected by the player during the time saving state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<About the production contents in the 11th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 254 to 258, a characteristic effect content among the effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. To do. Specifically, the effect content of the time-saving effect executed when the time-saving state is set will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the number of time reductions (the number of remaining time reductions) and the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (the number of times of reduction in time) and the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (the number of times of reduction in time remaining) and the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (the number of times of reduction in time remaining) and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol ( The difference is in that the effect mode is set based on the special figure 2 number of reserved balls) and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variation to be executed, and the other points are the same. The same production mode (display mode) is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, as described above, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later is greatly changed according to the content of the game to be executed during the time saving state. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting what kind of game to play during the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a guidance effect for guiding the player to a game method for increasing the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the game in which the game that is advantageous to the player is to be executed, depending on the mode of the guidance effect to be executed. In addition, since the skill for actually executing the game according to the grasped game content is required, the player can be enthusiastically played the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, the time saving effect in which the character 801 imitating a boy collects the keys is executed. Although detailed description will be described later, in the eleventh embodiment, the first half period of the time saving state (the period during which the first to sixth special symbol fluctuations (second special symbol fluctuation) are executed after the time saving state is set). ), An ultra-short fluctuation pattern (variation time 0.1 seconds) with an extremely short fluctuation time is selected, and it is configured to make it difficult to increase the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. Although not shown, the display mode (display mode displayed when the time reduction state is set) for explaining the effect content during the time reduction state is continuously displayed during the first half period. Then, when the first half period of the time saving state elapses and the second half period (the period during which the special symbol change is executed after the seventh time), various display modes for guiding the player to execute the game method during the time saving state are displayed. Will be done.

Here, a display mode (effect content) that can be displayed during the latter half of the time saving state will be described in detail. FIG. 254 (a) is an example of a display mode displayed when the middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) is executed as the seventh special symbol fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation) after the time saving state is set. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. As shown in FIG. 254 (a), in the eleventh embodiment, the time saving effect (guidance) in which a part of the display mode is changed with respect to the time saving effect (see FIG. 181) executed in the seventh embodiment described above. (Direction) is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 254 (a) is a display mode in which the seventh second special symbol fluctuation is fluctuating for 10 seconds and can be displayed in a state where one special figure 2 holding ball is secured. In the display area HR6, the characters "remaining 3 times" indicating that the remaining number of time reductions is 3 are displayed. Then, four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801. In these four display areas, each time a game ball enters the second entrance 6400 and the number of reserved balls increases, an image of a key in a mode corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), a display area HR5 in which the characters "Right-handed key is stored !!" is displayed is formed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to easily understand that the keys are accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by right-handing the player.

In the figure shown in FIG. 254 (a), as a display mode indicating that one holding memory (special figure 2 holding ball) of the second special symbol is secured, the special figure is inside the display area HR4. 2 The "key" icon, which is a display mode displayed corresponding to the reserved ball, is displayed. After that, when the special figure 2 holding balls are secured up to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the middle fluctuation for 10 seconds, the display mode shown in FIG. 254 (b) is displayed. FIG. 254 (b) is a schematic example of the display content displayed when the special figure 2 reserved balls are GET (secured) up to the upper limit number (4) during the 7th middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) in the time saving. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above.

As shown in FIG. 254 (b), when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol change, even if the right-handed game is executed any more, a new special figure 2 reserved ball is executed. Since it is not possible to secure the above, a display area HR5 in which the characters "GET 4 keys !! Take a break for a while" is displayed is formed for the sub display area Ds. Then, in the display areas HR1 to HR4, a "key" icon is displayed in each area to indicate that the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is the upper limit (4). Further, in FIG. 254 (a), as the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 in which "right-handed" is displayed, the display of "right-handed" is variably displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. With these display modes, it is possible to make the player understand in an easy-to-understand manner that the reserved ball has been secured up to the upper limit value, and to easily understand that it is not necessary to execute the right-handed game any more. it can.

In the example shown in FIG. 254 (b), by making it difficult to see the "right-handed" display in the guidance display area Dm2, the player is notified that it is not necessary to perform the right-handed game. , Not limited to this, for example, reducing the size of the guidance display area Dm2, displaying "right-handed" in a display area different from the guidance display area Dm2, or displaying the characters "right-handed". It may be configured to notify "right-handed" in a display mode (for example, mark display) that is difficult for the player to understand. In this way, the right-handed guidance display (see FIG. 254 (a)) that is easy for the player to understand and the display mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the right-handed guidance display, mainly in the time-saving state in which the right-handed game is executed. By configuring to switch and display, the player is made to understand that the current time is shortened, and the player is made to understand that it is not necessary to execute the right-handed game. be able to. Further, the display mode itself for guiding the right-handed game may be hidden (hidden).

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the effect content displayed while the second special symbol variation of the eighth time reduction is being executed will be described. FIG. 255 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is a specific number (3) during the eighth middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) of the time reduction. FIG. 255 (b) shows a display mode in which the number of reserved balls is less than a specific number (3) (1) during the 8th middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) of the time saving. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing.

Details will be described later, but in the eleventh embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the time when the second special symbol change of the eighth time reduction is stopped and displayed is a specific number (3), the tenth time reduction It is configured so that long-term fluctuation can be easily selected as the second special symbol fluctuation of. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit value during the 7th middle fluctuation of the time reduction, the break display (see FIG. 255 (a)) in which the break display shown in FIG. 254 (b) is continued is displayed. Is displayed. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reserved ball could not be acquired up to the upper limit during the 7th time saving second special symbol change, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), the second special figure 2 reserved ball The display mode of the acquisition chance is displayed.

In FIG. 254 (a), "Please wait for a while" is displayed in the main display area Dm as a display mode for suppressing the acquisition of a new special figure 2 reserved ball during the execution of the second special symbol change. Then, a display area HR5 is formed in which the characters "during a game break" are displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the guidance display area Dm2, the characters "STOP" for guiding the interruption of the game are displayed. With these display modes, it is possible to easily make the player know that the current special figure 2 holding ball is not allowed to be acquired.

Further, of the display areas HR1 to HR4 for indicating the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, the display area HR1 in which the "key" icon corresponding to the fourth reserved ball in Special Figure 2 can be displayed is hidden. So, it is possible to make you think that the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (3) is the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reserved balls that can be acquired, even if you do not visually perform a right-handed game. It can make the player think that it is in good condition.

Further, in the main display area Dm, a display area HR6 for indicating that the number of remaining time reductions is "2 times" is formed smaller than the display area HR6 shown in FIG. 254 (b). As a result, when the display content of the third symbol display device 81 shifts from the display mode shown in FIG. 254 (b) to the display mode shown in FIG. 255 (a), the number of time reductions is updated. It can be difficult for the player to understand. In addition, different from the display example shown in FIG. 255 (a), the display area HR6 may be hidden, or the display area HR6 may be displayed as "remaining times?". With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is easy to pay attention only to the content of the effect being executed. In addition, in this case, the display mode indicating the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 displayed in the display areas HR1 to HR4 is changed so that the display mode of the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is not displayed. You may. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the increase / decrease in the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, so that it is easy to pay attention only to the content of the effect being executed.

FIG. 255 (b) is a display screen in a state in which a guidance effect for guiding the game ball to be inserted into the second entrance 6400 is executed until the number of reserved balls in Special FIG. 2 reaches three. , A display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds, which displays "Right-handedly store 3 keys !! 4 cannot be used !!". Then, it is visually shown that the display area HR1 corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball in the display areas HR1 to HR4 is in a state in which the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball must not be acquired. The characters "DANGER" to be notified to are displayed.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol change in the seventh time reduction, or in the execution of the second special symbol change in the eighth time reduction. In the case where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 3, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is likely to be the largest. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4) during the execution of the second special symbol change in the 8th time reduction, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time reduction state decreases. It is configured to be easy.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 255 (a) and 255 (b), when the middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) is executed as the second special symbol fluctuation for the eighth time reduction, the special figure 2 at the start of the fluctuation By making the content of the production different according to the number of reserved balls, it is possible to guide the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol change in the seventh time reduction, the second special symbol change in the seventh time reduction is in progress. Since it is configured to display the guidance mode for interrupting the right-handed game to the player, when the guidance for interrupting the right-handed game is executed from the start timing of the second special symbol change in the eighth time reduction. In comparison, the number of game balls existing in the right region can be reduced at the start timing of the second special symbol change in the eighth time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 to reach the upper limit (4) during the execution of the second special symbol change in the eighth time reduction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content displayed while the long fluctuation (20-second fluctuation) is being executed at the 10th time reduction (final fluctuation in the time reduction state). It is a figure. In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change of the 10th time reduction is executed with the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 being two (when the second special symbol change of the 10th time reduction is started, the special figure 2 The number of reserved balls is one), and a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation. Then, during the long fluctuation, an effect for acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball up to the upper limit is executed. Further, as a display mode of the guide display area Dm2, a highlight display mode (displayed with a double frame in the figure) is displayed in which the right-handed game is emphasized and guided more than other timings in the time saving state.

In the example shown in FIG. 256, the character "last" indicating that it is the final fluctuation in the time saving state is displayed in the display area HR6, and "collect treasure by right-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The display area HR5 is formed. Then, since it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired during this fluctuation will be used for the second special symbol lottery executed after the time saving state ends, that is, during the normal state, special figure 2 As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls, a “treasure” icon is displayed as a display mode different from the display mode (“key” icon) shown in FIG. 254 (a). In this way, by changing the display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, it is possible to make the player understand that the degree of advantage of the reserved balls in Special Figure 2 stored in the reservation is different. ..

In this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving state. Specifically, the second special executed in the normal state is more than the case where the big hit game (per V) is executed based on the small hit winning in the second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving state. When the big hit game (V hit) is executed based on the small hit winning in the symbol lottery, the time saving end condition that is difficult to be established is set as the time saving end condition when the time saving state is set after the big hit game ends. It is configured to be done. Therefore, the display mode (treasure) showing the special figure 2 holding ball used in the normal state is visually more valuable than the display mode (key) showing the special figure 2 holding ball used in the time saving state. It is a display mode. In this way, by associating the actual degree of advantage with the value indicated by the display mode, it is possible to provide the player with a visually easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the display content displayed when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 during the time saving state becomes the number of reserved balls that is disadvantageous to the player will be described. FIG. 257 (a) schematically shows an example of the display contents displayed when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit (4) during the eighth middle fluctuation (variation for 10 seconds) in the time reduction. It is a schematic diagram. As described above with reference to FIG. 255 (b), the effect of accumulating three keys is executed during the eighth middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) of the time reduction. Here, if the player mistakenly operates the right-handed game and has accumulated four keys (the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has become four), it is shown in FIG. 257 (a). As shown, an icon 890 imitating a bomb is displayed in the center of the main control device 110, and in the display area HR6 indicating the number of remaining time reductions, the display mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions is "remaining? Times?" Is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the player has entered the "DANGER zone", which is a production mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp when the time saving state ends and the current number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. A display area HR5 displaying "Entering the DANGER zone !!" indicating that is formed.

As shown in FIG. 257 (a), when the DANGER zone is set, the number of remaining time reductions and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 are not displayed on the display surface. Details will be described later, but if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit during the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation, it will be super as the fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special symbol change in the 9th time reduction and the 10th time reduction. A short fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds) is selected, and a new special figure 2 reserved ball cannot be acquired (difficult) during the second special symbol change of the 10th time reduction. In this way, once the DANGER zone is set, there is a disadvantage that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is reduced. By displaying such a display mode, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the game method executed is the wrong game method, so that the game is executed by the appropriate game method in the next game. You can enthusiastically play the game.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to provide a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player in the latter half period of the time saving state, it is possible to select an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. It is configured. Then, by executing the ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is configured so that it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol. There is. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball during the fluctuation period, but it is difficult to notify the player of the lottery result of the second special symbol using only the ultra-short fluctuation time. There was a problem that it became.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the DANGER zone is set in the latter half of the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 257 (a), an icon 890 imitating a bomb is displayed and when it explodes. The situation that you do not know is displayed in advance, and for example, as shown in Fig. 257 (b), if you win a small hit in the second special symbol variation in which the ultra-short variation pattern is set, you will get a bomb. It is configured to explode the imitated icon 890 and display the letter 891 of "V" indicating a small hit. With this configuration, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed only by displaying the display mode in which the bomb is detonated from the state in which the icon 890 imitating the bomb is already displayed. Therefore, even if the fluctuation time is set to be short, the lottery result can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown, if the lottery result of the second special symbol fluctuation in which the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is set is out of order, even if the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the bomb will be released. It is configured to continuously display the imitated icon 890. As a result, the display mode (bomb icon) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is not variably displayed in order to show the player that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent annoying production from being executed. Further, when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed while the DANGER zone is set, the display mode in which the bomb explodes is displayed and secured as shown in FIG. 257 (b). FIG. 2 is configured to display a display mode showing the number of reserved balls. With this configuration, when the DANGER zone is set, the display mode in which the bomb finally explodes (when a small hit or a big hit is won, or when the time saving state ends) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which display mode (display mode indicating a hit or display mode indicating the end of the time saving state) is displayed when the bomb explodes. You can entertain the production.

In addition, since the DANGER zone is set when it becomes difficult to secure a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state, in this DANGER zone, when a small hit is won. , It is in a state where it is easier for the player to win a V prize for the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), when a small hit is won in the DANGER zone, a guidance display is provided as a display mode for causing the player to perform a game (right-handed game) aiming for a V prize. "Right-handed" is highlighted in the area Dm2, and a display area HR5 displayed as "Aim for small hit V" is formed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved balls and the number of remaining time reductions are not displayed in the DANGER zone, but the display mode is not limited to this and is normally displayed during the time reduction state. For example, the number of reserved balls and the number of remaining time reductions may be displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to discriminate than (see FIG. 254 (a)). In addition, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22), the player can specifically notify the number of reserved balls and the number of remaining time reductions even in the DANGER zone. It may be configured to display the aspect.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 258, the display contents displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 0 while the time is shortened will be described. FIG. 258 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0 during the time saving state. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set and the V hit (big hit game) is executed in the state where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 0, the big hit game is performed. Even if the time saving state is set again after the end, the time saving state is configured to end immediately by executing the first special symbol change. Therefore, if the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 holding ball number is 0 and the small hit is won, either the game aiming at the V prize is executed or the V prize is won in this small hit game. Instead of aiming for, the player will be allowed to select whether to execute the game aiming for the next small hit while acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball during the remaining short period of time.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 258, when a small hit is won in a state where the time is shortened and the number of reserved balls is 0, the characters "select" are displayed at the lower part of the main display area Dm. A horizontally long rectangular display area HR7 is formed, and a horizontally long rectangular display area in which the characters "I want to store a key" and the characters "STOP" are displayed on the left half of the sub display area Ds. Is formed, and a horizontally long rectangular display area in which the characters "I want to make a big hit" and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed is formed on the right half. The guidance display mode is hidden in the guidance display area Dm2 in order to indicate that it is a period for allowing the player to select a game method. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG imitating a right-pointing arrow (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. With this arrow image YG, it is possible for the player to grasp that the current time is shortened. Depending on these display contents, the player can stop the game (STOP) to end the small hit game without generating a V prize, or perform a right-handed game to generate a V prize. Since it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select whether to start a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, "STOP" indicating that the launch of the game ball is interrupted is used as a guide for the game method for not performing the right-handed game, but other game methods may be guided. It is good, for example, it may be configured to guide "left-handed" as a game method in which the game ball cannot win a V prize during the small hit game. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is determined at the start of the small hit game, and when the number is 0, the display mode shown in FIG. 258 is displayed and the player is allowed to select the game method. In addition to this, for example, did the number of balls reserved in Special Figure 2 increase during the small hit game (whether the game ball entered the second entrance 6400 during the small hit game)? Is determined, and the display mode during the small hit game may be changed based on the determination result.

In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit value during the small hit game, it is the most advantageous situation for the player to generate a V prize and start the big hit game in that state. Therefore, it is configured to display a display mode in which the right-handed game is forcibly executed (for example, a display mode in which a large "right-handed" character is displayed as the most emphasized guidance display mode in the center of the main display area Dm). , The sub-display area Ds may be configured to display the character "super chance" indicating that the most advantageous game is executed when the V prize is generated now. In addition, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 increases within the range below the upper limit, whether or not it is better to win a V prize during this small hit game based on the amount of increase and the number of remaining time reductions. A variable display of the emphasis of the display mode for guiding the right-handed game based on the prediction result (for example, a display for gradually guiding the "right-handed" with respect to the display area for guiding the "STOP" It may be configured to be variablely displayed so that the size of the area becomes large). With this configuration, the display mode corresponding to the change in the game situation during the small hit game is executed during the small hit game, so that the player can pay attention to the game during the small hit game.

Further, in this case, a plurality of types are set for the small hit game to be executed when the small hit is won, and the opening / closing door 6500f1 is closed during the small hit game according to the set small hit type. It may be configured to have different lengths. With this configuration, it is possible to change the degree of expectation that the game ball will enter the second entrance 6400 during the small hit game according to the type of the small hit game to be executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 253, when the closing period of the opening / closing door 6500f1 is set to be long during the small hit game executed in the short time state, the game ball flowing down the right side region by the right-handed game is the through gate 67. Alternatively, since it is possible to easily reach the second entrance 6400, it is possible to easily acquire the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 during the small hit game.

Further, as a small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit type among a plurality of small hit types, an opening period of the first period (1 second) is set immediately after the small hit game is executed, and then 10 seconds. After the closing period of, the small hit game in which the opening period of the second period (0.5 seconds) is set is executed, and two game balls are set in the V winning device 6500 as a condition for ending the small hit game. It is preferable to set the conditions for ending the number of winnings at which the small hit game ends when a winning is won. In this case, if the right-handed game is continuously executed during the small hit game, two or more game balls win the V winning device 6500 during the first period, and the small hit game ends. On the other hand, by interrupting the right-handed game during the first period, a closing period of 10 seconds is set, and after acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball during the closing period, the V winning device during the second period. A game ball can be won in 6500. That is, even during the execution of the small hit game, the degree of advantage in the later game can be changed according to the game method selected by the player.

Further, when the above-mentioned specific small hit type is provided, for example, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the small hit game executed this time is a small hit game corresponding to the specific small hit type, for example, the first It is preferable to set a small hit type in which an open period of 1 period (1 second) is set, and then the small hit game ends after a closing period of 0.2 seconds. By configuring in this way, whether or not the small hit game to be executed this time is a small hit game for which it is better to interrupt the right-handed game is determined by the opening operation content of the small hit game (the small hit game is executed). It is possible to prevent it from being easily grasped according to the opening operation content) from the time when the predetermined period elapses.

In addition, in this case, in order to guide the player to suggest the type of small hit game to be executed (small hit type) and the game method (right-handed continuation, right-handed interruption) during the small-hit game. The guidance effect of may be configured to be executed during the small hit game.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 259 to 261. First, the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 259 (a). FIG. 259 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 259 (a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment makes a small hit determination with respect to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 184 (b)) in the seventh embodiment. The difference is that the range of the first random number counter C1 defined as the value is different, and the other points are the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), the range of "10 to 259" is defined as the determination value for winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the range of values that the random number counter C1 can take per first is "0 to 999". Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is about 1/4. It is configured to win a small hit with a probability.

FIG. 259 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table 202hb. The time saving grant table 202hb changes the number of time saving grants (time saving end condition) set when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state with respect to the above-mentioned time saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 186 (a)). The difference is that when the jackpot D11 is won during the time saving state and when the jackpot E11 is won, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the other points are the same. is there. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, although some names of the jackpot types have been changed for convenience of explanation, detailed explanations thereof will be omitted because the contents are substantially the same.

As shown in FIG. 259 (b), when the "big hit A11" and the "big hit B11" are won, it is the same as when the "big hit A7" and the "big hit B7" of the seventh embodiment described above are won. Since the number of time reduction grants is set, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, for the "big hit C11", if the game state when the big hit game is executed is the normal state, "10 times" is defined in association with the number of times of shortening the time, and the big hit game is executed. When the game state is the normal state, the number of times of shortening the time is defined as "10 times" or "1 change of special figure 1 (first special symbol)" in association with each other. That is, when the "big hit C11" is determined, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit ends regardless of the game state. Then, when the "big hit C11" is won during the time saving state, the time saving ends when the special symbol change is executed 10 times during the time saving state, or when the first special symbol change is executed once. It is stipulated that the conditions are met and the time saving state ends.

With this configuration, if a V prize is generated during the time saving state and the number of reserved balls is 0 in the state where "big hit C11" is set, the left-handed game is executed. In order to acquire the reserved ball of the 1st special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved ball) with high probability, the lottery of the 1st special symbol is executed with non-priority over the lottery of the 2nd special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. Will be executed. Therefore, the time saving end condition defined as "one change of the special figure 1 (first special symbol)" is satisfied, and the time saving state ends immediately.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, it is configured to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when the special symbol change is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). However, since the ultra-short fluctuation pattern (variation time 0.1 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation in the time-saving state, V prize is won during the time-saving state. When "Big hit C11" is set and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 0, the game result is substantially the same as when the normal state is set after the big hit game is completed.

On the other hand, if a V prize is generated during the time saving state and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 in the state where "big hit C11" is set, after the time saving state is set, from the lottery of the first special symbol. The second special symbol lottery is executed with priority, and while the second special symbol lottery is executed four times, by acquiring a new special figure 2 reserved ball, "special figure 1 (first) It is possible to make it easier to satisfy the time saving end condition of "10 times" than "1 change of 1 special symbol)".

In this way, by changing the time saving end condition that is easy to be established according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time saving state is set (special figure 2 holding number of balls), the game state at the time of winning can be obtained. Even when the set jackpot type is the same, the gaming state set after the jackpot game is completed can be substantially different, and a surprising game can be provided to the player. ..

As for the "big hit D11" and the "big hit E11", the same number of time reduction grants (time reduction end condition) as the above-mentioned "big hit C11" is set, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, regarding "big hit F11", the presence or absence of time reduction is different depending on the game state when the big hit game is executed. Specifically, the game state when the big hit game is executed is the normal state. In the case of, "10 times" is specified in association with the number of times of shortening the time. On the other hand, when the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the time saving state, the time saving number is set to "0 times", that is, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, and the normal state is set. It is stipulated in. In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is completed can be switched between the set jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot type is set, and the presence or absence of the time state can be switched based on the result. By doing so, it is possible to provide various variations when setting the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the same number of times of time reduction (time reduction end condition) is set for all of "big hit C11", "big hit D11", and "big hit E11", but the number of times is not limited to this, for example, " "Big hit D11" is defined as "10 times" or "Special figure 1 (first special symbol) fluctuation 3 times", and V prize is generated during the time saving state and "Big hit D11" is set. In Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is 0, the time saving state may be more difficult to end than when "big hit C11" is set. With this configuration, when a small hit is won in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0 in the time saving state, it is better to win a V prize depending on the big hit type set. There can be cases where it is better not to win a V prize. Therefore, it is possible to increase the importance of letting the player decide which game to select when the small hit is won in the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 in the time saving state.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute an effect that suggests the jackpot type set this time as a result. As a result, the player pays close attention to the effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261 the variation pattern table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described as being different from the variation pattern table in the seventh embodiment described above. First, the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dh1 referred to during the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal variation pattern table 202dh1. As shown in FIG. 260, the normal variation pattern table 202dh1 has a second special symbol with respect to the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23A) in the above-described seventh embodiment (first embodiment). The difference is that the fluctuation pattern selected as the fluctuation pattern of (Special Figure 2) is different, and the other parts are the same. Specifically, in the second special symbol variation executed in the normal state, regardless of the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179", and the variation time is "10 seconds". "Short fluctuation" is defined in association with each other, and "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198".

That is, the case where the second special symbol change is executed in the state where the normal state is set is mainly the case where the normal state is set in the state where the special figure 2 holding ball is secured. Then, in this state, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the dedicated effect (pull-back effect) is configured to be executed, so that the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol to be selected is set as much as possible. It is configured to be fixed. As a result, the production period of the pull-back effect using the number of reserved balls (up to 4) secured in the state in which the normal state is set is specified in advance, and the fluctuation period of the plurality of second special symbols is set. It is possible to easily execute (set) the pull-back effect as a series of straddling effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents specified in the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202dh2, which is referred to when the time saving state is set, will be described. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving variation pattern table 202dh2. The time saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is selected for the first special symbol variation executed for the first time saving with respect to the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186 (b)) in the seventh embodiment described above. It differs from the fluctuation pattern to be performed in that the fluctuation pattern selected for the second special symbol fluctuation is changed, and is the same except for that. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the number of time reduction fluctuations is "1", that is, the special diagram 1 variation is the first special symbol variation in the time reduction. When is executed, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is ultra-short of 0.1 seconds in the entire range regardless of the number of reserved balls and the lottery result. Fluctuations are specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the first rotation in the time saving state, the fluctuation is completed in a very short time. Then, when "1 change of special figure 1 (first special symbol)" is set as the end condition (time reduction end condition) of the time saving state (see FIG. 259 (b)), the ultra-short fluctuation Special Figure 1 The time saving state ends when the fluctuation ends. As a result, even when the condition for setting the time saving state is satisfied after the end of the jackpot game, it can be considered that the normal state is actually set.

When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the number of time reduction fluctuations is "2", it is the same as the time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186 (b)) of the seventh embodiment described above. Since it is specified that the fluctuation pattern of is selected, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the time reduction frequency is "1 to 6", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of reserved balls and the lottery result. The range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is defined by associating an ultrashort fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. As a result, in the period until the number of time reduction fluctuations reaches 6 (the first half period of the time reduction state), the special figure 2 lottery is executed in a state where it is difficult to increase the number of reserved balls in special figure 2. Therefore, if a small hit is won in the first half of the time saving state, the small hit game is likely to be executed without securing the special figure 2 holding ball, the display screen shown in FIG. 258 is displayed, and the player On the other hand, it is necessary to select whether to aim for V prize or to execute the latter half period of the time saving state without making V prize in the small hit game (puncture the small hit game).

Next, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is "7, 8" and the lottery result is out of order, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" regardless of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. , "Ultra-short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with each other, and "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined with respect to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198". It is specified in association with each other. That is, when the 7th time reduction variation is the special figure 2 variation, the middle variation is selected with a probability of about 3/4, and the ultrashort variation is selected with a probability of about 1/4. If the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range regardless of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. A 10-second middle fluctuation is specified in association with it.

Here, when the middle variation is selected, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), the effect mode for acquiring the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is displayed. On the other hand, when the ultra-short variation is selected, the eighth variation in the time reduction is executed without marking the effect mode shown in FIG. 254 (a).

Further, even when the 8th time reduction variation is the special figure 2 variation, the variation pattern is selected with the same probability as the above 7th time reduction, and the 7th time reduction and the 8th time reduction are configured. In both cases, the lottery result is out of order, and the probability that the ultra-short variation is selected is about 3.5%. Therefore, when the time saving state is set, the unfortunate time saving state is set at a rate of about 3.5%, in which the chance of acquiring the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 cannot be obtained at the 7th and 8th time saving. It will be.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is acquired up to the upper limit during the 7th special figure 2 change in the time reduction, and if the middle change is selected as the special figure 2 change in the 8th time reduction, FIG. 255 (a). The effect mode shown in the above is displayed, and a game method for suppressing the acquisition of a new number of reserved balls is guided. In other words, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is acquired up to the upper limit during the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation, the case where the 8th time reduction is an ultra-short fluctuation is erroneous during the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation. Since it is less likely that a new special figure 2 number of reserved balls will be acquired, the fluctuation pattern will be advantageous to the player.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 could not be obtained up to the upper limit during the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation (during middle fluctuation), or the ultra-short fluctuation pattern was selected as the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation in the time reduction. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 255 (b) is displayed when the 8th time reduction special figure 2 variation is a middle variation.

Finally, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is "9,10" and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0,2,3", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" regardless of the lottery result. , That is, an ultra-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with the entire range, and when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "1", it fluctuates regardless of the lottery result. The value of the type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 198", that is, a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated with the entire range. That is, only when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "10", that is, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the last fluctuation in the time-saving state is "1", the last fluctuation in the time-saving state is a long fluctuation ( (Fluctuates for 20 seconds), and it is possible to easily end the time saving state with the special figure 2 holding ball acquired up to the upper limit.

Also, when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "9", that is, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 when selecting the fluctuation pattern one time before the last fluctuation in the time-saving state (pre-last fluctuation) is "1", It is configured to have a long fluctuation (20-second fluctuation). In this case, either play a game in which the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is acquired up to the upper limit by the fluctuation before the last, and the state where the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 3 at the end of the time saving state is surely secured, or the last By acquiring only one special figure 2 reserved ball in the previous fluctuation, the player can be made to select whether to perform a game aiming at executing the long fluctuation again in the last fluctuation.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the right-handed game is continuously executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, the special figure 2 reserved ball that can be secured at the time when the time saving state ends. It is configured so that the number can be easily reduced. Therefore, there is a risk that the game in the time saving state will be executed without securing the special figure 2 holding ball. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation of the 9th time reduction is executed without securing the special figure 2 holding ball, the ultra-short fluctuation is selected, and then the ultra-short fluctuation is also selected for the special figure 2 fluctuation of the 10th time reduction. It is configured to be easy to do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game in which the special figure 2 holding ball is not intentionally secured.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the second special symbol lottery is performed for a predetermined period after the time reduction state is set (while the second special symbol variation having the time reduction frequency of "1 to 6" is executed). It is configured so that the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set (selected) regardless of the result of the above and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 acquired, but the time is not limited to this, for example, the time is shortened. When the number of fluctuations is "1", that is, only the first special symbol fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation) after the time saving state is set, the fluctuation is larger than the above-mentioned ultrashort fluctuation pattern (variation time 0.1 seconds). It may be configured so that a minute fluctuation pattern (variation time 3 seconds) having a long time is selected.

With this configuration, for example, the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state, and the time saving state (retime saving state) is set again after the jackpot game is completed in the state where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is secured. In other words, when "10 times" or "1 special figure 1 variation" is set as the number of times of shortening the time (time reduction end condition), priority is given to the 1st special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation). The second special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) corresponding to the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls that is executed will end instantly, and the time saving state will end when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed. It can be suppressed.

In this case, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) after the time reduction state is set, that is, the fluctuation time defined as the minute variation pattern, is during the time reduction state (normal symbol high). A fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the probability state) is specified, and while the second special symbol fluctuation is being executed, the game per normal symbol during the time saving state is played. It is good to configure it so that it can be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to easily acquire a new special figure hold within the period from the setting of the time saving state to the end of the time saving state. Furthermore, by setting the first special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) as a minute variation (for example, 3 second variation) after the time reduction state is set, the first special symbol variation in the number of time reductions (special symbol) is in progress. During 2 fluctuations), there is a risk of acquiring multiple special figure 2 holds. Even in this configuration, while the number of time reductions is "2 to 6", the second special symbol variation is executed in the ultra-short variation pattern, so that during the first special figure 2 variation of the time reduction. Even when a plurality of reserved memories are acquired, the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls can be reduced (0) when the number of time reductions reaches "7".

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 262, the RAM 223 of the eleventh embodiment has a special symbol 2 holding ball with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 26 (b)) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the number counter 223b2, the acquisition effect set flag 223ha, the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb, the third acquisition effect set flag 223hc, the MAX acquisition flag 223hd, the Danger flag 223he, and the game waiting flag 223hf are added. , Other than that, it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 has the same contents as the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa in the second embodiment described above, and is among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main control device 110. , When a command related to the second special symbol is received, since it is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol according to the content indicated by the command, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The acquisition effect set flag 223ha is a flag for indicating that the effect (first hold acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254 (a) is being executed, and when the first hold acquisition effect is being executed. Is set to on, and is set to off when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (4) during the first hold acquisition effect and the first hold acquisition effect is completed. Specifically, in the first effect setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the seventh variation in time reduction is a middle variation (FIG. 271). In the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266), which is set to on (see S9105 in FIG. 272) and executed in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265), which is set to S9102: Yes in 272). The setting status is referred to (see S8001 in FIG. 266).

Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 4 after winning a prize (see S8002 in FIG. 266), it is set to off. Further, it is set to be on even during the period during which the effect shown in FIG. 256 (final hold acquisition effect) is being executed (see S9208 in FIG. 273). It is also set to off when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state) while the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to on (FIG. 270). S8204). That is, when the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to on, the increase in the number of special figure 2 reserved balls until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit is in a period that is advantageous to the player. It shows that there is.

The second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is a flag for indicating that the effect (second hold acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 255 (b) is being executed, and the second hold acquisition effect is executed. It is set to on when the second hold acquisition effect is set, and is set to off when the number of special figure 2 hold balls reaches the upper limit number (4) during the second hold acquisition effect and the second hold acquisition effect is completed. .. Specifically, when it is determined in the first effect setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) that the eighth special figure variation in the time saving is a middle variation. (S9107: Yes in FIG. 272), when it is determined that the MAX acquisition flag 223 hd, which will be described later, is not set to ON (S9108: Yes in FIG. FIG. 2 When the number of reserved balls cannot be acquired up to the upper limit (4), it is set to ON (see S9113 in FIG. 272) and executed in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265). The setting status is referred to in the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) (see S8008 in FIG. 266).

Then, various production modes are set according to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls after winning (see S8013 to S8016 in FIG. 266), and finally it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls after winning is four. If this is the case (S8009: Yes in FIG. 266), it is set to off (see S8012 in FIG. 266). That is, when the second acquisition effect setting flag 223hb is set to on, it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches three. It is a period, which indicates that it is a period that is disadvantageous to the player when the number of reserved balls reaches four. In addition, when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state) while the second acquisition effect setting flag 223hb is set to on, it is also set to off (when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state). See S8204 in FIG. 270).

The third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the effect (third hold acquisition effect) to be executed when the special figure variation of the ninth time reduction is a long variation is being executed. It is set to on when the third hold acquisition effect is being executed, and is set to off when the number of special figure 2 hold balls increases by one during the third hold acquisition effect. Specifically, when it is determined in the second effect setting process (see S2989 in FIG. 273) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) that the special figure variation of the ninth time reduction is a long variation. (S9202: Yes in FIG. 273), set to ON (see S9204 in FIG. 273), and executed in the special figure 2 prize processing (see S2396 in FIG. 266) of the prize information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265). The setting status is referred to in the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267) (see S8101 in FIG. 267). Then, when the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to on (S8101: Yes in FIG. 267), that is, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls increases by one during the third acquisition effect acquisition effect. It is set to off (see S8104 in FIG. 267). In addition, when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state) while the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to on, it is also set to off (when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state). See S8204 in FIG. 270).

The MAX acquisition flag 223 hd is a flag for indicating that the effect (MAX acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254 (b) is being executed, and is in the first hold acquisition effect shown in FIG. 254 (a). 2 is set to ON when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit and the display mode (see FIG. 254 (b)) indicating the game standby is displayed, and corresponds to the 8th special figure change in the time saving. It is referred to when setting the effect mode, and is set to off after setting the effect mode corresponding to the eighth time reduction of the special figure variation (see S9110 in FIG. 272).

By providing this MAX acquisition flag 223 hd, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit during the 7th special figure change in the time saving and the guidance notification for interrupting the right-handed game is executed, the guidance notification is sent. It is possible to continuously display over the 8th time reduction of the special figure change.

The Danger flag 223he is for indicating that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is excessively increased during the time saving state, and a large number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 cannot be secured at the end of the time saving state. When it is a flag and it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached 4 while the second hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 255 (b)) is being executed (S8009: Yes in FIG. 266), , When it is determined that a new special figure 2 reserved ball has been acquired while the game waiting effect (see FIG. 255 (a)) is being executed (S8017: Yes in FIG. 266), it is set to on.

While this Danger flag 223he is set to ON, the Danger effect (see FIG. 257 (a)) is executed, and the remaining time reduction period until the time reduction state ends for the player and the reserved special feature. FIG. 2 An effect mode in which the number of reserved balls is difficult to understand is displayed. As described above, in the period before the end of the time reduction in the time reduction state (9th time reduction, 10th time reduction), when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls other than the appropriate number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1) exists, The variation pattern table 202dh2 for shortening the time is specified so that the ultra-short variation (0.1 second) can be easily set as the variation time of the variation in FIG. Therefore, by executing the Danger effect, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the plurality of special figure 2 fluctuations corresponding to the first half of the time reduction period are digested in a short period of time.

In addition, when the Danger flag 223he is set to ON, it is difficult to secure a large number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 when the time saving state ends. Therefore, when a small hit is won, It is configured to execute a guidance effect (see FIG. 257 (b)) for guiding the player to win a V prize. With this configuration, even if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small, if it is difficult to secure a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls within the remaining time saving period, Instead of a selection effect (see FIG. 258) that allows the player to select whether or not to win a V prize, a guidance effect (see FIG. 257 (b)) that guides the player to win a V prize can be executed, and the player can perform extremely. It is possible to suppress the selection of a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

The game waiting flag 223hf is a flag for indicating that the effect (game waiting effect) shown in FIG. 255 (a) is being executed, and is executed during the seventh special figure change in a short time. During the 1 hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 254 (a)), the special figure 2 hold ball number reached the upper limit (4), and the effect (MAX acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254 (b) was executed. In this state, it is set to ON when the 8th special figure variation of the time saving is executed with the middle variation (10-second variation) (see S9111 in FIG. 272). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) (see S8017 in FIG. 266), and the game waiting flag 223hf is set to ON (S8017: Yes in FIG. 266), that is, A display mode is set when a special figure 2 prize is generated while the game waiting effect is being executed (see S8018 in FIG. 266), and then turned off (see S8020 in FIG. 266).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to set various production modes to be executed in the time saving state, the number of times the special figure changes during the time saving state (the number of times the special symbol changes) and the special figure hold. It is configured to set various flags based on the number of balls (number of reserved balls in special figure 2) and the selected fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is increased based on the setting status of various flags. It is configured to set a display mode for guiding the player whether the state is good to be allowed or the state is not allowed to be increased. Further, when it is in a good state to increase the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, a display for guiding the player of the range (allowable range) of the amount of increase in the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 which is advantageous to the player. It is configured to set the mode. This makes it possible to inform the player of the optimum game method to be executed during the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the transition of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 during the time saving state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (the number of balls held in Special Figure 2), and the fluctuation time in Special Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 263, in the present embodiment, the remaining time reduction is 10 to 5 (1st to 6th time reduction), the remaining time reduction is 4 or 3 (7th or 8th time reduction). ), The period before the end of the time reduction of 2 or 1 (9th or 10th time reduction) and the period before the end of the time reduction are divided into 3 periods, and the second special symbol changes for each period. The time saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is defined so that different variation times can be selected as the time (special figure 2 variation time).

In addition, when selecting the special figure 2 variable time in each period, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is referred to, and a different special figure 2 variable time is selected according to the reserved special figure 2 reserved ball number. It is configured as follows. Then, depending on the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time selected for each period in the time saving state, a state in which it is easy to acquire a new special figure 2 reserved ball during the special figure 2 fluctuation and a state in which it is difficult to acquire it. It is configured so that and can be revealed.

In addition, when a state in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball appears (for example, during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation in which a long fluctuation time is selected), it is more final to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball. It is configured to provide a case where the player is advantageous and a case where the player is disadvantageous. With this configuration, it is possible to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball depending on whether or not it is easy for the player who is executing the game in the time saving state to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not it is in a state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the pull-back game (the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special figure 2 reserved ball) executed after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set is advantageous to the player. In other words, various guidance effects (see FIGS. 254 to 258) for guiding the game method during the time saving state are executed so that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is increased. It is configured to do. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game in the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 263, during the normal time saving period, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the ultra-short fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of 0.1 second is set. This 0.1 second is a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state, and in the present embodiment, the second entrance 6400 is reached in one game per game. Since the game is configured to end when one game ball enters, the second special symbol does not secure the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during this normal period of time reduction. The lottery is executed. In addition, during one game per game, a plurality of game balls may be connected to enter the second entrance 6400, but in this case as well, a plurality of second special fluctuations are executed in a short time. Therefore, the game during the normal period of time reduction is not executed while maintaining the state in which the number of reserved balls is secured.

Then, when the normal time reduction period elapses and the period shifts to the preparation period for the end of the time reduction, the middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) is selected with a probability of about 3/4, and the ultra-short fluctuation (0.1) with a probability of about 1/4. Seconds) is selected. When the middle variation is selected in the special figure 2 variation in which the number of remaining time reductions is 4 (7th time reduction), the effect of accumulating the reserved balls shown in FIG. 254 (a) (accumulation effect) is executed. Then, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is accumulated up to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the execution of this "accumulation effect" (when the special figure 2 reserved MAX is reached), the special figure 2 change to be executed next. (The special figure variation in which the number of remaining time reductions is 3 (8th time reduction)), the standby effect of not acquiring the new special figure 2 reserved ball shown in FIG. 255 (a) is executed.

According to the production mode (guidance content) during the standby effect, when the special figure change of the 8th time reduction is completed without acquiring a new special figure 2 reserved ball, the period shifts to the period before the end of the time reduction, and the 9th time reduction. The 0.1 second fluctuation is executed, and the long fluctuation of 20 seconds is executed at the 10th time reduction. During the 10th long fluctuation of the time reduction, an effect (see FIG. 258) for urging the player to acquire the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 up to the upper limit is executed. Therefore, in the flow shown in FIG. 263 (a), it is easy to secure a large number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 at the end of the time saving state.

On the other hand, when the standby effect is being executed during the 8th time reduction special figure 2 fluctuation, the player accidentally acquires a new special figure 2 holding ball, or the 7th time reduction special figure. Fig. 2 When the number of reserved balls cannot be obtained up to the upper limit during the accumulation effect executed during the fluctuation, or when the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is selected as the special figure 2 fluctuation for the 7th time reduction. Is a storage effect that allows the special figure 2 reserved balls to be stored until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls shown in FIG. 255 (b) reaches a specific number (3) during the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation of the time saving. The second save production) is executed. Then, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is set to 3 during this second storage effect (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time of the 8th special figure fluctuation stop in the time saving is 3), the above-mentioned figure The production of the period before the end of the time reduction is executed in the same flow as in 263 (a).

In addition, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is increased to 4 during this second accumulation production (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time of the 8th special figure fluctuation stop in the time saving is 4), the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 263 (b), the ultra-short variation of 0.1 seconds is executed for all the special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the 9th time reduction and the 10th time reduction, that is, the period before the end of the time reduction. Therefore, the expected value of acquiring the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is low (the expected value of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 at the end of the time saving is about 2).

Furthermore, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes 2 during this 2nd accumulation production (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time of the 8th special figure fluctuation stop is 2), the time reduction 9 Long fluctuation is executed as the second special figure 2 fluctuation. Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is acquired up to the upper limit during the 9th long fluctuation of the time reduction, as shown in FIG. 263 (c), the special Figure 2 fluctuation of the 10th time reduction exceeds 0.1 seconds. Since the short fluctuation is executed, the expected value of acquiring the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is medium (the expected value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is about 3). It becomes a flow.

Here, if only one special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired during the 9th time reduction long fluctuation, the long variation is also executed in the subsequent 10th special figure 2 fluctuation, so FIG. 263 (a). ), It becomes easy to secure a large number of reserved balls at the end of the time saving state (FIG. 263 (d)).

In addition, in a time-saving state, a game in which the number of reserved balls is not intentionally accumulated in Special Figure 2, specifically, a game in which a small number (1) of game balls are launched at the timing when the electric accessory 6400a is released (1). When the stop shot is performed, as shown in FIG. 263 (e), the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed with an ultra-short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds even in the time reduction end preparation period and the time reduction end pre-end period. This is the flow of the game in which the expectation of acquiring the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is the lowest (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving is about 0).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, a disadvantageous period (a period in which it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reserved balls) is set in the first half period of the time saving state, and an advantageous period (special figure 2 reserved balls number) is set in the latter half period. It is configured so that it is possible to set a period) that makes it easy to obtain. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the big hit game based on the small hit won during the second half period than to execute the big hit game based on the small hit won during the first half period. It can be easily set.

In addition, even during the advantageous period, it is better to interrupt the right-handed game for a predetermined period (when the right-handed game is executed with a predetermined firing interval) than to continuously execute the right-handed game. It is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player who is playing in a time-saving state with a novel game property of interrupting a right-handed game.

Furthermore, by acquiring a specific number of special figure 2 reserved balls corresponding to the remaining time reduction number (time reduction number), a pullback game that is advantageous to the player as a pullback game executed at the end of the time reduction (at the end of the jackpot game). Since it is configured so that the player can execute the above, the player can be interested in the timing of acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if a specific number of special figures corresponding to the remaining time reduction (time reduction number) cannot be obtained, a specific number of special figures corresponding to the remaining time reduction number (time reduction number) can be obtained again. 2 Since it is configured to be able to provide an opportunity to acquire the number of reserved balls, it is possible to make the player continue to play an ambitious game until the time saving state ends.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the content of the control process of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the main control device 110 of the eleventh embodiment, the same control processing as that of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the configuration of the data table (see FIGS. 259 to 261) referred to in the various processes is changed. , The operation content of the small hit game executed at the time of winning the small hit (opening operation pattern of the opening / closing door 6500f1) is changed, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the operation content (opening operation pattern of the opening / closing door 6500f1) during the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described. The opening pattern of the opening / closing door 6500f1 in the eleventh embodiment is configured so that the closing period during the small hit game is shorter than the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 6500f1 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 180). It is configured so that the game ball does not easily flow down to the downstream side of the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game. Specifically, the small hit game is executed in an opening pattern in which a closing period of 0.1 seconds and an opening operation of 0.6 seconds as one set are repeated three times after the small hit game is started. To.

Since 0.1 seconds set as the closing period is shorter than the period required for the game ball to pass through the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 in the closed state, the small hit game Even when the game ball reaches the opening / closing door 6500f1 during the closing period, the opening / closing door 6500f1 is opened and the V winning device 6500 can be awarded a prize before passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of opening patterns for the small hit game may be facilitated, and the small hit types set for the winning small hits and the opening patterns to be executed may be different depending on the game state at the time of winning. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game, the winning game ball passes through the V winning switch 6500e3, and the big hit starts after the small hit game ends. That is, it is configured so that if even one game ball is won by the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game, the big hit is started, but it is not limited to this. For example, a game ball is provided with a plurality of paths in the V winning device 6500 and a distribution member for distributing the game ball flowing down in the V winning device 6500 to one of the above-mentioned plurality of paths. It may be configured so that the V winning switch 6500e3 can be passed only when the player flows down a specific route.

Further, in this case, an opening pattern for opening the opening / closing door 6500f1 a plurality of times is set as a small hit game, and the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 only at a specific opening among the plurality of opening. You may. With this configuration, when a small hit game is executed, the V winning device 6500 is made to win a game ball and only the prize ball is obtained, and the V winning device 6500 is made to win a game ball and a prize is awarded. The game of winning the ball and the jackpot can be executed only by switching the timing at which the player wins the game ball to the V winning device 6500.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the game balls are suppressed from flowing down to the downstream side of the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game so that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 cannot be increased during the small hit game. It is configured to execute the small hit game with the opening pattern, but the opening and closing door 6500f1 is closed during the small hit game, for example, when a specific small hit game is executed. The closing period may be configured to be longer than other small hit games. As a result, when a specific small hit game is executed, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 during the small hit game. Therefore, even if the small hit game is executed with the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 being 0, a chance to increase the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 can be left, and the player is expected to the end. You can play the game while holding it.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the content of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 273. In the eleventh embodiment, the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264) is won instead of the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 56) with respect to the above-mentioned seventh embodiment (first embodiment). The winning information-related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) is replaced with the information-related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57), and the hit-related process 11 (see S2296 in FIG. 264) is replaced with the hit-related process (see S2212 in FIG. 57). ) Is replaced with the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63), the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) is executed, and the stop command process 11 (see S2291 in FIG. 270) is added. Everything else is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 11 (S2195) will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 11 (S2195). The command determination process 11 (S2195) is a process executed in place of the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see S2113 of FIG. 56), and is a command determination process of the first embodiment described above. (See S2113 in FIG. 56), when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information-related process 11 is executed (S2295), and it is determined that the winning-related command has been received. In this case (S2211: Yes), the hit-related process 11 is executed (S2296), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2297). Further, in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, in the eleventh embodiment, the lottery right of the second special symbol is configured to be hold-stored, so that when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received ( S2207), included in the hold ball number command received by the hold ball number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b2) corresponding to the special symbol type indicated by the received hold ball number command. It differs in that it executes the process of storing information. Other than that, they are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the winning information-related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) executed in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 265. The prize information-related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) is a process executed in place of the prize information-related process (see FIGS. 57 and S2210) in the first embodiment, and the second special symbol is won during the time saving state. When an information command is received, control for changing the effect mode of various effects (see FIGS. 254 to 258) being executed is executed.

When the winning information-related processing 11 (S2295) is executed, first, the same processing of S2301 and S2302 as the winning information-related processing (see FIGS. 57 and S2210) in the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, when it is determined that the processing of S2302 is not in the time saving state (time saving) (S2302: No), the processing of S2312 which is the same as the prize information related processing (see FIGS. 57 and S2210) in the first embodiment, and the processing of S2312. , S2311 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2302 that the time is being shortened (in the time saving) (S2302: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning information command received this time includes the winning information of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the winning information of the second special symbol is included (S2395: Yes), the special drawing 2 winning process is executed (S2396), the process of S2311 is executed, and this process is performed. finish. If it is determined in the processing of S2395 that the winning information of the second special symbol is not included (only the winning information of the first special symbol is included) (S2395: No), the processing of S2396 is skipped. , S2311 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266). This special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is a process executed when the winning information of the second special symbol is received during the time saving state, and various effects being executed (see FIGS. 254 to 258). ) Is changed based on the newly acquired special figure 2 reserved ball.

When the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, it is determined whether the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to on (S8001), and if it is determined that it is set to on. (S8001: Yes), Did the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol) become 4 (upper limit) by receiving the reserved ball number command corresponding to the winning information command received this time? Is determined (S8002). In the process of S8002, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 4 (upper limit number) (S8002: Yes), a display mode indicating the reserved MAX is set (S8003), and a display mode indicating the game standby is set. It is set (S8004), the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to on, the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to off (S8006), the process proceeds to the process of S8022 described later, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8002, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not 4 (upper limit number) (S8002: No), a display mode indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8007), and the process proceeds to S8022. Transition.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8001 that the acquisition effect set flag 223ha is not set to ON (S8001: No), then it is determined whether the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is set to ON. Then (S8008), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S8008: Yes), the number of reserved balls corresponding to the winning information command received this time is received, so that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (second) It is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols) is 4 (upper limit number) (S8009).

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is 4 (upper limit number) (S8009: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8010). The Danger flag 223he is set to ON (S8011), the second acquisition effect setting flag 223hb is set to Off, and the process proceeds to S8022. If it is determined in the processing of S8009 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is not 4 (upper limit number), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is held. It is determined whether the number of stored items) is 3 (specific number) (S8013), and if it is determined to be 3 (specific number) (S8013: Yes), a display mode indicating an appropriate number of holdings is set (S8014). , The display mode indicating the game standby is set (S8015), and the process proceeds to S8022.

Further, in the process of S8013, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is not 3 (specific number), a display mode indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8016). , S8022. In the process of S8008, when it is determined that the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is not set to ON (S8008: No), it is determined whether the game waiting flag 223hf is set to ON (S8017). When it is determined that it is set to ON (S8017: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the number of holdings is set (S8018), the Danger flag 223he is set to ON (S8019), and the game waiting flag 223hf is set. It is set to off (S8020), and the process proceeds to S8022.

If it is determined in the process of S8017 that the game waiting flag 223hf is not set to ON (S8017: No), then the pre-end period setting process is executed (S8021), and then the received prize information command is executed. Information is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S8022), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the contents of the pre-end period processing (see S8021 of FIG. 267) executed in the special drawing 2 winning process (see S2396 of FIG. 266) will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing during the period before the end (see S8021 in FIG. 267). When the processing during the period before the end (see S8021 in FIG. 267) is executed, first, it is determined whether the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to ON (S8101), and it is set to ON. If it is determined (S7101: Yes), the display mode indicating the number of pending corrections is set (S8102), the display mode indicating the game standby is set (S8103), and the third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is set to off. , End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is not set to ON (S8101: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 11 (S2498) will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 11 (S2498). The jackpot end time process 11 (S2498) is a control process executed in the hit related process 11 (S2296 of FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 of FIG. 264), and is an effect at the end timing of the jackpot game. The process for setting the mode is executed.

When the jackpot end processing 11 (S2498) is executed, first. The information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S2501), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the time saving state (S2502). Then, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S2502: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S2502 that the time is shortened (S2502: Yes), then the special symbol 2 hold (hold memory of the second special symbol) is held based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b2. ), That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding ball is secured (S2591), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 holding ball is secured (S2591; Yes). ), A display command for indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed (S2592) is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2591 when it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured (S2591: Yes), the special figure 1 information of the next variation stored in the prize information storage area 223a (first special). The winning information stored in the holding area 1 of the symbol is read (S2593), and it is determined whether the read special figure 1 information includes hit information (information indicating that a big hit is won) (S2594). Then, when it is determined that the hit information is not included (S2954: No), a display command for extending the display period of the jackpot end screen by 0.1 seconds is set (S2595), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of S2594, when it is determined that there is a hit information, that is, when it is determined that a big hit is won by the first special symbol change executed immediately after (S2594: Yes), a big hit consecutive villa image is shown. A display command is set (S2596), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the small hit start command process 11 (S2491) will be described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit start command process 11 (S2491). The small hit start command process 11 (S2491) is a control process executed in the hit related process 11 (S2296 of FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 of FIG. 264), and is the start timing of the small hit game. The process for setting the effect mode in is executed.

When the small hit start command process 11 (S2491) is executed, first. Information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S3901), and it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state based on the read information (S3902). Then, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S3902: No), the start of the small hit effect is set (S3977), and this process ends.

In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the time is shortened (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the Danger flag 223he is set to ON (S3991), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S3901). S3991: Yes), a display mode for winning a V prize (aiming at the small hit V) of the game ball during the current small hit game is set (S3994), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3991 when the group is divided if the Danger flag 223he is not set to ON (S3991: No), then the number of reserved balls stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b2 (special). FIG. 2 The number of reserved balls) is read out (S3992), and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special FIG. When it is determined in the processing of S3993 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 4 (upper limit number), that is, when a big hit game is generated in this small hit game, four times after the end of the big hit game ( When it is determined that the second special symbol lottery (upper limit number of times) can be executed (S3993: Yes), the display mode for aiming the small hit V is set (S3994), and the process of S3997 is executed. , End this process.

Further, in the process of S3993, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not 4 (S3993: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 0 (S3995), which is 0. (S3995: Yes), a display mode (see FIG. 258) for allowing the player to select the game during the small hit is set (S3996), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process is terminated. .. If it is determined in the process of S3995 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not 0, that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 1 to 3 (S3995: No), the process of S3997 is executed and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, the contents of the stop command process 11 (S2291) will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 11 (S2291). This stop command processing 11 (S2291) is executed when a stop command for indicating that the special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed is received from the main control unit 110, and is based on the stop timing of the special symbol variation. The process for setting various production modes to be set is executed.

When the stop command process 11 (S2291) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S8201), and whether the current game state is the time saving state based on the read information. (S8202). Then, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (S8202: No), the stop display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S8211), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S8202 that the time is shortened (S8202: Yes), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation stop is the final fluctuation of the time shortened state (S8203). In the determination of S8203, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation stop is the final variation in the time reduction state based on the update information (time reduction number of times, remaining time reduction number of times) stored in the time reduction information update area 223g.

Here, when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation is (S8203: Yes), since it is the timing when the time saving state ends, various flags set to execute various effects during the time saving state (acquisition effect setting). Completed flag 223ha, 2nd acquisition effect set flag 223hb, 3rd acquisition effect set flag 223hc, MAX acquisition flag 223hd, Danger flag 223he, game waiting flag 223hf) are all set to off (S8204), processing of S8205. Move to. On the other hand, in the processing of S8203, when it is determined that it is not the time saving final fluctuation (S8203), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a big hit or a small hit fluctuation (S8206), and the current fluctuation is a big hit. Alternatively, if it is determined that the variation is not a small hit variation (outlier variation) (S8206: No), the process of S8211 is executed and the present process is terminated. In the process of S8206, if it is determined that the current variation is a big hit or a small hit variation (S8206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S8205.

In the process of S8205, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is read out (S8205), and whether the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is 4 (upper limit number). Is determined (S8207). When it is determined in the process of S8207 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 4 (upper limit number), that is, it is in a state where the second special symbol lottery can be executed four times (upper limit number of times) after the end of the time saving state. If it is determined (S8207: Yes), a display mode for showing that an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed is set as a game (pull-back game) after the end of the time saving state (S8208), and the process of S8211 is performed. Is executed to end this process.

Further, in the process of S8207, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not 4 (S8207: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 0 (S8209), which is 0. If it is determined (S8209: Yes), a display mode is set to indicate that a disadvantageous game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed (the pullback game is not executed) as a game (pullback game) after the end of the time saving state. (S8210), the process of S8211 is executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S8209 that the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is not 0, that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is 1 to 3 (S8209: No), the process of S8211 is executed and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, the contents of the effect setting process 11 (S2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 11 (S2891). This effect setting process 11 (S2891) is executed in place of the effect setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S2804 in FIG. 63), and the number of changes in the special figure (number of times of time reduction) in the time saving state is set. Processes for setting different production modes are executed accordingly.

When the effect setting process 11 (S2891) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (S2981), and if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S2981: No), the variable display mode. As a result, a variable display mode for a normal state corresponding to the lottery result is selected (S2982), and this process is terminated. In the process of S2981 when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S2981: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation executed this time is the second special symbol variation (special diagram 2 variation). (S2983), when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not a variation (the first special symbol variation) (S2983: No), the variation display mode is the variation display mode for the special figure 1 time saving state corresponding to the lottery result. Is selected (S2984) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2983, when it is determined that the variation is the special figure 2 (S2983: yes), then the special symbol variation this time is executed for the 1st to 6th time reductions (the first half period of the time reduction state). (S2985), and if it is determined that the time is 1 to 6 times (S2985: Yes), the variation display mode is the variation display mode for the special figure 2 time reduction state corresponding to the lottery result. Is selected (S2986) to end this process.

In the processing of S2983, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation is not the 1st to 6th time reduction (S2983: No), then the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is the 7th or 8th time reduction (the latter half of the time reduction state). Of the period, it is determined whether it is the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time reduction end preparation period (S2987), and the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is the 7th or 8th time reduction (of the latter half period of the time reduction state). If it is determined (S2987: Yes) that the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving end preparation period, the first effect setting process is executed (S2988), the process of S2896 is executed, and this process is terminated. ..

In the processing of S2987, when it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is not the 7th or 8th time reduction (the special figure 2 variation executed during the time reduction end preparation period in the latter half period of the time reduction state), that is, If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation this time is the 9th or 10th time reduction (the special figure 2 variation executed during the first half of the time reduction period in the latter half period of the time reduction state) (S2987: No), the first 2 The effect setting process is executed (S2989), the process of S2896 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988). This first effect setting process (S2988) is a process for setting an effect mode for the special figure 2 variation executed in the 7th time or the 8th time (the second half period of the time reduction state, the time reduction end preparation period). It is what you do.

When the first effect setting process (S2988) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure 2 fluctuation is the special figure fluctuation at the 7th rotation of the time reduction (S9101), and the special figure fluctuation at the 7th rotation of the time reduction is used. If it is determined to be present (S9101: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a middle variation (S9102). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not middle fluctuation (ultra-short fluctuation pattern) (S9102: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is in the middle by the processing of S9102 (S9102: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 4 (upper limit number) (S9103), 4 (upper limit number). If it is determined that this is not the case (S9103: No), the effect mode for prompting the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold is set (S9104), the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to on (S9105), and this process is terminated. .. Further, in the process of S9103, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not 4 (upper limit number) (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S9105.

In the processing of S9101, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 fluctuation is not the special figure fluctuation at the 7th rotation time (S9101: No), then the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is the special figure fluctuation at the 8th rotation time reduction. (S9106), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is the special figure fluctuation at the 8th rotation of the time saving (S9106: Yes), it is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is the middle fluctuation. Determine (S9107). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not middle fluctuation (ultra-short fluctuation pattern) (S9107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 9107 that the selected fluctuation pattern is a middle fluctuation (S9107: Yes), then it is determined whether the MAX acquisition flag 223 hd is set to ON (S9108), and MAX. If the acquisition flag 223 hd is not set to ON and the teams are divided (S9108: No), a production mode for prompting the number of reserved balls to be set to 3 is set (S9112), and the second acquisition effect setting is set. The completed flag 223hb is set to on (S9113), and this process ends.

In the process of S9108, if the MAX acquisition flag 223 hd is set to ON (S9108: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the game standby is set (S9109), and the MAX acquisition flag 223 hd is turned off. It is set (S9110), the game waiting flag 223hf is set to on (S9111), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the content of the second effect setting process (S2989) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be described. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989). This second effect setting process (S2989) is a process for setting an effect mode for the special figure 2 variation executed in the 9th or 10th time reduction (the period before the end of the time reduction in the latter half period of the time reduction state). It is what you do.

When the second effect setting process (S2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is the special figure fluctuation at the 9th rotation of the time reduction (S9201), and the special figure fluctuation at the 9th rotation of the time reduction If it is determined to be present (S9201: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a long variation (S9202). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not a long fluctuation (an ultra-short fluctuation pattern) (S9202: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is long in the process of S9202 (S9202: Yes), then, an effect mode for prompting to increase only one of the special figure 2 hold is set (S9203), and the second acquisition effect setting is set. The completed flag 223hc is set to on (S9204), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9201 when it is determined that the current special figure 2 fluctuation is not the special figure fluctuation at the 9th rotation time (S9201: No), then the special figure 2 fluctuation this time is the special figure at the 10th rotation time reduction. If it is determined whether it is a figure variation (last variation) (S9205) and it is determined that the special figure 2 variation this time is a special figure variation (last variation) at the 10th rotation of the time saving, it is selected (S9205: Yes). It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation (S9206). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not a long fluctuation (an ultra-short fluctuation pattern) (S9206: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S9206, when it is determined that the fluctuation is long (S9206: Yes), the effect mode for prompting the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold is set (S9207), and the acquisition effect setting flag 223ha is set to ON (S9208). ), End this process.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, at least a specific condition (acquisition of holding of special figure 2) is difficult to be established as a period in which a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. The advantageous period is set so that the period is set before the advantageous period in which the specific condition is likely to be satisfied, and the advantageous period is set more than when the jackpot game is executed before the advantageous period in the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the player is more advantageous when the jackpot game is executed after being set.

In addition, during the small hit game that is executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol that is mainly (priority) executed during the time saving state, the big hit game is executed by making the game ball V prize. It is configured so that it can be made. That is, it is configured so that the player can select at what timing in the time saving state the big hit game is to be executed, and whether or not the game ball is V-winned during the small hit game.

With this configuration, when a small hit game is executed during the disadvantageous period of the time saving state, it is executed during the disadvantageous period in order to ensure that the player executes the big hit game during the time saving state. Even if it is a small hit game, you can choose whether to play a game to make the game ball V prize, or to play a game that does not make the game ball V prize to execute the big hit game after the advantageous period is set. It is possible to provide a new playability.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the predetermined disadvantage period and the advantageous period are always set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting of the time saving state is set. Depending on the type of jackpot type set for the jackpot game that triggers the game and the game state at the time of winning, it is possible to set a time saving state in which only the disadvantageous period is set and a time saving state in which only the advantageous period is set. Is also good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is formed by one disadvantageous period (time saving 1st to 6th special figure fluctuation period) and one advantageous period (time saving 7th to 10th special figure fluctuation period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the disadvantageous period and the advantageous period may be set alternately. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set without triggering the jackpot winning, for example, the probability state of the normal symbol and the probability state of the special symbol are both variably configured as the game state, and four types of games are played. The states are a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a time saving state (low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a normal symbol high probability state) and a latent probability state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) can be set, and the probability variation state is set. , When the time saving state is set based on the condition for shifting (falling) the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, and when the time saving state is set when the jackpot is won. Then, the setting contents of the disadvantageous period and the advantageous period may be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first state in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is easily acquired within the advantageous period of the time saving state, and the second state in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is more difficult to be acquired than in the first state. , And the first state in which it is easy to obtain the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 based on the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 at the time when the change in special figure 2 during the advantageous period is executed, and the first state thereof. It is configured to variably set the second state, which is more difficult to obtain the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2.

As a result, it is easy to acquire the number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the time saving state based on the game result of how many special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired at what timing during the time saving state (during the advantageous period). Since (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time reduction) can be changed, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game including a new element of the acquisition timing of the special figure 2 reserved balls.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned first state and the second state are configured to be set by a predetermined specific setting method, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , Even if the setting method (setting condition) between the first state and the second state is different depending on the type of jackpot type set for the jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time saving state and the game state at the time of winning. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which game method should be played at what timing, so that the player gets bored with the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first state and the first state are based on the lottery result of one special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) and the variation pattern of the selected 1 special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation). It is configured to set two states, but is not limited to this, for example, a special symbol executed (set) within a predetermined period (for example, within a period until the special symbol variation is executed five times). The first state and the second state may be set by comprehensively discriminating the lottery result of the lottery and the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol. Further, an operating means that can be operated by the player may be provided, and the first state and the second state may be set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operating means.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the guidance effect that is used as a reference when the player selects the game method in the time saving state is configured to be executable, and the time saving game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player is executed. It is possible to suppress the storage. In the present embodiment, when the timing for allowing the player to select the game method arrives, the guidance effect is executed using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, but the present embodiment is limited to this. It is possible to execute a guidance effect that only informs the player that it is a period for selecting a game method, or a plurality of options are displayed as selectable choices for the player, but which game method is used. May be configured to inform the player that is a gaming method that is advantageous to the player in an incomprehensible manner. In addition, even if it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting whether or not the game method selected this time is the correct game method when the game is performed by the game method selected by the player. good.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the production modes of the various guidance effects described above are changed with reference to FIGS. 254 to 258 at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol or the timing of receiving the winning command of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect mode of the guidance effect may be configured at the fluctuation stop timing of the previous fluctuation. That is, when the game is executed by the game method according to the effect mode of the guide effect after visually recognizing the guide effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the timing at which the game can be executed by the appropriate game method. If so, the production mode of the guidance effect may be changed at any timing.

Furthermore, a plurality of appropriate game methods set for various game patterns that can occur during the time reduction state (a pattern that combines the number of time reductions and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) can be displayed so that the current game can be displayed. The pattern may be determined by the player, and then an appropriate game method may be selected and executed. In this case, a first notification mode (for example, a mode in which the number of time reductions and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 are displayed numerically) and the first notification mode in which the currently executing game pattern can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner and the first notification mode A second notification mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the mode (for example, a mode in which only one of the time reduction number and the special figure 2 reserved ball number is displayed numerically, and the time reduction number and the special figure 2 reserved ball number A mode in which the corresponding mark is displayed) is configured to be displayable, and the display conditions that are satisfied (for example, the conditions that are satisfied according to the operation result of the player with respect to the frame button 22 and the lottery result of the special symbol are used. It is preferable to configure so as to determine the notification mode to be displayed based on the conditions). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new enjoyment of letting the player predict the current game pattern.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired up to the upper limit during the period (advantageous period) in which the special figure 2 reserved ball can be easily acquired, the game is played. The first period, which tends to be advantageous to the player, the second period, which tends to be advantageous to the player when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is acquired up to a specific number (for example, 3), and only one reserved ball in Special Figure 2. It is possible to set a third period, which is likely to be advantageous to the player when acquired. As a result, even during the period in which the advantageous period is set, the game for increasing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to an arbitrary number is played instead of unnecessarily increasing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. Since it can be done by a person, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, since there is only one data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the first period, the second period, and the third period described above are used. However, the setting rule is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of data tables referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the time saving state are provided, and the above-mentioned first period, first period, first A plurality of setting rules for the two periods and the third period may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period are set for each execution period of the second special symbol change to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period may be set across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, or based on the elapsed time since the time saving state is set. The above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period may be set.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to notify the remaining time saving number of times, but the remaining time saving number of times is not displayed. It may be configured, or it may be configured to display the remaining time reduction number in an abstract manner. With this configuration, even if the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time-saving state, the display of the remaining time reduction number does not decrease rapidly, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a giving situation.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed, the effect mode of the guidance effect is set based on the selected variation pattern. Not limited to this, for example, based on the information (look-ahead information) included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110, the selected fluctuation pattern and lottery result are determined in advance, and the pre-determination result is used. It may be configured to set the effect mode based on. As a result, for example, when a special symbol lottery in which an ultra-short variation pattern is selected is won, in addition to the ultra-short variation (0.1 second) period, the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) Since it is possible to set an effect mode for showing the winning to the player by using the variation period of the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) executed before, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. it can.

In the eleventh embodiment, as a pull-back game (second special symbol lottery in the normal state) executed after the time-saving state is completed, the time-saving state for causing the player to execute an advantageous pull-back game is performed. Various guidance effects for guiding the game method to the player are configured to be executed without fail during the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a specific execution condition is satisfied during the time saving state. It may be configured to execute the various guidance effects described above only for the user. In this case, for example, when the special figure change during the time reduction end preparation period corresponding to the 7th or 8th time reduction is executed, whether or not it is better to newly acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball number. The initial effect that is difficult for the player to discriminate is executed, and the initial effect being executed is changed to the above-mentioned guidance effect according to the game method executed while the initial effect is being executed. Specifically, when the length of the period from the execution of the initial effect to the acquisition of a new number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is longer than the predetermined period, the guidance effect is executed. It is good to configure.

With this configuration, the ease of executing the guidance effect can be different depending on the game method (the firing interval of the game ball by the right-handed game) during the time saving state. It is possible to further increase the enjoyment of selecting a game method during the time saving state.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the game method during the time saving state (presence or absence of the right-handed game) is set for each special symbol change (special figure 2 change) executed during the time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be set for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations (special figure 2 fluctuation), or for one special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation), the first half. The game method may be set so as to encourage right-handed games during the period and prohibit right-handed games during the latter half of the period.

<About the production modification example in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the effect executed during the time saving state of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described based on the flow shown in FIG. 263 described above. In the eleventh embodiment described above, as an effect to be executed during the time saving state, a storage effect of newly acquiring a specific number of special figure 2 reserved balls based on the number of time saving fluctuations and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. (For example, see FIG. 254 (a)) is configured to execute, and when a specific number of special figure 2 reserved balls are newly acquired during the accumulation effect, the special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired for a predetermined period. It was configured to execute a standby effect (see, for example, FIG. 254 (b)) so as not to acquire any more.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned storage effect, when the special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time is a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more. It is configured to be executed when it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls rather than the number of special figure 2 reserved balls currently acquired, and the accumulation thereof. When a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired while the ro effect is being executed, it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reserved balls after acquisition is the number of special figure 2 reserved balls that is advantageous to the player. Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is advantageous to the player, a standby effect is executed so as not to acquire a new special figure 2 reserved ball until the final change in the time saving state is executed. It was configured like this. Furthermore, if a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired while the standby effect is being executed, it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball has been acquired excessively, and this time saving state is disadvantageous to the player. It was configured to perform a DANGER effect indicating that.

Then, the above-mentioned standby effect or DANGER effect is configured to be continuously executed until the end timing of the time-saving state, and the normal state is based on the number of reserved balls acquired at the end of the time-saving state. It was configured to execute a pull-back effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during.

On the other hand, in this effect modification example, the winning information included in the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired is pre-read (preliminarily determined), and the effect based on the pre-determination result is obtained. Is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the standby effect.

Next, the production contents of this production modification example will be described. First, the content of the effect executed in correspondence with the flow of FIG. 263 (a) will be described. As shown in FIG. 263 (a), when the middle variation (10-second variation) is set (selected) as the special figure 2 variation of the 7th time reduction (4 times of remaining time reduction), the eleventh embodiment described above. The same guidance effect (accumulation effect) for accumulating the number of reserved balls up to the upper limit (4) is executed.

Then, the guidance effect (accumulation effect) is executed until the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed, or until the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit. Here, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit, a standby effect for a predetermined period is executed. In this effect modification example, an effect in which the player positively releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51 is executed as a standby effect. Specifically, a plurality of decorative members provided on the pachinko machine 10, specifically, a plurality of decorative members provided at positions separated by a size larger than the size of a human palm can be touched at the same time (touch effect). As a result, a touch effect is executed in which the characters "continue to touch the decorative member" and an icon imitating the decorative member to be touched by the player are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The above-mentioned decorative member is provided with a detection means (touch sensor) capable of detecting that the player is touching, and according to the detection result of the detection means during the period during which the above-mentioned touch effect is being executed. It is configured to execute an operation effect that changes the effect mode. Specifically, as the effect mode of the operation effect, the initial display mode is first displayed, and then the length of the period during which the detection means detects the player's operation, and the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball. It is configured so that the effect mode of the operation effect can be changed based on the pre-reading result.

In this case, when it is determined that there is a specific pre-reading result (big hit) as the pre-reading result, and when it is determined that the player has touched a plurality of decorative members for a predetermined period or more, the special feature corresponding to the pre-reading result. FIG. 2 is configured to notify the player before the variation is performed. With this configuration, the decorative member is positively determined for the player in order to quickly grasp the result of the game to be executed later (the game result corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold). You can touch it for more than a period of time. Therefore, since it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation handle 51 during the period when the standby effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special figure 2 reserved ball is excessively acquired during the standby effect. it can.

Further, in this effect modification example, when the special figure 2 holding ball is acquired during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the 7th time reduction, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the 8th special figure 2 variation of the time reduction) to be executed next is executed. Pre-reading (preliminary determination) whether the (variation time) is an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (variation time 0.1 seconds) or a middle fluctuation (variation time 10 seconds), for example, the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation of the time reduction If it is 0.1 seconds, the standby effect for the first period (for example, 5 seconds) is executed after the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit, and the 8th change in Special Figure 2 in 10 seconds. In some cases, the standby effect for the second period (for example, 15 seconds) is executed after the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit. In addition, the period set as the execution period of the standby effect is the end timing of the standby effect executed when the upper limit number of the special figure 2 reserved balls is reached in the shortest period during the change of the special figure 2 for the seventh time reduction. The length may overlap with the final fluctuation period in the time saving state.

In this way, by pre-reading the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed later and setting the effect period of the standby effect to be executed based on the pre-reading result, the special symbol executed within the target period of the standby effect is set. Since it is not necessary to set the standby effect every time the variation (variation in Special Figure 2) is executed, the processing load related to the effect setting can be reduced.

In addition, by executing the standby effect for a predetermined period, for example, it is better to reach the upper limit of the special figure 2 reserved ball earlier during the 7th change of the special figure 2 in the time saving, so that the upper limit is reached earlier. It is possible to make the end timing of the standby effect earlier than when it could not be done. Therefore, it is possible to accelerate the execution timing of the accumulation effect (see FIG. 256) executed during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, and to acquire the special figure 2 reserved balls up to the maximum number during the final fluctuation of the time saving state. , Can be executed with a margin.

Further, for example, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired up to the upper limit number during the 7th special figure 2 change in the time saving, as a pre-reading result, the winning information corresponding to the last acquired special figure 2 reserved ball is hit information (small). When it is determined in advance that a hit, a big hit) is included, a special standby effect different from the normal standby effect is executed. Specifically, as a result of the above-mentioned touch effect and operation effect, an effect of notifying the player in advance that the most advantageous game will be executed after the end of the time saving state is executed.

That is, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired up to the upper limit number during the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation, the last acquired special figure 2 reserved ball is executed next when the time saving state ends. 2 Special symbol lottery, that is, the special symbol 2 reserved ball used for the second special symbol lottery that is executed first after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. That is, when the special standby effect is executed, the player can know in advance that the game that is most advantageous to the player, that is, winning in the second special symbol lottery during the normal state, is executed. .. Therefore, since the player enthusiastically executes the touch effect while expecting that the special standby effect is executed, the player can enthusiastically participate in the game and participate in the touch effect. As a result, it is possible to easily take the hand off the operation handle 51, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a new special figure 2 holding ball is acquired during the period in which the standby effect is being executed. ..

In addition, for example, a small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the standby effect, specifically, in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 263 (a), the special figure 2 fluctuation in the ninth time reduction. If it is determined in advance that a winner will be won, a special selection effect will be executed instead of the standby effect. In this special selection effect, a player as shown in FIG. 258 is allowed to select whether to perform a game aiming for a V prize during a small hit game or a game not aiming for a V prize during a small hit game. Is executed. The effect mode of this special selection effect is configured so that a different effect mode is set based on the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 reserved ball other than the special figure 2 reserved ball corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation of the ninth time reduction. For example, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the 7th special figure 2 change in a short time, the preliminary determination result for the last acquired special figure 2 reserved ball is a hit (small hit). If this is the case, a special selection effect mode is set to show that it is advantageous not to aim for a V prize during the small hit game based on the small hit that is won in the 9th special figure 2 variation of the time saving, and other special figures are set. 2 If there is no pre-determination result indicating winning in the pre-determination result for the reserved ball, a special selection effect mode is set in which the player arbitrarily selects which game to execute. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an excessively disadvantageous game, so that the player selects an unfavorable game and the motivation to play is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired excessively, as shown in FIG. 257, the DANGER effect is executed by using the remaining period in the time saving state (remaining time saving period). Was configured in. Then, the DANGER effect is terminated at the timing when the time saving state ends, the reserved number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is notified, and the pullback effect is executed.

On the other hand, in this effect modification example, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired excessively, the second special symbol change (special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state) is executed after the normal state is set. It is configured so that the DANGER effect using the fluctuation period of the second special symbol variation) using the reserved ball is also executed. That is, the end timing of the DANGER effect is different from that of the eleventh embodiment described above. As a result, when the DANGER effect is completed, the game of executing the first special symbol lottery in the normal state is executed. With this configuration, when the DANGER effect is executed, it is difficult to give an opportunity to acquire a large amount of special figure 2 reserved balls during the time saving state, and the pullback effect is not executed either. It is possible to notify the player that the game situation is unfavorable. Further, since the DANGER effect can be executed by using the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation that is executed after the normal state is set, from the execution of the DANGER effect to the arrival of the end timing of the time saving state. When the period is extremely short, for example, in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 263 (b), when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is set to the upper limit just before the end of the change in the special figure 2 for the eighth time reduction. It is possible to prevent the DANGER effect from being completed in an instant and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand to be executed.

Further, the above-mentioned effect period of the DANGER effect is the entire period of the remaining period from the execution of the DANGER effect to the end of the time saving state and the execution period of the second special symbol change executed after the normal state is set. Is not necessary to use, for example, when the number of executions of the second special symbol variation executed after the normal state is set is two or more, the first execution is executed after the normal state is set. 2 The DANGER effect is terminated in correspondence with the stop display timing of the special symbol variation, a display mode indicating that the pullback effect is executed as the effect result of the DANGER effect is displayed, and then the pullback effect is executed. You may.

In addition, as in this effect modification example, a configuration in which a series of effects are executed using the remaining period in the time saving state and the execution period of the second special symbol change executed after the normal state is set. It may be used for a standby effect. In this case, the effect mode of the standby effect (at least a part of the effect modes included in the standby effect) is configured to be variable according to the length of the period during which the standby effect is executed, and the execution period of the standby effect is long. The longer the game, the more favorable the game result may be to the player.

<About the modified example of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above, specifically, an example in which the technical idea of the eleventh embodiment is applied to the technique described in the eleventh embodiment described above will be described. In the eighth embodiment described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and a plurality of time saving ending conditions (left-handed game, right-handed game) are further provided according to the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) executed by the player. Of the special figure 1 end condition and the special figure 2 end condition), the time saving end condition that is likely to be satisfied was configured to be different. Then, it is determined whether the state is immediately before each time reduction end condition is satisfied (the state before the time reduction end is satisfied), and when it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied with respect to one time reduction end condition. , It was configured to execute an effect (game method guidance effect) for performing a game by a game method in which other time reduction end conditions are more likely to be satisfied than one time reduction end condition in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied.

That is, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to maximize the enjoyment of the game in the time saving state to the player (in order to lengthen the game period in the time saving state), one of the plurality of time saving end conditions Only the element for satisfying the time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol) is updated, and the element for satisfying the other time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol) is completely updated. It was configured to prevent the time saving state from ending when it was not done.

Further, in the eighth embodiment described above, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and the time saving state is terminated with the lottery rights for the second special symbol reserved and stored. As a result, in the normal state set after the end of the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, can be executed. In other words, it is possible to end the time saving state while maximizing the number of special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state and holding more lottery rights for the second special symbol. It was configured to run.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is easier to acquire the lottery right than when the gaming state other than the time saving state (for example, the normal state) is set. The time saving end condition (special figure 2 end condition) is set only for the second special symbol, and the number of lottery (variation number) of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). The special figure 2 end condition is satisfied when the above is reached, and the time saving state is configured to end, and the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery. It differs from the above-described eighth embodiment in that it is configured. Since the specific control content for executing the second special symbol lottery with priority over the first special symbol lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this modification, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the lottery right of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed) and the end of the special figure 2. Based on the number of remaining lottery of special symbols until the condition is satisfied (number of remaining time reductions), the variation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state can be selected differently.

Specifically, from the time the time saving state is set until the remaining time saving number reaches 5 times, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is a short time based on the same fluctuation pattern table as the eighth embodiment described above. (Short variation pattern A) is configured to be selected, the number of remaining time reductions is 5 to 3, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 2 or more, the above-mentioned short variation pattern is selected. When a fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation pattern (for example, 10 to 20 seconds)) having a fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected as the fluctuation pattern A is selected and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one, When the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern A is selected and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern A (ultra-short fluctuation pattern (for example, 0. 1 second)) is configured to be selected.

Then, when the number of remaining time reductions is 2 or 1 (final fluctuation in the time reduction state) and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, 2 or 3, the above-mentioned ultra-short fluctuation pattern ( 0.1 seconds) is selected, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation pattern (for example, 30 seconds)) having a fluctuation time longer than the above-mentioned medium fluctuation pattern is generated. It is configured to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state different depending on the game method executed during the time saving state.

Here, the content of the game in the time saving state in this modified example will be described. In this modification, as in the eighth embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, the game method in which the right-handed game is performed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is the most advantageous advantage for the player. It is configured to be a method.

While the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the interval at which the lottery right of the second special symbol is acquired is shorter than the interval at which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. , The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol), the execution period of the game per normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation, and the arrangement on the game board 13. Arrangement intervals of various devices are set. As a result, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the game is executed toward the final fluctuation of the time saving state while maintaining the upper limit value (4) of the reserved memory number of the second special symbol. Will be done.

After that, when explaining the flow of the game in the time saving state, the period from the time saving state is set until the remaining time saving number reaches 5 times is the time saving normal period, and the remaining time saving number is 5 to 3 times. Will be described as a period before the end of the time reduction, and a period in which the number of remaining time reductions is two or one (final change in the time reduction state) is referred to as a period before the end of the time reduction.

As described above, when the game is executed in the time saving state while the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is maintained at the upper limit value (4 pieces), the ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) is performed in the period before the end of the time saving. Will be selected. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time saving state ends (when the final fluctuation of the special figure during the time saving state is stopped and displayed) tends to decrease. Specifically, the second special symbol fluctuation is an ultra-short fluctuation pattern in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit value (4) and the number of remaining time reductions is "2" (99th rotation in the time reduction state). The second special symbol variation with the remaining time reduction number of "1" (100th rotation in the time reduction state) is executed in the ultra-short variation pattern while the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to three. To. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction is two.

In this way, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (4) and the player enters during the first half of the time reduction end, the second special symbol executed twice during the period before the time reduction end Since the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is set, it becomes difficult to newly acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, if the right-handed game in the time-saving state is temporarily interrupted and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set to other than 4 when rushing into the first half of the time-saving end, the reserved balls of the second special symbol The fluctuation time is set for the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the period before the end of the time reduction so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction tends to increase as compared with the case where the number is four.

For example, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when rushing into the first half of the end of the time reduction is 3, the fluctuation of the second special symbol with the remaining time reduction number of "2" (99th rotation in the time reduction state) is extremely short. The second special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to two, and the remaining time reduction number is "1" (100th rotation in the time reduction state). Will be done. Therefore, since the final fluctuation in the time-saving state can be executed for a long time, it is possible to easily acquire a new reserved ball of the second special symbol during the final fluctuation. Further, in this modification, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected as the long fluctuation pattern, and by executing the right-handed game for 30 seconds during the time saving state, the holding ball of the second special symbol is held. Since it is configured so that 3 or more can be newly acquired, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction can be easily obtained by simply continuing the right-handed game during the time reduction final fluctuation in which the long variation pattern is selected. It can be the upper limit (4 pieces).

Next, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when rushing into the first half of the time reduction end is two, the second special symbol fluctuation with the remaining time reduction number of "2" (99th rotation in the time reduction state) is long. When executed in the fluctuation pattern, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be temporarily set to the upper limit value (4) by continuing the right-handed game during the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Then, with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol set to the upper limit value (4), the second special symbol variation with the remaining time reduction number of "1" (100th rotation in the time reduction state) is executed in the ultra-short variation pattern. Will be done. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction can be set to three. That is, it is possible to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction as compared with the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time reduction state.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one when entering during the first half of the end of the time reduction, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, a new second special symbol is reserved. When the ball is acquired and the second special symbol variation with the remaining time reduction number of "2" (99th rotation in the time reduction state) is executed, the ultra-short variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. To. Similarly, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one and the second special symbol variation with the remaining time reduction number of "1" (100th rotation in the time reduction state) is executed, the second special symbol is executed. It is executed in the ultra-short fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation. In other words, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the predetermined number (2) and the player rushes into the first half of the end of the time saving, there is an opportunity to newly acquire the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. The time saving state will end without giving.

As described above, in this modified example, the expected acquisition of the reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction is expected according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when rushing into the first half of the end of the time reduction in the time reduction state. Since the values can be made different, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting a game method during a short time.

Further, in this modification, the right-handed game is temporarily interrupted, or a game other than the normal right-handed game (left-handed game) is performed, as compared with the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state. Since it is configured so that it is easier to provide a game that is advantageous to the player in the period after the time saving state is completed, the game is played against the player who is playing the time saving state. It can provide fun to change the way.

Further, in this modification, when the right-handed game executed during the time saving state is interrupted more than necessary, the privilege provided to the player in the period after the time saving state ends (the second in the normal state). (Execution of special symbol lottery) is configured to be less than when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to have a player who is playing in a time-saving state not only change the game method but also play the game while considering the length of the period for changing the game method. Therefore, it is possible to make the game more interested in the game during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, the period during the time reduction state, which is before the period before the end of the time reduction (the period in which the number of remaining time reductions is 2 or 1 (the final change in the time reduction state)), is the period before the end of the time reduction. (Period with 5 to 3 remaining time reductions) is also configured so that a variation pattern different from the normal time reduction period (period until the remaining time reduction reaches 5 times) is selected. Depending on the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the period, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when rushing into the first half of the time saving end is arbitrarily changed by the player selecting the game method. It is configured so that it can be done.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "3 or 4" in the time saving end preparation period, the fluctuation time is longer than the short fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving normal period. The medium fluctuation pattern is easily selected, and when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering during the first half of the time saving is the upper limit (4 pieces). ) Is easy to become. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "1 or 2" in the time saving end preparation period, the fluctuation pattern is selected within the range that can be selected during the time saving normal period. It is configured so that when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "0" when entering during the first half of the end of the time reduction, an ultra-short fluctuation pattern shorter than the short fluctuation pattern is selected. ing.

That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed by selecting the above-mentioned medium fluctuation pattern, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored at the time of entering the period before the end of the time reduction is the upper limit. It is easy to become a value (4 pieces). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rushing into the first half of the end of the time saving without newly acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol even though the right-handed game is continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a privilege according to the content of the game method to be executed during the time saving state.

Further, in this modification, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 when the time saving end preparation period is entered, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is an ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 seconds). Is configured to be selected. Therefore, in order to prevent the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from rushing into the first half of the end of the time saving with the upper limit value (4 pieces), the game in the time saving state is performed while interrupting the right-handed game more than necessary. When executed, that is, in order not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the right-handed game is not performed while the second special symbol change is being executed, and the second special symbol change is stopped. It is possible to prevent a game method (so-called stop-hit game) in which a right-handed game is performed after the game is performed.

Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in the present modification, as a time saving effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state, the first time saving effect mode executed during the time saving normal period. The second time-saving effect mode executed during the time-saving end preparation period and the third time-saving effect mode executed during the time-saving end preparatory period can be set. Here, an effect mode peculiar to this modification will be described.

As described above, in this modification, if the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation selected is different based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining time reductions in the time saving state. By making the expected value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol acquired at the end of the time saving different, the degree of advantage of the game executed after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state is made. Is configured to be different. That is, it is configured so that the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be changed according to the game method selected by the player in the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game in the time saving state.

Further, as described above, in the present modification, the period during which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased (the period during which the second special symbol variation in which the long variation pattern is set is executed) is When set, the case where it is better to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the case where it is better not to increase it are configured to occur according to the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state. Therefore, whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when the period (easy period) in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased for the player has arrived. Can provide fun to let you choose.

In this modification, only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (100 times) is set as the time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state. The time saving end condition may be different depending on the big hit type set in the big hit winning that triggered the setting of the time saving state. For example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 50. The jackpot type that sets the time saving end condition that is established when the number of times is reached, the jackpot type that sets the time saving end condition that is established when the time reaches 75 times, and the time saving end that is established when the time is reached once. A jackpot type for which conditions are set may be provided.

In this case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the duration of the time saving state, whether or not the player increases the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the easy period is determined based on the remaining time saving number. It can be difficult to distinguish.

Further, in this modification, as described above, only the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set as the time saving ending condition, but the result of the special symbol lottery is, for example, not limited to this. A time saving end condition (lottery result end condition) that is established when a specific lottery result (for example, a specific hit or a specific loss) is set is set so that the time saving state is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining time reductions. It may be configured as. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the time saving state will end. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time saving state ends for the player. It is possible to execute a game in a time-saving state while thinking about a game method for securing a large number of games.

In addition, in this modification, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation selected is made different based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining time reductions in the time saving state. It is configured so that the expected value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol acquired at the end of the time reduction is different, but the expected value is not limited to this, for example, the remaining time reduction number in the time reduction state and the second special symbol. It may be configured to select the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation based on the result of the lottery, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the number of remaining time reductions in the time saving state, and the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol variation may be selected based on the lottery result of. In this way, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation, the lottery result of the second special symbol is referred to, for example, before the end of the time reduction, which is the period immediately before the end of the time reduction state. During the period, the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is selected except when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, small hit), and only when the result is a specific lottery result (for example, small hit). A long fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time longer than the short fluctuation pattern is set may be selected.

With this configuration, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery in the specific period (the period before the end of the time reduction) during the time reduction state, the first advantageous period (the period in which the time reduction state is set) that is advantageous to the player ), The degree of advantage (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) of the second advantageous period (the pending digestion period of the second special symbol executed during the normal state) can be different. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state provides a novel playability that can affect the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period. be able to.

Further, in this modification, as the period during the time reduction state, the time reduction normal period (time reduction 1 to 95 times), the time reduction end preparation period (time reduction 96 to 98 times), and the period before the time reduction end (time reduction 99,100 times) are set. However, the fluctuation pattern to be selected is configured to be different according to the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state) so that different fluctuation patterns are selected according to each set period. However, the length (range) of each period described above may be different depending on, for example, the jackpot type set when the jackpot for which the time saving state is set is won. ..

Further, when the time saving state is set, the entire period of the time saving state is set as the time saving normal period, and the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is set to a specific lottery result (for example, a small hit). When winning, as a variation pattern selected in response to the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the small hit game, a special variation pattern is selected for a predetermined period (for example, during 5 rotations of the special symbol variation). It is configured to use a special variation pattern table that can be selected, and when a variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table, the above-mentioned ultra-short variation pattern or long variation pattern can be selected. Is also good. With this configuration, the first advantageous period (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state and the timing of the specific lottery result. The degree of advantage (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) of the second advantageous period (the pending digestion period of the second special symbol executed during the normal state) that comes after the set period) can be different. .. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state provides a novel playability that can affect the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period. be able to.

<About the production contents in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the content of the characteristic effect among the plurality of effects executed in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, in the present modification, when the time saving state which is the gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the time saving state (first period) is completed according to the game method to be executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that the degree of advantage of the game executed in the later predetermined period (second period) can be different. Then, in the time saving state (during the first period), the effect for guiding (suggesting) the game method for causing the player to execute the game during the second period more advantageously is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to guide the player in an easy-to-understand manner to the game in the time saving state.

Specifically, when the time saving state is set, the current time saving situation is normal based on the measuring means for measuring the number of remaining time saving until the time saving end condition is satisfied and the measurement result of the measuring means. It has a period determination means for determining which of the period, the time reduction end preparation period, and the time reduction pre-end period, and an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode corresponding to the determination result of the period determination means. By displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can grasp the situation during the time saving state.

Further, based on the measurement result of the measuring means and the stored contents of the storage means for storing the reserved storage number of the second special symbol, a predicting means for predicting in advance the fluctuation pattern that can be selected before the time saving end condition is satisfied Provide.

Then, when it is predicted by the prediction means that only the ultra-short variation pattern is selected until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, for example, the final variation of the time-saving end preparation period (executed when the number of remaining time reductions is 3). If there are four reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the second special symbol change) is executed, regardless of whether or not a new reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the final change. , Since it is confirmed that the remaining time-saving fluctuations (two special symbol fluctuations executed during the time-saving state) are executed in the ultra-short fluctuation pattern, the third time-saving fluctuation including this final fluctuation is performed. 2 Set a composite effect mode based on the lottery result (look-ahead result) of special symbol variation. Then, the period until the time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, the period from the start of the final fluctuation of the time reduction end preparation period to the stop display of the final fluctuation of the period before the time reduction end (the final fluctuation of the time reduction state) is used. The composite effect used in the composite effect mode is executed.

In the case where the ultra-short fluctuation pattern can be set in order to make it difficult to newly acquire the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by executing the compound effect in this way, the ultra-short fluctuation pattern becomes Since the lottery result of the selected second special symbol variation can be notified to the player using a plurality of fluctuation periods of the second special symbol variation, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern discriminating means for discriminating the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation executed this time determines that the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation executed this time is a long fluctuation pattern, it is stored in the storage means. It is advantageous for the player to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol based on the stored number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the measurement result (remaining time reduction number) of the measuring means. It has a situation determination means for determining whether or not the situation is present, sets an effect mode based on the determination result of the situation determination means, and is configured to execute a guidance effect for guiding the current situation to the player. There is.

In this guidance effect, the first guidance mode for guiding the player that the second special symbol variation in which a long fluctuation time is set is being executed (during the easy period), and the player On the other hand, at least a second guidance mode for guiding a game method of either a continuous game in which the right-handed game is continued or a switching game in which the right-handed game is interrupted (the left-handed game is executed) is included. The effect is executed in the display mode.

In addition, instead of this guidance effect, a special guidance effect capable of displaying the above-mentioned first guidance mode and a special guidance mode that allows the player to execute either a continuous game or a switching game is executed, and the easy period elapses. Later, it may be configured to display the result mode showing the game result based on the game content of the player during the easy period and the content of the second guide mode described above. In this case, it is better to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol while notifying the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased during the easy period. An effect is performed that makes it difficult for the player to understand whether it is good or not. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game property that the player can select the game method while grasping the production content.

Further, as a technical configuration different from the eleventh embodiment and the modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above, for example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in duplicate. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the special symbol indicating the small hit is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol change during execution is forcibly stopped and displayed. In the configured pachinko machine 10, when a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. In the pachinko machine 10 that has been used, when the time saving state is set, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is acquired, and if the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not acquired, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is acquired. It is configured to execute a guidance effect that prevents the game (time saving game) for acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol from being executed until it becomes 0 (until the first special symbol fluctuation is not executed). Is also good. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the number of fluctuations in the second special symbol that are forcibly stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol can be suppressed during the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the above from being updated unnecessarily. That is, when an advantageous state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to provide a game advantageous to the player by interrupting the game for acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment and the modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above, an example in which the time saving state is used as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the probability changing state May be in an advantageous state. Further, in a gaming machine having a game property that allows the privilege to be acquired through a plurality of stages, a state in which the privilege has reached a specific stage among the plurality of stages, that is, a state in which the privilege can be easily acquired than in the initial state is an advantageous state. Just do it.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations among the plurality of time saving end conditions, that is, the variation The time saving state is set to the normal state at different timings depending on whether the number of times end condition is satisfied and the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, that is, the time saving end condition is satisfied. It was configured so that it could be migrated to.

Using this configuration, for example, when the change number end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the change of the special symbol, and the winning number end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time saving ending condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition to be established, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods for which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on winning the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 293. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above, the jackpot is hit in a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) after the advantageous gaming state is completed, as compared with the case where the jackpot is won during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state). It is possible to let the player select the end timing of the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) after configuring so that it is more advantageous to win the game (the rate at which the time saving state is set after the big hit is high). Configured.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot during a relatively advantageous gaming state (latent state, probability changing state) (the advantageous probability changing state after the jackpot ends). The situation (which is set) and the situation where it is more advantageous to win the jackpot in the unfavorable gaming state after the end of the advantageous gaming state than to win the jackpot between the advantageous gaming states are established. It was configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a novel game playability that makes a difference between expecting to win a big hit and expecting to be out of the game depending on not only the game state but also the situation. ..

In the seventh embodiment described above, a normal state is provided as a game state disadvantageous to the player, and a time saving state is provided as a game state advantageous to the player. However, in the twelfth embodiment, these states are provided. In addition to the two types of game states, even if you hit right, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, and there is a high probability of a big hit. Four types of gaming states are provided: a probability variation state in which the game ball can be easily entered into the ball entry port 6400 and the jackpot probability is high.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is performed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 7 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 274 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 274, the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is provided in the flow path on the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. The point that the winning device 6500 has been deleted, and the point that the second ball opening 6450 is provided in place of the second ball opening 6400 for the flow path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. The right first entry port 64b, which triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, is provided below the second entry opening 6450, and the variable winning device 65 is in front of the right first entry opening 64b. The difference is that it is moved downward.

Since the right first entrance 64b is provided on the right side of the board, when a right-handed hit is made in a game state in which a big hit or a time saving state of a normal symbol is set, the game is also played to the right first entrance 64b. Since the ball enters, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased simply by continuously hitting the ball to the right. In addition, the ratio of the game ball launched by right-handed hitting into the right first entry slot 64b (for example, the ratio of 1 ball in 20 balls) is such that the game ball launched by left-handed hitting is the first entry ball. It is configured to be lower than the rate of entering the mouth 64 (for example, 1 in 40 balls). Therefore, in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the game can be played by left-handed. Further, since the variable winning device 65 is moved to the right side of the board surface, it is possible to make a player who wants to win a prize ball perform a right-handed hit during the execution of the jackpot game. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the right first entrance ball opening 64b during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, the flow of the game in the twelfth embodiment will be briefly described. In the twelfth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, the game shifts to the latent state (latent state A) after the jackpot ends. In the latent state, it is not possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6450 even if the player hits the right side (the electric accessory 6450a is difficult to open), so it is necessary to execute the lottery for the first special symbol. There is. Since the latent state will end and return to the normal state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed three times, we aim to win the jackpot by lottery within three times after shifting to the latent state. There is a need. When a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state (time reduction once). As described above, if a right-handed hit is made during a jackpot, a game ball will also enter the right first entrance 64b and a reserved ball with the first special symbol will be accumulated. A lottery of symbols is executed.

If you win a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state, the game state after the big hit is set to the latent state, and even if you lose in the lottery of the first special symbol, the number of time reductions will be 0. Since only the high-probability state of the special symbol remains, it shifts to the latent state. In the latent state set after the probabilistic state, the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated by right-handed during the probabilistic state is digested. If a big hit is made in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol during the latent state, the latent state will be looped, while the probability change number can be passed while holding 1 or more reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol. , It is possible to shift to the normal state while holding the reserved ball of the second special symbol. In the twelfth embodiment, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the game state other than the latent probability state, the number of time reductions is set to the probability variation state of 34 times (note that the high probability state itself of the special symbol is It will end in 3 times, but the time saving state will be maintained until the 34 times lottery is completed). In other words, for the first time in the normal state, if you can win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, you can get a relatively large number of time saving states of 34 times, and you can get multiple special times without reducing the number of balls you have. Form an advantageous state in which the lottery of symbols can be executed. In the twelfth embodiment, the player can be made to play a game with one goal of being given a time saving state in which the time saving number is 34 times.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 275 to 278, a characteristic effect mode in the twelfth embodiment will be described. Here, the twelfth embodiment is roughly divided into three types of effect modes. That is, the normal mode in which the normal effect mode is set (mainly the effect mode in the normal state) and the probability change state in which the number of time reductions is 34 times after the latent state is set based on the winning of the jackpot in the normal state. The chance mode, which is the effect mode until the second special symbol is given, or until the reserved ball of the second special symbol returns to the normal state of 0, and the time reduction number is set after the probability change state of 34 times is set. There are three types, a continuous villa mode, which is a production mode until the passage of time. Here, the production mode in the chance mode will be described.

FIG. 275 (a) shows the ending of the jackpot when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode (the normal state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist) and the transition to the latent state is confirmed. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during a period. As shown in FIG. 275 (a), in the ending period of the jackpot of the first special symbol won in the normal mode (normal state), the character 801 imitating an adventurer and the monster imitating the main display area Dm. The display mode in which the character 811 is confronted is displayed. In addition, the characters "Chance mode entered !!" are displayed on the display area HR6 formed at the upper part of the main display area Dm. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the player is entering the chance mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the first display area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are formed on the left side of the sub-display area Ds. Will be done. In the first display area Ds1, a number indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed on the upper side, and a number indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed on the lower side. In FIG. 275 (a), as a result of a game ball entering the right first entrance 64b by hitting the right during a jackpot, two reserved balls of the first special symbol are accumulated during the ending period. Illustrates the situation. Further, on the right side of the first display area Ds1, a second display area Ds2 is formed in which the characters "If you defeat the enemy, you will enter RUSH !?" are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand that if the enemy (character 811 imitating a monster) can be defeated, the player will shift to the advantageous RUSH (renso mode).

Next, with reference to FIG. 275 (b), an effect mode after shifting to the chance mode will be described. Here, as described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the transition to the advantageous consecutive villa mode can be achieved by sequentially achieving (clearing) the three conditions in the chance mode. That is, as the first condition, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the latent state, and as the second condition, the probable change state set after the hit during the latent state and the probable change state after the probable change state. By continuously losing the lottery of the special symbol executed in the latent state, it shifts to the normal state while holding one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, and as the third condition, the second special symbol By winning a big hit in the lottery based on the reserved ball, the consecutive villa mode is set after the big hit of the second special symbol. That is, a probabilistic state in which the number of time reductions is 34 times is set, and thereafter, a probabilistic state in which the number of time reductions is 34 times is set again every time a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol within the number of time reductions, which is extremely advantageous. To form. In the twelfth embodiment, as the effect mode in the chance mode, three types of effects (part destruction chance effect, avoidance turn effect) for notifying whether or not these first to third conditions can be achieved in order are produced. , And attack turn production) are executed in order.

In the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to about 1 / 3.4, and the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is set to about 1 / 30.3. During the number of time reductions (3 times in the first half are in the high probability state of the special symbol, 31 times in the second half are in the low probability state of the special symbol), a relatively high ratio (about 88%) is the jackpot of the second special symbol. You can win. Therefore, once the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode, the jackpot of the second special symbol and the consecutive villa mode are repeated at a high rate (about 88%), which forms an extremely advantageous state. You can play the game with a strong expectation that you will do it.

FIG. 275 (b) shows a part destruction chance for notifying the player whether or not the above-mentioned first condition is achieved in the chance mode (a big hit was won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state). It is a figure which showed an example of the production mode of the production. In this part destruction chance production, the effect of notifying the player of the achievement of the first condition (winning a big hit in the latent state) by succeeding in destroying the horn of the character 811 imitating a monster is executed. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 275 (b), when the part destruction chance effect is started, the characters "Attack the corner and destroy it !!" are displayed on the display area HR6. In addition, this character is displayed only for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) at the start of the part destruction chance, and after a certain time elapses, the character "part destruction chance" and the rest until the latent state ends. The display content is switched to a character indicating the number of lottery (for example, "remaining 3 times"). Further, on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, there is a special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a in which a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. A small display area Dm composed of a special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b on which a symbol is displayed is formed.

Further, below the small display area Dm1, a display area HR11 for displaying an image suggesting the remaining conditions (stage of the chance mode) to be achieved in the chance mode is formed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), the display area HR11 has an image HR11a having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape with the characters "part destruction chance" and the characters "avoidance turn". Three images of the image HR11b and the image HR11c with the word "attack turn" are displayed, and an image imitating an arrow pointing from the image HR11a to the image HR11b and an image from the image HR11b. An image imitating an arrow pointing toward HR11c and an image YG1 imitating an arrow for suggesting the condition currently being achieved (the stage of chance mode) are displayed. Since FIG. 275 (b) is a display mode at the start of the site destruction chance, the image YG1 imitating the arrow is displayed at a position indicating the image HR11a with the characters “site destruction chance”. The display content of the display area HR11 makes it easy for the player to understand the conditions to be achieved in the chance mode. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved.

FIG. 276 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the site destruction chance is successful in the chance mode (that is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit in the latent state). As shown in FIG. 276 (a), when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the corner of the character 811 imitating a monster and breaks the corner. The (destroy) effect is executed. Further, a display area HR12 with the characters "success" is formed on the upper left of the character 801. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the player has become a big hit in the latent state and that the first condition among the three conditions to be achieved in the chance mode has been achieved. it can. Although not shown, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not won during the execution of the part destruction effect (latent state), the adventurer character 801 is attacked by the monster character 811 and defeated. The end of the chance mode is notified by the effect. As a result, the player can easily understand that the chance mode has ended.

In FIG. 276 (b), the part destruction chance was successful in the chance mode, and the avoidance turn was entered (in the latent state, the jackpot was won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the game state after the jackpot was set to the probability change state. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case. In the avoidance turn production, the achievement of the second condition (transition to the normal state while possessing one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol) is notified by avoiding all the attacks launched by the character 811 imitating a monster. The production to be performed is executed. As shown in Fig. 276 (b), when the evasion turn is entered (the number of time reductions shifts to the probability change state of 1), the display area HR6 is asked to "Enter the evasion turn !! Hit right to increase the evasion power! The characters "!" Are displayed. In addition, the character 811 imitating a monster is set in a display mode in which the horns are destroyed and struggling, and the character 801 is set in a display mode in which the aura is worn (the surroundings emit light). In addition, a gauge image KG imitating a five-level gauge is displayed on the right side of the character 801. The details will be described later, but in this gauge image, the gauge rises as the evasion power of the character 801 increases, and the gauge rises up to the fifth stage to break through the evasion turn (achievement of the second condition). Is configured to be finalized. In other words, it is possible to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation to break through the avoidance turn (shift to the normal state with one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the probability change state) depending on how the gauge rises. It is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Since the time saving state of the normal symbol is set when the avoidance turn is entered, a small display area Dm2 in which the characters "right-handed" are displayed is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm. As a result, it is possible to make the player make a right-handed strike more reliably during the probable change state in which the number of time reductions is one, and to accumulate the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

FIGS. 277 (a) and 277 (b) show an effect mode of the avoidance rate notification effect executed every time the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the first variation display of the special symbol in the avoidance turn. Is. FIG. 277 (a) shows an effect mode when it is notified that the avoidance rate has reached 100% based on the accumulation of the reserved balls of the fourth special symbol. In the production showing the avoidance rate of 100%, the characters in the display area HR6 are set to the characters "Avoidance power UP !! Avoidance rate 100%!", And the gauge of the gauge image KG rises to the 5th stage (maximum stage). To do. In addition, the amount of aura (ambient light emission) worn by the character 801 becomes relatively large. By changing the display mode, the player can easily understand that the avoidance turn can be broken through.

FIG. 277 (b) shows an effect mode of the avoidance rate notification effect of the mode showing that the avoidance rate has reached 60%. In the production showing the avoidance rate of 60%, the characters in the display area HR6 are set to the characters "Avoidance power UP !! Avoidance rate 60%!", And the gauge of the gauge image KG is the third stage (3/5 stages). Ascend to. Further, the amount of aura (light emission in the surroundings) worn by the character 801 is set to be larger than that at the time of entering the avoidance turn and smaller than that when the avoidance rate is 100%. With these display modes, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is uncertain whether or not the avoidance turn can be broken through, so that the subsequent transition of the production (whether or not all the attacks of the character 811 can be avoided). Can be noticed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, every time a start winning prize of the second special symbol is detected, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is included in the hold, and the avoidance rate is determined according to the determination result. It has a structure. Then, only when there are three or more reserved balls of the second special symbol and the jackpot is not included, the execution of the effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases to 100% is permitted. That is, there is a special aspect of the effect that is executed only when there is no jackpot in the hold. In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot (lottery result that is advantageous to the player) in the hold, and only when there is a jackpot, a special effect (so-called premium effect) is allowed to be executed. It is possible to realize a novel production operation that is the exact opposite of the operation of a general game machine. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not accumulated because the player did not hit right during the probability change state, the avoidance turn effect is ended at the end of the fluctuation and the part destruction chance effect is returned. It is configured in. That is, the effect of regenerating the destroyed part of the monster character 811 is executed, and the transition to the part destruction chance effect is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the avoidance turn effect from progressing unnecessarily even though there is no holding ball of the second special symbol and there is no possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode.

FIG. 278 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode after the avoidance rate is notified in the avoidance turn effect. As shown in FIG. 278 (a), after the evasion rate is notified, the effect of the monster character 811 attacking the adventurer character 801 with the tail is executed for each change. If all attacks can be avoided, the transition to the attack turn will be notified. Since the second and subsequent special symbol lottery after the start of the avoidance turn effect is performed in the latent state, the small display area Dm2 in which the characters for instructing the player to hit right is deleted.

FIG. 278 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode (display mode) in the case of transition to the attack turn (transition to the normal state in a state where one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are present). .. In the attack turn, as shown in FIG. 278 (b), the adventurer character 801 attacks the monster character 811 with a sword. If a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol in this attack turn, the production that succeeds in defeating the monster character 811 by the attack of the adventurer character 801 is executed, and the transition to the consecutive villa mode (RUSH) is notified. Will be done. On the other hand, if all the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is missed, the monster character 811 is counterattacked and defeated, and the effect of notifying the transition to the normal mode (fall) is executed. .. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved because the player can easily understand whether or not to shift to the consecutive villa mode only by checking the content of the effect.

<Electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a). FIG. 279 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 279 (a), the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment has a variation pattern scenario table 202ga added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 183 (a)). It differs in that it is. It is also different in that the provisions of the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, the variation pattern table 202d, and the time saving assignment table 202e are partially changed.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (a). FIG. 280 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the first hit random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment shows a random number value (first hit random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. (Counter value of) and a random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) that is determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 280 (a), 33 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 32" are determined to be jackpots in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol. Random value (counter value) of is specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, 33 random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 32". Therefore, the probability of being judged as a big hit when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1 / 30.3 (33/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 280 (a), 295 random values (counter values) of "0 to 294" are determined as jackpots in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol. Numerical values (counter values) are specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol is 295 that are "0 to 294". Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probability variation state or the latent probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is about 1 / 3.4 (295/1000).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery differs greatly between the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, since the game can be sharpened, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won, similarly to the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 280 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 280 (b), in the twelfth embodiment, only "big hit A12" is provided as a big hit type that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, the "big hit A12" is defined in association with the range of all possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2 (100 when the big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol). "Big hit A12" is selected (determined) at a rate of%). This "big hit A12" is a big hit type (4R probable big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 4 and the probable change state of the special symbol having 3 probable changes is given after the big hit is completed. As for the number of time reductions, any number of 0 times, 1 time, and 34 times is set according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, if the "big hit A12" is won in the normal state or the probability change state, the number of time reductions is set to 0 (that is, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent state), and in the latent state. If you win the "big hit A12", the number of time reductions is set to 1 (that is, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability variation state of 1 time reduction), and if you win the "big hit A12" in the time reduction state, the time reduction The number of times is set to 34 (that is, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variation state of 34 times of time reduction).

Further, as shown in FIG. 280 (b), in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol are 3 of "big hit B12" to "big hit D12". There are different types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 280 (b), "big hit B12" is defined in association with the range in which the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". This "big hit B12" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 and the probability variation state of the special symbol having the probability variation number of 3 times is given after the jackpot ends. Since this "big hit B12" is the big hit type having the largest number of rounds among the big hit types in the twelfth embodiment, it is the most advantageous big hit type for the player in terms of the number of rounds. The game state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot ends depends on the game state at the time of winning. That is, if the player wins in a gaming state other than the latent state, 34 times is set as the number of time reductions, while if the player wins in the latent state, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions. Therefore, when winning in a gaming state other than the latent state, it is most advantageous in terms of the gaming state, and when winning in the latent state, it is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random values (counter values) associated with "big hit B12" is 20. The probability (ratio) that "big hit B12" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 20/100 (20%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 280 (b), "big hit C12" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "20 to 49". This "big hit C12" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 and the probability variation state of the special symbol having the probability variation number of 3 times is given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, "big hit C12" is the second most advantageous jackpot type after "big hit B12" in terms of the number of rounds. Since the game state (number of time reductions) after the end of the big hit is the same as that of the "big hit B12", if the player wins in a game state other than the latent state, it is most advantageous in terms of the game state, and the latent state. If you win in, you will be disadvantaged in terms of game status. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit C12" is 30. The probability (ratio) that "big hit C12" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 30/100 (30%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 280 (b), "big hit D12" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "50 to 99". This "big hit D12" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 and the probability variation state of the special symbol having the probability variation number of 3 times is given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, "big hit D12" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in terms of the number of rounds. The game state (number of time reductions) after the end of the big hit is the same as the "big hit B12" and "big hit C12", so if the player wins in a game state other than the latent state, it is most advantageous in terms of the game state. If you win in the latent state, you will be disadvantaged in terms of the game state. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D12" is 50. The probability (ratio) that "big hit D12" is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is 50/100 (50%).

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (c). Similar to the time reduction table 202e in the seventh embodiment, the time reduction table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. is there. At the end of the jackpot, the time saving table 202e is referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is set.

FIG. 280 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e. As shown in FIG. 280 (c), for the "big hit A12" won in the normal state and the probable change state, "0 times" is defined in association with the number of times of shortening the time, and the "big hit A12" won in the time saving state is defined. Is defined as "34 times" as the number of times of shortening the time. On the other hand, for the "big hit A12" that was won in the latent state, "1 time" is specified as the number of times of shortening the time. If you win the "Big Hit A12", the number of probability changes will be set to 3 times. Therefore, if you win the "Big Hit A12" in the normal state or the latent state, until the lottery of 3 special symbols is completed after the big hit ends. When it becomes a latent state and the lottery of three special symbols is completed, it becomes a normal state. In addition, if the "big hit A12" is won in the time saving state, it will be in a probable state until the lottery of the three special symbols is completed after the big hit is completed, and the time will be shortened from the fourth to the 34th special symbol lottery. , When the lottery of 34 special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached. In addition, if the "big hit A12" is won in the latent state, it will be in a probable state until the lottery of one special symbol is completed after the big hit is completed, and the latent probability will be extended to the second and third special symbol lottery. When the state is reached and the lottery of the three special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 280 (c), the "big hit B12" to "big hit D12" (big hit of the second special symbol) won in the gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability changing state) other than the latent probability state. On the other hand, "34 times" is associated with the number of times of time reduction, and "0 times" is associated with "big hit B12" to "big hit D12" won in the latent state. Is stipulated. Even if you win any of "Big hit B12" to "Big hit D12", the number of probability changes is set to 3 times, so you can choose any of "Big hit B12" to "Big hit D12" in the game state other than the latent state. If you win, you will be in a probable state from the end of the jackpot until the end of the three special symbol lottery, and the time will be shortened from the fourth to the 34th special symbol lottery, and the 34 special symbol lottery will end. Then, it becomes a normal state. In addition, if any of "Big hit B12" to "Big hit D12" is won in the latent state, the latent state is reached until the lottery of the three special symbols is completed after the big hit is completed, and the three special symbols are displayed. When the lottery is completed, it will be in the normal state.

In this way, the number of time reductions given depends on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the type of jackpot, so when the jackpot is won, not only the type of jackpot but also the playing state at the time of winning the jackpot You can pay attention to the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 281. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga is a data table referred to for selecting a correspondence relationship (variation pattern scenario) between the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the jackpot and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to. In the twelfth embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern table, the normal table 202id1 mainly referred to in the normal mode, the probability variation / time saving table 202id2 mainly referred to in the consecutive villa mode, and mainly the chance mode are referred to. Three types of fluctuation pattern tables of the chance mode table 202id3 are provided, and at the start of fluctuation, one of these three tables is determined according to the fluctuation pattern scenario. The specified contents of the normal table 202id1 are the same as the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, and the specified contents of the probability variation / time saving table 202id2 are the time saving fluctuations in the above-mentioned seventh embodiment. It is the same as the pattern table 202d2. The details of the chance mode table 202id3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 282.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in the twelfth embodiment, the variation pattern scenario set after the end of the jackpot is displayed in association with the type of the jackpot won last time and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. It is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 281, for the situation where the jackpot A12 is won in a game state other than the time saving state, the chance mode table 202id3 is used in the first to third special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends. Is referred to, and the normal table 202id1 is referred to in the 4th and 5th special symbol lottery after the big hit, while the chance mode table 202id3 is referred to in the 2nd special symbol lottery, and 6 after the big hit is finished. A variation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202id1 is referred to in the lottery of special symbols after the first time is defined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 281, in the situation where the jackpot A12 was won in the time saving state, the probability change / time saving table 202id2 is referred to in the 1st to 34th special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot ends. A variable pattern scenario in which the normal table 202id1 is referred to in the special symbol lottery after the 35th time is defined.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 281, in the situation where one of the jackpots B12 to D12 is won in the game state other than the latent probability state, the probability changes in the 1st to 34th special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends. A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the time saving table 202id2 is referred to, and the normal table 202id1 is referred to in the lottery of the 35th and subsequent special symbols after the end of the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 281, in the situation where one of the jackpots B12 to D12 is won in the latent state, the chance mode table 202id3 is set in the first to third special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends. Referenced, the normal table 202id1 is referred to in the 4th and 5th special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, while the chance mode table 202id3 is referred to in the 2nd special symbol lottery, and the 6th time after the jackpot ends A variation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202id1 is referred to in the subsequent special symbol lottery is defined.

In this way, by prescribing the fluctuation pattern scenario in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga, the processing load when selecting the fluctuation pattern can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the details of the chance mode table 202id3, which is a kind of table constituting the variation pattern table 202d in the twelfth embodiment, will be described. As shown in FIG. 282, the chance mode table 202id3 has a variation pattern in association with the type of special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the like. Is stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 282, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1, and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is If the range of "0 to 198", that is, the special variation A with a variation time of 20 seconds is specified in the entire range and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". In other words, the special fluctuation A is specified per 20 seconds of fluctuation time in the entire range. On the other hand, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the number of fluctuations is 2 or more, and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the special fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in the entire range and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range. However, the special fluctuation B is specified per 10 seconds. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the chance mode, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or 10 seconds is selected depending only on the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, regardless of the lottery result. ..

With this configuration, the fluctuation time in the chance mode can be made constant regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, it is possible to fix the effect period for each change in the part destruction chance effect, the effect period in the avoidance turn effect, and the like. Therefore, as the effect mode of each of the above effects, only the effect mode having a common effect period needs to be prepared, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. The reason why the fluctuation time is lengthened only when the number of fluctuations is one is to secure a period for explaining the playability at the start of the part destruction chance and the start of the avoidance turn effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand, and thus it is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 282, when the symbol type is the second special symbol and the lottery result is "off", the number of fluctuations is one and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is within the range of 2 or less. Therefore, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the deviation time of 0.1 seconds is specified in association with the special fluctuation C, while the holding ball of the second special symbol is 3 and the fluctuation type is 3. Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, the deviation time of 20 seconds and the special fluctuation A are defined in association with each other. Further, while the number of fluctuations is 2 and the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 1 or less, the deviation time of 0.1 seconds is associated with the special variation C, while the 2nd special symbol is associated with the range. A special variation B with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the range in which the holding series is 2 or more. Further, while the number of fluctuations is 3 and the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 0, the deviation special variation C of the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is associated with the reserved series of the 2nd special symbol. A special variation B with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with a range of 1 or more. Further, for the range in which the number of fluctuations is 4 or more, the special fluctuation B having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Even when the lottery result is "big hit", the correspondence between the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the fluctuation time is the same.

Therefore, in the chance mode, if the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is within 3 times, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds or 20 only when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is larger than the remaining number of probability changes. When a relatively long fluctuation time of seconds is set and the remaining number of probable changes is equal to or less than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time is set to an extremely short time. Therefore, when the number of remaining probability changes in the latent state becomes less than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (that is, the latent state is digested), such as by winning the jackpot of the second special symbol in the avoidance turn. Even if it does, it is impossible to maintain the holding ball of the second special symbol until the normal state, and there is no possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode), without setting an unnecessarily long fluctuation time, The reserved ball of the second special symbol can be digested earlier. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is larger than the remaining number of probability changes, a relatively long fluctuation time of 20 seconds or 10 seconds can be set, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed. It is possible to fix the effect period during the execution of the avoidance turn effect. Therefore, as the effect mode of the avoidance turn effect, only the effect mode having a common effect period needs to be prepared, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b). FIG. 279 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 279 (b), the RAM 203 in the twelfth embodiment stores the probability variation counter 203ia and the variation pattern scenario with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 183 (b)). It differs from the area 203ib in that is added. Further, the small hit type storage area 203e, the small hit start flag 203f, the small hit medium flag 203g, the V passing big hit type storage area 203h, the V flag 203i, and the V passing flag 203j are deleted. But it's different. These deletions are due to the fact that the V winning device 6500 in the 7th embodiment is deleted and the small hit lottery result of the special symbol is deleted in the 12th embodiment. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the specification that the jackpot game is not executed (there is no jackpot based on the V prize) is adopted unless the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol.

The probability variation counter 203ia is a counter for counting the number of times (period) of the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, and if the counter value is 1 or more, the probability variation state of the special symbol (big hit probability is about 1/3. 4) On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, it means that the special symbol has a low probability state (big hit probability of about 1 / 30.3). In the twelfth embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is always set to 3 after the end of the jackpot (see S1641 in FIG. 289). In other words, regardless of the jackpot type, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state until the lottery of 3 special symbols is completed after the jackpot ends, and after the 3 special symbol lottery is completed after the jackpot is completed, it is special. It is configured to be in a low probability state of the symbol.

The variation pattern scenario storage area 203ib is a storage area for storing data indicating the variation pattern scenario. At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the fluctuation pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203ib and the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot. The pattern table is read. At the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203ib stores data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern scenario determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga.

Next, the state transition method in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284. First, a method of shifting the state in the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 283. Here, although the illustration is omitted, the mode is always shifted to the chance mode when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode (normal state). Hereinafter, for convenience, the normal state in the normal mode (mainly the normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) is referred to as the normal state A.

As shown in FIG. 283, the chance mode is configured in four types of states. That is, the high probability state A of the special symbol and the latent state A in which the game is advanced by executing the lottery of the first special symbol mainly by left-handing, which is set to the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability of the special symbol. Probability change state A in which the lottery of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol accumulated mainly in the jackpot, which is set to the state and the time saving state of the normal symbol is executed, and the high probability state of the special symbol, In addition, the probability state B, which is set to the normal state of the normal symbol, and the lottery of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol stored mainly during the probability change state A is executed, and the low probability of the special symbol. There are four types of states: normal state B, which is set to the normal state of the normal symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol mainly accumulated during the probability change state A. It is composed of states.

In the latent state A, if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, or if the probability variation number (ST number) has passed (the lottery of the special symbol over the probability variation number is all out), another state. May move to. That is, in the latent state A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, if the jackpot with a probability of 1 / 3.4 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability change state A. Will be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 283, when the probability variation number (ST number) has elapsed without winning the jackpot in the latent probability state A, the mode shifts to the normal mode (normal state A). In addition, during this latent state A, a part destruction chance effect (FIG. 275 (b)) is an effect that suggests whether or not the first condition in the chance mode can be achieved (a big hit is won in the latent state A). ), FIG. 276 (a)) is executed. In this site destruction chance production, the rate of success in site destruction (winning a jackpot of about 1 / 3.4 during the number of probability changes (3 times) in the latent state A) is about 65%. Therefore, when the state shifts to the latent state A, the site destruction chance production can be succeeded at a rate of about twice every three times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 283, in the probability change state A (the probability change state in which the lottery of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol accumulated during the jackpot is executed), the lottery of the special symbol wins the jackpot. There is a possibility that it will shift to another state depending on whether it is won or if the number of time reductions has passed without winning the jackpot. More specifically, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if no reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated, the player shifts to the latent state A after the jackpot ends, while the second special symbol If there is one or more reserved balls, or if the number of time reductions has passed once (it was lost in the first special symbol lottery after the big hit), it shifts to the latent state B after the big hit. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 283, in the latent state B (the latent state in which the lottery of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated during the probability change state A is executed), the special symbol There is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the lottery, or it will shift to another state when the number of probability changes has passed. Specifically, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the latent state A after the end of the jackpot. In addition, when the probability variation number (ST number) has elapsed in the latent probability state, if there is 1 or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the normal state B, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0. If so, the mode shifts to the normal state A (normal mode). On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state B and there is one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the player goes to the latent state B after the jackpot ends. And migrate. In this case, one or more holds of the second special symbol are consumed in the latent state B before the big hit (the number of reserved balls is 3 or less), while the latent state B is newly set. If this is done, the number of probability changes will return to three, so it will be impossible to shift to the normal state while possessing one or more reserved balls with the second special symbol. Therefore, in the latent state B, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the game is played while hoping that the jackpot of the second special symbol will not be won. In the probability change state A and the latent state B, whether or not the second condition in the chance mode can be achieved (possessing one or more reserved balls with the second special symbol and shifting to the normal state) is determined. An avoidance turn effect (see FIGS. 276 (b), 277, and 278 (a)), which is a suggestive effect, is executed. The lottery result of the first special symbol of the avoidance turn effect (the lottery result of the special symbol in the probability change state A) does not affect the breakthrough rate of the avoidance turn effect (achievement rate of the second condition). During the execution of the avoidance turn effect, right-handed during the probability change state A to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the rest after shifting to the latent state B The fact that the lottery for the number of probable changes (2 times) is missed greatly affects the breakthrough rate of the avoidance turn effect. Percentage of success in avoiding all attacks of the monster character 811 in the avoidance turn production (achieving the second condition) (Two second special symbol lottery executed in latent state B are both missed The ratio) is about 49.7%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 283, in the normal state B, the state shifts to another state when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state B, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, in the normal state B, when all the lottery of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is lost, the process shifts to the normal state A (normal mode). Therefore, whether or not the jackpot is won in the normal state B has a great influence on the subsequent development, and therefore, it is possible to expect more strongly to win the jackpot of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the normal state B, the attack turn effect is an effect that suggests whether or not the third condition in the chance mode can be achieved (in the normal state, a big hit is won by a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol). (See FIG. 278 (b)) is executed. By the time the attack turn effect is started, at least two reserved balls of the second special symbol have been consumed (in order to shift to the normal state B, the two lottery in the latent state B will be missed. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed only twice at the maximum in the attack turn production. Therefore, the rate of succeeding in defeating the monster character 811 in the attack turn effect (the rate of winning a jackpot of about 1 / 30.3 in two lottery in the normal state B) is about 6.5%.

For this reason, the expectation of shifting from the chance mode to the consecutive villa mode (achieving all the first to third conditions in one chance mode) is about 2.1% (65% x 49.7% x 6). 5.5%). Since the probability of shifting from the normal mode to the chance mode (the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol) is 1 / 30.3, the expectation of shifting from the normal mode to the consecutive villa mode is about 1. It becomes / 1446 (1 / 30.3 × 2.1%). Thus, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability itself is significantly higher than in the other embodiments (high probability state 1 / 3.4, low probability state 1 / 30.3), but instead an advantageous sequence. The transition rate to the villa mode is low. In other words, instead of switching to chance mode frequently, it is difficult to switch to consecutive villa mode, so make the player think that you should play until you switch to chance mode for the time being. Can be done. In addition, if you are lucky enough to switch to the consecutive villa mode, you can greatly improve the interest of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, even if it is not possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode, a certain amount of prize balls (outgoing balls) can be obtained in the chance mode. That is, in order to shift to the chance mode, it is first necessary to win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, so at the time of shifting to the chance mode, it is possible to win the prize balls for 4 rounds of the jackpot A12. it can. In addition, by winning a jackpot in the latent state A or the probability changing state A in the chance mode, it is possible to win a prize ball for four rounds of the jackpot A12, and if the jackpot is achieved in the latent state B, You can win 4 rounds, 8 rounds, or 16 rounds of prize balls. Therefore, even if it is not possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode, it is possible to give the player a certain degree of satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the mode is changed to the chance mode, the game can be played with the strong expectation that the game will be a big hit during the number of STs (3 times) in the latent state A. .. Then, if the player wins the jackpot as expected in the latent state A, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit in the subsequent probabilistic state A, and then the first two second special symbols are displayed. It is possible to expect that one of the two second special symbol holding balls in the latter half will be the holding ball corresponding to the jackpot. In addition, after accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the game can be played while expecting to continue to be out of the lottery of the special symbol until the number of STs is completed. Then, the number of STs can be completed as expected by the player, and after the transition to the normal state B, a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol stored during the probability change state A is performed. You can play the game while strongly expecting it to be a big hit. In other words, depending on the game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to wish to win the jackpot or to request that the player lose the game and move to another game state. It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, a method of shifting the state in the consecutive villa mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 284, the consecutive villa mode is configured in three states. That is, a probabilistic state B in which the special symbol is set to a high probability state and a normal symbol is set to a time saving state, and the game is advanced by executing the lottery of the second special symbol mainly by right-handed, and the low probability state of the special symbol In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, and the game progresses by executing the lottery of the second special symbol mainly by right-handed, and the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. It is mainly composed of three types of states: a probability change state B, a normal state C in which a lottery is executed based on a reserved ball of a first special symbol and a second special symbol accumulated in a time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the probability change state B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when the probability change number (ST number) has elapsed. That is, when the probability change number (ST number) elapses in the probability change state B, the time is shortened after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state B, the game state after the big hit is set to the probability change state B again. Therefore, in the probabilistic state B, it is possible to realize a playability that makes it expected to win a big hit within the range of the probable change number of times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284, in the time saving state, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the time saving number of times has passed and when the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, when the number of time reductions (31 times) elapses in the time reduction state, the state shifts to the normal state C, while when the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the state changes to the probability change state B after the big hit ends. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the jackpot will be won within the short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284, in the normal state C, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when the lottery based on all the reserved balls is missed or when the big hit is won in the lottery based on the reserved balls. There is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 284, when the lottery based on all the reserved balls is missed, the process shifts to the normal state A (normal mode), while the lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special symbol is a big hit. If you win, you will shift to latent state A (chance mode) after the big hit. In addition, if a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the probability change state B after the jackpot ends.

In summary, in the consecutive villa mode, in any of the probable change state B, the time saving state, and the normal state C, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol, and after the big hit is completed, the consecutive villa mode (probable change state B) is performed again. Can be migrated to. There is a possibility that all the lottery of the probability change state B (probability change number 3 times), the time reduction state (time reduction number 31 times), and the normal state C (the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4) will be missed. Since it is 5%, the possibility of hitting the jackpot again within the range of the consecutive villa mode is about 90.5%. Therefore, once the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode, the consecutive villa mode and the jackpot are repeated at a rate of 90.5%, which is extremely advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player when the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode.

The number of probability changes and the number of time reductions set after the end of the jackpot are not limited to the number of times of the twelfth embodiment, and may be arbitrarily increased or decreased. Specifically, for example, the probability variation number may be set to 2. With this configuration, the number of lottery in the latent state B is reduced by one, while the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the case where the transition to the normal state B can be performed is increased by one. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation of transition to the consecutive villa mode in the situation of transition to A. Further, the jackpot probability in the low probability state or the probability variation state of the special symbol is not limited to this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the higher the jackpot probability in the low probability state, the easier it is to win the jackpot in the normal state B, so that it is possible to easily shift to the consecutive villa mode. Further, the higher the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the easier it is to shift to the probabilistic state A, but the more difficult it is to shift to the normal state B.

In the twelfth embodiment, only the jackpot A12 is provided as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. That is, while the number of time reductions is set to 0 when winning in the normal state or the probabilistic state, 1 time is given as the number of time reductions when winning in the latent state, and 34 times is given as the number of time reductions when winning in the time saving state. It was configured to provide only the jackpot type, but it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the time saving state, a jackpot type (special figure 1 special jackpot) in which 34 times are given as the number of time saving in the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent probability state may be provided. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that shifts to an advantageous consecutive villa mode is provided regardless of the game state at the time of winning. With this configuration, it is possible to expect a shift to the consecutive villa mode when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the game state. Further, for example, a jackpot type may be provided in which the number of probability changes after the jackpot ends is set to 0. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that the probabilistic state is not always given, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285 (a). FIG. 285 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285 (a), the ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment has the avoidance rate selection table 222ia added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 26 (a)). It differs only in that it is. The avoidance rate selection table 222ia is a data table that is referred to when selecting the avoidance rate displayed during the execution of the avoidance turn effect (see FIG. 276 (b) and FIG. 277). As for the avoidance rate, among the probabilistic state A and the latent probable state B, which are the production periods of the avoidance turn effect, the reserved balls of the second special symbol increase in the probabilistic state A (the start winning of the second special symbol is detected). It may be updated (increased) every time. The details of the avoidance rate selection table 222ia will be described with reference to FIG. 286.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the avoidance rate selection table 222ia. As shown in FIG. 286, in the avoidance rate selection table 222ia, the effect mode (avoidance rate) that can be selected is defined in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in association with the value range of the effect counter 223e. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 286, when the holding ball (starting prize) of the first second special symbol is detected, the avoidance rate is 0 with respect to the entire range that the effect counter 223e can take. An effect mode that increases from% to 20% is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected for the first time after the avoidance turn effect is started, the effect of increasing the avoidance rate to 20% is always executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 286, when the holding ball (starting prize) of the second second special symbol is detected, the avoidance rate is 20% to 40 with respect to the entire range that the effect counter 223e can take. The effect mode that increases to% is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the second special symbol holding ball is detected after the start of the avoidance turn effect, the effect of increasing the avoidance rate to 40% is always executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 286, when the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, the hold is included in the first or second reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the selection ratio of the effect mode is variable depending on whether or not the effect is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 286, when the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, there is a hit in either the first or the second reserved ball (that is, the normal state). (It is confirmed that the transition to B is not possible), the avoidance rate increases from 40% to 60% with respect to the range of the value of the effect counter 223e of "0 to 98". It is defined in association with each other, and an effect of increasing the avoidance rate from 40% to 80% is specified in association with "99". That is, when it is not possible to shift to the normal state B, even if the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, the avoidance rate increases only to 60% at a rate of 99%, and 1%. Only at a rate, the avoidance rate rises to 80%.

On the other hand, when the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, it is confirmed that both the first and second reserved balls are out of position (that is, the transition to the normal state B is entered. In that case, the effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases from 40% to 60% is defined in association with the range of the effect counter 223e of "0 to 49", and the range of "50 to 97". On the other hand, an effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases from 40% to 80% is defined in association with the above, and an effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases from 40% to 100% corresponds to the range of "98,99". It is specified with. That is, in the case of shifting to the normal state B, when the third reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, the avoidance rate increases to 60% at a rate of 50%, and the avoidance rate increases at a rate of 48%. Increases to 80%, and the avoidance rate increases to 100% at a rate of 2%. That is, as compared with the case where the transition to the normal state B cannot be achieved, the selection ratio of the effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases to 60% decreases, and the selection rate of the effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases to 80% increases. In addition, the avoidance rate of 100% (an effect mode in which it is determined that no hit is included in the hold) can be selected. As a result, as the avoidance rate increases, the possibility of shifting to the normal state B increases, so that the player can be expected to increase to a higher avoidance rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 286, when the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, the hold is included in the first or second reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the selection ratio of the effect mode can be changed according to whether or not the ball is held and the effect mode (avoidance rate) at the time when the reserved ball is detected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 286, when the avoidance rate is 60%, the holding ball of the fourth special symbol is detected, and the holding ball (the first or second holding ball) is hit. If it is included, the effect mode in which the avoidance rate is maintained at 60% is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223e in the range of "0 to 94", and is defined as "95 to 99". An effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases from 60% to 80% is defined in association with the range. On the other hand, when both the first and second reserved balls are out of the way, the avoidance rate is maintained at 60% for the range of "0 to 24" in the effect counter 223e. The modes are defined in association with each other, and the effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases from 60% to 80% is defined in association with the range of "25 to 98", and the avoidance rate is 60 with respect to "99". An effect mode that increases from% to 100% is defined in association with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 286, when the avoidance rate is 80%, the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, and the hit is included in the reserved ball (the first or second reserved ball). If this is the case, an effect mode in which the avoidance rate is maintained at 80% is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 223e is "0 to 99". On the other hand, when both the first and second reserved balls are out of the way, the avoidance rate is maintained at 80% with respect to the range where the value of the effect counter 223e is "0 to 89". The modes are defined in association with each other, and the effect mode in which the avoidance rate increases from 80% to 100% is specified in association with the range of "90 to 99". Further, as shown in FIG. 286, when the holding ball of the fourth special symbol is detected in the state where the avoidance rate is 100%, the avoidance rate is 100% with respect to the entire range that the effect counter 223e can take. The effect mode that is maintained as it is is defined in association with each other.

In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, every time the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not to break through the avoidance turn (an effect of updating the avoidance rate) is executed. It has a structure. That is, it is configured to be able to execute an effect of notifying the degree of expectation that the ball is continuously disengaged over the number of probable changes and shifts to the normal state B while holding the holding ball of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel production mode that suggests that it is advantageous for the player that there is no hit hold, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 285 (b). FIG. 285 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285 (b), the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has an avoidance rate storage area 223ia added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 26 (b)). It differs in that it is. In addition, the time saving information update area 223g, the provisional collision detection flag 223h, the provisional time reduction information update area 223i, the provisional time reduction end flag 223j, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m, the time reduction pre-end fluctuation flag 223n, and the state production counter 223o It also differs in that it has been deleted.

The avoidance rate storage area 223ia is a storage area for storing data indicating the avoidance rate displayed in the avoidance turn effect. In this avoidance rate storage area 223ia, data indicating an avoidance rate of 0% is set as an initial value, and every time the hold ball of the second special symbol is detected during the execution of the avoidance turn effect and the avoidance rate is updated, , The data is updated to correspond to the avoidance rate after the update (see S2336 in FIG. 291).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 287, the details of the special symbol variation processing 12 (S161) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 12 (S161) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, and the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment. ), This is a process for setting the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Of the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 287) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, S206 to S209, S121 to S216, S218, and S231 to S237, the special symbol variation in the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S201, S202, S206 to S209, S121 to S216, S218, and S231 to S237 of process 7 (see FIG. 188) are executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 287) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S209 or S235 is completed, the special symbol variation start processing_ (S210) in the seventh embodiment is replaced with the special symbol. The fluctuation start process 12 (S261) is executed to end this process. Details of this special symbol variation start processing 12 (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 288.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 12 (S161) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S216 is completed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k and the value of the probability variation counter 203ia are both reset to 0 ( The process proceeds to S262) and S218. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 287) in the twelfth embodiment, it is determined in the processing of S236 that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0) (that is, it is 0). When the processing of S236: No) or S237 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is greater than 0 (S263), and it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is greater than 0. If this is the case (S263: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is subtracted by 1 (S264), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, in the processing of S263, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S263: No), the processing of S264 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288, the details of the special symbol variation start process 12 (S261 of FIG. 288), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 287) in the twelfth embodiment, will be described. This special symbol variation start process 12 (S261) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the seventh embodiment (and the seventh embodiment). Similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment), this process is for setting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Of the special symbol variation start processing 12 (see FIG. 288) in the twelfth embodiment, each processing of S301, S303, S305, S312, S314, and S315 is in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S301, S303, S305, S321, S314, and S315 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) are executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 12 (see FIG. 288) in the twelfth embodiment, after the processing of S301 is completed, is the value of the probability variation counter 203ia larger than 0 (value of 1 or more)? That is, when it is determined (S321) whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is greater than 0 (S321: Yes), the first for high probability. The lottery result of the special symbol is acquired based on the random number per unit defined in the random number table 202a (see FIG. 280 (a)) and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area. (S322), the process proceeds to S303. On the other hand, in the process of S321, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S321: No), it means that the special symbol is in a low probability state. Therefore, based on the hit random number defined in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 280 (a)) for the low probability time and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area. The lottery result of the special symbol is acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S303.

Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 12 (see FIG. 288) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S303 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S303: Yes), the first hit. The current jackpot type is specified with reference to the type selection table 202b (see FIG. 280 (b)) (S324), and the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and the jackpot type is set (S305). Next, the fluctuation pattern scenario (variation pattern scenario set this time) corresponding to the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203ib and the fluctuation to be referred to for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the number of fluctuations. The pattern table is specified from the three tables defined in the variable pattern table 202d (S325). Then, from the specified fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern at the time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the number of reserved balls, and the number of fluctuations is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S314.

Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 12 (see FIG. 288) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S312 is completed, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the data stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203ib is then generated. The fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the number of fluctuations after the jackpot ends is specified from the three tables defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d (S327). Next, from the specified fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the number of reserved balls, and the number of fluctuations is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S314.

By executing the special symbol variation start processing 12 (see FIG. 288) in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to select and set a variation pattern according to the variation pattern scenario set after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot control process 12 (S1541) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 289. The jackpot control process 12 (S1541) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment, and is the same as the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and for executing opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Among the jackpot control processes 12 (see FIG. 289) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S1601 to S1612, S1616 to S1618, S1621, and S1622, the jackpot control process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see S1521 in FIG. 192). ), The same processes as those of S1601 to S1612, S1616 to S1618, S1621, and S1622 are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 12 (see FIG. 289) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending period (S1612: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203ia is set to 3. The setting (S1641) is performed, and the process shifts to S1621. By executing this jackpot control process 12 (see FIG. 289), it is possible to set a high probability state of three special symbols after the end of each jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 293. First, the details of the command determination process 12 (S2171) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 12 (S2171) in the twelfth embodiment. The command determination process 12 (S2171) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and is a command executed in the seventh embodiment described above. Similar to the determination process (see FIG. 56), this is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 290) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received for the command determination process in the seventh embodiment (S2209: Yes), the prize information related process The difference is that 12 (S2241) is executed. Further, in the processing of S2213, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether the status command has been received (S2242), and when it is determined that the status command has been received (S2242). : Yes), the state command process 12 (S2243) is executed to shift to the process of S2217, while when it is determined that the state command has not been received in the process of S2242 (S2242: No), the process of S2243 Is different in that the process proceeds to the process of S2217. Details of the winning information-related process 12 (S2241) and the state command process 12 (S2243) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 291 and 292, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291, the details of the above-mentioned winning information-related processing 12 (S2241) will be described. The prize information-related process 12 (S2241) is a process executed in place of the prize information-related process 7 (see FIG. 193) in the seventh embodiment, and the prize information-related process 7 (see FIG. 193) in the seventh embodiment. ), This is a process for performing control according to the winning information command received from the main control device 110.

In the winning information-related process 12 (S2241) in the twelfth embodiment, the current game state is first specified by referring to the data stored in the game state storage area 223f (S2331), and then in the process of S2331. It is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is either the probability variation state A or the latent probability state B (S2332). If it is determined in the process of S2332 that the current gaming state is neither the probability change state A nor the latent state B (S2332: No), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, in the process of S2332, when it is determined that the current gaming state is either the probability change state A or the latent state B (S2332: Yes), the winning information command received this time is the second special symbol. It is determined whether it is the winning information of (S2333). If it is determined in the process of S2333 that it is the winning information of the second special symbol (S2333: Yes), the avoidance rate selection table 222ia (see FIG. 286) is read out (S2334).

When the processing of S2334 is completed, next, the effect mode (avoidance rate) is determined according to the value of the effect counter 223e, the data of the avoidance rate storage area 223ia, and the lottery result indicated by the winning information this time (S2335). ), The data in the avoidance rate storage area 223ia is updated to the data corresponding to the avoidance rate determined this time (S2336), and the process proceeds to the process of S2311. On the other hand, in the processing of S2333, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (S2333: No), the processing of S2334 to S2336 is skipped, and the processing of S2311 described above is skipped. Move to.

By executing this prize information related process 12 (see FIG. 291), in the avoidance turn effect (see FIG. 276 (b)), the degree of expectation that the number of probability changes of two times in the latent state B can be passed through (the first degree). 2 It is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the special symbol will be continuously missed over the remaining number of probability changes in the lottery.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned state command processing 12 (S2243) will be described with reference to FIG. 292. The state command process 12 (S2243) is a process for executing control according to the type of the state command received from the main control device 110.

In this state command processing 12 (see FIG. 292), first, it is determined whether or not the state command received this time is a command indicating a normal state (S5801). In the process of S5801, when it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the normal state (S5801: Yes), it is determined whether the data indicating the latent state B is stored in the game state storage area 223f (S5801: Yes). S5802), when it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223f is the data indicating the latent state B (S5802: Yes), the data indicating the normal state B is stored in the game state storage area 223f. Then (S5803), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5802, if it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223f is not the data indicating the latent state B (S5802: No), then the time is shortened to the game state storage area 223f. It is determined whether or not the data indicating the state is stored (S5804). In the process of S5804, when it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223f is the data indicating the time saving state (S5804: Yes), the data indicating the normal state C is displayed in the game state storage area 223f. It is stored (S5805), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5804, when it is determined that the data indicating the time saving state is not stored in the game state storage area 223f (S5804: No), the data indicating the normal state A is stored in the game state storage area 223f. (S5806), this process is terminated.

Further, in the processing of S5801 when it is determined that the state command received this time is not a command indicating a normal state (S5801: No), then it is determined whether the state command received this time is a command indicating a latent state. (S5807). In the process of S5807, when it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating the latent state (S5807: Yes), it is determined whether the data indicating the probability change state A is stored in the game state storage area 223f (S5807: Yes). S5808), when it is determined that the data indicating the probability change state A is stored (S5808: Yes), the data indicating the latent state B is stored in the game state storage area 223f (S5809), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5808, when it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223f is not the data indicating the probability change state A (S5808: No), the latent state A is set in the game state storage area 223f. The indicated data is stored (S5810), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5807, when it is determined that the state command received this time is not a command indicating the latent state (S5807: No), it is determined whether the state command received this time is a command indicating the probability change state (S5807: No). S5811). In the process of S5811, when it is determined that the state command received this time is a command indicating the probability change state (S5811: Yes), it is determined whether the data indicating the normal state B is stored in the game state storage area 223f (S5811: Yes). In S5812), if it is determined that the data indicating the normal state B is stored (S5812: Yes), the data indicating the probability change state B is stored in the game state storage area 223f (S5813), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S5812, when it is determined that the data indicating the normal state B is not stored in the game state storage area 223f (S5812: No), the data indicating the probability change state A is stored in the game state storage area 223f. Is stored (S5814), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S5811, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a probability change state (S5811: No), it means that the command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state. Data indicating a time saving state is stored in the state storage area 223f (S5815), and this process is terminated.

By executing this state command process 12 (see FIG. 292), the data in the game state storage area 223f can be accurately updated according to the state command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the details of the effect setting process 12 (S2841) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The effect setting process 12 (S2841) is a process executed in place of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). ), This is a process for setting the effect mode of the variation display effect to be executed within the variation time notified by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the effect setting process 12 (S2841 in FIG. 293), first, the game state is specified by referring to the information stored in the game state storage area 223f (S2931), and then the specified game state is the latent state A. It is determined whether or not there is (S2932). In the process of S2932, when it is determined that the specified gaming state is the latent state A (S2932: Yes), the effect mode of the part destruction chance effect is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol (S2933). This process ends. That is, if the lottery result is a big hit, the effect mode that succeeds in destroying the part is set, while if the lottery result is wrong, the effect mode that fails to destroy the part is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2932, when it is determined that the game state is not the latent state A (S2932: No), whether or not the game state specified from the data of the game state storage area 223f is the probability change state A. Is determined (S2934). In the process of S2934, when it is determined that the specified gaming state is the probability change state A (S2934: Yes), the effect mode of the avoidance turn rush effect is set according to the lottery result (whether or not) of the special symbol (S2935). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2934, if it is determined that the game state specified from the data of the game state storage area 223f is not the probability change state A (S2934: No), then it is determined whether the game state is the latent state B. (S2936). In the process of S2936, when it is determined that the specified gaming state is the latent state B (S2936: Yes), the effect mode of the avoidance turn effect is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol (S2937). End the process. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the adventurer character 801 avoids the attack of the monster character 811. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the adventure The effect is set so that the person 801 cannot avoid the attack of the monster character 811 and hits it.

Further, in the process of S2936, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state B (S2936: No), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal state B (S2938), and the gaming state is normal. When it is determined that the state is B (S2938: Yes), the effect mode of the attack turn effect is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol (S2939), and this process is terminated. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the effect of attacking the monster character 811 and succeeding in defeating it is set, while if it is off, the monster 811 is subdued. The effect of the mode that fails is executed. Further, in the process of S2938, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state B (S2938: No), it means that the gaming state is the normal state A, so that the effect mode is adjusted according to the extracted variation pattern. Is set (S2940), and this process ends.

By executing this effect setting process 12 (see FIG. 293), it is possible to preferably set the effect mode according to the game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot during the relatively advantageous gaming states (latent state, probabilistic state) (the advantageous probabilistic state after the jackpot ends). The situation (which is set) and the situation where it is more advantageous to win the jackpot in the unfavorable gaming state after the end of the advantageous gaming state than to win the jackpot between the advantageous gaming states are established. It was configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a novel game playability that makes a difference between expecting to win a big hit and expecting to be out of the game depending on not only the game state but also the situation. ..

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous state (latent state B), which is disadvantageous by winning the jackpot, the degree of expectation that the player will be out of the range over the number of probable changes is shifted to the latent state B. In the probabilistic state A before, the effect suggested to the player can be executed. That is, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect in a manner as if it is advantageous to the player by the continuous deviation. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel effect mode that is significantly different from the effect of notifying the degree of expectation including the hit hold in the conventional game machine. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state A, the upper limit value (4 pieces) of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is hit by right-handing during the jackpot fluctuation. It was configured so that there would be no major disadvantages if it was stored up to. That is, it is configured so that the demerit in the case of winning the jackpot is reduced as compared with the case of winning the jackpot in the latent state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a big hit is won in the probability change state A, it may be configured so as to be disadvantageous to the player. More specifically, for example, in the probabilistic state A, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed, the jackpot is won without changing the fluctuation time (20 seconds as in the twelfth embodiment described above). If so, the fluctuation time may be shortened (for example, 0.1 second). With this configuration, if the first special symbol is lost in the lottery in the probability variation state A, the variation display of the first special symbol ends after the variation display of the deviation is started, and the time saving state is set. During the 20 seconds until the end, you can easily collect the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol by hitting right, but if you win a big hit in the lottery of the 1st special symbol, immediately (0) after the start of fluctuation After 1 second has passed), the time saving state ends and the jackpot starts, making it impossible (difficult) to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state A, the latent state A is not the latent state B (the latent state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists) after the end of the big hit. Since it is possible to shift to (a latent state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist), three special symbol lottery spanning two types of gaming states, a probability changing state A and a latent state B, are continuously performed. It is possible to realize a novel playability that makes you wish to be out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, in the avoidance turn effect, an effect indicating whether or not the avoidance turn can be broken (the adventurer character 801 breaks through the avoidance turn by avoiding the attack of the monster character 811 a specific number of times). In addition to this, the expectation of breaking through the attack turn effect (expected to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state B) during the execution of the avoidance turn effect. Degree) may be configured to be informative. More specifically, for example, in the probability change state A, the lottery result of the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is determined, and the latent state after the probability change state A ends. The two reserved balls of the second special symbol that are digested in B (two reserved balls in chronological order) are out of the way and are in the reserved balls of the second special symbol that are digested in the normal state B. When it is determined that a jackpot exists, a special effect (so-called premier effect) different from the usual one may be executed with a low probability (for example, a probability of 1/10). As a result, when the premier production appears during the execution of the avoidance turn production, not only the breakthrough of the avoidance turn but also the transition to the consecutive villa mode will be confirmed, so we strongly expect that the premier production will be executed. You can play a game. Further, by lowering the appearance rate of the premier effect, it is possible to suppress the loss of expectation for breaking through the attack turn even when the avoidance turn is breached without the premier effect. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is better to win the jackpot in the relatively unfavorable (low jackpot probability) normal state B than to win the jackpot in the relatively advantageous (high jackpot probability) latent state B. By configuring so that the rate of transition to the consecutive villa mode is high, it was possible to establish a gameplay that is more advantageous if the jackpot is won in a disadvantageous state than in an advantageous state, but it is not limited to this Absent. For example, it is easier to execute a jackpot game with a large number of rounds if you hit a jackpot in a disadvantageous normal mode than if you hit a jackpot in an advantageous consecutive villa mode where you can play a game with almost no reduction in the number of balls you have. By doing so, it is possible to realize playability in which an element in which the degree of advantage is higher occurs when the jackpot is hit in a disadvantageous state rather than in an advantageous state.

In the twelfth embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a probability change state of a special symbol having a probability change number of 3 times is always set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the jackpot type, the special symbol type, the game state at the time of winning, and the like. However, depending on the conditions when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends may be different. More specifically, for example, if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the probability that the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit is high, and if the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, after the big hit is finished. It may be configured so that the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol is high. That is, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state B, or if the jackpot is won in the consecutive villa mode, a low probability state of the special symbol is given at a high rate (the number of time reductions is 34 times). It may be configured so that only the time saving state of is given). With this configuration, in the consecutive villa mode, the number of time reductions is almost 34 times, so that the case where the jackpot is won in the normal mode is better than the case where the jackpot is won in the consecutive villa mode. , It is advantageous in terms of the number of probability changes given after the jackpot ends. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which some elements are more advantageous when the jackpot is achieved in the disadvantageous normal mode than when the jackpot is achieved in the advantageous state of the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, in the part destruction chance effect (see FIGS. 275 and 276 (a)), an effect of destroying the horn of the monster character 811 is executed, and the destruction is successful, so that the first special It was configured to notify that the design was a big hit, but it is not limited to this. For example, there may be variations such as an effect of destroying the claws, an effect of destroying the fangs, and an effect of destroying the tail. In this case, the degree of expectation of a big hit may differ depending on the part to be destroyed. Specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation may be increased in the order of tail, claw, fang, and horn. With this configuration, the adventurer's character 801 can play the game while paying attention to the part to be destroyed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, in this case, the development in the subsequent avoidance turn effect and attack turn effect may be different depending on the part destroyed in the part destruction chance effect. More specifically, for example, in the avoidance turn production, as an attack method of the monster character 811, not only an attack using a tail but also an attack using a claw, an attack using fangs, and an attack using horns are performed. It is more likely that you will avoid it when you attack using the destroyed part in the part destruction chance production after configuring it so that it can be broken, than when you attack with the undestroyed part. It may be configured to be. That is, the playability of predicting the degree of expectation of success in avoidance by determining whether or not an attack using the destroyed part is being performed from the motion (preliminary movement) when the monster 811 attacks. Can be realized. Similarly, regarding the attack turn effect, the adventurer character 801 is given a variation in the part to be attacked, and the combination of the type of the part that has already been destroyed and the part to be attacked is used. , May be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of defeating the monster character 811. More specifically, for example, when an effect of trying to attack a destroyed part is executed, it is expected to defeat the monster character 811 than when attacking an undestroyed part. It may be configured to have a high degree.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state B, the effect of succeeding in defeating the monster character 811 is always executed, and the transition to the consecutive villa mode is notified. Although it was configured, the effect mode may be different depending on the pre-reading result of each reserved ball held at the time when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won. More specifically, for example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, and the oldest reserved ball of the first special symbol is held in time. If the ball (the first reserved ball to be digested) is the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot, the monster character 811 may not be defeated and the effect of re-entry into the avoidance turn effect may be executed. .. When only the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the time of transition to the consecutive villa mode, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol to be digested first is the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot, the state shifts to the probability change state B. At the same time, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, so it is confirmed that the jackpot will be won in the probable change state. That is, it is possible to shift to the latent state B (if a right-handed hit is made during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not accumulated, the transition to the latent state A is performed). Since it will be confirmed, if the transition to the consecutive villa mode is notified, the first special symbol will be a big hit and the consecutive villa mode will be terminated, which may disappoint the player. .. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the first special symbol will be a big hit immediately after the transition to the consecutive villa mode, if the production mode is set to return to the avoidance turn production, the player will be overly disappointed. Can be suppressed. In addition, the player did not hit right during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probability change state B (the reserved ball of the second special symbol was not accumulated), or the normal state even though the player made a right hit. If the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that can execute the lottery in B cannot be accumulated (only 2 or less reserved balls can be accumulated), the destroyed part of the monster character 811 is It may be configured so that the effect to be reproduced is executed and it is notified that the effect returns to the part destruction chance effect. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the avoidance turn effect from being executed even though the possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in the normal state B is 0.

In the twelfth embodiment, only the specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening for winning the prize ball during the execution of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a large winning opening may be provided on the left side of the board (a position where a game ball launched by hitting left can enter and a game ball launched by hitting right makes it difficult to enter). Then, in the case of a big hit of the big 2 special symbols, the big winning opening on the right side of the board and the big winning opening on the left side are alternately controlled so that the opening period and the interval period are relatively short. The number of prize balls that can be obtained may be approximately the same when the player continues to hit right during the jackpot and when he continues to hit left. Then, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained in the latent state B, it is notified that the left-handed hit is continuously performed during the execution of the jackpot game, while the jackpot of the second special symbol is performed in the consecutive villa mode. If it becomes, it may be configured to notify that the right-handed hit is continued. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball launched by right-handed hitting in the latent state B from entering the second entrance 6450 and increasing the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol. .. That is, it is possible to more reliably suppress the problem that the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be maintained until the normal mode B even though the failure is notified in the avoidance turn effect.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 308. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, in the advantageous (high jackpot probability) latent state B, the disadvantageous (low jackpot probability) normal state as compared with the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In B, the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more advantageous for the player. That is, in the normal state B, by winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the mode is configured to shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode for the player. In other words, in order to shift to the advantageous consecutive villa mode, it is necessary to win the jackpot in the unfavorable gaming state rather than the advantageous gaming state, which is a novel game property.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment, two types of advantageous consecutive villa modes are provided: the consecutive villa mode A having a relatively low degree of advantage and the consecutive villa mode B having a relatively high degree of advantage. Then, in these two types of modes, as in the consecutive villa mode in the twelfth embodiment, a plurality of gaming states are sequentially transitioned (probability change state, time saving state, and normal state). are doing. Then, in each mode, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the relatively advantageous (that is, the jackpot probability is high) probability variation state, the consecutive villa mode A with a low degree of advantage is set. If the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the relatively disadvantageous (that is, the jackpot probability is low) time saving state or the normal state, the consecutive villa mode B having a high degree of advantage is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, in the consecutive villa mode, a very special and novel game in which the degree of advantage is higher when the jackpot is won in the unfavorable game state than in the advantageous game state. It has a structure that realizes sex.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the voice lamp. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the control device 113 has been partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The point is that some control processes have been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 12 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 294 and 295, a characteristic effect mode in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 294 (a), an effect mode during the time saving state A, which is a gaming state constituting the consecutive villa mode A having a low degree of advantage, will be described. Here, in the consecutive villa mode A, the probabilistic state is set until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit, and then the time is set to the short time state over the lottery of 4 special symbols. After that, the mode is set to the normal state. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the time saving state than to win the jackpot in the probabilistic state in the consecutive villa mode A. That is, it shifts (promotes) to the consecutive villa mode B having a high degree of advantage. In the thirteenth embodiment, the effect (final decisive battle effect) indicating whether or not the jackpot is won in the four time reduction states (time reduction state A) in the consecutive villa mode A is executed.

FIG. 294 (a) is a diagram showing a production mode of the final battle production in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 294 (a), when the final battle effect is executed, the character 801 imitating an adventurer and the character 811 imitating a monster are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, with respect to the display area HR6 formed above the main display area Dm, the characters "Enter the final battle !!", the characters indicating the remaining number of time reductions (for example, the characters "4 times remaining"), Is displayed. Further, a display area HR20 for displaying characters indicating the current state is formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 294 (a), the characters “in RUSH” indicating the consecutive villa mode A are displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "If you defeat the enemy, you will be promoted to super RUSH !?" are displayed. With these display modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that if the enemy can be defeated within a short time, the player will shift to the more advantageous super RUSH (renso mode B).

Next, with reference to FIG. 294 (b), the super final decisive battle effect executed in the time saving state (time saving state B) of the consecutive villa mode B will be described. Similar to the final battle production, this super final battle production is a production showing that the player shifts to the consecutive villa mode B by defeating the enemy. Here, in the consecutive villa mode B, the probabilistic state is set until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the end of the jackpot, and then the time is set to the shortened state over the lottery of 39 special symbols. After that, the mode is set to the normal state. That is, the consecutive villa mode B forms an advantageous mode in which the number of time saving states is 35 times more than that of the consecutive villa mode A. In the thirteenth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot during the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 1/20, and the probability of winning the jackpot during the low probability state is set to 1/40. .. Therefore, the ratio of winning the jackpot during the 35 times of the time saving state (time saving state B) in the consecutive villa mode B is about 58.8%. In other words, compared to the final battle production in Renso Mode A, there is a higher possibility of winning the enemy significantly (a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol), so the super final battle production is expected by the player. It will be a higher production of.

FIG. 294 (b) is a diagram showing a production mode of the super final battle production. As shown in FIG. 294 (b), in the super final battle production, the character 801 has a smaller body size than the enemy character 811 in the final battle production, and has no horns or claws (that is, it seems to be weak). A production that confronts the character 821 that imitates a monster (appearance that seems to be easy to win) is executed. Further, in the display area HR6, the characters "Enter the super final battle !!" and the characters indicating the remaining number of time reductions (for example, the characters "39 times remaining") are displayed. In addition, the characters "in super RUSH" indicating the consecutive villa mode B are displayed on the display area HR20. Further, the characters "Super RUSH continues if the enemy is defeated !?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the super RUSH (renso mode B) is set again even after the big hit is completed by winning the big hit within the short time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 295, an effect mode during the probabilistic state (probability change state B) in the consecutive villa mode B (super RUSH) will be described. Here, in the consecutive villa mode B, if a big hit is won during the probability change state, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode A having a low degree of advantage. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the effect is performed as if it were a big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 295 (a), the effect of rolling down the rock IG from the front of the character 801 imitating an adventurer is executed, and the sub-display area Ds is set to " When it hits a rock, it is demoted to normal RUSH !? "is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that if the adventurer 801 hits the rock IG, it will be disadvantageous to the player (shift to the consecutive villa mode A). it can.

FIG. 295 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state B. As shown in FIG. 295 (b), when the jackpot is won in the probability change state B, the adventurer 801 collides with the rock IG and is blown away, and the jackpot symbols are aligned in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b. By doing so, the jackpot winning will be notified. In addition, the characters "normal RUSH demotion !?" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player has been demoted from the consecutive villa mode B to the consecutive villa mode A.

In the thirteenth embodiment, only the jackpot A13 is provided as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. That is, while the number of time reductions is set to 0 when winning in the normal state or the probabilistic state, 1 time is given as the number of time reductions when winning in the latent state, and 34 times is given as the number of time reductions when winning in the time saving state. It was configured to provide only the jackpot type, but it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the time saving state, a jackpot type (special figure 1 special jackpot) in which 34 times are given as the number of time saving in the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent probability state may be provided. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that shifts to an advantageous consecutive villa mode is provided regardless of the game state at the time of winning. With this configuration, it is possible to expect a shift to the consecutive villa mode when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the game state. Further, for example, a jackpot type may be provided in which the number of probability changes after the jackpot ends is set to 0. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that the probabilistic state is not always given, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 to 298. Here, the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment has the first random number table 202a, the time saving table 202e, and the variation pattern table 202d with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment described above (see FIG. 279 (a)). , The configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga has been partially changed. First, the details of the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 296 (a). FIG. 296 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 296 (a), the first random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment has a high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol as in the first random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. The random number value determined to be a big hit (counter value of the first random number counter C1) and the random number value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol (counter value of the first random number counter C1) are defined. Has been done.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296 (a), 25 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 24" are determined to be jackpots in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol. Random value (counter value) of is specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, 25 random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 24". Therefore, the probability of being judged as a big hit when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state or the time saving state is 1/40 (25/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 296 (a), 50 random values (counter values) of "0 to 49" are determined as jackpots in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol. Numerical values (counter values) are specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, 50 random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 49". Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probability variation state or the latent probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/20 (50/1000).

Next, with reference to FIG. 296 (b), the details of the time saving table 202e provided in the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. Similar to the time reduction table 202e in the twelfth embodiment, the time reduction table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. is there. In the thirteenth embodiment, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, only the jackpot A13, which is the same four-round probability variation jackpot as the jackpot A12 in the twelfth embodiment, is provided. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, jackpots B13 to D13, which are the same 16 rounds, 8 rounds, and 4 rounds probability variation jackpots as the jackpots B12 to D12 in the 12th embodiment, are provided. The number of probable changes after the end of the jackpot has been increased from 3 times to 20 times in the twelfth embodiment. This is intended to balance the fact that the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state of the special symbol has decreased from the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 296 (b), for the "big hit A13" won in the normal state and the time saving state, "0 times" is defined in association with the number of times the time saving is given, and the winning in the latent state and the probability changing state. With respect to the "big hit A13", "24 times" is specified as the number of times of shortening the time. If you win the "Big Hit A13", 20 times will be set as the probability variation number, so if you win the "Big Hit A13" in the normal state or the time saving state, you will be submerged until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the big hit. When it becomes a certain state and the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed, it becomes a normal state. In addition, if the "big hit A13" is won in the probability change state or the latent state, it will be in the probability change state until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the end of the jackpot, and the lottery of the 21st to 24th special symbols will be carried out. When the time is shortened and the lottery of 24 special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 296 (b), the "big hit B13" to "big hit D13" (big hit of the second special symbol) won in the game state (normal state, time saving state, latent state) other than the probability change state. On the other hand, "59 times" is associated with the number of times of shortening the time, and "24 times" is associated with the number of times of giving the time saving for "big hit B13" to "big hit D13" won in the probabilistic state. It is stipulated. Even if you win any of "Big hit B13" to "Big hit D13", 20 times are set as the probability variation number, so you win any of "Big hit B13" to "Big hit D13" in the game state other than the probability variation state. Then, after the big hit is finished, until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed, it will be in a probable state, and the time will be shortened from the 21st to the 59th special symbol lottery, and when the 59 special symbol lottery is completed. , It becomes a normal state. In addition, if any of "Big hit B13" to "Big hit D13" is won in the latent state, the probability changes state until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit, and the 21st to 24th specials The time is shortened over the lottery of symbols, and when the lottery of 24 special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 296 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d according to the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 296 (c), the variation pattern table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment shows the variation pattern for showing the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state and the latent state. The normal / latent table 202di1 that is referred to when selecting, and the time saving table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern for showing the lottery result when a lottery of special symbols is executed in the time saving state. It is composed of three data tables: a table 202di2 and a probability variation table 202di3 that is referred to when a variation pattern for showing the lottery result is selected when a lottery of a special symbol is executed in the probability variation state. There is. First, the details of the normal / latent probability table 202di1 will be described with reference to FIG. 297 (a).

FIG. 297 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal / latent probability table 202di1. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "off", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139". Is specified in association with a short deviation of 7 seconds, a long deviation of 10 seconds is associated with the range of "140 to 149", and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in the range of "150 to 179". Normal reach is associated and defined, and a super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is associated with a range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the normal reach with the variation time of 30 seconds is associated. A super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with a range of "30 to 189", and a special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds is associated with a range of "190 to 198". There is.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range. If the ultra-short deviation of 0.1 seconds is specified and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 0.1 seconds in the entire range. The long and short hits are specified. The reason why the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 0.1 seconds, which is extremely short, is mainly during the time saving state when the time saving state is changed to the normal state in the consecutive villa mode A and the consecutive villa mode B. This is to digest the reserved balls of the second special symbol stored in the box at high speed. That is, as in the eighth embodiment described above, even if the effect of notifying the lottery result based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is executed during the fluctuation time of the last fluctuation display in the time saving state (see FIG. 199). This is to reduce the possibility of making the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 297 (b), the details of the time saving table 202di2, which is a kind of data table constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. FIG. 297 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202di2. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), the time saving table 202di2 varies with respect to the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take with respect to the lottery result of "off" regardless of the type of the special symbol. Only the special fluctuations with a time off of 5 seconds are specified in association with each other. Further, with respect to the lottery result of the "big hit", only the special variation per 5 seconds of the variation time is defined in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the fluctuation time is always set to 5 seconds. Therefore, the production period in the final battle production (see FIG. 294 (a)) and the super final battle production (see FIG. 294 (b)) can be fixed. Therefore, since it is only necessary to provide the effect for 5 seconds as the effect mode of the variable pattern effect, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298 (a), the details of the probability variation table 202di3, which is a kind of data table constituting the variation pattern table 202d, will be described. FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation table 202di3. As shown in FIG. 298 (a), when the lottery result is "out of order", the fluctuation time is 3 seconds with respect to the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149" regardless of the symbol type. "Short deviation" is specified in association with each other, and "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". A "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the range of CS1 values of "190 to 195", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates with respect to the range of "196 to 198". A "super reach" with a time of 15 seconds is associated and specified. That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the normal state (when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined by referring to the normal / latent probability table 202di1 (see FIG. 297 (a))). In comparison, the fluctuation time is shortened when the lottery result is not a big hit. As a result, the game during the probabilistic state can be speedily performed (digested), so that it is possible to prevent the game in the probabilistic state from becoming redundant.

Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (a), when the lottery result is "big hit", the fluctuation time is in the range of "0 to 49" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the symbol type. A "normal reach" of 10 seconds is specified in association with each other, and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". A "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value of the counter CS1 in the range of "195 to 198". That is, even if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery during the probability change state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as compared with the case where the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state or the latent state. are doing. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game in the probabilistic state from becoming redundant.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298 (b), the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga, which is a kind of data table constituting the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga. Similar to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga in the twelfth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga has a correspondence relationship (variation pattern scenario) between the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the jackpot and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to. A data table that is referenced for selection.

As shown in FIG. 298 (b), for the situation where the previous jackpot type was jackpot A13 and the gaming state at the time of winning was the normal state or the time saving state, regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols, Fluctuation pattern scenarios with which the normal / latent table 202di1 is referred to are associated and defined. Therefore, when the jackpot A13 is won in the normal state or the time saving state, the normal / latent probability table 202di1 is referred to every time the special symbol lottery is executed until the next big hit, and the fluctuation pattern (variation). Time) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), for the situation where the previous jackpot type was jackpot A13 and the gaming state at the time of winning was the latent state or the probable change state, the special symbol after the jackpot A variation pattern in which the probability variation table 202di3 is referred to in the range of 1 to 20 lottery times, the time saving table 202di2 is referred to in the range of 21 to 24 times, and the normal / latent probability table 202di1 is referred to after 25 times. Scenarios are associated and defined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), the previous jackpot type is any of jackpots B13 to D13 (big hit of the second special symbol), and the gaming state at the time of winning is a gaming state other than the probability change state. Regarding the situation, the probability variation table 202di3 is referred to when the number of lottery of special symbols after the big hit is in the range of 1 to 20, the time saving table 202di2 is referred to in the range of 21 to 59 times, and after 60 times, it is normal. A variation pattern scenario in which the latent probability table 202di1 is referred to is defined in association with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (b), the previous jackpot type is any of jackpots B13 to D13 (big hit of the second special symbol), and the gaming state at the time of winning is a probable change state. Refers to the probability variation table 202di3 in the range of 1 to 20 times of the special symbol lottery after the big hit, refers to the time saving table 202di2 in the range of 21 to 24 times, and is for normal / latent use after 25 times. Fluctuation pattern scenarios with which table 202di1 is referenced are associated and defined.

By setting the fluctuation pattern scenario in advance with reference to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga, it is possible to omit the process of determining which fluctuation pattern table to select at the time of drawing a special symbol. It is possible to reduce the processing load when executing the lottery of symbols.

Next, the state transition method in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 and 301. Here, the thirteenth embodiment is configured to transition between four modes (states) of the normal mode, the chance mode, the consecutive villa mode A, and the consecutive villa mode B. First, with reference to FIG. 299, a method of shifting the state in a mode other than the consecutive villa mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 299, the normal mode is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 by left-handed to enter the first special. It is composed only of the normal state A in which the game is advanced by executing the lottery of the symbols. In addition, the chance mode is set to the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the game ball is entered into the first entry slot 64 by left-handed to execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is composed only of the latent state A in which the game progresses by making the game proceed.

As shown in FIG. 299, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state A to another state when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state A, the game state after the big hit is set to the latent state A. That is, when the jackpot A13 is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, the chance mode (latent state A) is set by setting the number of time reductions to 0 and the number of probability changes to 20.

Further, as shown in FIG. 299, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent probability state A to another state when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and when the probability variation number (ST number) has elapsed. There is. Specifically, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state A, the mode always shifts to the consecutive villa mode A after the big hit is completed. That is, when the jackpot A13 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the chance mode, the time saving number of times is set to 24 times and the probability change number of times is set to 20 times, so that the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode A (probability change state A). On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won during the probability variation number (ST number) in the latent probability state A (until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 20 times), the process shifts to the normal state A. Since the jackpot probability in the latent state A is 1/20, the percentage of winning jackpots in the lottery of special symbols within 20 times is about 64.2%. Therefore, the rate of transition from the chance mode to the consecutive villa mode A is significantly higher than the rate of transition from the chance mode to the consecutive villa mode (about 2.1%) in the twelfth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to shift to the advantageous mode relatively frequently, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300, a method of shifting the state in the consecutive villa mode A will be described. As shown in FIG. 300, the consecutive villa mode A is set to the high probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability change in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed. State A, low probability state of special symbol, and time saving state A of normal symbol, and time saving state A in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed, and low probability of special symbol Three games, a normal state B, which is set to the normal state of the normal symbol and the game progresses by digesting the reserved balls of the first and second special symbols accumulated during the consecutive villa mode A. It is composed of states.

As shown in FIG. 300, there is a possibility of transition from the probabilistic state A to another state only when the number of probable changes has elapsed. That is, as shown in FIG. 300, in the probability variation state A, the probability variation number (ST number) elapses and the time is shortened by continuously losing the lottery of the special symbol which is the probability variation number of 20 times. Move to A. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the probability change state A, the state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability change state A again.

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state A to another state when the time saving number of times has passed or when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 300, when all the lottery of the special symbols over the four time reduction times is lost in the time reduction state A, the process shifts to the normal state B. On the other hand, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won within the range of four time reductions, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode B, which has a higher degree of advantage than the consecutive villa mode A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 300, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state B to another state when all the reserved balls are digested and when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 300, when the lottery of special symbols based on all the reserved balls is missed in the normal state B, the mode shifts to the normal mode (normal state A). On the other hand, if a big hit is won in a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol in the normal state B, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode B after the big hit is completed. In addition, if a big hit is won in a lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the mode shifts to the chance mode after the big hit is completed.

In this way, in the consecutive villa mode A, the probability change state A is looped by winning the jackpot during the advantageous probability change state A, and the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state A and the normal state B. As a result, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode B, which has a higher degree of advantage, and thus forms a relatively advantageous state for the player. The rate of winning a jackpot (looping the consecutive villa mode A) during the 20 times set in the probability change state A is about 64.2%, and the jackpot is won in the time saving state A or the normal state B. The ratio (promoted to consecutive villa mode B) is about 18.3%. Therefore, once the transition to the consecutive villa mode A is performed, the consecutive villa mode A is looped or promoted to the consecutive villa mode B at a rate of about 70.7% (64.2% + 35.8% × 18.3%). (It becomes a big hit and an advantageous state is set again). In addition, it is possible to realize a novel playability that the degree of advantage is higher when the jackpot is hit in the time saving state A or the normal state B where the jackpot probability is low than when the jackpot is hit in the probability variation state A where the jackpot probability is high. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game. Further, by setting the time saving state A and the normal state B, which have a low expectation of winning a big hit but have a large benefit when winning a big hit, after the end of the probability changing state A having a high expectation of winning a big hit, the probability changing state A Even if the number of probable changes has passed, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of having passed through the state where the jackpot expectation is high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, a method of shifting the state in the consecutive villa mode B will be described. As shown in FIG. 301, the consecutive villa mode B is set to the high probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability change in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed. State B, low probability state of special symbol, and time saving state B of normal symbol and time saving state B in which the game is advanced by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed, and low probability of special symbol Three games, the normal state C, which is set to the normal state of the normal symbol and the game progresses by digesting the reserved balls of the first and second special symbols accumulated during the consecutive villa mode B. It is composed of states.

As shown in FIG. 301, there is a possibility of shifting from the probability change state B to another state when the probability change number has passed and when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery. That is, as shown in FIG. 301, in the probability variation state B, the probability variation number (ST number) elapses and the time is shortened by continuously losing the lottery of 20 special symbols which is the probability variation number. Move to B. If a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the probability change state B, the state after the big hit is set to the consecutive villa mode A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state B to another state when the time saving number of times has passed or when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, when all the lottery of the special symbols over 39 times of time saving in the time saving state B is missed, the process shifts to the normal state C. On the other hand, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won within the range of 39 times of time reduction, the state shifts to the probability change state B. That is, the consecutive villa mode B is looped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state C to another state when all the reserved balls are digested and when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery of special symbols based on all the reserved balls is missed in the normal state C, the mode shifts to the normal mode (normal state A). On the other hand, if a big hit is won in the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol in the normal state C, the state shifts to the probable change state B after the big hit ends (loops in the consecutive villa mode B). In addition, if a big hit is won in a lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the mode shifts to the chance mode after the big hit is completed.

In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, while the jackpot is won during the advantageous probability change state B, the player is demoted to the consecutive villa mode A, while in the time saving state B and the normal state C, the second special symbol is displayed. By winning the jackpot in the lottery, the consecutive villa mode B, which has a high degree of advantage, is looped, so it is possible to realize an extremely novel playability that makes the player wish to win the jackpot after the number of probable changes has passed. In addition, the rate of winning a jackpot (demoted to consecutive villa mode A) during the 20 times set in the probability change state B is about 64.2%, and the second special symbol in the time saving state B or the normal state C. The rate of winning the jackpot (looping the consecutive villa mode B) is about 66.3%. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode B, the jackpot is won at a rate of about 87.9% (64.2% + 35.8% × 66.3%), and the consecutive villa mode A or the consecutive villa mode B is set. Form a very favorable condition to be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, the number of time reductions after shifting to the consecutive villa mode B is significantly larger than that in the consecutive villa mode A, so even if the jackpot is not achieved in the advantageous probability change state, the time reduction state It is possible to give the player the impression that it is possible to win a big hit after the transition to. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode B, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to pass through without becoming a big hit during the probability change state B and win the big hit after the time is shortened. In other words, it realizes a novel playability that makes it more strongly expected to win the jackpot in the time saving state B, which is set after that, than to win the jackpot in the more advantageous probability change state B. be able to. In addition, when the number of probability changes (ST number) elapses in the advantageous probability change state B and the state shifts to the time saving state, the player is not disappointed, but rather has survived the crisis of falling to the consecutive villa mode A. You can make an impression and please the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the RAM 223 in the thirteenth embodiment has a final variation flag 223fa and a final effect setting flag 223fb with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment described above (see FIG. 285 (b)). And the hit effect flag 223fc are different in that they are provided. It is also different in that the avoidance rate storage area 223ia is deleted.

The final fluctuation flag 223fa is a flag indicating whether or not the final fluctuation display in the time saving state is being executed. When the final variation flag 223fa is on, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is not being executed. This final fluctuation flag 223fa is set to on when the last fluctuation in the time saving state starts, and turns off when the number of time saving becomes 0 (that is, when the last fluctuation display in the time saving state ends). It is set (see S9006 in FIG. 307).

The final effect set flag 223fb has already set the effect result (the result of the battle with the character 811 (renso mode A) or the character 821 (renso mode B) imitating a monster) in the final variation display in the time saving state. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been completed. If the final effect setting flag 223fb is on, it means that the effect type has been determined, and if it is off, it means that the effect type has not been determined. When a hit holding ball is detected during the execution of the final variation (a jackpot start winning prize is detected), a revival effect is produced according to the state of the final effect set flag 223 fb and the state of the hit effect flag 223 fc described later. It is determined whether or not to notify the hit. As the revival effect, as in the eighth embodiment, an effect in which a hit can be notified in a short time during a high-speed (0.1 second) fluctuation of the holding ball of the second special symbol (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). b) See) is executed.

The hit effect flag 223fc wins the battle with the effect mode indicating a hit (character 811 (renso mode A) or character 821 (renso mode B) imitating a monster) as the effect mode of the final variable effect in the time saving state. It is a flag for indicating whether or not the effect mode) or the revival effect is set. If the hit effect flag 223fc is on, it means that the effect mode indicating a hit or the revival effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the effect mode indicating a loss is being executed or the last in the time saving state. It means that the variable display is not being executed. The hit effect flag 223fc is set to on when an effect mode indicating a hit is set (see S2916 in FIG. 308) or when the start of a resurrection effect is set (see S2326 in FIG. 306), and the time saving state (and It is set to off when the effect mode in (hold digestion) is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 303. Here, the thirteenth embodiment differs only in that the jackpot control process 13 (S1545) is executed instead of the jackpot control process 12 (see FIG. 289) with respect to the twelfth embodiment described above. Here, only the details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1545) will be described.

FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 13 (see FIG. 303) described above. Of the jackpot control processes 13 (see FIG. 303) in the thirteenth embodiment, in each of the processes S1601 to S1612, S1616 to S1618, S1621, and S1622, the jackpot control process 12 in the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 289). The same processes as those of S1601 to S1612, S1616 to S1618, S1621, and S1622 are executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 13 (see FIG. 303) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), 20 is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203ia. The setting (S1645) is performed, and the process shifts to S1621. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 20 times after the jackpot is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 308. First, with reference to FIG. 304, the details of the effect update process 13 (S2175) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 13 (S2175) in the thirteenth embodiment. The effect update process 13 (S2175) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (S2112) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), such as the progress of the variation pattern effect (variation display effect). This is a process for updating the effect mode according to the above.

In the effect update process 13 (S2175) in the thirteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the final variation flag 223fa is on (S3511), and it is determined that the final variation flag 223fa is not on (off). If this is the case (S3511: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3511, when it is determined that the final variation flag 223fa is on (S3511: Yes), it is determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S3512). If it is determined in the process of S3512 that the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S3512: Yes), it is not necessary to additionally set the effect, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3512, when it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is not on (off) (S3512: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. (S3521). If it is determined that the timing has not elapsed 2 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S3521: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3521, when it is determined that the timing is 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation (S3521: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold (S3514), and there is a big hit in the hold. If it is determined that (S3514: Yes), an effect of winning the enemy is set (S3522). Next, the hit effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S3516), and the process shifts to S3519. On the other hand, in the process of S3514, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the hold (S3514: No), the effect of defeating the enemy is set (S3523), and the hit effect flag 223fc is set to off (S3514). S3518), the process shifts to S3519. In the process of S3519 executed after the process of S3516 or S3518 is completed, the final effect setting flag 223fb is set to ON (S3519), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the command determination process 13 (S2176) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 305. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 13 (S2176). The command determination process 13 (S2176) in the thirteenth embodiment is a process executed in place of the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 290) in the twelfth embodiment described above. Of the command determination processes 13 in the thirteenth embodiment, in each of the processes S2201 to S2209, S2211, S2213, S2242, S2217, and S2222, S2201 to S2201 of the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 290) in the twelfth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S2209, S2211, S2213, S2242, S2217, and S2222 are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 13 (see FIG. 305) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received in the process of S2209, the prize information related process 12 (S2241) in the twelfth embodiment is set. Instead, the winning information-related process 13 is executed (S2661), and this process is terminated. Details of the winning information-related process 13 (S2661) will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

Further, in the command determination process 13 (see FIG. 305) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the stop command has been received in the process of S2242 (S2242: Yes), the stop command process 13 is executed (S2262). ), End this process. The details of the stop command process 13 (S2262) will be described later with reference to FIG. 307.

Further, in the command determination process 13 (see FIG. 305) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the state command has been received in the process of S2215 (S2215), the state command process 12 (S2243) in the twelfth embodiment. Instead of, the state command process 13 is executed (S2663), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the details of the winning information-related processing 13 (S2661) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the winning information-related process 13 (S2661). The winning information-related process 13 (S2661) in the thirteenth embodiment is a process executed in place of the winning information-related process 12 (see FIG. 291) in the twelfth embodiment described above. Of the prize information-related processes 13 (S2661) in the thirteenth embodiment, in each of the processes S2311 and S2312, each process of the prize information-related process 12 (see FIG. 291) S2311 and S2312 in the twelfth embodiment, respectively. The same process as is executed.

Further, when the winning information-related process 13 (S2261) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed, it is first determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2321), and the final effect set flag 223fb is executed. If it is determined that is not on (S2321: No), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, in the process of S2321, when it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fc is on (S2321: Yes), it is determined whether the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S2322), and the hit effect flag 223fc is on. If it is determined to be (S2322: Yes), the process shifts to S2312.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2322 that the winning effect flag 223fc is not on (off) (S2322: No), the winning information command received this time is the winning information corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (S2341). If it is determined in the process of S2341 that the winning information does not correspond to the jackpot of the second special symbol (S2341: No), the process shifts to the process of S2312. On the other hand, in the process of S2341 when it is determined that the received prize information command is the prize information corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol (S2341: Yes), the execution of the resurrection effect is set (S2325). The hit effect flag 223fc is set to on (S2326), and the process shifts to S2311.

Next, the details of the stop command process 13 (S2262) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 307. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the stop command process 13 (S2262). The stop command process 13 (S2262) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process 13 (see S2176 in FIG. 305) that a stop command has been received.

In this stop command processing 13 (S2262), first, it is determined whether the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S9001), and when it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is not on (off). (S9001: No), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S9007), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fc is on (S9001: Yes), then it is determined whether the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S9002). In the process of S9002, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S9002: Yes), it is determined whether to stop the hit symbol (S9011). If it is determined that the winning symbol is not stopped (S9011: No), the process proceeds to S9007.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S9011 that the hit symbol is stopped (S9011: Yes), the end of the final effect is set (S9005), and the final effect set flag 223 fb and the hit effect flag 223 fc are all set to off. (S9006), the process shifts to S9007. Further, in the processing of S9002, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is not on (S9002: No), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more (S9012). ), When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S9012: No), the process shifts to S9005. On the other hand, in the process of S9012, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more (S9012: Yes), the process shifts to S9007.

Next, with reference to FIG. 308, the details of the effect setting process 13 (S2845) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 13 (S2845). The effect setting process 13 (S2845) in the thirteenth embodiment is a process executed in place of the effect setting process 12 (see S2841 in FIG. 293) in the twelfth embodiment described above, and the effect setting in the twelfth embodiment. Similar to the process 12 (see FIG. 293), this is a process for setting the effect mode of the variation display effect at the variation time notified by the variation pattern command.

In the effect setting process 13 (S2845), first, it is determined whether the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2911). In the process of S2911, when it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is not on (S2911: No), the effect mode of the variable pattern effect according to the game state and the lottery result is set (S2951). End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fc is on (S2911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S2913). In the process of S2913, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S2913: Yes), the display continuation of the display mode at the start of the fluctuation is set (S2917), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is not on (S2913: No), the process proceeds to S2952.

In the process of S2952, it is determined whether or not the hold of the second special symbol includes a hit (S2952). When it is determined that the hold of the second special symbol includes a hit (S2952: Yes), the start of the resurrection effect is set (S2915), the hit effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S2916), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2952, when it is determined that the hold of the second special symbol does not include a hit (S2952: No), the process shifts to S2917.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, there are two types of advantageous states, that is, the consecutive villa mode A having a relatively low degree of advantage and the consecutive villa mode B having a relatively high degree of advantage. As the configuration of each of these modes, a probability variation state in which the jackpot probability is relatively high, a time saving state in which the jackpot probability is relatively low, and a game ball to the second entrance 6450 with a low jackpot probability are provided. It consisted of three gaming states: a normal state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. Then, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the time saving state or the normal state where the jackpot probability is low than to win the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state where the jackpot probability is high. did. That is, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode A, which has a relatively low degree of advantage after the jackpot ends, whereas in the time saving state or the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol If the jackpot is won, the mode will be changed to the consecutive villa mode B, which has a relatively high degree of advantage after the jackpot is completed. With this configuration, a novel game in which the game is played with the expectation that the jackpot will be won in the time-saving state or the normal state that shifts after the probability variation state ends, without becoming a jackpot in the advantageous probability variation state. Sex can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth embodiment, only the jackpot A13 is provided as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. That is, while the number of time reductions is set to 0 when winning in the normal state or the time reduction state, only the jackpot type in which 24 times are given as the number of time reductions when winning in the latent state or the probability change is provided. It is not limited to. For example, a jackpot type in which 24 times are given as the number of time reductions may be provided regardless of the game state at the time of winning. That is, even if the player wins in the normal mode, a jackpot type that directly shifts to the consecutive villa mode A may be provided. Further, for example, a jackpot type (a jackpot type that directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B) may be provided, in which 59 times are given as the number of time reductions regardless of the winning game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect a transition to the consecutive villa mode A or the consecutive villa mode B when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the game state. Further, for example, a jackpot type may be provided in which the number of probability changes after the jackpot ends is set to 0. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension that the probabilistic state is not always given, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the time saving state A and the time saving state B, which are relatively disadvantageous (low jackpot probability), are compared to winning the jackpot in the probability changing state A and the probability changing state B, which are relatively advantageous (high jackpot probability). By configuring so that those who win the jackpot are more likely to shift to the consecutive villa mode B after the jackpot ends, it is possible to establish a playability in which it is more advantageous to win the jackpot in a disadvantageous state than in an advantageous state. I was allowed to do it, but it is not limited to this. For example, it is more disadvantageous (normal symbol) than a big hit in the advantageous consecutive villa mode A and consecutive villa mode B where the game can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held (the time saving state of the normal symbol is set). The jackpot in the normal mode or chance mode (the normal state is set) is better if the jackpot game with a large number of rounds is easily executed, so that the jackpot is in a disadvantageous state rather than an advantageous state. , It may be possible to realize playability in which an element having a high degree of advantage is generated. That is, the jackpot of the first special symbol may be configured so that the jackpot type having a larger number of rounds can be easily selected than the jackpot of the second special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a probability change state of a special symbol having a probability change number of 20 times is always set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the jackpot type, the special symbol type, the game state at the time of winning, and the like. However, depending on the conditions when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends may be different. More specifically, for example, if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the probability that the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit is high, and if the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, after the big hit is finished. It may be configured so that the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol is high. In other words, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the consecutive villa mode A or the consecutive villa mode B, a low probability state of the special symbol is given at a high rate (the number of time reductions is 24 or 59 times). It may be configured so that only the time saving state is given). More specifically, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation state A, only the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 24 is set, and in the normal state B, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. If a winner is won, only the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 59 times may be set. Further, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the time saving state where the time saving number is 59 times, it may be configured so that only the time saving state where the time saving number is 59 times is set. With this configuration, the case of winning a big hit in the normal mode or the chance mode is more advantageous in terms of the number of probability variations given after the end of the big hit than the case of winning the big hit in the consecutive villa mode. In other words, it realizes a novel playability that some elements are more advantageous when it is a big hit in the disadvantageous normal mode or chance mode than when it is a big hit in the advantageous state of the consecutive villa mode. This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 to 315. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the player is most advantageous by not winning the jackpot in a relatively advantageous gaming state and winning the jackpot in a relatively unfavorable gaming state that shifts thereafter. It was configured so that it was possible to shift to the villa mode.

On the other hand, in the 14th embodiment, it is possible to shift to the advantageous consecutive villa mode only when the big hits are continuously won over a specific number of special symbol lottery under a predetermined condition. It was configured to be. That is, when the succession of big hits is interrupted, the possibility of shifting to the consecutive villa mode is cut off, realizing a novel playability.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The twelfth regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 309, a characteristic effect mode in the 14th embodiment will be described. Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 313, but in the 14th embodiment, when the chance mode is entered, a special symbol of a specific number of times (up to 3 times) is specified before the chance mode ends. By winning a big hit in succession over the lottery, it is configured to shift to the advantageous consecutive villa mode. More specifically, if a jackpot is won in the latent state that constitutes the chance mode, a probability change state (probability change state A) with one time reduction is set, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol accumulated during the jackpot digestion. If the jackpot is won again during the probability change state A in the lottery based on, the probability change state A is set again after the jackpot ends, and in this reset probability change state A, a right-handed strike is performed during the previous probability change state A. By winning a big hit in a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol saved in, it is configured to shift to the consecutive villa mode. Here, a mode of producing a continuous attack effect for suggesting whether or not a jackpot will be won consecutively over a specific number of lottery in the chance mode will be described.

FIG. 309 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode (effect mode of continuous attack effect) displayed when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state in the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 309 (a), when the jackpot is won in the latent state, the adventurer character 801 performs a sword-based sword attack on the monster character 811 in the main display area Dm. At the same time, a display area HR12 in which the characters "1 continuous attack" is displayed is formed above the character 801. In addition, the characters "Determine a continuous attack !! Defeat with 3 consecutive attacks !?" are displayed for the upper display area HR6 in the main display area Dm. Further, the characters "chance mode" are displayed with respect to the display area HR20 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. Further, the characters "If you defeat the enemy, you will enter RUSH !?" are displayed for the first display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. By these display contents, the character 811 of the enemy monster is successfully attacked (slashed) three times in a row (successful three consecutive attacks), and the advantageous consecutive villa mode (RUSH) is entered. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the transition will occur.

FIG. 309 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode when the jackpot is won again in the probability variation state (probability variation state A) in which the number of time reductions set after the jackpot in the latent probability state is limited to one. If the jackpot is also won in the lottery of the next special symbol of the jackpot in the latent state, the adventurer character 801 additionally slashes the monster character 811, and the trajectory of the slashing crosses. Updated to mode. In addition, the characters in the display area HR12 are updated to "two consecutive attacks". With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that up to 2 out of 3 consecutive attacks can be achieved.

Although not shown, the probability change state A is set again after the second consecutive shot is successful, and the probability change of the previous time (second consecutive shot) is set during the one time reduction of the probability change state A. If you win the jackpot again in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol based on the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol saved during the state A, you can shoot the 3rd consecutive slash at the monster character 811 to make it a monster. An effect that succeeds in defeating the character is executed, and the transition to the consecutive villa mode (RUSH) is notified. In this way, the player's interest in the game can be improved by performing a series of effects (continuous attack effects) across a plurality of game states and jackpot states.

<Electrical configuration in the 14th embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 312. Here, the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment is the first random number table 202a, the time saving table 202e, and the variation pattern table 202d with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 12th embodiment described above (see FIG. 279 (a)). , And the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga has been partially changed. First, with reference to FIG. 310 (a), the details of the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 310 (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first random number table 202a in the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 310 (a), the first random number table 202a in the 14th embodiment has a high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol as in the first random number table 202a in the 12th embodiment. The random number value determined to be a big hit (counter value of the first random number counter C1) and the random number value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol (counter value of the first random number counter C1) are defined. Has been done.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), 25 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 24" are determined to be jackpots in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol. Random value (counter value) of is specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, 25 random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 24". Therefore, the probability of being judged as a big hit when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state or the time saving state is 1/40 (25/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), 227 random values (counter values) of "0 to 226" are used as random values (counter values) determined to be jackpots in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol. Numerical values (counter values) are specified. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, 227 random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the high probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 226". Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probability variation state or the latent probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is about 1 / 4.4 (227/1000).

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e provided in the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310 (b). Similar to the time reduction table 202e in the twelfth embodiment, the time reduction table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. is there. In the 14th embodiment, only the jackpot A14, which is the same 4-round probability variation jackpot as the jackpot A12 in the 12th embodiment, is provided as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, jackpots B14 to D14, which are the same 16 rounds, 8 rounds, and 4 rounds probability variation jackpots as the jackpots B12 to D12 in the 12th embodiment, are provided. The number of probable changes after the end of the jackpot has been increased from 3 times in the 12th embodiment to 4 times. This is intended to balance the fact that the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state of the special symbol has decreased from the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 310 (b), for the "big hit A14" won in the normal state, "0 times" is defined in association with the number of times the time reduction is granted, and for the "big hit A14" won in the time reduction state. Therefore, "39 times" is specified in association with the number of times of time reduction, and "1 time" is specified in association with "1 time" for the "big hit A14" won in the latent state and the probability change state. ing. If you win the "Big Hit A14", the number of probability changes will be set to 4 times. Therefore, if you win the "Big Hit A14" in the normal state, you will be in a latent state until the lottery of 4 special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit. When the lottery of the four special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached. In addition, if the "big hit A14" is won in the time saving state, it will be in a probabilistic state until the lottery of the four special symbols is completed after the big hit is completed, and the time will be shortened from the fifth to the 39th special symbol lottery. , When the lottery of 39 special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached. Furthermore, if the "big hit A14" is won in the probabilistic state or the latent state, it will be in the probable change state until the lottery of one special symbol is completed after the end of the big hit, and the lottery of the first to fourth special symbols will be carried out. When the lottery of four special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), "0 times" is associated with the "big hit B14" to "big hit D14" (big hit of the second special symbol) won in the normal state as the number of times of shortening the time. For the "big hit B14" to "big hit D14" (big hit of the second special symbol) that were won in the time saving state and the probability change state, "39 times" is specified in association with the number of times the time saving is given. For the "big hit B14" to "big hit D14" that were won in the latent state, "1 time" is defined as the number of times of shortening the time. Even if you win any of "Big hit B14" to "Big hit D14", the number of probability changes is set to 4, so if you win any of "Big hit B14" to "Big hit D14" in the normal state, the big hit ends. Until the lottery of the next four special symbols is completed, the latent state is reached, and when the lottery of the four special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached. In addition, if any of "Big hit B14" to "Big hit D14" is won in the time saving state or the probable change state, the probable change state is reached after the end of the big hit until the lottery of 4 special symbols is completed, and the 5th to 39th times. The time is shortened over the lottery of the special symbols, and when the lottery of 39 special symbols is completed, the normal state is reached. Furthermore, if any of "Big hit B14" to "Big hit D14" is won in the latent state, the probability changes state until the lottery of one special symbol is completed after the end of the big hit, and the first to fourth specials are made. It will be in a latent state over the lottery of symbols, and will be in a normal state when the lottery of four special symbols is completed.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 310 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d according to the 14th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 310 (c), the variation pattern table 202d in the 14th embodiment is used when selecting a variation pattern for showing the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode. The table 202dj1 for the normal mode to be referred to, the table 202dj2 for the chance mode to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern for showing the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the chance mode, and the consecutive villas. When a special symbol lottery is executed in the mode, it is composed of three data tables, a consecutive villa mode table 202dj3 that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern for showing the lottery result. First, the details of the normal mode table 202dj1 will be described with reference to FIG. 311 (a).

FIG. 311A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal mode table 202dj1. As shown in FIG. 311 (a), in the normal table 202dj1 in the 14th embodiment, the lottery result is "off" regardless of the symbol type, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation of 7 seconds is specified in association with the range of "140 to 149", and a long deviation of 10 seconds is specified in the range of "140 to 149", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "150 to 179". A normal reach with a time of 30 seconds is associated and defined, and a super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with a range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 29" with the normal reach of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and the value varies in the range of "30 to 189". A super reach with a time of 60 seconds is associated and defined, and a special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds is associated with a range of "190 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 311 (b), the details of the chance mode table 202dj2, which is a kind of data table constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. FIG. 311 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chance mode table 202dj2. As shown in FIG. 311 (b), in this chance mode table 202dj2, regardless of the type of special symbol, the fluctuation time is set in the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take for the lottery result of "out". Only 10-second off special fluctuations are associated and specified. Further, with respect to the lottery result of "big hit", only the special fluctuation per 5 seconds of the fluctuation time is defined in association with the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, if the lottery of the special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the fluctuation time is always set to 10 seconds in the case of a loss, and the fluctuation time is always set to 5 seconds in the case of a hit. It should be noted that the reason why the fluctuation time is different between the hit case and the miss case is that in the thirteenth embodiment, the continuous attack effect is executed by using the opening period of the big hit as well. That is, the purpose is to prevent the player from feeling as if the continuous attack was interrupted during the hit game by executing the continuous attack effect using a part of the jackpot period. Since the table 202dj3 for the consecutive villa mode has the same contents as the table 202id2 for the probability change / time saving in the twelfth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 312, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga, which is a kind of data table constituting the ROM 202 in the 14th embodiment, will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga. Similar to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga in the twelfth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga has a correspondence relationship (variation pattern scenario) between the number of lottery of special symbols after the end of the jackpot and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to. A data table that is referenced for selection.

As shown in FIG. 312, for a situation in which the previous jackpot type is jackpot A14 and the gaming state at the time of winning is a gaming state (normal state, latent state, or probability changing state) other than the time saving state. The variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode table 202dj2 is referred to in the range where the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit is 1 to 4 times and the normal mode table 202dj1 is referred to after the 5th time is defined in association with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 312, for the situation where the previous jackpot type was jackpot A14 and the game state at the time of winning was a time saving state, the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot was 1 to 39 times. In the range, the table 202dj3 for the consecutive villa mode is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the table 202dj1 for the normal mode is referred to after 40 times is defined in association with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 312, the previous jackpot type is any of jackpots B14 to D14 (big hit of the second special symbol), and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the latent state. On the other hand, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode table 202dj2 is referred to in the range where the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit is 1 to 4 times and the normal mode table 202dj1 is referred to after the 5th time is defined in association with each other. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 312, for a situation in which the previous jackpot type is any of jackpots B14 to D14 (big hit of the second special symbol) and the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state or a probability change state. Therefore, the table 202dj3 for the consecutive villa mode is referred to when the number of lottery of the special symbol after the big hit is in the range of 1 to 39 times, and the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the table 202dj1 for the normal mode is referred to after the 40th time is defined in association with each other. Has been done.

By setting the fluctuation pattern scenario in advance with reference to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga, it is possible to omit the process of determining which fluctuation pattern table to select at the time of drawing a special symbol. It is possible to reduce the processing load when executing the lottery of symbols.

Next, a state transition method in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 313. FIG. 313 is a diagram showing a state transition method in a mode other than the normal mode. Regarding the normal mode (normal state), if you simply win a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, you will definitely shift to the chance mode (latent state), and you cannot shift to another state by any other method. It is a simple state transition method.

As shown in FIG. 313, the chance mode is composed of two types of gaming states. Specifically, it is set to a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and basically a latent state in which the game progresses by executing a lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, and a special state. There are two types of probabilistic states A, which are set to a high probability state of the symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol, and the game progresses by executing a lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is composed of game states.

As shown in FIG. 313, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another state when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery and when the number of probable changes has passed. Specifically, when the probability variation number (ST number) of 4 times elapses in the latent probability state, the state shifts to the normal state (normal mode). On the other hand, if a jackpot is won within the range of the number of probability changes in the latent state, the state shifts to the probability change state A (the probability change state in which the number of time reductions is one) after the end of the big hit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 313, from the probability change state A in the chance mode to another state, when the number of time reductions has passed (all the lottery of special symbols during the number of time reductions has been missed), and in the jackpot. There is a possibility of transition if you win. Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbol executed in the short time period in the probability change state A is missed, the state shifts to the latent state. On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state A, the state after the big hit is set to the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state A, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variation state A again.

Here, in order to shift to the probability change state A, first, it is necessary to win a big hit in the latent state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6450, so the first shift in the chance mode. In the probable change state A (first probable change state A), it is highly possible that the player does not have the reserved ball of the second special symbol. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the latent state and a right-handed hit is made during the jackpot, a game ball also enters the right first entry slot 64b, so in the first probability change state A, the first special symbol is reserved. It is highly possible that you have one or more balls. Therefore, in the first probability change state A, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, even if a big hit is won in the first probability change state A, the probability change state A is set again (it is not possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode). On the other hand, if right-handed is performed according to the display content of the small display area Dm2 in the first probability change state A, the second special symbol will be displayed before the variation display of the first special symbol in the first probability change state A is completed. You can get a reserved ball. Then, in the 14th embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery of the first special symbol, a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the first probability change state A. In the probability change state A (second probability change state A) set again based on the above, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. By winning the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode which is advantageous to the player after the big hit is completed. That is, in the chance mode, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the jackpot is won in the one lottery of the first special symbol executed in the first probability change state A, and further, 2 If you do not win the jackpot in the first lottery of the second special symbol executed in the second probability change state A, you cannot shift to the consecutive villa mode. In other words, if you do not win the jackpot three times in a row in the chance mode, you will not be able to switch to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability in which the degree of advantage changes dramatically depending on the timing of winning the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 313, the consecutive villa mode is composed of two types of gaming states. Specifically, the probability change state B in which the special symbol is set to the high probability state and the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, and the game is progressed by basically executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed, and the special It consists of two types of game states: a low-probability state of the symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol, and basically a time-saving state in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 313, there is a possibility of transition from the probability change state B to another state only when the probability change number (ST number) has elapsed. Specifically, when the probability variation number (4 times) elapses, the time is shortened by switching from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state B, the probability change state B is set again after the big hit is completed. That is, the consecutive villa mode is set. Therefore, in the probability change state B, it is advantageous for the player to win the jackpot before the probability change number (ST number) elapses.

Further, as shown in FIG. 313, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another state when the time saving number of times has passed and when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. More specifically, when the number of time reductions (35 times) elapses, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state (normal mode). On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol before the number of time reductions elapses, the state after the big hit is set to the probability change state B. Therefore, even in the time-saving state, it is possible to realize the playability that makes it expected to win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 314 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 314, the RAM 223 in the 14th embodiment has a continuous attack counter 223ja added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 12th embodiment described above (see FIG. 285 (b)), and The difference is that the avoidance rate storage area 223ia has been deleted.

The continuous attack counter 223ja is a counter for counting the number of continuous attacks in the continuous attack effect (see FIG. 309). In the chance mode, the continuous hit counter 223ja is updated by adding one value each time a series of jackpots is made (see S2955 and S2962 in FIG. In that case, the value is reset to 0 (see S2961 in FIG. 315).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 14th embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 315. The 14th embodiment is different from the above-described 12th embodiment only in that the effect setting process 14 (S2861) is executed instead of the effect setting process 12 (see FIG. 293). The details of the effect setting process 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 315. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 14 (S2861).

In the effect setting process 14 (S2861), first, the game state is specified by referring to the data of the game state storage area 223f (S2951). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state specified in the process of S2951 is the latent state (S2952), and if it is determined to be the latent state (S2952: Yes), the variation display to be started this time is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot fluctuation (S2953). In the processing of S2953, when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation is (S2953: Yes), the start of the continuous attack effect (see FIG. 309 (a)) is set (S2954), and 1 is set to the value of the continuous attack counter 223ja. After setting (S2955), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2953, when it is determined that the current variation display is not a jackpot variation (S2953: No), an effect mode for disengagement is set (S2956), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2952, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (S2952: No), then it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic state A (S2957). In the process of S2957, when it is determined that the game state is not the probability change state A (S2957: No), the effect mode of the variable pattern effect according to the game state and the lottery result is set (S2858), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2957, when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability change state A (S2957: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2959.

In the processing of S2959, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation this time is a jackpot fluctuation (S2959), and if it is determined that the fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation (S2959: No), an effect mode for disengagement is set (S2960). , The value of the continuous attack counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S2961), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2959 that this fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation (S2959: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the continuous attack counter 223ja to update (S2962), and this jackpot is the first. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation (S2963). In the processing of S2963, when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of this time is the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (S2963: Yes), the continuous attack effect corresponding to the value of the continuous attack counter 223ja updated in the processing of S2962 is performed. Set (S2964), and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation this time is not the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol) (S2963: No), a continuous attack effect of the mode of destroying the enemy is set. (S2965), and this process is terminated. By executing this effect setting process 14 (see FIG. 315), the number of continuous attacks of the continuous attack effect can be accurately updated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 14th embodiment, a specific number of times (3 times) of special symbols are used between the transition to the chance mode and the end of the chance mode (falling to the normal mode). By winning consecutive big hits throughout the lottery, it is easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode, which is advantageous for the player. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the development (degree of advantage) is influenced by the timing of winning the jackpot. That is, even if the same number of big hits (for example, 5 times) is won in one chance mode, if the lottery result is lost four times in a row after repeating the big hit and the loss alternately, the chance Even if a total of 14 special symbol lottery is executed in the mode, it is not possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode, but after repeating 3 misses and 1 jackpot 3 times, then 2 more times. If a big hit is won in a row, it is possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode after executing the lottery of 14 special symbols in the chance mode. In other words, even if the number of lottery lottery and the number of big hits are exactly the same in the chance mode, it is possible to set a case where the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode and a case where the big hit is not made. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, in the 14th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in succession over three special symbol lottery after the transition to the chance mode, it is easy to shift to the advantageous consecutive villa mode. Although it was configured, the number of consecutive villas required to shift to the consecutive villa mode is not limited to three, and may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, by configuring the lottery of the first special symbol to shift to the consecutive villa mode at a high rate in the probability change state A, the jackpot will be obtained twice in a row in the chance mode. As a result, it is possible to realize playability that facilitates the transition to the consecutive villa mode. As a result, it becomes relatively easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode, so that the player's interest can be improved. On the contrary, if the number of consecutive jackpots is increased, the difficulty of shifting to the consecutive villa mode increases. Therefore, when the transition to the consecutive villa mode is possible, the player Can give great joy to. As a method of increasing the number of consecutive jackpots, for example, if the probability variation limit is set to a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) and the jackpot is won in the normal state and the latent probability state, the probability variation changes after the jackpot ends. It may be configured to shift to the latent state where the number of times is one, and to shift to the normal state when the number of times is lost in the lottery of the special symbol in the latent state. Then, when the number of continuous latent states reaches the probability variation limit number, the time saving state may be given. If the jackpot is won within the number of time reductions, the normal symbol is set to the time reduction state again after the jackpot ends (within the probability variation limit number, the probability variation number shifts to the time reduction state after one probability variation state, and the probability variation state. When the limit number of times is reached, the time may be shortened directly after the jackpot ends). In this case, for example, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 1/20, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 1/2, and the number of time reductions is set to 20 times, the jackpot is won in 1/20 in the normal state. After that, by winning the jackpot of 1/2 in the latent state five times in a row, it is possible to shift to the advantageous consecutive villa mode. In other words, considering from the normal state, there is a 1/640 probability (1/20 x 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2) to shift to the consecutive villa mode, so the jackpot probability. Although it is relatively high, it is relatively difficult to shift to the consecutive villa mode. On the other hand, once the time reduction number is set, if the jackpot is won in a situation where the probability variation limit number has not been reached in the consecutive villa mode, 19 time reduction states are set after one probability variation state. If you win the jackpot when the probability variation limit has been reached, the time saving state of 20 times is set, so in the former case, the percentage of winning the jackpot is about 82%, and in the latter case, it is about 64%. , Form an advantageous state of repeating jackpot and consecutive villa mode at a very high rate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the mode is changed to the consecutive villa mode. By making the probability variation limit number different, the number of consecutive jackpots required to shift to the consecutive villa mode can be arbitrarily set.

In the 14th embodiment, the number of time reductions in the probability change state A is limited to one, but the number of time reductions is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. In other words, in the chance mode, the operation of winning the jackpot once and then winning the jackpot before the game state (probability change state A) set after the jackpot ends is repeated twice in the consecutive villa mode. It may be configured to transition to. With this configuration, it is easier to switch to the consecutive villa mode than when the jackpot shifts to the consecutive villa mode only when the big hits are consecutive over a specific number of times (3 times) of special symbol lottery. Since it can be improved, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 14th embodiment, in the chance mode, the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit in the probable change state A, and the lottery of the second special symbol is further in the probable change state A. It was configured so that it was possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode by becoming a big hit, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the probabilistic state A, if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode, while in the probabilistic state A, the second special symbol is in possession of one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol. In the latent state, it is possible to shift to the consecutive villa mode by winning a big hit in the lottery (discrimination) based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol in the latent state. May be good. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a case where it is advantageous to win the jackpot and a case where it is advantageous not to win the jackpot despite the same probability change state A. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<15th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 335. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above is configured so that a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (variably) at the same time (in parallel), and the time is shortened. As a result, a time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is more likely to be set to a shorter time than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (that is, a time saving state in which more lottery (variation) is performed in the second special symbol). , The time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is more likely to be set to a shorter time than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the time saving state in which the first special symbol is drawn more (variated)) is provided. It was composed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is always longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to always win either a big hit or a small hit, and when it becomes a small hit of the second special symbol, a V prize is almost certainly generated and a big hit is generated. It is configured so that it is possible to win the prize. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined that the prize will be almost a big hit. On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, as compared with the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 6450 is less likely to be opened in the time saving state of the normal symbol. ing. Specifically, the fluctuation time when a normal symbol is won is set to a relatively long fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state is set to one. .. That is, even if the normal symbol hits during the time saving state, the possibility that the time saving state ends before the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol ends is high. Then, when the hit of the normal symbol is started in the normal state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 6450a has an opening / closing pattern that makes it extremely difficult to insert the game ball (opens only for 0.2 seconds). It is configured to be opened and closed. Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, in order to win the jackpot again during the time saving state, the hit of the normal symbol is won before the time saving state is started, and the hit fluctuation is changed during the time saving state. It is necessary to let the fluctuation time elapse. That is, by winning the hit of the normal symbol during the execution period of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is given, the hit of the normal symbol is started in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot, and the game is played during the hit game of the normal symbol. The ball can be entered into the second entrance 6450. In other words, by winning a normal symbol hit during the jackpot game, the next jackpot is confirmed, which is an extremely novel gameplay.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The processing has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 4 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 316, in the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, the position of the variable winning device 65 is moved to the left. That is, it is configured so that the game ball launched by right-handed hit cannot enter the variable winning device 65. That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning device 65, it is necessary to launch the game ball by hitting the left side. The variable winning device 65 in the fifteenth embodiment is opened in some rounds in a predetermined jackpot (direct hit of the second special symbol or hit V), and 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, or 10 or more. It is closed when it detects the entry of a game ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 316, the configuration of the flow path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 is changed from the fourth embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 316, the through gate 67 is moved to the upstream side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second entry port 6450 is provided downstream of the through gate 67. A right first ball entry port 64b, which serves as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, is provided below the second ball entry port 6450, and a V winning device 650 is provided downstream of these. These through gates 67, the second entrance 6450, the first right entrance 64b, and the V winning device 650 are all configured so that only a right-handed game ball can enter. The V winning device 650 in the fifteenth embodiment is configured so that it can be opened not only during the execution of the small hit game but also in a predetermined round in the big hit game. That is, the V winning device 650 in the fifteenth embodiment serves as a lottery device for drawing a big hit depending on whether or not there is a V winning in the small hit game, and a big winning opening that serves as an opportunity to pay out a prize ball in the big hit game. It also serves as a role. The V winning device 650 in the fifteenth embodiment is opened in rounds in which the number of remaining rounds in all jackpots is 6 or less. The V winning device 650 is closed when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the round or when 10 game balls enter. Since it is impossible (difficult) to insert 10 game balls in 0.5 seconds, the latter 6 rounds of the jackpot can be completed in 0.5 seconds. The details will be described later, but this is the period from the end of the last round in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened (or the start of the opening period of the jackpot) to the end of the ending period of the jackpot. This is to adjust to just 40 seconds.

As described in the first embodiment and the like, a delay mechanism for delaying the flow of the game ball is formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 7). Therefore, by hitting right during the opening period or the interval period, a plurality of game balls can be in a state of flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 at the start of the next round. As a result, at approximately the same time that the round is started and the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened, a plurality of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 can be entered into the V winning device 650. Therefore, even if a relatively short opening period (0.5 seconds) is set in each round of the jackpot, a certain amount (around 5) of game balls can be entered into the V winning device 650 in each round. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage of the round in which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened (the latter six rounds of the jackpot) becomes too low.

In addition, since the right first ball entrance 64b is provided on the right side of the board surface, when a right-handed hit is made in a game state in which a time-saving state of a big hit or a normal symbol is set, the right first ball entrance 64b is reached. However, since the game ball enters, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased only by continuously hitting the right side. In addition, the ratio of the game ball launched by right-handed hitting into the right first entry slot 64b (for example, the ratio of 1 ball in 20 balls) is such that the game ball launched by left-handed hitting is the first entry ball. It is configured to be lower than the rate of entering the mouth 64 (for example, 1 in 40 balls). Therefore, in the game state (normal state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the game can be played by left-handed. Further, since the V winning device 650 is provided on the right side of the board surface, it is possible to make a player who wants to win a prize ball perform a right-handed hit during the execution of the jackpot game. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the right first entrance ball 64 during the execution of the jackpot game. For this reason, when the time saving state is given after the jackpot ends, the lottery of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol held during the jackpot game can be started at the same time as the time saving state is entered. it can.

Here, in the fifteenth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is fixed to 40 seconds. Then, as described above, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state is fixed to one, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol when it hits the normal symbol is set to 40 seconds. .. Therefore, even if the game ball launched by right-handed hitting immediately after the start of the time saving state passes through the through gate 67 and wins the hit of the normal symbol, the first is before the hit of the normal symbol is started. Since the variation of the special symbol (the first (last) variation in the time saving state) is completed, the start of hitting the normal symbol is after the transition to the normal state. That is, even if the player wins the hit of the normal symbol during the time saving state, it is difficult to insert the game ball into the second entrance 6450. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property of aiming to open the electric accessory 6450a during the time saving state by winning a normal symbol hit during the jackpot game before the transition to the time saving state. .. In the fifteenth embodiment, the period of the jackpot game of the first special symbol is also controlled to be fixed at 40 seconds. Therefore, if a normal symbol hits during the execution period of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the hit of the normal symbol can be surely started during the time saving state after the jackpot ends. That is, by hitting a normal symbol during the jackpot, the next jackpot is substantially confirmed (the game ball can be easily entered into the second entrance 6450 where the jackpot or the small hit is determined). ), Which is a novel playability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 to 319, a characteristic effect mode in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 317 (a), the stock time effect executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, the execution period of the jackpot game of the first special symbol, the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the time saving state (variable time of the first special symbol), and the normal By fixing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol at the time of hitting the symbol to 40 seconds, the hit game of the normal symbol starts only when the normal symbol hits during the big hit. By doing so, a relatively long opening period (2 seconds x 2 times) is set for the electric accessory 6450a, and the game ball can be allowed to enter the second entrance 6450. ing. Then, when the game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6450 and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the jackpot is substantially confirmed. That is, if the hit of the ordinary symbol is won during the execution period of the jackpot game, the jackpot is substantially confirmed. Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, a hobby effect (stock time effect) that can suggest whether or not a hit of a normal symbol is won is executed during the execution of the jackpot game.

FIG. 317 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode (display mode) of the stock time effect executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 317 (a), in the stock time effect, the adventurer character 801 collects (stocks) the keys in the main display area Dm. Further, with respect to the upper display area HR6 in the main display area Dm, the characters "stock time" and the characters indicating the remaining time until the end of the stock time (big hit) (for example, the characters "remaining 35:00"). ) Is displayed. Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, four display areas HR1 to HR4 for displaying the key acquired by the adventurer character 801 are formed. In addition, the characters "Right-handed key storage !!" are displayed in the display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the keys can be collected by continuously hitting the right side.

In the fifteenth embodiment, four keys can be acquired, and each acquired key is displayed one by one in each display area HR1 to HR4. Here, the key is configured to be acquired according to the passage of time, and when 5 seconds have passed, 15 seconds have passed, 25 seconds have passed, and 35 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot (after the start of the stock time production). You will get one for each. Depending on the display mode of this key, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation (whether or not the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol is being executed) whether or not the normal symbol is won during the big hit. That is, when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the stock time, 15 seconds have passed, 25 seconds have passed, and 35 seconds have passed, it is determined whether or not the hit of the normal symbol is changing, and the key is acquired according to the determination result. It is configured to select the mode of the key. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the mode of the key and play the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 (b) and 318, the effect mode in the time saving state in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 317 (b), an effect mode (display mode of the third symbol display device 81) immediately after the time saving state is started will be described. As shown in FIG. 317 (b), when the time is shortened after the jackpot is completed, the effect of challenging the breakthrough of the door TG is executed by using the four keys accumulated during the execution of the jackpot game. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 317 (b), the effect of the adventurer character 801 discovering the door TG is executed, and at the same time, the display area HR6 is "breaking through the door with the stocked key". The text "What !!" is displayed. Further, an arrow image YG2 imitating an arrow for indicating the key to be used to the player is displayed on the left side of any one of the display areas HR1 to HR4. FIG. 317 (b) illustrates a state in which the arrow image YG2 is displayed on the left side of the display area HR1. In addition, the characters "Bonus confirmed by breaking through the door !?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that if the door can be breached by using the four keys collected in the previous jackpot (stock time production), the jackpot will be obtained.

In this door breakthrough effect, basically, an effect of whether or not the door TG is successfully breached is executed in an effect period of 10 seconds per key. That is, it is configured so that it takes 40 seconds (the period until the time saving state ends) to use up four keys. As a result, the effect can be efficiently used for 40 seconds until the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318 (a), a display mode in the case where the hit of the normal symbol is started during the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 318 (a), since the normal symbol hits during the execution period of the immediately preceding jackpot, the normal symbol hit variation time elapses during the time saving state and the normal symbol hit starts. In that case, the effect of opening the door TG is executed by using the key. In addition, the characters "Successful breakthrough !! Get a bonus by hitting right !!" are displayed for the display area HR6. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the second entrance 6450 is opened by winning a normal symbol.

In FIG. 318 (b), the game ball is entered into the second entrance 6450 by right-handed to win a small hit, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning device 650 opened in the small hit game. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case of making (V winning is generated). As shown in FIG. 318 (b), when a V prize is generated in a short time state, three symbols imitating the same number (for example, a symbol imitating "3") are aligned from the back of the opened door TG. The protruding production is executed. In addition, the characters "bonus confirmed !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot (per V) has been won. When the second special symbol becomes a small hit, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol, and the first special symbol is forcibly stopped as a missed symbol. Therefore, at the time of winning the small hit, the third symbol (for example, "3", "6", "2") indicating the deviation is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a, and the special figure 2 variable display is displayed. In the area Dm1b, the third symbol (for example, "3", "4", "1") indicating the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, a display mode when a V hit (or a direct hit of the second special symbol) is won during the time saving state will be described. Here, when it comes to V, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened during the first half round (until the remaining number of rounds reaches 6 rounds), and the latter half round (the remaining number of rounds is 6 rounds). In the following rounds), the V winning device 650 is configured to be open. FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a display mode in the first half per V.

In the first half per V (rounds until the number of remaining rounds reaches 6), the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 provided on the left side of the board is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 319, in the small display area Dm2, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in order to cause the player to shoot the game ball toward the variable winning device 65 by left-handed. In addition, the adventurer character 801 discovers the treasure chest 802 filled with treasure and rejoices. Then, the characters "4R remaining until right-handed" are displayed on the display area HR6. Further, the characters "bonus" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that a large number of prize balls can be obtained by inserting the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side.

When entering the latter half of the V hit (the number of remaining rounds becomes 6 rounds), the stock time effect is executed and the V winning device 650 is released in each round, as in the case of the jackpot of the first special symbol. .. By winning the normal symbol during the latter six rounds, the second special symbol lottery in which the jackpot is substantially confirmed by opening the electric accessory 6450a during the time saving state is executed again. Can be done.

In this way, if you win a V hit (or a direct hit of the second special symbol), the specific winning opening 65a will be opened for a maximum of 30 seconds in the first half, so you can easily hit 10 in each round just by hitting left. Individual game balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the first half of the jackpot. Further, by making the jackpot game proceed by hitting left in the first half of the jackpot, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the through gate 67. That is, it is possible to prevent the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol from starting before the start timing of the stock time effect fixed for 40 seconds (the hit of the normal symbol is started during the stock time effect). In other words, there is a wasteful situation in which the normal symbol is won unnecessarily, and the lottery for the normal symbol is not executed during the period when the fluctuation time of the useless hit fluctuation and the production period of the stock time production overlap. It is possible to suppress the stocking. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the opening / closing pattern set in the opening / closing door 650f1 in the jackpot of the first special symbol will be described. FIG. 320 is a diagram showing a timed change in the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 650f1. As shown in FIG. 320, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is started, the opening period of 3 seconds is first set, and then the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened at the start of the first round. This open state is maintained for 0.5 seconds and is closed after 0.5 seconds. If 10 game balls enter the V winning device 650 before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the opening / closing door 650f1 will be closed, but 10 game balls will be opened in 0.5 seconds. Since it is almost impossible (difficult) to enter the ball, in almost all cases, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed after 0.5 seconds have passed.

As shown in FIG. 320, when the first round is completed, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened again for 0.5 seconds at the start of the second round after an interval period of 4.5 seconds. After that, opening for 0.5 seconds (round period) and closing for 4.5 seconds (interval period) are repeated until the end of the 6th round, and when the 6th round is completed, 11.5 seconds. Ending period is set. When this ending period ends, the jackpot ends and the time is shortened. Therefore, the jackpot period of the first special symbol is fixed to 40 seconds each time (opening 3 seconds + 0.5 seconds x 6 rounds + 4.5 seconds x interval 5 times + ending 11.5 seconds). As a result, when the hit of the normal symbol is won during the jackpot of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of 40 seconds is set, the hit of the normal symbol is surely started in the time saving state after the jackpot is completed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to surely establish an extremely novel game property in which the next big hit is substantially determined by winning a normal symbol hit during the big hit.

The number of rounds of 8 to 14 rounds is set for the direct hit of the second special symbol and the hit of V. Of these, in the latter six rounds, an opening / closing pattern that is exactly the same as the jackpot of the first special symbol is set for the opening / closing door 650f1. As a result, even in the case of a direct hit or a V hit of the second special symbol, in the latter six rounds, by winning the hit of the normal symbol, it is possible to surely establish the game playability in which the next big hit is substantially determined. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the flow of the game when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 321 (a), the flow of the game in the case where the hit of the ordinary symbol is not won during the big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 321 (a), when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the first special symbol is started, the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed for a fixed period of 40 seconds. To. During the jackpot of the first special symbol, a stock time effect (see FIG. 317 (a)) for an effect period of 40 seconds is executed as an effect mode. Then, when the jackpot ends and the time is shortened, as shown in FIG. 321, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol stored in the jackpot is started. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 40 seconds, and further, since the lottery of the special symbol is completed once in the time saving state, the time saving state is completed in 40 seconds.

During this 40-second time saving state, the door breakthrough effect (see FIG. 317 (b)) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 321, the 5-second effect of selecting the key to challenge the breakthrough of the door TG and the 5-second effect display mode for notifying that the breakthrough of the door TG has failed are performed four times (key 4). Repeatedly, the door breakthrough effect ends with the end of the time saving state. In this way, by dividing the effect into four times and notifying the presence or absence of hitting the normal symbol, the player feels as if the variable display of the special symbol was executed multiple times during the time saving state. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321 (b), the flow of the game when the hit of the ordinary symbol is won during the big hit will be described. FIG. 321 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the hit of the normal symbol is won 18 seconds after the start of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 321 (b), when the normal symbol hits 18 seconds after the start of the big hit, the normal symbol hits when 18 seconds have passed from the start of the time saving state 40 seconds later. In this case, as the production mode, there are two production modes: a 5-second production in which the first key is selected to challenge the breakthrough of the door TG, and a 5-second production display mode in which the failure to break through the door TG is notified. A 5-second effect of selecting the key of the eye to challenge the breakthrough of the door TG and an effect display mode indicating that the door TG has been successfully breached are executed, and the start of hitting the normal symbol is notified. That is, immediately after 15 seconds have passed from the start of the time saving state, the state in which the door TG is opened (see FIG. 318 (a)) is displayed. As a result, the game ball can be launched aiming at the second entrance 6450 before the electric accessory 6450a is opened, so that the second entrance 6450 is surely reached during the normal symbol hit period. And the game ball can be put in.

A game ball enters the second entrance 6450, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened, and the game ball is placed in the V winning device 650. When the ball is entered into (generates a V prize), V hit is started. In this V hit, different production modes are executed in the first half of the jackpot (up to the remaining 7 rounds) and the latter 6 rounds. That is, as shown in FIG. 321, the bonus effect (see FIG. 319) is executed up to the remaining 7 rounds, and the stock time effect is executed when the remaining 6 rounds are reached. As a result, in the first half of 1 jackpot, the gameplay of winning a large number of prize balls by hitting the left is realized, and in the latter 6 rounds, the playability of aiming to hit a normal symbol while winning a relatively small number of prize balls by hitting the right is achieved. It can be realized. That is, since it is possible to switch to a different game property in the middle of one jackpot, it is possible to further improve the interest of the jackpot game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, even if a normal symbol is hit during the stock time production, it is not notified that the normal symbol is hit until just before the normal symbol is actually hit in the time saving state (key key). The configuration was limited to suggestions based on aspects), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, as a big hit effect, when a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and a normal symbol is won in a lottery, it may be configured to immediately notify that the normal symbol has been hit. .. That is, an effect in which the player can easily understand that the next big hit is substantially determined may be performed at the time when the winning is won by the lottery of ordinary symbols. With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player during the execution of the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration in the 15th embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 322 (a). FIG. 322A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322 (a), the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment replaces the random number 4 table 202ca per first with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 128 (a)). The point that the first hit random number table 202a is provided, the point that the first hit type selection table 202b is provided instead of the first hit type selection 4 table 202c, and the fluctuation pattern table 202c instead of the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd. The difference is that 202d is provided, the jackpot operation table 202ka, and the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202kb are added, and the configuration of the second random number table 202c is partially changed. ..

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. Here, the first random number table 202a in the fifteenth embodiment is a data table (special symbol 1 random number) referred to in the lottery of the first special symbol, similarly to the first random number 4 table 202ca in the fourth embodiment. It is composed of two types of data tables: a table 202a1) and a data table (special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol. First, with reference to FIG. 323 (a), the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 constituting the first random number table 202a in the fifteenth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 323 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 323 (a), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the fifteenth embodiment, a random number value determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (counter value of the first random number counter C1). As, four random number values (counter values) of "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the lottery of the first special symbol is four. Therefore, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000).

Next, with reference to FIG. 323 (b), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 323 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. As shown in FIG. 323 (b), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the fifteenth embodiment, a random number value determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (counter value of the first random number counter C1). 4 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other, and 996 random number values (counter values) of "4 to 999" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits. Value) is specified in association with each other. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random numbers that are determined to be small hits. Since the number of numerical values (counter values) is 4 and 996, respectively, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000), and the probability of winning a small hit is 249 /. It is 250 (996/1000). That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, either a big hit or a small hit is won. Then, as described above, in the small hit in the fifteenth embodiment, the game ball is easily entered into the V winning device 650 and the V winning is generated only by continuously right-handing during the small hit game. It is configured to be able to. In other words, since the small hit in the present embodiment is configured so that the V prize is substantially confirmed at the time of winning, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The direct hit or V hit is substantially fixed. As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, in the normal state, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, the game is expected to win the jackpot with a probability of 1/250. In the time-saving state, the electric accessory 6450a is opened during the time-saving state as a normal symbol hit, and the game ball is only entered into the second entrance 6450, and the big hit is substantially confirmed. Become a sex. Therefore, since the difference in the degree of advantage for each game state can be increased, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the state will shift to the time saving state.

Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 323 (c). Similar to the second hit random number table 202c in the fourth embodiment, the second hit random number table 202c is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol for each state of the normal symbol (normal state of the normal symbol, time saving state). It is a data table in which a numerical value (counter value of the random number counter C4 per second) is defined. FIG. 323 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 323 (c), in the second hit random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. , 200 random numbers of "5-204" are defined in association with each other. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is 200. Since it is an individual, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the high probability state of a normal symbol is 1 / 1.2 (200/240).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 323 (c), 30 random values of "5 to 34" are used as random values (counter values) determined to hit the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. (Counter value) is specified in association with each other. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the random number value (counter value) determined to hit the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is 30. Since it is an individual, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the low probability state of a normal symbol is 1/8 (30/240). As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, only when the hit of the normal symbol is won during the execution of the big hit game, the hit of the normal symbol can be started in the time saving state after the end of the big hit. In addition, the hit of the normal symbol is started during the time saving state, so that the big hit is substantially confirmed. Then, during the execution period of the jackpot game, it is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot game, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the next jackpot is determined with a probability of substantially 1/8 each time a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 324 (a). The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won, similar to the first hit type selection 4 table 202cc in the fourth embodiment described above. FIG. 324 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first type selection table 202b in the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 324 (a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifteenth embodiment shows the jackpot type when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery (so-called "direct hit" occurs). When a big hit is made based on the occurrence of a direct hit table 202bk1 for specifying (determining) and a V winning (a ball entering the V winning device 650 during the execution of a small hit game), the jackpot type is selected. A table 202bk2 per V for specifying (determining) is specified. First, the details of the direct hit table 202bk1 will be described with reference to FIG. 324 (b).

FIG. 324 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the direct hit table 202bk1. As shown in FIG. 324 (b), in the fifteenth embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs), the first "Big hit A15" is defined in association with the entire range that the type counter C2 can take. On the other hand, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs), for the entire range that the first hit type counter C2 can take, " "Big hit B15" is specified in association with each other. "Big hit A15" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of big hit is 6 rounds, and a time saving state is given with one time saving after the big hit is completed. On the other hand, the "big hit B15" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 14 rounds, and the time saving state in which the number of time reductions is one is given after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player in terms of the number of rounds to win directly in the lottery of the second special symbol than to win directly in the lottery of the first special symbol.

In the jackpot A15, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened for 0.5 seconds in all rounds of the jackpot, and the stock time is produced for 40 seconds from the start to the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 317 (a)). ) Is executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot B15, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds of the jackpot, and the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in the 9th to 14th rounds. Until the end of the first eight rounds when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a bonus effect (see FIG. 319) is executed, and at the end of the eight rounds, the jackpot effect is switched to the stock time effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the player wins the direct hit of the first special symbol or the direct hit of the second special symbol, the next jackpot (the consecutive chan of the jackpot) is determined by the hit of the normal symbol. Because it is possible to entertain, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the V-per-V table 202bk2 will be described with reference to FIG. 324 (c). As described above, the V-hit table 202bk2 identifies (selects) the type of jackpot to be executed based on the occurrence of V-winning in the small-hit game (the game ball has won the V-winning device 650). Data is a specified data table. FIG. 324 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V-per table 202bk2. As shown in FIG. 324 (c), the V-hit table 202bk2 defines three types of jackpots: "big hit C15", "big hit D15", and "big hit E15".

As shown in FIG. 324 (c), "big hit C15" is associated with the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit C15" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 14 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of one time saving. This "big hit C15" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the jackpot types and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random values (counter values) associated with "big hit C15" is 50. The rate at which "big hit C15" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 324 (c), the hit of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69" with the "big hit D15". This "big hit D15" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 12 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state where the number of time saving is one. This "big hit D15" has the largest number of rounds next to "big hit B15" and "big hit C15", and the game state after the big hit is advantageous, so the jackpot type that is advantageous next to "big hit B15" and "big hit C15" Is. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit D15" is 20. The probability (ratio) that "big hit D15" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 324 (c), "big hit E15" is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" for the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit E15" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state where the number of time saving is one. This "big hit E15" has more rounds than "big hit A15" (direct hit of the first special symbol), which has the least number of rounds, but has the least number of rounds (low degree of advantage) among V hits. It is a type. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E15" is 30. The probability (ratio) that "big hit E15" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 30% (30/100).

In addition, even if one of "Big hit C15" to "Big hit E15" is won, the number of remaining rounds will be 6 rounds as in the case of winning "Big hit B15" (direct hit of the second special symbol). Until then, the specific winning opening 65a is opened, and when the remaining 6 rounds or less, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened. In line with this, during the first half of the jackpot (until the number of remaining rounds reaches 6 rounds), a bonus effect (see Fig. 319) is executed as a jackpot effect, and stock is made when the number of remaining rounds reaches 6. It is possible to switch to the time effect (see FIG. 317 (a)). As a result, even if you win a V hit, in the first half of the big hit, you will get a lot of prize balls by hitting left, and in the second half 6 rounds, you will get a normal symbol hit and the next big hit will be decided. It can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (a). FIG. 325 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 325 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in the fifteenth embodiment is a normal table 202dk1 that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state (low probability state of a normal symbol). It is composed of at least a time saving table 202dk2 that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state (high probability state of a normal symbol). Here, regarding the normal table 202dk1, only the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed with respect to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 (see FIG. 132) in the fourth embodiment. More specifically, for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an exact same fluctuation pattern (variation time) as in the case of referring to the time saving table 202dk2 described later is selected. Therefore, illustration and detailed description will be omitted here.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202dk2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 325 (b). FIG. 325 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202dk2. As shown in FIG. 325 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the fluctuation time is set with respect to the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. The deviation time reduction variation for 40 seconds is specified in association with it. In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the fluctuation time is 40 seconds for the entire range that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. It is specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of 40 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, by hitting the right ball during the jackpot, one or more game balls enter the right first entrance ball opening 64b, and the first special symbol is used. Since the holding balls are configured to be accumulated, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol for 40 seconds is executed at the same time as the transition to the time saving state. Then, since the time saving state ends when the lottery of the special symbol is executed once, the time saving state is fixed to 40 seconds by fixing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state to 40 seconds. can do. As a result, 40 seconds from the remaining rounds of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot (execution period of the stock time effect (see FIG. 317 (a))) becomes a hit of a normal symbol for 40 seconds. When the fluctuation time of is set, it is possible to surely start hitting the normal symbol during the time saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 325 (b), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "missing (small hit)", the entire range that the variable type counter CS1 can take is set. On the other hand, the fluctuation time is defined in association with the deviation short fluctuation of 1 second. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds corresponds to the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. It is specified with. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state, a relatively short fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds is set. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from the end of the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol to the start of the jackpot. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of winning the small hit is shorter than the fluctuation time at the time of winning the big hit (direct hit) because when the small hit is won, the game ball is further right-handed to the V winning device 650. Since the big hit (V hit) cannot be started unless the ball is entered, the purpose is to configure the big hit to start in the same period at the time of the small hit winning and the big hit winning, taking into account the time lag. is there. As described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to the same time even in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). For this reason, it is assumed that the start timing of hitting the normal symbol is just before the end of the time-saving state (just before the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol), and the ball entering the second entrance 6450 has shifted to the normal state. Also, a relatively short fluctuation time can be set as in the case where the ball is entered into the second entrance 6450 and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state. Therefore, even though it was possible to win a normal symbol during the jackpot, a long fluctuation is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and it takes a long time to start the jackpot. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

Next, with reference to FIG. 326 (a), the details of the jackpot operation table 202ka, which is a kind of data table constituting the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. The jackpot operation table 202ka is a data table that defines the operation of each jackpot (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) for each jackpot type, the interval period set after the end of each round, and the like. During the execution of the jackpot game, the type of the jackpot to be opened, the interval period after the end of the round, and the like are set according to the jackpot operation table 202ka and the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 326 (a), the jackpot A15 corresponds to 1 to 6 rounds as the opening round of the V winning device 650, a maximum of 0.5 seconds as the opening period, and 4.5 seconds as the interval period. It is specified with. As a result, when the jackpot A15 is won, an interval period of 4.5 seconds can be set after the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened for 0.5 seconds in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot A15 can be completed in 40 seconds each time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 326 (a), for the jackpot B15 and the jackpot C15, 1 to 8 rounds are specified as the opening round of the variable winning device 65, and a maximum of 30 seconds is specified as the opening period, and the V winning is won. The opening round of the device 650 is defined as 9 to 14 rounds, and the opening period is defined as a maximum of 0.5 seconds. Further, as the interval period, the interval period after the end of 8 rounds is defined as 3 seconds, and the interval period after the end of rounds other than 8 rounds is defined as 4.5 seconds. That is, the length of the interval period before the start of the first round (9 rounds) in which the V winning device 650 is opened can be set to the same length as the opening period of the jackpot. As a result, the period from the end of the eight rounds of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot can be fixed to 40 seconds. Therefore, when the hit of the ordinary symbol is won after the eight rounds of the big hit are completed, the hit can be surely started in the time saving state after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the next big hit is substantially determined when a normal symbol hit is won during the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 326 (a), for the jackpot D15, 1 to 6 rounds are specified as the opening round of the variable winning device 65, and a maximum of 30 seconds is specified as the opening period, and the V winning device 650 The open round is defined as 7 to 12 rounds, and the open period is defined as a maximum of 0.5 seconds. Further, as the interval period, the interval period after the end of 6 rounds is defined as 3 seconds, and the interval period after the end of rounds other than 6 rounds is defined as 4.5 seconds. That is, the length of the interval period before the start of the first round (7 rounds) in which the V winning device 650 is opened can be set to the same length as the opening period of the jackpot. As a result, the period from the end of the 6 rounds of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot can be fixed to 40 seconds. Therefore, when the hit of the ordinary symbol is won after the 6 rounds of the big hit are completed, the hit can be surely started in the time saving state after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the next big hit is substantially determined when a normal symbol hit is won during the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 326 (a), for the jackpot E15, one or two rounds are specified as the opening round of the variable winning device 65, and a maximum of 30 seconds is specified as the opening period, and the V winning device 650 The open round is defined as 3 to 8 rounds, and the open period is defined as a maximum of 0.5 seconds. Further, as the interval period, the interval period after the end of the two rounds is defined as 3 seconds, and the interval period after the end of the rounds other than the two rounds is defined as 4.5 seconds. That is, the length of the interval period before the start of the first round (3 rounds) in which the V winning device 650 is opened can be set to the same length as the opening period of the jackpot. As a result, the period from the end of the two rounds of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot can be fixed to 40 seconds. Therefore, when the hit of the ordinary symbol is won after the two rounds of the big hit are completed, the hit can be surely started in the time saving state after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the next big hit is substantially determined when a normal symbol hit is won during the big hit.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, in all the jackpot types, the period from the remaining number of rounds reaching 6 to the end of the jackpot is fixed to 40 seconds, and the remaining number of rounds is 7. While there are more than a round left, the specific winning opening 65a, which allows the game ball to enter by hitting left (a launch method that makes it difficult to pass the game ball through the through gate 67), is opened, while the remaining rounds. In the range of 6 rounds or less, the V winning device 650 that can enter the game ball by right-handed (a launching method that allows the game ball to pass through the through gate 67) is opened. As a result, in the range where the number of remaining rounds is 6 rounds or less, it is possible to realize the playability of playing a game in the hope that it will hit a normal symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 326 (b), the details of the normal map variation pattern table 202 kb, which is a kind of data table constituting the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. The normal symbol variation pattern table 202 kb is a data table that is referred to in order to set the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202 kb, the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol is defined in association with each lottery result of the ordinary symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 326 (b), with respect to the lottery result "off" of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is defined in association with the out-of-normal short fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, for the lottery result "hit" of the ordinary symbol, a long fluctuation per normal symbol with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is defined in association with it. As a result, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed, the fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set, while if the lottery of the normal symbol is successful, the fluctuation time of 40 seconds is set. Therefore, during the execution of the stock time effect, the lottery of the ordinary symbols can be executed up to 8 times (effect period 40 seconds / deviation fluctuation time 5 seconds). As described above, since the probability of winning a normal symbol during the execution of the jackpot game set to the low probability state of the normal symbol is 1/8, the normal symbol is won by lottery within 8 times. The ratio is about 65.6%. Therefore, in one jackpot, the next jackpot is confirmed at a rate of 65.6%. Since it is almost impossible to execute the lottery eight times (the first lottery of the ordinary symbols is executed at the same time as the start of the stock time production), the lottery of the ordinary symbols seven times is actually executed. Is at best. The ratio of winning a normal symbol in a lottery of ordinary symbols within 7 times is about 60.7%. Therefore, in any case, it is possible to realize an extremely novel game property in which the next big hit is confirmed at a rate of more than 60% during the execution of the big hit game.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 322 (b). FIG. 322 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322 (b), the RAM 203 in the fifteenth embodiment has a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203 ea with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 128 (b)). It differs from the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb in that it is added. That is, the difference is that the hold storage function of the normal symbol is added. It is also different in that the time saving state storage area 203cd, the remaining time saving number counter 203ce, and the winning state storage area 203cf are deleted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2. .. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea is the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored (stored) in the execution area shifted (moved) to the execution area for executing the lottery, the judgment such as the lottery for winning a normal symbol is made. Will be done.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a2, other The shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the holding area of the above into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203eb (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball passes through the through gate 67. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1023 in FIG. 330). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203eb is 4, which is the maximum value, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea (FIG. Refer to S1022: No of 330). Further, the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S953 in FIG. 329).

Next, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 327 (a). FIG. 327 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 327 (a), the ROM 222 in the fifteenth embodiment is provided with a key mode selection table 222 ka added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 135). Only different. The key mode selection table 222ka is acquired when a specified time (5 seconds, 15 seconds, 25 seconds, and 35 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the effect during execution of the stock time effect (see FIG. 317 (a)). A data table that is referenced to select the mode of the key. The details of the key mode selection table 222ka will be described with reference to FIG. 328.

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the key mode selection table 222ka. As shown in FIG. 328, in the key mode selection table 222ka, the effect mode and the value range of the effect counter 223f are defined in association with each other depending on whether or not the hit variation of the normal symbol is being executed. Has been done. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 328, in the situation where the hit of the normal symbol is fluctuating, the normal key is acquired in the range where the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". The effect is defined in association with the range of "50 to 84", and the effect of acquiring a key larger than that of a normal key is specified in association with the range of "85 to 98". The effect of acquiring a shining key is defined in association with the effect of acquiring a rainbow-colored key with respect to "99".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 328, the value of the effect counter 223f is set for a situation in which the normal symbol is not in the hit fluctuation (during the normal symbol's deviation fluctuation, the normal symbol's fluctuation is stopped, etc.). The effect of acquiring a normal key is defined in association with the range of "0 to 89", and the effect of acquiring a huge key compared to the normal key is specified in the range of "90 to 97". Are associated with each other, and the effect of acquiring a shining key is associated with the range of "98,99". In addition, the effect of acquiring the rainbow-colored key is not associated with it. For this reason, when the effect of acquiring the rainbow-colored key is executed, it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol is changing, so that the electric accessory 6450a is released during the time saving state after the big hit. It is possible to easily make the player understand that (the lottery of the second special symbol whose big hit is confirmed can be executed by just hitting right). In addition, since it is easier to select a huge key or a shining key while the hit fluctuation of the symbol is being executed, the electric accessory 6450a is released during the time saving state when these production modes are executed. It is possible to improve the expectation for things. Therefore, during the execution of the stock time production, each time the production of acquiring the key is executed, the game can be performed by paying attention to the mode of the key. Therefore, the player's interest during the execution of the stock time production can be enjoyed. It can be improved further.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 327 (b). FIG. 327 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 327 (b), the RAM 223 in the fifteenth embodiment has a general drawing winning information storage area 223 ka with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 135 (b)). It differs from the stock time counter 223 kb in that is added. It is also different in that the time saving start flag 223ad, the time saving number counter 223ca for display, and the time saving state storage area 223cc are deleted.

The general figure winning information storage area 223ka has one execution area and four holding areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores the winning information of the ordinary symbol. Will be done. From the information stored in the general symbol winning information storage area 223 ka, the lottery result of the normal symbol being executed, the lottery result of the reserved ball of the ordinary symbol, and the like can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In the general map winning information storage area 223ka, each time a general drawing winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the general drawing winning information notified by the command is stored in order from the first area. By referring to the general drawing winning information storage area 223ka, the lottery result of the normal symbol can be surely grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, so that the time can be shortened in the stock time production (see FIG. 317 (a)). It is possible to more accurately notify (suggest) the degree of expectation that the hit of the normal symbol will start after the transition to the state.

The stock time counter 223 kb is a counter for counting the remaining production period of the stock time production. The initial value of the stock time counter 223 kb is set to 0, and when the start timing of the stock time effect is reached, the counter value corresponding to 40 seconds is set (S9302, FIG. 334 (FIG. 334 (a)). b) See S9403). During the execution of the stock time effect, the elapsed time is determined by the value of the stock time counter 223 kb, and it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect of acquiring a new key (S3534 in FIG. 332).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 15th embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 329 to 331, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 329, the details of the normal symbol variation processing 15 (see FIG. 329) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 15 (see FIG. 329) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the fourth embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). Similar to the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment), the variation display and variation of the second symbol executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) and performed by the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the time, the opening operation of the electric accessory 6450a attached to the second entry port 6450, the opening time, and the like.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 15 (see FIG. 329) in the fifteenth embodiment, in each of the processes S901, S902, S906 to S908, S913 to 915, and S918 to 921, the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S901, S902, S906 to S908, S913 to 915 and S918 to 921 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45) in the mode) is executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 15 (see FIG. 329) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S902 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing). (S902: No), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is acquired (S951), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203eb is greater than 0 (S952). .. In the process of S952, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is 0 (S952: No), the variation display of the normal symbol cannot be started, so this process ends as it is. To do. On the other hand, in the processing of S952, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S952: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb The value (M) of is subtracted by 1 and updated (S953).

When the processing of S953 is completed, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea is then shifted (S954). In the process of S954, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203ea is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea is acquired (S955).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened for the normal symbol (S956). In the processing of S956, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S956: Yes), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired based on the second random number table 202c for high probability time. Then (S957), the process shifts to S906. On the other hand, in the processing of S956, when it is determined that the current state is not the time saving state of the normal symbol (S956: No), whether or not the normal symbol is hit based on the second random number table 202c for low probability The lottery result is acquired (S958), and the process shifts to S906.

Further, in the normal symbol variation processing 15 (see FIG. 329) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the processing of S907 or S908 is completed, the ordinary symbol variation pattern table 202 kb (see FIG. 326 (b)) is referred to. A variable time is set according to the result of the regular drawing lottery (S959), and this process is completed. Specifically, if it hits a normal symbol, a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is set, while if it is out of the normal symbol, a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set.

By executing this normal symbol variation process 15 (see FIG. 329), it is possible to set a variation time of 40 seconds without fail when a winner wins a normal symbol. Therefore, if the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the hit is a normal symbol within 40 seconds from the end of the jackpot, after the transition to the time saving state, during the time saving state. It is possible to start hitting a normal symbol and open the second entrance 6450, which is a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol in which the jackpot is substantially confirmed, for a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to realize an extremely novel game property in which the jackpot is determined by hitting a normal symbol during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 330, the details of the through gate passing process 15 (S123) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The through-gate passage process 15 (S123) is a process executed in place of the through-gate passage process (see FIG. 46) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the through gate passage process 15 (S123) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1001 that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S1001: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (S1021) is acquired (S1021), and it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball counter 203eb is smaller than 4. (S1022). In the process of S1022, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is 4 (that is, the upper limit value) (S1022: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1022, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1022: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is set. 1 is added (S1023), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea (S1024). Next, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is acquired in advance by referring to the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 and the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 323 (c)) (S1025), and the acquired lottery is performed. A general map winning information command indicating the result is set (S1026), and this process ends.

Next, the jackpot control process 15 (S1594) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 331. The jackpot control process 15 (S1594) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 150) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the jackpot control process 15 (S1594) in the fifteenth embodiment, in each of the processes S1601 to S1612, S1617, and S1618, the jackpot control process 4 in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (FIG. 150, FIG. The same processes as those of S1601 to S1612, S1617, and S1618 of (see S1594) are executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 15 (S1594) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1609 is completed, a round end command for indicating that the jackpot round is completed is set (S1661), and the present process is terminated. To do. By this round end command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the end timing of each big hit round.

Further, in the jackpot control process 15 (see FIG. 331) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k. Is set to 1 (S1662), a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S1696), and the process shifts to S1617.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 15th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 332 to 335. First, with reference to FIG. 332, the details of the effect update process 15 (S21001) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This effect update process 15 (S21001) is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIGS. 55 and S2112), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 55) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process to be performed.

When this effect update process 15 (S21001) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current is a big hit (S3531), and if it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S3531: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S21001, when it is determined that the jackpot game is currently being executed (S3531: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the stock time counter 223 kb is greater than 0 (S3532), and the stock time is in progress. When the value of the counter 223 kb is 0 (S3532: No), it means that the stock time effect (see FIG. 317 (a)) is not being executed (that is, the bonus effect (see FIG. 319) is being executed). Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3532, when it is determined that the value of the stock time counter 223 kb is larger than 0 (S3532: Yes), the value of the stock time counter 223 kb is subtracted by 1 (S3533), and the key acquisition effect is produced. (That is, whether it is 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 25 seconds, or 35 seconds after the start of the stock time production) is determined (S3534). If it is determined in the process of S3534 that it is not the start timing of the key acquisition effect (S3534: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the key acquisition effect (either 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 25 seconds, or 35 seconds after the start of the stock time effect) (S3534: Yes), the key. The effect mode of the key acquisition effect is set with reference to the mode selection table 222ka (see FIG. 328) and the value of the effect counter 223f (S3535), and this process is terminated.

By executing this effect update process 15 (see FIG. 332), the degree of expectation of winning a normal symbol is determined by the mode of the key to be displayed in the display areas HR1 to HR4 during the execution of the jackpot game. It can be suggested to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game during the execution of the jackpot (stock time production) while expecting that the key of the mode with higher expectation is displayed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. it can.

Next, the details of the hit-related process 15 (S2661) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 333. The hit-related process 15 (S2661) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 58) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is related to the hit received from the main control device 110. This is a process for performing control according to the type of command to be executed.

Of the hit-related processes 15 (S2661) in the fifteenth embodiment, in each of the processes S2401, S2404 to S2407 and S2409 to S2416, the hit-related processes in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 58). ), The same processes as those of S2401, S2404 to S2407 and S2409 to S2416 are executed. Further, in the hit-related process 15 (S2661) in the fifteenth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received in the process of S2401 (S2401), and when it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S2401: Yes). ), The jackpot start process for setting the start of the jackpot is executed (S2431), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot start processing (S2431) will be described later with reference to FIG. 334 (a).

Further, in the hit-related process 15 (see FIG. 333) in the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the process of S2404 (S2404: No), then the round end command is received. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S2432). In the process of S2432, if it is determined that the round end command has been received (S2432: Yes), the round end process for setting when each big hit round is completed is executed (S2433), and this process is performed. finish. Details of this round end processing (S2433) will be described later with reference to FIG. 334 (b). On the other hand, in the process of S2432, if it is determined that the round end command has not been received (S2432: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2406.

Further, in the hit-related process 15 (S2661) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S2407 is completed, the jackpot ends instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 59) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The time process 15 is executed (S2434), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot end processing 15 will be described later with reference to FIG. 335.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334, the details of the jackpot start processing (S2431), which is one of the hit-related processing 15 (FIG. 333, S2661), will be described. FIG. 334 (a) is a flowchart showing this jackpot start process (S2431). In the jackpot start processing (S2431), first, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot to be started this time is jackpot A15 (S9301), and if it is determined to be jackpot A15 (S9301: Yes), during stock time. The start of the stock time effect (see FIG. 317 (a)) is set by setting the counter value corresponding to 40 seconds to the counter 223 kb (S9302), the jackpot start command for display is set (S9303), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S9301, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot A15 (S9301: No), the process of S9302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S9303.

By executing this jackpot start process (see FIG. 334 (a)), the effect mode at the start of the jackpot can be changed depending on whether or not the jackpot is A15 (the jackpot type in which the stock time effect is executed from the beginning). Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to preferably set the effect during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334 (b), the details of the above-mentioned round end processing (S2433) will be described. FIG. 334 (b) is a flowchart showing the round end processing (S2433). In the round end processing (S2433) in the fifteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock time counter 223 kb is 0 (S9401), and it is determined that the value of the stock time counter 223 kb is not 0. If this is done (S9401: No), the stock time effect has already been set, so this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9401, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223 kb during the stock time is 0 (S9401: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the stock time (S9402), and the stock time production is started. If it is determined that it is not the timing (S9402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the stock time (S9402: Yes), the stock time effect (see FIG. 317 (a)) is started by setting the counter value corresponding to 40 seconds in the counter 223 kb during the stock time. Is set (S9403), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335, the jackpot end processing 15 (S2434), which is one of the hit-related processes 15 (FIG. 333, S2661) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. The jackpot end processing 15 (S2434) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 59) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and various settings at the jackpot end are performed. It is a process for.

In the jackpot end processing 15 (S2434) in the fifteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress (S2511), and if it is not in the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol (S2511: No), four A 40-second effect mode in which the door TG fails to break through even though all the keys are used is set (S2512), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2511, when it is determined that the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress (S2511: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than 5 seconds (S2513). ). In the process of S2513, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the normal symbol is 5 seconds or less (S2513: No), an effect mode in which the door is immediately opened is set (S2514), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2513, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the normal symbol is longer than 5 seconds (S2513: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the residual variation time of the ordinary symbol is longer than 15 seconds. (S2515).

In the process of S2515, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 15 seconds or less (S2515: No), the effect mode in which the door TG is successfully breached is set by using the first key (S2515: No). S2516), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the normal symbol is longer than 15 seconds (S2515: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the residual variation time of the normal symbol is longer than 25 seconds (S2517).

In the processing of S2517, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 25 seconds or less, (S2517: No), the second key is used to set an effect mode that succeeds in breaking through the door TG. (S2518), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the residual variation time of the normal symbol is longer than 25 seconds (S2517: Yes), it is determined whether or not the residual variation time of the ordinary symbol is longer than 35 seconds (S2519).

In the process of S2519, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 35 seconds or less (S2519: No), the effect mode that succeeds in breaking through the door TG is set by using the third key (S2519: No). S2520), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than 35 seconds (S2519: Yes), a production mode that succeeds in breaking through the door TG is set using the fourth key (S2521). This process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the period from when the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot game becomes less than or equal to a specific number of rounds (6 rounds) until the jackpot ends, and in a time-saving state, 1 The fluctuation time of the first special symbol set when the lottery of the special symbol is executed and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set when the normal symbol is won are all common specific periods (40). It was configured to be set to (seconds). Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the jackpot is substantially fixed, and the winning of the ordinary symbol is started during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Then, while the electric accessory 6450a is opened with an opening pattern that allows the ball to easily enter the second entrance 6450, if the hit of the normal symbol is started during the normal state of the normal symbol, the first The electric accessory 6450a is configured to be opened in an opening pattern that makes it impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the 2 entry port 6450. With this configuration, it is possible to realize an extremely novel game property in which the next big hit is substantially determined by hitting a normal symbol during the execution of the big hit game. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel behavior that is significantly different from the conventional game machine, that there is almost no merit for the player even if the player wins the lottery of the normal symbol during the advantageous time saving state. In other words, it is extremely special and novel that winning a lottery of ordinary symbols during the execution of a big hit game is more advantageous to the player than winning by lottery of ordinary symbols during an advantageous time saving state. It is possible to realize a good playability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Since the fifteenth embodiment is based on the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration does not have the hold storage function of the second special symbol as in the fourth embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. The hold storage function of the second special symbol may be installed. With this configuration, when the hit of the normal symbol is started during the time saving state and the electric accessory 6450a is opened, the game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6450 (that is,). , The more the reserved balls of the second special symbol are increased), the more the lottery of the second special symbol whose jackpot is substantially confirmed can be executed. That is, it is possible to realize a more gambling game property in which a plurality of jackpots can be determined based on the hit of one ordinary symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. ..

In the fifteenth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the period from when the number of remaining rounds becomes less than or equal to a specific number of rounds (6 rounds) in the jackpot game until the jackpot ends, and in a short time state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol set in the case and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set when the normal symbol is won are all set to 40 seconds, but they are not necessarily the same period. Is not limited to 40 seconds, but can be set arbitrarily. By lengthening the common period, the execution period of the jackpot game is increased, so that the number of lottery of ordinary symbols that can be executed during the execution of the jackpot game can also be increased. Therefore, it can be configured so that it is easier to win a hit with a normal symbol. In addition, by shortening the common period, it is possible to shorten the period from winning the normal symbol hit during the jackpot to the start of the normal symbol hit, so that the second after the jackpot ends. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored until the entrance 6450 is opened.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is fixed to 40 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation of the ordinary symbol when it hits the ordinary symbol. Any length may be set as long as it is longer than the time (40 seconds). Even if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is lengthened, by winning the hit of the normal symbol between the time when the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds or less and the end of the jackpot, it is possible to shorten the time. You can start hitting a normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the next big hit is determined during the execution of the big hit game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the simultaneous fluctuation specification in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time (overlapping) is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of adopting the specification capable of executing only the variable display of the special symbol 1, the configuration may be configured to include the hold storage function of the second special symbol. Even with this configuration, if the hit of the normal symbol is started during the time saving state and a right-handed hit is made, the game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6450 and the reserved ball of the second special symbol Can be obtained, so that the variation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be started after the variation display of the first special symbol started almost at the same time as the start of the time saving state is completed. Therefore, also in this case, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the next big hit is determined during the execution of the big hit game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot game is 6 rounds or less and the hit is a normal symbol, it is substantially determined that the jackpot will be won again after the jackpot ends. However, the method of confirming that the jackpot will be won again after the jackpot is over is not limited to this. For example, if a special symbol lottery can be executed even during the jackpot game, and a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will be played again based on the end of the jackpot. It may be configured to start. Further, for example, it is determined whether or not a reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot lottery result is included in the hold during the execution of the jackpot game, and if there is a reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot lottery result, the jackpot ends. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting that it will be a big hit again later. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when the normal symbol hits during the execution of the jackpot game, the normal symbol hit is likely to be started during the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 6450a is easily released for a relatively long time. (It becomes easier to put the game ball into the second entrance 6450) On the other hand, if the normal symbol hits during the time saving state, it is easy to start hitting the normal symbol after the time saving state ends. Therefore, the electric accessory 6450a is easily opened for a relatively short time (it becomes difficult to insert the game ball into the second entrance 6450), so that the jackpot game can be executed. It was configured so that hitting a normal symbol inside would be more advantageous than hitting a normal symbol in a short time state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, 1 second) and the lottery of the normal symbol is executed during the jackpot game and the time saving state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends in almost the same state. If a normal symbol hits during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball can easily enter the second entrance 6450 during the execution of the jackpot game, while in an advantageous time saving state. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 6450a may be configured to be open / closed so that the game ball is difficult to enter into the second entrance 6450. More specifically, for example, the electric accessory 6450a is provided along with an entry port (for example, the right first entry port 64b) different from the second entry port 6450, and the electric accessory 6450a is provided. While it is open, the game ball cannot enter the second entrance 6450 (the game ball enters only the other entrances opened by the electric accessory 6450a). While the electric accessory 6450a is closed, the electric accessory 6450a allows the game ball to enter the second entrance 6450 (not obstructed by the electric accessory 6450a and other entrances). , And the arrangement and mechanism of the second entrance 6450 may be set. With such a configuration, the player is frequently won by hitting a normal symbol in an advantageous time saving state, and the more the electric accessory 6450a is constantly opened, the more difficult it is to enter the second entrance 6450. During the big hit game, it is difficult to hit the normal symbol, and even if it hits the normal symbol, the electric accessory 6450a is opened only for a short time, so it is relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second entrance 6450. It becomes possible to make a ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In this case, by providing the hold storage function of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol held during the jackpot after the jackpot is completed, and the above-mentioned 16th implementation It is possible to realize the same behavior as the form.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the player is notified of a right-handed hit from the time when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 or less until the end of the jackpot, but in addition to this. Therefore, when a right-handed player is hit with seven or more rounds remaining, a predetermined warning effect for strongly warning the player to stop the right-handed player may be executed. With this configuration, the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol starts just before the number of jackpot rounds becomes 6 rounds or less, and after the number of rounds becomes 6 or less, the lottery of the normal symbol can be executed. Since it can be suppressed from disappearing, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money. Further, for the same reason, the warning effect may be executed even when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state. As a result, the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol is started immediately before the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the lottery of the normal symbol is executed while the jackpot game of the first special symbol (big hit A15) is being executed. It is possible to prevent things from becoming almost impossible.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the fluctuation time when the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol is fixed to 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation time is drawn from a plurality of different fluctuation times. It may be configured to be close to the selection. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize playability that makes the player expect that a shorter fluctuation time is selected in the case of deviation. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of disengagement may be different depending on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation time may be longer or shorter at a predetermined number of reserved balls (for example, 4 or 0). Good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make people want to avoid the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol becoming a predetermined number of reserved balls, or conversely, to make them want to keep the number of reserved balls at a predetermined number. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<16th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 336 to 353. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above is configured so that a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (variably) at the same time (in parallel), and the time is shortened. As a result, a time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is more likely to be set to a shorter time than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (that is, a time saving state in which more lottery (variation) is performed in the second special symbol). , The time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is more likely to be set to a shorter time than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the time saving state in which the first special symbol is drawn more (variated)) is provided. It was composed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment, the fluctuation time (300 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state. did. That is, in the time saving state, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed by biasing the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the change display of one special symbol is being executed and the big hit or the small hit based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started, the change of the special symbol in the change display is started. Is configured to interrupt (interrupt the timekeeping of the fluctuation time), and the interrupted variation display is resumed (the timekeeping of the fluctuation time is resumed) when the other big hit or small hit ends. are doing. Further, in the 16th embodiment, after the time saving state is started, the time saving state is changed by ending the variation display of the first special symbol once or ending the variation display of the second special symbol 99 times. Configured to exit. That is, even if a small hit or a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the long fluctuation (300 seconds) of the first special symbol, after the end of the small hit or the big hit, the remaining at the start of the small hit or the big hit. The fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted from the fluctuation time. In other words, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, the larger the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the shorter the remaining period until the time saving state ends, so the first special symbol It is possible to realize a novel playability that is directly linked to the amount of balls to be played, depending on how much the second special symbol is drawn to win the jackpot during the fluctuation time of 300 seconds.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 4th embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The processing has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 4 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 336. FIG. 336 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 336, in the game board 13 in the 16th embodiment, the position of the variable winning device 65 is moved to the right. That is, it is configured so that the game ball launched by hitting the left cannot enter the variable winning device 65. That is, in the 16th embodiment, in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning device 65, it is necessary to launch the game ball by hitting right. In all the rounds of the jackpot, the variable winning device 65 in the 16th embodiment is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round or until the entry of 10 or more game balls is detected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336, the configuration of the flow path on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 is changed from the fourth embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 336, the through gate 67 is moved to the upstream side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second entry port 6450 is provided downstream of the through gate 67. A right first ball entry port 64b, which serves as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, is provided below the second ball entry port 6450, and a V winning device 650 is provided downstream of these. These through gates 67, the second entrance 6450, the first right entrance 64b, and the V winning device 650 are all configured so that only a right-handed game ball can enter. In addition, the V winning device 650 in the 16th embodiment only continues to hit right during the execution of the small hit game, similarly to the V winning device 6500 (see FIGS. 179 and 180) in the 7th embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to easily enter a game ball and generate a V prize. Therefore, in a time-saving state in which the electric accessory 6450a attached to the second entrance 6450 is easily opened (the game ball is easy to enter the second entrance 6450), the second special symbol is a big hit by lottery. The big hit (per V) is substantially determined not only when the player wins the game but also when the player wins the small game.

In addition, since the right first ball entrance 64b is provided on the right side of the board surface, when a right-handed hit is made in a game state in which a time-saving state of a big hit or a normal symbol is set, the right first ball entrance 64b is reached. However, since the game ball enters, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased only by continuously hitting the right side. Therefore, it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the same time as the start of the time saving state. In addition, the ratio of the game ball launched by right-handed hitting into the right first entry slot 64b (for example, the ratio of 1 ball in 20 balls) is such that the game ball launched by left-handed hitting is the first entry ball. It is configured to be lower than the rate of entering the mouth 64 (for example, 1 in 40 balls). Therefore, in the game state (normal state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the game can be played by left-handed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338, a characteristic effect performed in the time saving state of the 16th embodiment will be described. Here, as described above, in the 16th embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and in the time saving state, By ending the variation display of the first special symbol once, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal state. That is, the longer the elapsed time after the time saving state is set, the more the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is subtracted (consumed), and the end of the time saving state is approaching. In the 16th embodiment, an effect indicating a period until the end of this time saving state can be executed.

FIG. 337 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 337 (a), in the time saving state in the 16th embodiment, in the vicinity of the center of the main display area Dm, in a relatively wide display range (that is, in a manner relatively easy for the player to see). 2 In the first display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm by executing the variable display of the special symbol, the first display range is relatively narrow (that is, in a mode that is relatively difficult for the player to see). It is configured to execute variable display of special symbols. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 300 seconds, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 3 seconds, so that the second special symbol is set. This is because the lottery of symbols is frequently executed.

Further, the characters "Continuous Chan Expectation 99% OVER" are displayed on the display area HR6 formed above in the main display area Dm. That is, a display mode suggesting the possibility of winning the jackpot again before the end of the time saving state is displayed. Further, a character indicating the remaining time until the end of the time saving state (the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol) (for example, the character "remaining 298:01 until the end of the rush") is displayed on the sub-display area Ds. Will be done. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to know how much time is left before the end of the time saving state and how much expectation is expected to win the jackpot during the remaining time. Can be understood.

In the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit (that is, winning a direct hit or a V hit) when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is set to 1/20. Then, each time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds. In other words, the value obtained by dividing the remaining time until the end of the time saving state by 3 seconds is the number of lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed within the remaining variable time. In the 16th embodiment, the number of lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed within the remaining variable time (time saving period) and the probability of becoming a big hit or a small hit are taken into consideration, and within the remaining time saving period. A novel production mode is realized in which a substantially expected value for winning a big hit (direct hit or V hit) is displayed in the display area HR6 again.

FIG. 337 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the expectation of continuous chan decreases with the passage of time. As shown in FIG. 337 (b), when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the time saving state and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time until the time saving state ends) decreases to 270 seconds, The degree of expectation of consecutive chans displayed in the display area HR6 is reduced from "99% OVER" to "95% OVER". In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed in 240 seconds is 90 times, and the expected value of winning a 1/20 big hit or small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol within 90 times is about. It is 99.0%. That is, it is configured to update to an expectation degree (95% OVER) lower than 99% in the last minute when the expectation degree is less than 99%. As a result, the actual behavior of the pachinko machine 10 can be matched with the displayed expected degree of continuous chan, so that the displayed content and the actual behavior deviate from each other, and the player can see the hall or the pachinko machine. It is possible to suppress the distrust of 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338, an example of an effect mode in which a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state in the 16th embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 338, when a small hit is won, an effect of displaying three third symbols imitating the same number in the main display area Dm is executed, and the display area HR6 and the sub display area are displayed. A chain image LG1 and LG2, which imitate a chain with a plate of "LOCK", are entwined with each other to display the remaining time of Ds. In addition, the subtraction of the remaining time until the end of the time saving state is also stopped at the same time as the start of the small hit. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the degree of expectation (the remaining time in the time saving state) is not reduced during the execution of the small hit game. When the V hit executed by generating the V prize during the small hit is completed, the chain images LG1 and LG2 entwined with respect to the display area HR6 and the sub-display area Ds are disengaged, and the effect is executed. 1 The variable display of the special symbol is restarted, and the subtraction of the remaining time in the time-saving state and the expectation of the chain is restarted. Further, even when the direct hit of the second special symbol is won, the chain image LG1 is similarly obtained for the display area HR6 and the sub-display area Ds from the start to the end of the big hit (direct hit). , LG2 is set to the entwined display mode, and the reduction of the remaining time until the end of the time reduction and the continuous change rate is stopped.

With this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that strongly expects the second special symbol to hit in as little time as possible, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Can be done.

<Electrical configuration in the 16th embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 339 (a). FIG. 339 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 339 (a), the ROM 202 in the 16th embodiment replaces the random number 4 table 202ca per first with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 128 (a)). The point that the first hit random number table 202a is provided, the point that the first hit type selection table 202b is provided instead of the first hit type selection 4 table 202c, and the fluctuation pattern table 202c instead of the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd. The difference is that 202d is provided, the configuration of the second random number table 202c is partially changed, and the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce is deleted.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the 16th embodiment will be described. Here, the first random number table 202a in the 16th embodiment is a data table (special symbol 1 random number) referred to in the lottery of the first special symbol, similarly to the first random number 4 table 202ca in the fourth embodiment. It is composed of two types of data tables: a table 202a1) and a data table (special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 differ only in whether or not the range of the random number value determined to be a small hit is defined. More specifically, in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the same value is defined as the random number value determined to be a big hit (counter value of the first random number counter C1). , The random number value determined to be a small hit is defined in association with the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (the small hit is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol). Therefore, only the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 will be described here, and the illustration and description of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 will be omitted.

FIG. 340 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. As shown in FIG. 340 (a), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the 16th embodiment, a random number value determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (counter value of the first random number counter C1). As a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit, 46 random number values (counter) of "4 to 49" are defined in association with each other. Value) is specified in association with each other. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random numbers that are determined to be small hits. Since the number of numerical values (counter values) is 4 and 46, respectively, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000), and the probability of winning a small hit is 23 /. It is 500 (46/1000). Whenever you win the small hit of the 2nd special symbol, the small hit game of the opening and closing pattern that can easily generate a V prize just by hitting right is executed, so you can win the small hit by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. Even if it becomes, the big hit (per V) is substantially fixed. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the jackpot is substantially won with a probability of 1/20 (50/1000).

Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (b). Similar to the second hit random number table 202c in the fourth embodiment, the second hit random number table 202c is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol for each state of the normal symbol (normal state of the normal symbol, time saving state). It is a data table in which a numerical value (counter value of the random number counter C4 per second) is defined. FIG. 340 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c in the 16th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 340 (b), in the second hit random number table 202c in the 16th embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to hit the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is used. , 200 random numbers of "5-204" are defined in association with each other. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is 200. Since it is an individual, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the high probability state of a normal symbol is 1 / 1.2 (200/240).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), only "0" is associated and defined as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. There is. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the random number value (counter value) determined to hit the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is 1. Since it is an individual, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the low probability state of a normal symbol is 1/240. Therefore, in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress the irregular game method of trying to enter the second ball entrance 6450 by hitting the ball right in the normal state. Can be done.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the 16th embodiment will be described. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won, similar to the first hit type selection 4 table 202cc in the fourth embodiment described above. The first hit type selection table 202b in the 16th embodiment is for direct hit to specify (determine) the jackpot type when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery (so-called "direct hit" occurs). Table 202bm1 and V-winning table for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained based on the occurrence of V-winning (ball winning into the V-winning device 650 during execution of the small-hit game) It is composed of 202 bm2. First, the details of the direct hit table 202bm1 will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (c).

FIG. 340 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the direct hit table 202bm1. As shown in FIG. 340 (c), in the 16th embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs), " There are two types of jackpots, "big hit A16" and "big hit B16". More specifically, "big hit A16" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". "Big hit B16" is defined in association with the range of "". Both "Big hit A16" and "Big hit B16" have four rounds, but "Big hit A16" is given a time saving state that is advantageous to the player after the big hit, while "Big hit B16" is , After the jackpot ends, it is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the "big hit A16" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit B16" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340 (c), as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs), the first hit type counter C2 "Big hit C16" is defined in association with the entire range that can be taken. "Big hit C16" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 and an advantageous time saving state is given after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends.

Next, the details of the V-per-V table 202bm2 will be described with reference to FIG. 340 (d). As described above, the V-hit table 202bm2 is used to identify (select) the type of jackpot to be executed based on the occurrence of V-winning in the small-hit game (the game ball has won the V-winning device 650). Data is a specified data table. FIG. 340 (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V-per table 202bm2. As shown in FIG. 340 (d), the V-hit table 202bm2 defines three types of jackpots: "big hit D16", "big hit E16", and "big hit F16".

As shown in FIG. 340 (d), a “big hit D16” is associated with the value “0” of the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit D16" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state. This "big hit D16" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the jackpot types and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous. Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D16" is one among the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2. The rate at which "big hit D16" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 340 (d), the "big hit E16" is defined in association with the range of "1 to 14" for the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit E16" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 and the game state after the big hit is set to an advantageous time saving state. This "big hit E16" has the largest number of rounds next to "big hit C16" and "big hit D16", and the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous, so the big hit type is the second most advantageous after "big hit C16" and "big hit D16". Is. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E16" is 14. The probability (ratio) that "big hit E16" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 14% (14/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 340 (d), the "big hit F16" is defined in association with the range of "15 to 99" for the first hit type counter C2. This "big hit F16" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is two, and the game state after the big hit is set to an advantageous time saving state. This "big hit F16" has the smallest number of rounds, but since the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is advantageous, it is more advantageous than the "big hit B16" in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit F16" is 85. The probability (ratio) that "big hit F16" is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game is 85% (85/100).

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the "big hit F16" with a relatively high number of rounds (2 rounds) is selected when the hit is V. This is because it does not shift to the normal state until the total period set in the time saving state reaches 300 seconds, regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol after shifting to the time saving state. If you shift to the time saving state, you can expect about 5 big hits (you can execute the lottery of the 2nd special symbol about 100 times in 300 seconds, and 1/20 of the lottery of the 2nd special symbol will be a big hit) Because. Therefore, if the proportion of jackpots with a large number of rounds is increased, it becomes excessively advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the 16th embodiment, the proportion of "big hits F16", which is a two-round jackpot, is set high. ing.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d in the 16th embodiment will be described. The variation pattern table 202d in the 16th embodiment is the normal table 202dm1 which is referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (high probability of the normal symbol). The state) is composed of at least a time saving table 202 dm2 that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed. Here, since the normal table 202dm1 has the same specified contents as the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 (see FIG. 132) in the fourth embodiment, the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the details of the time saving table 202dm2 that constitutes the variation pattern table 202d will be described. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202 dm2. As shown in FIG. 341, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the fluctuation time is 300 seconds for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. The deviation time reduction fluctuation is specified in association with it. In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the fluctuation time is 300 seconds for the entire range that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. It is specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state, a very long fluctuation time of 300 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, by hitting right during the jackpot, one or more game balls enter the right first entrance 64b, and the first special symbol is used. Since the holding balls are configured to be accumulated, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol for 300 seconds is executed at the same time as the transition to the time saving state. Then, the time saving state is almost continued until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed once. In other words, the time saving state continues from the first entry into the time saving state until the total period in the time saving state (the period excluding the execution period of the small hit and the big hit won in the middle) becomes 300 seconds, so 300 seconds. By the time the game has passed, it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes it expected that more small hits or big hits will be won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "missing (small hit)", the variable type counter CS1 can be used for the entire range. The fluctuation time is specified in association with the deviation short fluctuation of 3 seconds. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds corresponds to the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. It is specified with. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state, a relatively short fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds is set. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed about 100 times before the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, it is possible to expect a plurality of big hits.

In the 16th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 3 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) or a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) may be selected at a predetermined ratio. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention not only to the success or failure of the second special symbol but also to the set fluctuation time itself. In this case, the display of the continuous change rate may be calculated using the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol.

In the 16th embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when the variation display of the first special symbol ends in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving state may be terminated when the number of times that a specific lottery result (for example, a small hit) is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is one. More specifically, it is configured so that a small hit is won with a relatively high probability (for example, a ratio of 90%) in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the remaining 10% is configured to be a big hit or a miss. You may. With this configuration, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is completed in the time-saving state, the end condition of the time-saving state is not satisfied if it is out of order, so the time-saving state is added for 300 seconds at a rate of about 10%. It is possible to realize even more innovative playability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 113 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 339 (b). FIG. 339 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the RAM 203 in the 16th embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 4th embodiment described above (see FIG. 128 (b)) with the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 ma. The difference is that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md are added. It is also different in that the time saving state storage area 203cd and the remaining time saving number counter 203ce are deleted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203mb are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended according to the counter values of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203mb.

For the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md, the big hit or small hit symbol is confirmed (stopped display) by the lottery of the other special symbol, and the big hit or small hit game is started. This is a flag for indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the temporary stop state. While the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md are set to ON, the update of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 ma and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is interrupted, respectively. The flag. Thereby, during the execution of the big hit or small hit game, it is possible to prevent the big hit or the small hit from being started in duplicate after the fluctuation time elapses.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342 (a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 342 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 342 (a), the ROM 222 in the 16th embodiment has a continuous Chan expectation update table 222ma added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 4th embodiment described above (see FIG. 135 (a)). It differs in that it is done. The details of the continuous Chan expectation update table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. 343.

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuous Chan expectation update table 222ma. In this continuous chan expectation update table 222ma, the numerical value of the "continuous chan expectation" displayed for the display area HR6 in the time saving state is set according to the remaining time in the time saving state (the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol). A data table that is referenced for updating. As shown in FIG. 343, the continuous chan expectation update table 222ma corresponds to the numerical value of the continuous chan expectation to be displayed for each range of the remaining time until the end of the time saving state (remaining time saving period T). It is specified with.

Specifically, when the remaining time reduction period T is more than 270 seconds, "99% OVER" is specified in association with the display of the expectation of continuous chan. Therefore, when the remaining time reduction period is longer than 270 seconds, the display of the consecutive chan expectation degree is maintained at "99% OVER". Similarly, as shown in FIG. 343, when the remaining time reduction period T is 270 seconds or less and more than 180 seconds, "95% OVER" is defined in association with the expected degree of continuous chan, and 180 seconds or less. If it is more than 140 seconds, "90% OVER" is specified as the expected degree of continuous chan, and if it is 140 seconds or less and more than 120 seconds, "85%" is expected as the expected degree of continuous chan. "OVER" is specified in association with each other, and when it is 120 seconds or less and more than 100 seconds, "80% OVER" is specified in association with the expected degree of continuous chan. Further, when the remaining time reduction period T is 100 seconds or less and more than 80 seconds, "70% OVER" is defined in association with the expected degree of continuous chan, and when it is 80 seconds or less and more than 60 seconds. Is defined in association with "60% OVER" as the expected degree of continuous chan, and when it is 60 seconds or less and more than 50 seconds, "50% OVER" is specified in association with the expected degree of continuous chan. If it is 50 seconds or less and more than 30 seconds, "40% OVER" is specified in association with the expected degree of continuous chan. On the other hand, for the range in which the remaining time reduction period T is 30 seconds or less, "???" is defined in association with it.

According to these provisions, as the value of T in the short remaining time decreases, the display of the expected degree of consecutive chan can be reduced, so that the game can be played while always checking the actual expected degree. can do. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Each expectation is based on the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (1/20) and the number of lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed in a short period of time remaining. It shows the lower limit of the ratio of winning one or more small hits or big hits calculated. In other words, it shows a lower expectation than the actual jackpot ratio. As a result, the player can feel as if he / she has won the jackpot at a rate higher than the displayed expectation, so that he / she can enjoy the game in a time-saving state without stress. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342 (b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 342 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 16th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 342 (b), the RAM 223 in the 16th embodiment has a remaining time reduction counter 223ma added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 135 (b)). It differs in that it is. It is also different in that the time saving start flag 223ad, the time saving number counter 223ca for display, and the time saving state storage area 223cc are deleted.

The remaining time reduction period counter 223ma is a counter for counting the remaining time until the time reduction state ends. A counter value corresponding to 300 seconds is set in the remaining time reduction period counter 223ma when the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the time reduction state (see S2863 in FIG. 353). During the time saving state, the remaining time saving period is determined according to the value of the remaining time saving period counter 223ma, and the continuous change expectation degree displayed in the display area HR6 is updated, the remaining time short period display is updated, etc. Is done.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 344 to 351. First, the special symbol variation process 16 (S19001), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 344. This special symbol variation process 16 (S19001) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 137) in the fourth embodiment, and the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 137) in the fourth embodiment. ), Various determinations and decisions are made based on the counter values acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, and the determination is made by predetermined control. In the variation display mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variation display, or control the stop display in the display mode showing the determination result.

Of the special symbol variation processing 16 (S19001) in the 16th embodiment, in each of the processes S7001 and S7002, each process of the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 137) S7001 and S7002 in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 16 (S19001) in the 16th embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S7002 that the small hit is not in progress (the small hit middle flag 203g is off) (S7002: No), Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is on (S7011), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is on (S7011: Yes), the special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203 mc is turned off (S7012), and it is determined whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (S7003). In the process of S7003, if the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is 1 or more, it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being executed.

In the processing of S7003, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not in progress (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is 0) (S7003: No), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed. The first special symbol change start process 16 for starting is executed (S7013), and the process proceeds to the process of S7015. The details of the first special symbol change start processing 16 (S7013) will be described later with reference to FIG. 345.

On the other hand, in the process of S7011, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is not on (the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is off) (S7011: No), and in the process of S7003, the first When it is determined that the change display of the special symbol is being executed (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is 1 or more) (S7003: Yes), the change stop of the first special symbol is set. The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 16 is executed (S7014), and the process proceeds to the process of S7015. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7014) will be described later with reference to FIG. 347.

Whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203md is turned on in the process of S7015 executed after the first special symbol variation start process 16 (S7013) or the first special symbol variation stop process 16 (S7014) is executed. (S7015). In the process of S7015, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md is on (S7015: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md is turned off (S7016), and the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is being executed (S7006). In the process of S7006, when it is determined that the variation display of the second special symbol is not being executed (the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203 mb is 0) (S7006: No), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. The second special symbol variation start process 16 for starting the process 16 is executed (S7017), and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol change start processing 16 (S7017) will be described later with reference to FIG. 348.

On the other hand, in the process of S7015, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md is not on (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md is off) (S7015: No), and in the process of S7006, the second If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S7006: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process 16 is executed (S7018), and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7018) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350.

By executing this special symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 344), the variation display of the other special symbol that has been temporarily stopped (interrupted) based on the start of the big hit or small hit of one special symbol is restarted. Can be made to.

Next, the first special symbol variation start process 16 (S7013), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 344), will be described with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing 16 (S7013). This special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 344) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138) in the fourth embodiment described above, and is a process of displaying the variation of the first special symbol. This is the process for setting the start.

Of the first special symbol variation start processing 16 (S7013) in the 16th embodiment, in each process of S7101 to S7106, S7101 to S7106 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of is executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation start process 16 (S7013) in the 16th embodiment, when the process of S7106 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 140) in the fourth embodiment is performed next. Instead, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7111) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7111) will be described with reference to FIG. 346.

FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7111). Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7111) in the 16th embodiment, in each of the processes S7301 to S7308, S7301 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 140) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S7308 is executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7111) in the 16th embodiment, when the process of S7308 is completed, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ma is next corresponding to the current variation time. The counter value is set (S7311), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 347, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7014), which is one of the special symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 344), will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7014). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 16 (S7014) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 142) in the fourth embodiment, and monitors the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Then, it is a process for setting a stop symbol when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7014) in the 16th embodiment, in each of the processes S7501, S7502, and S7506 to S7512, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 142). ), The same processes as those of S7501, S7502, and S7506 to S7512 are executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7014) in the 16th embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S7502 that the jackpot flag 203ca corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON (S7502). : Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md is set to on (S7521), and the special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203 md is turned on is set (S7522). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped (S7523), and the process proceeds to S7506. As a result, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol can be temporarily stopped (interrupted) during the jackpot of the first special symbol, so that the jackpot game can be played. It is possible to suppress a problem that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses during the execution, and the big hit or the small hit is executed in duplicate.

Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (see FIG. 347) in the 16th embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca corresponding to the first special symbol is set to off in the processing of S7502. (S7502: No), the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 141) is executed (S7108), and the process proceeds to the process of S7510. That is, in the fourth embodiment described above, the game state update process (see FIG. 141) is the process of S7108 at the start of fluctuation (first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138)) and the second special symbol variation start process. Although it was configured to be executed at the time of processing S7606 (see FIG. 143), in the 16th embodiment, the game state update process (see FIG. 141) is executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. As a result, after shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state can be continued until the first variation display of the first special symbol is completed or the 99th variation display of the second special symbol is completed.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process 16 (S7017), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 16 (FIG. 344), will be described with reference to FIG. 348. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing 16 (S7017). The second special symbol variation start process 16 (S7017) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 143) in the fourth embodiment described above, and the variation display of the second special symbol. This is the process for setting the start of.

Of the second special symbol variation start processing 16 (S7017) in the 16th embodiment, in each process of S7602 to S7604, S7602 to S7604 of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 143) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing 16 (S7017) in the 16th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203md is on. That is, when it is determined whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted) and it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203md is set to ON (S7611). : Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7611, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203md is not set on (set to off) (S7611: No), the processing shifts to S7602. Further, in the second special symbol variation start process 16 (see FIG. 348) in the 16th embodiment, when the process of S7604 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146) in the fourth embodiment is replaced. Then, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7612) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7612) will be described later with reference to FIG. 349.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7612), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 16 (FIG. 348), will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7612). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7612) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146) in the fourth embodiment, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a process for selecting.

Of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7612) in the 16th embodiment, in each of the processes S7901 to S7909, S7901 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S7909 is executed. Further, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7612) in the 16th embodiment, when the processes of S7901 to S7909 are completed, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ma is then displayed as a counter corresponding to the current variation time. A value is set (S7911), and this process ends.

Next, the second special symbol variation stop process 16 (S7018), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 16 (FIG. 344, S19001), will be described with reference to FIG. 350. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7018). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 16 (S7018) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 148) in the fourth embodiment, and monitors the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Then, it is a process for setting a stop symbol when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

Of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7018) in the 16th embodiment, in each of the processes S8101 to S8103 and S8107 to S8112, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 148). ), The same processes as those of S8101 to S8103 and S8107 to S8112 are executed. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (S7018) in the 16th embodiment, if the jackpot flag 203ca of the second special symbol is set to ON in the processing of S8103 (S8103: No), the fourth The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 16 (S8121) is executed instead of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 149) in the embodiment, and this process is terminated. The details of the special drawing 2 detachment stop processing 16 (S8121) will be described later with reference to FIG. 351.

Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 16 (see FIG. 350) in the 16th embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca corresponding to the second special symbol is set to ON in the processing of S8103. (S8103: Yes) sets the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc on (S8122), and sets the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is turned on (S8123). .. Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped (S8124), and the process proceeds to S8107. As a result, during the jackpot game of the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol can be temporarily stopped (interrupted), so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot of the first special symbol is started and the jackpots are executed in duplicate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, a special figure 2 off-off stop process 16 (S8121), which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processes 16 (FIG. 350), will be described. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 detachment stop process 16 (S8121). This second special symbol disengagement stop process 16 (S8121) is executed in place of the second special symbol disengagement stop process (see FIG. 149) in the fourth embodiment, and stops the disengaged symbol or small hit symbol of the second special symbol. This is a process for setting the display.

Of the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing 16 (S8121) in the 16th embodiment, in each process of S8201 and S8204 to S8211, S8201 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. And the same processing as each processing of S8204 to S8211 is executed. Further, in the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 16 (S8121) in the 16th embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S8201 that the small hit flag 203cc is set to ON (S8201: Yes), the special figure 1 The temporary stop flag 203 mc is set to ON (S8221), the special figure 1 temporary stop command is set (S8222), and then the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped (S8223) to perform processing. It shifts to S8204. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol can be temporarily stopped (interrupted) during the execution period of the small hit game of the second special symbol, so that the first special symbol can be temporarily stopped (interrupted) during the execution of the small hit game. It is possible to suppress a problem that a big hit is started.

Further, in the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 16 (see FIG. 351) in the 16th embodiment, when the process of S8209 or S8211 is completed, the game state update process 16 (see FIG. 141) is executed (S7606). This process ends. As a result, the update timing of the number of time reductions can be set when the fluctuation is stopped.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 352 and 353. First, the effect update process 16 (S21011) in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 352. This effect update process 16 (S21011) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see S2112 in FIG. 55) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a variable display effect (variable pattern effect). This is a process for updating the effect mode during execution of.

When the effect update process 16 (S21011) in the 16th embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining time reduction period counter 223ma is larger than 0 (S3541). When it is determined that the value of the remaining time saving period counter 223ma is 0 (S3541: No), it means that the time saving state is not in progress, and the present processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3541, when it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction period counter 223ma is greater than 0 (S3541: Yes), the time reduction state is in progress and the variation display effect of the first special symbol is being executed. Since it means that there is, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223ma is updated (S3542), and then the continuous chan expectation update table 222ma (see FIG. 343) is read out (S3543). Next, with reference to the read continuous chan expectation update table 222ma, the currently set continuous chan expectation (the continuous chan expectation displayed in the display area HR6) is the updated remaining time reduction counter 223ma. It is determined whether or not the expected degree of consecutive chan corresponding to the short remaining time (T) specified from the value is obtained (S3544). In the process of S3544, if it is determined that the currently set continuous-chan expectation is the expectation corresponding to the remaining time reduction period (T) after the update (S3544: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S3544, if it is determined that the current expected degree of continuous chan is not the expected degree corresponding to the remaining time after the update (S3544: No), the expected degree of continuous chan displayed in the display area HR6 The display is updated to the expected degree corresponding to the remaining time reduction period (T) after the update (S3545), and the present process is terminated.

By executing this effect update process 16 (see FIG. 352), as the fluctuation time (remaining time reduction period) of the special symbol decreases with the passage of the first time in the time reduction state, the continuous chan expectation degree Since the display can be reduced, it is possible to make the player wish to win a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol before the expectation level drops. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the variable display setting process 16 (S21012) in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 353. This variation display setting process 16 (S21012) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed at the start of variation of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the variation pattern effect according to the variation pattern (variation time) notified by the variation pattern command. Of the variation display setting process 16 (S21012) in the 16th embodiment, in each of the processes S2801 to S2803 and S2805 to S2810, the variation display setting process in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (FIG. 62). The same processes as those of S2801 to S2803 and S2805 to S2810 of (see) are executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 353) in the 16th embodiment, when the process of S2803 is completed, the effect mode according to the variation pattern is determined (S2861), and the process proceeds to the process of S2805. To do. Further, in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 353) in the 16th embodiment, when the process of S2806 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the variation is in the special figure 1 in the time saving state (S2862), and the time saving state is in progress. When it is determined that the variation is in the special figure 1 (S2862: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 300 seconds is set in the remaining time reduction counter 223ma (S2863), and the process proceeds to S2807. On the other hand, in the process of S2862, when it is determined that the variation is not the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state (S2862: No), the process of S2863 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2807.

By executing this variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 353), the counter value of the remaining time reduction period counter 223ma can be set in accordance with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol in the time reduction state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 16th embodiment, the fluctuation time (300 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Configured. That is, in the time saving state, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed by biasing the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the change display of one special symbol is being executed and the big hit or the small hit based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started, the change of the special symbol in the change display is started. Is configured to interrupt (interrupt the timekeeping of the fluctuation time), and the interrupted variation display is resumed (the timekeeping of the fluctuation time is resumed) when the other big hit or small hit ends. are doing. Further, in the 16th embodiment, after the time saving state is started, the time saving state is changed by ending the variation display of the first special symbol once or ending the variation display of the second special symbol 99 times. Configured to exit. That is, even if a small hit or a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the long fluctuation (300 seconds) of the first special symbol, after the end of the small hit or the big hit, the remaining at the start of the small hit or the big hit. The fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted from the fluctuation time. In other words, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, the larger the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the shorter the remaining period until the time saving state ends, so the first special symbol It is possible to realize a novel playability that is directly linked to the amount of balls to be played, depending on how much the second special symbol is drawn to win the jackpot during the fluctuation time of 300 seconds.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 16th embodiment, in the time saving state, the expectation degree (ream-chan expectation degree) of winning the jackpot at least once before the time saving state ends is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to execute the production to make it. Then, the display of the degree of expectation is configured to decrease as the remaining time reduction period decreases. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of playing a game while always confirming the actual degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Each expectation is based on the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (1/20) and the number of lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed in a short period of time remaining. It shows the lower limit of the ratio of winning one or more small hits or big hits calculated. In other words, it shows a lower expectation than the actual jackpot ratio. As a result, the player can feel as if he / she has won the jackpot at a rate higher than the displayed expectation, so that he / she can enjoy the game in a time-saving state without stress. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 16th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is fixed to 300 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined. Further, it is not always necessary to fix the fluctuation time in one way, and a configuration may be made in which a plurality of candidates are determined by lottery. With this configuration, when the time saving state is started, the game can be performed with the expectation that the longest possible variable time will be selected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. it can.

In the 16th embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when the variation display of the first special symbol ends once in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ending condition of the time saving state is not limited to this. Can be determined arbitrarily. For example, after configuring so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol, as a condition for ending the time saving state, the small hit of the first special symbol ends once, or the variable display of the special symbol is the first. It may be configured so that the time saving state ends when one special symbol and the second special symbol are completed 100 times in total. That is, even if the variation display of the first special symbol ends in the time saving state, if it does not become a small hit (it is out of order), the time saving state may be configured to continue without ending. .. In this case, by setting the probability of losing in the lottery of the first special symbol to, for example, 1/10, even if the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state, it will be lost. It can be configured so that the time saving state continues again. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention not only to the remaining period of the variable display of the first special symbol (the remaining period of the time saving state) but also to the lottery result of the first special symbol so that the player can play the game. Can be improved. In this case, if the time saving state is not ended even if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends in the time saving state, a special effect mode may be executed. More specifically, for example, the display in the remaining short-term period is not subtracted, or the chain images LG1 and LG2 are used to reduce the remaining time period and the expectation of continuous chan from the time when the small hit is won. You may notify that it will not be changed. Further, for example, at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, or during the fluctuation, an effect of adding 300 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for one time, to the display for a short period of time remaining is executed. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player understand that the degree of advantage in the time saving state is at least doubled, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that these effects may be executed even when the variation display of the first special symbol started in the time reduction state is the variation display corresponding to the time reduction jackpot. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<17th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 395. The pachinko machine 10 according to the 16th embodiment described above is configured so that a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (variably) at the same time (in parallel), and the time is shortened. As the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the above, a fluctuation time (300 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. That is, in the time saving state, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed by biasing the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, in the 16th embodiment, when the change display of one special symbol is being executed and the big hit or the small hit based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started, the change of the special symbol in the change display is started. Is configured to interrupt (interrupt the timekeeping of the fluctuation time), and the interrupted variation display is resumed (the timekeeping of the fluctuation time is resumed) when the other big hit or small hit ends. are doing. Further, in the 16th embodiment, after the time saving state is started, the time saving state is changed by ending the variation display of the first special symbol once or ending the variation display of the second special symbol 99 times. It was configured to end.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment, a plurality of special symbols (1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol) are simultaneously (parallel) drawn (in parallel) as in the 16th embodiment described above. Four gaming states (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, latent probability state) can be set as game states after being configured so that they can be changed (variable), and a lottery (lottery) is made according to the set game states. It is configured so that the types of special symbols that are easy to execute (variation) are different. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery. The time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), latent state (high probability state of special symbol) , A low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, so that the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed than the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, when the latent probability state is set after being configured so that the small hit can be won in the second special symbol lottery, it is based on the small hit winning than when other game states are set. It is configured so that it is easy to win a prize ball during the small hit game executed. With this configuration, it is possible to change the type of special symbol that is easy to execute the lottery according to the set game state, and when a specific game state (latent state) is set. Since it is possible to easily obtain a prize ball by a small hit game, it is possible to provide a player with a game having different game characteristics according to a set game state.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, the jackpot is won in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol is set again after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to set an upper limit (limit number of times) for the number of times (probability variation continuous number of times). With this configuration, a gaming state (probability change) in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, which is advantageous to the player, is set rather than a gaming state (normal state, time saving state) in which a low probability state of the special symbol is set. By continuously setting the state (state, latent state), it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 used in each of the above-described embodiments, when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, after the big hit game is completed, a plurality of gaming states (for example, probabilistic change) having different degrees of advantage to the player It is configured to set one gaming state from among the states (states and time saving states), and is configured to determine each gaming state at a predetermined ratio. Therefore, after the jackpot game is completed, a probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability of the normal symbol), which is a gaming state (for example, a high probability state of the special symbol) that is advantageous to the player at a predetermined ratio (for example, 65%). If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting the state), the problem is that the probability change state is continuously set by continuously selecting the ratio of 65%, and the player is forced to perform an excessively advantageous game. was there. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to continuously set the advantageous gaming state, if the ratio of setting the advantageous gaming state to the player after the jackpot game is lowered is lowered, the player will be given a favorable gaming state after the jackpot game is completed. Since it becomes difficult to set an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state), a player who is playing a game in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) is less motivated to play. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the 17th embodiment, since an upper limit can be set for the number of times (probability variation continuous number of times) in which the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set after the end of the big hit game, the game is played after the end of the big hit game. Even if the ratio of the game state that is advantageous to the player is set high, the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuously set, and the game that is excessively advantageous to the player is prevented from being executed. can do. Therefore, in particular, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol).

In addition, when the number of times (probability variation continuous number) in which the game state advantageous to the player is continuously set reaches the upper limit number (limit number of times) after the jackpot game ends, the game advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends. Even if a jackpot is won in which a state (high probability state of a special symbol) is set, a gaming state (low probability state of a special symbol) that is disadvantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game is completed. are doing. That is, even if the same jackpot type is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the game set after the jackpot game ends depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied (whether or not the limit number of times has been reached). Since the states can be changed, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of games.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect for preventing the player from easily determining that the jackpot has been won by a special symbol lottery and that the probability change state has been set after the jackpot game is completed. are doing. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine the current number of consecutive probabilistic changes, so it is difficult to know when the limit number of times has been reached.

In the 17th embodiment, four gaming states (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, latent probability state) can be set, and a gaming state (time saving state,) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is set. When a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied in the probabilistic state), the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Then, it is configured so that different time saving end conditions are set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol, which is satisfied when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed once, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are combined and displayed. It is configured to provide a case where both the second time saving end condition which is satisfied when the process is completed 100 times and a case where only one of them is set.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, it is possible to set a game state in which the first time reduction end condition is easily satisfied and a game state in which the second time reduction end condition is easily satisfied. With this configuration, when the same time saving end condition (first time saving end condition, second time saving end condition) is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be obtained by quickly satisfying the time saving end condition. In the game state (for example, the time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set by letting the player play the set game state (for example, the latent probability state) or making it difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition. It is possible to let the player execute the game for a long period of time.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, the ease with which the first time saving end condition is satisfied is made different by changing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that triggers the establishment of the first time saving ending condition. ing. Then, a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which the probability variation state is set) and a state in which the time saving ending condition is not satisfied is advantageous to the player (for example, the time saving state). (Set state) and is configured to be configurable.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the currently set game state and let the player play the game while predicting whether the time saving end condition should be satisfied or not. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, with respect to whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the pachinko machine 10 in which the time saving end condition is more advantageous to the player and the pachinko machine 10 in which the time saving ending condition is not satisfied is advantageous to the player. In contrast to the case where a clear advantage is defined, in the 17th embodiment, the advantage regarding the presence or absence of the time saving end condition is switched depending on the situation, so that the time saving end condition is satisfied or the time saving is shortened. It is possible to make the player happy and uneasy about the fact that the end condition is not satisfied.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The processing has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 16 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 16th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the 17th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 354, in the game board 13 in the 17th embodiment, the game area (launched) formed on the game board 13 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 336) in the 16th embodiment described above. Of the areas through which the game balls can pass), the right side area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right side in FIG. 354 front view) is different in that the configuration is different, and the other parts are the same. .. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 will be described in detail. In the right side region of the game board 13, a first flow path ry1, a second flow path ry2, and a third flow path ry3 are formed from the upstream side as a flow path having a width of about 15 mm through which one ball can pass. .. Then, the right first entry port 64z, which triggers the lottery of the first special symbol when the ball enters the first flow path ry1, and the ball flowing down the first flow path ry1 are the right first entry balls. A regulation lid 64zf, which regulates entry into the mouth 64z, is provided. The regulation lid 64zf is variable to an open state in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path ry1 can enter the right first entry port 64z and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. If the regulation lid 64zf is in the closed state when the game ball flowing down the first flow path ry1 reaches the regulation lid 64zf, the flow path formed on the upper surface of the regulation lid 64zf is rolled. At the same time, it is configured to flow down in the downstream direction of the first flow path ry1. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the regulation lid 64zf is 0.1 seconds.

The regulation lid 64zf is configured as a constantly variable member that is variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. ing. Specifically, in the variable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In the 17th embodiment, as a movable scenario for opening and closing the regulation lid 64zf, a movable scenario that opens for 0.1 seconds and then closes for 1.2 seconds is defined, and the operation control based on this movable scenario is defined. It is configured to be executed repeatedly.

That is, in the game board 13 of the 17th embodiment, the balls launched in the right-handed game at intervals of 0.6 seconds based on the operation of the operation handle 51 flow into the first flow path ry1 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the rolling surface on which the regulation lid 64zf is arranged. When the game ball flows into the first flow path ry1 and rolls on the regulation lid 64zf (or falls on the regulation lid 64zf) and the timing when the regulation lid 64zf is opened coincides with the ball. Will enter the regulation lid 64zf in the open state and the right first entry port 64z.

As described above, the timing at which the game ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the regulation lid 64zf is at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and the timing at which the regulation lid 64zf is opened is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is 1 second, the timing at which the game ball exists on the upper surface of the regulation lid 64zf at the time when the regulation lid 64zf is opened is 1 second in 78 seconds. Further, since the period during which the regulation lid 64zf is opened is 0.1 seconds, a game in which the regulation lid 64zf is reached within 0.1 seconds after the regulation lid 64zf is opened. The ball is a game ball that flows down a position that can reach the regulation lid 64zf within 0.1 seconds among the game balls that flow down the first flow path ry1. That is, when the player continuously plays the right-handed game, the regulation lid 64zf is in the open state, and the timing at which the game ball can pass through the regulation lid 64zf in the open state is 1 in 38 seconds. It will be seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about two balls per minute enter the right first entrance 64z.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, when the left-handed game is performed, about 15 of the 250 fired balls are designed to enter the first entry port 64. If a ball enters, five prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the first entrance 64, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, about 5 of the 250 fired balls will enter the right first entry port 64z. When a game ball enters, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the prize balls to be paid out will be fired again, about 6 balls should be put into the right first entrance 64z. I can only do it.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is the first special regardless of whether the right-handed game or the left-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set (regardless of the set game state). It is configured so that the game ball can be inserted into the starting port (first ball entry port 64 or right first ball entry port 64z) that triggers the lottery of the symbol lottery, but the left-handed game is better. It is configured so that the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol can be established more efficiently than the right-handed game. Therefore, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed ball is hit more than the left-handed game. The general entrance 63 may be arranged based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time saving state or the jackpot state.

A through gate 67 is arranged at a position downstream of the regulation lid 64zf in the first flow path ry1. The through gate 67 is the same as each of the above-described embodiments, and is configured so that a lottery opportunity for a normal symbol lottery is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67. Since the contents of the ordinary symbol lottery executed based on passing through the through gate 67 and the detailed processing flow are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a V winning device 1650 is arranged at a place where the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down. The V-winning device 1650 is configured as a variable ball-entry means that is variably operated during a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. The V winning device 1650 is configured so that the game ball can be won only during the big hit game, and when the big hit game is executed, the opening / closing door 1650f is variably operated to the open state or the closed state.

The opening / closing door 1650f is configured so that the upper surface thereof becomes a flow path on the downstream side of the first flow path ry1 in the closed state, and the game ball that reaches the V winning device 1650 is closed except during the jackpot game. The upper surface of the opening / closing door 1650f in the state is rolled and flows down toward the second flow path ry2 communicating with the most downstream right end portion of the first flow path ry1.

Here, when the jackpot game in which the V winning device 1650 is variably operated is executed, the jackpot game in which the opening / closing door 1650f is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds is executed as a round game executed during the jackpot game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment, all of the game balls flowing down the right side region by the right-handed game are configured to flow into the first flow path ry1 and 2 per minute. All of the game balls that did not enter the right first entrance port 64z, where the degree of launch is entered, reach the V winning device 1650.

Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the V winning device 1650 is variably operated is executed, the player can put the game ball into the V winning device 1650 without waste just by executing the right-handed game.

Next, the configuration of the V winning device 1650 will be described. Since this V winning device 1650 is composed of the same elements as the V winning device 650 (see FIGS. 4 to 7) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the first embodiment described above, the V winning device 650 is configured to open when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and further, the inside of the V winning device 650 (V winning device) during the small hit game. While the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V switch 650e3) provided in the position where the game ball that won the 650 can pass. The seventeenth embodiment is different in that the V winning device 1650 is configured to be opened during the jackpot game. That is, the conditions for opening the V winning device 1650 are different.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, the game ball has passed through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) provided inside the V winning device 1650 (a position where the game ball winning the V winning device 1650 can pass). Based on this, the difference is that the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. That is, the types of benefits given to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area are different. Further, in the 17th embodiment, since the V winning device 1650 is configured to be opened during the big hit game, the operation scenario of the V winning device 1650 during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is also possible. It's different.

That is, the V winning device 1650 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment has the same (similar) structure as the V winning device 650 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, but the operation of the structure is the same. The control content (hit operation pattern) and the control content (privilege type) executed based on the detection result of the gaming ball winning the V winning device 650 are different. This difference will be described later with reference to FIG. 365. For convenience of explanation, when explaining the internal structure of the V winning device 1650, various codes (large codes) attached to the internal structure of the V winning device 650 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (650) + small code) will be described using a code obtained by changing the large code from 650 to 1650, but since the specific structure is the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 354. The game ball that has passed through the V winning device 1650 flows down the second flow path ry2 that communicates with the first flow path ry1 and reaches the second entry port 640. The second entry port 640 has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the rolling surface of the second ball flow path ry2, and each time one ball enters, a prize ball is awarded. It is configured so that one ball is paid out. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the ball entering the second entry port 640 is configured to trigger the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. The opening of the second ball entry port 640 is covered with an electric accessory 640a, and the ball can enter the electric accessory 640a in an open state and is more difficult (impossible) to enter than the open state. ) Is variably controlled to the closed state, so that the ease of entering the ball can be made different.

In the state where the electric accessory 640a covers the opening of the second entry port 640 (closed state), the ball flowing down the second ball flow path ry2 passes over the electric accessory 640a and passes through the second flow path. It is configured to flow down to the downstream side of ry2. That is, in the second flow path ry2, the ball that flows down to the downstream side of the second entry port 640 is a ball that did not (cannot) enter the second entry port 640.

In addition, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to an open state in the game per game executed when the player wins the normal symbol lottery as in each of the above-described embodiments. Since the processing content is the same as that of each of the above-described embodiments, the detailed description thereof will be omitted in the present embodiment.

Of the second flow path ry2, a ball flowing down on the downstream side of the second entry port 640 flows into the third flow path ry3 communicating with the second flow path ry2 and reaches the variable winning device 2650. The variable winning device 2650 is composed of a specific winning opening 2650a and an opening / closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the specific winning opening 2650a.

The specific prize opening 2650a has an opening formed so as to cut out a part of the rolling surface of the third flow path ry3, and each time one ball enters, 15 prize balls are used. The ball is configured to be paid out.

This variable winning device 2650 is a part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, or the small hit executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol). The opening operation is performed during the game, and by opening the opening / closing door 2650f in a predetermined opening scenario, an open state in which the ball can enter and a closing in which it is more difficult (impossible) to enter than the open state. It is variably controlled by the state.

In the closed state in which the opening / closing door 2650f closes the specific winning opening 2650a, the ball flowing down the third flow path ry3 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f and flows down toward the out opening 66. .. The upper surface (ball passage surface) of the opening / closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball, and is configured so that it takes 1 second for the ball to pass over the opening / closing door 2650f. .. By providing this delay means, it is possible to secure the required ball transit time in a smaller space. Although detailed description is omitted, in the 17th embodiment, as a delay means, a ball is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f so as to have a rolling surface having high frictional resistance (higher frictional resistance than other rolling surfaces). It forms an uneven portion that can be overcome.

As the delay means, a ball delay passage (for example, a passage in which the ball path is zigzag-shaped) is formed by devising the structure of the ball passage surface, or a ball delay passage is formed by devising the material of the ball passage surface. Anything can be used as long as it forms a shape or delays the passage time for the sphere to pass through a predetermined section.

Further, each winning opening (ball entry opening) provided in each of the above-mentioned flow paths (ry1 to ry3) where the ball launched by the left-handed game (a game aiming at the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80) is provided. ), A nail is planted below the game board 13 (below the first ball entry port 64 and to the right) as a regulating member (regulating means) for regulating the ball from entering the ball. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different games for the right-handed game and the left-handed game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired (hard to get tired). ..

Next, the relationship between the ball flow content and the set gaming state in the case of playing a right-handed game in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state in which a time saving state (a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a game state, and FIG. 355 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the ball flow in the state which the latent probability state is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment, four gaming states are set as the gaming states: a normal state and a latent state, which are low probability states of the normal symbol, and a time saving state and a probabilistic state, which are high probability states of the normal symbol. It is configured to be possible. Then, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol lottery is won with a high probability. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the game per normal symbol are configured to be different depending on the probability state of the normal symbol. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol lottery is configured to be different according to the set game state.

In this way, by making the normal symbol fluctuation time, the content per normal symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation time different according to the game state, the game result of the right-handed game is configured to be different according to the set game state. ing. Briefly, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is possible to easily put the game ball into the second entrance 640, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery. Since a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) is likely to be set, the second special symbol lottery cannot be efficiently executed even if the right-handed game is executed.

When the time saving state is set as the game state, it is possible to easily put the game ball into the second entry port 640, and further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery is a short time variation. Since the time (for example, 3 seconds) can be easily set, the second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed when the right-handed game is executed. However, since the electric accessory 640a is configured to be frequently opened by the game per game, it becomes difficult for the game ball flowing down the right side region to flow into the third flow path ry3, and the second special symbol Even when a small hit game in which the lottery result of the lottery is a small hit is executed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650. It should be noted that this time saving state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player because the second special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently than the above-mentioned normal state.

When the probability change state is set as the game state, the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery game are executed with the same contents as the above-mentioned time saving state, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit. Even when the winning game is executed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650. In addition, since the high probability state of the special symbol is set during the probability variation state and the low probability state of the special symbol is set during the time reduction state, the time reduction state is set when the probability variation state is set. Since the probability of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the case of being present, the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

Next, when the latent state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery is likely to be set to the same fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) as the time saving state described above, and The electric accessory 640a is configured to be in the open state at a lower frequency than the time saving state described above. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side region is more likely to flow into the third flow path ry3 than when the time saving state is set, and the game is played to the specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game. It is in a state where the ball can be easily entered.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 17th embodiment, when the latent probability state is set as the game state when the right-handed game is executed, it is easy to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery. In addition, it becomes the most advantageous game state in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball during a small hit game, and the next advantageous game state is difficult to obtain a prize ball during a small hit game, but the second special symbol is efficiently executed. The next advantageous gaming state is a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed at the same frequency as the probability change state, and the jackpot probability of the second special symbol lottery is lower than the probability change state. Become. Then, the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability (low probability) as the time saving state, and the normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in FIG. 355 (a), in the game board 13 of the 17th embodiment, the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640 (the ball passing through the through gate 67 is the second entry port). The time required to reach 640) is set to 0.5 seconds. Further, the ball passing time on the electric accessory 640a covering the second entry port 640 (the time required for the ball to pass (flow down) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a) is set to 1 second. are doing.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the 17th embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.1 seconds. The time is set to be ~ 0.4 seconds, that is, a time shorter than the ball passing time from the through gate 67 to the second entry port 640. Further, when a winner is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the opening operation of 0.2 seconds is executed twice with a closing period of 0.8 seconds in between. That is, it is configured to execute an opening operation in which a closing period shorter than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (a), when the right-handed game is played when the time saving state is set as the game state, most of the balls enter the second entrance 640. Further, in the 17th embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in less than half of the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) from the through gate 67 to the second entrance 640, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. Even if the lottery that results in the loss of the result is performed once, the ball that caused the loss of the lottery can be entered into the second entrance 640 by winning the next lottery. ..

On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, from the through gate 67 to the second entrance. It is configured so that a time longer than the ball passing time (0.5 seconds) up to 640 is set. Further, when a normal symbol is won by lottery, the opening operation for 0.04 seconds is executed once.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355 (b), when the right-handed game is played when the latent state is set as the game state, most of the balls do not enter the second entrance 640 and the variable winning is achieved. The ball will flow down toward the device 2650 (third flow path ry3). With this configuration, in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, it is easier to make the ball win the specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game than in the high-probability state of the normal symbol. ..

In the 17th embodiment, the time for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is 1 second, and the ball is fired once every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, by continuously performing the right-handed game, one ball is configured to always stay on the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, when a player wins a game by drawing a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a can play a game per game with a short opening period (a game per game with an opening period of 0.04 seconds). Even when it is executed, the ball can be surely entered into the second entrance 640 during one game per game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed in the game state (probability change state, time saving state, latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed.

As described above, in the 17th embodiment, four gaming states (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, latent probability state) can be set as game states, and three of them (time saving state) can be set. , Probability change state, latent probability state) is set as a game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Then, of the three game states in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, only a specific game state (latent state) is given during the small hit game than the other game states (time saving state, probability change state). The amount of benefits is large. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, and the first game state (latent state) in which the privilege is easily given during the small hit game and the first game state are given during the small hit game. It is possible to set a second game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the amount of privilege to be played is reduced and the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the first game state.

Therefore, by setting a game state that can give different advantageous situations to the player, it is possible to provide a variety of games and prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, the above-mentioned second game state is divided into a game state in which it is easy to win a big hit in the second special symbol lottery (probability change state) and a game state in which it is harder to win a big hit than the probability change state (time saving state). Since it can be set, a wider variety of games can be provided to the player, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in the 17th embodiment, it is possible to set a probability change state in which the ease of satisfying the time saving end condition is different according to the set jackpot type. That is, after the jackpot game is completed, a probabilistic state (first probabilistic state) in which the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied and a probabilistic state (second probabilistic state) in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied can be set. Then, regardless of which probabilistic state is set, the gaming state is configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the latent state based on the establishment of the time saving end condition.

Therefore, when the probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game is completed, it is expected that the first probabilistic state is set so that the game state can be easily shifted to the latent state which is more advantageous to the player than the probabilistic state. It is possible to play a game while letting it play.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, an upper limit (limit number of times) is set for the number of times (probability change continuous number of times) in which the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol) is continuously set, and when the limit number of times is reached. Is configured so that the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed even when the jackpot type in which the probability variation state is set is set. In other words, if the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, the game state in which it is easy to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery will be continued excessively. Therefore, when the limit number of times is reached, the special symbol is high. Even if the jackpot type for which the probability state is set is set, the low probability state of the special symbol is forcibly set after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, when the limit number of times is reached with the jackpot type set in which the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (low probability of the special symbol) Probability state, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

In this case, the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be different depending on whether or not the limit number of times has been reached, but since the set jackpot types are the same, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low probability. The time saving end conditions for transitioning to the state are the same. Here, when the probability change state is set as the game state, the latent probability state (the game state before the time reduction end condition is satisfied) is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state (the game state before the time reduction end condition is satisfied) because the time reduction end condition is satisfied. Since it is possible to shift to the game state after the time reduction end condition is satisfied), it is advantageous for the player if the time reduction end condition is satisfied early, but it is set when the limit number of times is reached. In the time saving state, the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the time saving state (the game state before the time saving end condition is satisfied) becomes a normal state (the game state after the time saving end condition is satisfied) which is disadvantageous to the player. Since the transition will occur, the player will be provided with a disadvantageous situation if the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the 17th embodiment, as the time saving end condition, a plurality of time saving end conditions that are satisfied based on the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of times of special symbol change) are set, and the probability change state is set. It is configured so that the ease of satisfying the time saving end condition differs depending on whether the time saving state is set or not. With this configuration, even if the same time reduction end condition is set, the ease with which the time reduction end condition is satisfied can be different depending on the set game state. Therefore, for example, When the probability change state is set based on winning a specific jackpot type, it is easy to shift to the latent state by making it easier to satisfy the time saving end condition, but the specific jackpot type is won. Moreover, when the time saving state is set based on the arrival of the limit number of times, it is possible to make it difficult to shift to the normal state by making it difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition.

<About the production contents in the 17th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 356 to 362, the characteristic effect performed in the 17th embodiment will be described. Here, as described above, in the 17th embodiment, the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the time saving state, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state are set, that is, the state in which the game state other than the normal state is set. It is configured to be an advantageous game method for the player. Then, when the latent state is set, a game (RUSH game) in which a prize ball can be obtained by a small hit game can be executed, so that the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the latent state is in effect. (RUSH effect) is configured to be executed. Further, even when the time saving state is set and the probability variation state (probability variation B state) is set, that is, even when the small hit game is executed, the variable winning device is used during the small hit game. If it is not possible to win the ball to 2650 (it is more difficult to win than in the latent state), the challenge production is executed as the same production (a concept including a production with differences that are difficult for the player to identify). It is configured to be done.

In this way, by configuring so that the same effect is executed in the time saving state and the probability change state, the prize ball in the small hit game during the right-handed game period (advantageous period) in which the right-handed game continues. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times in which the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol) in which the player cannot obtain the prize ball (it is difficult to obtain the prize ball) is continuously set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp when the limit number of times has been reached.

First, an example of a display screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 356. FIG. 356 (a) is an example of a display mode displayed during the ending period in the jackpot game corresponding to the probability variation A jackpot, and has acquired the reserved ball of the first special symbol and has acquired the first. 1 It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode for showing the RUSH rush which is displayed when the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball of a special symbol is out, and FIG. Probability change A An example of a display mode displayed during the ending period of a jackpot game executed in a part of the jackpot, and an example of a display mode indicating that a challenge effect (challenge mode) is executed after the jackpot game ends. It is a figure shown.

As described above, in the 17th embodiment, even when the RUSH game is executed after the jackpot game ends, the latent probability state is not set directly after the jackpot game ends, but after the probability change state is set once. , It is configured to set the latent state by satisfying the time saving end condition in a short time (0.5 seconds) (the first special symbol change is stopped and displayed). That is, it is configured so that the high probability state of the normal symbol is always set after the end of the jackpot game. With this configuration, when the number of jackpot wins reaches the limit number and the low probability state is forcibly set as the probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot game ends, the normal state (special symbol) Since it is possible to set a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) instead of low probability state (low probability state of normal symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), it is set when the limit number of times is reached. It is possible to set a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player as much as possible as the gaming state, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from dropping at once.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, the first special symbol change is executed once (stopped and displayed) as one of the time saving end conditions for the game state set based on the probability change A jackpot winning. It stipulates the first time-saving end condition that is satisfied in some cases. Then, when the probabilistic change state is set after the probabilistic change A jackpot, a short-time (0.5 second) fluctuation time is easily set as the fluctuation time of the first first special symbol change, and the probabilistic change is made. When the time saving state is set after the A jackpot, it is configured so that a long-time (300 seconds) fluctuation time can be easily set as the fluctuation time of the first first special symbol fluctuation.

With this configuration, when the same jackpot type is set, the length of the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues can be made different. Further, in the 17th embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery can be executed even during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation period of the first special symbol is different. The number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed) in the high probability state of the normal symbol can be made different.

An example shown in FIG. 356 (a) is a state in which a reserved ball that does not win a big hit (wins a miss) is acquired in the first special symbol lottery, that is, after the jackpot game ends, the first special symbol loses fluctuation (0 Since it is confirmed that .5 seconds) will be executed, a rabbit-like character 851 will be displayed in a display mode to congratulate the player as the ending screen of the jackpot game near the center of the main display area Dm. And the word "Congratulations" is displayed above it.

A small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm, and is configured to notify the player of a game method (right-handed game or left-handed game) that is advantageous to the player. That is, in the 17th embodiment, the display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is a guide display mode for displaying a game method that is advantageous to the player.

A small display area Dm10 for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the right-handed game period (advantageous period) is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and corresponds to the number of prize balls acquired during the right-handed game period. The display mode is configured to be updated (variable). In the example shown in FIG. 356 (a), "720 pt" corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired during the first jackpot game executed as the right-handed game period is displayed. That is, in the 17th embodiment, the display mode displayed in the small display area Dm10 indicates the amount (content) of the privilege acquired during the period (advantageous period) in which the gaming state advantageous to the player continues. It becomes the acquisition display mode for.

This acquisition display mode is configured to be cumulatively displayed during the period during which the right-handed game continues, that is, during the period until the normal state is set as the game state, and when the normal state is set as the game state. In, it is displayed as a display mode indicating that the advantageous period ends (for example, the amount of benefits acquired during the advantageous period, the number of big hits, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, etc.), and then is cleared to 0. In this embodiment, the display mode for showing the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) acquired by the player within one advantageous period is displayed in the small display area Dm10. In order to show the display mode for showing the number of winning games (big hit game, small hit game) executed within one advantageous period, and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous period. It may be configured to display the display mode of the above and the display mode for indicating the elapsed time during the advantageous period.

Further, the acquisition display mode may be cumulatively displayed over a plurality of advantageous periods, or the period for accumulating the acquisition display mode in one advantageous period may be divided into a plurality of periods. In addition, in the 17th embodiment, the acquisition display mode is updated (variable) for all the prize balls acquired during the advantageous period, but the acquisition display mode is not limited to this, for example, the advantageous period. For each type of prize balls acquired in, for example, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in other games are acquired in a display mode that can be identified by the player. May be configured to display. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of what triggered and how many prize balls were won during the advantageous period.

In this way, by executing the RUSH effect indicating that the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the RUSH game is executed for the player rather than the latent state is set. Since it can be notified in advance, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the probability change A jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, the process of determining (pre-reading) the hold memory (special figure 1 hold) of the first special symbol at various timings. Is configured to be executed. Specifically, the special figure 1 hold is acquired at the timing when the special symbol won in the probabilistic A jackpot fluctuates, the timing when the jackpot game of the probabilistic A jackpot is executed, and the timing when the jackpot game of the probabilistic A jackpot ends. Whether or not it is in the state, or among the acquired special figure 1 hold, the winning information held by the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the first special symbol change to be executed next (executed after the jackpot game ends) It is configured to determine whether or not the included lottery result (look-ahead result) is a big hit.

In this way, by discriminating the acquisition status and the look-ahead result of the special figure 1 hold at various timings, for example, at the timing when the special symbol won in the probability change A jackpot changes, the next first special symbol change (big hit). If it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special symbol variation executed after the end of the game is missed and won (0.5 second variation), the special symbol variation won in the probability variation A jackpot (probability variation A jackpot variation) In the variable display effect for, it becomes easier to execute an effect that suggests that the RUSH game will be executed after the jackpot game ends (for example, if the jackpot is hit by this variation, the comment display of RUSH is confirmed !!), and the probability variation A jackpot is won. It is confirmed that the short change (0.5 second change) of the first special symbol is executed when the special figure 1 hold is not acquired at the timing when the special symbol changes, that is, after the jackpot game ends. If not, since it is not confirmed that the RUSH game will be executed immediately after the jackpot game is completed (0.5 seconds later), the effect suggesting that the RUSH game will be executed after the jackpot game is completed. (For example, if a big hit is made by this fluctuation, the comment display of RUSH is confirmed !!) can be prevented from being executed.

In addition, even if the special figure 1 hold is not acquired at the timing when the special symbol won in the probability change A jackpot fluctuates, a new special figure 1 hold is acquired at the start timing and the end timing of the jackpot game. By determining that, it is possible to execute the effect of executing the RUSH game after the end of the jackpot game during the jackpot game period or on the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. With this configuration, even if the special figure 1 hold is not acquired at the timing when the special symbol won in the probability change A jackpot fluctuates, a new special figure will be added in the period until the jackpot game ends. By acquiring 1 hold, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the RUSH game will be executed. Therefore, the player is made to perform the game while expecting the suggestion effect to be executed. be able to.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 hold has been acquired or newly acquired, the effect based on the pre-reading result of the acquired special figure 1 hold is executed. However, not limited to this, when it is confirmed that the RUSH game will be executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game (0.5 seconds later) based on the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 hold that has been acquired. A flag (executable flag) indicating that the suggestion effect suggesting that the RUSH game is executed is set to be on, and the effect is executed while the executable flag is set to on. When the condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute the suggestion effect at a timing different from the timing at which the information regarding the special figure 1 hold is determined. In addition, the suggestion effect can be easily executed at a plurality of execution timings. Here, as the execution condition of the effect, for example, an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been executed on the operation means are provided to determine the operation. When the means determines that a predetermined operation has been executed, it is configured so that the execution condition of the effect is satisfied, or while the executable flag is set to ON, a predetermined value provided on the game board 13 is provided. The number of passing balls that have passed through the area (through gate, second entry port 640, out port 66, etc.) or the number of prize balls paid out based on the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area is the predetermined number (passing). When the number of balls reaches 20 balls, and the number of prize balls reaches 100 balls), the execution condition of the effect may be satisfied. In this way, since the execution condition for executing the suggestion effect can be satisfied according to the result of the game executed by the player, the player can be enthusiastically performed the game.

In addition, as the execution condition of the effect, the execution condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time elapses after the executable flag is set to ON, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game that is executed after the executable flag is set to ON. May be provided with an execution condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 3 rounds) is reached. In this way, by configuring the suggestion effect to be executed based on the elapsed time since the executable flag is set to on, the player is motivated to set the executable flag to on as soon as possible. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

Further, the effect execution lottery may be performed in a state where the suggestion effect can be executed, and the suggestion effect may be executed when the result of the effect execution lottery is won. In this case, the effect execution lottery is independent. It may be executed by the one lottery means, or may be configured to refer to the lottery result of the lottery means used for another purpose such as the ordinary symbol lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 1 hold determination timing for determining the winning information included in the acquired special figure 1 hold are fixed to the above-mentioned three timings. , Not limited to this, the special figure 1 hold determination timing can be changed (for example, when the start timing of the specific round is set to the special figure 1 hold determination timing, the number of rounds to be a specific round can be changed). Alternatively, a determination means for determining the timing at which the special figure 1 hold determination is actually executed may be provided among the plurality of special figure 1 hold determination timings.

As described above, by making it difficult for the player to understand when the special figure 1 hold determination is executed, a new special feature is obtained when the jackpot game is executed without acquiring the special figure 1 hold. Fig. 1 Even if the suggestion effect is not executed when the hold is acquired, whether the jackpot is won by a jackpot type other than the probability variation A jackpot, or the probability variation A jackpot, but the execution condition of the suggestion effect is not satisfied. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the RUSH game is executed until the jackpot game is completed (until 0.5 seconds have passed since the jackpot game was completed).

In addition, the above-mentioned effect execution condition is configured to be feasible regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 1 hold, and the type of the effect to be executed differs depending on the presence or absence of the special figure 1 hold when the effect execution condition is satisfied. For example, if the special figure 1 hold is acquired, the suggestion effect is executed, and if the special figure 1 hold is not acquired, the current probability variation continuous number is obtained. It may be configured to perform an effect that suggests. In this way, by making it possible to execute different types of effects according to the time-series context of the acquisition timing of the special figure 1 hold and the timing at which the execution conditions of the effects are satisfied, the player is predicted. It is possible to easily perform a production that is difficult to perform.

Further, as a variable display effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, when a variable display effect using a plurality of symbols (third symbol) is executed as in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display effect is used. By changing the effect mode, a suggestion effect for suggesting that the RUSH game is executed may be executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game (0.5 seconds later). That is, the result of the special symbol lottery, the presence or absence of the special symbol 1 hold, and the first special symbol change to be executed next (first executed after the jackpot game ends) among the acquired special figure 1 hold. The lottery result (pre-reading result) included in the winning information of the corresponding special figure 1 hold may be configured so that the effect mode of the variable display effect can be determined. For example, when the probability variation A jackpot is won. If it is confirmed that the RUSH game will be executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, the RUSH game will be executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, indicating that the jackpot was won as a result of the variable display effect. In the case where the special display mode (for example, "777") indicating the above is stopped and displayed, and the probability variation A jackpot is won, if it is not confirmed that the RUSH game is executed immediately after the jackpot game ends, It is preferable to configure the display mode other than the above-mentioned special display mode to stop and display the normal display mode (for example, "666") indicating only that the jackpot has been won, regardless of the set jackpot type. Further, the probability variation A jackpot may be configured to stop and display the advantageous display mode (for example, "555") that is easier to be displayed than the case where the jackpot of another type is won. When the A jackpot is won, the disadvantageous display mode (for example, "222"), which is more difficult to be displayed than when the jackpot of another type is won, may be stopped and displayed.

In this way, it is possible to set the display mode of the variable display effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not the jackpot is won), the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot, and the status of holding the special figure 1. By configuring it, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned normal display mode or advantageous display mode, it is possible to make the probability change A jackpot winning expectation different depending on whether or not the special figure 1 is held. It is possible to provide a novel production.

Further, in this case, as a variation display effect, when the remaining variation period reaches a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) in the variation period (for example, 90 seconds) of the special symbol, whether or not the special figure 1 is held, and It is configured to execute the process of discriminating the look-ahead result, and when the discriminant result is different from the start timing of the special symbol variation, for example, when the special symbol 1 hold is 0 at the start timing of the special symbol variation. When it is determined that one special figure 1 hold indicating that the lottery result is out of order is acquired at the timing when the remaining fluctuation period of the special symbol reaches the predetermined period (RUSH immediately after the end of the jackpot game). When it is confirmed that the game will be executed), the promotion effect of changing (promoting) the stop display mode of the third symbol may be executed by using the residual variation period.

In this case, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode other than the probabilistic promotion effect used in the conventional pachinko machine 10, that is, the display mode corresponding to the jackpot type that is actually won. The production that can be changed (promoted) to the display mode corresponding to the jackpot type that is actually won may be fused with the promotion production, or the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion production and the promotion production may be different. , The probabilistic promotion effect may be executed first to increase the possibility of being in the probabilistic A state, and then the promotion effect may be executed. With this configuration, the player can variably display the stop display mode of the third symbol over a plurality of stages, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the above-mentioned example of the effect mode, the effect mode showing the execution expectation of the RUSH game is described by using the stop display mode of the third symbol, but the RUSH game is executed without limitation (big hit). A dedicated symbol (character) for indicating that the RUSH game is executed immediately after the end of the game may be configured to be displayable on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured. By varying the color and size of the display mode displayed on the display surface of the RUSH game, a suggestion effect for suggesting the execution expectation of the RUSH game may be executed.

Next, an example of a display mode for showing that the challenge mode (challenge effect) is executed after the jackpot game is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 356 (b). In FIG. 356 (b), the description of the special 1 hold display area Ds1a and the special 2 hold display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, the special 1 variable display area Ds3a, and the special 2 variable display area Ds3b is omitted. There is. As shown in FIG. 356 (b), when the condition for executing the challenge mode (challenge effect) is satisfied after the jackpot game is completed, the character 851 runs to the right near the center of the main display area Dm. Is displayed, and in the second display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Challenge mode rush !!" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the challenge mode (challenge effect) is executed after the jackpot game is completed. Is displayed. Other than that, it is the same as FIG. 356 (a) described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the ending screen shown in FIG. 356 (b) has a jackpot in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends and a jackpot in which the probability variation B state is set, that is, the first special symbol after the jackpot game ends. If a jackpot for which the time saving end condition is not satisfied is won until the total number of fluctuations of the fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times, it is configured to be displayed without fail after the jackpot game ends. As a result, when the ending screen shown in FIG. 356 (b) is displayed, it is possible to inform the player that the challenge mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner, and any game state (time saving state). , Probability change B state) can be difficult to determine.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation A state in which the time reduction end condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the probability variation B state, when it is not determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied immediately after the jackpot game ends, FIG. 356 (a). ) Is displayed, but the ending screen shown in FIG. 356 (b) is displayed.

Here, among the cases where the ending screen shown in FIG. 356 (b), that is, the display mode suggesting that the challenge mode (challenge effect) is executed after the jackpot game is completed is displayed on the ending screen, the probability change A state Will be described in detail when is set. If the ending screen shown in FIG. 356 (b) is displayed when the probability change A state is set after the jackpot game ends, the hold ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 hold ball) at the end of the jackpot game. Is not acquired, or as the first special symbol change executed after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving jackpot or the first special symbol variation indicating that the probability variation B jackpot is won is executed. Is. That is, it is a case where it is not confirmed that the time saving end condition is satisfied early in the probability change state set after the jackpot game ends. In this case, when the ending screen shown in FIG. 356 (a) is displayed, the probabilistic state set after the end of the jackpot game cannot be changed to the latent probable state, that is, the probabilistic state is set. After that, the player is notified that the RUSH game will be executed even though the first special symbol change is not executed and the state in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied continues, which confuses the player. There is a risk. Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, it is confirmed that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage on the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the probability variation state (probability variation A state) in which the time saving end condition is easily established after the jackpot game is completed is set. If not, a display mode indicating that the challenge mode is set is displayed even on the ending screen of the jackpot game based on the probability variation A jackpot.

In this way, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and when a specific condition is satisfied during the probability change state, the jackpot type (probability change A jackpot) is defined so as to shift to the latent probability state at an early stage. In the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is confirmed by the end of the jackpot game, and if it is confirmed that the specific condition is satisfied, the latent state is set. (For example, at the start of the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, at the end of the jackpot, during the probability change state), it is notified in advance that the latent probability state will be set, and it is confirmed that the specific condition is satisfied. If this is not the case, the content of the game to be executed after the jackpot game is completed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying in advance only that the probability change state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the content of the effect when the RUSH effect is executed after the jackpot game is completed will be described. FIG. 357 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the probabilistic state when the probabilistic state is set for 0.5 seconds after the end of the jackpot game and then shifts to the latent probable state. As shown in FIG. 357 (a), although it is actually a period in which the probability variation state is set, an effect mode (RUSH effect) for showing that the latency state is set is displayed. With this configuration, when a plurality of game states are switched in a short period of time, the effect that is difficult for the player to understand by executing the effect corresponding to the set game state, that is, the effect mode is switched in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the production from being executed.

As shown in FIG. 357 (a), when the RUSH effect is executed, the treasure box 852 is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm. This treasure box 852 is used to notify the player of the game result (result of special symbol lottery or result of RUSH production) during the RUSH game, and is used when showing the result of the special symbol lottery or RUSH. The treasure box 852 is opened when the effect satisfies the predetermined conditions, and the result display mode 852a is displayed from the treasure box 852 (see FIG. 357 (b)).

During the RUSH effect, the special 1 hold display area Ds1a and the special 2 hold display area Ds1b are formed on the left side of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, and the special 1 hold display area Ds1a is currently acquired. The value corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the 1 special symbol is displayed, and the value corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol currently acquired is displayed in the special 2 reserved display area Ds1b. In the example shown in FIG. 357 (a), "0" indicating that none of the special symbols has acquired the reserved ball is displayed.

A second display area Ds2 is formed in the center of the sub-display area Ds. The second display area Ds2 is an area used as a guidance display area for guiding the effect content being executed and the set game state, and in FIG. 357 (a), the RUSH effect is executed. The characters "in RUSH" indicating that are displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the RUSH game is being executed in an easy-to-understand manner.

A special 1 variation display area Ds3a and a special 2 variation display area Ds3b are formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds, and a third symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol variation is displayed in the special 1 variation display area Ds3a. The special 2 variation display area Ds3b is configured to display the third symbol variation corresponding to the second special symbol variation. In the example shown in FIG. 357 (a), the first special symbol changes. In order to indicate that the display is in progress, the display mode "downward arrow" indicating that the third symbol is variablely displayed is displayed in the special 1 variable display area Ds3a, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. In order to show that the third symbol is not variablely displayed, a display mode "-" indicating that the third symbol is not variablely displayed is displayed in the special 2 variable display area Ds3b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357 (b), the production content of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game will be described. FIG. 357 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the RUSH effect. In the 17th embodiment, when the latent state is set, the RUSH game in which the prize ball is easily obtained by the small hit game is executed. The RUSH effect is an effect for notifying the player of the game result during the RUSH game. For example, the small hit game is executed and variable based on the small hit winning in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH game. When a ball wins a prize in the specific prize opening 2650a of the prize device 2650 and 15 prize balls are paid out, the treasure box 852 is opened as shown in FIG. 357 (b), and the result display mode 852a is set. "+15" indicating that 15 prize balls have been won is displayed.

An example shown in FIG. 357 (b) is a display at the time when the first small hit game is executed from the state shown in FIG. 357 (a) described above and 15 prize balls are won during the small hit game. Since the aspect is shown, in the small display area Dm10, the cumulative number of prize balls in the advantageous period is increased by 15 to "735pt" with respect to "720Pt" shown in FIG. 357 (a). The updated acquisition display mode is displayed, and in the special 2 variable display area Ds3b, "341", which is a stop display mode of the third symbol to indicate that a small hit has been won in the second special symbol lottery, is displayed. ing.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 357 (b), since the case where the second special symbol wins a small hit in the state where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol fluctuation is not displayed, the special 1 fluctuation display area Ds3a is displayed. , The third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed last time. For example, the second special symbol indicates a small hit winning during the execution of the first special symbol change. When the stop display is performed in the display mode, that is, when the small hit game is executed during the execution of the first special symbol change, the display mode indicating that the first special symbol change being executed is temporarily stopped. (For example, in addition to the display mode in which the third symbol is slightly swung to be displayed, the display mode in which the characters "temporarily stopped" are displayed) displays the third symbol. As a result, by executing the small hit game based on one special symbol lottery, it is possible to easily notify that the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is temporarily stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358 (a), the contents of the super RUSH effect executed during the RUSH effect will be described. FIG. 358 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the super RUSH effect. This super RUSH effect is an effect executed when a specific condition is satisfied during the RUSH effect, and in the 17th embodiment, the winning information indicating the small hit winning is in the reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when there is a predetermined number (4 pieces) or when there is winning information indicating that a specific type of jackpot (big hit E17) in which the RUSH game can be executed again after the jackpot game is completed are doing.

That is, the super RUSH effect is an effect for notifying the player of the period during which the RUSH game (RUSH effect) does not end. With this configuration, the player can play the RUSH game with peace of mind during the super RUSH production.

When the super RUSH effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 358 (a), in the second display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, "Super RUSH rushes!" To indicate that the super RUSH effect has started! ”Is displayed, and from the treasure chest 852 displayed in the main display area Dm, the display mode of“ R ”indicating the entry of the super RUSH is displayed as the second result display mode 852b, and the main display area Dm “R × 1” is displayed in the small display area Dm11 as the rush count display mode for indicating the number of times the super RUSH effect is executed in the upper right. In addition, in the 17th embodiment, in addition to the case where there is winning information indicating that a specific type of jackpot (big hit E17) in which the RUSH game can be executed again is won after the jackpot game is completed, as an opportunity to enter the super RUSH production. A case is set in which a predetermined number (4 pieces) of winning information indicating a small hit winning is present in the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

That is, the super RUSH effect is configured to be executed even in a situation where a small hit is won four times in a row in the second special symbol lottery to be executed in the future. With such a configuration, the super RUSH effect can be easily executed, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the super RUSH effect is executed during the period when the small hit game is continuously executed (the variable winning device 2650 is continuously opened), it is a big hit whether the small hit game is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the game is being executed. In the 17th embodiment, on the display screen during the RUSH effect, another effect is executed in the display area (special 1 variable display area Ds3a, special 2 variable display area Ds3b) for variable display of the third symbol. It is configured to be smaller than the display screen (for example, see FIG. 337) in the case where the player is present, and is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not a new special symbol change has been executed. Therefore, during the super RUSH production, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the special symbol variation for winning the small hit is executed multiple times or the special symbol variation for winning the big hit is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. it can.

During the super RUSH effect, as shown in FIG. 358 (b), the display mode of the treasure box 852 becomes a luxurious display mode as compared with the normal RUSH effect (see FIG. 357 (b)). This makes it easier for the player to visually understand that the current situation is advantageous. Then, in the second display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, the characters "~ super RUSH in ~" are displayed to indicate that the super RUSH production is currently in progress.

Next, the content of the jackpot notification effect during the RUSH effect will be described. In the 17th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot type in which a probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability variation jackpot) and a jackpot type in which a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability variation jackpot). (Time saving jackpot) and any of the jackpot types are set. Further, as the type of the probability variation jackpot, a probability variation A jackpot in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied and a probability variation B jackpot in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the probability variation A jackpot can be set.

Then, when the probability change A jackpot is set, the game is configured to execute the game that shifts to the latent state (RUSH game) after the first special symbol change of 0.5 seconds after the jackpot game ends. There is. As shown in FIG. 356 (a), when the probability variation A jackpot is set, the latent probability state is set immediately after the jackpot game is completed (actually, from the time when the probability variation state is set). ) It is configured so that the RUSH effect is executed. That is, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the RUSH production and a probability variation A jackpot is set as the jackpot type, the RUSH production is continuously executed through the jackpot game. ..

FIG. 359 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed when a jackpot is won in which the RUSH effect (RUSH game) continues after the end of the jackpot game during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 359 (a), when a jackpot for which a probability variation A jackpot is set as a jackpot type is won, the treasure box 852 opens, and as a result display mode 852a, a RUSH effect (RUSH game) is performed after the jackpot game is completed. The display mode of "V" for indicating continuation is displayed, and the character "big hit" for indicating the jackpot winning is displayed above the center of the main display area Dm. Further, a small display area Dm12 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and the small display area Dm12 is displayed as "V × 1" as a probability variation winning number display mode for indicating the number of times the probability variation A jackpot is won during the advantageous period. Is displayed. Since the time point shown in FIG. 359 (a) indicates the time when the big hit was won in the second special symbol lottery, the special 2 variable display area Ds3b is to show that the big hit was won in the second special symbol lottery. The third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "555", and the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the special 1 variation display area Ds3a in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning. The third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "cross mark" indicating that the first special symbol variation in the inside is forcibly stopped in the display mode indicating the deviation.

In the 17th embodiment, as the effects to be executed during the advantageous period (probability change state, latent state, time saving state), in addition to the above-mentioned RUSH effect, a challenge effect can be executed. This challenge effect is configured to be feasible depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. In this way, by executing the same effect (challenge effect) between the case where the probability change state is set during the advantageous period and the case where the time reduction state is set, the probability change state is changed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether it is set or the time saving state is set.

Further, as described above, in the 17th embodiment, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol is continuously set, and when the probability change jackpot is set 5 times in a row ( After the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the fifth probability change jackpot (when the limit number is reached), a time saving state is set in which the high probability state of the special symbol is forcibly switched to the low probability state for the probability change state. It is configured as follows. In this way, when a specific gaming state (for example, a gaming state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set) is continuously set a predetermined number of times, a gaming state other than the specific gaming state (for example, a gaming state) is forcibly set. By configuring so as to set a game state in which a low probability state of a special symbol is set), it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous game from being executed for the player.

Here, in the case of executing an effect in which the player can grasp whether or not the limit number has been reached or the number of remaining jackpots until the limit number is reached, in the number of jackpot winnings that can reach the limit number, Regardless of whether you win the probabilistic jackpot or the time saving jackpot, the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so the player's willingness to play will decrease as the limit number approaches. There was a problem. On the other hand, in the 17th embodiment, the content of the effect (challenge effect) executed when the game state set after the jackpot game ends is a probabilistic state and when the time saving state is set. By unifying the above, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the probability change state is continuously set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the limit number of times has been reached or the number of remaining jackpots until the limit number of times is reached, so that the player's willingness to play is reduced. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 359 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed when a jackpot (probability variation B jackpot, time saving jackpot) in which a challenge effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game is won during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 359 (b), when a jackpot with a probability variation B jackpot or a time-saving jackpot is won as a jackpot type, the treasure box 852 opens, and as a result display mode 852a, a challenge effect is produced after the jackpot game ends. The display mode of "challenge" to indicate that it is executed is displayed, and the characters "challenge jackpot" to indicate the jackpot winning are displayed above the center of the main display area Dm. Since the time point shown in FIG. 359 (b) indicates the time when the big hit was won in the second special symbol lottery, the special 2 variable display area Ds3b is to show that the big hit was won in the second special symbol lottery. The third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "444" of the above, and the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the special 1 variation display area Ds3a in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning. The third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "cross mark" indicating that the first special symbol variation in the inside is forcibly stopped in the display mode indicating the deviation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, the content of the challenge effect executed during the advantageous period will be described. In the 17th embodiment, when it is confirmed that the RUSH game is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, the RUSH effect (see FIG. 357) is executed after the end of the jackpot game. If it is not confirmed that the RUSH game will be executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, that is, if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, or if the time saving end condition that is difficult to be established after the jackpot game ends is specified. When the state (probability change state set based on the probability change B jackpot) is set, the probability change state (probability change state set based on the probability change A jackpot) in which the time saving end condition that is likely to be established after the end of the jackpot game is set is set. It is configured so that the challenge effect is executed when the setting is made and the establishment element for establishing the time saving end condition is not acquired by the end of the jackpot game. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict what the currently set gaming state is.

As shown in FIG. 360 (a), when the challenge effect is executed, the character 851 is displayed in a mode of running from left to right near the center of the main display area Dm, and the challenge effect is executed above the character 851. The words "Challenge mode in progress" are displayed to indicate that. Then, in the display area HR20, "remaining time 300 seconds" is displayed as a period display mode for suggesting the effect period of the challenge effect. This period display mode is a countdown display in which the remaining time is subtracted and displayed according to the passage of time.

Then, in the small display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, the comment "find the treasure in time" is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the game content during the challenge production.

The details will be described later, but in the 17th embodiment, the challenge effect is executed while the high probability state (probability variation state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set, and the height of the normal symbol is high. As the time saving end condition for ending the probability state, the specific time saving ending condition that is satisfied by executing the first special symbol change once (displayed as a stop), the number of times the first special symbol changes, and the second special symbol The normal time saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations and the total number reaches 100 times is given (set) according to the jackpot type that the jackpot is won.

Therefore, the production period of the challenge effect is the period until the above-mentioned specific time reduction end condition or normal time reduction end condition is satisfied. Here, when the challenge effect is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is easily set to 300 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is easily set to 3 seconds. .. Therefore, regardless of whether the specific time reduction end condition or the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied, any time reduction end condition is satisfied near the timing when 300 seconds have passed since the challenge effect is executed, and the normal symbol height It is configured so that the probability state shifts to the low probability state (challenge production ends).

In this way, when a plurality of time-saving end conditions having different contents are actually set as time-saving end conditions that are satisfied based on the number of times the special symbol changes, when the game is normally executed, each time-saving end condition is set. It is configured so that a time difference is unlikely to occur at the timings that can be satisfied, and it is not an effect mode that indicates the number of special symbol fluctuations until each time reduction end condition is satisfied, but shows the remaining period until the timing that each time reduction end condition can be satisfied. By setting the effect mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time saving end condition is set. In addition, since it is possible to standardize the effect mode of the challenge effect when different time reduction end conditions are set, the capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 360 (b), an example of a display mode displayed when the remaining period is exhausted during the challenge effect will be described. FIG. 360 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during extension of the challenge effect (challenge mode). As described above, in the 17th embodiment, the period (300 seconds) until the specific time reduction end condition is satisfied is displayed in the display area HR20 as the remaining period of the challenge effect. Here, when only the normal time reduction end condition is set as the time reduction end condition instead of the specific time reduction end condition, the time reduction end condition is not satisfied when the countdown display of 300 seconds becomes 0 seconds. Occurs. That is, when the player continuously performs the right-handed game during the challenge production, the second special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, so that after the challenge production is executed. By the time 300 seconds have passed, the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied and the challenge effect can be ended, but if the game is temporarily stopped during the execution of the challenge effect, the 300 second countdown display will be 0 seconds. At that point, the normal time reduction end condition (total of special figure fluctuations of 100 times) may not be satisfied.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 360 (b), the extension effect in which the characters during the challenge mode extension are displayed and "???" indicating that the remaining period is unknown is displayed in the display area HR20. Will be executed. During this extension effect, the effect is executed in such a manner that the icon 853 imitating a rock attacks the character 851. Then, the comment "End when caught" is displayed in the second display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds.

With this configuration, the challenge effect does not end even though 300 seconds have passed since the challenge mode effect was executed for the player (the game in the high probability state of the normal symbol does not end). It is possible to notify the state in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, it is possible to make the player think that the challenge effect (the game in the high probability state of the normal symbol) has been extended, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving end condition is not satisfied when the remaining period displayed in the display area HR20 reaches 0 seconds, the extension effect is executed. Without limitation, for example, when the remaining period displayed in the display area HR20 reaches 0 seconds, the factor (number of remaining fluctuations) until the time saving end condition is satisfied is determined, and the number of remaining fluctuations is a predetermined number (for example, , 30 times) or more, the effect mode may be switched so that the remaining period of the challenge effect is indicated by the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol. With such a configuration, the extended effect is executed for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the provision of an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

Although not shown, the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied before the remaining period displayed in the display area HR20 reaches 0 seconds, and the challenge effect (game in the high probability state of the normal symbol) is performed. When it is determined to be the end, the speed of subtracting the remaining period displayed in the display area HR20 is increased, and the remaining period displayed in the display area HR20 becomes 0 seconds at the timing when the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied. The display control may be executed as described above, or the challenge effect may be forcibly terminated before the remaining period reaches 0 seconds. In addition, the shortest period required for the normal time saving end condition to be satisfied (the shortest period for the total number of special figure fluctuations to reach 100 times), as opposed to the period required for the specific time saving end condition to be satisfied (300 seconds). ) May be configured to be slightly longer so that the normal time saving end condition cannot be satisfied before the remaining period displayed in the display area HR20 reaches 0 seconds.

Next, the end screen of the challenge effect will be described with reference to FIG. 361. FIG. 361 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the end screen of the challenge effect when the challenge effect ends and shifts to the normal state, that is, when the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 361 (a), when the normal state is set after the challenge effect is completed, the display area Dm2 displays "left-handed" that guides the game method in the normal state, and the main display area Dm. In the vicinity of the center of the icon 853, the effect of capturing the character 851 (crushed) is executed. Then, above, as a result display mode showing the game result of the current advantageous period (the period during which the right-handed game is continuously executed), "1550 pt" is used as information corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous period. "Rx1 acquisition" is displayed as information indicating the number of times the super RUSH effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the probability change state is set, when the challenge effect is completed, that is, in the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), the high probability state of the normal symbol becomes the low probability state. When the transition is made to, the latent probability state is set as the game state, and the RUSH game is executed. FIG. 361 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the challenge effect is completed and the RUSH effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 361 (b), the display mode displayed during the challenge effect is destroyed, and the RUSH game (RUSH effect) is executed near the center of the main display area Dm. A revival effect in which characters are displayed is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state that shifts after the end of the challenge effect (after the end of the high probability state of the normal symbol) differs depending on the set game state, and the challenge It is configured to suggest (notify) the game state after the transition at the timing when the production ends. Therefore, even just before the end of the challenge production, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery that satisfies the specific time reduction end condition is a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the fluctuation time of 300 seconds has elapsed. In this case, the revival effect is executed in the effect mode in which the characters displayed near the center of the main display area Dm are switched from "RUSH" to "big hit" with respect to the effect mode shown in FIG. 361 (b). ..

Immediately after this revival effect is executed, an effect of cracking the entire surface of the main display area Dm is executed, and after that, after the destruction mode in which the display surface is destroyed is displayed, the “destruction mode” shown in FIG. 361 (b) is displayed. It is configured to display the characters "RUSH". That is, the suggestion mode (crack mode) suggesting that the resurrection effect is executed, the notification mode (destruction mode) indicating that the resurrection effect has been executed, and the result mode (RUSH mode) indicating the content of the resurrection effect are staggered. It is configured to be displayed. Therefore, when the notification mode (destruction mode) indicating that the resurrection effect has been executed is executed, the player can enjoy two choices of whether the RUSH game is executed or the jackpot game is executed. You can do it.

It should be noted that the end screen shown in FIG. 361 (a) may be displayed after the suggestion mode of the revival effect is displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 362, when the challenge effect is executed (a high probability state of the normal symbol is set), it is executed when the first special symbol variation is the jackpot variation in which a specific jackpot is won. I will explain the back challenge production, which is a specific production to be performed.

In the 17th embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot winning. When the change is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol change that is being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out, and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol change that is forcibly stopped and displayed It is configured to be discarded. In other words, if one special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and while the jackpot fluctuates, the other special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous jackpot is won. If the special symbol change shown is stopped and displayed first, the information that won the advantageous jackpot will be discarded.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, in a part of the case where the first special symbol variation (long variation) executed during the challenge production is a jackpot variation that is advantageous to the player, the player is asked. On the other hand, it is configured to execute a back challenge effect that suppresses the execution of the second special symbol lottery. By executing this back challenge effect, the second special symbol lottery will be actively held during the period until the first special symbol fluctuation during the jackpot fluctuation that is winning the jackpot in favor of the player is stopped and displayed. By executing and winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving jackpot), it is possible to prevent the jackpot winning of the first special symbol variation from being abandoned.

FIG. 362 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the back challenge effect is started. As shown in FIG. 362 (a), in the vicinity of the center of the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 851 is placed on the same icon 853 as the effect mode shown in FIG. 360 (b) is executed. Then, the characters "in back challenge mode" indicating that the back challenge is being produced are displayed above, and the characters "100 seconds escape" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, 100 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that satisfies the execution condition of the back challenge effect, so that the display area HR20 has the variation of the first special symbol being executed. The remaining period "100 seconds" is displayed as a countdown. Further, the display area HR21 is formed in the upper left, and an image imitating the icon 853 is displayed in a number corresponding to the number of reserved second special symbols (the number of reserved special figures 2).

Then, during the back challenge production, the effect that the icon 853 attacks the character 851 is executed every time the result of the second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. If the result of the second special symbol lottery is wrong, the character 851 escapes (jumps over) from the icon 853, the back challenge effect continues, and the result of the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player. In the case of a time-saving jackpot, the effect that the character 851 is crushed by the icon 853 is executed, the back challenge effect is ended, and the effect indicating that the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed is executed.

In this way, the icon 853 is consumed every time the result of the second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and the image imitating the icon 853 is additionally displayed in the display area HR21 every time the special figure 2 hold is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to succeed in the back challenge production (it is easier to set the remaining period to 0 seconds) if the special figure 2 hold is not acquired.

Therefore, by executing the back challenge effect, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game for the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the jackpot winning, which is advantageous to the player, to be discarded.

The display mode of the image displayed in the display area HR21 may be configured to be variable based on the winning information included in each special figure 2 hold, and includes, for example, the winning information corresponding to the time saving jackpot. As the image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold, an image different from the image imitating the normal icon 853 (for example, an image in which the size of the rock is doubled) is configured to be easily used, and is being executed. The image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold, which includes the winning information indicating the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the first special symbol change, is configured so that an image imitating a treasure box is easily displayed. You may.

Then, when the back challenge effect is successful (when the remaining period reaches 0 seconds), as shown in FIG. 362 (b), the effect is executed in the main display area Dm in a manner indicating that the back challenge effect is successful. At the same time, "777" indicating that the jackpot is advantageous to the player is displayed in the special 1 variable display area Ds3a.

As described above, in the 17th embodiment, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, many second special symbols are generated during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol in which long-term fluctuation is likely to be executed. An effect that encourages the execution of the lottery (challenge effect) and an effect that suppresses the execution of the second special symbol lottery (back challenge effect) are executed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol change during execution. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game method that does not cause a loss to the player.

Next, the flow of the game in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 363. FIG. 363 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the 17th embodiment. First, in the initial state (RAM cleared state) of the pachinko machine 10, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set, and left-handed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13. A game is performed in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by inserting the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the game. It is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery by performing the right-handed game even in this normal state, but as described above, the left-handed game is a game in the normal state. Since it is designed to be a game method that is advantageous to the player, a left-handed game in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is actually drawn is performed.

In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit lottery (big hit probability 1/200) is executed. Here, when the jackpot A is won (selection ratio 10%), the presence or absence of special figure 1 hold (hold memory of the first special symbol) and the next execution of the first special symbol lottery (after the jackpot game is completed) The result of the first special symbol lottery to be executed first is determined, the special figure 1 is held, and the first special symbol lottery to be executed next (the first special to be executed first after the jackpot game is completed) If the result of the symbol lottery) is out of order, the mode shifts to the rush mode indicating that the RUSH game is executed.

In this case, the display screen shown in FIG. 356 (a) is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game, and in the probability change A state (during the first special symbol change in a short time (0.5 seconds)), FIG. 357 ( The display screen shown in a) is displayed. Then, when the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) that is satisfied when the first special symbol change is executed once is satisfied, the probability change A state is changed to the latent probability state, which is shown in FIG. 357 (b). The display screen is displayed and the RUSH game is executed. This latent state is a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed (easier to be executed than the normal state) by the right-handed game, and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is a game state in which the game ball is most likely to reach the variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game to be executed. Therefore, during the latent state, the game of acquiring the prize ball by the small hit game is executed until the game state is changed based on the big hit winning.

In the second special symbol lottery in the latent state, a big hit lottery (1/50) and a lottery to win a small hit in a part (1 / 1.5) when the big hit lottery is missed are executed. That is, until the big hit (1/50) is won, the game aiming at the small hit (1 / 1.5) is executed. In addition, when a small hit is won, the game state is configured so as not to shift. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform the small hit game without fear of ending the latent state.

When a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot (big hits D and E) that can easily shift to the latent state is selected at a rate of 80%. As in the case of winning the jackpot A in the 1 special symbol lottery, the presence or absence of the special symbol 1 hold (holding memory of the 1st special symbol) and the 1st special symbol lottery to be executed next (first executed after the jackpot game is completed) The result of the first special symbol lottery) is determined, and the special symbol 1 is held, and the first special symbol lottery to be executed next (the first special symbol lottery to be executed first after the jackpot game is over) If the result is off, the mode shifts to the rush mode indicating that the RUSH game is executed.

On the other hand, if the jackpot A is won in the normal state and there is no special figure 1 hold, or if the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special symbol lottery, or if the jackpot D or E is won in the latent state. However, if there is no special figure 1 hold, or if the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special symbol lottery, the mode shifts to the challenge mode in which the challenge effect is executed.

This challenge mode is an effect mode that shifts when the game state is a time-saving state or a probabilistic state is set and the transition to the latent probable state is not confirmed. That is, when the jackpots C and H, in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, are won, and when the jackpot game ends, the jackpot B in which the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied (probability variation B state) is set. , F, G, and the jackpot A, D, E, in which the probability variation state (probability variation A state) in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied is set as the probability variation state after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to shift in a state where it is not confirmed that the first time saving end condition is satisfied (when there is no special figure 1 hold, when the first special symbol lottery executed first after the end of the big hit game is a big hit). This is the production mode.

Here, when shifting to the challenge mode, the display screen shown in FIG. 356 (b) is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. Then, at the same time as the first special symbol variation is started, the display screen of FIG. 360 (a) is displayed. In addition, when the probability change A state is set and the mode is shifted to the challenge mode because the special figure 1 hold has not been acquired, even if the second special symbol lottery is executed, FIG. 356. The display screen shown in FIG. 361 (b) is continuously displayed, and the display screen shown in FIG. 361 (b) is displayed based on the fact that the first special symbol fluctuation is executed as an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the RUSH mode is entered. The production that shifts to is executed.

Further, when the probability variation B state is set, the second time saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation reaches 100 is set. Based on the satisfaction of the second time saving end condition, the display screen shown in FIG. 361 (b) is displayed, and the effect of shifting to the RUSH mode is executed.

Then, when the time saving state is set, the above-mentioned second time saving end condition is set, and based on the fact that the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the display screen shown in FIG. 361 (a) is displayed. It is displayed and the effect of shifting to the normal state is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, even when different game states are set, the same effect mode is set, so that it is difficult for the player to understand the game state. Can be done. Further, even when the same game state (probability change A state) is set, different production modes are set depending on whether or not the game condition is satisfied during the game state. It is possible to make the game state more difficult for the player to understand.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the same game state (probability change A state) is set, it is set according to whether or not the game condition (whether or not the special figure 1 is held) is satisfied during the game state. The ease of transition from the played game state (probability change A state) to the next game state is different. Therefore, not only the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, but also the transition state of the gaming state can be changed according to other game conditions (whether or not the special figure 1 is held), so that a novel game property can be achieved. It can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state that can shift from the probability change A state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, even if the same gaming state (probability change A state) is set, the gaming state is the same. By making the ease of transition from the set game state (probability change A state) to the next game state different depending on whether or not the game condition (whether or not the special figure 1 is held) is satisfied during the game state. The degree of advantage of the player is made different. Therefore, the player pays close attention to whether or not the state is likely to shift from the probability change A state to the latent state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the production mode in the state in which the probabilistic A state is set is different depending on the ease of transition from the probabilistic A state to the latent state, and the transition to the latent state is performed. If it is easy, the effect mode (RUSH mode) indicating that the latent probability state is set from the time when the probability change A state is set (including during the probability change A jackpot) is displayed, and it is difficult to shift to the latent probability state. In this case, the challenge mode is displayed from the time when the probability change A state is set (including during the probability change A jackpot). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the state is likely to shift from the probability change A state to the latent state.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, a big hit is won in a state where a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol is set, and again, a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol is set. Has a limit function for forcibly setting a low probability state of a special symbol when the number of times (probability variation continuous number) is set reaches the limit number of times (5 times). Here, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is completed, the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player is not set, and the latent probability state is shifted to the latent probability state via the probability change state. Therefore, when the limit number of times is reached, even if the low probability state of the special symbol is forcibly set, the time saving state is set without setting the normal state.

As described above, even in the probability change state and the time saving state, the game of executing the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game is executed as in the latent state. Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed with the same fluctuation time as the latent state. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 355, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, even if the small hit game is executed, it is more difficult to obtain the prize ball than in the latent state. Is also in a disadvantageous game state.

<Electrical configuration in the 17th embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 364 (a). FIG. 364 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the 17th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 364 (a), the ROM 202 in the 17th embodiment replaces the first random number table 202a with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 339 (a)). The point that the first hit random number 17 table 202na is provided, the point that the first hit type selection table 202nb is provided instead of the first hit type selection table 202b, the second per random number table 202c is replaced with the second. The point that the hit random number 17 table 202 nc is provided, the point that the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202nd is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the time saving 17 table 202ne, the fluctuation pattern scenario 17 table 202nf, and the hit operation 17 table 202ng are provided. It differs in that it is added.

First, the details of the first random number 17 table 202na in the 17th embodiment will be described. Here, the first random number 17 table 202na in the 17th embodiment is a data table (special symbol 1 random number) referred to in the lottery of the first special symbol, similarly to the first random number table 202a in the 16th embodiment. It is composed of two types of data tables: a 17 table 202na1) and a data table (special symbol 2 random number 17 table 202na2) referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, the special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1 and the special symbol 2 random number 17 table 202na2 differ only in whether or not the range of the random number value determined to be a small hit is defined. More specifically, in the special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1 and the special symbol 2 random number 17 table 202na2, the same value is defined as the random number value determined to be a big hit (counter value of the first random number counter C1). Therefore, only in the special symbol 2 random number 17 table 202na2, the random number value determined to be a small hit is associated and defined (the small hit is not won in the lottery of the first special symbol).

FIG. 364 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1. As shown in FIG. 364 (b), the special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1 in the 17th embodiment is determined to be a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol when the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When five random number values (counter values) of "0 to 4" are defined in association with each other as random number values (counter value of random number counter C1 per first) and a high probability state of a special symbol is set. As the random number value (counter value of the random number counter C1 per first) determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, 20 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 19" are defined in association with each other. There is. Of the 1000 random random values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the lottery of the first special symbol is in the low probability state of the special symbol. Since there are 5 pieces and 20 pieces in the high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/200 (5/1000), and the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/50 (20/1000). As described above, in the 17th embodiment, the small hit is not won by the 1st special symbol lottery.

FIG. 364 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number 17 table 202na2. As shown in FIG. 364 (c), the special symbol 2 random number 17 table 202na2 in the 17th embodiment has the same contents as the above-mentioned special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1 and is determined to be a big hit (counter value). Is specified, and as a random number value (counter value of the random number counter C1 per first) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, 653 random number values (counter value) of "20 to 672" are specified. ) Is specified in association with each other. Therefore, the probability of a small hit is about 1 / 1.5 (653/1000). That is, in the 17th embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability by executing the second special symbol lottery. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit game is executed in which the variable winning device 2650 (see FIG. 354) is opened.

In the 17th embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 363, when three game states of a time saving state, a probability variation state, and a latent probability state are set, a right-handed hit to execute the second special symbol lottery. The game is configured to be an advantageous game method for the player. Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 355, in the state where the time saving state and the probability variation state are set, the ball is configured to be difficult to reach the variable winning device 2650 even if the small hit game is executed. ing.

With this configuration, even if the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 17 table 202na2 are specified so that the small hit is won with high probability, the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set. In this case, it is possible to provide a game state (latent state) in which a prize ball is easily obtained during a small hit game and a game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball during a small hit game. , It is possible to suppress the excessive provision of prize balls to the player. In addition, the player is allowed to execute the first special symbol lottery to win the big hit, the second special symbol lottery to execute the big hit, and the second special symbol lottery to aim for the big hit. However, since it is possible to execute a game in which a prize ball is acquired by a small hit game and a plurality of games, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 364 (d), the details of the second random number 17 table 202 nc in the 17th embodiment will be described. The second random number 17 table 202nc is the same as the second random number table 202c in the 16th embodiment, for each state of the normal symbol (low probability state (normal state), high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol). In addition, it is a data table in which a random number value (counter value of the second random number counter C4) determined to be a hit of a normal symbol is defined. FIG. 364 (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number 17 table 202 nc in the 17th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 364 (d), in the second hit random number 17 table 202nc in the 17th embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be the hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. , The range of "0 to 235" is defined in association with each other. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is 236. Since it is an individual, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the low probability state of a normal symbol is 236/240. Therefore, even in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is extremely high. Therefore, by performing the right-handed game in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the game ball can be easily entered into the second entrance 640. You can make it a ball. As a result, even in the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game mainly for the second special symbol lottery can be performed. ..

In the 17th embodiment, as described above, since the normal symbol lottery is configured to win with a high probability even in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, Even when the right-handed game is executed during the low probability state of the normal symbol), the game ball can be easily entered into the second entrance 640. However, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time is set for a long time (10 minutes) as in the fourth embodiment described above. In addition, since the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second entrance 640 is configured to be one, the right-handed game is irregularly executed in the normal state. Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, 239 random value values of "0 to 238" are defined in association with each other as random value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. Of the 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the random number value (counter value) determined to hit the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is 239. Since it is an individual, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the high probability state of a normal symbol is 239/240.

With this configuration, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, most of the results of the normal symbol lottery will be won, so every time the normal symbol lottery is executed, the game per normal symbol (electric accessory 640a is released). It is possible to execute a game to be operated). Therefore, in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to further suppress the game ball launched in the right-handed game from reaching the variable winning device 2650. it can.

As described above with reference to FIG. 355, in the 17th embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball is played even when the small hit game is executed. The variable winning device 2650 is configured so as not to win a prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by slightly lowering the winning probability in the high probability state of a normal symbol (for example, 1 / 1.2). By increasing the possibility that the normal symbol lottery will be continuously missed, the game ball can reach the variable winning device 2650 even when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel playability that it is possible to create a situation in which the player is more advantageous (easily to win the prize ball during the small hit game) than to keep winning the lottery. it can.

Next, the details of the first type selection 17 table 202nb in the 17th embodiment will be described. The first hit type selection table 202nb is a data table referred to for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won, similar to the first hit type selection table 202b in the 16th embodiment described above.

FIG. 365 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection 17 table 202nb. As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in the 17th embodiment, the jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol are "big hit A17", "big hit B17", and "big hit B17". There are three types of jackpots, "big hit C17". More specifically, "big hit A17" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 19". "Big hit B17" is associated with the range of "", and "Big hit C17" is associated with the range of "20 to 99" in the value of the first hit type counter C2. Both "Big hit A17" to "Big hit C17" have 6 rounds, but "Big hit A17" is in a probable state favorable to the player after the big hit game is completed, and the time saving end condition is satisfied. An easy probability change A state is given, and "big hit B17" is a probability change state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game, and a probability change B state that the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied is given, and "big hit C17" is , After the jackpot game is completed, a time saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability change state is given. The detailed contents of the time saving end condition specified for each jackpot type will be described later using the time saving granting 17 table 202ne (see FIG. 368).

In the 17th embodiment, since the latent probability state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the “big hit A17” in which the probability variation state is set and the time saving end condition is easily satisfied is the game after the jackpot ends. In terms of state, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit B17" and "big hit C17".

Further, the "big hit B17" is more difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition than the "big hit A17", but when the time saving ending condition is satisfied, the latent state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. , It is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "big hit C17" that cannot shift to the latent state.

In the 17th embodiment, since the latent probability state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player, "big hit A17", which easily satisfies the time saving end condition, is set as the most advantageous jackpot type. However, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 which has a playability that is more advantageous to the player when the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (it is difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition), the "big hit A17" is the most disadvantageous to the player. It will be a big hit type. In addition, from the viewpoint of whether or not it is easy to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, "big hit A17" and "big hit B17" have the same degree of advantage, and only "big hit C17" is a disadvantageous big hit type. Become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 365 (a), as the jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit D17", "big hit E17", and "big hit F17" are used. There are five types of jackpots, "big hit G17" and "big hit H17". More specifically, "big hit D17" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 79". "Big hit E17" is specified in association with the range of "", and "Big hit F17" is specified in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80, 81", and the first hit "Big hit G17" is defined in association with the range where the value of the type counter C2 is "82 to 89", and "Big hit H17" is defined with respect to the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99". Is specified in association with each other. "Big hit D17" and "Big hit F17" are defined as 16 rounds (R) as the number of rounds of the big hit game, and "Big hit E17", "Big hit G17" and "Big hit H17" are the number of rounds of the big hit game. 4 rounds (R) are specified as. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the jackpot that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. Among the types, "big hit D17" and "big hit F17" are jackpot types that are more advantageous than other jackpot types.

Further, "big hit D17" and "big hit E17" are given a probabilistic change state which is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game, and a probabilistic change A state in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied is given, and the "big hit F17" is given. , "Big hit G17" is given a probability change state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game, and a probability change B state that the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied is given, and "Big hit H17" is a probability change state after the end of the big hit game. A time saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the state is given. The detailed contents of the time saving end condition specified for each jackpot type will be described later using the time saving granting 17 table 202ne (see FIG. 368).

In the 17th embodiment, since the latent probability state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the probability variation state is set among the jackpot types that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In addition, "big hit D17" and "big hit E17", in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied, are the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the 17th embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot games with different numbers of rounds can be executed, and when the jackpot games of 16 rounds are executed, the probability changes. It is configured so that the state is set. By making it possible for the player to predict the game state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in this way, the prize is given to the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to increase the number of balls and set the game state which is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, an upper limit (limit number of times) is set for the number of times the probability change state is continuously set, and the player is probablely changed after the jackpot game is completed by executing the jackpot game of 16 rounds. Since it is possible to determine that the state is set, it is possible to predict the number of times the probabilistic state is continuously set. Further, when a 16-round jackpot game is executed, a probability variation A state in which the time reduction end condition is easily set after the jackpot game is completed and a probability variation B state in which the time reduction end condition is difficult to be set can be set. It is configured so that the ratio at which the probability variation A state is set and the ratio at which the probability variation B state is set are 5: 2. Therefore, when the 16-round jackpot game is executed, many prize balls can be obtained during the jackpot game, and the probability variation A state can be easily set. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the 16-round jackpot game The player can be made to play the game while expecting that the game will be executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed, any of the probability variation A state, the probability variation B state, and the time saving state can be set after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the period (advantageous period) in which the right-handed game is continuously executed and the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed, whether or not the probability change state is set. Can be made difficult for the player to discriminate. Further, in the 17th embodiment, since the upper limit (limit number of times) is set for the number of times the probability change state is continuously set, the probability change state is changed by executing the jackpot game of 4 rounds during the advantageous period. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of times that are continuously set, it is possible to play the game aiming at a big hit while always expecting that the probability change state is set during the advantageous period.

Next, the details of the hit operation 17 table 202 ng will be described. The hit operation 17 table 202 ng defines the operation content of the hit game executed in the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), similarly to the jackpot operation table 202ka in the 15th embodiment described above. There is a data table that defines the operation of each big winning opening (variable winning device 2650, V winning device 1650) for each winning type, the opening period, the interval period set after each round, the ending period, etc. is there. During the execution of the hit game, the type of the big winning opening to be opened, the interval period after the end of the round, and the like are set according to the hit operation 17 table 202 ng and the big hit type. Of the contents specified in the hit operation 17 table 202 ng, each content not shown in FIG. 365 (b) is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot operation table 202ka (see FIG. 326 (a)). Detailed illustration and description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 365 (b), the V winning device 1650 is opened for the big hit types "big hit A17" and "big hit B17" that are set when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. The rounds are 1 to 6 rounds, and the opening period is 0.5 seconds. Further, in the first round game, an opening scenario for operating the switching member 1650h so that the game ball winning the V winning device 1650 can pass through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) in the V winning device 1650. Is stipulated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 365 (a), for the "big hit C17", the opening period is 0.5 for the contents specified for the above-mentioned "big hit A17" and "big hit B17". The hit operation is specified only by changing from seconds to 3.5 seconds. Then, when the jackpot game is executed based on the hit operation content defined in association with the "big hit C17", the game ball that has won the V winning device 1650 during the first round game is V winning. It is configured so that it cannot pass through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) in the device 1650.

That is, the switching member 1650h is configured to operate based on the opening scenario when the jackpot game is executed (the opening period is set), and 3 seconds after the opening period is set. An open scenario is defined so that the game ball that has won the V winning device 1650 can pass through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) before the lapse of time. Therefore, when the hit operation corresponding to the "big hit C17" in which 3.5 seconds is specified as the opening period is executed, the game ball is set to a specific area (probability change switch) during the big hit game (during the V round). It becomes impossible (difficult) to pass through 1650e3), and a privilege (high probability state of a special symbol) given when the game ball is passed through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) may be set. There is no.

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to give a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot game based on passing the game ball to a specific area during the jackpot game, the jackpot By simply changing the length of the opening period of the jackpot game according to the type, it is possible to easily set a jackpot game in which the game ball easily passes through a specific area during the jackpot game and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass through.

In the 17th embodiment, the variable means (switching member 1650h) that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball easily reaches the specific region (probability change switch 1650e3) and the second state in which it is difficult to reach the specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) is hit. The length of the opening period of the jackpot game is configured to control the operation according to a predetermined rule (based on the specified opening scenario) when the game is executed (the opening period is set). Is configured to change the rate of arrival of the game ball in a specific area (easiness of passing) during the jackpot game, but the variable means is, for example, operation control. Instead of starting the jackpot game, the operation control of the variable means may be started at the start timing of the round game or the end timing of the round game, and it is determined that the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. The operation control may be started at the same time.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, the first round of the jackpot game is configured to be a V-round game, but the open scenario is not limited to this, and the specific round of the jackpot game is a V-round. It may be specified, or it may be configured so that the V-round game is executed a plurality of times during one big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 365 (b), the V winning device 1650 is opened for the "big hit D17" and the "big hit F17", which are the big hit types set when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The rounds are 1 to 16 rounds, and the opening period is 0.5 seconds. Further, in the first round game, an opening scenario for operating the switching member 1650h so that the game ball winning the V winning device 1650 can pass through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) in the V winning device 1650. Is stipulated.

Next, for the jackpot type "big hit E17" and "big hit G17" that are set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, one or two rounds are used as the open round of the V winning device 1650. The open round of the variable winning device 2650 is defined as 3 or 4 rounds, and the opening period is defined as 0.5 seconds. The interval period between the second and third rounds and the interval period between the third and fourth rounds are defined as 3 seconds.

Therefore, when the jackpot game corresponding to the "big hit E17" and the "big hit G17" is executed, first, the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened is executed for two rounds, and then the variable winning device 2650 is executed. The round game in which is released is executed for two rounds. Here, in the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened, an opening period of up to 30 seconds is defined as in the above-mentioned each hit operation, and in the round game in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened, a small hit The maximum open period of 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the round game of the game, is specified.

That is, when the jackpot game corresponding to the "big hit E17" and the "big hit G17" is executed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation (3) is apparently after the two rounds of the jackpot game are executed. The same winning game as the small hit game is executed twice through the interval period of the same time as (seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the jackpot game is started and at what timing the jackpot game is finished, and after the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened is executed, 3 Since the variable winning device 2650 is opened in the same winning motion (0.5 seconds open) as the small hit game after an interval period of seconds, it can be made to think that the RUSH game was executed after the big hit game was completed. ..

Although detailed description will be described later, in the 17th embodiment, when the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit E17" and "big hit G17" is executed, the effect executed during the jackpot game (big hit effect). ) Is configured to be from the start timing of the jackpot game to the end timing of the second round. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the jackpot game is finished. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the period when the jackpot game is being executed, the game ball is moved to the variable winning device 2650 as in the latent probability state. It will be easy to reach. Therefore, when the variable winning device 2650 is opened in the same operation pattern as the small hit game during the big hit game, the game ball can be made to win the variable winning device 2650, so that the player can win the big hit game. It is possible to make it easy to think that the latent state has been set after the end.

In addition, for the jackpot type "big hit H17" that is set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, 3 or 4 rounds are used as the opening round of the V winning device 1650, and the opening round of the variable winning device 2650 is performed. 1 and 2 rounds are specified, and 0.5 seconds is specified as the opening period. The interval period between the first and second rounds and the interval period between the second and third rounds are defined as 3 seconds.

Therefore, when the jackpot game corresponding to the "big hit H17" is executed, first, the round game in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened is executed for two rounds, and then the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened. Is executed for 2 rounds. Here, in the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened, an opening period of up to 30 seconds is defined as in the above-mentioned each hit operation, and in the round game in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened, a small hit The maximum open period of 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the round game of the game, is specified.

That is, when the jackpot game corresponding to the "big hit H17" is executed, the appearance is the same as the small hit game through the interval period of the same time as the fluctuation time (3 seconds) of the second special symbol fluctuation. After the hit game is executed twice, the big hit game of two rounds is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the jackpot game is started and at what timing the jackpot game is finished.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the 17th embodiment, when the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit H17" is executed, the production period of the effect (big hit effect) executed during the jackpot game is set. It is configured to be from the start timing of the third round of the jackpot game to the end timing of the jackpot game. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the jackpot game is finished. Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the period when the jackpot game is being executed, the game ball is moved to the variable winning device 2650 as in the latent probability state. It will be easy to reach. Therefore, when the variable winning device 2650 is opened in the same operation pattern as the small hit game during the big hit game, the game ball can be made to win the variable winning device 2650, so that the player can win the big hit game. It is possible to make it easy to think that the latent state has been set after the end.

As explained above, in the case of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, if the big hit type in which the big hit game of 4 rounds is executed is decided, the big hit game of 2 rounds is actually executed. It is configured in. Then, in the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) game in which the game ball easily passes through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) during the jackpot game, a round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game is executed. In a jackpot (time saving jackpot) game in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) during the jackpot game, a round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened in the third and fourth rounds of the jackpot game is executed. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to set a common opening scenario as the opening scenario of the switching member 1650h for all the jackpot games.

Finally, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a maximum opening period of 0.5 seconds is specified as the opening period of the variable winning device 2650.

In the present embodiment, among the round games of the big hit game, the content of the round game in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened is configured to be the same as that of the small hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. In one round game, it may be configured to execute the opening operation for a plurality of small hit games (two times). In this case, the opening period of 0.5 seconds may be set during one round game, and then the opening period of 0.5 seconds may be set again after the closing period of 3 seconds. As a result, the variable winning device 2650 is opened a plurality of times in the same manner as when the small hit game is executed after the second special symbol change (3 seconds) within the period in which one round game of the big hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to determine whether or not the current jackpot game is in progress.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, when the variable winning device 2650 is continuously opened during the jackpot game, the second special symbol variation is executed once so as to have an interval of 3 seconds. The interval period is set so that the variable winning device 2650 is opened at the same interval as when the small hit game is executed later, but the interval period is not limited to this, for example, an interval of 6 seconds is provided. The hit operation for which the interval period is set may be specified.

That is, the interval period may be defined so as to have the same interval as when two small hit games are executed with the second special symbol variation that has been won out of the game. With this configuration, after the end of the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened, or before the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened, the player loses the prize in the second special symbol lottery (probability of losing). When about 1/3), it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is currently in progress (an interval period of 6 seconds is set). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the fact that the result of the second special symbol lottery is out of order in the latent state in which the prize ball can be obtained by the small hit game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening period for opening the variable winning device 2650 during the big hit game and the opening period for opening the variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game are configured to be the same period (0.5 seconds). However, the opening period is not limited to this, and the opening period may be different, and the opening period for opening the variable winning device 2650 during the jackpot game may be lengthened (for example, 0.6 seconds). It may be shortened (for example, 0.3 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the length of the opening period of the variable winning device 2650.

By providing a slight difference between the case where the variable winning device 2650 is opened as a part of the big hit game and the case where the variable winning device 2650 is opened as a small hit game, the player who notices the difference Only on the other hand, as a technique for making it possible to determine whether the opening operation of the variable winning device 2650 this time is based on the big hit game or the small hit game, the length of the opening period of the variable winning device 2650 described above is made different. Other than the technology, for example, when the variable winning device 2650 is opened, the player may perform an effect in a display mode (notification mode) that is difficult for the player to notice, or may provide identification information for indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. It may be configured to be displayed in a manner that is difficult for a person to notice.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367, details of various tables constituting the variation pattern 17 table 202nd will be described. In the 17th embodiment, the variation pattern is selected by referring to different data tables according to the set gaming state, and the variation pattern 17 table 202nd is specifically in the normal state. 17 table 202nd1 for normal use, which is referred to when is set, and time saving state, and 17 table 202nd2 for time saving / probability change B, which is referred to when probability change B state is set, and probability change A state are set. 17 table 202nd3 for probability change A referred when there is, 17 table 202nd4 for probability change referred when the latency state is set, the number of times the probability change state is continuously set reaches the limit number (reached) It is composed of a limit 17 table 202nd5 that is referred to when the time saving state is forcibly set after reaching and the jackpot game is completed.

The specified contents of the normal 17 table 202nd1 referred to when the normal state is set are the normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 (see FIG. 131) of the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIG. 131) in the fourth embodiment described above. Since it is the same as 132), the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the 17-table 202nd2 for the time saving / probability variation B will be described. FIG. 366 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the 17 table 202nd2 for the time saving / probability variation B. As shown in FIG. 366 (a), in the 17-table 202nd2 for time saving / probability variation B, the fluctuation time determined for the first special symbol is larger than the fluctuation time determined for the second special symbol. Each fluctuation pattern is defined so that it tends to be long. That is, in the 17th embodiment in which the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation can be executed at the same time (in parallel), when the time saving state and the probability variation B state are set, it is substantially , The second special symbol lottery is mainly executed.

Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "out", the variation time is reduced by 300 seconds with respect to the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. The length variation is specified in association with each other. In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", a different variation pattern can be selected according to the set jackpot type, and the "big hit" is configured. For "A17", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 98" and the variation for shortening the hit time for 100 seconds, and for the range of "99 to 198". Therefore, the fluctuation time is defined in association with the length variation for shortening the hit time of 300 seconds. On the other hand, for "big hit B17 and big hit C17", the fluctuation time is defined in association with the per-time reduction length variation of 300 seconds for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state, a very long fluctuation time of 300 seconds is set with high probability. As described above, in the 17th embodiment, by hitting right during the jackpot game, one or more game balls enter the right first entrance 64z, and the first special symbol is provided. Since it is configured so that the reserved balls of the above are accumulated, it becomes easy to execute the fluctuation display of the first special symbol for 300 seconds at the same time as the transition to the time saving state. Then, in the time saving state and the probability variation B state, the time saving end condition is set as the time saving end condition, which is satisfied when the number of fluctuations between the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times. In the state and the probability change B state, the game can be played by executing only the second special symbol change in substance.

In the 17th embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the same fluctuation pattern table in the case where the time saving state is set and the case where the probability variation B state is set, and the third The effect display executed by the symbol display device 81 is also configured to execute the same effect mode (challenge effect). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probabilistic state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 360 (a), when the challenge effect is executed, "300 seconds" is displayed as the remaining period of the challenge effect, and the effect that the remaining period decreases with the passage of time is executed. It is configured to be done. This "300 seconds" is a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (300 seconds) determined with high probability as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

In addition, when a big hit that is advantageous to the player, that is, a "big hit A17" in which the probability variation A state is set after the big hit game is won, "100 seconds", which is a shorter fluctuation time than other lottery results, is determined. It is configured to be done. When the fluctuation time of 100 seconds is determined, the above-mentioned back challenge effect is executed with reference to FIG. 362 (a).

As shown in FIG. 366 (a), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "missing (including small hit)", the variable type counter CS1 can be taken. For the entire range, the deviation time of 3 seconds is specified in association with the short variation. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds corresponds to the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. It is specified with.

That is, when the time saving state and the probability change B state are set, the second special symbol lottery can be performed up to 100 times during the period in which one first special symbol fluctuation (300 seconds) is executed. The fluctuation time is fixed at 3 seconds so that it can be executed. With this configuration, when the effect showing "300 seconds" is executed in correspondence with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol as the remaining period of the challenge effect, it matches the timing when the "300 seconds" elapses. It is possible to complete the 100th second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in reality, it is a gaming state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching 100 times, but the player is in the gaming state in which the time saving ending condition is satisfied with the passage of time. Because it can be made to think, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game.

Next, the details of the 17 table 202nd3 for probability variation A will be described with reference to FIG. 366 (b). FIG. 366 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the 17 table 202nd3 for probability variation A. The 17 table 202nd3 for probability variation A is a data table that is referred to when determining a variation pattern when the probability variation A state is set. As shown in FIG. 366 (b), in the 17 table 202nd3 for probability variation A, the fluctuation time determined for the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time determined for the second special symbol. Each variation pattern is defined for ease of use. That is, in the 17th embodiment in which the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation can be executed at the same time (in parallel), the first special symbol variation is set when the probability variation A state is set. Is configured to finish first.

Here, the probabilistic A state is set with a time saving end condition that is easier to be established than the probabilistic B state, and in addition to the time saving end condition (normal time saving end condition) set in the probabilistic B state, the first special symbol is set. A specific time saving end condition that is satisfied when the fluctuation is executed once (when stopped is displayed) is set.

Therefore, when the probability change A state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the reserved ball of the first special symbol acquired during the jackpot game (special figure 1 reserved ball), that is, the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game. Based on the special figure 1 reserved ball acquired by the game ball launched by the player entering the right first entrance 64z, the first special symbol change is immediately executed, and the stop display is displayed after 0.5 seconds. As a result, the specific time saving end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game as if the latent state was set after the jackpot game was completed.

In the 17th embodiment, when the probability change A state is set after the jackpot game is completed and the special figure 1 reserved ball is acquired, the jackpot is as shown in FIG. 357 (a). It is configured to execute an effect (RUSH effect) indicating that the latent state is set, instead of executing an effect (challenge effect) indicating that the probability change state is set after the game is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the probability change state is set only for 0.5 seconds, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being executed in an incomprehensible notification mode.

Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Short fluctuations for probability variation are specified in association with each other. In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", a different variation pattern can be selected according to the set jackpot type, and the "big hit" is configured. For "A17", a short variation for hit probability variation of 0.5 seconds is defined in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and for "big hit B17 and jackpot C17". Therefore, the variation time is defined in association with the per-probability variation length variation of 300 seconds for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

That is, if the result of the first special symbol lottery executed after the probability change A state is set is out of order, or if it is a jackpot (big hit A17) in which the probability change A state is set again, it is 0. It is configured to perform a short variation of .5 seconds. Then, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the state shifts to the latent state after 0.5 seconds have passed. Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is the jackpot A17, the jackpot game is continuously executed after the jackpot game is completed, and then the probability change A state is set again. In this case, it should be noted that the result of the first special symbol lottery executed after the probability variation A state is set is the jackpot A17, at a time before the probability variation A state is set, that is, 1 If it is determined before the end of the first probability change A jackpot, the jackpot production (renso jackpot production) will be executed so as to straddle the first probability change A jackpot and the second probability change A jackpot. It may be configured.

In this way, even when the consecutive villa jackpot effect is configured to be executed, the player is notified that the probability change state is set only for 0.5 seconds, and the effect is executed in an incomprehensible notification mode. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery executed after the probability variation A state is set is a jackpot other than the jackpot A17, that is, the probability variation B state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. If the jackpot is won, the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is determined. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the specific time saving end condition to be satisfied when the probability variation A state is set. In this case, it is configured so that the same effect mode (challenge effect) as when the time saving state or the probability variation B state is set is executed.

With this configuration, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot (big hit B17, C17) other than the jackpot A17, even though the probability variation A state is set. , It is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot game based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. In addition, since it is configured to execute the same effect mode (challenge effect) as when the time saving state or the probability change B state is set, it is difficult for the player to understand that the probability change A state is set. can do. As shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "missing (including small hit)", the variable type counter CS1 is used. An out-of-short variation of 3 seconds is specified in association with the entire range that can be taken. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds corresponds to the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. It is specified with.

Next, the details of the latent probability 17 table 202nd4 will be described with reference to FIG. 367 (a). FIG. 367 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability 17 table 202nd4. The latent probability 17 table 202nd4 is a data table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern when the latent probability state is set. As shown in FIG. 367 (a), in the latent probability 17 table 202nd4, the fluctuation time determined for the first special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time determined for the second special symbol. Each fluctuation pattern is defined as follows. That is, in the 17th embodiment in which the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change can be executed at the same time (in parallel), the second special symbol lottery is performed when the latent state is set. Is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery.

Here, the probabilistic A state is set with a time saving end condition that is easier to be established than the probabilistic B state, and in addition to the time saving end condition (normal time saving end condition) set in the probabilistic B state, the first special symbol is set. A specific time saving end condition that is satisfied when the fluctuation is executed once (when stopped is displayed) is set.

Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "out", the variation time is 300 seconds out of the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. The probability fluctuations are specified in association with each other. In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the fluctuation time is 300 seconds per hit latent probability variation with respect to the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Is specified in association with each other.

On the other hand, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is "missing (including small hits)", the fluctuation time is 3 seconds for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Out-of-short fluctuations are specified in association with each other. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", the short variation per 3 seconds is associated with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Is stipulated.

With this configuration, in the latent state, which is a game state in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball during the small hit game, which is executed based on the small hit winning in the second special symbol lottery, the second It is possible to provide a playability in which only a special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, the details of the limit 17 table 202nd5 will be described with reference to FIG. 367 (b). FIG. 367 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the limit 17 table 202nd5. The limit 17 table 202nd5 is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern when the time saving state is set based on the number of times the probability variation state is continuously set reaches the limit number (5 times). It is a data table. As shown in FIG. 367 (b), in the limit 17 table 202nd5, the same fluctuation pattern type as the above-mentioned time reduction / probability variation B 17 table 202nd2 is defined with a content in which a part of the selection ratio is different. There is.

Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "out", the variation time is for deviation of 300 seconds with respect to the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Long fluctuations are specified in association with each other. In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", a different variation pattern can be selected according to the set jackpot type, and the "big hit" is configured. For "A17", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 149" and the fluctuation time is 100 seconds, and the fluctuation time is defined in association with the range of "150 to 198". , The fluctuation time is specified in association with the per-use length fluctuation of 300 seconds. On the other hand, for "big hit B17 and big hit C17", a hit variation with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is defined in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

On the other hand, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is "missing (including small hits)", the fluctuation time is 3 seconds for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Out-of-short fluctuations are specified in association with each other. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", the short variation per 3 seconds is associated with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Is stipulated.

The situation in which the limit 17 table 202nd5 is referred to is a case where a jackpot for which a probability variation state is set (probability variation A jackpot, probability variation B jackpot) is won and the limit number of times is reached by the winning. As described above, in the 17th embodiment, when the probability variation A jackpot is won, the specific time reduction end condition is set in addition to the normal time reduction end condition, and the probability variation A state is set. Is configured so that a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation, so that the probability variation A state is immediately shifted to the latent probability state. Was there. Then, when the limit number of times is reached when the probability variation A jackpot is won, a long fluctuation time (100 seconds or 300 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation. .. Therefore, in the case of winning the probability change A jackpot, if the specific condition is not satisfied (when the limit number of times is not reached), the probability change state is immediately terminated (the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state). When a specific condition is satisfied (when the limit number of times is reached), it is possible to make it difficult to end the probability change state.

Further, when the jackpot A17 is won against the 17 table 202nd2 for the time saving / probability variation B, the variation pattern with the variation time of 100 seconds is easily selected. With this configuration, when the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern for 100 seconds is executed, the jackpot may be won in the state where the limit number of times is reached (the state in which the time saving state is set). It is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

In the 17th embodiment, the variation pattern is determined based on the configuration so that the same variation pattern is determined as much as possible depending on whether the time saving state is set or the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the currently set gaming state.

Next, the details of the time saving 17 table 202ne will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving 17 table 202ne in the 17th embodiment. The time reduction granting 17 table 202ne is a data table in which the time reduction end conditions set according to the jackpot type are predetermined, and the jackpot end processing for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 382). ), It is referred to when setting the time saving end condition.

As shown in FIG. 368, the time saving end condition (time saving number of times) is defined in the time saving grant 17 table 202ne according to the jackpot type and whether or not the limit is reached. Specifically, for the jackpot types of "big hit A17", "big hit D17", and "big hit E17", that is, for the jackpot type in which the probability variation A state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving end condition is set. , The total number of the specific time saving end condition that is satisfied when the first special symbol change is executed once (when stopped is displayed), the first special symbol change, and the second special symbol change has reached 100 times. The normal time saving end condition that is satisfied in the case is stipulated.

In the 17th embodiment, when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, the time saving state (high probability state of a normal symbol) is terminated when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied. ing. That is, the jackpot type in which the specific time reduction end condition is set in addition to the normal time reduction end condition is a jackpot type in which the time reduction end condition is more easily satisfied than the jackpot type in which only the normal time reduction end condition is set.

Further, for the jackpot types of "big hit B17", "big hit F17", and "big hit G17", that is, for the jackpot type in which the probability variation B state is set after the jackpot game ends, the first time saving end condition is set. The normal time saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of the special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation reaches 100 times is stipulated.

In the 17th embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. Therefore, when the probability variation B state is set, the normal time saving end condition is set. If it is established, it will shift to the latent state. However, in the probability variation A state having the specific time reduction end condition described above, the time reduction end condition is satisfied with one first special symbol change (0.5 seconds) at the shortest, whereas in the probability variation B state, the first special symbol is satisfied. Since the time saving end condition is satisfied when the total number of the symbol variation and the second special symbol variation reaches 100 times, it is more difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition than the probability variation A state (it is difficult to shift to the latent state). It will be in a probable state.

Further, for the jackpot types of "big hit C17" and "big hit H17", that is, for the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, only the above-mentioned normal time saving ending condition is used as the time saving ending condition. It is stipulated. If the time saving end condition is satisfied while the time saving state is set, the state shifts to the normal state.

As described above, in the 17th embodiment, the time saving end condition is the same in the probability variation B state and the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discriminated by the player in the process until the time saving end condition is satisfied, whether the probability variation B state is set or the time saving state is set. Then, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, if the probability change B state is set, the state shifts to the latent probability state, and if the time saving state is set, the state shifts to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, even if the jackpot type (“big hit A17”, “big hit D17”, “big hit E17”) for which the specific time saving end condition is set is won, the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery will be displayed. Correspondingly, the ease with which the specific time reduction end condition is satisfied is configured to be different by varying the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot type for which the specific time reduction end condition is set is won and the probability variation A state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is short in order to satisfy the specific time reduction end condition at an early stage. It makes it easier to determine the fluctuation time (0.5 seconds), and if the time reduction state is set based on reaching the limit number when winning the jackpot type for which the specific time reduction end condition is set, the specific time reduction is set. It is configured to make it easy to determine a long fluctuation time (300 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol so that the end condition is less likely to be satisfied (it is more difficult to be satisfied than the normal time reduction end condition).

With this configuration, when a predetermined number of times (limit number of times) is won in succession to a jackpot for which a specific gaming state (high probability state of a special symbol) is set, the jackpot game is completed and the game state is higher than the specific gaming state. In the pachinko machine 10 having a limit function for forcibly setting a disadvantageous gaming state (low probability state of a special symbol) that is disadvantageous to the player, the gaming state set before reaching the limit number of times and the limit number of times are reached. Even if the game state that is set after the game is switched between the game state in which the time saving end condition is more advantageous and the game state in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied is switched, it is specified for the jackpot type. It is possible to set the time saving end condition which is advantageous to the advantageous person without changing the time saving ending condition to be performed before and after reaching the limit.

In the 17th embodiment, in the case where a specific jackpot type is won and the game state is set before the limit number of times is reached, it is more advantageous for the player to satisfy the time saving end condition, and the limit number of times is reached. In the game state set after reaching, it is configured so that it is advantageous for the player if the time saving end condition is not satisfied, but the limit number of times is not limited to this, and it is the case where a specific jackpot type is won. In the game state set before reaching, it is advantageous for the player that the time saving end condition is not satisfied, and in the game state set after reaching the limit number of times, it is advantageous for the player that the time saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured as.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, the ease with which the time saving end condition is satisfied is changed so that the period advantageous to the player is lengthened, but the ease of establishment is not limited to this, and it is advantageous to the player. The ease with which the time saving end condition is satisfied may be changed so that the period is shortened.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, as the time saving end condition, the total number of the specific time saving end condition (1st special symbol change 1 time) and the normal time saving end condition (1st special symbol change and 2nd special symbol change) is used. (100 times) and can be set, but other time-saving end conditions may be set. For example, if a special symbol lottery results in a specific loss (including small hits), or The time saving end condition that is established when the number of times of winning (including small hits) is a predetermined number may be set so as to be configurable, or any of the various time saving ending conditions used in each of the above-described embodiments, or All may be configured to be configurable.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario 17 table 202nf will be described with reference to FIG. 369. FIG. 369 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario 17 table 202nf. In this variation pattern scenario 17 table 202nf, a variation pattern table to be referred to before the time reduction end condition is satisfied and a time reduction end condition are satisfied according to the winning jackpot type (set game state) and whether or not the limit is reached. The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the above is specified.

Specifically, if the jackpot type is "big hit A17", "big hit D17", or "big hit E17" before the limit is reached, refer to the 17 table 202nd3 for probability variation A before the time saving end condition is satisfied. The fluctuation pattern scenario is defined so that the latent probability 17 table 202nd4 is referred to after the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the jackpot types are "big hit B17", "big hit F17", and "big hit F17" before the limit is reached. In the case of "big hit G17", the variation pattern scenario is such that the 17 table 202nd2 for the time reduction / probability change B is referred to before the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and the latent probability 17 table 202nd4 is referred to after the time reduction end condition is satisfied. If it is specified and the jackpot type is "big hit C17" or "big hit H17" before the limit is reached, the time saving / probability variation B 17 table 202nd2 is referred to before the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving is shortened. After the end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern scenario is defined so that the normal 17 table 202nd1 is referred to.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "big hit A17", "big hit D17", or "big hit E17" after reaching the limit, the limit 17 table 202nd5 is referred to before the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving end is completed. When the fluctuation pattern scenario is defined so that the normal 17 table 202nd1 is referred to after the condition is satisfied, and the jackpot type is other than "big hit A17", "big hit D17", and "big hit E17" after reaching the limit. The variation pattern scenario is defined so that the 17 table 202nd2 for the time saving / probability variation B is referred to before the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the normal 17 table 202nd1 is referred to after the time saving ending condition is satisfied.

In this way, in order to show the result of the special symbol lottery by providing a data table in which a variable pattern table to be referred to for each jackpot type is provided in advance according to whether or not the limit is reached and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation of the above can be preferably determined according to the state.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 113 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 370. FIG. 370 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 370, the RAM 203 in the 17th embodiment has a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2 and a special symbol 2 with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 339 (b)). Hold ball number counter 203b2, limit counter 203na, limit arrival flag 203nb, probability variation flag 203nc, fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203nd, game state storage area 203ne, special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf, time saving end waiting flag 203ng, special figure 2 subtraction flag 203hn, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj, probability variation setting flag 203zzs, probability variation passing counter 203zzt1, winning number counter 203zzt2, operation counter 203zzt3, remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4, remaining ball timer 203zzt5, probability variation effective flag 203zzt6 , The probability variation effective timer 203zzt7, and the discharge number counter 203zzt8 are added. It is also different in that the small hit type storage area 203e, the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h, the V flag 203i, the V-passing flag 203j, the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q, and the jackpot flag 203ca are deleted.

The limit counter 203na is a counter for measuring the number of times a probability variation jackpot (probability variation A jackpot, probability variation B jackpot) is continuously won in a special symbol lottery, and when the probability variation jackpot is won, a value is added by 1. To. Specifically, when it is determined in the jackpot end processing 17 (see FIG. 382) that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set to ON, that is, a specific area provided in the V winning device 1650 during the jackpot game ( When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3) (S17101: Yes in FIG. 382), the value is incremented by 1 (see S17103 in FIG. 382). Then, it is referred to when it is determined whether the number of times the probability variation jackpot is continuously executed reaches the limit number of times (5 times) (S17105 in FIG. 382). Further, in the jackpot end processing 17 (see FIG. 382), when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is not set to ON (S17101: No in FIG. 382), the probability variation state is not continuously set. , The value of the limit counter 203na is reset to 0 (see S17102 in FIG. 382). Further, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203na has reached the limit number of times (5 times) (S17105: Yes in FIG. 382), the value of the limit counter 203na is reset to 0 (see S17102 in FIG. 382). ..

In the 17th embodiment, when the game ball passes through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) provided in the V winning device 1650 during the big hit game, the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed. Therefore, the process of updating the value of the limit counter 203na is configured to be executed by the jackpot end process 17 (see FIG. 382), but the process of updating the value of the limit counter 203na at any other timing. For example, in a winning process (see FIG. 383) for determining whether a game ball has passed to a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) provided in the V winning device 1650, the probability change switch 1650e3 is used. When it is determined that the game ball has passed (S1490: Yes in FIG. 383), the value of the limit counter 203na may be updated.

Further, for example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which it is determined whether or not the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed according to the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the value of the limit counter 203na. The process of updating may be configured to be executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, the timing of executing the special symbol variation indicating the jackpot winning, or the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol variation.

In this way, by executing the process of updating the value of the limit counter 203na at a stage before the game state is actually set, it is possible to determine the game state set after the jackpot game ends in advance. It becomes. Therefore, by transmitting a command for indicating the confirmed game state to the voice lamp control device 113, even if the game state set after the jackpot game ends is changed based on whether or not the limit is reached, it is actually It is possible to facilitate the execution of the effect mode corresponding to the game state set in (the effect mode of the variation display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation and the effect mode of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game). it can.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) is set, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit is won. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the process of updating the value of the limit counter 203na every time the jackpot game is executed. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol is executed 80 times after the jackpot game is completed. When a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that are set only for a predetermined period or a high-probability state of a special symbol is set, the high-probability state of the special symbol is changed to a low-probability state each time the predetermined condition is satisfied. If the pachinko machine 10 has a game property that the high probability state of the special symbol ends without going through the big hit winning, such as the pachinko machine 10 of the specification for executing the transition lottery for making the game, the big hit game is won. The process of determining the game state in the above is executed, and only when the high probability state of the special symbol is set at the time of winning the big hit game, the process of whether or not to update the value of the limit counter 203na is executed, and at the time of winning the big hit game. When the high probability state of the special symbol is not set, it may be configured to execute the process of resetting the value of the limit counter 203na to 0.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, a limit function is provided to prevent the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol from being set excessively continuously, but the limit function is not limited to this, for example. A limit function may be provided in order to prevent the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol from being set excessively continuously. In this case, a process of determining whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the time of winning the jackpot and a process of determining whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game is provided are provided to determine whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (was set) before and after the game, the value of the limit counter 203na may be updated.

The limit arrival flag 203nb is a flag for indicating that the number of times the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) is continuously set has reached the upper limit number (limit number of times), and is the upper limit number (limit number of times). Is set to on when is reached. The limit arrival flag 203nb is set when it is determined in the jackpot end processing (see S1693 in FIG. 382) that the number of consecutive executions of the probability variation jackpot has reached the limit number of times (5 times) (FIG. 382). S17105: Yes) is set to on, and the number of time reduction grants and the fluctuation pattern scenario are determined according to the setting status (on, off) of the limit arrival flag 203nb (see S17108 and S17112 in FIG. 382). Then, it is set to off at the next big hit winning (timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit winning) (see S1890 in FIG. 376).

The probability variation flag 203nc is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is set. When the probability variation flag 203nc is on, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the high probability state, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the low probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203nc is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set. The probability variation flag 203nc is set to off when the initial state is set to off and when the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped (see S1890 in FIG. 376 and S1986 in FIG. 380). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203nc is set to on when the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set to on during the jackpot game and the probability variation limit number of times has not been reached (see S17106 in FIG. 382). That is, in the 17th embodiment, once the probability variation flag 203nc is set to on, the probability variation flag 203nc is not set to off until the next jackpot is won, so that the probability variation jackpot is won. In this case, the high-probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot ends is that the next jackpot is always won unless the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (unless the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on). It is configured to continue until it is done.

In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) since the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol. May be configured to terminate the high-probability state of the special symbol when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, instead of the probability variation flag 203nc, a probability variation counter for counting the remaining number of lottery until the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-probability end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-probability end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high-probability state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special symbol high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the high probability state of the special symbol may be terminated when any of the special symbol high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The variation pattern scenario storage area 203nd is a storage area for storing data indicating the variation pattern scenario. At the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is read out according to the fluctuation pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203nd. At the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern scenario storage area 203nd stores data corresponding to the variation pattern scenario determined by referring to the variation pattern scenario table 202nf (see S17113 in FIG. 382).

The game state storage area 203ne is a storage area for storing the game state that changes according to the setting status of the probability change flag 203 nc and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203k. The information stored in the game state storage area 203ne is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state. Therefore, at the time of power restoration (when the power is turned on), the gaming state can be easily restored to the state immediately before the power is turned off. Further, the game state storage area 203ne has a storage area that can store not only the currently set game state but also the game state set in the past and the value of the limit counter 203na counted in the past. Have. With this configuration, when an illegal game is executed on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to retroactively analyze the damage caused by the illegal game. When using the pachinko machine 10 having a setting function capable of setting the jackpot probability value in a plurality of stages, a storage area that can store the currently set value and the set value set in the past is stored. It may be provided.

The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is a flag indicating whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is set when it is determined in the first special symbol change start processing 17 (see S7055 in FIG. 373) that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is larger than 0 (S7122 in FIG. 373: Yes), set to on (S7123 in FIG. 373), and in the time saving update process (see S1893 in FIG. 377) executed in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (see S7058 in FIG. 376), special figure 1 When it is determined that the subtraction flag 203nf is on (S17001: Yes in FIG. 377), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is subtracted (see S1702) and then set to off (see S1703).

If a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see S7058 in FIG. 376) (see S1890 in FIG. 376). Similarly, in the second special symbol lottery, when a big hit is won, it is set to off in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see S7063 in FIG. 380) (see S1986 in FIG. 380).

With this configuration, for example, when a big hit is won in one special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol lottery) as in the 16th embodiment described above, the other special symbol change during execution. If the pachinko machine 10 has a specification for suspending (temporarily stopping), when the fluctuation of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped resumes, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is set at the time when the fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Since it is set to off, it can be configured so that the number of remaining hours is not updated (subtracted).

The time saving end waiting flag 203ng is a flag indicating that the special figure change in which the ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied has been started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol variation is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. The specific time reduction end condition that is satisfied when is executed once, the normal time reduction end condition that is satisfied when the total number of times of the first special symbol change number and the second special symbol change number reaches 100 times, Is configured to be configurable. The time saving end waiting flag 203ng is set to on when a special symbol variation that can satisfy this time saving ending condition is started.

Then, when the time saving end waiting flag 203ng is set to on and the special symbol variation that can satisfy the time saving ending condition is stopped and displayed, it is set to off. Further, when a new special symbol change is started, it is determined whether the time saving end waiting flag 203ng is set to on, and when it is determined that the time saving end waiting flag is set to on, that is, the time saving end condition is satisfied. When the 101st special symbol change is executed at the timing when the special symbol change to be obtained (for example, the 100th special symbol change) is being executed, it is before the 101st special symbol change is executed (special). Before the symbol lottery is executed), the process of satisfying the end condition of the time saving state is executed. With this configuration, when the time saving end wait flag 203ng is set to on (that is, the waiting state), when any time saving end timing arrives, it is surely according to each timing. Can be made to execute the time saving end processing.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203hn is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k should be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Determines whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is greater than 0 in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing 17 (see S7060 in FIG. 378) (see S7640 in FIG. 378), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k. Is set to on (see S7641 in FIG. 378) when it is determined that is a value greater than 0 (that is, the time is being shortened) (S7640: Yes). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update processing of the special figure 2 deviation stop processing, and when it is on, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is subtracted, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203hn is set to off. If a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see S7058 in FIG. 376) (see S1890 in FIG. 376), and the second special symbol is set to off. If a big hit is won in the lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see S7063 in FIG. 380) (see S1986 in FIG. 380).

In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the big hit is won and the second special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped. As described above, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203hn is set to off, so when the fluctuation that is forcibly stopped due to the deviation is stopped. , The process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203k can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is a flag for indicating that the result of the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery based on the start winning prize to the first entry slot 64 or the right first entry slot 64z) is a jackpot. However, it is set to be turned on when the lottery result is a big hit. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is set to on when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7121 in FIG. 374) (see S1816 in FIG. 374), and corresponds to the jackpot. It is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol to be performed (S1890 in FIG. 376). When the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ni is on and the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed and the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is changed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed (see S1875 in FIG. 376). As a result, when a big hit is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit game is started in duplicate.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is set to on when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery based on the starting prize at the second entrance 640) (see S1926 in FIG. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S1986 in FIG. 380). When the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203nj is on and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed and the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the first special symbol is removed and the symbol is removed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed at (see S1974 in FIG. 380). As a result, when a big hit is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit is started twice.

The probability variation setting flag 203zzs is a flag indicating whether or not to set the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is set depends on whether or not the ball enters (passes) a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) provided in the V winning device 1650 during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not. Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (passed) the probability variation switch 1650e3 during the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as V winning), the probability variation setting flag 203zs is set to ON (see S1492 in FIG. 383). .. On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is referred to at the end of the jackpot game (see S17101 in FIG. 382), and when it is determined that the flag is set to ON, the value of the limit counter 203na is updated and then set to OFF. (See S17104 in FIG. 382). The probability variation setting flag 203zzs is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203 zs is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch has passed, the probability change setting flag 203 zs May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probabilistic change switch 1650e3 has passed before the power is turned off by whether or not the probabilistic change passage counter 203zzt1, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203zzs is rewritten on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation pass counter 203zzt1 is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 1650e3 (flowed down a specific area) in one round during the jackpot game (in this control example, one round of jackpot). It is possible to determine whether all the balls that have won the V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650 have been ejected from the total value of the value of the probability variation passing counter 203zzt1 and the value of the ejection number counter 203zzt8 described later. The probability variation passage counter 203zzt1 is updated by adding one by one when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 1650e3 (V wins). Further, after executing the determination process of whether or not the number of balls won in the V winning device 1650 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0". The probability variation pass counter 203zzt1 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203zzt2 is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the C winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650 in one round in the jackpot game, and the winning of the V winning opening 1650a is detected. Based on this, it is added and updated one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the V winning device 1650 (value of the winning number counter 203zt2) and the number discharged (total value of the discharging number counter 203zzt8 and the probability variation passing counter 203zzt1) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203zzt3 is for measuring (counting) the operation time of various devices (opening / closing door 1650f, switching member 1650h) of the V winning device 1650 that is variably controlled during the jackpot game. It is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 1650k is set to on (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 1650k is set to be on for 2 seconds based on the start of the jackpot game (start of the opening period) with reference to various operation scenarios defined in the hit operation 17 table 202 ng. In the operation counter 203zzt3, a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value indicating the operation time of the switching member 1650h. Then, it is subtracted and updated one by one in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, the flow path solenoid 1650k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0. The operation counter 203zzt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203zzt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 1650k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 1650e3 according to the jackpot type.

Further, the operation counter 202zzt3 is configured to be capable of measuring the counter value for measuring the operation time of the opening / closing door 1650f of the V winning device 1650 and the opening / closing door 2650f of the variable winning device 2650. Values corresponding to various operation scenarios specified in the above are set in each counter, and operation control of various devices is executed based on the updated contents of the counter values. As a result, it is possible to centrally control the operation of various winning devices during the jackpot game.

The remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball-spraying period after one round is completed and the V winning opening 1650a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to ON, it means that it is a ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203zzt5, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203zzt5 is a counter for determining the time since the V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650 is closed, and the time required for the game ball in the V winning device 1650 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for determining whether or not it has been done.

The remaining ball timer 203zzt5 is the time required for the ball winning in the V winning device 1650 to be discharged when the V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball winning in the V winning device 1650 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203zzt5. It is set as the upper limit of. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203zzt5 (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings in the V winning device 1650 and the number of ejected pieces match. To. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the V winning device 1650.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability change setting flag 203zs is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. It may be configured not to be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability change effective flag 203zzt6 is when the game ball passes through the specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) after the switching member 1650h is switched to the arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to the specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) (V prize). ) Is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (V winning) is valid. When the probability change effective flag 203zzt6 is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the specific area (probability change switch 1650e3).

The probabilistic valid timer 203zzt7 is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203zzt7 is set to ON. After the switching member 1650h is switched to the arrangement in which the sphere cannot flow down the specific region (probability change switch 1650e3) by the probability change effective timer 203zzt7, it is possible to determine the period required for the switching member 1650h to normally pass through the probability change switch 1650e3. In this control example, the time required for the ball reaching the switching member 1650h to pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the probability change effective timer 203zzt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if it passes through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) (V prize) after that, it is determined to be invalid and it is determined to pass. do not do.

As a result, the ball is illegally entered into a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) (V prize), the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 1650e3 and passed, or the magnetic sensor is passed by radio waves or the like. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as false detection.

The discharge number counter 203zzt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the V winning device 1650 in one round. The discharge number counter 203zzt8 is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls won in the V winning device 1650 matches the number of discharges.

Next, with reference to FIG. 371, details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 17th embodiment will be described. FIG. 371 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the 17th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 371, the RAM 223 in the 17th embodiment has a super RUSH start flag 223na and a super RUSH middle flag 223nb with respect to the configuration of the RAM 222 in the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 342 (b)). The difference is that the super RUSH counter 223 nc, the quasi-limit flag 223 nd, the resurrection flag 223 ne, the challenge effect flag 223 nn, the game state storage area 223 ng, and the start delay flag 223 hn are added.

The super RUSH start flag 223na is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the super RUSH effect is satisfied, and is set to be turned on when the condition for executing the super RUSH effect is satisfied. The 17th embodiment is configured so that when the latent state is set, the RUSH game in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball during the small hit game is executed, and the player is informed that the RUSH game is in progress. The RUSH effect for notifying (see FIG. 357 (b)) is configured to be executed. Then, during the RUSH game, when four prize information for winning a small hit is stored in the prize information included in the reserved ball (special figure 2 hold) of the acquired second special symbol, or the player When the winning information indicating that the jackpot E17, which is an advantageous jackpot, is won is stored, the super RUSH effect for indicating that a more advantageous period is set is executed during the RUSH game. It is configured.

That is, when the super RUSH effect is executed, the small hit game is continuously executed thereafter, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained per unit period increases, or after the big hit game is completed, the probability is confirmed again. The player is notified that the period for winning the jackpot, which is easy to set the state, has come. To put it the other way around, during the execution period of the Super RUSH production, the second special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot H17 in which a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends). This will be notified to the player.

By setting such an effect period, it is possible to provide a period for the player to execute the RUSH game with peace of mind.

This super RUSH start flag 223na is executed in the command determination process 17 (see S12113 in FIG. 385) when it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S2209: Yes). The prize information related process 17 (S12201 in FIG. 386). (See), when it is determined that there are four pieces of information (winning information) indicating a small hit winning in the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2374: Yes in FIG. 386), or in the big hit E17. When it is determined that the information indicating that the player wins (winning information) is included (S2375: Yes in FIG. 386), it is set to ON (S2376 in FIG. 386). Then, in the effect setting process 17 (see S12861 in FIG. 393) for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol, the setting state of the super RUSH start flag 223na is determined (S12703 in FIG. 393) and turned on. When it is determined that it is set (S12703: Yes in FIG. 393), it is set to off (S12704 in FIG. 393), and then a display command for executing the super RUSH effect is set (FIG. 393). S12707).

The super RUSH middle flag 223nb is a flag for indicating the period during which the super RUSH effect is executed. When the super RUSH effect is executed (set), it is set to on, and when the super RUSH effect ends. It is set to off. While the super RUSH middle flag 223nb is set to on, in the winning information related process 17 (see S12201 in FIG. 386), the super RUSH is in progress so that the process for setting a new super RUSH effect is not executed. The setting state of the flag 223nb is referred to.

In the 17th embodiment, when the execution condition of the super RUSH effect is satisfied, the new super RUSH effect is not executed until the super RUSH effect is completed, but the present invention is limited to this. Without, for example, if the newly acquired winning information during the Super RUSH production contains information indicating that a small hit is won, the supermarket will continue until the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the newly acquired winning information. It may be configured to continue the RUSH production. In this way, by configuring the effect period of the super RUSH effect once set so that it can be extended during the execution of the super RUSH effect, the length of the period during which the super RUSH effect continues for the player. Can be made difficult to understand, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, the player uses the super RUSH effect to indicate that a period in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained per unit period and the latent state does not end will come. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to execute a period effect indicating only a period in which the latent state does not end, or the latent state ends. It may be configured to execute a period effect indicating only the winning of a jackpot that is never done (difficult to end). Further, during the RUSH production period, it may be configured to execute a period production suggesting that the jackpot at the end of the latent state will be won, or there is a possibility of winning some kind of jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. It may be configured to perform a period effect suggesting that it is high. By executing the various period effects in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early during the period when the RUSH effect is executed (during the latent state).

In the 17th embodiment, the super RUSH effect is always executed when the above-mentioned execution condition of the super RUSH effect is satisfied, but the execution condition of the super RUSH effect is not limited to this. A predetermined effect execution lottery may be configured to be executable in the established state, and a super RUSH effect may be executed when the lottery result of the effect execution lottery is a specific lottery result. Further, the execution condition of the super RUSH effect may be changed according to the number of remaining jackpots until the limit number is reached (for example, the setting status of the quasi-limit flag 223nd described later), or the latent state is set. The execution condition of the super RUSH effect may be changed according to the number of times the special symbol changes from. Further, the execution condition of the super RUSH effect established based on the second special symbol lottery may be changed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol fluctuation (long fluctuation) being executed and the remaining fluctuation time. By changing the execution conditions based on various factors in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the super RUSH effect will be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early. can do.

The super RUSH counter 223nc is a counter for measuring the period until the super RUSH effect being executed ends, and is a special symbol that is the target of the super RUSH effect when the super RUSH effect is executed (set). A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations (second special symbol fluctuation) is set. Then, the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol change is executed during the super RUSH effect, and the super RUSH effect is terminated when the counter value becomes 0. Further, when the jackpot is won during the super RUSH effect, that is, when the jackpot E17, which is the execution condition of the super RUSH effect, is won, the value of the super RUSH counter 223 nc is cleared to 0.

The quasi-limit flag 223nd is a flag for indicating that the number of times in which the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) is set has reached a predetermined number (the number of times immediately before the limit number (5 times)). It is set to ON when a predetermined number (the number immediately before the limit number (5 times)) is reached, and when the limit number is reached while it is set to ON, or a probability change state. (High probability state of special symbol) is not set It is set to off when a jackpot game is executed.

In the 17th embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed according to the game content during the jackpot game, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) is continuously set. The timing at which the information (limit arrival information) for indicating whether the number of times has reached the limit number of times is output from the main control device 110 is the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect mode of the variation display effect of the third symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot winning that can reach the limit number of times cannot be set based on the limit arrival information output from the main control device 110. .. Therefore, the information (state command) output at the timing when the jackpot game ends includes at least information for indicating the number of times the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol) is continuously set (the number of consecutive probability changes). The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine whether or not the limit number of times can be reached at the next jackpot based on the information indicating the number of consecutive times.

With this configuration, for example, when the quasi-limit flag 223nd is set to ON, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes information for winning the probability variation jackpot. Even if there is, as an effect mode of the variable display effect of the corresponding third symbol, an effect that suggests (notifies) that the jackpot (probability variation A jackpot) in which the latent probability state is set (easily) is set after the jackpot game ends is won. It can be prohibited that the aspect (see FIG. 359 (a)) is determined.

In the 17th embodiment, the quasi-limit flag 223nd is when the number of times the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol) is continuously set (the number of consecutive probability changes) is one number before the limit number of times. Is set to ON, and various production modes set by the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to be variable according to the setting status of the quasi-limit flag 223nd, but the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol). ) May be configured to change the effect mode in more detail with respect to the number of times (probability change continuous number) set continuously, for example, the probability change based on the state command output from the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage means capable of storing the number of consecutive times and the latent probability state is set in a state where the number of consecutive times of probability variation is small (for example, once), the period until the limit number of times is reached (for example). A special effect suggesting that the number of jackpots) is long may be executed, or the execution frequency of a specific effect that can be executed regardless of the number of consecutive probability changes may be changed according to the number of consecutive probability changes.

In this way, by changing the effect mode executed according to the probability variation continuous number of times stored in the storage means or the execution frequency of the specific effect, the probability variation continuous number currently set for the player can be obtained. It can provide predictive fun. Therefore, if the predicted content of the player and the actual number of consecutive probability changes are different, an unexpected game is executed (for example, the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot predicted to reach the limit number of times. It is possible to increase the possibility that the game to be played will be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the 17th embodiment, there is a technical idea of changing the effect mode according to the number of consecutive probable changes, but conversely, a state in which the number of continuous probable changes is 0, that is, a time saving state is set. It is also possible to configure the suggestion effect during the time-saving state, which can suggest the state to the player. In this case, it is possible to execute the time saving state suggestion effect that suggests that the currently set game state is the time saving state, and the winning information that the jackpot is won during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol or while the second special symbol is on hold. When is included, it is preferable to configure it so that the time saving state suggestion effect is more easily executed than in other cases. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict that the current jackpot will not be a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player predict that the RUSH game can be executed in the maximum period until the probability variation continuous number reaches the limit number (the period until the probability variation jackpot is won 5 times in a row). Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game.

Furthermore, a game state suggestion effect during setting that can suggest the currently set game state to the player, a game state that has been set in the past, or a past state suggestion effect that can suggest the probability variation continuous number to the player It may be configured to be feasible. Here, as the past state suggestion effect, for example, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot two times before is the state in which the number of consecutive probability changes is one before the limit number (quasi-limit flag). It is preferable to configure the past state suggestion effect to be feasible in an effect mode indicating that 223nd was set to ON). By executing such a past state suggestion effect, the time saving state is once set (the number of consecutive probability changes is reset) by the big hit winning two times before, and then the probability change state is set by the big hit winning one time before. It is possible to predict what has been done.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of probable change continuous times is set as a limit number, the current gaming state (probable change continuous number) is notified (suggested) to the player by notifying (suggesting) the game state (probable change continuous number of times) set in the past. Since it is possible to make the player predict the number of times) and the future game development (how many times in a row the probability change state can be set), it is possible to execute an effect that interests the player. Can be done.

The resurrection flag 223ne is a flag for indicating that the resurrection effect is executed when the third symbol variation corresponding to the specific special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol corresponding to the specific special symbol variation is executed. It is set to on when the fluctuation is executed, the setting status is determined each time the third symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and when the third symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed while it is set to on, the revival effect is produced. Is executed.

In the present embodiment, when the probability change state or the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is easily set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol of 300 seconds is easily set. It is configured so that a game in which the second special symbol change is executed a plurality of times during the period is executed. Then, when the probability change state or the time reduction state is set, a common effect (challenge effect) is provided to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the probability change state is set or the time reduction state is set. It is configured to be executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (a), when the challenge effect is executed, the countdown display for 300 seconds is executed in the display area HR20.

Here, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the challenge production, the fluctuation time of 100 seconds is set in a part of the case where the jackpot A17 is won. Even when the fluctuation time of 100 seconds is set, a countdown display of 300 seconds is displayed in the display area HR20 as a challenge effect. Therefore, when the challenge effect is executed, the player cannot determine whether the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation executed this time is 100 seconds or 300 seconds.

The resurrection flag 223ne is set to be on when the fluctuation time of 100 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation, and when the fluctuation time of 100 seconds is set, the revival flag 223ne is set to the first. The first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed 100 seconds after the start of the 1 special symbol variation, that is, when the countdown display executed in the display area HR20 in the challenge effect displays 200 seconds. Then, when the revival flag 223ne is set to on when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, the effect of destroying the display mode indicating the challenge effect is executed as in FIG. 361 (b), and then the effect is executed. The jackpot game (probability change A jackpot) is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, at the time when the challenge effect is executed, the set first special symbol is set without notifying the player of the fluctuation time (lottery result) of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed. Since the lottery result of the first special symbol change can be notified to the player when the fluctuation time of the above has elapsed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

The challenge effect flag 223nf is a case where the jackpot (big hit D17, jackpot E17) for which the probability variation A state is set in the second special symbol lottery is won in the latent probability state, and the probability variation A set after the jackpot game ends. It is a flag to indicate that it is not confirmed that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage during the state.

In the 17th embodiment, when the first special symbol change is executed once (stopped and displayed) in the state where the probability change A state is set, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the game state is changed from the probability change state. It is configured to shift to the latent state. Then, in the state in which the probability variation A state is set, a short variation time (0.5 second variation) is easily set as the variation time of the first special symbol.

When the probability variation A state is set, as shown in Table 202ne (see FIG. 368) for granting time reduction, the first special symbol change is executed once as the time reduction end condition (stop displayed). ) The specific time reduction end condition that is satisfied in the case and the normal time reduction end condition that is satisfied when the total number of the first special symbol change count and the second special symbol change count reaches 100 times are set. When the second special symbol change is executed during the probability change A state, the time reduction end condition is not satisfied until the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied.

Further, when the result of the first special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation A state is set is a big hit (big hit B17, big hit C17) which is disadvantageous to the player, the above-mentioned short If the fluctuation time of the time (0.5 seconds) is set, the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is immediately executed, so that the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is set (see FIG. 366 (b)). ..

Then, when the probability variation A state is set and it is confirmed that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage, that is, the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player (big hit B17, When it is confirmed that the first special symbol change other than the jackpot C17) is executed (when the special figure 1 hold is acquired), it is suggested that the RUSH game is executed after the jackpot game is completed. (RUSH effect) is configured to be feasible, and when the probability variation A state is set, when it is not confirmed that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage, that is, the result of the first special symbol lottery is , If the first special symbol change that becomes a jackpot (big hit B17, jackpot C17) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, or if the special figure 1 hold is not acquired, the probability change state will be changed after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the effect (challenge effect) to suggest that it is set can be executed.

The challenge effect flag 223nf is a case where the jackpot (big hit D17, jackpot E17) for which the probability variation A state is set in the second special symbol lottery is won in the latent probability state, and the probability variation A set after the jackpot game ends. It is set to on when it is not confirmed that the time saving end condition is satisfied early during the state. Then, it is referred to when the jackpot (big hit D17, jackpot E17) in which the probability variation A state is set is executed, and when the jackpot ends.

That is, when the challenge effect flag 223nf is set to ON because the special figure 1 hold has not been acquired at the time when the jackpot (big hit D17, jackpot E17) for which the probability change A state is set in the second special symbol lottery is won. There is a possibility of acquiring a new special figure 1 hold during the special symbol change and the jackpot game, and the probability change A state is set by the winning information included in the newly acquired special figure 1 hold. In this case, since it may be determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage, it is determined whether or not the time saving ending condition is satisfied at an early stage until the probability variation A state is set.

Here, when the probability variation A state is set, if it is confirmed that the time saving end condition is satisfied early, the challenge effect flag 223nf is set to off, and the RUSH game is executed after the jackpot game ends. A process for setting an effect (RUSH effect) for suggesting that is executed. Therefore, since it is possible to appropriately execute the effect corresponding to the game development after the probability change A state is set, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The game state storage area 223 ng is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223 ng, the current game state can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the game state storage area 223 ng when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like because the data is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 executed after the power is turned on, the game set in the game state storage area 223 ng immediately after the power is restored before the power is cut off. Information indicating the status will be stored. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the voice lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state. Further, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set.

The start delay flag 223hn is a flag for indicating that the start timing of the jackpot game effect for indicating that the jackpot game has been executed is delayed, and the jackpot is at the execution timing (start timing) of the jackpot game. It is set to on when the game effect is not executed (when it is delayed). Then, when the jackpot game reaches the delayed start timing (start timing of the third round) of the jackpot game effect, the setting status of the start delay flag 223hn is determined, and when it is set to ON, the jackpot game The jackpot game effect is executed at the delay start timing of the effect, and then turned off.

As described above with reference to FIG. 365 (b), in the 17th embodiment, the jackpot game using both the V winning device 1650 and the variable winning device 2650 is executed in a part of the jackpot game. Operation 17 The operation is specified for 202 ng of the table. Specifically, in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot E17 and the jackpot G17 are set as the jackpot types, that is, the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, V in the first and second rounds. The hit operation is specified so that the round game in which the winning device 1650 is opened and the round game in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened is executed in the third and fourth rounds, and the jackpot H17 is used as the jackpot type. In the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot game is set, that is, the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, a round game in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened is executed in the first and second rounds, and 3 The hit operation is specified so that the round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened in the round and the fourth round is executed.

In other words, regardless of the jackpot type, if the jackpot game production is started from the time when the jackpot game is started, the jackpot game being executed will be based on the opening pattern of the jackpot game and the start timing of the jackpot game production. There is a problem that the player can easily identify the corresponding jackpot type.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, the jackpot game effect is executed not at the start timing of the jackpot game but at the timing when the V winning device 1650 is opened in the jackpot game. With this configuration, either the jackpot game executed when the jackpot type E17 and the jackpot G17 are set, or the jackpot game executed when the jackpot H17 is set as the jackpot type. Even when the game is executed, the start timing of the jackpot game effect and the opening operation timing of the V winning device 1650 can be synchronized, making it difficult for the player to easily determine the jackpot type. ..

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 17th embodiment>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 372 to 384, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the 17th embodiment will be described.

First, the special symbol variation process 17 (S191), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 372. FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 17 (S191). The special symbol variation processing 17 (S191 in FIG. 372) makes various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and controls the first special symbol and the second special symbol by predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 so as to enable the variable display on the determined variable display mode, and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is set, and control is executed for stopping and displaying in a display mode indicating a determination result (hit / fail determination result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing 17 (S191 in FIG. 372) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing 17 (S191 in FIG. 372), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (big hit in progress) or the small hit game is in progress (small hit in progress) (S7051). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203ne, it is determined whether the current state is during the big hit game (during the big hit) or during the small hit game (during the small hit).

In the process of S7051, when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is being made (S7051: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is set to ON (S7052), and then ON. When it is determined that the setting is set to (S7052: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (first special symbol (special figure 1 in the present embodiment)) is displayed. Update (S7053) and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S7052, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is not set to ON (S7052: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is set to be turned on when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, while the small hit game is being executed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed with the start of the small hit game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted when the first special symbol variation in the inside disappears. As a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is in progress (for example, at 0.2 second intervals). The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated, or a display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is in progress (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals). A blinking display mode in which the above is repeated) may be used. Further, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be able to display a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during a temporary stop is used. Is also good.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7051 when it is determined that the current is not a big hit or a small hit (S7051: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7054). When it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203ma of the special diagram 1 is larger than 0) (S7054: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process 17 is executed. (S7056).

In the first special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7056), the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 is changed (updated) during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Is executed. Then, when the processing of S7056 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma updated in the first special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7056) is 0 (S7057). If it is determined in the process of S7057 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is 0 (S7057: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 is executed (S7058), and the process proceeds to the process of S7059 described later. ..

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7058), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped at the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. The process is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7058), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the deviation. The process is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for deleting the information regarding the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 376. If it is determined in the processing of S7057 that the variation time counter 203ma in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S7057: No), the processing of S7058 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7059.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7054, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is not larger than 0 (0) (S7054: No), that is, when it is determined that the current special figure 1 is not changing. Next, the first special symbol change start processing 17 is executed (S7055). In the first special symbol change start processing 17 (S7055), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and the new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is possible to determine whether or not there is a new lottery (variation), a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing 17 (S7055) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 373 to 374.

After executing the first special symbol change start process 17 (S7055), after determining that the change of the special figure 1 is in progress (S7057: No) in the process of S7057, or after the first special symbol change stop process 17 (S7058) ) Is executed, then the variation processing (S7059 to S7063) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is larger than 0 (S7059). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S7059 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is not larger than 0 (0) (S7059: No), it means that the current special figure 2 is not changing. The second special symbol change start process 17 for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S7606), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start process 17 (S7606), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a2, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection process based on the hold data are performed. Is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing 17 (S7606), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203ca (or the small hit flag 203cc) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7059, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current special figure 2 is changing (S7059: Yes), then the second The special symbol variation executing process 17 is executed (S7061). Regarding the content of the second special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7061), the processing having the same content as the above-described first special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7056) is performed, and the processing target is the first to the second special symbol. Since it is changed to a special symbol and executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7061) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 variation time counter 203 mb is 0 (S7062), and if it is determined to be 0 (S7062). S7062: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 is executed (S7063), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7062 that the value of the variation time counter 203 mb in FIG. 2 is not 0 (S7062: No), the process of S7063 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7063) will be described later with reference to FIG. 380, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7058), it is defined in the second special symbol during the fluctuation display. When the variable time has elapsed, the process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol change stop processing 17 (S7063), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a forcible deviation. The process of causing is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for deleting the information regarding the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 372, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S7054 to S7058) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S7059 to S7063) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed (priority) before the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed with priority over the variable process related to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from being extinguished (discarded) by the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the first special symbol variation start process 17 (S7055), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (S191 in FIG. 372), will be described with reference to FIG. 373. FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing 17 (S7055).

In the first special symbol change start processing 17 (FIG. 373, S7055), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S7101), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired. It is determined whether (N1) is a value larger than 0 (S7102). In the process of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is larger than 0 (S7102: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is subtracted by 1. Then (S7103), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b after subtraction is set (S7104).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

When the processing of S7104 is completed, the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S7105 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 is then executed (S7121). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7121 in FIG. 374) will be described in detail later, but is set to the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the current gaming state.

When the process of S7121 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 is next executed. The first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 16 (S7111) fluctuates based on the result of determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a pattern.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7111) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is larger than 0 (S7122). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S7122: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is larger than 0 (S7122: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is set to ON (S7123), and the process proceeds to S7124.

In the process of S7124, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1. (S7124). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 1 (S7124: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is 1 (S7124: Yes), the time saving end waiting flag 203ng is set to ON (S7125), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7121), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (S7055 in FIG. 373), will be described. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7121).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7121 in FIG. 374), first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S1811). Then, in order to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied and the state is waiting, that is, whether or not the time saving final variation is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end It is determined whether the standby flag 203 ng is set to ON (S1871). When it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203 ng is on (that is, the second special symbol is undergoing the final change in time reduction) (S1871: Yes), the period of the time reduction state set this time ends. Therefore, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203ne (S1872), and the time saving end waiting flag 203ng and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203hn are set to off (S1873). Next, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is set to 0 (S1874), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S1875), and the process proceeds to S1812. On the other hand, in the processing of S1871, when it is determined that the time saving end wait flag 203ng is not on (S1871: No), the processing of S1872 to S1875 is skipped because the final fluctuation of the time saving state is not executed. The process proceeds to S1812.

In this way, in the state of waiting for the end of the time saving state (the state in which the final fluctuation of the time saving state is started in the other special symbol), the game is played before the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired. By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, the time-saving game state with the other special symbol until the change of the special symbol in which the final change of the time-saving state is executed ends. It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

After finishing the processing of S1871 or S1875, it is next determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203nc is on (S1812). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203 nc is on (S1812: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1 (see FIG. 364 (b)) for high probability (S1813). ), The process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203 nc is not on (S1812: No), based on the special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1 for low probability (see FIG. 364 (b)). The lottery result is acquired (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815.

In the process of S1815, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1813 or S1814 is a big hit (S1815). When it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1815: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is set on so as to indicate the jackpot winning of the first special symbol (S1816). Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S1817), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2. (S1818). Then, the value indicating the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area 203cf (S1819), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1815 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S1815: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1820), and this process is completed. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, the first special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7056), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (S191 in FIG. 372), will be described. FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7056). In the first special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7056), the process for updating the variation time of the executing special symbol variation and the small hit in the second special symbol lottery were interrupted. The process for restarting the special symbol change is executed.

In the first special symbol variation executing process 17 (S7056), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is set to ON (S7141). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from the small hit winning to the small hit game). (Period until the end of the game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted again.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is difficult for the player to understand because the other special symbol variation ends during one small hit game. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery is not discarded based on winning the small hit game in one special symbol lottery, for example, by winning the small hit, the big hit is won. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery result (the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small hit winning) is discarded.

If it is determined in the processing of S7141 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is set to on (S7141: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S7142), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is set. Is set to off (S7143), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is subtracted by 1 (S7144), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S7145), and this processing is completed. To do.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation executing process is performed in the special symbol variation process 17 (see S191 in FIG. 372) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) executed every 2 milliseconds. 17 (see S7056 in FIG. 372) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is updated (1) in the first special symbol variation executing process 17 (see S7056 in FIG. 375). It is configured to be subtracted). Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 mc is not set to ON in the processing of S7141 (S7141: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Skips the processes of S7142 and S7143, executes the processes of S7144 and S7145 described above, and ends the present process.

Next, the first special symbol variation stop process 17 (S7058), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (S191 in FIG. 372) in the 17th embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 376. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7058). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7058) determines that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is “0” at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is the process that is executed when

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (S7058 in FIG. 376) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is set to ON (S1871). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is set to on (S1871: Yes), then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is larger than 0, that is, the special figure 2 changes. It is determined whether it is inside (S1872). When it is determined that the value of the variation time counter 203 mb of the special figure 2 is larger than 0 (S1872: Yes), the process proceeds to S1873. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is not a value larger than 0 (S1872: No), the processes of S1873 to S1875 and the processes of S1885 to S1888 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1889. To do.

In the process of S1872, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is larger than 0 (S1872: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203 cc is set to on (S1873). FIG. 2 A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203cc is turned on is set (S1874).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed at the off symbol (S1875), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is set to 0 (S1885). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) is possible.

After finishing the processing of S1885, it is next determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is set on (S1886), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is set on (that is, the second special symbol). If it is determined (S1886: Yes), the 2nd special symbol is drawn for the 2nd special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed by the process of S1875 described above. In order to adapt the result, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is set to off (S1887), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S1888), and the process proceeds to S1889. On the other hand, in the processing of S1886, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is set to off (that is, the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol) (S1886: No), S1887. , S1888 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1889.

In the processing of S1889, first, the jackpot scenario won by the special symbol variation this time is set (S1889), then the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203hn, and the time saving end standby. The flag 203ng, the probability variation flag 203nc, and the limit arrival flag 203nb are set to off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is reset (S1890). Then, the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot middle flag 203d are set on (S1891).

Then, information indicating that the current gaming state is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203ne (S1892). The game state storage area 203ne is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, time saving state) and the game state related to the winning game (large hit medium, small hit medium) can be stored separately. By executing the process of S1892, the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored. With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won.

After finishing the processing of S1892, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S1880), and the first special symbol display device is displayed. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variable-displayed in 37 is executed (S1881), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1871, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is not set to ON (S1871: No), the time saving update process (S1893) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1880 described above. .. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S1893) will be described later with reference to FIG. 377.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process 17 (S7058), the process (S1880 to S1881) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S1871: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S1875). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing is executed at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In the present embodiment, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating the jackpot is executed. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7121 in FIG. 374) that the lottery result is a jackpot. (S1815: Yes in FIG. 374) may be configured so that the fluctuation of the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly removed and stopped to execute a special variation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot variation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when the jackpot is won with one special symbol, the other special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed, and prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a jackpot, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Not limited to, for example, it may be configured to suspend the other special symbol change until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, and to restart the interrupted special symbol change after the jackpot game ends. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discarding of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. It may be possible, for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (disappearance fluctuation) to indicate that it is out of the lottery, the lottery may be performed. During the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) by discarding the result and executing the forced stop processing to forcibly stop the deviation fluctuation. In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether a new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is resumed after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play a game. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol to the player during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 377, a time saving update process (S1893), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (see S7058 of FIG. 376) in the 17th embodiment, will be described. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time saving update process (S1893). In this time saving update process (S1893), when the game state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed to the normal state. Execute the process of migrating with. In the description described later, the process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped will be described, but the same process is also executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time saving update process (S1893) is executed, first, whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is turned on, that is, the change of the special symbol being executed this time starts to change during the time saving game. It is determined whether or not there is (S17001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is on, that is, the fluctuation is started during the time saving game (S17001: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is subtracted (S1702). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is set to off (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, in the processing of S17001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is not on (S17001: No), the processing of S1772 to S17006 is skipped because it is not a fluctuation stop that triggers the update of the time saving state. Then, the process proceeds to S17007.

As described above, when the game state is the time saving state at the start of the change of the special symbol, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped by setting the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type to ON. be able to. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be set until the final fluctuation of the time-saving game state stops. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player for the longest possible period.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the period until the small hit game is completed is changed. It is configured not to restart. Then, a V prize is generated during the small hit game, a big hit is given, and after the big hit game is completed, the change of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped resumes. Further, since the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is set to off before the jackpot game is started (see S1890 in FIG. 376), the special figure 1 subtraction flag is set when the temporarily stopped fluctuation resumes and stops. Since 203nf is off, the value of the time saving counter 203k is not subtracted. That is, the remaining time reduction number is not subtracted when the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the jackpot game due to the V prize is stopped. With this configuration, in addition to the specified period of time reduction set by the jackpot type, the time reduction game is also set for the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure that was temporarily stopped, which is an advantageous period for the player. The time saving state can be set to the maximum long period. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

In the process of S1704, it is determined whether or not the time saving end wait flag 203 ng is on (S1704). When it is determined that the time reduction end wait flag 203 ng is on (S1704: Yes), that is, the variation of the special symbol this time is the final variation of the time reduction, and the time reduction in the second special symbol (the other special symbol). If the next fluctuation has not been started from the final fluctuation of the above, since it is the timing to shift the gaming state to the normal state, the time saving end waiting flag 203ng is set to off (S1705) and the gaming state is stored. A normal state is set in the area 203ne (S17006). Then, the process proceeds to S17007.

On the other hand, in the process of S1704, when it is determined that the time saving end wait flag 203ng is not turned on (S17004: No), the state in which the final variation of the time saving game is not executed, that is, the state in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, the process of S1705 to S1706 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S17007. In this way, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the fluctuation that is the final fluctuation of the time-saving game is stopped, the fluctuation exceeding the specified number of times of the time-saving game state (the next fluctuation from the final fluctuation) is executed by the other special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is not executed, and if it is not executed, the game state is shifted. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player with a comfortable game.

When any of the processes of S17001, S1704, and S17006 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S17007. In the process of S17007, a command indicating the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k and the game state is set (S17007), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process 17 (S7606), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (S191 in FIG. 372) in the 17th embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing 17 (S7606).

When the second special symbol change start process 17 (S7606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7631). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (FIG. 374)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process 17 (see S191 in FIG. 372)). (Refer to S7121)), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won.

In the processing of S7631, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7631: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to off (S7632), and this process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7121 in FIG. 374), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. 2 It is prohibited that a new second special symbol change is executed after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to on in the processing of S7631 (S7631: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc, the second special symbol change start process 17 (S7060 in FIG. 378) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery (first) of the first special symbol executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process 17 (S7606) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process 17 (see S191 of FIG. 372)). Only when the jackpot is won in the special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7121 in FIG. 374), if the second special symbol variation start process 17 (S7060 in FIG. 378) executed immediately after is skipped, then the second 1 The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7121 in FIG. 374), and the process of S7051 in the special symbol variation process 17 (see S191 in FIG. 372). This is because the second special symbol variation start process 17 (S7060 in FIG. 372) is not executed until the jackpot game is completed.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by the off symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. To prevent a new change (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set and the change processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

That is, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the big hit is not won in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured. For example, when the jackpot control process 17 (see S1581 in FIG. 381) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device 110, the special figure 2 variation. The stop flag 203cc may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (see S7060 in FIG. 378) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc set to ON, the second special symbol It is configured to skip the fluctuation processing, that is, not to start a new fluctuation (keep the second special symbol stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is turned on without limitation. If it is set to, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The contents of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols are configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the contents, and the third symbol display device. It is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used on the third symbol display device 81, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S7631, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is not set to on, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S7631: No), S7633 to S7639. Is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S7640 described later. In the processes of S7633 to S7639, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, the first, for each process from S7101 to S7105, S7111, and S7121 of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (S7055 in FIG. 373) described above. 1 Special symbol reserved ball number counter value (N1), special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7121), first special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7111), second Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b2, second special symbol reserved ball number counter value (N2), second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2, second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7638), second special symbol variation pattern Since it is the same except that the selection process 16 (S7639) is changed, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S7639), the processes S7640 to S7643 are executed, and this process is terminated. In the processing of S7640 to S7643, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf is changed to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203hn for each of the above-described first special symbol change start processing 17 (S7055 of FIG. 373) S7122 to S7125. The description is omitted because they are the same except for the changed points.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game machine is a game machine in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, the same processing is executed at the start of the fluctuation of both special symbols. In the other special symbol, it is possible to prevent problems such as the number of remaining time reductions not being subtracted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 379, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7638), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 17 (S7060 in FIG. 378) in the 17th embodiment, will be described. FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7638). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7638) sets the type of the target special symbol from the first special symbol to the second special with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7121 in FIG. 374). It has been changed to a design and some other processing has been added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 379) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 374) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1921 corresponding to the process of S1811, the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a was changed to the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, and the process of S1871 to S1875 is supported. The target of the processing of S1922 to S1929 corresponding to the processing of S1971 to S1975 and the processing of S1812 to S1819 was changed from the special figure 1 (first special symbol) to the special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the special symbol. The difference is that the processing executed when the lottery result of is out of order has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (S7638 in FIG. 379), if it is determined that the lottery this time is not a jackpot (S1925: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process 17 is executed (S1930 (S7708)). , End this process.

The special figure 2 deviation variation process 17 (S1930 (S7708)) is a process executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a miss, and the fourth embodiment described above. The same process as the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S7708 in FIG. 145) in the embodiment is executed, and when the lottery result is a small hit, the process corresponding to the small hit winning is executed.

Next, the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (S7063), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (S191 in FIG. 372) in the 17th embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 380. FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7063). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (S7063), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see S7058 in FIG. 376). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big hit is changed, and the process of setting the flag for stopping the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted.

That is, the processing target of S1871 to S1875, S1880, S1811, S1885-S1892 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see S7058 of FIG. 376) was changed to the second special symbol (S1971 to S1974, S1979 to S1988). Each process) and when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S1971: No), the same process as the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 16 (S8121 in FIG. 351) in the above-described 16th embodiment is executed. It is different from the point to be done. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 17 (S1581) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 381. FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 17 (S1581). This jackpot control process 17 (S1581) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the corresponding prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the opening (specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 or V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650).

In the jackpot control process 17 (S1581 in FIG. 381), first, it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S1601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203c. The jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON in the process of S1891 of the first special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 376) or the process of S1987 of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 380). .. In the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is (when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is on) (S1601: Yes), the opening command is set (S1602), and then the jackpot start flag is set. 203c is set to off (S1603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to off) (S1601: No), then the jackpot is currently in progress. (S1604). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the period in which the above-mentioned jackpot middle flag 203d is set to ON. In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is off) (S1604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is set to on) (S1604: Yes), various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot. The determination process (S1605 to S1612, S1691 to S1695) for determining whether it is the timing to execute the above is executed.

In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the present is a big hit (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether the present is the start timing of a new round (S1605). In the process of S1605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the jackpot scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650, or the specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650) is based on the winning operation 17 table 202 ng. The V winning opening 1650a) of the V winning device 1650 is opened (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1607). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the switching operation (S1691: Yes). When it is determined that it is the timing of the switching operation (S1691), the state of the probabilistic solenoid is switched (S1692), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1691 when it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation (S1691: No), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 or V winning opening of the V winning device 1650). It is determined whether the closing condition of 1650a) is satisfied (S1608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 or V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650), or , It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10 in total) of balls are won in the variable winning device 2650 or the V winning device 1650.

If it is determined in the processing of S1608 that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 or V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650) is satisfied (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening is dealt with. The winning opening (specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 or V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650) is closed (S1609) to end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 or V winning opening 1650a of the V winning device 1650) is not satisfied (S1608: No), the following In addition, it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed after the round according to the jackpot type (the final round game preset in this jackpot game) is completed, and the waiting time (book) which is the ball ejection time. In the embodiment, when 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. The start timing of this ending effect and the end timing described later are also configured to be determined based on the jackpot scenario (see S1889 in FIG. 376 or S1985 in FIG. 380) set when the jackpot is won. ing.

In the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: Yes), the ending command is set (S1611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1610 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: No), it is determined in the process of S1612 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), the jackpot end process 17 is executed (S1693), and this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot end process 17 (S1693), which is one of the jackpot control processes 17 (S1581 in FIG. 381) in the 17th embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 382. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 17 (S1693). As described above, the jackpot end process 17 (S1693) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end processing (S1693), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is on (S17101). When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is not on (that is, it is off) (S17101: No), the value of the limit counter 203na is set to 0 (S17102), and the process proceeds to the process of S17108 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is on (S17101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203na (S17103). Next, the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set to off (S17104), it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203na after addition by the processing of S17103 is 5 (S17105), and the value of the limit counter 203na after addition is set. When it is determined that the value is 5 (S17105: Yes), the limit arrival flag 203nb is set to ON (S17107), and the process proceeds to the above-described S17102 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S17105, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203na after addition is not 5 (a value of 4 or less) (S17105: No), the probability variation flag 203nc is set to ON (S17106). The process proceeds to S17108.

In the process of S17108, the number of time reductions corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203cf, and the state of the limit arrival flag 203nb is read from the time reduction assignment 17 table 202ne (see FIG. 368) (see FIG. 368). S17108), the number of times of time saving read out is set as a counter value of the time saving medium counter 203k (S17109). Next, the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (S17110), and the state command corresponding to the game state after the big hit and the value of the limit counter 203na is set (S17111).

Next, the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the execution jackpot type, the data of the winning state storage area 203cf, and the state of the limit arrival flag 203nb is specified (S17112), and the data indicating the specified fluctuation pattern scenario is changed. It is stored in the pattern scenario storage area 203nd (S17113). Next, the end of the jackpot is set (S17114), and the jackpot middle flag 203d is set to off (S17115) to end this process.

By executing this jackpot end processing 17 (S1693), the gaming state can be appropriately set according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type, and whether or not the probability variation limit number has been reached.

Returning to FIG. 381, the description will be continued. In the process of S1612, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: No), the winning process 17 (S1694) is executed.

Here, the winning process 17 (S1694), which is one process of the jackpot control process 17 (S1581) in the 17th embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 383. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process 17 (S1694).

In the winning process 17 (S1694), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1481). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 165f1 or the open door 1650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1481: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1481: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball detection switch 1650c1 of the V winning opening (specific winning opening) 1650a has passed. When it is determined that the ball detection switch 1650c1 of the V winning opening (specific winning opening) 1650a has passed (S1482: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2 to update (S1483). After that, the process of S1484 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball detection switch 1650c1 has not passed (S1482: No), the process of S1483 is skipped and the process of S1484 is executed.

In the process of S1484, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2 is 10 or more (S1484). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more (S1484: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 1650f of the V winning opening 1650a is set (S1486). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to ON (S1487), and the process of S1488 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 1650f is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1484, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zzt2 is less than 10 (S1484: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1485). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1485: Yes), the process of S1486 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1485: No), the process of S1488 is executed.

In the processing of S1488, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is greater than 0 (S1488), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zzt3 is greater than 0 (S1488: Yes), the operation counter The value of 203zzt3 is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1489). Next, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 1650e3 (S1490), and when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 1650e3 (S1490: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203zzt1 and updated. (S1491), the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set to ON (S1492), and the process shifts to S1493.

On the other hand, in the process of S1490, when it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the probability change switch 1650e3 (S1490: No), each process of S1491 and S1492 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1493. In the process of S1493, it is determined whether the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0 (S1493), and when it is determined that the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0 (S1493: Yes), the flow path solenoid 1650k is set to off (S1494). , The probability variation valid flag 203zzt6 is set to ON (S1495), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1493, if it is determined that the operation counter 203zzt3 is not 0 (S1493: No), each process of S1494 and S1495 is skipped and the present process is terminated. By setting the probability change effective flag 203zzt6 to ON in the processing of S1495, even after the switching member 1650h is switched, if the ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 1650e2 passes through the probability change switch 1650e3, it is special. It can be controlled so that the high probability state of the symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1488, when it is determined that the operation counter 203zzt3 is 0 (S1488: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203zzt6 is on (S1494). When it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203zzt6 is off (S1494: No), this process ends. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1494 that the probability variation effective flag 203zzt6 is on (S1494: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation effective timer 203zzt7 to update (S1497).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probabilistic change effective timer 203zzt7 after the update has reached the upper limit value (1.2s in this control example) (S1498). When it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203zzt7 is the upper limit value (S1498: Yes), the probability variation effective flag 203zzt6 is set to off (S1499), and the probability variation effective timer 203zzt7 is reset to the initial value 0 (S1500). .. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S1498 that the probability variation effective timer 203zzt7 is not the upper limit value (S1498: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S1490.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 1650e3 until the probability change effective timer 203zzt7 reaches the upper limit value, so that the probability of the special symbol is high in consideration of the ball brushing time. The state can be set. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time when it is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 1650e3 from being illegally passed through the ball and being given a high probability state of a special symbol.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 381. The winning process 17 (S1694) is executed, then the abnormal process 17 (S1695) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 384, the exception handling 17 (S1695), which is one of the jackpot control processing 17 (see S1581 of FIG. 381) in the 17th embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 384. To do. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing 17 (S1695). This abnormality processing 17 (S1695) is a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 1650e3 is illegally passed.

In the abnormal processing 17 (S1695), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1581). If it is outside the round validity period (S1581: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1581: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 1650e4 (S1582). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 1650e4 (S1582: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203zzt8 is added by 1 and updated (S1583). After that, the process of S1584 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 1650e4 (S1582: No), the process of S1584 is executed.

In the process of S1584, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is on (S1584). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is off (S1584: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is on (S1584: Yes), the ball ejection time is in progress, so the remaining ball timer 203zt5 is added by 1 and updated (S1585). The remaining ball timer 203zzt5 determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1586). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1586: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1586: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203zzt1 and the number of discharges counter 203zzt8) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prizes counter 203zzt2) match. (S1587).

If it is determined that they match (S1587: Yes), the process of S1589 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1587: No), an error command is set (S1588). After that, the process of S1589 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the V winning device 1650 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 1650e3.

In the process of S1589, the remaining ball timer flag 203zzt4 is set to off (S1589), and the remaining ball timer 203zzt5 is reset to the initial value 0 (S1590). After that, the winning number counter 203zzt2, the discharging number counter 203zzt8, and the probability variation passing counter 203zzt1 are reset to the initial values (S1591), and then this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 17th embodiment>
Next, the command determination process 17 (S12113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 385. FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 17 (S12113). This command determination process 17 (S12113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. To do.

In the command determination process 17 (S12113 in FIG. 385), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device is used. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command is received from 110 (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2203), and other commands are responded to. The process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the stop type is also extracted. The process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the hold ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol hold ball number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2) is received. It is stored in the hold ball number counter 223c) (S2208). After the processing of S2208 is completed, the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2208. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected. Or, at the time of lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. When the process of S2208 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2207, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information-related process 17 is executed (S12201). After the processing of S12201 is completed, the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the contents of the prize information-related process 17 (S12201) will be described with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process 17 (S12201). The prize information-related process 17 (S12201) determines whether or not to execute the provisional hit effect based on the prize information (variable type) included in the prize information command received this time and the current game situation. The process to do is executed.

When the winning information-related process 17 (S12201) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223 ng provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state read in the process of S2301 is latent (S2371), and if it is determined that it is latent (S2371: Yes), then the second special symbol is won. It is determined whether it is information (S2321). In the process of S2321, when it is determined that it is the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: Yes), it is determined whether or not the flag 223nb in Super RUSH is ON (S2372).

If it is determined in the process of S2372 that the flag 223nb in Super RUSH is ON (S2372: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2311 described later. On the other hand, in the process of S2372 described above, when it is determined that the flag 223nb in Super RUSH is not on (off) (S2372: No), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S2373). Next, it is determined whether the number of information indicating the small hit winning is four (S2374).

In the process of S2374, when it is determined that the number of information indicating the small hit winning is not four (S2374: No), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit E17 (S2375). If it is determined in the process of S2375 that there is no jackpot E17 (S2375: No), the received prize information command information is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223a (S2311), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2374, when it is determined that the number of information indicating the small hit winning is four (S2374: Yes), or in the processing of S2375, when it is determined that there is a big hit E17 (S2375: Yes). The super RUSH start flag 223na is set to ON (S2376), the above-mentioned process of S2311 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2371 when it is determined that the read game state is not latent (S2371: No), or in the process of S2321 it is determined that it is not the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: No). ), A display winning information command corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), the above-mentioned processing of S2311 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 385. In the process of S2209, if the winning information command is not received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). When a hit-related command is received (S2211: Yes), the hit-related process 17 (S12202) is executed, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the hit-related process 17 (S12202) will be described with reference to FIG. 387. FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 17 (S12202). The hit-related process 17 (S12202) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In the hit-related process 17 (S12202 in FIG. 387), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the command determination process 17 (S12113) has received the jackpot start command (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is in the latent state (S12301), and when it is determined that it is not in the latent state (S12301: No), the jackpot start process 17 (S12302) to end this process.

Here, the contents of the jackpot start processing 17 (S12302) will be described with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot start processing 17 (S12302).

When the jackpot start process 17 (S12302) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in the normal state at the time of winning (S12401). In the process of S12401, if it is determined that the jackpot is in the normal state at the time of winning (S12401: Yes), the corresponding display jackpot start command is set (S12410), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in the normal state at the time of winning (S12401: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is D17 or F17 (S12402). If it is determined that the jackpot is not D17 or F17 in the process of S12402 (S12401: No), a display jackpot start command indicating the challenge mode is set (S12409), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12402, when it is determined that the jackpot is D17 or F17 (S12402: Yes), then it is determined whether the challenge effect flag 223nf is on (S12403). In the process of S12403, when it is determined that the challenge effect flag 223nf is on (S12403: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more (S12404).

In the process of S12404, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is not 1 or more (0) (S12404: No), the above-mentioned process of S12409 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more (S12404: Yes), the result of the next special symbol lottery is determined from the winning information storage area 223a (S12405), and the jackpot B17 Alternatively, it is determined whether it is C17 (S12406).

If it is determined that the jackpot is B17 or C17 in the processing of S12406 (S12406: Yes), the processing of S12409 described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot B17 or C17 (S12406: No), the challenge effect flag 223nf is set to off (S12407), the jackpot start command for display indicating the RUSH mode is set (S12408), and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S12403, if it is determined that the challenge effect flag 223nf is not on (off) (S12403: No), the processes of S12404 to S12407 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S12408.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 387. In the process of S12301, when it is determined that the state is in the latent state (S12301: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot is H17 (S12303). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is H17 (S12303: Yes), the start delay flag 223hn is set to ON (S12304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12303, if it is determined that the hit is not H17 (S12303: No), the above-mentioned process of S12302 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2404). When the round number command is received (S2404: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S12305), and this process ends.

Here, the contents of the round number command processing (S12305) will be described with reference to FIG. 389. FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command process (S12305).

When the round number command process (S12305) is executed, it is first determined whether the start delay flag 223hn is on (S12431). In the processing of S12431, if it is determined that the start delay flag 223hn is on (S12431: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the third round (S12432), and if it is determined that it is not the third round (S12432). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S12432, when it is determined that it is the third round (S12432: Yes), the jackpot start command for display indicating the challenge mode is set (S12433), and the start delay flag 223nn is set to off (S12343). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S12431, when it is determined that the start delay flag 223hn is not on (off) (S12431: No), then it is determined whether or not the start delay flag is in the latent state (S12435). Then, when it is determined that the player is in the latent state (S12435: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot is E17 or G17 (S12436), and when it is determined that the jackpot is not E17 or G17 (S12436: No), this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S12436, when it is determined that the jackpot is E17 or G17 (S12436: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the third round (S12437).

If it is determined that it is not the third round in the process of S12437 (S12437: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the third round (S12437: Yes), a display command indicating the entry into the challenge mode is set (S12438), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12435 described above, if it is determined that the state is not in the latent state (S12435: No), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S12439), and this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 387. In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2406). When the jackpot end command is received (S2406: Yes), the jackpot end processing 17 (S12306) is executed.

Here, the contents of the jackpot end processing 17 (S12306) will be described with reference to FIG. 390. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 17 (S12306).

When the jackpot end processing 17 (S12306) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot effect is a challenge effect (S12451). When it is determined that the jackpot effect is a challenge effect (S12451: Yes), then it is determined whether the challenge effect flag 223nf is on (S12452). Then, when it is determined that the challenge effect flag 223nf is not on (off) (S12452: No), a display command indicating the entry into the challenge mode is set (S12458), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12452, when it is determined that the challenge effect flag 223nf is on (S12452: Yes), the challenge effect flag 223nf is set to off (S12453), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. It is determined whether it is 1 or more (S12454).

If it is determined in the process of S12454 that the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is not 1 or more (0) (S12454: No), the above-mentioned process of S12458 is executed and the present process is terminated. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more (S12454: Yes), the result of the next special symbol lottery is determined from the winning information storage area 223a (S12455), and then It is determined whether the determination result is the jackpot B17 or C17 (S12456).

Then, when it is determined that the determination result is the jackpot B17 or C17 (S12456: Yes), the above-mentioned process of S12458 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12456, when it is determined that the determination result is not the jackpot B17 or C17 (S12456: No), a display command indicating RUSH entry is set (S12457), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S12451, when it is determined that the jackpot effect is not a challenge effect (S12451: No), then it is determined whether it is a RUSH effect (S12459). Then, when it is determined that the effect is RUSH, (S12459: Yes), the above-mentioned process of S12457 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12459, if it is determined that the effect is not RUSH effect, (S12459: No), a display command indicating the corresponding state is set (S12460), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 387. In the process of S2406, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S2409). When the small hit start command is received (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S2410), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2409: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S2411). When the small hit end command is received (S2411: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (S2412), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2411: No), it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command (S12310). If it is a prize ball command (S12310: Yes), a display prize ball command is set (S12311), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S12310, if it is determined that the command is not a prize ball command (S12310: No), this process is terminated as it is.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 385. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2211: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the process of the stop process 17 is executed (S12203), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the stop processing 17 (S12203) will be described with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop processing 17 (S12203).

When the stop processing 17 (S12203) is executed, first, it is determined whether the resurrection flag 223ne is on (S12501). When it is determined that the resurrection flag 223ne is on (S12501: Yes), the resurrection command for display is set (S12502), and then the resurrection flag 223ne is set to off (S12503). Then, the stop display of the third symbol is set (S12504), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12501, when it is determined that the resurrection flag 223ne is not on (off) (S12501: No), the process of S12502 is skipped, the processes of S12503 and S12504 are executed, and then the main process is performed. To finish.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 385. When it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the process of S2213 (S2213: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving related command has been received (S2215). When it is determined that the time saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes), the time saving update process (S2216) is executed, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process. Since the content of the time saving update process (S2216) is the same as the process of S2216 of the time saving update process (see FIG. 56) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S2215, when it is determined that the time saving related command has not been received (S2215: No), it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S12204). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S12204: Yes), the status command process 17 is executed (S12205), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the state command process 17 (S12205) will be described with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 17 (S12205).

When the state command process 17 (S12205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command indicates the game state (S12601), and if it is determined that the command indicates the game state (S12601: Yes), the game state is stored. The game state corresponding to the area 223 ng is stored (S12602), and then it is determined whether to shift to the normal state (S12603).

If it is determined in the process of S12603 that the state does not shift to the normal state (S12603: No), the process corresponding to other information is executed (S12608), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state shifts to the normal state (S12603: Yes), a display command indicating the end screen is set (S12604), the above-mentioned process of S12608 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12601, when it is determined that the command is not a command indicating the game state (S12601: No), it is determined whether the command is a limit-related command, that is, information for indicating the number of times the probability change state is set (the number of consecutive probability changes). Then (S12605), if it is determined that the command is a limit-related command (S12605: Yes), then the probability variation continuous number indicated by the received command is 1 less (4) than the limit number (5). Determine (S12606). If it is determined that the number of consecutive probability changes indicated by the received command is 2 or more less than the limit number (S12606: No), the above-mentioned process of S12608 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12606, when it is determined that the probability variation continuous number indicated by the received command is one less than the limit number (S12606: Yes), the quasi-limit flag 223nd is set to ON (S12607), and the above-mentioned S12608 Execute the process and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S12605, when it is determined that the command is not a limit-related command (S12605: No), the process of S12608 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 385. If it is determined that the status command has not been received in the process of S12204 (S12204: No), the process of S2217 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 393, the effect setting process 17 (S12861), which is one of the variable display setting processes (see FIGS. 62 and S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 17th embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 17 (S12861).

In the effect setting process 17 (S12861), first, the game state is specified by referring to the data of the game state storage area 223 ng (S12701), and it is determined whether the game state is the latent state (S12702). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (S12702: No), the second effect setting process is executed (S12713), and this process ends. The details of the second effect setting process (S12713) will be described later with reference to FIG. 394.

On the other hand, in the process of S12702, when it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S12702: Yes), then it is determined whether the super RUSH start flag 223na is on (S12703). When it is determined that the super RUSH start flag 223na is on (S12703: Yes), the super RUSH start flag 223na is set to off (S12704), and the super RUSH middle flag 223nb is set to on (S12705). Next, 4 is set in the value of the super RUSH counter 223 nc (S12706), a display command for indicating the super RUSH is set (S12707), the above-mentioned process of S12713 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12703, when it is determined that the super RUSH start flag 223na is not on (off) (S12703: No), it is determined whether the value of the super RUSH counter 223 nc is larger than 0 (S12708). ). When it is determined that the value of the super RUSH counter 223 nc is not a value larger than 0 (0) (S12708: No), the above-mentioned process of S12713 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12708, when it is determined that the value of the super RUSH counter 223 nc is a value larger than 0 (S12708: Yes), the value of the super RUSH counter 223 nc is subtracted by 1 (S12709), and the value after the subtraction is set. It is determined whether it is 0 (S12710).

If it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (S12710: No), the above-mentioned process of S12713 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S12710, when it is determined that the value after subtraction is 0 (S12710: Yes), the flag 223nb in super RUSH is set to off (S12711), and then the display for indicating normal RUSH is displayed. Set the command for (S12712). After that, the process of S12713 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the second effect setting process (S12713), which is one process in the effect setting process 17 (S12861), will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second effect setting process (S12713).

In the second effect setting process (S12713), first, it is determined whether the game state is the normal state (S12751). When it is determined that the game state is the normal state (S12751: Yes), the effect mode of the variation pattern effect according to the game state and the lottery result is set (S12752), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12751, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (S12751: No), it is determined whether the quasi-limit flag 223nd is on (S12753).

In the processing of S12753, when it is determined that the quasi-limit flag 223nd is on (S12753: Yes), then it is determined whether it is a jackpot fluctuation (S12754), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot fluctuation (S12753). S12754: Yes), the effect mode of the variation pattern corresponding to the challenge mode is set (S12755). Then, the quasi-limit flag 223nd is set to off (S12756), and the process proceeds to S12757. On the other hand, in the processing of S12754, if it is determined that the fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation (S12754: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S12757 as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S12753, when it is determined that the quasi-limit flag 223nd is not on (off) (S12753: No), it is determined whether the jackpot is D17 or F17 (S12757). If it is determined in the process of S12757 that it is not a jackpot D17 or F17 (S12757: No), the third effect setting process is executed (S12763), and this process is terminated. The details of the third effect setting process (S12763) will be described later with reference to FIG. 395.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12757, when it is determined that the jackpot is D17 or F17 (S12757: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 or more (S12758). When it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 or more (S12758: Yes), then it is determined whether the next special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot B17 or C17 (S12759).

In the processing of S12759, when it is determined that the next special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot B17 or C17 (S12759: Yes), or in the processing of S12758, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is not 0 or more (at 0). If it is determined that there is (S12758: No), the challenge effect flag 223nf is set to ON (S12760). Then, the effect mode of the variation pattern corresponding to each challenge mode is set (S12761), the above-mentioned process of S12763 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12759, when it is determined that the next special figure 1 lottery is not the jackpot B17 or C17 (S12759: No), the effect mode of the variation pattern corresponding to the RUSH mode is set (S12762), and the above description is made. The process of S12763 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the third effect setting process (S12763), which is one of the processes in the second effect setting process (S12713), will be described with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third effect setting process (S12763).

In the third effect setting process (S12763), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is the latent state (S12781), and when it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (S12781: No), the special figure 1 It is determined whether it is a fluctuation (S12782). Then, when it is determined that the variation is the special figure 1 variation (S12782: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time is 0.5 seconds (S12783). If it is determined in the process of S12783 that the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds (S12783: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12781, when it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S12781: Yes), or in the processing of S12782, when it is determined that the special figure 1 does not change (S12782: No), the gaming state. And the effect mode of the variable pattern effect according to the lottery result are set (S12786), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S12783, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 0.5 seconds (S12783: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation time is 100 seconds (S12784), and the fluctuation time is 100 seconds. If it is determined (S12784: Yes), the resurrection flag 223ne is set to ON (S12785), the above-mentioned process of S12786 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12784, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 100 seconds (S12784: No), the process of S12786 described above is executed as it is, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 17th embodiment, the jackpot is won in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and after the jackpot game is completed, the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability) of the special symbol is again. An upper limit (limit number of times) is set for the number of times (probability variation continuous number of times) for which the state) is set. With this configuration, a gaming state (probability change) in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, which is advantageous to the player, is set rather than a gaming state (normal state, time saving state) in which a low probability state of the special symbol is set. By continuously setting the state (state, latent state), it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

In the 17th embodiment, an upper limit is set for setting a high probability state of a special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. An upper limit may be set for this, or an upper limit may be set for the number of times that both the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set.

In this case, for example, the limit number of times for the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 5, and the limit number of times for the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to 4, that is, the limit number of times less than the limit number set for the special symbol. When the number of times is set, for example, when the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is not changed (so that the probability change state continues) and four times are won in succession. Will reach the limit number of times for the normal symbol before the limit number of times for the special symbol, so that the latent probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to set a period in which the latent state (RUSH game) is likely to be executed before the limit number of times for the special symbol is reached.

Further, in this case, if the latent probability state is set before the limit number of times for the special symbol is reached, the continuous number of special symbols is updated, but the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the number of consecutive symbols is reset to 0. Therefore, since the special symbol can reach the limit number of times first, it is possible to make it difficult to set the latent state based on the arrival of the limit number of times for the normal symbol. Even with this configuration, as in the 17th embodiment described above, when the same jackpot (probability variation B jackpot) is won, the jackpot depends on the presence or absence of specific conditions (reaching the limit number of times for a normal symbol). The game state set after the game is over can be different.

Further, in the 17th embodiment described above, it is confirmed that the probability change A state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and that the probability change A state shifts to the latent state in a short period (0.5 seconds). In this case, it is configured to notify the player of the transition to the latent probability state instead of the probability change state (probability change A state) at a timing before the jackpot game ends. That is, it is configured to notify the player of the next game state to be set next, not the next game state to shift from the current game state. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the game to be executed in the future in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since it is configured not to notify the next game state that shifts from the current game state, it is difficult for the player to understand because the next game state and the next next game state are notified at the same time. It is possible to prevent the notification mode from being provided. In addition, it is configured to notify the player of the game state that is advantageous to the player among the next game state and the next next game state. Therefore, depending on the content of the notification mode, the player can be delighted. Further, among the next game state and the next next game state, the game state in which the game state is likely to continue for a long period of time is likely to be notified to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand playability.

<About the modified example of the 17th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 396 and 397. In the 17th embodiment described above, when the result of the first special symbol lottery executed when the probability variation B state or the time saving state is set is different, the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is set. , The probabilistic B state or the time saving state was configured to continue for 300 seconds.

On the other hand, in this modification, variations having different lengths are set as the variation time set when the result of the first special symbol lottery executed when the probability variation B state or the time saving state is set is out of order. The difference is that a variable time of 1 can be set from the time.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the ease with which the first special symbol variation is executed when the probability variation B state or the time reduction state is set. Therefore, for example, when a specific time reduction end condition is set. In, the ease with which the specific time reduction end condition is satisfied can be made different, and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state (probability change state, time reduction state) of the normal symbol can be increased or decreased.

First, with reference to FIG. 396, the content of the effect in this modified example will be described. FIG. 396 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a challenge effect executed in a high probability state (probability variation state, time saving state) of a normal symbol. The detailed description of the same elements as the display mode of the challenge effect in the 17th embodiment described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 396 (a), in the present modification, the remaining time displayed in the display area HR20 is displayed as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol actually set. It is different from the form. Then, when the challenge effect in the game state in which the specific time reduction end condition is set is executed, the remaining time displayed in the display area HR20 becomes 0 seconds, that is, the first special symbol variation is stopped. When it is displayed, the specific time saving end condition is satisfied and the challenge production ends. Since the effect at the end of the challenge effect is the same as that of the 17th embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the case of the challenge effect in the gaming state in which only the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 396 (b), the seconds corresponding to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation to be executed next. An additional effect is executed in which the number is added to the display area HR20. FIG. 396 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the additional effect is executed during the challenge effect. In FIG. 396 (b), the first special symbol variation being executed in the challenge effect in the game state in which only the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied is out of the range, and the variation time of the first special symbol variation to be executed next is executed. Shows an additional effect when is 60 seconds.

Specifically, a treasure box 852 is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, "+60 seconds" is displayed as the result display mode 852a, and the remaining time displayed in the display area HR20 is "90 seconds". An increasing additional effect is executed.

In this way, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the gaming state in which only the normal time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, the total number of the first special symbol change number and the second special symbol change number reaches 100 times. If only holds, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation is shorter than 300 seconds, the first special symbol fluctuation is executed multiple times during the high probability state of the normal symbol. Will be done. In this case, by executing the additional effect so that the remaining period of the challenge effect is extended, it is possible to make the player think that the effect period of the challenge effect indicating the high probability state of the normal symbol is extended in the middle. It can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 396 (b), before the first special symbol variation (variation time 120 seconds) in the challenge effect is stopped and displayed, that is, when the remaining period is 30 seconds. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation to be executed next is added to the effect. That is, based on the winning information included in the special figure 1 hold, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is pre-read, and the next first special symbol change may be executed before the normal time reduction end condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute an additional effect when it is confirmed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the stop or start timing of the first special symbol fluctuation different from the execution timing of the additional effect, so that the player can determine what triggered the additional effect to be executed. Can be confusing.

It should be noted that the challenge effect in the gaming state in which the specific time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, the challenge effect in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied when the first special symbol variation is completed once, is also shown in FIG. 396 (b). It is preferable to configure the additional effect to be feasible. In this case, a value smaller than the fluctuation time of the first first special symbol fluctuation is displayed in the display area HR20, and the display mode displayed in the display area HR20 satisfies a predetermined condition. In this case (when the remaining time indicates 30 seconds), a value indicating the remaining fluctuation time may be added and displayed in the effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of the time saving end condition currently set from being specified depending on the presence or absence of the additional effect, and as a result, the game state currently set from being specified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 397, the contents of the electrical configuration in the present modification, which are different from the above-described 17th embodiment, will be described. In this modification, one of the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation B 17 table 202nd2 and the limit 17 table 202nd5 referred to in the time saving state and the probability variation B state with respect to the above-described 17th embodiment. It differs in that the parts are different, and is the same in other respects. The detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 397 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving / probability variation B 17 table 202nd2 in the present modification, and FIG. 397 (b) shows the specified contents of the limit 17 table 202nd5 in the present modification. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 397 (a) and 397 (b), the type of variation pattern set when the result of the first special symbol lottery is different from the above-mentioned 17th embodiment is different. They are different and otherwise the same.

Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the fluctuation time is 300 with respect to the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98". The deviation time reduction variation A for seconds is specified in association with it, and the deviation time reduction variation B for 120 seconds is associated with the range of "99 to 149", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". The deviation time variation C of 60 seconds is associated with the range of "150 to 197", and the deviation time variation D of 1 second is associated with the variation time of "198". ing. The above-mentioned specified contents are the same for the 17 table 202nd2 for the time saving / probability change B and the 17 table 202nd5 for the limit.

As described above, in this modification, it is executed when the time saving state is set, when the probability variation B state is set, and when the limit number of times is reached and the time saving state is forcibly set. As the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation, various fluctuation times (10 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, 300 seconds) can be set when the player is elected out of the game. As a result, for example, when the time saving state is set, it is more advantageous for the player to set a long fluctuation time, and when the probability variation state is set, more specifically, the specific time saving end condition is set. When the set probability change state is set, it can be advantageous for the player to set a short fluctuation time.

With this configuration, the length of the period until the time reduction end condition is satisfied can be changed by making the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation for satisfying the time reduction end condition different, so that the time reduction can be performed. Depending on the length of the period until the end condition is satisfied, it is possible to change the actual number of times the special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

In addition, not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the 17 table 202nd3 for probability variation A, which is referred to when the probability variation A state is set, is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation as in this modification. It may be specified that various fluctuation times (10 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, 300 seconds) are set when the player is elected out of the game. With this configuration, it is possible to make the transition timing to the latent probability state different when the probability variation A state is set.

That is, in the 17th embodiment described above, when the first special symbol change that is lost and won in the first special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the probability variation A state is set, the fluctuation is always 0.5 seconds. It was configured to run. Since this 0.5 second fluctuation is configured to have a fluctuation time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the probability change A state, the first special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot game ends. When the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol start at the same time, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is always stopped first. Therefore, the second special symbol change is stopped and displayed during the probability change A state, and the small hit game that is difficult to win the game ball is hard to be executed.

On the other hand, when the 17 table 202nd3 for probability variation A, which is referred to when the probability variation A state is set, is elected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation as in this modification, various cases are obtained. By specifying that the fluctuation time (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, 300 seconds) is set, the probabilistic A state can be continued by different lengths during the probabilistic A state. The number of fluctuations of the second special symbol variation executed in can be made different. Further, in this case, for example, when the probability variation A state is set and the fluctuation time of the first first special symbol variation is set to a predetermined period or longer (for example, 120 seconds or longer), The challenge mode (challenge effect) described above is configured to be executed, and the resurrection effect (see FIG. 361 (b)) is executed at the timing when the first special symbol change is stopped and displayed. It may be configured. With this configuration, while performing an effect (challenge effect) that makes it difficult for the player to determine that the probability variation A state is set, RUSH occurs when a predetermined period (120 seconds) elapses. Since the game is started, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness. In addition, since the challenge mode (challenge effect) is an effect that is executed even when the time saving state is set, that is, the second special symbol change is performed during the period when the challenge mode (challenge effect) is executed. Since it is possible to set a game state that should be executed and a game state that should not be executed, for example, when the challenge mode (challenge effect) is executed, the first special symbol change during execution is stopped and displayed. Until then, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that does not execute the new second special symbol change.

Further, when the probability variation A state is set, the fluctuation time of the first first special symbol change is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 120 seconds) and longer than the second predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or more). When is set, it is configured to execute an effect (challenge preparation effect) that makes it difficult to understand whether the current game state is the probability change A state, the time saving state, or the probability change B state. You may. Specifically, the character 851 is displayed in a running manner as in the display screen during the challenge effect (see FIG. 360), and the display area HR20 displays the characters "preparing" instead of the countdown display, and the sub-display area. The second display area Ds2 of Ds may be configured to execute an effect in which a comment "Challenge preparation in progress" indicating that the challenge preparation effect is currently in progress is displayed. That is, unlike the challenge effect, the countdown display in which the remaining period is subtracted and displayed based on the passage of time is not displayed based on the start of the first special symbol change that can satisfy the time saving end condition. It should be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which a new special symbol change is not executed until the countdown display becomes 0.

Further, at least a part of the effect mode of the challenge preparation effect is changed according to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol variation executed during the challenge preparation effect or the number of balls entering the second entrance 640. It may be configured so that the player can grasp the gaming state set according to the variable content. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game in which a new special symbol change is not executed during the challenge preparation production.

Further, in the 17th embodiment and the modified example of the 17th embodiment described above, the specific time saving end condition (first time saving ending condition) in which the time saving ending condition is likely to be satisfied only when the probability variation A state is set Although it is configured to be set, it is not limited to this, and part or all of the case where the probability variation B state is set, and part or all of the case where the time saving state is set. , The specified contents of the time reduction granting 17 table 202ne (see FIG. 368) may be set so that the specific time reduction end condition (first time reduction end condition) can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period during which the challenge effect is executed (the period during which the high-probability state of the normal symbol continues).

Further, in the 17th embodiment and the modified example of the 17th embodiment described above, as the time saving end condition, two types of time saving end conditions (first time saving end condition and second time saving ending condition) having different ease of establishment are used. Although the end condition) is provided, it may be configured to have three or more types of time-saving end conditions with different ease of establishment. In this case, for example, the number of times the first special symbol change is executed is The time saving end condition that is established when the number of times is reached twice, and the time saving ending condition that is established when the number of times that a specific lottery result (specific small hit) is reached in the second special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (twice). It is preferable to configure so as to set conditions. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where it is easier to satisfy the time saving end condition when the game is executed (when the second special symbol lottery is executed) during the challenge production, so that a new special symbol change can be caused during the challenge production. It is possible to make it difficult to play a game that is not executed.

In addition, by changing the production mode of the production executed during the challenge production, it is possible to suggest or notify the player of a part or all of the currently set time saving end conditions. Well, for example, as in the first embodiment described above, whether or not the elements (number of fluctuations and number of winnings) for establishing the time saving end condition are updated is determined by the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the set game state. It may be configured to notify the player in association with. As a result, the player is given a game in which the special symbol lottery is actively executed or a game in which the special symbol lottery is not executed is selected while predicting the game state currently set during the challenge production and the time saving end condition. Can be made.

<About the board surface deformation example of the 17th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 398, a modified example of the configuration (see FIG. 354) of the game board 13 of the 17th embodiment described above will be described. In the 17th embodiment described above, the V winning device 1650 and the variable winning device 2650 are included as the winning devices that are opened when the winning game is executed. Then, in the small hit game, the variable winning device 2650 was opened, and in the big hit game, the V winning device 1650 or the variable winning device 2650 was opened.

Therefore, there is a problem that it is easy to understand whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed based on the presence or absence of the opening operation of the V winning device 1650. On the other hand, in the modified example of the surface of the main board, the difference is that the winning device that is opened when the winning game is executed is changed to one type, and the other parts are the same.

FIG. 398 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the surface of the main board. As shown in FIG. 398, in the game board 13 of the main board surface modification example, the variable winning device 2650 is deleted from the game board 13 of the 17th embodiment described above, and the variable winning device 2650 is provided at a position where the variable winning device 2650 is provided. The difference is that the V winning device 1650 has been relocated. Then, in the modified example of the surface of the main board, the V winning device 1650 is configured to be opened regardless of whether the small hit game is executed or the big hit game is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed depending on the type of the winning device to be opened. ..

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the V winning device 1650 in the modified example of the main board surface has a case where a small hit game is executed and a case where a big hit game is executed in an opening scenario for operating the switching member 1650h. However, when the game ball passes through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3), the player is given a privilege (high probability state of a special symbol) because the game ball is in a specific area during the jackpot game. Since it is only when (probability change switch 1650e3) is passed, even if the V winning device 1650 is opened during the small hit game, the hit game can be smoothly executed.

When the V winning device 1650 is opened by the small hit game, the switching member 1650h may not be opened.

<18th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 399 to 414. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the 17th embodiment described above, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an advantageous latent state, it is only necessary to continue hitting right, and until the jackpot is won, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently performed. As a result of the hit game being executed and the prize balls by small hits being frequently obtained, it is possible to increase the number of balls held until the big hit. In other words, as the number of lottery until winning the big hit increases, it becomes easier to increase the number of balls held by increasing the number of balls released by the small hit, so we realized a novel gameplay that makes you expect not to win the big hit. Was there.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment, when the right-handed game is performed in an advantageous (higher jackpot probability than the normal state) latent state, the jackpot is hit as in the 17th embodiment. Until you win, you will often win a small hit where you will be given the opportunity to get a prize ball by entering a game ball into the variable winning device 2650, but when you win the big hit, you will have the opportunity to win a prize ball by a small hit. In addition to the end of the game, the rate at which the disadvantageous jackpot type (normal jackpot for 5 rounds) is determined becomes higher (easier to determine), while when a left-handed game is performed, a special symbol is displayed. It is easy to consume a relatively large number of balls to execute the lottery (the balls consumed before winning the jackpot), but it is easier to win more prize balls when the jackpot is won (the round of the jackpot itself). In addition to the fact that the number tends to increase, it is configured to be playable (you can also get a prize ball by a small hit by hitting right while the big hit fluctuates).

That is, when the right-handed game is performed in the latent state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is frequently opened, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and the probability (99% ratio) is high. As a result of being able to get a chance to win a prize ball by making a small hit, the advantageous situation is that the number of prize balls to be paid out is likely to be larger than the number of shot balls when hitting right. It holds, but winning a jackpot makes it easier to end a favorable situation. For this reason, when a right-handed game is played in an advantageous latent state, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases as the player wins only a small hit without winning a big hit. It is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls that can be played increases (a game property in which it is advantageous not to win a big hit).

On the other hand, when a left-handed game is performed in the latent state, the game ball enters the first entry port 64 at the same rate as in the normal state (for example, 1 in 16), so that it is a big hit. Until you win, the number of balls you have will decrease steadily, but if you win the jackpot, you will have multiple opportunities to win the prize ball by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right during the jackpot fluctuation. In addition to being able to start the jackpot game after obtaining the jackpot, the rate of becoming an advantageous latent state as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is relatively high. For this reason, when a left-handed game is played in an advantageous latent state, the smaller the number of lottery until the jackpot is won (the sooner the jackpot is won after the latent state is set). , Since the number of balls held can be suppressed, the number of balls held is increased more (the number and consumption of prize balls paid out between the start of the latent state and the end of the jackpot of the first special symbol). It is possible to realize the game property (the game property in which it is more advantageous to win the jackpot early) that the difference from the number of balls to be held can be increased.

In the 18th embodiment, a simultaneous fluctuation method capable of executing the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) is adopted. If the lottery of one special symbol is a big hit, it is regulated that the lottery of the other special symbol will be a big hit during the big hit fluctuation (the lottery based on the counter value that becomes the big hit is Even if it is executed, the lottery result is forcibly set to be out), and if the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the changing special symbol is removed. It is configured to control so that it is forcibly stopped by the symbol. For this reason, in particular, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won by the left-handed game in the latent state, the second special symbol is drawn by right-handing during the variable display of the first special symbol to show the jackpot. By executing, it is possible to execute a game that becomes a small hit with a high probability without winning a big hit. That is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous (low degree of advantage) is won and the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is preceded by the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Is displayed as a stop, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot fluctuation of the advantageous first special symbol is forcibly stopped due to the deviation. In other words, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won by the left-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed until the jackpot of the first special symbol is started (during the jackpot fluctuation). It forms an advantageous state where you can get a chance to win a prize ball by making a small hit with a high probability each time.

Here, conventionally, when a lottery of a special symbol is executed in an advantageous gaming state, a small hit is won with a high probability, and even if the big hit is not won, the small hit with a high probability is continuously won. , Game machines with specifications that can win a large number of prize balls are widely and generally known. In such a conventional game machine, as the number of lottery until the big hit is increased, more small hit games can be executed, so that the lottery of the special symbol does not become a big hit (so-called addiction). It is possible to win more prize balls in one advantageous game state. However, in such a conventional game machine, the smaller the number of lottery, the less chance of winning a prize ball by a small hit, so that there is a problem that the motivation of the player for the game is lowered. It was.

On the other hand, in the 18th embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent probability state, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed, and the right-handed strike is performed to increase the value. The lottery of the second special symbol that will be a small hit with a probability and there is no possibility of winning a big hit (even if the lottery is executed based on the random number value (counter value) that becomes the big hit, it will be rewritten to the lottery result of the loss) Can be executed. Further, in the 18th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the latent state is set to any one of 180 seconds to 300 seconds, while the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the latent state. The time is fixed to 3 seconds. As a result, by continuing to hit right while the jackpot of the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special is at least 60 times (180 seconds / 3 seconds) and at most 100 times (300 seconds / 3 seconds). A lottery of symbols can be executed. In other words, in an advantageous latent state, after the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (specific conditions are satisfied), the second is advantageous in that the small hit is won with a high probability simply by continuously hitting the right. It is possible to execute a lottery (advantageous game) of a special symbol at least 60 times (a specific number of times). Therefore, if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol by playing a left-handed game in the latent state, in addition to being able to win the prize ball by the jackpot itself, the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is performed a specific number of times. Since it is possible to make the player recognize that it has become possible to execute (60 times) or more, it is possible to have greater joy and satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 17 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 17th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 399. FIG. 399 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 18th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 399, a first flow path ry1 through which the game ball can flow down (pass) is provided in the right region of the game board 13, and the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path ry1 is almost certain. A through gate 67 is provided at a position where the through gate 67 passes through. Further, on the downstream side of the through gate 67, a V winning device 1650 as a big winning opening that is opened and closed during the execution of the big hit game is provided. The mechanism of the V winning device 1650 is the same as that of the V winning device 1650 in the 17th embodiment, and while the opening / closing door 1650f is closed, the game ball can pass through the upper surface of the closed opening / closing door 1650f. On the other hand, while the opening / closing door 1650f is open, the reached game ball is guided to the inside of the V winning device 1650 (falls from the opening). When the game ball passes through a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3, not shown) provided inside the V winning device 1650 during the execution of the jackpot game, the state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability change state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if no game ball has passed through the specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) during the execution of the jackpot game, the state after the jackpot is completed is set to the low probability state of the special symbol.

This V prize device 1650 is configured as a big prize opening in which 15 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball enters, and in each round of big hits, 10 or more after the opening / closing door 1650f is opened. When the entry of the game ball is detected or 30 seconds have passed from the opening, the ball is closed to end the round. Further, inside the V winning device 1650, there are a flow path (special discharge flow path 1650e2) that can pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 and a flow path (normal discharge flow path 1650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the probability change switch 1650e3. A switching member 1650h capable of flowing down (sorting) to either of the above is provided, and the switching member 1650h is set to a specific (fixed regardless of the jackpot type) predetermined with the start of the jackpot as a trigger. It is configured to switch with a switching pattern. On the other hand, the opening / closing door 1650f that closes and opens the V winning device 1650 is configured to be opened at a predetermined opening timing for each jackpot type in each round of jackpots. That is, in the probability variation jackpot, the opening timing that allows the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 1650e3 (the opening timing that allows the game ball to reach the switching member 1650h while the switching member 1650h is switched to the special discharge flow path 1650e2 side). Is set to the opening / closing door 1650f, while the opening timing (the switching member 1650h is switched to the normal discharge flow path 1650e1 side) is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 in the normal jackpot, and the game ball is changed to the switching member 1650h. By configuring the opening / closing door 1650f to set the opening timing (opening timing that can be reached), a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot are realized, and the game state after the jackpot ends is determined. More specifically, for example, the switching member 1650h is in a state of being switched to the special discharge flow path 1650e2 side for 3 seconds from the start of the first round of the jackpot, and to the normal discharge flow path 1650e1 side for the remaining period. The switching pattern is set so that it is in the switched state. Then, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the opening timing for opening the opening / closing door 1650f is set immediately after the start of the first round, while in the case of a normal jackpot, 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. The opening timing at which the opening / closing door 1650f is opened later is set. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the game ball from flowing down into the special discharge flow path 1650e2 in a normal jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference whether or not an advantageous special symbol probabilistic state is set depending on whether or not the probability change switch 1650e3 is passed during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, the game during the execution of the jackpot game. It is possible to improve the interest in.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 399. A second ball entry port 640 is provided in the second flow path ry2 formed on the downstream side of the V winning device 1650. The second entry port 640 has an opening (directed upward in the front view) formed so as to cut out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of the second path ry2, and one game ball is inserted. Each time a ball is played, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. In addition, it is configured as one of the starting winning openings that triggers the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball. The opening of the second entrance 640 is normally closed by being covered with an electric accessory 640a provided along with the second entrance 640. When the electric accessory 640a hits a normal symbol, the game ball enters the opening only for a predetermined period (0.04 seconds) from the closed state where it is difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball. It is controlled to be variable to the open state where the ball is possible.

The upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is reached after the game ball reaches the right end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a. It is configured so that it takes 1 second to roll and reach the left end side. The firing interval of the game balls is configured so that one can be fired every 0.6 seconds at the shortest. That is, when the right-handed game is played at the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval), the passing game is performed during 1 second when the game ball 1 is passing over the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a. At least one game ball launched after the ball can reach the electric accessory 640a. In other words, by performing the right-handed game at the shortest firing interval, at least one game ball can be in a state of passing through the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a while the electric accessory 640a is closed. .. Therefore, even if an extremely short period of 0.04 seconds is set as the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting a normal symbol, one or more passing through the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a at the time of opening. The game ball can be reliably dropped toward the opening and entered into the second entrance 640.

The game ball that has passed through the second flow path ry2 (passed through the electric accessory 640a while the electric accessory 640a is closed) flows into the third flow path ry3 provided on the downstream side of the second flow path ry2. .. The game ball that has flowed into the third flow path ry3 reaches the variable winning device 2650. The variable winning device 2650 is composed of a specific winning opening 2650a and an opening / closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the specific winning opening 2650a. It has an opening formed so as to be cut out, and is configured so that 10 balls are paid out as prize balls each time one game ball is inserted.

The variable winning device 2650 is a game in which the opening / closing door 2650f is controlled to open / close in a predetermined opening pattern during the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol). It temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can enter. In the closed state in which the opening / closing door 2650f closes the specific winning opening 2650a, the ball flowing down the third flow path ry3 passes by rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f and flows down toward the out opening 66. The upper surface (ball passage surface) of the opening / closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and is configured so that it takes 1 second for the game ball to pass over the opening / closing door 2650f. ing. By providing this delay means, it is possible to secure the required ball transit time in a smaller space. Although detailed description will be omitted, in the 18th embodiment, the opening / closing door 2650f is used as a delay means so as to have a ball passage having a high frictional resistance (higher frictional resistance than other ball passage surfaces of the third flow path ry3). An uneven portion on which the ball can get over is formed on the upper surface of the door.

The delay means may be configured so as to allow the game ball to pass through a predetermined section for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 1 second or longer), and for example, a passage in which the ball path is zigzag-shaped. It may be formed, or the material of the ball passage surface may be formed of a substance having a high coefficient of friction such as rubber.

Further, each winning opening provided in the first flow path ry1 to the third flow path ry3 described above in which the ball launched by the left-handed game (a game aiming at the left side region (left side region) of the variable display device unit 80) is provided. Nails are planted below the game board 13 (below the first entry port 64 and to the right) as a regulatory member (regulatory means) for regulating entry into the (ball entry port). ing. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different games for the right-handed game and the left-handed game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired (hard to get tired). ..

In the 18th embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds to 5 seconds as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, right-handed strikes are continuously performed at the shortest firing interval. Even if this is continued, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for 0.04 seconds at intervals of 3 to 5 seconds. In other words, a part of the game ball hit right in a state other than the jackpot enters the second entrance 640 during the 0.04 second opening period of the electric accessory 640a based on the hit of the normal symbol. , The remaining game balls reach the variable winning device 2650. Therefore, in an advantageous latent state, when the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entrance 640 is frequently executed and the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit. , The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reached the variable winning device 2650 can be entered into the specific winning opening 2650a to obtain the winning ball.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 399. As shown in FIG. 399, the fish mark 910 is affixed to the upstream side of the flow path on the left side of the front view (mainly the flow path through which the game ball launched by left-handed hitting flows down) with respect to the variable winning device 80. At the same time, the turtle mark 911 is affixed to the upstream side of the flow path on the right side of the front view (mainly the flow path through which the game ball launched by right-handed hitting flows down) with respect to the variable winning device 80. By attaching each mark to the upstream side of each flow path in this way, it is possible for the player to easily grasp which flow path the launched game ball has flowed into.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 400 to 403, a characteristic effect mode in the 18th embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 400A, an effect mode of the game method selection effect, which is one of the characteristic effect modes in the 18th embodiment, will be described. This game method selection effect is given to the player before the game method in the advantageous latent state shifts to the latent state (during the ending period of the jackpot that shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends). It is a production to make a choice. FIG. 400A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of this game method selection effect.

Here, in the 18th embodiment, as described above, it is possible to provide a game with different merits and demerits depending on whether the right-handed game is performed in the latent state and the left-handed game is performed. are doing. That is, if a right-handed game is performed in a latent state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained when a big hit is won is instead of being able to frequently win a small hit and increase the number of balls held before the big hit. It is a game that is less and more likely to be set in a disadvantageous normal state after the end of the jackpot (a game that is advantageous if you continue to be addicted to without winning the jackpot). On the other hand, if you hit left in the latent state, you will consume a relatively large number of balls before you hit the jackpot (the same amount of balls you have when playing a game in a disadvantageous normal state), but instead of the first After winning the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed a specific number of times (60 times) or more during the jackpot fluctuation to win a large amount of prize balls by the small hit, and then the prize ball of the big hit is also It is a game that can be acquired (a game that is more advantageous to win the jackpot early). Therefore, in the 18th embodiment, the game method selection effect for selecting whether to perform the right-handed game or the left-handed game in the latent state is executed before the latent state is started. It has a structure. As a result, the player can be made to decide the game method in the latent state in advance, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which game method should be selected after the transition to the latent state. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 400A, when the game method selection effect is executed during the ending period of the type of jackpot (latent jackpot) that shifts to the latent state after the jackpot ends, the upper part of the main display area Dm is Then, the text "Determine the game method after the big hit!" Is displayed. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR30 and a display area HR31 are formed on the lower left side and the lower right side of the main display area Dm, respectively. As shown in FIG. 400A, in the display area HR30, the characters "left-handed game", the characters "pulling route", and the characters "quick pulling chance !!" are displayed. In addition, an arrow image YG1 imitating an upward arrow indicated by a solid line is displayed below these characters, and a fish mark affixed to the board surface of the game board 13 is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area HR30. An image imitating 910 is displayed. Based on these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that when a game method in which a left-handed game is performed aiming at the fish mark 910 is selected, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot earlier. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 400A, in the display area HR31, the characters "right-handed game", the characters "weak route", and the characters "the more you get hooked, the more chances you have!" Are displayed. .. In addition, an arrow image YG2 imitating an upward arrow indicated by a broken line is displayed below these characters, and in the upper right portion of the display area HR31, the turtle attached to the board surface of the game board 13 is displayed. An image imitating the mark 911 is displayed. Based on these display contents, when selecting a game method in which a right-handed game is performed aiming at the turtle mark 911, the player is informed that it is more advantageous to get hooked without winning the jackpot. It can be easily understood. Further, since the arrow image YG1 displayed in the display area HR30 is displayed as a solid line, the arrow image YG2 displayed in the display area 31 is displayed as a broken line, so that it is currently selected. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the game method is the game method (the game method by the left-handed game) indicated by the display content of the display area HR30.

Further, as shown in FIG. 400A, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, with respect to the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed on the left end and the upper side thereof. A display area Ds1a for displaying the indicated number is formed, and a display area Ds1b for displaying the number indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is formed in the lower left end. Further, on the right side of these display areas Ds1a and Ds1b, the characters "select by PUSH" and an image imitating the frame button 22 are displayed. Based on these display contents, which of the arrow images YG1 and YG2 is displayed as a solid line each time the frame button 22 is pressed (indicated by the game method indicated by the display contents of the display area HR30 and the display contents of the display area HR31). It is possible to easily make the player understand that it is possible to switch between the game method being played and which state is selected. After the transition to the latent state, different production modes are executed according to the game method selected by the player in the game method selection effect. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the game method (left-handed game) indicated by the display content of the display area HR30 is selected is referred to as the first selection state, and is indicated by the display content of the display area HR31. The state in which the game method (right-handed game) is selected is referred to as the second selection state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 400 (b), the player submerges in a state (left-handed game) in which the left-handed game (first game method) is selected in the game method selection effect (see FIG. 400 (a)). The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the state shifts to the certain state will be described. As shown in FIG. 400 (b), in the state in which the player selects the first game method (first selection state), an image imitating the fish mark 910 and "is displayed on the guidance display area Dm2. "Aim!" Is displayed. That is, the content urging the player to shoot the game ball (play the left-handed game) aiming at the fish mark 910 is displayed. As a result, the game method selected in the game method selection effect (see FIG. 400A) can be easily confirmed only by visually recognizing the guidance display area Dm2, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. it can.

Here, instead of clearly displaying "left-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2, the display mode is limited to indirectly recommending left-handed by displaying a prompt to shoot a game ball aiming at the fish mark 910. This is because if you hit left, you will be at a disadvantage compared to hitting right (reducing the number of balls you have), at least until you win the jackpot, so it is recognized that you are clearly informing you of the disadvantageous game method. The purpose is to suppress this.

In the first selection state, the guidance display area Dm2 may be clearly displayed as "left-handed". With such a configuration, the player can more clearly understand the game method selected by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 400 (b), two display areas Dm40 and Dm41 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape are displayed vertically side by side in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm. In the upper display area Dm40, characters indicating the game method selected by the player are displayed, and in the lower display area Dm41, characters indicating the number of lottery of special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed are displayed. In FIG. 400 (b), the characters “strong route” indicating a left-handed game (first selection state) are displayed in the display area Dm40, and the number of lottery of special symbols is 15 in the display area Dm41. The case where the character "15 rotations" indicating that it is the second time is displayed is illustrated. With these display contents, it is possible to easily confirm the game method selected by oneself and the number of lottery of special symbols executed in the selected game method, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. The display area Dm41 is configured to display only the number of lottery times of the special symbol corresponding to the selected game method. That is, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right-handing in the first selection state, the display content of the display area Dm41 is not updated. As a result, even if the game is played by a game method different from the selected game method, the display content of the display area Dm41 is not updated, so that the player can easily notice the error in the game method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 400B, a treasure box image 852 imitating a treasure box is displayed in the display area Ds2 of the central portion in the main display area Dm. In the first selection state, it is configured to notify whether or not the jackpot can be won according to what comes out of the treasure box image 852. Therefore, by simply paying attention to the contents of the treasure box image 852, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a big hit, so that it is possible to provide playability that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, the characters "Aim for a big hit" are displayed in the central portion of the sub-display area Ds. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the game should be played with the aim of winning the jackpot.

In the display areas Ds3a and Ds3b displayed at the right end of the sub-display area Ds, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed, respectively. As a result, the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol can be easily confirmed, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, the effect mode after the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the first selection state and the jackpot fluctuation is started will be described. Here, as described above, in the first selection state (when the left-handed game is selected in the latent state), if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won by left-handing, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. By continuously hitting the right side inside, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed and the small hit game can be executed frequently. Specifically, by making sure that a long fluctuation time of 180 seconds to 300 seconds is set as the jackpot fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the latent state, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed. It is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at least about 60 times. Since a small hit is won at a rate of 99% for each lottery of the second special symbol, even if the minimum fluctuation time (180 seconds) is set, it is possible to expect a small hit of around 59 times, which is the longest. When the fluctuation time (300 seconds) of is set, it is possible to expect a small hit winning of about 99 times. Therefore, between the time when the big hit is won and the time when the big hit actually starts, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by a small hit of about 59 to 99 times. In the eighteenth embodiment, an average of 1.1 game balls are entered into the specific winning opening 2650a per small hit, and 15 prize balls are entered for one winning ball into the variable winning device 2650. Is configured to be paid out (given), so that 980 to 1630 prize balls can be expected to be paid out before the jackpot starts. As described above, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, unless the player stops launching, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is almost the same. The lottery of the second special symbol can be executed a number of times (60 to 100 times) according to the time. In other words, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, it is confirmed that at least about 1000 prize balls will be paid out by the time the jackpot fluctuation ends, which is a novel playability. Can be done.

Further, since the jackpot of the first special symbol in the 18th embodiment has only 10 rounds or 16 rounds (only a relatively large number of jackpots are provided). Even the jackpot itself can receive a large amount of prize balls. Specifically, 1500 prizes can be paid out for 10 rounds of jackpots, and 2400 prize balls can be paid out for 16 rounds of jackpots. A total of around 2480 prize balls and a maximum of around 4030 prize balls can be paid out. Therefore, a large amount of payout can be received only by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol once in the latent state. Therefore, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the first selection state, the player It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 401 (a) shows a display mode (stock RUSH rush effect) when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the first selection state (when the player selects the left-handed game in the latent state). It is a figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 401 (a), when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the display content of the guidance display area Dm2 is switched to the character "right-handed" at the same time as the big hit fluctuation starts. In addition, the characters "Stock RUSH rushed !!" were displayed for the main display area Dm, and the jackpot fluctuation started from the treasure box image 852, and the right to receive at least 2400 payouts was obtained ( An effect is executed in which the result display mode 852a for notifying the player that (stocked) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 401 (a), the stock display 852a has the characters "stock 2400". Further, the characters "Right-handed start !!" are displayed on the display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the jackpot fluctuation is started and the player can easily understand that the player can receive the payout of 2400 prize balls just by hitting the right side. Here, in the 18th embodiment, 2480 to 4030 prize balls are paid out based on the jackpot winning of 1 first special symbol according to the fluctuation time of the jackpot and the number of rounds of the jackpot. However, in the stock RUSH rush effect, the result display mode 852a with the characters "stock 2400" is uniformly displayed. In other words, it is configured to display characters suggesting a smaller number of payouts than the actual payout. Then, in the case of a jackpot fluctuation of variable time or a jackpot of the number of rounds that can receive more than 2400 payouts, the minimum guaranteed number of prize balls to be paid out by the end of the jackpot is displayed at a predetermined opportunity. It is configured to increase. As a result, even if the combination of the variable time and the number of rounds can be paid out only around 2480 pieces, the game can be performed with the expectation that a larger number of payouts will be notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As shown in FIG. 401 (a), a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area Dm42 for displaying a comment according to the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is won is formed immediately below the display area Dm41. The comment displayed in the display area Dm42 is set to praise the player as the number of fluctuations until the jackpot winning (the number of lottery of the first special symbol) is smaller, while the number of fluctuations until the jackpot winning is larger. , Contents that are easy to make the player feel sorry are set. In the example of FIG. 401 (a), as a comment praising the winning of the jackpot at a relatively early stage (the 20th lottery of the first special symbol after the jackpot is completed), the comment "well done" is given. The case where it is displayed is illustrated.

It should be noted that the judgment as to whether the number of fluctuations until winning is large or small is made according to the jackpot probability (the average number of lottery until winning the jackpot) in the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol). In the 18th embodiment, since the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol is set to 1/100 (1/200 in the low probability state), the average number of lottery until the jackpot is won. Is 100 times. Further, in the 18th embodiment, the case where the jackpot of the first special symbol is won by the average number of lottery (100 times) in the first selection state and the case where the second special symbol is won by the average number of lottery in the second selection state. The number of balls that can be increased from the start of the latent state to the transition to the normal state (the number of game balls fired from the number of prize balls paid out) depending on the case of winning the jackpot. The net increase in the number of game balls minus the above is equal (for example, the difference in the net increase is 10% or less). Therefore, when the number of lottery to the jackpot is more than 100, the net increase of the game balls is more likely to increase in the second selection state (right-handed game) than in the first selection state (left-handed game). When the number of lottery to the jackpot is less than 100 times, the net increase of the game balls is more likely to be larger in the first selection state than in the second selection state (it is more likely to be advantageous). In the first selection state, until the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, about 16 balls are consumed on average by the time the lottery of the special symbol is executed once, while in the second selection state, it is. This is because it is possible to increase the number of balls held by an average of about 15 each time the special symbol lottery is executed.

In consideration of these circumstances, in the 18th embodiment, if the number of lottery winnings for the jackpot of the first special symbol is around the average (100 times) (75 to 125 times), the average luck (75 to 125 times). It is determined that the so-called "pull" (hiki) is average), and the comment "neither good nor bad" is displayed on the display area Dm42. In addition, if it is slightly less than the average (if the number of lottery to the jackpot is 50 to 74 times), it is judged that it is relatively lucky (the pull is strong), and a comment "OK" is given to the display area Dm42. If it is displayed and it is less than half of the average (if the number of lottery to the jackpot is 10 to 49 times), it is judged that you are very lucky (strong pull), and the display area Dm42 is "well done". If you win the jackpot with an extremely small number of lottery times within 9 times, it is judged that you are extremely lucky (strong pull) and the comment "great" is displayed for the display area Dm42. Let me.

On the other hand, if the number of lottery wins for the jackpot of the first special symbol is slightly higher than the average (if the number of lottery to the jackpot is 126 to 150 times), it is judged that there is some luck (bad luck). If you display the comment "Let's do our best next time" on the display area Dm42 and exceed 1.5 times the average number of lottery (when the number of lottery to the jackpot is 151 to 200), you are quite lucky. Is judged to be bad (bad pull), and the comment "Sorry !!" is displayed on the display area Dm42, and if it is more than twice the average number of lottery (the number of lottery to the jackpot exceeds 200). In the case of), it is judged that the person is extremely unlucky (the pull is bad), and the comment "Is it better to take the weak route next time?" Is displayed on the display area Dm42.

In this way, by varying the comment to be displayed in the display area Dm42 according to the number of lottery when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, it is estimated from the comment how lucky the player is. Therefore, it can be used as one of the judgment factors of whether to select the first selection state (left-handed game) or the second selection state (right-handed game) in the latent state from the next time onward. it can. That is, in the game method selection effect (see FIG. 400A), the game property of selecting the game method is realized by adding the comment displayed in the display area Dm42 at the time of the previous jackpot winning in the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 18th embodiment, the display area Dm42 is configured to display comments according to the number of lottery at the time of winning a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the predetermined number of lottery times (for example, 100 times or 150 times) is reached without winning the jackpot in the first selection state, it is determined that the ball held is consumed too much, and the ball held is hit right. It may be configured to display comments that recommend (suggest) to increase (change the game method). Specifically, for example, the comment "You can replenish your ball by hitting right!" May be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from consuming all the balls held by the player at the time of transition to the latent state without being able to win the jackpot in the first selection state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player has to quit the game even though he / she knows that he / she is in an advantageous state because he / she runs out of balls in an advantageous latent state. The timing of displaying a comment that recommends (suggests) right-handedness is not limited to this. For example, the number of game balls stored in the upper plate 17 may be detected (determined), and a comment may be displayed when the number becomes less than a predetermined number. In addition, a comment is made when it is detected that the ball lending button 42 is first operated (pressed) in the latent state (that is, it is highly possible that the prize ball due to the jackpot before shifting to the latent state is exhausted). May be displayed, or a comment may be displayed when it is detected that the frequency (remaining amount information) displayed on the frequency display unit 41 becomes 0. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being completely exhausted in the latent state, making it impossible to continue the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401 (b), an effect mode of the stock RUSH effect executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation will be described. FIG. 401 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the stock RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 401 (b), during the execution of the stock RUSH effect, the treasure chest images 852 arranged in a row in the main display area Dm are displayed one by one each time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The effect of trying to open is executed. More specifically, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a ball entering the variable winning device 2650 is detected during the small hit game (that is, a condition (trigger) for paying out 15 prize balls). ), The effect that the result display mode 852a with the character "+15" added from the treasure box image 852 appears is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the effect is executed in synchronization with the payout of the prize balls for the small hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 401 (b), a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area Dm43 is formed below the display area Dm40. In this display area Dm43, there are a display of the number of prize balls already acquired and a display showing the lower limit of the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the end of the jackpot (minimum guaranteed number of payouts). Displayed in the upper left and lower right. In FIG. 401 (b), the character "15pt" corresponding to 15 prize balls already acquired is displayed, and 2400 are guaranteed as the minimum guaranteed number of payouts until the jackpot ends. The state in which the characters "2400pt" are displayed is illustrated. With these display contents, it is possible to easily confirm how much remaining payment can be received, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402, the additional effect performed in the stock RUSH effect will be described. FIG. 402 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the additional effect is executed. Here, as described above, in the 18th embodiment, at the start of the stock RUSH (at the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol), the fluctuation time (the number of fluctuating changes of the second special symbol that can be performed) and the fluctuation end Regardless of the number of jackpot rounds executed later, the minimum guaranteed number of 2400 is uniformly notified once. For this reason, if it is possible to receive a payout of more than 2400 prize balls, the display of the minimum guaranteed number will be updated (add 300pt or 600pt) at a predetermined opportunity. By executing the above, the minimum guaranteed number according to the actual number of payouts will be approached by the end of the jackpot. More specifically, when the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, 900 or 1200), this additional effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 402, when the addition effect occurs, the result display mode 852a with characters indicating the minimum guaranteed number (pt number) to be added appears from the treasure box image 852 in the main display area Dm. The production is executed. In the example of FIG. 402, the case where the result display mode 852a with the characters “+600 pt” appears is illustrated. Further, as shown in FIG. 402, the characters "guaranteed UP !!" are displayed with respect to the central portion of the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the minimum line (minimum guaranteed number) of the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the end of the jackpot has increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, the effect mode in the second selection state will be described. In the second selection state, an effect similar to the effect mode (see FIG. 401 (b)) in the stock RUSH in the first selection state is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 403 (a), in the main display area Dm, the characters "RUSH in" are displayed, and one treasure box image 852 is opened for each variation display of the second special symbol. The production is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 403 (a), in the second selection state in the 18th embodiment, an image imitating the turtle mark 911 and "Aim!" Are displayed for the guidance display area Dm2. Characters and are displayed. That is, the content prompting the launch of the game ball (performing a right-handed game) aiming at the turtle mark 911 is displayed. As a result, the game method selected in the game method selection effect (see FIG. 400A) can be easily confirmed only by visually recognizing the guidance display area Dm2, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. it can.

Here, instead of clearly displaying "right-handed" in the guidance display area Dm2, the display mode is limited to indirectly recommending right-handed by displaying a display prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the turtle mark 911. The reason is that if you hit right, if you win the jackpot early, it will be disadvantageous to the player (the number of prize balls that can be won will decrease), so the disadvantageous game method is clearly notified. The purpose is to prevent people from being recognized as doing so.

In the first selection state, the guidance display area Dm2 may be clearly displayed as "right-handed". With such a configuration, the player can more clearly understand the game method selected by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 403 (a), the character "weak route" indicating the second selection state is displayed in the display area Dm40. Further, in the central portion of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Keep pulling off !!" are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that it is advantageous not to make a big hit.

FIG. 403 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a big hit is won in the second selection state. As shown in FIG. 403 (b), when the jackpot is won in the second selection state, the effect that the result display mode 852a with the symbol “x” appears from the treasure box image 852 is executed. In addition, the characters "End !!" are displayed in the central portion of the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state in which the small hit game is frequently executed by winning the big hit of the second special symbol is interrupted. In addition, the jackpot of the second special symbol has a lower ratio of the latent jackpot than the jackpot of the second special symbol (set to a ratio of 40%), so that a disadvantageous normal state may be set. It is also possible to make the player understand that there is sex.

Further, as shown in FIG. 403 (b), comments are displayed on the display area Dm42 according to the number of fluctuations until the jackpot is won. The comment displayed in the display area Dm42 is set to praise the player as the number of fluctuations until the jackpot win (the number of lottery of the second special symbol) increases, while the number of fluctuations until the jackpot win decreases. , Contents that are easy to make the player feel sorry are set. In the example of FIG. 403 (b), the jackpot was won at a relatively early stage (the 19th lottery of the second special symbol after the jackpot was completed), resulting in a relatively disappointing result for the player. This is an example of the case where the comment "Sorry !!" is displayed.

The correspondence between the number of fluctuations until winning and the comment displayed for the display area Dm42 is the opposite of that of the first selection state. As described above, when the number of lottery to the jackpot is more than 100, the net increase of the game balls is more likely to increase in the second selection state (right-handed game) than in the first selection state (left-handed game). (It becomes easy to be advantageous), and when the number of lottery to the jackpot is less than 100 times, the net increase of the game balls is likely to be larger in the first selection state than in the second selection state (it becomes easier to be advantageous). This is because it is configured in. Specifically, if the number of lottery winnings in the jackpot is around the average (100 times) (75 to 125 times), the comment "No good or bad" is displayed on the display area Dm42, and the average. If it is slightly less (if the number of lottery to the jackpot is 50 to 74), the comment "Let's do our best next time" is displayed on the display area Dm42, and if it is less than half of the average (up to the jackpot). (If the number of lottery is 10 to 49), the comment "Sorry !!" is displayed for the display area Dm42, and if the jackpot is won with an extremely small number of lottery within 9 times, the display area Dm42 will be displayed. On the other hand, the comment "Maybe the weak route is better next time ...?" Is displayed.

On the other hand, if the number of lottery winnings for the jackpot of the first special symbol is slightly higher than the average (if the number of lottery until the jackpot is 126 to 150 times), the comment "OK" is displayed for the display area Dm42. If it exceeds 1.5 times the average number of lottery (when the number of lottery to the jackpot is 151 to 200), the comment "well done" is displayed on the display area Dm42. When the number of lottery is twice or more the average number of lottery (when the number of lottery to the big hit exceeds 200), the comment "excellent" is displayed on the display area Dm42.

In this way, by changing the comment to be displayed in the display area Dm42 according to the number of lottery when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, how lucky the player is (weakness of pulling). Since it can be inferred from the comment, it is a judgment factor of whether to select the first selection state (left-handed game) or the second selection state (right-handed game) in the latent state from the next time onward. It can be used as one. That is, in the game method selection effect (see FIG. 400A), the game property of selecting the game method is realized by adding the comment displayed in the display area Dm42 at the time of the previous jackpot winning in the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the 18th embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 404 and 405. Here, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 18th embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th embodiment (see FIG. 364 (a)) in that the first random number 17 table 202na is replaced with the first random number 18 table. The point that 202oa is provided, the point that the first type selection 18 table 202ob is provided instead of the first type selection 17 table 202nb, and the variation pattern 18 table 202no is provided instead of the variation pattern 17 table 202nd. The point is that the hit operation 18 table 202 og is provided instead of the hit operation 17 table 202 ng. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 404 (a), the details of the first random number 18 table 202oa in the 18th embodiment will be described. Here, although the illustration is omitted, the first random number 18 table 202oa in the 18th embodiment is the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202oa1 referred to when the first special symbol lottery (win / fail determination) is performed. , The special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202oa2 referred to when the lottery (win / fail determination) of the second special symbol is performed, and at least. Of these, the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202oa1 are the same as the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number 17 table 202na1 (see FIG. 364 (b)) in the above-described 17th embodiment. The explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 404 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202oa2 in the 18th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 404 (a), in the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202oa2, the jackpot determination value (the range of the value of the first random number counter C1) in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 4". The five determination values of are defined in association with each other. Further, as the jackpot determination value (the range of the value of the first random number counter C1) in the high probability state of the special symbol, 10 determination values of "0 to 9" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/200 (5/1000), and it is determined as a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of being done is 1/100 (10/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (a), the state of the special symbol (low probability state or high probability state) is set as the determination value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Regardless of (), 989 determination values of "10 to 998" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being determined as a small hit is 989/1000 (about 99%).

As described above, in the 18th embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit is almost (at a rate of about 99%). As a result, when a right-handed hit is made in the latent state, it is possible to give an opportunity to win a small hit and win a prize ball almost every time the lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the case.

Next, the details of the first type selection 18 table 202ob in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 404 (b). FIG. 404 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection 18 table 202ob in the 18th embodiment. The first hit type selection 18 table 202ob is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, similarly to the first hit type selection 17 table 202nb in the 17th embodiment. It is a data table.

As shown in FIG. 404 (b), in the first hit type selection 18 table 202ob in the 18th embodiment, there are four jackpot types of "big hit A18" to "big hit D18" as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. The value of the first type counter C2 is associated with each of the above. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 19" and "big hit A18" as the jackpot type. There is. This "big hit A18" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds, which is the largest among all the big hit types, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to an advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit A18" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the number of rounds (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) and the game state after the jackpot is completed. Of the 100 random values from 0 to 99 that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 of the random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit A18" are "0 to 19". Therefore, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of "big hit A18" is determined is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "20 to 64" with "big hit B18" as the jackpot type. This "big hit B18" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to an advantageous latent state. Therefore, although the "big hit B18" is inferior to the "big hit A18" in terms of the number of rounds, it is a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Of the 100 random values from 0 to 99 that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 45 random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit B18" are "20 to 64". Therefore, the ratio of "big hit B18" determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is 45% (45/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), "big hit C18" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65-89". This "big hit C18" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit C18" is a jackpot type that is most advantageous in terms of the number of rounds (the number of prize balls that can be obtained), but is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot is completed. Of the 100 random values from 0 to 99 that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit C18" are "65-89". Therefore, the rate at which "big hit C18" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is 25% (25/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" with "big hit D18" as the jackpot type. This "big hit D18" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit D18" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot is completed. Since the jackpot of the second special symbol is uniformly set to 5 rounds, it is more advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls than the jackpot of the second special symbol. Of the 100 random values from 0 to 99 that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit D18" is 10 from "90 to 99". Therefore, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of "big hit D18" is determined is 10% (10/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), in the first hit type selection 18 table 202ob in the 18th embodiment, the jackpot types of the second special symbol are "big hit E18" and "big hit F18". The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with each of the two jackpot types. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 39" in association with "big hit E18" as the jackpot type. There is. This "big hit E18" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is set to 5 rounds, which is the smallest among all the big hit types, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to an advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit E18" is the most disadvantageous for the player in terms of the number of rounds (the number of prize balls that can be obtained), but is a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random values from 0 to 99 that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit E18" are "0 to 39". Therefore, the rate at which "big hit E18" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "40 to 99" in association with "big hit F18" as the jackpot type. This "big hit F18" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is set to 5 rounds, which is the smallest among all the big hit types, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit F18" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of the number of rounds (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) and the game state after the jackpot is completed. Of the 100 random values from 0 to 99 that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 60 random values (counter values) associated with the "big hit F18" are "40 to 99". Therefore, the ratio of "big hit F18" determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol is 60% (60/100).

As described above, in the 18th embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, 10 rounds or 16 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and the ratio of setting an advantageous latent state is also 65%. On the other hand, if you win a big hit in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, the number of rounds will be 5 rounds and the ratio of the latent state will be 40%, which is relatively low, so the lottery of the 1st special symbol It can be said that the case of winning a big hit is more likely to be advantageous than the case of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol.

Next, the details of the hit operation 18 table 202og in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 404 (c). The hit operation 18 table 202og is a data table referred to for setting the operation during the jackpot game for each jackpot type. FIG. 404 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hit operation 18 table 202og.

As shown in FIG. 404 (c), the opening period is 4 seconds for each round of big hits for the latent big hits "big hit A18", "big hit B18", and "big hit E18". The hit operation in which the V winning device 1650 is opened is defined in association with the above. Further, in the first round, an opening pattern is set in which the opening / closing door 1650f of the V winning device 1650 is immediately opened without a delay period. As described above, the switching pattern is set so that the switching member 1650h is switched to the special discharge flow path 1650e2 side for 3 seconds at the start of the first round, and is switched to the normal discharge flow path 1650e1 side for the remaining period. Will be done. Therefore, by opening the opening / closing door 1650f at the start of the first round, the game ball reaches the switching member 1650h during the period during which the game ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 1650e2 side, and the probability change switch 1650e3 Can be easily passed through.

On the other hand, for the hit types "Big hit C18", "Big hit D18", and "Big hit F18" (normal big hit), the opening period is 0.5 seconds, and the V winning device 1650 is used in each round of the big hit. The hit operation to be released is specified in association with each other. Further, in the first round, an opening pattern is set in which the opening / closing door 1650f of the V winning device 1650 is opened after a delay period of 3.5 seconds. That is, an opening pattern is set in which the opening / closing door 1650f is opened after the switching member 1650h is switched to the normal discharge flow path 1650e1 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being distributed to the special discharge flow path 1650e2 and passing through the probability change switch 1650e3 when a normal big hit occurs.

The period from the start of the jackpot to the opening of the opening / closing door 1650f for the first time is fixed to 4 seconds regardless of the jackpot type. That is, in the case of the probabilistic jackpot, the opening / closing door 1650f is opened when the opening period of 4 seconds elapses, while in the case of the normal jackpot, the opening period is 0.5 seconds and the delay period is 3. The opening / closing door 1650f is configured to be opened when 5 seconds have passed (4 seconds have passed). This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the opening / closing door 1650f is a probabilistic jackpot. Therefore, even if a normal jackpot is won, the expectation that it is a probabilistic jackpot will be longer. You can keep holding it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 404 (c), in the small hit, an opening operation in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened is set after a small hit opening period of 0.5 seconds.

Next, the details of the variation pattern 18 table 202od in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 405. Although not shown here, the variation pattern 18 table 202od in the 18th embodiment has the variation pattern in the latent state with the normal 18 table 202od1 referred to for selecting the variation pattern in the normal state. It is composed of at least two types of data tables, the latent probability 18 table 202od2, which is referred to for selection. First, the details of the normal 18 table 202od1 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 405 (a).

FIG. 405 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal 18 table 202od1 in the 18th embodiment. Of the 18 tables 202od1 for normal use, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern type of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) and the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is described in the 17th embodiment (and the 4th embodiment) described above. Since it is the same as the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 (see FIG. 132) in the mode), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, among the normal 18 tables 202od1 in the 18th embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, when the lottery result is out of order (including small hits), all random values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take ( With respect to the range (0 to 198) of the counter value), a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when the irregular game method of hitting right in the normal state is performed, the lottery of the special symbol is executed only once every 600 seconds, so that the game efficiency can be extremely deteriorated. Therefore, for the purpose of obtaining a small hit prize ball or the like, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of hitting right in a normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 405 (a), as the jackpot fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time per 3 seconds is defined in association with the entire range that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Has been done. The reason why the jackpot fluctuation time is set to a relatively short time of 3 seconds is that in the 18th embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol, the lottery of the other special symbol is restricted (restricted) so as not to be a jackpot. ) This is because the control is adopted. That is, if the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to 600 seconds in the same manner as the deviation fluctuation, the right-handed strike is temporarily performed in the normal state without malicious intent due to an incorrect firing direction or the like, and the second If the lottery of the special symbol is executed and the big hit is won, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed for a long period of 600 seconds, the big hit will not be formed, which is an extremely disadvantageous situation. Moreover, the jackpot of the second special symbol is more likely to be disadvantageous than the jackpot of the second special symbol (a disadvantageous normal state is likely to be set), so that there is a risk that the jackpot will be excessively disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the 18th embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by setting a short fluctuation time of 3 seconds. It is configured to minimize the disadvantageous period that cannot be a big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

Next, the details of the latent probability 18 table 202od2 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 405 (b). FIG. 405 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability 18 table 202od2. As shown in FIG. 405 (b), in the latent state, the fluctuation time deviates by 0.5 seconds with respect to the deviation of the first special symbol with respect to the entire range of values that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Latent fluctuations are specified in association with each other. Therefore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, an extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set in the case of a loss, so basically the reserved ball of the first special symbol is set during the latent state. There is no accumulation.

Here, if a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, etc.) can be selected as the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol, the hold of the first special symbol is accumulated during the long deviation fluctuation. , An event may occur in which a hit hold is included. In this situation, there is a possibility that a player who has become a hand-held player during a long period of deviation will make a right-handed hit in order to win a small hit prize ball by right-handed. In this case, the lottery of the second special symbol will be a big hit, and the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol will be executed first, and the lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol will be executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. If it is executed, it will be forcibly rewritten as a lottery result that is out of order (the winning of the first special symbol will be invalid). Therefore, it will be a great loss for the player. In order to prevent this, in the 18th embodiment, the fluctuation time is set so that the hold of the first special symbol is hardly accumulated, and the jackpot of the first special symbol is suppressed from becoming invalid. ..

Further, in the 18th embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the first selection state, the stock RUSH rush is notified at the same time as the big hit fluctuation starts, and the player is immediately started to hit right. It is configured as follows. In other words, in the latent state, when the stock RUSH rush is not notified at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined that the fluctuation is out of alignment. For this reason, even though the player is convinced that the player is out of the game immediately after the start of the change, the first special symbol is changed for an unnecessarily long time, and the lottery for the next first special symbol is desired to be executed at an early stage. In order to prevent the player from being annoyed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 0.5 seconds, which is extremely short. As a result, the player who has selected the first selection state can be less likely to have stress.

As shown in FIG. 405 (b), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is 180 seconds as a fluctuation pattern with respect to the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99". The hit latency variation 1 is defined in association with each other, and the hit latency variation 2 with a variation time of 240 seconds is associated with the range of "100 to 169", and is defined in "170 to 198". With respect to the range, the fluctuation time for latent probability 3 per 300 seconds is defined in association with the range. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the fluctuation time of 180 seconds is set at a rate of about 50%, and the fluctuation time of 240 seconds is set at a rate of about 35%. A fluctuation time of 300 seconds is set at a rate of 15%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 405 (b), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is a uniform fluctuation pattern (out-of-short fluctuation) of 3 seconds regardless of the lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , Or a short fluctuation per hit) is set. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the fluctuation time of 180 seconds is set in the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed about 60 times. Further, when the fluctuation time of 240 seconds is set, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed about 80 times, and when the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is set, about 100 times of the second special symbol can be executed. 2 A lottery of special symbols can be executed. In other words, there is a high probability (about 99% of the percentage) of small hits just by continuously right-handing after the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (specific conditions are met) in an advantageous latent state. It is possible to execute the lottery (advantageous game) of the advantageous second special symbol that wins the prize at least 60 times (specific number of times) and at most 100 times. Therefore, if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol by playing a left-handed game in the latent state, in addition to being able to win the prize ball by the jackpot itself, the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is performed a specific number of times. (60 times) or more can be executed to obtain a prize ball by a small number of hits close to a specific number of times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th embodiment will be described. Here, the ROM 222 in the 18th embodiment is an addition executed during the stock RUSH to the configuration (see FIG. 342 (a)) of the ROM 222 in the 17th embodiment (and the 16th embodiment) described above. The only difference is that the additional pt selection table 222oa, which is referenced to select the additional pt of the effect, has been added. The details of the additional pt selection table 222oa will be described with reference to FIG. 406 (a).

FIG. 406 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the additional pt selection table 222oa. As shown in FIG. 406 (a), in the additional pt selection table 222oa, the number of additional pt is defined in association with each combination of the jackpot type and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation. Here, in the 18th embodiment, it is determined between the time when the stock RUSH is entered (that is, the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started) and the time when the jackpot fluctuation is finished and the jackpot is started. Every time an opportunity is established, the addition pt selection table 222oa is referred to to determine whether or not the addition effect can be executed. More specifically, when the payout of prize balls by small hit is in the range of 1200 or more (the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is 1200 or more), the number of prize balls to be paid out is a multiple of 300 (prize ball counter). Every time (the value of 223oa is a multiple of 300), the additional pt is determined by referring to the additional pt selection table 222oa.

As shown in FIG. 406 (a), when the jackpot type is either jackpot A18 or C18 (16 round jackpot) and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is 180 seconds or 240 seconds, the prize ball counter 223oa "+600 pt" is specified as an additional pt with respect to the values (number of payouts) "1200" and "1500". Further, when the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is "1500" or later, "+300 pt" is associated and defined as an additional pt every time the value of the prize ball counter 223oa increases by 300. Therefore, if the jackpot A18 or jackpot C18 is won and the jackpot fluctuation of 180 seconds or 240 seconds is executed, the additional effect of "+600pt" will be added when the payout of prize balls reaches 1200 during the jackpot fluctuation. Executed (minimum guaranteed number increases from 2400pt to 3000pt). With jackpots A18 and C18 (16 round jackpots), you can receive 2400 payouts with only the jackpot prize balls, so even if you add 600pt to the minimum guaranteed number displayed at the time of entering stock RUSH, up to now It does not exceed the total (3600) of the number of prize balls paid out to (1200) and the prize balls from the jackpot (2400). Therefore, it is possible to perform an additional effect within a range in which the display of the number of payouts at the end of the jackpot does not fall below the display of the minimum guaranteed number. In addition, when the number of payouts reaches 1500, an additional effect of "+600 pt" is executed (the minimum guaranteed number increases from 3000 pt to 3600 pt), and when the number of payouts reaches 1800, an additional effect of "+300 pt" is executed. Is executed (the minimum guaranteed number is increased from 3600pt to 3900pt). In this case as well, since the minimum guaranteed number that is smaller than the actual number to be paid out is notified, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts until the end of the jackpot from falling below the minimum guaranteed number.

It should be noted that the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed up to 60 times with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds and up to 80 times with a fluctuation time of 240 seconds. Of these, since the percentage of winning small hits is about 99%, it is possible to execute an average of 59 small hit games with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds and 79 times with a fluctuation time of 240 seconds. As described above, since the average number of prizes for the variable winning device 2650 in one small hit game is 1.1, the average number of prize balls paid out in one small hit game is 16.5 (15). Pieces x 1.1). Therefore, in the fluctuation time of 180 seconds, the average number of payouts is about 980, and in the fluctuation time of 240 seconds, the average number of payouts is about 1300. In other words, in order to achieve the payout of 1200 or more during the fluctuation time of 180 seconds, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the variable winning device 2650 above the average value (1.1) (1 small hit). About 1.4 pieces per time). In addition, in order to achieve the payout of 1500 or more during the fluctuation time of 240 seconds, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the variable winning device 2650 above the average value (1.1) (1 small hit). About 1.3 per time). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a possibility that a larger number of game balls than the average can be entered into the variable winning device 2650 when the additional effect is executed. Since it can be done, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 406 (a), when the jackpot type is either jackpot A18 or C18 (16 round jackpot) and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is 300 seconds, the value of the prize ball counter 223oa. (Number of payouts) A uniform "+300 pt" is specified as an additional pt for a range of "1200" or more. Therefore, if the jackpot A18 or jackpot C18 is won and the jackpot fluctuation of 300 seconds is executed, every time the prize balls are paid out during the jackpot fluctuation of 1200 or more and the number is a multiple of 300, "+300 pt" An additional effect is executed (the minimum guaranteed number increases by 300 pt). As mentioned above, in the jackpot A18 and C18 (16 round jackpot), 2400 pieces can be paid out only with the big hit prize balls, so the payout increases by 300 pieces in the range where the number of payouts before the start of the big hit is 1200 or more. Even if 300 pt is added each time, the display of the number of payouts at the end of the big hit does not fall below the display of the minimum guaranteed number. Therefore, the additional effect can be suitably executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 406 (a), when the jackpot type is either jackpot B18 or D18 (10 round jackpot) and the jackpot fluctuation time is 180 seconds or 240 seconds, the jackpot type is jackpot. In any of A18 and C18 (16 round jackpot), when the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is 300 seconds, the additional effect is executed in the same manner. That is, every time 1200 or more prize balls are paid out during the jackpot fluctuation and the number is a multiple of 300, an additional effect of "+300 pt" is executed (the minimum guaranteed number increases by 300 pt). With jackpots B18 and D18 (10 round jackpots), you can receive 1500 payouts with only the jackpot prize balls, so for example, if you have achieved 1200 payouts during the jackpot fluctuation, by the end of the jackpot It can be said that a total of 2700 prize balls have been paid out. Therefore, even if 300 pt is added to the minimum guaranteed number (the minimum guaranteed number is increased to 2700 pt) in the situation where the number of payouts is 1200, it is possible to realize the payout of the minimum guaranteed number or more by the end of the jackpot. The same applies to the case where 1500 pieces or 1800 pieces are paid out during the fluctuation and "+300 pt" is added. Therefore, it is possible to carry out a suitable additional effect that can prevent the payout until the end of the jackpot from falling below the minimum guaranteed number.

Further, as shown in FIG. 406 (a), when the jackpot type is either jackpot B18 or D18 (10 round jackpot) and the jackpot fluctuation time is 300 seconds, the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is ". "+600 pt" is specified in association with "1200" as an additional pt. On the other hand, the value "1500" of the prize ball counter 223oa is not associated with the additional pt. Further, after the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is "1500" or later, an additional pt of "+300 pt" is associated with each increase of the value of the prize ball counter 223oa by 300. Therefore, if the jackpot is 10 rounds and the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is selected, when the number of payouts (counter value of the prize ball counter 223oa) reaches 1200, the addition effect of "+600pt" is executed ( When the minimum guaranteed number increases from 2400 pt to 3000 pt) and the number of payouts exceeds 1800, an additional effect of "+300 pt" is executed every time the number of payouts increases by 300 (adds 300 pt to the minimum guaranteed number). Will be). Here, the number of payouts in the jackpot of 10 rounds is 1500, and when 1200 payouts are achieved, only 2700 (1500 + 1200) payouts have been confirmed, but 1200 payouts have been made. When it is achieved, 3000 pt is displayed as the minimum guaranteed number. This is designed so that the average number of payouts during the fluctuation time of 300 seconds is about 1630, and when the number of jackpot payouts (1500) is taken into consideration, it is sufficiently higher than the minimum guaranteed number display. This is because it is configured in. As a result, the additional effect can be more preferably executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 406 (a), the additional pt at the time when 1200 payouts are achieved is a 16-round jackpot and a fluctuation time of 180 seconds or 240 seconds, and a 10-round jackpot and fluctuation. It is common (+600pt) with the case where the time is 300 seconds. As a result, if an additional +600 pt occurs when 1200 payouts are achieved, it is determined that the jackpot is either 16 rounds or the fluctuation time is the longest 300 seconds ( The player can be reassured because it is not the most unfavorable combination (10 rounds, fluctuation time 180 seconds). In addition, the mode of the additional effect is common between the case of 16 round jackpot and the fluctuation time of 300 seconds and the case of 10 round jackpot and the fluctuation time of 180 seconds or 240 seconds (+300 pt for every 300 payouts). The mode in which the addition occurs). For this reason, the player is expected to select the most advantageous combination (16 rounds, fluctuation time 300 seconds) when the addition effect of the mode in which +300 pt is added for every 300 pieces is executed. be able to. Therefore, not only the additional effect is generated, but also the number of pt added in the additional effect can be paid attention to the game to be performed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

At the start of the jackpot, the minimum guaranteed number displayed and the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the end of the jackpot (the number of prize balls paid out by the end of the fluctuation and the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the jackpot) (The sum of 1500 pieces in 10 rounds and 2400 pieces in 16 rounds) is discriminated, and if a difference of 100 or more occurs, it is configured to be added to the minimum guaranteed number. As a result, even if the minimum guaranteed number is displayed too small during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, the book tail can be adjusted at the start of the jackpot. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the number of payouts and the minimum guaranteed number can be roughly matched, so that a suitable production mode can be realized.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 406 (b). FIG. 406 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 18th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 406 (b), the RAM 223 in the 18th embodiment includes the selected game storage area 223dc and the prize ball counter 223oa with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 17th embodiment described above (see FIG. 371). , Guarantee display storage area 223ob, stock RUSH flag 223oc, RUSH type storage area 223od, special 1 fluctuation number counter 223oe, special 2 fluctuation number counter 223of, and game state storage area 223og are added. Is different. In addition, the time saving information update area 223g, the remaining time saving period counter 223ma, the super RUSH start flag 223na, the super RUSH middle flag 223nb, the super RUSH counter 223nc, the quasi-limit flag 223nd, the resurrection flag 223ne, and the challenge production flag It is also different in that 223 nf, the game state storage area 223 ng, and the start delay flag 223 hn are deleted.

The selected game storage area 223dc is a storage area for temporarily storing data corresponding to the game method during the latent state selected by the player in the game method selection effect (see FIG. 400A). is there. In the selected game storage area 223dc, data corresponding to the game method selected at the end of the latent jackpot is stored. During the latent state, the effect mode corresponding to the data stored in the selected game storage area 223dc is executed.

The prize ball counter 223oa is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in the latent state. After winning the jackpot in the first selection state (after entering the stock RUSH), the number of pt corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is displayed for the display area Dm43 (see S12403 in FIG. 412). Further, during the execution of the stock RUSH, it is determined whether or not the additional effect can be executed according to the value of the prize ball counter 223oa (see S1282 in FIG. 411 and S12405 and S12406 in FIG. 412).

The guaranteed display storage area 223ob is a storage area for storing data indicating the minimum guaranteed number of prize balls to be paid out displayed in the display area Dm43 between the stock RUSH. During the stock RUSH, the minimum guaranteed number according to the data of the guaranteed display storage area 223ob is displayed. Further, when the additional effect (see FIG. 402) is executed, the data corresponding to the number of pt notified by the additional effect is added to the guaranteed display storage area 223ob.

The stock RUSH flag 223oc is a flag for indicating whether or not the stock RUSH is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the stock RUSH is being executed, and if it is off, the stock RUSH is not being executed. Show that. The stock RUSH flag 223oc is set on when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the latent state (see S12709 in FIG. 413), and is set off when the jackpot ends (see S12352 in FIG. 410). ). The stock RUSH flag 223oc determines whether or not the stock RUSH is being executed.

The RUSH type storage area 223od is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of stock RUSH (the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation and the jackpot type executed after the fluctuation ends). The RUSH type storage area 223od corresponds to the data corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display to be started when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the latent state, and the jackpot type executed after the fluctuation time elapses. The data is stored (see S12708 in FIG. 413), and the data is cleared (reset) at the end of the jackpot (see S12352 in FIG. 410). The data stored in the RUSH type storage area 223od and the above-mentioned additional pt selection table 222oa at the execution trigger of the additional effect (when the number of payouts is 1200 or more and is a multiple of 300, and when the jackpot starts). (Refer to FIG. 406 (a)), the additional pt in the case of performing the additional effect is determined according to the specified contents.

The special 1 fluctuation count counter 223oe and the special 2 fluctuation count counter 223of are counters for counting the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed in the latent state, respectively. The values of the special 1 fluctuation counter 223oe and the special 2 fluctuation counter 223of are added by 1 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are started in the latent state, respectively. (S12804, S12808 in FIG. 414). In the first selection state, the number of rotations corresponding to the value of the special 1 fluctuation number counter 223oe is displayed in the display area Dm41 until the jackpot is won, and in the second selection state, until the jackpot is won. During the period, the rotation speed corresponding to the value of the special 2 fluctuation count counter 223of is displayed. Further, when the jackpot is won, the comment displayed in the display area Dm42 is determined based on the value of the counter according to the type of the selected state (see S12705 and S12710 in FIG. 413).

The game state storage area 223og is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223og, the current game state can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 407, the content of the game in the latent state will be described. FIG. 407 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the left-handed game (first selection state) and the right-handed game (second selection state) in the latent state in comparison with each other. As shown in FIG. 407, the game method in which the left-handed game is performed in the latent state is given the name "strengthening route" as the game name, and this name is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In the game of "strong route", the game progresses by letting the lottery of the first special symbol be performed by left-handed. In this case, if the jackpot is won, a relatively large number of jackpot games such as 10 rounds or 16 rounds will be executed, and after the jackpot is completed, an advantageous latent state will be set again at a relatively high rate (65%). To. Furthermore, during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, by hitting right, the small hit game is frequently executed, so that in addition to the jackpot, a small hit can be obtained. Form a very favorable condition. As a result, from the time you win the jackpot until the end of the jackpot, you just have to keep hitting right, and the total of the small hits and the jackpots will be a large amount exceeding at least 2400. The prize ball can be easily obtained (paid out). Therefore, in the game in the "strengthening route", if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the interest of the player can be further improved. On the other hand, in the "strong route" game, the game ball can be entered into the first entrance 64 only at the same rate as in the normal state, which is disadvantageous due to left-handed hitting, until the jackpot is won. Therefore, in order to execute the lottery of the special symbol once, about 16 balls are consumed on average. Therefore, there is a demerit that the number of balls consumed increases as the first special symbol is continuously removed (so that the jackpot cannot be drawn). As a result, the player who is confident that he / she will win the jackpot immediately (the jackpot has a strong pull) will mainly select the game of this strong route.

On the other hand, the game method in which the right-handed game is performed is given the name "weak route" as the game name, and this name is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the "weak route" game, the game progresses by letting the lottery of the second special symbol be performed by right-handed. In this case, every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won at a rate of about 99%, and a prize ball based on the winning of the variable winning device 2650 can be obtained. As a result, an advantageous state is formed in which an average of 16.5 payouts can be received each time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, only a relatively small number of jackpot games of 5 rounds are executed, and a relatively high percentage (60%) is disadvantageous in the normal state after the jackpot ends. Will be set. Therefore, in the game of the weak route, it is possible to realize the game property that is more advantageous as the jackpot is not won (the jackpot is weaker).

In the game of this weak route, after shifting to the latent state, the small hit game is executed immediately in a relatively short period (and a small number of shot balls) and the payout can be received, so that the latent state can be received. Immediately after shifting to, you can increase the number of balls you have by hitting a small hit. In addition, when the number of game balls fired by right-handed hitting is taken into consideration, the number of balls held can be increased by 15 per lottery of the second special symbol on average. On the other hand, as a demerit in the game of the weak route, the sooner the jackpot is won, the less chance the prize ball will be paid out by the small hit (the lower limit is the number of balls obtained by the small hit game). The point (which does not exist) is raised. For this reason, a player who is confident that he / she does not draw a big hit (weak big hit) mainly selects a game of this weak route.

In summary, in the game of the strong route, first, the game can be played while expecting to win a big hit by hitting left. At this time, as the number of misses increases, the player's balls are more likely to be consumed, so that the player can play the game while expecting to be a big hit of the first special symbol with a smaller number of consumed balls. .. That is, to win the jackpot of the first special symbol with a small number of lottery, and to play the game while expecting that as many game balls fired by left-handed as possible enter the first entrance 64. Can be done. In addition, if it is notified that the jackpot of the first special symbol has been won (stock RUSH rush) in the game of the strong route, it is confirmed that a large amount (2400 or more) of prize balls can be paid out. It is possible to have a great sense of satisfaction. On the other hand, in the game of the strong route, if the period of not winning the big hit continues for a long time, or if the game ball launched by left-handed does not enter the first entrance 64 very much, the weak route It is possible to make the player feel that it is better to switch to the game of.

On the other hand, in the game of the weak route, by hitting right, it becomes a game to wait for the big hit while increasing the number of balls held immediately after the end of the latent jackpot, so there is no risk of reducing the number of balls held. You can play the game with a feeling. On the other hand, winning the jackpot increases the possibility that the advantageous latent state will end, so it is possible to play the game while expecting not to win the jackpot. In addition, if you feel that you are about to win a big hit due to the player's experience and intuition, you can let them play the game with a view to switching to a strong route and playing the game. it can.

As described above, in the 18th embodiment, the game of the strong route and the game of the weak route can be selected, and the game characteristics having different advantages and disadvantages are realized according to the selected game method. Configured to be possible. As a result, the player can be made to select the playability that suits the taste of each player, so that it is possible to provide the playability that suits the tastes of a wide range of players. Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, even after the game method is selected, it is possible to easily switch to the game of the other game method simply by switching the firing direction, so that the situation and emotions change after the game method is selected. Therefore, when a player wants to switch to the other game method, that desire can be easily fulfilled. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved. In addition, regardless of whether the game is played on the strong route or the weak route, the total game ball fired between the transition to the latent state and the end of the latent state. Since the total number of prize balls to be paid out is designed to be larger than the number of prize balls, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money regardless of which game method is selected. Therefore, the player can be made to select the game method with confidence. In addition, it is a design story that the total number of payouts increases, and if you are unlucky, the number of game balls fired may be larger than the number of prize balls paid out (for example, a strong route). If you did not win the jackpot of the 1st special symbol in). In this sense, it can be said that each game method is configured such that the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls to be fired.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 18th embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 408 and 409. First, with reference to FIG. 408, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (S7131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 18th embodiment will be described. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (S7131). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (S7131) in the 18th embodiment is a process related to the final variation in the time saving state with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 374) in the 17th embodiment described above. The point that (S1871 to S1875) is not executed is different from the processing when the second special symbol is executing the jackpot variation. With respect to other points, since the same processing is executed, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (see FIG. 408) in the 18th embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1815 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a jackpot (S1815: Yes), then the special symbol FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203nj is set to ON (S1876). In the process of S1876, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is on (S1876: Yes), the process is shifted to S1820 and the lottery result of the first special symbol is forcibly rewritten to be off. (Valid jackpot). On the other hand, in the process of S1876, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is not on (S1876: No), the process shifts to the process of S1816.

By executing this first special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (see FIG. 408), even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot will be won. It can be restricted (suppressed).

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (S7648) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 409. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (S7648) in the 18th embodiment. The second special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (S7648) is a process related to the final variation in the time saving state (S1971 to S1975) with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 379) in the above-described 17th embodiment. The point that the process of is not executed is different from the process when the first special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation. With respect to other points, since the same processing is executed, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (see FIG. 409) in the 18th embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1925 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a jackpot (S1925: Yes), then the special symbol FIG. 1 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203ni is set to ON (S1976). In the processing of S1976, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is on (S1976: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1930, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is forcibly rewritten to be off. (Valid jackpot). On the other hand, in the process of S1976, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ni is not on (S1976: No), the process shifts to the process of S1926.

By executing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 18 (see FIG. 409), even if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot will be won. It can be restricted (suppressed). Therefore, in particular, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the jackpot of the second special symbol is won by continuing to hit right during the jackpot fluctuation until the jackpot starts. You can enjoy the game where you are given the opportunity to win a small hit and win a prize ball with a high probability.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 18th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 410 to 414, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 410, the details of the hit-related process 18 (S12252) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th embodiment will be described. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 18 (S12252). The hit-related process 18 (S12252) in the 18th embodiment corresponds to the type of the hit-related command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the hit-related process 17 (see FIG. 387) in the 17th embodiment described above. This is a process for performing control.

Of the hit-related processes 18 (see FIG. 410) in the 18th embodiment, in each of the processes S2401, S2404, S2406, S2409 to S2412, S12305, and S12306, the hit-related process 17 (FIG. The same processes as those of S2401, S2404, S2406, S2409 to S2412, S12305, and S12306 of (see 387) are executed.

In this hit-related process 18 (S12252), when it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received in the process of S2401 (S2401: Yes), the jackpot start process 18 for making various settings at the jackpot start is executed. (S12351), this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot start processing 18 (S12351) will be described later with reference to FIG. 411.

Further, in the jackpot start processing 18 (see FIG. 410) in the 18th embodiment, when the processing of S12306 is completed, the prize ball counter 223oa, the guarantee display storage area 223ob, the stock RUSH flag 223oc, and the RUSH type storage area are next. The 223od, the special figure 1 fluctuation number counter 223oe, and the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223of are all reset (S12352), and this process ends.

Further, in the hit-related process 18 (see FIG. 410) in the 18th embodiment, when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received in the process of S12310 (S12310: Yes), the prize ball notified by the prize ball command The prize ball process 18 (S12353) for performing control according to the number is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the prize ball processing 18 (S12353) will be described later with reference to FIG. 412.

Next, the details of the jackpot start processing 18 (S12351) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 411. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the jackpot start processing 18 (S12351). As described above, the jackpot start processing 18 (S12351) is a process for performing various settings at the jackpot start.

When this jackpot start processing 18 (see FIG. 411) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the stock RUSH flag 223oc is on (that is, whether the stock RUSH is being executed) (S12801), and the stock is stocked. If it is determined that the RUSH flag 223oc is on (S12801: Yes), then the value (A) of the prize ball counter 223oa and the minimum guaranteed number specified by the data stored in the guarantee display storage area 223ob. Read the displayed value (B) (S12802).

Next, the value (C) obtained by multiplying the number of jackpot rounds started this time by 150 is calculated (S12803), and the value obtained by adding C to A and subtracting B is calculated (S12804). This value is a numerical value indicating how much the displayed value of the minimum guaranteed number is exceeded by the number of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot starting from now on. When the processing of S12804 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value calculated in the processing of S12804 is 100 or more (S12805), and if it is determined to be 100 or more (S12805: Yes), in the processing of S12804. The value obtained by rounding down the ones digit and the tens digit of the calculated value is specified as an additional pt (S12806), and the execution of the additional effect (see FIG. 402) in which the specified additional pt is notified is set. (S12807), the process shifts to S12808. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stock RUSH flag 223oc is off in the processing of S12801 (that is, it is not a big hit in the stock RUSH) (S12801: No), and in the processing of S12805, the value calculated in the processing of S12804. Is less than 100 (that is, when the number of jackpot payouts to be started is taken into consideration, the minimum guaranteed number currently displayed and the total number of payouts are almost the same), (S12805: No. ), Since it means that it is not necessary to execute the additional effect (see FIG. 402), the process proceeds to S12808. In the process of S12808, a display jackpot start command is set (S12808), and this process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot start processing 18 (see FIG. 411), at the start of the jackpot, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot is taken into consideration, and the displayed value of the minimum guaranteed number is brought closer to the actual payout number. Can be left. Therefore, a more preferable production mode can be realized.

Next, the above-mentioned prize ball processing 18 (S12353) will be described with reference to FIG. 412. FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prize ball processing 18 (S12353). As described above, the prize ball process 18 (S12353) is a process for performing control according to the number of prize balls notified by the prize ball command.

In the prize ball processing 18 (S12353), first, it is determined whether or not the stock RUSH flag 223oc is on (S12401), and if it is determined that the stock RUSH flag 223oc is off (S12401: No), other prizes are awarded. A display command corresponding to the sphere is set (S12411), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stock RUSH flag 223oc is on in the processing of S12401 (S12401: Yes), it means that the stock RUSH is being executed, so that the number of prize balls notified by the prize ball command is used. It is updated by adding it to the value of the prize ball counter 223oa (S12402), and then the number of payouts of the display area Dm43 (S12403) of the third symbol display device 81 is adjusted according to the updated value of the prize ball counter 223oa. Set the display command to update the display value.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is currently being executed (S12404), and if the jackpot game is being executed (S12404: Yes), there is no possibility of executing the additional effect, so this processing is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S12404 that the jackpot game is not currently being executed (S12404: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball counter 223oa updated by the processing of S12402 is 1200 or more. If it is less than 1200 (S12405: No), there is no possibility of executing the additional effect, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S12405, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is 1200 or more (S12405: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is a multiple of 300 ( S12406), if it is determined that the value is not a multiple of 300 (S12406: No), there is no possibility of executing the additional effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12406, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223oa is a multiple of 300 (S12406: Yes), the additional pt selection table 222oa (see FIG. 406 (a)) is read out (S12407). From the read table, the value of the current prize ball counter 223oa, the current jackpot type, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation currently set, and the additional pt corresponding to are specified (S12408). The jackpot type this time and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation currently set are specified by referring to the data of the RUSH type storage area 223od. When the processing of S12408 is completed, it is determined whether or not the specific result of the processing of S12408 is the specific result of adding (S12409), and if it is the specific result of adding (S12409: Yes), it is specified by the processing of S12408. The execution of the addition effect in the mode of adding the added pt to the display value of the minimum guaranteed number is set (S12410), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12409, if it is determined that the result is a specific result without addition (S12409: No), the process of S12410 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this prize ball processing 18 (see FIG. 412), every time the number of payouts during execution of the jackpot fluctuation satisfies a specific condition (1200 or more and a multiple of 300), an additional effect is executed. It is possible to judge whether or not it is possible.

Next, the details of the effect setting process 18 (S12891) in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 18 (S12891).

In this effect setting process 18 (S12891), first, the current game state is specified by referring to the data of the game state storage area 223og (S12701). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state specified in the process of S12701 is a latent state (S12702). In the process of S12702, when it is determined that the game state is not the latent state (normal state) (S12702: No), the effect mode of the variable pattern effect according to the specified game state and the lottery result is set. (S12712), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12702, when it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S12702: Yes), then the special 1 fluctuation number counter 223oe or the special 2 fluctuation number counter 223of of the special symbol is used this time. The variation count update process (S12703) for updating the counter value corresponding to the type of the special symbol for which the variation display is executed is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S12704. Here, the details of this fluctuation number update process (S12703) will be described with reference to FIG. 414. FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the variation number update process (S12703).

In this fluctuation number update process (see FIG. 414), first, the data in the selected game storage area 223dc is read out, and the game method (the game method selected by the player) corresponding to the read data is specified (S12801). Next, it is determined whether or not the game method specified in the process of S12801 is a left-handed game (a game of a strong route) (S12802), and if it is determined to be a left-handed game (S12802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation display executed this time is the variation display of the first special symbol (S12803). In the process of S12803, if it is determined that the current variation is not the variation display of the first special symbol (S12803: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (S12803: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation count counter 223of to update (S12804), and then , A display command for indicating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation count counter 223of updated in the process of S12804 is set (S12805), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1282, when it is determined that the selected game method is not a left-handed game (S12802: No), it is determined whether the selected game method is a right-handed game (S12806). If it is determined that the selected game method is not a right-handed game (S12806: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the selected game method is a right-handed game (S12806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation display to be started this time is the variation display of the second special symbol. (S12807). If it is determined that the current variation is not the variation display of the second special symbol (S12807: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S12807, when it is determined that the current fluctuation display is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (S12807: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 223og to update. (S12808) Next, a display command for indicating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 223og updated in the process of S12808 is set (S12809), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation number update process, the rotation speed (variation number) displayed in the display area Dm41 is displayed in accordance with the execution of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the game method selected by the player. Can be updated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 413. When the variation number update process (S12703) is completed, it is next determined whether or not the variation display started this time is a jackpot variation of the first special symbol (S12704), and this variation is a jackpot variation of the first special symbol. When it is determined that the fluctuation is (S12704: Yes), the comment corresponding to the value of the special 1 fluctuation count counter 223oe is specified (S12705), and the specified comment is displayed in the display area Dm42. The execution of the RUSH rush effect (see FIG. 401 (a)) is set (S12706). Next, the data corresponding to 2400 pt is stored in the guaranteed display storage area 223ob (S12707), and the data corresponding to the current jackpot type and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to be started is stored in the RUSH type. It is stored in the area 223od (S12708). Next, by setting the stock RUSH flag 223oc to ON, it indicates that the stock RUSH has been entered (S12709), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12704, if it is determined that the variation display started this time is not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol (S12704: No), then the variation display started this time is the jackpot variation of the second special symbol. (S12709), and if it is determined that the second special symbol does not have a jackpot fluctuation (S12709: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation display this time is the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol (S12709: Yes), the comment corresponding to the special 2 fluctuation count counter 223of is specified (S12710) and the specification is specified. The execution of the RUSH end effect (see FIG. 403 (b)) in which the comment is displayed in the display area Dm42 is set (S12711), and this process is terminated.

By executing this effect setting process 18 (see FIG. 413), if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the latent state, the stock RUSH rush effect can be executed, while the second special symbol is executed. If you win the jackpot, you can execute the RUSH end effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 18th embodiment, a plurality (two types) having different playability (merits and demerits) are used as a gaming method in an advantageous (higher jackpot probability than the normal state) latent state. It is possible to select one of the game methods (strong route game, weak route game) to play the game. When a game with a weak route (right-handed game) is executed, it is often a small hit that gives an opportunity to get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the variable winning device 2650 until the big hit is won. (The ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the number of game balls fired tends to be large), but when the big hit is won, the opportunity to win the prize ball by the small hit is terminated and it is disadvantageous. The rate at which the jackpot type (normal jackpot for 5 rounds) is determined increases (easily determined), while the game of a strong route (left-handed game) is played, a special symbol lottery is performed. The number of balls to be consumed (the number of balls to be consumed before winning the jackpot) tends to be relatively large (the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the number of game balls fired) becomes a small value. (Easy), but if you win the jackpot, you can win the prize balls by frequently executing the small hit game by hitting right while the jackpot fluctuates, and the number of prize balls of the jackpot itself is relatively large. By selecting the type, we have realized the playability that makes it possible to receive a large amount of prize balls. In other words, in the game of the weak route, it is more advantageous to win more small hits without winning the big hit (the weaker the big hit is more advantageous), while in the game of the strong route, it is advantageous. , The earlier you win the jackpot, the more you can reduce the consumption of your ball, so it becomes a game (the stronger the jackpot is, the more advantageous it becomes). As a result, the game method can be selected in consideration of the merits and demerits of each game method, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of whether the game is played on the strong route or the weak route, the total game ball fired between the transition to the latent state and the end of the latent state. Since the total number of prize balls to be paid out is designed to be larger than the number of prize balls, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money regardless of which game method is selected. Therefore, the player can be made to select the game method with confidence.

In the 18th embodiment, a simultaneous fluctuation method capable of executing the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) is adopted. If the lottery of one special symbol is a big hit, it is regulated that the lottery of the other special symbol will be a big hit during the big hit fluctuation (the lottery based on the counter value that becomes the big hit is Even if it is executed, the lottery result is forcibly set to be out), and if the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the changing special symbol is removed. It is configured to control so that it is forcibly stopped by the symbol. For this reason, in particular, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won by the left-handed game in the latent state, the second special symbol is drawn by right-handing during the variable display of the first special symbol to show the jackpot. When is executed, it is possible to execute a game that becomes a small hit with a high probability without winning a big hit. That is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous (low degree of advantage) is won and the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is preceded by the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Is displayed as a stop, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot fluctuation of the advantageous first special symbol is forcibly stopped due to the deviation. In other words, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won by the left-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed until the jackpot of the first special symbol is started (during the jackpot fluctuation). It forms an advantageous state where you can get a chance to win a prize ball by making a small hit with a high probability each time.

Here, conventionally, when a lottery of a special symbol is executed in an advantageous gaming state, a small hit is won with a high probability, and even if the big hit is not won, the small hit with a high probability is continuously won. , Game machines with specifications that can win a large number of prize balls are widely and generally known. In such a conventional game machine, as the number of lottery until the big hit is increased, more small hit games can be executed, so that the lottery of the special symbol does not become a big hit (so-called addiction). It is possible to win more prize balls in one advantageous game state. However, in such a conventional game machine, the smaller the number of lottery, the less chance of winning a prize ball by a small hit, so that there is a problem that the motivation of the player for the game is lowered. It was.

On the other hand, in the 18th embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent probability state, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed, and the right-handed strike is performed to increase the value. The lottery of the second special symbol that will be a small hit with a probability and there is no possibility of winning a big hit (even if the lottery is executed based on the random number value (counter value) that becomes the big hit, it will be rewritten to the lottery result of the loss) Can be executed. Further, in the 18th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the latent state is set to any one of 180 seconds to 300 seconds, while the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the latent state. The time is fixed to 3 seconds. As a result, by continuing to hit right while the jackpot of the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special is at least 60 times (180 seconds / 30 seconds) and at most 100 times (300 seconds / 3 seconds). A lottery of symbols can be executed. In other words, in an advantageous latent state, after the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (specific conditions are satisfied), the second is advantageous in that the small hit is won with a high probability simply by continuously hitting the right. It is possible to execute a lottery (advantageous game) of a special symbol at least 60 times (a specific number of times). Therefore, if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol by playing a left-handed game in the latent state, in addition to being able to win the prize ball by the jackpot itself, the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is performed a specific number of times. Since it is possible to make the player recognize that it has become possible to execute (60 times) or more, it is possible to have greater joy and satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, in the 18th embodiment, in the situation where the game of the strong route (left-handed game) is performed in the advantageous latent state, the fact that the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is regarded as the establishment of the specific condition. , Until the end of the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation, it is an advantageous state where you can hit right and win a prize ball with a high probability every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed ( Although it was configured to form a stock RUSH), the conditions for shifting to the stock RUSH) are not limited to the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. For example, instead of winning the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, or in addition, assuming that the winning of the small hit is satisfied, the stock RUSH is formed during the fluctuation period of the small hit. May be. That is, it is regulated that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the other special symbol not only during the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol but also during the small hit fluctuation (a lottery based on the random value corresponding to the hit is executed). Even if the lottery result is forcibly rewritten to be out of order), the small hit (and out of) fluctuation of the second special symbol can be executed multiple times as the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variation time (for example, 60 seconds) may be set. With this configuration, the player can increase the number of balls held by the small hit game without worrying about winning the big hit of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous during the small hit fluctuation. It is possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, even if the small hit of the first special symbol ends, there is no possibility that the game state will be changed (maintained in the latent state), so if the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Although the number of prize balls to be paid out is smaller in comparison, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security that the advantageous latent state will not end. Therefore, in the case of playing a game of a strong route, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that a small hit will be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, the specific condition for shifting to stock RUSH (an advantageous state in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol with a high small hit probability can be reliably executed a specific number of times (60 to 100 times)) is the first. It is not limited to the lottery result of the special symbol (the big hit winning or the small winning winning of the first special symbol). For example, it may be configured to shift to the stock RUSH by satisfying the specific condition that the lottery of the first special symbol is continuously deviated a specific number of times (for example, 100 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel playability that can please the player as the deviation continues.

In the 18th embodiment, in the game of the tough route (left-handed game), only when the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the right-handed hit is performed by notifying the entry into the stock RUSH. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds or 90 seconds) can be selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and then the latent jackpot is placed in the hold of the first special symbol. If it is included, the period until the lottery based on the jackpot hold is executed by pre-reading may be specified, and the right-handed hit may be continuously notified until 5 seconds before the specified period elapses. In this case, there is a possibility of winning a big hit in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol by right-handed, but since the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol is uniformly 3 seconds, if you quit right-handed 5 seconds before. , It is possible to suppress duplication of the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol and the lottery based on the jackpot hold of the first special symbol. In addition, even if a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol before the lottery based on the jackpot hold of the first special symbol is executed, after that, the latent probability is determined based on the jackpot hold of the first special symbol. It can be returned to the state. Therefore, in the situation where the latent jackpot is included in the hold of the first special symbol, the player loses even if he hits right, does not hit the jackpot, or hits the jackpot. It is possible to suppress that (the latent jackpot becomes invalid).

In the eighteenth embodiment, in the latent state, the game characteristics have different merits and demerits depending on the game method. That is, as the first factor related to the degree of advantage of the player, the number of prize balls paid out between the transition to the latent state and the end of the jackpot is changed according to the game method, and the second factor. As a result, the number of balls held to execute one special symbol lottery until the big hit is won is changed. That is, the game of the strong route is disadvantageous to the second element instead of the advantage of the first element to the game of the weak route, but the first element and the second element are limited to the above. is not. For example, the jackpot probability, the number of time reductions, the game state set when the jackpot is won, and the like may be used as the first element and the second element. More specifically, for example, as in the 17th embodiment, a probability change state or a time saving state is provided as a game state, a specific type of jackpot is executed in a normal state, and during the specific type of jackpot game. When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 (V prize is generated), the game state after the end of the big hit becomes the probability change state that continues until the next big hit, but does not pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 (V). If no prize is awarded), the time may be shortened so as to continue until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the jackpot is completed. Then, when a jackpot is reached in the probabilistic state, the ratio of the jackpot that becomes the probabilistic state due to the occurrence of the V prize is higher than the ratio of the jackpot that becomes the more advantageous latent state than the probabilistic state, while the time saving state. If a big hit occurs during the period, the ratio of the big hit that becomes the latent state due to the occurrence of the V prize may be higher than the ratio of the big hit that becomes the probable change state. With this configuration, if you hit right to generate a V prize during the execution of a specific type of jackpot in the normal state, the jackpot probability will increase by shifting to the probability change state, but the jackpot will be It is possible to realize playability in which it is difficult to set an advantageous latent probability state when winning. On the other hand, if you hit the left side (or stop firing) so that V prize does not occur during the execution of a specific type of jackpot, the jackpot probability will be lower but the jackpot will be hit by shifting to the time saving state. It is possible to realize game playability that makes it easy to set an advantageous latent probability state when winning. In other words, by performing a right-handed game during a jackpot, instead of increasing the jackpot probability (becoming advantageous) as the first factor, an advantageous latent state is set as the second factor when the jackpot is won. It is possible to realize playability in which the ratio is low (disadvantageous). In addition, by performing a left-handed game (or launch stop) during the jackpot, the jackpot probability becomes low (disadvantageous) as the first factor, but as the second factor, a submarine that is advantageous when the jackpot is won. It is possible to realize playability in which the probability state is set at a high rate (advantageous). As a result, during the execution of a specific type of jackpot game, it is possible to realize a novel operation of switching the subsequent game playability depending on whether or not a V prize is generated, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. Can be improved.

In addition, as a modified example of a configuration that realizes game playability with different merits and demerits depending on the game method, for example, two types of game states, a time saving state and a normal state, are provided, and a big hit (direct) by a special symbol lottery. In a configuration in which a big hit (per V) is provided based on the occurrence of a V prize in a small hit (hit) and a small hit (so-called specifications of a type 1 type 2 mixer), a case where a V prize is generated in a small hit game and a case where a V prize is generated in a small hit game It may be configured so that the merits and demerits are different from those in the case where the V prize is not generated. More specifically, for example, it may be configured so that the direct hit is given a higher rate of the time saving state after the end of the big hit than the V hit in the time saving state. With this configuration, when a small hit is won in a short time state, when a game method of launching a game ball aiming at a V winning device to win a V prize is executed, a winning ball is won per V and a prize ball is obtained. On the other hand, it is possible to realize playability in which a disadvantageous normal state is likely to be set. On the other hand, when a small hit is won in the time saving state, the game method of stopping the firing (or firing the game ball in a direction different from the V winning device) is executed so that the V winning is not generated (that is, the time saving state). (Implement a game method that executes only the jackpot of the direct hit), the time saving grant ratio will be higher when the jackpot is won, but the possibility of winning the jackpot during the time saving state will be reduced. can do. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select a game method when a small hit is won in a short time state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, for example, when the game method of performing the game of the first special symbol by hitting the left in the normal state is executed as another example, the ball is held faster at the cost of a higher probability variation rate at the time of a big hit. On the other hand, when the game method is executed in which the player strikes right in the normal state to play the game of the second special symbol, the probability variation rate at the time of big hit is low, but the rate of big hit with many rounds is high. May be configured so that the rate of decrease of the ball held is slower than that of the left-handed game.

In the 18th embodiment, as the number of rounds of the jackpot, either 10 rounds or 16 rounds are set in the case of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and 5 rounds are always set in the case of the jackpot of the second special symbol. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this, and the number of rounds can be set arbitrarily. Similarly, the ratio of the latent jackpot can be arbitrarily determined. That is, the merits and demerits of the first game method (the game method of the strong route) and the second game method (the game method of the weak route) are arbitrarily set within a range in which different game characteristics can be realized. can do.

In the 18th embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot in the latent state and the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation and the execution period of the subsequent jackpot game The stock RUSH effect (see FIG. 401) was continuously executed over the period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode in the fluctuation period of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol and the effect mode in the execution period of the jackpot game may be set to different effect modes. Specifically, for example, a stock RUSH effect is executed during the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation, and when the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation elapses, an effect of notifying that the jackpot will be obtained is executed, and thereafter, for the jackpot. It may be configured so that the effect mode (big hit effect) is executed. In this case, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the effect of counting down the remaining fluctuation time may be executed. That is, as in the challenge mode effect (see FIG. 360 (a)) in the 17th embodiment, even if the remaining time until the effect ends (the jackpot starts) is displayed for the main display area Dm. Good. Further, in this case, as the remaining time to be displayed at the start of the stock RUSH, the remaining time (180 seconds) corresponding to the shortest fluctuation time is displayed, and the fluctuation time of 240 seconds or 300 seconds is set. May be configured to execute an effect of adding the remaining time when the display of the remaining time becomes 0. That is, when the fluctuation time is 240 seconds, an effect of adding 60 seconds is executed, and when the fluctuation time is 300 seconds, 120 seconds is added (or 60 seconds is added in two times). It may be configured as follows. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is 180 seconds, the start of the jackpot may be notified as the remaining time of 180 seconds displayed first elapses. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the remaining time will be added and displayed when the remaining time has elapsed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 18th embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in a latent state, a small hit game is frequently executed so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the small hit is abolished, and the difference between the number of prize balls simply paid out by the big hit and the number of balls consumed before winning the big hit is almost the same between the strong route and the weak route (error is 10% or less). ) May be used. Specifically, for example, as in the 17th embodiment described above, the upper limit (limit) number of times is set for the continuous number of times of the gaming state (latent probability state) in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and the limit number of times ( For example, at the time of reaching 5 times), the gaming state after the end of the big hit may be forcibly changed to the normal state even if the latent big hit is reached. Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol mainly executed in the strong route, even if it is configured to be a latent big hit almost (for example, a ratio of 95% or a ratio of 100%). Good. With this configuration, it is possible to make the game playability in the case of playing a tough route game (left-handed game) a game playability in which it is confirmed that the jackpot will be won 5 times before the transition to the normal state. Because it is possible, it is possible to play a left-handed game with peace of mind, and it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the jackpot of the limit number of times (5 times) can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 18th embodiment, the total number of net increase balls (the total number of prize balls to be paid out minus the total number of game balls to be fired) from the transition to the latent state to the transition to the normal state. The average value of the number of balls) was configured to be substantially the same for the game of the strong route and the game of the weak route, but the game is not limited to this. For example, the number of net increase balls from the start of the latent state to the end of the jackpot of 1 may be configured to be substantially the same. That is, with respect to the specifications in the 18th embodiment described above, the average number of rounds of the jackpot is adjusted, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is extended, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol is increased. By doing so, the average value of the net increase in the number of balls during the game of the strong route and the average value of the net increase in the number of balls during the game of the weak route until the end of the jackpot of 1 are configured to be substantially the same. You may. Further, in this case, the ratio at which the latent probability state is set after the jackpot ends is configured to be common (for example, a ratio of 50%) between the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the second special symbol. May be good. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily select a different game method each time the latent state is set after the jackpot ends, so that the game method can be changed regularly or randomly. It is possible to realize the playability that meets the wishes of the player who wants to change and play the game.

<19th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 415 to 419. The pachinko machine 10 according to the 16th embodiment described above is configured so that a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (variably) at the same time (in parallel), and the time is shortened. As the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the above, a fluctuation time (300 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. That is, in the time saving state, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed by biasing the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, in the 16th embodiment, in a situation where the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, when a big hit or a small hit based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started, the variation of the special symbol in the variable display is displayed. It is configured to be interrupted (interrupt the timekeeping of the fluctuation time), and when the other big hit or small hit ends, the interrupted fluctuation display is resumed (the timekeeping of the fluctuation time is resumed). ing.

Further, in the 16th embodiment described above, after the time saving state is started, the variation display of the first special symbol ends once, or the variation display of the second special symbol ends 99 times, so that the time saving state is completed. Was configured to end. That is, even if a small hit or a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the long fluctuation (300 seconds) of the first special symbol, after the end of the small hit or the big hit, the remaining at the start of the small hit or the big hit. The fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted from the fluctuation time. In other words, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, the larger the number of lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the shorter the remaining period until the time saving state ends, so the first special symbol It is configured so that it is possible to realize a novel playability that is directly linked to the amount of balls to be played, depending on how much the second special symbol is drawn to win the jackpot during the fluctuation time of 300 seconds.

However, in the 16th embodiment described above, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol once set in the time reduction state does not increase, the game in the time reduction state progresses, and the remaining period of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol When the number of hits is reduced, the upper limit of the number of hits that can be executed within the remaining period of the time saving state can be predicted, and there is a risk that the motivation for playing will decrease.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment, a plurality of special symbols (1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol) are simultaneously (parallel) drawn (parallel) as in the 16th embodiment described above. After configuring so that it can be changed), a type is set for the small hits won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol being displayed is interrupted based on the winning small hit type. (Interrupts the timekeeping of the fluctuation time) or discards (forced stop with a missed symbol). Specifically, there are two types of small hits to be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, small hit A and small hit B, and when the small hit A is won, the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is provided. When the small hit B is won, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display is discarded (forced stop at the off symbol).

With this configuration, during the time-saving game, the game is executed while expecting how to win the big hit or the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol within the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In addition to the sex, by winning the small hit B and discarding the first special symbol fluctuation during execution, it is possible to provide the player with the game property of extending (resetting) the period of the time saving state. Even when the remaining period of the time saving state is short, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment described above is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the main control The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 16 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 16th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 415, a characteristic effect executed during the time-saving gaming state in the 19th embodiment will be described. FIG. 415 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the small hit B is won during the time saving state. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and in the time saving state, the first special symbol is configured to be executable. The configuration is such that the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal state when the fluctuation display of That is, the longer the elapsed time after the time saving state is set, the more the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is subtracted (consumed), and the end of the time saving state is approaching.

In the 19th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment, the effect indicating the period until the end of the time saving state can be executed. Further, as described above, in the 19th embodiment, when the small hit B is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the change (lottery) of the first special symbol being executed is discarded, and the small hit B is discarded. After the end of the V-hit game by hitting, the first special symbol is newly started to change. That is, by the time the small hit B is won, the subtracted fluctuation time of the first special symbol is reset, and the fluctuation time of the new first special symbol (300 seconds in this embodiment) is the period until the end of the time reduction. It is configured to be displayed as an effect to show.

As shown in FIG. 415, when the small hit B is won during the time saving state, the symbol "555" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the small hit is won. In addition, the characters "bonus confirmed !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, indicating that the player has won a small hit in an easy-to-understand manner. Then, by winning the small hit B, the big hit is again until the time saving state of "ream-chan expectation 95% over" displayed in the display area HR6 formed above in the main display area Dm ends. The character "203: 32" indicating the display mode suggesting the possibility of winning the item and the remaining time until the time saving state displayed in the sub-display area Ds ends (the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol). On the other hand, the chain images LG1 and LG2, which imitate the chain with the plate "Reset !!", are entwined with each other.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the period until the subtracted time saving state ends (the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is reset.

In this embodiment, the small hit B is won, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is discarded, and the remaining time in the time saving state is reset, so that the chain images LG1 and LG2 that imitate the chain are entwined with each other. It is configured to suggest to the player by executing it, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the small hit B is won, an effect suggesting that the remaining time in the time-saving game state is reset by an effect using the character, such as an effect in which the character holding the clock increases the time, may be executed. .. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player.

Further, when the small hit B is won, "300: 00" indicating the remaining time is displayed after the end of the V-win game due to the small hit and before the change of the new first special symbol is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining time in the time saving state may be added multiple times and "30:00" may be displayed by using the multiple variation effects of the second special symbol. .. By gradually increasing the remaining time display of the time-saving game in this way, the player can execute the game while expecting whether the remaining time will increase further.

Further, in the 19th embodiment, similarly to the 16th embodiment described above, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time saving game is configured to be "300 seconds", but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a fluctuation time other than "300 seconds". In this configuration, in addition to the fluctuation time of 300 seconds, a fluctuation time shorter than 300 seconds (for example, 100 seconds) and a fluctuation time longer than 300 seconds (for example, 500 seconds) may be set to be configurable. .. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time so that a short fluctuation and a long fluctuation can be set, if the selected fluctuation time is short, it becomes a disadvantage for the player, and if a long fluctuation time is selected, it becomes a disadvantageous state. Since it is in an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to make a difference in the game state even in the same time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when performing an effect to show that the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded, the effect mode is different if the lottery result of the first special symbol variation to be discarded differs depending on the remaining variation time. For example, when the lottery result is a big hit or the remaining fluctuation time is long, specifically, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation to be executed next (executed after the winning game is completed). When the remaining variation time is longer than the length of, the effect mode indicating that it is not advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol variation during execution is determined, and the lottery result is out of order. Or, when the residual fluctuation time is short, specifically, when the residual fluctuation time is shorter than the length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation to be executed next (executed after the end of the winning game), or in advance. When the residual fluctuation time is shorter than the specified specific time (for example, 10), the effect mode indicating that it is advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol fluctuation during execution is determined. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify whether or not it is advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol variation during execution.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 415, when the small hit is won, the player is configured to perform an effect of notifying the player that the first special symbol variation being executed has been discarded. Without limitation, for example, even when a small hit (small hit B) in which the first special symbol variation during execution is discarded is won, the first running first as shown in FIG. 338 of the 16th embodiment described above. It may be configured to execute an effect indicating that the special symbol variation is interrupted, and to execute an additional effect of adding the remaining time in the time saving state after the winning game is completed.

In this case, a means for storing the remaining period of the first special symbol variation and a means for storing the remaining period display content displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are provided, and the difference is set. The corresponding value is added and determined as a value that can be displayed, and a predetermined display condition (for example, a display condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times, or that the player operates the frame button 22. It is preferable to configure the additional display to be executed when the display condition that is satisfied based on the above is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to increase (extend) the remaining period of the time saving state other than the timing when the small hit B is won, so at what timing the remaining period of the time saving state increases for the player. Can be made difficult to understand, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, when a configuration capable of making the period of the time saving state longer than the initially set period (300 seconds) as in the 19th embodiment is used, not only the remaining period of the time saving state but also the time saving state is used. It may be configured to notify the player of the length of the elapsed period of the state. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the time saving period has been increased (extended) during the time saving state.

In addition, as in the 16th embodiment and the 19th embodiment described above, when the second special symbol lottery is won in the time saving state, the subtraction of the remaining period of the first special symbol change during execution is interrupted. However, when the configuration of restarting the subtraction for the interrupted remaining period after the end of the winning game is used, the remaining period after the restart, that is, the remaining period of the time saving state set after the end of the winning game is less than the predetermined period, specifically. Specifically, when it is shorter than the fluctuation time set as the second special symbol fluctuation, it may be configured to display a display mode indicating that the time reduction state is not set after the end of the winning game.

With this configuration, the time saving state ends without displaying the result of the second special symbol lottery, even though the effect showing the time saving state is temporarily executed after the winning game ends. , It is possible to prevent the player from being confused. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time of winning in the second special symbol lottery is determined in the time saving state, and when the determination result satisfies the predetermined condition, specifically, the time saving If it is shorter than the fluctuation time set as the second special symbol fluctuation during the state, it is configured to execute an effect indicating to the player that the current winning is the last winning in the time-saving state. good. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has ended when the winning is won, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Electrical configuration in the 19th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 19th embodiment will be described. In the 19th embodiment, among the configurations of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110, the special symbol 2 random number table 202pa2 is provided instead of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the 16th embodiment. It's different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 416, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202pa2 provided in the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 19th embodiment will be described. FIG. 416 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202pa2. As shown in FIG. 416, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202pa2 in the 19th embodiment, as a random number value determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (counter value of the random number counter C1 per first), " Four random number values (counter values) of "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other, and 42 random number values (counter values) of "4 to 45" are defined as random number values (counter values) determined to be small hit A. Are specified in association with each other. Then, as the random number value (counter value) determined to be the small hit B, four random number values (counter values) of "46 to 49" are defined in association with each other. Although the details of the small hit B will be described later, the lottery of the first special symbol can be discarded during the time-saving game, so that the small hit B is advantageous for the player.

Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random numbers that are determined to be small hits. Since the number of numerical values (counter values) is 4 and 46, respectively, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000), and the probability of winning a small hit is 23 /. It is 500 (46/1000). Whenever you win the small hit of the 2nd special symbol, the small hit game of the opening and closing pattern that can easily generate a V prize just by hitting right is executed, so you can win the small hit by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. Even if it becomes, the big hit (per V) is substantially fixed. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the jackpot is substantially won with a probability of 1/20 (50/1000).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 19th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 417 to 418. The various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 19th embodiment are stopped out of FIG. 2 with respect to the various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 19 (see S8181 of FIG. 471) is executed instead of the process 16 (see S8121 of FIG. 351), and the variable discard process (S8282 of FIG. .. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 417, a special figure 2 disengagement stop process 19 (S8181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 19th embodiment will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process 19 (S8181). The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 19 (S8181) in the 19th embodiment is the case where the small hit B is won against the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 16 (S8121 in FIG. 351) of the 16th embodiment described above. , The difference is that the variable discard process is executed. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing 19 (S8181), first, when it is determined in the processing of S8201 that the small hit flag 203cc is on (S8201: Yes), is the winning small hit type the small hit B? Determine (S8281). If it is determined that the small hit is B (S8281: Yes), the variable discard process (S8282) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S8204. On the other hand, in the processing of S8281 when it is determined that the winning small hit type is not small hit B (that is, small hit A) (S8281: No), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. , S8221.

Next, with reference to FIG. 418, a variable discard process (S8282), which is one process in the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 19 (S8181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 19th embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable discard processing (S8282). In the variation discard process (S8282), when the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the small hit B has been won in the second special symbol lottery, the variation of the first special symbol being executed is displayed. Is forcibly stopped in a display mode indicating a deviation, and a process for discarding the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the forcibly stopped first special symbol change is executed.

In the fluctuation discard processing (S8282), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is larger than 0, that is, whether the special figure 1 is changing (S8283). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is larger than 0 (S8283: Yes), the process proceeds to S8284. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is not a value larger than 0 (S8283: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S8283, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is larger than 0 (S8283: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set. (S8284).

Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed at the off symbol (S8285), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is set to 0 (S8286). As a result, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) is possible.

When the processing of S8286 is completed, it is next determined whether the jackpot flag 203ca for the special figure 1 is set to ON (S8287), and when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca for the special figure 1 is set to ON. (S8287: Yes), in order to adapt the lottery result of the first special symbol to the first special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S8284 described above, the jackpot flag 203ca for the special figure 1 was set. Set it to off (S8288), delete the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot (S8289), set the discard command (S8290), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S8287, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203c for the special figure 1 is set to off (S8287: No), each process of S8288 to S8290 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 19th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 419, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th embodiment is a command determination process with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment described above (FIG. The difference is that the command determination process 19 (see S2194 in FIG. 419) is executed instead of (see S2113 in FIG. 56). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the command determination process 19 (S2194) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 19 (S2194). In the command determination process 19 (S2194) in the 19th embodiment, a process when a discard command is received is added to the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 56) in the 16th embodiment described above. Is different. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process 19 (S2194), when it is determined that the time saving related command has not been received in the process of S2215 (S2215: No), it is determined whether or not the discard command has been received (S2295). When it is determined that the discard command has been received (S2295: Yes), a display command for indicating that the remaining period display is to be reset is set (S2296), and this process is terminated. The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S2102 in FIG. 55) in the main process (see FIG. 55), and is output to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display mode (see FIG. 415) indicating that the variation of the first special symbol has been discarded is displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the discard command has not been received in the process of S2295 (S2295: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 19th embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the small hit has been won in one of the special symbol lottery, the execution of the special symbol change is interrupted. A small hit (small hit A) and a small hit to be discarded (small hit B) are provided. Then, in the time saving state, the remaining period of the time saving state is increased (extended) by discarding the execution of the first special symbol change based on winning the small hit B in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that

Therefore, during the time-saving game, in addition to the game nature of executing the game while expecting how to win the big hit or the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol within the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the small hit By winning B and discarding the first special symbol fluctuation that is being executed, it is possible to provide the player with the playability of extending (resetting) the period of the time saving state, and the remaining period of the time saving state can be extended. Even when the number is reduced, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

In the 19th embodiment, a small hit winning of a specific small hit type (small hit B) is provided as a discard condition for discarding the first special symbol change during execution, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the discard condition is satisfied based on the winning of the jackpot.

Further, in the 19th embodiment, the fluctuation time (300 seconds) for the first special symbol fluctuation set during the time saving state is fixed, but the fluctuation time is not limited to this, and various length fluctuation times are set. It may be configured as possible. In this case, for example, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation set during the time reduction state, the ultra-short fluctuation time (20 seconds), the short fluctuation time (50 seconds), the medium fluctuation time (100 seconds), and the long fluctuation time Any of (300 seconds) can be set to be set, and the length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation to be executed next (executed after the end of the winning game) is included in the special figure 1 hold. It is configured so that it can be discriminated based on the winning information, and the first special symbol fluctuation during execution is determined based on the remaining period of the fluctuation time during execution and the length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation to be executed next. It is advantageous to provide a means capable of determining whether it is an advantageous period to interrupt or a period advantageous to discard, and to interrupt the first special symbol change during execution as an effect according to the determination result. It is preferable to perform a zone effect capable of notifying the interruption advantageous zone and the discard advantageous zone which is more advantageous to be discarded. As a result, it is possible to easily notify that the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on the timing of winning.

In addition, in the case of winning in the time saving state, first, after notifying (suggesting) the player that the winning is won, whether or not the first special symbol change is interrupted (whether or not it is discarded). It is preferable to configure it to perform a suggestion effect that suggests. As a result, the player can be interested in the judgment result (small hit type) other than the result of the winning / losing lottery.

Further, in the configuration of the above-mentioned 17th embodiment and the above-mentioned configuration of the 16th embodiment, that is, in a situation where the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the jackpot game based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started. In this case, a specific embodiment may be used in which the variation of the special symbol during the variation display is interrupted (the timekeeping of the variation time is interrupted). This specific embodiment will be described below.

In the 17th embodiment described above, when the probability variation B state is set, the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number (100 times) as a time saving end condition. The second time saving end condition that is satisfied in is set (see FIG. 368), and when the second time saving ending condition is satisfied, the probability change B state shifts to the latent state and the RUSH game is executed. It was configured to be. Further, even when the time saving state is set, the above-mentioned second time saving end condition is set, and when the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state. (See FIG. 363). In addition, when the jackpot game based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started in the situation where the fluctuation display of one special symbol is being executed, the fluctuation of the special symbol being displayed is discarded (timekeeping of the fluctuation time). It was configured to clear).

In the 17th embodiment configured in this way, when the probability change B state is set and the time saving end condition is not satisfied, if the probability change B jackpot is won again, the time saving is newly completed after the jackpot game is completed. Since the end condition is satisfied, for example, when the probability change B jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the first special symbol change (for example, during the 100th special symbol change) in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied. , There was a problem that the player's willingness to play was reduced.

Therefore, in the specific embodiment, when the jackpot game based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started in the situation where the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation of the special symbol in the variation display is discarded ( Instead of the configuration (clearing the timekeeping of the fluctuation time), the jackpot game based on the lottery of the other special symbol starts in the situation where the fluctuation display of one special symbol is being executed as in the 16th embodiment described above. This is different from the 17th embodiment in that a configuration is provided in which the fluctuation of the special symbol during the fluctuation display is interrupted (the timekeeping of the fluctuation time is interrupted). In addition, even when the probability change B state or the time saving state is set, the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) that is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol change once can be set. It is also different from the above-mentioned 17th embodiment in that it is used. Since the other elements are the same as those in the 17th embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present specific embodiment configured in this way, for example, when 300 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation executed in the state where the time saving B state is set, the 300 seconds elapse. If the probability variation B jackpot is won by then, the first special symbol change interrupted at the timing when the probability variation B jackpot game is started (the timing when the special symbol indicating that the probability variation B jackpot is won is stopped and displayed). The length of the remaining fluctuation time of is the time saving end condition of the probability variation B state set after the probability variation B jackpot game ends.

That is, the length of the time saving end condition when the probability change B state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends can be changed according to the timing of interrupting the first special symbol variation. With this configuration, in order to make the ease of establishing the time saving end condition different, multiple types of time saving end conditions are defined in advance, and there is no need to provide multiple jackpot types according to each time saving ending condition. , The ease with which the time saving end condition is satisfied can be easily different.

In addition, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing of winning the big hit, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, there are a gaming state (probability variation state) in which the player is advantageous when the time saving end condition is satisfied, and a gaming state (time saving state) in which the player is advantageous when the time saving ending condition is not satisfied. Since it is configured to execute the production in a production mode (challenge production) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is set, it is easy for the player to satisfy the time saving end condition. You can be interested in the current game status.

The display screen during the challenge effect in this specific embodiment is almost the same as that in the 17th embodiment described above, and is the main display when the variation of the special symbol being displayed is interrupted based on the jackpot winning. The countdown display displayed in the HR20 of the area Dm (see FIG. 360 (a)) is displayed in a display mode indicating interruption (for example, a display mode in which the characters "interrupted" are added on the value at which the countdown is stopped). The display mode of the countdown display during the interruption is continuously displayed even during the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is completed, the countdown display is restarted after displaying the display mode indicating that the countdown display is restarted. Only different in.

In addition, in this specific embodiment, when the big hit game based on the lottery of the other special symbol is started in the situation where the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the special symbol variation in the variation display that is interrupted is , It has a means to determine whether it is a special symbol variation that can satisfy the time saving end condition, and a special symbol variation that can satisfy the time saving end condition and a special symbol variation that cannot satisfy the time saving end condition. It is possible to make the display mode of the countdown display different depending on the case. Specifically, three colors (blue, red, and rainbow) can be set as the display color of the countdown display, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation that can satisfy the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that red and rainbow colors are more easily set than in the case of special symbol variation that cannot be made. On the other hand, in the case of a special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied, the blue color is more easily set than in the case of the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether or not the special symbol variation being executed according to the display color of the countdown display is a special symbol variation that can satisfy the time saving end condition.

Further, in this case, at the timing when the countdown display is interrupted, the player may be configured to notify the player whether or not the special symbol variation can satisfy the time saving end condition with higher accuracy, or the interrupted countdown display may be displayed. However, it is configured to notify the player whether or not it is a special symbol change that can satisfy the time saving end condition with higher accuracy when restarted in the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. You may.

Further, in the specific embodiment described above, the remaining period of the first special symbol change during execution can be predicted by performing the countdown display in the same manner as in the 17th embodiment described above, but the countdown is displayed. There may be cases where the remaining period and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol variation match or do not match, or the countdown display itself is not performed and the production mode of the challenge effect (for example, the background color) ) May be used to predictably notify the player of the length of the remaining period until the time saving end condition can be satisfied.

Furthermore, the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won (the stop display mode of the third symbol and the characters of the jackpot) is set to the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot and the remaining period until the time saving end condition can be satisfied. It may be configured to be determined according to the situation. For example, when the probability variation B jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is based on the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation and the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation at the present time. Then, the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation when the jackpot fluctuation is stopped is calculated, and when the calculation result satisfies the advantageous condition (remaining fluctuation time is within 3 seconds), the third probability variation A jackpot is indicated. The third symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the stop display mode of the symbol, and if the calculation result satisfies the disadvantageous condition (remaining fluctuation time is 250 seconds or more), the third symbol indicating the time saving jackpot is stopped. The third symbol may be stopped and displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the display mode.

On the other hand, for example, when the time-saving jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol at the time of stopping the jackpot fluctuation is based on the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation at the present time. The residual fluctuation time of the fluctuation is calculated, and when the calculation result satisfies the second disadvantageous condition (remaining fluctuation time is within 3 seconds), the mode that is difficult to distinguish from the stop display mode of the third symbol that normally indicates a jackpot. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed and the calculation result satisfies the advantageous condition (remaining fluctuation time is 250 seconds or more), the third symbol is difficult to distinguish from the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the time saving jackpot. The symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, by changing the display mode displayed during the jackpot fluctuation or the jackpot game (for example, the comment of the jackpot start), the time saving end condition can be easily established after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to notify the player of the degree of advantage in the case and the associated game information, and as this game information, it is easier for the player to satisfy the time saving end condition and the time saving ending condition is satisfied. Game information indicating that an advantageous game state is set, game information indicating that a time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied and a game state is set that is disadvantageous to the player if the time saving end condition is satisfied, Game information indicating that the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied and the game state is set which is more advantageous to the player if the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is preferable to configure the game information indicating that the game state that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and the game information divided into at least four stages so that the player can be notified. As a result, the content of the game executed after the jackpot game is completed can be provided as complex information corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the present specific embodiment, the determination result of whether or not the first special symbol variation during execution is a big hit may be used as an element for changing the production mode of the various effects described above, for example. After the jackpot game ends, it is interrupted when a game state (time saving state) is set in which the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied (the remaining fluctuation time is short) and the time saving end condition is more disadvantageous to the player. When the first special symbol variation that has been performed is won in the jackpot (probability variation A jackpot) that is advantageous to the player, the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied as the game information to be notified to the player (remaining fluctuation time). It is preferable to provide the player with game information indicating that the player is in a game state (short) and the time-saving end condition is satisfied, which is advantageous to the player (winning the probability variation A jackpot). As a result, more complex information can be provided to the player.

<20th Embodiment>
Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 420 to 426. In the 20th embodiment, the jackpot game executed by using both the V winning device 1650 and the variable winning device 2650, that is, the jackpot E17, the jackpot G17, and the jackpot H17 is supported with respect to the 17th embodiment described above. The difference is that the operation content of the jackpot game executed in the above-mentioned manner is different from that of the processing content for setting the execution period of the jackpot game effect executed based on the jackpot game. Since the other parts are the same as those of the 17th embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the 17th embodiment described above, as shown in the hit operation 17 table 202 ng shown in FIG. 365 (b), as the operation content corresponding to the jackpot E17 and the jackpot G17 in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game The operation content of opening the V winning device 1650 in the first and second rounds of the above and opening the variable winning device 2650 in the third and fourth rounds of the jackpot game is specified, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. As the operation content corresponding to the jackpot H17, the operation content of opening the variable winning device 2650 in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game and opening the V winning device 1650 in the third and fourth rounds of the jackpot game is defined. Was there.

As a result, when the above-mentioned jackpot game is executed for the player in the latent state, it is considered that the small hit game is executed by the opening operation of the variable winning device 2650 which is executed as a part of the jackpot game. It is possible to make it look like a jackpot game (2 round jackpot game) in which the V winning device 1650 is opened for 2 rounds is being executed as a jackpot game, and the probability change state is changed after the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the jackpot game corresponding to the set jackpot E17 and jackpot G17 was executed, or the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot H17 in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. there were.

However, in the 17th embodiment described above, the player immediately determines whether the time saving state is set or the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, depending on the game situation after the V winning device 1650 is opened. There was a risk that the motivation to play would drop at once.

That is, when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot E17 and the jackpot G17 in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is executed, the variable winning device 2650 is performed after the first and second rounds in which the V winning device 1650 is opened. The jackpot game of the 3rd and 4th rounds is executed, and after that, the latent state is set and the situation where the ball can be continuously won by the variable winning device 2650 can continue. On the other hand, when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot H17 is executed, the time saving state ends after the jackpot game ends, that is, after the opening operation of the fourth round ends, and then the small hit game ends. Even if it was executed, the game ball could not be entered into the variable winning device 2650.

Therefore, even if the effect is executed so that the opening operation of the V winning device 1650 seems to be a big hit game, the opening operation of the variable winning device 2650 executed after the opening operation of the V winning device 1650 is performed (one of the big hit games). The game state that is set immediately is determined by the winning condition of the ball in the club or the small hit game).

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the variable winning device 2650 is set in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game as the operation content of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot E20 and the jackpot G20 in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. As the operation content of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot H20 in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the operation content of opening the V winning device 1650 is specified in the third and fourth rounds of the jackpot game. The operation content of opening the V winning device 1650 in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game and opening the variable winning device 2650 in the third and fourth rounds of the jackpot game is defined.

With this configuration, when a jackpot game in which a time saving state is set is executed after the jackpot game is completed, after the opening operation of the V winning device 1650 that makes the player think of the jackpot game is executed. Since the variable winning device 2650 is opened for two rounds, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state has been set. Therefore, even after the opening operation of the V winning device 1650 is completed, whether the gaming state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set for the player after the jackpot game is completed for a predetermined period of time, the game It is possible to make it difficult for a person to grasp whether a disadvantageous game state (time saving state) has been set.

Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the start screen of the jackpot effect (see FIG. 359) is displayed at the timing when the V winning device 1650 is opened, and after the opening operation of the V winning device 1650 is completed, the variable winning is obtained. The device 2650 is configured to display the end screen (see FIG. 356) of the jackpot effect at the timing when the period during which the opening operation can be performed a predetermined number of times (twice) elapses.

In other words, for the types of jackpot games that are configured so that the execution period of the actual jackpot game and the execution period of the jackpot effect are different, and that the jackpot game is opened in different operation modes, some movements of the jackpot game and It is configured so that the opening operation of the same operation mode can be executed during the execution period of the big hit effect, including the operation of the small hit game. With this configuration, when a jackpot game that is opened in different operation modes is executed, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of the jackpot game that is being executed based on the operation mode of the jackpot game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422, the flow of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot E20 is won and the case where the jackpot H20 is won and the content of the effect to be executed will be described. FIG. 422 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the jackpot E20 is won, and FIG. 422 (b) is a timing chart showing the flow when the jackpot H20 is won. The detailed description of the same flow as that of the 17th embodiment described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 422 (a), when the jackpot E20 is won, a round game in which the variable winning device 2650 is opened is executed in the first and second rounds. The operation content of this round game is the same as the operation content of the small hit game. Further, as the interval period between the first round and the second round, 3 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation, is set. Therefore, when the jackpot game of the jackpot E20 is executed, the variable winning device 2650 is opened as if the second special symbol lottery was won twice in a row. Further, at this point, the jackpot effect is not executed, and the RUSH effect (RUSH mode effect) is continuously executed.

Then, an interval period of 3 seconds is set even after the end of the second round game, a round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened is executed as the third round game, and a jackpot game effect is executed. To. Then, after the end of the fourth round game, the latent state is set, and the small hit game based on the second special symbol lottery is subsequently executed. Then, the big hit game production ends at the end timing of the second small hit game. That is, during the period during which the jackpot game effect is being executed, the V winning device 1650 is first opened twice, and then the variable winning device 2650 is opened twice.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 422 (b), when the jackpot H20 is won, a round game in which the V winning device 1650 is opened is executed in the first and second rounds. After that, the variable winning device 2650 is opened in the 3rd and 4th rounds after an interval period of 3 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variation. In the 3rd and 4th rounds, the variable winning device 2650 is opened, and the interval period is as if the opening operation of the variable winning device 2650 of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot E17 is won. 2 The variable winning device 2650 is opened with the operation content as if the small hit was won twice in a row in the special symbol lottery. In the jackpot game when the jackpot E20 is won, the jackpot game production is executed in the same period as the jackpot game period. That is, during the period during which the jackpot game effect is being executed, the V winning device 1650 is first opened twice, and then the variable winning device 2650 is opened twice.

With this configuration, the operation order and operation contents of the V prize device 1650 and the variable prize device 2650 during the execution period of the jackpot game effect can be made the same, so which jackpot game is executed for the player. It can be difficult to tell if it was done.

Further, even when the jackpot game (big hit H20) in which the time saving state is set is executed, it is possible to insert the ball into the variable winning device 2650 after the V winning device 1650 is opened. Since the variable winning device 2650 can be opened during the jackpot game in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), the player is made to think that the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed and the jackpot game production is continuing, if the player loses the prize in the second special symbol lottery, the player wins the prize. It is configured to execute a RUSH effect (RUSH mode effect) indicating that the latent state is set at a time point. That is, as shown in FIG. 422 (b), in the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set, the variable winning device 2650 is always set at a predetermined interval after the opening operation of the V winning device 1650 (special figure 2 variation time interval). Since it is stipulated that the game is executed by opening, when the small hit game is not executed at that interval, it is configured to promptly notify that the latent state is set by the effect. .. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel playability such that the player is expected to win the prize.

In the present embodiment, before and after the opening operation of the V winning device 1650 is executed, the mode on the premise that a small hit is won in the second special symbol (that is, the variable winning device 2650 is opened at 3 second intervals). The opening operation is specified according to the mode in which it is operated), but it is not limited to this, and as the operation content of the jackpot game, a variable prize is created only when the player loses consecutively in the second special symbol lottery and wins. The interval period, the opening period, and the ending period may be set corresponding to the period during which the device 2650 is not opened (for example, 6 seconds or 9 seconds).

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the big hit game has been won when the period in which the small hit game is not executed continues for a predetermined period.

Further, a plurality of fluctuation times can be set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the RUSH game (during the latent state). For example, when the reference fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds, the long fluctuation time As a result, a fluctuation time of 6 seconds or 9 seconds may be set to be configurable. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the opening period of the jackpot game is set, whether the second special symbol lottery has been won consecutively, or whether the length variation of the second special symbol has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the opening operation timing of each winning device during the RUSH game.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the variation display effect to be executed in the same effect mode as when the second special symbol is lost and won in the second special symbol lottery during the length variation of the second special symbol. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the opening period of the jackpot game is set, whether the second special symbol lottery has been won consecutively, or whether the length change of the second special symbol has been executed. be able to.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 20th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 423 to 426. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment is a hit-related process 17 (with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 17th embodiment described above. Hit-related processing 20 (see S12292 in FIG. 423) instead of S12202 in FIG. 387, jackpot end processing 20 (see S12356 in FIG. 424) instead of jackpot end processing 17 (see S12306 in FIG. 390), The difference is that the effect setting process 20 (see S12891 in FIG. 426) is executed instead of the setting process 17 (see S12861 in FIG. 393), and the small hit end process (S12352 in FIG. 425) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the hit-related process 20 (S12292) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 423. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 20 (S12292). The hit-related process 20 (S12292) in the 20th embodiment is a jackpot type for setting the start delay flag 223hn to the hit-related process 17 (see S12202 in FIG. 387) in the 17th embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing when the round number command, the jackpot end command, and the small hit end command are received is different. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the hit-related process 20 (S12292), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2401). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the latent state (S12301). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S12301: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type won this time is the jackpot E20 or the jackpot G20 (S12351). After the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot E20 and the jackpot G20 are set to the probability variation B state in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the probability variation A state.

In the processing of S12351, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot E20 or jackpot G20 (S12351: Yes), the start delay flag 223hn is set to ON (S12304), and this processing is terminated. .. The start delay flag 223 hn is referred to in the process of S12481 of the jackpot end process 20 (see S12356 of FIG. 424), and when the start delay flag 223 hn is set to ON, the jackpot effect is continued. The process is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12301, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S12301: No), or in the processing of S12351, the jackpot type won this time is not the jackpot E20 or the jackpot G20. When it is determined that (S12351: No), the above-mentioned jackpot start process (S12302) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the hit-related process 20 (see FIG. 423) in the 20th embodiment, when it is determined that the round number command has been received in the process of S2404 (S2404: Yes), then the start delay flag 223hn is turned on. If it is determined whether or not there is (S12431), and if it is determined that the start delay flag 223hn is off (S12431: No), the process shifts to S2405. On the other hand, in the process of S12431, when it is determined that the start delay flag 223hn is on (S12431: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the number of rounds command received this time is a command indicating the third round. (S12432), if it is determined that the command indicates the third round (S12432: Yes), a display jackpot start command for executing the jackpot effect corresponding to the jackpot to shift to the challenge mode is set (S12432). S12433), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S12432, if it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the command indicating the third round (S12432: No), the process of S12433 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is. By executing each of the processes S12431 to S12433, the jackpot effect of the jackpots E20 and G20 can be started from the third round of the jackpot (the round in which the V winning device 1650 is opened). In other words, it can be configured to have the same operation and effect as the jackpot H20 (the jackpot in which the V winning device 1650 is opened in the first and second rounds) in appearance, so that it is a probabilistic jackpot or a shorter time. It can be configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a big hit or not. Therefore, even if the unfavorable jackpot H20 (short-time jackpot) is won, it is possible to expect the jackpot to be a probabilistic jackpot for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the hit-related process 20 (see FIG. 423) in the 20th embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S2406 (S2406: Yes), the jackpot end process 20 (S12356) Is executed to end this process. Here, with reference to FIG. 424, the jackpot end processing 20 (see S12292 in FIG. 423), which is one of the hit-related processes 20 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment (see S12292 in FIG. 423). S12356) will be described. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 20 (S12356). The jackpot end processing 20 (S12356) in the 20th embodiment is based on the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed for the jackpot end processing 17 (see S12306 in FIG. 390) in the 17th embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for setting the continuation of the jackpot effect has been added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot end time processing 20 (S12356), first, it is determined whether the start delay flag 223hn is set to ON (S12481). When it is determined that the start delay flag 223hn is on (S12481: Yes), the start delay flag 223hn is set to off (S12482), and then the jackpot effect continuation flag 223qb is set to on (S12483). This process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S12481, when it is determined that the start delay flag 223 hn is not on (S12481: No), the process of S12451 to S12455 described above is executed. When the processing of S12455 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending this time is either jackpot B20 or C20 (S12484), and if it is determined to be either jackpot B20 or C20 (S12484: Yes), the process shifts to S12458. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot ending this time is neither the jackpot B20 nor C20 (S12484: No), the process shifts to S12457.

Returning to FIG. 423, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received in the process of S2406 (S2406: No), the above-described processes of S2409 to S2411 are executed. Then, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S2411: Yes), the small hit end process is executed (S12352), and the present process is terminated as it is. A detailed description of the small hit end processing (S12352) will be described later with reference to FIG. 425. On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2411: No), the above-mentioned processes of S12310 and S12311 are executed, and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 425, the small hit end processing (see S12292 in FIG. 423), which is one of the hit-related processes 20 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment (see S12292 in FIG. 423). S12352) will be described. FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit end processing (S12352). This small hit end processing counts the number of small hits won after the big hit E20 or big hit G20 big hit game ends, and when it reaches a predetermined value, a display command indicating that the rush mode is entered is issued. This is a process for setting.

In the small hit end processing (S12352), first, it is determined whether the value of the small hit number counter 223qq is larger than 0 (S12371). When it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223qq is not a value larger than 0 (S12371: No), it is determined whether the large hit effect continuation flag 223qb is set to ON (S12372). If it is determined that the jackpot effect continuation flag 223qb is not on (S12372: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot effect continuation flag 223qb is set to ON (S12372: Yes), the value of the small hit count counter is set to 1 (S12373), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12371, when it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223qq is larger than 0 (S12371: Yes), the value of the small hit count counter 223qq is subtracted by 1 (S12374), and then , It is determined whether the value of the small hit count counter 223qq is 0 (S12375). When it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223qq is 0 (S12375: Yes), since it is the end timing of the continuation of the big hit effect, a display command indicating the entry into the rush mode is set (S12376), and the big hit effect is produced. The continuation flag 223qb is set to off (S12377), and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S12375, when it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223qq is not 0 (S12375: No), the processes of S12376 to S12377 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the effect setting process 20 (S12891) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 426. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 20 (S12891). The effect setting process 20 (S12891) in the 20th embodiment is different from the effect setting process 17 (see S12861 in FIG. 393) in the 17th embodiment described above, while the jackpot effect is being continued, the second special symbol is removed. The difference is that processes (S12893 to S12897) for setting the effect of fluctuation are added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the effect setting process 20 (S12891), first, after executing the process of S12701 described above, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect continuation flag 223qb is set to ON (S12893). When it is determined that the jackpot effect continuation flag 223qb is set to ON (S12893: Yes), it is determined whether the variation of the special symbol executed this time is the deviation variation of the second special symbol (S12894). If it is determined that the fluctuation of the special symbol to be executed this time is the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol (S12894: Yes), a display command for indicating RUSH rush is set (S12895), and the jackpot production continuation flag is set. Set 223qb to off (S12896). Then, the value of the small hit count counter 223qq is reset to 0 (S12897), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12893, when it is determined that the jackpot effect continuation flag 223qb is not set to ON (S12893: No), the process of S12702-S12713 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Another example of control content in the main controller>
Among the above-described embodiments, in the sixth embodiment and the seventeenth embodiment, as the probability state of the special symbol, a high probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high and a higher probability state than the high probability state. The pachinko machine 10 that can set the low probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is low and the probability of winning the jackpot are explained.

Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, when the special symbol variation number is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. The pachinko machine 10 having the control content to be performed is described, and in the 17th embodiment, the control content in which the high probability state of the special symbol continues for the period from the setting of the high probability state of the special symbol to the winning of the next jackpot The pachinko machine 10 having the above is described.

As the control content for continuing the high-probability state of the special symbol (control content for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state), control content other than the above-mentioned two control contents may be used. good.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 427 to 429, another example in which the control content in the main control device 110 is different from that of the 17th embodiment described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this alternative example, when the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. The lottery for this purpose (so-called fall lottery) is configured to be feasible, and when the fall lottery is won, the game state is changed from the probability change state to the time saving state. That is, in the 17th embodiment described above, when the probabilistic state is set, the probabilistic state continues until the next big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit). However, in this alternative example, if the fall lottery is won before the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the probability change state ends at that point.

With this configuration, the player can determine how long the probabilistic state will continue even if it is grasped that the probabilistic state is set by the suggestion effect executed during the period when the advantageous game state is set. Since it can be made difficult to understand, it is possible to pay more attention to the content of the suggestion effect to be executed.

Further, in the 17th embodiment described above, when the probability change state is set, the state is changed to the latent state when the time saving end condition is satisfied. That is, in the seventeenth embodiment configured so that the probabilistic state continues until the next big hit is won in the special symbol lottery (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit winning), the big hit is performed during the probable change state. By executing a special symbol lottery until the time saving end condition is satisfied without winning, it is configured to shift to a latent state that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in this alternative example, if the fall lottery is won before the time saving end condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied. With this configuration, even when the probability change state is set, the playability after the time saving end condition is satisfied can be greatly different depending on whether or not the fall lottery is won.

<About the electrical configuration of this example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 427. The present alternative example is significantly different from the above-mentioned 17th embodiment in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state can be executed. The difference is that a configuration has been added to execute the fall lottery.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of this other example will be described with reference to FIG. 427 (a). FIG. 427 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of this other example. As shown in FIG. 427 (a), the ROM 202 of the present alternative example is different from the ROM 202 of the 17th embodiment described above in that a new fall lottery table 202hn is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fall lottery table 202hn is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 described later is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of starting winning) is any of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202hn. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202hn will be described with reference to FIG. 427 (b). FIG. 427 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202hn. As shown in FIG. 427 (b), in the fall lottery table 202hn, two determination values of "0, 1" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in the probable change state of the special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, there are two judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/500.

In the fall lottery table 202hn in this alternative example, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the probabilistic state (determination value for the probabilistic state of the special symbol) is defined, and the special symbol The judgment value for the low probability state of is not specified. This is because it is wasteful of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

In this alternative example, the fall lottery table 202hn and the regularly updated fall lottery counter Cd1 are compared to determine whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol. Is judged. That is, from the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), which is the most advantageous state for the player among the advantageous gaming states, although it is one of the advantageous gaming states, from the probabilistic state. Can randomly shift to a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the probabilistic state to continue for as long as possible.

In this alternative example, when the probability change state is set, the probability change state is continued until the next big hit winning unless the fall lottery is won. For example, the sixth implementation described above is carried out. Like the embodiment, the maximum duration (50 times) of the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be defined by the value of the probability variation counter 203i.

In this alternative example, a lottery (judgment) was made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state of the special symbol, but it is a lottery (judgment) to shift to another state. ) May. For example, it may be determined by a lottery executed for each change whether or not to shift from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomly determine how long the advantageous gaming state will continue, so that the game can be performed in the hope that the advantageous gaming state will continue for each change. Further, for example, it may be configured so that lottery is possible whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, in this alternative example, the above-mentioned fall lottery is configured to be executed every time a special symbol lottery is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the type of special symbol to which the special symbol lottery is executed may be used. Depending on the situation, the ease of executing the fall lottery may be different. For example, when the second special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, is performed, the first special symbol lottery is performed. It may be configured so that the fall lottery is more easily executed than when it is performed. With this configuration, the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state by the fall lottery executed based on the first special symbol lottery, and the game is advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to perform.

Further, at the execution timing of the fall lottery, a means for determining the number of times the fall lottery is executed may be provided so that the number of fall lottery executed when the execution opportunity of the fall lottery is established is different. good. In this case, it is preferable to set the range of the number of times determined by the number-of-times determining means to "0 to 5" and design so that the average value is one time. With this configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the fall lottery is executed can be separated, so at what timing the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state. You can make it more difficult to understand what to do. In this case, a suggestion means that can suggest the number of times determined by the number-of-times determination means (the number of times the fall lottery is executed) is provided, and a period during which the player is likely to fall (multiple times is determined by the number-of-times determination means) It is preferable to configure a period in which it is difficult to fall (a period in which 0 times is determined by the number of times determination means) in a suggestable manner. As a result, the game can be played while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the content of the suggestion by the suggestion means.

Further, in this alternative example, the execution of the special symbol lottery is used as the execution trigger of the fall lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the fall lottery may be executed when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute a fall lottery when a ball enters a specific winning opening (for example, a general entry opening 63) provided in the game board 13.

<Regarding the control processing content in another example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 428 and 429, the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present alternative example will be described, which is different from the above-described 17th embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment in that it has a fall lottery function as described above, and the control content regarding this difference is different. are doing. Specifically, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 and the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 are different, and other than that, they are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 428, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7126 of FIG. 428) will be described. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7126 in FIG. 428). When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7126 of FIG. 428) is executed, the same processes of S1811 to S1812 as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7121 of FIG. 374) are executed. , When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203 nc is set to ON in the processing of S1812 (S1812: Yes), the value of the acquired fall lottery counter Cd1 is compared with the value specified in the fall lottery table 202hn. (S1876), it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S1877).

If it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (S1877: Yes), the probability variation flag is set to off (S1878), and a fall command is set to indicate that the high probability state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state. (S1879), each process of S1880 and S1815 to S1820, which is the same process as the process of S1813 to S1820 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7121 of FIG. 374) described above, is executed, and this process is completed. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S1877, when it is determined that the fall lottery has not been won (S1877: No), each process of S1878 and S1879 is skipped and the process shifts to S1880. Further, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203 nc is off (S1812: No), each process of S1876 to S1879 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1880.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7644 in FIG. 429) will be described with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7644 in FIG. 429). When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7644 in FIG. 429) is executed, the same processes of S1921 to S1922 as in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see S7638 in FIG. 379) are executed. , When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203 nc is set to ON in the processing of S1922 (S1922: Yes), the value of the acquired fall lottery counter Cd1 is compared with the value specified in the fall lottery table 202hn. (S1976), it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S1977).

If it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (S1977: Yes), the probability variation flag 203 nc is set to off (S1978), and a fall command is issued to indicate that the high probability state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state. After setting (S1979), the processes S1980 and S1925 to S1930, which are the same processes as the processes of S1923 to S1930 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 379) described above, are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1977, if it is determined that the fall lottery has not been won (S1977: No), each process of S1978 and S1979 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1980. Further, in the process of S1922, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203 nc is off (S1922: No), each process of S1976 to S1979 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1980.

As described above, in this alternative example, in the state where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied, the fall lottery is executed before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately execute a special symbol lottery according to the lottery result of the fall lottery, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

The execution timing of the fall lottery and the execution timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from the present alternative example. For example, the fall lottery may be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fall lottery is executed immediately after that. Therefore, the special symbol lottery executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is executed. By the time the lottery result is stopped and displayed (by the time the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed), an event will occur in which the fall lottery is won and the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When such a state occurs, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol change currently being executed becomes the last change in which the special symbol lottery is executed in a high probability state. It is preferable to configure the fall notification effect to indicate that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the special symbol change during execution.

Further, in this alternative example, when the fall lottery is won, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed before the next special symbol lottery is executed. However, not limited to this, for example, when the fall lottery is won, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol continues is subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the height of the special symbol is high. The remaining number of special symbol lottery that can be executed during the probability state may be set to a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Even in such a configuration, by winning the fall lottery, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the game state (probability change state) that is most advantageous to the player will continue, so that the player is nervous. It is possible to play a game with a feeling.

In this alternative example, when the player is not won in the fall lottery, that is, when the high probability state of the special symbol continues, the effect for suggesting or notifying the player to that effect is not executed. The period during which the high-probability state of the special symbol continues (the period during which it continues) is difficult for the player to understand, but it is not limited to this, and in some cases where the player does not win the fall lottery. It may be configured to notify the player to that effect. In this case, for example, not only the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 determined to be won (fall) but also the value determined to be out of specification (for example, 998,999) is specified in the fall lottery table 202hn. When it is determined to be a value, a command indicating a specific deviation may be set to execute an effect for indicating to the player that the result of the fall lottery is a specific deviation. When a command for indicating that the lottery result of the fall lottery is out of order is set and a command for indicating that the lottery result of the fall lottery is out of order is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the fall lottery is performed. A lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute an effect indicating that the lottery result is out of order, and when it is determined that the effect is to be executed in the lottery, the out-of-order effect may be executed.

<21st Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 430 to 446. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, as the probabilistic state, the first special symbol lottery is easily executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the probabilistic state 1 and the second special state are compared with the probabilistic state 1. Two types of probabilistic states having different degrees of advantage are provided, that is, the probabilistic state 2 in which the lottery of symbols is easy to be executed (that is, relatively advantageous), and the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (that is, as a time saving state). (Relatively disadvantageous) time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed (that is, relatively advantageous) than the time saving state 1 It was configured to provide a time saving state. In other words, as a relatively advantageous game state in which the game progresses by hitting right, a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol having a relatively low degree of advantage is easily executed and a lottery of the second special symbol having a relatively high degree of advantage Was configured to provide a game state in which is easy to execute.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 21st embodiment, the degree of advantage is high as a relatively advantageous gaming state in which the game is advanced by right-handed hitting (that is, a gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set). 2 Instead of providing only two types of gaming states, a probabilistic state in which the lottery of special symbols is easily executed and a time-saving state, a relatively disadvantageous gaming state in which the game is advanced by left-handed (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol is set. The game state (normal state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol having a relatively low degree of advantage is easily executed, the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage, and the second special with a high degree of advantage. As a configuration in which two types of gaming states are provided: a symbol lottery and a gaming state (latent state) in which the lottery of symbols is easily executed alternately (that is, the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state). There is. In the normal state, the special symbol is set to the low probability state, and only the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is executed, which is disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the latent state, the special symbol is in the high probability state. By setting to, it becomes easy to win a big hit, and the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage becomes relatively easy to be executed, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to add sharpness to the game state in which the game progresses by hitting left, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming state in which the game progresses by hitting left with a relatively low degree of advantage and a gaming state in which the game progresses by hitting right with a relatively high degree of advantage are provided. It is widely known that a gaming state with a low degree of advantage shifts to a gaming state with a high degree of advantage based on the establishment of a specific opportunity such as a jackpot winning. However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the motivation of the player for the game is lowered if the gaming state with a low degree of advantage continues for a long time.

On the other hand, in the 21st embodiment, as a game state in which the game is advanced by left-handed, a normal state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by performing left-handed, and a left-handed state are performed. Two types of gaming states are provided: a latent state in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed almost alternately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in an unfavorable game state in which the game is advanced by hitting the left side, so that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in a disadvantageous game state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 21st embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 6th embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the above is partially changed, the control process executed by MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and it is executed by MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that some control processes have been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 6 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 430, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 21st embodiment will be described. FIG. 430 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 430, in the game board 13 in the 21st embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the distribution device 700 and the first operation port 704 of the distribution device 700 in the 6th embodiment. The point that the right first ball entry port 64a2 to be opened and the right second ball entry port 64b to be opened based on the game ball entering the second operating port 707 of the distribution device 700 have been deleted. Is different.

Further, in the game board 13 in the 21st embodiment, as shown in FIG. 430, a plurality of game balls are inserted in the lower center of the game board 13 instead of the first entry port 64a1 in the sixth embodiment. The difference is that a distribution device 1750 that can be distributed to any of the mouths (left first ball entrance 64l, right first ball entrance 64r, and second ball entrance 1640) is provided. In addition, the second entrance 1640 is normally housed inside the game board 13, and when it hits a normal symbol, it is horizontally long and can be projected toward the front side of the front view for a predetermined period. It is also different from the sixth embodiment in that a substantially rectangular shape ordinary electric accessory 1640a is provided incidentally. The ordinary electric accessory 1640a is configured so that the game ball can roll on the upper surface in a state of protruding toward the front side of the front view with respect to the game board 13. The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is guided to the entry spherical surface of the second entry opening 1640. On the other hand, in the state where the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is stored inside the game board 13 (in the buried state), the game ball is not guided to the second entry port 1640, so that the second entry port 1640 It forms a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 430, in the game board 13 in the 21st embodiment, two through gates, a central through gate 67c and a right through gate 67r, are provided as through gates that trigger a lottery of ordinary symbols. It is provided. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 430, the central through gate 67c is provided inside the sorting device 1750, and the right through gate 67r is provided on the left side of the front view of the variable winning device 65. However, it is different from the sixth embodiment.

Further, on the right side of the front view of the distribution device 1750, a game ball that is bounced to the right without entering the distribution device 1750 is a right first entry port 64r or a second entry ball of the distribution device 1750. A region for suppressing entry into the mouth 1640 and guiding the ball to the out mouth 66u is formed. Although the details will be described later, in the 21st embodiment, the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than the lottery of the 1st special symbol, and the ball enters the sorting device 1750 in the latent state. While a part of the game ball that has been played can enter the second entrance 1640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, under normal conditions, even if the ball enters the distribution device 1750, the second entry is made. It is configured so that it cannot enter the ball mouth 1640. Therefore, in order to prevent the game ball that did not enter the distribution device 1750 in the normal state from irregularly winning the second entry port 1640, the out port 66u moves to the right side of the distribution device 1750. All the game balls that have flowed down are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the superiority of the latent state in which the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage can be executed can be more reliably enhanced than in the normal state.

Here, the details of the distribution device 1750 according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 431. FIG. 431 (a) shows the vibration when the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is buried (stored) in the game board 13 (a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry port 1640). FIG. 431 (b) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the dividing device 1750, in which the ordinary electric accessory 1640a protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 (the game ball moves to the second entrance 1640). It is an enlarged front view around the distribution device 1750 in the case of being guided).

As shown in FIG. 431 (a), the distribution device 1750 is placed on the upper surface of the distribution device 1750 through an opening 1750a having a width through which the game ball can pass and the opening 1750a. A distribution member 1750b that distributes the game ball that has entered the ball to either the right side or the left side of the front view, and a left guide flow path 1750c that allows the game ball that is distributed to the left side of the front view by the distribution member 1750b. And the first ball entry port 64l provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the left guidance flow path 1750c can enter, and the game ball distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 1750b can flow down. The right first entry port 64r and the second entry port 1640 provided at positions where the right guidance flow path 1750d and the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1750d can enter, and the second entry ball thereof. It is provided along with the mouth 1640 and is variable between a protruding state that guides the game ball to the second entry port 1640 and a buried state (stored state) in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second entry port 1640. It is composed of an ordinary electric accessory 1640a that is possible (displaceable).

The right first entry port 64r and the left first entry opening 64l are configured as starting winning openings that trigger a lottery for the first special symbol having a relatively low degree of advantage, and the second entry opening 1640 is relatively advantageous. It is configured as a starting winning slot that triggers a lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree. More specifically, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that the percentage of jackpots with a small number of rounds is higher when the jackpot is won than the lottery of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot Since the ratio of the second special symbol is set to be low, the lottery of the second special symbol has a higher degree of advantage.

As shown in FIG. 431 (a), the distribution member 1750b is provided on the right side in the front view and can receive the game ball, and the right receiving portion 1750br is provided on the left side in the front view and can receive the game ball. It is composed of at least a portion 1750 bl and a rotation shaft 1750 bc which is a rotation axis of the rotation operation of the distribution member 1750 b. The distribution member 1750b is configured to be variable (displaceable) into a state of being tilted to the right side of the front view (arrangement) and a state of being tilted to the left side of the front view (arrangement) with the rotation shaft 1750bc as the rotation axis. There is. FIG. 431 (a) illustrates a situation in which the vehicle is displaced to the right side in the front view (arrangement). In the state where the distribution member 1750b is tilted to the right side in the front view, the left receiving portion 1750bl is arranged directly under the opening 1750a (the game ball passing through the opening 1750a is received by the left receiving portion 1750bl). The right receiving portion 1750br is arranged directly under the opening 1750a in a state of being tilted to the left side in the front view (the game ball passing through the opening 1750a is received by the right receiving portion 1750br).

When the game ball is received by the left receiving portion 1750 bl in a state where the distribution member 1750 b is tilted to the right side in the front view, the distribution member 1750 b rotates counterclockwise with the rotation axis 1750 bc as the rotation axis due to the weight of the game ball. The distribution member 1750b is variably (displaced) in a state of being tilted to the left side in the front view, and the game ball received by the left receiving portion 1750bl falls into the left guiding flow path 1750c. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the right receiving portion 1750 br in a state where the distribution member 1750 b is tilted to the left side in the front view, the distribution member 1750 b rotates clockwise with the rotation axis 1750 bc as the rotation axis due to the weight of the game ball. The distribution member 1750b is variably (displaced) in a state of being tilted to the right side in the front view, and the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1750br falls into the right guiding flow path 1750d. In other words, the distribution member 1750b alternately receives the game ball by the right receiving portion 1750br and the left receiving portion 1750bl, and alternately guides the game ball to the right guiding flow path 1750d and the left guiding flow path 1750c. That is, every time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750, it is alternately distributed to the left guide flow path 1750c and the right guide flow path 1750d.

In the normal state, the game ball flowing down the right guide flow path 1750d reaches the buried ordinary electric accessory 1640a, passes through the ordinary electric accessory 1640a as it is, and enters the right first entrance 64r. Sphere (see FIG. 431 (a)). More specifically, if a lottery of a normal symbol based on the passage of a game ball through the central through gate 67c provided in the right guide flow path 1750d is won, the passage of the central through gate 67c is detected and then 0. After 4 seconds, the ordinary electric accessory 1640a changes (displaces) from the buried state to the protruding state. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c reaches the normal electric accessory 1640a in about 0.2 seconds. For this reason, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c has passed through the normal electric accessory 1640a before the normal electric accessory 1640a is changed to the protruding position, and enters the right first entrance ball port 64r. Sphere (see FIG. 431 (a)). In addition, since the hit of the normal symbol is completed in a relatively short time (about 0.9 seconds after passing through the central through gate 67c), even if the game balls continuously enter the distribution device 1750 at short intervals. , While the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c is distributed to the left guide flow path 1750c, the hit of the normal symbol ends. Therefore, even if the game balls continuously enter the distribution device 1750 at short intervals, the subsequent game balls may reach the normal electric accessory 1640a during the protrusion period of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a. Absent. Therefore, in the normal state, every time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750, the game ball alternately enters the right first entry port 64r and the left first entry port 64l.

Further, the game ball that has flowed down the right guidance flow path 1750d in the latent state reaches the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the protruding state, and is guided by the inclination formed by the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the protruding state. 2 Enter the ball into the ball entry port 1640 (see FIG. 431 (b)). More specifically, in the latent state, when the game ball passes through the central through gate 67c provided in the right guide flow path 1750d and wins by a lottery of a normal symbol, the central through gate 67c passes. 0.12 seconds after the detection of the above, the ordinary electric accessory 1640a changes (displaces) from the buried state to the protruding state. This protruding state is maintained for 0.5. On the other hand, as described above, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c reaches the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in about 0.2 seconds, so that it almost collides with the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the protruding state. It is guided to the entrance spherical surface of the second entrance 1640 along the downward inclination from the upper right to the lower left in the front view formed by the protruding ordinary electric accessory 1640a. Therefore, in the latent state, each time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750, the game ball alternately enters the second entry port 1640 and the left first entry port 64l.

As shown in FIG. 431 (b), the game ball that has passed through the right through gate 67r provided on the right side of the distribution device 1750 is also set so that the normal electric accessory 1640a is in the protruding state in the latent state. It is configured so that the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a can be reached during the process. However, in the gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbol such as the latent state or the normal state is set, the period during which the normal electric accessory 1640a is set to the protruding state when the normal symbol hits (second entry). The game ball that has fallen to the right side of the normal electric accessory 1640a reaches the second entrance 1640 because the period during which the ball can enter the ball opening 1640 is relatively short (for example, 0.5 seconds). The ordinary electric accessory 1640a returns to the buried state before the period required for (for example, 1 second). Therefore, the anomalous game method of allowing the game ball to enter only the second entrance 1640 by hitting right in the latent state and passing through the right through gate 67r is not established. In a low latency state, the player can more reliably advance the game by hitting the left side.

On the other hand, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the period in which the normal electric accessory 1640a is set in the protruding state when the normal symbol hits is set to a relatively long period (for example, 2 seconds), so that the right The game ball that has passed through the right through gate 67r by hitting can be rolled into (guided) the second entry port 1640 by rolling the upper surface of the protruding ordinary electric accessory 1640a. Therefore, in an advantageous probabilistic state or a time saving state, most of the game balls launched by right-handed hitting can enter the second entrance 1640, so that the ball can be held as compared with the case of left-handed hitting. It forms an advantageous state in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be continuously executed without reducing the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the state shifts to the time saving state or the probability change state.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, in the normal state in which the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is set and the latent state, the normal electric accessory 1640a is opened after winning the hit of the normal symbol. The left-handed game state (normal state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed and the first special symbol by changing the period until the first special symbol is moved (displacement) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a. It is configured to form a left-handed game state (latent state) in which the lottery and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed alternately. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game in the left-handed game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the game in the unfavorable left-handed game state from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 21st embodiment, the normal state is configured as a left-handed game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, while the latent state is the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Was configured as a left-handed game state in which and are executed alternately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, conversely, the normal state may be configured as a left-handed game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are alternately executed. With such a configuration, in the normal state, the jackpot probability is low, but the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed, while in the latent state, the jackpot probability is high, but it is advantageous. It is possible to realize playability in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. That is, since different merits and demerits can be provided between the normal state and the latent state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in these gaming states.

Next, with reference to FIG. 432, a method of shifting between gaming states in the 21st embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 432, four gaming states are provided in the 21st embodiment. That is, it is set to the normal state (see the upper part of FIG. 432) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. The latent probability state (see the middle row of FIG. 432), the probabilistic state set to the high probability (probability change) state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (see the lower left side of FIG. 432), and the low probability state of the special symbol. There are four gaming states: a time saving state (see the lower right side of FIG. 432), which is set as a time saving state of a normal symbol. Here, as described above, the normal state is a gaming state in which the game proceeds mainly by executing the lottery of the first special symbol mainly by left-handing, and the latent state is the lottery mainly by the first special symbol by left-handing. It is a game state in which the game progresses by alternately executing the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the game progresses mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed. It is in a game state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 432, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another gaming state only when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 432, if the jackpot A21, which is won at a rate of 5% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the most advantageous probabilistic state for the player. In addition, if the jackpot B21, which is won at a rate of 30% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is relatively disadvantageous (that is, in the left-handed gaming state). Yes) Set to latent state. Further, if the jackpot C21, which is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to a relatively advantageous time saving state. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the normal state, the game shifts to the right-handed game state at a rate of 70%, and shifts to the latent state, which is a left-handed game state that is relatively more advantageous than the normal state, at a rate of 30%. Therefore, in any case, winning the jackpot is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the player can be more pleased.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 432, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 432, among the cases where the jackpot is won in the latent state, the case where the jackpot A21, D21, or E21 which is won at a substantially 35% rate is won. , The game state after the big hit is set to the most advantageous probability change state. In addition, the substantial ratio is a ratio in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed alternately (evenly), and is the jackpot of the first special symbol. It refers to the value obtained by averaging the distribution of the jackpot type and the distribution of the jackpot type of the second special symbol. That is, the average ratio (70% / 70%) of 5%, which is the ratio of winning the jackpot A21 in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 65%, which is the ratio of winning the jackpots D21 and E21 in the lottery of the second special symbol. 35%, which is 2), is expressed as the rate of transition to a substantial probability change state in the latent state. Similarly, among the cases where the jackpot is won in the latent state, when one of the jackpots C21 and F21, which wins at a substantially 50% rate, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is relatively advantageous is a time saving state. Is set to. On the other hand, when the jackpot B21, which is substantially won at a rate of 15% in the latent state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the latent state again. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the latent state, the rate of transition to the right-handed game state is substantially 85%, and the rate of transition to the most advantageous probability change state is also 30% higher than in the normal state. It is possible to further increase the expectation of the player when the jackpot is won.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 432, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 432, if the jackpot F21, which is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, is won, the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the jackpots D21 and E21, which are won at a rate of 65% in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, are won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous probability variation state for the player again. That is, if the jackpot is won in the probability variation state, the most advantageous probability variation state is set again at a rate of 65%, so that the most advantageous probability variation state and the jackpot are repeated (looped) at a rate of 65%, which is extremely advantageous. Form a state. Therefore, by shifting to the probabilistic state, it is possible to greatly improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 432, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another gaming state when the jackpot is won or when the time saving number of times has elapsed. More specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 432, if the jackpots D21 and E21 are won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, after the jackpot ends. The gaming state of is set to the most advantageous probabilistic state for the player. In addition, when the number of time reductions (30 times or 100 times) elapses in the time reduction state, the state shifts to the normal state which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot F21, which is won at a rate of 35% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state again. In other words, if the jackpot is won in the time saving state, the most advantageous probability variation state is set at a rate of 65%, but when the time saving number of times elapses, the most disadvantageous normal state for the player is set. The degree of advantage is lower than that of the probabilistic state.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, the normal state and the latent state are provided as the disadvantageous left-handed gaming state, and the probabilistic state and the time saving state are provided as the advantageous right-handed gaming state. By configuring these four game states to go back and forth with a big hit or the like as an opportunity, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 433, a characteristic effect mode in the 21st embodiment will be described. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing a variation display mode during the latent state in the 21st embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 433 (a) is a diagram showing a variation display mode of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol, and FIG. 433 (b) is a diagram of the second special symbol. It is a figure which showed the variation display mode of the 3rd symbol for showing a lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 433 (a), in the latent state, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol has an auxiliary symbol (“normal” symbol) with the character “normal” in the third symbol. It is displayed along with the lower right part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 433 (b), in the latent state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol has a third auxiliary symbol (“heat” symbol) with the letters “heat”. It is displayed along with the lower right part of the design. The word "heat" is commonly used, especially in the amusement machine industry, to mean that it is highly expected to be advantageous. Therefore, the variable display of the third symbol (see FIG. 433 (b)) accompanied by the "heat" symbol is better than the variable display of the third symbol accompanied by the "normal" symbol (see FIG. 433 (a)). It is possible to intuitively and easily make the player understand that the degree of advantage is high.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, as a reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, a substantially circular "normal" reserved symbol with the character "normal" is displayed on the upper side, and the second special symbol As the corresponding reserved symbol, a substantially equilateral triangular "heat" reserved symbol with the letters "heat" is displayed at the bottom. With these display modes, the player can easily understand whether the symbol is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol or a reserved symbol of the second special symbol.

<Electrical configuration in the 21st embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 434 (a). FIG. 434 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 434 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 21st embodiment is a small hit with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 6th embodiment (and the 1st embodiment) (see FIG. 19A). The difference is that the type selection table 202f and the open scenario table 202g are deleted. In addition, the provisions of the first random number table 202a, the first random number selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the time saving table 202e have been partially changed. The difference is that table 202ra has been added.

The normal figure open pattern table 202ra is a data table that is referred to for selecting the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 1640a when the normal symbol is won. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 438 (b), but in the normal figure opening pattern table 202ra, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a based on the hit of the ordinary symbol is defined in association with the gaming state. There is.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 435 (a). The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a random number value (counter value) for hitting a special symbol is defined. FIG. 435 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the 21st embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 435 (a), the first hit random number table 202a in the 21st embodiment shows a random number value (first hit random number counter) determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the special symbol. Eight random number values (counter values) of "0 to 7" are defined in association with each other as the C1 counter value), and the random number value (No. 1) determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery in the high probability state of the special symbol. As the counter value of the random number counter C1 per unit), 20 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 19" are defined in association with each other. Of the 1000 random random values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the special symbol lottery is 8 in the low probability state of the special symbol. Since there are 20 in the high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/125 (8/1000), and the first in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/50 (20/1000). In the 21st embodiment, since the lottery result corresponding to the small hit is not provided, the random number value corresponding to the small hit is not defined.

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 435 (b). FIG. 435 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the 21st embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table that is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 435 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the 21st embodiment, there are three types of jackpots, "big hit A21" to "big hit C21", as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Is stipulated. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three types of jackpot types of "big hit D21" to "big hit F21" are defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 435 (b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0-4", the jackpot type is " The jackpot A21 ”is defined in association with each other. This "big hit A21" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 2 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit A21", basically (that is, if the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is the most advantageous probability change state for the player (that is, It is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). Therefore, the "big hit A21" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit A21" is 5 of "0 to 4". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit A21" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 435 (b), "big hit B21" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5-34". This "big hit B21" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of "big hit B21", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is the latent state (probability change state of the special symbol). , And the normal state of the normal symbol). That is, it is set to a left-handed game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the "big hit B21" is a big hit type having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot, it is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit B21" is 30 of "5 to 34". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B21" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 435 (b), "big hit C21" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 99". This "big hit C21" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 2 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. After the end of this "big hit C21", it is basically set to a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) (unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 65e3). .. That is, it is set to a right-handed gaming state that is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the "big hit C21" is a big hit type having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit C21" is 65 of "35 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C21" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 65% (65/100).

The reason why the number of rounds is common (2 rounds) between "Big hit A21" and "Big hit C21" is that it is difficult to understand whether the game state after the big hit is a probable change state or a time saving state. This is to improve the interests of people. That is, when it becomes "big hit A21" or "big hit C21", the big hit game of two rounds is executed, and after the big hit ends, it shifts to the right-handed game state (probability change state or time saving state). That is, it shifts to one of two types of gaming states in which only the jackpot probability, which is indistinguishable from the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 (the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a, etc.), is different. Therefore, even if a time saving state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that an advantageous probability variation state is set. Therefore, even if the "big hit C21", which has a relatively high percentage of determination, is won and the time saving state is set, the "big hit A21" is won until the number of time saving times (30 times) in the time saving state elapses. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the most advantageous probability change state may be set, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Here, in the 21st embodiment, when the time saving state or the probability change state is set after the end of the winning jackpot in the left-handed game state, until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 30 times (that is, the time saving state). (Until the number of lottery times when the time saving state ends when is set), a common production mode is set to indicate that the game is in a right-handed game state, and 30 special symbol lottery has been completed. Based on this, the game status is notified. That is, if the time saving state is set after the big hit ends, the transition to the normal state (elapsed number of time saving times) is notified when the lottery of 30 special symbols is completed, and the probability changes after the big hit ends. If the state is set, it is configured to notify that it is a probable change state that continues until the next big hit, triggered by the completion of the lottery of 30 special symbols. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set, the player is continuously expected to have the probability change state set until the time saving number of times elapses. Since it is possible to keep holding it, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "big hit D21" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". This "big hit D21" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 16 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit D21", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is the most advantageous probability change state for the player (that is, It is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). Therefore, the "big hit D21" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the game state after the big hit and the number of rounds. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit D21" is 50 of "0 to 49". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D21" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 50% (50/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 64", "big hit E21" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit E21" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit E21", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is the most advantageous probability change state for the player (that is, the probability change state (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3). It is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). Therefore, "Big hit E21" is the most advantageous in terms of the game state after the end of the big hit, like "Big hit A21" and "Big hit D21", and in terms of the number of rounds, it is the second most advantageous type of big hit after "Big hit D21". Is. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit E21" is 15 of "50 to 64". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit E21" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 15% (15/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "big hit F21" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit F21" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. In addition, after the end of "big hit E21", it is basically set to a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 65e3. .. Therefore, the "big hit F21" is a big hit type having a lower degree of advantage than the "big hit A21", the "big hit D21", and the "big hit E21" in terms of the gaming state after the big hit ends. In terms of the number of rounds, it is a jackpot type that is the second most advantageous after "big hit D21". Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit F21" is 35 of "65 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit F21" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 35% (35/100).

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, even if a big hit is won in the lottery of the 1st special symbol, it is configured so that it shifts to an advantageous probability change state only at an extremely low ratio (5% ratio). On the other hand, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the majority (65% ratio) is configured to shift to the probability change state. Furthermore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the big hit can only be won in a relatively small number of rounds such as 2 rounds or 4 rounds, whereas the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is a big hit. In that case, it is configured to win a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds of 8 or 16 rounds. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that it will shift to a right-handed game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed by right-handed. it can. In addition, in a latent state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed alternately, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a big hit rather than the lottery of the first special symbol. You can play the game with a strong expectation. That is, the variation display of the third symbol with the "heat" symbol (see FIG. 433 (b)) is more than the variation display of the third symbol with the "normal" symbol (see FIG. 433 (a)). The game can be played with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be notified. In other words, in the latent state, when a production with a high expectation of a big hit with a "normal" pattern (for example, a super reach production) is executed, it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes the expectation that the jackpot will not be achieved. it can. Therefore, it is possible to extremely improve the interest in the game in the latent state.

Next, the second random number table 202c in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 435 (c). The second hit random number table 202c is a data table in which a random number value (counter value of the second hit random number counter C4) that is a hit of a normal symbol is defined for each state of the normal symbol. FIG. 435 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c.

As shown in FIG. 435 (c), for a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, 240 random values of "0 to 239" are used as random values (counter values) that are hit by the normal symbol. Are specified in association with each other. Since all 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4 are defined as winning random numbers, the lottery of the normal symbols can be performed in the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbols. When executed, the ratio of hitting a normal symbol is 100% (240/240).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 435 (c), for the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the random number value (counter value) that hits the normal symbol is "1 to 239". 239 random values are associated and defined. Of the 240 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the number of random numbers that are determined to be hits of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "1 to". Since there are 239 of "239", the ratio of winning the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is 99.6% (239/240). That is, even in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the number of winning random values changes by only one, so that the winning of the normal symbol is almost always won every time the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. There is.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, even in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, each time the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, the normal symbol is almost won. .. As a result, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, each time the game ball is distributed to the left guide flow path 1750d by the distribution device 1750 and passes through the central through gate 67c, the normal symbol hits. The game ball can be guided to the second entrance 1640. Therefore, in the latent state, each time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750, the game ball can be alternately entered into the left first entry port 64l and the second entry opening 1640. Therefore, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be alternately executed in the latent state.

Next, the variation pattern table 202d according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (a). The variation pattern table 202d is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 436 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in the 21st embodiment selects the variation pattern in the latent state with the normal table 202rd1 referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the normal state. It is composed of at least a latent probability table 202rd2 referred to at the time and a time reduction / probability variation table 202rd3 referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the right-handed gaming state (probability change state and time reduction state). First, the details of the above-mentioned normal table 202rd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (b).

FIG. 436 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202rd1, which is one of the data tables, for the variation pattern table 202d in the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 436 (b), in the normal table 202rd1 in the 21st embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other. There is. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 436 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 0". A "short deviation" of 7 seconds is defined in association with the range of "139", and a "short deviation" of 10 seconds is defined for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "140 to 149". "Long deviation" is specified in association with each other, and "normal reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 179", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is specified. However, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198".

Further, as shown in FIG. 436 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". On the other hand, "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with each other, and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "30 to 189". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is specified in association with the range of "190 to 198" and the variation time is 90 seconds.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 changes in the range of "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range. When the ultra-long deviation of 180 seconds is specified in association with each other and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 in the entire range. Super long hits per second are specified in association with each other. Therefore, even if an irregular game method is performed in which the game ball is made to enter the second entrance 1640 by hitting the right in the normal state, a special symbol lottery is performed only every 180 seconds at the shortest. In addition to being unable to execute, it is also difficult to enter the game ball into the second entrance 1640 when right-handed in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the game efficiency by right-handed is improved. It can be significantly exacerbated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which right-handed hitting is performed in a normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 437 (a), the details of the latent probability table 202rd2, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, the latent probability table 202rd2 is a data table that is referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in the latent probability state. FIG. 437 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability table 202rd2.

As shown in FIG. 437 (a), the latent probability table 202rd2 defines the lottery result of the special symbol and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with each other. That is, in the latent state, the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol regardless of the type of the special symbol. This is because, in the latent state in the 21st embodiment, every time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750 by hitting the left, the left first entry port 64l and the second entry opening 1640 This is because the game balls are alternately entered and the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed alternately.

As shown in FIG. 437 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "off", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139". A "short deviation" of 7 seconds is specified in association with the fluctuation time, and a "long deviation" of 10 seconds is specified in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "140 to 149". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "150 to 179", and the "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198". On the other hand, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 437 (a), when the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". , "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in association with each other, and "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "30 to 189". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "190 to 198" in association with the "special reach" having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds.

In this way, in the latent state, regardless of whether it is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, it fluctuates only according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is configured to select (determine) a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game efficiency in the latent state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are alternately performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 437 (b), the details of the time saving / probability variation table 202rd3, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, the time reduction / probability variation table 202rd3 is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the right-handed gaming state (time reduction state, probability variation state). It is a data table. FIG. 437 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving / probability variation table 202rd3.

As shown in FIG. 437 (b), in the time saving / probability variation table 202rd3, the lottery result of the special symbol and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with each other. That is, even in the right-handed game state, the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, regardless of the type of the special symbol, as in the latent state. This is because when the game shifts to the right-handed game state with the reserved ball of the first special symbol remaining, and a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, right-handed strike is performed. However, the lottery for the 2nd special symbol will not start easily (that is, until the reserved ball of the 1st special symbol becomes 0), which may irritate the player, so the purpose is to suppress this. Is.

As shown in FIG. 437 (b), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "off", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149". A "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is specified in association with it, and a "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "190 to 195" and the "normal reach" of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "196 to 198". On the other hand, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 437 (b), when the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". , "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in association with each other, and "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". Therefore, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "195 to 198" in association with the "special reach" having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds.

As described above, in the right-handed game state, the fluctuation time is shortened as a whole, and the ratio of selecting the short fluctuation time is high. Therefore, the game in the right-handed game state can be advanced more efficiently.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 438 (a). The time reduction table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting the number of time reductions at the end of the jackpot. FIG. 438 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 438 (a), the time saving table 202e in the 21st embodiment shows the jackpot type and the presence or absence of the time saving at the time of winning the jackpot (whether the winning is the time saving state of the normal symbol or the normal state). The number of time reductions to be set is defined in association with the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 438 (a), when the jackpot type is jackpot A21, D21, E21, V prize (probability change switch) is won during the jackpot regardless of the state of the normal symbol at the time of jackpot winning. If (passing 65e3) is detected, 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. As described above, in the jackpot types A21, D21, and E21, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, so that the launch of the game ball is stopped during the jackpot game. Unless the game is played by the game method, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 65535 times is set. That is, when the jackpots A21, D21, and E21 are won, it is substantially determined that the probability variation state that continues until the next jackpot is won is set regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, these jackpots are most advantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 438 (a), when the jackpot type is jackpot B21 (4 round probability variation jackpot), the jackpot winning is the normal state (no time reduction state) of the normal symbol, and V during the jackpot. If a prize (passing of the probability change switch 65e3) is detected, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not a V prize is generated during the jackpot. That is, if the jackpot B21 is won in the normal state or the latent state, it shifts to the latent state when the V prize occurs, and shifts to the disadvantageous normal state when the V prize does not occur. As described above, in the jackpot B21, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, the game is not performed by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. As long as the V prize is generated, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 0 times is set. That is, if the jackpot is won in the left-handed game state (normal state or latent state), it is substantially determined that the latent probability state that continues until the next big hit is set. It should be noted that the number of time reductions set when the V prize is not detected in the jackpot B21 is set to 0, although the jackpot probability is lower than the transition to the latent state of the left-handed game state, but the right. Considering that it is better to shift to a time-saving state where the game can proceed by hitting, an irregular game method that does not allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by intentionally stopping the firing during the execution of the jackpot B21. Is intended to prevent this from happening.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 438 (a), if the state of the normal symbol when the jackpot B21 is won is the time saving state of the normal symbol (the state with the time saving), it is the same as the case where the jackpots A21, D21, and E21 are won. In addition, by detecting the V prize (passing the probability change switch 65e3) during the big hit, 65535 times is set as the number of time reductions, and if the V prize is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. Therefore, unless the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probable change state, and the time saving state of 65535 times is set. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 438 (a), when the jackpot type is jackpot C21, F21, if the state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state of the normal symbol (no time reduction state), the jackpot is in progress. By detecting the V prize (passing through the probability change switch 65e3), 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, while if the V prize is not detected, 30 times is set as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, if the state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state of the normal symbol (the state with the time saving), V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the big hit, so that the number of time saving is 0. While the number of times is set, if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. As described above, in the jackpots C21 and F21, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is not opened (remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, basically, V prize does not occur. A low probability state of the special symbol is set, and a time saving state of 30 times or 100 times is set. That is, if the jackpots C21 and F21 are won in the left-handed game state, the time-saving state is basically set to 30 times, and if the jackpots C21 and F21 are won in the right-handed game state, the time-saving times are basically set. Is set to a time saving state of 100 times. As mentioned above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/125, so the ratio of winning the jackpot during the 30 times of shortened working hours is about 21.4%. , The ratio of winning a big hit during 100 times of shortening time is about 55.2%.

In addition, when the jackpot C21 and F21 are won and the V prize is detected, setting 0 times as the number of time reductions may cause the jackpot C21 and F21 to generate the V prize unless some cheating is performed. Because it is difficult. When a V prize occurs in jackpot C21 and F21, by setting the number of time reductions to 0, it shifts to a latent state, which is one of the disadvantageous left-handed game states, and even commits cheating. The merit of generating a V prize can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

Next, with reference to FIG. 438 (b), the details of the general drawing open pattern table 202ra in the 21st embodiment will be described. As described above, the normal figure open pattern table 202ra is a data table referred to for setting the appearance pattern (displacement pattern) of the normal electric accessory 1640a when the normal symbol is won. FIG. 438 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the open pattern table 202ra.

As shown in FIG. 438 (b), when a hit is made by a lottery of a normal symbol in a normal state, the displacement pattern of the normal electric accessory 1640a (opening pattern of the second entrance 1640) is 0 at the start of hitting the normal symbol. An opening period of 3 seconds is set, and after the opening period elapses, the normal electric accessory 1640a protrudes for 0.5 seconds (the second entrance 1640 is opened), and after 0.5 seconds elapses, 0.02 seconds. After the ending period is set, the winning game of the normal symbol is completed. On the other hand, when a hit is made by a lottery of a normal symbol in the latent state, an opening period of 0.02 seconds is set at the start of winning the normal symbol, and after the opening period elapses, the normal electric accessory 1640a protrudes for 0.5 seconds (No. (2 entrance 1640 is opened), and after 0.5 seconds have passed, the ending period of 0.02 seconds is set, and then the hit game of the normal symbol is completed. That is, in the normal state in which the normal state (left-handed game state) of the normal symbol is set and the latent state, the length of the opening period set at the start of hitting the normal symbol as the displacement pattern of the normal electric accessory 1640a. Only are configured differently.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 438 (b), when the normal symbol hits in the time-saving state in the right-handed game state and the probability change state, the displacement pattern of the normal electric accessory 1640a (opening pattern of the second entrance 1640). ), An opening period of 0.02 seconds is set at the start of hitting the normal symbol, and after the opening period elapses, the normal electric accessory 1640a protrudes for 2 seconds (the second entrance 1640 is opened), and 2 seconds have passed. Then, after the ending period of 0.02 seconds is set, the hit game of the normal symbol is completed. That is, the protrusion period (opening period of the second entrance 1640) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is longer than that in the left-handed game state. As a result, in the right-handed game state, the normal electric accessory 1640a is projected for a sufficient period of time for the game ball that has been right-handed and passed through the right through gate 67r to be guided to the second entrance 1640. Therefore, it is possible to form a game state in which a large number of game balls enter the second entrance 1640 and only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 439, the details of the operation mode (displacement mode) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the left-handed gaming state will be described. FIG. 439 (a) is a diagram showing the time course of the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the normal state, and FIG. 439 (b) is a diagram showing the time course of the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 1640a in the latent state. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 439 (a), when the game ball passes through the central through gate 67c in the normal state and wins in the lottery of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 0.1 seconds, and then the normal symbol is normally displayed. An operation pattern (see FIG. 438 (b)) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a corresponding to the state is set. That is, after the opening period of 0.3 seconds is set, the ordinary electric accessory 1640 is displaced in an operation mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds. As a result, the normal electric accessory 1640a is maintained in the immersion position until 0.4 seconds have passed since the game ball passed through the central through gate 67c, and 0.9 seconds have passed since 0.4 seconds have passed. The operation pattern is such that the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds until the time, and is displaced to the immersion position again after 0.9 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, as described above, it takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c to reach the normal electric accessory 1640a, so that the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is in the protruding position. It usually passes through the electric accessory 1640a before it is displaced. Therefore, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c to enter the second entrance 1640, and the right first entrance that is located directly below the central through gate 67c. Enter the ball to 64r. Therefore, in the normal state, every time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750, the game ball alternately enters the right first entry port 67r and the left first entry port 67l. Almost only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 439 (b), when the game ball passes through the central through gate 67c in the normal state and wins in the lottery of the normal symbol, after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 0.1 seconds. , The operation pattern (see FIG. 438 (b)) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a corresponding to the normal state is set. That is, after the opening period of 0.02 seconds is set, the ordinary electric accessory 1640 is displaced in an operation mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds. As a result, the normal electric accessory 1640a is maintained in the immersion position until 0.12 seconds have elapsed after the game ball has passed through the central through gate 67c, and 0.62 seconds have elapsed since 0.12 seconds have elapsed. The operation pattern is such that the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds until the time, and is displaced to the immersion position again after 0.62 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, as described above, since it takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c to reach the normal electric accessory 1640a, the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is in the protruding position. Immediately after the displacement (about 0.1 seconds later), the game ball reaches the upper surface of the normal electric accessory 1640a. As a result, the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is viewed from the front along the inclination of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a arranged at the protruding position from the upper right direction to the lower left direction. It rolls in the lower left direction and enters the second ball entry port 1640 provided on the left side of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a. Therefore, in the latent state, each time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750, the game ball alternately enters the second entrance 1640 and the left first entrance 67l. Almost, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed alternately.

As described above, in the 21st embodiment, in the normal state in which the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is set and the latent state, the normal electric accessory 1640a is opened after winning the hit of the normal symbol. The left-handed game state (normal state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed and the first special symbol by changing the period until the first special symbol is moved (displacement) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a. It is configured to form a left-handed game state (latent state) in which the lottery and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed alternately. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game in the left-handed game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the game in the unfavorable left-handed game state from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 21st embodiment, by making only the opening period at the time of hitting the normal symbol different between the normal state and the latent state, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67r in the normal state is almost right first. While the ball enters the ball opening 64r, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67r is configured to enter the second entry port 1640 in the latent state, but this is limited to this. is not. For example, the operation pattern (displacement pattern) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640 at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol is common (for example, the displacement pattern in the latent state in the 21st embodiment), and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is the normal state and the latent state. The same behavior as in the 21st embodiment may be realized by making the state different (for example, 0.38 seconds in the normal state and 0.1 seconds in the latent state). With this configuration, the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a can be reduced, so that the amount of data in the open pattern table 202ra can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the 21st embodiment, the normal state is configured as a left-handed game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, while the latent state is the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. It was configured as a left-handed game state that is executed alternately, but it is not limited to this. For example, conversely, the normal state may be configured as a left-handed game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are alternately executed. With such a configuration, in the normal state, the jackpot probability is low, but the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed, while in the latent state, the jackpot probability is high, but it is advantageous. It is possible to realize playability in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. That is, since different merits and demerits can be provided between the normal state and the latent state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in these gaming states.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 434 (b). FIG. 434 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 434 (b), in the RAM 203 of the 21st embodiment, the probability variation counter 203 zg and the time saving identification flag 203 zx are deleted with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the 6th embodiment described above (see FIG. 173). It differs in that it is. It is also different in that the probability variation flag 203ra and the winning order storage area 203rb are added.

The probability variation flag 203ra is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is set. When the probability variation flag 203ra is on, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the high probability state, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the low probability state. That is, when the probability change flag 203ra is set to on, the game state is a probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, time saving state of normal symbol) or latent state (high probability state of special symbol, normal). Any of the normal state of the symbol) is set. The probability variation flag 203ra is set to off when the initial state is set to off and when the fluctuation of the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped (see Z285 in FIG. 440). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203ra is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game when it is detected that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (see Z4104 in FIG. 444). That is, in the 21st embodiment, once the probability variation flag 203ra is set to on, the probability variation flag 203ra is not set to off until the next big hit is won, so that the pachinko machine 10 is set. Is not initialized (unless the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on), it is configured to continue until the next big hit is won.

In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) since the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol. May be configured to terminate the high-probability state of the special symbol when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, instead of the probability variation flag 203ra, a probability variation counter for counting the remaining number of lottery until the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol may be provided.

The winning order storage area 203rb is a storage area for storing data indicating the order in which the starting winnings are detected for each of the held balls. Here, in the 21st embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the starting winning prize is detected in order from the oldest reserved ball regardless of the type of the special symbol. That is, in a situation where both the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are reserved as in the sixth embodiment described above, the special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is reserved. Rather than giving priority to the lottery, the reserved balls of the 1st special symbol and the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol are treated in the same line, and the reserved balls used for the lottery are selected only according to the start winning time. It is configured to be. Therefore, data (winning quasi-data) indicating the order in which each reserved ball detects the start winning prize is stored in the winning order storage area 203rb, and when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied, this winning prize is obtained. The reserved balls used for the lottery of special symbols are determined according to the order indicated by the order data (see Z282 in FIG. 440). A storage area of 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to the winning order storage area 203rb, and each time the number of reserved balls increases, "0" indicating the reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in order from the lower byte. , Or the data of "1" indicating the reserved ball of the second special symbol is set (see S711 in FIG. 442). When executing the lottery of the special symbol, the bit data corresponding to the total number of reserved balls is read (see Z282 in FIG. 440), and when "0" is read, the reserved balls of the first special symbol are read. While executing the lottery of the special symbol using the oldest reserved ball in time (various counter values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a) (Z283 in FIG. 440: (Refer to No), when "1" is read, it is stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball of the second special symbol, which is the oldest in time (special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa). A lottery of special symbols is executed using (various counter values) (see Z283: Yes in FIG. 440). After executing the lottery of the special symbol, the bit data for which the reserved ball of which special symbol is used in the lottery of the special symbol is determined is initialized to "0" (see S337 in FIG. 441). .. With these controls, in a situation where a plurality of reserved balls are held, the lottery of the special symbols can be executed in the order in which the starting prize is detected regardless of the type of the special symbol. Therefore, especially in the latent state. , It is possible to form a situation in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are likely to be executed alternately.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 21st embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 440 to 444. First, the special symbol variation process 21 (S161) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 440. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 21 (S161). The special symbol variation process 21 (S161) in the 21st embodiment is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 175) of the 6th embodiment described above, and is a process executed in place of the above-described 6th embodiment. Similar to the special symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 175), this is a process for making various settings related to the variation display of the special symbol in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

In each of the special symbol variation processes 21 (see FIG. 440), Z201 to Z203, Z205 to Z207, Z210 to Z212, Z214 to 218, Z220, and Z222, the special symbol variation process 6 of the sixth embodiment is performed. Since the same processes as those of Z201 to Z203, Z205 to Z207, Z210 to Z212, Z214 to 218, Z220, and Z222 of (Z104 of FIG. 175) are executed, the details thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 440, in the special symbol variation processing 21 (S161) in the 21st embodiment, whether or not the reserved ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol exists after the processing of Z203 is executed. If it is determined (Z281) and it is determined that the reserved ball does not exist (Z281: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z281, when it is determined that the reserved ball exists (Z281: Yes), then the type of the special symbol to be newly drawn for the special symbol is specified by referring to the data of the winning order storage area 203rb. (Z282). Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the special symbol specified in the processing of Z282 is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (Z283), and the type of the special symbol to be drawn is the second special symbol. If it is determined (Z283: Yes), the processes of Z205 to Z207 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of Z284. On the other hand, in the processing of Z283, when it is determined that the type of the special symbol to be drawn is not the second special symbol (the first special symbol) (Z283: No), the processing of Z210 to Z212 is executed and Z284 is executed. Move to the processing of.

In the Z284 process, the first symbol display device 37 executes the special symbol variation start process 21 for starting the variation display (Z284), and then ends this process. Details of this special symbol variation start processing 21 (Z284) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 21 (see FIG. 440) in the 21st embodiment, when the processing of the Z220 is completed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is reset to 0, and the state of the probability variation flag 203ra is turned off. Reset and shift the process to Z222. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 21 (see FIG. 440) in the 21st embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a big hit in the processing of Z217 (Z217: No), then the time is shortened. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203zu is larger than 0 (Z286), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203zu is larger than 0 (Z286: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203zu is subtracted by 1. And update (Z287), and shift the process to Z222. On the other hand, in the processing of Z286, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is 0 (Z286: No), the processing of Z287 is skipped and the processing is shifted to Z222.

Next, the special symbol variation start process 21 (Z284) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 441. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing 21 (Z284). The special symbol variation start process 21 (Z284) in the 21st embodiment is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 21 (see FIG. 440), and a lottery of the special symbol is performed, and the lottery result of the lottery is performed. This is a process for setting the start of the fluctuation pattern according to.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 21 (Z284), in each of the processes S301, S303, S305, S212, S314 and S315, the special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 39) of the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed. Since the same processing as each processing of S301, S303, S305, S212, S314 and S315 of S210) is executed, the details thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 21 (see FIG. 441) in the 21st embodiment, when the processing of S301 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203ra is on (S331), and the probability variation flag is determined. When it is determined that 203ra is on (S331: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 435 (a)) for high probability (S332). The process shifts to S303. In the process of S332, specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 435 (a)) for high probability. To do. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 19", it is determined that the special symbol is hit, and if it is in the range of "20 to 999", the special symbol is out. (See FIG. 435 (a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ra is off (S331: No), a special symbol is used based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 435 (a)). The lottery result is acquired (S333), and the process shifts to S303. In the process of S333, specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 435 (a)) for low probability. To do. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 7", it is determined that the special symbol is hit, and if it is in the range of "8 to 999", the special symbol is out. (See FIG. 435 (a)).

Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 21 (see FIG. 441) in the 21st embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit in the processing of S303 (S303: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 441). Based on (see FIG. 435 (b)), the current jackpot type is specified (S334). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 435 (b)). It is determined what type of jackpot is among the three types of jackpots (big hits A21, B21, C21, D21, E21, F21) for each of the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol (see FIG. 435 (b)).

Then, the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol type) and the jackpot type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A21, B21, C21, D21, E21, F21). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A21, B21, C21, D21, E21, F21) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is determined based on the current game state and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S335), and the process proceeds to S314. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S335, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variable type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal table 202rd1, the latent probability table 202rd2, and the time reduction / probability variation table 202rd3. Of these, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with the variation pattern table according to the current gaming state (see FIGS. 436 (b), 437 (a), and (b)).

Further, in the special symbol fluctuation start processing 21 (see FIG. 441) in the 21st embodiment, when the processing of S312 is completed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined according to the current gaming state and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (S336). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S335, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variable type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal table 202rd1, the latent probability table 202rd2, and the time reduction. -The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing the probability variation table 202rd3 with the variation pattern table according to the current gaming state (see FIGS. 436 (b), 437 (a), and (b)).

Further, in the special symbol variation start processing 21 (see FIG. 441) in the 21st embodiment, when the processing of S315 is completed, the data of the winning order storage area 203rb is updated (S337), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 442, the start winning process 21 (S162) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 21st embodiment will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 21 (S162). The start winning process 21 (S162) in the 21st embodiment is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 43) of the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

Of the start winning process 21 (S162), each process of S701 to S707 is the same as each process of S701 to S707 of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 43) of the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Processing is executed.

Further, in the start winning process 21 (see FIG. 442) in the 21st embodiment, after the process of S706 is executed, the data of the winning order storage area 203rb is updated (S711), and the process shifts to S707. Further, in the start winning process 21 (see FIG. 442) in the 21st embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S701 that the ball has not won the first winning opening (S701: No), the process of S703 is the first. 1 When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 4 (S703: No), and when the processing of S707 is completed, then the balls enter the second winning opening (entry opening) 1640. Whether or not it is determined (S712). In the process of S712, the ball entering the second winning opening (entry opening) 1640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second winning opening (entry opening) 1640 (S712: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired (S713), and the special symbol 2 is reserved. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S714).

Then, whether or not there is a ball entering the second winning opening (entry opening) 1640 (S712: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening (entry opening) 1640, the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls If the value (N2) of the counter 203ab is not less than 4 (S714: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second winning opening (entry opening) 1640 (S712: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than 4 (S714: Yes). The value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is added by 1 (S715). Then, a special figure 2 hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (S716).

The special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is also stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201, similarly to the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the process of S705. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab from the special figure 2 hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 2 of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223aa.

After setting the special figure 2 hold ball number command by the processing of S716, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first area of the free hold area (special figure 2 hold 1st area to special figure 2 hold 4 area) of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203aa of the RAM 203 (S717). In the process of S717, as in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203ab is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 hold second area is set, if the value is 2, the special figure 2 hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the special figure 2 hold fourth area is set. , Each is the first area. When the processing of S717 is completed, the data in the winning order storage area 203rb is updated (S718), the processing of S707 is executed, and the main processing is completed.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 21 (S163) in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 443. The ordinary symbol variation process 21 (S163) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the variation display and variation time of the second symbol, the opening operation and opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640, and the like.

Of the ordinary symbol variation processing 21 (see FIG. 443) in the 21st embodiment, in each of the processes S901, S902, S904, S906 to S908, S913 to 915, and S920, the ordinary symbol variation processing in the sixth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S901, S902, S904, S906 to S908, S913 to 915, and S920 of (see FIG. 45) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 443, in the normal symbol variation processing 21 (S163), in the process of S902, unless the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S902: No), the number of normal symbol reserved balls. The value of the counter 203zb (the number of holdings M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S961). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 zb is larger than 0 (S962), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 zb is 0. If it is determined that there is (S962: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S962, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 zb is a value larger than 0 (S962: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203 zb is set. 1 is subtracted (S963).

When the processing of S963 is completed, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za is then shifted (S964). In the process of S964, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203za is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za is acquired (S904).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S965). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, while the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is 0. , It is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

In the processing of S965, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S965: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S904 and the second random number table 202c for high probability. Based on (see FIG. 435 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S966), and the process shifts to S906. In the process of S966, specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 435 (c)) for high probability. To do. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 239", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (see FIG. 435 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S965, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S965: No), then the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S904 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table 202c (see FIG. 435 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S967), and the process shifts to S906. In the process of S967, specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 435 (c)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "1 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, and if it is "0", it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order. (See FIG. 435 (c)). That is, in the 21st embodiment, even in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, the normal symbol is won with a high probability (239/240 probability). It is configured as follows. As a result, every time the game ball passes through the central through gate 67c in the normal state or the latent state set to the normal state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is almost hit. Therefore, in the latent state, the central through gate The game ball that has passed through the 67c can be made to reach the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a while the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is in a protruding state, and can be entered into the second entrance 1640. That is, in the latent state, every time the game ball enters the distribution device 1750, the game ball can be alternately entered into the left first entry port 64l and the second entry opening 1640. it can. Therefore, since the playability of the normal state and the latent state, which are disadvantageous left-handed game states, can be significantly different, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the ending process 21 (Z1391) executed in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 444. The ending process 21 (Z1391) is a process executed in place of the ending process 6 (see FIG. 177) in the sixth embodiment.

Of the ending processes 21 (Z1391) in the 21st embodiment, the processes of Z4101 to Z4104 are the same as the processes of Z4101 to Z4104 of the ending processes 6 (FIGS. 177 and Z1379) in the sixth embodiment, respectively. Will be executed.

Further, in the ending process 21 (Z1391) in the 21st embodiment, after executing the processes of Z4103 and Z4104, the time saving table 202e (see FIG. 438 (a)) is read (Z4111), and the read time giving table is read. From 202e, specify the number of time reductions according to the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (Z4112), set the number of time reductions specified in the processing of Z4112 in the time reduction counter (Z4113), and end this processing. To do. By executing this ending process 21 (see FIG. 444), the game state can be set accurately according to the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning, and the like.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 21st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 445 and 446, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st embodiment is a prize information related process with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment described above. The difference is that the prize information related process 21 (see FIG. 445) is executed instead of (see FIG. 57) and the effect setting process 21 (see FIG. 446) is executed instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63). To do. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the prize information-related process 21 (S18101) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 445. The prize information-related process 21 (S18101) is a process executed in place of the prize information-related process (see FIG. 57) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the winning information-related processing 21 (S18101) in the 21st embodiment, in each of the processes S2301, S2311 and S2312, the winning information-related processing in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 57). The same processes as those of S2301, S2311 and S2312 are executed.

Further, in the winning information-related process 21 (S18101) in the 21st embodiment, after the process of S2301 is executed, it is determined whether the game state read in the process of S2301 is the latent state (S2361), and the latent state is determined. If it is determined that (S2361: Yes), then whether or not the prize information command received this time is a command indicating the prize information corresponding to the first special symbol (the prize information of the special figure 1) is determined. Determine (S2362). In the process of S2362, if it is determined that the command corresponds to the winning information of the first special symbol (S2363: Yes), the display winning information command corresponding to the "normal" holding indicating the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. Is set (S2363), and the process shifts to S2311. On the other hand, in the process of S2362, when it is determined that the information is not the winning information of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S2363: No), it is for display corresponding to the "heat" hold indicating the reserved symbol of the second special symbol. The winning information command is set (S2364), and the process shifts to S2311. Further, in the process of S2361, when it is determined that the read game state is not the latent state (S2361: No), the process shifts to S2312.

By executing this prize information-related process 21 (see FIG. 445), when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage in the latent state increases, the “heat” hold is increased and the degree of advantage is low. When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol increases, the "normal" hold can be increased, so that the player can easily understand the type of reserved ball from the display mode of the reserved symbol.

Next, the effect setting process 21 (S2841) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 446. This effect setting process 21 (S2841) is a process executed in place of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is an effect of the variable display effect (variable pattern effect). This is a process for setting an aspect.

Of the effect setting process 21 (S2841) in the 21st embodiment, the process of S2901 executes the same process as the process of S2901 of the effect setting process (see FIGS. 63 and S2804) in the sixth embodiment.

Further, in the effect setting process 21 (S2841) in the 21st embodiment, when the process of S2901 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the information corresponding to the latent state is read in the process of S2901 (S2971). When it is determined that the information corresponding to the latent state has not been read in the process of S2971 (S2971: No), then the variable display mode according to the game state and the special figure type is selected (S2975), and the present End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2971, when it is determined that the information corresponding to the latent state has been read (S2971: Yes), then the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to the first special symbol (special diagram 1). It is determined whether or not it is a command (S2972). In the process of S2972, if it is determined that the variation pattern command of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) has been received (S2972: Yes), the variation display mode of the third symbol accompanied by the "normal" symbol is selected (S2972: Yes). S2973), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2972, when it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) has not been received (the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol has been received) (S2972). : No), the variable display mode of the third symbol accompanied by the "heat" symbol is selected (S2974), and this process is terminated.

By executing this effect setting process 21 (see FIG. 446), when the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the latent state, a "normal" symbol is displayed with respect to the third symbol. On the other hand, when the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed, the "heat" symbol can be attached to the third symbol and displayed. Therefore, it is easy for the player to determine whether the variable display effect corresponding to the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is executed or the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is executed. Can be understood.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment, the degree of advantage when the game is advanced by left-handed in the normal state and the latent state in which the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is set. Was configured to be different. That is, in the normal state, only the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is executed, while in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol have a higher degree of advantage. 2 It is configured so that the lottery of special symbols can be easily executed alternately. More specifically, by differentiating the period from winning the hit of the ordinary symbol to the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a (the mode of movement (displacement) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a), the first special A left-handed game state (normal state) in which the lottery of symbols is easily executed and a left-handed game state (latent state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed alternately are formed. It was configured to be. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game in the left-handed game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the game in the unfavorable left-handed game state from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming state in which the game progresses by hitting left with a relatively low degree of advantage and a gaming state in which the game progresses by hitting right with a relatively high degree of advantage are provided. It is widely known that a gaming state with a low degree of advantage shifts to a gaming state with a high degree of advantage based on the establishment of a specific opportunity such as a jackpot winning. However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the motivation of the player for the game is lowered if the gaming state with a low degree of advantage continues for a long time.

On the other hand, in the 21st embodiment, as a game state in which the game is advanced by left-handed, a normal state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by performing left-handed, and a left-handed state are performed. Two types of gaming states are provided: a latent state in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed almost alternately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in an unfavorable game state in which the game is advanced by hitting the left side, so that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in a disadvantageous game state.

In the 21st embodiment, by making only the opening period at the time of hitting the normal symbol different between the normal state and the latent state, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67r in the normal state is almost right first. While the ball enters the ball opening 64r, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67r is configured to enter the second entry port 1640 in the latent state, but this is limited to this. is not. For example, the operation pattern (displacement pattern) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640 at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol is common (for example, the displacement pattern in the latent state in the 21st embodiment), and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is the normal state and the latent state. The same behavior as in the 21st embodiment may be realized by making the state different (for example, 0.38 seconds in the normal state and 0.1 seconds in the latent state). With this configuration, the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a can be reduced, so that the amount of data in the open pattern table 202ra can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the 21st embodiment, the normal state is configured as a left-handed game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, while the latent state is the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. It was configured as a left-handed game state that is executed alternately, but it is not limited to this. For example, conversely, the normal state may be configured as a left-handed game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are alternately executed. With such a configuration, in the normal state, the jackpot probability is low, but the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is easily executed, while in the latent state, the jackpot probability is high, but it is advantageous. It is possible to realize playability in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. That is, since different merits and demerits can be provided between the normal state and the latent state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in these gaming states. In this specification, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the most unfavorable latent state, the player during the period during which the prize ball cannot be obtained even if the right-handed hit is performed, such as the interval period in the jackpot game. By executing an effect of urging the player to hit left, the reserved balls of the second special symbol may be stored. That is, an effect of urging the game ball to enter the distribution device 1750 may be executed between the time when the jackpot is won and the time when the latent state is set. During the jackpot game, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the same state as the initial state (normal state), so that it is easy to alternately enter the normal state into the left first entry port 64l and the second entry opening 1640. By setting the game state, every time a game ball enters the distribution device 1750 even during the execution of the jackpot game, it is easy to be alternately distributed to the left first entry port 64l and the second entry opening 1640. Form a state. Therefore, under such a situation, by configuring the configuration to notify the left-handed hit during the jackpot game, the game ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 1640 during the jackpot game, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is placed. You can save it. Therefore, only the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is executed (even if the game ball is put into the distribution device 1750, the left first entry port 64l and the right first entry opening 64r are used. It is possible to store the reserved ball of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage before shifting to the latent state (where only one of the balls can enter). Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the reserved ball of the second special symbol, which is digested after the transition to the latent state, will be a big hit and the transition to the advantageous probability change state will be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, when shifting to the normal state, or when shifting to the time saving state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, or the probabilistic state, the effect of urging left-handed may or may not be executed. Good. In the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability change state, the game ball enters the second entrance 1640 as much as or more than during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the effect of urging the left strike during the execution of the jackpot game is produced. By not doing so, it is possible to reduce wasted balls during the jackpot game. Further, when executing the effect of urging left-handed hitting, for example, it is effective to execute the effect before notifying the game state after the end of the big hit. That is, the timing for notifying the game state after the end of the jackpot is set, for example, in the ending period of the jackpot, and in the interval production between each round of the jackpot, the player is allowed to select whether to hit left or not. It is configured to be executed. In this case, the player who predicts that the game state after the big hit is likely to be in the latent state is made to select left-handed, while the player who is expected to be in the game state other than the latent state is left. You can choose not to hit. Therefore, it is possible to realize a new game property in which the game state after the end of the big hit is predicted and the game method (whether left-handed or not) is selected according to the predicted result. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the 21st embodiment, the left-handed game is performed by differentiating the period required from the game ball passing through the central through gate 67c to the opening of the normal electric accessory 1640a between the normal state and the latent state. When this is performed, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed (normal state), the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are likely to be alternately performed (latent state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in one game state, the period required from when the game ball passes through the central through gate 67c until the normal electric accessory 1640a is opened is different depending on the situation, so that only the first special symbol is drawn. May be configured to form a state in which the above is executed and a state in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are likely to be alternately performed. More specifically, for example, an opening period is set that makes it easier to enter the second entrance 1640 when a part of the normal jackpots are won and the time is shortened, and when the number of time reductions elapses. It is configured to form the normal state A, and when the other normal jackpot is won and the number of time reductions elapses, or when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is guided to the second entrance 1640. It may be configured to form a normal state B in which an unobtainable opening period is set. With this configuration, the latent state can be abolished. Further, for example, a normal state B is set in which an opening period in which the player cannot be guided to the second entrance 1640 is set from the setting of the normal state to the end of a specific number of lottery (for example, 300 times). After the specific number of lottery has been completed, the normal state A in which the opening period for facilitating entry into the second entrance 1640 may be set may be set. With this configuration, when the specific number of lottery approaches, it is possible to make the player think that the game will continue up to the specific number of lottery, and when the specific number of lottery is exceeded, it will be a win. It can make you want to continue the game until. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 21st embodiment, in the normal state, the period required from the game ball passing through the central through gate 67c to the opening of the normal electric accessory 1640a is different between the normal state and the latent state. While the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c cannot be guided to the second entry port 1640, most of the game balls that have passed through the central through gate 67c are second-entry by the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the latent state. It was configured to be guided to the ball mouth 1640, but it is not limited to this. For example, the period required from the game ball passing through the central through gate 67c to the opening of the normal electric accessory 1640a is common between the normal state and the latent state, and the central through gate 67c is used in both the normal state and the latent state. Most of the game balls that have passed through the above may be configured to be guided to the second entrance 1640 by the ordinary electric accessory 1640a. Then, as in the 17th embodiment described above, a simultaneous fluctuation method capable of overlapping the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol is adopted, and the second special symbol is in a normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (for example, 1 hour, etc.), while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is common in the latent state. It may be configured as. With this configuration, when a normal symbol hits, common control may be performed between the normal state and the latent state, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, when the simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted, the central through gate 67c and the right first entry port 64r are abolished, and most of the game balls that simply flow down the right guidance flow path 1750d can enter the position ( A second ball entrance 1640 to which the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is not attached may be provided at the position where the right first ball entry 64r is provided in the 21st embodiment). With this configuration, the configuration of the sorting device 1750 can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Further, when the simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in one gaming state is not selected by referring to different fluctuation pattern tables in different gaming states (normal state and latent state). By providing different cases, a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage (easiness of entering the second ball entry port 1640) may be formed. More specifically, for example, when some of the normal jackpots are won and the time is shortened, and the number of time reductions elapses, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol). (Equivalent to) When the normal state A in which the fluctuation pattern table is referred to is set, and when the number of time reductions has passed by winning other normal jackpots, or when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. May be configured so that the normal state B in which the fluctuation pattern table in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly long is referred to is set. With this configuration, the latent state can be abolished. Further, for example, a normal state B is set in which a fluctuation pattern table in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is remarkably long is set from the setting of the normal state to the end of a specific number of lottery (for example, 300 times). After the specific number of lottery is completed, the normal state A in which the fluctuation pattern table is referred to is set so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter (equal to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol). It may be configured as. With this configuration, when the specific number of lottery approaches, it is possible to make the player think that the game will continue up to the specific number of lottery, and when the specific number of lottery is exceeded, it will be a win. It can make you want to continue the game until. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 21st embodiment, even in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, the normal symbol is almost hit (at a rate of 99.6%). However, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is not limited to this. For example, by halving the hit probability of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol, 1/4 (right-guided flow) of the game ball that hits left in the latent state and enters the distribution device 1750. It can be configured so that 1/2) of the game balls guided to the road 1750d is guided to the second entrance 1640. Further, for example, by reducing the hit probability of the normal symbol to 1/4, 1/4 of the game ball that hits the left in the latent state and enters the distribution device 1750 (guided to the right guidance flow path 1750d). It can be configured so that 1/2) of the played game balls is guided to the second entrance 1640. Therefore, by changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, the rate at which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed can be changed in the latent state, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the 21st embodiment, when the player shifts to the probability change state, the probability change state is substantially continued until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the probability change state is continuously deviated over a predetermined number of lottery times (ST number of times), the probability change state may be terminated and changed to the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to strongly expect that a jackpot will be won within a specific number of times when the state shifts to the latent state or the probable change state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Can be done.

In the 21st embodiment, when the jackpot C21 is won in the normal state, the time saving number is changed to the time saving state of 30 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of time reductions may be set to 0 to loop the normal state. In other words, if you win a jackpot in the normal state, you will loop through the normal state at a high rate, and only if you win a probability change jackpot that wins at a relatively low rate, you will have an advantageous probability change state or a relatively high degree of advantage left It may be configured to shift to the latent state which is the hitting game state. With such a configuration, the player can be pleased just by shifting to the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the 21st embodiment, the rate at which the probability variation jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the rate at which the probability variation jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the probability variation ratio may be standardized. In this case, if a probabilistic jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the number of time reductions is set to 0 at a high rate (for example, 80% or 100% of the probabilistic jackpot) and the latent state. On the other hand, if a probability variation jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol, the number of time reductions is set to 65535 at a high rate (for example, 80% or 100% of the probability variation jackpot). It may be configured to be set to a probabilistic state that substantially continues until the next big hit. Further, in this case, the probability variation jackpot rate itself is also increased (for example, the rate of 90% when the jackpot is won), and the probability variation limit number is set in the same manner as in the 17th embodiment described above. May be. With this configuration, if you win a big hit in the normal state, you can shift to the latent state at a relatively high rate, and if you win the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, the rate is relatively high. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won only by the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the latent state will be looped at a relatively high rate, and the probability change limit will be reached. Since it is a game that wastefully consumes the remaining number of times up to the number of times, whether to win the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state is the first mentioned above. It is possible to realize game playability that is more important than the 21st embodiment. That is, since the remaining number of times up to the probability change limit number at the time of transition to the probability change state changes depending on the number of times the latent probability state is looped, the upper limit of the number of big hits in the probability change state changes depending on the game content in the latent state. Sex can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 21st embodiment, all the symbol rows (right symbol row, middle) are executed in a latent state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed almost alternately (easily to be executed alternately). When a "normal" symbol is attached to the third symbol of the symbol row and the left symbol row), it indicates that the first special symbol has a variable pattern effect (variable display effect) with a low degree of advantage. So, it was configured to show that it is a variation pattern production of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage when the "heat" symbol is displayed accompanying it, but the same accompanying symbol is always used for all the symbols. There is no need to display it. For example, under a predetermined condition, a variable display mode in which an accompanying symbol different from the type of the special symbol being changed is attached to a part or all of the symbol strings, or an accompanying symbol for some or all of the symbol strings. It may be configured to execute a variable display mode in which is not attached. More specifically, for example, the display number of the accompanying symbols and the type of the accompanying symbols are changed according to the lottery result, and for example, the lottery result of the disadvantageous first special symbol is relatively advantageous ( For example, in the case of winning a jackpot A21 or a jackpot B21), a variable display mode (or a part or all of the symbol sequence) in which some or all of the accompanying symbols are set to "heat" symbols instead of "normal" symbols. If the lottery result is relatively unfavorable, some or all of the accompanying symbols will be replaced with "normal" symbols at a relatively low rate. It may be configured to be set to a variable display mode (or a variable display mode in which no accompanying symbol is attached to a part or all of the symbol rows) set to the “heat” symbol. In this case, as the number of "heat" symbols increases (or the number of symbol rows not accompanied by accompanying symbols increases), the expectation that the lottery result will be advantageous to the player increases, and the first special symbol is supported. When all the accompanying symbols are changed to "heat" symbols and the jackpot is notified in the variable display effect, the jackpot A21 which is most advantageous for the player may be determined. And, in the case of losing in the lottery of the first special symbol, the effect that all the accompanying symbols are changed to "heat" symbols is selected only with a very low probability (for example, 1/300 at the time of losing). It may be configured. With this configuration, when the production mode in which all the accompanying symbols are changed to "heat" symbols is started, it is possible to improve the expectation that the jackpot will be A21 and the transition to the probabilistic state will occur. it can. Therefore, in particular, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage in the latent state, is being executed. Similarly, as the number of "normal" symbols increases in the second special symbol lottery (or the number of symbol rows without accompanying symbols increases), the lottery result may be disadvantageous to the player (for example, jackpot F21). It may be configured to be highly sexual. By doing this in this way, when the number of "normal" symbols is displayed more in the lottery of the second special symbol, or when the number of the third symbol without the accompanying symbol is displayed more, It is possible to realize a novel playability in which the game is played while strongly wishing that the lottery result will be out of order. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 21st embodiment, in the normal state, the period from when the normal symbol hits to when the normal electric accessory 1640a is released is longer than in the latent state, so that the normal electric accessory in the normal state is used. While it is difficult to reach the game ball while the object 1640a is displaced in the protruding state, in the latent state, the game ball is reached while the normal electric accessory 1640a is displaced in the protruding state. It was configured to be possible, but it is not limited to this. On the contrary, it is configured so that it takes a relatively long period until it passes through the right induction flow path 1750d (from passing through the central through gate 67c until it completely passes through the right induction flow path 1750d), and then is an ordinary electric accessory. It may be configured so that it can reach the ordinary electric accessory 1640a which is displaced in the protruding state when the period until the 1640a is opened is long. Specifically, for example, a delay mechanism (for example, zigzag folding) below the central through gate 67c so that it takes 2 seconds from passing through the central through gate 67c to reaching the lower end of the right induction flow path 1750d. In the normal state, the normal electric accessory 1640a is controlled to be opened for 1 second 0.5 seconds after passing through the central through gate 67c, while being latent. In the state, the ordinary electric accessory 1640a may be opened for 1 second 1.5 seconds after passing through the central through gate 67c. Even in this configuration, as in the 21st embodiment described above, it is possible to realize an operation in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed alternately only in the latent state. it can. In addition, by configuring the normal symbol to finish hitting earlier in the normal state, a plurality of (for example, three) game balls are connected to enter the distribution device 1750 in the normal state, and the first ball is entered. Even if the game ball passes through the central through gate 67c, even the first game ball can be configured so that it is difficult to reach the normal electric accessory 1640a in the protruding state of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a, so that the subsequent game ball protrudes. It is possible to more reliably prevent the state from reaching the ordinary electric accessory 1640a.

<Modified example of the 21st embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the 21st embodiment described above will be described. In the 21st embodiment described above, the second entrance 1640 is provided on the upper left side of the right first entrance 64r, and the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is directed toward the second entrance 1640 from the upper right direction to the lower left. It was configured to form an inclination in the downward direction. On the other hand, in this modified example, the structure of the distribution device 1750 is simplified by changing the arrangement of the second entry port 1640 and the mechanism of the ordinary electric accessory 1640.

Further, in the 21st embodiment described above, the accompanying symbol (“heat” symbol or “normal” symbol) is displayed attached to the third symbol only while the latent state is simply set. It was configured so that it could be identified whether the variable display of the first special symbol was executed or the variable display of the second special symbol was executed.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the accompanying symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of lottery even before the transition to the latent state or after the latent state is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to display the accompanying symbols having different expectations for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 498. FIG. 498 is a front view of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 498, the game board 13 in the present modification is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 430) in the 21st embodiment described above in that the peripheral structure of the distribution device 1750 is changed. Only different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498, the arrangement of the second entry port 1640 is moved in the lower right direction of the distribution device 1750 (on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the right first entry port 64r). The difference is that the first entry port 64l is moved directly below the left guide flow path 1750c. It is also different in that a pair of ordinary electric accessories 1640al and 1640ar are provided on the left and right sides of the second entrance 1640 instead of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the 21st embodiment. The details of the second entry port 1640 and the ordinary electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entry port 1640 of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 499. It should be noted that the reason why the arrangement of the left first entry port 64l was moved and the nails provided around the left first entry opening 64l was deleted was simply that the arrangement of the second entry opening 1640 was moved. As a result, the space directly below the left guidance flow path 1750c is vacated, so the purpose is to further simplify the configuration of the distribution device 1750 by moving the game ball that has freely fallen from the left guidance flow path 1750c to a position where it can enter as it is. Is.

FIG. 499 is an enlarged front view showing the periphery of the second entry port 1640 in this modified example. FIG. 499 is a diagram showing a case where the ordinary electric accessories 1640al and 1640ar are set in the protruding state. As shown in FIG. 499, in the situation where the ordinary electric accessory 1640al provided on the left side of the second entrance 1640 is set to the protruding state, the ordinary electric accessory 1640al moves to the second entrance 1640. And forms a downward inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction where the game ball can be guided. Further, as shown in FIG. 499, since the ordinary electric accessory 1640al closes the upper part of the right first entry port 64r in the protruding state, the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 1750d during the protruding state is normal. The electric accessory 1640al prevents the ball from entering the right first entrance 64r, and the inclination formed by the normal electric accessory 1640al guides the ball to the second entrance 1640.

Further, as shown in FIG. 499, the ordinary electric accessory 1640ar forms an inclination in the downward direction from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in which the game ball can be guided to the second entrance 1640 by being in the protruding state. .. Of this ordinary electric accessory 1640ar, the end on the side opposite to the second entrance 1640 side extends below the right through gate 67r, so that the right-handed game ball is received in the protruding state. It is configured so that it can be guided to the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, while the set of ordinary electric accessories 1640al and 1640ar are set to the immersive state, the upper part of the right first entry port 64r is opened, so that the right guide flow path 1750d is opened during the immersive state. The passed game ball enters the right first entrance 64r in the same manner as in the 21st embodiment described above. Further, since the game ball hit to the right during the immersive state is not received by the ordinary electric accessory 1640ar, it flows down toward the out port 66 as in the 21st embodiment. Regarding the operation pattern (displacement pattern) of the ordinary electric accessory 1640al and 1640ar when the ordinary symbol is won, the same operation as the ordinary electric accessory 1640 in the 21st embodiment is performed for both ordinary electric accessory 1640al. , 1640ar. Therefore, when left-handed in the normal state, the game balls that have entered the distribution device 1750 become the left first entry port 64l and the right first entry opening 64r, as in the 21st embodiment. By alternately entering the balls, a disadvantageous gaming state is formed in which only the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is executed. On the other hand, when the player hits the left in the latent state, the game ball that has entered the distribution device 1750 becomes the left first entry port 64l and the second entry opening 1640, as in the 21st embodiment. By alternately entering the balls, a relatively advantageous gaming state is formed in which the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage and the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage are alternately executed. Further, when a right-handed hit is made in a game state (time reduction state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball is guided to the second entrance 1640 by the normal electric accessory 1640ar. Therefore, it forms an extremely advantageous gaming state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 500, a method of shifting between gaming states in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 500, in this modified example, four gaming states are provided as in the 21st embodiment. That is, it is set to the normal state (see the upper part of FIG. 500) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. Latent state (see the middle row of Fig. 500), probabilistic state set to high probability (probability change) state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol (see lower left side of Fig. 500), and low probability state of special symbol. There are four game states: a time-saving state (see the lower right side of FIG. 500), which is set as a time-saving state of a normal symbol. Here, since the state transition method in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is the same as that of the 21st embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 500, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another gaming state only when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 500, if the jackpot A21, which is won at a rate of 5% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the most advantageous probabilistic state for the player. In addition, if the jackpot B21, which is won at a rate of 60% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is relatively disadvantageous (that is, in the left-handed gaming state). Yes) Set to latent state. On the other hand, if the jackpot C21, which is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, unlike the 21st embodiment described above, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is changed again. It is set to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, in this modified example, the degree of advantage is higher than that of the 21st embodiment in that the transition rate to the latent state is increased, but the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous when a normal jackpot is obtained, is used. The degree of advantage is low in that it loops.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 500, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 500, substantially 35% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the latent state (the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol). When any of the jackpots A21, D21, and E21 that are won in consideration of the fact that they are executed alternately) is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous probability change state. Similarly, among the cases where the jackpot is won in the latent state, when the jackpot C21, which is virtually won at a rate of 17.5%, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most disadvantageous normal state. Among the cases where the jackpot is won in the latent state, when the jackpot F21, which is substantially won at a rate of 17.5%, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous time saving state. On the other hand, when the jackpot B21, which is substantially won at a rate of 30% in the latent state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the latent state again as in the 21st embodiment. ..

In this modified example, the jackpot B21 and the jackpot C21 are configured in a jackpot game in which the jackpot B21 and the jackpot C21 are completed in an extremely short time (for example, 1 second), and even if the player hits the right side, a prize ball cannot be almost obtained. In other words, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has been won. As a result, when the jackpot B21 is won in the normal state, it is possible to make it seem as if it has directly shifted to the latent state. In addition, when the jackpot C21 is won in the latent state, it can be made to think as if it has directly shifted to the normal state. In addition, the probability change switch 65e3 is abolished in this modification because the probability change jackpot, which is impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the normal jackpot are provided. .. That is, depending on the jackpot type, it is predetermined whether the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends or the low probability state of the special symbol is set. As a result, it is possible to provide a probabilistic jackpot, which is difficult to insert a game ball, and a normal jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 501 to 503, a characteristic effect mode in the present modification will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 501, an effect mode when shifting from the normal state to the latent state in this modified example will be described. In this modified example, when the jackpot B21 is won in the normal state and the state shifts to the latent state, the third symbol imitating the same odd number is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row and the middle symbol row, and the right symbol is displayed. A variable display effect (variable pattern effect) in which a third symbol imitating an odd number different from the left symbol column and the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed is executed in the column. That is, the effect of the display mode as if notifying the disconnection is executed. Then, even during the jackpot game that ends in a short time (for example, 1 second), the stop symbol that is stopped and displayed in the hit fluctuation continues to be displayed as it is. In the example of FIG. 501 (a), the third symbol imitating the number "3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol row LD and the middle symbol row CD, and the third symbol imitating the number "5" is displayed on the right symbol row RD. The case where the symbol is stopped and displayed is illustrated. In addition, when shifting to the latent state, the characters "Enter the chance zone !!" are displayed in the display area HR6. With these display modes, it is possible to make the player feel as if the player has shifted to a state in which the degree of advantage is high, as if the player was out of the lottery for the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in this modification, in the sub-display area Ds, the execution symbol display area Ds0 for indicating the reserved symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed and the reserved symbol for which the fluctuation is suspended are displayed. The 1st to 8th reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are displayed side by side. As a result, the player can easily understand the reserved symbol to be executed next.

Further, when the end timing of the jackpot B21 is reached and the latent state is set, as shown in FIG. 501 (b), each reserved symbol displayed in each reserved symbol display area Ds1 to Ds8 of the sub-display area Ds Is pseudo-changed to a "heat" hold symbol and a "normal" hold symbol. In the normal state, only the reserved symbols of the first special symbol are reserved, so if you simply try to set the display mode of the latent state immediately after shifting to the latent state, all the reserved symbols are normally low. It should be set to a "normal" hold symbol that indicates the degree of expectation. On the other hand, in this modified example, the reserved symbols already reserved at the time of transition to the latent state are set to a display mode in which "heat" reserved symbols and "normal" reserved symbols are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that allows the player to alternately digest the reserved balls having different expectations immediately after the transition to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in making this change, the arrangement order of the "heat" reserved symbol and the "normal" reserved symbol is set in consideration of the arrangement of the distribution member 1750b. That is, if the distribution member 1750b is tilted to the right, the game ball that next enters the distribution device 1750 is distributed to the left first entry port 64l, so that the ball is the newest reserved ball in terms of time. The corresponding reserved symbol is set to the "heat" reserved symbol, and the "heat" reserved symbol and the "normal" reserved symbol are set to be displayed alternately (see FIG. 501 (b)). On the other hand, if the distribution member 1750b is tilted to the left, the game ball that next enters the distribution device 1750 is distributed to the second entry port 1640, so that it is the newest reserved ball in terms of time. The corresponding reserved symbol is set to the "normal" reserved symbol, and the "heat" reserved symbol and the "normal" reserved symbol are set to be displayed alternately. As a result, even when the reserved symbol held during the normal state and the reserved symbol additionally held in the latent state coexist, the "heat" reserved symbol and the "normal" are surely made. It can be set so that the reserved symbols are displayed alternately.

It should be noted that, only when the hold ball (big hit A21) corresponding to the shift to the probability change state is included in the hold at the time of transition to the latent state, the arrangement of the distribution member 1750b is not taken into consideration. The reserved symbol corresponding to the jackpot A21 is set as the "heat" reserved symbol, and the "heat" reserved symbol and the "normal" reserved symbol are set to be displayed alternately. As a result, even in the reserved symbols held before the transition to the latent state, the “heat” reserved symbol can be configured with a higher degree of expectation that is more advantageous to the player, so that the “heat” reserved symbol can be configured. The value can be shared.

Next, with reference to FIG. 502, a display mode during the latent state will be described. FIG. 502 (a) is a basic display mode during the latent state in this modification. As shown in FIG. 502 (a), in the latent state, as in the 21st embodiment, in the variation pattern production corresponding to the first special symbol, a "normal" symbol is attached to the third symbol. It is displayed (see FIG. 502 (a)), and in the variation pattern effect corresponding to the second special symbol, the "heat" symbol is displayed accompanying the third symbol. As a result, as in the 21st embodiment, whether the lottery of the second special symbol having a high expectation for the player is being executed or the lottery of the first special symbol having a low expectation is being executed. It can be easily understood.

On the other hand, FIG. 502 (b) is a diagram showing a secret state set under a predetermined condition in the latent state. In this concealed state, as shown in FIG. 502 (b), all the accompanying symbols and reserved symbols are changed to the mode in which the characters "?" Are added ("?" Symbols, "?" Reserved symbols). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 502 (b), when the state shifts to the concealed state, the characters "Pinch of the end of the chance zone !?" are displayed on the display area HR6. This concealed state is set in a part (for example, 1/20) when the start prize corresponding to the jackpot C21 (the jackpot that shifts to the normal state) is detected and the start prize corresponding to the loss is detected. It is a state, which indicates that there is a possibility of falling from a latent state to a normal state. By concealing the type (attribute) of the accompanying symbol in the concealed state, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which hold is dangerous. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player feeling tense until the confidential state is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. While the concealed state is set, even if a new start prize is detected and the number of reserved balls increases, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is changed to the "?" Reserved symbol. The concealed state itself is terminated when a lottery of special symbols based on the starting prize that triggers the setting of the concealed state is executed and the variable display based on the lottery is completed.

FIG. 503 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the concealed state is terminated and the latent state is continued (when the concealed state is set when the lottery is simply won). Is. When the latent state continues, as shown in FIG. 503 (a), the third symbol is stopped and displayed by a mere combination of deviations, and the "?" Pending symbol is returned to the mode indicating the type of the special symbol. To. That is, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is restored to the "normal" symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is restored to the "heat" symbol. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of relief that the latent state has continued. When the latent state ends (normal state is set), the third symbol imitating the same even number is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row and the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row is displayed in the right symbol row. In addition, the variable display effect (variable pattern effect) in which the third symbol imitating an even number different from the middle symbol string is stopped and displayed is executed. In FIG. 503 (b), the third symbol imitating the number "2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row and the middle symbol row, and the third symbol imitating the number "6" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row. The case where the display effect is executed is illustrated. In other words, it is set to the exact opposite of the case where the latent state (chance zone) is set (the relationship between the even and odd numbers is the exact opposite). As a result, the player can easily understand the transition to the chance zone and the end of the chance zone. Further, as shown in FIG. 503 (b), at the end of the chance zone, the reserved symbol is set to the display mode corresponding to the pseudo normal state. As a result, it is possible to standardize the timing of notifying the end of the chance zone and the timing of setting the reserved symbol mode corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

<Control processing of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the 21st embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 505 to 507. First, the winning information-related process 21A (S18101) in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 504. The prize information-related process 21A (S18101) is a process executed instead of the prize information-related process 21 (see FIG. 445) in the 21st embodiment described above, and is the same as the prize information-related process 21 (see FIG. 445). In addition, it is a process for performing control according to the look-ahead result notified by the winning information command.

Of the winning information-related processing 21A (see FIG. 504) in the modified example of the 21st embodiment, in each of the processes S2301, S2311 and S2312, the winning information-related processing 21 (see FIG. 445) in the above-described 21st embodiment, respectively. ), The same processes as those of S2301, S2311, and S2312 are executed. Further, in the winning information-related processing 21A (see FIG. 504) in this modification, when the processing of S2301 is completed, the accompanying symbol display flag for indicating that the accompanying symbol is displayed is turned on. If it is determined whether or not it is (S2381) and it is determined that it is off (S2381: No), it means that it is not in the gaming state in which the accompanying symbol is displayed, so the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, in the process of S2381, when it is determined that the accompanying symbol display flag is on (S2381: Yes), it means that the game state is such that the accompanying symbol is displayed, such as the latent probability state. It is determined whether or not the value of the concealment counter for indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the state is greater than 0 (S2382).

In the process of S2382, when it is determined that the value of the concealment counter is greater than 0 (that is, it is set to the concealed state) (S2382: Yes), it corresponds to the concealed reserved symbol ("?" Reserved symbol). The display winning information command to be displayed is set (S2383), and it is determined whether or not the current winning information is the winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S2384). In the processing of S2384, when it is determined that the winning information corresponds to the jackpot (S2384: Yes), the current number of reserved balls is overwritten with respect to the value of the concealment counter indicating the number of fluctuations for continuing the concealment state. (S2385), the process shifts to S2311. On the other hand, in the processing of S2384, if it is determined that the winning information this time is not the winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S2384: No), the processing of S2385 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S2311. That is, if the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is additionally detected while the secret state is set, the secret state is extended to the jackpot fluctuation. As a result, when the secret state continues for a long time, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit.

Further, in the winning information-related process 21A (see FIG. 504) in this modification, when it is determined that the value of the concealment counter is 0 (that is, the concealment state is not set) in the process of S2382 (S2382: No), the secret lottery process for drawing the possibility of setting the secret state is executed (S2386), and the process shifts to S2311. The details of this secret lottery process (S2386) will be described with reference to FIG. 505.

FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing a secret lottery process (see S2386). When the secret lottery process (S2385) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the winning information notified by the current winning information command is the winning information corresponding to the jackpot C21 (S17901), and the winning information corresponds to the jackpot C21. If it is determined that the information is winning information (S17901: Yes), a display command for changing all reserved symbols to concealed reserved symbols ("?" Retained symbols) is set (S17902), and the current concealed counter is set to the current one. The number of reserved balls is set (S17903), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S17901, if it is determined that the current winning information is not the jackpot C21 (S17901), then whether or not there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in each winning information including the current winning information. (S17902), and if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included (S17902: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S17902, if it is determined that the winning information does not include a big hit (S17902: No), a lottery for whether or not to set the secret state is executed (S17905), and the secret state is set. It is determined whether or not the lottery result is set (S17906). In the process of S17906, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the secret state is obtained (S17906: Yes), the process is shifted to S17902 and the secret state is set.

On the other hand, if the lottery result set to the concealed state is not obtained in the processing of S17906 (S17906: No), the type of the special symbol, the type of the special symbol, the accompanying symbol, and the type of the reserved symbol are reversed. The state of the reverse order flag indicating the above and the display winning information command for indicating the reserved symbol according to the above are set (S17907), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 506, the jackpot end processing A (S2408) in this modified example will be described. The jackpot end processing A (S2408) is a process for making various settings at the jackpot end, similar to the jackpot end process (see FIG. 59) in the 21st embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. is there.

In the jackpot end processing A (see FIG. 506) in the modified example of the 21st embodiment, first, the data in the game state storage area 223f is read (S2501), and is the read data the data indicating the latent state? Whether or not it is determined (S2531). In the process of S2531, when it is determined that the data corresponding to the latent state has not been read (S2531: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the concealment counter is greater than 0 (S2532), and the value is determined. When it is determined that is 0 (S2532: No), the display mode of the reserved symbol according to the game state after the end of the big hit is set (S2533), and this process is terminated. If the jackpot is in the normal state, all the reserved symbols are set to the reserved symbols indicated by white circles, while in other gaming states, the reserved symbols of the second special symbol are indicated by the "normal" reserved symbols. Then, the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is set to the display mode indicated by the "heat" reserved symbol. On the other hand, in the processing of S2532, when it is determined that the value of the concealment counter is greater than 0 (that is, it is in the concealed state) (S2532: Yes), then the reserved symbols for the number of reserved balls are concealed reserved symbols. Set to (“?” Hold symbol) (S2534), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the S2531 process, when it is determined that the data corresponding to the latent state has been read (S2531: Yes), it is determined whether or not the accompanying symbol display flag is on (S2537), and it is turned on. If it is determined that there is, it means that the latent state has been looped, and it means that the display of the accompanying symbol has already been set. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2535, when it is determined that the accompanying symbol display flag is off (S2535: Yes), all the data stored in the prize information storage area 223a is read out (S2536), and the prize information is obtained. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the jackpot A21 is included in the inside (S2537). When it is determined that the jackpot A21 is included in the processing of S2537 (S2537: Yes), the reserved symbol held in the normal state is displayed according to the state of the distribution state flag indicating the arrangement of the distribution member 1750b. The mode is set to alternate display of "heat" hold and "normal" hold (S2538), and the process shifts to S2542. On the other hand, in the processing of S2537, when it is determined that the winning information includes the data corresponding to the jackpot A21 (S2537: Yes), each of the reserved symbols corresponding to the jackpot A21 becomes the "heat" symbol. The alternate display of the reserved symbols is set (S2539), and it is determined whether or not the correspondence relationship opposite to the arrangement of the distribution member 1750b is set according to the state of the distribution state flag (S2540). In the process of S2540, when it is determined that the correspondence relationship opposite to the arrangement of the distribution member 1750b is set (S2540: Yes), the reverse order flag indicating that the correspondence relationship is reversed and displayed is set to ON. (S2541), the process shifts to S2542. On the other hand, in the process of S2540, if it is determined that the correspondence relationship is set according to the arrangement of the distribution member 1750b (S2540: No), the process of S2541 is skipped and the process shifts to S2542. In the process of S2542, the accompanying symbol display flag is set to on, and this process ends.

Next, the details of the effect setting process 21A (S2841) in this modification will be described. The effect setting process 21A (S2841) is a process for setting a variable display mode of the variable display effect, similarly to the effect setting process (see FIG. 446) in the 21st embodiment described above. In this effect setting process 21A (S2841), it is determined whether or not the value of the concealment counter is greater than 0 (S2991), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S2991: Yes), the concealment counter The value of is subtracted by 1 and updated (S2992), and it is determined whether or not the value of the concealment counter after the subtraction is 0 (S2993). If it is determined in the process of S2993 that the value of the concealment counter after subtraction is not 0, the variation display of the third symbol accompanied by the concealed symbol is set (S2994), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2993, when it is determined that the value of the concealment counter after subtraction is 0 (S2993: Yes), the variation display set in the accompanying symbol mode according to the state of the distribution state flag when the variation is stopped. The mode is set (S2995), and this process ends.

Further, in the processing of S2991 when it is determined that the value of the concealment counter is 0 (S2991: No), then it is determined whether or not the accompanying symbol display flag is ON (S2996), and the accompanying symbol is displayed. If the flag is off (S2996: No), the variation display mode according to the game state and the type of the special symbol is selected (S2975), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2996, when it is determined that the accompanying symbol display flag is on (S2996: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol has been received (S2997), and the first special symbol is determined. If the variation pattern command of (S2997: Yes) is received, the variation display mode of the third symbol accompanied by the "normal" symbol is set (S2998), while the variation pattern command of the first special symbol is received. If it is determined that the pattern is not present (S2997: No), the variation display of the third symbol accompanied by the "heat" symbol is set (S2999), and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the 21st embodiment, the structure of the distribution device 1750 is made compact by changing the arrangement of the second entry port 1640 and the structure of the ordinary electric accessory. .. In addition, in the present modification, since the display period of the accompanying symbol is made longer than that of the 21st embodiment, it is possible to provide the playability of estimating the degree of expectation depending on the type of the accompanying symbol over a longer period. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the above-described 21st embodiment and its modified example, the mode of the reserved symbol in the latent state is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the first special symbol is a reserved ball. It was configured so that it could be distinguished whether it was a reserved ball with the second special symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be configured to be distinguishable by different aspects (back image) of the back surface of the reserved symbol.

<22nd Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 447 to 469. The pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment described above is configured so that a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (variably) at the same time (in parallel). Four gaming states (normal state, time saving state, probabilistic state, latent probable state) can be set as game states, and the type of special symbol that is easy to execute lottery (variation) is different according to the set game state. It was configured like this. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) which is the left-handed game state is set, the first special symbol lottery is performed rather than the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that it is easier to execute, and it is a right-handed game state, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). ), When the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed than the first special symbol lottery. Was there. That is, in the left-handed game state, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, while in the right-handed game state, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment is configured to provide a plurality of gaming states in which the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is different as the right-handed gaming state. That is, a game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is more easily executed than the lottery of the second special symbol, and a game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured to provide a state (latent state). With such a configuration, the degree of advantage of each gaming state in the right-handed gaming state can be made more different, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment is advantageous until a specific number of times (for example, 2 times) of jackpot games are won, triggered by the transition to a specific game state (for example, latent state). It is configured to be able to form an extremely advantageous state in which the right-handed gaming state is easy to continue (it cannot shift to the disadvantageous left-handed gaming state). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is substantially confirmed that the jackpot will be won a specific number of times when the player shifts to a specific gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest in.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The processing has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first 17 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 17th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 447. FIG. 447 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 447, in the 22nd embodiment, the configuration on the right side of the game board 13 is largely changed from the 17th embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 447, the through gate 67 is moved to the upstream side on the right side of the game board 13. Further, on the downstream side of the through gate 67, a large number of game nails are arranged, and a right first entrance ball opening 64r that triggers a lottery for the first special symbol is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 447, the right first ball entry port 64r is provided with an ordinary electric accessory 64ra capable of opening and closing the right first ball entry port 64r. This ordinary electric accessory 64ra is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second) when the ordinary symbol is hit by a lottery of the ordinary symbol based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 67. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 447, a variable winning device 1650 that is opened in each round of the jackpot is arranged on the downstream side of the right first ball entrance 64r. In addition, on the left side of the front view of the variable winning device 1650 (the position where the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device 1650 can reach while the variable winning device 1650 is closed), a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol is provided. A second entry port 1640 is provided. In the 22nd embodiment, the variable winning device 2650 is deleted because the small hit lottery result is not provided.

With this board configuration, in the 22nd embodiment, in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol in which the normal electric accessory 64ra is easily released is set, the right first ball entrance 64r is reached by hitting right. In addition to the frequent entry of game balls, game balls also enter the second entrance 1640. Then, in the 22nd embodiment, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In addition, in the 22nd embodiment, similarly to the 17th embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time. As a result, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, it is possible to realize the behavior that only the lottery of the first special symbol is frequently executed while the second special symbol fluctuates for a long time.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the normal electric accessory 64ra is hardly opened even if the player hits the right side (it is difficult to win the hit of the normal symbol), so the right first entrance ball port 64r Almost no game ball enters the ball, and the game ball enters only at the second entrance 1640. Here, in the 22nd embodiment, of the normal state and the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly longer in the normal state, while in the latent state. Is configured so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short. That is, in the normal state, even if a right-handed hit is made, the game ball can hardly be put into the right first entrance 64r, and the game ball is made to enter the second entrance 1640. Even so, since the lottery of the second special symbol is executed at extremely long time intervals, the game efficiency deteriorates. Therefore, the game can be advanced by hitting left. On the other hand, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter, so by hitting right, the ball frequently enters the second entrance 1640 and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. To. Therefore, the game can be advanced by hitting right.

In the 22nd embodiment, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the opening / closing door 1650f of the variable winning device 1650 is always opened during the period (V round) during which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 1650e3. The opening pattern is set. In other words, just by continuing to shoot the game ball toward the variable winning device 1650 (continuing to hit right) during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 and the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. The jackpot to be done is always executed. Then, in the 22nd embodiment, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit. For this reason, when shifting to the latent state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right-handed, not only the right-handed game state continues until the next big hit (the next big hit is substantially fixed). , It is confirmed that the right-handed game state will be set even after the end of the next big hit, and that the right-handed game state after the end of the next big hit will continue until the big hit is won. In other words, by shifting to the latent state, the next and next two jackpots will be substantially fixed, so when the transition to the latent state, the player will be more satisfied. You can feel a sense of security and a sense of security. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 448, a method of shifting between gaming states in the 22nd embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 448, in the 22nd embodiment, four gaming states are provided. That is, it is set to the normal state (see the upper part of FIG. 448) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. The latent state (see the middle left side of Fig. 448), the time saving state set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (see the middle right side of Fig. 448), and the high probability (probability change) of the special symbol. Four gaming states are provided: a probabilistic state (see the lower part of FIG. 448) set as a state and a time saving state of a normal symbol. Here, as described above, the normal state is a game state in which the game is advanced mainly by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, and the latent state is the lottery of the second special symbol mainly by right-handed. Is a game state in which the game progresses by executing the above, and the probability variation state and the time saving state are game states in which the game progresses mainly by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by right-handed.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 448, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another gaming state only when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 448, if the jackpot A22, which is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player. Further, if the jackpot B22, which is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to a relatively advantageous time saving state. That is, if the jackpot is won in the normal state, the game always shifts to the right-handed gaming state. In any case, winning the jackpot is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can be more pleased when the jackpot is won.

Further, as shown on the left side of the middle stage of FIG. 448, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown on the left side of the middle row of FIG. 448, if the jackpot D22, which is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, is won, after the jackpot ends. The game state is set to the probability change state. On the other hand, if the jackpot C22 is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is the most advantageous for the player again. It is set to a certain latent state. In other words, in the latent state that is the right-handed game state, if the jackpot is won, either the same game state is looped or the state is changed to the right-handed probable state, so the next big hit ends. It is substantially confirmed that the later gaming state will also be the right-handed gaming state. That is, at the time of transition to the latent state, it is substantially determined that the right-handed game state can be maintained and at least two big hits can be won. Therefore, at the time of shifting to the latent state, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and security, and thus the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown on the right side of the middle row of FIG. 448, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another gaming state when the jackpot is won or when the time saving number of times has elapsed. More specifically, as shown on the right side of the middle row of FIG. 448, if the jackpot A22 is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to the most favorable latent state for the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot B22 is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is relatively advantageous for the player again. It is set to a short time state. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won during the time reduction number set in the time reduction state, the game state is set to the normal state as a result of switching from the time reduction state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol. .. In other words, in the time saving state, which is a kind of right-handed gaming state, if the jackpot is won, either the same gaming state is looped or the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state, while within the time saving number of times. If the jackpot is not won, the player will be in a normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with a strong desire to win the jackpot within a short time. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 448, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 448, if the jackpot A22 is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player. Further, if the jackpot B22, which is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to a relatively advantageous time saving state. In other words, in the probabilistic state, winning the jackpot A22 shifts to a more advantageous latent state, while winning the jackpot B22 shifts to a time saving state in which the degree of advantage is lower than in the probabilistic state. I will end up. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the jackpot A22 will be won.

In summary, in the 22nd embodiment, in the normal state of the left-handed game, first, the left-handed game is executed with the expectation that a big hit will be won. Then, when the jackpot is won, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot type is the jackpot A22. Then, when the jackpot A22 is won and the most advantageous latent state is set for the player, the player can be given a great sense of security and satisfaction, while the jackpot B22 is won. If this is the case, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot will be won again during the time saving state set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the latent state, even if the jackpot is won, unless the game is played by a special game method such as not firing the game ball during the jackpot, the time saving state with a low degree of advantage does not occur. , You can play the game with a sense of security. Further, when the jackpot is won, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the jackpot C22, which loops the latent state, will be won.

If you win the jackpot D22 in the latent state and shift to the probabilistic state, there is a sense of security that the right-handed game state will continue until the next jackpot, but the majority (65%) of the jackpot winning will be the jackpot B22. Therefore, the time saving state is set to a low degree of advantage. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while feeling the tension that the jackpot B22 is not desired to be won. Then, when the jackpot is A22 in the probabilistic state and the player shifts (returns) to the advantageous latent state, the player can be given greater joy. On the other hand, when the jackpot B22 is won and the time saving state is set, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be won again during the time saving number of times. Then, if the jackpot is won within a short time as intended and the jackpot is A22 and the player shifts to the latent state, the player can be more satisfied, while the jackpot B22 is won. In that case, you can make them want to win the jackpot again within a short time. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions has passed, it is possible to make people think that they will aim for a big hit from scratch.

As described above, in the 22nd embodiment, by shifting to the latent state which is a kind of the hitting game state which is advantageous to the player, the right-handed game state continues until at least two big hits are won. Since it is configured so that the player is substantially determined to do so, the player's interest can be greatly improved when the player shifts to the latent state.

In the 22nd embodiment, when a big hit is won in the probability change state or the time reduction state, either the latent probability state or the time reduction state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a distribution in which the probability change state is set may be provided. More specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a probability variation jackpot in which the number of time reductions is set to 65535 is won at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 10%). It may be configured. With such a configuration, a more complicated state transition can be realized, so that a deeper game can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 449 to 452, a characteristic hobby effect in the 22nd embodiment will be described. As described above, in the 22nd embodiment, by shifting to the latent state, the right-handed game state continues (easily) until the two big hits are won, which is extremely advantageous. Therefore, in the 22nd embodiment, whether or not to shift to the latent state and whether or not to shift (fall) from the latent state to the probable state is suggested by the effect mode executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to be possible.

First, with reference to FIG. 449, an example of an effect mode of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state will be described. To do. FIG. 449 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in the first round of the jackpot won in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 449 (a), when the jackpot is won in the normal state, in the first round of the jackpot, a character (adventurer's character) imitating an adventurer possessing a sword and a shield with respect to the main display area Dm. A display mode in which the character) 801 and the character (monster character) 811 imitating a monster holding the treasure chest 802 glares at each other is displayed. In addition, the characters "defeat the enemy !!" are displayed on the horizontally long rectangular display area HR6 formed above the adventurer character 801 and the monster character 811. In addition, the characters "If you defeat the enemy, you will enter RUSH !?" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that the adventurer character 801 defeats the enemy monster character 811 to shift to an advantageous latent state (RUSH state). Can be done.

In the 22nd embodiment, the right-handed game state (latent state or probability change state) set in the probability change state of the special symbol is collectively referred to as "RUSH". On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, the right-handed game state (time saving state) set to the low probability state of the special symbol is called "chance time". In other words, when the rush to "RUSH" is notified, the right-handed state continues until the next big hit is won, while when the "chance time" is notified, it is right due to the passage of time reduction. It is configured so that the hitting state is terminated (it shifts to a disadvantageous normal state). This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the type of right-handed state.

FIG. 449 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the adventurer character 801 succeeds in defeating the enemy monster character 811 in the jackpot production (the winning jackpot type is jackpot A22). Is. As shown in FIG. 449 (b), when the enemy monster character 811 is successfully defeated, the characters "Victory !!" are displayed for the display area HR6 and the sub-display area Ds. Then, the characters "RUSH rush confirmed !!" are displayed. From these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the player shifts to an advantageous latent state (RUSH state) after the end of the big hit.

After the effect of defeating the monster character 811 is executed, as shown in FIG. 450 (a), a round bottom flask (superhuman drug) containing a chemical solution from the treasure box 802 possessed by the monster character 811. The effect of discovering 802a is executed. In addition, the characters "superhuman drug GET !!" are displayed on the display area HR6. With these display contents, in addition to setting the state after the end of the jackpot to the RUSH state, it is possible to give the player the impression that further added value has been acquired. While possessing this superhuman drug 802a, the victory in the battle with the monster character 811 is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the RUSH state is set by winning the battle not only in this jackpot but also in at least the next jackpot.

Although not shown, when the game state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state, the adventurer character 801 is defeated by the monster character 811 and the chance time is entered. Is notified.

As shown in FIG. 450 (b), in the RUSH state in which the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a is executed in the jackpot effect, the display area Dm3 formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm The superhuman drug 802a is displayed. With this display content, the player can easily confirm (visually recognize) whether or not he / she possesses the superhuman drug 802a, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

FIGS. 451 and 452 are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of a jackpot effect executed when a jackpot is won in a situation (latent state) in which the superhuman drug 802a is possessed. In the 22nd embodiment, when the superhuman drug 802a is possessed, the adventurer character 801 takes the superhuman drug 802a to achieve power-up, and then the superhuman character 811 battles with the monster character 811. It is configured to execute either the effect mode of fighting with the monster character 811 (while preserving it) without using the medicine 802a. First, with reference to FIG. 451, an effect mode when taking the superhuman drug 802a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 451 (a), when the jackpot is won in possession of the superhuman drug 802a and the production mode of taking the superhuman drug 802a is selected, the adventurer character 801 takes the superhuman drug 802a. The mode is set, and the characters "Use superhuman medicine !!" are displayed on the display area HR6. In addition, the superhuman drug 802a displayed in the display area Dm3 is erased. Further, the characters "Victory confirmed !?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that it is confirmed that the RUSH state is set at least after the end of the jackpot.

After the adventurer character 801 took the superhuman drug 802a, as shown in FIG. 451 (b), the effect of the superhuman drug 802a caused the arm muscles of the adventurer character 801 to expand, and the muscles expanded. By hitting the monster character 811 with the monster character 811, the effect of blowing the monster character 811 away is executed. Further, the characters "Victory !!" are displayed in the display area HR6, and the characters "RUSH rush confirmed !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the game state after the end of the big hit is the RUSH state (latent state or probable change state). When the game state after the big hit is in the probable state, the effect that the contents of the treasure box 802 left by the monster character 811 are empty is always executed. On the other hand, when the game state after the jackpot is in the latent state, either the effect that the contents of the treasure box 802 are empty or the effect of acquiring a new superhuman drug 802a from the treasure box 802 is executed. To. In other words, if the jackpot is won in the latent state and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the latent state, the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a (the RUSH state will be maintained even after the next jackpot ends). The effect of notifying in advance) is not executed. In this way, even if you do not have the superhuman drug 802a, by configuring it so that the latent state may be set, only the entry into the RUSH state is notified without acquiring the superhuman drug 802a. Even in such a case, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the latent state is actually set. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, FIG. 452 shows a battle with the monster 811 as it is without using the superhuman drug 802a when the jackpot is won in possession of the superhuman drug 802a and the production mode that preserves the superhuman drug 802a is selected. Transition. In addition, the characters "superhuman drug preservation !!" are displayed on the display area HR6. Further, as in the case where the effect of using the superhuman drug 802a is executed on the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 451 (a)), the characters “Victory confirmed !?” are displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state shifts to the RUSH state while maintaining the state of possessing the superhuman drug 802a. In other words, before the effect of defeating the monster character 811 and confirming the contents of the treasure chest 802 is executed, it is possible to detect that the state shifts to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the jackpot production started with the superhuman drug 802a in possession.

Although not shown, if the jackpot B22 is won in the probabilistic state (the state in which the superhuman drug 802a is not possessed) and the time saving state is set, the effect of defeating the monster character 811 is executed. Then, the transition to the chance time is notified. In addition, although the illustration is omitted, if the V prize does not occur due to the player not firing the game ball in the probability variation jackpot, etc., at the end of the V round, it will be in an advantageous state to continue until the next jackpot. An effect is executed to notify that the right to transfer is lost. More specifically, for example, the effect that the character 811 of the monster that should have been defeated is revived and the character 801 of the adventurer is defeated is executed, and the transition to the chance time is notified. As a result, the player can easily understand that he / she has lost the right to shift to the advantageous state due to the fact that the V prize has not occurred.

<Electrical configuration of the 22nd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 453 (a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described. FIG. 453 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 453 (a), in the ROM 202 in the 22nd embodiment, the variation pattern scenario 17 table 202nf is deleted with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th embodiment described above (see FIG. 364 (a)). It differs in that it is. Further, the first random number table 202a is provided in place of the first random number 17 table 202na, the first type selection table 202b is provided in place of the first type selection 17 table 202nb, and the second random number 17 table is provided. The difference is that the second random number table 202c is provided in place of 202 nc, the variation pattern table 202d is provided in place of the variation pattern 17 table 202nd, and the time reduction table 202e is provided in place of the time reduction 17 table 202ne. To do.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 453 (b). FIG. 453 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 453 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the 22nd embodiment, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 7". 8 random number values (counter values) are defined, and 20 random number values (0 to 19) of "0 to 19" are defined as random number values (counter values) that are judged to be big hits in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. Counter value) is specified.

Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 999" that the first random number counter C1 can take, the random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol. Since the number is 8 and 20, respectively, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/125 (8/1000), and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/125 (8/1000). The probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of one special symbol is 1/50 (20/1000). In the 22nd embodiment, since the lottery result corresponding to the small hit is not provided, the random number value corresponding to the small hit is not defined.

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 454 (a). FIG. 454 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the 22nd embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table that is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 454 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the 22nd embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, "big hit A22" and "big hit B22", as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Is stipulated. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two types of jackpot types, "big hit C22" and "big hit D22", are defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 454 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", the jackpot type is " The jackpot A22 ”is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A22" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit A22", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the execution period), the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the latent state that is most advantageous to the player. (Probability change state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) is set. Therefore, the "big hit A22" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit A22" is 35 of "0 to 34". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit A22" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 35% (35/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 454 (a), "big hit B22" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 99". This "big hit B22" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the big hit. After the end of this "big hit B22", it is basically set to a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) (unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 1650e3). .. That is, it is set to a gaming state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that in the latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B22" is a big hit type having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit B22" is 65 of "35 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B22" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 65% (65/100).

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "big hit C22" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34". This "big hit C22" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of "big hit C22", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the execution period), the latent probability state most advantageous to the player (probability change state of the special symbol, And the normal state of the normal symbol) is set. Therefore, the "big hit C22" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends and the number of rounds. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit C22" is 35 of "0 to 34". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C22" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 35% (35/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 99", "big hit D22" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit D22" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit D22", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is less advantageous than the latent state. , It is set to a probabilistic state (probability change state of special symbol and time reduction state of normal symbol) having a higher degree of advantage than the time reduction state. Therefore, the "big hit D22" has a lower degree of advantage than the "big hit A22" and the "big hit C22" in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit, but has a higher degree of advantage than the "big hit B22". In terms of the number of rounds, it is the most advantageous jackpot type along with "big hit C22". Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit D22" is 65 of "35 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D22" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 65% (65/100).

As described above, in the 22nd embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol is always set. As a result, the superiority of the latent state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed by right-handed can be enhanced, so that the player's interest in the transition to the latent state can be greatly improved. it can.

Next, the second random number table 202c in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 454 (b). The second hit random number table 202c is a data table in which a random number value (counter value of the second hit random number counter C4) that is a hit of a normal symbol is defined for each state of the normal symbol. FIG. 454 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c.

As shown in FIG. 454 (b), for a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, 240 random values of "0 to 239" are used as random values (counter values) that are hit by the normal symbol. Are specified in association with each other. Since all 240 random numbers of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4 are defined as winning random numbers, the lottery of the normal symbols can be performed in the time saving state (high probability state) of the normal symbols. When executed, the ratio of hitting a normal symbol is 100% (240/240).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 454 (b), only "0" corresponds to the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol as the random value (counter value) that hits the normal symbol. It is specified with. Of the 240 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 239" that can be taken by the second hit random number counter C4, the number of random numbers determined to be hits of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "0". Since there is only one of the above, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed in the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol, the ratio of winning the ordinary symbol is about 0.4% (1/240). Therefore, in the normal state or the latent state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the normal electric accessory 64ra is almost never released, so that the game ball launched by right-handed hitting is the second entrance. Enter the ball to 1640.

Next, the variation pattern table 202d according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 455. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. Although not shown here, the variation pattern table 202d in the 22nd embodiment selects the variation pattern in the latent state and the normal table 202sd1 referred to for selecting the variation pattern in the normal state. It is composed of three data tables, a latent probability table 202sd2 referred to for the purpose, and a time reduction / probability variation table 202sd3 referred to for selecting a fluctuation pattern in the time reduction state and the probability variation state. That is, it has the same configuration as the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 436 (a)) in the 21st embodiment described above. In addition, the normal table 202sd1 in the 22nd embodiment has exactly the same specified contents as the normal table 202rd1 in the 21st embodiment described above (see FIG. 436 (b)). That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, an extremely long fluctuation time of 180 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

Next, the details of the latent probability table 202sd2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 455 (a). FIG. 455 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent probability table 202sd2. In the latent probability table 202sd2, the lottery result of the special symbol and the value range of the variable type counter CS1 are defined in association with each other. That is, in the latent state, the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol regardless of the type of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 455 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "off", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149". A "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is specified in association with it, and a "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "190 to 195" and the "normal reach" of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the range of "196 to 198". On the other hand, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 455 (a), when the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". , "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in association with each other, and "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". Therefore, a “special reach” with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “195 to 198”.

As described above, in the latent state, the fluctuation time is shortened as a whole, and the ratio of selecting the short fluctuation time is high. Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game more efficiently when hitting right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455 (b), the variation pattern table 202d in the 22nd embodiment will be described in detail as the time saving / probability variation table 202sd3, which is one of the data tables. FIG. 455 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving / probability variation table 202sd3. As shown in FIG. 455 (b), in the time saving / probability variation table 202sd3 in the 22nd embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other. Has been done. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 455 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 0". A "short deviation" of 3 seconds is defined in association with the range of "149", and a "short deviation" of 5 seconds is defined with respect to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "150 to 189". "Long deviation" is specified in association with each other, and "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in association with the range of "190 to 195" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. However, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the range of "196 to 198".

Further, as shown in FIG. 455 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". On the other hand, "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with each other, and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified in the range of "195 to 198", and the "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in association with the range.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 changes in the range of "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range. When the time is specified in association with a long fluctuation of 180 seconds and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 in the entire range. Long fluctuations per second are specified in association with each other. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made in a time-saving state or a probable change state, a game ball frequently enters both the right first entrance 64r and the second entrance 1640, but for the second special symbol. Since the long variation is set, the lottery of the first special symbol can be frequently executed while the second special symbol is displaying the variation for a relatively long period of time. Therefore, the time saving state and the probabilistic state can be configured as a gaming state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is substantially executed.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 456. The time reduction table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting the number of time reductions at the end of the jackpot. FIG. 456 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in the 22nd embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 456, the time saving table 202e in the 22nd embodiment is set in relation to the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot. Is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 456, when the jackpot type is jackpot A22 (4 round probability variation jackpot), V prize (passage of probability variation switch 1650e3) during jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of jackpot winning. ) Is detected, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, and if V prize is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot A22, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless the above is performed, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. That is, when the jackpot A22 is won, it is substantially determined that the latent state that continues until the next jackpot is won is set regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, the jackpot A22 is most advantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 456, when the jackpot type is jackpot B22 (4 rounds normal jackpot), V prize (passing of the probability change switch 1650e3) is detected during the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. If this is done, 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, while 50 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. As described above, in the jackpot B22, since the opening / closing door 1650f1 is not opened (it remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, basically, no V prize is generated and a special symbol is used. The low probability state of is set, and the time saving state of 50 times of time saving is set. That is, when the jackpot B22 is won, basically, a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 50 times is set. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/125, so that the ratio of winning the jackpot during the 50 times of time reduction is about 33%.

In addition, when the jackpot B22 is won and the V prize is detected, the reason why the time saving number is set to 65535 is that it is difficult to generate the V prize in the jackpot B22 unless some kind of cheating is performed. Is. When a V prize occurs in the jackpot B22, by setting the number of time reductions to 65535 times and shifting to a probability change state where the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state, the merit of generating the V prize even by committing a fraudulent act It can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

Further, as shown in FIG. 456, when the jackpot type is jackpot C22 (8-round probability variation jackpot), if the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state, V prize (passing of the probability variation switch 1650e3) during the jackpot. ) Is set as the number of time reductions of 65535 times, while the number of times of time reductions is set to 0 times if V prize is not detected. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a gaming state other than the normal state (any of the time saving state, the probability change state, and the latent probability state), V winning (passing the probability change switch 1650e3) is detected during the jackpot. As a result, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, while 100 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot C22, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless this is done, a V prize will be generated and the special symbol will be set to the probable change state. That is, if the jackpot C22 is won in the normal state, a probability variation state that substantially continues until the next jackpot is set, while if the jackpot C22 is won in a game state other than the normal state, the most advantageous latent probability for the player. The state is set. In the normal state, the game state in which the degree of advantage is low is set only in the normal state, which is basically a game state in which the game progresses by left-handed, and the game is intentionally right-handed by breaking this basic. This is because unless the game is played by the irregular game method, the player cannot enter the second entrance 1640 and win the jackpot C22. By reducing the degree of advantage when the jackpot C22 is won in the normal state, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed during the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 456, when the jackpot type is jackpot D22 (8-round probability variation jackpot), V prize (passage of probability variation switch 1650e3) is detected during the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of jackpot winning. By doing so, 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, while 100 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot D22, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless is performed, a V prize will be generated and the special symbol will be set to the probable change state. That is, when the jackpot D22 is won, a probability change state that substantially continues until the next jackpot is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 457, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described. FIG. 457 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 457, the RAM 203 in the 22nd embodiment has a small hit start flag 203f, a small hit medium flag 203g, and a small hit, with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 17th embodiment described above (see FIG. 370). The hit flag 203cc, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203mc, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203md, the limit counter 203na, the limit arrival flag 203nb, the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203nd, and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203nf. The difference is that the time saving end wait flag 203 ng and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203 hn are deleted. The deletion of these configurations is associated with the deletion of the use of the small hit game, the probability variation limit number of times, etc. in the 22nd embodiment.

Next, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 458 (a). FIG. 458 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 458 (a), the ROM 222 in the 22nd embodiment has a continuous change with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 17th embodiment (and the 16th embodiment) described above (see FIG. 342 (a)). The difference is that the expectation update table 222ma has been deleted. It is also different in that the hit effect selection table 222sa is added.

The hit effect selection table 222sa is a data table that is referred to when the effect mode during the jackpot is determined according to the game state, the type of the winning jackpot, and the like at the start of the jackpot. The details of the hit effect selection table 222sa will be described with reference to FIG. 459.

FIG. 459 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hit effect selection table 222sa in the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 459, the hit effect selection table 222sa in the 22nd embodiment shows the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the situation of the superhuman drug 802a at the time of winning the jackpot (whether the superhuman drug 802a is possessed). For each (whether or not), the value of the effect counter 223e and the effect mode of the jackpot effect are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 459, if the superhuman drug 802a is not possessed and the jackpot A22 is won, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state or a shortened time state. For the entire range (range 0 to 99) that the counter 223e can take, there is an effect mode (see FIGS. 449 (b) and 450 (a)) in which the superhuman drug 802a is acquired after defeating the monster character 811. It is associated. Therefore, when the jackpot A22 is won in the normal state and the time saving state, the effect of defeating the monster character 811 and acquiring the superhuman drug 802a (victory + superhuman drug effect) is always executed. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic state or a latent state, the superhuman drug 802a cannot be acquired although the monster character 811 is defeated in the range of the effect counter 223e of "0 to 49". The production mode (victory only production) is defined in association with each other, and the production mode (victory) in which the superhuman drug 802a is acquired after defeating the monster character 811 against the range of the effect counter 223e of "50 to 99". + Superhuman drug production) is specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the jackpot A22 is won in the probabilistic state or the latent state, only the victory effect and the victory + superhuman drug effect are selected at a ratio of 50%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 459, when the superhuman drug 802a is not possessed and the jackpot B22 is won, the entire range (0 to 0) that the production counter 223e can take regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. A mode of defeating the monster character 811 (defeat effect) is associated with the range of 99). For this reason, when the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state (the chance time is entered after the jackpot ends), when the jackpot B22 is won, the adventurer character 801 is always defeated by the monster character 811. Will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 459, if the superhuman drug 802a is not possessed and the jackpot C22 is won, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state or a time saving state, the effect counter 223e is taken. An effect mode (victory only effect) is associated with the entire range (range 0 to 99) to be obtained, in which the monster character 811 is defeated but the superhuman drug 802a cannot be acquired. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic state or a latent state, the value of the production counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 74", and the monster character 811 is defeated, but the superhuman drug 802a is acquired. An effect mode that cannot be performed (victory only effect) is defined in association with each other, and an effect mode in which the superhuman drug 802a is acquired after defeating the monster character 811 against the range of the effect counter 223e of "75 to 99". Victory + superhuman drug production) is specified in association with each other. For this reason, even if the jackpot C22 is won in the probabilistic state or the latent state and the transition to the latent state is confirmed, the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a is executed only at a rate of 25%, and the rate of 75%. Only the victory is performed. Therefore, even if only the victory effect is executed in the RUSH state (latent state or probable change state), the expectation that the latent state is set can be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 459, when the superhuman drug 802a is not possessed and the jackpot D22 is won, the entire range (0 to 0) that the production counter 223e can take regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. With respect to the range of 99), a production mode (production only for victory) that wins the monster character 811 but cannot acquire the superhuman drug 802a is defined in association with it. This is because the RUSH state set after the end of the jackpot D22 is a probabilistic state, and if the "victory + superhuman drug" effect corresponding to the latent state is executed, it contradicts the actual game state. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 459, when the jackpot C22 is won in the state of possessing the superhuman drug 802a (that is, a part of the latent state), the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 29". On the other hand, after defeating the monster character 811 by using (taking) superhuman medicine 802a, the effect of newly obtaining superhuman drug 802a (superhuman drug use + superhuman drug acquisition effect) is defined and directed. When the value of the counter 223e is in the range of "30 to 89", the superhuman drug 802a is used to defeat the monster character 811, but a new superhuman drug 802a cannot be obtained (only the superhuman drug is used). It is defined in association with each other, and the effect of subduing the monster character 811 while preserving the superhuman drug 802a (superhuman drug preservation effect) is specified in association with the value of the effect counter 223e in the range of "90 to 99". ing. Therefore, if the jackpot C22 is won with the superhuman drug 802a in possession, the superhuman drug use + superhuman drug acquisition effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and only the superhuman drug use effect is executed at a rate of 60%, and 10%. Superhuman drug preservation production is executed at a rate. In other words, even in the case of winning the jackpot C22, which shifts to the most advantageous latent state after the jackpot ends in the situation of possessing the superhuman drug 802a, the majority (60% ratio) is set to direct only the superhuman drug use. Therefore, the latent state is not confirmed and notified. Therefore, even if the production is performed only by using the superhuman drug, the game can be continued without impairing the expectation that the latent state is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 459, when the jackpot D22 is won in the state of possessing the superhuman drug 802a, only the superhuman drug is used for the entire range (range 0 to 99) that the production counter 223e can take. The effects are associated. Therefore, if the jackpot D22 is won in the situation of possessing a superhuman drug, only the superhuman drug use is always performed.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 458 (b). FIG. 458 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 458 (b), the RAM 223 in the 22nd embodiment has a time saving information update area 223g, a remaining time saving period counter 223ma, and a super RUSH start with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 17th embodiment described above. The difference is that the flag 223na, the super RUSH middle flag 223nb, the super RUSH counter 223nc, the quasi-limit flag 223ne, the challenge effect flag 223nf, and the start delay flag 223hn are deleted. It also differs in that the superhuman drug flag 223sa has been added.

The superhuman drug flag 223sa is a flag for indicating whether or not the superhuman drug 802a is possessed. If it is on, it indicates that the superhuman drug 802a is possessed, while if it is off, the superhuman drug 802a is displayed. Indicates that you do not have it. The superhuman drug flag 223sa is set to off when the initial state is set to off, and is set to on when the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a is set as the jackpot effect (see S12415 in FIG. 469), while the superhuman drug flag is set to on. It is set to off when the effect of only using 802a is set (see S12417 in FIG. 469). When determining the jackpot effect with reference to the above-mentioned hit effect selection table 222sa (see FIG. 459), the state of the superhuman drug flag 223sa is read out to determine whether or not the superhuman drug 802a is possessed. The discrimination is performed, and the production mode is determined according to the discrimination result, the game state, and the jackpot type.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 22nd embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 to 468. First, the special symbol variation process 22 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 460. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 22 (S181). The special symbol variation process 22 (S181) in the 22nd embodiment is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 17 (FIGS. 372, S191) of the 17th embodiment described above, and is a process to be executed, and the special symbol variation process 22 (S181) in the 17th embodiment is executed. Similar to the variation processing 17 (see FIG. 372), this is a process for making various settings related to the variation display of the special symbol in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Of the special symbol variation processing 22 (see FIG. 460), in each of the processes S7054, S7057, S7059, and S7062, S7054, S7057, S7059, and S7054, S7057, S7059 of the special symbol variation processing 17 (FIG. 372) of the 17th embodiment, respectively. Since the same processing as each processing of S7062 is executed, the details thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 460, when the special symbol variation process 22 (see FIG. 460) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (during jackpot) (S7071). Here, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is in progress (during jackpot) based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203ne. If it is determined in the process of S7071 that a big hit is being made (S7071: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 22 (see FIG. 460) in the 22nd embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S7054 that the variation time counter 203ma of the special figure 1 is not larger than 0 (0) (S7054: No. ), That is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 change, then the first special symbol change start process 22 is executed (S7072), and the process shifts to S7059. In the first special symbol change start processing 22 (S7072), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is possible to determine whether or not there is a new lottery (variation), a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing 22 (S7072) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 461 to 463.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 22 (see FIG. 460) in the 22nd embodiment, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is a value larger than 0 in the processing of S7054 (variation display of the first special symbol). (S7054: Yes), then the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is subtracted and updated (S7073), and the first special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is updated. The display mode is updated (S7074). When the processing of S7074 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma after subtraction by the processing of S7073 is 0 (S7057), and it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is 0. If this is the case (S7057: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 22 is executed (S7075), and the process proceeds to the process of S7059. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7075), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped at the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. The process to be executed is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7075) will be described later with reference to FIG. 464. Further, in the processing of S7057, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ma is not 0 (S7057: No), the processing of S7075 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7059.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 22 (see FIG. 460) in the 22nd embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S7059 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203 mb is not larger than 0 (0). (S7059: No), since it is the case that the special figure 2 is not currently changing, the second special symbol change start process 22 for executing a new lottery (change) of the second special symbol is then executed. (S7076), this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol change start processing 22 (S7076) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 465 and 466.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7059, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203 mb is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current special figure 2 is changing (S7059: Yes), then the special figure 2 The value of the fluctuation time counter 203 mb is subtracted and updated (S7077), and the display mode of the second special symbol of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is updated (S7078). When the processing of S7078 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203mb after the update by the processing of S7077 is 0 (S7062), and if it is determined to be 0 (S7062: Yes). , The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 22 for setting the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol 22 is executed (S7079), and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7079) will be described later with reference to FIG. 467. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7062 that the value of the variation time counter 203 mb in FIG. 2 is not 0 (S7062: No), the process of S7079 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the first special symbol change start processing 22 (S7072) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 461. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change start processing 22 (S7072). The first special symbol variation start process 22 (S7072) in the 22nd embodiment is a process to be executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 373) of the 17th embodiment described above.

Of the first special symbol variation start processing 22 (see FIG. 461), in each of the processes S7101 to S7105 and S7111, S7101 to the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 373) of the 17th embodiment, respectively. Since the same processing as each processing of S7105 and S7111 is executed, the details thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first special symbol change start processing 22 (S7072) in the 22nd embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 22 for performing the lottery (big hit determination) of the first special symbol after executing the process of S7105. Is executed (S7131), and the process proceeds to the process of S7111. The details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7131) will be described later with reference to FIG. 462.

Further, in the first special symbol variation start processing 22 (see FIG. 461) in the 22nd embodiment, when the processing of S7111 is completed, the time saving update processing 22 for updating the time saving number of times is then executed (S7132). This process ends. The details of the time saving update process 22 (S7132) will be described later with reference to FIG. 463.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7131) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7131). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7131) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 374) in the 17th embodiment in the first special symbol variation start process 22 (see FIG. 461). This is a process to be executed instead, and is a process for executing a special symbol lottery (big hit determination) as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 374) in the 17th embodiment.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7131) in the 22nd embodiment, the processes S1871 to S1875 are deleted from the first special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 374) of the 17th embodiment. It differs only in that it is. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the time saving update process 22 (S7132) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 463. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 22 (S7132). The time saving update process 22 (S7132) in the 22nd embodiment is executed in the first special symbol variation start processing 22 (see FIG. 461) in place of the time saving update process (see FIG. 377) of the 17th embodiment. This is a process executed to update the number of time reductions (value of the time reduction counter 203k) when the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set.

In this time saving update process 22 (S7132), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0 (S17011), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0). If it is determined (S17011: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S17011, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0 (S17011: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S17012), and the time saving medium counter 203k is performed. A state command indicating the game state after subtracting the value of and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203k is set (S17007), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 464, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7075) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described. FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7075). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7075) is a process to be executed in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see FIG. 376) of the 17th embodiment described above, and the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol. Is the process that is executed to set.

The first special symbol variation stop process 22 (S7075) is different in that the time saving update process (S1893) is not performed with respect to the first special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 376) of the 17th embodiment. .. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, in the 22nd embodiment, the number of time reductions is updated not when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped but when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started.

Next, the second special symbol change start processing 22 (S7076) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 465. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 22 (S7076). The second special symbol variation start process 22 (S7076) in the 22nd embodiment is a process to be executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 378) of the 17th embodiment described above.

Of the second special symbol variation start processing 22 (S7076), in each of the processes S7631 to S7637 and S7639, S7631 to S7637 of the second special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 378) of the 17th embodiment, respectively. Since the same processing as each processing of S7639 is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the second special symbol change start processing 22 (see FIG. 465) in the 22nd embodiment, after the processing of S7637 is executed, the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 22 is executed (S7651), and the process proceeds to the processing of S7639. To do. The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7651) will be described later with reference to FIG. 466. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing 22 (see FIG. 465) in the 22nd embodiment, after the processing of S7639 is executed, the time saving update processing 22 is executed (S7652), and this processing is terminated. The time saving update process 22 (S7652) is exactly the same process as the time saving update process 22 (S7132) executed in the first special symbol variation start process 22 (see FIG. 461) (see FIG. 463).

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7651) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 466. FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7651). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7651) in the 22nd embodiment is the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 465) in the second special symbol variation start process 22 (see FIG. 465) in the 17th embodiment. This process is executed instead of (see FIG. 379), and is for executing the lottery (big hit determination) of the second special symbol as in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 379) in the 17th embodiment. It is the processing of.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (S7651) in the 22nd embodiment, the processes S1971 to S1975 are deleted from the second special symbol jackpot determination process 17 (see FIG. 379) in the 17th embodiment. When it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a big hit (S1925: No) in the processing of S1925, the first symbol display device is used instead of the special figure 2 deviation processing 17 (S1930). The only difference is that the process of setting the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol (S1935) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7079) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 467. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7079). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 22 (S7079) in the 22nd embodiment is a process to be executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 17 (see FIG. 380) of the 17th embodiment described above, and is the second. Similar to the special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (see FIG. 380), this is a process for setting the stop display of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 22 (S7079) in the 22nd embodiment, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 16 (S8121) is compared with the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (see FIG. 380) in the 17th embodiment. ) Is deleted, and when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203nj is off in the processing of S1971 (S1971: No), the processing is shifted to S1979. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot end process 22 (S13001) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 22 (S13001). The jackpot end process 22 (S13001) in the 22nd embodiment is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process 17 (see FIG. 382) of the 17th embodiment described above, and is a jackpot end process in the 17th embodiment. Similar to 17 (see FIG. 382), this is a process for making various settings at the end of the jackpot.

Of the jackpot end processing 22 (S13001), in each of the processes S17101, S17106, S17109, S17110, S17114, and S17115, S17101, S17106, and S17109 of the jackpot end processing 17 (FIGS. 382 and S1693) of the 17th embodiment, respectively. , S17110, S17114, and S17115, the same processing as each processing is executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 22 (S13001) in the 22nd embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S17101 that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is not on (that is, is off) (S17101: No), S17121. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is on (S17101: Yes), the process of S17106 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S17121.

In the process of S17121, the number of time reductions corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed and the data of the winning state storage area 203cf is read from the time reduction assignment table 202e (see FIG. 456) (S17121). Next, after executing the processes of S17109 and S17110, a state command corresponding to the game state after the big hit is set (S17122), and the process proceeds to the process of S17114. By executing this jackpot end process 22 (see FIG. 468), the game state after the jackpot ends can be accurately set according to the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, etc., and thus the state shown in FIG. 432. The transition can be reliably achieved.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 22nd embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 469, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 22nd embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 22nd embodiment is the jackpot start process 17 (with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 17th embodiment described above. The only difference is that the jackpot start process 22 (S12321) is executed instead of (see FIG. 388). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The details of the jackpot start processing 22 (S12321) will be described with reference to FIG. 469. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot start processing 22 (S12321).

As shown in FIG. 469, in the jackpot start processing 22 (S12321) in the 22nd embodiment, first, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is specified according to the data of the game state storage area 223f (S12411), and the specified game is specified. The production mode of the hit effect is determined according to the state, the current jackpot type, and the state of the superhuman drug flag 223sa (S12412). Next, the execution of the hit effect of the effect mode specified in the process of S12412 is set (S12413), and it is determined whether or not the superhuman drug acquisition effect (see FIG. 450 (a)) is set (S12414). If it is determined that the superhuman drug acquisition effect (see FIG. 450 (a)) has been set in the process of S12414 (S12414: Yes), the superhuman drug flag 223sa is set to ON (S12415), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12414, when it is determined that the superhuman drug acquisition effect (see FIG. 450 (a)) is not set (S12414: No), then the superhuman drug use effect (see FIG. 451 (a)) is performed. It is determined whether or not it has been set (S12416). When it is determined that the superhuman drug use effect (see FIG. 451 (a)) has been set (S12416; Yes), the superhuman drug flag 223sa is set to off (S12417), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the superhuman drug use effect (see FIG. 451 (a)) is not set (S12416: No), this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this jackpot start process 22 (see FIG. 469), the state of the superhuman drug flag 223sa can be updated according to the effect mode of the effect set as the jackpot effect, so that the situation of the superhuman drug 802a can be accurately changed. Can be grasped. Therefore, the superhuman drug use effect (see FIG. 451 (a)) is executed even though the superhuman drug 802a is not possessed, or the superhuman drug use effect (see FIG. 451 (a)) is executed even though the superhuman drug 802a is possessed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of contradictions such as the execution of the superhuman drug acquisition effect (see FIG. 450 (a)) without (see FIG. 451 (a)).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 22nd embodiment is configured to provide a plurality of gaming states in which the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is different as the right-handed gaming state. That is, a game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is more easily executed than the lottery of the second special symbol, and a game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured to provide a state (latent state). Then, with the transition to a specific game state (latent state), it becomes easy for the advantageous right-handed game state to continue until the jackpot game is won a specific number of times (twice) (unfavorable left-handed game). It is configured to be able to form an extremely advantageous state (which cannot be transferred to the state). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is substantially confirmed that the jackpot will be won a specific number of times when the player shifts to a specific gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest in.

Further, in the 22nd embodiment, when a specific production mode (effect of acquiring superhuman drug 802a or production of preserving superhuman drug 802a) is executed as a jackpot effect, a gaming state advantageous for the player (next time). Not only is the right-handed game state that continues until the jackpot of the game is set), but even after the jackpot is won in the set advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is set again (the advantageous game state is It is configured so that it is confirmed that it is stocked for one time). That is, it is possible to make the player understand that at least two jackpot wins are substantially confirmed at the time when the specific effect mode is executed, before the jackpot is won. It is possible to give great joy to the player at the time when the production mode of is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, in the 22nd embodiment, it is suggested that the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a and the effect of preserving the superhuman drug 802a (after the end of the next big hit, a right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit is set. The effect is to be executed as an effect mode during a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a fluctuation effect of the jackpot fluctuation to indicate that the jackpot A22 or the jackpot C22 (a jackpot whose latent state is set after the jackpot ends) has been won, an effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a may be executed. In other words, in addition to winning the jackpot during the jackpot fluctuation and entering the RUSH state after the jackpot ends, if the jackpot is won in the next RUSH state, it will be rich until the RUSH state is set again. It may be configured to provide a (determined) effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the effect mode during the variable display and perform the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<23rd Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 470 to 474. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment described above, the shift to the latent state is triggered to form an extremely advantageous situation in which the right-handed gaming state continues at least until the jackpot is won twice. It was composed of.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment forms a more advantageous situation in which the right-handed gaming state continues at least until the jackpot is won three times, triggered by the transition to the latent state. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the superiority in the case of shifting to the latent state can be further enhanced, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The 22nd execution of other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 22nd embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 470, a method of shifting the gaming state in the 23rd embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 470, in the 23rd embodiment, five gaming states are provided. That is, it is set to a normal state (see the upper part of FIG. 470) set to a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol, and a high probability (probability variation) state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol. Latent state (see middle left side of Fig. 470), time saving state set to low probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol (see middle right side of Fig. 470), and high probability of special symbol (probability change) Probability change state A (see the lower left side of FIG. 470) set for the state and the time reduction state of the normal symbol, and probability change state B (probability change) set for the high probability (probability change) state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol. (See the lower right side of FIG. 470) and five gaming states are provided. Here, as in the 22nd embodiment described above, the normal state is a game state in which the game is advanced mainly by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, and the latent state is mainly by right-handed. It is a gaming state in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the second special symbol. On the other hand, unlike the 22nd embodiment, the time saving state is configured as a gaming state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially executed by right-handing. Further, the probability variation state A is configured as a gaming state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially executed by performing a right-handed strike, and the probability variation state B is substantially the first by performing a right-handed strike. It is configured as a game state in which only lottery of special symbols is executed. As a method of making the special symbol that is substantially changed between the probabilistic state A and the probabilistic state B different, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made extremely long in the probabilistic state A, and the first in the probabilistic state B. 2 This is achieved by making the fluctuation time of the special symbol extremely long. That is, in each game state (time saving state, probability change state A, probability change state B) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, the first right ball is entered by hitting right as in the 22nd embodiment described above. Frequently enters both the mouth 64r and the second entrance 1640. Therefore, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, and by lengthening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, only the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed. Can be executed. Using this method, in the 23rd embodiment, the types of special symbols for which the lottery is substantially executed are different in each game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbols.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 470, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another gaming state only when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 470, if the jackpot A23, which is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player. Further, if the jackpot B23, which is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to a relatively advantageous time saving state. That is, if the jackpot is won in the normal state, the game always shifts to the right-handed gaming state. In any case, winning the jackpot is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can be more pleased when the jackpot is won.

Further, as shown on the left side of the middle stage of FIG. 470, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown on the left side of the middle row of FIG. 470, if the jackpot D23, which is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, is won, after the jackpot ends. The game state is set to the probability change state A. On the other hand, if the jackpot C23, which is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is the most advantageous for the player again. It is set to a certain latent state. In other words, in the latent probability state, which is the right-handed game state, if the jackpot is won, either the same game state is looped or the game shifts to the right-handed probabilistic state A, so the next jackpot It is substantially determined that the gaming state after the end will also be the right-handed gaming state. Therefore, at the time of shifting to the latent state, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and security, and thus the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown on the right side of the middle row of FIG. 470, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another gaming state when the jackpot is won or when the time saving number of times has elapsed. More specifically, as shown on the right side of the middle row of FIG. 470, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the degree of advantage is relatively higher than the time saving state at a rate of 100% regardless of the big hit type. Shifts to a high probability change state B. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won during the time reduction number set in the time reduction state, the game state is set to the normal state as a result of switching from the time reduction state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol. .. In other words, in the time saving state, which is a kind of right-handed gaming state, if the jackpot is won, it shifts to the more advantageous probability change state B, but if the jackpot is not won within the time saving number of times, it is a disadvantageous normal state for the player. Because it shifts to, it is possible to play the game while strongly hoping to win the jackpot within a short time. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 470, there is a possibility of shifting from the probability change state A to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 470, if the jackpot C23, which is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state A, is won, after the jackpot ends. The gaming state is set to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player. Further, if the jackpot D23, which is won at a rate of 65% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state A, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variation state B. This probability change state B is a kind of right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit, but the degree of advantage is lower than the probability change state A because only the lottery of the first special symbol having a relatively low degree of advantage is executed. Become. That is, in the probability change state A, regardless of whether the jackpot C23 is won or the jackpot D23 is won, the game state after the jackpot ends continues to the right-handed game state (latent state or probability change state B) until the next jackpot. ), Which is extremely advantageous for the player.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 470, there is a possibility of shifting from the probability change state B to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 470, if the jackpot A23, which is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability change state B, is won, after the jackpot ends. The gaming state is set to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player. Further, if the jackpot B23, which is won at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state B, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. Therefore, in the probability change state B, even if the jackpot is won, the majority (65%) shifts to the time-saving state, which is the right-handed game state with the lowest degree of advantage, and fortunately, the distribution is 35% to the jackpot A23. Even if you can win, you will move to the probabilistic state A instead of the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the probability change state B is the game state having the lowest degree of advantage among the three game states (latent probability state, probability change state A, and probability change state B) in which the probability change state of the special symbol is set.

In summary, in the 23rd embodiment, in the normal state of the left-handed game, first, the left-handed game is executed with the expectation that a big hit will be won. Then, when the jackpot is won, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot type is the jackpot A23. Then, when the jackpot A23 is won and the most advantageous latent state is set for the player, the player can be given a great sense of security and satisfaction, while the jackpot B23 is won. If this is the case, the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot will be won again during the time saving state set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the latent state, even if the jackpot is won, unless the game is played by a special game method such as not firing the game ball during the jackpot, the time saving state with a low degree of advantage does not occur. , You can play the game with a sense of security. Then, when the jackpot is won in the latent state, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the jackpot C23 that loops the latent state will be won.

Even if you win the jackpot D23 in the latent state and shift to the probability change state A, the right-handed game state will continue until the next jackpot, and even after the end of the next jackpot, the right-handed state will continue until the next jackpot. Since it is set, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security until the jackpot is won. Further, when the jackpot is won in the probability change state A, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot C23 to shift to the latent state will be determined.

If you win the jackpot D23 in the probability change state A and shift to the probability change state B, there is a sense of security that the right-handed game state will continue until the next jackpot is won, but when the jackpot is won, the majority (65%) ) Becomes a big hit B23, and the time saving state with a low degree of advantage is set. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while feeling the tension that the jackpot B23 is not desired to be won. Then, in the case of the jackpot A23 in the probability change state B and the transition (return) to the advantageous probability change state A, the player can be given greater joy. On the other hand, when the jackpot B23 is won and the time saving state is set, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be won again during the time saving number of times. Then, if the jackpot is won within the time reduction number as intended and the player returns to the probability change state B, the player can be more satisfied, but if the time reduction number has passed, the player can feel greater satisfaction. Also, it can make you want to aim for a big hit from the beginning.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when the game shifts to the latent state, the jackpot can be won at least once in the three gaming states of the latent state, the probable change state A, and the probable change state B. It is configured as follows. That is, it is possible to realize an extremely novel playability in which it is substantially confirmed that the jackpot will be won at least three times when the state shifts to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game more than ever.

Next, with reference to FIG. 471, a characteristic effect mode in the 23rd embodiment will be described. FIG. 471 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the probability change state (probability change state A or probability change state B) is set in the 23rd embodiment. Is. As shown in FIG. 471, in the probabilistic state, the special symbol (in the probabilistic state A) on the side where the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed (the side where the short fluctuation time is easily set) in a relatively wide range in the main display area Dm. If there is, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol and the first special symbol in the probability variation state B is executed, and a relatively narrow range (provided in the lower right portion) in the main display area Dm is executed. In the small area Dm4), the special symbol on the side where the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be executed (the side where the long fluctuation is set) (the first special symbol in the probability variation state A, the second special in the probability variation state B) The variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the symbol) is executed. In other words, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol on the side where the lottery of the special symbol is easy to be executed is made more conspicuous than the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol on the side where it is difficult to be executed (easy to see). ) It is configured. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol simply by paying attention to the variable display of the third symbol in the display mode that is easy to see regardless of the game state, so that the player can understand. It is possible to provide an easy game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 471 (a), on the left side in the sub-display area Ds, there may be a special symbol on the side where the lottery of the special symbol is likely to be executed (if the probability variation state A, the second special symbol or the probability variation state B). For example, the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed in a relatively wide display range (small area Ds1), and the special symbol on the side where the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be executed is displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display area Ds. The reserved symbols corresponding to the symbols (the first special symbol in the probabilistic state A and the second special symbol in the probabilistic state B) are displayed in a relatively narrow display range (third display area Ds3). That is, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol on the side where the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed is made more conspicuous (easier to see) than the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol on the side where it is difficult to be executed. By simply checking the hold symbol that is easily displayed, it is possible to grasp the status of the hold ball of the special symbol that is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

In the 23rd embodiment, in the probabilistic state (probability change state A or probabilistic state B), the third symbol and the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, or the third symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol It is configured so that it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether it is a reserved symbol. By configuring in this way, the game determines whether the set gaming state is the probabilistic state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed or the probabilistic state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed. It can be difficult for a person to recognize. More specifically, in both the probabilistic state A and the probabilistic state B, the game ball frequently enters the right first entry port 64r and the second entry opening 1640 by hitting the right side. It is relatively difficult to accurately grasp whether the variable display is started in each display area and whether the reserved symbols are increased when the ball is entered. Under such circumstances, the degree of advantage is compared by not clearly indicating whether the symbol is the third symbol and the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the third symbol and the reserved symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. It is difficult for the player to grasp whether it is a probabilistic state A in which the target is high (at least two jackpots are substantially determined) or a probabilistic state B in which the degree of advantage is relatively low (only the next jackpot is confirmed). Can be configured. As a result, even when the probability variation state B having a low degree of advantage is set, the player can be expected to have the probability variation state B having a high degree of advantage set. It is possible to improve the interest in.

In addition, in the case of shifting to the probabilistic state A, there is a possibility that the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a is executed during the execution of the jackpot game, as in the case of shifting to the latent probable state in the 22nd embodiment described above. is there. That is, after the end of the next big hit, there is a possibility that an effect suggesting that a right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit is set (at least two big hits are substantially confirmed) is executed. Therefore, while the superhuman drug 802a is acquired and displayed with respect to the third display area Ds3, the player can easily understand that the superhuman drug 802a is in the probabilistic state A (or more advantageous latent state). Can be done.

Next, an example of the display mode in the latent state will be described with reference to FIG. 471 (b). As shown in FIG. 471 (b), in the latent state, the character "x2" may appear on the right side of the image of the superhuman drug 802a with respect to the third display area Dm3. That is, there is a possibility that display contents indicating that two superhuman drugs 802a are possessed may be displayed. As described above, the superhuman drug 802a is an effect mode (display mode) in which winning the battle with the monster character 811 in the jackpot is rich (determined). That is, after the end of the next jackpot, a display mode (directing mode) means that a right-handed gaming state (either a latent state, a probability change state A, or a probability change state B) that continues until the next jackpot is set. Is. Therefore, possessing two superhuman medicines 802a means that winning the monster character 811 will be rich (confirmed) at least three times over at least two jackpots. It is possible to make the player recognize that the winning of the jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, when the display mode in which two superhuman drugs 802a are possessed is set, the player's interest in the game can be significantly improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, even if the jackpot C23 is won and the latent state is looped in the state of possessing two superhuman drugs 802a (latent state), one superhuman drug 802a is used and a new one is used. There is a possibility that an effect mode in which the superhuman drug 802a is not acquired (an effect mode in which the superhuman drug 802a is reduced by one) is executed. In addition, even if the jackpot C23 is won and the latent state is set in the state of possessing one superhuman drug 802a (probability change state A or latent state), the superhuman drug 802a is preserved and the monster character 811 is defeated. , A production mode in which a new superhuman drug 802a is not acquired (a production mode in which the number of superhuman drugs 802a does not change) or a production mode in which one superhuman drug 802a is used and a new superhuman drug 802a is not acquired (superhuman drug 802a is 1). There is a possibility that the effect mode) will be executed. That is, even if the state shifts to the latent state, the state of possessing two superhuman drugs 802a does not necessarily occur, and even if the state shifts to the probabilistic state A, the state of possessing one superhuman drug 802a does not always occur. In other words, in the latent state, the number of superhuman drugs 802a possessed can be set to either 0 to 2, and in the probabilistic state A, the number of superhuman drugs 802a possessed can be either 0 or 1. Is also configured so that it can be set. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state B, the number of superhuman drugs 802a possessed is always set to 0 (a mode in which the superhuman drug 802a is not displayed in the third display area Dm3). As a result, even if the number of superhuman drugs 802a possessed is 0, the game can be performed with the expectation that the superhuman drug 802a is set to the latent state or the probability change state A. Further, even if the number of superhuman drugs 802a possessed is one, the game can be performed with the expectation that the superhuman drug 802a is set to the latent state.

In the latent state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first entrance 64r (normally, it is difficult for the electric accessory 64ra to be released), so a player who knows the specifications. If this is the case, it is possible to distinguish between the latent state and the probable state by checking the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 64ra. Conversely, a player who does not know the specifications has no choice but to estimate the game state from the effect mode of the third symbol display device 81, so that the game property of estimating the game state from the number of superhuman drugs 802a possessed is further improved. Can be entertained.

<Electrical configuration of the 23rd embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 472 to 474. Although not shown here, the ROM 202 in the 23rd embodiment is defined in the first type selection table 202b with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 22nd embodiment described above (see FIG. 453 (a)). The contents are different in that the specified contents of the time saving table 202e and the specified contents of the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed. Further, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta, which is a data table referred to for selecting the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to according to the game state after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot type, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot It is also different in that is added.

First, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 472 (a). FIG. 472 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the 23rd embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table that is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 472 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the 23rd embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, "big hit A23" and "big hit B23", as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Is stipulated. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, two types of jackpot types, "big hit C23" and "big hit D23", are defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 472 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", the jackpot type is " The jackpot A23 ”is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A23" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit A23", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the execution period), the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the latent state that is most advantageous to the player. (Probability change state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) is set. Therefore, the "big hit A23" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit A23" is 35 of "0 to 34". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit A23" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 35% (35/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 472 (a), "big hit B23" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 99". This "big hit B23" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the big hit. After the end of this "big hit B23", it is basically set to a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) (unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 1650e3). .. That is, it is set to a gaming state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that in the latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B23" is a big hit type having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit B23" is 65 of "35 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B23" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 65% (65/100).

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "big hit C23" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34". This "big hit C23" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the jackpot. Further, after the end of the "big hit C23", there is a possibility that the latent probability state and the probability change state B are set. That is, when the "big hit C23" is won in the latent state or the probability change state A and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent state, and the "big hit C23" is set in the time saving state. When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change state B. That is, if the "big hit C23" is won in the right-handed game state, the game state is set with an advantage degree equal to or higher than the advantage degree of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "big hit C23" is the aspect of the game state after the jackpot ends. It is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. In addition, although it is a rare case, in the normal state where only the lottery of the first special symbol is substantially executed, if the "big hit C23" is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the game state after the big hit is completed. It is set to the probability change state B. Further, when the "big hit C23" is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is substantially executed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the latent state. .. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit C23" is 35 of "0 to 34". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C23" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 35% (35/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 99", "big hit D23" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit D23" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the big hit. Further, after the end of the "big hit D23", there is a possibility that the probability change state A and the probability change state B are set. That is, when the "big hit D23" is won in the latent state and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3, the game state after the big hit is set to the probability change state A, and the "big hit D23" is set in the probability change state A or the time saving state. When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change state B. In other words, in a game state other than the time saving state, if the "big hit D23" is won, the game shifts to a right-handed game state with a low degree of advantage. Therefore, in terms of the game state after the big hit ends, the "big hit C23" Is also disadvantageous to the player. In addition, although it is a rare case, if the "big hit D23" is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state or the probability change state B where only the lottery of the first special symbol is substantially executed, after the big hit ends. The game state of is set to the probability change state B. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit D22" is 65 of "35 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D22" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 65% (65/100).

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol is always set. As a result, the superiority of the latent state and the probabilistic state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed by right-handed can be enhanced, so that the player in the case of shifting to the latent state or the probable change state A. Can greatly improve the interest of.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 472 (b). The time reduction table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting the number of time reductions at the end of the jackpot. FIG. 472 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in the 23rd embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 472 (b), the time saving table 202e in the 23rd embodiment is set in association with the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot. The number of time reductions is specified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 472 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot A23 (4 round probability variation jackpot), if the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state or the latent state, the jackpot By detecting V winning (passing of the probability change switch 1650e3), 0 times is set as the time saving number, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the time saving number. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time saving state or a probability change state, 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions by detecting V winning (passing the probability change switch 1650e3) during the jackpot, and V winning is detected. If not, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot A23, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless this is done, a V prize will be generated and the special symbol will be set to the probable change state. That is, when the jackpot A23 is won in the normal state or the latent state, it is substantially determined that the latent state that continues until the next big hit is won is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot A23 is won in the time saving state or the probability variation state, it is substantially determined that the probability variation state that continues until the next jackpot is won is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 472 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot B23 (4 rounds normal jackpot), V prize (passing of the probability change switch 1650e3) during the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. ) Is detected, 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, while 50 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. As described above, in the jackpot B23, since the opening / closing door 1650f1 is not opened (it remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, basically, no V prize is generated and a special symbol is used. The low probability state of is set, and the time saving state of 50 times of time saving is set. That is, when the jackpot B23 is won, basically, a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 50 times is set. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/125, so that the ratio of winning the jackpot during the 50 times of time reduction is about 33%.

In addition, when the jackpot B23 is won and the V prize is detected, the reason why the time saving number is set to 65535 is that it is difficult to generate the V prize in the jackpot B23 unless some kind of cheating is performed. Is. When a V prize occurs in the jackpot B23, by setting the number of time reductions to 65535 times and shifting to a probability change state where the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state, the merit of generating a V prize even by committing a fraudulent act It can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

Further, as shown in FIG. 472 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot C23 (8 round probability variation jackpot), if the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state or the time saving state, V prize is won during the jackpot. By detecting (passage of the probability change switch 1650e3), 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, while if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state or a latent state, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions by detecting V winning (passing the probability change switch 1650e3) during the jackpot. If V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot C23, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless is performed, a V prize will be generated and the special symbol will be set to the probable change state. That is, if the jackpot C23 is won in the normal state or the time saving state, a probability variation state that substantially continues until the next jackpot is set, while if the jackpot C23 is won in the probability variation state or the latent state, it is most advantageous for the player. The latent state is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 472 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot D23 (8-round probability variation jackpot), V prize (passing of the probability variation switch 1650e3) during the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of jackpot winning. ) Is set as the time saving number of 65535 times, while if V winning is not detected, the time saving number of times is set to 100 times. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot D22, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless is performed, a V prize will be generated and the special symbol will be set to the probable change state. That is, when the jackpot D22 is won, a probability change state that substantially continues until the next jackpot is set.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 473 (a). The variation pattern table 202d is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. FIG. 473 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d according to the 23rd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 473 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in the 23rd embodiment replaces the variation pattern table 202d in the 22nd embodiment described above with the time saving / probability variation table 202sd3. It is different only in that 1 game table 202td3 and substantial special figure 2 game table 202td4 are provided. The substantial special figure 1 game table 202td3 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation state B in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is substantially executed, and the substantial special figure 2 game table. 202td4 is a data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern in the time saving state and the probability variation state A in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 473 (b), the details of the above-mentioned substantial special figure 1 gaming table 202td3 will be described. FIG. 473 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the substantial special figure 1 game table 202td3. In the substantial special figure 1 game table 202td3, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 473 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 0". A "short deviation" of 3 seconds is defined in association with the range of "149", and a "short deviation" of 5 seconds is defined with respect to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "150 to 189". "Long deviation" is specified in association with each other, and "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified in association with the range of "190 to 195" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. However, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the range of "196 to 198".

Further, as shown in FIG. 473 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". On the other hand, "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with each other, and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified in the range of "195 to 198", and the "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in association with the range.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 changes in the range of "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range. When the time is specified in association with a long fluctuation of 180 seconds and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 in the entire range. Long fluctuations per second are specified in association with each other. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made in the probability variation state B in which the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3 is referred to, the game ball frequently enters both the right first entry slot 64r and the second entry slot 1640. Although it is a ball, a long variation is set for the second special symbol, so the lottery of the first special symbol is frequently executed while the second special symbol is displaying the variation for a relatively long period of time. be able to. Therefore, the probability variation state B can be configured as a gaming state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is substantially executed.

Further, although the illustration is omitted, the regulation content of the real special figure 2 game table 202td4 is that the distribution of the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is simply opposite to that of the real special figure 1 game table 202td3. It is only. That is, while the data is specified so that the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds to 30 seconds can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, only the long fluctuation of 180 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. It is configured to be selected. As a result, when a right-handed hit is made in the probabilistic state A or the time-saving state in which the game table 202td4 is referred to, the game is frequently played in both the right first entrance 64r and the second entrance 1640. Although the ball enters, a long fluctuation is set for the first special symbol, so the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently performed while the first special symbol is displaying the fluctuation for a relatively long period of time. Can be executed. Therefore, the probability change state A and the time saving state can be configured as a game state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially executed.

Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta described above will be described with reference to FIG. 474. As shown in FIG. 474, this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta varies with respect to the combination of the currently set gaming state, the previous jackpot type, and the gaming state when the previous jackpot is won. The type of data table for selecting a pattern (one of the normal table 202sd1, the latent probability table 202sd2, the real special figure 1 game table 202td3, and the real special figure 2 game table 202td4) is defined in association with each other. There is.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 474, for the normal state, as the type of the fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the previous jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning. , The normal table 202sd1 is specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern is always selected with reference to the normal table 202sd1. In addition, for the time saving state, the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4 corresponds to the type of the fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation pattern regardless of the previous jackpot type and the game state at the time of the previous jackpot winning. It is specified with. Therefore, when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the time saving state, the variation pattern is always selected by referring to the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4. Further, with respect to the latent probability state, the latent probability table 202sd2 is associated as the type of the fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation pattern regardless of the previous jackpot type and the game state at the time of the previous jackpot winning. It is stipulated. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the special symbol is satisfied in the latent probability state, the variation pattern is always selected with reference to the latent probability table 202sd2.

On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the type of the variable pattern table to be referred to is configured differently depending on the previous jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 474, for the condition that the previous jackpot type is the jackpot A23 and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning is the time saving state, the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3 is used. It is specified in association with each other. Therefore, in the probability variation state set by winning the jackpot A23 in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3. That is, a probability variation state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed is formed. On the other hand, for the condition that the previous jackpot type is jackpot A23 and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning is other than the time saving state, the actual special figure 2 gaming table 202td4 is defined in association with it. Therefore, in the probabilistic state set by winning the jackpot A23 in the lottery of the first special symbol in the game state other than the time saving state, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4. That is, a probability variation state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 474, in the probabilistic state, the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3 corresponds to the situation where the previous jackpot type is the jackpot B23, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning. It is specified with. Therefore, in the case where the probability change state is set even though the jackpot B23, which is a normal jackpot, is won (that is, there is a high possibility that the game ball is illegally passed through the probability change switch 1650e3), the actual special figure 1 The variation pattern is selected with reference to the game table 202td3. That is, since the probability variation state B having the lowest degree of advantage among the gaming states set in the probability variation state of the special symbol is formed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent activity by reducing the merit of the fraudulent activity.

Further, as shown in FIG. 474, the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3 corresponds to the condition that the previous jackpot type is jackpot C23 and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning is the normal state or the time saving state. It is specified with. Therefore, in the probabilistic state set by winning the jackpot C23 in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state or the time saving state, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3. That is, a probability variation state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed is formed. On the other hand, for the condition that the previous jackpot type is jackpot C23 and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning is the latent state or the probable change state, the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4 is defined in association with it. .. Therefore, in the probability change state set by winning the jackpot C23 in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent probability state or the probability change state, the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4. That is, a probability variation state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is formed.

In addition, when the jackpot C23 is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the transition to the probability change state B is performed by right-handing in the normal state where the game should proceed by left-handed and the second special symbol lottery. The purpose is to curb anomalous game methods that force the player to execute. That is, by configuring the configuration so that it cannot shift to the most advantageous latent probability state or the relatively advantageous probability variation state A, it is possible to reduce the merit of the irregular game method of hitting right in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress anomalous game methods.

Further, as shown in FIG. 474, the actual special figure 2 gaming table 202td4 is associated with the condition that the previous jackpot type is the jackpot D23 and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning is the latent state. It is stipulated. Therefore, in the probability variation state set by winning the jackpot D23 in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent probability state, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4. That is, a probability variation state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is formed. On the other hand, for the condition that the previous jackpot type is jackpot D23 and the gaming state at the time of the previous jackpot winning is a gaming state other than the latent state, the actual special figure 1 gaming table 202td3 is defined in association with it. There is. Therefore, in the probabilistic state set by winning the jackpot D23 in the lottery of the second special symbol in the game state other than the latent probability state, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3. That is, a probability variation state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed is formed.

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, when the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the variation pattern table that differs depending on the process of shifting to the probabilistic state (previous jackpot type or game state at the time of the previous jackpot winning) is referred to. It is configured to be done. As a result, a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage can be provided as probabilistic states. That is, it is possible to form a probability-changing state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and a probability-changing state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific gaming state (latent state), at least until a specific number of times (3 times) is won in the jackpot, the right It is configured to be able to form a more advantageous situation in which the pachinko game state continues. More specifically, in the 23rd embodiment, as the right-handed game state, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, that is, the latent state, the probability change state A, and the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. It is configured to provide four types of gaming states, a probabilistic state B that is easily generated. Then, since the latent probability state and the probable change state A and B are configured to continue until the next big hit (they are not changed to another game state), the latent probability state and the probable change state A, In the probability change state B and the probability change state B, the next jackpot winning is substantially confirmed (committed). Further, in the 23rd embodiment, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability variation state of the special symbol is always set, and when the big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured so that a low probability state of a special symbol can be set only for. In other words, in the probability change state A and the latent state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, not only the next jackpot is confirmed, but also the right-handed game that continues until the next jackpot as the game state after the end of the next jackpot. It is also determined that the state (any of the probability change state A, the probability change state B, and the latent probability state) is set. Then, when a big hit occurs in the latent state, either the latent state or the probability change state A is set in the right-handed game state, and when the big hit occurs in the probability change state A, the latent state in the right-handed game state is set. Alternatively, either the probabilistic state B is set. With these configurations, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot shifts to the latent state, it does not shift to the time saving state unless it passes through at least the probable change state A and the probable change state B, so that the latent state, the probable change state A, And, in each of the probabilistic state B, the jackpot can be won at least once. Therefore, it is possible to realize an extremely entertaining game, in which at least three more jackpots are won at the time of transition to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, in the probability variation state A and the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is uniformly set to 180 seconds to form a gaming state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In the probabilistic state B, the variation time of the second special symbol is uniformly set to 180 seconds to form a gaming state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation time can be set arbitrarily. For example, a variation time such as 10 hours or 100 hours may be set as the variation time of the special symbol on the side where the lottery is difficult to be executed so that the lottery result cannot be confirmed substantially. Even if it is configured in this way, if the lottery of the special symbol on the side where the lottery is easy to be executed hits and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special symbol on the side where the lottery is difficult to be executed is removed and forced by the symbol. Since it is stopped and displayed (the lottery result is discarded), it is possible to more reliably display only the special symbols on the side where the lottery is likely to be executed without affecting the game. In this case, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol on the side where the lottery is difficult to be executed may be set to a relatively short fluctuation time. In the time saving state, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state as the number of time saving times elapses (that is, without winning the jackpot). Therefore, when shifting to the normal state, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. If is in progress, the game may not be possible until the remaining fluctuation time elapses. Therefore, in the time saving state, by setting a relatively short fluctuation time such as 300 seconds instead of a fluctuation time where it is impossible to confirm the lottery result such as 10 hours, a long period after the number of time reductions elapses. , It is possible to suppress a problem that makes the game impossible. In addition, after setting the type of special symbol that is easy to execute the lottery in the time saving state to the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the time saving state is substantially confirmed such as 10 hours or 100 hours. It may be set to a time when it becomes difficult to do so. In this case, since the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed immediately after the transition to the normal state, the lottery of the special symbol on the side where the lottery is difficult to be executed without affecting the game in the normal state is performed at all. Can be configured to be more difficult to implement.

In the 23rd embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the probability change state B, the game shifts to the time saving state in which the right-handed game state can be ended. However, even when the jackpot is won in the probability change state B, the jackpot is always won. , The right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit may be set. That is, in the 23rd embodiment, when the game shifts to the latent state, the jackpot is won at least once in the three gaming states of the latent state, the probable change state A, and the probable change state B. At the time of transition to the latent state, the three jackpots are substantially fixed, but the four jackpots may be fixed. More specifically, as a right-handed game state, a normal state B in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short (see the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4) is provided, and a normal jackpot is obtained in the probability variation state B. If (big hit B23) is won, the configuration may be such that the state shifts to the normal state B instead of the time saving state. Then, it may be configured to shift to the normal state or the time saving state in a part of the case where the jackpot is won in the normal state B. With such a configuration, it is possible to remarkably improve the interest of the player when the state shifts to the latent state.

In the 23rd embodiment, the display mode is standardized so that the probabilistic state A and the probable change state B are difficult to distinguish. However, instead of or in addition to this, the probable change state A and the time saving state are different. The display mode may be standardized so as to be difficult to distinguish. That is, there are two types of gaming states in which the normal electric accessory ra is frequently released by right-handed hitting, and the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially executed (that is, the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory). By setting a common production mode (a state in which it is impossible (difficult) to distinguish from the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, etc.), the jackpot has been confirmed at least twice, or the number of time reductions has elapsed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the state shifts to the normal state. Conversely, when the number of lottery times exceeds 50 times (the number of time reductions when the time reduction state is set) while the common production mode is set, at least two big hits are reserved. Since it is possible for the player to easily understand that, especially when a common production mode is set, the player's expectation becomes higher as the number of lottery after the big hit approaches 50 times. Can be greatly enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, the probability change state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big hit, but the probability change state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state of the special symbol by a specific number of lottery. By doing so, new playability is created. Specifically, for example, by setting the number of continuations of the probabilistic state of the special symbol (the number of lottery of the special symbol) set at the end of the jackpot to 40 times, and setting the number of time reductions to 50 times, 40 times. If you can't win the jackpot within the time, you can realize the playability that will be set to the time saving state. Furthermore, when the probability change state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, the probability change state of the special symbol ends first (shifts to the low probability state) by providing a variation in the number of time reductions. ), Only the time saving state of the normal symbol continues (probability change state A or probability change state B directly shifts to the time saving state), or the time saving state of the normal symbol ends first (shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol). ), The situation where only the probability change state of the special symbol continues (the probability change state A or the probability change state B directly shifts to the latent probability state), or the number of time reductions ends at the same time as the probability change count ends and the normal state shifts directly. Various situations such as situations can be established. Therefore, when the probabilistic state A or the probabilistic state B is set, a big hit is won during the probabilistic state, or only the time saving state of the normal symbol ends first and the game shifts to the latent state. It is possible to expect a state transition according to the preference of each person. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 22nd and 23rd embodiments described above, the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of possession of the superhuman drug 802a is executed only during the jackpot effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the latent state or the probabilistic state A in the 23rd embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of possession of the superhuman drug 802a may be executed. More specifically, for example, in the latent state or the probability change state A, the number of displayed superhuman drugs 802a is less than the number of remaining advantageous states (right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit) that is actually guaranteed. In this case, each time the special symbol lottery is executed, an effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/50) may be executed. With this configuration, even if the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a during the jackpot is not executed, the game is expected to be added after the transition to the right-handed game state. Since it can be performed, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, in this case, the probability of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a may be different depending on the lottery result. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is a big hit (or when it is determined by pre-reading that the big hit is included in the hold), it is out of the case (or the big hit is not included in the hold). It is configured to increase the execution probability of the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a (for example, set the probability to 1/3 in the case of a big hit and 1/50 in the case of a miss) than when it is determined by look-ahead). You may. With this configuration, it can be expected that a big hit will be obtained when the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a is executed as the variable effect. On the contrary, in the case of a big hit (or when it is determined by pre-reading that the big hit is included in the hold), the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a may be difficult to be executed. With this configuration, when a production with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, a reach production) is executed without the production of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a, the expectation for the production with a relatively high expectation is achieved. It can make it hard to lose the feeling. In addition, even when the display number of the superhuman drug 802a in the latent state or the probability change state A matches the number of remaining advantageous states (right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit) that is actually guaranteed, Under predetermined conditions, an effect of additionally acquiring the superhuman drug 802a may be executed. More specifically, for example, a jackpot of a type that loops in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot C22 in a latent state in the 22nd embodiment) or a jackpot of a type in which the number of guarantees of an advantageous state increases (for example, the 22nd). When it is determined by pre-reading that the start winning prize corresponding to the jackpot A22) in the probabilistic state in the embodiment is newly detected, the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a from the time of the determination to the end of the hit fluctuation. May be configured to set. With this configuration, it is possible to display a larger number of superhuman drugs 802a, so that the larger the number of superhuman drugs 802a displayed, the more pleasing the player can be. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 22nd embodiment and the 23rd embodiment described above, the guaranteed number (stock number) in which an advantageous state (right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit) is set after the end of the big hit is suggested by the number of possessions of the superhuman drug 802a. Although it was composed, it is not limited to this. For example, the superhuman drug 802a may be configured to suggest the remaining number of jackpots until the transition to a time-saving state (a right-handed gaming state that may be terminated without winning the jackpot). In this case, since it is possible to display one more superhuman drug 802a, a larger number of superhuman drugs 802a can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 22nd and 23rd embodiments described above, the display number of the superhuman drug 802a is set up to the minimum guaranteed number of times that an advantageous state (right-handed game state that continues until the next big hit) is set after the end of the big hit. However, the effect of acquiring the superhuman drug 802a beyond the minimum guaranteed number of times may be made feasible. In this case, by executing the effect of using the superhuman drug 802a during the right-handed game state, until the next big hit is started (that is, during the right-handed game state in which the next big hit is won). It may be configured to match the minimum guaranteed number of times. As a method of using the superhuman drug 802a, for example, a river or a valley without a bridge appears in the direction of travel of the adventurer character 801 and jumps over the river or valley by improving the physical ability with the superhuman drug 802a. Execute the production, etc.

In the 22nd embodiment and the 23rd embodiment described above, the production in which the adventurer character 801 and the monster character 811 battle is configured to start from the first round of the jackpot, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the next round in which the probabilistic switch 1650e3 can pass is completed, or a battle effect may be executed during the ending period of the jackpot. With this configuration, if V prize does not occur despite the probability variation jackpot, or if irregular itself such as V prize occurs despite normal jackpot, the irregular itself It is possible to set the production content that reflects. Therefore, a more preferable production mode can be realized.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 475 to 487. In the 23rd embodiment described above, there are two types of probabilistic states: a probabilistic state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is easily executed, and a probabilistic state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed. By providing the configuration, five types of gaming states are realized, and a deeper and more innovative game performance is realized.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment, as the time saving state, the time saving state A in which the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is easily executed and the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage are executed. The configuration is such that a time saving state B, which is easily generated, is provided. That is, two types of time saving states are provided: a time saving state A having a low degree of advantage and a time saving state B having a high degree of advantage. Then, the time saving state B is configured to be more difficult to shift than the time saving state A. More specifically, the time-saving state A is usually configured to shift only by winning a jackpot, while in order to shift to the time-saving state B, first shift to the probabilistic state and then the probabilistic change. By repeatedly winning the probabilistic jackpot in the state, and further winning the probabilistic jackpot in the state where the continuous setting number of the probabilistic change state (probability change limit number) reaches the predetermined upper limit value (5 times), the probabilistic change state is changed. Instead of being set, the time saving state B is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to give greater joy to the player when the transition to the time saving state B, which is difficult to shift, is made. In the 24th embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained, the probability variation jackpot is obtained at a rate of 10% and the normal jackpot is obtained at a rate of 90%, while the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol. In that case, the probability variation jackpot is 90%, and the normal jackpot is 10%. Therefore, it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic state in the normal state or the time saving state A where the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a relatively large amount of joy just by shifting to the probabilistic state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. , The configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 23rd embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 475, a method of shifting the gaming state in the 24th embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 475, four gaming states are provided in the 24th embodiment. That is, it is set to the normal state (see the upper part of FIG. 475) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. The probabilistic state (see the middle left side of FIG. 475), the time saving state A set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (see the middle right side of FIG. 475), and the low probability state of the special symbol as well. Four gaming states are provided: a time saving state B (see the lower left side of FIG. 475), which is set as a time saving state of a normal symbol. Here, the normal state is a game state in which the game is advanced mainly by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed. On the other hand, the probabilistic state is a gaming state in which the game is advanced mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed striking, and the time saving state A is the gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed by right-handing. It is a game state in which the game progresses, and the time saving state B is a game state in which the game progresses mainly by executing a lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed striking. The method of making the type of the special symbol that is easy to be executed different between the time saving state A and the time saving state B is the same as that of the 23rd embodiment described above, and is realized by making the referenced variation pattern table different.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 475, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another gaming state only when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 475, if the jackpot A24 is won at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, if the jackpot B24 is won at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is a right-handed gaming state in which the degree of advantage is lower than the probability change state. It is set to the time saving state A which is. That is, when a big hit is won in the normal state, it is rare (10% ratio) to directly shift to the probabilistic state, and in most cases, it shifts to the time saving state A.

Further, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 475, the time saving state A shifts to another state not only when the jackpot is won but also when the number of time saving times has elapsed. More specifically, as shown on the right side of the middle row of FIG. 475, if the jackpot A24, which is won at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state A, is won, after the jackpot ends. The gaming state is set to an advantageous probabilistic state. On the other hand, if the jackpot cannot be won during the time reduction number set in the time reduction state A and the time reduction number elapses, the game state is set to the normal state. On the other hand, if the jackpot B24, which is won at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state A, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state A again. To. For this reason, in the game in the time saving state A, it is possible to face the game with the spirit of "hit a few hits" by continuing to win the jackpot during the time saving state and aiming for the jackpot A24 at a rate of 10%. In the 24th embodiment, when the jackpot B24 is won, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the 24th embodiment is about 1 / 71.4, the ratio of winning the jackpot again by the special symbol lottery within 100 times (within the number of time reductions) is about 75.6. %. Therefore, since it is expected that the jackpot will be won about 4 times during the time saving state, it is possible to realize the playability that is expected to win the jackpot A24 at a rate of 10% during the 4 times.

Further, as shown on the left side of the middle stage of FIG. 475, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown on the left side of the middle row of FIG. 475, the jackpot C24 or jackpot D24 (that is, the probability variation jackpot) that wins at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state. If the player wins the game and the probability variation limit is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B. In addition, if the jackpot E24 is won at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is in the time saving state A where the degree of advantage is relatively low. Set. On the other hand, in the probability variation state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot C24 or jackpot D24 (that is, the probability variation jackpot) is won at a rate of 90%, and the probability variation limit is reached. If not, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability change state again (loops the probability change state). Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state loops at a high rate each time a big hit is made, so that the probability change limit number is reached at a realistic rate. More specifically, by winning 90% of the probability variation jackpots in succession over 5 jackpots, the time saving state B is entered, so that the probability variation limit number is reached when the probability variation state is entered. The rate at which the time saving state B is set is about 59% (90% to the 5th power).

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 475, the time saving state B shifts to another gaming state not only when the jackpot is won but also when the number of time saving times has elapsed. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 475, when the jackpot C24 and D24 (probability variation jackpot) are won at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state B. , The game state after the big hit is set to an advantageous probability change state. In addition, if the jackpot E24 is won at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state B, the gaming state after the jackpot ends becomes the time saving state A having a relatively low degree of advantage. Set. On the other hand, if the jackpot cannot be won during the time reduction number set in the time reduction state B and the time reduction number elapses, the game state is set to the normal state. Therefore, in the game in the time saving state B, by winning the big hit within the time saving number of times, the state returns to the almost probable change state, so that it is possible to realize the game property that strongly expects the big hit within the time saving number of times. .. Since the probability variation limit number is reset when the time saving state B is entered, by returning to the probability variation state, the extremely advantageous state in which the jackpot and the probability variation state loop at a rate of 90% can be enjoyed again. Can be done. When the time saving state B is set, 100 times is always set as the time saving number. Therefore, as described above, the jackpot is won at a rate of about 75.6% during the time reduction of 100 times, and 90% of the time shifts to the probabilistic state. That is, since the time saving state B shifts to the probabilistic state at a rate of about 68% (75.6% × 90%), it is an extremely advantageous state as compared with the time saving state A.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 476 to 479, a characteristic effect mode in the 24th embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 476, an example of an effect mode executed in the third symbol display device 81 when a big hit is won in the normal state and the time saving state A will be described. As shown in FIG. 476 (a), when the jackpot is won in the normal state and the time saving state A, the adventurer character 801 searches in the cave in the main display area Dm. In addition, the characters "Find the enemy !!" are displayed in the display area HR6. Further, the characters "Battle RUSH rushes into enemy discovery !?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that if the character 811 of the enemy monster is found, it will be an advantageous development for the player. After these display contents are displayed, the adventurer character 801 selects either the right door RG provided in the right passage in the cave or the left door LG provided in the left passage. Then, the effect of opening one of the selected doors is executed. In the 24th embodiment, it is suggested that the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change state (battle RUSH) by the appearance of the monster character 811 from the door selected by the adventurer character 801 (notification). However, if the monster character 811 does not appear, it is configured to suggest (notify) that the probability change state is not set (the time saving state A is set).

FIG. 476 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the monster character 811 appears from the door selected by the adventurer character 801 (that is, when the character 811 shifts to the probabilistic state). When the effect of discovering the monster character 811 is executed, the display mode in which the monster character 811 pops out from the door is set, and the characters "discovery !!" are displayed in the display area HR6. In addition, the characters "Battle RUSH confirmed !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state shifts to the probability change state (battle RUSH) after the end of the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 477 and 478, an effect mode when a jackpot is won in a probabilistic state will be described. As described above, in the probability variation state, within the range of the probability variation limit number of times, the probability variation state and the jackpot loop at a ratio of 90% to form an extremely advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the probabilistic state, the player is informed by the big hit effect whether or not the probabilistic state continues and the remaining number of times until the probability change limit is reached.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 477 (a), when the jackpot is won in the probabilistic state, the adventurer character 801 receives the attack from the monster character 811 with a shield in the main display area Dm. Shield. In addition, the characters "Endure the attack !!" are displayed in the display area HR6, and the characters "Battle RUSH continues if it can be endured !?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to easily understand that the adventurer character 801 withstands the attack from the monster character 811 and the probability change state (battle RUSH) is set again after the jackpot ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 477 (a), a durability gauge TG indicating the durability of the shield is displayed on the left side of the adventurer character 801. In the 24th embodiment, the number of gauges of the durability gauge TG suggests the remaining number of times until the probability variation limit number is reached.

FIG. 477 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the adventurer character 801 has withstood the attack of the monster character 811. As shown in FIG. 477 (b), when the monster character 811 has withstood the attack, the characters "Success !!" are displayed for the display area HR6, and the number of gauges of the durability gauge TG is 1. The effect of reducing the gauge is executed. In addition, the characters "Battle RUSH continue !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that an advantageous probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot. Further, by reducing the number of gauges of the durability gauge TG by one gauge, the player can easily understand that the remaining number of times up to the probability variation limit number is reduced by one.

On the other hand, FIG. 478 (a) shows a display mode in which a normal jackpot (big hit E24) is won in the probability variation state and the repetition of the probability variation state and the jackpot is completed (the time saving state A is set after the jackpot ends). It is a figure shown. As shown in FIG. 478 (a), when the jackpot E24 is won in the probabilistic state, the effect that the shield is destroyed without being able to withstand the attack of the monster character 811 is executed, and the durability gauge TG The effect that the number of gauges becomes 0 at once is executed. In addition, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed for the display area HR6. Further, the characters "Battle RUSH finished ..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state A.

FIG. 478 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the jackpot game when the probability variation limit number of times is reached. As shown in FIG. 478 (b), when the probability variation limit number is reached (the probability variation jackpot winning in the probability variation state is repeated 5 times), the effect of enduring the attack received from the monster character 811 is executed. After that, the effect that the monster character 811 withdraws is executed. In addition, the number of gauges of the durability gauge TG is updated to the remaining 1 gauge. In addition, the characters "enemy, temporary withdrawal !!" are displayed on the display area HR6. Further, the characters "Entering the durability UP zone !!" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the situation shifts to an advantageous situation different from the probabilistic state (that is, the shift to the time saving state B).

Next, with reference to FIG. 479, a display mode in the time saving state B (durability UP zone) will be described. In this time saving state B, for example, an effect of repairing the shield SG whose durability has decreased due to being continuously attacked by the monster character 811 is developed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 479 (a), in the main display area Dm, the third symbol (right symbol RD, middle symbol CD, left symbol LD) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. The variable display mode is displayed, and on the back side of the third symbol, the adventurer character 801 repairs the damaged shield SG with a tongue. In addition, the remaining number of time reductions is displayed in the display area HR6. Further, the characters "Repair the shield !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state B, as shown in FIG. 479 (b), the shield SG is successfully repaired and the number of gauges of the durability gauge TG is restored to the maximum value. Along with the execution of the effect, the third symbols imitating the same number are aligned and stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "Repair succeeded !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the battle RUSH is ready in which the production mode that withstands the attack of the monster character 811 is developed by the shield.

In the jackpot effect in the time saving state B, the effect mode (see FIG. 476) of searching for the monster character 811 in the cave is executed as in the jackpot effect in the normal state and the time saving state A. However, in the time saving state B, since the probability change jackpot is at an extremely high rate of 90% when the jackpot is won, the battle RUSH is significantly entered (the probability change state is set) compared to the normal state and the time saving state A. Expectations are high. Therefore, in the time saving state B, the expectation of entering the battle RUSH can be greatly increased when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. When the number of time reductions elapses in the time reduction state B to shift to the normal state, the effect of failing to repair the shield SG is executed, and the end of the time reduction state B is notified.

In this way, in the 24th embodiment, a series of story-like production modes are executed from the time when the monster character 811 is found by winning the probabilistic jackpot to the transition to the time saving state A. It has a structure. That is, while the probability change state and the probability change jackpot are repeated (looping), the probability change state changes depending on whether or not the attack of the monster character 811 discovered at the time of transition to the probability change state can be withstood. An effect mode is executed to notify whether the player loops or shifts to the time saving state A (falls), wins the probability change jackpot in the probability change state, and after reaching the probability change limit number, the monster character 811 The production of repairing the shield SG damaged by the battle is executed, the jackpot winning is notified by successfully repairing the shield SG, and by discovering the monster character 811 again during the jackpot, it will return to the probable state. Indicates to rush. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state B set after reaching the probabilistic limit number of times in the probabilistic state, it is possible to realize a series of production modes with a story, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. it can.

<Electrical configuration in the 24th embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 480 (a). FIG. 480 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 480 (a), the ROM 202 in the 24th embodiment has the specified contents of the first random number table 202a and the first hit type selection table with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 23rd embodiment described above. There is a difference in that the specified contents of 202b, the specified contents of the time saving table 202e, and the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202ta are partially changed.

First, the first random number table 202a in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 480 (b). FIG. 480 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 480 (b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the 24th embodiment, "0 to 13" are set as random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol. 14 random numbers (counter values) are defined, and 15 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 14" are determined as jackpots in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. Counter value) is specified.

Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 999" that the first random number counter C1 can take, the random number values (counter values) that are determined to be big hits in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol. Since the number is 14 and 15, respectively, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the special symbol is about 1 / 71.4 (14/1000), and the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is about 1 / 66.7 (15/1000).

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 480 (c). FIG. 480 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the 24th embodiment. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table that is referred to for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

As shown in FIG. 480 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the 24th embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, "big hit A24" and "big hit B24", as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Is stipulated. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three types of jackpot types of "big hit C24" to "big hit E24" are defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 480 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0-9", the jackpot type is " "Big hit A24" is defined in association with each other. This "big hit A24" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to one round, and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit A24", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit becomes the most advantageous probability change state for the player. Set. Therefore, "big hit A24" is the most advantageous big hit type for the player in terms of the game state after the big hit, but since there is only one round, the degree of advantage is low in terms of the number of prize balls to be paid out. It is a jackpot type. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit A24" is 10 of "0 to 9". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit A24" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 480 (c), "big hit B24" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 99". This "big hit B24" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to one round, and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the big hit. After the end of this "big hit B24", it is basically set to the time saving state A (low probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) (unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 1650e3). To. That is, it is set to a gaming state in which the degree of advantage is significantly lower than that of the probability change state. Therefore, the "big hit B24" is a big hit type having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. In addition, it is a jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage in terms of the number of jackpot rounds. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit B24" is 90 of "10 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B24" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol is 90% (90/100).

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "big hit C24" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". This "big hit C24" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of "big hit C24", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the execution period), the probability change state most advantageous to the player (the probability change state of the special symbol, and the probability change state of the special symbol) It is set to the normal state of the normal symbol). Therefore, the "big hit C24" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends and the number of rounds. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit C24" is 25 of "0 to 24". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C24" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 25% (25/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 89", "big hit D24" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit D24" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 2 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 1650e3 to pass through during the jackpot. In addition, after the end of "big hit D24", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the execution period), the probability change state advantageous to the player (probability change state of special symbol, and normal). It is set to the time saving state of the symbol). Therefore, the "big hit D24" has the highest degree of advantage in terms of the gaming state after the big hit ends. Also, in terms of the number of rounds, it will be advantageous to the player next to "Big hit C24". Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit D24" is 65 of "25 to 89". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D24" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 65% (65/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit E24" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit E24" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 2 and the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 1650e3 during the big hit. After the end of this "big hit E24", it is basically set to the time saving state A (low probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 1650e3. To. That is, it is set to a gaming state in which the degree of advantage is significantly lower than that of the probability change state. Therefore, "big hit E24" is a big hit type having the lowest degree of advantage for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the big hit. In addition, in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot, it is the jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage among the jackpots of the second special symbol. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit E24" is 10 of "90 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D24" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the time saving state A having a low degree of advantage is set at a rate of 90%, while the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. In the case of a big hit, it is configured so that an advantageous probability change state is set at a rate of 90%. As a result, the degree of advantage between the game state (normal state, time saving state A) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed and the game state (probability change state, time saving state A) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Since the difference can be increased, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the state will shift to the probabilistic state or the time saving state B. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 481. The time reduction table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting the number of time reductions at the end of the jackpot. FIG. 481 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in the 24th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 481, the time saving table 202e in the 24th embodiment is associated with the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the presence / absence of V winning during the jackpot, and the presence / absence of reaching the probability variation limit. , The number of time reductions to be set is specified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 481, when the jackpot type is jackpot A24 (1 round probability variation jackpot), V prize (passage of probability variation switch 1650e3) during jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of jackpot winning. ) Is set as the number of time reductions of 65535 times, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. If the V prize is detected and the probability variation limit number is reached, 100 times is set as the time reduction number.

Further, as shown in FIG. 481, when the jackpot type is jackpot B24 (1 round normal jackpot), V winning (passing of the probability change switch 1650e3) is detected during the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. If so, 0 times is set as the time reduction number regardless of whether or not the limit number of times is reached, while 100 times is set as the time reduction number if V winning is not detected. As described above, in the jackpot B24, since the opening / closing door 1650f1 is not opened (it remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, basically, no V prize is generated and a special symbol is used. The low probability state of is set, and the time saving state A of 100 times of time saving is set. That is, when the jackpot B24 is won, basically, the time saving state A in which the number of time saving times is 100 times is set. As mentioned above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is about 1 / 71.4, so the ratio of winning the jackpot during 100 time reductions is about 75.6%. Is.

When the jackpot B24 is won and a V prize is detected, the time reduction is set to 0 because it is difficult to generate a V prize in the jackpot B24 unless some kind of cheating is performed. Is. When a V prize occurs in the jackpot B24, by setting the number of time reductions to 0 and shifting to the latent state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state, but as in the normal state, it is mainly the first by hitting left. Since the disadvantageous state in which it is necessary to proceed with the game is set by the lottery of the special symbol, it is possible to reduce the merit of generating the V prize even if the cheating is committed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities. It should be noted that the latent state is a gaming state that shifts only when a V prize is generated despite a normal big hit due to cheating. That is, the latent state in the 24th embodiment is positioned as a penalty state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 481, when the jackpot type is jackpot C24 (4 round probability variation jackpot) or jackpot D24 (2 round probability variation jackpot), the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state (or penalty state). In a certain latent state), 0 times is set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether V winning (passing of the probability change switch 1650e3) is detected during the jackpot. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a gaming state other than the normal state (probability change state, time saving state A, or time saving state B), V winning (passing the probability change switch 1650e3) is detected during the jackpot. While 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot C24 or D24, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game is performed. Unless the game is played in, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to a probabilistic state. That is, if the jackpots C24 and D24 are won in the normal state and the latent state, the latent probability state that substantially continues until the next big hit is set, while if the jackpots C24 and D24 are won in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, The most advantageous probabilistic state for the player is set. It should be noted that the configuration in which the number of time reductions is set to 0 when the jackpots C24 and D24 are won in the normal state or the latent state, which is the left-handed game state, is the first by right-handed in spite of the left-handed game state. 2 This is to suppress an irregular game method in which a lottery of special symbols is executed. That is, when the second special symbol lottery is executed by right-handing in the left-handed game state, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the penalty state is the latent state (when V winning occurs) or normal. By adopting a configuration that shifts to the state (when V winning is not generated), it is possible to eliminate the merit of performing a right-handed hit in the left-handed game state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the game progresses by right-handed in the left-handed game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 481, when the jackpot type is jackpot E24 (two rounds normal jackpot), if the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state (or the latent state which is a penalty state), the jackpot 0 times is set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not V winning (passing of the probability change switch 1650e3) is detected. This is the same as the case where the jackpots C24 and D24 are won, and the purpose is to suppress the irregular game method of right-handed in the left-handed game state. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the probability change state, the time reduction state A, or the time reduction state B, the time reduction is 65535 times (limit) by detecting V winning (passing the probability change switch 1650e3) during the jackpot. (When not reached) or 100 times (when the limit is reached) is set. On the other hand, if V winning is not detected, 50 times is set as the number of time reductions. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot E24, the opening / closing door 1650f1 is not opened during the period when the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed, so that V prize is basically not generated and the game state after the jackpot ends is shortened. Set to state. Therefore, the jackpot E24 is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, among the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ta according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 482. As shown in FIG. 482, this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta selects a fluctuation pattern for a combination of the currently set gaming state and whether or not the probability variation limit number of times has been reached when the previous jackpot was won. The type of data table for this purpose (one of the normal table 202sd1, the substantial special figure 1 game table 202td3, and the substantial special figure 2 game table 202td4) is defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482, for the normal state (and the latent state which is a penalty state), the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of whether or not the limit is reached at the time of the previous jackpot winning. As the type of the variation pattern table for this purpose, the normal table 202sd1 is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the normal state and the latent state which is the penalty state, the normal table 202sd1 is always referred to and the variation pattern is selected.

In addition, for the time saving state, for the situation where the probability variation limit number has been reached at the time of the previous jackpot winning, the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4 is associated as the type of the variation pattern table. .. On the other hand, for the situation where the probability variation limit number has not been reached at the time of the previous jackpot winning, the substantial special figure 1 game table 202td3 is associated with the type of the variation pattern table. Therefore, the time saving state set after reaching the probability variation limit number is the time saving state B in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, while the time saving state set without reaching the probability variation limit number is The time saving state A is set so that the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 482, for the probabilistic state, the actual special figure 2 is used as the type of the fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation pattern regardless of whether or not the limit is reached at the time of the previous jackpot winning. The game table 202td4 is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the probabilistic state, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table is made different depending on whether the time saving state is set by reaching the probability variation limit number of times or the time saving state is set by the normal jackpot. As a result, the time saving state A in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the time saving state B in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed are formed in a time saving state in which the degree of advantage is different. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 483. FIG. 483 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 483, the RAM 203 in the 24th embodiment has a limit counter 203na and a limit arrival flag with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 457) of the RAM 203 in the 23rd embodiment (and the 22nd embodiment) described above. The difference is that 203nd and the variation pattern scenario storage area 203nd are added.

The limit counter 203na is a counter for measuring the number of times a probability variation jackpot is continuously won in a special symbol lottery, and when the probability variation jackpot is won, a value is added by 1. Specifically, when it is determined in the jackpot end processing 24 (see FIG. 485) that the probability variation setting flag 203zs is set to ON (that is, a specific area provided in the V winning device 1650 during the jackpot game) (that is, When the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1650e3)), the value is added by 1 (see S17103 in FIG. 485). Then, it is referred to when determining whether the number of times the probability variation jackpot is continuously executed reaches the limit number of times (5 times) (see S17105 in FIG. 485). Further, in the jackpot end processing 24 (see FIG. 485), when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is not set to ON (S17101: No in FIG. 485), the probability variation state is not continuously set. , The value of the limit counter 203na is reset to 0 (see S17102 in FIG. 485). Further, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203na has reached the limit number of times (5 times) (S17105: Yes in FIG. 485), the value of the limit counter 203na is reset to 0 (see S17102 in FIG. 485). ..

In the 24th embodiment, when the game ball passes through the specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) provided in the V winning device 1650 during the big hit game, the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed. Therefore, the process of updating the value of the limit counter 203na is configured to be executed by the jackpot end process 24 (see FIG. 485), but the value of the limit counter 203na is updated at a timing other than this. In the winning process of determining whether or not the game ball has passed to a specific area (probability change switch 1650e3) provided in the V winning device 1650, the game ball presses the probability change switch 1650e3. It may be configured to update the value of the limit counter 203na when it is determined that the passage has passed. Further, for example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which it is determined whether or not the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed according to the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the value of the limit counter 203na. The process of updating may be configured to be executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, the timing of executing the special symbol variation indicating the jackpot winning, or the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol variation.

In this way, by executing the process of updating the value of the limit counter 203na at a stage before the game state is actually set, it is possible to determine the game state set after the jackpot game ends in advance. It becomes. Therefore, by transmitting a command for indicating the confirmed game state to the voice lamp control device 113, even if the game state set after the jackpot game ends is changed based on whether or not the limit is reached, it is actually It is possible to facilitate the execution of the effect mode corresponding to the game state set in (the effect mode of the variation display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation and the effect mode of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game). it can.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) is set, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit is won. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the process of updating the value of the limit counter 203na every time the jackpot game is executed. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol is executed 80 times after the jackpot game is completed. When a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that are set only for a predetermined period or a high-probability state of a special symbol is set, the high-probability state of the special symbol is changed to a low-probability state each time the predetermined condition is satisfied. If the pachinko machine 10 has a game property that the high probability state of the special symbol ends without going through the big hit winning, such as the pachinko machine 10 of the specification for executing the transition lottery for making the game, the big hit game is won. The process of determining the game state in the above is executed, and only when the high probability state of the special symbol is set at the time of winning the big hit game, the process of whether or not to update the value of the limit counter 203na is executed, and at the time of winning the big hit game. When the high probability state of the special symbol is not set, it may be configured to execute the process of resetting the value of the limit counter 203na to 0.

Further, in the 24th embodiment, a limit function is provided to prevent the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol from being set excessively continuously, but the limit function is not limited to this, for example. A limit function may be provided in order to prevent the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol from being set excessively continuously. In this case, a process of determining whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the time of winning the jackpot and a process of determining whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game is provided are provided to determine whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (was set) before and after the game, the value of the limit counter 203na may be updated.

The limit arrival flag 203nb is a flag for indicating that the number of times the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) is continuously set has reached the upper limit number (probability variation limit number), and is the upper limit number (limit number of times). ) Is reached, it is set to on. The limit arrival flag 203nb is set when it is determined in the jackpot end processing 24 (see FIG. 485) that the number of consecutive executions of the probability variation jackpot has reached the limit number of times (5 times) (FIG. 485). S17105: Yes) It is set to on, and the number of time reduction grants and the fluctuation pattern scenario are determined according to the setting status (on, off) of the limit arrival flag 203nb (see S17108 and S17131 in FIG. 485). Then, it is set to off at the time of big hit winning (timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit winning).

The variation pattern scenario storage area 203nd is a storage area for storing data indicating the variation pattern scenario. At the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is read out according to the fluctuation pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203nd. At the end of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203nd stores data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern scenario determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta (see S17113 in FIG. 485).

Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 484. FIG. 484 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 484, in the RAM 223 in the 24th embodiment, the superhuman drug flag 223sa is deleted with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 458) of the RAM 223 in the 23rd embodiment (and the 22nd embodiment) described above. It differs in that it is. It is also different in that the slave limit counter 223ua is added.

The slave limit counter 223ua is a counter for counting the number of consecutive probable change states on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and each time a limit number command indicating the value of the limit counter 203ua notified from the main control device 110 is received. , It is updated in synchronization with the value of the limit counter 203ua of the main control device 110. With this slave limit counter 223ua, the number of consecutive probable change states can be accurately grasped even on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 485. In the 24th embodiment, the jackpot end processing 24 (S13011) is executed only in place of the jackpot end processing 22 (see FIG. 468) for the 23rd embodiment (and the 22nd embodiment) described above. It's different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 485 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 24 (S13011) in the 24th embodiment. The jackpot end process 24 (S13011) in the 24th embodiment is a process for making various settings at the end of the jackpot, similar to the jackpot end process 22 (see FIG. 468) of the 22nd embodiment described above.

Of the jackpot end processing 24 (S13011), in each of the processes S17101, S17106, S17109, S17110, S17114, and S17115, the jackpot end processing 22 (FIGS. 468, S13001) of the 23rd embodiment (and the 22nd embodiment), respectively. ) S17101, S17106, S17109, S17110, S17114, and S17115, the same processes as those of S17101, S17106, and S17115 are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 24 (S13011) in the 24th embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S17101 that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is not on (that is, is off) (S17101: No), the limit counter The value of 203na is set to 0 (S17102), and the process proceeds to the process of S17108. That is, the process of resetting the probability variation limit number is performed.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 24 (see FIG. 485) in the 24th embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is ON in the processing of S17101 (S17101: Yes), the value of the limit counter 203na is set to 1. Is added and updated (S17103), and then the probability variation setting flag 203zzs is set to off (S17104). When the processing of S17104 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203na after addition by the processing of S17103 is 5 (that is, whether the probability variation limit number has been reached) (S17105), and the limit after addition is determined. When it is determined that the value of the counter 203na is 5 (that is, the probability variation limit number has been reached) (S17105: Yes), the limit arrival flag 203nb is set to ON (S17107), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S17102 processing. To do. That is, since the process of S17106 that turns on the probability change flag 203 nc is not executed, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state B. On the other hand, in the processing of S17105, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203na after addition is not 5 (a value of 4 or less) (S17105: No), the probability variation flag 203nc is set to ON (S17106). The process proceeds to S17108.

In the process of S17108, the number of time reductions corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203cf, and the state of the limit arrival flag 203nb is read from the time reduction table 202e (see FIG. 481) (S17108). ), Then, the processes of S17109 and S17110 are executed, and the state commands corresponding to the game state after the big hit and the value of the limit counter 203na are set (S17111).

Next, the variation pattern scenario is specified according to the game state after the end of the jackpot and the state of the limit arrival flag 203nb (S17131), and the data indicating the specified variation pattern scenario is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203nd (S17131). S17113). Next, a limit number of times command indicating the value of the limit counter 203na is set (S17132), the processes of S17114 and S17115 are executed, and then this process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing 24 (see FIG. 485), the value of the limit counter 203na is updated according to the state of the probability variation setting flag 203zs (whether or not the probability variation switch 1650e3 is passed during the execution of the jackpot game). Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the probability variation limit has been reached. Therefore, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, the advantageous time saving state B can be surely set.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 and 487, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment is the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment (and the 22nd embodiment) described above. Therefore, the jackpot start process 24 (S12341) is executed instead of the jackpot start process 22 (see FIG. 469), and the jackpot end process 24 (S12342) is executed instead of the jackpot end process 17 (see FIG. 390). It differs in that it does. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the jackpot start process 24 (S12341) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 486. FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot start processing 24 (S12341). The jackpot start process 24 (S12341) in the 24th embodiment is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process 22 (see FIG. 469) of the 23rd embodiment (and the 22nd embodiment) described above, and is a jackpot game. It is a process for setting the effect mode to be executed during.

Of the jackpot start processing 24 (S12341), in the processing of S12411, the same processing as the processing of S12411 of the jackpot start processing 22 (see FIG. 469) of the 23rd embodiment (and the 22nd embodiment) is executed. Detailed description will be omitted.

Further, in the jackpot start processing 24 (S12341) in the 24th embodiment, when the processing of S12411 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the gaming state specified in the processing of S12411 is a probabilistic state (S12421). When it is determined that the game state specified in the process of S12421 is not a probabilistic state (S12421: No), a jackpot effect mode corresponding to the game state and the jackpot type is set (S12422), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state specified in the process of S12421 is a probabilistic state (S12421: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S12423), and the current jackpot is determined. If it is determined that it is not a probabilistic jackpot (S12423: No), an effect mode for defeating the monster character 811 is set (S12424), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S12423, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S12423: Yes), the value of the slave limit counter 223ua is read (S12425), and the read value of the slave limit counter 223ua is 4. Whether or not it is determined (S12426).

In the process of S12426, when it is determined that the value of the read slave limit counter 223ua is not 4 (S12426: No), an effect mode in which the durability is reduced by 1 gauge is set (S12427), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the read slave limit counter 223ua is 4 (S12426: Yes), an effect mode (see FIG. 478 (b)) in which the monster character 811 temporarily withdraws is set (S12428). This process ends. It should be noted that the effect mode is switched depending on whether or not the slave limit counter 223ua is 4, when the timing for updating the limit counter 203na on the main control device 110 side is the end of the jackpot, and the main jackpot start process 24 (FIG. FIG. This is because it is in the state before the update at the time of execution (see 486). That is, when the value of the limit counter 203na is updated to 5 in the main controller 110 (the probability variation limit number is reached and the time saving state B is set), the probability variation jackpot is won and the probability variation jackpot starts. At times, the value of the limit counter 203na (and the slave limit counter 223ua) is 4, so if this condition is met (the probability variation limit is reached at the end of the jackpot), the monster character 811 temporarily withdraws at the start of the jackpot. While setting the effect mode (see FIG. 478 (b)), the effect mode in which the durability is reduced by 1 gauge when the condition is not satisfied is set. With this configuration, it is possible to notify (suggest) the player that the time saving state B is set before the probability variation limit is actually reached, so that the player's game can be played. You can improve your interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 487, the jackpot end time process 24 (S12342) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th embodiment will be described. FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 24 (S12342). The jackpot end process 24 (S12342) in the 24th embodiment is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process 17 (see FIG. 390) of the 23rd embodiment (and the 17th embodiment) described above.

In the jackpot end processing 24 (S12342), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect is an effect mode in which the discovery of the monster character 811 fails (S12461). If it is determined that the jackpot effect is an effect mode in which the discovery of the monster character 811 fails (S12461: Yes), the process proceeds to S12464, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S12461, if it is determined that the jackpot effect is not an effect mode in which the discovery of the monster character 811 fails (S12461: No), then the jackpot effect is an effect mode in which the monster character 811 is defeated. Whether or not it is determined (S12462). If it is determined that the jackpot effect is an effect mode in which the monster character 811 is defeated (S12462: Yes), the process proceeds to S12464, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S12462, if it is determined that the jackpot effect is not a production mode that is defeated by the monster character 811 (S12462: No), notification of transition to the mode according to the effect result of the jackpot effect is set ( S12463), this process is terminated.

In the process of S12464, it is determined whether or not the value of the slave limit counter 223ua is larger than 0 (S12464). If it is determined that the value of the slave limit counter 223ua is 0 in the process of S12464 (S12464: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the slave limit counter 223ua is larger than 0 (S12464: Yes), the probability change switch 1650e3 is miraculously (luckily) pressed during the jackpot game even though the jackpot is normally won. It means that the game ball passes and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change state or the time saving state B. That is, the effect mode set assuming the normal jackpot at the start of the jackpot (the effect mode in which the discovery of the monster character 811 fails, or the effect mode in which the monster character 811 is defeated) and the game state actually set (probability change). It is in a state where there is a discrepancy between the state or the time saving state B). Therefore, in order to eliminate the discrepancy with the effect result, a revival effect is set to notify the transition to an advantageous gaming state. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the slave limit counter 223ua is 5 (S12465), and when it is determined that the value of the slave limit counter 223ua is 5 (S12465: Yes), the revival effect is produced. (S12466) sets the notification of entering the repair mode, and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S12465, if it is determined that the value of the slave limit counter 223ua is not 5 (S12465: No), the notification of the battle RUSH rush is set by the resurrection effect (S12467), and then this process is terminated. ..

By executing this jackpot end processing 24 (see FIG. 487), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to an advantageous gaming state (probability change state or time saving state B) even though the normal jackpot is won. When a situation occurs, it is possible to notify the transition to an advantageous gaming state by the revival effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a contradiction between the effect mode and the actually set gaming state, so that the effect mode can be set more preferably.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 24th embodiment, when a specific gaming state is set, the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state is changed according to the circumstances in which the specific gaming state is set. It has a structure. That is, when the normal jackpot is won and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state, the time saving state A in which the degree of advantage is relatively low is formed, while the probability change jackpot is won and the probability changes during the jackpot. When the game ball has passed through the switch 1650e3 and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state because the probability variation limit number has been reached, the time saving state B having a relatively high degree of advantage is formed. Was supposed to be. More specifically, in the time saving state A, it is controlled so that only the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a lower degree of advantage due to right-handed striking, is executed, while in the time saving state B, the degree of advantage is higher due to right-handed striking. It is configured to control so that only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give greater joy to the player when the transition to the time saving state B, which is relatively difficult to transition, is made.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, conventionally, it is widely known that one of a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage is set each time a predetermined setting condition is satisfied. There is. More specifically, for example, a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state set to a normal state of a normal symbol, a low probability state of a special symbol, and a time reduction state set to a time reduction state of a normal symbol, One of the high-probability states of the special symbol and the latent state set to the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol and the probabilistic state set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol. Is known to set. However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the number of combinations of the special symbol state (high probability state or low probability state) and the normal symbol state (normal state or time saving state) can be provided. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to diversify the playability.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment is configured so that the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state can be changed according to the opportunity for setting the specific gaming state (time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to form more gaming states having different degrees of advantage. Therefore, since the playability can be diversified, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 24th embodiment, it is switched between the time saving state A and the time saving state B whether the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is easy to be executed or the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is easy to be executed. Therefore, the configuration is such that the degree of advantage is variable, but the method of varying the degree of advantage is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, in the time saving state B, the degree of advantage may be changed by configuring so that the number of time saving times is larger than that in the time saving state A. Further, for example, the game efficiency may be improved (the average fluctuation time is shorter) in the time saving state B. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

<First modification of the 24th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the 24th embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 488 to 491. In the 24th embodiment described above, as the time saving state, a plurality of time saving states (time saving state A and time saving state B) having different degrees of advantage are provided, and the time saving state B is a gaming state in which it is most difficult to shift. It was configured and was configured to be more advantageous than the time saving state A. However, in terms of the degree of advantage, the probability change state has a higher degree of advantage (the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is easy to be executed continues until the next big hit, and the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit. (Probability is also high), so that the case where the probability variation jackpot is won in the time saving state B gives greater joy to the player than the time saving state B is set.

On the other hand, in the first modification, the right-handed game state is determined to continue until the next big hit is won when the time saving state B is entered. That is, the normal state that shifts when the number of time reductions elapses in the time saving state B is configured as the right-handed gaming state (normal state B). In addition, in the first modification, when the normal state B is entered, even if the normal jackpot is won, the time saving state B is not shifted to the time saving state A. As a result, when the number of time reductions elapses in the time reduction state B, the player can have greater joy.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the 24th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment described above is that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. It is a point that has become. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described above. 24 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 24th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 488, a method of shifting between the states of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 488, five states are provided in the first modification. That is, it is set to the normal state A (see the upper part of FIG. 488) which is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. Probability change state (see the middle left side of Fig. 488), the time saving state A set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (see the middle right side of Fig. 488), and the low probability state of the special symbol as well. The time saving state B (see the lower left side of FIG. 488) set to the time saving state of the normal symbol and the normal state B (lower right side of FIG. 488) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. (See) and five states are provided. Here, the normal state A is the same state as the normal state in the above-described 24th embodiment, and is a gaming state in which the game is advanced by mainly executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed. On the other hand, the normal state B is different from the normal state A, and is a gaming state in which the game progresses mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed striking. The method of making the types of special symbols that are easy to be executed different between the normal state A and the normal state B is the same as the time saving state A and the time saving state B described above, and is realized by making the reference variation pattern table different. There is. In the first modification, the name of the normal state is changed to the normal state A, and the gaming state set when the time reduction number of times elapses in the time reduction state B is determined with respect to the 24th embodiment. It differs only in that it has been changed and that normal state B has been added. Therefore, here, only the method of state transition in the time saving state B and the normal state B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 488, when the number of time reductions elapses in the time reduction state B, the state shifts to the normal state B. This normal state B is a gaming state in which the special symbol is set to the low probability state and the normal state of the normal symbol, but a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is formed by right-handing. To do. In this normal state B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big hit is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 488, when either the jackpot C24 or D24, which is determined at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state B, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the probabilistic state. On the other hand, when the jackpot E24 is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B. That is, in the normal state B, winning the jackpot shifts to an advantageous probabilistic state, or shifts to a time saving state B having a high degree of advantage, so that the probabilistic state or the time saving in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends It is more advantageous than the state B. Therefore, when the number of time reductions elapses in the time reduction state B, the player can have greater joy. In addition, rather than winning a big hit in the time saving state B, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that the number of time saving times will elapse. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 489, a characteristic effect mode in the first modification will be described. FIG. 489 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state B in the first modification, and FIG. 489 (b) is the first modification. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 during the normal state B in the example. As shown in FIG. 489 (a), in the time saving state B, the characters "10 times remaining until the infinite repair zone" are displayed for the display area HR6. That is, characters suggesting that the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (10 times) will be advantageous to the player are displayed. This "infinite repair zone" indicates an advantageous normal state B. That is, the number of times of 10 times indicates the remaining number of lottery until the number of time reductions elapses. With this display content, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the displayed time reduction number of times is elapsed, which is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 489 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the normal state B. As shown in FIG. 489 (b), in the normal state B set based on the elapse of the time reduction number in the time reduction state B, the characters "continue until repair is completed !?" At the same time, the characters "infinite repair zone" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the advantageous right-handed gaming state continues until the jackpot is won (successfully repairing the shield).

<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 490 and 491, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the first modification will be described. Here, in the ROM 202 in the first modification, the specified contents of the time saving table 202e and the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202ta are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 24th embodiment described above. It differs only in that it is. First, with reference to FIG. 490, the details of the time saving table 202e in the first modification will be described. FIG. 490 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in the first modification.

As shown in FIG. 490, the time saving table 202e in the first modification wins the jackpots A24, C24 to E24 with respect to the time saving table 202e (see FIG. 481) in the above-described 24th embodiment. Moreover, it differs only in that the number of time reductions set when the probability variation limit number is reached is changed from 100 times to 10 times. That is, in the first modification, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state B is set to be smaller than that in the 24th embodiment described above. As a result, the number of time reductions can be easily elapsed in the time reduction state B, so that it is possible to easily shift to the advantageous normal state B. Therefore, it is possible to give greater joy to the player when the time saving state B is entered.

Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 491. As shown in FIG. 491, the variation pattern scenario table 202ta in the first modification is executed after the game state set after the end of the previous jackpot, whether or not the probability variation limit number of times at the time of winning the jackpot has been reached, and after the end of the jackpot. A variation pattern table that is referred to for determining a variation pattern is defined in association with the number of lottery of special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 491, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the normal state (and the latent state which is the penalty state), whether or not the limit is reached at the time of the previous jackpot winning, and special The normal table 202sd1 is defined in association with the type of the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern regardless of the number of times the symbol is drawn. Therefore, when the normal state and the latent state which is the penalty state are set after the big hit ends, the fluctuation pattern is always selected by referring to the normal table 202sd1 until the next big hit is won.

In addition, for the situation where the game state after the big hit is in a short time state and the probability variation limit number has been reached at the time of the previous big hit winning, the variable pattern table regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols after the big hit is finished. As the type of, the substantial special figure 2 game table 202td4 is associated with the above. On the other hand, for the situation where the probability variation limit has not been reached at the time of the previous jackpot winning, the actual special figure 1 game table 202td3 is used for the range where the number of lottery of special symbols after the jackpot is 100 times or less. It is defined in association with each other, and the normal table 202sd1 is defined in association with the range in which the number of lottery of special symbols is 100 or more. Therefore, the time saving state set after reaching the probability variation limit number of times and the normal state after the time saving number of times have elapsed are the time saving state B and the normal state B in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state set without reaching the probability variation limit number and the normal state after the time saving number has elapsed, the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed (the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed). A and the normal state A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 491, when the game state after the big hit is in a probabilistic state, it varies regardless of whether or not the limit is reached at the time of the previous big hit winning and the number of lottery of special symbols after the big hit is finished. As the type of the variation pattern table for selecting the pattern, the substantial special figure 2 game table 202td4 is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied in the probabilistic state, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the actual special figure 2 game table 202td4.

As described above, in the 24th embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table is made different depending on whether the time saving state is set by reaching the probability variation limit number of times or the time saving state is set by the normal jackpot. As a result, the time saving state A in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the time saving state B in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed are formed in a time saving state in which the degree of advantage is different. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, the variation pattern depends on whether the normal state is set when the number of time reductions has elapsed in the time reduction state A or the normal state set when the number of time reductions has elapsed in the time reduction state B. By making the table different, the lottery of the special symbol is hardly executed even if you hit right (the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated), so it is necessary to proceed with the game by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting left. It is configured to form a certain normal state A and an advantageous normal state B in which a lottery of a second special symbol is frequently executed by right-handed striking. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the first modification of the 24th embodiment, when the transition to the time reduction state B, which is extremely difficult to shift, is performed, a relatively small number of time reductions is set, and the small number of time reductions elapses. By doing so, it is configured to shift to the normal state B, which is most advantageous in terms of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (either the advantageous probability variation state or the time saving state B having a high degree of advantage is set). That is, even if the jackpot is won in the time saving state B, the probability change state is set at a high rate of 90%, and the degree of advantage becomes higher by passing the time saving number (advantageous at the time of winning the jackpot). It is configured so that the normal state B is set (there is no possibility that the time saving state A having a low degree is set). With this configuration, it is possible to give the player greater joy at the time of transition to the time saving state B, and in the time saving state B, the number of time saving is higher than that of winning the jackpot within the time saving number of times. It is possible to realize a novel playability in which the game is played with a stronger expectation that the above will be passed. Therefore, it is possible to remarkably improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the above-described 24th embodiment and the first modification thereof, the degree of advantage when the jackpot is won in the time saving state B is set to the same degree of advantage as the probability change state, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, as in the 17th embodiment described above, a specific winning opening 2650a that is opened by a small hit winning is provided at a position that can be reached only while the second entrance 640 is closed, and is a normal symbol. In the time saving state, all the game balls that have reached the specific winning opening 2650a enter the second entrance 640, while in the normal state of the normal symbol, some of the game balls that have reached the specific winning opening 2650a The board surface configuration may be such that the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the rest flows down to the variable winning device 2650 (see FIG. 354). Then, of the normal state and the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long in the normal state (for example, 1 hour), while in the latent state. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol may be shortened (for example, 10 seconds on average). That is, as in the 17th embodiment described above, in the latent state, not only the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed by continuing to hit right, but also the small hits are frequently won. By configuring it so that the prize balls can be paid out when the game balls enter the specific winning opening 2650a, it is possible to obtain an extremely advantageous game state in which the prize balls can be obtained more and more even if it is not a big hit. It may be a configuration to be formed. Then, in the time saving state B, only when the probability variation jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, 0 times may be set as the time saving number and the state may be changed to the latent state. With such a configuration, in the case of shifting to the time saving state B, it is possible to play the game with a stronger desire to win the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be significantly improved. This modification will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 492 to 497.

<Second variant of the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 492 to 497, a second modification in which the specifications of the 17th embodiment are combined with the 24th embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 24th embodiment and the first modification thereof, the degree of advantage is common between the case where the jackpot is won in the time saving state B and the case where the jackpot is won in the advantageous probability variation state. (The distribution of the game state after the big hit is common) was configured. Therefore, even if the transition from the probabilistic state to the time saving state B is made, it is difficult for the player to experience the difference, and it is difficult to greatly improve the interest of the player in the time saving state B.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification is configured to provide a gaming state (latent state) that is more advantageous to the player than the probabilistic state, and the latent state is a big hit in the time saving state B. It is configured so that it can be transferred only when it is won. With this configuration, when the player shifts to the time saving state B, he / she can play the game with a stronger desire to win a big hit during the time saving state B, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. It can be significantly improved. The method of making the latent state more advantageous than the probability changing state is the same as that of the 17th embodiment described above, and only when the right-handed game is performed in the latent state, until the jackpot is won. A method is adopted in which a game ball is inserted into the variable winning device 2650 and a small hit that gives an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is frequently won. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the game can only be continued until the next big hit without reducing the number of balls held so much, while in the latent state, the ball is entered into the variable winning device 2650. Frequent opportunities are given to form an extremely advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be won without winning a big hit.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the 24th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is the above-mentioned 17th embodiment. The board surface configuration has been changed to be similar to that of the game board 13, and as in the 17th embodiment, the lottery result of the small hit has a high probability (about 65%) in the lottery of the second special symbol. The changed point is that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed.

First, with reference to FIG. 492, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 492 is a front view of the game board 13 in the second modification. As shown in FIG. 492, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the second modification is similar to that of the game board 13 (see FIG. 354) in the 17th embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 492, with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 354) in the 17th embodiment, the first right ball entering the ball provided in the flow path on the right side of the front view of the game board 13. The only difference is that the mouth 64z and the regulation lid 64zf that regulates entry into the right first ball entrance 64z have been removed.

With this board configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification is hit right, the same playability as when the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment described above is hit right can be realized. .. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in the probability variation state or the time saving state B, which is the gaming state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 640a wins the hit of the normal symbol with a high probability (239/240). Frequently released. Therefore, it is possible to easily insert the game ball into the second entry port 640, and it becomes easier to set a short variation time as the variation time of the second special symbol lottery (substantially special figure 2). Since the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the game table 202td4), the second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed when the right-handed game is executed. However, as in the 17th embodiment, in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 to 5 seconds → 0.1 to 0.4 seconds), and the normal symbol is normal. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes long (0.04 seconds → 0.2 seconds × 2 times), the normal electric accessory 640a is frequently opened by the game per game, and the game ball flowing down the right area. Is less likely to flow into the third flow path ry3. As a result, even when a small hit game in which the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit is executed, a game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 2650a of the variable winning device 2650 is formed. To do. As a result, almost all of the right-handed game balls enter the second entry opening 640, which is configured as a starting winning opening in which one prize ball is given each time the entry is detected. In the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the number of fired game balls and the number of prize balls to be paid out are substantially the same. As a result, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state B, which are set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed without reducing the number of balls held by right-handed, and the gaming state advantageous to the player can be achieved. Form.

In the time saving state A, since the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is controlled to be selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern table (normal table 202sd1) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, right-handed strike. Even if the above is performed, the lottery for the second special symbol will be performed only at extremely long time intervals. Therefore, the time saving state A in the second modification forms the left-handed gaming state in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handing. In other words, the time saving state A in the second modification forms a left-handed gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, when the latent probability state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery is likely to be set to the same fluctuation time as the above-mentioned probability variation state or time saving state B (substantial special figure 2). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the game table 202td4). On the other hand, in the latent state, since the normal symbol is set to the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes long, and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 640a at the time of winning the normal symbol also becomes short. As a result, in the latent state, the game ball flowing down the right side region is more likely to flow into the third flow path ry3 than in the game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the variable winning device during the small hit game. It is possible to easily insert the game ball into the 2650 specific winning opening 2650a. The hit probability of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 640a, the structure of the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, etc. are all the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment described above. Therefore, even in the latent state, the game ball can be frequently entered into the second entrance 640. That is, as in the 17th embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed in the latent state, the second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed, and the game ball is reached to the specific winning opening 2650a during the small hit game. (It is possible to frequently receive the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 2650a), so that the prize ball can be obtained frequently until the jackpot is won. That is, it forms an extremely advantageous gaming state in which the probability of a big hit is high and a large number of prize balls can be obtained without winning the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 493, a method of shifting between the states in the second modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 493, the second modification is provided with five states. That is, it is set to the normal state (see the upper part of FIG. 493) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. The probabilistic state (see the middle left side of Fig. 493), the time saving state A set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (see the middle right side of Fig. 493), and the low probability state of the special symbol as well. The time saving state B (see the lower left side of Fig. 493) set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the latent state set to the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (see the lower right side of Fig. 493). ) And five states are provided. Here, the time saving state A is different from the time saving state A in the above-described 24th embodiment, and when the lottery condition for the special symbol is satisfied, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the normal table 202sd1 as in the normal state. It is almost impossible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol even if the player strikes right. That is, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes remarkably long, and a disadvantageous situation is formed in which the game efficiency becomes extremely poor when right-handed. Therefore, the time saving state A in the second modification forms a disadvantageous gaming state in which the game needs to be played by left-handed striking. Since the jackpot probability is the same in the normal state and the time saving state A, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is also selected with reference to the same fluctuation pattern table (normal table 202sd1), the degree of advantage is substantially the same. That is, the normal state and the time saving state A form a left-handed gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, as described above, in the latent state, a lottery for the second special symbol is frequently executed by performing a right-handed game, and a specific prize is won when a small hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol. It forms the most advantageous gaming state in which the gaming ball can be easily entered into the mouth 2650a.

In the second modification, the method of shifting to the normal state, the time saving state A, and the probable change state to other states is exactly the same as that of the 24th embodiment described above. Therefore, here, only the time saving state B and the state transition method in the newly added latent state will be described.

As shown on the lower left side of FIG. 493, when the number of time reductions elapses in the time reduction state B, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state as in the above-described 24th embodiment. Further, even when the jackpot E24, which is determined at a rate of 10% of the jackpot winning in the time saving state B, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state A as in the 24th embodiment. On the other hand, when either the jackpot C24 or D24, which is determined at a rate of 90% of the jackpot winning in the time saving state B, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is extremely advantageous for the player. It is set to the correct state. That is, in the second modification, if the jackpot is won in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is looped at a high rate of 90% as in the 24th embodiment, while the probability variation limit is reached. If a jackpot is won in the time-saving state B to shift to, the player shifts to a latent state (most advantageous for the player), which has a higher degree of advantage than the probabilistic state at a high rate of 90%. Therefore, in the time saving state B, if a big hit is made within the time saving number of times, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state, but if the time saving number of times elapses, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. It is possible to realize the playability of playing a game with a strong desire to win a big hit within a short time. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 493, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another state only when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. That is, if the jackpot D24, which is determined at a rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probabilistic state and determined at a rate of 10%. When the jackpot E24 is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state A which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot C24, which is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the latent state again (submarine). Loop the probability state). That is, since the distribution that loops the most advantageous latent probability state is set to 25%, it is more advantageous than the probable change state in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

As described above, in the second modification, if the jackpot is won in the time saving state B which is set only by reaching the probability variation limit number, the configuration shifts to the most advantageous latent state for the player with high probability. And said. In this latent state, even if you do not win the big hit, you can frequently win the prize balls by the small hit game, so it is a highly entertaining game that intermittently increases the prize balls until the next big hit. Can be realized. Therefore, when the player shifts to the time saving state B and when the jackpot is won in the time saving state B, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 494 and 495, a characteristic effect mode in the second modification will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 494, the effect mode in the time saving state in the second modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 494 (a), in the time saving state B in the second modification, the jackpot effect indicating that the shield SG is repaired in the above-described 24th embodiment is shifted to the time saving state B. (See FIG. 478 (b)), an effect of tracking the withdrawn monster character 811 is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 494 (a), in the main display area Dm, the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the adventurer character 801 runs and chases the escaped monster character 811. The production mode is displayed. In addition, the characters "Don't lose sight of the enemy !!" are displayed on the display area HR6. Further, the characters "tracking zone" are displayed for the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the time saving state B continues as long as the character 811 of the enemy monster is not lost. In the following description, the effect of tracking the monster character 811 is referred to as a "tracking zone effect". In this tracking zone effect, if the nest (base) of the monster character 811 can be found without losing sight of the monster character 811, the transition to the latent state is confirmed in addition to the jackpot.

FIG. 494 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a probability variation jackpot is won in the time saving state B. As shown in FIG. 494 (b), when the probability variation jackpot is won in the time saving state B and the transition to the latent probability state is confirmed, the same number (for example, "7") is attached in the main display area Dm. At the timing when the third symbol is confirmed and displayed, the effect that the adventurer character 801 discovers the cave DG inhabited by a large number of enemies including the monster character 811 is executed before the monster character 811 escapes. In addition, the characters "enemy's nest found !!" are displayed in the display area HR6, and the characters "premium battle RUSH confirmed !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the state has shifted to a state having a higher degree of advantage than the "battle RUSH" (probability change state). In addition, "Premium Battle RUSH" is a production name that means a latent state, and the specific winning opening 2650a is opened by frequently winning a small hit by hitting right, and the opened specific winning opening is opened. It is an extremely advantageous state in which a game ball can be frequently put into the 2650a and a prize ball can be paid out. The mode of production in this latent state (premium battle RUSH) will be described later with reference to FIG. 495.

Although not shown in the illustration, when the number of time reductions has elapsed in the time reduction state B, or when the normal jackpot is won, the adventurer character 801 loses sight of the monster character 811, which is usually the case. The transition to the state or the winning of the normal jackpot is notified. As a flow of the production until the adventurer character 801 loses sight of the monster character 811, for example, a production in which the monster character 811 jumps over a valley or a river and escapes is executed, and the adventurer character 801 is also a monster. Attempts to jump over a valley or river following the character 811 of the above, but the monster character 811 cannot be tracked because it falls into the valley or river without being able to jump over. In addition, even in the situation where the number of time reductions remains in the time reduction state B and the jackpot is not won, the monster character 811 jumps over the valley or river and escapes at a predetermined ratio. Has been done. That is, as a kind of variable display effect corresponding to the deviation, the effect in which the first half (part) of the effect mode in which the adventurer character 801 cannot track the monster character 811 is executed, and the adventurer's character When the character 801 also succeeds in jumping over the valley or river, the effect of continuing the pursuit is executed. With this configuration, when the monster character 811 jumps over the valley or river, the passage of jackpots and time reductions is usually uncertain, so I hope that the adventurer character 801 will not fall into the valley or river. You can play a game. That is, since the game can be performed while expecting that the time saving state B is not completed until the end of the production, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 495 (a), the display mode in the latent state in the second modification will be described. FIG. 495 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when a small hit is won in a latent state. As shown in FIG. 495 (a), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, the third symbol imitating an odd number different from each other is stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. Along with the display effect, one Zako enemy character ZE appears from the cave DG where a large number of enemies live, and the adventurer character 801 defeats the appearing Zako enemy ZE with a sword attack. Is executed. Further, in the display area HR6, the characters "number of subjugation x 5" are displayed. This number of subjugation shows the number of defeated Zako enemy ZE in the latent state of 1, and in FIG. 495 (a), by winning the fifth small hit and defeating the fifth Zako enemy ZE. , The situation where the number of subjugation of "x5" is displayed is illustrated. The number of subjugation displayed in the display area HR6 is added and displayed by 1 each time one Zako enemy ZE is subdued. As a result, the player can easily understand the number of times a small hit is won in the latent state of 1, so that the player can easily understand how much profit (small) he / she has in the latent state of this time. It is possible to roughly grasp whether or not the prize ball by winning) was obtained. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved. Furthermore, the characters "Defeat until the boss enemy appears !!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, until the character 811 of the monster that is the boss enemy reappears, a small hit game is executed every time the Zako enemy ZE is defeated, and a prize ball can be obtained. Can be easily understood.

Next, with reference to FIG. 495 (b), an example of a jackpot effect when the jackpot C24 is won during the latent state will be described. Here, as described above, if the jackpot C24 is won in the latent probability state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the latent probability state again. Therefore, in the second modification, when the jackpot C24 is won during the latent probability state, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the latent probability state has been temporarily terminated by the jackpot. It has a structure. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 495 (b), during the jackpot opening period and the interval period, the same effect mode as the small hit variation is executed in the main display area Dm. That is, a variable display effect in which odd-numbered third symbols imitating different numbers are stopped and displayed is executed, and an effect of subduing one Zako enemy ZE is executed. In addition, unlike the small hit variation, the big hit symbol (fourth symbol) indicating the big hit type is displayed for the small area Dm1. In addition, the characters "invincible zone" and "two remaining bodies until the end" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The word "invincible zone" intuitively tells the player that there is no possibility that the boss enemy monster character 811 will appear and be changed to another game state. It can be easily expressed. In addition, the letters indicating the number of remaining subjugation until the end indicate the number of rounds of jackpot. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the advantageous situation in which the prize ball can be continuously obtained by right-handed will continue until the remaining number of subjugation is exhausted.

In this second modification, the "invincible zone" is linked to the execution period of the jackpot C24, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the pre-reading determination that the jackpot C24 is included in the hold (provided that no other jackpot exists in the hold prior to the jackpot C24), the display mode is switched to the invincible zone. It may be configured as follows. Further, even after the end of the jackpot C24, it may be configured to determine whether or not to continue the invincible zone according to the look-ahead result. More specifically, for example, the invincible zone may be continued until the out-of-bounds fluctuation is executed, or a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 50%) is executed every time a special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends. It may be configured to end the invincible zone with. With this configuration, the display mode of the invincible zone can be continued for a longer period of time, so that the player can continue to be given a sense of security that he / she cannot shift to another gaming state for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 496 and 497, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the second modification will be described. Here, in the ROM 202 in the second modification, the specified contents of the time saving table 202e and the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202ta are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 24th embodiment described above. It differs only in that it is. First, with reference to FIG. 496, the details of the time saving table 202e in the second modification will be described. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 496, the time saving table 202e in the second modification is the case where the jackpots B24, C24, and D24 are won against the time saving table 202e (see FIG. 481) in the above-described 24th embodiment. The difference is that the number of time reductions given to is partially changed. Since the number of time reductions set when the other jackpot types (big hit A24, E24) are won is the same as that of the 24th embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 496, when the jackpot B24 is won and the V prize is detected, 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions if the probability variation limit number is not reached regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. On the other hand, in other cases (when V winning is detected and the probability variation limit number is reached, and when V winning is not detected), the same as in the 24th embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, when the jackpot C24 is won in the normal state, if the V prize is detected and the probability variation limit number is not reached in the jackpot, 65535 times are set as the time saving number. .. On the other hand, if the V prize is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. The jackpot C24 is a jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) in which a V prize is almost generated just by continuing to hit right during the jackpot game, so if you win the jackpot C24 in the normal state, basically, the number of time reductions is 65535. The times are set, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to a probabilistic state in which the game state substantially continues until the next jackpot. In the 24th embodiment described above, when the latent probability state is configured as an unfavorable gaming state and the jackpot C24, which should not be won if the normal game (left-handed game) is performed in the normal state, is won, it is anomalous. As a penalty for various game methods, it was configured to shift to the latent state, but in this second modification, the latent state was formed as the most advantageous state, so instead of shifting to the latent state, it shifts to the probable state. It is configured to be migrated.

Further, when the jackpot C24 is won in the time saving state and the latent probability state, if the V prize is detected and the probability variation limit number is not reached in the jackpot, 0 times is set as the time saving number. On the other hand, when the V prize is detected and the probability variation limit number is reached, or when the V prize is not detected, 100 times is set as the time reduction number. The jackpot C24 is a jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) in which a V prize is almost generated just by continuing to hit right during the jackpot game, so if you win the jackpot C24 in a time saving state or a latent state, basically 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent state. Since the number of time reductions set when the jackpot C24 is won in the probabilistic state is the same as that of the 24th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, when the jackpot D24 is won in the normal state, if the V prize is detected and the probability variation limit number is not reached in the jackpot, 65535 times are set as the time saving number. .. On the other hand, if the V prize is not detected, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions. Like the jackpot C24, the jackpot D24 is a jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) in which a V prize is generated just by continuing to hit right during the jackpot game, so if you win the jackpot C24 in the normal state, basically. , 65535 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a probabilistic state in which the game state is substantially continued until the next big hit. In the 24th embodiment described above, when the latent probability state is configured as an unfavorable gaming state and the jackpot D24, which should not be won if the normal game (left-handed game) is performed in the normal state, is won, it is anomalous. As a penalty for various game methods, it was configured to shift to the latent state, but in this second modification, the latent state was formed as the most advantageous state, so instead of shifting to the latent state, it shifts to the probable state. It is configured to be migrated.

Further, when the jackpot D24 is won in the time saving state, if the V prize is detected and the probability variation limit number of times is not reached in the jackpot, 0 times is set as the time saving number. On the other hand, when the V prize is detected and the probability variation limit number is reached, or when the V prize is not detected, 100 times is set as the time reduction number. The jackpot D24 is a jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) in which a V prize is almost generated just by continuing to hit right during the jackpot game, so if you win the jackpot D24 in a time saving state or a latent state, basically 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent state. Since the number of time reductions set when the jackpot D24 is won in the probability variation state and the latency state is the same as that in the 24th embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ta in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 497. As shown in FIG. 497, the variation pattern scenario table 202ta in the second modification corresponds to the time saving state and the latent state with respect to the variation pattern scenario table 202ta (see FIG. 482) in the above-described 24th embodiment. The difference is that the provisions to be made have changed. More specifically, for a situation (that is, a time saving state A) in which the time saving state and the probability variation limit number of times has not been reached in the previous jackpot (usually the time saving state based on winning the jackpot). Is specified in association with the normal table 202sd1. Further, the latent probability state is defined in association with the substantial special figure 2 game table 202td4. Therefore, in the time saving state A, unlike the 24th embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes remarkably long even if the right-handed hit is performed, so that the game efficiency due to the right-handed hit is extremely deteriorated (disadvantageous to the player). ). Therefore, the time saving state A in the second modification forms a disadvantageous gaming state in which the game needs to be advanced by left-handed striking. In addition, the latent state in the second modification forms an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed by right-handed striking. Further, as described above, in the small hit game, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol that enable the game ball to reach the specific winning opening 2650a are set, so that the player strikes right. It forms an advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained just by playing. Therefore, since the game can be performed with the ultimate goal of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that the specified contents in the normal state, the probability change state, the time saving state, and the case where the probability change limit number of times is reached at the time of the previous jackpot winning (that is, the time saving state B) are the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta in the 24th embodiment described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second modification of the 24th embodiment, a gaming state (latent state) that is more advantageous to the player than the probabilistic state is provided, and the latent state is hit by a jackpot in the time saving state B. It is configured so that it can be transferred only when it is won. With this configuration, when the player shifts to the time saving state B, he / she can play the game with a stronger desire to win a big hit during the time saving state B, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. It can be significantly improved.

In the second modification, the time saving state A and the time saving state B are formed in two types, but the time saving state B may be provided only. In other words, when the normal jackpot is won, the number of time reductions is set to 0 so that the normal state is directly entered, and when the probability variation jackpot is won and the probability variation limit is reached. The time saving state B may be set by setting the time saving number (100 times) only for. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ta can be simplified, so that the data capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the above-described 24th embodiment and various modifications thereof, the time saving state B can be set only when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a normal big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state B may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 2%), or the second special symbol may be set. When a normal big hit is obtained in the lottery, the time saving state B may be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 2%). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the time saving state B with a high degree of advantage will be set. Therefore, when a normal jackpot is won, the player is expected to play the game in the time saving state B. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this second modification, when the player shifts to the latent state, he / she always forms an extremely advantageous game state in which he / she frequently enters the specific winning opening 2650a by right-handed game, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the latent state A in which the opening control of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, which frequently enters the second entrance 640 by right-handed but is difficult to reach the specific winning opening 2650a, is executed, and the right-handed hit The second entry opening 640 and the specific winning opening 2650a may be provided with an advantageous latent state B in which the ball is frequently entered. More specifically, as in the 21st embodiment described above, the opening period of the hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol is made different depending on the state, and for example, it is set when the jackpot D24 is reached. In the latent state (latent state A), a short opening period (for example, 0.04 seconds) is set, while the latent state (latent state B) set when the jackpot is C24. ) May be configured to set a long opening period (eg, 2 seconds). That is, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, 0.3 seconds), the opening time of the normal symbol is lengthened (for example, 0.2 seconds), and if the opening period of the normal symbol is not long, the specific winning opening It may be configured so that it cannot reach 2650a. With this configuration, more diverse states can be formed without changing the gaming state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the above-described 24th embodiment and various variations thereof, the ratio of the probability variation jackpot when the first special symbol is won is set to 10%, while the second special symbol lottery is won. In this case, the ratio of the probability variation jackpot is set to 90%, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the rate of winning the probability variation jackpot may be set to 100% when the winning is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state or the time saving state A, the jackpot winning for the number of probability variation limits is substantially determined, so that the time saving state B is entered. It is possible to realize playability in which the transition is substantially fixed. That is, the same game performance as the 22nd embodiment and the 23rd embodiment described above (a game property in which a predetermined number of jackpot wins are substantially guaranteed when a specific game state is set). Can be added. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, the probability variation limit number may be freely increased or decreased. That is, the number of jackpot wins that are substantially guaranteed when the state shifts to the probability change state may be arbitrarily set. By increasing the number of probabilistic variation limits, it is possible to increase the profit of the player, and conversely, by setting it to be small, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

In the above-described 24th embodiment and various modifications thereof, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state, the number of time saving times and the type of the time saving state (whether the time saving state A or the time saving state B). ) Was determined according to the type of jackpot, whether or not the probability variation limit was reached, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, etc., but the method of setting the type of time saving state after the end of the jackpot is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it may be configured in advance whether the time saving state A or the time saving state B is set for each jackpot type. More specifically, when a normal jackpot is won and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state, the time saving state A is uniformly set, while the probability variation jackpot (big hit A24, C24, D24). If the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state, the time saving state B may be uniformly set. With this configuration, when simply setting the time saving state as the game state after the end of the big hit, the variable pattern scenario (substantially special figure 1 game table 202td3) is set with reference to the big hit type that triggered the setting. The variation pattern scenario table 202t can be reduced because the simple control of setting the reference scenario or the scenario that refers to the substantial special figure 2 game table 202td4) may be performed. Therefore, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. When this method is adopted, if an irregular game method such as intentionally stopping the launch of the game ball during the period during which the probability change switch 1650e3 can be passed in the probability change jackpot is performed, after the jackpot ends easily. It is possible to shift the gaming state of the game to the time saving state B. Therefore, when an element having a higher degree of advantage than the probabilistic state is provided for the time-saving state B, the time-saving state is set as the gaming state at the end of the probabilistic jackpot, as in the above-described 24th embodiment and various modifications thereof. When is set, the process of setting the time saving state (whether the time saving state is set by not detecting the V prize or the time saving state is set by reaching the probability variation limit number) Therefore, it is desirable to adopt control that makes the type of time saving state different. As a result, when a probabilistic jackpot is won, it is possible to configure an irregular game method that intentionally avoids the V prize so that the act of shifting to the time saving state B is not established. Can be suppressed.

In the above-described 24th embodiment and various modifications thereof, the time saving state B is set only when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined first number of special symbol lottery (for example, 99 times) is executed without winning a jackpot in the time saving state A, a predetermined second number of times (for example, once) is executed. The variable pattern scenario may be configured so as to switch to the time saving state B over the lottery of the special symbol of. That is, the range of the number of lottery that refers to the real special figure 1 game table 202td3 and the number of lottery that refers to the real special figure 2 game table 202td4 in order to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the number of lottery after the big hit ends. The range may be defined in advance in the variation pattern scenario table 202t. With this configuration, when shifting to the time saving state A, it is possible to expect that the lottery of special symbols will continue to be missed until the time saving state B is switched to, and after switching to the time saving state B, it will be a hit. Since it is possible to realize an extremely special and novel game property that the player can be expected to win, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, since the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be accumulated by hitting right during the second number of times, all the second specials accumulated during the time saving state B after shifting to the time saving state B. The number of lottery of the second special symbol until the lottery of the symbol is completed is the second number (for example, 1 time) + the number of reserved balls (for example, 4 times). Further, conversely, after the time saving state B is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, the variation pattern scenario may be configured so as to switch to the time saving state A within the number of time saving times. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a game playability that strongly expects that a big hit will not occur during the number of lottery times when the time saving state B is switched to, so that the player's game can be played. You can improve your interest.

In the pachinko machines 10 of the 22nd to 24th embodiments described above, as a simultaneous fluctuation method, when one special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the other special symbol is stopped and displayed by a jackpot, the variable display is in progress. A method was adopted in which the special symbol was stopped and displayed with a detached symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, if one special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the other special symbol is stopped and displayed by a jackpot, the subtraction of the variable time of the special symbol in the variable display is interrupted until the jackpot ends. You may. With such a configuration, even in a right-handed game state in which an advantageous second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed, it is possible to increase the possibility of a big hit in the disadvantageous first special symbol lottery, which is disadvantageous. Even in a right-handed game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning a big hit by the advantageous lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the pachinko machines 10 of the 22nd to 24th embodiments described above, as a simultaneous fluctuation method, the fluctuation display is performed only when one special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the other special symbol is stopped and displayed by a jackpot. In addition to this, a lottery result for small hits was set up so that even if the small hit symbol was stopped and displayed, the other special symbol would be displayed in a variable manner. May be configured to forcibly stop and display with an off-design. In addition, the variable winning device that is opened when a small hit is won is provided at a position where the game ball is almost impossible to enter, and there is a high probability (for example, 1 /) in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. It may be configured to win a small hit in 2). With this configuration, during the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the side where the long fluctuation time is set, almost all the special symbols on the side with the long fluctuation time are removed by winning a small hit in the lottery of the other special symbol. Since it can be forcibly stopped with, it is possible to more reliably execute only the lottery of the special symbol of the type (the side where the lottery is easily executed) according to the game state.

<25th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 508 to 519. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment described above, there are a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) and a latent state (a probabilistic state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol). Then, by making the opening period at the hit of the normal symbol different, the game ball that has flowed down the left guide flow path 1750d in the normal state passes through the normal electric accessory 1640a in the immersive state and becomes the left first entrance ball port 64l. On the other hand, the gaming ball that has flowed down the left guidance flow path 1750d in the latent state falls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the protruding state due to the inclination formed by the ordinary electric accessory 1640a. It was configured to be guided to the second entrance 1640. As a result, if the player continues to hit left in the normal state, the game ball is alternately distributed to the right first entry port 64r and the left first entry port 64l by the distribution device 1750, while the left in the latent state. When the hitting is continued, the game ball is distributed alternately to the right first entry port 64r and the second entry opening 1640 by the distribution device 1750, so that the game is played in a disadvantageous left-handed game state. The lottery ratio of the second special symbol, which is advantageous depending on the state, is greatly different, and the playability is different.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is a distribution device that alternately distributes the entered game ball to the left guide flow path 1755c and the right guide flow path 1755d with respect to the right side of the front view of the game board 13. A 1755 is provided, and the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1755d in the normal state (and during the jackpot game) is guided to the variable winning device 65 that can enter the ball during the jackpot game, while in a latent state. The gaming ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1755d is configured to be guided to the second entrance 1645 by the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. Further, in both the normal state and the latent state, the game ball flowing down the left guidance flow path 1755c is configured to be guided to the small hit winning device 2655 that can be entered during the execution of the small hit. did. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment, similarly to the 17th embodiment described above, a small hit is won with a high probability (for example, a ratio of about 98%) in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state. It was configured to be. As a result, when a right-handed hit is made in the latent state, the game ball is alternately distributed to the second entrance 1645 and the small hit winning device 2655, and as a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed and small. Since the specific winning opening 2655a of the winning winning device 2655 is frequently opened and the game ball can be frequently entered into the frequently opened specific winning opening 2655a, the latent state is set to the right. It is possible to configure it as an extremely advantageous game state in which a large number of prize balls can be won without winning a big hit just by continuing to hit. On the other hand, when hitting right in the normal state, the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 2655d is not guided to the second entry port 1645, so that the entry is difficult (impossible). The variable winning device 65 and the small hit winning device 2655, which are set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball, are alternately distributed. That is, when a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the game ball cannot be put into either the second entrance 1645 or the small hit winning device 2655, and almost all the game balls launched by the right-handed hit. Will be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the lowermost out port 66 of the game board 13. For this reason, it is possible to make the game playability more significantly different between the normal state in which the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is set and the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. be able to.

Here, conventionally, the probability (ratio) of a small hit is different depending on the type of special symbol (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol) is different. In addition, in the normal state of the normal symbol), the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) having a high probability of small hit is easily executed, and the game is played to the specific winning opening opened based on the small hit winning. There is known a gaming machine having specifications that form an advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without winning a big hit by controlling the balls so that they can easily enter the ball. In the conventional gaming machine, the latent probability state set to the normal state of the normal symbol is set to the most advantageous state, so that the small hit probability is high even in the normal state set to the normal state of the normal symbol. Since the lottery conditions for special symbols are likely to be established (the game ball is likely to enter the starting winning opening that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol), it is difficult to obtain profits from small hits under normal conditions. In order to form a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is common to take measures in the form of remarkably lengthening the fluctuation time of the symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol having a high probability of small hit. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, the small hit probability is low in order to prevent the situation where the lottery of the special symbol cannot be performed continues for an extremely long time. By configuring the variable display of the (unfavorable) first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol with a high (advantageous) small hit probability in an overlapping (simultaneous) manner, in a disadvantageous normal state Even if the variable display of the second special symbol having a remarkably long fluctuation time is started, it is possible to start the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol. It was common. However, in such a conventional game machine, even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long in the normal state, it is easy to enter the starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol as in the latent state. Therefore, the lottery efficiency is achieved by firing the game ball to the starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol so that the variable display of the second special symbol is not interrupted, and also executing the lottery of the first special symbol. There was a problem that an irregular game method of improving the game was performed. Further, even if the player wants to quit the game after executing the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state, he / she quits the game under the situation where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is difficult, there is also a problem that in order to quit the game, it is necessary to wait for a remarkably long fluctuation time of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment, the opening period at the time of hitting the normal symbol is different between the normal state and the latent state, so that the game is played to the second entrance 1645 in the latent state. While the ball frequently enters the ball, the game ball does not enter the second entry port 1645 in the normal state (it becomes difficult to enter the ball). That is, in the normal state, the lottery condition for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of small hit, is not satisfied in the first place. Therefore, it is necessary to lengthen the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state. There is no need to adopt it. Therefore, it can be configured so that an irregular game method for executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed in the normal state cannot be fundamentally established, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed remarkably in the normal state. It can be configured so that a situation in which a long fluctuation time is set and it becomes difficult to quit the game cannot be established.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 21st embodiment described above is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main control device 110. The configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the above are partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The 21st regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 21st embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 508. FIG. 508 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the 25th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 508, in the game board 13 in the 25th embodiment, the starting winning opening that serves as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is used for the position where the distribution device 1750 in the 21st embodiment is provided. A first ball entry port 64 is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is different in that the distribution device 1755, the second ball entry port 1645, and the small hit winning device 2655 are added to the flow path on the right side of the front view. are doing. The distribution device 1755 is configured to alternately distribute the inflowing game balls to the left guidance flow path 1755c and the right guidance flow path 1755d. In the game ball distributed to the left guidance flow path 1755c, the ordinary electric accessory 1645a arranged so as to cover the downstream of the left guidance flow path 1755c and the right guidance flow path 1755d is in an immersive state (second entry). When the ball opening 1645 is closed), the game ball falls toward the small hit winning device 2655, while the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is in a protruding state (the second ball opening 1645 is opened). In that case, it is guided toward the second entry port 1645 by the inclination formed by the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. On the other hand, in the game ball distributed to the right induction flow path 1755d, when the normal electric accessory 1645a is immersed, the game ball falls toward the variable winning device 65, while the ordinary electric accessory 1645a Is in a protruding state, it is guided toward the second entry port 1645 by the inclination formed by the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. The details of the distribution device 1755 according to the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 509 to 511.

FIG. 509 is a diagram showing the flow path of the game ball at the entrance portion of the distribution device 1755. As shown in FIG. 509 (a), at the entrance portion of the distribution device 1755, a protruding position that projects toward the front side of the game board 13 to prevent the game ball from entering the distribution device 1755, and a rear side. A displacement member 1755e that can be displaced at an immersive position that allows the game ball to pass by immersing in is provided. FIG. 509 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the displacement member 1755e is arranged at the protruding position. The displacement member 1755e is controlled so as to repeat the operation of displacing to the immersion position for 0.1 seconds in a cycle of 1 second. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to repeat the operation of being displaced to the protruding position for 0.9 seconds and displaced to the immersion position for 0.1 seconds while the power is turned on. The displacement member 1755e is provided to limit the game ball from flowing into the inside of the distribution device 1755 only at 1-second intervals. Although the details will be described later, by limiting the inflow interval of the game ball to the interval of 1 second, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second entry port 1645 under the normal state, and the submarine. In a certain state, the game ball can be made to flow down alternately to the second entry opening 1645 and the small hit winning device 2655.

As shown in FIG. 509 (a), the displacement member 1755e is arranged at a depth less than the diameter of the game ball at the entrance portion (opening) of the distribution device 1755. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 509 (a), when the game ball reaches the entrance portion of the distribution device 1755 while the displacement member 1755e is displaced to the protruding position, the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the displacement member 1755e. It will be in a stationary state. Further, the subsequent game ball collides with the game ball parked on the upper surface of the displacement member 1755e and spills to the right side of the opening of the distribution device 1755 from the side of the distribution device 1755 to the lower side of the game board 13. It may flow down or be stopped above the game nail on the left side of the opening of the distribution device 1755.

As shown in FIG. 509 (b), when the displacement member 1755e is displaced from the protruding position to the immersive position while the game ball is stopped on the upper surface, the displacement member 1755e is stopped during 0.1 seconds while being displaced to the immersive position. The game ball that has been played passes through the displacement member 1755e and flows into the inside of the distribution device 1755. The period of 0.1 seconds for displacement to the immersion position is a period of length that only one game ball can pass by falling. That is, the length of the period of displacement to the immersion position is set so that the plurality of game balls do not flow into the inside of the distribution device 1755 during the displacement period of 1 to the immersion position. As a result, as shown in FIG. 509 (c), the displacement member 1755e is displaced again to the protruding position immediately after the game ball 1 has completely passed through the displacement member 1755e. Therefore, the entry of the game ball into the distribution device 1755 is limited to every second at the shortest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the flow path of the game ball that has entered the distribution device 1755 will be described. FIG. 510 (a) shows the flow path of the game ball when the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is set to the immersive state, and FIG. 510 (b) shows the normal electric accessory 1645a set to the protruding state. The flow path of the game ball in the case is shown. As shown in FIG. 510, the game ball that has passed through the displacement means 1755e and has flowed into the inside of the distribution device 1755 first passes through the through gate 67 and then reaches the distribution member 1755b. Since this distribution member 1755b has the same structure as the distribution member 1750b in the 21st embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but the game ball that has reached the left guide flow path 1755c and the right It is configured so that it can be alternately distributed to the induction flow path 1755d.

As shown in FIG. 510 (a), the game ball distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c by the distribution member 1755b in a state where the normal electric accessory 1645a is set to the immersive state has the left guide flow path 1755c. After passing, it falls to the small hit winning device 2655. If the specific winning opening 2655a of the small hit winning device 2655 is open at the time of this fall, the ball enters the specific winning opening 2655a as it is and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is paid out. .. On the other hand, when the specific winning opening 2655a of the small hit winning device 2655 is closed by the opening / closing door 2655f, the game ball falls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2655f, and the front view formed by the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2655f. It rolls in the lower right direction due to the downward inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction, falls from the small hit winning device 2655, and flows down to the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the right guide flow path 1755d by the distribution member 1755b passes through the right guide flow path 1755d and falls in the direction of the variable winning device 65.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 510 (b), the game ball distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c by the distribution member 1755b in the state where the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is set to the protruding state is the ordinary electric accessory. It falls to the left side of the inclination formed by 1645a (upstream side in the path formed by the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a), and flows down (guided) toward the second entrance 1645 by the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. .. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the right guide flow path 1755d falls to the right side of the inclination formed by the ordinary electric accessory 1645a (downstream side in the path formed by the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a). It flows down (guided) toward the second entrance 1645 by the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. Here, the game ball flowing down the left guidance flow path 1755c falls on the normal electric accessory 1645a in the protruding state, which is basically a game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Limited to. In the probability variation state or the time saving state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 1645a is substantially changed to the protruding state as in the 21st embodiment described above. Therefore, in the game state (probability change state, time reduction state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, both the game ball that has fallen to the upstream side and the game ball that has fallen to the downstream side in the path formed by the normal electric accessory 1645a. , Basically, the ball enters the second entrance 1645.

As shown in FIG. 510 (a), the left guide flow path 1755c is a zigzag-shaped flow path, while the right guide flow path 1755d is a linear flow path. Therefore, the period required for the game ball distributed to the left guidance flow path 1755c to pass through the left guidance flow path 1755c and reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is the game ball distributed to the right guidance flow path 1755d. Is longer than the period required for the vehicle to pass through the right induction flow path 1755d and reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. More specifically, the period required to pass through the left induction flow path 1755c is about 1 second, whereas the period required to pass through the right induction flow path 1755d is about 0.2 seconds. Each flow path is configured. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 511, but by making the flow period different between the left guide flow path 1755c and the right guide flow path 1755d, in a normal state, a game ball flowing down the left guide flow path 1755c can also be used. The game ball that has flowed down the right induction flow path 1755d is also configured to pass (easily pass) the front side of the immersive ordinary electric accessory 1645a. Further, in the latent state, the game ball flowing down the left guidance flow path 1755c passes in front of the immersive normal electric accessory 1645a, while the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1755d is in a protruding state. It is configured so that it can easily fall on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a and be easily guided to the second entry port 1645. As a result, it becomes impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 1645 even if the player hits the right in the normal state, while in the latent state, the second player enters by hitting the right. It becomes possible to frequently enter a game ball into the ball mouth 1645.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511, the details of the operation mode (displacement mode) of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in the left-handed gaming state in the 25th embodiment will be described. FIG. 511 (a) is a diagram showing the time course of the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in the normal state, and FIG. 511 (b) is the time course of the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 1645a in the latent state. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 511 (a), when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and wins in the lottery of the normal symbol in the normal state, it is normal as in the normal electric accessory 1640a in the 21st embodiment described above. After the variable display of the symbol is executed for 0.1 seconds, the operation pattern (see FIG. 438 (b)) of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a corresponding to the normal state is set. That is, after the opening period of 0.3 seconds is set, the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is displaced in an operation mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds. As a result, the normal electric accessory 1645a is maintained in the immersion position from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 until 0.4 seconds elapses, and when 0.4 seconds elapses to 0.9 seconds elapses. The operation pattern is such that the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds until 0.9 seconds, and then displaced to the immersion position again after 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, it takes about 1 second for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to be distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c and reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a, and the right guide flow path. It takes about 0.2 seconds to reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a after being distributed to 1755d. Therefore, the game balls that flow into the distribution device 1755 in the normal state, pass through the through gate 67, and are distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c by the distribution member 1755b are as shown in FIG. 511 (a). It reaches the ordinary electric accessory 1645a after the timing when the normal symbol hit ends (0.9 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), and passes in front of the immersive ordinary electric accessory 1645a. It falls toward the small hit winning device 2655. Further, as shown in FIG. 511, the game balls that flowed into the distribution device 1755 in the normal state, passed through the through gate 67, and were distributed to the right guide flow path 1755d by the distribution member 1755b. The ordinary electric accessory 1645a reaches the ordinary electric accessory 1645a before the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 1645a changes (displaces) to the protruding state (0.4 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), and the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in the immersive state It passes through the front side of the above and falls toward the variable winning device 65.

As described above, the entrance portion of the distribution device 1755 is provided with a displacement member 1755e that is displaced to the immersion position for 0.1 seconds at a cycle of 1 second, and the game ball that flows into the inside of the distribution device 1755. Is configured to be limited to 1 or less per second. As a result, even if the player continues to hit right in the normal state, the game ball passes through the through gate 67 only every second, so that the timing at which the game ball passes through the normal electric accessory 1645a is shown in FIG. 511 (a). There is no deviation from the timing shown in. That is, since a plurality of game balls do not continuously flow into the inside of the distribution device 1755, the game balls also move in the right guide flow path 1755d while the game balls pass through the left guide flow path 1755c. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being distributed, or conversely, to prevent the game balls from being distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c while the game balls are passing through the right guide flow path 1755d. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) all the game balls launched by right-handed hitting and flowing into the distribution device 1755 in the normal state from entering the second entry port 1645. It can be configured so that an irregular game method of executing a lottery of a second special symbol having a high degree of advantage by inserting a game ball into the second entrance 1645 cannot be fundamentally established. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress anomalous game methods.

Further, as shown in FIG. 511 (b), when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and wins in the lottery of the ordinary symbol in the latent state, it is the same as the ordinary electric accessory 1640a in the 21st embodiment described above. After the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 0.1 seconds, the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 1645a corresponding to the latent state (see FIG. 438 (b)) is set. That is, after the opening period of 0.02 seconds is set, the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is displaced in an operation mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 1640a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds. As a result, the normal electric accessory 1645a is maintained in the immersion position until 0.12 seconds elapse after the game ball passes through the through gate 67, and when 0.12 seconds elapses to 0.62 seconds elapses. The operation pattern is such that the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is displaced to the protruding position for 0.5 seconds until 0.62 seconds, and then displaced to the immersion position again after 0.62 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, it takes about 1 second for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to be distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c and reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a, and the right guide flow path. It takes about 0.2 seconds to reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a after being distributed to 1755d. Therefore, the game balls that flow into the distribution device 1755 in the latent state, pass through the through gate 67, and are distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c by the distribution member 1755b are as shown in FIG. 511 (b). , The normal electric accessory 1645a is reached after the timing when the normal symbol hit ends (0.62 seconds after passing through the through gate 67), and passes in front of the immersive ordinary electric accessory 1645a. It falls toward the small hit winning device 2655. Further, the game balls that flowed into the distribution device 1755 in the latent state, passed through the through gate 67, and were distributed to the right guide flow path 1755d by the distribution member 1755b are as shown in FIG. 511 (b). While the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is variably (displaced) in the protruding state, it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 1645a and is guided by the inclination formed by the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in the protruding state to enter the second ball. Enter the ball into the mouth 1645. As a result, in the latent state in the 25th embodiment, the game ball is continuously fired toward the distribution device 1755, so that the distribution device 1755 makes the second entrance 1645 and the small hit winning device 2655. The game balls are distributed alternately. As described above, in the 25th embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won at a high rate (98% rate) and the special winning opening 2655a of the small hit winning device 2655a. Is released. Therefore, by continuing to hit right in the latent state, the game balls distributed to the right guidance flow path 1755d frequently enter the second entry port 1645, so that the small hit game is executed with high frequency. The specific winning opening 2655a is opened, and the game balls distributed to the left guidance flow path 1755c frequently enter the opened specific winning opening 2655a, so that a large number of prizes are awarded even if the jackpot is not won. It forms a very advantageous condition in which the ball can be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Although not shown, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the normal electric accessory 1645a is variably (displaced) to the protruding state for 2 seconds when the normal symbol hits. Therefore, if you continue to hit right, the ordinary electric accessory 1645a will be immersed for 0.14 seconds (the total of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening period when the ordinary symbol hits, and the ending period) and 2 seconds. The operation repeats the protruding state of. For this reason, most of the game balls that have flowed into the distribution device 1755 are guided to the second entrance 1645 by the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in a protruding state, and about one in ten game balls is a normal electric accessory. While the object 1645a is variably immersive, it passes through the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. Here, as shown in FIG. 508, a game nail for suppressing the entry of the ball into the small hit winning device 2655 is arranged between the ordinary electric accessory 1645a and the small hit winning device 2655. There is. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 508, the normal electric accessory 1645a descends from the upper left direction to the lower right direction with three game nails from the left end to the lower side on the right side by about two diameters of the game ball. A directional slope is formed. Due to this inclination, the position where the game ball that has passed through the left guide flow path 1755c and has fallen on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is narrowed to the position where it can fall to the small hit winning device 2655. That is, only when the ordinary electric accessory 2655 is opened within about 0.1 seconds after passing through the left guide flow path 1755c and falling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a, the small hit winning device 2655 is used. The game ball arrives, and in other cases, after flowing down above the game nail or downstream of the game nail, the ordinary electric accessory 2655 is opened and guided to the variable winning device 65. As a result, the number of game balls that can reach the small hit winning device 2655 in the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is extremely reduced (for example, 1 of the game balls that have entered the distribution device 1755). / 60) can be achieved, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from frequently entering the small hit winning device 2655 in the probability change state or the time saving state, which is excessively advantageous to the player. More specifically, if you continue to hit right in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the number of prize balls to be paid out will be less than the number of game balls to be fired (the base of the game will be 100% or less). It is configured in.

Next, with reference to FIG. 512, a method of shifting between gaming states in the 25th embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 512, in the 25th embodiment, four gaming states are provided. That is, it is set to the normal state (see the upper part of FIG. 512) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the high probability (probability variation) state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. Probability change state (see the middle row of FIG. 512), latent state set to high probability (probability change) state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol (see lower left side of FIG. 512), and low probability state of special symbol. There are four gaming states: a time saving state (see the lower right side of FIG. 512), which is set as a time saving state of a normal symbol, and a time saving state. Here, as described above, the normal state is a game state (left-handed game state) in which the game is advanced mainly by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handed, and is a latent state, a probable change state, and a time saving state. Is a game state (right-handed game state) in which the game is advanced mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed.

As described above, in the latent state, the game ball that has flowed into the distribution device 1755 by right-handed strike is alternately distributed to the second entry port 1645 and the small hit winning device 2655, so that the second special symbol is used. The lottery is frequently executed and a small hit is won with a high probability, and a game ball is frequently entered into the specific winning opening 2655a opened based on the small hit winning. That is, until the next big hit is won, an advantageous gaming state is formed in which a predetermined amount of prize balls (for example, 10 pieces) can be paid out frequently based on the balls entered into the specific winning opening 2655a. .. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, in other right-handed game states (time saving state, probability change state), most of the game balls that have flowed into the distribution device 1755 enter the second entrance 1645, so continue to hit right. This makes it possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol more efficiently, but since it is extremely difficult for the game ball to reach the small hit winning device 2655, it is advantageous (it became a hit) without simply reducing the number of balls held. In some cases, the probability variation jackpot rate is high). It only forms an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 512, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another gaming state only when the jackpot is won. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 512, if the jackpot A25, which is won at a rate of 5% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player. In addition, if the jackpot B25 is won at a rate of 45% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, the gaming state after the jackpot is relatively advantageous (that is, in the right-handed gaming state). Yes) Set to probabilistic state. Furthermore, if the jackpot C25, which is won at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous in the right-handed gaming state. It is set to a low time saving state. That is, if the jackpot is won in the normal state, the game always shifts to one of the right-handed gaming states. In any case, winning the jackpot is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be more pleased when the jackpot is won.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 512, there is a possibility of shifting from the probabilistic state to another game state when the jackpot is won or when the number of time reductions is completed. More specifically, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 512, if the jackpot D25 is won at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, if the jackpot F25 is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, the gaming state after the jackpot is relatively low in the right-handed gaming state. It is set to a certain time saving state. In addition, when the number of time reductions ends (elapses) in the probability change state, the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state for the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot E25 is won at a rate of 15% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variation state again. .. In the probability change state set based on winning the jackpot F25, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. For this reason, after the jackpot F25 is completed, if the special symbol lottery is missed 100 times in a row (small hit), the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended (the number of time saving has passed) and the submarine. Move to a certain state. On the other hand, the probability change state set after the jackpot of another type is completed is set to 65535 times, so that it substantially continues until the next jackpot. In this way, if the jackpot is won in the probability change state, the player shifts to the most advantageous latent state at a rate of 50%, so that the game can be played with the expectation that the jackpot will be won.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 512, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another game state only when a big hit is won. More specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 512, if the jackpot E25, which is won at a rate of 15% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, is won, after the jackpot ends. When the game state is set to the probabilistic state and the jackpot F25 is won at a rate of 35% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the jackpot D25 is won at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the most for the player again. It is set to an advantageous latent state. Therefore, in the latent state in the 25th embodiment, the game ball frequently enters the specific winning opening 2655a of the small hit winning opening 2655 until the big hit is won, and the winning ball frequently hits. In addition to being paid out, when a jackpot is won, the latent state is set again at a rate of 50% (looping the latent state), forming an extremely advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the state shifts to the latent state, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 512, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state to another gaming state when the jackpot is won or when the time saving number of times has elapsed. More specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 512, if the jackpot D25 is won at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the game after the jackpot ends. If the state is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player, and if the jackpot E25 is won at a rate of 15% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot is relatively high. It is set to an advantageous probability change state. Further, when the number of time reductions (100 times) elapses in the time reduction state, the state shifts to the normal state which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot F25, which is won at a rate of 35% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time-saving state, is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state again. In other words, if the jackpot is won in the time saving state, a more advantageous gaming state (probability change state or latent state) is set at a rate of 65%, but it is the most disadvantageous for the player when the time saving number of times elapses. Since the normal state is set, the time saving state has a lower degree of advantage than the probabilistic state.

As described above, in the 25th embodiment, the normal state is provided as the disadvantageous left-handed game state, and the probabilistic state, the latent state, and the time-saving state are provided as the advantageous right-handed game state. By configuring these four game states to go back and forth with a big hit or the like as an opportunity, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the 25th embodiment>
Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the 25th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 513, in the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 25th embodiment, the winning order storage area 203rb is deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 21st embodiment described above (see FIG. 434 (b)). The difference is that the point and the small hit flag 203ua are added. The reason why the winning order storage area 203rb is deleted is that in the 25th embodiment, a priority variation method is adopted in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and a new special symbol lottery opportunity is established in a situation where one or more of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol exist. In, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially used and the lottery of the special symbol is executed.

The small hit flag 203ua is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is being executed. When the small hit flag 203ua is on, it indicates that the small hit game is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the small hit game is not being executed. The small hit flag 203ua is set to off in the initial state, is set to a small hit in a special symbol lottery, and is set to on when setting the start of the small hit game (see S18104 in FIG. 518). It is set to off when the end timing of the small hit game (the end timing of the ending period of the small hit) is reached (see S1740 in FIG. 519).

Next, the details of the ROM 202 according to the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 514 to 516. Although not shown here, the ROM 202 in the 25th embodiment has the first random number tables 202a and the first random number tables 202a with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 21st embodiment described above (see FIG. 434 (a)). The difference is that the configurations of the hit type selection table 202b, the variation pattern table 202d, and the time saving assignment table 202e are partially changed.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 514 (a). Although the illustration is omitted here, the first random number table 202a in the 25th embodiment includes the special symbol 1 random number table 202ua1 and the second special symbol referred to when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. It is composed of at least two types of data tables, a special symbol 2 random number table 202ua2, which is referred to when the lottery is executed. First, the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ua1 will be described with reference to FIG. 514 (a).

FIG. 514 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ua1. As shown in FIG. 514 (a), for the special symbol 1 random number table 202ua1, the random number value (value of the random number counter C1 per first) determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery is the state of the special symbol (special). It is specified for each (whether it is a probability variation state of a symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol). More specifically, four random number values (counter values) of "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other as random number values (counter values) determined to be jackpots in the low probability state of the special symbol. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be hits of the special symbol is four. In the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 514 (a), 20 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 19" are used as random numbers (counter values) determined to be jackpots in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. ) Is specified in association with each other. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be hits of the special symbol is 20. In the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/50 (20/1000). As shown in FIG. 514 (a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202ua1 does not specify a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit. Therefore, there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Next, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ua2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 514 (b). As described above, the special symbol 2 random number table 202ua2 is a data table referred to for executing the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 514 (b), for the special symbol 2 random number table 202ua2, the random number value (value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery is the state of the special symbol (special). In addition to being specified for each (whether it is a probability variation state of a symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), a random number value (counter value) that is judged as a small hit in the special symbol lottery is also specified. There is. The random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol and the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is defined as the same value as the special symbol 1 random number table 202ua1. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, as shown in FIG. 514 (b), 979 random number values (counter values) of "20 to 998" are associated with each other as random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits in the special symbol lottery. It is stipulated. Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be hits of the special symbol is 20. In the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 979/1000. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the extremely high ratio of about 98% (overwhelmingly compared to the jackpot probability) regardless of whether the special symbol is in the low probability state or the probability variation state. It is configured to win a small hit with a high probability). For this reason, in the right-handed game state (probability change state, latent state, time saving state) in which the game ball easily enters the second entry port 1645 by right-handed, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. A small hit game is executed with a probability of 979/1000 each time the game is played, and the specific winning opening 2655a is opened. As a result, in the latent state in which the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the distribution device 1755 by right-handed strike are alternately distributed to the second entrance 1645 and the small hit winning device 2655, during the small hit game execution. The game balls frequently enter the specific winning opening 2655a, and form an extremely advantageous gaming state in which the prize balls can be paid out frequently. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the electric accessory 1645a is difficult to change (displace) to the immersive state (it becomes easy to repeat the protruding state for 2 seconds and the immersive state for 0.14 seconds). The game ball that has flowed down the 1755c is likely to be hindered by the electric accessory 1645a that is variably (displaced) in the protruding state, and it becomes difficult to reach the small hit winning device 2655. For this reason, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the small hit game is frequently executed, but it is almost impossible to put the game ball into the specific winning opening 2655, so simply without reducing the number of balls held ( Form a relatively advantageous (higher advantage than normal state but less advantageous than latent state) gaming state that allows lottery of special symbols to be executed (more efficiently than left-handed) ..

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 514 (c). FIG. 514 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the 25th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 514 (c), in the 25th embodiment, the jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol are "big hit A25", "big hit B25", and "big hit B25". There are three types of jackpots, "big hit C25". Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three types of jackpot types of "big hit D25" to "big hit F25" are defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 435 (b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0-4", the jackpot type is " "Big hit A25" is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A25" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 2 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit A25", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is the latent state that is most advantageous to the player. (Probability change state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) is set. Therefore, the "big hit A25" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit A25" is 5 of "0 to 4". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit A25" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 514 (c), "big hit B25" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 49". This "big hit B25" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit B25", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is the probability change state (the probability change state of the special symbol, And the time saving state of the normal symbol) is set. That is, it is set to a right-handed gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the "big hit B25" is a big hit type having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player in terms of the gaming state after the big hit is completed. On the other hand, in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot, it is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit B25" is 45 of "5 to 49". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit B25" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 45% (45/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 514 (c), "big hit C25" is defined as a big hit type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". This "big hit C25" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 2 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. After the end of this "big hit C25", it is basically set to a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) (unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 65e3). .. That is, it is set to the gaming state having the lowest degree of advantage in the right-handed gaming state. Therefore, "Big hit C25" is the jackpot type that has the lowest degree of advantage for the player in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, and is also the most disadvantageous among the jackpots of the first special symbol in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot. It is a jackpot type that becomes. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit C25" is 50 of "50 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit C25" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is 50% (50/100).

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "big hit D25" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". This "big hit D25" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 16 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit D25" (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the gaming state after the end of the big hit is basically the most advantageous latent state for the player. (Probability change state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) is set. Therefore, the "big hit D25" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in terms of the game state after the big hit and the number of rounds. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit D25" is 50 of "0 to 49". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit D21" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 50% (50/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 64", "big hit E25" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit E25" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that allows the probability change switch 65e3 to pass through during the big hit. In addition, after the end of the "big hit E25", basically (that is, if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the execution period), the game state after the end of the big hit is a probability change state (special) that is advantageous to the player. It is set to the probability variation state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). Therefore, "Big hit E25" is the most advantageous in terms of the game state after the end of the big hit, like "Big hit A25" and "Big hit D25", and in terms of the number of rounds, it is the second most advantageous type of big hit after "Big hit D25". Is. Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit E25" is 15 of "50 to 64". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit E25" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is 15% (15/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "big hit F25" is defined in association with the jackpot type. This "big hit F25" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 8 and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened / closed in an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. In addition, after the end of "big hit E25", it is basically set to the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol) unless the game ball miraculously passes through the probability change switch 65e3. .. Therefore, the "big hit F25" is a big hit type having a lower degree of advantage than the "big hit A25", "big hit B25", "big hit D25", and "big hit E25" in terms of the gaming state after the big hit ends. In terms of the number of rounds, it is a jackpot type that is the second most advantageous after "big hit D25". Of the counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random values) associated with "big hit F25" is 35 of "65 to 99". Since there are individual pieces, the ratio at which "big hit F25" is determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol is 35% (35/100).

As described above, in the 25th embodiment, even if a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured so that only an extremely low ratio (5% ratio) shifts to an advantageous latent state. On the other hand, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to shift to the latent state at a rate of 50%. Furthermore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the big hit can only be won in a relatively small number of rounds such as 2 rounds or 4 rounds, whereas the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is a big hit. In that case, it is configured to win a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds of 8 or 16 rounds. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that it will shift to a right-handed game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed by right-handed. it can.

Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 515. Similar to the variation pattern table 202d in the 21st embodiment described above, the variation pattern table 202d selects a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the special symbol when the lottery of the special symbol is executed. The data table referenced for. FIG. 515 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 515 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in the 25th embodiment is a normal table 202ud1 referred to for selecting a variation pattern in the normal state, and a gaming state (probability variation state) other than the normal state. , The latent state, the time saving state), and at least the non-normal table 202 ud2 referred to for selecting the fluctuation pattern. Regarding the normal table 202ud1, with respect to the normal table 202rd1 (see FIG. 436 (b)) in the 21st embodiment, the specified contents for the second special symbol are shared with the specified contents for the first special symbol. Since it differs only in that, the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 515 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned non-normal table 202 ud2. As shown in FIG. 515 (b), the specified contents of the non-normal table 202 ud2 in the 25th embodiment are the specified contents of the time saving / probability variation table 202rd3 (see FIG. 437 (b)) in the 21st embodiment described above. Is the same as. Therefore, in addition to the time saving state and the probabilistic state, the fluctuation pattern is selected at the same selection ratio in the latent state. As a result, in the probabilistic state, the latent probable state, and the time saving state, which are the right-handed game states, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state, so that the game can be executed efficiently.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 516. The time saving table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting the number of time saving at the end of the jackpot, like the time saving table 202e in the 21st embodiment. FIG. 516 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 516, the time saving table 202e in the 25th embodiment is set in relation to the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot. Is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 516, when the jackpot type is jackpot A25, V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, and 100 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. As described above, when the jackpot type is jackpot A25, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, so that the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the launch of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless the above is performed, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probable change state, and as a result of setting the number of time reductions to 0, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent state. That is, when the jackpot A25 is won, it is substantially determined that the latent state that continues until the next jackpot is won is set regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, the jackpot A25 is most advantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 516, when the jackpot type is jackpot B25, the jackpot winning time is the normal state, and if V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot, the number of time reductions is reduced. 65535 times is set as, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the time saving number. That is, when the jackpot B25 is won in the normal state, when the V prize occurs, the state shifts to the probabilistic state, and when the V prize does not occur, the time saving state where the degree of advantage is low shifts. As described above, in the jackpot B25, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, the game is not performed by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. As long as the V prize is generated, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 65535 times is set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 516, if the gaming state when the jackpot B25 is won is a gaming state other than the normal state (right-handed gaming state), a V prize is won during the jackpot, as in the case of winning the jackpot A25. By detecting (passing of the probability change switch 65e3), 0 times is set as the time saving number, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the time saving number. Therefore, unless the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the big hit game, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 0 times is set. By doing so, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 516, when the jackpot type is jackpot C25, the number of time reductions is reduced by detecting V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) during the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. While 65535 times are set as, if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. As described above, in the jackpot C25, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is not opened (it remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, basically, no V prize is generated and a special symbol is used. The low probability state of is set, and the time saving state of 100 times of time saving is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 516, when the jackpot type is jackpot D25, the jackpot winning time is the normal state, and if V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot, the number of time reductions 65535 times is set as, and 0 times is set as the time saving number if V winning is not detected. That is, if the jackpot D25 is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the probabilistic state when the V prize occurs, and shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state when the V prize does not occur. As described above, in the jackpot D25, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, the game is not performed by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. As long as the V prize is generated, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 65535 times is set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 516, if the gaming state when the jackpot D25 is won is a gaming state other than the normal state (right-handed gaming state), a V prize is won during the jackpot, as in the case of winning the jackpot A25. By detecting (passing of the probability change switch 65e3), 0 times is set as the time saving number, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the time saving number. Therefore, unless the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the big hit game, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 0 times is set. By doing so, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 516, when the jackpot type is jackpot E25, the jackpot winning time is the normal state, and if V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot, the number of time reductions 65535 times is set as, and 0 times is set as the time saving number if V winning is not detected. That is, if the jackpot E25 is won in the normal state, it shifts to the probabilistic state when the V prize occurs, and shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state when the V prize does not occur. As described above, in the jackpot E25, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, the game is not performed by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. As long as the V prize is generated, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 65535 times is set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 516, if the gaming state when the jackpot E25 is won is a gaming state other than the normal state (right-handed gaming state), V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot. In either case, even if the V prize is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. Therefore, unless the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the big hit game, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probable change state, and the time saving state of 100 times is set. By doing so, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probabilistic state. In addition, in the probability change state set after the end of the jackpot E25, if the special symbol lottery is missed (small hit) 100 times in a row, the player shifts to the most advantageous latent state. For this reason, even if the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, there is a possibility of a probability change state or a time reduction state, so when the passage of the time reduction number is notified, it will be in the latent state. It is possible to play a game in anticipation of a transition (the game state set after the end of the previous jackpot was a probabilistic state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 516, when the jackpot type is jackpot F25, the jackpot winning time is the normal state, and if V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot, the number of time reductions 65535 times is set as, and 0 times is set as the time saving number if V winning is not detected. That is, if the jackpot F25 is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the probabilistic state when the V prize occurs, and shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state when the V prize does not occur. As described above, in the jackpot F25, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is not opened (it remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, V prize is basically not generated and the special symbol is used. By setting the low probability state and setting the time saving state of 0 times, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the most disadvantageous normal state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 516, if the gaming state when the jackpot F25 is won is a gaming state other than the normal state (right-handed gaming state), a V prize is won during the jackpot as in the case of winning the jackpot C25. By detecting (passage of the probability change switch 65e3), 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. Therefore, basically, the special symbol is set to the low probability state, and the time saving state of 100 times is set, so that the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the right-handed gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player. Set to state.

In addition, when the jackpot D25 to jackpot F25, which are the jackpot types of the second special symbol, are won, the probability change state that substantially continues until the next jackpot when a V prize occurs is set, while V The reason why the normal state is set when no prize is generated is that the player enters the second entrance 1645 in the left-handed game state (normal state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. This is to suppress the irregular game method of hitting the ball right. That is, in the left-handed game state, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol and the probability variation jackpot (big hit D25, E25) is obtained, the possibility of shifting to the most advantageous latent probability state can be eliminated. In addition, when a normal jackpot (big hit F25) is reached, the most disadvantageous normal state can be directly set without going through the time saving state. For this reason, it is better to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the left-handed game state (normal state) (the possibility of directly shifting to the latent state). In addition to that, even if the player wins the jackpot, 100 times of time reduction will be given), so that it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in the normal state.

As described above, in the 25th embodiment, by making the opening period of hitting the normal symbol different according to the game state, right-handed hitting is performed in the normal state and the game is distributed to the right guidance flow path 1755d. The game ball is configured so as to be impossible (difficult) to enter the second entrance 1645. Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the game ball rarely enters the second entrance 1645, and there is an extremely high possibility that the launched game ball will be wasted. Even if you miraculously enter the game ball into the 2nd entrance 1645 and you are lucky enough to win the jackpot, the degree of advantage over the jackpot of the 1st special symbol in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends. Is lowered, so that the player does not want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state (does not want to hit right). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which right-handed hitting is performed in a normal state.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 25th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 519. First, the details of the special symbol variation processing 25 (S185) in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 517. This special symbol variation process 25 (S185) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 21 (see FIG. 440) in the above-described 21st embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 21 (see FIG. 440) in the 21st embodiment. (Refer to 440), this is a process for making various settings related to the variable display of the special symbol in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Of the special symbol variation processing 25 (see FIG. 517), in each of the processes Z202, Z203, Z205 to Z207, Z210 to Z212, Z214 to 218, Z220, Z222, and Z284, the special symbol variation of the 21st embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of Z202, Z203, Z205 to Z207, Z210 to Z212, Z214 to 218, Z220, Z222, and Z284 of process 21 (see FIG. 440) are executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 517, when the special symbol variation processing 25 (see FIG. 517) in the 25th embodiment is started, first, whether or not the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed is determined. If it is determined (Z291) and the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed (Z291: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z291, if it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is being executed (Z291: No), the processing is shifted to Z202. This processing of Z291 is a change due to the addition of the small hit lottery result to the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the special symbol is displayed not only during the execution of the big hit game but also during the execution of the small hit game. This is a process for suppressing the start.

Further, as shown in FIG. 517, in the special symbol variation processing 25 (see FIG. 517) in the 25th embodiment, when the processing of Z203 is completed, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab read in the processing of Z203 is completed. Is determined whether or not is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Z204), and if it is determined to be a value greater than 0 (Z204: Yes), the process is shifted to Z205, while the process is shifted to Z205. If it is determined to be 0 (Z204: No), the process shifts to Z210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 517, in the special symbol variation processing 25 (see FIG. 517) in the 25th embodiment, when the processing of Z220 is completed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is reset to 0 and the probability variation flag 203ra is set. Is reset to off (Z292), and the process shifts to Z222. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 25 (see FIG. 517) in the 25th embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of Z217 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a big hit (Z217: No), it corresponds to the deviation. The disconnection processing 25 (Z293) for executing various controls is executed, and the processing is transferred to Z222. The details of the disconnection processing 25 (Z293) will be described with reference to FIG. 518.

FIG. 518 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned disconnection processing (Z293). The out-of-order processing 25 (Z293) is a control process executed when setting a stop display of a special symbol indicating a lottery result of an out-of-order (including a small hit). As shown in FIG. 518, in this out-of-order processing (Z293), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit (S18101), and the lottery result of this time is a small hit. When it is determined (S18101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S18102), and the value is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more). If it is determined to be (S18102: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is subtracted by 1 (S18103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S18102, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is 0 (S18102: No), the process of S18103 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S18101, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S18101: Yes), the small hit flag 203ua is set to on (S18104), and the start of the small hit is set. Then (S18105), this process is terminated. By executing this off-time processing 25 (see FIG. 518), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit game can be started without updating the value of the time saving medium counter 203zu. In the case of deviation, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu can be updated. If the lottery result is a small hit, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is updated at the end of the small hit game. As a result, in the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set or the probability variation state in which the time saving number is 100 times, when the lottery of the last second special symbol within the time saving number is a small hit, the small hit game Suppresses that the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated at the start (stop of the small hit symbol) and the game ball can reach the small hit winning device 2655 (the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 2655a). be able to.

Next, the details of the small hit control process 25 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 519. The small hit control process 25 (S1505) is a process for performing various controls during the execution period of the small hit game, similar to the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment described above. In the 21st embodiment, which is the base of the 25th embodiment, the small hit lottery result is not defined, so that the process corresponding to the small hit control process 25 (S1541) does not exist. Therefore, in the description of the small hit control process 25 (S1541) in the 25th embodiment, the description will be made by comparison with the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 519 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 25 (see FIG. 519). Of the small hit control processes 25 (see FIG. 519), each process of S1701, S1702, and S1704 is the same as each process of S1701, S1702, and S1704 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the small hit control process 25 (see FIG. 519) in the 25th embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1704 that the small hit game is currently being executed (S1704: Yes), then the small hit game It is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the specific winning opening 2655a (S1731), and if it is the opening timing of the specific winning opening 2655a (S1731: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 2655a is set (S1732). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1731, if it is determined that the timing is not the opening timing of the specific winning opening 2655a (S1731: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the specific winning opening 2655a is satisfied (S1733). When it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 2655a is satisfied (S1733: Yes), the specific winning opening 2655a is closed (S1734), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1733, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 2655a is not satisfied (S1733: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period in the small hit game. If it is the start timing of the ending period (S1735: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S1736), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1735, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period of the small hit game (S1735: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending period of the small hit game (S1735: No). In S1737), if it is determined that the end timing of the ending period of the small hit game does not come out (S1737: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1737, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period of the small hit game (S1737: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is larger than 0. (S1738). In the processing of S1738, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is larger than 0 (S1738: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1739), and the processing is sent to S1740. And migrate. On the other hand, in the processing of S1738, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is 0 (S1738: No), the processing of S1739 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1740. In the process of S1740, the small hit game is ended by setting the small hit flag 203ua to off (S1740), and the main process is ended.

By executing this small hit control process 25 (see FIG. 519), the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 2655a in the small hit game can be accurately set, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203zu is set at the end of the small hit. Can be updated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 25th embodiment, the inserted game ball is alternately distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c and the right guide flow path 1755d with respect to the right side of the front view on the game board 13. A game ball having a configuration in which a dividing device 1755 is provided and flowing down the right induction flow path 1755d in a normal state (and during a jackpot game) has a normal electric function only while the normal electric accessory 1645a is variably (displaced) in an immersive state. While reaching the object 1645a (easily reaching), the gaming ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1755d in the latent state is normally electric while the accessory 1645a is variable (displaced) to the protruding state. By variably (displacement) controlling the ordinary electric accessory 1645a so that the upper surface of the accessory 1645a can be reached, it is extremely possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol even if the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state. While it becomes difficult, it is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed in the latent state. Further, in the 25th embodiment, in both the normal state and the latent state, the game ball flowing down the left guide flow path 1755c passes through the ordinary electric accessory 1645a which is changed to the immersive state and wins a small hit. It is configured to variably (displace) control the ordinary electric accessory 1645a so as to reach the device 2655. As a result, in the latent state, it is possible to realize an operation in which the game ball that has flowed into the distribution device 1755 by right-handed strike is alternately distributed to the second entrance 1645 and the small hit winning device 2655. , The second special symbol lottery is frequently executed, and the specific winning opening 2655a of the small hit winning device 2655 is frequently opened, and the game ball is frequently opened to the frequently opened specific winning opening 2655a. You can enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to configure the latent state as an extremely advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be won without winning a big hit simply by continuing to hit right. On the other hand, when hitting right in the normal state, the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 2655d is not guided to the second entry port 1645, so that the entry is difficult (impossible). The variable winning device 65 and the small hit winning device 2655, which are set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball, are alternately distributed. That is, when a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the game ball cannot be put into either the second entrance 1645 or the small hit winning device 2655, and almost all the game balls launched by the right-handed hit. Will be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the lowermost out port 66 of the game board 13. For this reason, it is possible to make the game playability more significantly different between the normal state in which the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is set and the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. be able to.

Here, conventionally, the probability (ratio) of a small hit is different depending on the type of special symbol (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the latent probability state (probability change state of the special symbol) is different. In addition, in the normal state of the normal symbol), the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) having a high probability of small hit is easily executed, and the game is played to the specific winning opening opened based on the small hit winning. There is known a gaming machine having specifications that form an advantageous gaming state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without winning a big hit by controlling the balls so that they can easily enter the ball. In the conventional gaming machine, the latent probability state set to the normal state of the normal symbol is set to the most advantageous state, so that the small hit probability is high even in the normal state set to the normal state of the normal symbol. Since the lottery conditions for special symbols are likely to be established (the game ball is likely to enter the starting winning opening that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol), it is difficult to obtain profits from small hits under normal conditions. In order to form a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is common to take measures in the form of remarkably lengthening the fluctuation time of the symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol having a high probability of small hit. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, the small hit probability is low in order to prevent the situation where the lottery of the special symbol cannot be performed continues for an extremely long time. By configuring the variable display of the (unfavorable) first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol with a high (advantageous) small hit probability in an overlapping (simultaneous) manner, in a disadvantageous normal state Even if the variable display of the second special symbol having a remarkably long fluctuation time is started, it is possible to start the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol. It was common. However, in such a conventional game machine, even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long in the normal state, it is easy to enter the starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol as in the latent state. Therefore, the lottery efficiency is achieved by firing the game ball to the starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol so that the variable display of the second special symbol is not interrupted, and also executing the lottery of the first special symbol. There was a problem that an irregular game method of improving the game was performed. Further, even if the player wants to quit the game after executing the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state, he / she quits the game under the situation where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is difficult, there is also a problem that in order to quit the game, it is necessary to wait for a remarkably long fluctuation time of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment, the opening period at the time of hitting the normal symbol is different between the normal state and the latent state, so that the game is played to the second entrance 1645 in the latent state. While the ball frequently enters the ball, the game ball does not enter the second entry port 1645 in the normal state (it becomes difficult to enter the ball). That is, in the normal state, the lottery condition for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of small hit, is not satisfied in the first place. Therefore, it is necessary to lengthen the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state. There is no need to adopt it. Therefore, it can be configured so that an irregular game method for executing the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed in the normal state cannot be fundamentally established, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed significantly in the normal state. It can be configured so that a situation in which a long fluctuation time is set and it becomes difficult to quit the game cannot be established.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 25th embodiment, when the game ball flowing into the distribution device 1755 is distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c in the latent state, the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in the immersive state is used. On the other hand, when it is distributed to the right induction flow path 1755d, it is always electric so that it always reaches (easily reaches) the protruding ordinary electric accessory 1645a. The accessory 1645a is variably (displaced) controlled. In other words, it protrudes depending on which of the plurality of flow paths (left guidance flow path 1755c, right guidance flow path 1755d) for guiding the game ball to the same variable member (ordinary electric accessory 1645a). It becomes easier to reach the variable member in the state (it becomes easier to enter the second ball entry port 1645), or it becomes easier to reach the variable member in the immersive state (it enters the second ball entry port 1645). It is possible to realize a novel ball flow in which (it becomes difficult) is variable. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the traveling direction of the game ball launched by right-handed hitting in the latent state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 25th embodiment, by making the opening period when the normal symbol hits different between the normal state and the latent state, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 moves to the second entrance 1645 in the normal state. On the other hand, it is difficult to enter the ball, but in the latent state, it is configured to be easy to enter the second entry port 1645, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by making the fluctuation time of the normal symbol different between the normal state and the latent state, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 1645 may be different between the normal state and the latent state. By making the variable (displacement) pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol different, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 1645 may be made different between the normal state and the latent state. ..

In the 25th embodiment, the game ball distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c by the distribution device 1755 in the latent state becomes difficult to reach the normal electric accessory 1645a in the protruding state, while the right guide flow path. The game ball distributed to the 1755d is configured so as to be able to reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in the protruding state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a distribution in which a game ball is randomly (or according to a predetermined distribution rule) is distributed to a plurality of routes having different flow periods and one of the plurality of routes on the upstream side of the switching member 65h inside the variable winning device 65. A split member may be provided so that the V winning rate can be changed according to the flow period. More specifically, for example, the switching member 65h is provided with a flow path that takes 1 second to reach the switching member 65h and a flow path that reaches the switching member 65h in 0.2 seconds. For example, until 1 second has passed since the start of the jackpot, the arrangement for guiding to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the arrangement for guiding to the special discharge flow path 65e2 are switched every 0.1 seconds, while after 1 second, the arrangement is switched. It may be configured to be fixed in an arrangement that guides the special discharge flow path 65e2 until the end of the V round. In this configuration, when the flow path is distributed to a flow path with a short flow period, the ratio of distribution to the special discharge flow path 65e3 and passing through the probability change switch 65e3 is about 50%, while the flow path has a long flow period. When they are distributed, they are almost distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2 and pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the flow path through which the game ball passes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the contrary, the flow path having a short flow period may be configured to have a higher V winning rate. Further, as in the eighth embodiment described above, in the specification that the big hit game is executed when the small hit is won and the V prize is generated (so-called type 2 type mixer or type 2 specification), V These configurations may be provided on the upstream side of the winning opening. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game playability that changes according to the flow path in which the jackpot expectation (expectation of V prize generation) is distributed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Can be done.

In the 25th embodiment, when the game ball hit right in the latent state is distributed to the left guide flow path 1755c by the distribution member 1755b in the distribution device 1755, it is arranged in the protruding state (variable). ), It becomes difficult to reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a (it becomes difficult to enter the second entry port 1645), but when it is distributed to the right guidance flow path 1755d, it is placed in a protruding state. It was configured so that it would be possible to reach the (variable) ordinary electric accessory 1645a (it would be possible to enter the second entrance 1645), but it would be possible to enter the second entrance 1645. Instead of making the easiness different, the easiness of entering the ball into another entrance may be made different. Specifically, for example, the ease of entering the ball into the out opening or the general winning opening may be different depending on the flow path through which the game ball flows. As a result, the range of design can be expanded.

In the 25th embodiment, the game ball is distributed to the right guide flow path 1755c and the left guide flow path 1755d by the distribution device 1755, and the game ball flowing down the right guide flow path 1755c is normally immersed in the normal state. While passing through the electric accessory 1645a, in the latent state, the normal electric accessory 1645a in the protruding state guides the ball to the second entry port 1645, so that the second special symbol is displayed in the latent state. While the lottery is frequently executed, in the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed even if the player strikes right, but it is not always necessary to provide the distribution device 1755. The distribution member 1755b and the left guide flow path 1755c may be deleted, and the small hit winning device 2655 may be moved to a position where all the game balls that have passed through the immersive ordinary electric accessory 1645a can be reached. Then, in the normal state, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 always passes through the ordinary electric accessory 1645a in the immersive state, while in the latent state, it is in the protruding state at the first ratio (for example, the ratio of 35%). An opening period is set so that the normal electric accessory 1645a can be reached, and an opening period (same as the normal state) that makes it easy to pass through the immersive ordinary electric accessory 1645a at a second ratio (for example, 65%). (Opening period) may be set. Even with this configuration, it is possible to realize the playability that the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 2655a during the opening period of the small hit winning device 2655 only when the right-handed hit is made in the latent state. can do.

<26th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 520 to 525. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the 25th embodiment described above, even if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the game ball hardly enters the second entrance 1645, while the right-handed hit is made in the latent state. Controls the ordinary electric accessory 1645a so that one out of every two game balls that have flowed into the distribution device 1755 enters the second entrance 1645 (the opening period at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol). It was configured to be variable according to the game state). As a result, in the normal state, a relatively disadvantageous game can be played by hitting the left side, while in the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by hitting the right side, and frequently to the specific winning opening 2655. It was configured so that a game ball could be inserted into the ball to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large number of prize balls could be obtained. Furthermore, if the game state set when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is different between the normal state and the latent state, and the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, By configuring the game state with a low degree of advantage to be set to a higher ratio, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed in an attempt to execute a lottery of a second special symbol in a normal state.

On the other hand, in the 26th embodiment, only when a V prize is generated in the jackpot won in the normal state (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3), the state is changed to the probability change state. Was configured as a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. More specifically, when a jackpot is won in the probability change state, the game ball is transferred to the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot V round (the round in which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3) regardless of the jackpot type. By configuring it so that it is very difficult to reach, the advantage of the probabilistic state is lowered, and the player is more aware that the lottery of the second special symbol should not be executed in the normal state. It is configured so that it can make a strong impression. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in the normal state.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The configuration of the above is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The 21st regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 25th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 520. FIG. 520 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the 26th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 520, the game board 133 in the 26th embodiment is a detour between the distribution device 1755 and the variable winning device 65 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 508) in the 25th embodiment. The difference is that the UR is provided and the right out port 66r is provided on the right side of the front view of the distribution device 1755.

The right out port 66r is a pachinko machine that hits the right side and cannot flow into the distribution device 1755, and all the game balls that flow down from the gap between the nails on the right side of the distribution device 1755 into the space on the right side of the distribution device 1755. It is provided for discharging to the outside of 10. Here, in the 25th embodiment, the space on the right side of the distribution device 1755 was connected to the flow path leading to the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 508), and therefore spilled into the space on the right side of the distribution device 1755. The game ball was basically configured to reach the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, in the 26th embodiment, all the game balls spilled in the space on the right side of the distribution device 1755 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the right out port 66r, so that the game balls are variable. In order to reach the winning device 65, the game ball is made to enter the inside of the distribution device 1755, and the game ball has passed through the left guide flow path 1755c or the right guide flow path 1755d by the distribution device 1755. Needs to pass through the second entrance 1645 and the small hit winning device 2655. However, as in the 25th embodiment described above, in the probabilistic state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the period during which the normal electric accessory 1645a is variably (displaced) to the immersive state is shortened, so that the distribution device 1755 As a result, most of the game balls that have flowed into the ball enter the second entrance 1645. Therefore, it becomes extremely difficult to reach the game ball to the variable winning device 65 while the probability change state continues.

In addition, in the 26th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 520, since the detour UR is provided between the distribution device 1755 and the variable winning device 65, the normal electric accessory 1645a in the immersive state is passed through. It is configured to prolong the period required for the game ball to reach the variable winning device 65 (delay the flow speed of the game ball). That is, it is configured so that it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the ordinary electric accessory 1645a that is variable to the immersive state to reach the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state, the specific winning opening 65a is opened during the first round (the round in which the probability change switch 65e3 can pass, the V round). (It is possible to let the game ball flow down to the probability change switch 65e3) The period is from the start of the jackpot to the lapse of 2 seconds. As a result, even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game is started and the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended, the game ball that has passed through the normal electric accessory 1645a can be reached to the probability change switch 65e3. Since it can be configured to be virtually impossible (difficult), the degree of advantage of the player in the probabilistic state can be made lower. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method that attempts to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 521, the operation mode of each part (switching member 65h and opening / closing door 65f) in the variable winning device 65 for each jackpot type will be described. As shown in FIG. 521, the switching member 65h is maintained on the normal discharge flow path 65e1 side (non-V route side) until 0.5 seconds elapse from the start of the jackpot, and then 0.5 seconds elapse. From time to 4.5 seconds, it is switched to the special discharge flow path 65e2 side (V route side), and after 4.5 seconds, it is switched to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 side again, and after that, it is a big hit. It is configured to maintain its state (arrangement) until the end. This switching operation is an operation that is set every time for all jackpots regardless of the jackpot type and the like. Therefore, regardless of the jackpot type, if the game ball can reach the switching member 65h within 4 seconds from the start of the jackpot game to the lapse of 4.5 seconds, the game ball. Is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passes through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 521, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 65f (specific winning opening 65a) in the first round when the probability variation jackpot (big hit A26, B26) of the first special symbol is won is 0.5. After being kept closed for the opening period of seconds, it is switched to the open state for 3.5 seconds (that is, until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot), and closed 4 seconds after the start of the jackpot. The opening and closing pattern to be performed is set. That is, an opening pattern with an opening period of 0.5 seconds and an opening period of 3.5 seconds is set. After that, the interval period (2 seconds) is reached until the second round is started, and the opening / closing door 65f is maintained in the closed state. Therefore, when the probability variation jackpot (big hit A26, B26) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the opening / closing door 65f is set to the open / closed state even if the right-handed hit is started after the opening period of the jackpot is started. While the game is being played, the game ball can be easily reached to the open specific winning opening 65a (the game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a about 2 seconds after the start of the big hit). Therefore, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability variation state of the special symbol can be easily set by passing the probability variation switch 65e3 simply by continuing to hit right after the jackpot starts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 521, the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing door 65f in the first round when the probability variation jackpot (big hit D26, E26) of the second special symbol is won is the opening period according to the gaming state. Only the length of is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 521, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the game state other than the time saving state, the opening period is set to 0.5 seconds and the first round is opened. An open pattern with a period of 1.5 seconds is set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, even if the jackpot fluctuates and continues to hit right, the game that has passed through the through gate 67 after the opening period of the jackpot has started and the time saving state of the normal symbol has ended. Only the ball can reach the detour UR beyond the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. Then, since it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 1645a to flow down the detour UR and reach the variable winning device 65, it is almost (at the start of the opening period, it just hits the normal symbol). (Unless the game ball has reached the normal electric accessory 1645a), the game ball is selected as the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. It is not possible to pass the probability change switch 65e2 by entering the ball. Therefore, even if the probabilistic jackpot is won in the probabilistic state, it is almost impossible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. Thereby, the probabilistic state can be configured as one kind of disadvantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 521, when the probability variation jackpot (big hit D26, E26) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the length of the opening period is set to 2.5 seconds and one round. An opening pattern with an eye opening period of 1.5 seconds is set. As a result, in the time saving state, the game ball fired by right-handed after the jackpot is won and the opening period is started (after the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished) can be easily identified during the opening period. The ball can be entered into the winning opening 65a. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 in the probability change jackpot.

As described above, in the 26th embodiment, the probability change state is positioned as a penalty state that shifts only when the probability change jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, and the probability change jackpot is set during the probability change state. Even if the player wins the game, it is extremely difficult to insert the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot at which the probability change switch 65e3 can pass. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in the normal state.

In the 26th embodiment, the opening period when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state and the opening period in the normal state are set to a common period (0.5 seconds). There was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the length of the opening period when the probability variation jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state may be shorter (for example, 0.02 seconds). With this configuration, if you hit right in the normal state to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, and if you win the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state, before the start of the jackpot ( For example, even if the right-handed strike is started (from the moment when the stop display of the winning symbol is confirmed), the first round may be completed before the flow period of the detour UR elapses. With this configuration, if you perform an irregular game method that executes the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, even if you win the jackpot, there is a high possibility that you will loop the disadvantageous normal state. Since it can be configured so that an extremely disadvantageous situation is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, a characteristic effect mode in the 26th embodiment will be described. FIG. 522 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a probabilistic state, which is positioned as a penalty state. As shown in FIG. 522 (a), when the probability change state is set, basically the same display mode as the normal state is displayed. That is, since the display mode for urging the player to hit right is not displayed, it is possible to make the player think that it is better to hit left.

FIG. 522 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a game ball illegally enters the second entrance 1645 by hitting the right in a probabilistic state and fortunately or due to fraudulent acts. .. As shown in FIG. 522 (b), when the entry of the game ball into the second entry opening 1645 is detected in the probabilistic state, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm2. At the same time, as a reserved symbol of the second special symbol increased by entering the ball into the second entrance 1645, a substantially triangular-shaped reserved symbol with the letters "cold" is displayed. In addition, while the reserved symbol of the second special symbol exists, a display mode suggesting that it is disadvantageous for the player if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is displayed for the second display area Ds2. To. That is, as shown in FIG. 522 (b), an image showing the reserved symbol of the second special symbol and the character "Pinch when hit with" are displayed on the right side of the image. With these display modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the situation will be disadvantageous for the player.

In the 26th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases in the probabilistic state, the reserved symbol (hold with the character "cold") in a mode implying a disadvantage to the player In addition to displaying the symbol), it was configured to display a display mode suggesting that a situation unfavorable to the player would occur if a big hit was won in the lottery of the second special symbol, but the same is true in the normal state. A display mode may be adopted. With such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by right-handed in the normal state.

<Electrical configuration in the 26th embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 523 (a). FIG. 523 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the 26th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 523 (a), the ROM 202 in the 26th embodiment has an opening selection table 202va with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 25th embodiment (and the 21st embodiment) (see FIG. 434 (a)). The difference is that is added. It is also different in that the provisions of the first random number table 202a and the time saving table 202e are partially changed.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 523 (b) and 523 (c). FIG. 523 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202va1 constituting the first random number table 202a in the 26th embodiment, and FIG. 523 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table. It is a figure which showed the regulation content of 202ca2. First, the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202va1 will be described with reference to FIG. 523 (b).

FIG. 523 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202va1 referred to when executing the lottery of the first special symbol in the 26th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 523 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202va1 in the 26th embodiment is special to the special symbol 1 random number table 202ua1 (see FIG. 514 (a)) in the 25th embodiment described above. It differs only in that the judgment values in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the symbols are different. More specifically, 25 random values of "0 to 24" are defined in association with each other as random value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/40 (25/1000). That is, the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the jackpot probability (1/50) in the 25th embodiment.

Further, the special symbol 2 random number table 202va2 illustrated in FIG. 523 (c) is a data table referred to when the second special symbol is drawn in the 26th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of. As shown in FIG. 523 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202va2 in the 26th embodiment is special to the special symbol 2 random number table 202ua2 (see FIG. 514 (b)) in the 25th embodiment described above. The difference is that the judgment value in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the symbol and the random number value (counter value) judged to be a small hit are changed. More specifically, as the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol, 25 random numbers of "0 to 24" are associated with each other as in the special symbol 1 random number table 202va1. In addition to being specified, 334 random number values of "25 to 358" are specified in association with each other as random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits. Therefore, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/40, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/3 (334/1000). As described above, in the 26th embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol is higher than that in the 25th embodiment, and the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is lower. It is configured. This is because, in the 25th embodiment, when the probability change jackpot is won in the normal state, the rate of transition to the probability change state is high, whereas in the 26th embodiment, the probability change state is defined as a penalty state. As a result, when a probability change jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the player always directly shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, if the degree of advantage in the latent state is set too high, it is excessively advantageous for the player. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in the 26th embodiment, in addition to being configured so that the latent probability state is difficult to continue for a long time by increasing the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol, a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. By lowering the probability, it is difficult to open the specific winning opening 2655. As a result, the average value of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain by winning a small hit in the latent state of 1 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous in the latent state. be able to.

Next, the details of the time saving table 202e in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 524 (a). FIG. 524 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202e in the 26th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 524 (a), the time saving table 202e in the 26th embodiment shows the time saving table 202e in the 26th embodiment as shown in FIG. 524 (a). The number of time reductions to be set is defined in association with the game state at the time and the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot. Here, the jackpots A26 to F26 in the 26th embodiment are jackpot types corresponding to the jackpots A25 to F25 in the 25th embodiment, respectively, and whether or not they are the types that can be set in the number of rounds and the probability variation state, etc. Are the same.

As shown in FIG. 524 (a), when the jackpot type is jackpot A26 or B26, V winning (passing the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. If so, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions, and 100 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. When the jackpot type is jackpot A26 or B26, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, so that the game is performed by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the jackpot game. Unless otherwise, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probable change state, and as a result of setting the number of time reductions to 0, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the latent state. That is, when the jackpots A26 and B26 are won, it is substantially determined that the latent state that continues until the next jackpot is won is set regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, the jackpots A26 and B26 are most advantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 524 (a), when the jackpot type is jackpot C26, V winning (passing of the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. , 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, while 100 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. As described above, in the jackpot C26, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is not opened (it remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, basically, no V prize is generated and a special symbol is used. The low probability state of is set, and the time saving state of 100 times of time saving is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 524 (a), when the jackpot type is jackpot D26 or E26, the jackpot is in the normal state or the probability change state at the time of winning the jackpot, and a V prize is won during the jackpot (passage of the probability change switch 65e3). If is detected, 65535 times is set as the number of time reductions, and if V winning is not detected, 0 times is set as the number of time reductions. That is, if the jackpots D26 and E26 are won in the normal state, the state shifts to the probabilistic state when the V prize occurs, and shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state when the V prize does not occur. As described above, in the jackpot D26 and E26, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed. Therefore, if the jackpot D26 and E26 are won in the normal state, the game ball will be played during the jackpot game. Unless the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 65535 times is set. On the other hand, if the jackpots D26 and E26 are won in the probabilistic state, the V round (first round) ends 2 seconds after the start of the jackpot, so in most cases it is variable through the detour UR. The first round is completed before the game ball reaches the winning device 65. Therefore, when the jackpots D26 and E26 are won in the probabilistic state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 524 (a), if the gaming state when the jackpots D26 and E26 are won is the latent state or the time saving state, V is during the jackpot as in the case where the jackpots A26 and B26 are won. By detecting the winning (passing of the probability change switch 65e3), 0 times is set as the time saving number, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the time saving number. Therefore, unless the game is played by a special game method such as stopping the firing of the game ball during the big hit game, a V prize is generated and the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state, and the time saving state of 0 times is set. By doing so, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 524 (a), when the jackpot type is jackpot F26, the jackpot is in the normal state or the probability change state at the time of winning, and V prize (passage of the probability change switch 65e3) is detected during the jackpot. If so, 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, and 0 times is set as the number of time reductions if V winning is not detected. That is, if the jackpot F26 is won in the normal state or the probable change state, the state shifts to the probable change state when a V prize occurs, and shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state when the V prize does not occur. As described above, in the jackpot F26, since the opening / closing door 65f1 is not opened (it remains closed) during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed, V prize is basically not generated and the special symbol is used. By setting the low probability state and setting the time saving state of 0 times, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the most disadvantageous normal state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 524 (a), if the gaming state when the jackpot F26 is won is a latent state or a time saving state, a V prize (probability change switch) is won during the jackpot as in the case of winning the jackpot C26. By detecting the passage of 65e3), 65535 times are set as the number of time reductions, and if V winning is not detected, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. Therefore, basically, the special symbol is set to the low probability state, and the time saving state of 100 times is set, so that the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the right-handed gaming state, which is less advantageous for the player. Set to state.

In addition, when the jackpot D26 to jackpot F26, which are the jackpot types of the second special symbol, are won, the probability change state that substantially continues until the next jackpot when a V prize occurs is set, while V The reason why the normal state is set when no prize is generated is that the player enters the second entrance 1645 in the left-handed game state (normal state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. This is to suppress the irregular game method of aiming at the ball and hitting right. That is, in the left-handed game state, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a probability change jackpot (big hit D26, E26) is reached, it is possible to shift to the probability change state, which is positioned as a penalty state. In addition, when a normal jackpot (big hit F26) is reached, the most disadvantageous normal state can be directly set without going through the time saving state. For this reason, it is better to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the left-handed game state (normal state) (the possibility of directly shifting to the latent state). In addition to that, even if the player wins the jackpot, 100 times of time reduction will be given), so that it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in the normal state.

Next, the details of the opening selection table 202va in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 524 (b). The opening selection table 202va is a data table in which data for selecting an opening period set at the time of winning a big hit is specified. As shown in FIG. 524 (b), in the opening selection table 202va, the opening period set at the start of the jackpot is defined in association with each of the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 524 (b), the jackpots A26 and B26 are defined in association with an opening period of 0.5 seconds regardless of the gaming state. Further, for the jackpots C26 and F26, an opening period of 0.1 seconds is defined in association with each other regardless of the gaming state.

On the other hand, for the jackpots D26 and F26, the opening period of 0.5 seconds is defined in association with the gaming states (normal state, probability variation state, latent probability state) other than the time saving state. Therefore, the opening period of 2.5 seconds is defined in association with the time saving state. As a result, when a probability change jackpot is reached in the lottery of the second special symbol in a game state other than the time saving state, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 1.5 seconds after the interval period of 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, in the time saving state, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 1.5 seconds after the interval period of 2.5 seconds. As a result, if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, especially in the probable state, the flow period of the game ball hit right by the detour UR is delayed to 2 seconds or more, so that it is within 2 seconds from the start of the big hit. It becomes extremely difficult to insert the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, since the probabilistic state can be positioned as a penalty state, the game can be performed so as not to perform the game method that may shift to the probabilistic state. That is, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed strike is performed in an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 26th embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 525. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 26 (Z1111) in the 26th embodiment. The jackpot control process 26 (Z1111) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 176) in the 25th embodiment (and the sixth embodiment) described above, and is a jackpot control in the sixth embodiment. Similar to process 6 (see FIG. 176), this is a process for performing various controls during execution of the jackpot game.

Of the jackpot control processes 26 (see FIG. 525) in the 26th embodiment, in each of the processes Z1301, Z1371, Z1372, Z1374 to Z1381, the jackpot control process 6 (and the sixth embodiment) in the 25th embodiment (and the sixth embodiment), respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z1301, Z1371, Z1372, Z1374 to Z1381 (see FIG. 176) is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 26 (see FIG. 525) in the 26th embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached in the Z1371 process (Z1371: Yes), the opening selection table 202va (FIG. 524 (FIG. 524) From b)), the opening period corresponding to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is selected (Z1391), the selected opening period is set (Z1392), and the process shifts to Z1372. By executing this jackpot control process 26 (see FIG. 525), the opening period can be appropriately set according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment shifts to the probabilistic state only when a V prize is generated in the jackpot won in the normal state (the game ball passes through the probabilistic change switch 65e3). The probabilistic state is configured as a gaming state (penalty state) that is disadvantageous to the player. More specifically, when a jackpot is won in the probability change state, the game ball is transferred to the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot V round (the round in which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3) regardless of the jackpot type. By configuring it so that it is very difficult to reach, the advantage of the probabilistic state is lowered, and the player is more aware that the lottery of the second special symbol should not be executed in the normal state. It is configured so that it can make a strong impression. More specifically, while the probabilistic state continues, the game ball launched by right-handed hitting only enters the second entrance 1645 (and right out 66r), leading to the detour UR. It will be almost impossible to reach (it can only reach the detour UR through the immersive ordinary electric accessory 1645a only after the jackpot has started and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol has ended). It was configured in. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel playability that is configured as if it is a penalty to enter the ball into the second entrance 1645. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress the irregular game method of hitting right in the normal state.

In the 26th embodiment, even if the probabilistic jackpot is won in the probabilistic state, it is difficult to insert the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the V round (first round). By setting the opening period of the game, the length of the opening period of the first round, the flow time of the flow path when hitting right, etc., the probability change state was positioned as a penalty state, but it is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, by changing the opening / closing operation of the normal electric accessory 1645a when the normal symbol hits, the game ball frequently enters the second entrance 1645 in the time saving state, but the game ball is in the probabilistic state. It may be configured so that the ball does not enter the second ball entry port 1645. More specifically, for example, after changing the ball entry interval of the game ball to the distribution device 1755 (the cycle of the displacement operation of the displacement member 1755e) to 1.5 second intervals, the opening period of the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol is set. After that, the ordinary electric accessory 1645a may be configured to open for 0.5 seconds, close for 0.2 seconds, and open for 0.4 seconds. The fluctuation time and opening period of the normal symbol in the probabilistic state are the same as those in the normal state (variation time is 0.1 seconds, opening period is 0.3 seconds), and the fluctuation time and opening period in the time saving state are latent states. It may be configured to have the same period (variation time is 0.1 seconds, opening period is 0.02 seconds). In this case, as shown in FIG. 533, in the probabilistic state, both the game ball flowing down the left guidance flow path 1755c and the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1755d are displaced (variable) to the protruding state. While it becomes impossible to reach 1645a, in the time saving state, both the game ball flowing down the left guidance flow path 1755c and the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1755d are displaced (variable) to the protruding state. It can be configured to reach the ordinary electric accessory 1645a. In this case, the game ball flowing down the right guidance flow path 1755d enters the second entry port 1645, while the game ball flowing down the left guidance flow path 1755c enters the second entry due to the flow speed of the game ball or the like. Either the ball mouth 1645 is reached, or the ordinary electric accessory 1645a is displaced (variable) to the immersive state and flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65 before reaching the ball mouth 1645. In any case, by rolling the upper surface of the protruding ordinary electric accessory 1645a to some extent, it exceeds the range that can flow down to the small hit winning device 2655, so that the game ball goes to the specific winning opening 2655a in the short time state. It becomes difficult to let the ball enter. Therefore, the probability change state can be configured as a penalty state without breaking the position that the latent probability state is the most advantageous gaming state.

In the 26th embodiment, when the player shifts to the probability change state, which is a penalty state, even if the probability change jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the specific winning opening 65a is reached during the period when the probability change switch 65e3 can be passed. By configuring the game ball so that it is difficult to enter the ball (configuring so that the almost normal state is set), the probabilistic state is set to be a disadvantageous game state for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a probability change jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability change state, the game ball can be easily passed through the probability change switch 65e3, but the disadvantageous probability change state is configured to loop. May be good. In this case, the board surface configuration of the right-handed flow path, the number of rounds of the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the like may be adjusted so that the number of balls held decreases by right-handed. With this configuration, if you hit right when you move to the probabilistic state, you can form a disadvantageous game state in which the number of balls you have is steadily decreasing even if you win the jackpot.

In the 26th embodiment, when a probabilistic jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state, it is difficult to insert the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the V round of the probabilistic jackpot. By configuring so as to be, the probabilistic state is configured to be more disadvantageous than other gaming states, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the normal state, when a probability variation jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it may be configured so that it is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the V round. More specifically, for example, when a probability variation jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the opening period of the jackpot is extremely short (for example, 0.02 seconds), and the V round ends early. (It may not be in time even if you hit right after the big hit is notified). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state.

<Modified example of the 26th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 526. In the above-described 26th embodiment, as in the 25th embodiment, in the specification in which the latent probability state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state by using the distribution device 1755, the technical idea capable of suppressing the right-handed game in the normal state is explained. However, the technical idea in the 26th embodiment can also be applied to other game machines having more general specifications in which a prize ball by a small hit game can be frequently obtained only in a latent state. More specifically, when a right-handed hit is made in a game state (normal state, latent state) in which a normal state of a normal symbol is set, the game frequently goes to the second entrance 640 regardless of the game state. Instead of the ball entering, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long in the normal state, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed in the normal state, but the latent state. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and the game machine having the specifications of frequently winning small hits (for example, the 17th embodiment and the 24th embodiment) can also be applied.

FIG. 526 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 when the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment are combined. As shown in FIG. 526, in the game board 13 in this modified example, a second entrance 640 is provided downstream of the through gate 67, and a small hit winning device 2650 is provided downstream thereof, and the small hit is A variable winning device 1650 is provided on the downstream side of the winning device 2650.

In the case of this board configuration, as described above in the 17th embodiment and the 24th embodiment, almost all the right-handed game balls enter the second entrance 640 in the time saving state or the probability change state. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to reach the small hit winning device 2650, while in the normal state or the latent state, a part of the right-handed game ball is the second entrance. The ball enters the 640, and other game balls can overcome the ordinary electric accessory 640a and reach the small hit winning device 2650 and the variable winning device 65 during the closing period of the ordinary electric accessory 640a.

However, as in the 26th embodiment described above, since a detoured (spin-folded) flow path is formed between the small hit winning device 2650 and the variable winning device 1650, the ordinary electric accessory 640a is used. It takes about 2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the second entrance 640 during the closing period to reach the variable winning device 65. Therefore, by setting the period from the start of the probabilistic jackpot in the probabilistic state to the end of the V round (first round) to 2 seconds or less, when the jackpot is won in the probabilistic state, a special symbol is displayed regardless of the jackpot type. It is possible to form a gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of. As a result, as in the 26th embodiment, the probabilistic state can be formed as a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, which is extremely difficult to set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol even if a big hit is won when right-handed. it can.

In the 25th embodiment, the 26th embodiment and the modified example thereof described above, the game balls that have flowed into the distribution device 1755 by the distribution member 1755b alternate between the left guide flow path 1755c and the right guidance flow path 1755d. It was configured to sort, but it is not limited to this. It may be configured so that it is distributed to the right guidance flow path 1755d more frequently than the left guidance flow path 1755c, or it is configured to be distributed to the left guidance flow path 1755c more frequently than the right guidance flow path 1755d. You may. With this configuration, the degree of advantage in the latent state can be changed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be further improved.

<27th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 527 to 532. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the 25th embodiment described above, the game balls distributed to the upstream side (left guide flow path 1755c) of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a by the distribution device 1755 in the latent state are transferred to the small hit winning device 2655. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the downstream side (right guide flow path 1755d) of the ordinary electric accessory 1645a by the distribution device 1755 is configured to enter the second entrance 1645. , It was configured to realize a novel playability in which the latent state is the most advantageous.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 27th embodiment, two types of winning devices, a right variable winning device 6550 and a left variable winning device 6560, are provided as winning devices capable of entering a game ball during a big hit. When the game ball enters the left special area 6560L of the two types of areas, the left special area 6560L and the right normal area 6560R, which are provided inside the left variable winning device 6560, the probability change switch is passed. It is configured to be possible. Further, the left variable winning device 6560L is not provided with a configuration corresponding to the switching member 65h in the 25th embodiment. That is, in the state where the left variable winning device 6560L can enter the ball (the opening / closing door 6560f1 is open), both the left special area 6560L and the right normal area 6560R can enter the game ball (upper). Is in the open state). Therefore, in the second round in which the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 is opened, the game ball that has entered the left special winning device 6560 from above the left special area 6560L basically becomes the left special area 6560L. While entering the ball, the game ball that has entered the left specific winning device 6560 from above the right normal region 6560R basically enters the right normal region 6560R. In other words, the area where the game ball enters the left specific winning device 6560 changes according to the entry position when the game ball enters (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends). Therefore, in the second round in which the left specific winning device 6560 is set so that the ball can be entered, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed by paying attention to the entry position of the game ball.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 27th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. The configuration of the above is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The 25th regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 25th embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 527, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 27th embodiment will be described. FIG. 527 is a front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 527, the second ball entry port 640 in the 27th embodiment is provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the first ball entry port 64, and is provided with an electric accessory 640a. There is. The electric accessory 640a is normally closed, and when it hits a normal symbol, it is opened for a predetermined period to temporarily form a state in which it is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Further, as shown in FIG. 527, in the 27th embodiment, the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is provided in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Therefore, the game ball can reach both the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 just by hitting right, so that the game ball can be hit right while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. It is possible to pass through the through gate 67 or to enter the second entrance 640 during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a simply by continuing to fire. Thereby, the convenience of the player can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 527, in place of the variable winning device 65 in the 25th embodiment, downstream of the flow path (right-handed flow path) provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80. Therefore, two types of variable winning devices (right variable winning device 6550 and left variable winning device 6560) are provided. These two types of variable winning devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. That is, the right variable winning device 6550 is provided on the right side of the front view, and the left variable winning device 6560 is provided on the left side of the front view. In the right variable winning device 6550, the opening / closing plate 6550b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls win) in rounds other than the second round of the jackpot, and the right specific winning opening 6550a And form an open state in which the game ball can enter. The right specific winning opening 6550a is one of the winning openings in which 10 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. Further, while the right specific winning opening 6550a is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 6550b that closes the right specific winning opening 6550a forms a flow path through which the game ball can flow down. That is, the game ball that reaches the right variable winning device 6550 while the right specific winning opening 6550a is set to the closed state (while the opening / closing plate 6550b is closed) rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 6550b. Then, it flows down in the direction of the left variable winning device 6560.

On the other hand, in the left variable winning device 6560, the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened / closed in the second round of the jackpot in an opening / closing pattern according to the jackpot type. While the opening / closing door 6560f1 is open, an open state is formed in which the ball can enter the left specific winning opening 6560a. Further, while the left specific winning opening 6560a is closed, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 that closes the left specific winning opening 6560a forms a flow path through which the game ball can flow down. With the opening / closing door 6560f1 closed, the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 goes to the area where the second entry port 640, the out opening 66, etc. And fall.

As described above, the game ball that has entered the left specific winning opening 6560a enters either the left specific area 6560L or the right normal area 6560R. As described above, since the game ball that has entered the left specific area 6560L passes through the probability change switch (not shown), the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the right normal region 6560R is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as it is without passing through the probability change switch. By providing two types of specific winning openings downstream of the right-handed flow path, during the execution of the jackpot game, simply continuing right-handing will specify the right during the opening period of the right specific winning opening 6550a. It is possible to insert a game ball into the winning opening 6550a, and it is possible to insert a game ball into the left specific winning opening 6560a during the opening period of the left specific winning opening 6560a. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player during the execution of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 527, the right-handed flow path is configured so that the flowing game ball is easily guided to the right side (upstream side) of the right variable winning device 6550 by a large number of nails. In other words, the board configuration is such that it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the right-handed flow path to reach the left variable winning device 6560 directly without going through the right variable winning device 6550. That is, while the opening / closing plate 6560b of the right variable winning device 6550 is closed, only the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 6560b is configured to reach the right variable winning device 6560. Therefore, in the round in which the right specific winning opening 6550a is opened (a round other than the second round of the jackpot), the right-handed game ball enters the right specific winning opening 6550a, so that the left The game ball never reaches the variable winning device 6560.

During the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball may reach the left variable winning device 6560 during the interval period between rounds in which the right specific winning opening 6550a is kept closed, and the left variable winning device 6560 is open. Only during the two rounds to be played. Although the details will be described later, in the 27th embodiment, the game ball that has reached the left variable winning device 6560 after the start of the second round almost enters the right normal region 6560R. There is a possibility of entering the left specific area 6560L when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is closed during the period when both the right specific winning opening 6550a and the left specific winning opening 6560a are closed, such as during an interval period. This is a case where the game ball reaches the flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 and the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened at the stage where the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 flows down by more than half. That is, it is a case where the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened while the opening / closing door 6560f1 is closed and the door advances to the upper side of the left specific area 6560L. In this case, the game ball falls almost directly below and enters the left specific area 6560L. Details of the left variable winning device 6560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 528 and 529.

First, the structure of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 528. FIG. 528 (a) is a front perspective view of the left variable winning device 6560 when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is closed, and FIG. 528 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 6560 when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is open. It is a perspective view.

As shown in FIG. 528 (a), the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is provided with convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c provided for limiting the traveling direction of the game ball (preventing the flow). Since the traveling direction of the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is limited by the convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c (flowing is hindered), the game ball flows down on the opening / closing door 6560f1 along the outer circumference of the convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c. To do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 529 (a), the details of the flow path of the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 will be described. FIG. 529 (a) is a top view of the opening / closing door 6560f1 in a state where the opening / closing door 6560f1 is closed. In the example of FIG. 529 (a), a case where two game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 529 (a), the game ball incident on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 from the right side to the left side in the front view is blocked in the traveling direction by the convex portion 6560f1a, and as a result, is formed on the outer circumference of the convex portion 6560f1a. Detour along. That is, the traveling direction is changed from the front left direction to the front back direction. Then, the game ball that wraps around the left side of the convex portion 6560f1a along the outer circumference of the convex portion 6560f1a then detours along the outer circumference of the convex portion 6560f1b as a result of being blocked in the traveling direction by the convex portion 6560f1b. It wraps around to the left side of 6560f1b. The game ball that wraps around to the left side of the convex portion 6560f1b further detours along the outer circumference of the convex portion 6560f1c as a result of being blocked from the traveling direction by the convex portion 6560f1c, wraps around to the left side of the convex portion 6560f1c, and opens and closes the door. It flows down to the left of 6560f1.

As described above, on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1, a zigzag-shaped flow path is formed by the convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c. As a result, the opening / closing door is compared with the case where the convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c are not provided (that is, the game ball can flow linearly on the opening / closing door 6560f1 from the right direction to the left direction in the front view). The period required for the 6560f1 to flow down the upper surface can be lengthened. Therefore, in the interval period after the end of the first round, the right-handed game ball passes over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 in a short time (a waste ball is generated). It can be suppressed. In other words, at the start of the second round, almost all the game balls hit to the right in the interval period after the end of the first round can enter the left specific winning opening 6560a (on the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1). Alternatively, since it can be arranged in the flow path in front of the left variable winning device 6560), the game ball can be efficiently entered into the left specific winning opening 6560a at the start of the second round.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 528 (a). As shown in FIG. 528 (a), two regions (left specific region 6560L, right normal region 6560R) in which a game ball can enter are provided side by side in the left variable winning device 6560. At the boundary between these two regions, a central protrusion 6560C is provided to prevent the game ball that has entered one region from moving to the other region. By providing the central protrusion 6560C, the game ball that has entered the left specific area 6560L moves to the right normal area 6560R without passing through the probability change switch (not shown), or vice versa. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the right normal area 6560R from moving to the left specific area 6560L and passing through the probability change switch. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player surely determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch according to the position where the game ball has entered, in the second round of the jackpot, the game ball enters the left variable winning device 6560. The game can be played by paying attention to the position of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 528 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 528 (b), the opening / closing door 6560f1 slides from the front side of the front view toward the back side of the front view, and enters the inside of the game board 13 through the opening provided in the game board 13. It is stored. As a result, the left specific winning opening 6560a is opened. That is, the upper part of the left specific area 6560L and the upper part of the right normal area 6560R are opened. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the left variable winning device 6560 can enter the left specific winning opening 6560a. As shown in FIG. 528 (b), in the left variable winning device 6560, the right normal area 6560R is provided on the right side of the left specific area 6560L, so that the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened. Almost all the game balls that later enter the left specific winning opening 6560a from the right side enter the right normal area 6560R. The game ball enters the left specific area 6560L when the game ball reaches the opening / closing door 6560f1 on the downstream side of the convex portion 6560f1b (that is, above the left special area 6560L in the opening / closing door 6560f1). This is the case when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened.

Here, the flow direction of the game ball when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is set to the open state while the game ball is on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 529 (b). FIG. 529 (b) is a top view of the opening / closing door 6560f1 when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened while the game ball is on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1. As shown in FIG. 529 (b), the game ball flowing down the right half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is directly or via the right slope (right slope RS) of the central protrusion 6560C in the right normal region 6560R. Fall into. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 falls directly or through the left slope (left slope LS) of the central protrusion 6560C to the left specific area 6560L. Since the game ball that has fallen into the left specific area 6560L passes through the probability change switch, a probability change state of a special symbol advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot ends. The convex portion 6560f1b is arranged so as to be substantially at the center position in the left-right direction of the opening / closing door 6560f1. That is, the area where the door falls when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened changes depending on whether or not the convex portion 6560f1b is passed. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 has passed the convex portion 6560f1, and thus the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

When the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened by sliding to the back side of the front view, the height of the opening for accommodating the opening / closing door 6560f1 is sufficiently lower than the diameter of the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball that was flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 at the time when the sliding movement of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is started to be stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening / closing door 6560f1. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 6560f1 slides into the game board 13, the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 can be dropped into the specific winning opening 6560a.

Although not shown, the left specific area 6560L and the right normal area 6560R are provided with discharge ports capable of discharging game balls, respectively, and are provided on the left specific area 6560L side. A probability change switch is provided for. In this way, by not sharing the discharge port and providing a discharge port for each area, it is possible to more smoothly discharge the game ball that has entered the inside of the left variable winning device 6560. In other words, it takes time for the game balls inside the left variable winning device 6560 to be ejected, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the second round is not completed indefinitely.

As described above, in the 27th embodiment, there are two types of regions (left specific region 6560L, left specific region 6560L) in which the upper side is always open while the opening / closing door 6560f1 is set to the open state inside the left variable winning device 6560. The right normal area 6560R) is provided, and whether or not the ball can enter the left specific area 6560L can be changed depending on the length of the interval period.

Here, as a gaming machine in which a game ball enters a specific area inside a variable winning device during a big hit and an advantageous probability change state is given after the big hit is completed, the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment is used. In addition, it is generally known that a distribution member for distributing the traveling direction of the game ball is provided inside the variable winning device. That is, the distribution member is variably operated in a specific variable pattern during the jackpot, and in the probabilistic jackpot, the variable winning device is set to be in a state where the ball can be entered during the period when the distribution member is distributed to the specific area. In the jackpot, by setting the variable winning device to the ball-entry state only during the period when the ball is distributed to the area different from the specific area by the distribution member, the jackpot that enables the ball to enter the specific area and the non-ball-entry Specifications that distinguish it from possible jackpots are generally known. However, when this specification is adopted, in addition to the opening / closing control of the opening / closing door of the variable winning device, the variable control of the distribution member inside the variable winning device must be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game is being executed. There was a problem that the processing load in the above was increased. It is also known that all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device are entered into a specific area without providing a distribution member, but in this specification, a variable winning is usually made when a big hit is obtained. Since it is necessary to execute opening / closing control (for example, opening the opening / closing door only for a very short time (for example, 0.01 seconds)) so as not to let the game ball enter the device, in a normal jackpot, in a jackpot game. There is a problem that the number of prize balls that can be obtained is reduced.

On the other hand, in the 27th embodiment, the left specific area 6560L and the right specific area 6560R are simply arranged side by side in the left variable winning device 6560, and the left specific winning opening 6560a is arranged. There is no mechanism for distributing the game ball that has entered the ball to any area. That is, it depends only on the entry position when entering the left specific winning opening 6560a (whether the entry is made from the right half of the right half of the right half of the right half of the entry surface or the left half of the entry surface). Therefore, it is possible to change whether the game ball enters the left specific area 6560L or the right normal area 6560R. As a result, in the second round (V round) of the jackpot, it is only necessary to execute the opening / closing control of the opening / closing door 6560f1, so that the processing load in the V round can be reduced. Further, in the 27th embodiment, once the left specific winning opening 6560a is opened, the game ball can only enter from the right side of the left specific winning opening 6560a. Therefore, in a normal jackpot, two rounds Even if the left specific winning opening 6560a is opened to the eyes for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the left specific area 6560L. That is, even in a normal jackpot, many (around 10) game balls can be won in the left specific winning opening 6560a to obtain prize balls based on the winning, so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the normal jackpot Can be more. Therefore, even if it is usually a big hit, the player can be satisfied with the prize spherical surface.

In the 27th embodiment, a plurality of (two types) types are provided according to the jackpot type as the interval period from the end of the first round to the start of the second round. That is, a relatively long (4 seconds) interval period and a relatively short (0.5 seconds) interval period are provided. As described above, during one round, basically all the game balls hit to the right enter (win) the right specific winning opening 6550a (the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 cannot be reached). (It is possible), so it is the interval period after the end of one round (that is, the right specific winning opening 6550a is closed), and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is not available until it can pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 6550b. The game ball cannot reach the door. It takes about 1 second for the right-handed game ball to reach the right variable winning device 6550, so it takes about 1 second before the end of the first round and during the interval period after the end of the first round. Only the right-handed game ball may pass through the upper surface of the closed opening / closing plate 6550b and reach the upper surface of the closed opening / closing door 6560f1. However, when a short interval period (0.5 seconds) is set, the interval period ends before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the closed opening / closing door 6560f1 through the opening / closing plate 6550b (). That is, the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened after the second round is started). In this case, in the second round, the game ball can be entered only from the right side with respect to the left specific winning opening 6560a. Therefore, since the game ball enters only the right normal region 6560R, the probability change switch cannot be passed through, so that the probability change state advantageous to the player is not given (a disadvantageous low probability state is given).

On the other hand, when a long interval period (4 seconds) is set, it is only necessary to keep hitting the game ball to the right during the interval period, and the downstream side of the path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 during the closing period. Since the game ball can reach (above the left special area 6560L), the game ball that has been rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 can be dropped into the area directly below at the start of the second round. That is, since it is possible to easily put the game ball into the left special area 6560L, it is possible to shift to a probabilistic state of an advantageous special symbol after the end of the big hit.

In the 27th embodiment, by providing the three convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1, the game balls bypass the convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c, and the game balls pass through the opening / closing door 6560f1. It was configured to have a longer transit period, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 6560f1a to 6560f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 has a friction coefficient higher than that of other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the left variable winning device 6560, etc.). It may be made of a material having a large coefficient (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to prevent the game ball from rolling (for example, an uneven surface may be provided).

In the 27th embodiment, only two types of lengths, 0.5 seconds and 4 seconds, are provided as the length of the interval period after the end of one round. That is, even if the player continues to hit right, the period during which the game ball cannot reach above the left specific area 6560L on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 and the interval period during the closing period of the left specific winning opening 6560a. Even if the game ball is launched after the start of the game, only two types are provided, that is, a period during which the game ball can be reached above the left specific area 6560L with a margin, but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, even if the player hits the right side continuously from the start of the big hit to the start of the second round, the game ball goes up to the upper part of the left specific area 6560L during the closing period of the left specific winning opening 6560a. It may be configured to provide an interval period (for example, 2.5 seconds) having a length that depends on luck (the path when the game ball flows down the right-handed flow path). With this configuration, it is possible to realize a game property in which whether or not the game ball enters the left special area 6560L depending on luck can be changed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 530, a characteristic display effect (V-round suggestion effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the jackpot game in the 27th embodiment will be described. In the 27th embodiment, as described above, when the left specific winning opening 6560a is opened in the second round (V round) of the jackpot, up to the left half (above the left specific area 6560L) on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1. If the game ball is not in progress, it is impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to enter the left specific area 6560L during the opening period of the opening / closing door 6560f1. That is, if the game ball is not continuously hit to the right from the interval period before the start of the second round (V round), the opportunity to enter the game ball into the left specific area 6560L is lost. There is.

For this reason, when a player who is not accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, he / she waits for the start of two rounds (V round) without launching the game ball during the interval period. Regardless of the length of the interval period, there is a risk that it will not be possible to enter the game ball into the left specific area 6560L (pass the probability change switch). Therefore, in the 27th embodiment, the effect of urging the game ball to reach the left half range (above the left specific area 6560L) of the opening / closing plate 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 from the first round. (V-round suggestion effect) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from waiting without firing the game ball during the interval period, so that the interval period (4 second interval) that makes it easy for the player to enter the left special area 6560L. When the period) is set, the game ball can reach the left half on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 by the start of the second round (V round) by hitting right during the interval period. Therefore, even if a beginner who is not familiar with the pachinko machine 10 is playing the game, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the game.

FIG. 530 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the V-round suggestion effect displayed from the first round of the jackpot to the interval period after the end of the first round. As shown in FIG. 530, when the V-round suggestion effect is executed, the characters "Let's reach CAHNCE by the start of the next round !!" and the left variable winning device 6560 appear in the center of the main display area Dm. A display area HR10 is formed in which a schematic diagram of the above and an image of an arrow pointing to the left side of the left variable winning device 6560 are displayed. Further, in the schematic diagram of the left variable winning device 6560, the characters "CHANGE" are displayed on the left half, while the characters "NG" are displayed on the right half. Based on these display contents, if the game ball can reach the left half of the left variable winning device 6560 before the next round (V round) is started, the player is informed that there is some privilege. Can be intuitively understood. Therefore, until the second round is started, the player can positively hit the game ball to the right, and the player loses (even if a long interval period is set). Regardless of this, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the left specific area 6560L). Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the 27th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 531, the details of the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the 27th embodiment will be described. Since the other configurations (other than the first type selection table 202b) in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 have not been changed from the 25th embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 531, six types of jackpot types are defined in the first hit type selection table 202b in the 27th embodiment. Specifically, as the jackpot of the first special symbol, three types of jackpots A27 to C27 are defined, and as the jackpot of the second special symbol, three types of jackpots D27 to F27 are defined. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 531, "big hit A27" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9" (FIG. 531). 202b1). This "big hit A27" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and a relatively long 4-second interval period is set as the interval period immediately before the 2nd round (V round) (after the end of 1 round). is there. If an interval period of 4 seconds is set after the end of one round, as described above, the ball will reach a position where it is possible to enter the left specific area 6560L simply by continuing to hit right during the interval period. be able to. Therefore, the "big hit A27" is in a probable state after the big hit is completed by continuously hitting the game ball to the right from the round period of one round to the start of two rounds according to the V round suggestion effect (see FIG. It is a jackpot type (a type of probability variation jackpot) to be given.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 counter values are "big hit A27", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A27" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A27" is a big hit type that has the largest number of rounds and has an interval period that allows the ball to easily enter the left specific area 6560L, and is therefore the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. It is one of the.

Further, as shown in FIG. 531, "big hit B27" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 59" (). See 202b2 in FIG. 531). This "big hit B27" has 5 rounds, and like the "big hit A27", an interval period (interval period of 4 seconds) that allows the ball to easily enter the left specific area 6560L is set. It is a jackpot type (5-round probability variation jackpot).

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit B27", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B27" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). Since this "big hit B27" has the smallest number of rounds, it is the most disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Therefore, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the advantageous state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 531, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "60 to 99" in association with the "big hit C27" with respect to the first special symbol ( See 202b3 in FIG. 531). This "big hit C27" has 5 rounds, and a relatively short 0.5 second interval period is set as the interval period immediately before the 2nd round (V round) (after the end of 1 round). It is a type. As described above, the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 within 0.5 seconds after the opening / closing plate 6550b is closed after one round is completed and the game ball can reach the left specific winning device 6560. Since it is impossible (difficult) to reach the game ball to the left half (above the left specific area 6560L), the "big hit C27" is not given a probabilistic state after the big hit (it is extremely unlikely to be given). ) It is a jackpot type (usually one type of jackpot).

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 counter values are "big hit C27", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C27" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). This "big hit C27" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the smallest and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is also a low probability state of a disadvantageous special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 531, "big hit D27" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4" (). See 202b4 in FIG. 531). This "big hit D27" has 16 rounds, and like the "big hit A27" and "big hit B27", an interval period (4 seconds interval) that allows the ball to easily enter the left specific area 6560L. It is a jackpot type (16 round probability variation jackpot) for which the period) is set.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, five counter values are "big hit D27", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit D27" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit D27" is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is also an advantageous probabilistic state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 531, "big hit E27" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 59" (). See 202b5 in FIG. 531). This "big hit E27" has 10 rounds, and like the "big hit D27", an interval period (interval period of 4 seconds) that allows the ball to easily enter the left specific area 6560L is set. It is a jackpot type (10 round probability variation jackpot).

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 55 counter values are "big hit E27", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E27" is determined. The ratio is 55% (55/100). This "big hit E27" is more disadvantageous than "big hit A27" and "big hit D27" (16 round jackpot) on the prize spherical surface, and is more advantageous than "big hit B27" and "big hit C27" (5 round jackpot). In addition, since the probability change state is basically advantageous after the end of the jackpot, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 531, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as being associated with the "big hit F27" in the range of "60 to 99" with respect to the second special symbol (). See 202b6 in FIG. 531). This "big hit F27" has 10 rounds, and like the "big hit C27", it is difficult to put the game ball into the left specific area 6560L (interval period of 0.5 seconds). Is the jackpot type (10 rounds normal jackpot) for which is set.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 counter values are "big hit F7", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit F7" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Like the "big hit E27", this "big hit F27" is more disadvantageous than the "big hit A27" and "big hit D27" (16 round jackpot), and the "big hit B27" and "big hit C27" (5 round jackpot). ) Is more advantageous than. Further, since the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is almost the normal state of the special symbol, it is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the 27th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 532, the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 27th embodiment will be described. Here, the 27th embodiment differs only in that the jackpot operation setting process 27 (Z1381) is executed instead of the jackpot operation setting process 6 in the 25th embodiment (and the sixth embodiment). The details of the jackpot operation setting process 27 (Z1381) will be described with reference to FIG. 532. The jackpot operation setting process 27 (Z1381) is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of each specific winning opening (right specific winning opening 6550a, left specific winning opening 6560a). In the jackpot operation setting process 27 (Z1381) in the 27th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the second round (V round), and it is the start timing of the second round (that is, the left specific winning opening). When it is determined (S4111: Yes), the opening / closing scenario of the left specific winning opening 6560a is read out (S4112). Here, in the 27th embodiment, the opening pattern (opening / closing scenario) of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is different between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot. More specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot (big hit C27, F27), the opening / closing door 6560f1 is set to the open state at the start of the second round, and the open state is set to the open state for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or the game). An opening pattern (opening / closing scenario) that is maintained until 10 balls are won is set. On the other hand, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot (big hit A27, B27, C27, D27), the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened at the start of the second round, and thereafter, the opening period of 1 second and the closing period of 3 seconds are up to 3 times. A repeated opening pattern (opening scenario) is set.

The difference between the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot is that in the probability variation jackpot, the game ball was not fired during the interval period after the end of one round (the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 during the interval period). This is to provide relief to the player (who could not reach the game ball to the area). That is, by continuing to hit the game ball to the right for two rounds, it is possible to reach the game ball on the left half (above the left specific area 6560L) on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560a during the closing period of 3 seconds. Will be. Therefore, in the 1-second opening period set after the 3-second closing period, the game ball that has reached the left half of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 can be dropped into the left specific area 6560L. That is, the opportunity to send the game ball to the position (the left half on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1) where the ball can enter the left specific area 6560L can be given even during the round period of 2 rounds (V round). Therefore, in the probability variation jackpot, the game ball can be more reliably entered into the left specific area 6560L. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which the player loses the ball because the game ball cannot enter the left specific area 6560L despite the probability variation jackpot. It is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, the start of the opening / closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S4113), and the processing is shifted to S4115. On the other hand, in the processing of S4111, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the 2nd round (V round) (S4111: No), the opening of the right specific winning opening 6550a is set (S4114), and the processing is performed in S4115. Move to. In the process of S4115, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S4115), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot operation setting process 27 (see FIG. 532), the opening operation can be set according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds.

As described above, in the 27th embodiment, in the right-handed flow path, the left variable winning device 6560 is arranged on the downstream side of the right variable winning device 6550, and the opening / closing plate 6550b of the right variable winning device 6560 is closed. It is configured so that the right-handed game ball can reach the left variable winning device 6560 only while it is. The left specific area 6560L is provided on the left side inside the left variable winning device 6560 so that the entered game ball can pass through the probability change switch (easily), while the right side does not pass through the probability change switch. The right normal area 6560R, which is possible (difficult), is provided, and only when the game ball passes the probability change switch in one jackpot, the probability variation state advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot ends. .. Since the upper part of these two regions is always open while the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 is set to the open state, it is located at the entry position of the game ball with respect to the left specific winning opening 6560a. It is configured so that whether or not the probability change state is given can be changed accordingly. That is, when the game ball enters the left half of the left specific winning opening 6560a, it enters the left specific area 6560L, while when it enters the right half, it enters the right normal area 6560R. Sphere. Here, since the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed flow path and passed through the right variable winning device 6550 reaches the left variable winning device 6560 from the right side, the opening / closing door 6560 of the left variable winning device 6560 is opened. After that, the game ball that has reached the left variable winning device 6560 enters the right side of the left specific winning opening 6560a and enters the right normal area 6560a. There is a possibility of entering the left specific area 6560L when the opening / closing door 6560f1 is closed during the period when both the right specific winning opening 6550a and the left specific winning opening 6560a are closed, such as during an interval period. This is a case where the game ball reaches the flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 and the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened at the stage where the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 flows down by more than half. That is, it is a case where the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened while the opening / closing door 6560f1 is closed and the door advances to the upper side of the left specific area 6560L. In this case, the game ball falls almost directly below and enters the left specific area 6560L. In the 27th embodiment, the opening / closing plate 6550b of the right variable winning device 6550 is closed at the end of the first round, and the left variable winning device 6560 can be reached, and then the second round (V round) is started. As the interval period until the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened, a period in which the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 can be reached and a period in which the left half cannot be reached are provided. In the probability variation jackpot, as the interval period after the end of one round, an interval period of 4 seconds that can reach the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 is set, while in the normal jackpot, the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 can be reached. It is configured to set an interval period of 0.5 seconds.

Here, as a gaming machine in which a game ball enters a specific area inside a variable winning device during a big hit and an advantageous probability change state is given after the big hit is completed, the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment is used. In addition, it is generally known that a distribution member for distributing the traveling direction of the game ball is provided inside the variable winning device. That is, the distribution member is variably operated in a specific variable pattern during the jackpot, and in the probabilistic jackpot, the variable winning device is set to be in a state where the ball can be entered during the period when the distribution member is distributed to the specific area. In the jackpot, by setting the variable winning device to the ball-entry state only during the period when the ball is distributed to the area different from the specific area by the distribution member, the jackpot that enables the ball to enter the specific area and the non-ball-entry Specifications that distinguish it from possible jackpots are generally known. However, when this specification is adopted, in addition to the opening / closing control of the opening / closing door of the variable winning device, the variable control of the distribution member inside the variable winning device must be performed during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game is being executed. There was a problem that the processing load in the above was increased. It is also known that all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device are entered into a specific area without providing a distribution member, but in this specification, a variable winning is usually made when a big hit is obtained. Since it is necessary to execute opening / closing control (for example, opening the opening / closing door only for a very short time (for example, 0.01 seconds)) so as not to let the game ball enter the device, in a normal jackpot, in a jackpot game. There is a problem that the number of prize balls that can be obtained is reduced.

On the other hand, in the 27th embodiment, the left specific area 6560L and the right specific area 6560R are simply arranged side by side in the left variable winning device 6560, and the left specific winning opening 6560a is arranged. There is no mechanism for distributing the game ball that has entered the ball to any area. That is, it depends only on the entry position when entering the left specific winning opening 6560a (whether the entry is made from the right half of the right half of the right half of the right half of the entry surface or the left half of the entry surface). Therefore, it is possible to change whether the game ball enters the left specific area 6560L or the right normal area 6560R. As a result, in the second round (V round) of the jackpot, it is only necessary to execute the opening / closing control of the opening / closing door 6560f1, so that the processing load in the V round can be reduced. Further, in the 27th embodiment, once the left specific winning opening 6560a is opened, the game ball can only enter from the right side of the left specific winning opening 6560a. Therefore, in a normal jackpot, two rounds Even if the left specific winning opening 6560a is opened to the eyes for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the left specific area 6560L. That is, even in a normal jackpot, many (around 10) game balls can be won in the left specific winning opening 6560a to obtain prize balls based on the winning, so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the normal jackpot Can be more. Therefore, even if it is usually a big hit, the player can be satisfied with the prize spherical surface.

In the 27th embodiment, the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 is configured to be opened only in the second round of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the right variable winning device 6550 is opened in the immediately preceding round, the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 may be opened in any round. Further, the number of rounds for opening the opening / closing door 6560f1 of the left variable winning device 6560 is not limited to one round, and the opening / closing door 6560f1 may be opened in a plurality of rounds. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 27th embodiment, the game ball that reaches the left variable winning device 6560 with the opening / closing door 6560f1 open is almost certainly configured to enter the right normal area 6560R, but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. Depending on the momentum of the game ball, the flow direction, the angle of incidence on the left specific winning opening 6560a, etc., the game ball that reaches the left variable winning device 6560 after the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened also enters the left specific area 6560L. It may be the configuration to obtain. In this case, the path between the left variable winning device 6560 and the right variable winning device 6550 is provided with a protrusion or the like that makes it easy for the contacted game ball to bounce, and the left variable winning device 6560 is viewed from the upper right direction in the bounced state. It may be configured so that only the game ball incident on the left specific winning opening 6560a can enter the left specific area 6560L. With this configuration, even while the opening / closing door 6560f1 is open, attention can be paid to the ball entry position (whether the ball enters the left side or the right side) with respect to the left specific winning opening 6560a of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the V round.

In the 27th embodiment, the left specific area 6560L and the right normal area 6560R are provided inside the left variable winning device 6560, and the game ball is placed only when the game ball enters the left specific area 6560L. Although it was configured so that it could pass through the probability change switch, it is not always necessary to provide the right normal region 6560R. For example, the game ball that has entered the inside of the left variable winning device 6560 is configured to always pass through the probability change switch, and the opening time of the opening / closing door 6560f1 in the V round is extremely shortened (for example, 0.2 seconds). It may be configured. That is, when the game ball is on the flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 at the start of the V round, the game ball on the upper surface is moved to the left specific winning opening 6560a at the same time as the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened. On the other hand, if the game ball is not on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 at the start of the V round, the game ball is almost entered into the right specific winning opening 6560a during the V round. It may be configured so that it is impossible to make it. Then, as an interval period after the end of one round, even if the player continues to hit right from the first round to the start of the second round (V round), the game is played up to the opening / closing door 6560f1 by the start of the second round (V round). An interval period (for example, 0.1 second) of a length that makes it difficult for the ball to reach, and an interval period (for example, 2 seconds) that allows the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1. It may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to realize extremely simple game playability, in which it is confirmed that the game ball enters the left specific winning opening 6560a and shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It is possible to provide a more understandable playability.

In the 27th embodiment, it is possible to enter a game ball from the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, while in the case of a normal jackpot, the game ball wins a variable left. By configuring so that the prize is won only from the right side of the device 6560, it is configured to make a difference whether or not to pass the probability change switch. That is, although it is configured to change whether or not to pass the probability change switch according to the entry position of the game ball with respect to the left specific winning opening 6560a, the object to be changed according to the entry position is not limited to this. .. For example, the left half of the left specific winning opening 6560a may be shielded by a decorative body or the like to make it difficult for the player to see, and then all the game balls that have entered the left specific winning opening 6560a pass through the probability change switch. Good. Then, the opening period of the left specific winning opening 6560a may be shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds). That is, while it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the game ball that has reached the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 has entered the left specific winning opening 6560a, the game ball flows down to the front side of the left half. If so, the configuration may be such that it can be easily visually recognized whether or not the ball has entered the left specific winning opening 6560a. With this configuration, when the game ball exceeds the left half, it becomes difficult to know whether or not it has passed the probability change switch, so it is possible to keep the player feeling the expectation for the probability change state for a longer time. On the other hand, if the left half is not reached, it is possible to realize the playability that can be immediately understood whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state.

In the 27th embodiment, by providing the right variable winning device 6550 on the upstream side of the left variable winning device 6560, the period during which the game ball can reach the left variable winning device 6560 during the jackpot is limited. Although it was configured, the configuration for limiting the period during which the left variable winning device 6560 can be reached is not limited to this. For example, a second ball entrance 640 may be provided on the upstream side of the left variable winning device 6560. That is, while the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is open, the right-handed game ball enters the second entrance 6400 to reach the left variable winning device 6560. It may be configured to be unreachable. With this configuration, if the electric accessory 640a is opened during the interval period immediately before the V round, only the second entrance 640 will win a prize during the interval period, so that it is closed. It becomes difficult to advance the game ball to the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 and reach the left half. Therefore, in the interval period immediately before the V round, it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes it hope that the normal symbol does not hit. Further, for example, in the right-handed flow path, a distribution member is provided to distribute the flow path to the left variable winning device 6560 or the flow path to the direction different from the left variable winning device 6560. , The period of distribution to the flow path to the left variable winning device 6560 may be changed according to the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, the interval period after the end of one round is the same regardless of the jackpot type, and in the normal jackpot, it is not distributed to the flow path to the left variable winning device 6560 until the end of the interval period. While the operation of the distribution member is controlled, in the probability variation jackpot, the operation of the distribution member may be controlled so that the distribution member is distributed to the flow path toward the left variable winning device 6560 at the start of the interval period.

In the 27th embodiment, it depends on whether or not the game ball that has reached the path between the right variable winning device 6550 and the left variable winning device 6560 reaches the left half of the opening / closing door 6560f1 during the interval period. Therefore, after the V-round is started, whether or not the game ball enters the left specific area 6560L is variable. That is, the game ball can reach the left variable winning device 6560 immediately after the period during which the game ball can reach the left variable winning device 6560 and cannot enter the left specific winning opening 6560a has elapsed. In addition, the period during which the ball can be entered into the left specific winning opening 6560a is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a period (first period) in which the game ball can reach the left variable winning device 6560 and cannot enter the left specific winning opening 6560a has elapsed, during the first period. A period (second period) may be set in which a game ball other than the game ball heading for the left variable winning device cannot reach the left variable winning device 6560. Then, after the lapse of the second period, a period (third period) in which the game ball can reach the left variable winning device 6560 and can enter the left specific winning opening 6560a may be set. .. More specifically, for example, the length of the path between the right variable winning device 6550 and the left variable winning device 6560 may be made longer, and the V round may be the third and subsequent rounds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the right variable winning device 6550 during the interval period set after the round two rounds before the V round is completed reaches the left variable winning device 6560 before and after the start of the V round. May be. In this case, in addition to the method of changing the interval period according to the jackpot type, by changing the length of the round period (the length of the second period) of the round before the V round, the left specific area is 6560L. The jackpot type that can be entered and the jackpot type that is difficult to reach may be provided. With this configuration, the period during which it is not known whether or not the game ball will enter the left specific area 6560L (the period during which the expectation for entering the left specific area 6560L can be maintained) can be further increased. Since it can be lengthened, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 27th embodiment, the right variable winning device 6550 is provided on the upstream side of the left variable winning device 6560, and by changing the interval period immediately before the V round, a game for the left specific winning opening 6560a immediately after the start of the V round. The structure was such that the entry position of the ball was variable. That is, when a long (4 seconds) interval period is set, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter from the left half side of the left specific winning opening 6560a at the start of the V round, while it is short (0.5 seconds). When the interval period is set, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter from the right half side of the left specific winning opening 6560a at the start of the V round (the game ball cannot enter the left half side). Although it was composed, it is not limited to this. For example, there are a plurality of variable winning devices (for example, a first variable winning device and a first variable winning device) provided with a specific area (a region in which a game ball enters during a big hit and a probability change state is given after the big hit ends). (2 types of 2 variable winning devices) will be provided, and the 1st variable winning device will be arranged on the upstream side (right side) and the 2nd variable winning device will be arranged on the downstream side (left side). Then, a jackpot type that makes it easy to win the first variable winning device and a jackpot type that makes it easy to win the second variable winning device during the V round may be provided. Further, in this case, it is more effective to configure the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device to have different winning rates for a specific area. More specifically, for example, a game ball that has entered the inside of the first variable winning device enters a specific area at a rate of 20%, whereas the game ball has entered the inside of the second variable winning device. The game ball may be configured to enter a specific area at a rate of 80%. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of variable winning device into which the game ball enters in the V round, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the 27th embodiment, the V round is fixed to the second round of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on the jackpot type, any round other than the first round may be configured to be a V round. With this configuration, it is expected that the next round will be the V round in some or all of the rounds set before the V round, including at least the round immediately before the V round. It may be configured to execute an effect that suggests the degree. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the V round will start, so that the player can play the game with a sense of tension during the execution of the jackpot game. ..

In the 27th embodiment, as the interval period immediately before the V round, it is difficult to reach the left variable winning device 6560 during the interval period and the period of the length that can reach the left side on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1 during the interval period. The configuration was such that a period of various lengths was provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a longer interval period (for example, 10 seconds) may be set for a part or all of the probability variation jackpot. That is, even if the right-handed hit is started from the middle of the interval period, the interval period of a length that can sufficiently reach the left side of the opening / closing door 6560f1 by the start of the V round is set. Good. Further, in this case, the firing status of the player is determined in the first half of the interval period (for example, the first 4 seconds), and if the game ball is not fired, a warning effect for strongly urging right-handed is executed. May be good. With this configuration, the player waits until the start of the V round without hitting right during the interval period immediately before the V round, and the probability is low after the jackpot ends despite the probability change jackpot. It can be suppressed that it becomes.

In the 27th embodiment, in the probability variation jackpot, 4 seconds is set as the interval period immediately before the V round, and the opening / closing door 6560f1 is opened at the start of the V round as the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 6560f1 in the V round. After that, the opening pattern (opening scenario) in which the opening period of 1 second and the closing period of 3 seconds are repeated up to 3 times was set, but the interval period and the opening pattern in the probability variation jackpot are limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in a part of the probability variation jackpot, the interval period may be set to 0.5 seconds. Even with this configuration, by continuing to hit right during the 3-second closing period during the V-round, the game ball can reach the left side on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6560f1, so that the game ball can reach the left side for the subsequent 1 second. The game ball can be entered into the left specific area 6560L during the opening period of. Therefore, with a short interval period, it is possible to provide a reversal pattern that allows the player to enter the left specific area 6560L after making the player think that he / she has won the normal jackpot. It is possible to improve the interest in. Further, the opening pattern in the normal jackpot may be similar to the opening pattern in the probability variation jackpot, but may be configured to provide an opening pattern in which the ball cannot enter the left specific area 6560L. Specifically, for example, in a part of the case of a normal jackpot, an opening pattern in which a 1-second opening period and a 1.5-second opening period are repeated up to 3 times may be set. .. With this configuration, even if the opening / closing door 6560f1 is closed in 1 second during the V round, the probability variation jackpot is not fixed, so we strongly hope that it will be closed for 3 seconds. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball number command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control burden on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means have been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating the above, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110, which is different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The process for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In the sixth, eighth, and ninth embodiments described above, the first operating port 704 for opening the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the right second ball entry port 64b are opened inside the sorting device 700. The configuration is such that a second operating port 707 is provided for the operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the right second ball entry port 64b may be provided directly inside the sorting device 700. That is, the right first ball entry port 64a2 may be provided in place of the first operation port 704, and the right second ball entry port 64b may be provided in place of the second operation port 707. With this configuration, the first operating port 704, the second operating port 707, the first operating accessory 645a, and the second operating accessory 645b can be deleted, so that the board surface configuration can be simplified. it can. Therefore, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the cost rate can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball number command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control burden on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 is held up to four times, and the through gate 67 is held up to four times. The number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol. As such, for example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different depending on the game state, but the game state (time reduction) which is advantageous to the player is not limited to this. A left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 may be executed depending on the case of the state) and the case of the game state (normal state) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. .. Further, the left-handed game may be executed during the time saving state, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth to determine that it has been operated by a lever-shaped operating means or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the production mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. Although it is used as an effect operation means for the purpose, it is sufficient if the effect modes of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 can be changed based on the player's operation on the frame button 22, for example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operating means (frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display can be input. A control device capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of production operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of production operation means can be centrally managed, so that the production operation can be performed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation on the means.

Distribution of jackpot types (ratio), number of time reductions and probability changes (ST times) after the end of jackpots, jackpot probability and small hit probability, hit probability of ordinary symbols, number of prize balls for winning each winning opening, probability variation limit Numerical values (probabilities) related to game specifications such as the number of times are not limited to the numerical values of each of the above embodiments, and can be arbitrarily changed as long as the purpose of each embodiment is not changed. By increasing the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, increasing the number of time reductions and STs, increasing the jackpot probability and small hit probability, increasing the number of prize balls, and increasing the probability variation limit number, the game The degree of advantage of the person can be further increased. On the contrary, the ratio of advantageous jackpot types is lowered, the number of time reductions and STs is reduced, the jackpot probability and small hit probability are lowered, the number of prize balls is reduced, and the probability variation limit is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot can be changed according to the setting as a pachinko machine. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The degree of advantage for each setting may be changed by changing the ratio according to the setting. Further, for example, the rate at which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the big hit is changed according to the setting, or a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) can be changed. The rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift) to) is determined may be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly increased (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. Then, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot finishes in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of jackpot rounds to play the game. be able to. Alternatively, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be set to be higher than in other settings. With this configuration, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot type may be provided so as to be easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probabilistic state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that the chance of winning a prize ball becomes a small hit. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a plurality of steps, the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b referred to when the fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control device 110 is selected based on the set setting value. A detailed effect that is executed as a variation effect, such as different types of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol is selected by the voice lamp control device 113. It is preferable to configure so that the types of various selection tables referred to when selecting the mode are different. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable effect to be executed, so that the variable effect that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

Further, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is different based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, the setting set as the effect mode of the operation effect. The effect mode of "setting suggestion" for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each set value, and is executed in the effect mode of "setting suggestion". It is preferable to configure the effect contents of the operation effect to be different according to each set value, and to change the selection ratio of other effect modes according to the set value. With this configuration, when the operation effect of "setting suggestion" that directly suggests the set value is executed, the effect content is displayed, and when other operation effects are executed, each effect mode. By grasping the selection ratio of the above in a complex manner, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player is interested in the various operation effects to be executed. be able to.

Further, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to be different depending on the set gaming state, for example, from the setting "1" which is disadvantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value can be set in 6 steps up to the setting "6" which is advantageous to the player, the settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game which is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (probability change state) is set, and the settings "4" to "6" are set, and the first game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. 2 By making the selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the gaming state (time saving state) is set the same, the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value disadvantageous to the player is set is played. It is possible to make the player think that the set value that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, the effect mode is based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (big hit lottery result, set game state, selected fluctuation pattern (variation time)). By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the player from easily discriminating the set value set in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Short time finish with small hit)
A discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, a display means that displays identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and an operation that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. The target display executing means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the first display means. When the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the determination result is stopped and displayed, the small privilege game execution means for executing the small privilege game different from the privilege game and the privilege game execution means are executed. After the privilege game is completed, it is set by a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means. The end condition setting means for setting the end condition of the second game state is provided, and the end condition setting means is established based on the fact that the dynamic display is executed a predetermined number of times by the dynamic display execution means. The first termination condition to be performed, the second termination condition that can be established based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the first discrimination result, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the second discrimination result. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is configured so that at least a third termination condition that can be satisfied based on the above can be set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a game machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery can be easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned game machine, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) predetermined by the type of the privileged game to be executed, so that the player can execute the time-saving game during the period. There was a problem that the game was easily grasped, it was difficult to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game was continued, and the game tended to be monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned game machine to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the game machine A1, a plurality of end conditions for ending the second game state which is advantageous to the player can be set, so that the period during which the second game state is continuously set for the player can be set. It can be made difficult to predict, and has the effect of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine A1, when the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result reaches a predetermined number during the period in which the second gaming state is continuously set, the third end A game machine A2 characterized in that the conditions are satisfied.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, since the second game state can be terminated by the number of times the small privilege game is executed during the second game state, the player is made to pay close attention to the determination result of the determination means in the second game state. Can be done.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the small privilege game from being excessively executed during the second game state.

In the game machine A2, the discriminating means also discriminates the first discriminating result and the third discriminating result different from the second discriminating result, and the small privilege game executing means has the discriminating result of the discriminating means. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the small privilege game is executed even when the result of the third determination is obtained.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. That is, since it is possible to execute a small privilege game in which the third end condition cannot be satisfied, the second game state can be changed only by grasping the number of small privilege games executed during the second game state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period that is continuously set, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent early getting bored with the game.

In the game machine A2 or A3, as the second determination result, the determination means causes the small privilege game execution means to execute the first small privilege game, and the small privilege game execution means causes the small privilege game execution means to execute the first small privilege game. At least the special second determination result different from the specific second determination result for executing the second small privilege game different from the first small privilege game is determined, and the number of times determined from the specific second determination result is The third end condition is satisfied when the first predetermined number of times is reached, or when the number of times determined as the special second determination result is a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times. A game machine A4 characterized by being.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2 or A3, the following effects are played. That is, since the end condition of a different number of times can be set according to the type of the small privilege game, the second game state continues only by grasping the number of small privilege games executed during the second game state. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the set period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine A4, when the small privilege game is executed, the variable ball entry means that can be changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which it is easy to enter, and the variable ball entry means thereof. The privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area, and has a specific area through which the game ball entered in the above can pass. The ease of passing the game ball to the specific area is different between the case where the first small privilege game is executed by the game execution means and the case where the second small privilege game is executed. A game machine A5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the following effects are played. That is, the possibility that the second game state ends and the possibility that the privilege game is executed can be different depending on the type of the small privilege game to be executed. It is possible to make the player pay close attention to the content of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Time saving end conditions that differ between Special 1 game and Special 2 game)
A game ball enters the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the first ball entry means. , When the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the predetermined first determination is executed, the game ball enters the second entry means, and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. A discrimination means for executing a predetermined second discrimination in a case, a display means for displaying the discrimination result for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display execution for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. The means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the privilege game execution means executed by the privilege game execution means. After the privilege game is completed, the game state setting means that can set the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means that is set by the game state setting means. The end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state is provided, and the end condition setting means performs the second determination as the plurality of end conditions rather than executing the first determination. At least sets a first end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed, and a second end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed than the second determination is executed. A game machine B1 characterized by being there.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a game machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery can be easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, the above-mentioned game machine executes a lottery of special symbols as a lottery of games, and by providing two types of special symbols, it is possible to execute lottery of various games. However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine terminates the time saving state when the number of lottery of the special symbol executed during the time saving game reaches a predetermined number of times, the lottery is executed during the time saving state. The time saving state will end under the same conditions regardless of the type. Therefore, there is a problem that the game in the time saving state tends to be monotonous. In addition, the content of the lottery executed during the time saving state is different depending on the type of the special symbol to be drawn, but the game result of whether or not the time saving state ends is the special symbol to be drawn. Because it is the same regardless of the type of, it is not possible to make a relationship between the period during which the time saving state continues and the type of special symbol for which the lottery is executed during the time saving state, and the game tends to be monotonous. There was a problem. It is an object of the above-mentioned game machine to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the game machine B1, it is possible to make the end condition for ending the second game state different between the case where the first determination is executed and the case where the second determination is executed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine B1 has a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and the end condition setting means is at least the said. The determination result end condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and the dynamic display end that can be satisfied based on the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. The condition and the condition are set, and the discriminating means is characterized in that it is easier to discriminate from the second discriminating result when the second discriminating is executed than when the first discriminating is executed. Game machine B2 to play.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, since it is easier to satisfy one of the end conditions for terminating the second gaming state when the second determination is executed than when the first determination is executed, any of the following during the second gaming state. The determination is executed, and the player is concerned about what the determination result was. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the game machine B2, the end condition setting means sets the determination result end condition as the first end condition and sets the dynamic display end condition as the second end condition. Game machine B3.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, the following effects are played. That is, when the first determination is executed, the determination result end condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the second determination is executed. That is, although the second determination is more likely to result in the second determination result, it is difficult to satisfy the determination result end condition. Therefore, since the player pays close attention to whether the second determination result is the first determination or the second determination, there is an effect that a game that does not get tired can be provided.

In the game machine B2 or B3, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, the second discrimination result type of 1 is determined from a plurality of second discrimination result types as the type of the second discrimination result. It has a second discrimination result type determining means, and the ending condition setting means sets different ending conditions for each second discrimination result type determined by the second discrimination result type determining means as the discrimination result ending condition. A game machine B4 characterized by being.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are played. That is, since different end conditions can be set based on the second determination result type, it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the end conditions are satisfied. Therefore, since it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of predicting the future game, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine B4, the second discrimination result type determining means is the case where the discrimination result of the first discrimination is the second discrimination result and the discrimination result of the second discrimination is the second discrimination result. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is possible to determine a different second discrimination result type depending on the case.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, it is possible to determine different second discrimination result types between the first discrimination and the second discrimination, so that the first discrimination and the second discrimination can be used for discrimination. There is an effect that the ease of satisfying the result end condition can be easily different.

In any of the game machines B2 to B5, the end condition setting means can satisfy the first dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the first determination is executed as the dynamic display end condition. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it sets a second dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the second determination is executed.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B5, the following effect is played. That is, it is possible to make different termination conditions for ending the second gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine B6, the dynamic display end condition satisfies the end condition when the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches a predetermined number, and the end condition setting means is described. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the dynamic display number of times when the first dynamic display end condition is satisfied and the dynamic display number of times when the second dynamic display end condition is satisfied are set differently. ..

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the following effects are played. That is, since the number of dynamic display times for satisfying the first dynamic display end condition and the number of dynamic display times for satisfying the second dynamic display end condition can be different, the second game state is set. In this case, since the ease of ending the second game state can be made different between the game in which the first determination is executed and the game in which the second determination is executed, various games are provided. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine B7, the end condition setting means adds up the first dynamic display number executed based on the first determination and the second dynamic display number executed based on the second determination. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it sets an upper limit dynamic display end condition that is satisfied when the total dynamic display number of times reached the upper limit number of times.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the following effects are played. That is, even when the total dynamic display count, which is the sum of the first dynamic display count and the second dynamic display count, reaches the upper limit, the second game state is terminated, so that the second game state is in progress. It is possible to prevent the first determination and the second determination from being excessively executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The game machine B8 has an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the determination result of the determination means is likely to be the first determination result for a specific period when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the predetermined transition condition is The gaming machine B9, which can be established when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, the following effects are played. That is, since the advantageous state can be set according to the timing at which the second game state is set, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine B9 has a special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to the player when the first game state is set during the specific period in which the advantageous state is set. A game machine B10 characterized by.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of the game machine B9, the following effects are played. That is, when the second gaming state ends during the period in which the advantageous state is set, the special state is set. This makes it possible to set different gaming states according to the timing at which the second gaming state ends. In addition, since the special state is set by ending the second game state within a predetermined period of a specific period, it is a novelty to positively end the second game state which is advantageous to the player. It has the effect of being able to play various games and improving the interest of the games.

As the specific period, a period from the timing when the second game state is set to the time when the predetermined end condition is satisfied may be set, or the specific period may be set in the state where the second game state is set. It may be configured to set the period from the time when the condition for satisfying is satisfied to the time when the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic C group> (Remaining time short period production)
Discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, display means that displays identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means that displays the identification information indicating the first discrimination result. The first game state and the first game state after the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means are completed. A game state setting means that can set a second game state that is more advantageous to the player, an end condition setting means that can set a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means, and Among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means, an end condition determining means for determining an end condition that is likely to be satisfied and a suggestion for suggesting a period during which the second game state is continuously set. The suggestion effect mode setting means has the suggestion effect execution means for executing the effect and the suggestion effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, and the suggestion effect mode setting means is the end condition. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the effect mode of the suggestion effect is set based on the end condition determined by the determination means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a game machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery can be easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned game machine, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) predetermined by the type of the privileged game to be executed, so that the player can execute the time-saving game during the period. There was a problem that the game was easily grasped, it was difficult to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game was continued, and the game tended to be monotonous. Therefore, the applicant has developed a game machine that makes it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the time-saving game is continuously set by providing a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving game. In this game machine, since there are a plurality of end conditions for ending the time-saving game, it is difficult to notify the player of the remaining period during which the time-saving game is performed, and there is a problem that the player is provided with a game that is difficult to understand. there were. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the game machine C1, even when a plurality of end conditions for ending the second game state are set, it is possible to set a suggestion effect based on the end conditions that are likely to be satisfied among them. , There is an effect that the player can easily grasp the period in which the second gaming state is continuously set.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the ending condition determining means determines the ending condition that is likely to be satisfied based on the execution content of the determining means in the second gaming state.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, since the end condition that is easily satisfied is actually discriminated based on the execution content of the discriminating means, there is an effect that the discriminating accuracy can be improved.

The game machine C2 has an update means for updating predetermined game information based on the execution content of the determination means executed during a period in which the second game state is continuously set, and the end condition setting means. As the plurality of end conditions, the first end condition that can be satisfied when the first game information is updated by the update means and the second game information different from the first game information are updated by the update means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it sets at least a second termination condition that can be satisfied when the information is executed.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C2, the following effects are played. That is, since the end condition is set for a plurality of game information that can be established by executing the discriminating means, whether or not the second game state ends is grasped based on the execution content of the discriminating means. It can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the suggestion effect and the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine C3, the first end condition is satisfied when the number of times the first game information is updated becomes the first number, and the second end condition is the number of times the second game information is updated. Is the second number of times, and based on the game information updated by the update means, the first remaining update number until the first end condition is satisfied and the second end It has a remaining update number discriminating means for discriminating between the second remaining update number until the condition is satisfied, and the end condition discriminating means is an end condition that is easily satisfied according to the discriminating result of the remaining update number discriminating means. A game machine C4 characterized in that it discriminates between.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C3, the following effects are played. That is, since the end condition that is likely to be satisfied is determined based on the remaining number of times until each end condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the accuracy of the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be improved.

The game machine C4 has a pre-end condition determination for determining whether the first remaining update number or the second remaining update number determined by the remaining update number determining means satisfies a predetermined pre-end condition. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the suggestion effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the determination result of the pre-end condition determination means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C4, the following effects are played. That is, since the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be set according to whether or not the pre-end condition is satisfied by the pre-end condition determination means, until the end condition is satisfied for the player depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. There is an effect that the remaining number of times can be predicted.

In the game machine C5, the suggestion effect mode setting means sets a specific suggestion effect mode when it is determined by the determination of the pre-end condition determination means that a plurality of the pre-end conditions are satisfied. A game machine C6 characterized by being there.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C5, the following effects are played. That is, since a specific suggestion effect mode can be set when the pre-end condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the player predict the remaining period of the time saving state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, the game state setting means has a first period setting means for setting a first period after the second game state is set, and the suggestion effect mode setting means The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that a special suggestion effect mode is set when the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first period is set by the first period setting means.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C6, the following effect is played. That is, if the end condition is satisfied within a predetermined period after the second game state advantageous to the player is set, the special suggestion effect mode is set. Therefore, the effect mode corresponding to the timing when the end condition is satisfied is set. Can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced by making the player aware of the timing when the end condition is satisfied.

In the game machine C7, the first period setting means sets the first period from the time when the second game state is set until the number of times of the determination executed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number. A game machine C8 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C7, the following effects are played. That is, since the first period is set until the number of determinations executed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the state in which the first period is set. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not the end condition is satisfied while the first period is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine C7 or C8, the first period setting means sets the first period until the elapsed time from the setting of the second game state reaches a predetermined time. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7 or C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first period is set when the elapsed time from the setting of the second game state is within the predetermined time, the game is enthusiastically performed in order to satisfy the end condition within the first period. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic D group> (1 type, 2 types, normal time reduction)
The first discrimination means that performs discrimination when the first discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means that displays the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the first discrimination means, and the identification that shows the first discrimination result on the display means. When the information is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the first determination condition after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed are different. A specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the second discrimination condition is easily satisfied, a second discrimination means for discriminating when the second discrimination condition is satisfied, and a result of discrimination by the second discrimination means. When the identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means, the variable ball entry means that can be changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter, and the variable ball entry means thereof. It has a specific area through which the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. The specific game state setting means includes a first specific game state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied, and a second specific game state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first specific game state. A game machine D1 characterized by being at least configurable.

Here, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winning or losing of the game is drawn and the lottery result is a winning, or when the winning or losing lottery of the game is not a winning. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a privileged game that is advantageous to a player is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area during a predetermined game that can be executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, as a game state of the game machine, there is one that makes it possible to set a game state in which the above-mentioned privilege game is easily executed. The above-mentioned gaming machine sets two gaming states, a gaming state advantageous to the player and a gaming state other than that, and it is not possible to set a plurality of gaming states advantageous to the player step by step. , There was a problem that the game tended to be monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the monotonousness of the game and improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine D1, it is possible to set a game state in which the ease with which the second determination condition is satisfied is different during the specific game state, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. There is.

In the game machine D1, a display means capable of displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result by the first discrimination means and the second identification information for showing the discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and the display thereof. A first dynamic display means for causing the means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period, and a second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined second period. And the first dynamic display period setting means for setting the first dynamic display period of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display means, and the second dynamic display means executed by the second dynamic display means. It has a second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, and while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. , The second dynamic display means is configured to dynamically display the second identification information, and the display means has the first display mode for the first identification information to indicate the first determination result. The specific gaming state is set according to the stop display in, and the variable ball entry means is set according to the stop display of the second identification information in the second display mode for indicating the second determination result. Is variable to the second state, and the specific game state setting means is the first dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means, or the second dynamic display period. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are set by differentiating the second dynamic display period set by the setting means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, since the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be set by making the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period different in the specific game state, the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be set. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set a gaming state in which the ease with which the second determination condition is satisfied is different.

In the game machine D2, the second dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the first specific game state is set than when the second specific game state is set. A game machine D3 characterized by facilitating the setting of a period.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D2, the following effects are played. That is, by shortening the dynamic display period, it is possible to easily execute the discrimination by the second discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the game state can be easily set.

In the game machine D2 or D3, the second discriminating means is configured to be able to discriminate the first discriminating result, and the second dynamic display period setting means is the second discriminating means during the second specific gaming state. When the determination result of is the first determination result, the second dynamic display period is set shorter than when the determination result is other than the first determination result. ..

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D2 or D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is the first discrimination result, a dynamic display period shorter than that of the other discrimination results is set, so that there is an effect that the privilege game can be easily executed. ..

In any of the game machines D2 to D4, the first dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the second specific game state is set than when the first specific game state is set. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first dynamic display period can be easily set.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D4, the following effect is played. That is, since it is easier to set a shorter first dynamic display period when the second specific game state is set than when the first specific game state is set, the game state should be set easily. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine D5, when the determination result of the first determination means is the first determination result during the first specific state, the first dynamic display period setting means other than the first determination result. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that a first dynamic display period is set shorter than that of the determination result.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D5, the following effects are played. That is, when the first determination result is in the first specific state, a shorter first dynamic display period is set than when the determination result is other than the first determination result. As a result, it is possible to immediately notify the player that the determination result is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving anxiety to the player.

In any of the game machines D2 to D6, when a predetermined first acquisition condition is satisfied, the first acquisition means for acquiring the first ball entry information and the first ball entry information acquired by the first acquisition means. The first storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces up to the first predetermined number until the first determination condition is satisfied, and the second ball entry information is acquired when the predetermined second acquisition condition is satisfied. A second storage means capable of storing a plurality of the second acquisition means and the second ball entry information acquired by the second acquisition means up to a second predetermined number until the second determination condition is satisfied. When the determination result of the first second determination means executed in the state where the first specific game state is set is the second determination result, the first specific game state is set. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the determination result of the first first determination means executed in the state of being executed is set. ..

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D6, the following effect is played. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means executed first in the state where the first specific game state is set is the second determination result, it is the first in the state where the first specific game state is set. A dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the determination result of the first determination means executed in is set. As a result, even if the first specific gaming state is set in a state where both the first storage means and the second storage means store the entry information, the second of the second discriminating means which is advantageous to the player. The determination result can be immediately notified to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving anxiety to the player.

<Characteristic E group> (Electric support control at the time of winning a small hit during a short time)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, display means that displays identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. When the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means executed by the privilege game execution means. After the privilege game is completed, the game state setting means that can set the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means that is set by the game state setting means. The game state setting means has an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state, and the game state setting means sets the first game state according to the end condition satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. A game machine E1 characterized in that the timing of the game is different.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a game machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery can be easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned game machines, since the timing of ending the time-saving game is the same, the player can immediately grasp whether or not the time-saving game has ended, so that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game becomes more interesting. There was a problem that it would drop. It is an object of the above-mentioned game machine to provide a game that improves the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the timing for setting the first game state can be changed based on the type of the satisfied end condition, so that when the end condition is satisfied, the player is also interested in the type. Can have. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The game machine E1 has a small privilege game executing means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first determination result. The end condition setting means is at least a first end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display is executed and a second end that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result. The condition and the condition are set, and when the game state setting means determines that the first end condition is satisfied, the corresponding dynamic display ends and the identification information is stopped and displayed. The first game state is set based on the fact, and when it is determined that the second end condition is satisfied, the first game state is set based on the execution of the corresponding small privilege game. A game machine E2 characterized by being set.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the following effects are played. That is, since the first game state is set according to the content of the established end condition, there is an effect that a game without a sense of discomfort can be provided.

The game machine E2 has an end condition determining means for determining whether any of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, and the end condition determining means is the second end condition. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first end condition is prioritized over the end condition for determination.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the following effects are played. That is, when a plurality of end conditions are satisfied by one determination executed by the determination means, the first end condition is preferentially determined. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation where the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second end condition, and it is possible to provide a special feeling to the player.

When the configuration of the game machine E3 is used, when the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of the second end condition, the first game is based on the satisfaction of the first end condition. It is preferable to configure it so as to be more advantageous to the player than when setting the state. As a result, it is possible to pay attention not only to whether or not the end condition is satisfied to the player, but also to the end condition that is satisfied, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine E3, the end condition determination means determines whether the first end condition is satisfied when the determination of 1 is executed by the determination means, and determines that the first end condition is not satisfied. In this case, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the following effects are played. That is, since the timing of determining whether or not each end condition is satisfied is different, it is possible to determine whether or not the first end condition is satisfied with certain priority over whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. effective.

In any of the game machines E2 to E4, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, the game type determining means for determining the type of the small privilege game to be executed is provided, and the game type determination is performed. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the means is to determine one type among a plurality of types having different periods in which the small privilege game is executed.

According to the game machine E5, it is possible to execute a small privilege game for which the execution period is different. Therefore, the timing at which the second game state ends can be significantly different over the game period during the small privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E5, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball is easy to enter and the second state in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first state, and the state of the variable entry means are variable. The small privilege game executing means has a variable control means for controlling, and the small privilege game executing means executes variable control by the variable control means so that the variable ball entering means is in the first state as the small privilege game. A game machine E6 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the following effects are played. That is, the degree of advantage to the player differs greatly between the case where the first end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set and the case where the second end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to both the type of the termination condition established for the player and the type of the small privilege game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E6, the type of the small privilege game is different from the length of the period during which the variable ball entering means in the small privilege game is in the second state.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the following effects are played. That is, since the amount of benefits given to the player as a small privilege game is also variable according to the type of the small privilege game to be set, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the type of the small privilege game to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine E7, the type of the small privilege game is characterized by having a plurality of types having the same length of the period during which the variable ball entering means is in the first state during the small privilege game. The game machine E8.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E7, if the execution period of the small privilege game is different for a plurality of small privilege games in which the amount of privilege that can be given to the player as the small privilege game is set to be the same. This has the effect that the length of the period in which the second gaming state is set can be made different.

<Characteristic F group> (player selects multiple time-saving games)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means capable of entering a game ball different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. The first determination is executed based on the acquisition of the first acquisition information that can be acquired in the case of the above, and the second acquisition information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the second entry means is acquired. A discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the above, a display means that displays identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. When the identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means are executed. After the privileged game is completed, the first game state and the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be set, and the advantageous game state setting means is used. When the game state is set, the first advantageous game for executing the first determination and the second advantageous game for executing the second determination, which is different from the first game, are played. A game machine F1 characterized in that it has a selection means that can be selected by a person.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a game machine in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery can be easily performed after the privileged game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Such a game machine is configured to allow a player to perform a game in which a game ball is launched toward a game area different from the usual one when the above-mentioned time-saving game is executed. The above-mentioned gaming machine can provide a special feeling by executing a gaming method different from the usual one during a time-saving game, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, but a predetermined gaming method Since it is only for the player to perform the above, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned game machine to provide a game that improves the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the timing for setting the first game state can be changed based on the type of the satisfied end condition, so that when the end condition is satisfied, the player is also interested in the type. Can have. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

According to the game machine F1, since the player can select a game method in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide a variety of games to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine F1, the privilege game executed by the first advantageous game is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game executed by the second advantageous game. ..

In the game machine F1 or F2, the second advantageous game is characterized in that the advantageous game state is more likely to continue than the first advantageous game.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, there is a game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a launching means capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area with variable firing intensity. It has a first game area that can flow down and a second game area that is different from the first game area where a game ball launched with a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity can flow down. The first ball entry means is provided in one game area, the second ball entry means is provided in the second game area, and the selection means is characterized in that the firing intensity of the launching means is changed. Game machine F4.

In the game machine F4, when the privilege game is executed, the game ball launched by the launching means has a variable ball entry means capable of entering the ball, and the variable entry means covers the first game area. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that both the flowing game ball and the game ball flowing down the second game area are configured to be able to enter.

The game machine F4 or F5 has a third ball entry means that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first ball entry means when the advantageous state is set, and the game ball enters the third ball entry means. The first determination is executed even when the ball is balled and the first determination condition is satisfied, and the first advantageous game is a game in which a game ball is inserted into the third entry means. A game machine F6 characterized by this.

In the game machine F6, the first ball-entry means is provided in a third game area different from the first game area and the second game area in the game area. Machine F7.

In any of the game machines F5 to F7, a first detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the first game area and a second detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the second game area. The execution game determination means for determining the type of the currently selected advantageous game based on the detection result of the first detection means and the detection result of the second detection means, and the execution game determination means. The gaming machine F8 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying the player of information for indicating a determination result.

In the game machine F8, the game machine F9 is characterized in that the notification means notifies while the privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic G group> (Time-saving fall conditions that differ depending on the Yoshikaze type)
Variable entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state, and the variable entry means to satisfy the opening condition. Based on the above, the variable control means for changing the closed state to the open state, the second flow path different from the first flow path and the first flow path for the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the above. A distribution means capable of distributing a game ball entering the variable entry means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the first game ball entering the variable entry means. A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to distribute to the flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to distribute to the second flow path, and a game ball entering the first flow path. Based on the above, the first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, and the second ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter based on the fact that the game ball enters the second flow path. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination means that executes the first determination, and the second determination means that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The second discriminating means for executing the two discriminating means, the first gaming state in which the variable ball entering means is easily changed to the open state by the variable control means, and the first gaming state in which the variable ball entering means is less likely to be changed to the open state than the first gaming state. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting the two game states, and the game state setting means executes the first determination by the first determination means or the second determination by the second determination means. The game state is set based on the execution of the above, and when the first game state is set, the execution of the first determination is more than the execution of the second determination. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the gaming state can be easily set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a game machine has been proposed in which a probabilistic game state in which the lottery result becomes advantageous after the execution of the privilege game is set with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the probabilistic gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the gaming tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned game machine to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the game machine G1, it is possible to make it more difficult to set the second game state by executing the first determination than by executing the second determination. Therefore, when the first game state is set, the second game state is set. It is possible to play the game while expecting that one determination is executed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine G1, the first privilege game is executed when the first determination means has a specific first determination result, and when the second determination means has a specific second determination result, the first It has a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game, and is described above according to the game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. The gaming machine G2 is characterized by having a ratio variable means for varying the set ratio set in the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the distribution state setting means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state are determined according to the game state when a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set to any of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified not only by the discrimination result but also by the game state.

In the game machine G2, a plurality of game states are set as the game states, and based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, 1 from the plurality of game states. The gaming machine G3 is characterized by having a selection setting means for selecting and setting the gaming state of the above.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, one game state is selected and set by the selection setting means based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that not only the discrimination result but also the set game state can be interested and the interest can be improved.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, a second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. And a specific area where the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. A game machine G4 characterized by having and.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, it is possible to perform a game in which it is expected whether or not to enter a specific area, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified.

In the game machine G4, the privilege given by the privilege giving means sets a high probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or a probability of being determined as the specific second determination result until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine G5 characterized by being something to do.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G4, the probability of being discriminated from a specific first discrimination result or a specific second discrimination result can be changed, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved. ..

In either of the game machines G1 or G3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the specific first determination result is satisfied until the end condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine G6 is characterized by having a special state setting means for setting a probability of being determined as a determination result or the specific second determination result higher than usual.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the player can be worried about whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

<Characteristic H group> (Gameability in which it is more advantageous to win after the specific condition is satisfied than to win before the specific condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous state)
Discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and discrimination results of the discrimination means. In a game machine equipped with a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result, the player is based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The gaming machine includes a first state setting means for setting a first state which is advantageous to the user, and the gaming machine uses all the discrimination information acquired during the first state after the first state is set. The case where the award game is executed before the predetermined specific condition is satisfied and the case where the award game is executed after the specific condition is satisfied until the end of The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the degree of advantage for the player is different.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the degree of advantage of the player is constant while the same gaming state is set, so that the game becomes monotonous while the same gaming state is set. There is a risk that it will be difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, when the privilege game is executed, the player can play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of improving the interest in.

In the game machine H1, when the privilege game is not executed between the time when the first state is set and the time when the determination by the determination means of the first predetermined number of times is completed, from the first state. Also provided with a second state setting means for setting a disadvantageous second state, the specific condition ends the determination by the determination means for the second number of times less than or equal to the first number after the first state is set. The gaming machine H2, which is established when the privileged gaming is not executed in the meantime.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the degree of advantage of the privileged game changes according to the number of determinations executed in the first state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine H2 is provided with a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, at least until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. The second state is configured so that acquisition of the discrimination information by the discrimination information acquisition means is more difficult than the first state, and the first state is set as the specific condition. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that it is established when the privileged game is not executed before the determination by the determining means of the first number of times is completed.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, the discrimination executed until the end of the first state and the discrimination information stored in the storage means when the second state is set. Since the degree of advantage when the privilege game is executed varies depending on the discrimination based on the above, the game should be performed by paying attention to the number of discrimination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second state is set. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine H3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball capable of entering the second entry means. The first position and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position are provided with variable means that can be changed, and the predetermined acquisition conditions are the first ball entry means and the above. It is established based on the fact that the game ball enters at least one of the second ball entry means, and the second state is such that the variable means moves from the second position to the second state rather than the first state. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be difficult to change to the first position.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the game ball can easily enter into different ball entry means depending on whether it is in the first state or the second state, so that the player can easily enter the ball. It has the effect of improving the interest in the game.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, from the third ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the third position on which the game ball can enter the third ball entry means, and the third position. Based on the fact that the second variable means that can be changed to the fourth position where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are the specific discrimination result, the second variable means A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period, and a game ball that has entered the third ball entry means are provided at positions where the ball can enter. The game machine H5 is characterized in that the special area is provided, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H4, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine H5, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in any one of a plurality of directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction according to the operation of the player. The predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied at least in the first state when the game ball is launched in the second direction rather than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. The third ball entry means is configured to facilitate the entry of a game ball launched in the first direction rather than a game ball launched in the second direction. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to do.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5, when the variable game is executed while the game ball is being fired in the first direction in the first state, it is fired in the first direction. Since it is possible to prevent the existing game ball from entering the specific area of the third ball entry means as it is, in the first state, the launch direction is set to the second in order to allow the game ball to enter the specific area. It is possible to let the player choose whether to change the direction or to end the variable game without entering the game ball into a specific area by continuously firing the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the first state setting means is used from the time when the first state is set until the determination using all the discrimination information acquired during the first state is completed. When the privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied, the first state is set at a first ratio as the state after the privilege game is completed, and the specific condition is set. When the privilege game is executed after the above is established, the first state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio as the state after the privilege game is completed. The featured game machine H7.

According to the game machine H7, in any of the game machines H1 to H6, when the privilege game is executed after the specific condition is satisfied, the ratio of setting the advantageous first state is higher. It is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the privilege game will be executed after the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine H7, when the privilege game is executed based on the specific determination result in the two states, the first state setting means is set as a state after the privilege game is completed. The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the first state is set at a third ratio higher than the first ratio.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the disadvantageous second state is more likely to be set to the advantageous first state than the first state before the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second state from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

<Characteristic I group> (Make the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectations during the short time)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and A first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a specific condition predetermined in the first game state are provided in the game machine provided with the above. A second game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state based on the establishment is provided, and the first game state is the first game method. By playing the game, it becomes difficult to execute the privilege game, and it becomes difficult to satisfy the specific condition. By playing the game by a second game method different from the first game method, the first game is performed. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the privileged game is more easily executed than when the game is played by the gaming method, and the specific condition is easily satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the same gaming state may be disadvantageous to the player if the game is not performed by the same gaming method while the same gaming state is set. During the setting, the game method corresponding to the game state had to be continuously executed. Therefore, the game becomes monotonous, and it may be difficult for the player to improve his or her interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the game playability can be different depending on whether the game is performed by the first game method or the second game method, so that the player's interest in the game can be changed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine I1, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The first discriminating means is more difficult to execute the privilege game when the discriminating is executed than the discriminating of the second discriminating means. Moreover, the specific condition is configured so as to be difficult to be satisfied, and the first game method is executed by the determination of the first determination means rather than the determination of the second determination means. It is configured by a game method that makes it easier to perform, and the second game method is configured by a game method that makes it easier to execute the determination of the second determination means than the determination of the first determination means. The featured game machine I2.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1, the game performance in the first game state can be different depending on the type of the discrimination means for which the discrimination is executed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine I2, the specific condition is based on the fact that after the first game state is set, the privilege game is not executed and the determination of the first determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. It is established based on the fact that the privilege game is not executed after the second game state is set and the determination of the second determination means of the second number of times less than the first number of times is executed. A game machine I3 characterized in that it is configured as such.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I2, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times the first discriminating means is discriminated and the number of times the second discriminating means is discriminated.

In the game machine I2 or I3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball and a first entry provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction predetermined by the launching means can enter. The ball means and the game ball launched in the specific direction are provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the game ball moves to the second entry means different from the first entry means and the first entry means. The first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination of the discrimination means based on the ball entering, and the above-mentioned said based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information is provided, and the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the second discriminating means executes discrimination using the discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring means.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2 or I3, in the first game state, the game ball is launched in a specific direction to discriminate the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means. Since it is possible to execute both the discrimination and the determination, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the game machine I4, the first discriminant information acquired by the first discriminating information acquisition means can be stored until it is used for discriminating the first discriminating means, up to a predetermined number of first information. A second storage that can store the storage means and the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means until it is used for discrimination of the second discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of second information. The second discriminating means is configured to suppress the execution of the discriminant when one or more of the discriminant information is stored in the first storage means. A game machine I5 characterized by.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, it is possible to preferentially execute the determination of the first determination means in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied even if the determination is executed in the first game state. , The first game state can be configured so as to be easy to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the first gaming state for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine I5, in the second gaming method, when one or more of the discrimination information is stored in the second storage means, the discrimination information stored in the second storage means is discriminated. The game machine I6 is characterized in that the game is performed so that the launch of the game ball is suppressed until it is used in the game.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I5, by performing the second game method, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the discrimination of the first discriminating means, so that the privilege game can be easily executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a higher expectation for each discrimination.

In any of the game machines I4 to I6, the game ball enters the first position where the game ball can enter the first entry means, and the game ball enters the first entry means from the first position. A first variable means that can be changed to a difficult second position, a third position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a second ball entry rather than the third position. A second variable means that can be changed to a fourth position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the means, a passing means that is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can pass, and a passing means thereof. A third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the passing means can enter, and a third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the passing means can enter. Discharges a different fourth entry means and a game ball that has passed through the passage means to either the third entry means or the fourth entry means, and launches in the specific direction. A third variable means that can be changed to a fifth position where the game ball can pass through the passing means and a sixth position where the game ball is more difficult to pass through the passing means than the fifth position. The variable control means is provided with variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable from the sixth position to the fifth position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition, and the first variable means is the first variable means. It is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, and the second variable means is the fourth entry means. The game machine I7 is characterized in that it is configured to be variable from the fourth position to the third position based on the game ball entering the ball means.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I4 to I6, the game ball that has passed through the passing means can be played by paying attention to the type of the ball entering means that is distributed by the sorting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine I7, the variable condition is configured so that the first game state is more likely to be established than the second game state.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of the game machine I7, in the first game state, the game ball can easily pass through the passing means, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed more efficiently.

In the game machine I7 or I8, the first gaming state is configured so that the gaming ball that has passed through the passing means is more easily distributed to the third entering means than the fourth entering means. A game machine I9 characterized by being.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect of the game machine I7 or I8, when the game ball passes through the passing means, there is a possibility that the first ball entering means can enter the ball rather than the second entering means. Since the height can be increased, there is an effect that the determination of the first determination means can be performed more easily.

Based on the fact that in any of the game machines I2 to I9, a predetermined execution condition that can be satisfied is satisfied based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result. The second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game is provided, and the second discrimination means is configured so that the probability that the discrimination result becomes the second discrimination result is higher than that of the first discrimination means. A game machine I10 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I9, when the discrimination of the second discrimination means is executed, not only the specific discrimination result but also the second discrimination result is obtained. Since the game can be played with expectation, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine I10, the game ball is variably configured into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the game ball can enter. Based on the variable ball entering means provided with the specific region and the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming the second discriminating result, the variable ball entering means changes from the second state to the second state for a predetermined period. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to one state is provided, and the execution condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means has entered the specific area. A game machine I11 characterized in that it is to be used.

According to the game machine I11, in addition to the effect of the game machine I10, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters a specific area when the variable game is executed, so that the game can be performed. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Gameability in which the expectation of a big hit is higher after the end of the advantageous state than during the advantageous state)
Compared to the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the first determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. In a gaming machine having a second determination means for executing a second determination having a high degree of advantage for the player, the first determination condition is likely to be satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The game machine includes a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a game state and a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. When the setting condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set, if the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the second game state is higher than that in the first gaming state. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that it is configured to form a first state in which the determination condition is easily satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered when the game shifts from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, even if an unfavorable second gaming state is set, an advantageous second determination condition is likely to be established while the first state is being formed. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved when the state is formed.

In the game machine J1, when the setting condition is satisfied in the first game state and the second game state is set, the game machine is said to be the first if the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that it is configured to form a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at the time when the second game state is set, so that the player can enjoy the game. Has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine J1 or J2, based on the fact that either the discrimination result of the first discriminating means or the discriminating result of the second discriminating means is a predetermined specific discriminating result, the player is asked. The first discriminating means is configured to include the privileged game executing means capable of executing an advantageous privileged game, and to obtain the specific discriminating result with a predetermined first probability. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second discriminating means is configured to obtain the specific discriminating result with a second probability higher than the first probability.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, there is a high probability that a specific determination result will be obtained until the specific condition is satisfied even after the advantageous first game state is completed. , At least until a specific condition is satisfied, the game can be played with a sense of expectation for the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine J3, based on the fact that the first condition predetermined in the first state is satisfied, the game machine determines the second state rather than the first state without changing the game state. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that it is configured to form a second state in which the conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage can be formed as the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. There is an effect.

In any of the game machines J1 to J4, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball to the first entry means. The first discriminant information acquisition means for acquiring the first discriminating information to be used for discriminating the first discriminating means based on the ball entering the ball, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A predetermined number of pieces of the second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information to be used for the discrimination of the second discrimination means and the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first storage means that can be stored until it is used for the discrimination of the first discrimination means and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means are stored as predetermined information. A second storage means that can be stored until it is used for discrimination of the second discriminating means is provided up to a maximum number, and the first discriminating means is stored in the first storage means. The first discrimination is executed using the first discrimination information, and the second discrimination means uses the second discrimination information stored in the second storage means to perform the second discrimination. The first determination is configured to be executed with priority over the second determination, and the first gaming state is the first ball entry means. It is configured so that a game ball can enter both the and the second ball entry means, and the second game state is more in the second ball entry means than in the first game state. The game machine J5 is characterized in that at least the game ball is configured so as to be difficult to enter.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines J1 to J4, the determination of the first determination means is executed with priority, so that the second memory is stored at the end of the first gaming state. There is an effect that more second discrimination information can be stored in the means.

In the game machine J5, the first position where the game ball can enter the second entry means and the second position where the game ball becomes more difficult to enter into the first entry means than the first position. The position and the variable means that can be changed are provided, and the first gaming state is configured so that the variable means is more easily changed from the second position to the first position than in the second gaming state. The first state is configured in a state in which the second gaming state is set and at least one second determination information is stored in the second storage means. A game machine J6 characterized by being there.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect of the game machine J5, more second discrimination information is stored in the second storage means while the discrimination of the second discrimination means is preferentially executed. Therefore, when the second gaming state is set, there is an effect that the first state can be formed more reliably.

The game machine J6 includes a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the first discrimination information acquisition means plays a game in at least one of the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means. The first discrimination information is acquired based on the ball entering, and in the second gaming state, the game ball enters the third entry means rather than the first entry means. The game machine J7 is characterized in that it is easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J6, it is possible to change the ball entry means that is easy to enter depending on the game state, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In any of the game machines J1 to J7, from the fourth ball entry means in which the game ball can enter, the third position in which the game ball can enter the fourth ball entry means, and the third position. Based on the fact that the second variable means that can be changed to the fourth position where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are the specific discrimination result, the second variable means A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period, and a game ball that has entered the fourth ball entry means are provided at positions where the ball can enter. The game machine J8 is characterized in that the special area is provided, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines J1 to J7, the game is played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter a specific area when the variable game is executed. This has the effect of improving the player's interest in playing the game.

<Characteristic K group> (Suppresses the increase in hold immediately after the end of the advantageous state)
An entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first position that allows a game ball to enter the entry means, and a second position that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position. Using the variable means that can be changed to the ball, the discrimination information acquisition means that acquires the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. In a gaming machine having a discrimination means for executing discrimination and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, the first Based on the first game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of the setting condition 1 and the second setting condition being satisfied in the first game state, the first game state is higher than that of the first game state. A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state in which the variable means is difficult to change from the second position to the first position, and at least the variable means straddle before and after the establishment of the second setting condition. The game machine K1 is provided with a control means that can be controlled so that the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entry means when the state is changed to the first position.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute award games when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a predetermined result. Some of such game machines make it possible to set a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and facilitate execution of a lottery when the gaming states advantageous to the player are set (for example,). Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, depending on the timing of switching from the advantageous gaming state to the disadvantageous gaming state, a situation may occur in which the lottery can be executed in the same manner as in the advantageous gaming state even though the disadvantageous gaming state is set. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to equalize the expectation of the privileged game in a disadvantageous game state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entry means immediately after the second setting condition is satisfied, so that the privilege game in the first game state of 1 can be suppressed. There is an effect that the degree of expectation can be made uniform.

The game machine K1 is provided with a second ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the control means moves to the first position at least before and after the variable means satisfies the second setting condition. The game machine K2 is characterized in that when it is in a variable state, it is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means rather than the ball entry means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, there is an effect that the game ball can be more reliably suppressed from entering the ball entry means immediately after the second setting condition is satisfied.

In the game machine K2, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered at least one of the ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the discrimination information acquisition means. The means has entered the game ball into the ball entry means rather than performing the determination using the discrimination information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result is higher when the discrimination is executed using the discrimination information acquired based on the above.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K2, it is possible to prevent a lot of advantageous judgments that are likely to result in a specific judgment result from being executed even after the second game state is set. There is an effect.

In the game machine K2 or K3, when the variable means is arranged in the first position, the game ball can flow in, and when the variable means is arranged in the second position, the inflow becomes difficult. The control means includes a specific flow path provided and a distribution means for distributing a game ball flowing down the specific flow path to either the ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The distribution means is controlled so that the game ball can be easily distributed to the second entry means by the distribution means at least in a predetermined period after the second setting condition is satisfied. A game machine K4 characterized by.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K2 or K3, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably suppress the distribution of the game ball to the ball entry means after the second game state is set. is there.

In the game machine K4, the control means has a first distribution state in which the game ball reaching the distribution means is distributed to the ball entry means and a second distribution state in which the game ball has been distributed to the second ball entry means. Controls the distribution means so as to switch in a specific switching pattern determined in advance, and the specific switching pattern is a period set in the second distribution state in the predetermined period. The ratio is likely to be higher than the ratio of the period set in the first distribution state, and at least a part of the period from the setting of the first gaming state to the establishment of the second setting condition. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that, in the period, the ratio of the period set in the first distribution state is higher than the predetermined period.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4, in the first game state, the ease of entering the ball with respect to the ball entry means can be made different depending on the distribution state of the distribution means. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the state of the division means.

In the game machine K5, the control means controls the distribution means in the specific switching pattern based on the setting of the first game state.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of the game machine K5, when the first state is set, it is sufficient to execute a simple control of setting a specific switching pattern each time, thus reducing the processing load. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic L group> (The degree of advantage is higher when hitting during the pullback time is shorter than when hitting during the probability change state)
A discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminant condition, and a privilege that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. In a game machine provided with a game execution means, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game The game machine includes a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and a game state setting means that sets one game state from a plurality of game states including at least the third game state. Rather, the gaming machine is characterized in that the degree of advantage of a predetermined element regarding the degree of advantage is likely to be higher while the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the second game state. L1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered when the game shifts from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state. Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the first game is performed without directly shifting from the advantageous first game state (for example, the probabilistic state) to the most unfavorable second game state (for example, the normal state). It shifts to the third gaming state (for example, the time saving state) having an advantage between the state and the second gaming state, and shifts to the first gaming state only when there is no hit in the third gaming state. There is also something to make.

However, even in a gaming machine having such specifications, the degree of advantage decreases at the time of transition to the second gaming state, so that it is difficult to fundamentally suppress the decrease in motivation for the game. Therefore, there is a risk that it will be difficult for the player to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, while the first condition is satisfied, the advantage degree of the predetermined element is higher in the second game state where the advantage degree is low, so that the player's game It has the effect of improving the interest in.

In the game machine L2, the game machine obtains the specific determination result while the first condition is satisfied in the second game state, rather than the specific determination result in the third game state. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous in the case of the case.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the game state setting means sets the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the third game state, and the game machine sets the second game state. The specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the specific condition, rather than the specific determination result in the third gaming state. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the degree of advantage of the elements is likely to be high.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1 or L2, in the third game state, the game can be performed while expecting that the specific condition is not satisfied, and the specific condition is satisfied. 2 When the game state is set, the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine L3, the gaming state setting means is the second when the specific condition is satisfied in the third gaming state and when the second condition predetermined in the first gaming state is satisfied. The game machine is configured so that the gaming state can be set, and the specific condition is satisfied as compared with the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the second condition. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the second gaming state set based on the above is more likely to have a higher degree of advantage of the predetermined element.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that the degree of advantage can be different even in the same second game state.

In the game machine L3 or L4, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, and the game machine is the third specific condition. The second gaming state set based on the establishment of the first specific condition is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher than that of the gaming state. Game machine L5.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3 or L4, it is possible to expect the first specific condition to be satisfied more strongly than the second specific condition is satisfied in the third game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine L5, a plurality of types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means include at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The game state setting means is provided with a type determination means for determining the type of one of the privilege games, and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means as the specific determination result in the third game state. The gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the second specific condition is satisfied, and the gaming state after the end of the first privilege game is set to the second gaming state.

According to the game machine L5, when the first privilege game is determined in the third game state, the disadvantageous second game state is set and the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is lowered, so that the third game state When a specific determination result is obtained in the above, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first privilege game will not be determined.

In the game machine L6, the game state setting means ends the second privilege game when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means as the specific determination result in the third game state. It is configured so that the later gaming state can be set to the third gaming state, and the gaming machine becomes the specific determination result in the third gaming state and is described by the type determining means. When the second privilege game is decided, if a predetermined specific setting condition is satisfied, the control means for controlling the second game state to be set by the game state setting means is provided. The game state setting means is characterized in that the second game state is set by satisfying the first specific condition that the control means has controlled the second game state to be set. The game machine L7.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L6, when the second privilege game is determined in the third game state, an advantageous third game state is set or a second game state is set. Even if it is, since the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is either high, it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game will be decided when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state. It has the effect of being able to play games.

In the game machine L7, the specific setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the second privilege game is continuously determined over a predetermined specific number of times. ..

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L7, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second privilege game will be determined over a specific number of times.

The game machine L5 or L6 includes a second discriminating means that performs a second discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition in the third gaming state, and the gaming state setting means has a discriminating result of the second discriminating means. The gaming machine L9 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set by assuming that the second specific condition is satisfied when the first determination result is determined in advance.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effect of the game machine L5 or L6, the player's case where the second game state with a low degree of advantage is set as the first determination result in the third game state. It has the effect of alleviating disappointment.

In the game machine L9, in the game machine L9, the determination result of the second determination means is obtained by the determination result of the second determination means before the determination of the predetermined first number of times is completed after the third gaming state is set. The second game state is set based on the determination result of 1, and after the determination of the first predetermined number of times is completed after the third game state is set, the second determination means The gaming machine L10 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the determination result of the first determination result.

According to the game machine L10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L9, the disappointment of the player can be alleviated when the first judgment result is obtained with a small number of judgments in the third game state. There is.

<Characteristic M group> (Chance zone after the pullback time reduction is completed)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result. A plurality of privileged game execution means to be performed and, as a type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means, at least a first privileged game and a second privileged game having a higher degree of advantage than the first privileged game. A first game state in which the second privilege game is determined at a first ratio by the type determination means based on the establishment of a type determination means for determining the type of one privilege game and a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state. Based on the fact that the set condition is satisfied and another game state is set, the second privilege game is determined at a higher ratio than the first ratio until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by comprising a state control means for controlling a special state that facilitates.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the game shifts from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state, the player is satisfied because the game can be played in the advantageous gaming state, and the player tries to continue the game. There was a problem that it became difficult to think.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the first game is performed without directly shifting from the advantageous first game state (for example, the probabilistic state) to the most unfavorable second game state (for example, the normal state). It shifts to the third gaming state (for example, the time saving state) having an advantage between the state and the second gaming state, and shifts to the first gaming state only when there is no hit in the third gaming state. There is also something to make.

However, even in a gaming machine having such specifications, there is a possibility that the game will be satisfied when the second gaming state ends, so that the motivation of the player after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state There was a problem that it became difficult to maintain. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine after the transition to the first gaming state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, a special state is set when the advantageous second game state is changed to another game state, so that it is possible to make the player want to continue the game during the special state. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.

In the game machine M1, the state control means is in the special state until the specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the setting condition is satisfied in the second state and the first game state is set. A game machine M2 characterized in that it is controlled so as to be.

According to the gaming machine M2, when the transition from the advantageous second gaming state to the less advantageous first gaming state is performed, a special state is set, so that the player quits the game when the second gaming state ends. It can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the discrimination means is based on the establishment of a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The second discrimination means is composed of at least the second discrimination means for executing the discrimination, and the type determination means is such that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the second discrimination result rather than the specific discrimination result. When the determination result of the means is the specific determination result, the second privilege game is more easily determined, and the state control means is the first determination as the special state. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the determination of the means is controlled so as to be less likely to be executed than the determination of the second determination means.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1 or M2, the determination of the second determination means is easily executed during the special state, so that a specific determination result can be obtained during the special state. There is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation.

In the game machine M3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entering means provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means can enter, and the first direction. The second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and the game ball launched in the first direction become difficult to enter and the game ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where the ball can be entered. A third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and a game ball can enter the third entry means. Based on the variable means that can be changed to the first position, the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. A game ball enters at least one of a first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination of the discrimination means, a second ball entry means, and a third ball entry means. The second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information is provided, and the first discrimination means uses the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means to perform discrimination. The second discriminating means executes the discriminant using the discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring means, and the variable means is more than the first gaming state. The gaming machine M4 is configured so that the second gaming state is more easily changed from the second position to the first position.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, even in the second game state in which the special state is not set, the judgment by the second discriminating means can be executed, so that the second discriminating means There is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination.

In the game machine M3 or M4, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means. Dynamic display means composed of at least a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result of the above, and dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the display period is provided, and the state control means has a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means as the special state. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the period is likely to be longer than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3 or M4, in a special state, a long dynamic display period is likely to be set when the discrimination of the first discriminating means is executed. The discrimination by the second discrimination means can be executed a plurality of times during the target display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the possibility that a specific determination result can be obtained by the determination of the second determination means can be increased.

In the game machine M5, the dynamic display means duplicates the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means and the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means. A game machine M6 characterized in that it is configured to be playable.

According to the game machine M6, there is an effect that the determination of the first determination means and the determination of the second determination means can be executed more efficiently.

In any of the game machines M1 to M6, the game state setting means sets the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. One game state is set from a plurality of game states including at least one, and the second game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that a specific setting condition is satisfied in the third game state. A gaming machine M7 characterized in that it is configured to be set.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the advantageous third gaming state is terminated and set to the second gaming state, and further the second gaming state is terminated, which is disadvantageous. When the player shifts to the first gaming state, forming a special state has the effect of alleviating the disappointment of the player.

In any of the game machines M1 to M7, the game state setting means has completed the determination of the predetermined number of times of the determination means without executing the privilege game after the second game state is set. The gaming machine M8 is characterized in that the other gaming state is set by satisfying the setting condition.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines M1 to M7, the player's case where the privilege game is not executed in the advantageous second game state and the player shifts to another game state. It has the effect of alleviating disappointment.

<Characteristic N group> (During an advantageous state, it is more advantageous to launch a game ball at a second firing interval longer than the first firing interval than to launch a game ball at the first firing interval. Playability)
In a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and a launching means that can launch a game ball according to the operation content for the operating means, the game is based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game in which one game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state that is disadvantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game machine is provided with a state setting means, and the game machine is likely to launch a game ball at a first firing interval by the launching means while at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. When the operating means is operated with the second operating content, which makes it easier for the game ball to be launched at a firing interval longer than the first firing interval, rather than operating the operating means with the first operating content. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it is configured so that

According to the game machine N1, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the longer the firing interval is, the more advantageous it is, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine N1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on a game ball entering the ball entry means, and a discrimination information acquisition means. It is advantageous for the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result. The game machine includes a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, and the game machine performs the second operation rather than operating the operation means with the first operation content while the specific condition is satisfied. When the operating means is operated according to the content, the number of times of discrimination of the discriminating means is likely to increase until the discriminating using all the discriminating information acquired in the second gaming state is completed. A game machine N2 characterized by being

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, it is possible to realize a novel game property that the longer the firing interval is, the more times the discriminating means are discriminated, so that the player can enjoy the game. It has the effect of being able to improve further.

In the game machine N2, the second discriminating means capable of entering the game ball and the second discriminating information capable of acquiring the discriminating information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The discriminating means is provided with an acquisition means and a storage means that can store the discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring means until it is used for discriminating the discriminating means, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. Is a first discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a second discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. It is composed of at least the discriminating means, and the discriminating of the first discriminating means is configured so that the discriminating result is more advantageous than the discriminating of the second discriminating means, and the gaming machine. Is that the second game is performed when the operating means is operated according to the second operation content, rather than when the operating means is operated by the first operation content while the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the number of times of discrimination of the first discriminating means is likely to increase until the discriminating using all the discriminating information acquired in the state is completed.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2, the number of times of discrimination of the first discriminating means having a high degree of advantage can be changed according to the operation content while the specific condition is satisfied. Since it is possible to realize a high level of playability, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The game machine N3 is characterized in that the determination of the second determination means is configured to be executed with priority over the determination of the first determination means.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N3, the discrimination of the second discriminating means having a low degree of advantage is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is stronger to increase the number of discriminating times of the second discriminating means. It has the effect of making you want.

In the game machine N3 or N4, the game state setting means is based on the fact that in the second game state, the determination of the first determination means of the predetermined number of times is completed without executing the privilege game. The first game state is set, and the game state setting means performs the second determination of the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times, without executing the privilege game in the second game state. The gaming machine N5, characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the completion of determination of the means.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N3 or N4, the condition for setting the first gaming state is different between the number of times the first discriminating means is discriminated and the number of times the second discriminating means is discriminated. This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

The second game machine N2 to N5 is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means. The operation content of is characterized in that the operation content is such that the game ball is easily launched so that the game ball enters the ball entry means in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed. Game machine N6 to play.

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines N2 to N5, by performing the second operation content, a period during which the dynamic display is not executed is likely to occur, which is an advantageous second. It can be configured so that the period set in the gaming state tends to be long. Therefore, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In any of the game machines N1 to N6, the launching means is configured to be capable of firing a game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a predetermined firing interval according to the operation content for the operating means. The game machine N7 is characterized in that the operation of the first operation content is configured by the operation content that facilitates the launch of the game ball at the specific launch interval by the launch means.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines N1 to N6, the operation of the first operation content is composed of a relatively simple operation of firing the game ball at the shortest firing interval. Therefore, it can be easily performed regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic O group> (Gameability in which it is more advantageous to hit after the specific condition is satisfied than to hit before the specific condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous state)
Discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and discrimination results of the discrimination means. In a game machine provided with a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result, the first is based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a game state is provided, and the game machine is acquired during the first game state after the first game state is set. Before the determination using all the determination information is completed, the specific determination result is obtained before the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and after the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is different from that of the case where the specific determination result is obtained.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the degree of advantage of the player is constant while the same gaming state is set, so that the game becomes monotonous while the same gaming state is set. There is a risk that it will be difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine O1, when a specific determination result is obtained, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that the game can be played by the player. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the game machine O1, a predetermined specific condition is set between the time when the first gaming state is set and the time when the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired during the first gaming state is completed. It is configured that the case where the specific determination result is obtained after the specific condition is satisfied is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the specific determination result is obtained before the establishment. Characterized game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, when the player shifts to the first game state, the game is performed with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained after the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In the game machine O1 or O2, the game state setting means continuously obtains the specific determination result and the determination of the determination means a predetermined number of times after the first game state is set. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state is set based on the different second determination results.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1 or O2, in the first game state, it can be expected that a specific determination result will be obtained by the end of the determination of a specific number of times. It has the effect of improving the interest in the game.

In the game machine O3, the specific condition is the result of the second determination continuously over the determination of the determination means of the second number of times or less after the first game state is set. A game machine O4 characterized in that it is established based on.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine O3, the degree of advantage of the privileged game changes according to the number of determinations executed in the first game state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine O4 includes a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information at least until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. The second gaming state is configured so that the discrimination information acquisition means is more difficult to acquire the discrimination information than the first gaming state, and the specific condition is the first gaming state. The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that, after the setting is made, the case is established based on the fact that the second determination result is continuously obtained over the determination by the determination means a specific number of times.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine O4, the determination executed before the end of the first game state and the storage means are stored in the storage means when the second game state is set. Since the degree of advantage when the privilege game is executed varies depending on the discrimination based on the discrimination information, the game is played by paying attention to the number of discrimination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second game state is set. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic P group> (Make the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectations during the short time)
The first game state is based on the fact that the first game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition and the specific condition predetermined in the first game state are satisfied. A second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a different degree of advantage from the above is provided, and in the first game state, it becomes difficult to satisfy the specific condition by playing a game by the first game method. By playing a game by a second game method different from the first game method, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than by playing a game by the first game method. Characterized game machine P1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the same gaming state may be disadvantageous to the player if the game is not performed by the same gaming method while the same gaming state is set. During the setting, the game method corresponding to the game state had to be continuously executed. Therefore, the game becomes monotonous, and it may be difficult for the player to improve his or her interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the game playability can be different depending on whether the game is performed by the first game method or the second game method, so that the player's interest in the game can be changed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine P1, the discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the privilege for executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminating result. The first game state is provided with a game execution means, and the privilege game is hard to be executed and the specific condition is hard to be satisfied by playing the game by the first game method, and the second By playing the game according to the above-mentioned game method, it is easier to execute the privileged game and more easily to satisfy the specific condition than to play the game by the first game method. Characterized game machine P2.

According to the game machine P2, the game playability can be made different depending on whether the game is performed by the first game method or the second game method, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine P2, the discrimination means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The first discriminating means is more difficult to execute the privilege game when the discriminating is executed than the discriminating of the second discriminating means. Moreover, the specific condition is configured so as to be difficult to be satisfied, and the first game method is executed by the determination of the first determination means rather than the determination of the second determination means. It is configured by a game method that makes it easier to perform, and the second game method is configured by a game method that makes it easier to execute the determination of the second determination means than the determination of the first determination means. Characterized game machine P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine P2, the game performance in the first game state can be different depending on the type of the discrimination means for which the discrimination is executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game is further enhanced. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine P3, the specific condition is based on the fact that after the first game state is set, the privilege game is not executed and the determination of the first determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. It is established based on the fact that the privilege game is not executed after the second game state is set and the determination of the second determination means of the second number of times less than the first number of times is executed. A game machine P4 characterized in that it is configured as such.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine P3, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times the first discriminating means is discriminated and the number of times the second discriminating means is discriminated.

In the game machine P3 or P4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball and a first entry provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction predetermined by the launching means can enter. The ball means and the game ball launched in the specific direction are provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the game ball moves to the second entry means different from the first entry means and the first entry means. The first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination of the discrimination means based on the ball entering, and the above-mentioned said based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information is provided, and the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The gaming machine P5 is characterized in that the second discrimination means is for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3 or P4, in the first game state, the game ball is launched in a specific direction to discriminate the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means. Since it is possible to execute both the discrimination and the determination, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic Q group> (The degree of advantage is higher when the jackpot is won in the unfavorable gaming state than when the jackpot is won in the advantageous gaming state)
A discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. A plurality of game machines including a game execution means, including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of the game states is provided, and the game machine has the specific determination result in the first game state when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state. A game machine Q1 characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous than when it becomes.

According to the game machine Q1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the predetermined discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are advantageous to the player based on the predetermined specific discriminant result. It is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privileged game, and based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a first game state and a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of states including at least a state is provided, and the game machine is said to have the specific determination result in the first game state as the second game. It is configured to be more advantageous than the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the state.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a specific determination result is more strongly desired in a game state in which the degree of advantage is low, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved can be improved. is there.

In the game machine Q1, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set the first game state based on the fact that a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the privilege game is satisfied in the second game state. A game machine Q2 characterized by being.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1, the game state setting means is based on the fact that a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the privilege game is satisfied in the second game state. Since the first game state can be set, a novel game property that makes it more strongly expected that a specific setting condition is satisfied is realized rather than a specific determination result in an advantageous second game state. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the discrimination means is based on the establishment of a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the discriminating, and the first gaming state is such that the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is not the specific discriminant result. It is configured so that it is more advantageous when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result, and in the second gaming state, the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is the specific discrimination. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that it is more likely to be advantageous when the determination result of the first determination means becomes the specific determination result rather than the result.

According to the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the first discriminating condition. Is composed of at least a second discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of different second discriminating conditions, and in the first gaming state, the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is the specific. It is configured that the case where the determination result of the second determination means becomes the specific determination result is more likely to be more advantageous than the determination result of the above, and the second gaming state is the first. 2 It is configured that the case where the discrimination result of the first discriminating means becomes the specific discriminant result is more advantageous than the discriminating result of the discriminating means becomes the specific discriminant result.

As a result, it can be expected that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by discrimination of different discrimination means depending on the game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine Q3, the game ball has entered the first ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means. Based on the first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the first discrimination information to be used for the first discrimination, and the second discriminating information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. The second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information to be used for the discrimination, the first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position. The variable means can be changed to a second position where the ball is difficult to enter, and at least in the first game state, the variable means is controlled by the first control which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. The first discrimination condition is satisfied based on the acquisition of the first discrimination information by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and includes the variable control means for variably controlling the first discrimination information. The discrimination condition of the gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the acquisition of the second discrimination information by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first entry means described above. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball means, the first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the first discrimination information to be used for the first discrimination and the game ball to the second ball entry means. A second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring a second discrimination information to be used for the second discrimination based on the ball entering, and a first for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a position and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and at least in the first game state, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The variable control means for variably controlling the variable means by the first control that makes it difficult to ball is provided, and the first discrimination condition is that the first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination condition is established based on the fact that the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

As a result, the second discrimination information can be difficult to be stored in the second discrimination information storage means in the first game state, so that many discriminations by the second discrimination means are executed in the first game state, and the player can perform the discrimination. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive advantage.

In the game machine Q4, the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored until it is used for discrimination of the second discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of specific information. The game state setting means includes at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous than the second game state. One of a plurality of gaming states can be set, and the second gaming state is such that the variable means is variably controlled by the first control, and the third gaming state is The variable means is variably controlled by the second control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first control, and the game state setting means is the third game. The second game state is set based on the fact that a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is obtained over the determination of the determination means a predetermined number of times in the state, and the second game The feature is that the first gaming state can be set based on the result of the deviation determination over the determination of the determination means a predetermined number of times in the state. Game machine Q5 to play.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q4, the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is subjected to the second discrimination with a predetermined number of specific information as an upper limit. The game state setting means includes the discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discriminating the means, and the game state setting means is more than the first game state, the second game state, and the second game state. It is configured so that one gaming state can be set from a plurality of advantageous third gaming states including at least, and in the second gaming state, the variable means is variably controlled by the first control. In the third game state, the variable means is variably controlled by the second control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first control. The game state setting means is based on the fact that the discriminant determination result different from the specific discriminant result is obtained over the determination of the discriminating means a predetermined number of times in the third game state. 2 The game state is set, and the first game state is set based on the result of the deviation determination over the determination of the determination means of the second number of times predetermined in the second game state. Is configured to be possible.

As a result, it is hoped that the discrimination based on the second discrimination information stored in the second discrimination information storage means in the third gaming state will result in an outlier discrimination result in the second gaming state, while the second gaming state. In the first game state set after the end of the game, it is possible to realize an extremely novel game property in which a specific determination result is desired, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. There is an effect.

In the game machine Q5, the game machine Q6 is characterized in that the specific number of information is composed of a number larger than the sum of the first number of times and the second number of times.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q5, the specific number of information is composed of a number larger than the sum of the first number of times and the second number of times, so that the second game state In the first game state, at least one determination of the second determination means can be almost certainly executed by the deviation determination result over the determination of the second determination means of the second number of times. is there.

In any of the game machines Q3 to Q6, a specific state advantageous to the player is set based on the determination result of the second determination means being the specific determination result in the second gaming state. The specific state setting means is configured so that the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first gaming state, and the specific state setting means A gaming machine characterized in that the specific state can be set based on the determination result of the second determination means being the specific determination result in the specific state. Q7.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q3 to Q6, the game is based on the fact that the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result in the second gaming state. A specific state setting means capable of setting a specific state that is advantageous to the person is provided, and the specific state is configured so that the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first game state. The specific state setting means can set the specific state based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result in the specific state. It is configured.

As a result, the degree of advantage of the specific state can be made higher, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved when the specific state is set.

In the game machine Q7, in the second gaming state, when the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result, the specific state is changed by the specific state setting means rather than the first gaming state. A game machine Q8 characterized in that it is difficult to set.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q7, the second gaming state is when the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result rather than the first gaming state. Since the specific state is difficult to be set by the specific state setting means, it is possible to strongly expect the player to have the determination result of the second determination means become a specific determination result in the first gaming state. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic R group> (look-ahead effect suggesting that it does not hit in an advantageous gaming state)
A discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. In a game machine provided with a game execution means, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a first setting condition and a second setting condition in the first game state Based on the establishment, the second gaming state setting means for setting the second gaming state having a lower advantage than the first gaming state, and the ease with which the second setting condition is satisfied in the first gaming state. The gaming machine R1 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect that can suggest the above.

According to the game machine R1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the predetermined discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are advantageous to the player based on the predetermined specific discriminant result. The first game state setting means for setting the first game state and the first game state based on the establishment of the first setting condition, which are provided with the privilege game execution means for executing the above-mentioned privilege game. A second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state based on the establishment of the second setting condition, and the second game state in the first game state. It is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect that can suggest the ease with which the setting condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel effect of suggesting whether or not a second gaming state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set, so that the effect of improving the player's interest in the game can be improved. is there.

In the game machine R1, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination of the discrimination means based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are determined. Until the discrimination using the information is executed, the discrimination information is stored according to the storage means that can be stored up to a predetermined specific number of information and the discrimination information stored in the storage means. The second setting condition is set by the first gaming state, comprising a specific means capable of specifying the determination result of the determination means before the determination of the determination means used is executed. It is established based on the fact that a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of times after the determination is performed, and the specific effect executing means is the identification. The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the specific effect of the effect mode according to the determination result specified by the means can be executed before the determination of the specific number of times is completed.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination of the discrimination means based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquisition means. The discriminant information acquired in The second type is provided with a specific means capable of specifying the discrimination result of the discrimination means before the discrimination of the discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed according to the discrimination information. The setting condition is established based on the fact that after the first game state is set, a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of determinations. The specific effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect of the effect mode according to the determination result specified by the specific means before the determination of the specific number of times is completed.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an extremely novel game playability that suggests in advance the degree of expectation that will result in a continuous deviation discrimination over a specific number of discriminations.

In the game machine R1 or R2, the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state. A game machine R3 characterized by being a device.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1 or R2, when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state rather than the specific determination result in the first game state. Since it is configured to be more advantageous to the player, it is possible that the specific determination result is not obtained in the first gaming state where the degree of advantage is high, but is obtained in the second gaming state where the degree of advantage is low. It has the effect of being able to realize a novel playability that makes you expect.

The game machine R3 includes a third game state setting means for setting a third game state in which the predetermined acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state based on the establishment of the third setting condition. The setting condition of 1 is configured so as to be satisfied in the third gaming state, and the discrimination information acquired during the third gaming state and stored in the storage means is used. A game characterized in that it is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state. Machine R4.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine R3, a third game state setting means for setting a third game state in which the predetermined acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state is provided. The setting condition of 1 is configured so as to be satisfied in the third gaming state, and the discrimination information acquired during the third gaming state and stored in the storage means is used. It is configured that the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state is more advantageous to the player than the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state.

As a result, it can be expected that more of the predetermined acquisition conditions are satisfied in the third gaming state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine R3 or R4, the specific effect executing means is said to be specific in the second gaming state before the second setting condition is satisfied, depending on the determination result specified by the specific means. The gaming machine R5 is characterized in that the specific effect having a content suggesting a determination result can be executed.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effect of the game machine R3 or R4, the specific effect executing means is before the second setting condition is satisfied according to the determination result specified by the specific means. In addition, since the specific effect of the content suggesting that the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state can be executed, the game can be performed by paying attention to the content of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines R2 to R5, the first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball to the second entry means. The discriminating information includes a first position in which the ball can be entered, a second position in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first position, and a variable means that can be changed to the first position. The acquisition means are a first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means. It is composed of at least a second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information based on the above, and the discrimination means is based on the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The storage means is composed of at least a first discriminating means for executing the discriminant and a second discriminating means for executing the discriminant based on the discriminant information acquired by the second discriminant information acquisition means. Is a first storage means that can store the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means until the discrimination by the first discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed, and the second storage means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is at least composed of a second storage means that can store the discrimination information until the discrimination by the second discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed. Yes, the second discriminating means is configured to be able to perform discriminating with priority over the discriminating of the first discriminating means, and the specific means is stored in the second storage means. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the discrimination result of the discrimination means can be specified before the discrimination of the second discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed according to the discrimination information. The game machine R6.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R5, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. , The first position where the game ball can enter the second entry means and the second position where it is more difficult to enter the second entry means than the first position can be changed. The discrimination information acquisition means includes the first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means. It is composed of at least a second discrimination information acquisition means that acquires the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the discrimination means acquires the first discrimination information. At least the first discriminating means that executes the discriminant based on the discriminant information acquired by the means and the second discriminating means that executes the discriminant based on the discriminant information acquired by the second discriminant information acquiring means. It is configured, and the storage means stores the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means until the discrimination by the first discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed. A second storage that can store the possible first storage means and the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means until the discrimination by the second discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed. The second discriminating means is configured to be able to execute the discriminant with priority over the discriminating of the first discriminating means, and the specific means is configured to be capable of executing the discriminant. According to the discrimination information stored in the second storage means, it is possible to specify the discrimination result of the discrimination means before the discrimination of the second discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed. It is composed of.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying more attention to the specific effect.

In the game machine R6, the first control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the second control that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first control. The variable control means capable of variably controlling the variable means by a plurality of controls including at least a control, and the variable means in the first control by the variable control means based on the establishment of a third setting condition. A third game state setting means for setting a third game state in which is variably controlled is provided, and the first game state and the second game state are variably controlled by the second control by the variable control means. The means is configured to be variably controlled, and the first setting condition is configured to be satisfied in the third gaming state, and is configured to be satisfied in the first gaming state. It is more advantageous for the player when the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminant result in the second gaming state than when the discriminating result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminant result. A game machine R7 characterized by being easily configured.

According to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of the game machine R6, the first control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the second ball entry means rather than the first control. The variable control means that can variably control the variable means by a plurality of controls including at least a second control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter, and the variable control means based on the establishment of the third setting condition. A third game state setting means for setting a third game state in which the variable means is variably controlled by the first control by the control means is provided, and the first game state and the second game state are described above. The variable control means is configured so that the variable means is variably controlled by the second control, and the first setting condition is configured so as to be satisfied in the third gaming state. The discrimination result of the second discriminating means is the specific discriminant result in the second gaming state, rather than the discriminating result of the second discriminating means being the specific discriminant result in the first gaming state. It is structured so that it is more likely to be advantageous to the player when it becomes.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the control content of the variable control means.

In the game machine R7, a specific state capable of setting a specific state advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the second determination means being the specific determination result in the second gaming state. The specific state setting means is provided so that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first gaming state, and the specific state setting means is the specific state. The gaming machine R8 is configured so that the specific state can be set based on the determination result of the second determination means being the specific determination result.

According to the game machine R8, in addition to the effect of the game machine R7, the determination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result in the second gaming state, and the identification is advantageous to the player. The specific state setting means capable of setting the state of the above is provided, and the specific state is configured so that the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first game state. The specific state setting means is configured to be able to set the specific state based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result in the specific state.

As a result, the game can be performed with a strong expectation that a specific state will be set, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine R8, when the determination result of the second determination means becomes the specific determination result, the specific state is changed by the specific state setting means rather than the second gaming state. The gaming machine R9 is characterized in that it is difficult to set.

According to the game machine R9, in addition to the effect of the game machine R8, the first game state is when the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result rather than the second gaming state. Since the specific state is difficult to be set by the specific state setting means, the game is performed with a stronger expectation that the discrimination result of the second discriminating means will be a specific discriminating result in the second gaming state. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic S group> (By winning consecutive big hits over a specific number of lottery, it becomes easier to shift to an advantageous gaming state)
A discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. In a game machine provided with a game execution means, a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state after the privileged game is completed. The game machine is provided with the privilege of a predetermined number of times that the specific determination result is obtained during the set game state after the game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means. By continuously repeating the game state after the end of the game, the first game state is more easily set by the game state setting means than when the number of consecutive times is less than the specific number of times. A game machine S1 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine S1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the predetermined discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are advantageous to the player based on the predetermined specific discriminating result. It is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, and as a game state after the privilege game is completed, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to the player. The game machine is provided with a game state setting means for setting the above, and it is predetermined that the specific determination result will be obtained during the set game state after the game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means. By continuously repeating the specified number of times over the game state after the end of the privileged game, the first game state is set by the game state setting means than when the number of consecutive times is less than the specified number of times. It is configured to be easy.

As a result, it is possible to strongly expect that a specific determination result will be obtained after the privileged game is completed and before the transition to another game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In the game machine S1, when the specific determination result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of determinations, the continuous number of the specific determination results is less than the specific number of times. Rather, the gaming machine S2 is configured so that the first gaming state can be easily set by the gaming state setting means.

According to the game machine S2, when the specific determination result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of determinations, the number of consecutive times of the specific determination result is less than the specific number of times. Since the first game state is more easily set by the game state setting means than in the case of the above case, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes it expected that a specific determination result is continuous. There is an effect.

In the game machine S1 or S2, the game state setting means has the first game state and the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. It is configured so that one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a state can be set, and in the gaming machine, the discrimination result of the discriminating means is different from the specific discriminating result in the second gaming state. Based on the different deviation determination results, it becomes easier to set a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, and the determination result of the determination means is the same as the specific determination result in the second gaming state. The gaming machine S3 is configured so that the first gaming state can be easily set based on the above.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine S1 or S2, the game state setting means sets the first game state and the first game as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. A second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the state and one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one can be set, and the gaming machine is the discriminating means in the second gaming state. Based on the fact that the determination result of is different from the specific determination result, the third gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, is likely to be set, and the determination is made in the second gaming state. It is configured so that the first gaming state can be easily set based on the determination result of the means being the specific determination result.

As a result, when the game state after the privilege game is executed is set to the second game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property that can be strongly expected to continuously produce a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine S3, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the satisfying of the second discriminating condition. The game state setting means is more than the first game state when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the first determination means in the second game state. It becomes easier to set the second game state, and when the determination of the second determination means results in the specific determination result in the second game state, the first game state is set rather than the second game state. The gaming machine S4, which is configured to be easy to use.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effect of the game machine S3, the discriminating means is based on the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the second discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the discriminating, and the gaming state setting means has obtained the specific discriminating result by discriminating the first discriminating means in the second gaming state. In this case, the second game state is easier to set than the first game state, and when the determination of the second determination means results in the specific determination result in the second game state, the second game It is configured so that the first gaming state can be set more easily than the state.

As a result, in the second gaming state, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the discrimination of the second discriminating means will result in a specific discriminating result.

In the game machine S4, the first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball and the second entry means provided at a position different from the first ball entry means. The ball means, the first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the first discrimination information to be used for the discrimination of the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means. Acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information to be used for the discrimination of the second discrimination means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discriminant information storage means that can store the first discriminant information until it is used for discriminating the first discriminant means, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and the second discriminant information acquisition means acquired. The second discrimination information is provided with a second discrimination information storage means that can store the second discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for the discrimination of the first discrimination means, and the privilege game is performed in the first direction. It is configured to be advantageous to the player by firing the game ball, and in the second game state, the game ball moves to the second ball entry means at least during the execution of the privilege game. A game machine S5 characterized in that it is configured to be easy to enter a ball.

According to the game machine S5, in addition to the effect of the game machine S4, the first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and the first ball entry means thereof. Acquires the second discriminating means provided at different positions and the first discriminating information to be used for discriminating the first discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. The first discrimination information acquisition means and the second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information to be used for discrimination of the second discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The first discrimination information storage means that can store the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means until it is used for discrimination of the first discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of information, and the above. A second discrimination information storage means that can store the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means until it is used for discrimination of the first discrimination means, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, is provided. The privilege game is configured to be advantageous to the player by firing the game ball in the first direction, and the second game state is at least more than during the execution of the privilege game. It is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.

As a result, when the second gaming state is first set as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, the discrimination based on the first discrimination information can be started first, so that the second gaming state is set. However, if the discriminant result of the first discriminating means becomes a specific discriminant result and the discriminating result of the second discriminating means does not become a specific discriminant result in the second gaming state set again, the first gaming state is advantageous. Since it can be configured so as not to shift, there is an effect that the interest of the player when shifting to the first gaming state can be further improved.

In the game machine S5, the variable is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. In the means and the second game state, the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means, and the game is played in the second ball entry means in the third game state and during the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine S6 is characterized by comprising a variable control means for variably controlling the variable means so that the ball is difficult to enter.

According to the game machine S6, in addition to the effect of the game machine S5, the first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. In the second gaming state, the game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means, and the third gaming state and the privilege game are being executed. A variable control means for variably controlling the variable means so that the game ball does not easily enter the second ball entry means is provided.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable control of the variable means.

In any of the game machines S1 to S6, the game state setting means can set the first game state based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result in the first game state. A game machine S7 characterized by being configured in.

According to the game machine S7, in addition to the effects of the game machines S1 to S6, the game state setting means is based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes a specific discriminating result in the first gaming state. Since the first game state can be set, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained in the first game state.

<Characteristic T group> (The consecutive villas are confirmed when specific conditions are met during the jackpot game)
A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition. Based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result during the execution of the privilege game, the specific condition is controlled so as to be easily satisfied after the end of the privilege game. A gaming machine T1 comprising a condition control means.

According to the game machine T1, based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a predetermined determination condition are satisfied. The specific condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game based on the determination means for executing the determination and the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result during the execution of the privilege game. It is provided with a specific condition control means for controlling so as to be easy.

As a result, it is possible to expect that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result during the execution of the privilege game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the execution of the privilege game. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine T1, the game machine T2 is characterized in that the predetermined determination condition can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the privilege game is executed.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine T1, the predetermined determination condition can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, other than during the execution of the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to expect a specific discrimination result even in the state of.

In the game machine T2, the specific condition control means is more likely to obtain the specific determination result during the execution of the privilege game than to obtain the specific determination result in the state where the privilege game is not executed. , The gaming machine T3 characterized in that it is configured to be controllable so that the specific condition is easily satisfied.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect of the game machine T2, the specific condition control means may obtain the specific determination result during the execution of the privilege game rather than the specific determination result in the state where the privilege game is not executed. Since it is configured to be controllable so that the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied when a specific determination result is obtained, it is more strongly expected that the specific determination result will be obtained during the execution of the privilege game. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines T1 to T3, based on the determination being executed by the determination means, it is possible to set the determination period until the determination result of the determination is shown according to the determination result of the determination. A determination period setting means capable of setting a determination period having a length that is likely to elapse after the end of the privilege game is provided as the determination period until at least the specific determination result is shown. A game machine T4 characterized by.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines T1 to T3, the judgment result of the discrimination is determined according to the judgment result of the judgment based on the judgment executed by the discrimination means. It is possible to set the determination period until the indication, and at least as the determination period until the specific determination result is indicated, a determination period having a length that is likely to elapse after the end of the privilege game is set. It is provided with a determination period setting means capable of enabling it.

As a result, if a specific determination result is obtained during the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to prevent the specific condition from being satisfied during the execution of the privilege game and the privilege game from being executed in duplicate. There is an effect.

In any of the game machines T1 to T4, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position A second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball and a variable means that can be changed are provided, and the specific condition is configured to be feasible based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means. The specific condition control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result. The gaming machine T5, which is characterized in that the above is possible.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines T1 to T4, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter and the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means. And a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable means which can be changed, and the specific condition is that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The specific condition control means is configured to be feasible based on the above, and the specific condition control means moves the variable means from the second position based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result. It is configured so that it can be changed to the first position for a predetermined period.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable operation of the variable means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine T5, a specific determination means that executes a specific determination different from the determination of the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the game ball can enter the ball. A variable ball-entry means that can be changed to one state and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, and a first determination in which the determination result of the specific determination means is predetermined. Based on the result, the variable ball entering means includes a variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the privileged game executing means. Is a first privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result of the specific determination means having a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the variable ball entry means. It is composed of at least a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and the probability of the second determination result is the first. The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that it is configured to be higher than the probability of the determination result of.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine T5, the specific discrimination means that executes a specific discrimination different from the discrimination of the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means. And the variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the specific discriminating means. Variable game execution in which the variable ball entering means executes a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result being the predetermined first determination result. First, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the determination result of the specific determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. It is composed of at least a privilege game execution means and a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and is composed of the second. The probability of the determination result is higher than the probability of the first determination result.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the discrimination result of the specific discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that the specific discriminating means is configured to be a discriminating result of either the first discriminating result or the second discriminating result.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effect of the game machine T6, the specific discrimination means is configured to be a discrimination result of either the first discrimination result or the second discrimination result. Therefore, since the privilege game is substantially determined when the specific determination means is executed, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the variable means will be changed to the first position. is there.

In any of the game machines T5 to T7, among a plurality of game machines including at least a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The specific condition control means is provided with a game state setting means capable of setting the game state from 1 to 1, and the specific condition control means enters the ball entry means based on the fact that the specific determination result is shown during the first game state. The variable means is changed in the first variable pattern that makes it difficult to insert the game ball, and the first variable is based on the fact that the specific determination result is shown during the second game state. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that the variable means can be changed by a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the pattern.

According to the game machine T8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines T5 to T7, the first game state and the first game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The specific condition control means is provided with a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least two game states, and the specific condition control means shows the specific determination result during the first game state. Based on this, the variable means is changed in a first variable pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and the specific determination result is shown during the second gaming state. Based on the above, it is possible to change the variable means with a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern. ..

This has the effect that it can be strongly expected that a specific determination result will be shown during the second gaming state.

<Characteristic U group> (It is more advantageous to win a regular map during a big hit than to win a regular map during a short time)
A player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the first discrimination means are the predetermined first discrimination results. In a game machine equipped with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter and the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means. And the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the variable means that can be changed, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing means that the game ball has passed. Based on the second determination means that executes the second determination based on the determination and the determination result of the second determination means becomes the second determination result, the variable means is variable in a predetermined variable pattern. Based on the variable game executing means for executing the game and the execution of the second determination by the second determination means, the above-mentioned until the second determination can be executed next. As variable modes of the variable means, a first variable mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a second variable mode in which the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry means than the first variable mode. A variable control means capable of varying the variable means in one of a plurality of variable modes including at least, and a specific gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition are included. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states is provided, and the variable game state is changed when the second determination is executed when the privilege game is being executed rather than the specific game state. The gaming machine U1 is configured so that the variable means can be easily changed in the second variable mode by the control means.

According to the game machine U1, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the first discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. It is equipped with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact, and a ball entry means in which the game ball can enter and a game ball enters the ball entry means. Variable means that can be changed to the first position where the ball is possible and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing means thereof. The variable means is predetermined based on the second discriminating means that executes the second discriminating based on the passage of the game ball and the discriminating result of the second discriminating means becoming the second discriminating result. Based on the variable game execution means that executes the variable game that is variable in the variable pattern and the second determination by the second determination means, it is possible to execute the second determination next. As the variable mode of the variable means until the above, the first variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the ball entering means and the game ball enter into the ball entering means rather than the first variable mode. It is advantageous for the player based on the establishment of the variable control means capable of changing the variable means in one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode in which the ball is easy to ball and a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state is provided, and the second determination can be made when the privilege game is being executed rather than the specific game state. When executed, the variable control means is configured so that the variable means can be easily changed in the second variable mode.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player is expected to perform the discrimination of the second discriminating means during the execution of the privilege game rather than the specific game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine U1, the specific gaming state is configured so that the probability that the second determination result will be obtained when the determination by the second determination means is executed is higher than during the execution of the privilege game. A game machine U2 characterized by being

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine U1, the specific gaming state is determined by the second determination means when the determination by the second determination means is executed rather than during the execution of the privilege game. Since it is configured so that the probability of the result is high, the game can be performed with the expectation that the game will shift to the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine U1 or U2, the variable control means ends the privilege game when the second determination result is obtained in a state where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the variable means is variably controllable so that the variable game can be easily started after the game is performed.

According to the game machine U3, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1 or U2, the variable control means is the second determination result in a state where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game. In the case of, the variable means is variably controllable so that the variable game can be easily started after the privilege game is completed. Therefore, the execution period of the privilege game and the execution period of the variable game There is an effect that it is possible to suppress duplication.

In the game machine U3, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period setting means for setting is provided, and the privilege game execution means has a predetermined specific period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of the privilege game in the privilege game. As described above, the privilege game is configured to be executable, and the dynamic display period setting means serves as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the second determination result. A game machine U5 characterized in that the specific period can be set.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of the game machine U4, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the identification information by the dynamic display means. A dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the above is provided, and the privilege game execution means is from the time when the specific condition is satisfied in the privilege game until the end of the privilege game. The privilege game is configured to be executable so that the period of the above is a predetermined specific period, and the dynamic display period setting means is the identification information for showing the second determination result. The specific period can be set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained after the specific condition is satisfied in the privilege game, there is an effect that the variable game can be surely started after the privilege game is completed.

In the game machine U5, when the specific game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means, the set specific game state is likely to continue for at least the specific period or more. A game machine U6, characterized in that it includes a period control means for controlling such a situation.

According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine U5, when the specific game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means, the set specific game state is set. Since the period control means for controlling the gaming state so as to be easy to continue for at least the specific period or longer is provided, when a specific determination result is obtained after the establishment of the specific condition in the privilege game, the game state is surely during the specific gaming state. Has the effect of being able to start variable games.

In the game machine U6, the period control means is configured to be controllable so that the specific game state is likely to end when the specific period elapses, and the variable control means is the specific. When the variable game is started during the game state of, the variable means is variably controlled so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined first period, and the specific When the variable game is started after the end of the gaming state, the variable means may be variably controlled so as to be variable from the second position to the first position in a second period shorter than the first period. A game machine U7 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effect of the game machine U6, the period control means is configured to be controllable so that the specific game state is likely to end when the specific period elapses. In the variable control means, when the variable game is started during the specific gaming state, the variable control means moves from the second position to the first position for a predetermined first period. Variable control is performed so as to be variable, and when the variable game is started after the end of the specific gaming state, the variable means has a second period shorter than the first period, and the second position to the first position. It is configured so that it can be variably controlled so as to be variable to.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the variable game will be started during the specific game state.

In any of the game machines U1 to U7, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. , A third discriminating means that executes a third discriminating based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means, and a discriminating result of the third discriminating means become a predetermined third discriminating result. Based on the fact, the variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the variable ball entry means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. The privilege game execution means includes a second privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game based on the determination result of the third determination means becoming the first determination result. The third discriminating means is configured to be possible, and the probability of the third discriminating result is higher than the probability of the first discriminating result. A game machine U8 characterized by.

According to the game machine U8, in addition to the effects of the game machines U1 to U7, the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The variable ball-entry means that can be changed, the third determination means that executes the third determination based on the game ball entering the ball-entry means, and the determination result of the third determination means are predetermined. Based on the result of the third determination, the variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the game ball to the variable ball entry means. A second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the entry of a ball is provided, and the privilege game execution means has the determination result of the third determination means as the first determination result. The privilege game is configured to be feasible based on the above, and the third determination means has a higher probability of obtaining the third determination result than the probability of obtaining the first determination result. It is configured to be.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the determination of the third determination means will be executed.

In the game machine U8, the game machine U9 is characterized in that the third determination means is configured to be either the first determination result or the third determination result.

According to the game machine U9, in addition to the effect of the game machine U8, the third discrimination means is configured to be either the first discrimination result or the third discrimination result. Therefore, the execution of the privilege game is substantially determined when the third determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the determination of the third determination means is executed.

<Characteristic V group> (The number of time reductions after winning is variable according to the fluctuation time when winning)
A discriminant means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. A movement to determine a game execution means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing a discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. The target display period determining means and the game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state which is advantageous to the player as the game state after the execution of the privileged game is completed. In addition, in the first game state, the degree of advantage for the player can be changed according to the dynamic display period when the privilege game that triggered the setting of the first game state is executed. A game machine V1 characterized in that it is configured as such.

According to the game machine V1, it is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the predetermined discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result. A privilege game execution means for executing a special privilege game, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing a discrimination result of the discrimination means, and an operation in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. As the dynamic display period determining means for determining the target display period and the game state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state advantageous to the player is set. The first game state is provided with a game state setting means, and the first game state is set by the player according to the dynamic display period when the privilege game that triggered the setting of the first game state is executed. It is configured so that the degree of advantage of is variable.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage changes according to the dynamic display period when the privilege game is executed, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In the game machine V1, the discrimination means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discriminating means, which is composed of at least the second discriminating means for executing the above. The target display means and the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discriminating means are at least configured, and the first gaming state is The game is characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is variable according to the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information when the privilege game is executed. Machine V2.

According to the game machine V2, in addition to the effect of the game machine V1, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminant means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of the second discriminant condition, and the dynamic display means is a first for showing the discriminant result of the first discriminant means. 1 It is composed of at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. In the first game state, the degree of advantage for the player is changed according to the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information when the privilege game is executed. It is configured in.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed by paying attention to the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information.

In the game machine V2, at least the privilege game is completed based on the completion of the dynamic display of the second identification information for showing the specific determination result during the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information. The game state setting means completes the dynamic display of the first identification information in the first game state, provided with an interruption means capable of interrupting the dynamic display of the first identification information. When the dynamic display of the second identification information is completed a predetermined number of times in the first game state, a second game state which is more disadvantageous than the first game state can be set. A game machine V3 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine V3, in addition to the effect of the game machine V2, the dynamic display of the second identification information for showing the specific determination result is completed during the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information. Based on this, the gaming state setting means is provided with interrupting means capable of interrupting the dynamic display of the first identification information at least until the end of the privileged game, and the gaming state setting means is in the first gaming state. When the dynamic display of the first identification information ends, and when the dynamic display of the second identification information a predetermined number of times in the first game state ends, the first game state is higher than that of the first game state. It is configured so that a disadvantageous second gaming state can be set.

As a result, even if the determination of the second determination means results in a specific determination result during the first gaming state, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information is not reset and the remaining dynamic display is performed. Since the dynamic display of the first identification information of the period is restarted after the end of the privilege game, the privilege game is made to execute the determination of the second discrimination means more times during the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes you want to execute a lot.

In the game machine V3, to a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction by the launching means can enter, and the ball entering means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, the acquisition means for acquiring the first determination information to be used for the first determination and the first determination information acquired by the acquisition means are obtained by a predetermined number of pieces of information. The first discriminating information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discriminating the first discriminating means is provided, and the privilege game is directed to the player by firing a game ball in the specific direction. The gaming machine V4, which is configured to be able to give a predetermined privilege.

According to the game machine V4, in addition to the effect of the game machine V3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball and a game ball launched in a specific direction by the launching means are provided at a position where the ball can enter. Based on the ball entering means and the game ball entering the ball entering means, the acquisition means for acquiring the first determination information to be used for the first determination, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means. The privilege game includes a first discrimination information storage means that can store the first discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination of the first discrimination means, and the privilege game is performed in the specific direction. It is configured so that a predetermined privilege can be given to a player by firing a game ball.

As a result, the first discrimination information can be stored in the first discrimination information storage means during the execution of the privilege game, so that the first discrimination information is set to the first game state and the dynamic display of the first identification information is started. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine V3 or V4, the dynamic display period determining means in the first game state, in the dynamic display of the second identification information, rather than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information. The gaming machine V5 is characterized in that the dynamic display period is configured so that a shorter dynamic display period can be easily set.

According to the game machine V5, in addition to the effect of the game machine V3 or V4, the dynamic display period determining means is longer than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information in the first game state. Since the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to make it easier to set a shorter dynamic display period, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed in the first game state. While it is being performed, the determination of the second determination means can be executed one or more times. Therefore, there is an effect that a chance of a specific determination result can be surely given in the first gaming state.

In any of the game machines V3 to V6, in the first game state, a specific effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the player corresponding to the remaining period of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed. A game machine V7 characterized by being provided with a specific effect executing means.

According to the game machine V7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines V3 to V6, the player corresponding to the remaining period of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information in the first game state. Since the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect suggesting the degree of advantage is provided, the degree of advantage can be easily confirmed by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the game machine V7, the specific effect includes the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information that can be executed in the remaining period of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the specific determination result. The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that it is configured in a production mode according to at least the probability of becoming.

According to the game machine V8, in addition to the effect of the game machine V7, the specific effect can be executed in the remaining period of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information. Since it is configured in an effect mode that at least corresponds to the number of times of display and the probability that the specific determination result is obtained, there is an effect that the degree of advantage can be accurately suggested by the specific effect.

<Characteristic W group> (The game state that you want to hit and the game state that you do not want to hit are set in a predetermined order)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game execution that executes privileged games that are advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result. It is possible to set one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, based on the means and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The first game state is configured to include a game state setting means, and it is more likely to be advantageous to the player if the determination result of the determination means does not become the specific determination result rather than the determination result of the specific determination result. The second gaming state is configured to be easily set after the end of the first gaming state, and the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, the specific determination result. The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous to the player than in the case where it does not become.

According to the game machine W1, the discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means become a predetermined specific discriminant result, which is an advantageous privilege for the player. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on the privilege game execution means for executing the game and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The first game state is provided with a game state setting means capable of setting the above, and it is better that the determination result of the determination means does not become the specific determination result than the determination result of the specific determination result. The second gaming state is configured to be easily set after the end of the first gaming state, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. However, it is configured to be more advantageous to the player than in the case where the specific determination result is not obtained.

As a result, a second gaming state is set after the first gaming state, which is more advantageous not to obtain a specific discrimination result, and then a second gaming state is set, which is more advantageous to obtain a specific discrimination result. It is possible to realize a novel playability that changes the degree. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine W1, the game state setting means continuously obtains a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result over a predetermined specific number of determinations in the first gaming state. A gaming machine W2 characterized in that the second gaming state can be set.

According to the game machine W2, in addition to the effect of the game machine W1, the game state setting means continuously obtains the specific determination result over a predetermined number of times of determination in the first game state. Since the second gaming state can be set based on the different deviation determination results, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the deviation determination results are expected to be continuous. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine W1 or W2, the game state setting means is configured to be capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state. The game state setting means is configured so that the plurality of game states can be easily set in a predetermined specific order when the third game state is set. A game machine W3 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine W3, in addition to the effect of the game machine W1 or W2, the game state setting means includes at least a plurality of the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state. One of them is configured to be able to set the game state, and the game state setting means has the plurality of games in a predetermined specific order triggered by the setting of the third game state. It is configured so that the state can be easily set.

As a result, since the game states are set in a specific order when the third game state is set, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine W3, the third gaming state is configured so that the determination result of the determination means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the determination result is not the specific determination result. A game machine W4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine W4, in addition to the effect of the game machine W3, in the third gaming state, the case where the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the specific discriminating result is more than the case where the discriminating result is not the specific discriminating result. Is also configured to be advantageous to the player, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed in the third game state with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained.

In any of the game machines W1 to W4, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination of the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discriminant information storage means that can store information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discriminating the discriminating means is provided, and the second gaming state is stored in the discriminating information storage means in the second gaming state. The discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used before the second gaming state is set, as compared with the case where the discrimination using the stored discrimination information results in the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine W5 is characterized in that it is more likely to be advantageous to the player if the specific determination result is obtained by the determination.

According to the game machine W5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines W1 to W4, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination of the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, The second gaming state includes a discrimination information storage means that can store the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means until it is used for discrimination of the discrimination means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. The discrimination information is set before the second gaming state is set, as compared with the case where the discrimination using the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means in the second gaming state yields the specific discrimination result. It is configured that it is more likely to be advantageous to the player if the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination using the discrimination information stored in the storage means.

As a result, a specific discrimination result is obtained depending on whether the discrimination information is stored before the second gaming state is set or the discrimination information is stored after the second gaming state is set. Since the degree of advantage in the case is variable, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine W5, the discriminating means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. The discriminant information acquisition means is composed of at least a second discriminant means for executing the above, and the discriminant information acquisition means obtains the first discriminant information used for discriminating the first discriminant means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. Second discrimination information acquisition that acquires the second discrimination information used for discrimination of the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination information acquisition means to be acquired and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. The second gaming state is composed of at least means, and the second discriminant information stored in the discriminant information storage means is used before the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that it is configured to be easily advantageous to the player by obtaining the specific discrimination result in the discrimination.

According to the game machine W6, in addition to the effect of the game machine W5, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminant means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of the second discriminant condition, and the discriminant information acquisition means is the first based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first discriminating information acquisition means for acquiring the first discriminating information used for discriminating the discriminating means and a second discriminating means used for discriminating the second discriminating means based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. It is composed of at least a second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information, and the second gaming state is stored in the discrimination information storage means before the second gaming state is set. The discriminant using the stored second discriminant information yields the specific discriminant result, which is likely to be advantageous to the player.

As a result, it is possible to strongly expect that the discrimination result of the second discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result in the second gaming state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the second gaming state is configured so that the first acquisition condition is more easily satisfied than the second acquisition condition. W7.

According to the game machine W7, in addition to the effect of the game machine W6, the second gaming state is configured so that the first acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second acquisition condition. Therefore, a novel game in which the second discrimination information is stored in advance before the second game state is set, and a specific discrimination result is obtained after the second game state is reached, which is advantageous. Sex can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine W6 or W7, the game ball enters the first ball entry means in which the game ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the second entry means. Variable means that can be changed to a possible first position and a second position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means from the first position, and the variable means is variably controlled. The first acquisition condition includes the variable control means, and is configured to be feasible based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second acquisition condition. The condition is configured to be feasible based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the second game state is such that the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The gaming machine W8 is characterized in that the variable means is variably controlled so as to make it difficult to enter the ball.

According to the game machine W8, in addition to the effect of the game machine W6 or W7, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and the first ball entry means described above. 2 It is possible to change to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter into the second entry means than the first position. The variable means and the variable control means for variably controlling the variable means are provided, and the first acquisition condition is configured to be feasible based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The second acquisition condition is configured to be feasible based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, and the second gaming state is The variable means is variably controlled so that the game ball is difficult to enter into the second ball entry means.

As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means when the second game state is reached. Therefore, the second ball entry means is previously set before the second game state is set. The game ball is inserted into the ball to store the second discrimination information, and the discrimination based on the stored second discrimination information is executed after the second game state is set to obtain a specific discrimination result. It has the effect of being able to realize extremely novel playability, which is advantageous by becoming.

In the game machine W4, the first gaming state is more likely to be set based on the specific determination result in the third gaming state than in the case where the specific determination result is not obtained in the third gaming state. A game machine W9 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine W9, in addition to the effect of the game machine W4, the first game state is the specific determination in the third game state rather than the case where the specific determination result is not obtained in the third game state. Since it is configured so that it can be easily set based on the result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained in the third game state.

In the game machine W9, the game state setting means includes the first game state, the second game state, the third game state, the fourth game state, and the fifth game state which is most advantageous for the player. It is configured so that one of a plurality of gaming states including at least, can be set, and the fourth gaming state is set based on the specific determination result in the third gaming state. The first gaming state is set by continuously producing a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result over a predetermined first number of determinations in the fourth gaming state. The second gaming state is set by continuously producing deviation determination results different from the specific determination result over a predetermined second number of determinations in the first gaming state. The gaming machine W10 is characterized in that the fifth gaming state is set based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state.

According to the game machine W10, in addition to the effect of the game machine W9, the game state setting means includes the first game state, the second game state, the third game state, and the fourth game state. The fifth gaming state, which is the most advantageous for the player, and one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one can be set, and the fourth gaming state is the specific game state in the third gaming state. It is set based on the determination result, and the first gaming state is continuously combined with the specific determination result over the predetermined first number of determinations in the fourth gaming state. Is set by different deviation determination results, and the second gaming state is continuously the same as the specific determination result over a predetermined second number of determinations in the first gaming state. Is set by having different deviation determination results, and the fifth gaming state is set based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state.

As a result, it is possible to switch between a situation in which it is advantageous to have a specific discrimination result according to the game state and a situation in which it is advantageous not to have a specific discrimination result. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine W10, the game machine W11 is characterized in that the third game state is configured in the same game state as the first game state.

According to the game machine W11, since the third game state is configured to be the same game state as the first game state, it is advantageous to obtain a specific determination result in spite of the same game state. It is possible to provide a case where it becomes advantageous and a case where it is advantageous because a specific determination result is not obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AA group> (The time saving period tends to be longer when a specific jackpot is reached after the limiter is reached than when a specific jackpot is reached before the limiter is reached)
A discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. Among a plurality of game execution means and a plurality of types of privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means, including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A privilege game type determination means for determining the type of 1 from, and a state setting means for setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a specific state advantageous to the player as the state after the privilege game is completed. Based on the setting of the specific state, the types of the specific element regarding the player's degree of advantage are classified into the first specific element corresponding to the first degree of advantage and the second type higher than the first degree of advantage. The type determining means includes a second specific element corresponding to the degree of advantage and a type determining means for setting one of a plurality of types including at least one of them, and the type determining means satisfies a predetermined specific condition in the specific state. It is easier to determine the first specific element when the second privilege game is executed in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied than when the second privilege game is executed in the situation where the second privilege game is executed. The gaming machine AA1 characterized in that it is configured as such.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these game machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional game machine, the degree of advantage for each state is fixed, and the same degree of advantage continues as long as the same state continues, so that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AA1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the predetermined discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become a predetermined specific discrimination result. As a type of privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and a privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the first privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. 2 Bonus game, a bonus game type determining means for determining one type from a plurality including at least, and a plurality of states including at least a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after the privilege game is completed. Based on the state setting means for setting the state 1 and the setting of the specific state, the type of the specific element regarding the degree of advantage of the player is classified into the first specific element corresponding to the first degree of advantage and the above. The type determining means includes a second specific element corresponding to a second advantageous degree higher than the first advantageous degree, and a type determining means for setting one of a plurality of types including at least the specified. The second privilege game is executed in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied, rather than the second privilege game being executed in a situation where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the state. , The first specific element is configured to be easy to determine.

As a result, the degree of advantage can be different depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the second privilege game is executed, so that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AA1, the determination to be executed when the second specific element is set is executed before the end of the specific state than when the first specific element is set by the type determining means. AA2 is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the number of times of

According to the game machine AA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA1, the specific state is set when the second specific element is set rather than the first specific element is set by the type determining means. Since it is configured so that the number of determinations to be executed before the end of is likely to increase, it can be expected that the second privilege game will be executed in a situation where a specific condition is satisfied. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AA1 or AA2, it is possible to set one of a plurality of probabilities including at least a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability as the probability of the specific determination result. A condition that includes a probability setting means and can be satisfied based on the fact that the specific condition is executed continuously over a predetermined specific number of times of the privilege game while the second probability is set. A game machine AA3 characterized by being composed of.

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA1 or AA2, a plurality of probabilities including at least a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability as the probability of the specific determination result. A probability setting means capable of setting a probability of one of them is provided, and the specific condition is continuously set over a predetermined number of times of the privilege game while the second probability is set. It consists of conditions that can be met based on what has been done.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times the privilege game is continuously executed while the second probability is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In any of the game machines AA1 to AA3, the type determining means determines the length of the period until the end of the specific state as the first specific element in a predetermined first period, and the first specific element. 2. As a specific element, a gaming machine characterized in that the length of the period until the specific state is terminated can be determined in a second period longer than the first period. AA4.

According to the game machine AA4, in any of the game machines AA1 to AA3, the type determining means has a first predetermined length of a period until the end of the specific state as the first specific element. The period is determined, and as the second specific element, the length of the period until the end of the specific state can be determined in the second period, which is longer than the first period. The game can be played with the expectation that the two periods will be decided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AA4, based on the determination of the second privilege game by the privilege game type determination means, at least regardless of whether or not the second privilege game is executed under the condition of the specific condition, the said The gaming machine AA5 is provided with an end condition setting means for setting a common end condition predetermined as an end condition of the specific state set after the end of the second privilege game.

According to the game machine AA5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AA4, the second privilege game is performed under the condition that the specific condition is satisfied, based on the determination of the second privilege game by the privilege game type determining means. Since the end condition setting means for setting a common end condition set in advance as the end condition of the specific state set after the end of the second privilege game is provided, at least regardless of whether or not the game has been executed, the specific state is provided. As the end condition of, it is better when the second privilege game is executed in the situation where the specific condition is not satisfied even though the common end condition is set regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied or not. It is possible to realize an extremely novel playability in which the degree of advantage in a specific state is increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AA5, the common end condition includes a first end condition that is satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition in the specific state and a second condition that is different from the first condition. It is composed of at least a second termination condition that is satisfied when the specified number of times is satisfied, and the type determination means is based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that one of a plurality of periods including at least the first period and the second period can be set as a period until the end condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine AA6, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA5, the common end condition includes a first end condition that is satisfied based on the condition that a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific state, and the above. The second condition different from the first condition is at least composed of a second termination condition that is satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined number of times, and the type determining means is the first condition. Is configured so that one of a plurality of periods including at least the first period and the second period can be set as the period until the first termination condition is satisfied.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage of the specific state can be made different by making the length of the period until the first termination condition is satisfied different.

In the game machine AA6, the discrimination means executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. It is composed of at least the second discriminating means, and the first termination condition is based on the fact that the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is shown once after the specific state is set. The second end condition can be satisfied, and the second end condition can be satisfied based on the determination result of the second determination means being shown the specific number of times after the specific state is set. The type determination means includes at least the first period and the second period as a period until the determination result of the first determination means is shown based on the execution of the determination of the first determination means. The gaming machine AA7 is characterized in that one of a plurality of periods can be determined.

According to the game machine AA7, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA6, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating means different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the first termination condition is the discrimination of the first discrimination means after the specific state is set. The result can be established based on the fact that the result is shown once, and the second end condition is that the determination result of the second determination means is indicated the specific number of times after the specific state is set. The type determination means can be established based on the above, and the type determination means is the period until the determination result of the first determination means is shown based on the execution of the determination of the first determination means. It is configured so that one of a plurality of periods including at least one period and the second period can be determined.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel playability in which it is expected that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is not shown in the specific state.

In the game machine AA7, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result is provided, and the second dynamic display means is said to be said while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AA8, which is configured to be able to start the dynamic display of the second identification information.

According to the game machine AA8, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA7, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first action of dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means. The target display means and the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means are provided, and the second dynamic display means is the first identification. It is configured so that the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while the information is dynamically displayed.

This has the effect that the discrimination of the discrimination means can be executed more efficiently.

<Characteristic AB group> (When a specific condition is met in a small hit RUSH direct big hit, an effect that is difficult to distinguish from the pullback time reduction is executed)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition, and execution of a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result. A plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state, based on the privileged game execution means capable of the game and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. As a type of the game state setting means capable of setting one game state and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first game state is set after the execution of the privilege game is completed. A privilege game in which one type of privilege game can be determined from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a first privilege game that is easy to set and a second privilege game that is easy to set the second game state. Execution of the first effect mode capable of executing the first effect mode as the effect mode to be executed after the end of the first privilege game based on the type determination means and the determination of the first privilege game. When the means and the second privilege game are determined and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied, the effect mode after the second privilege game is completed is executed in the first effect mode. A game machine AB1 comprising: a second effect mode executing means capable of executing a second effect mode including an effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the mode.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered when the game shifts from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AB1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the predetermined discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become a predetermined specific discrimination result. Based on the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, the first game state and the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Execution of the privilege game as a type of the game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least the game state and the privilege game execution means and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. The award game of 1 from a plurality of types of award games including at least a first award game in which the first game state is easily set and a second award game in which the second game state is easily set after the end of As an effect mode to be executed after the first privilege game is completed based on the privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the first privilege game and the determination of the first privilege game, the first effect mode is defined. When the first effect mode execution means that can be executed and the second privilege game are determined and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied, the effect mode after the second privilege game is completed is described. A second effect mode executing means capable of executing a second effect mode including an effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the effect mode executed in the first effect mode.

As a result, even when the first privilege game in which the first game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state is set is executed, the second privilege game is executed as the first effect mode to be executed after that. Since it includes an effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the second effect mode executed in, it is possible to make the player expect that the second game state is set even when the first game state is set. This makes it possible, and has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In the game machine AB1, the game state setting means ends the second privilege game when the specific condition is satisfied, rather than ending the second privilege game when the specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that it is more difficult to set the second gaming state.

According to the game machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1, the game state setting means satisfies the specific condition rather than ending the second privilege game in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied. Since it is more difficult to set the second game state when the second privilege game ends in the state of being in the state, the first effect mode or the second effect mode is executed when the first effect mode or the second effect mode is executed. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is set, or at least it is difficult to set the second gaming state.

The game machine AB3 is characterized in that the game state in which the second effect mode is executed is configured differently from the game state in which the first game state is executed.

In any of the game machines AB1 to AB3, the game state setting means includes at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state which is more disadvantageous than the second game state. Of these, one of the game states can be set, and the privilege game type determining means is after the execution of the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the privilege game is completed. The third privilege game in which the third game state is set as the game state is configured to be able to determine the type of the privilege game of one of a plurality including at least one, and the first effect mode execution means. The gaming machine AB4 is configured so that the first effect mode can be executed as an effect mode after the first privilege game and the third privilege game are completed.

According to the game machine AB4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AB1 to AB3, the game state setting means is more disadvantageous than the first game state, the second game state, and the second game state. It is configured so that one of a plurality of game states including at least one of the third game states can be set, and the privilege game type determining means includes the first privilege game and the second privilege game. , The third privilege game in which the third game state is set as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, and the type of the privilege game of one of a plurality including at least one can be determined. The first effect mode executing means is configured to be able to execute the first effect mode as an effect mode after the first privilege game and the third privilege game are completed.

As a result, when the first effect mode or the second effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first effect mode is executed, which of the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game is completed is the game. Since it can be difficult for a person to understand, even if the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, the effect that the game can be performed in the expectation that the second privilege game has been executed. There is.

In any of the game machines AB1 to AB4, the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination and a second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination. In the game state setting means, the first determination is executed the first number of times after the second game state is set, or the second determination is executed a second time more than the first number of times. The gaming machine AB5 is configured so that the first gaming state can be set based on the above.

According to the game machine AB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB4, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminating and a second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating. The game state setting means has the above, and the first determination is executed the first time after the second game state is set, or the second determination is more than the first number of times. The first game state can be set based on the number of times the game has been executed.

As a result, the period for switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state differs between the first determination and the second determination, so that the case where the first determination is executed and the case where the second determination is executed are different. It has the effect of making the player's interest different and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine AB5, the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means are configured so that the first discriminating and the second discriminating can be executed at the same time. Machine AB6.

According to the game machine AB5, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB5, the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means can simultaneously execute the first discrimination and the second discrimination. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved.

In the game machine AB5 or AB6, a first dynamic display capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first discrimination on the display means and then stopping and displaying the first discrimination result in a mode showing the first discrimination result. A means, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second discrimination on the display means and then stopping and displaying the second discrimination result in a mode indicating the second discrimination result. When the second gaming state is set, the first dynamic display means displays the first identification information in a period longer than the period in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine AB7 characterized in that it is configured to be easily dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine AB7, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB5 or AB6, the first identification information for showing the first discrimination is dynamically displayed on the display means, and then stopped in the mode of showing the first discrimination result. After the first dynamic display means that can be displayed and the second identification information for indicating the second discrimination are dynamically displayed on the display means, the display is stopped and displayed in a mode that shows the second discrimination result. The first dynamic display means has a second dynamic display means capable of the above, and the first dynamic display means is a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed when the second gaming state is set. It is configured so that the first identification information can be dynamically displayed in a longer period of time.

As a result, when the second gaming state is set, the dynamic display period of the first identification information is likely to be set longer than the dynamic display period of the second identification information, so that the second game state during the second gaming state is set. 2 There is an effect that the number of times the discrimination is executed can be increased.

In any of the game machines AB5 to AB7, the effect commonly included in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is whether the set game state is the first game state or the second game. It is composed of an effect that makes it difficult to identify whether it is in a state, and the game machine can execute a third effect mode indicating that the second game state is set. The third effect mode executing means has means, and is different from the first identification information in which the first privilege game is executed after the stop display is displayed after the second game state is set. The gaming machine AB8 is characterized in that the third effect mode is executed based on the execution of the first identification information for showing the first determination result.

According to the game machine AB8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB5 to AB7, the effect commonly included in the first effect mode and the second effect mode has the set gaming state as described above. It is composed of an effect that makes it difficult to identify whether it is the first game state or the second game state, and the game machine has a third effect mode indicating that the second game state is set. It has a third effect mode executing means that can be executed, and the third effect mode executing means executes the first privilege game after the second game state is set and then stopped and displayed. The third effect mode is executed based on the execution of the first identification information for showing the first determination result different from the first identification information.

As a result, the first privilege game is executed immediately after the second game state is set, and the second effect mode is executed even when the game is switched to the first game state, so that the second game is executed in a short period of time. There is an effect that it becomes difficult for the player to identify the end of the state, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the interest of the game is lowered.

<Characteristic AC group> (After the advantageous state is set, the degree of advantage of the advantageous state is changed at a predetermined opportunity)
A discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. The game execution means, the game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state as the game state after the privilege game is completed, and the game state setting means for the specific game. A game characterized by comprising a variable means capable of changing and setting a period in which the specific game state is set based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the state is set. Machine AC1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game may be lowered when the game shifts from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AC1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the predetermined discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become a predetermined specific discrimination result. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state as the game state after the privilege game is completed. , The variable period in which the specific game state is set can be changed and set based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the specific game state is set by the game state setting means. Means and.

As a result, the period for which the specific game state is set changes based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the specific game state is set, so that the period for which the specific game state is set can be diversified. This makes it possible, and has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In the game machine AC1, the game machine AC2 is characterized in that the specific condition is configured to be at least different from the start of the privilege game.

According to the game machine AC2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC1, the specific condition is configured to be at least different from the start of the privilege game, so that the specific condition is specified even though the privilege game is not executed. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that the period in which the game state is set can be changed.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the variable means has a first period in which the specific gaming state is set, a first period in which the first determination can be executed during the specific gaming state, and a first period. The gaming machine AC3 is characterized in that it is variably configured in one of a plurality of periods including at least a second period capable of executing a determination of a second number of times more than one.

According to the gaming machine AC3, the variable means has a first period in which the specific gaming state is set, a first period in which the first determination can be executed during the specific gaming state, and a first period. It is variably configured in one of a plurality of periods including at least a second period in which the determination of the second number of times is possible to be performed more than one time.

As a result, when a specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that it will be changed in the second period.

In any of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the discriminating means is composed of at least a first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminant and a second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminant. A first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination and then stopping and displaying the determination result of the first determination. A second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result of the second determination and then stopping and displaying the determination result of the second determination. The game state setting means has the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination after the specific gaming state is set, or the first identification information is stopped and displayed for the first time, or the second determination is performed. It is characterized in that a gaming state different from the specific gaming state is set based on the fact that the second identification information indicating the determination result is displayed as a second stop display that is larger than the first number of times. Game machine AC4.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means capable of executing the first discriminating and a second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating. And, at least, the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination is dynamically displayed, and then stopped and displayed in a mode showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination. It is possible to dynamically display the first dynamic display means capable of the above and the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination, and then stop the display in a mode showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination. The game state setting means includes a possible second dynamic display means, and the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination is the first number of times after the specific game state is set. A gaming state different from the specific gaming state based on whether the stop display is displayed or the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second discrimination is stopped and displayed for the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times. Is to set.

As a result, the period from the specific gaming state to the other gaming state differs depending on whether the first determination is executed or the second determination is executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by making it different.

In the game machine AC4, the variable means is set by varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of at least one of the first identification information within the first number of times. ..

According to the game machine AC5, since the variable means is set by varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of at least one of the first identification information within the first number of times, the first identification information Can be varied until the first stop display is displayed. That is, since the period from the specific gaming state to the switching to the other gaming state can be changed, the number of times of the second determination that can be executed until the switching to the other gaming state can also be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AC4 or AC5, the first identification information and the second identification information are configured to be dynamically displayable at the same time, and the first dynamic display means is set to the specific game state. In this case, the gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily made longer than the dynamic display period of the second identification information.

According to the game machine AC6, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC4 or AC5, the first identification information and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed at the same time, and the first dynamic display means is When the specific gaming state is set, the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily made longer than the dynamic display period of the second identification information.

As a result, when a specific game state is set, the dynamic display period of the first identification information becomes long, so that the period for switching from the specific game state to another game state can be lengthened. There is an effect that the period in which a specific game state is set can be lengthened.

In any of the game machines AC4 to AC6, the second determination is configured to facilitate determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination, and when the specific gaming state is set, The gaming machine AC7, characterized in that the second determination is easily executed.

According to the game machine AC7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AC4 to AC6, the second determination is configured to facilitate the determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination. When a specific gaming state is set, the second determination is easily executed.

As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by executing the game with the expectation that a specific game state is set.

<Characteristic AD group> (When the advantageous game that tends to be advantageous to the player is shifted to a specific game state in which the player can execute the advantageous game, the game state is maintained until the end of the specific number of advantageous games).
Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state advantageous to the player, and a specific execution condition are satisfied in the specific game state. Based on the above, another game state is set based on the advantageous game execution means for executing the advantageous game that tends to be advantageous to the player and the establishment of the predetermined specific condition in the specific game state. AD1 is a game machine AD1 comprising: a control means for controlling the advantageous game so as to be easily executed over a predetermined specific number of times.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these game machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional game machine, even if an advantageous state is set, the advantageous state is temporarily interrupted by executing the hit game, so that the hit game is executed early in the advantageous state. However, there is a problem that it may be difficult to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

Further, among the conventional game machines, when the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined period without changing the game state. In this conventional game machine, the more a specific lottery result is obtained without executing a winning game, the more chances of entering a specific winning opening, which is advantageous for the player. Conversely, the earlier the hit game is executed, the more the player feels as if he / she has lost the opportunity to enter a specific winning opening, which improves the player's interest in the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to make it.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AD1, a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the above-mentioned game state setting means. Based on the fact that a specific execution condition is satisfied in a specific game state, an advantageous game execution means for executing an advantageous game that is likely to be advantageous to the player and a predetermined specific condition are satisfied in the specific game state. Based on the above, the control means for controlling the advantageous game to be easily executed over a predetermined specific number of times before another game state is set is provided.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied in a specific game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine AD1 includes a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined first game result in the advantageous game, and the game state setting means is described above. As the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, one of a plurality of game states including at least the specific game state and the disadvantageous game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state can be set. A game machine AD2 characterized by being configured in.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AD1, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the first game predetermined in the advantageous game. The game state setting means includes at least the specific game state and a disadvantageous game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state, as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. It is configured so that one of a plurality of including game states can be set.

As a result, when the first game result is obtained in a specific game state, the game can be performed with the expectation that the specific game state will be set again, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the game machine AD2, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, and the ball entry means. Variable means that can be changed to the first position where the game ball can enter and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the first game result in the advantageous game The variable game execution means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the second game different from the above. The variable game is characterized in that the game state at the time when the second game result is obtained is maintained even after the execution of the variable game is completed. AD3.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD2, a predetermined privilege is given based on the ball entry means in which the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a privilege giving means, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. , The variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the result of the second game different from the result of the first game in the advantageous game. The variable game is configured to include, and the variable game is configured to maintain the game state at the time when the second game result is obtained even after the execution of the variable game is completed. Is what it is.

As a result, when the variable game is executed, a predetermined privilege is given while the game state is maintained in a specific game state, whereas when the privilege game is executed, a disadvantageous game is disadvantageous. Since there is a possibility that the state will be set, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with a strong expectation that the second game result is obtained rather than the first game result.

In the game machine AD3, the control means is configured to be able to suppress the result of the first game in the advantageous game executed after the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine AD4, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD3, the control means can be configured to be able to suppress the first game result in the advantageous game executed after the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, after the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the fact that the disadvantageous game state is set as the first game result. Therefore, it can be expected that the variable game will be executed as the result of the second game more times in the advantageous game of a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AD4, the specific gaming state is configured to be set to another gaming state based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AD5 is characterized in that the specific period is composed of a period of a length that enables the execution of the advantageous game a specific number of times.

According to the game machine AD5, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD4, the specific game state is set to another game state based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the specific condition is satisfied. The specific period is configured to be a period of a length that enables the execution of the advantageous game a specific number of times.

As a result, even if the advantageous game is executed during a specific period, there is no concern that the first game result will be obtained, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed with peace of mind.

In the game machine AD5, the first game execution means for executing the first game different from the advantageous game based on the establishment of the first execution condition different from the specific execution condition in the specific game state, and the said As the execution period of the first game, the execution period setting means for setting one execution period out of a plurality of predetermined execution periods of different lengths is provided, and the privilege game execution means is described in the first game. The privilege game is configured to be executable based on the result of the first game, and the execution period setting means is the execution period of the first game corresponding to the first game result. The specific period can be set as described above, and the control means is the first in the advantageous game executed during the execution period of the first game corresponding to at least the first game result. The game machine AD6 characterized in that it is configured so as to be able to suppress the result of the game of 1.

According to the game machine AD6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AD5, the first game different from the advantageous game is based on the establishment of the first execution condition different from the specific execution condition in the specific game state. A first game execution means for executing the above, and an execution period setting means for setting one execution period out of a plurality of predetermined execution periods of different lengths as the execution period of the first game. The game executing means is configured to be able to execute the privileged game based on the result of the first game in the first game, and the execution period setting means is the first game. The specific period can be set as the execution period of the first game corresponding to the result, and the control means is at least the execution period of the first game corresponding to the first game result. It is said that the game can be performed with the expectation that the first game result will be obtained in the first game, which is configured to be able to suppress the first game result in the advantageous game executed in the meantime. effective.

In the game machine AD6, the advantageous game executing means is configured to be able to execute the advantageous game regardless of whether or not the first game is being executed, and the first game executing means is The game machine AD7 is characterized in that the first game can be executed regardless of whether or not the advantageous game is being executed.

According to the game machine AD7, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD6, the advantageous game executing means is configured to be able to execute the advantageous game regardless of whether or not the first game is being executed. The first game executing means is configured to be able to execute the first game regardless of whether or not the advantageous game is being executed.

As a result, the advantageous game and the first game can be executed in duplicate, so that there is an effect that the advantageous game and the first game can be efficiently executed.

A game characterized in that, in any of the game machines AD3 to AD7, the ratio of the second game result in the advantageous game is higher than the ratio of the first game result. Machine AD8.

According to the game machine AD8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AD3 to AD7, the ratio of the second game result in the advantageous game is higher than the ratio of the first game result. Since it is configured in, there is an effect that a specific gaming state can be easily continued for a longer period of time.

In the game machine AD8, the advantageous game executing means is different from the first game result, the second game result, the first game result, and the second game result in one advantageous game. It is configured to be the game result and any one of the game results, and the ratio of the second game result is configured to be higher than the ratio of the out-of-game result. A game machine AD9 characterized by being

According to the game machine AD9, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD8, the advantageous game execution means has the first game result, the second game result, and the first game in one advantageous game. It is configured so that the result and the out-of-game result different from the second game result are any one of the out-of-game results, and the ratio of the second game result is the out-of-game result. It is configured to be higher than the ratio of.

As a result, when the advantageous game is executed, the ratio of the second game result is the highest, so that more variable games can be executed in a specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of advantage in a specific gaming state can be increased.

<Characteristic AE group> (The game playability is changed depending on whether the game is played by the first game method or the second game method in an advantageous state).
Including at least a launching means capable of launching a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and at least a predetermined specific gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states is provided, and the specific game state includes a first element related to a player's degree of advantage and a second element different from the first element. , And the first element fired the game ball in the second direction rather than firing the game ball in the first direction during the particular gaming state. The case is configured so that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher, and the second element is the first element rather than firing the game ball in the second direction during the specific gaming state. The game machine AE1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher when the game ball is launched in a direction.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these game machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional game machine, since the game method is fixed for each state, the game in each state becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AE1, at least a launching means capable of launching a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a predetermined specific game state is provided, and the specific game state includes a first element related to a player's degree of advantage. It is composed of at least a second element different from the first element, and the first element is more than launching a game ball in the first direction during the specific gaming state. It is configured that the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher when the game ball is launched in the second direction, and the second element moves in the second direction during the specific gaming state. It is configured that the degree of advantage is more likely to be higher when the game ball is fired in the first direction than when the game ball is fired.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the first direction, the advantage degree of the second element is high, while the game degree of the first element is low, and when the game ball is fired in the second direction. Since the degree of advantage of the first element is high and the degree of game play of the second element is low, the playability can be made different depending on the launch direction of the game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AE1, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of game states including at least the specific game state and a disadvantageous game state that is more disadvantageous than the specific game state. A game machine AE2 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AE1, the game state setting means includes at least a plurality of the specific game state and a disadvantageous game state which is more disadvantageous than the specific game state. Since 1 game state can be set, different game properties can be realized depending on the firing direction in a specific game state having a high degree of advantage. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AE1 or AE2, the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the game ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter, and the game ball enters. The game machine AE3 is provided with a ball entry means to which a first privilege is given to the player based on the ball.

According to the game machine AE3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AE1 or AE2, the game ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball, and the game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter. Since it is provided with a ball entry means that is provided at the position where the game ball enters and the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is given based on the entry of the game ball, the player who wants to acquire the first privilege On the other hand, even if the second factor is disadvantageous, it is possible to make the player want to shoot the game ball in the second direction, and for the player who emphasizes the second factor, the first You can give up the acquisition of the privilege of and launch the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, since it is possible to select a game method according to the player's taste, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines AE1 to AE3, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition, and the discrimination means. The first element includes a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the predetermined privilege is easily given by the privilege granting means based on the determination result of the above. It is composed of the amount of the predetermined privilege given by the privilege granting means between the time when the specific game state is reached and the time when the privilege game executed during the specific game state ends. Characterized game machine AE4.

According to the game machine AE4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination condition, and the predetermined privilege based on the establishment of the predetermined grant condition. And a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the predetermined privilege is easily given by the privilege granting means based on the determination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific determination result. The first element is given by the privilege granting means between the time when the specific gaming state is reached and the time when the privilege game executed during the specific gaming state ends. Consists of the amount of benefits.

As a result, the player who attaches importance to the amount of the predetermined privilege to be given is made to select to launch the game ball in the second direction, and the player who attaches importance to the second element is given. You can choose to launch the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, since it is possible to select a game method according to the player's taste, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AE4, the granting means is configured to be able to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as the predetermined privilege, and moves in the first direction until the specific game state is completed. In both the case where the game ball is continuously fired and the case where the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction until the end of the specific game state, the grant is made more than the number of game balls to be fired. The game machine AE5 is characterized in that the number of game balls paid out by means is likely to be larger.

According to the game machine AE5, in addition to the effect of the game machine AE4, the player is less likely to lose when the game ball is fired in the first direction or in the second direction. Since it is configured, there is an effect that it is possible to safely select whether to launch the game ball in the first direction or the game ball in the second direction.

In the game machine AE5, when the game balls are continuously fired in the first direction until the end of the specific game state, the average value of the number of game balls paid out by the granting means and the number of game balls to be fired. The difference from the average value of is the average value of the number of game balls paid out by the granting means when the game balls are continuously fired in the second direction until the end of the specific game state and the game to be fired. The gaming machine AE6 is characterized in that the difference from the average value of the number of balls is 10% or less.

According to the game machine AE6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AE5, the number of game balls paid out by the granting means when the game balls are continuously fired in the first direction until the end of the specific game state is completed. The difference between the average value of and the average value of the number of game balls to be fired is the game paid out by the granting means when the game balls are continuously fired in the second direction until the end of the specific game state. Since it is configured so that the difference between the average value of the number of balls and the average value of the number of game balls to be fired is 10% or less, even when the game balls are fired in the first direction. Even when the game ball is launched in the second direction, the expected value of the player's profit can be made substantially the same. Therefore, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is launched can be selected with greater peace of mind.

In the game machine AE5 or AE6, the second element is composed of the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the granting means to the number of game balls fired by the launching means until the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine AE7 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine AE7, in addition to the effect of the game machine AE5 or AE6, the second element is paid out by the granting means for the number of game balls fired by the launching means until the specific determination result is obtained. Since it is composed of the ratio of the number of game balls to be used, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the granting means to the number of game balls fired by the launching means until a specific determination result is obtained is important for the player. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be launched in the first direction.

<Characteristic AF group> (If a specific type of jackpot is won, the jackpot effect will be executed after a specific period has passed since the start of the jackpot)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and privilege game execution that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result. One of a plurality of the privileged games including at least a first privileged game and a second privileged game different from the first privileged game as a type of the means and the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means. The type determining means for determining the type of the first specific effect, the first specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the start of the execution of the first privilege game, and the predetermined during the execution of the second privilege game. The gaming machine AF1 is provided with a second specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied.

Here, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a wide variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest in the game because the production mode in the jackpot game may be monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AF1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminant result of the discriminating means become a predetermined specific discriminant result. As the types of the privilege game execution means for executing the privileged game advantageous to the above and the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means, the first privileged game and the second privileged game different from the first privileged game are used. A type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game, and a first specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the start of execution of the first privileged game. A second specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second privilege game.

As a result, the execution timing of the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the privileged game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AF1 is characterized in that the specific effect is configured to include at least an effect mode that can suggest to the player that the privilege game is being executed.

According to the game machine AF2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AF1, the specific effect is configured to include at least an effect mode that can suggest to the player that the privilege game is being executed. Depending on the type of game, the timing of suggesting to the player that the privilege game is being executed can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AF1 or AF2, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means and the first effect for executing the first effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information. During the execution of the execution means and the second privilege game, at least for a predetermined period before the specific condition is satisfied, a second effect that is indistinguishable from the first effect is executed. The gaming machine AF3, which comprises a second effect executing means for executing.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the dynamic display period of the identification information. A mode in which it is difficult to distinguish between the first effect executing means for executing the first effect and the first effect during the execution of the second privilege game, at least for a predetermined period before the specific condition is satisfied. The second effect executing means for executing the second effect, which executes the second effect of the above, is provided.

This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to recognize that the privilege game is being executed from the start of the second privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the second specific effect executing means is configured to be able to continue the specific effect even after the privilege game is completed until a predetermined first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AF4, which is characterized by being

According to the game machine AF4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the second specific effect executing means is said to be described until the predetermined first condition is satisfied even after the privilege game is completed. Since it is configured so that the specific effect can be continued, it is possible to make it seem as if the privilege game is continuing even after the second privilege game is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines AF1 to AF4, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position The variable control means includes a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, a variable means that can be changed, and a variable control means that changes the variable means by a predetermined variable operation during the execution of the privilege game. After the variable operation of the variable means from the start of the first privilege game until the variable means changes to the first position a specific number of times and the specific condition are satisfied in the second privilege game. It is possible to change the variable means so that it is difficult to distinguish between the variable operation of the variable means and the variable operation of the variable means until the variable means changes to the first position a specific number of times after the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AF5, which is characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the game machine AF5, in addition to the effects of the game machines AF1 to AF4, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position on which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable control means that changes the variable means by a predetermined variable operation during the execution of the privilege game. The variable control means includes, in the variable operation of the variable means from the start of the first privilege game until the variable means changes to the first position a specific number of times, and in the second privilege game. It is difficult to distinguish the variable operation of the variable means from the time when the specific condition is satisfied until the variable means changes to the first position a specific number of times after the specific condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the variable means can be changed.

As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether the first privilege game is started and the specific effect is executed, or whether the specific condition is satisfied and the specific effect is executed during the execution of the second privilege game. There is.

In the game machine AF5, the variable means moves from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result. A variable game execution means for executing a variable variable game is provided, and the variable control means includes a variable operation of the variable means from the start to the end of the first privilege game and the second privilege game. In order to make it difficult to distinguish from the variable operation of the variable means from the time when the specific condition is satisfied until the end of the predetermined first variable game after the end of the second privilege game. The variable means is configured to be variable, and the second specific effect executing means is described until the first number of variable games is completed even after the second privilege game is completed. The gaming machine AF6 is characterized in that it is configured so that a specific effect can be continued.

According to the game machine AF6, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF5, the variable means has a predetermined period of time based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position is provided, and the variable control means is the variable from the start to the end of the first privilege game. The variable operation of the means and the variable means from the time when the specific condition is satisfied in the second privilege game to the end of the predetermined first number of variable games after the end of the second privilege game. It is configured so that the variable means can be changed so as to be difficult to distinguish from the variable operation of the above, and the second specific effect executing means is the same even after the second privilege game is completed. It is configured so that the specific effect can be continued until the first variable game is completed.

This has the effect of making it more difficult to tell whether the first privilege game is being executed, or whether the second privilege game is being executed or after the end.

In the game machine AF6, the second specific effect executing means is different from the specific determination result and the first determination result in the determination of the determination means within the first number of times after the end of the second privilege game. The gaming machine AF7 is configured so that the execution of the specific effect can be terminated based on the determination result.

According to the game machine AF7, in addition to the effect of the game machine AF6, the second specific effect executing means determines the specific determination by the determination of the determination means within the first number of times after the end of the second privilege game. Since it is possible to end the execution of the specific effect based on the fact that the result is different from the first determination result, the deviation determination result is obtained within the first number of times. When the execution of the specific effect is completed, there is an effect that the player can be made to understand that the second privilege game has been executed.

In any of the game machines AF1 to AF7, a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the privilege game is completed. A game state setting means for setting one of the game states is provided, and the first privilege game is configured to be easier to set the first game state by the game state setting means than the second privilege game. The gaming machine AF8 characterized by this.

According to the game machine AF8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AF1 to AF7, as a game state after the privilege game is completed, the first game state and the player are more advantageous than the first game state. The first privilege game is provided with the game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least the second game state, and the first privilege game is the first by the game state setting means rather than the second privilege game. 1 It is configured so that the game state can be easily set.

As a result, it is easier to set the second game state, which is more advantageous when the second privilege game can be executed. Therefore, by paying attention to the execution timing of the specific effect, the first privilege game is executed or the second privilege It is possible to realize the playability of guessing whether or not the game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AG group> (The time saving period given by a specific jackpot is different depending on the conditions)
A discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. A game execution means, a state setting means for setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after the privilege game is completed, and a predetermined specific state in the specific state. It is characterized by including a specific state termination means for terminating the specific state based on the satisfaction of the condition, and a variable means for varying the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition. Game machine AG1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these game machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional game machine, the degree of advantage for each state is fixed, and the same degree of advantage continues as long as the same state continues, so that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AG1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the predetermined discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become a predetermined specific discrimination result. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a state setting means for setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after the privilege game is completed. And the specific state termination means for terminating the specific state based on the establishment of the predetermined specific condition in the specific state, and the ease of establishment of the specific condition based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition. It includes a variable means for making it variable.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the variable means will be changed so that the specific condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine AG1, the first privilege game in which the specific state is set as the state after the privilege game is completed as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is different from the specific state. The second privilege game in which the second state is set and the type determination means for determining the type of one of a plurality of privilege games including at least one are provided, and the variable means is set after the end of the first privilege game. The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied is variably configured in the specific state.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AG1, the specific state is set as the state after the privilege game is completed as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. The variable means includes a type determining means for determining the type of one of a plurality of privileged games including at least one privileged game and a second privileged game in which a second state different from the specific state is set. In the specific state set after the end of the first privilege game, the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied is variably configured.

As a result, when the first privilege game is executed, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied.

In the game machine AG2, the variable means has a first period in which the specific condition is easily satisfied and a second period in which the specific condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first period, as a period in which the specific state is set. It is variably configured in one period out of a plurality of periods including at least, and when the first privilege game is executed in a predetermined first situation, it is more than the second period. The rate of change in the first period is high, and when the first privilege game is executed in a second situation different from the first situation, the rate of change in the second period is higher than that of the first period. The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that it is configured to be high.

According to the game machine AG3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AG2, the variable means has a first period in which the specific condition is likely to be satisfied as a period in which the specific state is set, and the first period is more than the first period. It is variably configured to be one of a plurality of periods including at least a second period in which a specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the first privilege game is executed in a predetermined first situation. When this is done, the rate of change in the first period is higher than that in the second period, and when the first privilege game is executed in a second situation different from the first situation, the first It is configured so that the rate of variation in the second period is higher than that of the period.

This has the effect that the player can be expected to execute the first privilege game in the second situation where the second period is likely to be set.

In the game machine AG3, the discriminating means is based on the establishment of a first discriminating means that executes the first discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second determination means for executing the second determination, and the specific condition is the first determination of the first number of times predetermined after the specific state is set. The game machine AG4 is established based on the fact that the above-mentioned is executed, and the variable means is configured to be able to change the period until the first determination of the first number of times is completed. ..

According to the game machine AG4, in addition to the effect of the game machine AG3, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes the first discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the first discriminating condition. Is composed of at least a second discriminating means that executes a second discriminating based on the establishment of a different second discriminating condition, and the specific condition is set in advance after the specific state is set. It is established based on the execution of the first determination of the predetermined first number of times, and the variable means is configured to be able to change the period until the first determination of the first number of times is completed. Has been done.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the period changed by the variable means.

In the game machine AG4, the game machine G5 is characterized in that the second determination means is configured to be able to start the second determination during the execution of the first determination.

According to the game machine AG5, in addition to the effect of the game machine AG4, the second determination means is configured to be able to start the second determination during the execution of the first determination. There is an effect that the discrimination can be executed efficiently.

<Characteristic BA group> (Provides a left-handed state in which only special 1 turns and a left-handed state in which special 1 and special 2 rotate alternately)
A first discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. 2 Benefits of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination means and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means or the discrimination result of the second discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result. Based on the game execution means and the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, the first game state that is advantageous to the player, the second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and the first game state. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state, which is disadvantageous to the player and makes it easier for the second determination condition to be satisfied than the second game state. The gaming machine BA1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the winning or losing of the game is drawn by entering the game ball into the starting port provided on the surface of the game board, and if the lottery result is successful, the player A hit game was performed that was advantageous to the player. Further, a game machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period so that a lottery is easily performed after the privilege game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217).
766).

However, in the conventional game machine, the degree of advantage differs greatly between the state in which the time-saving game is set and the state in which the time-saving game is not set. Therefore, the player in the state in which the time-saving game is not set There was a risk that it would be difficult to maintain motivation for the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BA1, a first discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition are established. Based on the fact that the second discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination based on the above, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, or the discrimination result of the second discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result. Based on the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player and the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, the first game state which is advantageous to the player and the first game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. One of a plurality of states including at least two game states and a third game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state and more likely to satisfy the second determination condition than the second game state. It is provided with a game state setting means for setting a game state.

As a result, as a gaming state disadvantageous to the advantageous person, a plurality of gaming states having different easiness of establishing the second determination condition are provided, so that the game in the situation where the disadvantageous gaming state is set becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed that it ends up. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BA1 is characterized in that the discrimination of the second discriminating means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means.

According to the game machine BA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA1, the discrimination of the second discriminating means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means. The game can be played with the expectation that the determination will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BA1 or BA2, the first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, the game ball in the first direction, and the first direction thereof. Is a launching means capable of launching in any of a plurality of launching directions including at least a different second direction, and a game ball launched in the second direction based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A first control that makes it easier to enter the second ball entry means, and a second control that makes it difficult for a game ball launched in the second direction than the first control to enter the second ball entry means. A control setting means capable of setting control of any one of a plurality of of them including at least control is provided, and the first determination condition is that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. The second determination condition can be established based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entry means, and can be established based on the second gaming state and the first ball entry means. The gaming machine BA3 is characterized in that the three gaming states are configured in at least a gaming state in which the second control is set.

According to the game machine BA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA1 or BA2, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball. Based on a launching means capable of firing in any one of a plurality of launching directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A first control that makes it easier for a game ball launched in two directions to enter the second entry means, and a game ball launched in the second direction than the first control is the second entry. A second control that makes it difficult to enter the ball means, and a control setting means that can set the control of any one of a plurality of balls including at least one are provided, and the first determination condition is the first ball entry. It can be established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the means, and the second determination condition can be established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. The second gaming state and the third gaming state are configured by at least a gaming state in which the second control is set.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the ease with which the second discrimination condition is satisfied is variable even though the control that makes it difficult to enter the second ball entry means is set. It has the effect of improving the interest of the person in the game.

In the game machine BA3, the third game state is configured as a game state in which a game ball launched in the first direction is easier to enter the second ball entry means than the second game state. A game machine BA4 characterized by being

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA3, in the third game state, the game ball launched in the first direction from the second game state is sent to the second ball entry means. Since it is configured in a gaming state that facilitates entry into the ball, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be launched in the first direction in the third gaming state.

In the game machine BA3 or BA4, the first ball entry means is composed of at least a first first ball entry means and a second first ball entry means, and is configured in the first direction. A specific flow path provided at a position where the launched game ball can flow down, and a first ball capable of causing the game ball flowing down the specific flow path to flow down to the first first entry means. The distribution means for distributing to either the flow path or the second flow path capable of flowing down to the second first ball entry means, and the game ball flowing down the second flow path are described. It can be displaced to a first position where it is possible to enter the second first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second first ball entry means than the first position. The displacement means is configured to be able to guide the reached game ball to the second entry means in a state of being displaced to the second position. The third gaming state is configured so that the gaming ball distributed to the second flow path can more easily reach the displacement means displaced to the second position than the second gaming state. A game machine BA5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine BA5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA3 or BA4, in the third game state, the game ball distributed to the second flow path can easily enter the second ball entry means. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether the distribution means is distributed to the first flow path or the second flow path.

In the game machine BA5, the passage means provided at a position where the game ball distributed to the second flow path can pass, and the passage determination that executes the determination based on the passage of the passage means by the game ball. A means and a displacement control means for controlling the displacement means so as to be displaced in a predetermined displacement pattern based on the determination result of the passage determination means being a predetermined first determination result are provided. When the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the displacement control means is a period from the first determination result to the first displacement of the displacement means to the first position. However, the displacement means can be easily controlled by the first displacement pattern, which tends to be longer than the period required for the game ball passing through the passing means to reach the displacement means, and the first displacement means can be easily controlled in the third gaming state. When the determination result is obtained, the game ball that has passed through the passing means reaches the variable means during the period from the first determination result to the first displacement of the displacement means to the first position. The gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that the displacement means is easily controlled by a second displacement pattern that tends to be shorter than the period required for the displacement.

According to the game machine BA6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA5, the passing means provided at a position where the game ball distributed to the second flow path can pass, and the game ball passes through the passing means. The displacement means is displaced in a predetermined displacement pattern based on the passage determination means that executes the determination based on the above and the determination result of the passage determination means that is the first predetermined determination result. The displacement control means is provided with a displacement control means for controlling the displacement, and when the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the displacement control means is the first after the first determination result is obtained. It becomes easier to control the displacement means with the first displacement pattern in which the period until the game ball that has passed through the passing means tends to be longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the passing means to reach the first position. When the first determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, the period from the first determination result to the first displacement of the displacement means to the first position is the passing means. It is configured so that the displacement means can be easily controlled by the second displacement pattern, which tends to be shorter than the period required for the game ball passing through the variable means to reach the variable means.

As a result, for each gaming state, the period from when the discrimination result of the passage discriminating means becomes the first discriminating result until the displacement means is displaced to the first position is made different according to the gaming state. Since the ease of entering the ball into the second ball entry means can be made different, there is an effect that the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

In the game machine BA6, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the passage determination means and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means are set. The displacement control means includes a dynamic display period setting means, and the displacement control means waits after the dynamic display period elapses when the determination result of the passage determination means becomes the first determination result. After the period has elapsed, the displacement means is displaced to the first position for a predetermined period, and in the second gaming state, the sum of the dynamic display period and the specific waiting period is the first. When the determination result of 1 is obtained, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is likely to be longer than the period required to reach the displacement means, and the third gaming state is described as described above. A gaming machine characterized in that the sum of the dynamic display period and the specific waiting period is likely to be shorter than the period required for the gaming ball that has passed through the passing means to reach the variable means. BA7.

According to the game machine BA7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA6, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the passage determination means, and the identification information by the dynamic display means. The displacement control means includes a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display, and the displacement control means moves when the determination result of the passage determination means becomes the first determination result. The displacement means is displaced to the first position for a predetermined period after a specific waiting period elapses after the target display period elapses, and the second gaming state includes the dynamic display period and the above. When the sum with the specific waiting period is the first determination result, it is likely to be longer than the period required for the game ball passing through the passing means to reach the displacement means. In the third gaming state, the sum of the dynamic display period and the specific waiting period tends to be shorter than the period required for the gaming ball that has passed through the passing means to reach the variable means. It is configured.

As a result, there is an effect that the ease of entering the second ball entry means for each game state can be made different by changing the sum of the dynamic display period and the specific waiting period.

In the game machine BA7, the dynamic display period setting means sets a common dynamic display period predetermined for the second game state and the third game state. ..

According to the game machine BA8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BA7, the dynamic display period setting means sets a common dynamic display period predetermined in the second game state and the third game state. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entry means can be made different by making only a specific waiting period different between the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the game machine can be reduced.

<Characteristic BB group> (As a right-handed state, a state in which a specific number of jackpots are confirmed and a state in which only the next jackpot is confirmed are provided)
A discriminant game that executes a discriminant game based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminant means being a predetermined specific discriminant result. A gaming state that sets one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state, based on the execution means and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. It is provided with a setting means, and is configured so that the first game state is at least difficult to set from the time when the second game state is set until a predetermined number of privilege games are executed. The game machine BB1 characterized by.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the gaming state after the end of the winning game is set to the gaming state with a high degree of advantage, any gaming state when the winning is achieved in the gaming state with a high degree of advantage. Since it is not decided until it is a hit, it is difficult for the player to play the game with a sense of security even if the game state with a high degree of advantage is set.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BB1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminant result of the discriminating means become a predetermined specific discriminant result. A plurality of privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the user, a first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of the game states is provided, and the first game state is at least from the time when the second game state is set until a predetermined number of privileged games are executed. It is configured to be difficult to set.

As a result, once the second game state is set, it becomes difficult to set the first game state with a low degree of advantage until a specific number of privilege games are executed. Therefore, when the second game state is set, the game is played. You can give great joy to others. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BB1, the game state setting means continuously obtains a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result over a first number of determinations predetermined by the determination means in the first gaming state. Based on the above, the gaming machine BB2 is configured so that a third gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, can be set.

According to the game machine BB2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BB1, the game state setting means continuously specifies the first number of times in the first game state over a predetermined number of times by the determination means. Since the third gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, can be set based on the deviation discrimination result different from the discrimination result of, the first number of times in the first gaming state The game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained before the determination is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, the second gaming state is configured so that the same gaming state is more easily maintained than the first gaming state until the specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the determination means. Characterized game machine BB3.

According to the game machine BB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB1 or BB2, the second game state is the same game as the first game state until the specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the determination means. Since the state is easily maintained, the next privilege game is substantially determined when the state shifts to the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the joy of the player when shifting to the second gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second determination means that executes determination based on the establishment, and the second determination condition is satisfied in the second gaming state rather than the first determination condition. The game state setting means is configured to facilitate the game, and when the determination result of the first determination means becomes the specific determination result, the gaming state is set in advance as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game. When the first game state is set at a predetermined specific ratio and the determination result of the second determination means becomes the specific determination result, the specific ratio is set as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game. The game machine BB4 is characterized in that the first game state can be set at a lower rate than that of the game machine BB4.

According to the game machine BB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BB1 to BB3, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the first discriminating means. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition different from the discriminating condition, and the second gaming state is more than the first discriminating condition. The second determination condition is configured so as to be more easily satisfied, and the game state setting means is such that when the determination result of the first determination means becomes the specific determination result. When the first game state is set at a predetermined specific ratio as the game state after the end of the privilege game and the determination result of the second determination means becomes the specific determination result, the privilege game The first game state can be set at a rate lower than the specific rate as the game state after the end of.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the discrimination of the second discriminating means will result in a specific discriminating result than the discriminating of the first discriminating means.

In the game machine BB4, when the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result in the second gaming state, the gaming state setting means is set as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game. It is configured so that it can be set to either a gaming state or a fourth gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is the first, rather than the second determination condition. The gaming machine BB5 is configured so that the determination condition of 1 is more easily satisfied.

According to the game machine BB5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB4, the game state setting means is described when the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result in the second gaming state. The game state after the end of the privilege game is configured to be set to either the second game state or the fourth game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and the fourth game state is The first discriminant condition is configured to be more easily satisfied than the second discriminant condition.

As a result, in the fourth gaming state, although it is advantageous for the player, the discrimination of the first discriminating means is easily executed, so that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation of the second gaming state. There is.

In the game machine BB4, when the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state and the first first as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game. It is configured so that it can be set to either the fourth gaming state, which is more advantageous than the gaming state, and the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminant result in the second gaming state. The fourth gaming state set based on the above is configured so that the second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition, and the fourth gaming state is set. In the fourth gaming state set based on the determination result of the second determination means being the specific determination result, the first determination condition is better than the second determination condition. A game machine BB6 characterized in that it is configured so as to be easily established.

According to the game machine BB6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB4, the game state setting means is a game after the end of the privilege game when the determination result of the second determination means becomes the specific determination result. The state can be set to either the second gaming state or the fourth gaming state which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and the determination of the second discriminating means in the second gaming state The fourth gaming state, which is set based on the result being the specific determination result, is configured so that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition. The fourth gaming state, which is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the second discriminating means becomes the specific discriminating result in the fourth gaming state, is based on the second discriminating condition. Is also configured so that the first determination condition is more likely to be satisfied.

As a result, the type of the discrimination means that is likely to be discriminated in the fourth game state is different depending on whether the specific discrimination result is obtained in the second game state or the specific discrimination result is obtained in the fourth game state. Since it is possible to realize a novel game property of being able to play, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the game machines BB4 to BB6, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and the first dynamic display means. 2. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information. The second gaming state is more dynamic in the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means than in the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that the display period is configured so that a long dynamic display period can be easily set by the dynamic display period setting means.

According to the game machine BB7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BB4 to BB6, a display means capable of displaying identification information and the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means are dynamically displayed. The first dynamic display means, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information. The dynamic display period setting means for setting is provided, and the second game state is the first dynamic display means rather than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information according to the above is configured so that a longer dynamic display period can be easily set by the dynamic display period setting means.

As a result, in the second gaming state, the discrimination of the second discriminating means can be performed more frequently than the discriminating of the first discriminating means, so that the advantage of the second gaming state can be further enhanced. There is.

In the game machine BB7, the identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A game machine BB8 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine BB8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB7, the identification information is displayed by the second dynamic display means while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since it is configured so that the dynamic display of the information can be started, there is an effect that the determination of the second determination means can be executed more efficiently.

In the game machine BB8, while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, the third dynamic display means can start the dynamic display of the identification information. A game machine BB9 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine BB9, in addition to the effect of the game machine BB8, the identification information is displayed by the third dynamic display means while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. Since the dynamic display of the above is configured to be startable, there is an effect that the determination of the first determination means can be executed more efficiently.

<Characteristic BC group> (A production that suggests the game state set after winning a specific number of times before winning a specific number of times)
A discriminant game that executes a discriminant game based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminant means being a predetermined specific discriminant result. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution means and the privilege game is completed. A game state setting means for setting the above, and a specific effect capable of suggesting a game state set by the game state setting means as a game state after the privileged game is executed a predetermined number of times. BC1 is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means that can be executed at least before the specific determination result is obtained in the determination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a wide variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines aim to improve the interest of the player by executing an effect that suggests the gaming state set after the winning game in advance before the gaming state is set. Some are.

However, since the gaming state after winning is usually not determined unless the winning is won, there is a problem that the execution timing of the effect that suggests the gaming state in advance is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BC1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are the predetermined specific discriminant results. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after the privilege game is completed. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including, and a game state set by the game state setting means as a game state after the privileged game is executed a predetermined number of times. The specific effect that can suggest the above is provided with the specific effect executing means that can be executed at least before the determination of the determination means results in the specific determination result.

As a result, it is possible to suggest in advance the game state after the privileged game has been executed a specific number of times, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BC1, as the type of the specific effect, it can be suggested that the first game state can be set by the game state setting means as the game state after the execution of the privilege game of the specific number of times is completed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect type determining means capable of determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type capable of suggesting that it is difficult to set the first gaming state. BC2.

According to the game machine BC2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BC1, as the type of the specific effect, as the game state after the execution of the privilege game of the specific number of times is completed, the first game state setting means. An effect type that can determine one of a plurality of types including at least a first type that can suggest that a game state can be set and a second type that can suggest that it is difficult to set the first game state. Since the determination means is provided, when the second type of specific effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the game state after the effect of the specific number of privileged games is completed is advantageous, so that the specified number of privileged games are executed. It can make you want to continue the game until it is played. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

In the game machine BC2, the second type is configured in an effect mode that can suggest that it is difficult for the game state setting means to set the first game state until the privilege game is executed a specific number of times. A game machine BC3 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BC2, in the second type, it becomes difficult to set the first game state by the game state setting means until the privilege game is executed a specific number of times. Since it is configured in an effect mode that can suggest that, there is an effect that greater joy can be given to the player when the second type of specific effect is executed.

In the game machine BC3, the specific effect executing means is the first game state by the game state setting means until the privilege game is executed a predetermined number of times as the specific effect of the second type. The first game state is set by the game state setting means until the privilege game is executed a second specific number of times, which is larger than the first specific number of times, and a first effect mode that can suggest that it becomes difficult to set. The gaming machine BC4 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute one of a plurality of production modes including at least a second production mode that can be suggested to be difficult to perform.

According to the game machine BC4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BC3, the specific effect executing means is until the privileged game is executed a predetermined number of times as the specific effect of the second type. The game until the first effect mode that can suggest that the first game state is difficult to be set by the game state setting means and the privilege game of the second specific number of times that is larger than the first specific number of times are executed. A second effect mode that can suggest that the first game state is difficult to be set by the state setting means, and one of a plurality of effect modes including at least one of the second effect modes can be executed. There is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that a specific effect will be executed.

In any of the game machines BC1 to BC4, the specific effect executing means is executed at least as an effect during the execution of the privilege game after the execution of the privilege game is completed, and the specific number of times the privilege game is executed. BC5 is a gaming machine, which is configured to be able to execute the specific effect capable of suggesting a gaming state after the end of.

According to the game machine BC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BC1 to BC4, the specific effect executing means is at least as an effect during the execution of the privilege game after the privilege game being executed is completed. Since it is configured to be able to execute the specific effect that can suggest the game state after the end of the award game of the specific number of times executed in, the specific effect can be executed as the effect during the execution of the award game. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the execution of the privilege game.

In any of the game machines BC1 to BC5, the second game state is the first game by the game state setting means until the privilege game is executed a specific number of times after the second game state is set. The gaming machine BC6, which is configured so that the state is difficult to set.

According to the game machine BC6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines BC1 to BC6, in the second game state, the privilege game is executed a specific number of times after the second game state is set. Since the first game state is difficult to be set by the game state setting means, it is possible to give great joy to the player when the second game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BC6, the game state setting means includes at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of 1 is configured to be settable, and the game state setting means is such that after the second game state is set, the second game state is executed until the privilege game is executed a specific number of times. A gaming machine BC7 characterized in that it is configured to set either a gaming state or the third gaming state.

According to the game machine BC7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BC6, the game state setting means is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the second game state, and the first game state. It is configured so that one of a plurality of game states including at least three game states can be set, and the game state setting means is said to have the specified number of times after the second game state is set. It is configured to set either the second game state or the third game state until the privilege game is executed.

As a result, once the second game state is set, the first game state with a low degree of advantage is not set until a specific number of privilege games are executed, so that the second game state is set more strongly. It has the effect of being able to be expected.

In the game machine BC7, the game machine BC8 is characterized in that the second game state and the third game state are configured so as to be difficult to be changed to another game state until the privilege game is executed.

According to the game machine BC8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BC7, the second game state and the third game state are configured so as not to be changed to other game states until the privilege game is executed. Therefore, in the second game state and the third game state, the next privilege game is substantially determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a sense of security at the time of transition to the second gaming state or the third gaming state.

In the game machine BC8, the first gaming state is different from the specific discrimination result over the determination of the determination means of the first number of times predetermined after being set to the first gaming state. BC9 is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be changed to a fourth gaming state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC8, the first gaming state extends over the determination of the first number of determination means predetermined after being set to the first gaming state. Based on the fact that the discriminant result is different from the specific discriminant result, the first game is changed to the fourth game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. When the state is set, there is an effect that the game can be performed while strongly wishing that a specific determination result will be obtained by the time the first determination is performed.

<Characteristic BD group> (The degree of advantage is changed between the time saving state after reaching the limit and the time saving state before reaching the limit)
A discriminant game that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privilege game that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. It is set by the execution means, the game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state, and the game state setting means as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. As the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state, one of a plurality of advantages including at least a first degree of advantage and a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. The game machine BD1 comprising: an advantage degree setting means for setting.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

Specifically, there is known a game state in which one game state is set from among four types of game states in which the degree of advantage differs depending on the combination of the presence / absence of the time saving state and the presence / absence of the operation of the probability change function.

However, since the conventional game machines have the same degree of advantage in the same game state, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if the same game state is continuously set for a long time.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BD1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminant result of the discriminating means become a predetermined specific discriminant result. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a specific game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. And, as the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state set by the game state setting means, at least a first degree of advantage and a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage are included. It is provided with an advantage degree setting means for setting one advantage degree out of a plurality of advantage degrees.

As a result, the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state can be made different, so that it is possible to more strongly expect that the second degree of advantage is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD1, the specific gaming state is set in advance after the specific gaming state is set, regardless of whether the first advantage degree is set or the second advantage degree is set. The gaming machine BD2 is configured to be terminated based on the result of the specific determination over the determination of the determination means a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BD1, the specific gaming state is described regardless of whether the first degree of advantage is set or the second degree of advantage is set. Since it is configured to end based on the result of the specific determination over the determination of the determination means a predetermined number of times after the specific game state is set, it is specific. There is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained before the determination of a specific number of times is executed after the game state is reached.

In the game machine BD1 or BD2, as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. The first advantageous degree setting means is provided with the type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game, and the first advantageous degree setting means is set when the specific gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the first privileged game. It is characterized in that it is set to a degree and can be set to the second advantage degree when the specific gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the second privilege game. Game machine BD3.

According to the game machine BD3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BD1 or BD2, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game are used. A type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game, which is at least one of a plurality including the privileged game, is provided, and the advantage degree setting means is the specific gaming state as a gaming state after the end of the first privileged game. Is set, the first advantage degree may be set, and when the specific gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the second privilege game, the second advantage degree may be set. It is configured to be possible.

As a result, it is possible to make it more strongly expected that the first privilege game will be decided, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD3, the game state setting means sets the specific game state as the game state after the end of the second privilege game when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition BD4 is characterized in that it is possible to set a first gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific gaming state when the above is not established.

According to the game machine BD4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BD3, the game state setting means is described when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied as the game state after the end of the second privilege game. Since it is possible to set a specific game state and set a first game state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific game state when the specific condition is not satisfied, the second privilege. When the game is decided, the game can be played with the expectation that the specific conditions are not satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BD4 includes a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball during the execution of the privilege game, and the game state setting means becomes the variable ball entry means during the execution of the second privilege game. When the game ball enters and the specific condition is satisfied, the specific game state is set, and the game ball enters the variable ball entry means during the execution of the second privilege game, and the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine BD5 is configured so that the first gaming state can be set when a specific condition is not satisfied.

According to the game machine BD5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BD4, the game state setting means includes the variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter during the execution of the privilege game, and the game state setting means is the second privilege game. When the game ball enters the variable ball entry means during the execution of, and the specific condition is satisfied, the specific game state is set, and the variable ball entry is performed during the execution of the second privilege game. It is configured so that the first game state can be set when the game ball enters the means and the specific condition is not satisfied.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the ball will enter the variable ball entry means during the execution of the second privilege game.

In the game machine BD5, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set the specific game state when the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means during the execution of the second privilege game. The advantage degree setting means determines the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state set without the game ball entering the variable ball entry means during the execution of the second privilege game. BD6 is a game machine characterized in that it is set to an advantage degree of 1.

According to the game machine BD6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BD5, the game state setting means is described when the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means during the execution of the second privilege game. It is configured so that a specific game state can be set, and the advantage degree setting means is set without the game ball entering the variable ball entry means during the execution of the second privilege game. The degree of advantage of the specific gaming state is set to the degree of advantage of the first.

As a result, if the game ball cannot be entered into the variable ball entry means in the second privilege game, it will be set to a specific game state set to the first advantage degree with a low advantage degree. In the second privilege game, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the variable ball entry means.

In any of the game machines BD4 to BD6, the specific condition is based on the fact that the second game state is set by the game state setting means continuously over the predetermined number of times of the privilege game. The gaming machine BD7, which is configured to be established.

According to the game machine BD7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BD4 to BD6, the specific condition is the first by the game state setting means continuously over the predetermined number of times of the privileged game. Since it is configured to be established based on the setting of the two gaming states, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the second gaming state is continuous to perform the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD7, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment, and the discriminating of the second discriminating means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means. The specific gaming state set to the second advantage degree satisfies the second determination condition as compared with the specific gaming state set to the first advantage degree. The game machine BD8, which is configured to be easy to use.

According to the game machine BD8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BD1 to BD8, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the first discriminating means. It is composed of at least a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the discrimination condition, and the discrimination of the second discrimination means is performed by the first discrimination means. It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the discrimination, and the specific gaming state set to the second advantage degree is more than the specific gaming state set to the first advantage degree. Is also configured so that the second determination condition can be easily satisfied.

As a result, it becomes easier to determine that the degree of advantage is different depending on whether the degree of advantage is set to the first degree or the second degree of advantage, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the game machine BD8, when the determination of the first determination means results in the specific determination result, the gaming state setting means is a first game that is more advantageous than the specific gaming state at a predetermined specific ratio. When the state is set and the specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the second determination means, the second gaming state can be set at a rate higher than the specific ratio. Characterized game machine BD9.

According to the game machine BD9, in addition to the effect of the game machine BD8, the game state setting means is said to have a predetermined specific ratio when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the first determination means. A first gaming state that is more advantageous than a specific gaming state is set, and when the discrimination of the second discriminating means results in the specific discrimination result, the second gaming state is set at a rate higher than the specific rate. Since it is possible to perform the game, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the determination of the second determination means will result in a specific determination result.

<Characteristic BE group> (Game state that cannot be transferred unless at least a specific number of jackpots are won)
A discriminant game that executes a discriminant game based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminant means being a predetermined specific discriminant result. One of a plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the execution means and the state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. The game state setting means is provided with a game state setting means for setting a state, and the game state setting means has a predetermined number of times the privilege game is executed after the privilege game of 1 is executed in the first game state. The gaming machine BE1 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second gaming state can be set more easily when the number of times is more than the specified number of times than when the number is less than.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are designed to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player and performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

Further, in the conventional game machine, the setting ratio of each game state is different, and a game state having a high degree of advantage but rarely set, a game state which is relatively easy to set but has a low degree of advantage, and the like are provided. As a result, there are some that aim to improve the interest by having the game playable for one purpose of setting a game state that is rarely set.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even in a gaming state that is rarely set, if lucky, it can be set with a small number of winnings, so a lucky player is rarely set. There was a possibility that the purpose of setting the game state would be achieved immediately, and the motivation for the game would be lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BE1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are the predetermined specific discriminant results. As a privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player and a state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, the first game state and the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state setting means is provided with a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least, and the game state setting means is the privilege after the privilege game of 1 is executed in the first game state. It is configured so that the second game state can be set more easily when the number of times the game is executed is less than the predetermined number of times specified and when the number of times the game is executed is more than the specified number of times.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times the privileged game is executed after the first game state is set, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BE1, the game state setting means includes at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of 1 is configured to be settable, and the game state setting means sets the third game state as the game state after the privilege game executed in the first game state is completed. It is characterized in that it is easier to set the second game state when the number of times the privileged game is executed is less than the specified number of times after the game is played. Game machine BE2.

According to the game machine BE2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE1, the game state setting means is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the second game state, and the first game state. It is configured so that one of a plurality of game states including at least three game states can be set, and the game state setting means is after the privilege game executed in the first game state is completed. It is easier to set the second gaming state when the number of executions of the privilege game is less than the specified number of times after the third gaming state is set as the gaming state of the above. It is configured as follows.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the third game state will be set as the game state after the end of the privilege game.

In the game machine BE2, the third gaming state is configured so that when the determination of the determination means is executed, the specific determination result is obtained with a predetermined first probability. 1 The gaming state is characterized in that, when the discrimination of the discrimination means is executed, the specific discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. BE3.

According to the game machine BE3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE2, the third game state will be the specific determination result with a predetermined first probability when the determination of the determination means is executed. The first gaming state is configured so that when the determination of the determination means is executed, the specific determination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. It is something that is.

As a result, when the third game state is reached, a specific determination result is likely to be obtained with a small number of determinations, so that the superiority of the third game state can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the third game state will be set.

In the game machine BE2 or BE3, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game is provided, and the first privilege game is provided. Is configured so that the third game state is set as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed by the game state setting means at least when the game is executed in the first game state. The gaming state setting means is characterized in that at least the second gaming state is set when the first privilege game is continuously executed over the specified number of times of the privilege game. Game machine BE4.

According to the game machine BE4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BE2 or BE3, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game is determined. The third game state is provided as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed by the game state setting means when the first privilege game is executed at least in the first game state. The game state setting means is configured to be set, and when the first privilege game is continuously executed over the specified number of times of the privilege game, at least the second game state is set. Is to set.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the first privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BE4, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state is set to one of a plurality of advantage degrees including at least a first degree of advantage and a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. The second game state is provided as the advantage degree setting means, and the type determination means sets the first privilege game and the second game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed by the game state setting means. The privilege game is configured so that one of a plurality of types including at least one can be determined, and the advantage degree setting means is set after the execution of the second privilege game is completed. It is possible to set the degree of advantage of the state to the first degree of advantage and set the degree of advantage of the second gaming state set after the execution of the first privilege game is completed to the degree of second advantage. The gaming machine BE5, which is characterized by being configured in.

According to the game machine BE5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE4, at least the first advantage degree of the second gaming state and the second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree are set. The advantage degree setting means for setting the advantage degree to one of the plurality of included is provided, and the type determining means is used as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed by the first privilege game and the game state setting means. It is configured so that one of a plurality of types including at least a second privilege game in which the second game state is set can be determined, and the advantage degree setting means executes the second privilege game. The advantage degree of the second gaming state set after the end of is set to the first advantage degree, and the advantage degree of the second gaming state set after the execution of the first privilege game is completed is described. It is configured so that it can be set to a second degree of advantage.

As a result, the second gaming state of the second advantage degree is not set unless the first privilege game is consecutive a specific number of times. Therefore, when the second gaming state of the second advantage degree is set, the player is asked. It has the effect of giving a great sense of accomplishment.

In the game machine BE5, the discrimination means discriminates based on the establishment of a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the discriminating of the second discriminating means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means. The second advantage degree setting means is set so that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition as the second advantage degree, and the first advantage degree is described as the first advantage degree. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that it can be set so that the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than when the first degree of advantage is set.

According to the game machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE5, the discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition and the first discriminating condition. It is composed of at least a second discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition, and the discriminating of the second discriminating means is more performed by the player than the discriminating of the first discriminating means. The advantage degree setting means is set so that the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied as the second advantage degree than the first determination condition. However, the first degree of advantage can be set so that the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than when the first degree of advantage is set.

As a result, it becomes easier to determine that the degree of advantage is different depending on whether the degree of advantage is set to the first degree or the second degree of advantage, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the game machine BE6, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information are set. In the first dynamic display period setting means, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the dynamic display of the second identification information. The second game state, which includes a second dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period and the first advantage degree is set, is set by the first dynamic display period setting means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information set by the second dynamic display period setting means is longer than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information. Is configured to be easy to set, and the second gaming state in which the second advantage degree is set is the dynamic of the second identification information set by the second dynamic display period setting means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information set by the first dynamic display period setting means is configured so that a longer period can be easily set than the dynamic display period in the display. A game machine BE7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE6, the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and the first identification information. The first dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the above, and the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. The second gaming state in which the first advantage degree is set is provided with the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information. 1 Dynamic display of the second identification information set by the second dynamic display period setting means rather than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information set by the dynamic display period setting means. The dynamic display period in the above is configured so that a longer period can be easily set, and the second gaming state in which the second advantage degree is set is determined by the second dynamic display period setting means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information set by the first dynamic display period setting means is longer than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information that is set. , It is configured so that a long period can be easily set.

As a result, the interval at which the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed can be lengthened in the situation where the first degree of advantage is set, so that the dynamic display of the first identification information is relatively increased. Since it is possible to execute the information and the interval at which the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed can be lengthened in the situation where the second advantage degree is set, the second identification information can be relatively displayed. It is possible to execute more dynamic display. Therefore, when the first degree of advantage is set, it can be configured so that the determination of the first determination means can be performed easily, and when the second degree of advantage is set, the first is surely the first. 2 There is an effect that the discrimination means can be configured so as to be easily discriminated.

In the game machine BE7, the first dynamic display means is configured to be able to start the dynamic display of the first identification information while the dynamic display of the second identification information is being performed. The second dynamic display means is configured to be able to start the dynamic display of the first identification information while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed. The game machine BE8 characterized by being.

According to the game machine BE8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BE7, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information while the second identification information is dynamically displayed. The second dynamic display means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed. It is configured so that it can be started.

This has the effect that the discrimination between the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means can be executed more efficiently.

<Characteristic BF group> (Suppresses irregular winning of special 2 starting port in the state of being distributed to special 1 starting port)
A specific flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the specific flow path can enter, and a game ball flowing down the specific flow path enter the ball. A second ball entry means provided at a possible position and different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball flowing down the specific flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition are released from the second ball entry means. Also, a first gaming state in which it is easier to enter the first ball-entry means and a second gaming state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball-entry means than in the first gaming state. A game state setting means for setting at least one of a plurality of game states including at least one, and suppression of suppressing the game ball flowing down the specific flow path from entering the second ball entry means in the first game state. A game machine BF1 characterized by providing means and means.

According to the game machine BF1, a specific flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the specific flow path can enter, and the specific flow path are provided. A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and a game ball flowing down the specific flow path are provided at a position where the flowed game ball can enter, and based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A first game state in which it is easier to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, and a game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry means than in the first game state. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state, and a game ball flowing down the specific flow path in the first game state enter the second ball entry means. It is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the ball.

As a result, the ease of entering the second ball entry means can be made different between the first game state and the second game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

In the game machine BF1, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and a determination result of the discrimination means are predetermined. Based on the determination result of the above, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player is provided, and the determination based on the entry into the second entry means is performed with the specific determination result. The game machine BF2 is characterized in that it is more likely to be advantageous to the player than in the case where the determination based on the entry into the first ball entry means results in the specific determination result.

According to the game machine BF2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the determination means thereof. The second ball entry means is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific determination result. It is configured that the specific determination result obtained by the determination based on the ball is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the determination based on the entry into the first ball entry means results in the specific determination result. There is.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the second ball entry means.

In the game machine BF1 or BF2, the game ball flowing down the specific flow path is divided into a first position capable of guiding the game ball to the first entry means and a second position capable of guiding the game ball to the second entry means. The variable means is provided with variable means, and the suppressing means is variable so that the game ball flowing down the specific flow path in the first gaming state is difficult to reach the variable means changed to the first position. A game machine BF3 characterized in that it is configured to be controllable.

According to the game machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF1 or BF2, a first position capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the specific flow path to the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. A second position that can be guided to and a variable means that can be changed to, and the suppressing means is the variable means in which the game ball that has flowed down the specific flow path in the first game state is changed to the first position. The variable means is variably controllable so as to be difficult to reach.

This has the effect of reliably suppressing the entry of the ball into the second entry means in the first gaming state.

In the game machine BF3, a passing means through which a game ball flowing down the specific flow path can pass, a passing discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the game ball, and a discriminating pass discriminating means. Based on the result being the predetermined first determination result, the variable game executing means for executing the variable game for changing the variable means from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period, and The suppressing means is such that the game ball passes through the period from the first determination result in the first game state to the change of the variable means to the second position in the variable game. The game machine BF4 is characterized in that it can be set to a period that tends to be longer than the period required from passing through the means to reaching the variable means.

According to the game machine BF4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF3, the determination is executed based on the passing means through which the game ball flowing down the specific flow path can pass and the game ball passing through the passing means. Based on the passage determination means and the determination result of the passage determination means being the predetermined first determination result, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game is provided, and the suppressing means changes the variable means to the second position in the variable game after the first determination result is obtained in the first game state. The period up to is set to be set to a period that tends to be longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the variable means after passing through the passing means.

This has the effect of more reliably suppressing the game ball from entering the second ball entry means in the first game state.

In the game machine BF4, the game ball passes through the passing means during the period from the first determination result in the second gaming state until the variable means changes to the second position in the variable game. The game machine BF5 is characterized by comprising means for setting a period that is likely to be shorter than the period required to reach the variable means.

According to the game machine BF5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BF4, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entry means in the second game state.

<Characteristic BG group> (Provides a left-handed state in which only special 1 turns and a left-handed state in which special 1 and special 2 rotate alternately)
A first ball-entry means provided at least at a position where a game ball launched with a specific firing intensity can enter, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and predetermined setting conditions. Based on the establishment, the first game state in which the game ball launched with the specific firing intensity is controlled so as to make it difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and the specific state rather than the first game state. A game state setting that sets one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which a game ball launched with the firing intensity of is controlled so as to easily enter the second ball entry means. A game machine BG1 characterized by providing means and means.

According to the game machine BG1, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched with a specific firing intensity can enter at least, and a second entry means different from the first entry means. A first game state in which a game ball launched with the specific firing intensity is controlled so as to be difficult to enter the second ball entry means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a first game state thereof. One of a plurality of games including at least a second game state in which a game ball launched with the specific firing intensity is controlled so as to be easier to enter the second ball entry means than in one game state. It is provided with a game state setting means for setting a state.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In the game machine BG1, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched with a first firing intensity different from the specific firing intensity can enter, and the first The game state and the second game state are controlled so that the game ball launched at the first firing intensity becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and the game state setting The means is controlled so that the game ball launched at the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the first firing intensity can easily enter the second entering means. The game machine BG2 is characterized in that it is configured to be configured to be able to set a game state and one of a plurality of game states including at least one.

According to the game machine BG2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG1, the second ball entry means is at a position where a game ball launched with a first firing intensity different from the specific firing intensity can enter. The first game state and the second game state are provided so that the game ball launched at the first firing intensity becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry means. The game state setting means is controlled, and the game ball launched by the first game state, the second game state, and the first firing intensity enters the second ball entry means. It is configured to be able to set a third gaming state controlled so as to make it easier to ball, and one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one.

As a result, it is possible to launch the game ball with different firing intensities depending on the game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BG1 or BG2, a first position where a game ball launched with the specific firing intensity is provided at a reachable position and the reached game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and A variable means that can be changed is provided at a second position where the reached game ball becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and in the first game state, the variable means is variable to the first position. The variable means is controlled so that it becomes difficult to reach the game ball while the game is being played, and the second gaming state is a game while the variable means is variable to the first position. The gaming machine BG3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled so that the ball can be reached more easily than the first gaming state.

According to the game machine BG3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG1 or BG2, there is an effect that the variable means can physically suppress the ball entering the second ball entry means in the first game state.

In the game machine BG3, a passing means provided at a position where a game ball launched with the specific firing intensity can pass, and a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the game ball. , A variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. The variable means is provided at a position where only the game ball that has passed through the passing means can reach the variable means, and the variable means is set in the first gaming state after the specific determination result is obtained. The period until the game ball is changed to the first position is controlled to be a period that tends to be longer than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the passing means to reach the variable means. The second gaming state requires a period from when the specific determination result is obtained until the variable means is changed to the first position until the game ball that has passed through the passing means reaches the variable means. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that it is controlled so that the period tends to be shorter than the period.

According to the game machine BG4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG3, the passing means provided at a position where the game ball launched at the specific firing intensity can pass, and the game ball passed through the passing means. Based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the above and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result, the variable means is moved from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. A variable control means for varying to a position is provided, the variable means is provided at a position where only a game ball that has passed through the passing means can reach, and the first gaming state is the specific. The period from when the determination result is obtained until the variable means is changed to the first position is likely to be longer than the period required for the game ball passing through the passing means to reach the variable means. In the second gaming state, the period from when the specific determination result is obtained until the variable means is changed to the first position is a game in which the passing means has passed. It is controlled so that the period is likely to be shorter than the period required for the sphere to reach the variable means.

This has the effect of more reliably suppressing the game ball from entering the second ball entry means in the first game state.

In the game machine BG4, the variable means is configured so that a game ball that is launched at the specific firing intensity and does not pass through the passing means is difficult to reach. ..

According to the game machine BG5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BG4, the variable means is configured so that a game ball that is fired at the specific firing intensity and does not pass through the passing means becomes difficult to reach. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entry means without going through the passing means.

<Characteristic BH group> (As a state without support, there is a normal state where you do not win a special 2 even if you hit right, and a latent state where you win a special 2 by hitting right)
The first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the second entry means by allowing the game ball to enter the first entry means. In a plurality of directions including at least a first direction in which it is difficult to enter the means and a second direction in which it is possible to enter the second ball entry means and it is difficult to enter the first ball entry means. A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first position in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. As a variable means that can be changed to, a variable control means that changes the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, and the predetermined variable pattern that is controlled by the variable control means. A first variable pattern in which the variable means is changed to the first position over a predetermined first period during the variable patterns of 1, and a first variable means having a length different from that of the first period. The specification is based on the establishment of a variable pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is variable to the first position over two periods and a predetermined setting condition. It is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in which the first variable pattern is determined at a specific ratio predetermined by the variable pattern determining means when the variable condition of is satisfied, and the first gaming state. A second gaming state in which the first variable pattern is determined at a specific ratio, and a third gaming state in which the second variable pattern is more easily determined by the variable pattern determining means than in the first gaming state. The game machine BH1 comprising at least one game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including the game state.

According to the game machine BH1, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. A first direction that makes it possible to enter the second ball entry means and a second direction that makes it possible to enter the second ball entry means and makes it difficult to enter the first ball entry means. A launching means capable of launching a game ball in a plurality of directions including at least, a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and a game ball entering the ball from the first position. It is controlled by a variable means that can be changed to a second position that becomes difficult, a variable control means that changes the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, and the variable control means. As the predetermined variable pattern, a first variable pattern in which the variable means is changed to the first position over a predetermined first period during one variable pattern, and the variable means are the first period. A variable pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is variable to the first position over a second period of a different length from the above, and a predetermined setting condition. From the first gaming state in which the first variable pattern is determined at a specific ratio predetermined by the variable pattern determining means when the specific variable condition is satisfied based on the establishment, and the first gaming state thereof. The second variable pattern is more likely to be determined by the variable pattern determining means than in the second gaming state in which the first variable pattern is determined at the specific ratio, which is advantageous to the player. A third gaming state and a gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one are provided.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the game state set by the game state setting means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BH1, the second game state is configured so that the game ball launched in the second direction is easier to enter the second ball entry means than the first game state. A game machine BH2 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine BH2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH1, in the second game state, the game ball launched in the second direction from the first game state is sent to the second ball entry means. Therefore, even though the same first variable pattern is determined when a specific variable condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the ball is easily entered. It is possible to realize a novel playability that can make the ease of entering the second ball entry means different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BH2, the game machine BH3 is characterized in that the first period is composed of a period having a length shorter than that of the second period.

According to the game machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH2, the first period is composed of a period shorter than the second period, so that the first position is moved to the first position in the second game state. There is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the second entry means while minimizing the variable period.

In any of the game machines BH1 to BH3, the specific variable condition includes a passing means through which the game ball can pass and a passing determining means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the game ball. BH4 is a gaming machine BH4, wherein is established based on the determination result of the passage determination means being a predetermined specific determination result.

According to the game machine BH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BH1 to BH3, the passing means through which the game ball can pass and the passing determination that executes the discrimination based on the passing means of the game ball. The specific variable condition includes means, and the specific variable condition is established based on the determination result of the passage determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result.

As a result, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the determination result of the passage determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BH4, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the variable control means changes the variable means in the first variable pattern after a predetermined third period elapses. Then, when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the variable means is changed by the first variable pattern after a fourth period having a length different from that of the third period has elapsed. In the third period, the game ball that has passed through the passing means reaches the variable means in which the game ball has been changed to the first position during the first period. It is composed of a period of a length that makes it difficult, and the fourth period is the first period to the variable means in which the game ball that has passed through the passing means is changed to the first position. The gaming machine BH5 is characterized in that it is composed of a period having a length that makes it easier to reach between the three periods.

According to the game machine BH5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH4, the variable control means waits after a predetermined third period elapses when the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state. When the variable means is changed by the first variable pattern and the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the fourth period having a length different from the third period elapses, and then the first. It is configured so that the variable means can be changed by one variable pattern, and during the third period, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is changed to the first position. It is composed of a period of a length that makes it difficult to reach during the first period, and in the fourth period, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is changed to the first position. It is composed of a period of a length that makes it easier to reach the variable means during the first period than the third period.

As a result, by making the period until the variable means variable in the first variable pattern different, the ease of entering the second ball entry means can be made different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The game machine BH5 is characterized by comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the game ball that has not passed through the passing means from reaching the variable means that has been changed to the first position in the first gaming state. The game machine BH6.

According to the game machine BH6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH5, in the first game state, the game ball that has not passed through the passing means reaches the variable means that is variable to the first position. Since the suppressing means for suppressing this is provided, there is an effect that it is possible to surely prevent the game ball that has not passed through the passing means from reaching the variable means that is variable to the first position.

In the game machine BH5 or BH6, the first flow path through which the game ball passing through the passing means can flow down, the second flow path different from the first flow path, and the game ball passing through the passing means are referred to as the first flow path. The variable means includes a distribution means for distributing to either one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and the variable means is a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. Is provided at a position where a ball can enter, and the first game state is to the variable means in which the game ball distributed to the first flow path is changed to the first position. The game ball that becomes reachable and is distributed to the second flow path is configured so as to be difficult to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position, and the second game state. Is configured so that neither the game ball distributed to the first flow path nor the game ball distributed to the second flow path can reach the variable means that is variable to the first position. A game machine BH7 characterized by being

According to the game machine BH7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH5 or BH6, a first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passing means can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path. The variable means includes a distribution means for distributing the game ball that has passed through the passing means to either the first flow path or the second flow path, and the variable means is a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path. And the game ball flowing down the second flow path are provided at a position where the ball can enter, and in the first game state, the game ball distributed to the first flow path is the first. It is configured so that the variable means that is variable to the position can be reached, and the game ball distributed to the second flow path is difficult to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position. In the second gaming state, both the game ball distributed to the first flow path and the game ball distributed to the second flow path are variable to the first position. It is configured to make it difficult to reach the means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the flow path distributed by the distribution means.

In the game machine BH7, the third game state is brought to the variable means in which both the game ball distributed to the first flow path and the game ball distributed to the second flow path are changed to the first position. The gaming machine BH8, which is configured to be reachable.

According to the game machine BH8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BH7, in the third gaming state, both the game ball distributed to the first flow path and the game ball distributed to the second flow path are the first. Since it is configured so that the variable means that is variable in position can be reached, the effect that more game balls can be entered into the second entry means in the third gaming state. There is.

In any of the game machines BH5 to BH8, at least in the first game state, after the predetermined game ball passes through the passing means, the variation of the first variable pattern based on the passage of the predetermined game ball ends. The gaming machine BH9 is provided with a regulating means capable of regulating the passage of another gaming ball through the passing means.

According to the game machine BH9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BH5 to BH8, at least in the first game state, after the predetermined game ball passes through the passing means, the predetermined game ball passes. Since the regulation means capable of restricting the passage of another game ball through the passing means is provided until the variable of the first variable pattern based on the above is completed, the game is played to the second ball entry means in the first gaming state. There is an effect that the ball can be more reliably suppressed from entering.

<Characteristic BI group> (Small hit RUSBH without simultaneous fluctuation)
It is more advantageous than the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the first determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. Based on the determination result of the second determination means that executes the second determination with a high degree and the first determination means, or the determination result of the second determination means becomes a predetermined specific determination result. Benefits that are advantageous to the player The game execution means for executing the game, the entry means for the game ball to enter, and the predetermined benefit based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means. Based on the privilege granting means and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state, the second gaming state in which the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state. The second determination is provided with a third gaming state in which the predetermined privilege is more likely to be granted by the privilege granting means than a state, and a gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one. The condition is configured so that it cannot be satisfied at least from the time when the first determination condition is satisfied until the determination result of the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition is shown to the player. The game machine BI1 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine BI1, the first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition are satisfied. A specific discrimination result in which a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination having a higher degree of advantage than the first discrimination, a discrimination result of the first discrimination means, or a discrimination result of the second discrimination means is predetermined. Based on the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has become, the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, and the game ball entering the ball entry means. Based on the privilege granting means for granting the predetermined privilege and the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, the first gaming state and the second gaming state in which the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first gaming state. And a third gaming state in which the predetermined privilege is more likely to be granted by the privilege granting means than in the second gaming state, and a gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one. The second determination condition is provided at least from the time when the first determination condition is satisfied until the determination result of the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition is shown to the player. It is configured so that it cannot be established.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that a third game state in which a predetermined privilege is easily given is set.

The gaming machine BI1 is characterized in that the third gaming state is configured so that the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first gaming state.

According to the game machine BI2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI1, the third game state is configured so that the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the first game state, and thus the third game state. In the above, there is an effect that the discrimination of the second discriminating means can be efficiently executed.

In the game machine BI1 or BI2, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Based on the fact that the variable means that can be varied and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means are the first discrimination results different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means can be used from the second position for a predetermined period. The gaming machine BI3 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to the first position.

According to the game machine BI3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI1 or BI2, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the game ball from the first position to the ball entry means. Based on the fact that the variable means that can be changed to the second position where the ball is difficult to enter, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is the first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the above. The variable means includes variable game execution means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the discrimination result of the second discriminating means and perform the game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines BI1 to BI3, the game ball moves to the first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the second determination means. Based on the second variable means that can be changed to the third position where the ball can be entered and the fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and the establishment of a specific variable condition. As the variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern and the predetermined variable pattern controlled by the variable control means, the second variable means is predetermined between the one variable pattern. A first variable pattern that is variable to the first position over one period and a second variable means that is variable to the first position over a second period that is different in length from the first period. A variable pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least two variable patterns is provided, and the first determination condition is that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is composed of conditions that can be satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The first variable pattern and the third gaming state are configured so that the first variable pattern is more easily determined than the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means. The second variable pattern is configured such that the second variable pattern is more easily determined than the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means. ..

According to the game machine BI4, in addition to the effects of the game machines BI1 to BI3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a second ball entry means thereof. 2 A second variable means that can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the discriminating means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and a specific variable Based on the establishment of the condition, the variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern and the predetermined variable pattern controlled by the variable control means include the second variable pattern between the first variable patterns. The first variable pattern in which the variable means is variable to the first position over a predetermined first period, and the second variable means in which the second variable means has a different length from the first period. A second variable pattern that is variable to a first position and a variable pattern determining means that determines one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least one of them are provided, and the first determination condition is the first ball entry means. It is composed of conditions that can be established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and the second determination condition is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. It is configured under conditions that can be satisfied, and the first variable pattern and the third gaming state are determined by the variable pattern setting means in the first variable pattern rather than the second variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured to be easy to be determined, and the second variable pattern is more easily determined by the variable pattern setting means than the first variable pattern. ..

As a result, the variable pattern that is easily determined according to the game state can be made different, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine BI4, the game machine BI5 is characterized in that the first period is composed of a period having a length shorter than that of the second period.

According to the game machine BI5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI4, the first period is composed of a period shorter than the second period, so that the player moves to the first position in the third game state. Although the variable period of the variable means is short, the game ball can be efficiently entered into the second entry means. This has the effect of further improving the interest of the player.

The game machine BI4 or BI5 includes a passing means through which the game ball can pass and a passing determining means for executing the discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the game ball. The gaming machine BI6 is characterized in that the determination result of the passage determination means is established based on the determination result of the first predetermined determination result.

According to the game machine BI6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI4 or BI5, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a passing discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the passing of the passing means by the game ball, The specific variable condition is established based on the fact that the determination result of the passage determination means is a predetermined first determination result.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the determination result of the passage determination means.

In the game machine BI6, when the first determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the variable control means uses the first variable pattern after a predetermined third period has elapsed. When the specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, the variable means is changed by the first variable pattern after a fourth period having a length different from that of the third period has elapsed. The third period is such that the game ball that has passed through the passing means is moved to the second variable means that is changed to the first position during the first period. The second variable means is configured by a period of a length that makes it difficult to reach the first position, and in the fourth period, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is changed to the first position. The gaming machine BI7 is characterized in that it is composed of a period of a length that makes it easier to reach during the first period than the third period.

According to the game machine BI7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BI6, the variable control means elapses a predetermined third period when the first determination result is obtained in the first game state. After that, when the variable means is changed by the first variable pattern and the specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, after a fourth period having a length different from the third period has elapsed. The variable means is configured to be variable by the first variable pattern, and during the third period, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is changed to the first position. The two variable means are composed of a period of a length that makes it difficult to reach the variable means during the first period, and in the fourth period, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is the first. It consists of a period of length that makes it easier to reach the second variable means, which is variable in position, during the first period than in the third period.

As a result, by making the period until the variable means variable in the first variable pattern different, it is possible to form a game state in which it is easy to enter the second ball entry means and a game state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. There is an effect.

In any of the game machines BI1 to BI7, the first determination condition is that the determination result of the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition is the determination result of the player after at least the second determination condition is satisfied. BI8 is a game machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to be established until it is shown in.

According to the game machine BI8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines BI1 to BI7, the first determination condition is based on the establishment of the first determination condition at least after the second determination condition is satisfied. Since it is configured so that the determination result of the first determination means cannot be established until the determination result is shown to the player, the determination of the first determination means and the determination of the second determination means are executed in duplicate. It has the effect of being able to reliably suppress this.

<Characteristic BJ group> (V winning rate deteriorates if hit while with support)
A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position higher than the first position. The variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the variable means that can be changed to the second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter and the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. The variable control means to be caused, and the control executed by the variable control means, the first control in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined first period, and the above-mentioned. A control determining means for determining control of one of a plurality including at least a second control in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position during a second period longer than the first period. A first control state in which the first control is more likely to be determined by the control determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a second control state in which the control determination means is more likely to determine the second control than the first state. The control state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least two control states, the discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the game ball The variable ball entry means that can be changed into the first variable state in which the ball can be entered and the second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are predetermined. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second variable state to the first variable state for a predetermined period based on the specific determination result obtained. The variable game is based on a specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the variable game. When the specific determination result is obtained during the first control state, the game is provided with an advantageous game state setting means for setting the game state after the execution of the above is completed to an advantageous game state which is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine BJ1 is characterized in that the ease of passing through the specific region is variable depending on whether the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state.

According to the game machine BJ1, a ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, and a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means. , The variable means that can be changed to the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and the variable means from the second position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition. The variable control means that is variable to the first position and the control executed by the variable control means are such that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position during a predetermined first period. One of a plurality of controls including at least a first control and a second control in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position during a second period longer than the first period. A first control state in which the first control is easily determined by the control determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition and a control determination means for determining the above state, and the control determination means rather than the first state. 2 The determination is executed based on the control state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least the second control state in which the control is easily determined, and the game ball entering the ball entry means. The discriminating means, the first variable state in which the game ball can enter, and the second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state, and the variable ball entry means that can be changed. Based on the determination result of the means being a predetermined specific determination result, the variable entry means executes a variable game in which the second variable state is changed to the first variable state for a predetermined period. The variable game execution means to be performed, a specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the variable game. Based on the above, an advantageous game state setting means for setting the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player is provided, and the specific determination is made during the first control state. It is configured so that the ease of passing through the specific region can be changed depending on whether the result is obtained or the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the game ball will pass through the specific area, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BJ1, it is better to obtain the specific determination result during the second control state than to obtain the specific determination result during the first control state during the execution of the variable game. The gaming machine BJ2 is characterized in that the ball is configured so as to be difficult to pass through the specific area.

According to the game machine BJ2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BJ1, the specific determination result was obtained during the second control state rather than the specific determination result during the first control state. Since it is configured so that the game ball is less likely to pass through the specific area during the execution of the variable game, it is more difficult to set the advantageous game state when a specific determination result is obtained in the second control state. It has the effect of being able to realize a novel playability of becoming.

In the game machine BJ1 or BJ2, as the type of the variable game, the first variable game in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and the first variable game in which the game ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the first variable game. It is provided with a type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least two variable games, and between the case where the specific determination result is obtained during the first control state and the second control state. The gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that at least the ease of passing through the specific region in the first variable game is variable depending on the case where the specific determination result is obtained.

According to the game machine BJ3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BJ1 or BJ2, as the type of the variable game, the first variable game in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and the first variable game thereof are described. A second variable game in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area, and a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least one of the above are provided, and the specific determination result is obtained during the first control state. It is configured so that at least the ease of passing through the specific region in the first variable game is variable depending on the case and the case where the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state.

This has the effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first variable game will be determined by the type determination means.

In the game machine BJ3, a first flow path is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the inflowing game ball flows down to the specific area, and the variable ball entry means. A second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the ball can pass, and the inflowing game ball flows down in a direction that cannot pass through the specific area, and a game that has entered the variable ball entry means. A variable distribution means and the variable game have been executed, that is, a first distribution state in which the ball is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the ball is distributed to the second flow path. Based on the above, the first variable game is provided with a switching control means for switching between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in a predetermined specific switching pattern. It is configured so that a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means while being variable to the first variable state can reach the distribution means in the first distribution state. In the second variable game, the distribution means in which the game ball that has entered the variable entry means while the variable entry means is changed to the first variable state is in the first distribution state. A game machine BJ4 characterized in that it is configured so as to be difficult to reach.

According to the game machine BJ4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BJ3, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is provided at a position where it can pass, and the inflowing game ball is allowed to flow down to the specific area. One flow path, a second flow path provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and a second flow path that allows the inflowing game ball to flow down in a direction that cannot pass through the specific area. Distributing means that can be changed into a first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. A switching control means for switching between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the execution of the variable game. In the variable game, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can reach the distribution means in the first distribution state while the variable ball entry means is changed to the first variable state. In the second variable game, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means while the variable ball entry means has been changed to the first variable state is It is configured so that it is difficult to reach the sorting means in the first sorting state.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the first variable game will be determined.

In the game machine BJ3 or BJ4, the period from the start of the first variable game to the end of the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is the variable without entering the ball entry means. The game machine BJ5 is characterized in that the game ball that has passed through the means is likely to be less than or equal to the length of the period required to reach the variable ball entry means.

According to the game machine BJ5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BJ3 or BJ4, the period from the start of the first variable game to the end of the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is the above-mentioned input. Since the game ball that has passed through the variable means without entering the ball means is likely to be equal to or less than the length of the period required to reach the variable entry means, it is during the second control state. When a specific determination result is obtained, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area.

In the game machine BJ5, the first variable game is started for a specific flow path that causes the game ball that has passed through the variable means to flow down to the variable ball entry means and a flow period of the game ball that flows down the specific flow path. The game machine BJ6 is characterized by comprising a prolongation means for prolonging the period from the time until the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area ends.

According to the game machine BJ6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BJ5, a specific flow path that causes the game ball that has passed through the variable means to flow down to the variable entry means, and a flow of the game ball that flows down the specific flow path. A means for prolonging the period is provided so as to be longer than the period from the start of the first variable game to the end of the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area.

As a result, the flow-down period until the game ball reaches the variable ball entry means can be physically lengthened, so that the game ball passes through the specific area when a specific determination result is obtained in the second control state. It has the effect of being able to more reliably suppress what is being done.

In the game machine BJ5 or BJ6, a third flow path in which a game ball launched in the specific direction can flow down and the inflowing game ball can flow down toward the variable means, and the specific direction. A fourth flow path in which the game ball launched into the flow is configured to be able to flow down, and the game ball that has flowed down can flow down in a direction that cannot reach the variable means, and a fourth flow path that flows down. The game machine BJ7 is characterized by comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the game ball from reaching the variable ball entry means.

According to the game machine BJ7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BJ5 or BJ6, the game ball launched in the specific direction can flow down, and the inflowing game ball can flow down toward the variable means. A possible third flow path and a game ball launched in the specific direction are configured to be able to flow down, and the flowed-down game ball can flow down in a direction that cannot reach the variable means. It includes a flow path and a suppressing means for suppressing the game ball flowing down the fourth flow path from reaching the variable ball entry means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the fourth flow path from flowing into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second control state, the game ball does not pass through the variable means. It is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the specific region more reliably in the second control state.

<Characteristic BK group> (Depending on the direction of distribution to the sorting means, it is variable whether it is easy to reach the electric chew in the ball-entry state or the electric chew in the ball-entry difficult state).
A distribution means for distributing the game ball to one of a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path. The first flow path is provided with a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and at least while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The game machine BK1 is characterized in that the game ball that has flowed down is configured to be easier to reach the second ball entry means than the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path.

According to the game machine BK1, the distribution means for distributing the game ball to one of a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first flow path. A game ball that has flowed down the flow path and a ball entry means that is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The game ball that has flowed down the first flow path in between is configured to be easier to reach the second ball entry means than the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path.

As a result, whether or not it becomes easy to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position changes depending on whether it flows down the first flow path or the second flow path, so that the flow of the game ball flows down. There is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the road.

In the game machine BK1, a variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The game ball that has flowed down the first flow path while the specific condition is satisfied is more likely to move to the variable means in a state of being variable to the first position than the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path. The game machine BK2 is characterized in that it is easily reached.

According to the game machine BK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK1, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the first position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A game ball that is provided with variable means that can be changed to two positions and flows down the first flow path while the specific condition is satisfied is more than a game ball that flows down the second flow path. It is configured so that it is easy to reach the variable means in a state of being variable to one position.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the state of the variable means.

In the game machine BK2, a game state in which one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The first gaming state includes the setting means, and reaches the variable means in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path are variable to the first position. The gaming machine BK3 is configured to be difficult, and the specific condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set.

According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BK2, a plurality of states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one of the game states is provided, and in the first game state, the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path are in the first position. It is configured so that it is difficult to reach the variable means that is variable to the above, and the specific condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set.

As a result, the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the second game state will be set, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BK3, the game state setting means is more advantageous than the first game state, the second game state, and the first game state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, and the second game state. A third game state different from the game state, and one of a plurality of game states including at least one game state can be set, and the third game state is a game ball flowing down the first flow path. The game machine BK4 is characterized in that the game ball flowing down the second flow path is configured to be able to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK3, the game state setting means has the first game state, the second game state, and the first game state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. It is configured so that one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state which is more advantageous than the gaming state and different from the second gaming state can be set, and the third gaming state is configured. The game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path are configured to be able to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position.

As a result, in the third game state, more game balls can be made to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position, so that the game balls can be more efficiently entered into the ball entry means. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine BK4, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the passage of the passing means by the game ball, and a specific discrimination in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is predetermined. The variable means is predetermined as a variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position based on the result, and as a type of the variable game. A first variable game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during the first period, and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a second period longer than the first period. A variable game type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including, at least, the first game state and the second game state are determined by the variable game type determining means from the second variable game. Is also configured so that the first variable game can be easily determined, and the third game state is configured so that the second variable game is more easily determined than the first variable game by the variable game type determining means. The game machine BK5, which is characterized by being

According to the game machine BK5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK4, a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the passage of the passing means by the game ball, and a discrimination means thereof. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position based on the determination result of the above being a predetermined specific determination result, and the variable The types of games include a first variable game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a predetermined first period, and a second period in which the variable means is longer than the first period. A second variable game that is variable to one position and a variable game type determining means that determines one of a plurality of types including at least one are provided, and the first game state and the second game state are the variable. The first variable game is more easily determined by the game type determining means than the second variable game, and the third game state is higher than that of the first variable game by the variable game type determining means. The second variable game is configured so that it can be easily determined.

As a result, different types of variable games can be executed according to the game state, which has the effect of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine BK5, the distribution means is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the passing means can reach, and the variable game executing means is the first variable in the first game state. When the game is decided, the variable means is changed to the first position after a predetermined third period elapses, and the first variable game is decided in the second game state. The gaming machine BK6 is configured so that the variable means can be changed to the first position after a fourth period different from the third period has elapsed.

According to the game machine BK6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK5, the distribution means is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the passing means can reach, and the variable game executing means is When the first variable game is determined in the first game state, the variable means is changed to the first position after a predetermined third period elapses, and in the second game state, the variable means is changed to the first position. When the first variable game is determined, the variable means can be changed to the first position after a fourth period different from the third period has elapsed, so that the variable game can be performed. There is an effect that the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry means can be made different only by changing the period until the variable means changes to the first position.

In the game machine BK6, the period required for the game ball distributed to the first flow path through the passing means to reach the variable means tends to be longer than the third period, and the fourth period is likely to be longer. The gaming machine BK7 is characterized in that it is configured so that it is likely to be shorter than the period.

According to the game machine BK7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK6, the period required for the game ball distributed to the first flow path through the passing means to reach the variable means is the third. Since it is configured so that it tends to be longer than the period and easier to be shorter than the fourth period, the game ball distributed to the first flow path in the first game state is variable to the first position. It has the effect of reliably preventing access to the means.

In the game machine BK7, the period required for the game ball distributed to the first flow path through the passing means to reach the variable means is longer than the sum of the third period and the first period. The game machine BK8, which is characterized in that it is easily shortened.

According to the game machine BK8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BK7, the period required for the game ball distributed to the first flow path through the passing means to reach the variable means is the third. Since it is configured to be shorter than the sum of the period and the first period, the game ball distributed to the first flow path in the second game state reaches the variable means variable to the first position. It has the effect of making it easier.

<Characteristic BL group> (The state where the game ball is dropped from the upstream side of the variable member that can flow down the upper surface is switched between the state where the game ball is dropped from the downstream side)
A first flow path through which a game ball launched in a first direction can flow down, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the first ball entry means. A second flow path that is different from the flow path and allows the game ball launched in the first direction to flow down, and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path are provided at positions where the ball can enter. The second ball entry means, the first position where the game ball launched in the first direction can flow into the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game launched in the first direction. Variable means that can be changed to a second position that forms at least a part of a specific path that allows the sphere to flow down in a second direction that is different from the direction of the first flow path and the direction of the second flow path. The specific path causes the game ball to move to the first position by changing the variable means to the first position while the game ball is flowing down the first range included in the specific path. The game ball is caused to flow down to the road, and the game ball is changed to the first position while the game ball is flowing down the second range on the downstream side of the first range in the specific route. The gaming machine BL1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to flow down to the second flow path.

According to the game machine BL1, a first flow path through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down and a first entry at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. The ball means, the second flow path different from the first flow path and capable of flowing down the game ball launched in the first direction, and the game ball flowing down the second flow path enter the ball. A second ball entry means provided at a possible position, a first position where a game ball launched in the first direction can flow into the first flow path and the second flow path, and the first position. With a second position forming at least a part of a specific path capable of causing the game ball launched in one direction to flow down in a second direction different from the direction of the first flow path and the direction of the second flow path. The specific path is variably provided with a variable means that can be changed to the first position while the game ball is flowing down the first range included in the specific path. The game ball is allowed to flow down to the first flow path, and the variable means is changed to the first position while the game ball is flowing down the second range on the downstream side of the first range in the specific path. By doing so, the game ball can flow down to the second flow path.

As a result, different ball entry means are reached depending on whether the ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the flow path through which the game ball flows down. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BL1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the predetermined discriminating condition and the variable means for a predetermined period based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. BL2 is a game machine BL2 comprising: a variable control means for varying from the first position to the second position, and a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the specific path.

According to the game machine BL2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BL1, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means become a predetermined specific discrimination result. Based on this, a variable control means that changes the variable means from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period, and a third ball entry means that allows a game ball that has flowed down the specific path to enter. To be equipped.

As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the specific path while the variable means is changed to the second position can be made to enter the third ball entry means different from the first entry means and the second entry means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the flow path of the game ball and play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BL2, a specific discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, and a first discrimination result in which the discrimination result of the specific discrimination means is predetermined. The game machine BL3 is characterized by comprising a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game has become.

According to the game machine BL3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine BL2, a specific discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, and a discrimination result of the specific discrimination means. Is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the first determination result determined in advance.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the discrimination result of the specific discrimination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BL3, the third position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position can be changed. The gaming machine BL4 comprising 2 variable means and variable control means for changing the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern during execution of the privilege game.

According to the game machine BL4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BL3, the third position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. A second variable means that can be changed to a fourth position, and a variable control means that changes the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern during execution of the privilege game.

This has the effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the variable position of the second variable means.

In the game machine BL3 or BL4, it can be changed to a fifth position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a sixth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the fifth position. Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the third variable means and the specific discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the third variable means is in the sixth position for a predetermined period. The game machine BL5, which comprises a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the fifth position to the fifth position.

According to the game machine BL5, in addition to the effect of the game machine BL3 or BL4, the fifth position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and the game ball enter from the fifth position. Based on the fact that the third variable means that can be changed to the sixth position, which is difficult, and the discrimination result of the specific discrimination means are the second discrimination results different from the first discrimination result, the first The variable game execution means for executing the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the sixth position to the fifth position for a predetermined period is provided.

This has the effect that the game can be played with more attention paid to the determination result of the specific determination means.

In any of the game machines BL1 to BL5, a third flow path capable of causing the inflowing game ball to flow down to the first range of the game ball launched in the first direction, and an inflowing game ball. The gaming machine BL6 is provided with a fourth flow path capable of flowing the sword into the second range, and a distribution means for allocating the sword to either of the fourth flow paths.

According to the game machine BL6, in addition to the effects of the game machines BL1 to BL5, the game ball launched in the first direction can be made to flow down the inflowing game ball into the first range. Since it is provided with a distribution means for distributing the flow path and the fourth flow path capable of causing the inflowing game ball to flow down to the second range, pay attention to the flow path distributed by the distribution means. You can play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BL6, the game ball distributed to the first flow path and the game ball distributed to the second flow path are changed to the first position based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The first gaming state that makes it easier to reach the variable means and the game ball that is distributed to the first flow path can easily reach the variable means that is variable to the second position, and the second flow path. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the game ball distributed to the first position is easily reached to the variable means is provided. The game machine BL7 characterized by this.

According to the game machine BL7, in addition to the effect of the game machine BL6, a game ball distributed to the first flow path and a game ball distributed to the second flow path based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. To the first game state in which the variable means is easily reached to the first position, and to the variable means in which the game ball distributed to the first flow path is changed to the second position. A second game state in which the game ball distributed to the second flow path is easily reached to the variable means in which the first position is changed, and one of a plurality of of them including at least one Since the game state setting means for setting the game state is provided, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the game state set by the game state setting means.

In the game machine BL7, the game state setting means includes the first game state, the second game state, the game ball distributed to the first flow path, and the game ball, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. It is possible to set one of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state in which the game ball distributed to the second flow path easily reaches the variable means in which the second position is changed. A gaming machine BL8 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine BL8, in addition to the effect of the game machine BL7, the game state setting means has the first game state, the second game state, and the first game state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. At least includes a third game state in which the game ball distributed to the first flow path and the game ball distributed to the second flow path can easily reach the variable means in which the second flow path is changed. Since one of a plurality of game states can be set, the game state set by the game state setting means can be further diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine γ1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
65a Specific winning opening (variable ball entry means)
65e1 Normal discharge flow path (second flow path)
65e2 special discharge flow path (first flow path)
65e3 Probability change switch (specific area)
65h switching member (sorting means)
1645 2nd ball entry port (ball entry means)
1645a Ordinary electric accessory (variable means)
S163 Variable control means S303 Discrimination means S969 Control determination means Z220 Variable game execution means Z4104 Advantageous game state setting means Z4111 Control state setting means

Claims (5)

A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter,
A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position.
A variable control means that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition.
The control executed by the variable control means includes a first control in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during a predetermined first period, and the variable means is the first. A control determining means for determining control of one of a plurality including at least a second control that is variable from the second position to the first position during a second period longer than the period.
A first control state in which the first control is more likely to be determined by the control determining means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a second control state in which the control determining means is more likely to determine the second control than the first state. A control state setting means for setting one of a plurality of control states including at least a control state, and
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means,
A variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first variable state in which the game ball can enter and a second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state.
A variable game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second variable state to the first variable state for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. Variable game execution means to execute
A specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and
Advantageous game state setting means for setting the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed to the advantageous game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area during the execution of the variable game. And with
The ease of passing through the specific region varies depending on whether the specific determination result is obtained during the first control state or the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state. A game machine characterized by being configured as such. The game ball is in the specific area during the execution of the variable game when the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state rather than when the specific determination result is obtained during the first control state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured so as to be difficult to pass through. As the type of the variable game, at least a first variable game in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and a second variable game in which the game ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the first variable game. Equipped with a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including
Depending on whether the specific determination result is obtained during the first control state or the specific determination result is obtained during the second control state, at least the specific region in the first variable game The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the ease of passing is variable. A first flow path provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and allowing the inflowing game ball to flow down to the specific area.
A second flow path provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the inflowing game ball flows down in a direction that cannot pass through the specific region.
Distributing means that can be changed into a first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. When,
A switching control means for switching between the first distribution state and the second distribution state in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the execution of the variable game is provided.
In the first variable game, a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means while the variable ball entry means is changed to the first variable state is transferred to the distribution means in the first distribution state. It is configured to be reachable,
In the second variable game, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means while the variable ball entry means is changed to the first variable state is transferred to the distribution means in the first distribution state. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is configured so as to be difficult to reach. During the period from the start of the first variable game to the end of the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area, the game ball that has passed through the variable means without entering the ball entry means The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that the length of the period required to reach the variable ball entry means is likely to be less than or equal to the length of the period required.

Images